Bartholinus anatomy made from the precepts of his father, and from the observations of all modern anatomists, together with his own ... / published by Nich. Culpeper and Abdiah Cole.
         Bartholin, Thomas, 1616-1680.
      
       
         
           1668
        
      
       Approx. 1597 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 134 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2007-01 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A31102
         Wing B977
         ESTC R24735
         08448669
         ocm 08448669
         41352
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A31102)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 41352)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 1245:54)
      
       
         
           
             Bartholinus anatomy made from the precepts of his father, and from the observations of all modern anatomists, together with his own ... / published by Nich. Culpeper and Abdiah Cole.
             Bartholin, Thomas, 1616-1680.
             Bartholin, Caspar, 1585-1629.
             Walaeus, Johannes, 1604-1649.
          
           [4], 169, 301-377 p., [4] leaves of plates : ill.
           
             Printed by John Streater,
             London :
             1668.
          
           
             "Two epistles of Johannes Walaeus concerning the motion of the chyle and the blood," p. 358-377.
             Reproduction of original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Human anatomy -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2006-04 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-05 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2006-06 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2006-06 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2006-09 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           Bartholinus
           Anatomy
           ;
           MADE
           From
           the
           Precepts
           of
           his
           Father
           ,
           And
           from
           the
           Observations
           of
           all
           Modern
           Anatomists
           ,
           together
           with
           his
           own
           .
           
             With
             one
             hundred
             fifty
             and
             three
          
           Figures
           
             cut
             in
             Brass
             ,
             much
             larger
             and
             better
             than
             any
             have
             been
             heretofore
             Printed
             in
          
           English
           .
           IN
           FOUR
           BOOKS
           AND
           FOUR
           MANUALS
           ,
           Answering
           to
           the
           said
           BOOKS
           .
           
             
               Book
               I.
               Of
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               .
            
             
               Book
               II.
               Of
               the
               Middle
               Venter
               or
               Cavity
               .
            
             
               Book
               III.
               Of
               the
               uppermost
               Cavities
               ,
               Viz.
               The
               Head.
               
            
             
               Book
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Limbs
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Four
             Manuals
             Answering
             to
             the
             four
             foregoing
             Books
             .
          
           
             
               Manual
               I.
               Of
               the
               Veins
               ,
               Answering
               to
               the
               First
               Book
               of
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               .
            
             
               Manual
               II.
               Of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               Answering
               to
               the
               Second
               Book
               of
               the
               Middle
               Cavity
               or
               Chest
               .
            
             
               Manual
               III.
               Of
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               Answering
               to
               the
               Third
               Book
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               Manual
               IV.
               Of
               the
               Bones
               ,
               Answering
               to
               the
               Fourth
               Book
               of
               the
               Limbs
               .
            
          
           
             Al
             's
             Two
             Epistles
             of
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
        
         
           Published
           By
           
             Nich.
             Culpeper
          
           Gent.
           And
           ,
           
             Abdiah
             Cole
          
           Doctor
           of
           Physick
           .
        
         
           London
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             John
             Streater
          
           living
           in
           Clerken-well-Close
           1668.
           
        
      
       
         
         
           Books
           newly
           Imprinted
           ,
           or
           Imprniting
           .
        
         
           
             1.
             
             RIverius
             Practice
             of
             Physick
             and
             Observations
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Bartholinus
             An
             atomy
             with
             large
             Brass
             figures
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Vestingus
             Anato
             my
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             Man.
             
          
           
             4.
             
             Riolanus
             Anatomy
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             The
             London
             Dispensatory
             in
             English
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             A
             Directory
             for
             Midwifes
             ,
             or
             a
             Guide
             for
             Women
             ,
             the
             first
             and
             second
             part
             ,
             newly
             inlarged
             and
             illustrated
             with
             Pl●tes
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             A
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Rickets
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             Medicam
             ents
             for
             the
             Poor
             ,
             or
             Physick
             for
             the
             Common
             people
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             Health
             for
             the
             Rich
             and
             Poor
             ,
             by
             Dyet
             without
             Physick
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             The
             English
             Physitian
             enlarged
             .
          
           
             11.
             
             Oriatrike
             or
             Physick
             refined
             .
             The
             Common
             errors
             therein
             refuted
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             Art
             reformed
             ,
             written
             by
             the
             acute
             Philosopher
             
               Baptista
               Van
               Helmont
            
             .
          
           
             12.
             
             The
             Hidden
             Treasures
             of
             the
             Art
             of
             Physick
             fully
             discovered
             in
             4
             Books
             .
             The
             second
             Edition
             with
             Additions
             ,
             By
             
               John
               Tanner
            
             Student
             in
             Physick
             and
             Astrology
             .
          
           
             13.
             
             Mathematical
             Collections
             and
             Translations
             from
             the
             Original
             Copyes
             of
             Galilaeus
             and
             other
             famous
             Modern
             Authors
             .
             By
             
               Tho.
               Salisbury
            
             Esquire
             .
          
        
         
           To
           be
           sold
           by
           
             Geo.
             Sawbridge
          
           at
           his
           house
           on
           Clerkenwell-Green
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           The
           Introduction
           .
        
         
           ANthropologia
           or
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Mans
           Nature
           ,
           is
           ,
           though
           commonly
           ,
           yet
           rightly
           divided
           into
           two
           Parts
           :
           Anatomia
           which
           treats
           of
           the
           Body
           and
           its
           Parts
           ;
           and
           Psychologia
           ,
           which
           treats
           of
           the
           Soul.
           
        
         
           Anatomia
           therefore
           [
           more
           rightly
           called
           Anatomy
           ,
           that
           is
           Section
           ,
           which
           Sr.
           Ignatius
           reckons
           as
           a
           kind
           of
           Martyrdom
           ,
           Caelius
           terms
           Apertio
           an
           opening
           ,
           and
           
             Tertulianus
             Prosectio
          
           a
           cutting
           up
           ,
           whence
           the
           term
           Prosector
           ,
           a
           Cutter
           up
           ]
           that
           I
           may
           come
           to
           that
           which
           is
           my
           business
           ;
           in
           as
           much
           as
           it
           is
           a
           part
           of
           Natural
           Philosophy
           [
           for
           
           Medicinal
           Anatomy
           how
           ever
           useful
           and
           of
           which
           Galen
           treats
           in
           his
           Anatomical
           Administration
           ,
           we
           must
           leave
           to
           Physitians
           ]
           hath
           for
           its
           Subject
           the
           Body
           of
           any
           Animal
           or
           Live-wight
           whatsoever
           ,
           whether
           frequenting
           the
           Land
           or
           or
           Waters
           ,
           flying
           in
           the
           Air
           ,
           &c.
           and
           not
           only
           the
           Body
           of
           Man.
           But
           we
           are
           wont
           most
           of
           all
           to
           search
           into
           the
           structure
           of
           Mans
           Body
           .
           1.
           
           Because
           of
           the
           great
           Perfection
           thereof
           ,
           which
           
           is
           the
           Rule
           of
           Imperfection
           .
           2.
           
           Because
           the
           sundry
           sorts
           of
           Animals
           are
           almost
           infinite
           ,
           so
           that
           to
           dissect
           and
           search
           into
           all
           of
           them
           ,
           the
           life
           of
           man
           in
           this
           Age
           of
           the
           World
           is
           not
           sufficient
           .
           3.
           
           Because
           of
           the
           incredible
           profit
           which
           thereby
           redounds
           to
           every
           man
           ,
           who
           desires
           perfectly
           to
           know
           himself
           ,
           and
           this
           House
           of
           his
           earthy
           Tabernacle
           ,
           both
           the
           better
           to
           preserve
           Health
           and
           to
           cure
           Diseases
           :
           Nor
           can
           any
           man
           be
           a
           Natural
           Philosopher
           or
           deserve
           so
           to
           be
           called
           ,
           unless
           he
           have
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Anatomy
           at
           his
           fingers
           end
           ,
           above
           all
           other
           Parts
           of
           Natural
           Philosophy
           .
           Yet
           is
           not
           the
           Dissection
           of
           other
           Creatures
           therefore
           unprofitable
           ,
           or
           to
           be
           
           neglected
           by
           an
           Anatomist
           ,
           partly
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Analogie
           and
           Correspondence
           they
           hold
           with
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           ,
           partly
           to
           attain
           to
           the
           Knowledg
           of
           the
           Motions
           of
           Living
           Creatures
           ,
           and
           partly
           ,
           to
           conclude
           ,
           for
           the
           Exercise
           of
           an
           Anatomist
           and
           Surgeon
           .
           Democritus
           sought
           the
           Seat
           and
           Nature
           of
           Choler
           in
           Living
           Creatures
           .
           After
           him
           Galen
           dissected
           Apes
           and
           other
           Living
           Creatures
           ,
           as
           also
           
             Severinus
             ,
             Aldrovandus
             ,
             Castellus
             ,
             Br●nzerus
             ,
             Panarolus
          
           and
           myself
           have
           cut
           up
           divers
           Living
           Creatures
           .
           By
           the
           cutting
           up
           of
           Creatures
           alive
           Asellius
           found
           out
           the
           
             Ven●
             lacteae
             ●●
          
           milkie
           Veins
           ,
           and
           Harvey
           and
           Walaeus
           found
           the
           motion
           of
           the
           Blood.
           
        
         
           Moreover
           ,
           because
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           vari●●
           of
           its
           Actions
           ,
           the
           Body
           of
           Man
           does
           not
           consist
           of
           one
           part
           all
           alike
           ,
           but
           of
           sundry
           ;
           therefore
           we
           must
           know
           that
           the
           whole
           Body
           is
           divided
           
           into
           Parts
           containing
           ,
           Parts
           contained
           ,
           and
           Parts
           moving
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           ancient
           Doctrine
           of
           Hippocrates
           :
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           into
           solid
           Parts
           ,
           Humors
           and
           Spirits
           .
           And
           in
           this
           large
           acceptation
           ,
           all
           things
           are
           called
           Parts
           which
           make
           up
           and
           compleat
           the
           Body
           ,
           even
           the
           Nails
           ,
           Hairs
           ,
           Fat
           and
           Marrow
           .
           But
           stricctly
           and
           properly
           that
           is
           called
           a
           Pa●●
           which
           partakes
           of
           the
           form
           ,
           and
           life
           of
           the
           whole
           ,
           and
           such
           the
           Anatomists
           accounts
           〈…〉
           so●i●t
           Parts
           ,
           And
           therefore
           ●…lius
           hath
           well
           defined
           a
           Part
           to
           be
           
             A
             Body
             〈◊〉
             to
             the
             whole
             ,
             partaking
             of
             the
             common
             Life
             〈…〉
             ●…ted
             for
             the
             performance
             of
             some
             Functions
             or
             Use
             .
          
           But
           Galen
           accounts
           that
           a
           Part
           ,
           
           which
           is
           a
           B●…●●
           some
           sort
           joyned
           to
           the
           whole
           ,
           and
           hath
           in
           part
           its
           own
           proper
           Circumsc●●●
           〈…〉
           part
           is
           properly
           ;
        
         
           
             1.
             
             Tha●
             〈…〉
             is
             〈…〉
             but
             does
             not
             nourish
             any
             other
             Part.
             And
             so
             they
             exclude
             the
             S●…
             H●…
             .
             〈…〉
             also
             t●●
             Fa●
             ,
             which
             somtimes
             nourishes
             the
             Parts
             ,
             and
             the
             
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Bone
             ▪
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             That
             which
             is
             solid
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Which
             hath
             a
             proper
             Circumscription
             of
             its
             own
             .
             The
             contrary
             whereof
             is
             in
             fat
             ,
             which
             is
             terminated
             by
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             Parts
             adjacent
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Which
             is
             continued
             with
             the
             whole
             ,
             Mathematically
             and
             Physically
             ,
             both
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Matter
             and
             Form
             joyntly
             considered
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             Which
             is
             fitted
             for
             some
             Function
             or
             Use
             .
             And
             so
             Warts
             and
             Swellings
             ,
             with
             other
             things
             which
             grow
             upon
             the
             living
             Body
             praeternaturally
             ,
             are
             excluded
             .
          
        
         
           And
           that
           we
           may
           understand
           what
           is
           ment
           by
           Function
           and
           Use
           ,
           I
           shall
           briefly
           open
           the
           same
           .
           An
           Action
           or
           Function
           may
           be
           either
           private
           or
           publick
           .
           The
           private
           Action
           is
           that
           whereby
           the
           Parts
           provide
           for
           themselves
           ;
           the
           publick
           is
           that
           whereby
           they
           provide
           for
           the
           
           whole
           live
           Creature
           .
           A
           publick
           Action
           as
           it
           is
           opposed
           to
           use
           ,
           is
           the
           Action
           of
           the
           principal
           Part
           of
           an
           Organ
           which
           performes
           the
           whole
           Action
           .
           For
           every
           Action
           in
           the
           Body
           of
           a
           livewight
           ,
           hath
           according
           to
           Galen
           ,
           a
           peculiar
           Particle
           ,
           by
           which
           it
           is
           performed
           .
           For
           Examples
           sake
           ;
           The
           Skin
           hath
           of
           it self
           a
           private
           Action
           ,
           such
           as
           the
           Attraction
           and
           Retention
           of
           Nourishment
           &c.
           it
           hath
           also
           a
           publick
           action
           for
           the
           behoof
           of
           the
           whole
           Animal
           ,
           viz.
           the
           discerning
           of
           the
           tangible
           Qualities
           ,
           such
           as
           are
           perceived
           by
           the
           Sense
           of
           Feeling
           .
           So
           the
           action
           of
           the
           Liver●●…od-making
           ,
           of
           the
           Stones
           ,
           Seed-making
           ;
           of
           the
           Dugs
           Milk-making
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           ●●●e
           ,
           is
           that
           help
           which
           the
           less
           principal
           Parts
           afford
           the
           more
           principal
           ,
           in
           the
           performance
           
           ●●
           their
           Actions
           ,
           which
           according
           to
           Galen
           is
           in
           all
           Parts
           ,
           yea
           even
           in
           those
           which
           have
           no
           action
           at
           all
           .
           It
           springs
           chiefly
           from
           three
           Fountaines
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           ,
        
         
           
             1.
             
             The
             proper
             Temper
             of
             the
             Part
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             Symmetry
             or
             even
             proportion
             of
             the
             fir●t
             Qualities
             .
             For
             Examples
             sake
             ,
             The
             Skin
             is
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             first
             Qualities
             temperate
             ;
             and
             if
             
             you
             ask
             wherefore
             ,
             I
             answer
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             able
             to
             discern
             and
             judg
             of
             all
             tangible
             Qualities
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             
               Such
               things
               as
               follows
               the
               Temper
               ,
            
             and
             they
             are
             the
             second
             Qualities
             :
             Hardness
             ,
             Softness
             ,
             Thickness
             Thinness
             ,
             Compactness
             ,
             Rarity
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             
               Necessary
               Adjuncts
            
             ,
             as
             Magnitude
             ,
             Number
             ,
             Passages
             or
             Cavities
             ,
             Figure
             ,
             Conformation
             ,
             Connexion
             ,
             Situation
             ,
             Surfase
             .
             But
             I
             ,
             in
             these
             Institutions
             ,
             for
             the
             conveniency
             of
             Learners
             ,
             shall
             ,
             with
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             seldom
             observe
             this
             accurate
             difference
             between
             Action
             and
             Use
             ▪
             especially
             ,
             that
             I
             may
             avoid
             the
             tedious
             repetition
             of
             sundry
             things
             .
          
        
         
           But
           before
           I
           proceed
           to
           the
           Division
           and
           Differences
           of
           Parts
           ,
           I
           shal
           briefly
           resolve
           this
           question
           ,
           
           
             Which
             Part
             of
             the
             Body
             is
             first
             generated
             .
          
           We
           must
           therefore
           know
           ,
           that
           according
           to
           Hippocrates
           ,
           all
           the
           Parts
           are
           formed
           and
           differenced
           at
           one
           and
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           as
           in
           a
           Circle
           ,
           there
           is
           neither
           beginning
           nor
           end
           ,
           but
           altogether
           are
           both
           beginning
           and
           end
           .
           But
           all
           the
           Parts
           are
           not
           perfected
           and
           adorned
           at
           one
           and
           the
           same
           time
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           first
           place
           the
           Navil-vein
           .
           2.
           
           The
           Liver
           .
           3.
           
           Afterwards
           the
           Heart
           (
           which
           Aristotle
           would
           have
           to
           be
           first
           made
           ,
           as
           Galen
           would
           have
           the
           Liver
           to
           be
           )
           and
           lastly
           the
           brain
           .
           The
           Navil-vein
           therefore
           ,
           is
           first
           finished
           and
           perfected
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           enlargement
           thereof
           by
           the
           blood
           ,
           but
           not
           in
           respect
           of
           its
           first
           Constitution
           of
           the
           Seed
           .
           But
           others
           said
           that
           the
           Groundwork
           or
           underwarpe
           of
           the
           Parts
           is
           Seed
           ,
           and
           the
           Woof
           or
           Superstructure
           blood
           ,
           supposing
           that
           there
           are
           two
           material
           Principles
           of
           the
           body
           :
           Seed
           and
           blood
           .
           Which
           Opinion
           I
           have
           refuted
           and
           sufficiently
           explained
           in
           my
           
             Anatomical
             Controversies
             ,
             Quaest
          
           .
           11.
           
             touching
             the
             Parts
             and
             their
             Faculties
             and
             Functions
             .
          
        
         
           And
           therefore
           the
           Vessels
           are
           said
           in
           respect
           of
           Perfection
           to
           be
           generated
           before
           the
           bowels
           ,
           
           and
           that
           justly
           .
           For
           otherwise
           the
           bowels
           could
           not
           be
           nourished
           without
           a
           proportionable
           Instrument
           to
           that
           end
           ,
           namely
           a
           Vein
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           blood
           is
           conveighed
           for
           their
           Nutriment
           .
           For
           as
           out
           of
           a
           Kernel
           or
           Seed
           put
           into
           the
           Earth
           ,
           first
           a
           long
           Root
           descends
           into
           the
           Earth
           ,
           after
           that
           other
           Roots
           spread
           themselves
           round
           about
           the
           Surface
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           out
           of
           which
           afterwards
           ,
           the
           Trunk
           and
           branches
           spring
           up
           ;
           so
           out
           of
           the
           Seed
           committed
           to
           the
           Womb
           ,
           there
           arises
           first
           the
           Navil-vein
           ,
           receiving
           blood
           out
           of
           the
           Womb-cake
           ;
           out
           of
           which
           Navil-vein
           arises
           the
           
             Vena
             Portae
          
           ,
           with
           its
           Roots
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           now
           come
           to
           the
           Division
           or
           Differences
           of
           the
           Parts
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           divers
           .
        
         
           Taking
           the
           word
           in
           a
           large
           Sense
           ,
           some
           divide
           them
           into
           parts
           of
           Necessity
           ,
           as
           the
           Heart
           ,
           Liver
           ,
           
           Lungs
           ,
           Stomach
           ;
           and
           Parts
           of
           Commodity
           ,
           and
           that
           either
           great
           as
           the
           Eyes
           and
           Stones
           ,
           or
           less
           as
           the
           Nails
           ;
           and
           parts
           of
           Ornament
           ,
           as
           the
           Hairs
           of
           the
           Head
           and
           Beard
           .
        
         
           But
           I
           shall
           divide
           the
           Parts
           ,
           chiefly
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           End
           ,
           or
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           Matter
           .
           
        
         
           In
           
             respect
             of
             the
             worthiness
             of
             the
             End
             ,
          
           some
           are
           Principal
           ,
           others
           less
           principal
           and
           〈…〉
           .
        
         
           The
           Principal
           are
           the
           Liver
           ,
           Heart
           ,
           Brain
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           Principles
           of
           other
           Parts
           .
           As
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           brain
           arise
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           common
           Opinion
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           Liver
           ,
           the
           Veins
           .
           Others
           add
           the
           Testicles
           ,
           but
           without
           any
           need
           ,
           because
           they
           make
           nothing
           to
           the
           Conservation
           of
           the
           Individual
           ,
           ●and
           Generation
           is
           caused
           without
           them
           ,
           as
           I
           shall
           shew
           by
           Examples
           in
           the
           7.
           
           Book
           Chap.
           22.
           
        
         
           Now
           we
           do
           not
           mean
           the
           beginning
           of
           Radication
           or
           Original
           ;
           for
           so
           ,
           the
           Seed
           is
           the
           beginning
           
           of
           all
           the
           Parts
           ,
           but
           of
           Dispensation
           and
           Distribution
           ;
           that
           is
           such
           a
           beginning
           as
           sends
           out
           of
           it self
           some
           Instrument
           ,
           Force
           or
           common
           Matter
           .
           So
           from
           the
           Heart
           ,
           as
           the
           beginning
           or
           Original
           of
           Dispensation
           ,
           the
           Arteries
           arise
           ,
           because
           they
           receive
           their
           Virtue
           from
           the
           heart
           .
           and
           seem
           there
           to
           have
           their
           Original
           .
           The
           same
           may
           be
           said
           of
           the
           Veins
           and
           Nerves
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           Originals
           .
           So
           the
           Gristles
           have
           their
           Original
           from
           the
           bones
           ,
           and
           also
           the
           Ligaments
           .
        
         
           The
           Subservient
           Parts
           are
           necessary
           or
           
             not
             necessary
          
           .
        
         
           The
           Necessary
           are
           those
           without
           which
           the
           Animal
           cann●●
           〈…〉
           cannot
           live
           well
           .
           So
           the
           Lungs
           serve
           the
           Heart
           ,
           the
           Guts
           the
           Stomach
           ;
           the
           Stoma●…●aver
           and
           Spleen
           ;
           the
           Gall-bladder
           ,
           Choler-passage
           and
           Piss-bladder
           ,
           serve
           the
           Liver
           ;
           and
           all
           the
           Instruments
           of
           the
           Senses
           serve
           the
           brain
           .
        
         
           The
           Not-necessary
           ,
           as
           simple
           flesh
           ,
           &c.
           in
           respect
           of
           other
           Parts
           :
           for
           in
           consumptive
           persons
           ●is
           wasted
           away
           ,
           and
           in
           fleshie
           persons
           t
           is
           a
           burthen
           ,
           and
           in
           sects
           according
           to
           Aristotle
           have
           no
           Flesh
           .
           
        
         
           In
           
             respect
             of
             their
          
           immediate
           
             Matter
             ,
             some
             are
          
           simple
           ,
           Homogeneal
           or
           
             Similary
             ;
             others
          
           Compound
           Heterogeneal
           ,
           or
           dissimilary
           .
        
         
           A
           Similar
           Part
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           is
           divided
           into
           Parts
           like
           it self
           ,
           so
           that
           all
           the
           Particles
           are
           of
           the
           same
           Substance
           with
           the
           whole
           ,
           as
           every
           part
           of
           flesh
           is
           flesh
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           Of
           such
           similar
           Parts
           ,
           some
           reckons
           more
           ,
           others
           fewer
           .
        
         
           Aristotle
           in
           sundry
           places
           ,
           thus
           reckons
           them
           :
           Blood
           ,
           Flegm
           ,
           Choler
           ,
           Sanies
           or
           blood-water
           ,
           Milk
           ,
           Seed
           ,
           Gall
           ,
           Fat
           ,
           Marrow
           ,
           Flesh
           ,
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           Nerves
           ,
           Fibres
           ,
           Membranes
           ,
           Skin
           ,
           Bones
           ,
           Gristles
           ,
           Hairs
           ,
           Nails
           ,
           Horns
           ,
           Feathers
           .
        
         
           Averroes
           omits
           some
           of
           these
           ,
           and
           adds
           Melancholy
           ,
           Spirits
           ,
           Muscles
           ,
           Cords
           ,
           Ligaments
           ,
           Suet.
           
        
         
           Galen
           in
           sundry
           places
           ,
           thus
           reckons
           them
           :
           A
           Bone
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           a
           Vein
           ,
           an
           Artery
           ,
           a
           Nerve
           ,
           a
           Membrane
           ,
           a
           Fibre
           ,
           a
           Tendon
           ,
           a
           Ligament
           ,
           a
           Nail
           ,
           Skin
           ,
           Fat
           ,
           Marrow
           ,
           the
           Glassie
           and
           Chrystalline
           Humors
           ,
           the
           flesh
           of
           the
           Muscles
           and
           bowels
           ,
           with
           the
           proper
           substance
           of
           the
           brain
           ,
           Stomach
           ,
           Guts
           and
           Womb.
           
        
         
           Archangelus
           retaines
           all
           the
           aforesaid
           ,
           and
           adds
           three
           sorts
           of
           Spirits
           ,
           four
           Alimentary
           humors
           ,
           and
           the
           Excrementitious
           humors
           ,
           as
           Urin
           in
           the
           Bladder
           ,
           Choler
           in
           the
           Gall-bladder
           ,
           Excrementitious
           Flegm
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Excrements
           of
           all
           digestions
           ,
           the
           Scarf-skin
           ,
           and
           the
           internal
           Skin
           of
           ●●
           〈…〉
           Cavities
           .
           Moreover
           ●e
           adds
           to
           these
           ,
           seventeen
           similar
           parts
           ,
           not
           commonly
           
           reckoned
           ,
           viz.
           the
           proper
           substance
           (
           setting
           aside
           the
           other
           similar
           parts
           ,
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           &c.
           )
           of
           the
           Brain
           ,
           Tongue
           ,
           Lungs
           ,
           Heart
           ,
           Liver
           ,
           Gall-bladder
           ,
           Spleen
           ,
           Stomach
           ,
           Guts
           ,
           Kidneys
           ,
           Ureters
           ,
           Piss-bladder
           ,
           Womb
           ,
           Yard
           ,
           Stones
           ,
           Muscles
           ,
           Kernels
           .
           But
           it
           is
           in
           Vain
           for
           him
           to
           reckon
           these
           parts
           as
           new
           :
           for
           all
           in
           a
           manner
           are
           comprehended
           under
           Flesh
           .
           For
           according
           to
           Hippocrates
           and
           Galen
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           flesh
           of
           the
           Muscles
           ,
           and
           a
           flesh
           of
           the
           Bowels
           ,
           and
           a
           flesh
           of
           the
           Glandules
           or
           Kernels
           .
           But
           in
           another
           place
           Galen
           propounds
           a
           threefold
           flesh
           .
           1.
           
           In
           a
           Muscle
           ,
           which
           the
           Ancients
           did
           only
           cal
           Flesh
           .
           2.
           
           The
           Parenchyma
           ,
           or
           proper
           substance
           of
           the
           Liver
           ,
           Heart
           ,
           Kidneys
           ,
           &c.
           3.
           
           In
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           Bladder
           ,
           Veins
           .
           4.
           
           In
           the
           Bones
           ,
           though
           improperly
           .
        
         
           Whence
           we
           may
           gather
           four
           sorts
           of
           Flesh
           .
           1.
           
           Musculous
           flesh
           ,
           which
           Galen
           frequently
           
           terms
           Fibrous
           flesh
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           soft
           and
           red
           and
           properly
           termed
           flesh
           .
           And
           in
           Hippocrates
           his
           Language
           ,
           by
           flesh
           many
           times
           is
           ment
           the
           Muscles
           .
           2.
           
           Viscerous
           flesh
           or
           the
           flesh
           of
           the
           Bowels
           .
           Erasistratus
           cals
           it
           Parenchyma
           or
           an
           Affusion
           of
           blood
           ;
           Galen
           cals
           it
           Similar
           and
           simple
           flesh
           ,
           which
           supports
           the
           Vessels
           of
           the
           bowels
           ,
           fills
           up
           the
           empty
           spaces
           ,
           and
           performs
           the
           Action
           .
           3.
           
           Membranous
           flesh
           ,
           or
           the
           fleshy
           substance
           of
           every
           Membranous
           part
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Gullet
           ,
           Stomach
           ,
           Guts
           ,
           Womb
           ,
           bladder
           .
           4.
           
           Glandulous
           flesh
           ,
           or
           the
           flesh
           of
           Kernels
           ,
           which
           serves
           .
           1.
           
           For
           to
           support
           the
           divisions
           of
           Vessels
           .
           2.
           
           To
           drink
           up
           superfluous
           humors
           ,
           especially
           wheyish
           humors
           ,
           because
           the
           Kernels
           are
           of
           an
           hollow
           Spungy
           substance
           ;
           and
           therefore
           they
           are
           vulgarly
           termed
           Emunctories
           or
           Clensers
           .
           Those
           in
           the
           Neck
           being
           counted
           Clensers
           of
           the
           Head
           ;
           those
           in
           the
           Arm-pits
           ,
           of
           the
           Heart
           ;
           those
           in
           the
           Groyns
           of
           the
           Liver
           .
           3.
           
           To
           moisten
           the
           parts
           for
           their
           more
           easie
           motion
           ,
           or
           otherwise
           to
           prohibit
           dryness
           .
           Such
           are
           those
           which
           are
           situate
           by
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           Larynx
           ,
           Eye-corners
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           But
           the
           similar
           parts
           are
           reckoned
           to
           be
           ten
           :
           A
           bone
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           a
           Ligament
           ,
           a
           Membrane
           ,
           a
           
           Fibre
           ,
           a
           Nerve
           ,
           an
           Artery
           ,
           a
           Vein
           ,
           Flesh
           and
           Skin
           .
        
         
           Of
           these
           some
           are
           similar
           only
           in
           the
           judgment
           of
           Sense
           ,
           as
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           (
           some
           add
           Muscles
           )
           others
           are
           simply
           and
           absolutely
           similar
           .
           That
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           Nerves
           ,
           Muscles
           are
           not
           truly
           simple
           and
           similar
           ,
           hath
           been
           rightly
           taught
           by
           Aristotle
           :
           for
           a
           Muscle
           consists
           of
           Flesh
           ,
           Fibres
           ,
           and
           a
           Tendon
           :
           Nerves
           are
           made
           up
           of
           the
           Dura
           and
           pia
           Mater
           ,
           with
           Marrow
           :
           Arteries
           ,
           of
           two
           different
           coats
           ;
           the
           Veins
           of
           a
           coat
           (
           and
           of
           Fibres
           as
           some
           will
           have
           it
           )
           and
           Valves
           .
           Simply
           and
           truly
           similar
           parts
           are
           Bones
           ,
           Gristles
           ,
           Ligaments
           ,
           Membranes
           ,
           Fibres
           ,
           Flesh
           and
           Skin
           .
           To
           these
           some
           add
           the
           Ureters
           ,
           the
           Air
           implanted
           in
           the
           Ear
           ,
           &c.
           but
           in
           vain
           .
           For
           ,
           1.
           
           They
           are
           not
           parts
           common
           ●●
           the
           whole
           body
           ,
           but
           proper
           to
           some
           parts
           .
           2.
           
           The
           implanted
           Air
           of
           the
           Ears
           ,
           is
           nothing
           but
           an
           implanted
           spirit
           ,
           which
           cannot
           be
           reckoned
           among
           solid
           parts
           .
        
         
           Here
           we
           are
           to
           observe
           that
           all
           these
           parts
           are
           commonly
           divided
           ,
           into
           
             Spermatical
             ,
             Sanguine
          
           ,
           or
           mixt
           .
        
         
           The
           Spermatical
           are
           made
           of
           seed
           ,
           and
           such
           are
           the
           eight
           first
           reckoned
           ;
           which
           if
           they
           are
           cut
           
           asunder
           ,
           they
           breed
           not
           again
           ,
           nor
           can
           they
           be
           truly
           united
           ,
           but
           they
           are
           joyned
           together
           by
           a
           Callus
           in
           the
           middle
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           defect
           of
           matter
           and
           formative
           faculty
           ,
           which
           acts
           not
           after
           the
           Conformation
           of
           the
           Parts
           .
        
         
           The
           Sanguine
           or
           fleshy
           Parts
           ,
           contrarywise
           are
           bred
           again
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           supposed
           to
           be
           
           made
           of
           Blood
           ,
           as
           the
           Flesh
           .
        
         
           A
           mixt
           Part
           is
           the
           Skin
           ,
           of
           which
           we
           shall
           treat
           hereafter
           ,
           in
           Book
           1.
           
           Chap.
           2.
           
        
         
           For
           feed
           and
           blood
           are
           commonly
           accounted
           the
           two
           general
           Principles
           of
           which
           we
           are
           made
           :
           so
           that
           in
           the
           Seed
           there
           is
           very
           little
           of
           the
           material
           principle
           ,
           but
           much
           of
           the
           active
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           blood
           much
           of
           the
           material
           principle
           ,
           and
           but
           a
           little
           and
           weak
           portion
           of
           the
           active
           or
           effective
           principle
           .
           The
           first
           Rudiments
           and
           underwrap
           as
           it
           were
           of
           the
           parts
           ,
           are
           said
           to
           be
           made
           of
           Seed
           ;
           and
           the
           woofe
           or
           superstructure
           of
           blood
           flowing
           in
           .
           But
           what
           the
           Truth
           is
           in
           Contradiction
           to
           this
           vulgar
           opinion
           ,
           we
           have
           taught
           
             in
             our
             Anatomical
             Controversies
          
           .
           For
           we
           are
           rather
           to
           hold
           ,
           that
           the
           parts
           are
           at
           first
           made
           only
           of
           Seed
           ,
           as
           of
           their
           matter
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Mothers
           blood
           doth
           nourish
           ,
           and
           encrease
           and
           amplifie
           the
           Parts
           .
           The
           Skin
           in
           comparison
           to
           other
           Parts
           ,
           hath
           an
           indifferent
           proportion
           of
           Seed
           ,
           not
           so
           much
           as
           the
           Spermatical
           ,
           nor
           so
           little
           as
           the
           Sanguinary
           parts
           .
        
         
           The
           Compound
           or
           
             dissimilar
             Parts
          
           are
           ,
           those
           which
           may
           be
           divided
           into
           divers
           unlike
           parts
           ,
           
           as
           an
           Hand
           cannot
           be
           cut
           into
           other
           Hands
           ,
           but
           into
           Bones
           ,
           Muscles
           ,
           Veins
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           dissimilar
           parts
           are
           by
           the
           Phylosopher
           called
           Members
           :
           but
           they
           are
           vulgarly
           termed
           Organical
           or
           instrumental
           parts
           .
        
         
           Now
           in
           every
           Organ
           ,
           there
           are
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           four
           kinds
           of
           parts
           .
           For
           example
           sake
           ,
           
           in
           the
           Eye
           there
           is
           ,
           1.
           
           That
           part
           by
           which
           the
           action
           ,
           viz.
           Seeing
           is
           performed
           ,
           namely
           the
           Chrystalline
           Humor
           .
           2.
           
           That
           without
           which
           it
           cannot
           be
           performed
           ,
           as
           the
           Optick
           Nerve
           .
           3.
           
           That
           by
           which
           it
           is
           the
           better
           performed
           ,
           as
           the
           Coats
           and
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Eyes
           .
           4.
           
           That
           by
           which
           the
           action
           is
           preserved
           ,
           as
           the
           Eye-lids
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           And
           because
           the
           Dissimilar
           parts
           are
           more
           or
           less
           Compounded
           ,
           they
           are
           divided
           into
           four
           degrees
           or
           ranks
           .
        
         
           The
           1.
           
           Is
           such
           as
           are
           similar
           to
           the
           sense
           ,
           as
           a
           Muscle
           ,
           Vein
           ,
           Artery
           .
           The
           2.
           
           Is
           made
           of
           the
           sormer
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           similars
           ,
           as
           a
           Finger
           .
           The
           3.
           is
           compounded
           of
           the
           second
           ,
           as
           an
           Hand
           ,
           Foot
           ,
           &c.
           The
           4.
           
           Is
           compounded
           of
           the
           third
           ,
           as
           an
           Arm
           or
           Leg.
           
        
         
           Finally
           the
           
             Body
             is
             divided
          
           into
           its
           greatest
           Members
           ,
           as
           by
           some
           into
           the
           Head
           ,
           Chest
           ,
           Belly
           
           and
           Bladder
           ;
           by
           others
           as
           
             Aristotle
             ,
             Ruffus
          
           a
           〈…〉
           Oribasius
           into
           the
           Head
           ,
           Neck
           ,
           Chest
           (
           under
           they
           comprehend
           the
           lower
           Belly
           )
           and
           therefore
           Hippocrates
           placed
           the
           Liver
           in
           the
           Chest
           ]
           the
           
           Arms
           and
           the
           Legs
           .
           But
           others
           have
           better
           divided
           them
           into
           the
           Bellies
           and
           Limbs
           .
        
         
           The
           Bellies
           are
           certain
           remarkeable
           Cavities
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           wherein
           some
           noble
           bowel
           is
           placed
           :
           and
           as
           there
           are
           three
           principal
           Members
           ,
           so
           are
           there
           
             three
             Bellies
          
           :
           the
           lowest
           belly
           ,
           commonly
           called
           Abdomen
           or
           the
           Paunch
           ,
           contains
           the
           Liver
           and
           Natural
           parts
           .
           The
           Middle
           or
           Chest
           ,
           containes
           the
           Heart
           and
           vital
           parts
           .
           The
           uppermost
           or
           Head
           contains
           the
           brain
           and
           Animal
           parts
           .
           The
           Limbs
           which
           were
           given
           us
           for
           more
           conveniency
           of
           living
           ,
           are
           the
           Arms
           and
           the
           Legs
           .
        
         
           And
           therefore
           we
           shall
           make
           four
           books
           :
           1.
           
           Of
           the
           Lower
           belly
           .
           2.
           
           Of
           the
           Middle
           belly
           .
           
           3
           ,
           Of
           the
           supream
           belly
           or
           Cavity
           ,
           the
           Head.
           4.
           
           Of
           the
           Limbs
           .
           And
           to
           these
           shall
           answer
           four
           
             Petty
             Books
          
           :
           The
           first
           of
           the
           Veins
           which
           arise
           from
           the
           Liver
           in
           the
           lower
           Cavity
           .
           The
           second
           of
           the
           Arteries
           which
           arise
           from
           the
           Heart
           ,
           in
           the
           middle
           Cavity
           .
           The
           third
           of
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           which
           are
           commonly
           thought
           to
           spring
           from
           the
           brain
           .
           The
           fourth
           of
           the
           bones
           ,
           which
           are
           most
           what
           in
           the
           Limbs
           :
           and
           as
           the
           bones
           joyned
           together
           make
           a
           compleat
           frame
           and
           bodies
           as
           it
           were
           ;
           so
           also
           do
           the
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           and
           Nerves
           .
        
         
           We
           may
           find
           another
           division
           of
           the
           body
           in
           Fernelius
           ,
           which
           nevertheless
           is
           of
           no
           use
           save
           
           in
           Physick
           .
           He
           divides
           the
           body
           into
           
             pulplike
             Regions
          
           and
           Private
           .
        
         
           
             Private
             Regions
          
           he
           calls
           the
           brain
           ,
           Lungs
           ,
           Kidneys
           ,
           Womb
           ,
           &c.
           
           Publick
           or
           common
           he
           makes
           three
           extended
           through
           the
           whol
           body
           .
           1.
           
           Hath
           the
           Vena
           porta
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           parts
           whereinto
           its
           branches
           are
           spred
           .
           2.
           
           Begins
           at
           the
           Roots
           of
           Vena
           Cava
           ,
           and
           is
           terminated
           in
           the
           smal
           Veins
           ,
           before
           they
           become
           Capillary
           .
           3.
           
           Hath
           the
           Muscles
           ,
           Bones
           ,
           and
           Bulk
           of
           the
           body
           and
           ends
           in
           the
           Skin
           .
        
         
           We
           purge
           the
           first
           Region
           cheifly
           by
           the
           Guts
           ;
           The
           second
           by
           the
           Urinary
           passages
           ;
           The
           third
           by
           the
           Pores
           of
           the
           Skin
           .
        
         
           
             The
             I.
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             The
             Explication
             of
             the
             FIGURE
             .
          
           
             This
             TABLE
             holds
             forth
             the
             Pourtraicture
             of
             a
             Living
             Man
             ,
             wherein
             both
             the
             external
             parts
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             as
             all
             the
             Conspicuous
             Veins
             which
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             opened
             by
             Chirurgeons
             ,
             and
             the
             places
             where
             Issues
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             are
             Represented
             .
          
           
             
               
                 A.
                 
                   The
                   Hypochondrium
                
                 .
              
               
                 B.
                 
                   The
                   Epigastrium
                
                 .
              
               
                 CC.
                 
                   The
                   Hypogastrium
                
                 .
              
               
                 D.
                 
                   The
                   Flanks
                
                 .
              
               
                 EE
                 .
                 
                   The
                   Groins
                
                 .
              
               
                 F.
                 
                   The
                   Region
                   of
                   the
                   Share
                
                 .
              
               
                 G.
                 
                   The
                   Navil
                
                 .
              
               
                 H.
                 
                   The
                   Heart-pit
                
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   The
                   jugulum
                   or
                   hollow
                   of
                   the
                   Throat
                   .
                
              
               
                 K.
                 
                   The
                   Forehead
                   Vein
                
                 .
              
               
                 L.
                 
                   The
                   Temple
                   Veins
                
                 .
              
               
                 M.
                 
                   The
                   jugular
                   Vein
                
                 .
              
               
                 N.
                 
                   The
                   Cephalica
                   Vena
                
                 .
              
               
                 O.
                 
                   The
                   Basilica
                   Vena
                
                 .
              
               
                 P.
                 
                   The
                   Mediana
                   or
                   common
                   Vein
                
                 .
              
               
                 Q.
                 
                   The
                   Head
                   vein
                   of
                   the
                   left
                   Arm.
                   
                
              
               
                 R.
                 
                   The
                   Salvatella
                
                 .
              
               
                 SSSS
                 .
                 
                   The
                   Saph●na
                   Vein
                   descending
                
                 .
              
               
                 T.
                 
                   The
                   Saphaena
                   Vein
                   in
                   the
                   Foot
                   it self
                   .
                
              
               
                 V.
                 
                   The
                   〈…〉
                   Sciatica
                
                 .
              
               
                 XX
                 〈…〉
                 
                   of
                   Issues
                   in
                   〈…〉
                   in
                   the
                   Thigh
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             before
             page
             1.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FIRST
           BOOK
           ;
           OF
           THE
           Lower
           Belly
           .
        
         
           ACcording
           to
           the
           Method
           
           of
           Anatomy
           ,
           this
           belly
           or
           cavity
           comes
           in
           the
           first
           place
           ,
           and
           is
           first
           of
           all
           dissected
           that
           the
           Guts
           and
           Excrements
           may
           be
           the
           sooner
           removed
           ,
           and
           the
           Body
           preserved
           from
           putrifaction
           .
        
         
           It
           is
           all
           that
           ,
           which
           is
           distinguished
           ,
           within
           ,
           from
           the
           Chest
           by
           the
           Midrif
           ;
           it
           
           is
           circumscribed
           by
           the
           sword-like
           Gristle
           ,
           the
           Share
           bones
           ,
           Hip-bones
           ,
           
             Os
             Sacrum
          
           ,
           the
           Vertebra's
           of
           the
           Loynes
           ,
           and
           the
           bastard
           Ribs
           on
           either
           side
           .
        
         
           The
           former
           part
           thereof
           is
           called
           Epigastrium
           ,
           
           which
           compasses
           the
           stomach
           and
           guts
           next
           unto
           it
           .
           The
           Arabians
           call
           it
           Mirath
           ,
           which
           generally
           is
           used
           for
           the
           Belly
           ,
           but
           in
           a
           particular
           sence
           it
           is
           taken
           for
           those
           wrinkles
           of
           the
           belly
           ,
           which
           remain
           after
           child-bearing
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           skin
           gathered
           together
           upon
           the
           belly
           ,
           as
           Giggejus
           informs
           us
           .
        
         
           And
           the
           upper
           part
           hereof
           is
           termed
           Hypochondrium
           ,
           neighbouring
           upon
           the
           lower
           gristles
           of
           the
           Ribs
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           right
           or
           left
           :
           some
           term
           them
           Phrenes
           and
           Praecordia
           .
        
         
           The
           middle
           Region
           is
           termed
           
             Regio
             umbilicalis
          
           ,
           whose
           lateral
           parts
           Aristotle
           calls
           Lagonas
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           Laxity
           ,
           and
           
             Galen
             ,
             Cenen●nas
          
           from
           their
           emptyness
           .
        
         
           The
           lower
           part
           which
           reaches
           from
           the
           Navil
           to
           the
           Share
           ,
           is
           termed
           Hypogastrium
           ,
           by
           
             Hypocrates
             ,
             Galen
             ,
             Ruffus
             ,
             Pollux
          
           ;
           the
           Latins
           term
           it
           
             Imus
             venter
          
           and
           Aqualiculus
           .
           The
           lateral
           parts
           thereof
           ,
           are
           termed
           Ilia
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           bending
           of
           the
           thigh
           by
           the
           Share
           Inguina
           the
           Groyns
           ;
           and
           that
           part
           next
           over
           the
           Privities
           ,
           which
           is
           covered
           with
           Down
           or
           Hair
           ,
           is
           called
           P●bes
           the
           Share
           .
        
         
           The
           hinder
           part
           of
           the
           lower
           Belly
           ,
           is
           either
           the
           upper
           ,
           which
           makes
           the
           Loynes
           ;
           or
           the
           lower
           ,
           which
           makes
           the
           Buttocks
           .
        
         
           Moreover
           this
           Belly
           consists
           of
           parts
           covering
           and
           covered
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           External
           and
           Internal
           .
        
         
           The
           covering
           or
           Containing
           parts
           (
           which
           they
           properly
           call
           Abdomen
           )
           are
           either
           common
           ,
           as
           the
           Scarf-skin
           ,
           the
           Skin
           ,
           the
           Fat
           with
           its
           Membrane
           ,
           the
           fleshy
           Pannicle
           ,
           and
           the
           Coat
           proper
           to
           every
           Muscle
           ;
           or
           proper
           ,
           and
           they
           are
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Abdomen
           ,
           〈…〉
           the
           Peritonaeum
           .
        
         
           The
           inner
           or
           contained
           parts
           ,
           do
           serve
           
           either
           for
           Nutrition
           or
           Procreation
           .
        
         
           For
           Nutrition
           or
           making
           of
           Chyle
           ,
           are
           subservient
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           the
           Caul
           ,
           the
           Sweet-bread
           ,
           the
           Guts
           with
           the
           Mesentery
           :
           to
           the
           
             making
             of
             Blood
          
           ,
           are
           subservient
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           the
           Meseraick
           Veins
           ,
           the
           
             Venae
             portae
          
           with
           their
           Roots
           ,
           the
           Cava
           with
           its
           Roots
           ,
           the
           Liver
           ,
           the
           Gall-bladder
           ,
           the
           Gall-passage
           ,
           the
           Spleen
           with
           the
           
             Vas
             breve
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Haemorrhoides
           ,
           the
           
             Arteria
             Caeliaca
          
           the
           Kidneys
           ,
           the
           
             Capsulae
             Atrabiliariae
          
           or
           black
           choler
           boxes
           ,
           the
           Ureters
           and
           the
           Piss
           bladder
           .
        
         
           Those
           which
           serve
           for
           Generation
           ,
           are
           either
           Masculine
           or
           Female
           :
           the
           Masculine
           are
           ,
           the
           Spermatick
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           
             Corpora
             Varicosa
          
           or
           Parastatae
           ,
           the
           Stones
           ,
           the
           carrying
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           Prostratae
           ,
           the
           Seminary
           bladders
           ,
           the
           Yard
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Female
           are
           ,
           the
           Spermatick
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           
             Corpus
             Varicosum
          
           ,
           the
           Testicles
           ,
           the
           Ejaculatory
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           Womb
           with
           its
           parts
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           But
           when
           a
           Man
           is
           in
           the
           Womb
           ,
           there
           are
           yet
           other
           things
           considerable
           ,
           as
           the
           Navil-vessels
           ,
           the
           coats
           which
           infold
           the
           Child
           ,
           &c.
           of
           which
           in
           their
           place
           .
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Scarf-Skin
             .
          
           
             THe
             Cuticula
             or
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             in
             Greek
             
             Epidormis
             ,
             is
             by
             some
             called
             the
             highest
             or
             last
             skin
             ,
             also
             the
             cream
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             the
             cover
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             &c.
             
             It
             is
             a
             
             thin
             skin
             void
             of
             life
             and
             sense
             ,
             close-compacted
             ,
             bloodless
             ;
             bred
             of
             Oyly
             ,
             sleek
             and
             clammy
             vapors
             thickned
             by
             the
             external
             cold
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             be
             a
             cover
             to
             the
             skin
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             of
             which
             the
             Scarf-skin
             
             is
             made
             ,
             
               is
               not
               seed
            
             .
             For
             1.
             
             It
             is
             no
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             2.
             
             It
             is
             not
             nourished
             .
             3
             A
             Spermatical
             part
             taken
             away
             breeds
             not
             again
             ;
             but
             the
             scarf-skin
             is
             easily
             lost
             by
             rubbing
             and
             wearing
             ,
             or
             being
             raised
             into
             blisters
             ,
             by
             burning
             with
             Fire
             or
             scalding
             Water
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             
               Nor
               is
               the
               matter
               thereof
               Blood
               ,
            
             For
             
             1.
             
             All
             Veins
             do
             end
             at
             or
             within
             the
             skin
             .
             2.
             
             It
             hath
             no
             spermatical
             Fibres
             ,
             whi●●●asis
             of
             all
             sanguine
             parts
             .
             3.
             
             In
             long
             ●a●tin
             
             and
             Consumptions
             ,
             it
             many
             times
             grows
             thick
             .
             4.
             
             Being
             cut
             or
             torne
             ,
             it
             sends
             forth
             no
             Blood.
             5.
             
             It
             is
             not
             of
             a
             red
             color
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             
               Nor
               are
               the
               Excrements
            
             of
             any
             Digestion
             ,
             the
             matter
             thereof
             .
             Not
             the
             
             Excrements
             of
             the
             first
             or
             second
             digestion
             ;
             for
             how
             should
             it
             be
             made
             of
             Dung
             ,
             Urin
             or
             Gall
             ?
             Nor
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             third
             ,
             For
             the
             third
             Digestion
             or
             Concoction
             hath
             a
             threefold
             Excrement
             .
             1.
             
             Vaporous
             and
             thin
             which
             Expires
             .
             2.
             
             Thin
             ,
             but
             more
             solid
             then
             the
             former
             ,
             of
             a
             waterish
             substance
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             Ichors
             and
             Wheyish
             humors
             ,
             which
             by
             their
             sharpness
             and
             Acrimony
             ,
             would
             sooner
             hinder
             the
             Generation
             of
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             or
             corrode
             the
             same
             after
             it
             is
             generated
             .
             3.
             
             Thick
             ,
             Clammy
             ,
             and
             sticking
             fast
             ,
             which
             Archangelus
             and
             Laurentius
             ,
             do
             
             suppose
             to
             be
             dried
             and
             turned
             into
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             and
             they
             demonstrate
             the
             same
             from
             the
             filth
             which
             is
             ,
             in
             bathing
             ,
             scraped
             from
             the
             foles
             of
             the
             Feet
             .
             And
             if
             their
             opinion
             were
             true
             ,
             the
             Scarf-skin
             would
             come
             off
             in
             Baths
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             the
             matter
             thereof
             is
             
               another
               Excrement
            
             ,
             viz.
             an
             Oyly
             ,
             
             Thick
             ,
             Clammy
             ,
             and
             moist
             vapor
             (
             for
             of
             dry
             Exhalations
             the
             Hair
             is
             made
             )
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Skin
             and
             Members
             under
             the
             same
             .
             So
             we
             see
             in
             a
             Skillet
             of
             Water-gruel
             ,
             a
             Skin
             grows
             over
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Gruel
             ,
             being
             mad
             ,
             of
             the
             vapors
             thereout
             ascending
             ,
             condensed
             by
             cold
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Scarf-skin
             is
             bred
             ,
             partly
             in
             the
             womb
             with
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             partly
             without
             the
             Womb.
             Within
             ,
             For
             1.
             
             So
             there
             are
             the
             rudiments
             and
             beginnings
             of
             Hair
             ,
             Teeth
             ,
             Nails
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             2.
             
             Without
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             the
             skin
             would
             be
             moist
             ,
             and
             the
             Humor
             would
             sweat
             out
             with
             pain
             ,
             as
             in
             gallings
             and
             where
             Phoenigmi
             are
             applied
             .
             3.
             
             Experience
             shews
             ,
             that
             the
             Scarf-skin
             is
             somewhat
             apparent
             in
             an
             Abortion
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             separated
             by
             some
             fretting
             Humidity
             .
             But
             whiles
             the
             Child
             is
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             it
             is
             exceeding
             tender
             ,
             soft
             ,
             and
             but
             as
             yet
             begun
             to
             be
             made
             :
             because
             there
             is
             not
             in
             the
             Womb
             so
             much
             cold
             ,
             only
             a
             small
             degree
             springing
             from
             the
             serous
             humor
             which
             surrounds
             the
             Child
             .
             But
             it
             receives
             its
             Complement
             and
             perfection
             without
             the
             Womb
             ,
             from
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             which
             doth
             more
             condense
             and
             dry
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Cause
             that
             the
             skin
             of
             all
             New-born
             Infants
             looks
             red
             .
          
           
             Wherefore
             the
             remote
             and
             internal
             Efficient
             thereof
             is
             in
             the
             inward
             heat
             of
             the
             
             Body
             ,
             thrusting
             forth
             a
             vapor
             into
             the
             surface
             thereof
             ,
             as
             Exhalations
             are
             made
             by
             the
             suns
             heat
             .
             The
             next
             and
             external
             ,
             is
             the
             coldness
             of
             somebody
             ,
             as
             the
             Air
             ,
             &c.
             compacting
             ,
             and
             thickning
             .
             So
             Gruel
             ,
             Hot
             milk
             ,
             and
             other
             hot
             dishes
             of
             meat
             ,
             have
             a
             skin
             growing
             over
             them
             :
             sometimes
             also
             the
             dryness
             of
             the
             Ambient
             Air
             ,
             consuming
             the
             external
             humor
             ,
             and
             compacting
             the
             remainders
             of
             the
             matter
             .
             Now
             by
             how
             much
             the
             said
             vapor
             is
             more
             Earthy
             and
             Clammy
             ,
             by
             so
             much
             more
             solid
             is
             that
             which
             is
             bred
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             Vse
             thereof
             is
             to
             defend
             the
             Skin
             .
             And
             therefore
             't
             is
             somwhat
             hard
             ,
             howbeit
             
               exceeding
               thin
            
             
             and
             yet
             transparent
             ,
             like
             the
             transparent
             skins
             of
             Onions
             ;
             least
             if
             it
             were
             thicker
             ,
             the
             skin
             should
             not
             feel
             〈…〉
             it
             is
             somtimes
             bard
             and
             brauny
             ,
             in
             the
             Hands
             〈…〉
             by
             reason
             〈…〉
             of
             Labor
             and
             Travel
             .
          
           
             〈…〉
             ●●d
             more
             compact
             than
             〈…〉
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             watery
             pustules
             pass
             through
             the
             Skin
             but
             not
             the
             Scarf-skin
             .
             Yet
             not
             over
             close
             and
             compact
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             hinder
             the
             bodies
             transpiration
             And
             it
             is
             close
             wrought
             ,
             not
             only
             to
             defend
             the
             parts
             under
             it
             but
             that
             also
             too
             great
             an
             efflux
             of
             Vapor
             ,
             Blood
             ,
             Spirit
             and
             heat
             might
             not
             happen
             .
             For
             it
             is
             the
             cover
             of
             the
             Mouths
             and
             extremities
             of
             the
             Vessels
             .
             And
             therefore
             those
             cannot
             live
             in
             good
             health
             that
             are
             born
             without
             a
             Scarf-skin
             ;
             as
             was
             seen
             in
             Lewes
             the
             King
             of
             Bohemia
             and
             Hungaria
             ,
             who
             became
             gray
             hair'd
             while
             he
             was
             but
             a
             Boy
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             of
             a
             
               white
               color
            
             ,
             and
             therefore
             of
             a
             
             
               cold
               and
               dry
               temper
               and
               quite
               void
               of
               Blood
               ,
            
             For
             being
             torn
             or
             cut
             ,
             it
             sends
             forth
             no
             Blood.
             Nor
             is
             it
             nourished
             by
             Blood
             ,
             as
             Lauremberg
             and
             Sperlinger
             would
             have
             it
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             not
             intrinfically
             nourished
             by
             attraction
             of
             its
             proper
             Aliment
             ;
             but
             by
             addition
             of
             parts
             ▪
             the
             vapor
             growing
             into
             the
             like
             nature
             of
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             as
             Casserus
             rightly
             disputes
             ,
             The
             Scarf-skin
             is
             black
             in
             Blackmores
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             skin
             beneath
             it
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             number
             :
             there
             is
             but
             one
             Scarf-skin
             ;
             
             only
             there
             was
             once
             two
             found
             by
             Aquapendent
             :
             the
             one
             being
             strongly
             fastned
             in
             the
             pores
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             and
             inseperable
             :
             the
             other
             seperable
             without
             offence
             to
             the
             skin
             .
             Which
             happens
             in
             some
             only
             ,
             not
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             Also
             Laurembergius
             ,
             in
             applying
             Vesicatories
             ,
             found
             the
             Scarf-skin
             double
             ;
             but
             that
             is
             a
             rare
             case
             ,
             for
             that
             Vesicatories
             do
             peitce
             unto
             the
             skin
             is
             apparent
             from
             the
             humor
             dropping
             out
             ,
             and
             the
             pain
             .
             In
             brawny
             Callosities
             ,
             indeed
             there
             are
             many
             little
             skins
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             the
             skins
             of
             Onyons
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             besides
             nature
             ,
             whose
             Generation
             and
             cure
             is
             delivered
             by
             Fallopius
             .
          
           
             In
             point
             of
             Connexion
             ,
             it
             sticks
             so
             
             close
             to
             the
             Skin
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             while
             he
             is
             alive
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             one
             continued
             body
             therewith
             .
             Yet
             many
             times
             it
             is
             cast
             off
             as
             snakes
             and
             serpents
             cast
             their
             skins
             ,
             which
             
               Felix
               Platerus
            
             tells
             us
             did
             happen
             to
             himself
             ;
             and
             which
             happens
             in
             burning
             Feavers
             and
             the
             small
             Pox.
             Salmuth
             observed
             as
             much
             in
             some
             Gouty
             persons
             ,
             in
             an
             Ague
             ,
             and
             some
             other
             cases
             .
             In
             dead
             persons
             't
             is
             separated
             by
             a
             Candle
             ,
             or
             scalding
             Water
             :
             in
             living
             Bodies
             with
             Phoenigmi
             .
             In
             the
             Nut
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             it
             sticks
             not
             to
             the
             skin
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             flesh
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
            
             Of
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             CVtis
             ,
             the
             skin
             ,
             is
             in
             Greek
             cal'd
             Derma
             ,
             
             as
             it
             were
             Desma
             a
             band
             ;
             it
             is
             the
             common
             covering
             of
             the
             Body
             ;
             or
             a
             Temperate
             Membrane
             bred
             of
             the
             seed
             by
             a
             proper
             faculty
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             Instrument
             of
             feeling
             ,
             and
             to
             defend
             the
             parts
             beneath
             it
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             called
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             which
             must
             not
             be
             understood
             simply
             ,
             but
             so
             as
             to
             be
             a
             Membrane
             of
             a
             peculiar
             nature
             and
             proper
             temperament
             .
             And
             therefore
             Piccolhomineus
             was
             mistaken
             
             when
             he
             would
             have
             the
             skin
             to
             be
             simply
             a
             Membrane
             ;
             for
             the
             skin
             is
             thicker
             ,
             hath
             a
             substance
             proper
             to
             it self
             ,
             and
             is
             temperate
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             opinion
             of
             others
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             matter
             hereof
             is
             Seed
             and
             Blood
             well
             mixed
             together
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             skin
             hath
             a
             middle
             nature
             between
             Flesh
             〈…〉
             Nerves
             .
             And
             therefore
             Galen
             
             〈…〉
             that
             it
             is
             as
             it
             〈…〉
             a
             Nerve
             
             endued
             with
             blood
             :
             he
             sayes
             not
             simply
             ,
             but
             as
             it
             were
             .
             For
             he
             also
             likens
             it
             to
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             because
             in
             some
             parts
             it
             may
             be
             extended
             ,
             feels
             exquisitely
             ,
             and
             is
             white
             .
          
           
             Aristotle
             would
             have
             the
             skin
             to
             consist
             of
             flesh
             dried
             and
             grown
             old
             as
             it
             were
             .
             But
             
             the
             skin
             is
             easily
             flaid
             from
             the
             parts
             under
             it
             ,
             and
             between
             the
             flesh
             and
             skin
             there
             is
             fat
             ,
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             &c.
             to
             which
             Opinion
             Fernelius
             inclined
             ,
             when
             he
             said
             that
             the
             skin
             of
             the
             Face
             was
             a
             certain
             more
             dry
             portion
             of
             the
             flesh
             beneath
             it
             .
             Wherein
             he
             also
             is
             to
             be
             blamed
             ,
             Because
             1.
             
             It
             may
             be
             separated
             from
             the
             flesh
             .
             2.
             
             It
             will
             admit
             of
             Scars
             as
             the
             skin
             in
             other
             places
             .
          
           
             Others
             say
             it
             is
             made
             of
             the
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Vessels
             widened
             ,
             because
             it
             
             every
             where
             lives
             and
             feels
             ,
             and
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             Vessels
             end
             thereinto
             :
             but
             this
             may
             be
             said
             of
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             Others
             ,
             of
             the
             softer
             Nerves
             spread
             out
             in
             the
             surface
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             an
             addition
             of
             blood
             concurring
             :
             but
             this
             Opinion
             is
             of
             no
             more
             force
             then
             the
             formet
             .
          
           
             The
             skin
             therefore
             is
             made
             of
             Seed
             taken
             in
             a
             moderate
             quantity
             :
             and
             for
             
             its
             enlargement
             ,
             it
             had
             a
             moderate
             quantity
             of
             blood
             ;
             but
             seed
             seems
             to
             hold
             the
             greater
             proportion
             .
             For
             the
             skin
             is
             naturally
             whi●ish
             ;
             though
             it
             varies
             according
             to
             the
             plenty
             of
             humors
             and
             Bodies
             beneath
             it
             .
             For
             such
             as
             the
             Humor
             is
             ,
             such
             will
             be
             the
             color
             of
             the
             skin
             .
             So
             Sanguine
             persons
             have
             it
             ruddy
             ;
             those
             that
             are
             Jaundized
             ,
             have
             it
             yellow
             or
             black
             .
             Examples
             whereof
             see
             in
             
               Marcellus
               Donatus
            
             and
             others
             .
             If
             flesh
             lie
             beneath
             it
             ,
             the
             redder
             it
             is
             ,
             if
             fat
             the
             whiter
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             in
             respect
             to
             the
             seed
             ,
             that
             Authors
             say
             ,
             the
             skin
             grows
             not
             together
             
             again
             after
             it
             is
             wounded
             .
             In
             respect
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             there
             is
             somewhat
             like
             the
             skin
             produced
             ,
             viz.
             a
             Scar
             :
             Which
             consists
             as
             it
             were
             of
             burnt
             and
             dried
             flesh
             .
             Howbeit
             in
             Children
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             moisture
             of
             their
             skin
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             aboundance
             of
             glutinous
             humors
             ,
             a
             wound
             hath
             been
             observed
             to
             be
             closed
             up
             with
             true
             skin
             ;
             
               Witness
               Spigelius
            
             .
          
           
             Wherefore
             the
             skin
             being
             made
             as
             it
             were
             of
             a
             Membranous
             ,
             cold
             and
             dry
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             fleshy
             ,
             hot
             and
             moist
             substance
             ;
             becomes
             temperate
             in
             all
             the
             first
             and
             second
             qualities
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             rightly
             judg
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             Cause
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             is
             the
             Skin-generating
             faculty
             ;
             as
             in
             a
             bone
             
             the
             Bone-generating
             faculty
             ,
             in
             a
             Nerve
             the
             Nerve-forming
             power
             or
             faculty
             ,
             &c.
             which
             faculty
             frames
             a
             part
             differing
             from
             all
             other
             similar
             parts
             .
             But
             how
             doth
             the
             faculty
             make
             of
             the
             same
             Seminal
             matter
             Nerves
             ,
             Bones
             ,
             &c.
             by
             an
             hidden
             and
             divine
             power
             as
             it
             were
             .
          
           
             The
             
               publick
               Action
            
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             necessary
             for
             the
             whole
             Living-Creature
             
             is
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             primary
             Instrument
             of
             the
             sense
             of
             feeling
             ,
             for
             every
             Membrane
             is
             the
             Adaequate
             Organ
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Bones
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Stomach
             ,
             &c.
             
             For
             though
             all
             the
             Organs
             of
             the
             senses
             are
             dissimilar
             parts
             ,
             yet
             one
             similar
             part
             is
             the
             primary
             cause
             of
             the
             action
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             be
             performed
             by
             the
             whole
             Organ
             .
             For
             examples
             sake
             ,
             the
             hand
             is
             indeed
             the
             Organ
             of
             feeling
             ,
             and
             especially
             that
             part
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             which
             covers
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Hands
             and
             Feet
             ,
             as
             being
             of
             all
             other
             most
             temperate
             .
             And
             because
             the
             skin
             is
             temperate
             in
             the
             first
             qualities
             ;
             it
             is
             therefore
             also
             temperate
             in
             the
             second
             ,
             as
             〈…〉
             hardness
             ,
             thickness
             ,
             thinness
             ,
             &
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             
               The
               first
               use
               of
               the
               Skin
               is
               ,
               to
               be
            
             a
             Covering
             
             for
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             hath
             received
             a
             Figure
             so
             round
             ,
             long
             ,
             &c.
             as
             the
             subject
             parts
             required
             ;
             and
             therefore
             also
             it
             is
             seared
             without
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             because
             it
             was
             to
             be
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Emunctory
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             The
             professors
             of
             Physiognomy
             commend
             unto
             us
             another
             use
             of
             the
             skin
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             streaked
             with
             lines
             ;
             who
             are
             wont
             to
             tell
             mens
             Fortunes
             from
             the
             Lines
             and
             Hillocks
             in
             their
             Hands
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Planetary
             and
             Adventitious
             Lines
             in
             their
             Foreheads
             .
             A
             third
             use
             is
             Medicinal
             ,
             being
             good
             for
             Anodin●
             Emplasters
             .
             Being
             dried
             ,
             it
             helps
             women
             in
             Labor
             ;
             Epileptick
             Convulsions
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             experience
             of
             Hildanus
             and
             Beckerus
             ;
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Scul
             ,
             according
             to
             Poppius
             .
             The
             fourth
             is
             more
             illustrious
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             give
             way
             to
             Excrements
             ,
             and
             exclude
             insensible
             sooty
             Fumes
             by
             way
             of
             insensible
             Transpiration
             ,
             by
             which
             we
             are
             more
             disburthened
             then
             by
             all
             our
             sensible
             Evacuations
             put
             together
             .
             By
             this
             ,
             Sanctorius
             through
             the
             statick
             Art
             ,
             in
             the
             experience
             of
             thirty
             years
             ,
             did
             learn
             that
             many
             persons
             in
             the
             space
             of
             one
             natural
             day
             ,
             do
             void
             more
             by
             transpiration
             ,
             then
             in
             fifteen
             dayes
             together
             by
             stool
             .
             The
             fift
             is
             to
             attract
             .
             1.
             
             Air
             in
             transpiration
             ,
             in
             Apople●tick
             and
             Hysterical
             fits
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             as
             dive
             deep
             and
             bide
             long
             under
             the
             Water
             .
             2.
             
             Juyce
             ,
             in
             long
             fasting
             ,
             from
             plasters
             applied
             ,
             if
             we
             credit
             the
             Observations
             of
             
               Zacutus
               Lufitanus
            
             ;
             and
             the
             force
             of
             purgative
             and
             other
             external
             Medicaments
             .
             And
             for
             this
             cause
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             bored
             through
             in
             divers
             places
             ,
             for
             the
             ingress
             and
             egress
             of
             things
             necessary
             .
             Now
             its
             holes
             are
             some
             of
             them
             visible
             ,
             as
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             the
             Ears
             ,
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             &c.
             others
             invisible
             and
             insensible
             ,
             as
             the
             pores
             .
             Those
             pores
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             being
             otherwise
             not
             Conspicuous
             ,
             are
             seen
             in
             the
             winter
             ,
             when
             the
             Body
             is
             suddenly
             bared
             ;
             for
             then
             the
             Scarf-skin
             looks
             like
             a
             Gooses
             skin
             when
             the
             feathers
             are
             pul'd
             of
             .
             By
             reason
             (
             it
             seems
             )
             of
             these
             pores
             it
             was
             ,
             that
             a
             certain
             Persian
             King
             made
             use
             of
             the
             skins
             of
             Men
             for
             windowes
             ,
             if
             we
             may
             credit
             Orabasi●s
             .
          
           
             The
             Skin
             is
             thick
             ,
             six
             fold
             thicker
             then
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             but
             thinner
             then
             it
             is
             in
             other
             Animals
             ,
             nor
             must
             any
             one
             judg
             of
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             Skin
             after
             it
             is
             made
             into
             Leather
             ,
             for
             by
             Tanning
             it
             is
             much
             contracted
             and
             thickned
             ,
             And
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             made
             lighter
             ,
             for
             a
             Mans
             skin
             Tanned
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Loselius
             ,
             weighs
             four
             pounds
             and
             an
             half
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             soft
             and
             exquisitely
             sensible
             ,
             but
             softer
             and
             thinner
             in
             the
             Face
             ,
             Yard
             ,
             and
             Cods
             ;
             harder
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             Thighs
             ,
             soles
             of
             the
             Feet
             ,
             Back
             ;
             of
             a
             midling
             constitution
             between
             hardness
             and
             softness
             ,
             in
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
             So
             ,
             some
             part
             of
             the
             skin
             is
             extream
             thick
             as
             in
             the
             Head
             ,
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             falsly
             cited
             by
             Columbus
             .
             Some
             is
             thick
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Neck
             ;
             some
             thin
             as
             in
             the
             sides
             ,
             whence
             proceeds
             tickling
             ;
             some
             yet
             thinner
             as
             in
             the
             Palms
             of
             the
             Hands
             ,
             some
             thinnest
             of
             all
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Lips.
             In
             Children
             't
             is
             more
             thin
             and
             porous
             then
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             in
             women
             then
             in
             men
             ;
             in
             an
             hot
             Countrey
             ,
             then
             in
             a
             cold
             .
             Also
             the
             Skin
             is
             more
             rare
             and
             open
             in
             the
             Summer
             then
             in
             the
             Winter
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             the
             skins
             of
             Animals
             flaid
             off
             in
             the
             Summer
             do
             more
             hardly
             retain
             their
             hair
             ,
             then
             such
             as
             are
             flaid
             off
             in
             the
             winter
             .
             Also
             it
             varies
             very
             much
             according
             to
             the
             diversity
             of
             the
             suoject
             ;
             so
             that
             in
             some
             it
             hath
             been
             of
             an
             admirable
             density
             and
             thickness
             ,
             if
             we
             beleive
             
               Petrus
               Ser●…
            
             who
             tels
             of
             two
             Negro
             women
             ,
             that
             could
             without
             hurt
             take
             up
             ▪
             carry
             ,
             hold
             ,
             and
             almost
             extinguish
             burning
             oles
             with
             their
             bare
             Hands
             .
             Fallopius
             saw
             the
             skin
             of
             〈…〉
             so
             〈…〉
             that
             he
             lost
             his
             feeling
             〈…〉
             ●easo●…
             of
             the
             Nerves
          
           
           
             As
             to
             its
             Connexion
             :
             some
             skin
             is
             easily
             separated
             from
             the
             parts
             under
             
             it
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             lower
             and
             middle
             Belly
             ,
             in
             the
             Arms
             and
             Thighs
             .
             From
             others
             with
             more
             difficulty
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             thick
             Membrane
             to
             which
             it
             is
             fastned
             by
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Vessels
             .
             In
             the
             soles
             of
             the
             Feet
             and
             Palms
             of
             the
             Hands
             ,
             it
             is
             hardly
             separated
             ,
             to
             which
             parts
             it
             grows
             that
             they
             might
             lay
             the
             faster
             hold
             .
             Also
             hardly
             from
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             Forehead
             and
             of
             the
             whole
             Face
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             Ears
             and
             Lips
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             tendons
             and
             Muscles
             mixed
             therewith
             ,
             especially
             the
             Muscle
             Latus
             so
             called
             ,
             mingled
             therewith
             .
             So
             ,
             in
             the
             Forehead
             it
             is
             moveable
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Head
             of
             some
             People
             by
             reason
             of
             peculiar
             Muscles
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             not
             so
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             The
             skin
             hath
             received
             common
             Vessels
             ,
             for
             Nourishment
             ,
             Life
             and
             Sense
             .
             It
             
             hath
             received
             two
             cutany
             Veins
             ,
             through
             the
             Head
             and
             Neck
             ,
             from
             the
             Jugulars
             ;
             two
             through
             the
             Arms
             ,
             Breast
             and
             Back
             ,
             from
             the
             Axillaries
             ;
             two
             through
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             Loyns
             and
             Legs
             ,
             from
             the
             Groyns
             ,
             which
             are
             Conspicuous
             in
             women
             after
             hard
             Labor
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Varices
             in
             many
             branches
             .
             It
             hath
             few
             
             Art
             ●●ng
             .
             And
             those
             very
             small
             ,
             in
             the
             temples
             and
             Forehead
             ,
             Fingers
             ,
             Cod
             and
             Yard
             .
             It
             hath
             no
             Nerves
             creeping
             in
             it
             ,
             but
             it
             hath
             many
             ending
             in
             it
             ,
             as
             Galen
             conceived
             :
             though
             
               Iohannes
               Veslingus
            
             the
             prime
             Anatomist
             of
             Padua
             sayes
             there
             are
             very
             small
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             running
             through
             the
             skin
             ;
             and
             that
             rightly
             ,
             for
             their
             presence
             was
             necessary
             to
             cause
             the
             sense
             of
             Feeling
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
            
             Of
             FAT
             .
          
           
             FAt
             is
             a
             similary
             Body
             void
             of
             Life
             ,
             
             growing
             together
             out
             of
             Oyly
             blood
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             for
             the
             safegard
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             That
             it
             is
             void
             of
             Life
             ,
             appears
             in
             that
             it
             is
             cut
             without
             pain
             ,
             and
             Consumptions
             thereof
             shew
             as
             much
             .
             Therefore
             Pliny
             writes
             that
             living
             sowes
             are
             gnawn
             by
             Mice
             ;
             and
             Aelian
             reports
             that
             the
             Tyrant
             Dionysius
             was
             so
             Fat
             ,
             that
             when
             he
             was
             a
             sleep
             ,
             the
             pricking
             of
             Needles
             could
             not
             awake
             him
             .
             Also
             in
             Greenland
             they
             cut
             fat
             out
             of
             living
             Whales
             which
             they
             never
             feel
             nor
             perceive
             .
          
           
             Pinguedo
             fat
             ,
             which
             the
             Greeks
             term
             Pimele
             ,
             is
             by
             Gaza
             ill
             translated
             Adeps
             :
             
             for
             Pinguedo
             is
             an
             Aiery
             hot
             and
             moist
             substance
             of
             the
             moister
             sorts
             of
             Animals
             ,
             and
             is
             more
             easily
             melted
             with
             heat
             ,
             and
             will
             scarce
             ever
             become
             hard
             again
             ,
             nor
             can
             it
             be
             broken
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             soft
             ,
             laxe
             and
             rare
             :
             but
             understand
             the
             contrary
             in
             Suet
             ,
             which
             easily
             grows
             hard
             and
             stiff
             ,
             but
             is
             hardly
             dissolved
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Now
             fat
             to
             speak
             properly
             ,
             is
             not
             a
             part
             ,
             but
             rather
             an
             humor
             ,
             unless
             
             haply
             it
             be
             considered
             together
             with
             the
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             many
             times
             it
             is
             by
             Galen
             .
          
           
             The
             〈…〉
             of
             our
             order
             is
             this
             ;
             because
             fat
             in
             a
             man
             is
             between
             the
             skin
             and
             the
             fleshy
             Membrane
             ,
             in
             ●…s
             under
             the
             Membrane
             which
             moves
             the
          
           
             Those
             parts
             are
             void
             of
             fat
             ,
             which
             
             could
             receive
             no
             profit
             thereby
             but
             hindrance
             by
             resisting
             convenient
             Complication
             and
             Distension
             ,
             as
             the
             Brain
             ,
             Eyelids
             ,
             Yard
             ,
             Cod
             ,
             and
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Testicles
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             chiefly
             in
             those
             parts
             which
             are
             more
             strongly
             moved
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             hard
             like
             Suet
             ,
             and
             interwoven
             between
             the
             Fibres
             and
             little
             Veins
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Palm
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             the
             inner
             sides
             of
             the
             Fingers
             (
             for
             there
             are
             many
             tendons
             ,
             Nerves
             and
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             moistened
             )
             in
             the
             sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             especially
             the
             Heel
             .
             It
             is
             softer
             in
             sundry
             parts
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             their
             place
             .
          
           
             
               Caecilius
               Folius
            
             hath
             larely
             written
             
             that
             the
             matter
             whereof
             fat
             is
             made
             ,
             is
             the
             milky
             juyce
             ,
             or
             fatter
             portion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             and
             that
             therewith
             the
             Bones
             are
             nourished
             .
             To
             which
             opinion
             I
             oppose
             .
             1.
             
             That
             such
             as
             eat
             fat
             meats
             ,
             do
             not
             presently
             grow
             fat
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Chylus
             is
             too
             crude
             to
             nourish
             the
             parts
             .
             3.
             
             That
             Children
             should
             presently
             become
             fat
             as
             we
             see
             it
             happen
             in
             Children
             new
             born
             ,
             who
             have
             been
             nourished
             only
             with
             their
             Mothers
             Blood.
             4.
             
             That
             the
             Chylus
             is
             necessarily
             changed
             before
             it
             come
             unto
             the
             Parts
             .
             5.
             
             There
             is
             no
             passage
             from
             the
             Mesentery
             to
             the
             extream
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             neither
             suckt
             through
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             as
             some
             learned
             men
             suppose
             ,
             nor
             is
             it
             carried
             through
             the
             Glandules
             .
             Not
             the
             former
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             they
             are
             thicker
             ,
             then
             to
             suck
             and
             draw
             as
             threads
             .
             2.
             
             They
             would
             appear
             swoln
             ,
             and
             would
             in
             Anatomy
             discover
             some
             Oyly
             moisture
             in
             them
             .
             Nor
             the
             latter
             ,
             1.
             
             Because
             the
             Kernels
             are
             not
             continued
             with
             the
             fat
             parts
             .
             2.
             
             Nor
             do
             they
             receive
             any
             profitable
             humor
             ,
             but
             Excrements
             ,
             yea
             they
             abound
             with
             a
             white
             ,
             flegmatick
             ,
             but
             not
             a
             fat
             humor
             .
             3.
             
             We
             observe
             that
             many
             creatures
             grow
             fat
             which
             have
             no
             Kernels
             .
             Now
             the
             fatter
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             is
             the
             material
             cause
             of
             fatness
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             only
             the
             remote
             cause
             ,
             and
             therefore
             in
             deed
             and
             truth
             ,
          
           
             The
             Matter
             thereof
             is
             Unanimously
             
             concluded
             to
             be
             Blood
             ,
             whence
             Aristotle
             sayes
             ,
             that
             such
             Creatures
             as
             have
             no
             Blood
             ,
             have
             neither
             Fat
             nor
             Suet
             :
             but
             it
             must
             be
             blood
             Purified
             and
             
               Absolutely
               concocted
            
             ,
             nor
             yet
             all
             such
             blood
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             thin
             ,
             Aiery
             and
             Oyly
             .
             It
             resembles
             the
             buttery
             substance
             of
             Milk
             ,
             and
             
             the
             Oyly
             substance
             of
             Seed
             ;
             and
             therefore
             Aristotle
             did
             well
             deny
             Fat
             to
             be
             moist
             ;
             with
             a
             watery
             moisture
             ,
             his
             meaning
             was
             ,
             not
             with
             an
             Aiery
             .
             Against
             whom
             Fernelius
             and
             Columbus
             have
             written
             .
             And
             when
             fat
             is
             made
             of
             Oyly
             Blood
             ,
             much
             of
             the
             heat
             is
             lost
             .
             Whence
             Aristotle
             sayes
             ;
             
               Such
               things
               as
               are
               condensed
               by
               cold
               ,
               out
               of
               them
               much
               heat
               is
               forced
               and
               squeezed
               .
            
             And
             in
             another
             place
             :
             
               Natural
               matters
               are
               such
               ,
               as
               the
               place
               is
               wherein
               they
               are
               .
            
          
           
             Therefore
             the
             nature
             of
             Fat
             is
             colder
             
             then
             that
             of
             blood
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             moderately
             hot
             ;
             For
             1.
             
             Outwardly
             applyed
             ,
             it
             Digests
             ,
             Resolves
             ,
             Discusses
             .
             2.
             
             It
             is
             the
             thinner
             and
             more
             Oyly
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             .
             3.
             
             It
             easily
             takes
             fire
             .
             4.
             
             It
             encreases
             the
             heat
             within
             ,
             as
             the
             Caul
             assists
             the
             Stomachs
             Concoction
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Some
             will
             have
             it
             to
             be
             cold
             ,
             because
             Aristotle
             sayes
             ,
             whatever
             things
             grow
             together
             by
             cold
             ,
             and
             are
             melted
             by
             Heat
             ,
             are
             cold
             .
             But
             Fat
             is
             congealed
             by
             cold
             .
             I
             answer
             :
             Fat
             is
             cold
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Heat
             which
             before
             it
             had
             ,
             while
             it
             was
             blood
             .
             But
             we
             must
             learn
             〈…〉
             the
             same
             Aristotle
             ,
             that
             such
             things
             as
             having
             been
             〈…〉
             cold
             ,
             are
             melted
             with
             an
             easie
             Heat
             ,
             have
          
           
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               are
               expressed
               the
               common
               Coverings
               of
               the
               Belly
               separated
               ,
               and
               on
               one
               side
               the
               Fat
               besprinkled
               with
               its
               Vessels
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               other
               side
               certain
               Muscles
               Detected
               ▪
            
             
               The
               II.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Scarf-skin
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   The
                   Skin
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Fat
                   out
                   of
                   its
                   place
                   ,
                   separated
                   from
                   the
                   Pannicle
                   or
                   Coat
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   fleshy
                   Pannicle
                   .
                
                 
                   EEEEE
                   .
                   The
                   Fat
                   left
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   place
                   half
                   the
                   Belly
                   over
                   .
                
                 
                   FFFF
                   .
                   The
                   distribution
                   of
                   certain
                   Vessels
                   through
                   the
                   Fat.
                   
                
                 
                   G.
                   Store
                   of
                   Kernels
                   in
                   the
                   Groyn
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   White
                   Line
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   Navil
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   Pectoral
                   Muscle
                   Detected
                   .
                
                 
                   LLL
                   .
                   The
                   Productions
                   of
                   the
                   greater
                   Foreside-saw-Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   oblique
                   descendent
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Breast
                   in
                   its
                   Situation
                   .
                
                 
                   NNN
                   .
                   The
                   right
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Belly
                   appearing
                   through
                   the
                   Tendon
                   of
                   the
                   oblique
                   descendent
                   .
                
                 
                   OOO
                   .
                   The
                   Nervous
                   Inscriptions
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   The
                   Right-side
                   Pyramidal
                   Muscle
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   place
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               5.
               
            
          
           
             The
             
               Efficient
               ,
               or
               Generating
               Cause
            
             of
             Fatness
             ,
             is
             moist
             and
             temperate
             Heat
             ,
             
             the
             Author
             of
             all
             Digestion
             .
             The
             
               cause
               Efficient
            
             of
             its
             growing
             together
             ,
             is
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             Membranes
             (
             from
             whence
             it
             gains
             its
             white
             color
             )
             not
             simple
             but
             respective
             ;
             yet
             sufficient
             to
             coagulate
             the
             oylie
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             sweating
             forth
             ,
             even
             as
             melted
             Lead
             grows
             congealed
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             poured
             out
             into
             a
             
             place
             hot
             enough
             ,
             yet
             colder
             then
             the
             fire
             .
             And
             Fat
             grows
             together
             
             by
             cold
             ,
             in
             a
             certain
             degree
             as
             it
             were
             (
             for
             every
             thing
             is
             not
             made
             of
             every
             thing
             )
             and
             therefore
             Fat
             is
             not
             bred
             in
             any
             part
             .
             Now
             that
             Fatness
             proceeds
             from
             Coldness
             Galen
             and
             other
             Learned
             men
             have
             determined
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Fat
             ,
             light
             ,
             and
             thin
             Part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             while
             in
             hotter
             Bodies
             it
             turns
             to
             Nutriment
             ,
             in
             colder
             it
             is
             reserved
             (
             and
             therefore
             hot
             and
             dry
             Animals
             are
             hardly
             eyer
             fat
             )
             and
             when
             the
             Veins
             send
             it
             out
             of
             themselves
             ,
             it
             lights
             upon
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             grows
             together
             .
          
           
             For
             1.
             
             Even
             the
             Blood
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             does
             after
             this
             manner
             grow
             together
             ,
             by
             meeting
             with
             the
             cold
             Air
             ,
             though
             its
             internal
             Coldness
             do
             also
             ,
             help
             forward
             the
             mutation
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Aristotle
             saies
             ,
             among
             such
             things
             as
             melt
             ,
             those
             that
             are
             melted
             by
             heat
             ,
             are
             congealed
             by
             cold
             ,
             as
             Oyl
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             The
             colder
             Creatures
             are
             the
             fatter
             ,
             as
             Gueldings
             ,
             Foemales
             ;
             also
             such
             as
             lie
             long
             hid
             in
             the
             Earth
             without
             Exercise
             :
             So
             in
             the
             Winter
             ,
             all
             Creatures
             are
             fatter
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Fat
             is
             only
             bred
             in
             cold
             places
             ,
             as
             
             in
             the
             Membranes
             :
             So
             we
             see
             the
             Call
             is
             fat
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             membranous
             Substance
             ,
             also
             in
             respect
             of
             its
             place
             ,
             being
             far
             from
             the
             hot
             Bowels
             ,
             for
             it
             〈…〉
             upon
             the
             Guts
             ,
             under
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             beca●…
             stored
             with
             abundance
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             i●…uch
             
             Fat
             ;
             so
             about
             the
             Heart
             Fat
             is
             collected
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             
             a
             cold
             and
             thick
             Membrane
             ;
             also
             the
             wheyish
             Humor
             contained
             therein
             :
             below
             it
             there
             is
             the
             Midriff
             as
             a
             Fan
             ,
             on
             either
             fide
             the
             Lungs
             like
             Bellows
             ,
             the
             Mediastinum
             &c.
             
             So
             about
             the
             the
             Kidneys
             
             Fat
             is
             gathered
             ,
             because
             they
             abound
             with
             a
             wheyish
             Excrement
             ,
             lie
             near
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             and
             are
             covered
             by
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             A
             Cover
             hanging
             over
             boyling
             Water
             ,
             coagulates
             the
             Vapors
             which
             arise
             unto
             it
             ,
             and
             turns
             them
             into
             water
             by
             its
             Coldness
             .
             For
             make
             the
             Air
             round
             about
             exceeding
             hot
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Vapors
             striking
             against
             the
             cover
             ,
             will
             not
             be
             condensed
             .
          
           
             
               Another
               Opinion
            
             is
             ,
             that
             Fat
             is
             made
             by
             an
             hot
             Cause
             ,
             because
             the
             matter
             thereof
             
             is
             hot
             ,
             and
             because
             Fat
             easily
             flames
             ;
             also
             because
             all
             things
             are
             made
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             by
             Coction
             ,
             and
             Heat
             .
             But
             the
             answer
             is
             clear
             from
             what
             hath
             been
             said
             before
             .
             And
             we
             do
             not
             mean
             meer
             Coldness
             ,
             the
             Cause
             of
             Crudity
             ,
             but
             a
             weak
             Heat
             .
          
           
             Some
             say
             that
             Fat
             attains
             its
             consistency
             from
             the
             compactness
             of
             the
             
             Membranes
             ,
             for
             that
             which
             is
             itself
             compact
             makes
             other
             things
             so
             .
             I
             answer
             .
             That
             cold
             things
             condense
             ,
             and
             Condensation
             proceeds
             from
             Cold
             ,
             nor
             can
             that
             which
             is
             condensed
             condense
             ,
             unless
             it
             were
             a
             first
             Quality
             ,
             or
             should
             take
             the
             assistance
             of
             Cold
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             the
             thinness
             of
             the
             Membrane
             would
             make
             the
             fat
             thin
             .
             And
             why
             does
             not
             the
             density
             or
             compactness
             of
             the
             Vessels
             make
             the
             matter
             contained
             to
             be
             condensed
             and
             compact
             ?
          
           
             2.
             
             In
             like
             manner
             they
             object
             :
             By
             a
             thick
             cover
             though
             very
             hot
             ,
             the
             Vapor
             arising
             from
             boyling
             Water
             ,
             when
             it
             meets
             therewith
             ,
             is
             turned
             into
             Water
             ,
             or
             in
             a
             Distillation
             by
             an
             Alembick
             ,
             the
             Exhalations
             arising
             from
             the
             subject
             matter
             ,
             meeting
             with
             the
             thick
             glass
             are
             stopped
             ,
             and
             by
             reflection
             turned
             into
             a
             thickned
             Substance
             .
             But
             the
             Answer
             ,
             is
             clear
             from
             what
             hath
             been
             said
             ;
             moreover
             ,
             the
             Vapors
             which
             are
             raised
             up
             by
             boyling
             ,
             if
             they
             are
             by
             the
             Vessel
             so
             shut
             in
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             place
             to
             breath
             out
             ,
             new
             Vapors
             continually
             arising
             ,
             that
             there
             may
             not
             be
             a
             Penetration
             of
             Bodies
             ,
             it
             is
             necessary
             ,
             that
             they
             reassume
             their
             former
             consistency
             :
             But
             if
             they
             find
             egress
             ,
             they
             turn
             to
             Water
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             cold
             Air
             surrounding
             the
             glassie
             Cover
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             ,
             to
             make
             the
             Liquor
             issue
             more
             aboundantly
             ,
             Distillers
             ever
             and
             anon
             cool
             the
             same
             with
             cold
             Water
             .
             So
             when
             the
             Air
             abroad
             is
             cold
             ,
             hot
             Vapors
             within
             do
             turn
             to
             Water
             upon
             the
             glass
             Windows
             ;
             which
             does
             not
             happen
             when
             the
             Air
             is
             hot
             abroad
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             many
             cold
             Parts
             ,
             as
             the
             Brain
             and
             its
             coats
             ,
             &c.
             which
             have
             no
             Fat
             about
             them
             .
             I
             answer
             ,
             those
             Parts
             also
             are
             dense
             .
             Nor
             would
             Nature
             have
             Fat
             in
             those
             Parts
             ,
             for
             it
             would
             be
             both
             unprofitable
             and
             hurtful
             :
             And
             a
             moderate
             Heat
             is
             there
             provided
             for
             ,
             by
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             Skin
             ,
             the
             Hair
             and
             the
             Skull
             .
          
           
             
               Fabius
               Pacius
            
             makes
             the
             cause
             to
             
             be
             also
             Dryness
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Fibers
             of
             Fat.
             To
             which
             is
             repugnant
             1
             That
             Fat
             is
             not
             dry
             ,
             but
             moist
             .
             2
             ●…le
             Fibers
             ,
             as
             the
             Blood
             hath
             .
             Touch-●…e
             
             
               Anatomical
               Contradictions
            
             of
             my
             
               Fa
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             
               Other
               late
               Writers
            
             are
             pleased
             with
             a
             
             new
             conceit
             ,
             that
             Fat
             is
             made
             ,
             by
             a
             peculiar
             fat-making
             form
             ,
             as
             a
             bone
             is
             made
             by
             a
             bone-making
             form
             .
             Who
             doubtless
             are
             mistakens
             because
             1
             Fat
             doth
             not
             live
             .
             2
             It
             hath
             no
             certain
             Dimension
             .
             And
             3
             The
             blood
             turns
             into
             the
             marrow
             of
             the
             bones
             ,
             without
             the
             help
             of
             such
             a
             form
             .
          
           
             The
             Form
             of
             Fat
             as
             long
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             is
             not
             congealed
             ,
             but
             liquid
             and
             
             melted
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Heat
             which
             as
             yet
             remains
             in
             the
             Vessels
             .
             It
             hath
             been
             voided
             liquid
             by
             Urin
             ,
             as
             Helmo●t
             hath
             observed
             ,
             and
             in
             an
             healthy
             Woman
             by
             stool
             ,
             in
             the
             Observation
             of
             
               Hildanus
               .
               Folius
            
             conceives
             it
             is
             liquid
             in
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             likeness
             of
             Nature
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             is
             congealed
             without
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             different
             Nature
             of
             the
             Fibres
             .
             But
             no
             man
             can
             easily
             observe
             the
             dissimilitude
             of
             the
             fibres
             ,
             either
             within
             the
             body
             ,
             or
             without
             .
          
           
             The
             Fat
             of
             the
             Belly
             hath
             three
             Veins
             ,
             the
             external
             Mammillary
             descending
             from
             
             above
             the
             
               Vena
               Epigastrica
            
             ,
             arising
             from
             beneath
             out
             of
             the
             crural
             Vein
             ,
             through
             the
             Groins
             ,
             and
             very
             many
             Veins
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             accompanied
             with
             Arteries
             .
             And
             through
             these
             ,
             and
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Skin
             ,
             Cupping-glasses
             and
             Scarifications
             draw
             Humors
             out
             of
             the
             inner
             Parts
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             I
             can
             conceive
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             very
             great
             aboundance
             of
             Kernels
             ,
             
             which
             receive
             Excrements
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             into
             themselves
             .
             In
             sickly
             persons
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             abound
             with
             excrementitious
             Moisture
             ,
             they
             are
             more
             plentiful
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             Fat
             is
             1
             To
             keep
             warm
             like
             
             a
             Garment
             ,
             to
             cherish
             Natural
             Heat
             ,
             by
             its
             Clammyness
             ,
             hindring
             the
             going
             forth
             thereof
             ,
             and
             by
             its
             thickness
             ,
             stopping
             the
             Passages
             ,
             least
             Cold
             should
             enter
             ;
             and
             in
             Summer
             ,
             they
             keep
             out
             the
             Heat
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             In
             a
             special
             manner
             to
             help
             the
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             cutting
             out
             of
             the
             Call
             breeds
             Winds
             and
             Belchings
             ,
             and
             to
             cause
             good
             Digestion
             ,
             it
             is
             necessary
             to
             provide
             some
             other
             covering
             for
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             daub
             and
             moisten
             hot
             and
             dry
             parts
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             facilitate
             Motion
             ,
             provided
             it
             be
             moderate
             ,
             for
             abundance
             of
             Fat
             hinders
             Motion
             and
             all
             other
             Actions
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             the
             Parts
             from
             being
             over
             dried
             ,
             distended
             ,
             or
             broken
             .
             Hence
             it
             defends
             the
             ends
             of
             Gristles
             ,
             the
             Joyntings
             of
             the
             greater
             Bones
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             placed
             on
             the
             outside
             of
             certain
             Ligaments
             ,
             also
             about
             the
             Vessels
             carried
             to
             the
             Skin
             .
             For
             this
             very
             cause
             ,
             there
             is
             store
             of
             Fat
             in
             the
             Socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             least
             by
             reason
             of
             continual
             Motion
             ,
             it
             should
             become
             dry
             and
             withered
             as
             it
             were
             .
             And
             the
             
               Vena
               Coronalis
            
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             fenced
             with
             much
             Fat
             ,
             to
             accommodate
             the
             great
             Motion
             and
             Heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             It
             serves
             as
             a
             Pillow
             and
             Bulwark
             against
             Blows
             ,
             Bruises
             ,
             and
             Compressions
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             Nature
             hath
             furnisht
             the
             Buttocks
             ,
             and
             the
             Hollow
             of
             the
             Hands
             and
             Feet
             with
             plenty
             of
             Fat.
             
          
           
             6.
             
             In
             times
             of
             Famine
             ,
             it
             is
             turned
             
             into
             nourishment
             ,
             for
             we
             are
             nourished
             with
             that
             which
             is
             sweet
             and
             fat
             ,
             as
             being
             familiar
             to
             us
             and
             our
             Nature
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             beleive
             Galen
             and
             other
             Authors
             .
             Whose
             Intention
             Rondeletius
             interprets
             to
             be
             ,
             that
             the
             Fat
             doth
             only
             releive
             famished
             persons
             ,
             and
             hold
             the
             parts
             ●●
             the
             Body
             in
             play
             ,
             till
             they
             attain
             their
             proper
             Nou●shment
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             It
             fills
             up
             the
             empty
             spaces
             between
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             Skin
             ,
             and
             consequently
             renders
             the
             Body
             smooth
             ,
             white
             ,
             soft
             ,
             fair
             ,
             and
             beautiful
             .
             And
             therefore
             persons
             in
             a
             Consumption
             and
             decrepit
             old
             Women
             are
             deformed
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             Fat.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
            
             Of
             Membranes
             in
             General
             ,
             of
             the
             fleshy
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             the
             Membrane
             which
             is
             proper
             to
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             UNder
             the
             fat
             in
             a
             Man
             ,
             the
             Membrana
             
             carnosa
             ,
             or
             fleshy
             Membrane
             lies
             ,
             which
             in
             Apes
             ,
             Dogs
             ,
             and
             Sheep
             lies
             next
             the
             Skin
             .
             Before
             we
             treat
             thereof
             ,
             some
             things
             are
             to
             be
             known
             concerning
             the
             Nature
             of
             a
             Membrane
             in
             general
             .
          
           
             The
             Ancients
             called
             the
             Membranes
             Hymenas
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Chitona's
             Coats
             ,
             also
             Meningas
             ;
             and
             otherwhiles
             Operimenta
             ,
             and
             Tegumenta
             Coverings
             ;
             and
             with
             Galen
             and
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             speaking
             in
             a
             large
             Sense
             ,
             a
             Coat
             and
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             are
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             .
             But
             when
             they
             speak
             in
             a
             strickt
             and
             proper
             Sense
             .
          
           
             That
             is
             a
             Membrane
             which
             compasses
             some
             bulkie
             Part
             ,
             as
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             the
             Periostium
             ,
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             and
             the
             peculiar
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             term
             Tunica
             or
             Coat
             in
             a
             strickt
             sense
             ,
             is
             attributed
             properly
             to
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             as
             Veins
             ,
             Arteries
             ,
             Ureters
             ,
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             and
             the
             Piss-bladder
             ,
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             the
             Guts
             ,
             the
             Stones
             .
          
           
             The
             term
             Meninx
             is
             properly
             given
             and
             peculiarly
             to
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             Now
             a
             Membrane
             is
             a
             similar
             part
             broad
             ,
             plane
             ,
             white
             ,
             
             and
             which
             may
             be
             stretched
             ,
             made
             by
             a
             proper
             Membrane-making
             faculty
             ,
             of
             clammy
             and
             watery
             Seed
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             it
             might
             by
             cloathing
             defend
             the
             Parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Form
             thereof
             is
             the
             equality
             of
             its
             Surface
             ,
             Thinness
             ,
             and
             Lightness
             (
             least
             it
             should
             burden
             )
             compactness
             and
             strength
             that
             it
             might
             be
             widened
             and
             stretched
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             1.
             
             To
             cloath
             and
             defend
             the
             Parts
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             hardness
             and
             compactness
             ;
             
             and
             to
             be
             the
             Instrument
             of
             feeling
             :
             For
             the
             Parts
             feel
             by
             help
             of
             the
             Membranes
             .
             And
             so
             great
             is
             the
             necessity
             of
             Membranes
             ,
             that
             Nature
             hath
             covered
             every
             Part
             with
             a
             Membrane
             .
             2.
             
             To
             strengthen
             the
             parts
             .
             3.
             
             To
             defend
             the
             parts
             from
             the
             injury
             of
             the
             Cold
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             the
             Natural
             Heat
             from
             exhaling
             .
             4.
             
             To
             joyn
             parts
             with
             parts
             .
             So
             the
             Mesentery
             knits
             the
             Guts
             to
             the
             Back
             .
             5.
             
             To
             shut
             the
             mouths
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             least
             the
             Humors
             should
             flow
             out
             ,
             or
             flow
             back
             :
             As
             in
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             where
             the
             Ureters
             are
             implanted
             ,
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             the
             Valves
             .
          
           
             Now
             a
             Membrane
             is
             thicker
             or
             thinner
             .
             
          
           
             The
             thin
             Membrane
             differs
             in
             thinness
             .
             For
             the
             Periostium
             of
             the
             Ribs
             is
             thinner
             then
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             the
             Periostium
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             is
             thinner
             then
             the
             Pericraneum
             ;
             the
             
               pia
               mater
            
             is
             thinner
             then
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             .
          
           
             The
             
               thick
               Membrane
            
             is
             the
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             every
             where
             alike
             thick
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             thicker
             in
             the
             Neck
             then
             other
             places
             .
             And
             now
             let
             us
             speak
             of
             the
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             ,
             or
             fleshy
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Panniculus
               carnosus
            
             or
             Membrana
             
             carnosa
             is
             by
             some
             termed
             a
             membranous
             Muscle
             ,
             by
             others
             a
             Nervie
             Coat
             ,
             a
             fattie
             Coat
             ,
             &c.
             
             It
             is
             termed
             fleshy
             ,
             because
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             as
             about
             the
             Forehead
             ,
             the
             compass
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             the
             Ears
             ,
             it
             turns
             to
             a
             musculous
             flesh
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             Creatures
             as
             by
             the
             help
             hereof
             can
             move
             their
             whole
             Skin
             ,
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             Muscle
             :
             It
             is
             endued
             with
             such
             fleshy
             Fibers
             ,
             especially
             in
             their
             Necks
             ,
             by
             the
             motion
             whereof
             they
             drive
             away
             flies
             .
             But
             in
             Man
             ,
             save
             in
             his
             Forehead
             ,
             it
             is
             immoveable
             ;
             only
             Vesalius
             and
             Valverda
             report
             that
             there
             were
             some
             men
             who
             could
             move
             the
             Skin
             on
             their
             Chest
             and
             Back
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             parts
             ,
             just
             as
             oxen
             do
             .
             In
             whom
             doubtless
             this
             Membrane
             was
             made
             of
             the
             same
             constitution
             ,
             which
             it
             hath
             in
             Brutes
             .
             Moreover
             in
             new-born
             Children
             ,
             it
             resembles
             flesh
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             plenty
             of
             blood
             ;
             in
             grown
             persons
             it
             is
             like
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             continually
             being
             dried
             .
             In
             a
             Mans
             Body
             ,
             if
             exact
             Separation
             be
             made
             ,
             it
             will
             appear
             to
             consist
             of
             four
             distinct
             Membranes
             .
             Spigelius
             and
             others
             do
             take
             those
             membranous
             Fibers
             ,
             which
             are
             every
             where
             interwoven
             among
             the
             Fat
             ,
             to
             be
             
               Panniculus
               carnosus
            
             ,
             or
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             1.
             
             To
             defend
             the
             neighboring
             
             Parts
             ,
             yea
             ,
             and
             to
             cover
             and
             defend
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             situate
             all
             over
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             keep
             in
             the
             Fat
             ,
             that
             it
             flow
             not
             out
             ,
             or
             melt
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             continual
             motion
             of
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             support
             those
             Vessels
             which
             are
             carried
             into
             the
             Skin
             (
             which
             go
             between
             
             the
             Skin
             and
             this
             Membrane
             )
             for
             it
             is
             
               knit
               unto
               the
               Skin
            
             by
             very
             many
             Veins
             ,
             some
             fewer
             Arteries
             ,
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             membranous
             Fibers
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             Membranes
             under
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             by
             the
             smaller
             Fibers
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             false
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Fat
             is
             consumed
             by
             fasting
             ,
             the
             Skin
             sticks
             to
             the
             Muscles
             no
             otherwise
             ,
             then
             a
             Ball
             to
             a
             peice
             of
             cloth
             wherewith
             it
             is
             covered
             .
             It
             sticks
             most
             
             firmly
             to
             the
             Back
             ,
             in
             fashion
             of
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             said
             to
             arise
             from
             thence
             .
             In
             the
             former
             part
             of
             a
             Mans
             Neck
             and
             his
             Forehead
             ,
             it
             can
             hardly
             be
             separated
             from
             the
             Skin
             and
             the
             
               Musculus
               latus
            
             ;
             it
             sticks
             so
             close
             ,
             and
             is
             thought
             to
             constitute
             the
             
               Musculus
               latus
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             thereof
             is
             slippery
             ,
             there
             where
             it
             touches
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             that
             clammy
             Humor
             ,
             which
             is
             wont
             to
             be
             daubed
             upon
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             least
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Muscles
             should
             be
             hindred
             .
             It
             is
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ;
             and
             therefore
             if
             it
             be
             twitched
             by
             a
             sharp
             Humor
             ,
             it
             causes
             shivering
             and
             shaking
             ,
             as
             by
             Choler
             in
             Agues
             .
          
           
             
               The
               proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Muscles
               ,
            
             
             which
             some
             will
             have
             to
             spring
             from
             the
             Pericranium
             or
             Periostium
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             nervous
             Fibers
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             thin
             ,
             and
             is
             knit
             unto
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             by
             most
             thin
             filaments
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             1.
             
             To
             cloath
             the
             Muscle
             
             and
             separate
             them
             one
             from
             anothe●
             2.
             
             To
             impart
             unto
             them
             the
             Sense
             of
             〈…〉
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             A
             Muscle
             is
             termed
             in
             Greek
             Mus
             a
             Mouse
             ,
             because
             it
             resembles
             a
             flaid
             Mouse
             ;
             and
             the
             Latins
             cal
             it
             Lacertus
             a
             Lizard
             ,
             from
             its
             similitude
             with
             that
             Creature
             :
             Howbeit
             we
             cannot
             allot
             one
             certain
             figure
             to
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             variety
             .
          
           
             A
             Muscle
             is
             an
             Organical
             Part
             ,
             the
             Instrument
             of
             voluntary
             motion
             .
             For
             
             only
             this
             part
             can
             receive
             the
             Iuflux
             of
             the
             motive
             faculty
             .
             Helmont
             allowes
             the
             muscles
             a
             life
             peculiar
             to
             themselves
             ,
             which
             continues
             for
             a
             while
             ,
             even
             after
             death
             ,
             as
             the
             convulsive
             motion
             in
             the
             Falling-sickness
             which
             continues
             involuntarily
             .
             Which
             nevertheless
             does
             more
             truly
             arise
             ,
             from
             the
             retraction
             and
             driness
             of
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             defect
             of
             Spirits
             .
             Also
             the
             same
             man
             is
             in
             an
             error
             in
             conceiving
             that
             new
             fibres
             do
             arise
             in
             the
             muscles
             ,
             and
             cause
             the
             Palsie
             .
             No
             man
             ever
             saw
             them
             ,
             nor
             can
             they
             be
             bred
             anew
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             Spermatick
             parts
             .
             The
             Palsie
             ought
             rather
             to
             be
             referred
             to
             a
             defect
             of
             some
             fibres
             .
          
           
             A
             muscle
             is
             an
             Organical
             part
             ,
             because
             it
             consists
             1.
             
             Of
             flesh
             .
             2.
             
             Of
             
             a
             tendinous
             part
             (
             and
             these
             are
             the
             two
             parts
             of
             a
             muscle
             ,
             which
             perform
             the
             Action
             )
             3.
             
             Of
             Veins
             to
             carry
             back
             the
             Nutriment
             .
             4.
             
             Of
             Arteries
             preserving
             the
             inbred
             Heat
             ,
             and
             bringing
             the
             Nourishment
             to
             the
             part
             .
             5.
             
             Of
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             contribute
             sense
             and
             especially
             motion
             .
             For
             the
             Brain
             sends
             the
             motive
             faculty
             through
             the
             Nerves
             into
             the
             Muscles
             .
             6.
             
             Of
             Membranes
             which
             encompass
             and
             keep
             the
             muscles
             together
             .
             7.
             
             Of
             Fat
             which
             moistens
             them
             ,
             and
             hinders
             them
             from
             being
             dried
             by
             over
             much
             motion
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             are
             most
             straitly
             conjoyned
             one
             with
             
             another
             :
             Yet
             sometimes
             they
             gape
             ,
             and
             are
             at
             some
             distance
             ,
             when
             Wind
             ,
             wheyish
             Humor
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             matter
             gets
             between
             them
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             bastard
             Pleurisie
             ,
             and
             concerning
             a
             Soldier
             whipt
             by
             the
             Turks
             .
             Veslingus
             told
             me
             that
             his
             muscles
             were
             so
             widened
             and
             separated
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             bent
             his
             body
             but
             a
             little
             ,
             every
             muscle
             would
             bear
             it self
             out
             from
             its
             Natural
             situation
             ,
             bunching
             out
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             and
             swelling
             .
          
           
             We
             divide
             the
             Muscles
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             a
             fleshy
             part
             ,
             and
             a
             tendinous
             part
             .
             
          
           
             Again
             ,
             we
             make
             the
             tendinous
             part
             to
             be
             either
             united
             ,
             or
             disgregated
             ,
             and
             severed
             .
          
           
             United
             ,
             where
             the
             whole
             tendinous
             part
             appears
             ,
             white
             and
             hard
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             beginning
             ,
             end
             ,
             or
             middle
             ;
             or
             in
             all
             these
             parts
             .
          
           
             Contrariwise
             it
             is
             disgregated
             or
             severed
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             many
             small
             fibres
             ,
             scarce
             discernable
             to
             the
             sight
             ,
             being
             compassed
             about
             with
             flesh
             ▪
             which
             tendinous
             fibers
             may
             notwithstanding
             be
             discerned
             among
             the
             fleshy
             ones
             ,
             in
             boyled
             Hogs-flesh
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             flesh
             of
             a
             Turkey-cock
             ,
             &c.
             
             So
             in
             some
             Muscles
             ,
             especially
             〈…〉
             of
             the
             Thighs
             of
             a
             Turkey-cock
             ,
             the
             tendinous
             〈…〉
             appear
             whole
             and
             united
             from
             the
             beginning
             to
             〈…〉
             .
             So
             in
             a
             man
             ,
             somtimes
             the
             Tendon
             descends
             〈…〉
             after
             it
             s
             Original
             ,
             mixe●
             with
             flesh
             .
             Somtimes
             the
             tendinous
             part
             appears
             ,
             united
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             and
             severed
             in
             the
             beginning
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             muscle
             Deltoides
             ;
             somtimes
             it
             is
             tendinous
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             not
             at
             all
             .
          
           
             With
             Aquapendent
             we
             define
             a
             
             Tendon
             to
             be
             a
             Body
             continued
             from
             the
             beginning
             to
             the
             end
             of
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             a
             body
             of
             a
             peculiar
             Nature
             ,
             cold
             and
             dry
             ,
             made
             
             of
             Seed
             ,
             as
             the
             principle
             of
             its
             Generation
             :
             But
             the
             beginning
             of
             its
             dispensation
             is
             a
             bone
             ,
             for
             it
             springs
             from
             a
             bone
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             or
             implanted
             into
             a
             bone
             .
             Yet
             some
             Muscles
             arise
             from
             Gristles
             ,
             and
             some
             from
             Tendons
             ,
             and
             are
             implanted
             into
             them
             .
             And
             
             it
             is
             rightly
             termed
             Tendo
             ,
             from
             stretching
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             bent
             and
             stretched
             like
             the
             string
             of
             a
             bow
             .
          
           
             A
             Muscle
             is
             otherwise
             divided
             into
             the
             
               Head
               ,
               middle
            
             ,
             and
             End.
             
          
           
             The
             
               Reginning
               and
               Head
               of
               a
               Muscle
               ,
            
             
             when
             it
             is
             tendinous
             ,
             is
             by
             Galen
             and
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             called
             Ligamentum
             ,
             which
             they
             say
             is
             void
             of
             Sense
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             less
             then
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             or
             the
             end
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             beginning
             in
             a
             great
             part
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             tendinous
             ,
             seldom
             
             fleshy
             .
             And
             to
             speak
             the
             very
             truth
             ,
             the
             beginning
             may
             as
             well
             be
             termed
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             as
             the
             end
             ;
             seeing
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             the
             Beginning
             ,
             such
             is
             the
             End
             ,
             in
             Substance
             ,
             in
             Thinness
             ,
             Lightsomness
             ,
             Whiteness
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Now
             every
             Muscle
             is
             said
             to
             move
             towards
             its
             beginning
             ,
             
             and
             every
             Muscle
             hath
             a
             Nerve
             ,
             which
             is
             inserted
             either
             into
             the
             Head
             ,
             or
             about
             the
             middle
             (
             and
             in
             some
             through
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             muscle
             ,
             in
             others
             through
             the
             Substance
             )
             so
             that
             where
             the
             Nerve
             is
             implanted
             ,
             there
             is
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Muscle
             :
             Which
             Galen
             laies
             down
             as
             
             a
             sure
             Rule
             ,
             and
             saith
             ;
             that
             if
             the
             Nerve
             be
             implanted
             into
             the
             Tayl
             ,
             there
             is
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             muscle
             .
             But
             
             
               Johannes
               Walaeus
            
             an
             excellent
             learned
             Physitian
             ,
             likes
             not
             this
             Rule
             ,
             and
             conceives
             that
             it
             is
             all
             one
             ,
             whether
             the
             Nerve
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             beginning
             ,
             the
             middle
             ,
             or
             the
             end
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             that
             Rule
             renders
             the
             motions
             of
             many
             muscles
             obscure
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             it
             holds
             not
             true
             in
             the
             Pectoral
             muscle
             ,
             nor
             somtimes
             in
             other
             muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             and
             Belly
             .
             3.
             
             Because
             that
             Rule
             is
             not
             founded
             upon
             any
             reason
             ,
             for
             whether
             the
             Nerve
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             muscle
             ,
             or
             into
             any
             other
             part
             thereof
             ,
             the
             Spirits
             flowing
             in
             by
             the
             Nerve
             ,
             may
             equally
             move
             the
             muscle
             :
             As
             we
             see
             in
             Wind-Instruments
             ,
             the
             Air
             is
             let
             in
             somtimes
             above
             ,
             somtimes
             beneath
             ,
             one
             way
             as
             conveniently
             as
             another
             .
             4.
             
             And
             whereas
             that
             Rule
             is
             oftentimes
             found
             true
             ,
             it
             happens
             by
             accident
             ,
             because
             mostmuscles
             are
             moved
             upward
             ,
             &
             because
             the
             Nerves
             descend
             from
             above
             ,
             and
             therefore
             could
             not
             be
             more
             safely
             implanted
             any
             where
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             muscles
             .
             And
             that
             which
             Riolanus
             objects
             against
             
             Walaeus
             ,
             touching
             the
             Contorsion
             or
             Wreathing
             of
             the
             recurrent
             Nerve
             ,
             is
             nothing
             .
             For
             the
             Nerves
             run
             back
             ,
             to
             avoid
             confusion
             ,
             otherwise
             ,
             if
             Nature
             chiefly
             intended
             the
             Insertion
             into
             the
             Heads
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             she
             might
             
             have
             carried
             them
             right
             out
             into
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             as
             she
             doth
             other
             Nerves
             of
             the
             sixt
             Pair
             .
             Some
             Muscles
             receive
             two
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             as
             the
             Midrif
             ;
             some
             five
             ,
             as
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Middle
               of
               the
               Muscle
            
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             belly
             or
             body
             ,
             doth
             for
             the
             
             most
             part
             swell
             ,
             and
             is
             fleshy
             ;
             some
             few
             have
             a
             tendon
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             as
             the
             Musculus
             Digastricus
             which
             opens
             the
             nether
             Jaw
             ,
             and
             the
             second
             Pair
             belonging
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Hyoïdes
            
             .
          
           
             
               The
               end
               or
               taile
               of
               a
               Muscle
               ,
            
             is
             by
             some
             called
             
               Tendo
               ▪
            
             by
             others
             Chorda
             ,
             and
             Aponeurosis
             .
             
             And
             the
             end
             is
             somtimes
             round
             ,
             somtimes
             broad
             ,
             somtimes
             long
             ,
             other
             whiles
             short
             ;
             somtimes
             one
             ,
             otherwhiles
             more
             then
             one
             .
             Now
             this
             end
             ,
             or
             tendon
             ,
             is
             commonly
             conceived
             to
             be
             made
             up
             of
             a
             Concourse
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             Ligaments
             ,
             and
             very
             smal
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             by
             little
             and
             little
             grow
             into
             one
             Body
             .
             For
             they
             will
             have
             a
             Nerve
             ,
             when
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             place
             of
             a
             Muscle
             to
             be
             divided
             into
             divers
             slips
             ,
             which
             are
             met
             by
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             cleft
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             Consequently
             they
             Determine
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Tendon
             hath
             the
             sense
             of
             Feeling
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             
             Head
             ,
             which
             they
             account
             void
             of
             sense
             and
             Motion
             .
             But
             this
             is
             false
             ;
             because
             the
             tendinous
             head
             of
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             prickt
             ,
             breeds
             Convulsions
             and
             cruel
             Symptomes
             ,
             just
             as
             if
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Muscle
             were
             prickt
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             beginning
             of
             a
             Muscle
             hath
             motion
             ,
             and
             therefore
             sense
             .
             It
             hath
             motion
             ,
             because
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             even
             in
             its
             
             Head
             ,
             is
             contracted
             and
             expanded
             ,
             especially
             when
             it
             is
             fleshy
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             They
             say
             also
             that
             the
             End
             is
             thicker
             then
             the
             Head
             :
             which
             notwithstanding
             
             is
             somtimes
             true
             and
             somtimes
             false
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Musculous
             Biceps
             ,
             and
             others
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             They
             will
             have
             the
             Tendon
             to
             be
             softer
             then
             the
             Ligament
             (
             as
             they
             call
             it
             )
             or
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             namely
             so
             much
             softer
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             harder
             then
             a
             Nerve
             ,
             But
             the
             contrary
             is
             true
             ,
             viz.
             that
             the
             Tendon
             is
             harder
             then
             the
             beginning
             ,
             because
             it
             many
             times
             changes
             into
             a
             boney
             and
             gristley
             substance
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             feet
             of
             feathered
             fowle
             ;
             but
             the
             beginning
             doth
             not
             so
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             I
             deny
             that
             Nerves
             enter
             into
             the
             Tendon
             .
             For
             Aquapendent
             
             and
             Riolanus
             have
             observed
             ,
             by
             frequent
             dissections
             ,
             that
             when
             they
             are
             entred
             into
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             they
             are
             spread
             out
             into
             many
             little
             branches
             ,
             which
             go
             into
             a
             certain
             Membranous
             flexure
             ,
             and
             so
             vanish
             or
             end
             ,
             before
             they
             come
             to
             the
             tendon
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             a
             Nerve
             is
             soft
             ,
             how
             therefore
             can
             it
             be
             mingled
             with
             an
             hard
             body
             ?
             Neither
             is
             the
             end
             less
             destitute
             of
             sense
             ,
             then
             the
             Head
             ,
             seeing
             there
             come
             no
             more
             Nerves
             to
             it
             then
             the
             other
             :
             for
             the
             Nerve
             being
             implanted
             ,
             tends
             downwards
             ,
             and
             not
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Action
               of
               a
               Muscle
            
             is
             voluntary
             Motion
             .
             
          
           
             The
             Motion
             of
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             is
             threefold
             ,
             1.
             
             A
             Muscle
             is
             contracted
             within
             it self
             ,
             towards
             the
             Head
             ;
             and
             when
             this
             is
             done
             the
             opposite
             Muscle
             is
             relaxed
             and
             loosned
             .
             2.
             
             Being
             contracted
             ,
             it
             continues
             so
             .
             And
             these
             two
             motions
             are
             primary
             ,
             
               per
               se
            
             and
             not
             accidental
             .
             3.
             
             After
             contraction
             it
             is
             relaxed
             ▪
             which
             motion
             is
             accidental
             ,
             and
             proceeds
             from
             another
             .
             And
             therefore
             Muscles
             are
             alwaies
             set
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             as
             Antagonists
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             work
             of
             this
             Motion
             or
             Action
             ,
             which
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             parts
             ▪
             whereinto
             the
             Muscles
             are
             planted
             ,
             doth
             vary
             according
             to
             the
             Variety
             of
             Parts
             .
             For
             in
             the
             throat
             it
             is
             swallowing
             ;
             in
             the
             Arme
             bending
             and
             stretching
             forth
             ,
             &c.
             
             Yea
             and
             somtimes
             one
             follows
             upon
             another
             .
             For
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             when
             they
             act
             ,
             do
             diversly
             widen
             or
             contract
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             draw
             in
             Air
             ,
             or
             expel
             Fuliginous
             sooty
             vapors
             ,
             and
             cause
             Respiration
             .
          
           
             This
             Motion
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             somtimes
             
             called
             Voluntary
             ,
             somtimes
             Animal
             ,
             to
             distinguish
             it
             from
             the
             natural
             ,
             in
             Brutes
             Spontaneous
             .
             For
             we
             can
             hasten
             ,
             or
             slacken
             ,
             or
             stop
             this
             motion
             as
             we
             please
             .
             And
             in
             this
             motion
             ,
             the
             will
             of
             a
             Man
             or
             the
             Appetite
             of
             Brutes
             ,
             is
             like
             an
             Horseman
             guiding
             and
             putting
             his
             Horse
             forward
             ;
             the
             Nerves
             resemble
             the
             Reins
             of
             the
             Bridle
             ,
             and
             the
             Muscles
             are
             like
             the
             Horse
             .
             There
             are
             some
             singular
             Muscles
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             inside
             of
             the
             Eare
             ,
             the
             Midrif
             ,
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             Eye-lids
             ,
             whose
             motion
             is
             partly
             voluntary
             and
             partly
             natural
             ,
             because
             they
             many
             times
             perform
             their
             actions
             ,
             when
             we
             have
             no
             thought
             nor
             will
             thereto
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             all
             the
             Parts
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             is
             
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             as
             in
             every
             perfect
             Organ
             .
             For
             1.
             
             There
             is
             that
             by
             which
             the
             action
             is
             primarily
             and
             of
             it self
             performed
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             the
             Fibrous
             flesh
             ;
             [
             but
             especially
             according
             to
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             for
             the
             flesh
             being
             wounded
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             the
             motion
             remains
             unhurt
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             not
             so
             ▪
             when
             the
             fibres
             are
             wounded
             ]
             for
             the
             most
             part
             the
             belly
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ▪
             which
             is
             most
             of
             all
             contracted
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             if
             you
             cut
             a
             Muscle
             of
             in
             the
             beginning
             end
             or
             middle
             ,
             in
             a
             living
             person
             ,
             or
             in
             one
             that
             is
             dead
             it
             purses
             it self
             round
             and
             draws
             it self
             into
             it self
             like
             a
             ball
             :
             as
             also
             it
             doth
             ,
             being
             cast
             into
             the
             water
             .
             Riolanus
             counts
             the
             principal
             part
             to
             be
             the
             tendon
             ,
             upon
             which
             the
             Action
             depends
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             a
             peculiar
             substance
             of
             its
             own
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             no
             where
             to
             be
             seen
             out
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
             But
             this
             is
             rather
             true
             of
             fibrous
             flesh
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             all
             Muscles
             ,
             where
             as
             in
             some
             there
             is
             no
             tendon
             .
             2.
             
             That
             without
             which
             it
             cannot
             be
             performed
             as
             the
             Nerve
             :
             For
             if
             the
             Nerves
             be
             hurt
             the
             Muscle
             looses
             its
             motion
             .
             3.
             
             That
             by
             which
             it
             is
             more
             strongly
             and
             better
             performed
             ,
             as
             the
             tendons
             and
             tendinous
             fibres
             .
             Wherefore
             those
             Muscles
             only
             ,
             which
             perform
             continual
             
             and
             strong
             motions
             ,
             have
             received
             united
             and
             Conspicuous
             tendons
             .
             For
             the
             Muscles
             do
             either
             move
             themselves
             only
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             the
             Fundament
             and
             Bladder
             ;
             or
             they
             move
             also
             the
             skin
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Lips
             ,
             forehead
             and
             face
             :
             and
             in
             these
             there
             is
             no
             tendon
             to
             be
             seen
             ▪
             or
             they
             move
             a
             bone
             ,
             and
             these
             for
             the
             most
             part
             evidently
             end
             in
             tendons
             ,
             because
             the
             strong
             motion
             of
             an
             heavy
             member
             did
             require
             as
             much
             :
             or
             they
             move
             some
             other
             light
             thing
             ,
             as
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             tongue
             and
             Larynx
             (
             some
             of
             which
             have
             tendons
             and
             some
             not
             )
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             Stones
             and
             Yard
             .
             4.
             
             Such
             parts
             as
             conserve
             and
             guard
             the
             action
             ,
             as
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             the
             Membranes
             and
             fat
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               VI.
            
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             or
             Abdomen
             .
          
           
             THose
             which
             are
             called
             
               Musculi
               Abdominis
            
             ,
             the
             Belly-muscles
             ,
             do
             cover
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             and
             Galen
             reckons
             as
             many
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             positions
             of
             fibres
             ;
             right
             ,
             transverse
             ,
             oblique
             ,
             and
             these
             either
             upwards
             or
             downwards
             .
             So
             that
             according
             to
             Galen
             there
             are
             eight
             ,
             four
             on
             each
             side
             ;
             two
             oblique
             descendents
             ,
             or
             external
             oblique
             ones
             ,
             two
             oblique
             ascendents
             or
             internal
             ones
             ,
             two
             right
             and
             two
             transverse
             :
             But
             Massa
             found
             out
             two
             others
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             Fallopius
             ,
             which
             they
             term
             Pyramidal
             Muscles
             ,
             others
             Fallopian
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             Sylvius
             calls
             them
             Succenturiatos
             .
             And
             so
             hither
             Anatomists
             have
             made
             these
             muscles
             ten
             in
             number
             .
             Casserius
             accounts
             the
             right
             Muscles
             to
             be
             many
             ,
             and
             that
             rightly
             ;
             seeing
             there
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             four
             of
             them
             on
             each
             side
             ;
             and
             so
             for
             the
             most
             part
             .
          
           
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               Oblique
               Descendent
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Belly
               out
               of
               its
               place
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Muscles
               in
               their
               proper
               places
               .
            
             
               The
               III.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   Obliquely
                   Descendent
                   Muscle
                   on
                   the
                   left
                   side
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   beginning
                   of
                   the
                   Obliquely
                   Descendent
                   Muscle
                   removed
                   out
                   of
                   its
                   Situation
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   right
                   side
                   ,
                   as
                   also
                   the
                   insertion
                   of
                   many
                   Nerves
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   oblique
                   carriage
                   of
                   many
                   fibres
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Right
                   Muscles
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   two
                   are
                   found
                   above
                   the
                   Navil
                   N.
                   and
                   one
                   beneath
                   it
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   fleshy
                   part
                   ,
                   or
                   Belly
                   of
                   the
                   obliquely
                   descendent
                   Muscle
                   ends
                   here
                   ;
                   and
                   here
                   begins
                   the
                   Tendon
                   or
                   Membranous
                   end
                   thereof
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   hole
                   in
                   the
                   Tendon
                   of
                   this
                   Muscle
                   ,
                   through
                   which
                   the
                   Spermatick
                   Vessels
                   ,
                   are
                   sent
                   into
                   the
                   Stones
                   towards
                   the
                   Cod.
                   
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   obliquely
                   ascendent
                   Muscle
                   ,
                   in
                   its
                   situation
                   ,
                   with
                   the
                   Fibres
                   which
                   run
                   to
                   the
                   upward
                   parts
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Fleshy
                   beginning
                   of
                   the
                   obliquely
                   ascendent
                   Muscles
                   ,
                   growing
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   sharpe
                   point
                   of
                   
                     Os
                     Ilij
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Appendix
                   GG
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Spina
                   ,
                   or
                   that
                   same
                   Appendix
                   of
                   the
                   Os
                   Ilium
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Line
                   about
                   which
                   the
                   Tendons
                   of
                   the
                   oblique
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Belly
                   begin
                   ,
                   which
                   Spigelius
                   calls
                   Semilunaris
                   ,
                   the
                   half-moon-shap'd
                   Line
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   streight
                   Muscles
                   transparent
                   under
                   the
                   Tendons
                   of
                   the
                   oblique
                   ascendent
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   Productions
                   of
                   the
                   Peritonaeum
                   ,
                   involving
                   the
                   spermatick
                   Vessels
                   ,
                   and
                   descending
                   into
                   the
                   Cod.
                   
                
                 
                   L.
                   Holes
                   in
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Ascendent
                   and
                   Right
                   Muscles
                   ,
                   to
                   let
                   the
                   spermatsck
                   Vessels
                   through
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   The
                   Kernels
                   of
                   the
                   Groyn
                   laid
                   open
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   Navil
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   The
                   white
                   Line
                   of
                   the
                   Belly
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   The
                   Thighs
                   near
                   the
                   Privities
                   .
                
                 
                   Q.
                   The
                   〈…〉
                   or
                   Yard
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   2.
                   3.
                   
                   ●…erves
                   ,
                   which
                   proceed
                   from
                   under
                   each
                   Rib
                   ,
                   to
                   be
                   distributed
                   into
                   the
                   oblique
                   descendent
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   9.
                   10.
                   11
                   
                   〈…〉
                   ●e
                   four
                   lower
                   Ribs
                   .
                
                 
                   a
                   a
                   a.
                   The
                   〈…〉
                   of
                   the
                   oblique
                   ascendent
                   Muscle
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               10
               :
            
          
           
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               are
               shown
               the
               right
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Belly
               ,
               with
               their
               Inscriptions
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Epigastric
               and
               Mammary
               Vessels
               ,
               which
               are
               conspicuous
               from
               their
               inner
               side
               .
               Also
               the
               transverse
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Belly
               ,
               separated
               about
               its
               beginning
               ,
               and
               the
               Pyramidal
               Muscles
               in
               their
               Situation
               .
            
             
               The
               IV.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     transversal
                     or
                     overthwart
                     Muscle
                     ,
                     made
                     loose
                     about
                     its
                     beginning
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   b
                   b
                   b.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     beginning
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   c
                   c.
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     Tendon
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Muscle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   
                     Its
                     beginning
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   f
                   f
                   f.
                   
                     Nervous
                     Inscriptions
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   g.
                   
                     The
                     End.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     back-side
                     of
                     the
                     other
                     right
                     Muscle
                     ,
                     wherein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Shews
                     the
                     Dug
                     Vein
                     and
                     Artery
                     descending
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   k
                   k.
                   
                     The
                     Epigastry
                     Vein
                     and
                     Artery
                     descending
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   l
                   l.
                   
                     The
                     Concourse
                     or
                     Anastomosis
                     of
                     the
                     Veins
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Peritonaeum
                     freed
                     from
                     the
                     Muscles
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NNN
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Pyramidal
                     Muscles
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     productions
                     of
                     the
                     Peritonaeum
                     descending
                     into
                     the
                     Cod.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               .
               11
               :
            
          
           
             there
             are
             
               sixteen
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Belly
            
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             at
             least
             and
             
               seldomer
               fourteen
            
             ,
             when
             there
             are
             only
             three
             right
             Muscles
             on
             either
             side
             ;
             
               somtimes
               eighteen
            
             ,
             when
             there
             are
             five
             
               right
               ones
            
             found
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             .
             Fontanus
             found
             them
             all
             ,
             folded
             and
             wrapped
             up
             in
             an
             Embryo
             or
             imperfect
             birth
             .
          
           
             
               The
               first
               Pair
               obliquely
               descendent
            
             ,
             [
             or
             the
             external
             ]
             so
             called
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             descend
             obliquely
             from
             the
             upper
             to
             the
             lower
             part
             ;
             covers
             all
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             on
             its
             own
             side
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             very
             great
             and
             broad
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             original
             is
             in
             the
             breast
             ,
             from
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             sixt
             ,
             seventh
             and
             eight
             
             Ribs
             ,
             before
             they
             end
             in
             Gristles
             ;
             and
             it
             arises
             from
             sundry
             triangular
             beginnings
             ,
             or
             spires
             ,
             [
             near
             the
             great
             sawshap'd
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Brest
             ]
             which
             afterward
             grow
             into
             one
             .
             And
             to
             every
             triangular
             spire
             ,
             from
             the
             spaces
             between
             its
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             Nerve
             is
             carryed
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             it
             arises
             also
             [
             a
             smal
             space
             being
             interposed
             ]
             from
             the
             point
             of
             the
             transverse
             processes
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loyns
             .
             So
             largly
             is
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             spread
             out
             ,
             namely
             from
             the
             sixt
             Rib
             to
             the
             lowest
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Loyns
             .
          
           
             It
             ends
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             where
             a
             white
             line
             appears
             ,
             and
             it
             ends
             into
             
             a
             large
             Tendon
             ,
             an
             infinite
             company
             of
             oblique
             Fibres
             running
             together
             in
             that
             place
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             
               white
               Line
            
             ,
             which
             is
             somtimes
             
             fringed
             with
             fat
             ,
             is
             the
             meeting
             together
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             saving
             those
             of
             the
             right
             muscles
             .
             For
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             oblique
             muscles
             are
             united
             .
             and
             do
             so
             meet
             form
             both
             parts
             ,
             that
             they
             form
             as
             it
             were
             a
             coat
             which
             covers
             the
             Belly
             ,
             or
             as
             if
             it
             were
             but
             one
             Tendon
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             white
             ,
             because
             void
             of
             flesh
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             
               Mucronata
               Cartilago
            
             or
             pointed
             Gristle
             which
             is
             seated
             at
             the
             Sharebone
             :
             and
             it
             is
             narrower
             below
             the
             Navil
             then
             above
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             muscles
             obliquely
             descendent
             are
             bored
             through
             .
             1.
             
             At
             the
             Navil
             .
             2.
             
             At
             the
             Groyn
             in
             men
             ,
             that
             the
             seed
             Vessels
             may
             pass
             through
             ;
             in
             Women
             ,
             to
             give
             passage
             to
             the
             two
             round
             and
             Nervy
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             which
             are
             terminated
             in
             the
             Privity
             near
             the
             Nymphes
             .
          
           
           
             Now
             as
             touching
             the
             Original
             
             of
             the
             obliquely-descending
             muscle
             ,
             Aquapendant
             did
             long
             since
             hatch
             a
             contrary
             Opinion
             ,
             which
             Laurentius
             did
             afterwards
             propound
             as
             new
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             own
             Invention
             ,
             reprehending
             all
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             who
             were
             the
             said
             miserably
             deceived
             .
             Now
             this
             contrary
             Opinion
             will
             have
             these
             muscles
             to
             be
             rather
             termed
             external
             Ascendents
             ,
             so
             that
             their
             Original
             should
             be
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
               ,
               Os
               Ilij
            
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Loins
             :
             And
             the
             end
             .
             in
             the
             Ribs
             .
             They
             prove
             it
             thus
             :
          
           
             1.
             
             Because
             a
             muscle
             ought
             to
             arise
             from
             some
             quiet
             and
             immoveable
             
             part
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             the
             Share-bone
             compared
             to
             the
             Ribs
             .
             I
             answer
             ,
             the
             Ribs
             are
             quiet
             and
             still
             ,
             being
             compared
             to
             the
             white
             Line
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             They
             say
             a
             muscle
             draws
             towards
             its
             beginning
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             obliquedescendent
             
             serves
             for
             Respiration
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Ribs
             towards
             the
             Share
             .
             I
             answer
             ,
             this
             muscle
             doth
             not
             primarily
             
             serve
             for
             Respiration
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             shew
             hereafter
             .
             
          
           
             Now
             our
             Opinion
             ,
             which
             is
             Galens
             ,
             is
             proved
             .
             1.
             
             By
             the
             Ingress
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             is
             about
             the
             beginning
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             carriage
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             go
             here
             from
             the
             beginning
             to
             the
             white
             Line
             .
             3.
             
             All
             confess
             that
             there
             is
             a
             Concourse
             of
             Tendons
             ,
             yea
             of
             those
             which
             obliquely
             descend
             ,
             into
             the
             white
             Line
             .
             Therefore
             the
             End
             is
             there
             .
             4.
             It
          
           
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               Obliquely-ascendent
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Belly
               ,
               loosned
               from
               its
               Originals
               ;
               the
               Transverse
               Muscle
               ,
               and
               the
               she
               one
               straight
               Muscle
               in
               its
               Situation
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               with
               its
               Pyramidals
               removed
               from
               its
               place
               .
            
             
               The
               V.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A
                   
                     The
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Abdomen
                     obliquely
                     ascending
                     ,
                     separated
                     about
                     the
                     beginning
                     ;
                     wherein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   bbb
                   .
                   
                     Is
                     the
                     Beginning
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     that
                     tendon
                     wch
                     covers
                     the
                     right
                     Muscle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DDDD
                   .
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Muscle
                     in
                     its
                     Situation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Muscles
                     drawn
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   f.
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     End
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Muscle
                     ,
                     cleaving
                     to
                     the
                     Share-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   gh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Epigastrick
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     which
                     spring
                     from
                     the
                     Ramus
                     Iliacus
                     ,
                     of
                     which
                  
                   g
                   
                     denotes
                     the
                     Vein
                  
                   h
                   
                     the
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ●
                   .
                   
                     The
                     End
                     of
                     these
                     Vessels
                     which
                     are
                     joyned
                     with
                     the
                     Mammaria
                     Descending
                     from
                     above
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Pyramidal
                     Muscles
                     removed
                     from
                     their
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   l.
                   
                     The
                     Tendon
                     of
                     those
                     Muscles
                     which
                     reaches
                     to
                     the
                     Navil
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     transverse
                     Muscle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     Its
                     first
                     Original
                     which
                     is
                     Nervous
                     &
                     membranous
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OOO
                   .
                   
                     Its
                     second
                     fleshy
                     Beginning
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ppp
                   .
                   
                     It
                     s
                     Tendon
                     which
                     grows
                     to
                     the
                     Peritonaeum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   qqq
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Nerves
                     which
                     come
                     from
                     the
                     marrow
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                     to
                     this
                     Muscle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   rrrrr
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Boughs
                     of
                     the
                     Vein
                     and
                     Artery
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Muscles
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     sent
                     unto
                     the
                     transverse
                     Muscle
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   SSSS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ribs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   TTT
                   
                     The
                     Intercostal
                     Muscles
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     Sternum
                     or
                     Breast-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   XX.
                   
                     T
                     Skin
                     separated
                     and
                     hanging
                     down
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Y.
                   
                     The
                     Spine
                     ,
                     or
                     sharp
                     point
                     of
                     Os
                     Ilij
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Z.
                   
                     Certain
                     Muscles
                     which
                     grow
                     to
                     the
                     Os
                     Ilij
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               .
               12
            
          
           
           
             is
             proved
             by
             the
             common
             Action
             ,
             of
             which
             beneath
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             [
             according
             to
             Riolanus
             ,
             who
             saith
             that
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             or
             Share-bone
             being
             moveable
             ,
             doth
             move
             this
             boney
             structure
             forwards
             ,
             the
             Chest
             resting
             ,
             or
             being
             lightly
             moved
             ,
             in
             the
             Conjugal
             Embracement
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             going
             of
             such
             as
             want
             Leggs
             and
             Thighs
             .
             But
             we
             daily
             observe
             the
             Belly
             to
             be
             moved
             ,
             in
             single
             persons
             that
             are
             chast
             ,
             nor
             doth
             Nature
             frame
             Parts
             to
             supply
             unexpected
             defects
             of
             muscles
             ,
             but
             for
             Natural
             and
             Ordinary
             Actions
             .
             Spigelius
             suspects
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             same
             moveable
             beginning
             ,
             that
             same
             bone
             is
             drawn
             obliquely
             upward
             ,
             and
             enclined
             toward
             the
             Chest
             ,
             by
             the
             help
             of
             the
             muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               pare
            
             is
             the
             OBLIQUELY
             ASCENDENT
             [
             or
             internal
             ]
             having
             Fibres
             contrarily
             situated
             :
             It
             is
             situated
             next
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             triangular
             Figure
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Original
             is
             fleshy
             ,
             from
             the
             Rib
             of
             
               Os
               Ilij
            
             :
             but
             membranous
             ,
             both
             
             from
             the
             transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             from
             which
             it
             receives
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             sharp
             points
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             It
             grows
             a
             little
             by
             a
             fleshy
             End
             ,
             to
             
             each
             of
             the
             bastard
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             to
             some
             of
             the
             true
             Ribs
             ,
             but
             the
             rest
             its
             End
             turns
             by
             little
             and
             little
             into
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             which
             is
             double
             :
             The
             one
             part
             goes
             upon
             the
             right
             muscles
             ,
             the
             other
             beneath
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             right
             doth
             rest
             as
             it
             were
             in
             a
             sheath
             ,
             but
             near
             the
             white
             Line
             it
             is
             reunited
             ,
             and
             inserted
             thereinto
             .
             Which
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             to
             happen
             only
             above
             the
             Navil
             ,
             and
             not
             beneath
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             pare
             of
             the
             
               right
               Muscles
            
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             right
             fibres
             .
             This
             pare
             is
             commonly
             reckoned
             to
             be
             but
             one
             .
          
           
             Galen
             doth
             rightly
             make
             the
             beginning
             to
             be
             fleshy
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             
             Breast-bone
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             of
             the
             Sword-fashion'd
             Gristle
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Gristles
             of
             the
             four
             bastard
             Ribs
             .
             It
             ends
             in
             a
             Tendon
             at
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
             Others
             contrariwise
             ,
             will
             have
             the
             beginning
             to
             be
             here
             in
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             and
             the
             End
             above
             .
             But
             I
             answer
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             right
             Muscles
             receive
             their
             Nerves
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             ,
             viz.
             one
             branch
             of
             those
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             were
             inserted
             into
             the
             oblique
             descending
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             others
             also
             from
             the
             last
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             first
             pare
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             2.
             
             A
             Muscle
             uses
             not
             to
             have
             a
             tendinous
             beginning
             ,
             and
             a
             fleshy
             End.
             Other
             late
             Anatomists
             will
             have
             the
             right
             Muscles
             to
             have
             two
             beginnings
             and
             two
             ends
             ;
             one
             beginning
             and
             one
             end
             in
             the
             Breast
             ,
             and
             another
             in
             the
             Share-bones
             .
             Who
             are
             for
             this
             Conceit
             of
             theirs
             ,
             beholden
             to
             that
             new
             opinion
             touching
             the
             moveableness
             of
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             speak
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Musculus
               rectus
            
             or
             straight
             muscle
             ,
             hath
             for
             the
             most
             part
             three
             .
             Inscriptions
             
             in
             Persons
             of
             a
             middle
             stature
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             four
             in
             tall
             people
             ,
             whose
             Belly
             is
             long
             .
             But
             according
             to
             Carpus
             and
             Casserius
             ,
             we
             say
             that
             suitable
             to
             the
             multitude
             of
             Inscriptions
             ,
             there
             are
             more
             muscles
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             To
             every
             Joynting
             there
             comes
             a
             Nerve
             .
             2.
             
             If
             it
             were
             but
             one
             ,
             being
             contracted
             into
             itself
             ,
             it
             could
             not
             equally
             compress
             all
             parts
             .
             3.
             
             There
             should
             be
             no
             such
             muscle
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             wherein
             nevertheless
             there
             are
             many
             long
             ones
             ,
             without
             such
             a
             number
             of
             Inscriptions
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             internal
             Surface
             of
             the
             right
             muscles
             ,
             there
             are
             
               two
               Veins
            
             conjoyned
             ,
             with
             as
             many
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             called
             Mammaria
             ,
             arise
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             lying
             beneath
             the
             
             Claves
             ,
             the
             more
             remarkeable
             branch
             whereof
             reaches
             unto
             the
             Duggs
             ,
             and
             runs
             out
             under
             the
             right
             Muscle
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Navil
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             terminated
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             met
             by
             the
             other
             termed
             Epigastrica
             ,
             which
             in
             Women
             springs
             from
             the
             Womb
             ,
             in
             men
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             goes
             upwards
             towards
             the
             upper
             Vein
             ,
             which
             before
             it
             touches
             ,
             it
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             obliterated
             .
             Yet
             these
             two
             Veins
             are
             somtimes
             joyned
             together
             by
             manifest
             Anastomosis
             ,
             touching
             one
             another
             ,
             at
             their
             ends
             .
             Hence
             the
             Consent
             is
             supposed
             to
             arise
             between
             the
             Duggs
             and
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             Belly
             and
             the
             Nostrils
             .
             For
             when
             the
             Nose
             bleeds
             ,
             we
             fix
             Cupping-glasses
             to
             the
             belly
             ,
             and
             the
             Duggs
             of
             Women
             being
             handled
             ,
             it
             in
             cites
             them
             to
             Venery
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Musculi
               recti
            
             receive
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Epigastrica
             Artery
             ,
             and
             Nerves
             which
             
             proceed
             from
             the
             last
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             use
             of
             these
             Muscles
             according
             to
             Riolanus
             ,
             is
             to
             move
             the
             Share-bone
             forward
             in
             Generation
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             already
             confuted
             .
             Spigelius
             will
             have
             them
             to
             draw
             the
             Breast
             to
             the
             
               Ossa
               pubis
            
             or
             share-bones
             ,
             and
             the
             Share-bones
             to
             the
             Breast
             ,
             in
             a
             straight
             motion
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             bend
             the
             Chest
             ;
             whence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             Dogs
             and
             Apes
             ,
             they
             reach
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Jugulum
             ,
             because
             their
             Chest
             did
             require
             very
             much
             bowing
             .
             But
             these
             contrary
             motions
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             holpen
             ,
             with
             those
             incisions
             of
             the
             right
             muscles
             ,
             do
             involve
             a
             difficulty
             .
             Helmont
             suspects
             that
             they
             are
             stretched
             in
             going
             up
             hill
             ,
             and
             that
             from
             thence
             shortness
             of
             breath
             proceeds
             .
             Flud
             saith
             ,
             that
             by
             a
             general
             use
             ,
             they
             make
             the
             Belly
             round
             ,
             and
             compress
             it
             centrally
             ,
             or
             towards
             the
             middle
             point
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fourth
               pare
            
             called
             the
             Pyramidal
             
             Muscles
             ,
             do
             rest
             upon
             the
             lower
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               recti
            
             .
             Nor
             are
             they
             parts
             of
             the
             right
             Muscles
             ,
             as
             Vesalius
             and
             Columbus
             think
             ;
             but
             distinct
             muscles
             ,
             as
             Fallopius
             proves
             with
             reasons
             ,
             which
             are
             partly
             convincing
             ,
             partly
             vain
             .
             But
             that
             they
             are
             peculiar
             muscles
             is
             hence
             apparent
             .
             1
             Because
             they
             are
             cloathed
             with
             a
             peculiar
             membrane
             .
             2.
             
             Their
             Fibres
             are
             different
             from
             those
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               recti
            
             .
          
           
             
               They
               rise
            
             with
             a
             fleshy
             beginning
             ,
             
             not
             very
             broad
             ,
             from
             the
             external
             Share-bone
             ,
             where
             also
             the
             Nerves
             do
             enter
             ;
             and
             the
             farther
             they
             go
             upwards
             ,
             the
             narrower
             they
             grow
             ,
             till
             they
             terminate
             with
             a
             sharp
             point
             ,
             into
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             transverse
             Muscle
             .
             And
             from
             this
             place
             I
             have
             observed
             more
             then
             once
             ,
             a
             small
             and
             round
             Tendon
             produced
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Navil
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             the
             left
             Pyramidal
             Muscle
             to
             be
             lesser
             then
             the
             right
             ,
             and
             when
             there
             is
             but
             one
             ,
             it
             is
             oftner
             left
             then
             right
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Pyramidal
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             
             to
             assist
             the
             right
             muscles
             ,
             in
             compressing
             the
             Parts
             beneath
             .
             Hereupon
             according
             as
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             right
             muscles
             are
             more
             or
             less
             strong
             .
             so
             ,
             sometimes
             the
             Pyramidal
             muscles
             are
             wanting
             (
             though
             rarely
             )
             somtimes
             they
             are
             strong
             ,
             otherwhiles
             weak
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             there
             is
             but
             one
             .
             Bauhine
             saith
             ▪
             If
             they
             are
             absent
             ,
             then
             either
             the
             flesh
             joyned
             to
             the
             Heads
             of
             the
             right
             ones
             [
             which
             I
             have
             often
             observed
             ]
             or
             the
             Fat
             performs
             their
             Office.
             And
             others
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             as
             it
             were
             certain
             Coverings
             of
             the
             right
             muscles
             .
          
           
             Fallopius
             will
             have
             the
             Pyramidal
             〈…〉
             to
             compress
             and
             squeez
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             when
             ●…e
             Water
             ,
             that
             the
             Urin
             may
             be
             forced
             out
             .
             Con●…wise
             Aquapendent
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             that
             they
             raise
             and
             lift
             themselves
             up
             ,
             and
             together
             with
             them
             the
             Abdomen
             and
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             
             that
             the
             parts
             beneath
             them
             ,
             may
             not
             be
             too
             much
             burthened
             .
             Now
             Columbus
             charges
             Fallopius
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             have
             these
             muscles
             serve
             to
             erect
             the
             Yard
             ,
             whereas
             that
             is
             Massa
             his
             Opinion
             [
             whose
             Opinion
             is
             followed
             by
             Flud
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             situation
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ]
             but
             they
             cannot
             serve
             for
             that
             intent
             ,
             because
             they
             reach
             not
             the
             foresaid
             part
             ,
             and
             because
             they
             are
             found
             likewise
             in
             Women
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fifth
               pare
            
             called
             the
             Transverse
             Muscles
             ,
             being
             lowest
             in
             situation
             ,
             do
             
             arise
             from
             a
             certain
             Ligament
             which
             springs
             out
             of
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             and
             covers
             the
             
               Musculus
               sacrolumbus
            
             ,
             also
             from
             the
             lowest
             Rib
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Os
               Ilij
               .
               They
               end
            
             by
             a
             membranous
             Tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             white
             Line
             ,
             and
             do
             stick
             extream
             fast
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             every
             where
             save
             about
             the
             Share
             .
             The
             proper
             Use
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             to
             compress
             the
             Gut
             Colon.
             
          
           
             The
             Action
             of
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             twofold
             .
             〈◊〉
             An
             equable
             
             Retension
             and
             Compression
             of
             the
             Parts
             in
             the
             Belly
             :
             For
             ●…y
             all
             act
             together
             ,
             the
             Midriff
             assisti●…em
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             Fibres
             of
             all
             th●…s
             ,
             do
             meet
             together
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             C●…ing
             as
             they
             are
             thus
             described
             by
             
               Robert
               E●…
            
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Second
             Action
             〈…〉
             vs
             upon
             the
             former
             ,
             viz.
             the
             ●…dance
             of
             
             Excrements
             .
             And
             because
             the
             number
             of
             parts
             to
             be
             compressed
             is
             great
             ,
             as
             the
             Guts
             ,
             Womb
             ,
             Bladder
             ;
             one
             Muscle
             could
             not
             suffice
             ,
             but
             there
             was
             need
             of
             divers
             ,
             acting
             in
             divers
             places
             ,
             according
             to
             divers
             Angels
             :
             Right
             ,
             transverse
             ,
             oblique
             .
             Every
             part
             indeed
             hath
             an
             expulsive
             Power
             ;
             
             but
             those
             parts
             which
             are
             hollow
             ,
             and
             often
             ,
             and
             much
             burthened
             ,
             do
             need
             the
             help
             of
             these
             muscles
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Expulsion
             of
             Excrements
             ,
             of
             Worms
             ,
             of
             Urin
             ,
             of
             a
             Child
             ,
             of
             a
             Mole
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             These
             are
             their
             true
             Actions
             ,
             which
             are
             apparent
             from
             their
             Fabrick
             .
             But
             
             Nature
             somtimes
             abuses
             the
             muscles
             ,
             to
             move
             the
             Chest
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             need
             of
             a
             great
             and
             violent
             Expiration
             ,
             as
             in
             Outcries
             ,
             Coughs
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             .
             For
             then
             they
             do
             not
             a
             little
             compress
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
             They
             are
             of
             an
             hot
             and
             moist
             Temperament
             .
             because
             flesh
             is
             prevalent
             in
             them
             :
             And
             therefore
             they
             
               cherish
               Heat
               and
               Concoction
            
             :
             They
             are
             moderately
             thick
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             defend
             the
             Parts
             ,
             and
             are
             a
             Safeguard
             to
             them
             ,
             even
             when
             they
             rest
             :
             Also
             
               they
               conduce
               to
               the
               Comlyness
               of
               the
               Body
               :
            
             And
             therefore
             extream
             Fat
             ,
             dropsied
             Persons
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             very
             lean
             ,
             &c.
             are
             deformed
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               VII
            
             .
             Touching
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             ALl
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             
             being
             removed
             ,
             the
             Peritonaeum
             comes
             in
             sight
             ,
             being
             spread
             over
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             having
             its
             Name
             
               a
               circumtendendo
            
             ,
             from
             stretchin●…ading
             about
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             drawn
             over
             all
             〈…〉
             ,
             which
             are
             between
             the
             Midriff
             and
             the
             Thighs
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Peritonaeum
             is
             a
             membrane
             which
             doth
             cloath
             the
             Bowels
             of
             the
             lower
             
             Belly
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             membrane
             ,
             and
             that
             sufficiently
             thin
             and
             soft
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             be
             burthensom
             ;
             but
             strong
             and
             compact
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             loosned
             and
             distended
             .
             
               It
               is
               thicker
               in
               Women
               ,
               from
               the
               Navil
               to
               the
               Share
               ,
            
             that
             it
             may
             stretch
             the
             more
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             with
             Child
             ;
             in
             men
             that
             are
             great
             Feeders
             especially
             ,
             it
             is
             thicker
             from
             the
             
               Mucronata
               Cartilago
            
             ,
             to
             the
             Navil
             ,
             Laurentius
             conceives
             for
             the
             Stomachs
             sake
             ,
             which
             notwithstanding
             is
             hardly
             probable
             :
             for
             it
             was
             fit
             the
             lower
             part
             should
             be
             thicker
             ,
             least
             while
             we
             stand
             ,
             it
             should
             become
             slackned
             and
             loosned
             by
             the
             weight
             of
             the
             Bowels
             .
          
           
             Some
             will
             have
             the
             Peritonaeum
             to
             be
             made
             of
             a
             ligamentous
             and
             nervous
             Substance
             ;
             others
             of
             Nerves
             only
             ;
             others
             only
             of
             Ligaments
             ;
             others
             of
             the
             Coats
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             Shape
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             is
             oval
             :
             
             For
             it
             is
             like
             a
             Bladder
             ,
             or
             a
             long-fashioned
             Egg.
             For
             it
             compasses
             all
             the
             lo●●●
             Belly
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             answerable
             ●…unto
             in
             Longitude
             and
             Latitude
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Surface
             is
             inwardly
             smooth
             ,
             and
             
             〈…〉
             were
             daubed
             with
             moisture
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Guts
             which
             it
             toucheth
             ;
             without
             it
             is
             fibrous
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             rough
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             fastned
             with
             the
             mus●…
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Original
             is
             at
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             at
             the
             
             first
             and
             third
             Vertebraes
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             where
             the
             Peritonaeum
             is
             thicker
             ;
             so
             that
             it
             cannot
             in
             that
             place
             be
             separated
             without
             breaking
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             knit
             also
             above
             most
             closely
             to
             
             the
             Diaphragma
             (
             and
             therefore
             when
             it
             is
             inflamed
             ,
             the
             Hypochondria
             are
             drawn
             upwards
             )
             beneath
             to
             the
             Share-bone
             and
             the
             
               Os
               Ilij
            
             ;
             before
             ,
             to
             the
             white
             Line
             and
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             transverse
             muscles
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             in
             al
             places
             double
             (
             and
             Laurentius
             
             with
             Cabrolius
             make
             al
             Membranes
             double
             ,
             even
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             it self
             )
             which
             notwithstanding
             is
             most
             apparent
             upon
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             above
             the
             Navil
             it
             sticks
             so
             close
             ,
             that
             its
             doubleness
             cannot
             be
             ●●seerned
             :
             But
             from
             the
             Navil
             to
             the
             Share
             ,
             it
             is
             manifestly
             divided
             into
             two
             Coats
             ,
             so
             distant
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             capacious
             doubleing
             the
             Bladder
             is
             contained
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             observed
             by
             few
             :
             And
             that
             was
             so
             ordered
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             membrane
             might
             be
             stronger
             there
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             burthened
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             umbelical
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             run
             out
             there
             ,
             may
             be
             carried
             more
             safely
             :
             For
             they
             pass
             through
             the
             Doublings
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             Therefore
             also
             .
          
           
             The
             Peritonaeum
             is
             
               boared
               through
               before
            
             in
             a
             Child
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Womb
             :
             Also
             above
             it
             hath
             holes
             ,
             where
             it
             grows
             to
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Vessels
             .
             Fernelius
             hath
             therefore
             
             done
             ill
             to
             contradict
             Galen
             ,
             in
             denying
             that
             the
             Peritonaeum
             hath
             Holes
             .
             They
             are
             three
             ;
             The
             first
             where
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             passes
             through
             ;
             The
             second
             where
             the
             Stomach
             passes
             ;
             The
             third
             where
             the
             great
             Artery
             and
             the
             Sixt
             pare
             of
             the
             Nerves
             do
             pass
             through
             the
             Midriff
             .
             Beneath
             about
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             and
             Womb
             ,
             and
             the
             Vessels
             which
             pass
             through
             the
             Peritonaeum
             to
             the
             Thighs
             ,
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             and
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             two
             oblong
             Processes
             or
             Productions
             ,
             
             like
             Pipes
             and
             wide
             Channels
             ,
             descending
             in
             men
             ,
             into
             the
             Cod
             ,
             by
             the
             Holes
             of
             the
             Tendo●s
             of
             the
             oblique
             and
             transverse
             muscles
             ,
             in
             which
             productions
             (
             call'd
             by
             the
             Ancients
             Didymi
             )
             the
             Seminary
             Vessels
             descend
             and
             run
             back
             ,
             and
             near
             the
             Stone
             ▪
             These
             productions
             are
             more
             widened
             and
             become
             the
             Coats
             of
             the
             Testicles
             .
          
           
           
             Whereof
             ,
             if
             the
             outer
             Coat
             be
             widened
             ,
             and
             the
             inner
             (
             which
             sticks
             most
             
             exactly
             ,
             save
             by
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             separated
             )
             broken
             ,
             a
             Rupture
             is
             made
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Gut
             or
             Call
             ,
             or
             both
             ,
             slip
             down
             .
          
           
             It
             receives
             Vessels
             from
             the
             neighboring
             Diaphragmatick
             ,
             Mammary
             ,
             and
             
             Epigastrick
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             from
             the
             Seminary
             .
             It
             receives
             small
             Nerves
             ,
             from
             those
             which
             are
             carried
             to
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Peritonaeum
             hath
             the
             Sense
             of
             Feeling
             ,
             contrary
             to
             what
             others
             have
             thought
             before
             Vesalius
             ,
             against
             whom
             Experience
             also
             bears
             witness
             .
          
           
             The
             USE
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             membranes
             in
             general
             .
             1.
             
             To
             
             contain
             the
             parts
             ,
             and
             to
             send
             Connexions
             here
             and
             there
             .
             This
             the
             Peritonaenm
             doth
             most
             of
             all
             :
             for
             it
             covers
             
             all
             the
             Bowels
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             and
             makes
             them
             more
             firm
             ;
             lengthens
             out
             ,
             and
             bestows
             a
             Coat
             upon
             all
             of
             them
             ,
             to
             some
             a
             thinner
             ,
             as
             need
             requires
             ,
             and
             to
             others
             a
             thicker
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             Guts
             ,
             Bladder
             ,
             and
          
           
             
               The
               Peritonaeum
               is
               here
               expressed
               ,
               with
               its
               processes
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               most
               of
               the
               Bowels
               of
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               discover
               themselves
               .
            
             
               The
               VI.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   The
                   four
                   common
                   coverings
                   of
                   the
                   Body
                   dissected
                   Cross-wise
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Belly
                   dissected
                   after
                   the
                   same
                   manner
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Breast-bone
                   or
                   Sternum
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   sword-fashion'd
                   Gristle
                   .
                
                 
                   EEEE
                   .
                   The
                   Peritonaeum
                   covering
                   the
                   whole
                   Cavity
                   of
                   the
                   Lower
                   Belly
                   and
                   going
                   about
                   the
                   same
                   ,
                   under
                   which
                   the
                   Bowels
                   seem
                   to
                   shew
                   themselves
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   liver
                   appearing
                   through
                   the
                   Peritonaeum
                   .
                
                 
                   a.
                   A
                   clift
                   into
                   which
                   the
                   Navil
                   vein
                   L.
                   is
                   inserted
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   An
                   obscure
                   appearance
                   of
                   the
                   stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   figure
                   of
                   the
                   Spleen
                   appearing
                   situate
                   in
                   the
                   left
                   Hypochondrium
                   .
                
                 
                   IIII.
                   The
                   manyfold
                   turnings
                   and
                   windings
                   of
                   the
                   Guts
                   ,
                   which
                   appear
                   obscurely
                   in
                   this
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Navil
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   Navil
                   vein
                   freed
                   from
                   the
                   covering
                   of
                   the
                   Peritonaeum
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   two
                   Navil
                   Arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   Urachus
                   or
                   Piss-pipe
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   Vessels
                   distributed
                   ,
                   partly
                   to
                   the
                   bottom
                   of
                   the
                   stomach
                   ,
                   partly
                   to
                   the
                   Call.
                   
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   Productions
                   of
                   the
                   Peritonaeum
                   ,
                   wherein
                   the
                   preparatory
                   Vessels
                   are
                   contained
                   .
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   stones
                   called
                   Cremasteres
                   or
                   suspensores
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   the
                   right
                   is
                   seen
                   in
                   its
                   own
                   place
                   well
                   near
                   ,
                   but
                   the
                   left
                   hangs
                   separated
                   .
                
                 
                   RR.
                   The
                   stones
                   freed
                   from
                   the
                   Cod.
                   
                
                 
                   S.
                   The
                   Share
                   Bone.
                   
                
                 
                   T.
                   The
                   Prick
                   or
                   Yard
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   The
                   Rise
                   of
                   the
                   Epigastrick
                   Vein
                   .
                
                 
                   X.
                   The
                   Epigastrick
                   Artery
                   ,
                   being
                   a
                   companion
                   to
                   the
                   V●ir
                   ▪
                
                 
                   Y.
                   A
                   certain
                   branch
                   of
                   the
                   Epigastrick
                   Vein
                   ▪
                
                 
                   Z.
                   〈…〉
                   the
                   〈…〉
                
              
            
             
               page
               15.
               
            
          
           
           
             Womb.
             Also
             from
             it
             proceed
             two
             doubled
             members
             ,
             the
             Call
             and
             the
             Mesentery
             .
             This
             also
             ,
             is
             an
             Office
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             that
             Vessels
             which
             are
             to
             be
             carried
             a
             great
             way
             ,
             do
             run
             along
             between
             the
             two
             Coats
             thereof
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             shut
             the
             Orifices
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
             Hence
             the
             Liver
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             covered
             with
             a
             membrane
             ,
             the
             mouths
             of
             its
             Veins
             would
             come
             into
             veiw
             .
             Hence
             also
             those
             parts
             in
             which
             there
             are
             more
             Arteries
             ,
             have
             received
             a
             thicker
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             the
             Spleen
             .
             3.
             
             To
             further
             the
             actions
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ;
             out
             of
             Galen
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Call.
             
          
           
             UNder
             the
             Peritonaeum
             is
             the
             Call
             as
             it
             
             were
             a
             Covering
             ,
             others
             name
             it
             
               Zirbus
               ,
               Rete
            
             or
             Reticulum
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             stragling
             course
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ;
             the
             Greeks
             term
             it
             Epiploon
             the
             Top-swimmer
             ,
             because
             it
             floates
             and
             swims
             as
             it
             were
             upon
             the
             Guts
             .
             For
             in
             all
             Living-Creatures
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             at
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             spred
             upon
             the
             Guts
             ,
             whose
             turnings
             it
             involves
             and
             enters
             into
             .
             In
             some
             it
             ceases
             at
             the
             Navil
             ,
             in
             others
             it
             reaches
             below
             the
             Navil
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             where
             it
             is
             inferted
             :
             [
             Somtimes
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             Womb
             with
             a
             strait
             
             Connexion
             ,
             as
             the
             rarely
             learned
             
               Marcus
               Aurelius
               Severinus
            
             found
             at
             Naples
             in
             a
             Shee-Fool
             ;
             and
             in
             another
             it
             was
             knit
             to
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             ▪
             in
             Venice
             when
             I
             was
             there
             ]
             and
             when
             it
             comes
             between
             the
             bottome
             of
             the
             Bladder
             and
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             Womb
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             compressed
             ,
             and
             Women
             thereby
             made
             
             barren
             .
             In
             men
             an
             Epiplocele
             is
             caused
             ,
             when
             it
             descends
             into
             the
             Cod.
             And
             because
             it
             is
             extended
             rather
             unto
             the
             left
             then
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             therefore
             an
             Epiplocele
             of
             the
             left
             side
             is
             more
             frequent
             .
             Epiplocele
             is
             a
             Rupture
             in
             which
             the
             Call
             falls
             into
             the
             God.
             
          
           
             Many
             times
             the
             Guts
             being
             left
             naked
             ,
             
             the
             Call
             lies
             lurking
             under
             the
             Liver
             ,
             which
             happens
             not
             from
             strangulation
             ,
          
           
             
               This
               TABLE
               expresses
               to
               the
               Life
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               Guts
               and
               Call
               and
               the
               Navil
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               The
               VII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     coverings
                     of
                     the
                     Belly
                     dissected
                     ,
                     and
                     turned
                     up
                     every
                     way
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     inner
                     parts
                     may
                     come
                     into
                     view
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Cartilago
                     Mucronata
                     ,
                     or
                     Sword-like
                     Gristle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     bunching
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     stomach
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Colon
                     seated
                     under
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FFFF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Call
                     ,
                     fastned
                     to
                     the
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Navil
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Navil-Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Navil-Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Urachus
                     or
                     Piss-pipe
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     Bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   aaa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Gastrepiploick
                     or
                     Belly-Call
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     sprinkled
                     through
                     the
                     Call
                     and
                     stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Guts
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               16
            
          
           
             seeing
             in
             strangled
             persons
             ,
             t
             is
             found
             in
             its
             right
             place
             ,
             and
             in
             persons
             not
             strangled
             ,
             we
             find
             it
             drawn
             back
             ;
             but
             if
             we
             may
             credit
             Spigelius
             ,
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             Guts
             being
             puffed
             up
             with
             wind
             .
             In
             Hydropical
             persons
             I
             have
             found
             it
             quite
             putrified
             .
             
               C.
               Stephanus
            
             unjustly
             denies
             it
             to
             hunters
             .
          
           
             Infants
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Riolanus
             
             are
             distitute
             of
             a
             Call
             over
             their
             Guts
             ,
             which
             as
             they
             grow
             is
             spread
             out
             downwards
             ,
             and
             in
             declining
             〈…〉
             it
             is
             again
             diminished
             .
             ●…t
             hath
             two
             distinct
             Originals
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             
             and
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             doubled
             Peritonaeum
             .
             1.
             
             It
             arises
             at
             the
             stomach
             ,
             viz.
             the
             bottome
             thereof
             .
             2.
             
             At
             the
             Back
             and
             Gut
             Colon
             ;
             and
             no
             beginning
             cleaves
             to
             another
             .
             Hence
             it
             hath
             two
             
             Walls
             or
             two
             Membranes
             ,
             thin
             and
             light
             (
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             troublesome
             with
             their
             weight
             )
             
             which
             lie
             one
             upon
             another
             :
             the
             external
             or
             former
             ,
             which
             is
             tied
             to
             the
             outer
             membrane
             of
             the
             stomach
             at
             the
             bottom
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             bunching
             part
             of
             the
             Spleen
             .
             The
             inner
             and
             latter
             ,
             which
             is
             tied
             to
             the
             Gut
             Colon
             ,
             and
             arises
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             under
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             just
             at
             the
             Back
             .
             And
             between
             these
             Walls
             ,
             it
             hath
             a
             remarkeable
             Cavity
             :
             in
             which
             some
             very
             foolishly
             conceive
             the
             Natural
             spirit
             is
             contained
             .
             Riolanus
             will
             have
             it
             propagated
             from
             a
             
             production
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             because
             if
             you
             separate
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             you
             may
             proceed
             as
             far
             as
             the
             Gut
             Colon
             ;
             which
             he
             proves
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             out
             of
             Hippocrates
             .
             But
             in
             vain
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Mesentery
             it self
             ,
             springs
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             he
             confesses
             the
             fourth
             part
             only
             of
             the
             Call
             to
             be
             Mesenterical
             .
          
           
             The
             Figure
             thereof
             resembles
             that
             of
             a
             Falconders
             pouch
             ,
             for
             the
             upper
             Orifice
             
             thereof
             is
             Orbicular
             ,
             and
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Call
             is
             round
             after
             a
             sort
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             unequal
             .
          
           
             The
             magnitude
             thereof
             varies
             :
             for
             it
             passes
             in
             some
             men
             to
             the
             Navil
             ,
             in
             others
             it
             
             goes
             further
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             before
             .
             Naturally
             it
             hardly
             exceeds
             the
             weight
             of
             half
             a
             pound
             ,
             Riolanus
             observes
             .
             Howbeit
             Vesalius
             saw
             a
             Call
             of
             five
             pounds
             weight
             .
          
           
             The
             Call
             hath
             this
             property
             above
             oother
             
             membranes
             ,
             that
             through
             the
             substance
             thereof
             ,
             very
             many
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             sprinkled
             ,
             from
             the
             Caeliacal
             and
             Mesenterical
             branches
             ;
             and
             smal
             Nerves
             from
             a
             double
             branch
             of
             the
             sixt
             Pair
             .
             And
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             many
             Veins
             ,
             there
             is
             much
             Fat
             in
             the
             Call
             :
             and
             between
             the
             same
             innumerable
             Kernels
             are
             interposed
             ,
             which
             suck
             in
             and
             feed
             upon
             the
             dreggy
             humors
             .
             Which
             Fat
             I
             have
             often
             observed
             to
             have
             been
             molten
             in
             such
             as
             have
             been
             sick
             of
             Consumptive
             Feavers
             .
          
           
             
               This
               Demonstrates
               the
               Lower
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Call.
               Also
               the
               Mesentery
               with
               the
               Guts
               and
               Kernels
               adjoyned
               thereto
               .
            
             
               The
               VIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   The
                   lower
                   Membrane
                   of
                   the
                   Call
                   ,
                   on
                   which
                   the
                   Colon
                   is
                   suspended
                   .
                
                 
                   aaa
                   .
                   The
                   Vessels
                   of
                   the
                   Call.
                   
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Ligament
                   of
                   the
                   Gut
                   Colon.
                   
                
                 
                   DDDD
                   .
                   The
                   Mesentery
                   .
                
                 
                   EEE
                   .
                   The
                   smaller
                   Kernels
                   of
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   greatest
                   Kernel
                   of
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   ,
                   situate
                   in
                   the
                   middest
                   thereof
                   ,
                   called
                   ,
                   by
                   
                     Asellius
                     ,
                     Pancreas
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GGG
                   .
                   The
                   Vessels
                   of
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   thin
                   and
                   thick
                   Guts
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Piss-bladder
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   The
                   Umbilical
                   Navil-Arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   Piss-pipe
                   ,
                   or
                   Urachus
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   The
                   Navil
                   cut
                   off
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               .
               ●7
            
          
           
             T
             is
             a
             most
             rare
             Case
             to
             find
             the
             Call
             perfectly
             fleshy
             such
             as
             I
             saw
             cut
             out
             of
             a
             Body
             in
             the
             Hospital
             at
             Zeyden
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             ,
             1.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             plenty
             of
             its
             
             Fat
             it
             helps
             and
             cherishes
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             stomach
             ,
             namely
             of
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ;
             for
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             stomach
             is
             cherished
             by
             the
             Liver
             ,
             resting
             upon
             it
             ;
             also
             it
             cherishes
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             as
             being
             membranous
             and
             blood-less
             parts
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             that
             same
             Fencer
             whose
             Call
             was
             taken
             away
             by
             
             Galen
             ,
             was
             easily
             hurt
             by
             cold
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             alwaies
             covered
             his
             Belly
             with
             Wool.
             The
             Call
             therefore
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Pillow
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             furthers
             Digestion
             .
             For
             that
             is
             a
             rare
             case
             which
             Forestus
             relates
             of
             a
             young
             man
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             of
             others
             who
             lived
             well
             enough
             ,
             after
             their
             Calls
             were
             taken
             away
             :
             Peradventure
             their
             Stomachs
             were
             some
             other
             way
             strengthened
             ,
             or
             might
             be
             Naturally
             more
             strong
             then
             ordinary
             .
             Otherwise
             ordinarily
             ,
             by
             defect
             of
             the
             Call
             ,
             Catarrhs
             ,
             Loosnesses
             ,
             Lienteries
             ,
             Consumptions
             do
             arise
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Membranes
             afford
             this
             Use
             ,
             that
             they
             prop
             up
             the
             Branches
             of
             a
             Vein
             and
             an
             Artery
             ,
             which
             go
             unto
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             Duodenum
             ,
             and
             Colon
             Guts
             so
             called
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             also
             the
             Fat
             grows
             by
             benefit
             of
             the
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Walaeus
             supposes
             that
             Branches
             of
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             are
             attributed
             in
             greater
             quantity
             unto
             the
             Call
             ,
             then
             is
             requisite
             to
             breed
             Fat
             ,
             and
             nourish
             the
             Call
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             are
             there
             placed
             ,
             being
             Branches
             of
             Venaporta
             ,
             that
             the
             greater
             quantity
             of
             Blood
             might
             return
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               IX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             THe
             Stomach
             called
             Ventriculus
             ,
             
             that
             is
             a
             little
             Belly
             ,
             is
             an
             Organical
             part
             seated
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             just
             under
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             being
             the
             Instrument
             that
             makes
             Chyle
             .
             Paraeus
             observes
             that
             it
             hath
             through
             a
             Wound
             in
             the
             Midriff
             ascended
             into
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             gone
             downwards
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             encrease
             of
             the
             Call.
             But
             Naturally
             ;
          
           
             It
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             Epigastrium
             ,
             a
             place
             encompassed
             with
             no
             Bones
             ,
             that
             it
             
             might
             stretch
             more
             easily
             ,
             just
             under
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             it
             rests
             upon
             the
             Back-bone
             :
             Now
             its
             left
             side
             which
             is
             the
             greater
             and
             rounder
             in
             the
             bottom
             ,
             lies
             in
             the
             left
             Hypochondrium
             ,
             to
             give
             way
             to
             the
             Liver
             which
             lies
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             and
             that
             so
             the
             Body
             may
             be
             equally
             as
             it
             were
             poised
             ,
             and
             ballanced
             ▪
             or
             trimmed
             ,
             as
             the
             Watermen
             speak
             of
             their
             boats
             :
             Towards
             the
             right
             hand
             it
             grows
             small
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             that
             the
             meat
             may
             be
             gradually
             thrust
             thither
             .
             Whence
             we
             gather
             that
             it
             is
             better
             for
             such
             as
             lie
             down
             to
             sleep
             ,
             to
             lie
             first
             upon
             their
             left
             side
             till
             the
             Digestion
             be
             finished
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             upon
             their
             right
             ,
             otherwise
             then
             is
             commonly
             imagined
             .
             But
             in
             the
             left
             side
             there
             is
             the
             bottom
             ,
             where
             the
             meat
             ought
             to
             tarry
             ,
             for
             being
             rowled
             to
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             it
             is
             nearer
             passing
             out
             .
             Howbeit
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             much
             must
             be
             allowed
             to
             Custom
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             only
             one
             in
             Number
             in
             man
             ,
             and
             such
             live
             Creatures
             as
             have
             teeth
             in
             both
             
             their
             Jaws
             .
             Riolanus
             bath
             twice
             observed
             a
             double
             Stomach
             in
             a
             man
             ,
             continued
             ,
             but
             distinguished
             by
             a
             narrow
             passage
             out
             of
             one
             into
             another
             .
             Sperlingerus
             saw
             the
             same
             in
             a
             Woman
             of
             
               Wittemberg
               ▪
            
             and
             Helmontius
             saw
             a
             bag
             full
             of
             stones
             which
             grew
             to
             the
             Stomach
             .
             Yea
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             hath
             been
             double
             in
             one
             that
             chewed
             the
             Cud
             ,
             as
             Salmuth
             relates
             and
             others
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             be
             doubted
             .
             In
             some
             Fowls
             there
             are
             two
             Stomachs
             ,
             the
             one
             membranous
             ,
             which
             the
             Latins
             term
             Ingluvies
             the
             Crap
             ,
             which
             only
             receives
             the
             meat
             ,
             that
             from
             thence
             being
             lightly
             digested
             ,
             they
             may
             cast
             it
             into
             the
             mouths
             of
             their
             young
             ones
             ,
             whereas
             otherwise
             young
             Birds
             could
             not
             be
             nourished
             .
             The
             other
             is
             very
             fleshy
             and
             hotter
             ,
             having
             within
             a
             hard
             Membrane
             ,
             wherein
             hard
             meat
             is
             received
             .
             
               Petrus
               Castellus
            
             a
             rare
             man
             ,
             adds
             a
             third
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             like
             manner
             fleshy
             .
             In
             Beasts
             that
             chew
             the
             Cud
             ,
             and
             have
             Hornes
             ,
             and
             teeth
             only
             in
             one
             Jaw
             
             there
             are
             four
             ;
             The
             first
             Venter
             ,
             the
             Reticulum
             ,
             the
             Omasus
             ,
             and
             the
             Abomasus
             ;
             of
             which
             Aristotle
             speaks
             .
             The
             Venter
             and
             the
             Reticulum
             which
             is
             a
             part
             thereof
             ,
             are
             ordained
             to
             hold
             the
             crude
             meat
             ;
             The
             Omasus
             receives
             the
             Food
             immediately
             from
             the
             mouth
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             thin
             ,
             if
             thick
             ,
             it
             is
             first
             chewed
             ,
             and
             from
             hence
             after
             a
             short
             stay
             ,
             it
             slips
             into
             the
             Abomasus
             .
             Now
             chewing
             the
             Cud
             ,
             is
             a
             second
             chewing
             of
             the
             meat
             in
             the
             mouth
             ,
             for
             the
             more
             perfect
             Digestion
             thereof
             ,
             whence
             the
             Aliment
             proves
             excellent
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             among
             the
             Jews
             ,
             such
             as
             chewed
             the
             Cud
             were
             counted
             clean
             Beasts
             .
             Chewing
             the
             Cud
             is
             caused
             ,
             not
             as
             some
             think
             ,
             because
             the
             meat
             in
             the
             first
             Stomach
             gains
             such
             a
             quality
             ,
             that
             it
             provokes
             the
             Stomach
             to
             cast
             it
             up
             ;
             for
             so
             in
             every
             sharp
             biting
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             Animals
             chewing
             the
             Cud
             ,
             would
             happen
             against
             their
             Wills
             :
             but
             it
             depends
             upon
             the
             voluntary
             Action
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             which
             by
             a
             singular
             membrane
             ,
             expels
             what
             it
             pleases
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             pleases
             ;
             as
             that
             some
             Tosspot
             of
             Malta
             ,
             whom
             I
             have
             seen
             ,
             would
             as
             he
             pleased
             cast
             up
             what
             ever
             he
             had
             drunk
             ;
             and
             others
             will
             swallow
             down
             the
             Smoak
             of
             Tobacco
             ,
             and
             turn
             it
             out
             again
             .
             In
             great
             Sea-fishes
             I
             have
             observed
             a
             threefold
             Stomach
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Porpice
             and
             others
             ;
             but
             it
             grew
             so
             together
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             rather
             three
             distinct
             Cavities
             with
             passages
             from
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             three
             perfect
             Stomachs
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             
               two
               Orifices
            
             ,
             and
             both
             of
             them
             in
             the
             upper
             Region
             of
             the
             stomach
             .
             
          
           
             The
             left
             is
             commonly
             called
             the
             upper
             Orifice
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             singly
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             t
             is
             termed
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             largeness
             ;
             the
             Ancients
             did
             cal
             it
             Cor
             the
             Heart
             ,
             because
             the
             Diseases
             thereof
             caused
             fainting
             Fits
             ▪
             and
             other
             Symptoms
             like
             those
             which
             happen
             to
             such
             as
             are
             troubled
             with
             Passions
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             also
             because
             of
             its
             most
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             Heart
             doth
             sympathize
             therewith
             ,
             both
             in
             regard
             of
             its
             nearness
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             Nerves
             proceeding
             from
             the
             same
             Branch
             .
             This
             Orifice
             
               is
               greater
            
             ,
             thicker
             ,
             and
             larger
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             may
             admit
             hard
             or
             half
             chewed
             meat
             .
             
               T
               is
               situate
            
             at
             the
             eleventh
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             :
             It
             hath
             circular
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             by
             Natural
             Instinct
             shut
             up
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             after
             the
             meat
             is
             received
             in
             ,
             least
             fumes
             should
             arise
             ,
             and
             go
             into
             the
             Brain
             ,
             and
             breed
             Diseases
             ;
             and
             that
             so
             Digestion
             may
             be
             more
             perfectly
             accomplished
             .
             So
             we
             cover
             it
             as
             we
             do
             our
             Seething-pots
             with
             a
             potlid
             ,
             to
             keep
             in
             the
             Fumes
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             the
             meat
             from
             falling
             back
             into
             our
             mouths
             ,
             when
             we
             lie
             in
             bed
             ,
             and
             tumble
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             .
             Through
             this
             Orifice
             ,
             meats
             and
             drinks
             are
             received
             in
             .
             And
             it
             is
             but
             in
             the
             Epigastrick
             Region
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             more
             near
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             then
             the
             sword-fashion'd
             Gristle
             or
             
               Cartilago
               Ensiformis
            
             :
             And
             therefore
             when
             it
             is
             diseased
             ,
             we
             apply
             Epithems
             rather
             behind
             then
             before
             .
             Helmont
             places
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Soul
             ,
             and
             the
             Principle
             of
             life
             
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             in
             its
             central
             point
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             governes
             and
             rules
             over
             the
             Head
             and
             principal
             Faculties
             .
             If
             you
             aske
             him
             more
             particularly
             where
             it
             is
             placed
             ,
             he
             will
             answer
             you
             that
             it
             is
             there
             after
             an
             exorbitant
             manner
             ,
             centrally
             in
             a
             point
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             an
             Atome
             of
             the
             thickness
             of
             one
             Membrane
             .
             But
             the
             Stomach
             cannot
             be
             
             the
             Seat
             of
             the
             Soul
             ,
             because
             .
             1.
             
             It
             is
             alwaies
             full
             of
             impure
             meats
             .
             2.
             
             No
             Faculties
             flow
             to
             us
             from
             thence
             .
             3.
             
             Great
             Feeders
             and
             persons
             of
             large
             Appetite
             ,
             should
             have
             more
             Soul
             then
             other
             people
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Soul
             is
             not
             fixed
             to
             any
             Centre
             .
             5.
             
             When
             the
             Stomach
             is
             hurt
             ,
             death
             doth
             not
             presently
             follow
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             him
             that
             swallowed
             the
             knife
             .
             And
             any
             dammage
             happen
             ,
             it
             is
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Nearness
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             Community
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             consequently
             by
             accident
             .
             For
             the
             Soul
             sticks
             not
             in
             the
             Nerves
             primarily
             ;
             but
             there
             rather
             from
             whence
             the
             Nerves
             have
             their
             Original
             ▪
             and
             it
             is
             a
             common
             Membrane
             .
             Yet
             in
             a
             large
             sense
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             called
             the
             Principle
             of
             Life
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             the
             Seat
             of
             Appetite
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             Reception
             and
             Digestion
             of
             Aliments
             ,
             whose
             fault
             in
             the
             following
             Concoctions
             ,
             is
             never
             amended
             .
             Now
             it
             rules
             over
             the
             Head
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Consent
             of
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             undoubted
             arising
             of
             Vapors
             .
          
           
             The
             
               right
               Orifice
            
             ,
             commonly
             called
             the
             lower
             ,
             is
             as
             far
             from
             the
             bottom
             ,
             
             well
             near
             ,
             as
             the
             left
             :
             It
             is
             narrower
             ,
             and
             abides
             shut
             until
             the
             Digestion
             of
             the
             meat
             be
             finished
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             until
             the
             meat
             be
             turned
             into
             a
             liquid
             Cream
             ,
             or
             Posset
             as
             irwere
             .
             Howbeit
             
             Walaeus
             hath
             observed
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             and
             doth
             let
             out
             the
             more
             liquid
             meats
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             are
             of
             easie
             Digestion
             ,
             by
             peicemeal
             before
             the
             rest
             ,
             which
             may
             easily
             be
             done
             by
             opening
             it self
             a
             little
             way
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             thicker
             and
             undigested
             meats
             cannot
             pass
             through
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             objects
             ,
             seeing
             they
             cannot
             pass
             through
             a
             narrow
             chink
             :
             This
             Walaeus
             I
             say
             observed
             in
             his
             Dissertion
             of
             Living
             Creatures
             .
             Helmont
             affirms
             that
             in
             Vomiting
             ,
             it
             is
             shut
             upwards
             towards
             
             the
             Pylorus
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             inconvenient
             to
             Health
             ,
             that
             the
             faculent
             matter
             of
             Vomits
             should
             pass
             downwards
             .
             Yet
             he
             grants
             that
             it
             is
             sometimes
             opened
             between
             the
             first
             and
             other
             Vomits
             ,
             when
             somwhat
             ascends
             out
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
             And
             the
             truth
             is
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             also
             open
             to
             noxious
             Humors
             ,
             Lienteries
             doth
             witness
             ,
             and
             other
             fluxes
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             
               Miserere
               mei
            
             ,
             and
             other
             Diseases
             ,
             which
             pass
             and
             repass
             through
             the
             Pylorus
             .
             The
             same
             Person
             beleives
             that
             it
             remains
             shut
             after
             Death
             ,
             which
             doth
             ,
             I
             conceive
             no
             otherwise
             happen
             ,
             then
             as
             other
             parts
             are
             then
             stiff
             with
             Cold.
             It
             is
             a
             little
          
           
             
               The
               Stomach-Nerves
               so
               called
               are
               Expressed
               .
            
             
               The
               IX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Gullet
                   or
                   Oesophagus
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   left
                   and
                   larger
                   side
                   of
                   the
                   stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   upper
                   Orifice
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   called
                   peculiarly
                   Stomachus
                   ,
                   and
                   Cardia
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   right
                   external
                   Nerve
                   of
                   the
                   sixt
                   pare
                   ,
                   compassing
                   the
                   Orifice
                   thereof
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   external
                   left
                   Nerve
                   of
                   the
                   sixt
                   pare
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Gastrick
                   Vessels
                   creeping
                   along
                   the
                   Bottom
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   lower
                   Orifice
                   or
                   Mouth
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   called
                   Pylorus
                   ,
                   the
                   Porter
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               ●●
               .
            
          
           
             bowed
             back
             ,
             and
             hath
             transverse
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             a
             thicker
             Circle
             cast
             about
             it
             (
             others
             call
             them
             Glandulous
             Pustles
             )
             like
             an
             Orbicular
             or
             Sphincter
             Muscse
             [
             some
             call
             it
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             a
             Valve
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             seldom
             so
             closely
             shut
             ,
             but
             that
             both
             Dung
             and
             Choler
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             do
             ever
             and
             anon
             ascend
             .
             But
             the
             Chylus
             by
             a
             Natural
             propension
             ,
             affects
             to
             go
             downwards
             ,
             nor
             doth
             it
             go
             the
             other
             way
             ,
             unless
             compelled
             ]
             It
             is
             called
             the
             Pylorus
             or
             Porter
             ,
             because
             it
             lets
             out
             the
             Chyle
             :
             It
             may
             be
             exceedingly
             dilated
             ,
             even
             
             as
             also
             the
             left
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             many
             examples
             testifie
             ,
             
             how
             that
             very
             great
             things
             have
             been
             swallowed
             down
             ,
             and
             voided
             out
             by
             Vomit
             ,
             and
             by
             Stool
             ;
             as
             Gold-rings
             ,
             Nut-shels
             ,
             small
             Knives
             ,
             Pebble-stones
             ,
             peices
             of
             Iron
             ,
             Frogs
             ,
             Lizards
             ,
             Serpents
             ,
             whole
             Eels
             ,
             Pipes
             ,
             Coins
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Pylorus
             rules
             over
             all
             the
             inferior
             parts
             ,
             according
             
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Helmont
             ,
             being
             Moderator
             of
             Digestion
             :
             From
             the
             Indignation
             whereof
             ,
             he
             fetches
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             Palsie
             ,
             and
             Swimming
             Dizziness
             of
             the
             Head
             ;
             and
             saith
             that
             a
             Flint
             having
             stopped
             the
             same
             ,
             Want
             of
             Appetite
             ,
             and
             Death
             it self
             followed
             .
             Salmuth
             saw
             Death
             caused
             by
             the
             Gnawing
             and
             Scirrhous
             Tumor
             thereof
             ,
             which
             Evils
             depend
             upon
             viriated
             Concoction
             ,
             or
             Digestion
             hindered
             .
          
           
             The
             stomach
             hath
             three
             sorts
             of
             Fibres
             :
             straight
             ,
             oblique
             ,
             &
             transverse
             ;
             which
             are
             
             conceived
             to
             serve
             for
             Attraction
             ,
             Retention
             ,
             and
             Expulsion
             .
             But
             some
             do
             peradventure
             more
             rightly
             determine
             ,
             that
             the
             Fibres
             conduce
             to
             firmness
             and
             strength
             ,
             as
             when
             we
             would
             have
             a
             peice
             of
             Cloath
             strong
             ,
             we
             cause
             more
             threeds
             to
             be
             woven
             into
             it
             :
             Especially
             seeing
             many
             other
             parts
             ,
             without
             these
             kind
             of
             Fibres
             do
             attract
             ,
             retain
             ,
             and
             expel
             ;
             as
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Spleen
             ,
             Brain
             ,
             Stones
             ,
             Lungs
             ,
             Duggs
             .
             And
             other
             parts
             ,
             as
             Bones
             and
             Gristles
             ,
             though
             they
             have
             Fibres
             ,
             yet
             do
             they
             not
             attract
             or
             expel
             any
             thing
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Number
               of
               Fibres
            
             in
             the
             Membranes
             is
             uncertain
             ,
             through
             the
             variance
             
             of
             Authors
             .
             That
             the
             first
             or
             outmost
             Coat
             hath
             more
             right
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             the
             second
             more
             transverse
             ,
             is
             generally
             agreed
             upon
             by
             most
             Anatomists
             .
             The
             doubt
             is
             touching
             the
             third
             or
             inner
             Coat
             .
             
               Galen
               ,
               Abensina
               ,
               Mundinus
               ,
               Sylvus
               ,
            
             and
             Aquapendens
             ,
             do
             allow
             it
             only
             right
             or
             straight
             Fibres
             .
             Vesalius
             saies
             it
             hath
             right
             Fibres
             towards
             the
             Cavity
             ,
             and
             oblique
             in
             the
             outward
             part
             .
             Costaeus
             allows
             it
             only
             oblique
             .
             I
             with
             Fallopius
             and
             Laurentius
             ,
             being
             led
             by
             Experience
             and
             Reason
             ,
             do
             admit
             al
             kinds
             of
             Fibres
             in
             this
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             is
             smooth
             without
             ,
             plain
             and
             whiteish
             within
             ,
             when
             the
             stomach
             
             doth
             purse
             it self
             ,
             it
             appears
             wrinkled
             and
             somwhat
             reddish
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             triple
             Membrane
             :
             The
             first
             
             common
             and
             external
             ,
             springing
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             the
             thickest
             of
             all
             that
             have
             their
             Original
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             though
             otherwise
             thin
             enough
             ;
             which
             
               Petrus
               Castellus
            
             conceives
             doth
             chiefly
             concurre
             in
             Vomiting
             .
             The
             second
             more
             fleshy
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             middlemost
             ,
             and
             hath
             fleshy
             Fibres
             to
             further
             Concoction
             .
             The
             third
             is
             lowest
             and
             nervous
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             Vessels
             are
             terminated
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             continued
             with
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Oesophagus
             ,
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             Lipps
             ,
             that
             nothing
             may
             be
             received
             in
             ,
             which
             ●
             ungrateful
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             meat
             is
             prepared
             in
             the
             mouth
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             when
             Choler
             is
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             the
             Tongue
             is
             bitter
             and
             yellow
             :
             And
             contrariwise
             the
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Tongue
             are
             communicated
             to
             the
             Oesophagus
             and
             Sromach
             .
             This
             Coat
             is
             wrinkled
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             the
             better
             dilated
             .
             And
             it
             hath
             its
             Wrinkles
             from
             a
             fleshy
             Crustiness
             sticking
             thereunto
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             defend
             it
             from
             hard
             meats
             .
             This
             Crust
             is
             thought
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             
             third
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Stomach
             :
             and
             it
             is
             spungy
             ,
             and
             hath
             passages
             like
             short
             Fibres
             ,
             from
             the
             inner
             Surface
             to
             the
             outward
             ;
             that
             the
             thinner
             Chylus
             may
             be
             the
             better
             detained
             till
             the
             End
             of
             Digestion
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             therefore
             of
             the
             Stomach
             being
             membranous
             and
             cold
             ,
             is
             holpen
             by
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Neighboring
             Parts
             .
             For
             the
             Liver
             lies
             over
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             and
             middle
             part
             thereof
             ;
             for
             it
             lies
             under
             the
             Heart-pit
             :
             At
             the
             left
             side
             lies
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             it
             is
             covered
             by
             the
             fat
             Call
             :
             Under
             it
             lies
             the
             Pancreas
             or
             Sweet-bread
             ;
             also
             near
             it
             lie
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             Colon-gut
             ,
             the
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             The
             Stomach
             is
             knit
             in
             the
             left
             part
             
             to
             the
             Midriff
             (
             not
             to
             the
             Back-bone
             )
             by
             its
             Orifice
             ;
             therefore
             when
             it
             is
             over
             full
             ,
             by
             hindring
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             it
             causes
             shortness
             of
             breath
             :
             On
             the
             right
             side
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             Gut
             Duodenum
             ,
             by
             its
             other
             Orifice
             or
             the
             Pylorus
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             in
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             under
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             is
             formed
             a
             remarkeable
             Cavity
             enclosod
             with
             Membranes
             ,
             partly
             from
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             partly
             from
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             and
             partly
             from
             the
             Call.
             Tonching
             this
             Cavity
             ,
             that
             place
             of
             Hippocrates
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             in
             the
             54
             Aphorism
             of
             the
             7.
             
             Section
             .
             
               Those
               who
               have
               Flegm
               shut
               up
               between
               the
               Septum
               transversum
               and
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               which
               causes
               pain
               ,
               and
               can
               find
               no
               passage
               into
               either
               of
               the
               Bellies
               ,
               when
               the
               Flegm
               passes
               through
               the
               Veins
               into
               the
               Bladder
               ,
               their
               Disease
               is
               cured
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Shape
             of
             the
             Stomach
             is
             round
             and
             
             oblong
             ,
             like
             ā
             Bag-pipe
             ,
             especially
             if
             you
             consider
             it
             together
             with
             the
             Duodenum
             and
             Oesophagus
             .
             In
             the
             Fore-part
             is
             is
             equally
             gibbous
             or
             bunching
             forth
             ;
             in
             the
             Hinder-part
             ,
             while
             it
             lies
             enclosed
             in
             the
             Body
             ,
             it
             hath
             two
             ▪
             bunchings
             ,
             that
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             being
             the
             less
             ,
             and
             that
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             the
             greater
             ,
             between
             which
             lie
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             the
             descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             and
             the
             Artery
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             varies
             ;
             commonly
             t
             is
             less
             in
             Women
             then
             in
             Men
             ,
             that
             
             place
             may
             be
             made
             for
             the
             Womb
             when
             it
             swells
             .
             For
             Women
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             lesser
             then
             men
             ,
             and
             yet
             not
             more
             gluttonous
             then
             Men
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             beleives
             ,
             viz.
             being
             of
             the
             same
             size
             and
             equally
             healthy
             ;
             yea
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             inferior
             to
             men
             in
             Heat
             to
             digest
             and
             concoct
             .
             Also
             in
             gluttonous
             persons
             and
             great
             Drinkers
             ,
             it
             is
             greater
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             so
             that
             when
             it
             swells
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             felt
             as
             it
             were
             naked
             .
             For
             it
             is
             exceedingly
             dilated
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             thinner
             in
             Drinkers
             ,
             in
             whom
             it
             is
             somtimes
             so
             attenuated
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             no
             more
             wrinkle
             it self
             ,
             whence
             follows
             long
             weakness
             .
             Which
             Walaeus
             in
             Diffection
             hath
             observed
             to
             happen
             chiefly
             to
             those
             old
             men
             ,
             whose
             Stomachs
             in
             time
             of
             Concoction
             do
             breed
             Wind
             ;
             which
             oftentimes
             also
             in
             gluttonous
             persons
             ,
             takes
             up
             more
             room
             then
             their
             meat
             .
             Columbus
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             stretched
             ,
             to
             reach
             as
             low
             as
             the
             Navil
             ,
             and
             Archangelus
             will
             have
             it
             to
             reach
             further
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             over
             stretched
             ;
             but
             being
             contracted
             and
             wrinkled
             in
             such
             as
             live
             soberly
             ,
             it
             is
             thick
             ,
             and
             lies
             hid
             under
             the
             Liver
             .
             Now
             the
             Largeness
             of
             the
             Stomach
             is
             known
             .
             1.
             
             By
             the
             Greatness
             of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             for
             those
             that
             have
             large
             Mouths
             ,
             are
             great
             Eaters
             ,
             but
             withal
             bold
             and
             magnanimous
             .
             2.
             
             If
             from
             the
             
               Cartilago
               Ensiformis
            
             to
             the
             Navil
             ,
             the
             space
             is
             greater
             ,
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Face
             or
             Breast
             .
          
           
             The
             weight
             of
             the
             Stomach
             being
             dryed
             with
             the
             Oesophagus
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Loselius
             is
             two
             ounces
             and
             two
             drams
             ;
             wherein
             notwithstanding
             I
             have
             found
             a
             variety
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diversity
             of
             subjects
             .
          
           
             It
             receives
             very
             many
             
               Vessels
               .
               Veins
            
             ,
             as
             from
             the
             Spleen
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             which
             is
             inferted
             ,
             
             not
             into
             the
             mouth
             but
             into
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ,
             and
             there
             insinuating
             it self
             into
             the
             tunicles
             ,
             it
             
             creeps
             upwards
             between
             them
             ,
             towards
             the
             Orifice
             :
             but
             before
             it
             reaches
             the
             same
             ,
             it
             is
             obliterated
             ;
             in
             some
             it
             is
             not
             visible
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             smalness
             ,
             in
             some
             it
             is
             quite
             absent
             [
             and
             therefore
             peradventure
             those
             persons
             have
             no
             good
             Concoction
             ,
             or
             Nature
             Recompences
             that
             defect
             with
             other
             Arteries
             ]
             in
             others
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             flourishing
             ,
             with
             manyfold
             branches
             .
             And
             because
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             blood
             emptied
             there
             ,
             cannot
             provoke
             Appetite
             ,
             as
             many
             imagine
             .
             Others
             will
             have
             it
             that
             a
             Melancholick
             Excrement
             which
             
             could
             not
             be
             changed
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             is
             by
             this
             Vessel
             brought
             into
             the
             stomach
             ,
             that
             by
             its
             harsh
             and
             acid
             faculty
             ,
             it
             might
             further
             the
             stomachs
             Concoction
             ,
             and
             make
             the
             meats
             abide
             therein
             ,
             a
             convenient
             season
             .
             But
             Concoction
             should
             rather
             be
             hindred
             ,
             by
             the
             casting
             in
             of
             a
             strange
             Excrementitious
             Humor
             .
             If
             we
             shall
             interpret
             it
             touching
             an
             acid
             fermenting
             juyce
             ,
             the
             Opinion
             will
             be
             truer
             ,
             which
             kind
             of
             juyce
             ,
             can
             come
             from
             no
             other
             place
             but
             the
             Spleen
             .
             For
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             especially
             of
             a
             Sow
             ,
             being
             boyled
             and
             eaten
             ,
             as
             coming
             nearest
             that
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             doth
             wont
             to
             help
             the
             heavyness
             and
             dullness
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
             Hence
             sharp
             things
             are
             pleasing
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             Hippocrates
             gives
             Vinegar
             to
             Spleenetick
             persons
             ,
             and
             Celsus
             makes
             a
             Cataplasm
             for
             the
             Spleen
             tempered
             with
             the
             sharpest
             Vinegar
             .
             Moreover
             Riolanus
             hath
             found
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Stomach
             blacker
             then
             the
             right
             .
             Others
             suppose
             that
             nothing
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             stomach
             by
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             but
             that
             somwhat
             is
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             stomach
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             whether
             it
             be
             the
             thinner
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             as
             
               Conringius
               ,
               Horstius
            
             ,
             and
             Regius
             prove
             ,
             or
             Blood
             as
             Hogeland
             conceives
             ;
             they
             being
             informed
             by
             Ligature
             in
             dissections
             of
             live
             Creatures
             :
             of
             which
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             the
             stomach
             receives
             Veins
             from
             Vena
             Portae
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Pyloric
             ,
             Gastric
             ,
             and
             Gastroepiploic
             branches
             left
             and
             right
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             one
             notable
             Vein
             called
             Gastrica
             ,
             which
             creeps
             a
             long
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             stomach
             ,
             but
             doth
             not
             quite
             touch
             it
             least
             the
             stomach
             being
             very
             much
             stretched
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             in
             danger
             to
             be
             broken
             ;
             but
             it
             spreds
             many
             branches
             to
             the
             stomach
             :
             which
             Picolhomineus
             and
             Aquapendent
             will
             have
             to
             suck
             out
             the
             more
             thin
             and
             subtile
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             before
             it
             passes
             out
             of
             the
             stomach
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
             And
             this
             Opinion
             seems
             probable
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             otherwise
             no
             reason
             can
             be
             given
             ▪
             of
             so
             sudden
             a
             passage
             ,
             seeing
             they
             who
             have
             drunk
             much
             ,
             do
             presently
             Piss
             it
             out
             plentifully
             .
             2.
             
             Otherwise
             the
             stomach
             would
             be
             ready
             to
             burst
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             overcharged
             .
             3.
             
             Thence
             it
             comes
             ,
             that
             strength
             is
             so
             soon
             repaired
             by
             fragrant
             Wine
             ,
             broaths
             ,
             and
             other
             comfortable
             things
             .
          
           
             In
             some
             Men
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Choler
             passage
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             stomach
             ,
             by
             which
             our
             Country-men
             
               Petrus
               Severinus
            
             ,
             would
             have
             choler
             to
             be
             carried
             into
             the
             stomach
             .
             But
             this
             is
             an
             Error
             of
             Nature
             ,
             and
             therefore
             such
             persons
             are
             apt
             to
             vomit
             Choler
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             exceeding
             Cholerick
             ,
             such
             as
             
               Galen
               ,
               Vesalius
               ,
               Fernelius
            
             ,
             and
             Casserius
             have
             observed
             .
             Such
             persons
             are
             said
             to
             be
             
               Picrocholoi
               ano
            
             ,
             vomiters
             of
             Choler
             .
          
           
             The
             stomach
             receives
             Arteries
             from
             me
             
               Caeliaca
               Arteria
            
             ,
             which
             accompany
             the
             Veins
             ,
             not
             only
             for
             lifes
             sake
             ,
             but
             that
             blood
             may
             be
             supplied
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             for
             nourishment
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             stomach
             should
             be
             nourished
             with
             Chyle
             ,
             is
             a
             false
             opinion
             and
             now
             out
             of
             date
             .
             Seeing
             it
             is
             nourished
             with
             blood
             ,
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             other
             parts
             (
             it
             is
             only
             delighted
             with
             the
             chyle
             )
             whichis
             brought
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ;
             which
             blood
             flows
             back
             again
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Circulation
             proved
             and
             asserted
             by
             the
             renowned
             Walaeus
             in
             his
             Epistles
             .
             By
             the
             Splenic
             Arteries
             an
             acid
             sharp
             juyce
             is
             conveighed
             into
             the
             stomach
             from
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             as
             the
             said
             Waloeus
             and
             Hogeland
             conceive
             ,
             which
             I
             grant
             when
             there
             is
             no
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             or
             in
             absence
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             wherein
             I
             easily
             consent
             with
             Riolanus
             .
          
           
             Also
             it
             hath
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pair
             ,
             
             viz.
             a
             couple
             in
             its
             Orifice
             ,
             from
             the
             stomach
             branches
             ,
             being
             produced
             after
             it
             hath
             run
             back
             in
             the
             Chest
             and
             furnished
             the
             Lungs
             and
             Pericardium
             ;
             which
             because
             they
             are
             soft
             and
             go
             a
             great
             way
             ,
             they
             are
             covered
             with
             strong
             Membranes
             .
             And
             they
             do
             so
             cross
             one
             another
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             carried
             obliquely
             and
             consequently
             with
             greater
             safety
             .
             The
             right
             branch
             compasses
             the
             fore
             and
             left
             part
             of
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             stomach
             ;
             the
             left
             the
             hinder
             and
             right
             part
             thereof
             .
             And
             therefore
             because
             the
             Orifice
             is
             so
             compassed
             with
             Nerves
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             altogether
             composed
             of
             Nerves●
             thence
             it
             is
             that
             this
             Orifice
             of
             the
             stomach
             is
             exceeding
             sensible
             ;
             for
             there
             was
             to
             be
             the
             seat
             of
             Appetite
             and
             hunger
             :
             even
             as
             those
             that
             are
             very
             hungry
             ,
             do
             feel
             that
             part
             to
             be
             as
             it
             were
             contracted
             and
             wrinkled
             together
             .
             Also
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             are
             sent
             from
             these
             downwards
             to
             the
             very
             bottom
             .
             A
             branch
             goes
             from
             the
             left
             Nerve
             ,
             a
             long
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             stomach
             to
             the
             Pylorus
             ,
             which
             it
             infolds
             with
             certain
             branches
             ,
             and
             goes
             to
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             Other
             two
             Nerves
             also
             go
             unto
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             from
             the
             branches
             which
             run
             along
             by
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Brain
             is
             smitten
             and
             hurt
             ,
             the
             Stomach
             is
             disturbed
             ,
             and
             falls
             a
             vomiting
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             pain
             called
             Hemicranea
             :
             As
             also
             that
             when
             the
             Stomach
             is
             misaffected
             ,
             the
             Animal
             Faculty
             languishes
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Stomach
             Fermentation
             of
             the
             Meats
             goes
             before
             Concoction
             ,
             which
             
             Hippocrates
             inculcates
             in
             his
             book
             
               de
               Prisca
               Medicina
            
             .
             Because
             hard
             things
             ought
             to
             be
             broken
             to
             peices
             ;
             and
             thick
             things
             as
             bones
             and
             shells
             ,
             &c.
             in
             the
             stomachs
             of
             Beasts
             ,
             seem
             impossible
             to
             be
             melted
             by
             the
             natural
             heat
             alone
             ,
             unless
             somwhat
             else
             do
             cut
             them
             in
             peices
             .
             This
             labor
             
               Petrus
               Severinus
            
             attributes
             to
             Choler
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             according
             to
             the
             ordinary
             Course
             of
             Nature
             is
             not
             found
             in
             the
             stomach
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             dissolve
             any
             hard
             meat
             ,
             though
             Painters
             use
             to
             temper
             their
             colours
             .
             
               De
               la
               Chambre
            
             attributes
             it
             to
             Spirits
             ,
             without
             which
             it
             can
             hardly
             be
             performed
             ,
             Riolanus
             supposes
             that
             it
             proceeds
             from
             the
             Reliques
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             which
             have
             attained
             a
             fermenting
             faculty
             ;
             it
             concurs
             indeed
             ,
             for
             a
             fermentative
             quality
             may
             be
             communicated
             to
             any
             thing
             :
             but
             we
             must
             come
             to
             some
             first
             ,
             thing
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Chylus
             is
             fermented
             ,
             and
             from
             whence
             the
             ferment
             of
             the
             first
             meat
             was
             derived
             ,
             before
             the
             Reliques
             of
             the
             Chyle
             could
             arise
             .
             The
             
               greater
               part
               of
               Doctors
            
             do
             attribute
             this
             whol
             work
             to
             Melancholy
             ,
             which
             is
             carried
             by
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             into
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             of
             which
             Melancholick
             persons
             ,
             who
             are
             otherwise
             no
             good
             digesters
             ,
             do
             often
             complain
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             sharp
             tast
             .
             Which
             Melancholy
             ▪
             if
             it
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             acid
             juyce
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             allowed
             .
             For
             any
             acid
             or
             sharp
             things
             taken
             in
             ,
             as
             Vinegar
             ,
             and
             Meats
             steeped
             therein
             ,
             Juyce
             of
             Citrons
             ,
             Oyl
             of
             Sulphure
             or
             Vitriol
             ,
             Cream
             of
             Tartar
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             do
             ●ase
             and
             amend
             the
             weakness
             of
             the
             stomach
             .
             Also
             without
             the
             Body
             Vinegar
             ferments
             the
             Earth
             and
             Milk
             ,
             even
             as
             blackcholer
             
             doth
             ,
             and
             the
             acidity
             of
             Vitriol
             ferments
             Treacle
             ,
             and
             sour
             leven
             makes
             the
             bread
             arise
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Now
             
               Johannes
               Walaeus
            
             requires
             three
             things
             to
             Concoction
             ,
             first
             some
             
             moisture
             to
             temper
             the
             meat
             and
             make
             it
             liquid
             ,
             viz.
             Drink
             and
             Spittle
             ;
             in
             the
             next
             place
             ,
             somwhat
             to
             cut
             and
             mince
             it
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             as
             the
             thin
             sharp
             humor
             ,
             and
             lastly
             somwhat
             to
             melt
             and
             make
             liquid
             that
             which
             is
             cut
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             heat
             ,
             wherewith
             in
             ravenous
             beasts
             and
             some
             Men
             ,
             the
             chyle
             is
             made
             fluid
             ,
             though
             they
             do
             not
             alwaies
             drink
             ,
             I
             should
             not
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             third
             Concoction
             ,
             sticking
             to
             the
             Crust
             ,
             as
             being
             still
             impraegnated
             with
             the
             virtue
             of
             the
             parts
             nourished
             ,
             do
             give
             some
             assistance
             to
             the
             Concoction
             ,
             which
             when
             they
             are
             fretted
             of
             ,
             is
             impared
             ,
             and
             so
             in
             long
             fasting
             men
             are
             not
             so
             able
             to
             digest
             :
             And
             that
             the
             spittle
             besides
             moistening
             and
             tempering
             the
             meats
             ,
             doth
             perform
             some
             other
             more
             noble
             work
             in
             Concoction
             ,
             viz.
             prepares
             the
             meat
             in
             the
             mouth
             ,
             whereupon
             it
             comes
             to
             change
             its
             smels
             ;
             and
             heals
             Tetters
             ,
             and
             either
             kills
             or
             chases
             away
             Scorpions
             and
             Spiders
             .
          
           
             But
             what
             becomes
             of
             that
             acid
             Juyce
             ,
             when
             it
             hath
             performed
             its
             office
             of
             fermentation
             ?
             
               H.
               Regius
            
             beleives
             that
             it
             remaines
             after
             the
             expulsion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             to
             prick
             the
             stomach
             and
             provoke
             Appetite
             .
             But
             hunger
             is
             raised
             in
             the
             sensible
             mouth
             of
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ,
             where
             this
             acid
             juyce
             is
             ;
             also
             there
             would
             be
             hunger
             after
             the
             stomach
             is
             full
             .
             I
             should
             think
             that
             it
             is
             expelled
             with
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             and
             that
             then
             it
             is
             either
             therewith
             turned
             into
             blood
             ,
             or
             that
             in
             obstructions
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             it
             goes
             downwards
             ,
             and
             raises
             disturbance
             .
          
           
             The
             Action
             of
             the
             stomach
             is
             Coction
             which
             is
             termed
             Chylification
             .
             For
             the
             
             stomach
             is
             the
             Organ
             of
             the
             first
             Concoction
             ,
             the
             beginning
             and
             preparation
             of
             which
             Concoction
             is
             performed
             in
             the
             mouth
             ,
             the
             middle
             in
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             the
             Conclusion
             in
             the
             smal
             Guts
             .
             Now
             this
             Concoction
             is
             performed
             by
             heat
             ,
             not
             
             of
             the
             stomach
             only
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             the
             Neighbouring
             parts
             ;
             as
             also
             by
             a
             faculty
             which
             is
             naturally
             bred
             in
             the
             stomach
             of
             every
             Animal
             .
             Now
             it
             turnes
             the
             meats
             into
             a
             white
             Chylus
             or
             Juyce
             ,
             of
             a
             like
             substance
             ,
             whiles
             both
             its
             Orisices
             being
             shut
             very
             well
             ,
             it
             contracts
             it self
             ,
             and
             closely
             embraces
             the
             food
             .
             But
             touching
             the
             whole
             manner
             of
             Concoction
             see
             the
             forecited
             Epistles
             of
             Walaeus
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             use
             is
             to
             receive
             the
             Meat
             and
             Drink
             ,
             which
             it
             doth
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             
             notable
             and
             large
             Cavity
             .
             And
             whereas
             it
             somtimes
             contains
             and
             breeds
             little
             stones
             ,
             as
             Gentilis
             and
             Zacutus
             have
             observed
             ,
             as
             also
             a
             Toad
             ,
             Worms
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             by
             me
             often
             observed
             ;
             this
             is
             beside
             the
             Intention
             of
             Nature
             .
             And
             the
             like
             we
             may
             say
             of
             an
             Infant
             conceived
             and
             formed
             there
             and
             voided
             out
             at
             the
             mouth
             ,
             the
             History
             whereof
             is
             described
             by
             Salmuth
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               X.
            
             Of
             the
             Guts
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Guts
             are
             oblong
             ,
             round
             ,
             hollow
             
             bodies
             variously
             wreathed
             about
             ,
             joyning
             with
             the
             Pylorus
             and
             reaching
             to
             the
             Fundament
             ;
             serving
             to
             receive
             the
             Chylus
             and
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             first
             Concoction
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             their
             name
             of
             
               Intestina
               inwards
            
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             in
             the
             inmost
             seat
             
             of
             the
             Body
             [
             whence
             Tirtullian
             cal'd
             the
             Crosses
             ,
             the
             
               Intestina
               Trophaeorum
            
             ,
             the
             inwards
             of
             the
             Trophies
             ]
             and
             so
             the
             Greeks
             term
             them
             Entera
             ;
             some
             have
             termed
             them
             Chordaj
             ,
             and
             thence
             the
             Barbarians
             had
             their
             term
             Chordae
             ;
             for
             which
             cause
             also
             the
             strings
             of
             musical
             Instruments
             because
             they
             are
             made
             of
             dried
             Guts
             are
             termed
             Chordae
             ,
             Chords
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Contents
             of
             their
             Cavities
             ,
             and
             the
             
             thickness
             of
             their
             substance
             ,
             is
             different
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             shewn
             hereafter
             .
             The
             weight
             of
             all
             of
             them
             dried
             ,
             is
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             of
             Loselius
             ,
             a
             pound
             .
             Their
             length
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             doth
             exceed
             the
             length
             of
             the
             person
             whose
             they
             are
             six
             times
             ,
             little
             more
             or
             less
             .
             Picolhomineus
             saies
             they
             are
             a
             foot
             and
             half
             shorter
             ;
             they
             are
             reckoned
             to
             be
             seven
             times
             as
             long
             by
             
               Laurentius
               ,
               Paraeus
            
             and
             Riolanus
             ,
             and
             before
             them
             by
             Celsus
             ,
             who
             nevertheless
             began
             to
             measure
             from
             the
             
               Oesophagus
               .
               Hippocrates
            
             saith
             they
             are
             near
             upon
             thirteen
             cubits
             ,
             or
             not
             less
             then
             twelve
             :
             but
             the
             ful
             stature
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             hardly
             exceeds
             three
             Cubits
             and
             an
             half
             .
             Flud
             in
             a
             certain
             Body
             an
             ell
             and
             half
             long
             ,
             found
             the
             Guts
             to
             be
             but
             nine
             ells
             in
             length
             ,
             so
             that
             no
             certain
             Measure
             can
             be
             determined
             .
             It
             varies
             according
             to
             the
             Multitude
             of
             the
             windings
             ,
             and
             the
             greediness
             of
             the
             person
             in
             point
             of
             eating
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             turnings
             and
             windings
             all
             
             over
             save
             at
             the
             beginning
             and
             end
             ,
             that
             the
             Ingress
             and
             Egress
             might
             not
             be
             hindred
             .
             Now
             the
             reason
             why
             they
             have
             these
             windings
             and
             turnings
             is
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             nutriment
             may
             not
             slip
             away
             ,
             before
             Concoction
             be
             perfectly
             finished
             .
             Also
             least
             if
             it
             should
             presently
             slip
             away
             ,
             before
             the
             Chylus
             be
             distributed
             ,
             we
             should
             be
             compelled
             presently
             to
             eate
             more
             meat
             ,
             and
             so
             should
             be
             hindred
             from
             our
             business
             through
             greedyness
             of
             eating
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             living
             Creatures
             by
             how
             much
             the
             way
             is
             streighter
             from
             their
             stomach
             to
             their
             Vent
             ,
             by
             so
             much
             the
             more
             greedy
             they
             are
             of
             eating
             ;
             and
             the
             more
             their
             Guts
             are
             coiled
             ,
             the
             more
             abstinent
             they
             are
             :
             which
             Cabrolius
             observed
             in
             a
             very
             great
             eater
             ,
             who
             had
             one
             only
             Gut
             ,
             bowed
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             a
             Greek
             Sigma
             .
             3.
             
             That
             we
             might
             not
             be
             continually
             going
             to
             stool
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             with
             greedy
             Animals
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Excrements
             may
             lie
             long
             in
             those
             windings
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             situate
             in
             the
             lowest
             Belly
             ,
             the
             greater
             Cavity
             whereof
             they
             
             fill
             up
             ,
             somtimes
             they
             are
             forced
             to
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             seen
             in
             an
             Hydropick
             Woman
             dissected
             .
             They
             are
             
               knit
               together
            
             by
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             by
             which
             ,
             and
             the
             Call
             coming
             between
             ,
             they
             are
             tyed
             unto
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             are
             propped
             up
             in
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilij
            
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             membranous
             Substance
             ,
             like
             that
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ;
             so
             
             that
             they
             may
             be
             distended
             by
             Chyle
             ,
             Dung
             ,
             and
             Wind.
             But
             their
             Substance
             is
             thicker
             in
             the
             thicker
             Guts
             :
             And
             the
             nearer
             they
             grow
             to
             an
             end
             ,
             the
             thicker
             they
             are
             ,
             as
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Colon
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             .
          
           
             This
             Substance
             of
             the
             Guts
             may
             be
             divided
             into
             
               three
               Coats
            
             :
             The
             first
             is
             proper
             
             and
             internal
             ,
             and
             is
             in
             the
             smal
             Guts
             wrinkled
             ,
             in
             the
             Colon
             stretched
             out
             into
             little
             Cells
             ,
             being
             otherwise
             sufficiently
             nervous
             .
             A
             certain
             membranous
             Crust
             as
             it
             were
             compasses
             about
             ,
             bred
             of
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             third
             
          
           
             
               The
               Stomach
               is
               seen
               open
               ,
               and
               the
               Bowels
               beneath
               the
               same
               and
               Joyned
               thereto
               ,
               much
               in
               their
               natural
               Situation
               .
            
             
               The
               X.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Oesophagus
                     or
                     Gullet
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     Orifice
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Stomach
                     Nerves
                     embracing
                     this
                     Orifice
                     ,
                     rudely
                     expressed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     Pylorus
                     or
                     the
                     Porter
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     common
                     ventricle
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     proper
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     ,
                     being
                     the
                     middlemost
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     second
                     proper
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     stomach
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     inmost
                     and
                     wrinkled
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     Duodenum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   
                     The
                     passage
                     for
                     Gall.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   IIII.
                   
                     The
                     Guts
                     Jejunum
                     and
                     Ileum
                     ,
                     with
                     Vessels
                     creeping
                     through
                     the
                     same
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     blind
                     Gut
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Worm-fashion'd
                     Appendix
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LLLLL.
                   
                     The
                     Gut
                     Colon.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     Valve
                     in
                     the
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Colon
                     ,
                     opened
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   mmm
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ligament
                     containing
                     the
                     Cells
                     of
                     the
                     Colon.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     streight
                     Gut
                     is
                     here
                     seen
                     ,
                     the
                     thin
                     Guts
                     lying
                     thereon
                     being
                     removed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     Sphincter
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Fundament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscles
                     which
                     lift
                     up
                     the
                     Fundament
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               .
               23
            
          
           
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Mouths
             of
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             may
             not
             be
             stopped
             .
             2.
             
             That
             neither
             they
             nor
             the
             inner
             Coat
             might
             be
             made
             hard
             and
             callous
             ,
             by
             the
             continual
             thorough-fare
             of
             the
             Chylus
             .
             Also
             the
             second
             is
             proper
             ,
             and
             the
             middle
             most
             ,
             being
             strong
             and
             furnished
             with
             fleshy
             Fibres
             .
             The
             third
             is
             common
             and
             external
             ,
             being
             bred
             immediately
             of
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Mesenterium
             [
             save
             that
             where
             the
             Duodenum
             and
             Colon
             cleave
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             lower
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Call
             ]
             but
             mediately
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             Of
             these
             two
             proper
             Membranes
             ,
             the
             inner
             is
             often
             hurt
             in
             a
             Dysentery
             or
             bloody
             Flux
             ,
             that
             other
             remaining
             unhurt
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             Fibres
             .
             not
             only
             transverse
             ,
             as
             is
             commonly
             conceived
             ,
             but
             of
             
             all
             kinds
             :
             The
             innermost
             hath
             oblique
             ones
             .
             the
             middlemost
             hath
             transverse
             ones
             .
             The
             right
             Fibres
             which
             are
             allotted
             for
             the
             safeguard
             of
             the
             transverse
             ones
             ,
             are
             fewer
             in
             the
             thin
             or
             small
             Guts
             ,
             more
             in
             the
             large
             ,
             especially
             the
             right
             or
             the
             last
             Gut
             ,
             which
             was
             to
             be
             strong
             ,
             because
             it
             did
             collect
             hard
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             The
             Guts
             are
             covered
             on
             the
             outside
             with
             Fat
             ,
             on
             the
             inside
             with
             a
             slimy
             snotty
             Substance
             ,
             that
             the
             Dung
             may
             thereby
             pass
             more
             freely
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Guts
             may
             be
             duller
             in
             point
             of
             feeling
             .
          
           
             For
             Vessels
             they
             have
             the
             
               Venae
               Lacteae
            
             or
             milkie
             Veins
             ,
             which
             are
             chiefly
             distributed
             
             between
             the
             common
             and
             proper
             Membranes
             ,
             which
             carry
             the
             Chyle
             to
             the
             Liver
             ;
             and
             others
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               Portae
            
             ,
             which
             are
             conceived
             to
             bring
             Blood
             for
             Nourishment
             ,
             but
             they
             rather
             carry
             back
             to
             the
             Liver
             the
             Blood
             which
             remains
             after
             the
             Guts
             have
             received
             their
             Nourishment
             .
             They
             have
             also
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Caeliaca
             for
             life
             ,
             which
             by
             their
             motion
             preserve
             from
             purrefaction
             ,
             but
             especially
             to
             bring
             Nourishment
             from
             the
             Spleen
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             which
             wanted
             such
             kind
             of
             sustenance
             .
             They
             have
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             .
             But
             Walaeus
             conceives
             that
             the
             Guts
             have
             such
             great
             plenty
             of
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             .
             1.
             
             That
             Excrements
             might
             be
             conveighed
             to
             the
             common
             shore
             ,
             which
             are
             contained
             in
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             whence
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             though
             it
             take
             
             no
             meat
             in
             at
             the
             mouth
             ,
             yet
             hath
             it
             Excrements
             in
             the
             Guts
             .
             2.
             
             That
             greater
             plenty
             of
             Blood
             might
             be
             carried
             through
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             and
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             might
             come
             to
             be
             perfected
             by
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Guts
             are
             commonly
             divided
             ,
             into
             the
             thin
             ,
             or
             small
             ,
             and
             the
             thick
             ,
             or
             
             large
             Guts
             .
             For
             though
             they
             make
             one
             continued
             Channel
             from
             the
             Pylorus
             to
             the
             Fundament
             :
             Yet
             because
             this
             passage
             doth
             vary
             ,
             in
             Magnitude
             ,
             Number
             of
             Turnings
             ,
             Substance
             ,
             Situation
             ,
             Figure
             ,
             and
             Office
             ,
             therefore
             is
             it
             distinguished
             into
             divers
             Guts
             .
          
           
             The
             thin
             or
             small
             Guts
             ,
             so
             called
             by
             
             reason
             of
             the
             thinness
             of
             their
             Membranes
             ,
             are
             situate
             partly
             above
             ,
             partly
             beneath
             the
             Navil
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             possess
             both
             the
             Umbilical
             Region
             and
             Hypogastrium
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             so
             in
             Dogs
             .
             Whereupon
             the
             Ancients
             taking
             Example
             from
             Dogs
             ,
             called
             the
             upper
             Guts
             thin
             ,
             the
             lower
             thick
             :
             which
             is
             false
             in
             Mankind
             .
             For
             a
             Man
             hath
             more
             of
             the
             thick
             Guts
             above
             his
             Navil
             ,
             and
             more
             of
             the
             thin
             Guts
             beneath
             ;
             seeing
             that
             which
             is
             the
             longest
             ,
             is
             beneath
             ;
             and
             the
             Jejunum
             which
             is
             short
             is
             above
             .
             And
             therefore
             all
             the
             small
             Guts
             are
             in
             the
             middle
             Region
             about
             the
             Navil
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             they
             are
             the
             more
             noble
             .
             2.
             
             That
             they
             may
             be
             the
             more
             near
             to
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             ,
             and
             consequently
             receive
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             immediately
             from
             the
             Mesenterie
             ,
             and
             quickly
             conveigh
             the
             Blood
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
             Now
             the
             small
             Guts
             are
             three
             :
             Duodenum
             ,
             Jejunum
             ,
             and
             Ileon
             .
             And
             these
             perfect
             and
             distribute
             the
             Chyle
             :
             In
             as
             much
             as
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             narrowness
             ,
             every
             part
             of
             the
             Chylus
             may
             be
             touched
             ,
             by
             their
             Coat
             and
             Vessels
             .
             This
             Distribution
             is
             holpen
             by
             the
             inbred
             Peristaltick
             motion
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Guts
             are
             contracted
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             downwards
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Crassa
               Intestina
            
             or
             thick
             Guts
             ,
             
             are
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             they
             have
             thicker
             Coats
             ;
             they
             contain
             the
             thick
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             :
             And
             are
             made
             to
             collect
             ,
             and
             for
             a
             season
             retain
             the
             Dung.
             And
             they
             are
             three
             ;
             Caecum
             ,
             Colon
             ,
             and
             Rectum
             .
             And
             they
             are
             situate
             by
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             small
             Guts
             ,
             which
             they
             wall
             about
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             give
             way
             to
             the
             thin
             Guts
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             thin
             Guts
             might
             not
             be
             oppressed
             by
             the
             thick
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             all
             the
             Guts
             is
             ,
             to
             be
             like
             
             the
             Earth
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             suck
             Blood
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Venae
               Lacteae
            
             or
             milkie
             Veins
             suck
             Chyle
             .
             And
             the
             use
             of
             the
             
               thin
               Guts
            
             is
             ,
             to
             concoct
             the
             Chylus
             yet
             more
             in
             the
             passage
             ,
             and
             to
             distribute
             the
             same
             .
             Of
             the
             
               thick
               Guts
            
             to
             contain
             the
             Excrementitious
             Reliques
             of
             the
             Chyle
             .
             viz.
             the
             Dung
             ;
             also
             Winds
             and
             Choler
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Liver
             .
             A
             
               Secundary
               use
            
             of
             the
             Guts
             being
             dried
             ,
             is
             to
             cure
             pains
             of
             the
             Cholick
             ,
             and
             other
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Guts
             ;
             and
             being
             preternaturally
             depraved
             ,
             to
             contain
             several
             sorts
             of
             Worms
             ,
             and
             Duggs
             ,
             and
             Stones
             ;
             also
             variously
             to
             be
             affected
             ,
             of
             which
             Physitians
             are
             wont
             to
             treat
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Guts
             in
             Particular
             .
          
           
             THe
             first
             thin
             Gut
             ,
             under
             which
             
             the
             Sweet-bread
             lies
             ,
             especially
             in
             Dogs
             ,
             is
             called
             DUODENUM
             .
             Galen
             terms
             it
             
               Ecphisis
               ,
               Herophilus
               ,
               Dodecadactylon
            
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             just
             twelve
             fingers
             long
             ;
             though
             in
             the
             daies
             and
             Bodies
             of
             ours
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             found
             so
             long
             ;
             nay
             it
             is
             hardly
             four
             fingers
             long
             ,
             unless
             men
             are
             grown
             less
             of
             stature
             then
             they
             were
             anciently
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             credible
             .
             Nor
             can
             we
             understand
             the
             fingers
             breath
             ,
             of
             which
             this
             Gut
             hardly
             attains
             to
             eight
             ,
             unless
             peradventure
             the
             Ancients
             did
             also
             comprehend
             the
             Pylorus
             in
             ther
             mesuring
             .
          
           
             It
             proceeds
             in
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             from
             the
             Pylorus
             towards
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             or
             under
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             where
             being
             joyned
             to
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             by
             membranous
             Ligaments
             ,
             it
             defends
             right
             along
             ,
             without
             any
             Circumvolution
             ,
             and
             is
             terminated
             ,
             where
             the
             Windings
             and
             Wreathings
             begin
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             thicker
             then
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             thin
             Guts
             ;
             but
             hath
             a
             more
             narrow
             Cavity
             ,
             least
             the
             Chylus
             should
             slip
             in
             too
             fast
             .
             I
             saw
             a
             large
             one
             at
             Padua
             ,
             and
             Aquapendent
             describes
             such
             another
             being
             puffed
             with
             Wind
             ,
             such
             as
             that
             was
             ,
             mentioned
             by
             Trafelman
             ,
             which
             had
             in
             it
             many
             Stones
             as
             big
             as
             Nutmegs
             ,
             of
             an
             Ash-color
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             
               two
               Holes
            
             beneath
             ,
             towards
             the
             Gut
             Jejunum
             ;
             the
             one
             being
             the
             
             outlet
             of
             the
             Exoler
             or
             Gall-carrying
             passage
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             reason
             we
             find
             it
             yellow
             in
             our
             Dissections
             ,
             the
             other
             is
             the
             new
             passage
             of
             the
             Pancreas
             or
             Sweet-bread
             ,
             invented
             by
             Wirsungus
             ;
             which
             I
             have
             notwithstanding
             sometimes
             seen
             grow
             together
             ,
             and
             joyned
             with
             one
             only
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             peculiar
             Use
             assigned
             by
             Helmont
             ,
             is
             to
             change
             the
             acid
             Cream
             brought
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             forthwith
             into
             a
             brackish
             Salt.
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             proper
             Vein
             called
             
               Vena
               duodena
            
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             an
             Artery
             from
             the
             right
             Branch
             of
             the
             Caeliaca
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             called
             JEJUNUM
             ,
             because
             for
             the
             most
             part
             it
             is
             more
             empty
             then
             
             the
             rest
             ,
             especially
             in
             Dissections
             .
             1.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             plenty
             and
             greatness
             of
             the
             Mesaraicks
             [
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             ]
             which
             in
             that
             place
             are
             as
             it
             were
             infinite
             ,
             and
             do
             presently
             suck
             out
             of
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             .
             2.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             moistness
             of
             the
             Chyle
             passing
             through
             .
             3.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             nearness
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             4.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             Acrimony
             of
             Choler
             .
             For
             the
             cholerick
             or
             Gall-passage
             ,
             enters
             in
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             Gut
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             bringing
             Choler
             from
             the
             Liver
             to
             provoke
             Expulsion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             inner
             Membrane
             is
             longer
             then
             the
             Outer
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             wrinkled
             into
             Foles
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             stop
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             slipping
             by
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             falsly
             saies
             that
             Women
             have
             no
             Jejunum
             Intestinum
             ,
             being
             deceived
             by
             those
             ,
             who
             either
             were
             dull-sighted
             ,
             or
             finding
             this
             Gut
             filled
             ,
             thought
             it
             could
             not
             be
             the
             Jejunum
             .
             Laurentius
             observes
             ,
             that
             it
             appears
             somwhat
             reddish
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Neighborhood
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             
               Mesenterica
               dextra
            
             ,
             which
             are
             common
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             excepting
             the
             last
             ,
             or
             
               rectum
               Intestinum
            
             ,
             the
             straight
             Gut.
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             Arteries
             from
             the
             upper
             Mesenterick
             Artery
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             from
             a
             Branch
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             which
             is
             spred
             out
             unto
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             called
             Ileon
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             rouled
             so
             and
             twined
             ,
             it
             is
             also
             for
             
             that
             cause
             termed
             Volvulus
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             many
             Circumvolutions
             ,
             which
             make
             for
             the
             tarriance
             of
             the
             Meat
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             it
             hath
             fewer
             pleites
             or
             foldings
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             presently
             after
             the
             Jejunum
             ,
             where
             few
             mesaraick
          
           
             
               The
               Coats
               and
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Guts
               are
               explained
               in
               this
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               XI
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Gut
               together
               with
               the
               Mesaraick
               Vessels
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     whole
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     External
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     separated
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     Carriage
                     of
                     the
                     Vessels
                     under
                     it
                     may
                     be
                     discerned
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     middle
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Guts
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     first
                     proper
                     Coat
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DEF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mesenterick
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     of
                     which
                  
                   D
                   
                     points
                     out
                     the
                     Vein
                  
                   ,
                   E
                   
                     the
                     Artery
                  
                   ,
                   F
                   
                     the
                     Nerve
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Expresses
               the
               Coats
               by
               themselves
               .
               
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     common
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Guts
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     middle
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Guts
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     inmost
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Guts
                     with
                     its
                     Plaites
                     elegantly
                     expressed
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IIII.
               Presents
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 rectum
              
               ,
               or
               straight
               Gut.
               
               
                 
                   K.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     Intestinum
                     rectum
                     ,
                     or
                     straight
                     Gut
                     ,
                     or
                     Arse-gut
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Muscles
                     called
                  
                   Levatores
                   Ani
                   ,
                   
                     or
                     Lifters
                     up
                     of
                     the
                     Fundament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     Sphincter
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Arse
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               25.
               
            
          
           
             Veins
             are
             inserted
             .
          
           
             It
             ends
             at
             the
             Caecum
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             under
             the
             Navil
             ,
             at
             the
             Flanks
             and
             Hips
             on
             each
             side
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             the
             longest
             Gut
             ,
             being
             near
             upon
             twenty
             one
             hands
             breadths
             in
             length
             ;
             it
             is
             one
             finger
             broad
             .
             But
             the
             Jejunum
             is
             not
             so
             long
             ,
             viz.
             about
             twelve
             or
             thirteen
             Hands-breadth
             long
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             fingers
             in
             breadth
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             puffed
             up
             with
             Wind.
             And
             as
             the
             Ileon
             is
             under
             the
             Navil
             ,
             so
             the
             Jejunum
             possesses
             well
             near
             all
             the
             space
             about
             the
             Navil
             ,
             with
             its
             very
             many
             turnings
             and
             windings
             .
          
           
             This
             Ileon
             may
             frequently
             slip
             into
             the
             Cod
             ,
             whence
             proceeds
             the
             Hernia
             
             Intestinalis
             ,
             or
             Rupture
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
             And
             in
             this
             Gut
             happens
             the
             Volvulus
             or
             
               Iliaca
               Passio
            
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Patient
             commonly
             
             vomits
             Dung.
             
          
           
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             somtimes
             three
             Appendices
             in
             this
             Gut
             ,
             resembling
             the
             
               Intestinum
               caecum
            
          
           
             The
             
               first
               thick
               Gut
            
             is
             called
             Caecum
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             of
             the
             obscure
             Use
             it
             hath
             in
             
             persons
             grown
             up
             ,
             howbeit
             in
             the
             Infant
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             to
             receive
             the
             Excrements
             .
             Knobleth
             indeed
             saith
             that
             it
             hath
             a
             double
             Orifice
             ,
             severed
             with
             a
             membranous
             Partition
             ,
             that
             by
             one
             it
             may
             receive
             from
             the
             Ileon
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             other
             deliver
             into
             the
             Colon
             ;
             but
             we
             have
             not
             yet
             found
             this
             in
             any
             man
             ,
             in
             whom
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Orifice
             takes
             in
             and
             gives
             out
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             it
             hath
             only
             one
             Hole
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             also
             called
             Monocolon
             .
             For
             it
             is
             a
             little
             Appendix
             like
             a
             long
             Worm
             ,
             which
             arising
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             Colon
             ,
             and
             the
             End
             of
             Ilium
             ,
             of
             a
             substance
             sufficiently
             thick
             ,
             spreds
             it self
             upon
             the
             Colon
             like
             a
             twined
             worm
             ,
             and
             is
             annexed
             to
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ;
             but
             by
             its
             End
             ,
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             right
             Kidneys
             ,
             the
             Peritonaeum
             coming
             between
             ,
             and
             is
             quite
             free
             and
             loose
             from
             the
             Mesenterie
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             four
             fingers
             long
             ,
             and
             as
             broad
             as
             ones
             thumb
             ,
             but
             the
             Cavity
             thereof
             is
             very
             strait
             .
             Riolanus
             did
             find
             it
             exceeding
             wide
             ,
             and
             equal
             to
             the
             Stoma
             it self
             ,
             as
             I
             also
             have
             seen
             it
             .
             Sylvius
             did
             in
             many
             find
             it
             solid
             ,
             without
             any
             Followness
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             persons
             ,
             the
             Dung
             
             does
             go
             immediately
             from
             the
             Ileon
             into
             the
             Colon.
             And
             Massa
             suspects
             that
             this
             Appendix
             is
             only
             bred
             when
             the
             Child
             being
             from
             its
             Birth
             troubled
             with
             a
             Loosness
             ,
             the
             liquid
             Dung
             passing
             speedily
             by
             the
             Caecum
             ,
             and
             not
             abiding
             therein
             ,
             being
             frustrated
             of
             its
             Office
             ,
             it
             grows
             lean
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             of
             the
             same
             thinness
             in
             a
             Child
             new
             born
             .
          
           
             The
             Ancients
             by
             the
             Caecum
             understood
             
             that
             globous
             and
             capacious
             part
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Colon
             ,
             which
             Celsus
             and
             
               Rufus
               Ephesius
            
             intimate
             .
             For
             that
             it
             was
             known
             to
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             contrary
             to
             what
             Laurembergius
             imagins
             ,
             I
             do
             hence
             prove
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             They
             dissected
             Beasts
             .
             2.
             
             Pollux
             and
             Aristotle
             have
             set
             it
             down
             distinctly
             .
             3.
             
             Galen
             hath
             distinguished
             it
             from
             the
             Colon
             ,
             both
             by
             Use
             and
             Situation
             ,
             placing
             the
             Caecum
             on
             the
             right
             Hand
             ,
             and
             the
             Colon
             on
             the
             left
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Caecum
             is
             ,
             not
             to
             be
             only
             for
             a
             marke
             or
             sign
             ,
             as
             Hofman
             imagines
             ,
             But
             first
             to
             receive
             Excrements
             ,
             least
             they
             slip
             down
             violently
             into
             the
             Colon
             ,
             and
             breed
             pains
             ,
             and
             force
             us
             to
             be
             contiually
             going
             to
             stool
             .
             And
             there
             some
             imagine
             the
             Dreggs
             or
             Excrements
             proceeding
             from
             cherries
             and
             cherry-stones
             ,
             which
             have
             been
             voided
             sorty
             daies
             after
             they
             were
             eaten
             ,
             did
             lie
             lurking
             .
             The
             Conciliator
             contends
             ,
             that
             the
             Dung
             is
             here
             separated
             from
             all
             chylous
             Matter
             .
             Helmont
             places
             the
             
               Fermentum
               stercoreum
            
             or
             turdie
             Leaven
             ,
             which
             turns
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             Chyle
             into
             plain
             Turds
             ,
             in
             this
             place
             .
             2.
             
             It
             may
             help
             somewhat
             towards
             the
             Elaboration
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             either
             by
             sucking
             out
             of
             the
             white
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             some
             neglected
             parcels
             of
             Chyle
             ,
             as
             Galen
             said
             ,
             or
             by
             digesting
             the
             inobedient
             Chylus
             ,
             which
             could
             not
             be
             tamed
             ,
             in
             the
             Stomach
             and
             small
             Guts
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             multitude
             of
             Food
             taken
             in
             ,
             as
             Zerbus
             supposes
             .
             3.
             
             It
             may
             be
             instead
             of
             a
             Ligament
             to
             sustain
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             least
             it
             fall
             down
             .
             But
             Riolanus
             observed
             this
             very
             Gut
             Caecum
             in
             a
             certain
             Apothecary
             rouled
             to
             the
             Groin
             ,
             and
             in
             little
             Boys
             into
             their
             Cod
             ,
             in
             whom
             it
             rested
             upon
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
               .
               Severinus
            
             suspects
             that
             the
             Reason
             why
             Dogs
             void
             their
             Dung
             with
             more
             then
             ordinary
             straining
             ,
             is
             ,
             because
             the
             caecum
             is
             in
             Dogs
             very
             narrow
             at
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             oblique
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               thick
               Gut
            
             is
             called
             Colon
             ,
             from
             the
             torment
             which
             is
             somtimes
             
             therein
             caused
             ,
             by
             colick
             pains
             .
             Some
             think
             t
             is
             so
             called
             from
             its
             Hollowness
             ,
             and
             because
             it
             shapes
             the
             Belly
             .
             Others
             derive
             it
             from
             a
             word
             signifying
             to
             delay
             ,
             because
             it
             gives
             a
             stop
             to
             the
             Excrements
             that
             are
             in
             passage
             .
             The
             Author
             of
             a
             Treatise
             falsly
             ascribed
             to
             Galen
             ,
             derives
             it
             
               a
               colando
            
             ,
             from
             straining
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             narrow
             like
             a
             strainner
             ,
             and
             involved
             ,
             that
             there
             may
             be
             a
             Gradation
             of
             the
             Excrement
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             not
             descend
             all
             at
             once
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             various
             ,
             for
             its
             beginning
             which
             is
             capacious
             and
             round
             ,
             is
             in
             
             the
             right
             Flank
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             caecum
             at
             the
             right
             Kidney
             to
             which
             it
             sticks
             ;
             then
             it
             is
             turned
             back
             upwards
             under
             the
             Liver
             ;
             where
             it
             is
             somtimes
             knit
             to
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             and
             is
             thereby
             dyed
             with
             a
             clay-color
             yellowishness
             :
             It
             passes
             further
             ,
             athwart
             ,
             under
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             with
             thin
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             then
             it
             is
             tyed
             to
             the
             left
             Kidney
             ,
             where
             it
             hath
             very
             crooked
             Turnings
             ,
             which
             are
             apt
             to
             detain
             both
             Dung
             and
             Wind
             ;
             and
             from
             thence
             it
             ends
             st●…ong
             ,
             upon
             the
             Rectum
             .
             Wherefore
             it
             doth
             a●…
             compass
             the
             whole
             Belly
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             ascends
             ,
             and
             otherwhile
             descends
             (
             hence
             such
             as
             do
             their
             business
             ,
             have
             commonly
             one
             Harvest
             after
             another
             distinct
             )
             that
             the
             Excrements
             may
             be
             the
             longer
             detained
             ,
             and
             not
             flow
             out
             all
             on
             a
             sudden
             ,
             and
             that
             we
             may
             not
             every
             foot
             be
             sollicited
             to
             go
             to
             stool
             .
             To
             which
             intent
             also
             serve
             its
             Magnitude
             and
             Cells
             .
             For
             ;
          
           
             It
             is
             commonly
             eight
             or
             nine
             hands-breath
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             the
             thickest
             and
             widest
             of
             all
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             received
             Cells
             ,
             that
             any
             hard
             Matter
             ,
             not
             before
             sufficiently
             digested
             ,
             might
             be
             perfectly
             concocted
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             through
             the
             milkie
             Mesaraicks
             ,
             which
             are
             carried
             to
             the
             Colon
             ,
             that
             said
             Matter
             being
             concocted
             ,
             might
             be
             sent
             unto
             the
             Liver
             .
             And
             that
             these
             Cells
             might
             not
             be
             dissolved
             ,
             and
             that
             being
             collected
             into
             themselves
             ,
             they
             might
             make
             the
             Cavities
             at
             times
             ,
             somtimes
             greater
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             less
             .
          
           
             A
             Ligament
             described
             by
             few
             ,
             or
             a
             
               certain
               Band
            
             ,
             as
             broad
             as
             an
             half
             finger
             ,
             is
             implanted
             through
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             on
             the
             upper
             part
             long-wise
             ,
             and
             arising
             from
             the
             Caecum
             ,
             is
             termined
             in
             the
             Rectum
             .
             Moreover
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             largeness
             ;
             it
             hath
             two
             strong
             Ligaments
             ,
             one
             upwards
             ,
             another
             downwards
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             tyed
             to
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             Parts
             .
             Riolanus
             nevertheless
             accounts
             these
             two
             Ligaments
             to
             be
             but
             one
             ,
             opposite
             to
             the
             upper
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             According
             to
             the
             Longitude
             of
             the
             Colon
             ,
             there
             are
             extrinsecally
             observed
             certain
             fat
             Appendices
             ,
             from
             the
             Spleen
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             
               Rectum
               Intestinum
            
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             and
             Spigelius
             have
             observed
             .
             Whose
             use
             is
             to
             moisten
             the
             Gut
             ,
             that
             the
             Excrements
             may
             slide
             down
             the
             more
             easily
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Colon
             ,
             a
             
             Valve
             is
             placed
             sufficiently
             thick
             and
             membranous
             ,
             invented
             by
             Baubinus
             ,
             looking
             upwards
             ,
             not
             downwards
             ,
             as
             Laurentius
             writes
             :
             for
             the
             Excrements
             do
             ascend
             and
             not
             descend
             ,
             when
             they
             pass
             out
             of
             the
             Ileon
             into
             the
             Colon
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             upper
             Situation
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
             But
             if
             the
             Natural
             setling
             of
             the
             Excrements
             be
             considered
             ,
             they
             descend
             making
             hast
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             :
             And
             thus
             Bartholinus
             and
             Sperlingerus
             are
             reconciled
             .
             The
             first
             Invention
             of
             this
             Valve
             ,
             seems
             to
             be
             long
             unto
             
               Salomon
               Alberts
            
             an
             Anatomist
             of
             Witteberg
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             an
             Appendix
             to
             three
             Orations
             set
             forth
             by
             him
             ,
             about
             the
             End
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Observations
             of
             
               Schenkius
               ,
               Lib.
            
             3.
             
             
               Title
               de
               Ilio
            
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             besides
             
               Bauhinus
               Varolus
            
             did
             also
             attribute
             the
             Invention
             thereof
             unto
             himself
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             well
             known
             Anatomist
             in
             the
             University
             of
             Padua
             ,
             in
             the
             year
             1572.
             
             And
             therefore
             Riolanus
             conceives
             the
             first
             Invention
             thereof
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             attributed
             rather
             to
             him
             then
             Bauhinus
             ;
             But
             truly
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             vain
             that
             he
             seeks
             to
             bereave
             him
             of
             this
             commendation
             ,
             seeing
             divers
             Persons
             may
             observe
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             at
             one
             or
             sundry
             times
             ,
             without
             stealing
             the
             Invention
             one
             from
             another
             .
             For
             Nature
             lies
             open
             to
             all
             diligent
             Enquires
             .
          
           
             
               It
               is
               found
            
             after
             this
             manner
             :
             Water
             
             poured
             or
             wind
             blown
             into
             the
             Gut
             Ileon
             ,
             cannot
             pass
             through
             unless
             violently
             :
             But
             Water
             doth
             a
             little
             mar
             the
             Gut.
             
          
           
             Touching
             its
             Figure
             or
             Shape
             and
             Number
             ,
             Authors
             do
             not
             consent
             .
             For
             omitting
             such
             as
             wholly
             deny
             the
             same
             ;
             Bauhinus
             determines
             that
             it
             is
             only
             one
             ,
             having
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Nail
             .
             Archangelus
             saith
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             three
             Valves
             at
             the
             Caecum
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             looking
             downwards
             .
             I
             have
             sought
             it
             at
             Padua
             in
             many
             Bodies
             ,
             and
             at
             other
             places
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             found
             it
             ,
             but
             never
             more
             then
             one
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             an
             orbicular
             or
             circular
             Shape
             .
             Pavius
             to
             Hildanus
             and
             afterwards
             Falcoburgius
             ,
             did
             not
             find
             out
             a
             membranous
             Valve
             ,
             but
             rather
             a
             Ring
             or
             Circle
             with
             an
             hanging
             brim
             .
             But
             the
             said
             Circle
             is
             nothing
             but
             a
             Valve
             ,
             for
             some
             Valves
             are
             
             found
             of
             a
             circular
             Figure
             ,
             both
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             Veins
             .
             The
             whole
             constitution
             of
             this
             Valve
             is
             elegantly
             described
             by
             that
             great
             Practitioner
             
               Nicholas
               Tulpius
            
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Circle
             on
             which
             hangs
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             two
             fingers
             broad
             ,
             and
             so
             shaped
             that
             it
             is
             fit
             to
             shut
             the
             egress
             of
             Intestinum
             Ileum
             .
             Before
             which
             there
             hangs
             a
             Cortin
             or
             slack
             veile
             as
             it
             were
             ;
             now
             the
             latitude
             of
             this
             Pendulous
             Membrane
             is
             very
             unequal
             ;
             for
             where
             it
             looks
             towards
             the
             Ileum
             ,
             it
             diffuses
             it self
             loosely
             ,
             to
             the
             quantity
             of
             near
             two
             fingers
             breadth
             ,
             but
             the
             farther
             from
             the
             place
             it
             is
             ,
             the
             closelyer
             it
             is
             strait'ned
             ,
             so
             that
             about
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Gut
             (
             for
             so
             far
             it
             runs
             )
             it
             is
             either
             quite
             obliterated
             ,
             and
             ends
             in
             to
             that
             Membranous
             compass
             ,
             which
             inwardly
             severs
             the
             Intestinum
             Colon
             a
             Caeco
             .
             From
             which
             unequal
             latitude
             ,
             there
             follows
             necessarily
             that
             same
             circular
             form
             ,
             which
             the
             value
             expresses
             being
             artificially
             extended
             :
             as
             the
             smaller
             picture
             faithfully
             expresses
             .
             Now
             this
             Membrane
             is
             fastned
             above
             to
             that
             same
             fibrous
             circle
             which
             ends
             the
             Colon
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             fastned
             below
             or
             rather
             strongly
             held
             ,
             by
             two
             very
             little
             Membranes
             ,
             proceeding
             on
             both
             sides
             from
             the
             side
             of
             that
             Orifice
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             thinner
             Guts
             disburthen
             themselves
             into
             the
             wider
             :
             the
             use
             of
             which
             bones
             ,
             is
             to
             hinder
             that
             the
             value
             do
             not
             easily
             totter
             ,
             for
             they
             bind
             it
             to
             the
             Ileum
             :
             But
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             value
             doth
             wave
             up
             and
             down
             loosely
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             that
             nothing
             may
             pass
             back
             out
             of
             the
             thick
             Guts
             into
             the
             thin
             ,
             be
             it
             Wind
             or
             Excrement
             ,
             especially
             in
             a
             strong
             excretion
             or
             straining
             at
             stool
             ,
             or
             in
             costiveness
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             matter
             of
             Clysters
             cannot
             naturally
             reach
             unto
             the
             smal
             Guts
             .
          
           
             The
             Colon
             hath
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             under
             the
             Stomach
             from
             the
             Epiplois
             postica
             .
             But
             in
             the
             left
             side
             it
             hath
             the
             Haemorrhoidal
             Vein
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             lower
             Mesenterick
             ,
             the
             Haemorrhoidal
             Artery
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             thick
             Gut
             is
             termed
             RECTUM
             ,
             because
             it
             goes
             straight
             out
             ,
             
             without
             any
             turning
             ,
             and
             ends
             at
             the
             Fundament
             ;
             for
             it
             goes
             streight
             downwards
             ,
             from
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Os
             Sacrum
             to
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             Crupper-bone
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             is
             Knit
             firmly
             ,
             by
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             least
             it
             fal
             of
             :
             also
             it
             grows
             in
             men
             to
             the
             Pispipe
             in
             the
             Yard
             ;
             to
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             in
             Women
             ,
             by
             mediation
             of
             a
             Musculous
             substance
             .
             Whence
             springs
             the
             consent
             of
             these
             parts
             in
             Men
             and
             Women
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             Womb
             and
             this
             Gut
             in
             Women
             ,
             for
             the
             Gut
             being
             exulcerated
             ,
             oft-times
             the
             Excrement
             is
             cast
             out
             the
             female
             Privity
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             long
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             an
             Hand-breath
             and
             an
             half
             ,
             and
             three
             fingers
             broad
             ;
             and
             Corpulent
             and
             thick
             ,
             having
             Fat
             Appurtenances
             ,
             growing
             thereto
             on
             the
             outside
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             Hypogastrick
             branch
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             ,
             and
             Haemorrhoidal
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Four
             Nerves
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             end
             thereof
             ,
             which
             make
             this
             Gut
             very
             sensible
             ,
             as
             is
             apparent
             in
             the
             Tenesmus
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             end
             is
             termed
             Podex
             or
             Anus
             ,
             the
             Arse
             or
             Fundament
             ,
             having
             three
             Muscles
             ,
             
             of
             which
             peradventure
             five
             may
             be
             made
             .
             The
             ,
          
           
             
               This
               TABLE
               sets
               forth
               that
               Valve
               which
               is
               found
               in
               the
               Guts
               .
            
             
               The
               XII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     a.
                     The
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     b.
                     Caecum
                     or
                     the
                     blind
                     Gut.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ccc
                     .
                     Colon.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   
                     dddd
                     .
                     The
                     valve
                     hanging
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     e.
                     The
                     entrance
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ffffff
                     .
                     The
                     Gut
                     Colon
                     slit
                     open
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     gg
                     .
                     The
                     inner
                     coat
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Colon.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     hhh
                     .
                     The
                     Valve
                     lifted
                     up
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     i.
                     The
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     kkk
                     .
                     The
                     Circle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     l.
                     Its
                     Connexion
                     with
                     the
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     a.
                     The
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     b.
                     Caecum
                     or
                     the
                     blind
                     Gut.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ccc
                     .
                     Colon.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   
                     dddd
                     .
                     The
                     valve
                     hanging
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     e.
                     The
                     entrance
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ffffff
                     .
                     The
                     Gut
                     Colon
                     slit
                     open
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     gg
                     .
                     The
                     inner
                     coat
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Colon.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     hhh
                     .
                     The
                     Valve
                     lifted
                     up
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     i.
                     The
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     kkk
                     .
                     The
                     Circle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     l.
                     Its
                     Connexion
                     with
                     the
                     Ileum
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               27
            
          
           
             I.
             Is
             termed
             Sphincter
             
             or
             
               Ani
               Constricter
            
             ,
             the
             shutter
             or
             contractor
             of
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             so
             that
             though
             some
             part
             thereof
             may
             be
             cut
             of
             in
             Fistula's
             or
             other
             Diseases
             ,
             yet
             is
             not
             therefore
             the
             whole
             use
             thereof
             ,
             quite
             taken
             away
             .
          
           
             Galen
             and
             Fallopius
             and
             others
             do
             make
             two
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             because
             its
             upper
             part
             is
             thicker
             ;
             the
             inferior
             part
             is
             inseparably
             annexed
             to
             the
             Skin
             ,
             as
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             Fore-head
             and
             Eye-lids
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Galen
             called
             this
             part
             the
             skinny
             Muscle
             ,
             or
             the
             fleshy
             Skin
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             lower
             Vertebra's
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             and
             is
             compassed
             with
             transverse
             Fibres
             all
             a
             long
             the
             Fundament
             .
          
           
           
             It
             is
             
               fastned
               on
               the
               forepart
            
             .
             1.
             
             To
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             by
             Fibrous
             couplings
             .
             2.
             
             To
             the
             Yard
             ,
             to
             the
             Muscles
             whereof
             it
             gives
             beginning
             .
             3.
             
             To
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb.
             Behind
             to
             the
             Crupper-bone
             which
             lies
             under
             it
             .
             
               At
               the
               sides
            
             ,
             by
             Ligaments
             produced
             from
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Os
               Corae
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             use
             is
             ,
             to
             purse
             up
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             do
             our
             business
             when
             we
             please
             .
             And
             therefore
             being
             palsied
             or
             otherwise
             hurt
             ,
             it
             makes
             the
             dung
             to
             come
             from
             a
             man
             whether
             he
             will
             or
             no
             :
             even
             as
             the
             Sphincter
             of
             the
             Bladder
             being
             hurt
             ,
             the
             piss
             flows
             out
             involuntarily
             .
          
           
             II.
             and
             III.
             Two
             
               other
               Muscles
            
             have
             insertions
             into
             the
             upper
             part
             
             of
             the
             Sphincter
             ,
             very
             much
             Commixed
             therewith
             .
             They
             are
             called
             
               Ani
               Levatores
            
             Arse-lifters
             .
             Because
             ,
          
           
             Their
             use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Fundament
             upwards
             into
             its
             own
             place
             again
             ,
             after
             the
             Excrements
             are
             voided
             .
             especially
             when
             we
             have
             been
             forced
             to
             strain
             hard
             at
             stool
             .
             And
             therefore
             when
             they
             have
             been
             weakned
             or
             slacked
             ,
             somtimes
             the
             Fundament
             is
             drawn
             up
             with
             difficulty
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             it
             continues
             hanging
             forth
             .
          
           
             These
             Muscles
             are
             under
             the
             Bladder
             broad
             and
             thin
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Share
             ,
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             and
             Hip
             :
             from
             whence
             they
             are
             carried
             downwards
             ,
             to
             the
             right
             and
             left
             sides
             of
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             which
             they
             compass
             about
             .
             But
             they
             have
             a
             certain
             peculiar
             and
             distinct
             portion
             ,
             growing
             to
             the
             Root
             and
             Neck
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             counted
             a
             third
             and
             distinct
             Muscle
             .
             The
             use
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ceases
             in
             those
             who
             have
             their
             Fundament
             shut
             up
             .
             Such
             a
             Case
             Fernelius
             saw
             ,
             And
             I
             saw
             the
             like
             at
             Padua
             in
             one
             named
             Anna
             ,
             whose
             Fundament
             was
             so
             shut
             up
             ,
             that
             he
             voided
             his
             Excements
             by
             his
             mouth
             when
             concoction
             was
             finished
             ,
             having
             an
             Horn
             to
             put
             into
             his
             mouth
             for
             that
             end
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Mesentery
             .
          
           
             THe
             Mesenterium
             is
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             
             it
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             not
             because
             it
             is
             the
             middle
             Gut
             as
             
               Cicero
               will
            
             have
             it
             [
             and
             Macrobius
             who
             follows
             him
             ;
             for
             it
             doth
             not
             partake
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             Gut
             ,
             save
             in
             that
             it
             is
             Membranous
             ,
             nor
             is
             there
             any
             defence
             for
             Laurembergius
             ,
             because
             we
             are
             rightly
             said
             to
             dwell
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             supposing
             the
             Earth
             to
             be
             a
             part
             of
             the
             World.
             Spigelius
             doth
             more
             rightly
             interpret
          
           
             
               Here
               are
               described
               four
               kinds
               of
               Vessels
               disseminated
               through
               the
               Mesenterium
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Pancreas
               is
               discovered
               ,
               in
               its
               Natural
               Situation
               .
            
             
               The
               XIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Convexe
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Concave
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Gall-Bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     passage
                     for
                     the
                     Gall.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Duodenum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Pancreas
                     or
                     Sweet-bread
                     whole
                     in
                     its
                     proper
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spleenic
                     Vessels
                     detected
                     by
                     opening
                     the
                     Pancreas
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Spleen
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Mesenterick
                     branch
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Portae
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Mesenterick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     A
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     sixt
                     part
                     spred
                     up
                     and
                     down
                     in
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MMMM
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Guts
                     cleaving
                     to
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Intestinum
                     Jejunum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OOOO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mesentery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PPPPPP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vessels
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     of
                     which
                     the
                     black
                     ones
                     the
                     Veins
                     ,
                     those
                     by
                     the
                     black
                     ones
                     the
                     Arteries
                     ;
                     and
                     the
                     white
                     ones
                     signifie
                     the
                     Nerves
                     and
                     〈◊〉
                     Veins
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQQQQ
                   .
                   
                     〈…〉
                     through
                     〈…〉
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               28
            
          
           
             
             
               This
               TABLE
               expresses
               the
               Mesentery
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               The
               XIV
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               Figure
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Centre
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     and
                     that
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                     ,
                     where
                     it
                     arises
                     from
                     the
                     Membranes
                     of
                     the
                     Peritonaeum
                     ,
                     which
                     knit
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     and
                     the
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     in
                     this
                     place
                     ,
                     to
                     the
                     Vertebra's
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     great
                     Kernel
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     which
                     Asellius
                     terms
                     Pancreas
                     ,
                     into
                     which
                     all
                     the
                     milkie
                     Veins
                     are
                     knit
                     together
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     Glandules
                     or
                     Kernels
                     placed
                     between
                     the
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     which
                     reach
                     as
                     far
                     as
                     to
                     the
                     Guts
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   EEE
                   .
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     which
                     ties
                     the
                     thin
                     Guts
                     to
                     the
                     Back
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   G.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     which
                     is
                     fastned
                     to
                     the
                     Colon
                     ,
                     from
                     the
                     right
                     Kidney
                     to
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     lower
                     Call
                     ,
                     which
                     in
                     this
                     place
                     supplies
                     the
                     Office
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     fastening
                     that
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Colon
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     stretched
                     out
                     under
                     the
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     stomach
                     ,
                     unto
                     the
                     Back
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   I.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     knitting
                     together
                     the
                     Colon
                     ,
                     drawn
                     out
                     from
                     the
                     Spleen
                     to
                     the
                     streight
                     Gut.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   K.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     fastning
                     the
                     streight
                     Gut
                     unto
                     the
                     Back
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Membranes
                     of
                     the
                     Mesenterium
                     ,
                     drawn
                     asunder
                     by
                     the
                     Nailes
                     ,
                     between
                     which
                     Vessels
                     are
                     carryed
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Fat
                     and
                     Kernels
                     are
                     contained
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     other
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               29
            
          
           
             the
             word
             Iutestinum
             in
             Cicero
             ,
             for
             some
             midling
             bowel
             ]
             but
             because
             like
             a
             Circle
             it
             embraces
             the
             Guts
             round
             ,
             and
             gathers
             them
             together
             into
             the
             form
             of
             a
             Globe
             ,
             and
             cloaths
             them
             .
             T
             is
             called
             also
             
               Mesaraeon
               :
               Gaza
            
             in
             Aristotle
             translates
             it
             Lactes
             [
             in
             a
             large
             sense
             ]
             thereby
             understanding
             that
             which
             involves
             and
             wraps
             up
             the
             Lactes
             that
             is
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             what
             ever
             is
             contained
             in
             them
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             one
             ;
             but
             others
             divide
             it
             into
             the
             Mesaraeon
             or
             Mesenterium
             ,
             and
             the
             
             Meso-Colon
             .
             The
             former
             being
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             belly
             and
             knitting
             together
             the
             smal
             Guts
             :
             the
             latter
             which
             knits
             up
             the
             Colon
             ,
             in
             the
             right
             and
             left
             side
             and
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             thereof
             ,
             cleaves
             to
             the
             right
             Gut.
             
          
           
             It
             Figure
             is
             very
             near
             Circular
             ,
             and
             after
             it
             hath
             been
             narrow
             in
             its
             rise
             ,
             in
             its
             
             progress
             ,
             at
             the
             Circumference
             it
             degenerates
             into
             very
             many
             foldings
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             gather
             in
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Guts
             :
             for
             one
             hands
             breadth
             of
             the
             Mesentry
             ,
             doth
             embrace
             more
             then
             fourteen
             handsbreadths
             of
             the
             Guts
             in
             a
             narrow
             space
             .
             In
             the
             sides
             it
             becomes
             oblong
             ,
             especially
             on
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             where
             it
             descends
             to
             the
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             .
             Whereupon
             Galen
             made
             a
             threefold
             Mesentery
             :
             a
             right
             ,
             left
             and
             middle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             from
             the
             Centre
             to
             the
             Circumference
             is
             a
             span
             :
             but
             its
             
             Longitude
             and
             Circumference
             is
             three
             ells
             .
          
           
             It
             Arises
             at
             the
             first
             and
             third
             Vertebra
             of
             
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             [
             which
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             the
             Cause
             of
             that
             great
             consent
             which
             is
             between
             the
             Loyns
             and
             the
             Guts
             ]
             where
             Membranous
             Fibres
             are
             produced
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             which
             turn
             into
             strong
             Membranes
             ,
          
           
             Through
             which
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             
             [
             both
             the
             Blood
             and
             the
             Chyle-bearers
             ]
             being
             exceeding
             smal
             and
             numerous
             ,
             and
             by
             little
             and
             little
             running
             together
             into
             fewer
             and
             greater
             ,
             are
             disseminated
             .
             [
             But
             of
             these
             more
             largely
             in
             the
             first
             Manual
             Chap.
             3.
             ]
             And
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             the
             Arteries
             :
             [
             from
             the
             Caliaca
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             carry
             arterial
             blood
             with
             heat
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             and
             Guts
             for
             the
             Nutrition
             and
             Fermentation
             of
             each
             of
             them
             and
             in
             no
             wise
             to
             draw
             chyle
             in
             a
             sound
             state
             of
             Body
             ,
             or
             other
             things
             as
             Varolius
             and
             Spigelius
             conceit
             .
             And
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             Circulated
             even
             in
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             these
             Arteries
             ,
             I
             shall
             demonstrate
             hereafter
             against
             Riolanus
             .
             ]
             It
             receives
             also
             Nerves
             from
             those
             which
             are
             carried
             from
             the
             sixth
             pair
             ,
             to
             the
             roots
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Nerves
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             give
             the
             sense
             of
             Feeling
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             as
             is
             manifest
             in
             the
             bastard
             colick
             and
             other
             pains
             ;
             and
             an
             obscure
             motion
             in
             distribution
             of
             the
             chyle
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Kernels
             interposed
             to
             fil
             up
             the
             
             spaces
             ,
             and
             to
             cherish
             the
             heat
             :
             but
             one
             greater
             then
             the
             rest
             it
             hath
             at
             its
             original
             which
             Asellius
             following
             Fallopius
             ,
             terms
             Pancreas
             :
             different
             from
             the
             other
             Pancreas
             situate
             under
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Duodenum
             .
             Out
             of
             this
             he
             fetches
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             milky
             Veins
             ,
             with
             probability
             enough
             ,
             because
             there
             they
             grow
             all
             into
             one
             ,
             and
             from
             hence
             are
             carryed
             both
             downwards
             and
             upwards
             to
             the
             Liver
             ▪
             Add
             hereunto
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             in
             color
             like
             those
             Veins
             ;
             and
             the
             
             Veins
             themselves
             have
             in
             this
             place
             somwhat
             proper
             ,
             viz.
             that
             they
             are
             interwoven
             in
             the
             whole
             Body
             of
             this
             Pancreas
             ,
             with
             wonderful
             turnings
             ,
             twistings
             ,
             and
             twinings
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             surrounded
             with
             Fat
             as
             in
             the
             Call
             ,
             which
             proceeds
             from
             fat
             blood
             slipt
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             retained
             by
             the
             density
             of
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             so
             congeled
             ;
             that
             it
             may
             cherish
             the
             Heat
             of
             those
             Parts
             ,
             and
             further
             the
             preparation
             of
             Chyle
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             these
             Kernels
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             prop
             up
             and
             support
             sundry
             Distributions
             
             of
             the
             Branches
             of
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             about
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             are
             the
             greatest
             Kernels
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             the
             Distribution
             of
             the
             greater
             and
             more
             collected
             Vessels
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             these
             Glandules
             or
             Kernels
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             at
             any
             time
             troubled
             with
             a
             scirrhous
             hard
             Tumor
             ;
             there
             follows
             a
             Leanness
             of
             the
             whol
             Body
             ,
             because
             they
             bear
             hard
             ,
             and
             lie
             upon
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             milkie
             Vein
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Nourishment
             cannot
             be
             freely
             carried
             through
             the
             said
             Veins
             .
             2.
             
             To
             moisten
             the
             Guts
             ,
             with
             the
             Humors
             which
             they
             suck
             out
             of
             the
             Parts
             ,
             and
             promote
             Digestion
             by
             way
             of
             boyling
             as
             it
             were
             .
             Which
             Use
             Spigelius
             denies
             ,
             because
             there
             are
             Animals
             that
             have
             not
             these
             Glandules
             ,
             and
             nevertheless
             are
             fat
             ;
             and
             others
             though
             they
             have
             these
             ,
             are
             lean
             .
             Which
             may
             happen
             without
             any
             prejudice
             to
             my
             assertion
             ,
             because
             these
             former
             Animals
             have
             such
             good
             Juyce
             ,
             as
             needs
             no
             purification
             ;
             the
             latter
             have
             so
             little
             nutritive
             Juyce
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             sufficiently
             be
             depurated
             by
             these
             Glandules
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             3.
             
             They
             serve
             to
             suck
             superfluous
             Humors
             out
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             which
             was
             Hippocrates
             his
             Opinion
             .
             I
             add
             4.
             
             A
             peculiar
             Use
             ,
             viz.
             to
             receive
             that
             plenty
             of
             milkie
             Veins
             which
             passes
             that
             way
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             some
             portion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             It
             is
             of
             like
             use
             with
             that
             greater
             middle
             Kernel
             ,
             and
             its
             substance
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             which
             exceeds
             this
             only
             in
             magnitude
             ,
             because
             greater
             milkie
             Veins
             pass
             that
             way
             .
             2.
             
             I
             observed
             that
             in
             Fishes
             ,
             especially
             in
             a
             Lump-fish
             male
             and
             female
             ,
             besides
             the
             great
             white
             one
             ,
             the
             others
             did
             also
             send
             forth
             a
             white
             Juyce
             .
             3.
             
             This
             being
             granted
             ,
             both
             Atrophia
             and
             other
             Diseases
             are
             better
             understood
             ,
             to
             which
             Opinion
             also
             Asellius
             seems
             to
             have
             enclined
             .
             And
             whereas
             Riolanus
             makes
             the
             Seat
             and
             Root
             of
             al
             Kings-evil
             swellings
             to
             be
             in
             these
             Kernels
             ,
             and
             saith
             they
             never
             shew
             themselves
             on
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             except
             the
             Mesenterie
             be
             first
             diseased
             with
             the
             same
             kind
             of
             Swellings
             ,
             is
             not
             likely
             ,
             for
             1.
             
             Though
             they
             may
             be
             remote
             and
             accidental
             causes
             .
             2.
             
             There
             is
             no
             communion
             between
             these
             kind
             of
             Swellings
             in
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             the
             Kernels
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             .
             3.
             
             Many
             have
             the
             Kings-evil
             swellings
             ,
             in
             whom
             these
             Kernels
             are
             perfectly
             sound
             .
             4.
             
             All
             would
             be
             subject
             to
             such
             Swellings
             ,
             because
             all
             have
             these
             Kernels
             .
             5.
             
             Those
             people
             dwelling
             under
             the
             Alpes
             ,
             that
             are
             so
             subject
             to
             these
             Swellings
             ,
             should
             have
             their
             Mesenterie
             differing
             from
             those
             that
             are
             not
             so
             troubled
             .
             6.
             
             The
             said
             Swellings
             are
             filled
             by
             any
             kind
             of
             Humor
             proceeding
             from
             any
             Region
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             is
             to
             be
             the
             common
             Band
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             whereby
             
             they
             are
             knit
             to
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             Use
             of
             its
             two
             Membranes
             ,
             is
             
             that
             through
             them
             the
             Vessels
             may
             pass
             safer
             unto
             the
             Guts
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Pancreas
             ,
             or
             Sweet-bread
             .
          
           
             THe
             Word
             Pancreas
             signifies
             All-flesh
             ,
             
             whereas
             this
             part
             should
             rather
             be
             call'd
             All-kernel
             ,
             its
             Substance
             being
             wholly
             glandulous
             ,
             loose
             it
             is
             and
             shapeless
             ,
             three
             or
             four
             fingers
             long
             ,
             somtimes
             six
             or
             seven
             ,
             and
             more
             ,
             cloathed
             with
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ▪
             and
             in
             fat
             Bodies
             ,
             it
             seems
             all
             made
             of
             Fat
             ,
             which
             others
             term
             dirty
             fat
             and
             moisture
             ;
             some
             Calicreas
             the
             Sweet-bread
             or
             White-bread
             ,
             and
             Lactes
             ;
             because
             of
             its
             milkie
             whiteness
             and
             softness
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             under
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ,
             
             the
             Duodenum
             and
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             the
             Regions
             of
             the
             Liver
             and
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             Now
             its
             Original
             is
             at
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             its
             Parenchyma
             is
             white
             .
          
           
             And
             it
             hath
             for
             Veins
             the
             Splenick
             
             Branch
             ;
             for
             Arteries
             the
             left
             Branch
             of
             
               Arteria
               Coeliaca
            
             ;
             for
             Nerves
             those
             of
             the
             sixt-pares
             branches
             ,
             which
             go
             to
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Duodenum
             ,
             and
             it
             hath
             also
             little
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               both
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               together
               with
               the
               new
               
                 Wirsungian
                 Passage
              
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Vessels
               drawn
               there
               through
               to
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               are
               expressed
               .
            
             
               The
               XV.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Pancreas
                     dissected
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     new
                     Passage
                     found
                     in
                     the
                     Pancrras
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   cccc
                   .
                   
                     Little
                     Branches
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Passage
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   d.
                   
                     The
                     Orifice
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Orifice
                     of
                     the
                     Choler-passage
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Choler-passage
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ggg
                   .
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Gut
                     Duodenum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     Splenicus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Spleenick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Arteria
                     Caeliaca
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LLL
                   .
                   
                     Anastomoses
                     or
                     Conjunctions
                     of
                     the
                     Mouths
                     of
                     the
                     Spleenick
                     Vein
                     and
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     Hemorrhoidal
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     Spleenick
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Body
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ingress
                     of
                     the
                     Vessels
                     in
                     the
                     Spleen
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     convex
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Spleens
                     Membrane
                     separated
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     flesh
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     blackish
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     concave
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     which
                     receives
                     the
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     spleenick
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     spleenick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               31
            
          
           
             Use
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             carry
             Chylus
             ut
             of
             the
             Duodenum
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             bo
             use
             1.
             
             
             It
             doth
             not
             reach
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
             2.
             
             A
             Valve
             hinders
             the
             Ingress
             .
             Nor
             doth
             it
             serve
             to
             carry
             Melancholy
             out
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             to
             which
             use
             serve
             the
             
               Capsulae
               atrabilariae
            
             ,
             the
             black
             Choler
             boxes
             .
             Nor
             to
             carry
             fermentative
             Juyce
             unto
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             as
             
               Horstius
               Junior
            
             ingeniously
             feignes
             ,
             Because
             1.
             
             Such
             Juyce
             is
             not
             bred
             in
             the
             Pancreas
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             glandulous
             Body
             .
             2.
             
             The
             way
             is
             more
             ready
             to
             that
             purpose
             ,
             from
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             this
             being
             a
             more
             troublesom
             and
             encombred
             passage
             ,
             for
             it
             would
             be
             troubled
             by
             meeting
             the
             Chylus
             in
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             and
             would
             be
             infected
             by
             the
             nearness
             of
             the
             Gall-passage
             .
             3.
             
             Never
             any
             such
             Juyce
             seen
             in
             this
             passage
             .
             4.
             
             Who
             will
             be
             bound
             that
             it
             shall
             be
             able
             to
             pass
             beyond
             the
             Pylorus
             ?
             Nor
             is
             it
             to
             prepare
             Chylus
             ,
             which
             Baccius
             affirmes
             to
             be
             found
             in
             living
             Creatures
             .
             Nor
             to
             nourish
             the
             Pancreas
             ,
             seeing
             that
             Humor
             is
             therefore
             unfit
             ,
             and
             the
             coeliack
             Arteries
             do
             that
             work
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             common
             good
             .
             But
             how
             ,
             or
             which
             way
             shall
             it
             return
             to
             the
             Liver
             ?
             For
             he
             rightly
             denies
             it
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
             Shall
             it
             return
             to
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ?
             There
             would
             be
             an
             infinite
             Circulation
             .
             He
             shall
             not
             easily
             find
             it
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             ;
             also
             he
             confounds
             the
             Pancreas
             with
             the
             large
             Kernel
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             .
             Nor
             finally
             does
             it
             send
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             Chyle
             to
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             as
             
               Licetus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             and
             Vestingus
             conceive
             ;
             for
             in
             this
             Passage
             no
             Chyle
             is
             seen
             ,
             but
             yellow
             Walls
             .
             Moreover
             the
             refuse
             of
             the
             Chyle
             is
             already
             voided
             by
             stool
             ,
             nor
             does
             the
             Chyle
             part
             with
             any
             new
             Excrement
             ,
             till
             it
             undergo
             a
             new
             change
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             Now
             sure
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             out
             of
             the
             
             Pancreas
             it self
             ,
             whose
             proper
             passage
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             in
             which
             it
             begins
             ,
             and
             is
             ended
             ,
             somwhat
             is
             thereby
             voided
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             it
             doth
             as
             I
             conjecture
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Purge
             forth
             Choler
             ,
             whether
             bred
             in
             the
             Digestion
             of
             the
             Pancreas
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             for
             each
             of
             these
             are
             taken
             to
             be
             Auxiliary-Livers
             .
             And
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Bladder-gall
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             which
             is
             conveniently
             joyned
             by
             its
             mouth
             ,
             to
             the
             other
             passage
             of
             the
             Livers-Gall-bladder
             ,
             by
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             so
             that
             look
             what
             use
             the
             one
             affords
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             same
             the
             other
             may
             be
             supposed
             to
             afford
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
             And
             to
             prevent
             our
             doubting
             ,
             the
             Humor
             of
             Choler
             daubs
             the
             inside
             of
             this
             Passage
             .
             To
             which
             Opinion
             of
             mine
             ,
             very
             many
             Learned
             men
             have
             asserted
             ,
             though
             in
             some
             things
             they
             dissent
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             receive
             into
             it self
             the
             Excrements
             of
             Arterial
             Blood
             from
             the
             Heart
             and
             Spleen
             ,
             though
             the
             neighboring
             Branches
             of
             
               Arteria
               Coeliaca
            
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Riolanus
             counts
             it
             a
             profitable
             Use
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             Passage
             ,
             in
             vomiting
             ,
             divers
             Humors
             are
             purged
             out
             ,
             and
             the
             Redundancies
             of
             the
             first
             Region
             ;
             and
             consequently
             the
             fomenting
             Humors
             which
             maintain
             long-lasting
             and
             malignant
             Feavers
             and
             chronical
             Diseases
             ,
             and
             which
             lurks
             in
             the
             Pancreas
             ,
             is
             this
             way
             voided
             forth
             .
             And
             I
             may
             well
             ad
             somwhat
             to
             this
             most
             learned
             Invention
             .
             That
             not
             only
             by
             Vomit
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             stool
             ,
             through
             the
             assistance
             of
             Choler-purgers
             ,
             hot
             cholerick
             Distempers
             may
             be
             by
             this
             Passage
             discharged
             ,
             which
             burn
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             Spleen
             ,
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             Heart
             it self
             .
             And
             hence
             proceed
             cholerick
             stools
             in
             burning
             Feavers
             ,
             and
             blood
             in
             a
             Dysentery
             or
             Bloody-flux
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             large
             Inundation
             of
             Choler
             ,
             continually
             flowing
             from
             hence
             into
             the
             Guts
             ;
             which
             is
             so
             much
             the
             more
             hard
             to
             cure
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             the
             Pancreas
             doth
             lie
             out
             of
             the
             reach
             of
             Medicaments
             ,
             being
             deeply
             whelmed
             among
             the
             Bowels
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               it self
            
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             prop
             and
             support
             Vessels
             passing
             
             through
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             the
             Branches
             of
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             ,
             of
             the
             Coeliack
             Artery
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Nerves
             :
             Especially
             the
             
               Ramus
               Splenicus
            
             .
             2.
             
             To
             assist
             the
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             which
             is
             performed
             in
             Heat
             and
             Moisture
             .
             3.
             
             To
             serve
             as
             a
             cushion
             under
             the
             Stomach
             .
             And
             therefore
             that
             old
             Woman
             of
             Rome
             in
             whom
             it
             was
             become
             stoney
             ,
             fell
             first
             into
             a
             continual
             Vomiting
             ,
             afterwards
             into
             an
             Atrophy
             or
             consuming
             of
             flesh
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             died
             thereof
             ,
             as
             Panarolus
             hath
             it
             in
             his
             Observations
             .
             4.
             
             To
             suck
             out
             the
             wheyish
             Blood
             which
             slides
             along
             that
             way
             ,
             and
             through
             help
             of
             the
             Kernels
             to
             purge
             it
             .
             5.
             
             In
             sickly
             and
             melancholick
             Bodies
             ,
             to
             perform
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             shews
             from
             the
             Example
             of
             the
             most
             renowned
             Thuanus
             :
             Whos
             's
             Pancreas
             or
             Sweet-bread
             ,
             did
             equal
             the
             Liver
             in
             amplitude
             and
             weight
             ,
             yet
             was
             it
             wholly
             scirrhous
             ;
             but
             his
             Liver
             hard
             and
             round
             as
             a
             ball
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             Flegm
             like
             Potters-clay
             ,
             and
             his
             Spleen
             was
             found
             so
             small
             ,
             that
             it
             hardly
             weighed
             an
             ounce
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIV
            
             .
             Touching
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             ANd
             so
             much
             may
             suffice
             to
             have
             said
             touching
             the
             Organs
             destined
             to
             primary
             Digestion
             or
             Chylification
             ,
             we
             come
             now
             to
             those
             which
             are
             any
             waies
             assisting
             the
             second
             Concoction
             or
             Sanguification
             .
             And
             the
             Principal
             of
             these
             is
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             The
             Liver
             is
             an
             Organick
             Part
             seated
             in
             the
             Lower
             Belly
             ,
             just
             under
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             being
             the
             Organ
             of
             Blood-making
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             its
             Name
             in
             Greek
             ,
             from
             a
             Word
             that
             signifies
             want
             or
             Indigency
             ,
             
             because
             it
             supplies
             the
             want
             of
             the
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             the
             Latins
             cal
             it
             Jecur
             ,
             as
             if
             you
             would
             say
             
               juxta
               Cor
            
             ,
             near
             the
             Heart
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             the
             Principle
             or
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             because
             therein
             the
             Roots
             of
             two
             of
             the
             greatest
             Veins
             appear
             dispersed
             ,
             viz.
             of
             the
             Cava
             and
             Portae
             ,
             as
             Roots
             implanted
             in
             the
             Earth
             .
             The
             milkie
             Veins
             are
             supposed
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Pancreas
             :
             Yet
             Trunks
             and
             Branches
             of
             them
             are
             also
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
             Now
             the
             Roots
             of
             Trees
             dispersed
             in
             the
             Earth
             ,
             do
             grow
             together
             into
             a
             Trunk
             without
             the
             Earth
             .
             The
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             in
             truth
             an
             Artery
             :
             And
             the
             
               Arteria
               venosa
            
             ,
             is
             a
             Vein
             ,
             and
             may
             owe
             its
             Original
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             because
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             cava
             ,
             and
             opens
             it self
             thereinto
             by
             an
             Anastomosis
             :
             And
             besides
             ,
             it
             carries
             Blood
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             brings
             none
             from
             it
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             any
             force
             in
             this
             Argument
             .
          
           
             The
             Liver
             is
             commonly
             but
             one
             in
             Number
             ,
             seldom
             two
             :
             And
             more
             seldom
             
             is
             the
             Liver
             quite
             wanting
             ,
             as
             in
             
               Matthias
               Ortelius
            
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             in
             the
             lowest
             Belly
             ,
             under
             
             the
             
               Septum
               transversum
            
             (
             which
             also
             Hippocrates
             and
             Aristotie
             acknowledged
             )
             by
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             greater
             part
             in
             the
             right
             Hypochondrium
             ,
             a
             fingers
             breadth
             distant
             there
             from
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             thereof
             might
             not
             be
             hindered
             :
             Therefore
             a
             Swelling
             in
             the
             Liver
             causes
             shortness
             of
             breath
             .
             In
             Birds
             it
             lies
             equally
             on
             both
             sides
             :
             As
             also
             for
             the
             most
             part
             in
             Dogs
             which
             have
             a
             thin
             and
             long
             Spleen
             .
             In
             Man
             it
             seldom
             changes
             its
             place
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             Liver
             should
             be
             in
             the
             left
             ,
             the
             Spleen
             in
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             which
             Gemma
             and
             Spererius
             have
             observed
             .
             It
             rests
             lightly
             upon
             the
             former
             and
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             especially
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             some
             part
             thereof
             reaches
             to
             the
             left
             side
             also
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             the
             Spleen
             being
             very
             small
             .
             But
             some
             conceive
             that
             Aristotle
             was
             ignorant
             of
             the
             Situation
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             because
             the
             said
             
               Huper
               de
               to
               Diazoma
            
             ,
             &c.
             which
             they
             interpret
             ,
             above
             the
             Septum
             is
             the
             Liver
             seated
             .
             But
             the
             Philosoper
             is
             thus
             to
             be
             translated
             :
             It
             is
             placed
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             or
             beyond
             the
             
               Septum
               transversum
            
             ;
             for
             Huper
             with
             an
             Accusative
             signifies
             beyond
             ,
             but
             with
             a
             Genetive
             ,
             it
             signifies
             above
             .
          
           
             And
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             to
             which
             
             it
             was
             to
             give
             way
             ,
             it
             hath
             its
             upper
             and
             outward
             Figure
             sufficiently
             round
             ,
             convex
             or
             gibbous
             ,
             even
             and
             smooth
             ,
             where
             also
             there
             is
             an
             oblong
             Cavity
             ,
             behind
             at
             the
             Passage
             of
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             .
             And
             because
             of
             the
             Stomach
             it
             hath
             received
             a
             Figure
             which
             is
             hollow
             on
             the
             inner
             and
             lower
             side
             ,
             which
             is
             termed
             its
             simous
             or
             saddle
             side
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             more
             uneven
             then
             the
             other
             having
             in
             it
             two
             hollownesses
             :
             One
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             for
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ;
             another
             on
             the
             left
             ,
             for
             the
             Stomach
             to
             pass
             by
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Liver
             is
             on
             the
             right
             side
             of
             an
             ample
             roundness
             ,
             but
             on
             the
             left
             it
             is
             narrow
             and
             sharp
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XVI
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               Expresses
               the
               Liver
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               especially
               the
               hollow
               side
               thereof
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   The
                   Liver
                   in
                   its
                   hollow
                   side
                   ,
                   cloathed
                   with
                   its
                   Coat
                   and
                   ragged
                   Nap.
                   
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Vena
                   Portae
                   ,
                   and
                   its
                   Egress
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   hollow
                   side
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Two
                   Trunks
                   of
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   ,
                   by
                   the
                   tuberant
                   or
                   bossie
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   going
                   forth
                   of
                   the
                   Navil-Vein
                   from
                   out
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   Gall-bladder
                   seated
                   in
                   the
                   hollow
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Gall-passage
                   ,
                   called
                   Cysticus
                   Felleus
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   other
                   Gall-passage
                   called
                   Hepaticus
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   An
                   Artery
                   which
                   comes
                   from
                   the
                   Ramus
                   Caeliacus
                   to
                   the
                   hollow
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   A
                   branch
                   of
                   this
                   Artery
                   ,
                   which
                   enters
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   Another
                   branch
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   Artery
                   which
                   goes
                   unto
                   the
                   Gall-bladder
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   A
                   Nerve
                   of
                   the
                   sixt
                   pair
                   which
                   goes
                   unto
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   A
                   smal
                   Lap
                   or
                   Scollup
                   stretched
                   out
                   unto
                   the
                   Call
                   ,
                   by
                   which
                   the
                   Liver
                   being
                   full
                   of
                   water
                   ,
                   is
                   somtimes
                   emptied
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   Certain
                   Eminencies
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   ,
                   anciently
                   termed
                   Portae
                   the
                   Gates
                   .
                
                 
                   a.
                   The
                   bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Gall-bladder
                   ,
                   hanging
                   without
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   The
                   common
                   Channel
                   ,
                   made
                   up
                   by
                   the
                   passages
                   of
                   Ramus
                   Hepaticus
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               freed
               from
               the
               Parenchyma
               or
               Fleshy
               substance
               thereof
               ,
               with
               the
               Gall-bladder
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Trunk
                   of
                   Vena
                   Porta
                   ,
                   passing
                   forth
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Gall-bladder
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   Navil-Vein
                   ending
                   into
                   a
                   branch
                   of
                   Vena
                   Porta
                   .
                
                 
                   EEEEEEE
                   .
                   The
                   branches
                   of
                   Vena
                   ▪
                   Porta
                   ,
                   dispersed
                   through
                   the
                   whole
                   Parenchyma
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   FFFF
                   .
                   The
                   branches
                   of
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   ,
                   especially
                   those
                   which
                   are
                   distributed
                   through
                   the
                   upper
                   parts
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   ,
                   and
                   joyned
                   in
                   sundry
                   places
                   with
                   the
                   branches
                   of
                   Porta
                   .
                
                 
                   GGGG
                   .
                   The
                   most
                   remarkable
                   Anastomoses
                   or
                   joyning
                   together
                   of
                   the
                   Mouths
                   of
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   and
                   Porta
                   .
                
                 
                   HHHH
                   .
                   The
                   extremities
                   of
                   the
                   said
                   Veins
                   ,
                   called
                   Capiliary
                   Veins
                   ,
                   because
                   of
                   their
                   smalness
                   .
                
                 
                   a.
                   The
                   
                     Meatus
                     Cysticus
                  
                   or
                   passage
                   into
                   the
                   Gall-bladder
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               33
               ▪
            
          
           
             The
             Greatness
             and
             thickness
             thereof
             ,
             is
             remarkable
             and
             exceeding
             great
             in
             
             a
             man
             (
             as
             is
             his
             Brain
             )
             not
             only
             for
             Nutrition
             as
             in
             brutes
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             breeding
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             ,
             which
             are
             often
             dissipated
             (
             and
             they
             are
             bred
             of
             the
             Vital
             Spirit
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             bred
             of
             Blood.
             Yet
             it
             is
             greater
             then
             ordinary
             in
             bodies
             that
             are
             of
             a
             cold
             Complexion
             ,
             and
             in
             fearful
             Persons
             and
             great
             Eaters
             ,
             to
             augment
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             In
             persons
             dead
             of
             a
             Comsumption
             ,
             I
             have
             somtimes
             seen
             an
             exceeding
             great
             Liver
             ,
             four
             or
             five
             times
             bigger
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             again
             very
             exceeding
             little
             .
             And
             others
             have
             found
             a
             very
             small
             Liver
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             no
             Liver
             ,
             or
             the
             Liver
             consumed
             away
             ;
             and
             a
             great
             and
             strong
             Spleen
             performing
             its
             Office.
             Rhasis
             and
             Abensina
             gather
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Liver
             from
             the
             length
             of
             a
             bodies
             singers
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             compassed
             with
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             ,
             springing
             from
             one
             of
             the
             
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             which
             hath
             its
             Original
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             In
             this
             there
             arise
             little
             bladders
             of
             water
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Dropsie
             come
             ,
             Witness
             Platerus
             .
             I
             have
             seen
             of
             these
             bladders
             in
             a
             she
             Goat
             ,
             many
             in
             number
             ,
             whiteish
             ,
             which
             being
             cut
             open
             ,
             were
             found
             to
             contain
             within
             a
             single
             coat
             or
             skin
             ,
             wheyish
             Humor
             ,
             with
             snotty
             Flegm
             ,
             and
             another
             yellow
             substance
             ,
             whether
             through
             a
             fault
             in
             Nature
             ,
             or
             because
             the
             Goat
             was
             camed
             .
             I
             have
             more
             then
             once
             found
             intertwisted
             ropes
             of
             Worms
             ,
             in
             other
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             fastned
             by
             three
             strong
             Ligaments
             .
             1.
             
             To
             the
             Belly
             ,
             by
             the
             umbelicalis
             
             Vena
             ,
             or
             Navil-vein
             ,
             which
             after
             the
             Birth
             ,
             is
             in
             grown
             Persons
             dried
             up
             ,
             and
             turns
             to
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             least
             the
             Midriff
             should
             dangle
             too
             much
             ,
             and
             should
             hang
             too
             low
             down
             .
             2.
             
             Above
             to
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             by
             a
             broad
             membranous
             and
             thin
             Ligament
             ,
             but
             yet
             a
             strong
             one
             arising
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             which
             the
             Midriff
             undercircles
             ;
             and
             this
             is
             called
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               suspensorium
            
             or
             hanging
             Ligament
             .
             3.
             
             Also
             above
             to
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             but
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             by
             another
             Ligament
             sprung
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             exceeding
             strong
             :
             Also
             in
             its
             after-part
             where
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             passes
             ,
             i●
             cleavs
             by
             its
             bunchy
             side
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             Riolanus
             reckons
             these
             three
             Ligaments
             for
             one
             ,
             because
             he
             contends
             that
             the
             umbelical
             Vein
             is
             dried
             up
             ,
             which
             being
             carried
             through
             a
             duplicature
             or
             folding
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             hath
             for
             its
             Companion
             the
             Membrane
             it self
             ,
             which
             being
             rouled
             back
             over
             the
             Liver
             ,
             runs
             out
             upwards
             &
             downwards
             to
             the
             Diaphragma
             it self
             ,
             which
             it
             invests
             and
             fastens
             .
             But
             it
             is
             al
             one
             case
             .
             For
             Ligaments
             are
             termed
             sundry
             ,
             because
             they
             fasten
             and
             suspend
             divers
             parts
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             although
             the
             two
             latter
             arise
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             Now
             therefore
             according
             to
             his
             reckoning
             ,
             there
             will
             be
             two
             Ligaments
             ,
             ●●●
             one
             only
             ;
             the
             former
             from
             the
             Umbelical
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             The
             fourth
             Ligament
             annexed
             to
             the
             
               mucronata
               Cartilago
            
             ,
             at
             the
             Cleft
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             is
             no
             pecular
             one
             ,
             but
             must
             be
             reckoned
             as
             part
             of
             our
             second
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             Substance
             red
             and
             soft
             [
             so
             
             that
             with
             a
             little
             stick
             it
             may
             be
             beaten
             off
             ,
             and
             separated
             from
             the
             Vessels
             interwoven
             ,
             either
             when
             it
             is
             boyled
             or
             being
             raw
             ]
             spred
             about
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             like
             congealed
             blood
             ,
             for
             which
             cause
             it
             is
             termed
             Parenchyma
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             an
             Effusion
             or
             shedding
             forth
             of
             blood
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             poured
             about
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             fills
             the
             spaces
             between
             them
             [
             in
             some
             kind
             of
             fishes
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             congealed
             Fat
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             an
             Oyl
             is
             boyled
             to
             burn
             in
             Lamps
             .
             Yet
             is
             it
             hardly
             corrupted
             ;
             for
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             that
             a
             Liver
             having
             been
             accidentally
             kept
             a
             year
             together
             ,
             hath
             remained
             uncorrupt
             .
             In
             substance
             it
             is
             most
             like
             an
             Oxes
             Liver
             ,
             and
             being
             boyled
             ;
             differs
             not
             there-from
             ,
             neither
             in
             consistence
             ,
             color
             ,
             nor
             tast
             ,
             and
             therefore
             our
             flesh
             is
             more
             like
             that
             of
             Oxen
             then
             of
             Swine
             .
          
           
             The
             Color
             of
             a
             sound
             Liver
             is
             ruddie
             [
             but
             
             if
             it
             be
             quite
             void
             of
             blood
             ,
             or
             boyled
             ,
             we
             may
             rightly
             say
             with
             Gordonius
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             whiteish
             ,
             as
             in
             an
             Embryo
             ,
             before
             affusion
             of
             blood
             be
             made
             .
             But
             we
             shall
             find
             it
             very
             large
             and
             red
             ,
             in
             Children
             new
             born
             ,
             of
             a
             good
             Constitution
             .
             I
             have
             demonstrated
             it
             to
             be
             yellow
             ,
             in
             the
             fish
             called
             a
             Lump
             .
             In
             a
             Lamprey
             it
             is
             green
             (
             which
             makes
             Bronzerus
             dispute
             touching
             the
             Principallity
             of
             the
             Liver
             )
             though
             the
             blood
             be
             red
             ,
             whether
             it
             have
             contracted
             its
             color
             here
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             from
             it self
             ]
             In
             some
             sick
             persons
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             have
             the
             Dropsie
             ,
             it
             is
             very
             pale
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Spleen
             and
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             Now
             those
             Vessels
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             are
             the
             
             
               Roots
               of
               Vena
               portae
               and
               cava
               ,
            
             (
             with
             a
             few
             [
             to
             a
             mans
             first
             thinking
             ,
             but
             upon
             serious
             Examination
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             an
             innumerable
             company
             of
             ]
             small
             Arteries
             interposed
             ,
             of
             a
             whiter
             color
             ,
             dispersed
             from
             the
             Coeliaca
             ,
             through
             the
             saddle
             part
             thereof
             )
             [
             partly
             that
             they
             might
             nourish
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             warm
             it
             throughly
             with
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             heart
             the
             branches
             of
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             assisting
             likewise
             to
             the
             same
             intent
             ;
             partly
             that
             by
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Pulse
             ,
             and
             the
             necessity
             of
             running
             back
             ,
             it
             may
             assist
             and
             provoke
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             according
             to
             the
             conjecture
             of
             Slegelius
             .
             For
             whereas
             Galen
             tells
             us
             that
             the
             Liver
             is
             cooled
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             is
             not
             consonant
             to
             truth
             :
             For
             they
             are
             hot
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             motion
             further
             the
             blood
             ,
             and
             draw
             it
             to
             those
             parts
             wherein
             they
             are
             implanted
             ;
             ]
             which
             appear
             distinct
             ,
             the
             flesh
             or
             Parenchyma
             of
             the
             Live
             ▪
             being
             taken
             away
             ,
             how
             they
             are
             carried
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             ,
             without
             order
             ,
             among
             which
             also
             small
             branches
             are
             disseminated
             ,
             which
             afterwards
             unite
             into
             one
             common
             Passage
             ,
             and
             so
             carry
             Choler
             into
             the
             Gall-bladder
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             conjoyned
             with
             the
             Roots
             of
             Porta
             ,
             that
             there
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             separated
             from
             the
             Choler
             .
             But
             more
             Roots
             of
             the
             Porta
             are
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             here
             and
             there
             through
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             very
             few
             through
             the
             upper
             part
             :
             Contrariwise
             ,
             more
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Cava
             are
             carried
             through
             the
             upper
             and
             tuberous
             ,
             or
             bossie
             part
             thereof
             ,
             and
             fewer
             through
             the
             hollow
             or
             saddle
             part
             .
             To
             these
             must
             be
             added
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Milkie
             Veins
             .
             Asellius
             did
             somtimes
             observe
             their
             trunk
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
             But
             he
             did
             not
             precisely
             add
             the
             place
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             determined
             to
             be
             in
             the
             third
             Lobe
             .
          
           
             The
             Anastomoses
             or
             Conjunctions
             of
             
             the
             Roots
             of
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             and
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             are
             peculiarly
             to
             be
             observed
             .
             For
             rejecting
             those
             who
             altogether
             deny
             the
             Union
             of
             these
             
             Veins
             ,
             or
             who
             conceive
             that
             they
             are
             obscurely
             and
             hardly
             known
             :
             [
             among
             whom
             Harvey
             and
             Riolanus
             are
             lately
             come
             upon
             the
             stage
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             whom
             could
             no
             where
             find
             any
             Anastomosis
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Spleen
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             Bowel
             ,
             though
             they
             had
             been
             boyled
             ,
             till
             the
             whole
             Parenchyma
             would
             crumble
             in
             peices
             ,
             and
             was
             separated
             like
             dust
             from
             all
             the
             strings
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             with
             a
             needle
             .
             Only
             he
             observed
             this
             one
             thing
             ,
             in
             a
             fresh
             Liver
             ,
             viz.
             that
             all
             the
             branches
             of
             Vena
             Cava
             creeping
             along
             the
             bossie
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             have
             Coats
             like
             selves
             full
             of
             infinite
             little
             holes
             ,
             as
             being
             made
             for
             the
             draught
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             to
             receive
             such
             Blood
             as
             settles
             there
             :
             but
             that
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             are
             not
             so
             but
             are
             divided
             into
             boughes
             ,
             and
             that
             every
             where
             the
             branches
             of
             both
             ,
             do
             run
             out
             to
             the
             highest
             Eminency
             of
             the
             bossie
             side
             of
             the
             Bowel
             ,
             without
             Anastomoses
             .
             But
             the
             Porta
             hath
             likewise
             very
             many
             holes
             great
             and
             little
             ,
             as
             the
             Cava
             hath
             ,
             some
             of
             which
             will
             admit
             the
             probe
             ,
             others
             not
             ,
             only
             they
             make
             certain
             Cavities
             covered
             with
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             .
             Whence
             it
             is
             apparent
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             staied
             by
             those
             closed
             holes
             and
             not
             strained
             out
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             being
             ▪
             covered
             with
             a
             Coat
             ,
             Riolanus
             inspired
             by
             the
             same
             Spirit
             ,
             doth
             strongly
             oppose
             the
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             Portae
             least
             he
             should
             be
             forced
             to
             admit
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             that
             Place
             .
             He
             was
             afraid
             that
             the
             concocted
             liquor
             should
             be
             confounded
             and
             mixt
             with
             the
             unconcocted
             .
             And
             what
             if
             they
             be
             confounded
             and
             jumbled
             together
             ?
             The
             Chymus
             being
             changed
             into
             imperfect
             blood
             is
             confounded
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             milky
             Veins
             ,
             with
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Cava
             ,
             for
             both
             of
             them
             are
             to
             be
             perfected
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
             And
             the
             other
             which
             flows
             out
             of
             Porta
             ,
             prepares
             both
             with
             its
             acid
             juyce
             .
             But
             be
             it
             how
             it
             will
             be
             ,
             the
             Authority
             of
             all
             Anatomists
             doth
             assert
             those
             Anastomoses
             from
             the
             times
             of
             Erasistratus
             and
             Galen
             to
             our
             daies
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             manifest
             to
             such
             as
             search
             diligently
             ,
             that
             these
             roots
             are
             joyned
             together
             ,
             somtimes
             athwart
             ,
             so
             that
             one
             lies
             over
             the
             middle
             of
             another
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             somtimes
             the
             extremities
             of
             one
             Vein
             touch
             the
             Extremities
             or
             ends
             of
             another
             ,
             otherwhiles
             the
             ends
             of
             one
             touch
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             other
             ;
             and
             somtimes
             they
             touch
             not
             one
             another
             at
             all
             ;
             peradventure
             where
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Liver
             serve
             only
             for
             Nutrition
             .
             Bauhinus
             wishes
             us
             chiefly
             to
             observe
             a
             remarkable
             Anastomosis
             ,
             which
             resembles
             a
             channel
             ,
             and
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             common
             and
             continued
             passage
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             Porta
             into
             the
             Roots
             of
             Cava
             ,
             admitting
             a
             pretty
             big
             Probe
             .
             But
             because
             we
             cannot
             rely
             upon
             naked
             Authorities
             ,
             experience
             must
             be
             called
             by
             us
             to
             counsel
             ,
             which
             doth
             necessarily
             perswade
             us
             that
             there
             are
             such
             Anastomoses
             or
             Unions
             of
             the
             Mouths
             of
             the
             Vesseis
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             milky
             Veins
             and
             the
             Venae
             Porrae
             ,
             unto
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             manifest
             Arteries
             ,
             seeing
             the
             passage
             only
             through
             the
             flesh
             cannot
             suffice
             ,
             in
             a
             quick
             and
             plentiful
             Flux
             .
             I
             confess
             all
             the
             kinds
             of
             Anastomoses
             are
             not
             appearent
             to
             the
             Eye
             as
             to
             be
             seen
             open
             ,
             in
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             though
             no
             man
             can
             therefore
             deny
             that
             there
             are
             such
             things
             ;
             but
             some
             of
             them
             are
             insensible
             ,
             which
             admit
             neither
             Probe
             not
             Wind
             ,
             and
             some
             admit
             Wind
             and
             nothing
             else
             .
             The
             Renowned
             Walaeus
             observed
             and
             found
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Porta
             are
             in
             the
             Liver
             no
             where
             opened
             into
             the
             greater
             branch
             of
             Vena
             Cava
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             very
             smallest
             branches
             of
             Vena
             Porta
             ,
             do
             open
             into
             the
             smallest
             branches
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             ,
             as
             he
             observed
             in
             a
             Liver
             blown
             up
             with
             wind
             ,
             after
             the
             flesh
             was
             taken
             away
             ,
             and
             floating
             upon
             water
             .
             I
             have
             in
             an
             Oxes
             Liver
             curiously
             sought
             for
             apparent
             Anastomoses
             ,
             because
             there
             they
             must
             needs
             be
             visible
             because
             of
             the
             greatness
             ,
             following
             the
             example
             of
             the
             most
             learned
             Slegelius
             .
             But
             the
             very
             truth
             is
             they
             are
             not
             visible
             to
             the
             Eye
             :
             the
             Vessels
             indeed
             are
             divers
             waies
             interwoven
             and
             twisted
             one
             among
             another
             ;
             Trunk
             with
             Trunk
             ,
             branches
             of
             the
             Trunkes
             ,
             either
             with
             the
             Trunk
             of
             another
             Vein
             ,
             or
             with
             little
             branches
             ;
             and
             that
             either
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             those
             little
             branches
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             extremities
             ,
             even
             as
             we
             see
             both
             the
             Vessels
             cleave
             together
             in
             the
             Womb-cake
             :
             But
             a
             Probe
             finds
             no
             entrance
             ,
             by
             any
             open
             hole
             of
             an
             Anastomosis
             .
             Nevertheless
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             denied
             ,
             but
             that
             in
             living
             ▪
             Bodies
             there
             is
             a
             passage
             known
             to
             Nature
             though
             unknown
             to
             us
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             necessity
             of
             a
             through
             passage
             .
             Which
             I
             the
             rather
             believe
             ,
             because
             that
             in
             the
             conjunction
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             yea
             even
             of
             the
             greater
             ,
             where
             the
             Anastomoses
             seems
             shut
             ,
             the
             Coat
             is
             extraordinary
             thin
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             single
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             its
             transparency
             ,
             which
             in
             Living
             Bodies
             being
             ratified
             by
             heat
             and
             motion
             ,
             doth
             easily
             suffer
             the
             blood
             to
             pass
             through
             .
          
           
             By
             these
             Unions
             therefore
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             ,
             the
             Blood
             may
             pass
             through
             :
             And
             by
             them
             likewise
             the
             peccant
             matter
             passes
             ,
             when
             we
             Evacuate
             the
             habit
             of
             the
             Body
             by
             Purgations
             .
             Not
             that
             it
             should
             be
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Porta
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             hitherto
             beleived
             ,
             but
             so
             as
             thence
             to
             pass
             through
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             be
             emptied
             out
             through
             the
             Caeliacal
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             thence
             through
             the
             stomach
             or
             the
             Gall-Conduits
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             forced
             along
             by
             virtue
             of
             the
             purging
             Medicament
             .
          
           
             Those
             Anastomoses
             are
             likewise
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             smal
             Veins
             of
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Branches
             of
             Vena
             Portae
             and
             Vena
             Cava
             .
          
           
             The
             Roots
             of
             Vena
             Portae
             ,
             do
             by
             little
             
             and
             little
             towards
             the
             lower
             part
             become
             smaller
             and
             greater
             ,
             until
             they
             make
             one
             Trunk
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             ,
             the
             Gate-Vein
             :
             So
             also
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Cava
             ,
             above
             and
             in
             the
             fore-part
             do
             altogether
             make
             up
             one
             Trunk
             ;
             before
             the
             going
             out
             whereof
             ,
             certain
             Circles
             are
             placed
             ,
             here
             and
             there
             in
             the
             greater
             branches
             ,
             being
             of
             a
             Membranous
             substance
             and
             very
             like
             to
             Valves
             ,
             somtimes
             thicker
             ,
             other
             whiles
             thinner
             and
             like
             Cobwebs
             ,
             which
             were
             first
             discovered
             by
             
               Stephanus
               ▪
            
             and
             after
             by
             Conringius
             in
             an
             Oxes
             Liver
             ;
             and
             I
             likewise
             found
             them
             ,
             looking
             towards
             the
             larger
             trunk
             ,
             which
             hinder
             the
             return
             of
             blood
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             of
             that
             which
             is
             impure
             and
             dreggy
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             pair
             being
             once
             gone
             out
             to
             the
             Heart
             :
             afterwards
             ,
             as
             soon
             as
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             great
             branches
             ,
             the
             ascendent
             and
             descendent
             ;
             and
             hence
             it
             is
             that
             they
             say
             ,
             the
             Cava
             arises
             from
             the
             upper
             or
             bossie
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             from
             the
             lower
             and
             hollow
             part
             .
          
           
             The
             Liver
             hath
             two
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pair
             ,
             one
             from
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             another
             from
             the
             Costal
             ,
             dispersed
             only
             through
             its
             Coat
             ,
             and
             not
             through
             its
             substance
             (
             as
             Vesalius
             will
             have
             it
             )
             that
             in
             its
             inmost
             body
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             void
             of
             sense
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             so
             many
             motions
             of
             humors
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             pains
             in
             this
             part
             are
             ,
             dul
             and
             rather
             a
             kind
             of
             Heavyness
             then
             pain
             .
             Yet
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             ,
             that
             two
             remarkable
             little
             Nerves
             do
             accompany
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             ,
             and
             go
             into
             the
             very
             substance
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               both
               sides
               of
               the
               Liver
               and
               the
               Gall-bladder
               ,
               Distinct
               one
               from
               another
               .
            
             
               The
               XVII
               .
               TABLE
               ▪
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Convexe
                     or
                     Bossie
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Livers
                     Membrane
                     Separated
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Ligament
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     called
                  
                   Sep●ale
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     coming
                     forth
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     ,
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     upper
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     concave
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     turned
                     up
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     Lobe
                     or
                     Scollup
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     to
                     which
                     the
                     Call
                     joynes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     A
                     cleft
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     ,
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     the
                     Navil-Vein
                     D.
                     descends
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Gall-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Gall-bladder
                     Channel
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Choler-passage
                     ,
                     ending
                     into
                     the
                     Duodenum
                  
                   H.
                   
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     Portae
                     descending
                     from
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Right-hand
                     Coeliacal
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     A
                     Nerve
                     brought
                     unto
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     Cavity
                     at
                     the
                     rise
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Passage
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     between
                     the
                     roots
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Portae
                  
                   F.
                   
                     and
                     of
                     the
                     Cavae
                  
                   G.
                   
                     dispersed
                     through
                     the
                     substance
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     concourse
                     of
                     the
                     passages
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Porus
                     Biliarius
                     or
                     Choler-pipe
                     ,
                     broader
                     then
                     the
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     common
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     Choler-pipe
                     and
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Orifice
                     of
                     the
                     Choler-passage
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     Gut
                     Duodenum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     Gut
                     Duodenum
                     opened
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     An
                     Artery
                     dispersed
                     into
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     A
                     smal
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     and
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     of
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     :
                     which
                     the
                     graver
                     hath
                     represented
                     too
                     large
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               36
            
          
           
             Sanguification
             therefore
             or
             Blood-making
             ,
             is
             thus
             performed
             :
             the
             more
             
             unprofitable
             and
             thicker
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             (
             which
             is
             made
             first
             in
             the
             Stomach
             and
             finally
             perfected
             in
             the
             thin
             Guts
             )
             is
             thrown
             out
             into
             the
             thick
             Guts
             ,
             and
             voided
             at
             the
             Fundament
             ;
             but
             the
             more
             laudable
             and
             thin
             part
             ▪
             is
             drawn
             in
             by
             the
             milky
             veins
             ,
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Guts
             ;
             and
             ●…le
             altered
             ,
             and
             from
             them
             by
             means
             of
             a
             power
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             it
             receives
             the
             first
             Rudi●…
             of
             Blood
             ,
             and
             is
             then
             called
             Chymus
             .
             The
             greatest
             question
             is
             whether
             the
             Liver
             draws
             it
             ,
             or
             it
             is
             forced
             thither
             .
             It
             seems
             to
             be
             drawn
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             Chaf
             or
             Straw
             is
             drawn
             by
             heated
             Amber
             ,
             and
             as
             Blood
             is
             drawn
             into
             the
             outward
             parts
             by
             hot
             Fomentations
             .
             Which
             is
             here
             visible
             by
             Ligatures
             and
             live
             dissections
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             attraction
             of
             the
             Liver
             is
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             the
             milky
             Veins
             are
             speedily
             emptied
             .
             There
             is
             not
             the
             same
             necessity
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             be
             forced
             thither
             ,
             as
             other
             have
             thought
             ,
             because
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Motion
             or
             moving
             principle
             should
             either
             be
             without
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             or
             within
             it
             .
             It
             cannot
             be
             in
             it
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             nothing
             thrusts
             or
             drives
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             alive
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Chyle
             newly
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             doth
             not
             move
             it self
             .
             3.
             
             It
             is
             void
             of
             Appetite
             .
             4.
             
             It
             should
             alwaies
             be
             driven
             downwards
             ▪
             not
             up
             ▪
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
             Nor
             can
             it
             be
             in
             
             any
             thing
             without
             it
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             the
             Meseraick
             Arteries
             have
             enough
             to
             do
             to
             drive
             out
             their
             own
             blood
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             have
             work
             enough
             to
             receive
             it
             .
             2.
             
             And
             the
             milky
             Veins
             are
             exceeding
             small
             .
             3.
             
             The
             proper
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             do
             serve
             more
             for
             strength
             ,
             then
             for
             driving
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Stomach
             indeed
             ,
             and
             the
             Guts
             are
             contracted
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             able
             to
             expel
             the
             chyle
             ;
             for
             their
             motion
             is
             obscure
             ,
             and
             though
             it
             were
             evident
             ,
             yet
             it
             would
             not
             presently
             follow
             ,
             that
             it
             must
             drive
             into
             the
             Liver
             .
             5.
             
             Those
             Bowels
             being
             contracted
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             and
             shut
             up
             ,
             as
             much
             Chyle
             is
             retained
             ,
             as
             is
             expelled
             .
             6.
             
             The
             Abdomen
             doth
             oft-times
             rest
             ,
             according
             to
             our
             desire
             and
             pleasure
             ,
             being
             apt
             to
             be
             moved
             by
             the
             Muscles
             ;
             but
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             is
             performed
             continually
             and
             swiftly
             ,
             viz.
             the
             due
             time
             of
             distribution
             being
             come
             .
             7.
             
             The
             dreggy
             Chyle
             should
             be
             sent
             unto
             the
             Liver
             ,
             without
             difference
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             pure
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             principally
             drawn
             by
             the
             Liver
             ,
             howbeit
             some
             construction
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             is
             secondarily
             assistant
             thereunto
             .
             This
             Chymus
             being
             attracted
             in
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             milky
             veins
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             place
             where
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Parenchyma
             or
             Substance
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             the
             Efficient
             cause
             ,
             with
             the
             assistance
             of
             the
             internal
             heat
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             changed
             into
             a
             new
             substance
             of
             blood
             .
             Now
             it
             gains
             a
             Redness
             like
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             from
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             Liver
             alone
             ,
             which
             it self
             ows
             its
             color
             to
             blood
             shed
             about
             it
             ,
             which
             it
             layes
             away
             when
             it
             is
             washed
             or
             boyled
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             other
             Creatures
             we
             find
             it
             of
             a
             green
             color
             ,
             as
             from
             its
             own
             proper
             and
             adventitious
             Heat
             (
             as
             Grapes
             are
             red
             )
             which
             vanishing
             away
             ,
             the
             redness
             ceases
             ,
             as
             it
             happens
             in
             blood-letting
             .
             Nor
             is
             that
             a
             sufficient
             cause
             ,
             seeing
             in
             healthy
             bodies
             it
             continues
             afterwards
             red
             ,
             and
             therefore
             we
             must
             take
             in
             light
             as
             another
             Cause
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             is
             a
             great
             quantity
             in
             red
             colors
             ,
             subsisting
             even
             without
             Heat
             ,
             unless
             the
             subject
             happening
             to
             be
             dissolved
             ,
             it
             come
             to
             be
             extinguished
             and
             exhale
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             boyled
             blood
             becomes
             black
             ,
             and
             putrid
             blood
             is
             duskie
             .
             Hence
             also
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             the
             more
             Natural
             inbred
             light
             any
             man
             hath
             ,
             the
             more
             he
             shines
             with
             bright
             blood
             ;
             contrariwise
             ,
             in
             Melancholick
             persons
             ,
             the
             same
             being
             darkned
             ,
             the
             blood
             grows
             black
             and
             dark
             .
             That
             light
             and
             fire
             are
             the
             cause
             hereof
             appears
             in
             Oyl
             of
             Sulphur
             ,
             by
             the
             mixture
             whereof
             Liquors
             become
             red
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             Heat
             and
             Light
             ,
             is
             partly
             planted
             in
             the
             liver
             ,
             and
             the
             Chyle
             it self
             ,
             springing
             thereout
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             previous
             preparation
             ,
             and
             partly
             kindled
             therein
             ,
             either
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             nearness
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             bordering
             parts
             ,
             or
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             derived
             from
             the
             Heart
             and
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             The
             more
             crude
             Blood
             being
             thus
             made
             ,
             is
             not
             distributed
             to
             nourish
             the
             Liver
             or
             the
             Body
             ,
             which
             Office
             is
             performed
             by
             the
             Hepatick
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             by
             insensible
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             flesh
             and
             Vessels
             ,
             it
             is
             expelled
             into
             the
             Roots
             of
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             where
             by
             longer
             tarriance
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             elaborated
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             with
             the
             returning
             blood
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             and
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             it
             is
             poured
             out
             into
             the
             Trunk
             of
             cava
             ,
             going
             all
             straight
             along
             ,
             through
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Trunk
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             there
             attain
             its
             last
             accomplishment
             whereby
             it
             becomes
             fit
             to
             nourish
             all
             the
             Parts
             .
             Not
             any
             thing
             returns
             this
             way
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             Valves
             hindering
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Liver
             look
             outwards
             ,
             in
             the
             Heart
             inwards
             ,
             as
             the
             whole
             Fabrick
             and
             Ligatures
             do
             testifie
             .
             By
             these
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Cava
             alwayes
             swells
             towards
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             is
             empty
             towards
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             the
             Nourishment
             of
             all
             the
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             being
             accomplished
             by
             the
             Capillary
             Arteries
             ,
             because
             all
             the
             blood
             is
             not
             consumed
             ,
             which
             by
             continual
             Pulsations
             is
             sent
             forth
             ,
             nor
             can
             that
             which
             is
             superfluous
             return
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             seated
             by
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             which
             lets
             any
             thing
             pass
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             admits
             nothing
             back
             again
             ;
             and
             because
             any
             Artery
             being
             tied
             ,
             is
             full
             ,
             and
             swels
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             is
             empty
             ,
             and
             lank
             towards
             the
             Veins
             :
             Therefore
             it
             must
             needs
             return
             as
             it
             were
             by
             a
             circular
             motion
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             smallest
             Vessels
             back
             again
             into
             the
             greatest
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             Trunk
             it self
             of
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             thence
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             As
             it
             passes
             through
             the
             Liver
             ,
             other
             blood
             there
             newly
             bred
             ,
             is
             joyned
             with
             that
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             redundant
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             for
             the
             restoring
             of
             that
             which
             is
             spent
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             Circulation
             is
             again
             repeated
             .
             Mean
             while
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             Choler
             is
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             by
             branches
             of
             vessels
             ,
             terminating
             into
             the
             Gal-bladder
             and
             Choler-passage
             .
             But
             the
             wheyish
             part
             ,
             is
             because
             of
             its
             thinness
             retained
             a
             while
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             more
             easily
             pass
             every
             where
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             it
             is
             sent
             away
             ,
             partly
             to
             the
             Kidneys
             (
             with
             the
             wheyish
             blood
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             Galen
             is
             not
             concocted
             in
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             but
             because
             the
             Serum
             is
             an
             Excrement
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             Kidneys
             do
             only
             separate
             the
             blood
             from
             the
             whey
             )
             and
             from
             thence
             by
             the
             Ureters
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ;
             whence
             the
             Urin
             does
             afterward
             partly
             go
             into
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             passes
             out
             by
             sweat
             and
             insensible
             Transpiration
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XV.
            
             Of
             the
             Receptacles
             of
             Choler
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             and
             Choler-passage
             .
          
           
             ON
             the
             right
             hand
             and
             hollow
             part
             
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             for
             the
             Reception
             of
             two
             sorts
             of
             Choler
             ,
             thick
             and
             thin
             ,
             two
             Conduits
             or
             Passages
             are
             engraven
             :
             The
             
               Vesica
               biliaria
            
             or
             Choler-bladder
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Canalis
               biliarius
            
             or
             Cholerchannel
             .
             Galen
             himself
             knew
             as
             much
             ,
             when
             he
             said
             that
             from
             the
             Liver
             a
             twofold
             cholerick
             Excrement
             was
             purged
             ;
             the
             one
             unmixt
             and
             simple
             ,
             the
             other
             mixed
             and
             thick
             ,
             which
             I
             collect
             contrary
             to
             what
             Hofman
             asserts
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             fourth
             Book
             of
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Parts
             ,
             12.
             and
             13.
             and
             from
             the
             fifth
             Book
             Chap.
             the
             6.
             
             For
             the
             Channel
             poures
             out
             thick
             and
             dreggy
             choler
             ,
             but
             the
             Bladder
             such
             as
             is
             more
             thin
             and
             yellow
             .
             For
             the
             larter
             bordering
             upon
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             ,
             sucks
             more
             plentifully
             out
             of
             the
             Spirituous
             and
             Arterial
             Blood
             ;
             the
             former
             being
             placed
             at
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Cava
             ,
             draws
             a
             less
             quantity
             of
             Choler
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             is
             more
             thick
             ,
             because
             that
             blood
             is
             thicker
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Vesica
               biliaria
            
             or
             Gall-bladder
             called
             
             also
             
               folliculus
               Fellis
            
             ,
             is
             a
             Vessel
             long
             and
             round
             ,
             fashioned
             like
             a
             Pear
             ,
             hollow
             ,
             furnished
             with
             a
             double
             Membrane
             ,
             the
             one
             ,
             whereby
             it
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             [
             which
             is
             also
             the
             same
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Liver
             is
             covered
             ]
             without
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             wherewith
             that
             part
             only
             is
             covered
             ,
             which
             hangs
             without
             the
             Liver
             :
             The
             other
             proper
             and
             more
             thick
             ,
             but
             strong
             ,
             having
             all
             manner
             of
             Fibres
             ;
             which
             a
             certain
             Crust
             encompasses
             ,
             bred
             of
             the
             Excrements
             of
             its
             third
             Digestion
             ,
             to
             keep
             off
             the
             sharpness
             of
             the
             Gall.
             
          
           
             This
             Gall-bladder
             is
             small
             ,
             compared
             ▪
             
               Its
               Greatness
               ▪
            
             to
             the
             Spleen
             and
             Kidneys
             .
             Being
             two
             ▪
             
             fingers
             breadths
             in
             deepness
             :
             but
             the
             more
             cholerick
             any
             person
             is
             ,
             the
             greater
             is
             this
             Gall-bladder
             observed
             to
             be
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             Bottom
             and
             the
             
             Neck
             .
          
           
             The
             Bottom
             is
             round
             ,
             and
             seated
             lowermost
             ,
             
             viz.
             when
             the
             Liver
             is
             in
             its
             Natural
             Situation
             ,
             it
             is
             died
             with
             a
             yellow
             color
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             black
             ,
             viz.
             when
             the
             Choler
             being
             over
             long
             kept
             ,
             is
             burned
             .
          
           
             The
             Neck
             ,
             being
             harder
             then
             the
             bottom
             ,
             looks
             upward
             ,
             grows
             long
             and
             narrow
             ,
             until
             
             it
             end
             into
             a
             very
             small
             and
             narrow
             passage
             .
             At
             the
             Neck
             is
             observed
             ,
             first
             a
             certain
             peculiar
             hollowness
             ,
             and
             also
             certain
             little
             Valves
             or
             Membranes
             ,
             somtimes
             two
             ,
             otherwhiles
             three
             ,
             which
             hinder
             the
             Regress
             of
             Choler
             .
             Regius
             proves
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             sometimes
             opened
             by
             Spirits
             ,
             through
             a
             Nerve
             inserted
             into
             the
             liver
             ,
             and
             so
             let
             Choler
             return
             into
             the
             Liver
             ;
             which
             appears
             by
             anger
             ,
             and
             the
             sudden
             boyling
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             angry
             persons
             ,
             by
             admixtion
             of
             burnt
             Choler
             .
             Howbeit
             by
             pressing
             ,
             or
             squeezin●
             ,
             and
             blowing
             ,
             we
             cannot
             force
             any
             Choler
             back
             .
             And
             if
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Spirits
             were
             so
             great
             ,
             they
             might
             as
             easily
             open
             and
             shut
             the
             valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             in
             the
             Arteries
             more
             plentiful
             then
             ordinary
             .
             They
             pierce
             indeed
             by
             their
             fineness
             the
             valves
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             shut
             ,
             but
             they
             carry
             not
             the
             blood
             with
             them
             .
             Choler
             ,
             truly
             ,
             may
             by
             some
             other
             means
             be
             inflamed
             ,
             which
             is
             every
             where
             among
             hot
             blood
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             valve
             would
             be
             broken
             by
             the
             violence
             of
             Spirits
             ,
             and
             greater
             danger
             might
             follow
             thereby
             ,
             then
             if
             the
             Gall-bladder
             were
             broken
             ,
             an
             Example
             whereof
             Salmuth
             relates
             .
          
           
             The
             Gall-bladder
             hath
             received
             very
             many
             small
             Passages
             ,
             furnished
             with
             sundry
             little
             twigs
             ,
             sowed
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             between
             the
             Roots
             of
             Cava
             and
             Porta
             ;
             which
             afterwards
             being
             joyned
             into
             one
             passage
             ,
             do
             carry
             pure
             Choler
             into
             the
             Gall-bladder
             :
             and
             the
             Gall-bladder
             having
             disgorged
             it self
             into
             the
             Gut
             ,
             is
             daily
             filled
             again
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             continues
             that
             course
             .
             Contrary
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Arnisoeus
             ;
             that
             the
             Bladder
             is
             filled
             with
             Choler
             ,
             which
             being
             hindred
             by
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             from
             descending
             by
             the
             
               Porus
               biliarius
            
             ,
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             does
             drive
             back
             again
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             For
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             Waloeus
             demonstrate
             ,
             how
             that
             the
             Bladder
             being
             never
             so
             little
             squeezed
             with
             a
             mans
             hand
             ,
             even
             when
             the
             Guts
             are
             full
             of
             Chyle
             ,
             Choler
             is
             easily
             squirted
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             two
             very
             small
             Veins
             to
             nourish
             it
             .
             Also
             it
             hath
             very
             small
             Arteries
             from
             
             the
             Coeliaca
             ,
             to
             nourish
             and
             preserve
             Heat
             .
             It
             is
             not
             therefote
             nourished
             with
             Choler
             ,
             as
             Joubertus
             conceives
             .
             It
             hath
             a
             little
             diminutive
             Nerve
             ,
             scarce
             visible
             ,
             from
             a
             little
             Branch
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             which
             crawls
             up
             and
             down
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             use
             is
             to
             receive
             yellow
             excrementitious
             Choler
             ,
             pure
             and
             thin
             (
             not
             the
             Excrement
             
             mingled
             with
             the
             Blood
             ,
             as
             the
             Kidneys
             do
             )
             and
             to
             retain
             it
             some
             while
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             expel
             it
             .
          
           
             Now
             touching
             the
             use
             of
             this
             Choler
             ,
             Learned
             men
             are
             of
             sundry
             minds
             .
             Some
             with
             Aristotle
             will
             allow
             it
             no
             use
             ,
             only
             it
             was
             a
             thing
             could
             not
             be
             avoided
             ,
             and
             is
             drawn
             away
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             may
             not
             be
             defiled
             ;
             which
             Opinion
             Conringius
             maintains
             .
             Others
             attribute
             more
             to
             Choler
             ,
             and
             make
             it
             useful
             to
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             1.
             
             In
             that
             it
             〈…〉
             ●iver
             ,
             according
             to
             Italy-Abbas
             and
             ●…sina
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             means
             comforts
             ●…e
             second
             Digestion
             ,
             and
             helps
             the
             Natural
             Heat
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             like
             fire
             under
             a
             kettle
             .
             Yea
             ,
             it
             heats
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             credit
             Nemesius
             ,
             especially
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             to
             further
             its
             Digestion
             .
             If
             that
             be
             true
             ,
             we
             must
             understand
             it
             of
             a
             moderate
             quantity
             thereof
             ;
             otherwise
             an
             over
             great
             Heat
             of
             Choler
             would
             burn
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Ofkin
             to
             these
             ,
             is
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Helmont
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             the
             balsom
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             Blood
             ,
             brought
             from
             the
             Liver
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             and
             that
             therefore
             the
             Gall
             precedes
             in
             the
             work
             of
             Sanguification
             ,
             and
             the
             Liver
             follows
             ;
             also
             he
             sayes
             it
             hath
             the
             constitution
             of
             a
             necessary
             Bowel
             .
             But
             how
             should
             it
             come
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             since
             Anatomy
             doth
             teach
             ,
             that
             this
             humor
             is
             brought
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             but
             not
             carried
             back
             thither
             .
             For
             ,
             the
             way
             is
             too
             long
             ,
             through
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             where
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             acrimony
             ,
             it
             makes
             hast
             out
             ,
             or
             the
             edge
             thereof
             is
             blunted
             .
             And
             of
             what
             ●hall
             it
             be
             bred
             ,
             if
             it
             go
             before
             the
             Concoction
             of
             Blood
             ?
             There
             are
             few
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             dispersed
             there
             abouts
             ,
             but
             store
             of
             Choler
             is
             collected
             .
             That
             the
             Action
             of
             the
             Liver
             goes
             before
             that
             of
             the
             Gall
             ,
             Children
             in
             the
             Womb
             do
             shew
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Liver
             is
             full
             of
             blood
             ,
             before
             the
             Bladder
             swell
             with
             Gall
             ,
             or
             be
             so
             much
             as
             lightly
             colored
             therewith
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Their
             Opinion
             is
             not
             much
             unlike
             ,
             who
             conceive
             that
             Choler
             preserves
             the
             neighbouring
             Parts
             ,
             and
             the
             Liver
             it self
             from
             corruption
             ,
             which
             Zerbus
             would
             therefore
             prove
             ,
             because
             when
             the
             Gall-bladder
             is
             removed
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             substance
             thereof
             where
             the
             Gall-bladder
             lay
             ,
             does
             presently
             dissolve
             and
             melt
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             A
             greater
             number
             of
             Authors
             will
             have
             it
             to
             serve
             to
             expel
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             by
             strengthening
             the
             Guts
             with
             its
             Heat
             ,
             or
             provoking
             them
             to
             Expulsion
             by
             its
             Acrimony
             .
             For
             although
             the
             Choler-passage
             ,
             be
             implanted
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Gut
             Jejunum
             ,
             or
             into
             the
             Duodenum
             ;
             yet
             it
             hath
             an
             easie
             passage
             to
             the
             Colon
             and
             Ileum
             .
             That
             it
             passes
             through
             the
             Jejunum
             ,
             is
             manifest
             from
             its
             yellow
             color
             ,
             and
             the
             quick
             passage
             of
             the
             Chyle
             there
             through
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             moderate
             in
             quantity
             ,
             otherwise
             the
             Belly
             is
             dried
             and
             made
             costive
             ,
             or
             too
             much
             loosned
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             I
             add
             that
             it
             makes
             the
             Dung
             liquid
             ,
             and
             apt
             to
             pass
             ,
             to
             which
             intent
             Painters
             use
             it
             to
             temper
             their
             colors
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             Receptacle
             of
             Choler
             ,
             is
             
             the
             Canalis
             or
             
               Porus
               biliarius
            
             ,
             the
             Choler-passage
             ,
             which
             is
             found
             even
             in
             those
             Animals
             which
             have
             no
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             as
             the
             Hart
             ,
             the
             Deer
             ,
             the
             Camel
             ,
             the
             Roe
             ,
             the
             Dolphin
             ,
             the
             Sea-calf
             ,
             &c.
             
             It
             is
             a
             vessel
             round
             and
             long
             ,
             and
             the
             passage
             thereof
             is
             twice
             as
             large
             as
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             and
             it
             goes
             right
             out
             from
             the
             Liver
             [
             being
             sometimes
             forked
             ,
             yet
             so
             that
             its
             two
             branches
             do
             soon
             become
             one
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Riolanus
             ]
             through
             the
             common
             passage
             into
             the
             Gut
             (
             not
             into
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             as
             Fallopius
             conceived
             )
             receiving
             a
             thick
             cholerick
             excrement
             ,
             which
             may
             plainly
             be
             perceived
             ,
             if
             the
             said
             passage
             be
             opened
             and
             blown
             up
             ,
             for
             then
             the
             Gut
             swells
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Gall-bladder
             .
             And
             Riolanus
             observed
             that
             some
             have
             died
             of
             a
             Dysentery
             proceeding
             from
             Choler
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Gall-bladder
             was
             obstructed
             ,
             but
             the
             
               Porus
               biliarius
            
             or
             Choler-passage
             ,
             very
             much
             enlarged
             .
             Which
             also
             was
             known
             to
             Galen
             ,
             who
             will
             have
             Choler
             to
             be
             forced
             right
             forwards
             ,
             even
             from
             the
             Liver
             into
             the
             Gut
             Duodenum
             :
             And
             next
             to
             Galen
             we
             are
             beholden
             to
             Fallopius
             for
             the
             true
             Description
             of
             this
             Choler-passage
             .
          
           
             The
             Ductus
             communis
             or
             common
             
             Passage
             ,
             which
             goes
             into
             the
             beginning
             o●
             the
             Gut
             Jejunum
             ,
             or
             
             about
             the
             end
             of
             Duodenum
             ,
             is
             made
             up
             of
             the
             Necks
             of
             the
             Choler-passage
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             and
             is
             obliquely
             inserted
             between
             the
             two
             Coats
             of
             the
             Gut
             ,
             the
             length
             of
             a
             finger
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             it
             is
             parted
             into
             two
             ,
             having
             loose
             Membranes
             ,
             from
             the
             inmost
             and
             middle
             Coat
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             before
             its
             Orifice
             .
             Where
             there
             is
             plenty
             of
             Choler
             ,
             as
             in
             cholerick
             Natures
             ,
             it
             often
             flows
             back
             into
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             so
             that
             such
             persons
             fasting
             ,
             are
             often
             griped
             in
             their
             Bellies
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             though
             seldom
             ,
             this
             Passage
             goes
             into
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             
             and
             there
             empties
             Choler
             .
             Whence
             proceeds
             Vomiting
             of
             Choler
             ,
             and
             such
             persons
             are
             termed
             
               Picrocholoi
               ano
            
             ,
             Choler-vomitets
             .
             Which
             is
             seldom
             found
             in
             ravenous
             Beasts
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Argenterius
             ;
             as
             also
             in
             Dogs
             by
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Akakia
             .
             But
             in
             case
             this
             passage
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Gut
             Jejunum
             ,
             such
             persons
             are
             ever
             troubled
             with
             cholerick
             Loosnesses
             ,
             and
             are
             termed
             
               Picrocholoi
               ●ato
            
             ,
             Choler-purgers
             by
             stool
             .
             Such
             as
             he
             must
             needs
             have
             been
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Choler-passage
             was
             inserted
             into
             the
             Gut
             Colon
             ,
             as
             Severinus
             observed
             ,
             when
             he
             dissected
             the
             said
             party
             at
             Naples
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XVI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             LIen
             or
             Splen
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             is
             seated
             under
             
             the
             short
             Ribs
             on
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             just
             over
             against
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             a
             second
             Liver
             ,
             under
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             between
             the
             Ribs
             and
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             being
             in
             some
             higher
             or
             lower
             then
             in
             others
             .
             Yet
             in
             all
             it
             is
             nearer
             to
             the
             hinder
             or
             back-part
             ,
             seeing
             it
             rests
             
             upon
             the
             Vertebraes
             and
             the
             bastard
             Ribs
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             cannot
             feel
             it
             with
             his
             hand
             ,
             unless
             it
             swell
             ,
             and
             so
             become
             nearer
             to
             the
             Belly-rim
             ;
             and
             this
             scituation
             of
             the
             Spleen
             is
             seldom
             so
             changed
             ,
             as
             to
             find
             the
             Liver
             in
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             and
             the
             Spleen
             on
             the
             right
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             only
             one
             ,
             seldom
             two
             (
             as
             Aristotle
             observes
             in
             the
             4.
             
               de
               Generatione
            
             
             Animalium
             ,
             Chap.
             4.
             
             And
             Posthius
             at
             Montpelier
             and
             Panarolus
             at
             Rome
             )
             and
             more
             rarely
             three
             one
             upon
             another
             ,
             though
             not
             all
             of
             like
             bigness
             (
             as
             Fallopius
             observed
             )
             but
             a
             most
             rare
             case
             it
             is
             for
             the
             Spleen
             to
             be
             wanting
             (
             as
             Aristotle
             hath
             observed
             in
             the
             place
             forecited
             ,
             and
             also
             Laurentius
             and
             Schenkius
             concerning
             one
             
               Matthias
               Ortelius
            
             ,
             and
             Hollerius
             in
             a
             certain
             Girle
             )
             nor
             can
             it
             naturally
             be
             wanting
             ,
             because
             
               Nature
               abounds
               not
               in
               things
               superfluous
               ,
               nor
               is
               wanting
               in
               things
               necessary
               .
            
             That
             vulgar
             Opinion
             is
             therefore
             fabulous
             ,
             which
             
             holds
             that
             it
             may
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             without
             danger
             of
             death
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             such
             as
             used
             to
             run
             Races
             ,
             it
             was
             usually
             taken
             out
             ,
             which
             never
             any
             man
             yet
             saw
             or
             recorded
             ,
             excepting
             
               Pliny
               ,
               Flud
               ,
               Fiorovanta
               ,
               Roussetus
               ,
            
             who
             if
             they
             speak
             truth
             ,
             doubtless
             those
             persons
             made
             a
             very
             bad
             shift
             to
             live
             ,
             or
             died
             soon
             after
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             that
             most
             noble
             Bowel
             ,
             or
             only
             the
             outward
             part
             of
             their
             Spleen
             was
             cut
             off
             .
             For
             deep
             Wounds
             in
             the
             Spleen
             are
             to
             be
             accounted
             mortal
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             plenty
             of
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             the
             consent
             it
             hath
             with
             the
             principal
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             This
             Conceit
             sprung
             Questionless
             from
             that
             old
             Opinion
             of
             Erasistratus
             ,
             who
             conceived
             that
             Nature
             had
             made
             the
             Spleen
             in
             vain
             ,
             which
             Opinion
             Plautus
             also
             follows
             in
             his
             Comedy
             called
             the
             Merchant
             .
             And
             others
             follow
             them
             ,
             who
             are
             so
             far
             to
             be
             born
             with
             ,
             if
             they
             shall
             say
             it
             is
             not
             necessary
             in
             reference
             to
             all
             kinds
             of
             Live
             wights
             ,
             but
             only
             in
             respect
             of
             some
             sorts
             .
             For
             such
             live
             Creatures
             as
             have
             no
             bladder
             do
             want
             a
             Spleen
             without
             detriment
             ,
             as
             the
             Chamaeleon
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             .
             Insects
             have
             no
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             therefore
             that
             Proverbial
             Speech
             is
             false
             :
             
               Habet
               &
               musca
               splenem
               ,
               even
               a
               Flie
               hath
               a
               Spleen
               .
            
          
           
             It
             is
             not
             so
             great
             as
             the
             Liver
             ,
             yet
             in
             Mankind
             the
             Spleen
             is
             sufficiently
             thick
             
             and
             big
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             because
             of
             the
             stubborn
             humor
             which
             it
             is
             to
             master
             ,
             and
             is
             hard
             to
             overcome
             ,
             as
             because
             of
             the
             Arterial
             ,
             fermentative
             ,
             or
             leavening
             ,
             and
             yeasty
             Blood
             ,
             which
             it
             was
             to
             contain
             .
             For
             it
             is
             six
             fingers
             long
             very
             near
             ,
             three
             fingers
             broad
             ,
             one
             finger
             thick
             ,
             of
             which
             greatness
             it
             is
             not
             found
             in
             any
             other
             living
             Creature
             .
             Yet
             is
             its
             bigness
             various
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             variety
             of
             Subjects
             ,
             and
             the
             several
             Constitutions
             of
             Men.
             'T
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             larger
             in
             such
             persons
             ,
             as
             have
             Naturally
             a
             greater
             quantity
             of
             Melancholy
             or
             acid
             Juyce
             then
             others
             have
             ,
             which
             flowing
             thereunto
             ,
             it
             is
             soon
             augmented
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             loose
             and
             spungie
             substance
             .
             Those
             persons
             whose
             Spleen
             is
             over
             grown
             ,
             are
             lean
             ,
             and
             bad
             colored
             .
             Whence
             it
             was
             that
             the
             Emperor
             Trajan
             termed
             the
             Exchequer
             a
             Spleen
             ,
             because
             as
             the
             Princes
             Excheque
             is
             inriched
             ,
             the
             People
             are
             impoverished
             ;
             so
             as
             the
             Spleen
             increases
             ,
             the
             Body
             pines
             .
             They
             who
             conceive
             it
             elaborates
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             do
             bring
             this
             for
             a
             reason
             ,
             viz.
             that
             it
             draws
             too
             much
             Ch●le
             by
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             ,
             and
             defrauds
             the
             Liver
             .
             But
             because
             that
             Action
             of
             the
             Spleen
             is
             questioned
             ,
             another
             reason
             must
             be
             sought
             after
             .
             The
             most
             renowned
             Conringius
             allows
             the
             Premises
             for
             true
             in
             a
             praeternatural
             greatness
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             otherwise
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             Natural
             and
             legitimate
             ,
             the
             Body
             flourishes
             when
             the
             spleen
             does
             flourish
             .
          
           
             Be
             the
             state
             of
             the
             Spleen
             what
             it
             will
             ,
             I
             conceive
             the
             Body
             is
             diminished
             ,
             when
             the
             Spleen
             is
             augmented
             ,
             because
             it
             bereaves
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             fermentative
             acid
             Juyce
             ,
             and
             either
             consumes
             it
             to
             nourish
             it self
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             naturally
             great
             ;
             or
             is
             unable
             to
             prepare
             and
             expel
             it
             ,
             when
             its
             greatness
             is
             praeternatural
             and
             sickly
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Shape
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             like
             on
             Oxes
             tongue
             ,
             whence
             some
             have
             called
             it
             
             
               linguosum
               Visous
            
             ,
             the
             Tongue-bowel
             .
             On
             the
             outside
             towards
             the
             Ribs
             and
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             little
             bunching
             and
             bossie
             ;
             somtimes
             it
             hath
             marks
             made
             in
             it
             by
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             being
             hollow
             on
             that
             side
             ,
             which
             is
             towards
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             stomach
             which
             lies
             close
             by
             it
             :
             Where
             all
             along
             the
             middle
             part
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             certain
             white
             Line
             ,
             with
             prominencies
             in
             it
             ,
             which
             admits
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             with
             the
             Caul
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             praeternaturally
             it
             receives
             sundry
             Figures
             ,
             viz.
             exactly
             round
             ,
             triangular
             ,
             sharp-pointed
             ,
             
               made
               rough
            
             with
             eminencies
             ,
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ;
             as
             Archangelus
             hath
             rightly
             observed
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Color
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             is
             red
             ,
             
             like
             that
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             nourished
             with
             pure
             Mothers
             Blood
             :
             But
             in
             persons
             come
             to
             age
             ,
             it
             is
             blackish
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             thick
             blood
             wherewith
             it
             is
             nourished
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             as
             are
             yet
             older
             ,
             it
             becomes
             black
             and
             blew
             .
             I
             have
             observed
             it
             red
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             and
             Vesalius
             before
             me
             ,
             as
             also
             Spigelius
             who
             therefore
             beleives
             ,
             that
             such
             as
             have
             it
             blackish
             are
             unhealthy
             .
             Conringius
             thinks
             that
             black
             color
             is
             caused
             by
             Intemperance
             in
             eating
             ,
             and
             in
             drinking
             especially
             .
             I
             do
             attribute
             much
             to
             the
             temper
             of
             particular
             persons
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             variety
             of
             Heat
             .
             Now
             the
             Spleen
             does
             praeternaturally
             put
             on
             many
             colors
             ,
             according
             
             to
             the
             Humor
             praedominant
             ,
             as
             black
             and
             blew
             ,
             ash-color
             ,
             &c.
             
             In
             Beasts
             of
             hot
             Constitution
             ,
             it
             is
             blacker
             then
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             and
             in
             Swine
             it
             is
             whiter
             .
          
           
             
               It
               is
               knit
            
             by
             thin
             Membranes
             arising
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             
             it self
             ,
             the
             Call
             ,
             and
             the
             left
             Kidney
             ,
             somtimes
             also
             to
             the
             Septum
             ,
             which
             Fernelius
             denies
             ,
             nor
             can
             he
             be
             excused
             ,
             unless
             we
             shall
             say
             he
             intended
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             for
             thereto
             it
             is
             not
             fastned
             .
             But
             in
             its
             hollow
             part
             ,
             it
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             upper
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Caul
             ,
             from
             which
             also
             (
             according
             to
             others
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             proper
             to
             it self
             )
             it
             receives
             ,
          
           
             A
             Coat
             thin
             and
             single
             ,
             yet
             thicker
             then
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             which
             in
             aged
             
             persons
             is
             oftentimes
             hardned
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             become
             bony
             and
             gristly
             .
             It
             ought
             to
             be
             thicker
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             be
             stronger
             to
             endure
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Arterial
             Blood.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             or
             Parenchyma
             ,
             is
             like
             thick
             ,
             black
             ,
             and
             congealed
             blood
             .
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             Vessels
             of
             all
             kinds
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             a
             remarkable
             
             Trunk
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             ,
             scituate
             far
             beneath
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             sent
             at
             h
             wart
             unto
             the
             Spleen
             .
             The
             numerous
             branches
             of
             this
             bough
             ,
             being
             for
             the
             most
             part
             small
             as
             Fibres
             ,
             are
             spent
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             saving
             two
             which
             sometimes
             pass
             out
             of
             the
             Spleen
             :
             The
             one
             is
             called
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             entring
             into
             the
             stomach
             ,
             sometimes
             by
             one
             ,
             otherwhiles
             by
             more
             branches
             [
             which
             more
             frequently
             ,
             as
             Walaeus
             informs
             us
             ,
             is
             a
             little
             branch
             of
             
               Vena
               splenica
            
             ,
             which
             when
             it
             is
             come
             to
             the
             middle
             space
             betwixt
             the
             stomach
             and
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             forkwise
             into
             two
             twigs
             ,
             one
             of
             which
             goes
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             the
             stomach
             ]
             which
             vessel
             some
             will
             have
             to
             belch
             out
             acid
             blood
             to
             provoke
             appetite
             ,
             or
             to
             strengthen
             the
             stomach
             ,
             which
             is
             afterwards
             voided
             by
             the
             Guts
             .
             Another
             branch
             goes
             unto
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             internal
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             many
             and
             great
             Arteries
             from
             a
             
             branch
             of
             the
             Coeliaca
             ,
             which
             the
             Liver
             hath
             not
             .
             1.
             
             To
             cherish
             life
             and
             inbred
             heat
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Blood
             might
             be
             more
             strongly
             altered
             .
             3.
             
             That
             for
             its
             own
             Nourishment
             ,
             it
             might
             receive
             blood
             ,
             and
             withal
             prepare
             acid
             Juyce
             brought
             thereunto
             ,
             with
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             for
             to
             ferment
             the
             Chyle
             and
             all
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Now
             we
             are
             to
             take
             special
             notice
             of
             the
             frequent
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Arteries
             
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             with
             the
             Veins
             thereof
             ,
             especially
             one
             remarkable
             one
             ,
             before
             the
             Entrance
             of
             the
             Vessels
             into
             the
             Spleen
             :
             the
             rest
             are
             in
             the
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             Also
             we
             must
             observe
             its
             
               little
               Nerves
            
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             left
             Costal
             branch
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             dispersed
             rather
             through
             the
             Coat
             ,
             then
             the
             Substance
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             Action
             of
             the
             Spleen
             is
             by
             such
             Doctors
             as
             follow
             the
             old
             Opinion
             said
             to
             be
             chiesly
             threefold
             .
             1.
             
             To
             draw
             melancholick
             ,
             excrementitious
             ,
             and
             slimy
             Humors
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             2.
             
             To
             separate
             the
             melancholick
             Excrement
             there
             from
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             nourished
             by
             the
             good
             blood
             .
             3.
             
             To
             void
             it
             being
             separated
             ,
             into
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Guts
             .
             Also
             they
             say
             that
             the
             nutriment
             of
             the
             Spleen
             is
             elaborated
             and
             broken
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             because
             spongy
             and
             loose
             flesh
             ought
             to
             be
             nourished
             with
             vaporous
             and
             subtile
             blood
             .
             The
             Passages
             by
             which
             the
             melancholy
             Juyce
             is
             said
             to
             be
             belched
             forth
             ,
             are
             first
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Haemorrhoidal
             Vein
             .
             They
             will
             have
             the
             Spleen
             therefore
             to
             be
             the
             Receptacle
             of
             the
             melancholick
             Excrement
             ,
             or
             of
             thick
             dreggie
             Blood
             separated
             in
             the
             Liver
             (
             even
             as
             the
             Gall-bladder
             receives
             the
             yellow
             Choler
             )
             and
             that
             therefore
             the
             Spleen
             is
             set
             just
             over
             against
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             
               Howbeit
               I
               deny
               that
               the
               Spleen
               is
               ordained
            
             
             
               only
               to
               receive
               an
               Exerement
            
             ;
             For
          
           
             
               1.
               
               In
               the
               Spleen
               there
               is
               no
               large
               cavity
               receiving
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Gall-bladder
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               membranous
               hollowness
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Bladder
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               If
               it
               were
               a
               Receptacle
               for
               Excrements
               ,
               why
               was
               it
               not
               seated
               in
               an
               inferior
               place
               ,
               that
               it
               might
               more
               conveniently
               receive
               the
               weighty
               Exerement
               as
               other
               Receptacles
               ?
            
             
               3.
               
               Rondeletius
               denving
               that
               the
               spleen
               
               is
               the
               Receptacle
               of
               Melancholy
               ,
               gives
               this
               reason
               :
               because
               that
               humor
               while
               it
               is
               naturally
               disposed
               ,
               is
               all
               consumed
               upon
               the
               bony
               ,
               and
               other
               hard
               and
               dry
               parts
               ;
               and
               seeing
               it
               is
               in
               us
               the
               least
               in
               quantity
               of
               all
               humors
               therefore
               there
               is
               no
               part
               ordained
               to
               receive
               it
               ,
               no
               more
               then
               there
               is
               for
               bloody
               Excrements
               ,
               which
               pass
               away
               by
               Sweat
               and
               insensible
               Transpiration
               .
               Yet
               I
               conceive
               this
               Argument
               is
               not
               very
               strong
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Why
               are
               there
               no
               Branches
               of
               this
               Receptacle
               spred
               through
               the
               substance
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               of
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 splenicus
              
               ,
               even
               as
               the
               Gall-bladder
               receives
               Branches
               spred
               up
               and
               down
               the
               Liver
               ?
            
             
               5.
               
               Why
               are
               there
               not
               some
               Passages
               ,
               which
               carry
               this
               Juyce
               from
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               No
               part
               is
               nourished
               with
               an
               Excrement
               ,
               notwithstanding
               the
               Saying
               of
               Columbus
               ,
               that
               no
               part
               is
               nourished
               with
               an
               Excrement
               saving
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               It
               is
               absurd
               that
               an
               Excrement
               should
               flow
               back
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 porta
              
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               into
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 splenicus
              
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               It
               should
               receive
               in
               ,
               and
               purge
               forth
               Excrements
               ,
               by
               the
               same
               Passages
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               The
               strongest
               reason
               ,
               that
               the
               Spleen
               is
               no
               Receptacle
               of
               Melancholy
               is
               ,
               In
               as
               much
               as
               it
               is
               another
               Organ
               of
               Sanguification
               ,
               as
               shall
               be
               proved
               by
               and
               by
               .
            
          
           
             Later
             Anatomists
             have
             conceived
             ,
             that
             the
             Spleen
             doth
             elaborate
             Blood
             ,
             as
             the
             
             Liver
             doth
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             agreed
             ,
             touching
             the
             way
             ,
             nor
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Chyle
             .
             
               Casparus
               Bartholinus
            
             my
             Father
             was
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Spleen
             did
             
               make
               a
               thick
            
             ,
             but
             good
             sort
             of
             Blood
             ,
             of
             the
             thicker
             part
             of
             the
             Chymus
             ,
             which
             by
             an
             inbred
             Faculty
             it
             hath
             ,
             it
             draws
             to
             it self
             ,
             through
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             .
             This
             he
             proved
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               By
               the
               likeness
               of
               the
               structure
               of
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               with
               that
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
               For
               as
               the
               Liver
               is
               a
               fleshy
               Bowel
               ,
               covered
               with
               a
               Coat
               ,
               furnished
               with
               very
               many
               Vessels
               ,
               the
               flesh
               whereof
               resembles
               blood
               ,
               shed
               round
               about
               :
               Even
               so
               ,
               the
               Spleen
               is
               a
               Bowel
               ,
               furnished
               with
               a
               Coat
               ,
               and
               with
               very
               many
               Vessels
               variously
               interwoven
               ,
               whose
               proper
               flesh
               is
               as
               it
               were
               congealed
               blood
               ,
               shed
               round
               about
               the
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               there
               are
               very
               many
               textures
               of
               the
               Vessels
               and
               infinite
               Anastomoses
               .
               Now
               there
               are
               no
               where
               such
               textures
               ,
               and
               plications
               ,
               or
               foldings
               of
               the
               Vessels
               ,
               save
               for
               a
               new
               elaboration
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               the
               Brain
               ,
               Liver
               ,
               Stones
               ,
               Duggs
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               It
               appears
               from
               the
               Scituation
               of
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 splenicus
              
               ,
               which
               is
               far
               beneath
               the
               Liver
               ,
               out
               of
               the
               Trunk
               of
               
                 Vena
                 porta
              
               ,
               where
               part
               of
               the
               Chymus
               is
               attracted
               ,
               or
               of
               the
               Chyle
               ,
               which
               hath
               some
               disposition
               towards
               blood
               ▪
               If
               therefore
               it
               receives
               matter
               there
               ,
               of
               which
               blood
               is
               made
               ,
               why
               therefore
               shall
               not
               the
               Spleen
               make
               blood
               ?
            
             
               
               4.
               
               Nature
               is
               wont
               either
               to
               double
               the
               Parts
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               set
               one
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               Kidneys
               ,
               Stones
               ,
               Lungs
               ,
               Duggs
               ,
               Organs
               of
               the
               Senses
               ,
               &c.
               or
               if
               she
               makes
               only
               one
               ,
               she
               is
               wont
               to
               place
               it
               in
               the
               middle
               .
               as
               the
               Heart
               ,
               Stomach
               ,
               Womb
               ,
               Bladder
               ,
               Nose
               ,
               Tongue
               ,
               Mouth
               ,
               &c.
               
               Therefore
               the
               Spleen
               must
               needs
               be
               another
               Liver
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Diseases
               of
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               do
               hurt
               Blood-making
               or
               Sanguification
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               Somtimes
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               Liver
               is
               changed
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               is
               in
               the
               left
               side
               ,
               and
               the
               Spleen
               on
               the
               right
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               Liver
               failing
               and
               growing
               less
               ,
               the
               Spleen
               is
               augmented
               ,
               and
               assists
               the
               Liver
               ,
               as
               is
               known
               by
               many
               Examples
               ,
               whence
               the
               Spleen
               hath
               been
               often
               seen
               in
               Dissections
               ,
               to
               be
               greater
               and
               redder
               then
               the
               liver
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               T
               is
               unlikely
               that
               so
               many
               Arteries
               enter
               into
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               for
               the
               sake
               of
               Excrements
               ,
               but
               rather
               to
               digest
               &
               concoct
               thick
               Blood
               ,
               that
               so
               by
               contrary
               thinness
               ,
               the
               stubborn
               thinness
               of
               the
               said
               Blood
               may
               be
               overcome
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               In
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               the
               Spleen
               is
               red
               as
               is
               the
               Liver
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               cause
               aforesaid
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               Such
               as
               the
               Diseases
               of
               the
               Liver
               are
               ,
               such
               in
               a
               manner
               are
               those
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               And
               the
               Diseases
               of
               the
               Spleen
               and
               Liver
               ,
               are
               cured
               well
               near
               with
               the
               self
               same
               Remedies
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               If
               Authorities
               are
               of
               force
               ,
               enter
               Aristotle
               in
               the
               3.
               
               Book
               of
               the
               Parts
               of
               living
               Creatures
               ,
               Chap.
               7.
               where
               he
               saith
               ,
               that
               the
               Liver
               and
               Spleen
               are
               of
               a
               like
               Nature
               ;
               also
               ,
               that
               the
               Spleen
               is
               as
               it
               were
               an
               adulterate
               Liver
               ,
               and
               where
               the
               Spleen
               is
               very
               little
               ,
               there
               the
               Liver
               is
               Bipartite
               ,
               or
               of
               two
               parts
               ,
               and
               that
               all
               parts
               in
               the
               Body
               almost
               are
               double
               .
               Plato
               calls
               the
               Spleen
               an
               express
               image
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
               Others
               call
               it
               the
               Livers
               Vicar
               ,
               the
               left
               Liver
               ,
               &c.
               
               
                 The
                 Author
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 touching
                 the
                 use
                 of
                 Respiration
                 ,
              
               hath
               confirmed
               this
               ,
               as
               also
               
                 Apbrodisaeus
                 ,
                 Araeteus
              
               ,
               and
               others
               .
               Archangelus
               makes
               another
               use
               of
               the
               Spleen
               to
               be
               ,
               to
               make
               more
               plenty
               of
               Blood.
               
            
          
           
             If
             any
             shall
             demand
             ,
             
               To
               what
               ●nd
               serves
               the
               Blood
               which
               the
               Spleen
               makes
               ?
            
             
          
           
             Some
             conceive
             it
             serves
             to
             the
             same
             end
             ,
             with
             that
             of
             the
             liver
             ,
             viz.
             to
             nourish
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             and
             to
             assist
             the
             liver
             .
          
           
             But
             he
             was
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             not
             done
             save
             when
             necessity
             requires
             ,
             in
             some
             defect
             or
             Disease
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             But
             he
             conceives
             that
             ordinarily
             the
             Spleen
             is
             an
             Organ
             to
             make
             blood
             ,
             
               to
               nourish
               the
               Bowels
               of
               the
               lower
               Belly
               ,
            
             as
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             Guts
             ,
             Call
             ,
             Mesentery
             ,
             Sweet-bread
             ,
             &c.
             and
             that
             the
             Spleen
             it self
             is
             nourished
             with
             some
             portion
             of
             the
             said
             Blood
             ,
             and
             sends
             the
             rest
             to
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             .
             And
             he
             conceives
             that
             the
             liver
             makes
             blood
             for
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             parts
             ,
             especially
             the
             musculous
             parts
             .
             And
             he
             proves
             it
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Because
               the
               bowels
               of
               the
               lower
               Belly
               receive
               their
               nourishment
               from
               the
               
                 Vena
                 splenica
              
               ,
               or
               from
               the
               branches
               yssueing
               therefrom
               ,
               namely
               from
               the
               branches
               of
               
                 Vena
                 port●
              
               only
               ,
               and
               not
               from
               the
               
                 Vena
                 cava
              
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Because
               those
               bowels
               are
               thick
               ,
               more
               earthy
               and
               base
               :
               And
               such
               as
               the
               like
               parts
               are
               not
               found
               in
               the
               body
               besides
               ,
               and
               therefore
               these
               parts
               stood
               in
               need
               to
               receive
               such
               blood
               from
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               And
               therefore
               the
               liver
               is
               greater
               ,
               because
               it
               makes
               blood
               for
               the
               whole
               body
               besides
               :
               The
               Spleen
               less
               ,
               because
               it
               makes
               blood
               only
               for
               the
               lower
               Belly
               ,
               save
               when
               in
               cases
               of
               necessity
               it
               is
               forced
               to
               help
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               In
               Dogs
               the
               Spleen
               is
               long
               and
               thin
               ,
               because
               the
               Parts
               or
               Bowels
               of
               the
               lower
               Belly
               are
               smaller
               in
               a
               Dog
               ,
               and
               less
               wreathed
               and
               folded
               ,
               then
               in
               a
               Man.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               There
               is
               an
               evident
               difference
               between
               the
               Fat
               bred
               in
               the
               musculous
               Parts
               ,
               or
               those
               which
               are
               nourished
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 cava
              
               ,
               and
               that
               dirty
               ,
               and
               soon
               pu●rifiing
               Fat
               ,
               which
               is
               bred
               in
               the
               lower
               Belly
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Cal
               ,
               Guts
               ,
               Mesentery
               ,
               &c.
               
               Hence
               arise
               so
               many
               Putrefactions
               in
               the
               mesenterick
               Parts
               .
               And
               by
               how
               much
               an
               Humor
               is
               thicker
               (
               as
               is
               the
               muddie
               Fat
               we
               speak
               of
               )
               so
               much
               the
               sooner
               it
               putrifies
               :
               As
               the
               dreggie
               fat
               doth
               sooner
               ,
               then
               the
               Fat
               in
               musculous
               parts
               .
               So
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Spleen
               is
               more
               disposed
               to
               Putrefaction
               ,
               then
               that
               of
               the
               liver
               ,
               and
               this
               then
               the
               blood
               of
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
               Moreover
               ,
               the
               blood
               of
               the
               Arteries
               is
               less
               subject
               to
               Putrefaction
               ,
               then
               any
               of
               the
               former
               ;
               and
               the
               Spirit
               least
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               6
               He
               believes
               this
               to
               be
               a
               most
               strong
               Argument
               ,
               that
               where
               a
               part
               is
               found
               having
               the
               substance
               of
               the
               Bowels
               ,
               there
               also
               there
               are
               Veins
               from
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               ,
               or
               the
               branches
               of
               the
               Spleen
               :
               but
               where
               a
               part
               is
               consisting
               of
               musculous
               flesh
               ,
               there
               are
               Veins
               which
               have
               their
               Original
               from
               
                 Vena
                 cava
              
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 rectum
              
               ,
               in
               which
               by
               reason
               of
               its
               twofold
               substance
               ,
               Nature
               hath
               placed
               two
               sorts
               of
               Veins
               .
               In
               the
               musculous
               Part
               ,
               there
               are
               the
               external
               Haemorrhoid
               Veins
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               Cava
               :
               In
               the
               ●owellie
               or
               guttie
               substance
               ,
               there
               are
               veins
               from
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               .
            
          
           
             These
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             Reasons
             prevailed
             with
             my
             Father
             of
             pious
             Memory
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             the
             Spleen
             drew
             Chymus
             ,
             by
             the
             
               Ramus
               spenicus
            
             .
             Which
             Opinion
             was
             at
             that
             time
             embraced
             by
             most
             Anatomists
             ,
             as
             
               Varolus
               ,
               Posthius
               ,
               Jessenus
               ,
               Platerus
               ,
               Baubinus
               ,
               Sennertus
               ,
            
             and
             Riolanus
             in
             his
             first
             Anthropographia
             .
             But
             that
             Age
             deserves
             excuse
             ,
             as
             being
             ignorant
             of
             what
             Posterity
             hath
             since
             found
             out
             .
             For
             the
             milkie
             veins
             discovered
             by
             Asellius
             ,
             do
             shew
             ,
             that
             no
             Chyle
             thick
             or
             thin
             ,
             is
             drawn
             by
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             ,
             or
             carried
             any
             whether
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             only
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             a
             Ligature
             in
             live
             Dissections
             declares
             ,
             that
             nothing
             is
             carried
             through
             the
             Mesaraicks
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             from
             the
             Spleen
             to
             the
             Mesaraicks
             .
             Yet
             I
             allow
             thus
             much
             to
             the
             foresaid
             reasons
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             certain
             Generation
             of
             Blood
             made
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             by
             the
             manner
             hereafter
             to
             be
             explained
             ,
             not
             of
             Chyle
             ,
             which
             hath
             here
             no
             Passages
             ,
             but
             of
             Arterial
             Blood
             ,
             sent
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Hofmaannus
             and
             Spigelius
             bring
             the
             
             dreggie
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             through
             the
             mesaraick
             Veins
             unto
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             there
             concocted
             into
             Blood.
             Who
             are
             in
             the
             same
             fault
             .
             For
             the
             Arteries
             are
             ordained
             to
             carry
             blood
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             manifest
             by
             Ligatures
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             course
             of
             Nature
             ,
             for
             the
             blood
             to
             be
             carried
             ,
             and
             the
             Chyle
             brought
             back
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             be
             mingled
             together
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             in
             live
             Anatomists
             ,
             there
             was
             never
             any
             Chyle
             observed
             there
             .
             And
             the
             dreggie
             Portion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             which
             no
             part
             stands
             in
             need
             of
             to
             nourish
             it self
             ,
             is
             more
             fitly
             purged
             out
             by
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Sperlingerus
             a
             learned
             Man
             ,
             conceives
             that
             this
             work
             is
             performed
             by
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
             Which
             were
             a
             ready
             way
             ,
             if
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             do
             go
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             which
             no
             man
             as
             yet
             hath
             been
             able
             to
             observe
             .
             Those
             that
             thought
             otherwise
             were
             deceived
             by
             nervie
             Fiberkies
             .
          
           
             Others
             who
             very
             well
             saw
             ,
             that
             the
             Mesentery
             sent
             nothing
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             would
             have
             the
             Chyle
             to
             come
             right
             out
             from
             the
             Stomach
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             by
             waies
             manifest
             or
             hidden
             .
             They
             account
             the
             manifest
             waies
             to
             be
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             and
             its
             branches
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             spleen
             sucks
             the
             more
             wa●ry
             part
             of
             the
             Chyle
             .
             But
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             carries
             acid
             Juyce
             from
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             but
             nothing
             
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             no
             more
             then
             the
             other
             Veins
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             somtimes
             it
             is
             not
             inserted
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             but
             there
             is
             a
             Branch
             of
             the
             Splenica
             without
             it
             .
             I
             omit
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             is
             never
             full
             of
             the
             white
             liquor
             .
             
               Daniel
               Florstius
            
             indeed
             hath
             in
             this
             case
             substituted
             the
             
               Vena
               splenica
            
             ,
             but
             contrary
             to
             Experience
             ,
             and
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
             The
             splenick
             Vein
             receives
             all
             its
             blood
             from
             the
             Spleen
             and
             its
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             returns
             nothing
             ,
             and
             therefore
             being
             bound
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             ,
             it
             is
             filled
             ,
             and
             swells
             towards
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             but
             towards
             the
             Liver
             it
             is
             emptied
             .
             Howbeit
             Regius
             appeals
             to
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             swells
             betwixt
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             lank
             between
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Spleen
             .
             Bachius
             is
             nothing
             moved
             herewith
             ,
             though
             he
             cannot
             untie
             the
             knot
             ,
             and
             Hogeland
             is
             various
             in
             this
             Observation
             ;
             so
             that
             I
             much
             doubt
             ,
             whether
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             is
             alone
             so
             filled
             ,
             before
             I
             shall
             see
             it
             attested
             by
             the
             Eyes
             of
             some
             others
             .
          
           
             Besides
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
               ,
               Carolus
               Piso
            
             proves
             that
             the
             wheyish
             and
             potulent
             matter
             ,
             is
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             by
             the
             Gastrick
             and
             Epiploick
             Veins
             ;
             who
             was
             ignorant
             of
             the
             motion
             of
             humors
             in
             these
             veins
             .
             Both
             the
             vessels
             disburthen
             themselves
             into
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             blood
             is
             sent
             by
             a
             straight
             Passage
             unto
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             returns
             unto
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             without
             any
             hindrance
             of
             the
             Valves
             .
          
           
             Those
             who
             are
             for
             hidden
             Passages
             ,
             would
             force
             upon
             us
             ,
             either
             the
             Pores
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             or
             a
             distinct
             vessel
             ,
             to
             us
             as
             yet
             invisible
             and
             unknown
             .
             Among
             the
             former
             is
             Veslingus
             ,
             among
             the
             latter
             Conringius
             ,
             who
             nevertheless
             differ
             ,
             touching
             the
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Humor
             .
             Veslingus
             will
             have
             the
             Spleen
             to
             make
             blood
             of
             the
             mor●●arry
             Portion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             with
             the
             earthy
             and
             slimy
             parts
             mixed
             therewith
             ,
             drawn
             by
             the
             invisible
             Pores
             ,
             like
             the
             milkie
             veins
             ,
             resting
             upon
             the
             stomach
             it self
             ,
             and
             the
             Pancreas
             .
             Conringius
             will
             have
             only
             the
             potulent
             liquor
             to
             pass
             by
             a
             vessel
             to
             us
             invisible
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             close
             sticking
             of
             the
             Spleen
             to
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             the
             Serum
             therein
             contained
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             so
             white
             :
             Which
             Vessel
             will
             at
             one
             time
             or
             other
             be
             discovered
             .
             But
             all
             would
             be
             well
             ,
             if
             those
             men
             that
             have
             eyes
             in
             their
             heads
             ,
             would
             shew
             us
             either
             those
             Passages
             ,
             or
             that
             peculiar
             Vessel
             .
             The
             Pores
             are
             too
             narrow
             for
             the
             dreggie
             parts
             of
             the
             Chyle
             to
             pass
             through
             ,
             and
             who
             can
             hinder
             them
             sweating
             out
             some
             other
             way
             ,
             rather
             then
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ?
             Many
             times
             when
             the
             Spleen
             stuck
             not
             so
             close
             to
             the
             stomach
             ,
             I
             could
             see
             no
             vessel
             ,
             nor
             could
             I
             see
             any
             such
             thing
             in
             a
             Youth
             ,
             who
             having
             largely
             drunk
             ,
             was
             here
             lately
             choaked
             with
             a
             bit
             of
             a
             Neates-tongue
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             ,
             
               Reusner
               ,
               Piso
            
             ,
             and
             Conringius
             lately
             praised
             ,
             do
             suppose
             ,
             that
             only
             potulent
             matter
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Spleen
             presently
             suckt
             out
             ,
             and
             that
             therefore
             it
             makes
             only
             watry
             Blood
             ordinarily
             .
             But
             there
             is
             no
             strong
             and
             sufficient
             reason
             for
             this
             Opinion
             ,
             seeing
             there
             are
             no
             manifest
             Passages
             .
             Nor
             must
             it
             only
             draw
             that
             which
             is
             thin
             ,
             which
             both
             the
             Blood
             and
             Chylus
             stand
             in
             need
             of
             ,
             as
             a
             vehicle
             or
             carrier
             ,
             though
             it
             flow
             not
             alone
             ,
             but
             is
             variously
             mixed
             with
             grosser
             matter
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Constitution
             of
             the
             blood
             ;
             till
             having
             plaid
             its
             part
             ,
             it
             is
             either
             separated
             by
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             or
             sweats
             through
             the
             whole
             Habit
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             If
             the
             wheyish
             moisture
             be
             praeternaturally
             separated
             in
             the
             stomach
             ,
             from
             the
             thicker
             Chyle
             ,
             either
             it
             is
             voided
             by
             Vomit
             ,
             and
             the
             grosser
             Chyle
             wanting
             the
             help
             thereof
             to
             carry
             it
             ,
             will
             make
             the
             Colick
             in
             the
             Guts
             ,
             as
             I
             saw
             in
             our
             famous
             Wormius
             ;
             or
             it
             is
             voided
             through
             the
             Pylorus
             ,
             which
             is
             alwaies
             open
             for
             liquid
             meats
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             are
             easily
             digested
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             our
             most
             desired
             Walaeus
             ;
             much
             more
             after
             much
             drinking
             ,
             which
             is
             somtimes
             in
             great
             Drinkers
             ,
             quickly
             voided
             by
             urin
             ,
             not
             passing
             through
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             but
             through
             the
             Guts
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             a
             conveniency
             of
             quality
             ,
             thinness
             of
             Humors
             ,
             loosness
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             strength
             of
             the
             attractive
             Faculty
             .
             All
             which
             conspiring
             ,
             Asellius
             rightly
             avouches
             there
             is
             no
             way
             so
             long
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             soon
             passed
             over
             .
             In
             such
             as
             are
             otherwise
             constituted
             ,
             Drink
             does
             not
             so
             soon
             slip
             away
             by
             Urin.
             For
             some
             will
             drink
             all
             day
             ,
             and
             never
             use
             a
             Chamber-pot
             .
             In
             some
             also
             their
             Belly
             becomes
             loose
             ,
             and
             the
             Drink
             goes
             away
             ,
             questionless
             ,
             by
             the
             Guts
             .
             The
             blood
             ,
             indeed
             ,
             of
             Splenetick
             persons
             ,
             is
             thin
             and
             warry
             ,
             not
             that
             it
             comes
             such
             immediately
             from
             the
             stomach
             ,
             but
             the
             fault
             is
             in
             the
             whole
             blood
             ,
             communicated
             by
             the
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
             I
             pass
             over
             ,
             how
             that
             these
             are
             the
             signs
             of
             a
             disordered
             Spleen
             ,
             from
             the
             praeternatural
             state
             whereof
             ,
             no
             good
             Argument
             can
             be
             drawn
             to
             prove
             any
             thing
             ,
             touching
             its
             Natural
             condition
             ;
             by
             which
             Answer
             ,
             all
             other
             Arguments
             brought
             by
             most
             learned
             men
             ,
             for
             this
             potulent
             Chylus
             are
             answered
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             doubtful
             question
             ,
             why
             only
             
             such
             Creatures
             have
             Spleens
             ,
             which
             have
             Kidneys
             and
             Bladders
             ,
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             which
             Panarolus
             found
             true
             in
             a
             Chamaeleon
             .
             Is
             it
             because
             of
             the
             Attraction
             of
             wheyish
             Humors
             ?
             I
             cannot
             beleive
             it
             .
             But
             they
             have
             no
             Spleen
             ,
             because
             they
             make
             little
             blood
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             wheyish
             Humor
             did
             not
             want
             peculiar
             Receptacles
             ,
             but
             the
             Superfluities
             of
             the
             blood
             is
             spent
             upon
             Feathers
             ,
             Skin
             ,
             Scales
             ,
             &c.
             
             They
             are
             therefore
             without
             a
             Spleen
             ,
             because
             Fermentation
             was
             not
             necessary
             ,
             in
             the
             imperfect
             Concoction
             of
             those
             kind
             of
             Creatures
             ,
             who
             have
             a
             perpetual
             and
             Natural
             Lientery
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             hath
             lately
             in
             his
             Enchiridion
             out
             of
             all
             these
             Opinions
             ,
             hammer'd
             a
             mixt
             action
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             to
             attract
             slimy
             Blood
             for
             its
             own
             Nourishment
             ,
             and
             after
             that
             to
             pour
             out
             a
             certain
             particular
             fermentative
             Whey
             ,
             through
             the
             splenetick
             Arteries
             into
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             because
             its
             flesh
             is
             of
             a
             drinking
             Nature
             ,
             to
             draw
             and
             suck
             superfluous
             Liquor
             through
             the
             Veins
             out
             of
             the
             stomach
             .
             To
             which
             I
             have
             already
             answered
             ,
             part
             by
             part
             .
             The
             Action
             verily
             of
             the
             Spleen
             is
             more
             noble
             ,
             then
             to
             receive
             superfluous
             Humors
             out
             of
             the
             stomach
             .
             And
             through
             what
             Passages
             should
             it
             do
             that
             ?
             For
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             ,
             to
             carry
             back
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             parts
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             Circulation
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             does
             here
             vainly
             oppose
             .
             And
             Ligatures
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             do
             shew
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             
               Franciscus
               Ulmus
               ,
               Carolus
               Piso
            
             ,
             and
             
               Aemilius
               Parisanus
            
             ,
             will
             needs
             have
             it
             that
             the
             Spleen
             makes
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             for
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             the
             Liver
             doth
             for
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             .
             Which
             Opinion
             is
             coufuted
             ,
             because
             ,
             1.
             
             There
             is
             no
             way
             by
             which
             the
             blood
             here
             made
             ,
             can
             go
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             for
             it
             cannot
             go
             by
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Valves
             there
             placed
             at
             the
             mouth
             thereof
             .
             2.
             
             There
             would
             ●●
             a
             mixture
             of
             perfect
             and
             imperfect
             Juyce
             ,
             if
             by
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             Heart
             should
             receive
             and
             return
             blood
             .
             3.
             
             Many
             Creatures
             live
             without
             a
             Spleen
             ,
             which
             generate
             Vital
             Spirits
             nevertheless
             .
          
           
             
               Mr.
               De
               la
               Chambre
            
             in
             his
             Treatise
             of
             Digestion
             ,
             supposes
             that
             the
             Spleen
             makes
             Spirits
             for
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
             But
             there
             is
             Spirit
             enough
             to
             nourish
             and
             vivifie
             the
             inferior
             Parts
             ,
             supplied
             from
             the
             Aorta
             .
             But
             if
             he
             understand
             some
             qualification
             of
             the
             spirituous
             blood
             accommodated
             to
             the
             use
             of
             the
             belly
             ,
             he
             deserves
             to
             be
             excused
             .
          
           
           
             Helmont
             a
             late
             Writer
             ,
             hath
             destined
             
             the
             Spleen
             for
             more
             noble
             Actions
             .
             He
             gives
             it
             out
             to
             be
             the
             seat
             of
             his
             Archeus
             ,
             which
             being
             the
             immediate
             Organ
             of
             the
             sensitive
             Soul
             ,
             determines
             the
             Actions
             of
             the
             ●i●●l
             Soul
             residing
             in
             the
             stomach
             .
             He
             calls
             it
             the
             Seat.
             1.
             
             Of
             the
             Understanding
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Conceptions
             thereof
             are
             formed
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             of
             all
             the
             Bowels
             the
             fullest
             of
             Blood
             ,
             and
             enriched
             with
             very
             many
             Arteries
             ;
             and
             the
             Brain
             does
             only
             keep
             the
             Conceptions
             sent
             to
             it
             from
             the
             Spleen
             .
             2.
             
             Of
             Sleep
             and
             Dreaming
             .
             3.
             
             Of
             Venery
             ,
             because
             Pollutions
             are
             in
             the
             dig●●
             ;
             and
             there
             about
             the
             stomach
             ,
             the
             first
             motions
             of
             lust
             are
             perceived
             :
             For
             they
             are
             said
             to
             proceed
             out
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Spleen
             is
             the
             principal
             Vital
             Member
             .
             Finally
             ,
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             Quartan
             Ague
             ,
             are
             not
             subject
             to
             lust
             ,
             because
             their
             Spleen
             is
             diseased
             .
             4.
             
             Of
             sundry
             Diseases
             ,
             which
             are
             accounted
             to
             be
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             Chest
             ,
             as
             the
             Tissick
             ,
             Pleurisie
             ,
             Apoplexy
             ,
             Falling-sickness
             ,
             Night-mare
             ,
             Swimming
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             &c.
             But
             1.
             
             All
             these
             Conceits
             bottom
             upon
             a
             false
             Foundation
             .
             2.
             
             No
             sound
             Anatomist
             will
             grant
             that
             the
             stomach
             and
             not
             the
             brain
             is
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Soul.
             3.
             
             The
             Spleen
             is
             full
             of
             blood
             for
             other
             uses
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             prepare
             acid
             blood
             for
             the
             fermentation
             of
             the
             whole
             blood
             and
             the
             Chylus
             .
             4.
             
             There
             are
             Living-Creatures
             ,
             that
             both
             sleep
             ,
             and
             are
             addicted
             to
             Venery
             without
             any
             Spleen
             ,
             or
             though
             they
             have
             a
             Spleen
             ,
             when
             the
             same
             is
             diseased
             .
             5.
             
             Nocturnal
             Pollutions
             spring
             from
             an
             hot
             Constirution
             of
             the
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             wheyish
             sharp
             Blood
             ,
             as
             the
             Dissection
             of
             the
             said
             Parts
             does
             declare
             .
             6.
             
             That
             is
             rather
             to
             be
             affirmed
             touching
             the
             Kidneys
             in
             the
             Loins
             ,
             as
             shall
             hereafter
             appear
             .
             7.
             
             Other
             Parts
             in
             the
             Belly
             are
             diseased
             besides
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             in
             such
             as
             have
             Quartan
             Agues
             .
             Yet
             it
             cannot
             be
             denied
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Spleen
             does
             assist
             in
             some
             measure
             ,
             by
             administring
             acid
             blood
             8.
             
             The
             Spleen
             is
             but
             the
             remote
             seat
             of
             the
             foresaid
             Diseases
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             Vapors
             raised
             from
             thence
             ;
             but
             proper
             Diseases
             which
             spring
             not
             from
             Sympathy
             ,
             do
             primarily
             depend
             upon
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             and
             truest
             Opinion
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             my
             quondam
             most
             worthy
             
             Master
             ,
             founded
             upon
             ocular
             Inspection
             ,
             and
             most
             certain
             reason
             .
             He
             finding
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             no
             motion
             of
             Humors
             through
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             of
             
               Vena
               portoe
            
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             did
             certainly
             conclude
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             unlikely
             ,
             that
             either
             Melancholy
             or
             Chyle
             is
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             by
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             ;
             and
             that
             therefore
             the
             Spleen
             receives
             no
             melancholick
             Excrement
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             not
             that
             any
             blood
             is
             made
             in
             the
             Spleen
             of
             Melancholy
             or
             Chylus
             .
             But
             contrariwise
             he
             observed
             alwaies
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             blood
             was
             carried
             ,
             both
             swiftly
             and
             strongly
             enough
             perpetually
             out
             of
             the
             Spleen
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             blood
             which
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Haemorrhoidal
             Vein
             ,
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             and
             other
             Veins
             which
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             .
             And
             that
             there
             is
             no
             motion
             of
             Humors
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             unless
             by
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Coeliaca
            
             :
             And
             therefore
             the
             Spleen
             does
             not
             receive
             any
             matter
             to
             change
             and
             alter
             from
             any
             place
             ,
             save
             the
             
               Arteria
               Coeliaca
            
             .
             And
             he
             conceives
             that
             it
             is
             most
             likely
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             being
             further
             to
             be
             perfected
             ,
             is
             dissolved
             by
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             that
             when
             it
             is
             forced
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             through
             the
             Coeliacal
             d●●eries
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             the
             whole
             mass
             of
             blood
             is
             not
             retained
             by
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             but
             as
             the
             Gall-bladder
             contains
             only
             Choler
             ,
             so
             the
             Spleen
             holds
             only
             the
             acid
             or
             sharp
             part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             which
             you
             may
             call
             Melancholy
             ,
             just
             as
             we
             see
             the
             acid
             Spirit
             separated
             from
             things
             that
             are
             distilled
             :
             And
             that
             the
             said
             acid
             Humor
             is
             perfected
             by
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             which
             the
             Spleen
             appears
             black
             and
             acid
             .
             And
             that
             this
             sharp
             humor
             is
             afterwards
             mingled
             with
             Blood
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             with
             Chyle
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             makes
             them
             thin
             :
             And
             that
             therefore
             the
             Spleen
             being
             obstructed
             ,
             gross
             Humors
             are
             multiplied
             in
             the
             Body
             ,
             not
             because
             thick
             Humors
             are
             not
             drawn
             by
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             which
             naturally
             are
             never
             found
             there
             ;
             but
             because
             the
             Spleen
             cannot
             communicate
             that
             attenuating
             acid
             Humor
             to
             the
             Blood
             or
             Chyle
             .
             And
             that
             as
             much
             of
             this
             acid
             Humor
             ,
             as
             is
             unfit
             for
             Digestion
             ,
             is
             voided
             with
             the
             Serum
             by
             Urin
             ,
             for
             such
             acid
             Liquors
             ,
             as
             Vinegar
             ,
             Spirit
             of
             Sulphur
             ,
             &c.
             are
             easily
             mingled
             with
             Water
             ;
             and
             the
             said
             acid
             Humor
             by
             Distillation
             may
             again
             be
             separated
             from
             the
             Urin.
             
          
           
             In
             as
             much
             therefore
             as
             the
             Spleen
             
             draws
             the
             sharp
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             ●●●●ds
             it
             prepared
             to
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             that
             the
             rest
             thereof
             being
             to
             be
             wrought
             by
             the
             Liver
             ,
             may
             become
             more
             pure
             and
             clear
             ;
             the
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Ancients
             may
             be
             allowed
             ,
             which
             held
             the
             Spleen
             to
             be
             the
             seat
             of
             Laughter
             .
             For
             the
             cheerfuller
             ,
             and
             livelier
             Animals
             ,
             or
             live
             Wights
             ,
             have
             great
             spleens
             ;
             the
             more
             lascivious
             have
             great
             livers
             ;
             the
             gentler
             have
             little
             galbladders
             ;
             the
             fearfuller
             have
             great
             hearts
             ,
             and
             the
             loudest
             ,
             have
             large
             lungs
             ,
             &c.
             
             Whence
             that
             Verse
             had
             its
             Original
             .
          
           
             
               Cor
               ardet
               ,
               pulmo
               loquitur
               ,
               fel
               commovet
               iras
               ,
            
             
               Splen
               ridere
               facit
               ,
               coget
               amare
               secur
               .
            
          
           
             
               Heart
               fears
               ,
               Lungs
               speak
               ,
               the
               Gall
               moves
               '
               anger
               fel
               ,
            
             
               Spleen
               makes
               us
               laugh
               ,
               *
               Liver
               doth
               Love
               compel
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Spleen
             therefore
             perpares
             blood
             to
             accommodate
             the
             Bowels
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             after
             the
             manner
             aforesaid
             .
             And
             the
             excrementitious
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             separated
             by
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             thin
             and
             watery
             ,
             it
             is
             purged
             out
             .
             1.
             
             By
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             not
             only
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             the
             Kidneys
             by
             the
             emulgent
             Veins
             .
             Hence
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             Urins
             are
             many
             times
             black
             ,
             for
             which
             cause
             in
             such
             cases
             we
             administer
             Diureticks
             .
             And
             splenerick
             and
             melancholick
             persons
             so
             called
             ,
             abound
             with
             wheyish
             Humors
             ,
             as
             is
             well
             known
             from
             Hippocrates
             and
             Galen
             ,
             for
             serum
             ought
             to
             be
             the
             vehicle
             or
             carrier
             of
             the
             grossest
             Humor
             .
             Hence
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             Quartan
             Ague
             ,
             do
             most
             plentifully
             sweat
             and
             piss
             :
             Also
             when
             it
             is
             very
             plentiful
             ,
             by
             the
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             stomach
             ,
             whence
             in
             the
             S●urvey
             ,
             the
             Patients
             spit
             exceedingly
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             Quartan
             Ague
             ,
             so
             that
             Galen
             places
             spitting
             and
             spawling
             among
             the
             signs
             of
             that
             Disease
             .
             Hence
             also
             melancholick
             persons
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             extream
             spitters
             .
             Now
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             Spleen
             to
             the
             stomach
             ,
             not
             only
             by
             the
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             other
             near
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Excrement
             of
             the
             Spleen
             be
             
             thick
             and
             earthy
             ,
             it
             is
             voided
             directly
             by
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             and
             comes
             not
             at
             the
             stomach
             ,
             for
             1.
             
             From
             Melancholy
             as
             Galen
             cells
             us
             ,
             comes
             the
             blackness
             of
             the
             Excrements
             .
             2.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             its
             weight
             and
             heaviness
             ,
             it
             setles
             downwards
             .
             3.
             
             The
             evacuation
             of
             Melancholy
             by
             the
             internal
             Haemorrhoid
             
             Veins
             ,
             does
             free
             men
             from
             melancholick
             Diseases
             present
             ,
             and
             preserves
             from
             future
             ,
             as
             the
             divine
             Hippocrates
             teaches
             in
             many
             places
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XVII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             A
             Threefold
             Excrement
             is
             purged
             
             from
             the
             Blood
             ;
             thin
             Choler
             into
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             thick
             Choler
             into
             the
             
               Canalis
               bilarius
            
             ,
             and
             Whey
             into
             the
             Kidneys
             .
             And
             because
             we
             have
             already
             spoken
             of
             the
             Receptacles
             of
             the
             two
             former
             Excrements
             ,
             we
             shall
             now
             also
             speak
             of
             the
             third
             .
          
           
             
               This
               FIGURE
               shews
               the
               Urinary
               Instruments
               ,
               and
               Parts
               serving
               for
               Generation
               in
               Men
               ,
               in
               their
               Natural
               Situation
               .
            
             
               The
               XVIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     hollow
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Gall-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Choler-passage
                     or
                     Ductus
                     bilarius
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Cystica
                     or
                     Gall-bladder
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     An
                     Artery
                     distributed
                     both
                     into
                     the
                     Liver
                     and
                     the
                     Gall-bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Navil-vein
                     turned
                     upwards
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     descendent
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     cava
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     descending
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Arteteria
                     magna
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kidneys
                     in
                     their
                     Natural
                     Place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Capsulae
                     atrabilariae
                     ,
                     with
                     Branches
                     distributed
                     into
                     them
                     from
                     the
                     Emulgens
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     Ureters
                     descending
                     from
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     to
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Piss-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     Insertion
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                     ,
                     into
                     th
                     sides
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Urachus
                     or
                     Pisspip●
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     or
                     straight
                     Gut
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     preparatorie
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     of
                     which
                     that
                     on
                     the
                     right
                     hand
                     is
                     bred
                     ▪
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Trunk
                     ,
                     that
                     on
                     the
                     left
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Emulgent
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     Pyramidal
                     Body
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     Union
                     of
                     the
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     preparatorie
                     ,
                     expressed
                     on
                     the
                     left
                     ●ide
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     The
                     Original
                     of
                     the
                     preparatorie
                     Arteries
                     from
                     the
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Aorta
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   XX.
                   
                     The
                     Stones
                     ,
                     the
                     left
                     being
                     laid
                     open
                     from
                     its
                     common
                     Coat
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   YY
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vasa
                     deferentia
                     which
                     ascend
                     from
                     the
                     Stones
                     to
                     the
                     Belly
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Z.
                   
                     The
                     Yard
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cod
                     ,
                     which
                     covered
                     the
                     left
                     Stone
                     ,
                     separated
                     therefrom
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ilia
                     or
                     Flanks
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                     The
                     Share-bones
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Loins
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               44
               ▪
            
          
           
             They
             are
             situate
             under
             the
             Liver
             and
             Spleen
             ,
             where
             they
             rest
             upon
             the
             
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             between
             the
             two
             Coats
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             ,
             under
             which
             very
             great
             Nerves
             lie
             hid
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             Muscle
             Psoas
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             evidently
             pass
             this
             way
             unto
             the
             Thighs
             .
             Whence
             it
             is
             that
             a
             stone
             being
             in
             the
             Kidney
             ,
             a
             numness
             is
             felt
             in
             the
             Thigh
             of
             the
             same
             side
             .
             It
             is
             a
             rare
             case
             which
             Cabrolius
             hath
             observed
             ,
             for
             the
             Kidneys
             to
             rest
             upon
             the
             Back-bone
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             Nor
             are
             the
             Kidneys
             seated
             just
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             
             least
             there
             should
             be
             some
             impediment
             to
             attraction
             ,
             and
             least
             some
             part
             of
             the
             wheyish
             humor
             should
             slip
             aside
             .
             But
             the
             right-side
             Kidney
             is
             
               lowest
               in
               Men
            
             ,
             to
             give
             way
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             under
             which
             it
             rests
             immediately
             ,
             reaching
             by
             its
             end
             ,
             the
             third
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             It
             is
             seldom
             higher
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             and
             seldom
             are
             the
             two
             Kidneys
             seated
             one
             just
             against
             another
             .
             The
             left
             Kidney
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             lies
             partly
             under
             the
             spleen
             ,
             but
             is
             seldom
             higher
             then
             the
             spleen
             .
             Contrariwise
             in
             Brutes
             ,
             the
             spleen
             goes
             more
             downwards
             ,
             and
             the
             right
             Kidney
             lies
             higher
             ,
             and
             therefore
             there
             is
             a
             Cavity
             in
             the
             Liver
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Kidney
             ,
             which
             does
             not
             Naturally
             happen
             in
             men
             .
             Here
             some
             observe
             that
             the
             right
             Kidney
             is
             nearer
             to
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             the
             left
             more
             remote
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             left
             Emulgent
             Vein
             ,
             which
             is
             much
             longer
             then
             the
             right
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             not
             alwaies
             both
             just
             of
             one
             bigness
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             are
             .
             
             They
             are
             commonly
             of
             the
             length
             of
             four
             Vertebra's
             ;
             their
             latitude
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             three
             fingers
             ,
             their
             thickness
             that
             of
             a
             thumb
             ,
             yet
             the
             right
             Kidney
             is
             very
             many
             times
             larger
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             because
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             right
             part
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             wheyish
             blood
             more
             vehemently
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             fretted
             by
             some
             Disease
             ,
             for
             then
             it
             grows
             lean
             and
             thin
             .
             Also
             such
             as
             are
             given
             to
             fleshy
             desires
             ,
             have
             larger
             Kidneys
             then
             ordinary
             .
             But
             their
             Proportion
             is
             not
             alwaies
             alike
             convenient
             for
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             liver
             is
             slippery
             and
             smooth
             :
             It
             is
             seldom
             
             in
             Mankind
             uneven
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             composed
             of
             many
             Kidneys
             or
             kernels
             ,
             which
             any
             man
             may
             frequently
             find
             in
             a
             Child
             yet
             in
             the
             Womb.
             But
             the
             Kidney
             is
             alwaies
             so
             made
             ,
             in
             an
             Ox
             and
             Bear
             ,
             in
             a
             Calf
             ,
             and
             most
             curiously
             of
             all
             in
             a
             Sturgeon
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Kidneys
             are
             made
             up
             like
             bunches
             of
             Grapes
             ,
             of
             triangular
             and
             quadrangular
             dies
             or
             tiles
             as
             it
             were
             after
             an
             Artificial
             manner
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             demonstrated
             in
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             that
             Creature
             .
          
           
             The
             Colour
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             is
             a
             dark
             
             red
             ,
             but
             seldom
             intensely
             red
             .
             In
             diseased
             persons
             the
             Kidneys
             are
             variously
             coloured
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             Liver
             and
             Spleen
             are
             .
          
           
             The
             Kidney
             is
             shaped
             like
             a
             kidney-bean
             so
             
             called
             ,
             also
             like
             an
             Asarum
             leaf
             ,
             if
             you
             respect
             the
             plane
             surface
             .
             Externally
             in
             the
             Back
             or
             about
             the
             Flanks
             ,
             it
             is
             of
             a
             round
             ,
             bunching
             shape
             ▪
             beneath
             towards
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             part
             it
             is
             bossie
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             middle
             concave
             and
             hollow
             .
             Helmont
             hath
             seen
             the
             left
             Kidney
             triangular
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             person
             the
             right
             Kidney
             not
             so
             big
             as
             an
             Hazel-nut
             .
             Hippocrates
             compares
             the
             kidneys
             to
             Apples
             :
             Without
             doubt
             to
             the
             broader
             sort
             of
             red
             Apples
             ;
             unless
             by
             the
             word
             meloisin
             he
             intended
             the
             likeness
             of
             the
             kidneys
             in
             man
             to
             other
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             knit
             by
             an
             external
             Membrane
             ,
             
             which
             is
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             to
             the
             Loins
             and
             Midriff
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             emulgent
             Vessels
             to
             the
             Cava
             and
             Aorta
             Vessels
             ,
             by
             the
             Ureters
             to
             the
             Bladder
             .
             And
             the
             right
             kidney
             ,
             to
             the
             blind
             Gut
             ,
             somtimes
             also
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             left
             to
             the
             Spleen
             and
             Colon.
             Hence
             pains
             of
             the
             kidneys
             are
             exasperated
             by
             plenty
             of
             Winds
             and
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             double
             Membrane
             :
             The
             
             first
             internal
             one
             near
             and
             proper
             ,
             being
             very
             thin
             without
             Fat
             and
             Veins
             ,
             from
             the
             external
             and
             common
             Coat
             of
             the
             ingredient
             Vessels
             dilated
             (
             for
             a
             Vein
             only
             goes
             in
             with
             but
             one
             Coat
             )
             which
             growing
             very
             close
             ,
             makes
             the
             flesh
             more
             compact
             ,
             and
             being
             turned
             back
             inwards
             ,
             it
             accompanies
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             enters
             into
             ,
             and
             invests
             their
             Bellies
             .
             Another
             external
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             which
             adhaeres
             but
             loosely
             ,
             whence
             they
             term
             it
             the
             Swath-band
             of
             the
             kidneys
             .
             For
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             coverlid
             or
             blanket
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ;
             and
             because
             it
             is
             encompassed
             with
             much
             Fat
             ,
             for
             the
             sake
             thereof
             ,
             it
             hath
             received
             the
             
               Vena
               adiposa
            
             so
             called
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             Fat-vein
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             fat
             persons
             ,
             the
             kidneys
             lie
             quite
             hidden
             .
             Whence
             he
             that
             knows
             or
             searches
             into
             hidden
             things
             ,
             is
             said
             to
             
             search
             the
             Reins
             .
             For
             the
             Scripture
             uses
             two
             words
             Pela●oth
             and
             Ta●oth
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             which
             Mercerus
             will
             have
             to
             be
             derived
             from
             a
             word
             signifying
             to
             perfect
             and
             finish
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             in
             the
             Kidneys
             a
             power
             of
             consulting
             ,
             and
             finishing
             things
             consulted
             upon
             :
             The
             latter
             they
             derive
             from
             Tiach
             a
             blot
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Radical
             word
             tivvach
             to
             daub
             ,
             or
             plaster
             ,
             and
             crust
             over
             ,
             because
             the
             Kidneys
             are
             crusted
             ,
             and
             hidden
             as
             it
             were
             with
             Fat.
             Some
             indeed
             explain
             the
             Phrase
             of
             searching
             the
             Reins
             to
             be
             meant
             of
             Concupiscence
             carnal
             and
             venereal
             Delectation
             ,
             from
             the
             word
             Calah
             to
             desire
             ,
             Witness
             
               Rabbi
               David
            
             ,
             and
             Pagnine
             ,
             or
             from
             Celi
             a
             Vessel
             ,
             because
             in
             and
             from
             the
             Kidneys
             is
             the
             desire
             of
             Venereal
             pleasures
             .
             Howbeit
             this
             also
             is
             a
             secret
             Quest
             ,
             stoln
             pleasures
             Venereal
             seeking
             the
             night
             and
             dark
             places
             and
             secret
             carriages
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             largely
             demonstrated
             in
             my
             
               Vindicae
               anatomicae
            
             against
             Hofman
             .
             Fat
             is
             bestowed
             upon
             them
             to
             preserve
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             in
             regard
             of
             plenty
             of
             Serum
             which
             would
             overcool
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             defend
             the
             Vessels
             .
             There
             is
             less
             about
             the
             right
             Kidney
             if
             we
             beleive
             Aristotle
             ,
             more
             about
             the
             left
             ,
             because
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             right
             Kidney
             ,
             either
             suffers
             it
             not
             to
             congeale
             ,
             or
             melts
             it
             when
             it
             is
             congealed
             .
          
           
             
             
               This
               TABLE
               propounds
               the
               Kidneys
               both
               whole
               and
               cut
               asunder
               ,
               that
               the
               Ingress
               and
               Egress
               of
               the
               Vessels
               might
               be
               discerned
               .
            
             
               The
               XIX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               Shews
               the
               Form
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               and
               of
               the
               Emulgent
               Vessels
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     common
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     compassed
                     about
                     with
                     Fat
                     ,
                     and
                     here
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Capsulae
                     atrabilariae
                     ,
                     or
                     auxiliary
                     Kidneys
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Kidneys
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     A
                     Particle
                     of
                     the
                     proper
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     separated
                     from
                     the
                     rest
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     cava
                     descendent
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Arteria
                     magna
                     descendent
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ureters
                     or
                     Piss-channels
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spermatick
                     Veins
                     ,
                     or
                     Seed-veins
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     spermatick
                     or
                     Seed-arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   m.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     adiposa
                     or
                     fat
                     Vein
                     from
                     the
                     Emulgent
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   n.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     adiposa
                     ,
                     the
                     fat
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Entrance
               of
               the
               Emulgent
               Vessels
               ,
               into
               the
               hollow
               part
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     inside
                     of
                     the
                     Kidney
                     cut
                     open
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Basin
                     of
                     the
                     Ureter
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Vein
                     spred
                     by
                     sundry
                     Branches
                     into
                     the
                     Kidney
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Artery
                     variously
                     divided
                     ,
                     joyning
                     it self
                     to
                     the
                     little
                     Branches
                     of
                     the
                     Veins
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               The
               III.
               FIG
               .
               Shews
               the
               Rise
               of
               the
               Aorta
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kidney
                     cut
                     open
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     large
                     Cavity
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Basin
                     of
                     the
                     Ureter
                     ,
                     about
                     the
                     Kidney
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Ureter
                     looking
                     downwards
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DDD
                   .
                   
                     Little
                     Pipes
                     embracing
                     the
                     Caruncles
                     of
                     the
                     Ureter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EEE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Teat
                     fashion'd
                     Caruncles
                     or
                     Bits
                     of
                     Flesh
                     ,
                     which
                     do
                     strain
                     the
                     Urin
                     into
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               The
               IV.
               FIG
               .
               Shews
               the
               Caruncles
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     appearance
                     of
                     a
                     Kidney
                     split
                     open
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mouths
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                     ,
                     which
                     compass
                     the
                     Caruncles
                     opened
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Papillary
                     Caruncles
                     so
                     called
                     ,
                     which
                     strain
                     the
                     Urin
                     into
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               The
               V.
               FIG
               .
               Shews
               the
               Kidney
               cut
               open
               to
               its
               Belly
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kidney
                     divided
                     through
                     the
                     bossie
                     part
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Caruncles
                     cut
                     through
                     the
                     middle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Pipes
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     A
                     Wound
                     piercing
                     into
                     the
                     Belly
                     of
                     the
                     Kidney
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               46
            
          
           
             The
             kidneys
             have
             two
             Bellies
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             
             the
             outermost
             in
             the
             hollow
             part
             which
             Fallopius
             calls
             Porta
             ;
             through
             which
             the
             emulgent
             vessels
             are
             carried
             ,
             and
             first
             they
             enter
             bipartite
             or
             divided
             into
             two
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             they
             are
             commonly
             divided
             into
             four
             ,
             and
             so
             spread
             abroad
             into
             the
             whole
             substance
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             they
             are
             consumed
             and
             spent
             into
             very
             small
             and
             fine
             threads
             .
             The
             inner
             Belly
             is
             nothing
             but
             the
             large
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ureter
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             
             say
             a
             membranous
             Cavity
             ,
             made
             of
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             spred
             out
             and
             widened
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             kidneys
             .
             But
             the
             Ureters
             in
             their
             progress
             are
             not
             attenuated
             within
             ,
             as
             other
             Vessels
             are
             ,
             but
             they
             have
             the
             ends
             of
             their
             branches
             (
             eight
             or
             ten
             for
             the
             most
             part
             )
             broad
             and
             open
             like
             Pipes
             ,
             embracing
             certain
             Caruncles
             ,
             or
             little
             fleshy
             Eminences
             .
          
           
             These
             Caruncles
             are
             like
             kernels
             ,
             less
             coloured
             and
             harder
             then
             the
             rest
             of
             
             the
             flesh
             .
             Carpus
             was
             the
             Finder
             out
             of
             them
             ,
             though
             Rondeletius
             saies
             that
             he
             did
             first
             observe
             them
             ,
             and
             calls
             them
             Mammilary
             productions
             .
             Others
             call
             them
             Papillary
             Caruncles
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             very
             like
             the
             Nipples
             upon
             Womens
             Duggs
             :
             They
             are
             as
             big
             as
             Pease
             ,
             somwhat
             broad
             above
             ,
             convex
             beneath
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             very
             little
             holes
             bored
             through
             them
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             will
             hardly
             permit
             an
             hair
             to
             enter
             ,
             which
             furrows
             and
             little
             channels
             may
             be
             observed
             ,
             if
             the
             kidneys
             be
             cut
             long-wise
             .
             I
             have
             instead
             of
             these
             found
             stones
             in
             an
             Ox.
             The
             holes
             were
             to
             be
             exceeding
             small
             ,
             least
             the
             blood
             which
             is
             requisite
             to
             nourish
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             should
             with
             the
             Serum
             and
             Choler
             flow
             into
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             which
             indeed
             happens
             when
             the
             kidneys
             are
             diseased
             or
             the
             Passages
             too
             open
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             Vessels
             of
             all
             kinds
             .
             Veins
             from
             the
             Cava
             .
             1.
             
             The
             emulgent
             or
             milking
             Veins
             so
             called
             from
             their
             Office
             ,
             which
             are
             great
             
             and
             remarkeable
             by
             reason
             of
             aboundance
             of
             wheyish
             humor
             in
             the
             Body
             :
             In
             which
             Baubinus
             saith
             there
             are
             Valves
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             which
             hinder
             the
             return
             
             of
             serum
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             .
             But
             Experience
             teaches
             otherwise
             ,
             for
             with
             their
             broad
             end
             they
             look
             towards
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             with
             their
             sharp
             and
             lunary
             part
             they
             respect
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             are
             opened
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Opinon
             of
             Dr.
             Harvey
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             found
             true
             ,
             and
             demonstrated
             by
             visible
             Inspection
             ,
             so
             that
             any
             matter
             may
             easily
             repass
             ,
             from
             the
             kidneys
             by
             the
             Emulgents
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             in
             the
             solemn
             Circulation
             of
             the
             Blood.
             By
             a
             short
             and
             crooked
             passage
             they
             are
             carried
             downwards
             to
             the
             hollow
             part
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             
               emulgent
               Arteries
            
             ,
             which
             are
             remarkable
             and
             large
             ,
             derived
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             unto
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             to
             furnish
             vital
             Heat
             ,
             to
             resist
             coldness
             ,
             as
             to
             nourish
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             to
             purge
             away
             the
             wheyish
             humor
             ,
             which
             is
             most
             plentifully
             contained
             in
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             .
             For
             these
             emulgent
             Vessels
             are
             seldom
             one
             like
             another
             ,
             or
             one
             in
             number
             ,
             somtimes
             with
             six
             ,
             five
             ,
             four
             ,
             three
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             two
             branches
             ,
             they
             go
             distinctly
             to
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             that
             either
             on
             the
             one
             or
             both
             sides
             ,
             seldom
             on
             one
             alone
             .
             And
             when
             they
             have
             entred
             the
             hollow
             part
             of
             the
             kidney
             ,
             each
             branch
             is
             suddenly
             subdivided
             into
             four
             or
             five
             little
             ones
             ,
             which
             being
             again
             divided
             into
             other
             lesser
             ones
             ,
             they
             are
             at
             last
             spent
             into
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             as
             smal
             as
             hairs
             ,
             which
             end
             at
             the
             the
             Heads
             of
             the
             Caruncles
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             shed
             their
             wheyish
             humor
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             distil
             into
             the
             little
             Pipes
             of
             the
             Ureters
             :
             Yet
             are
             the
             Emulgents
             never
             opened
             at
             the
             Pipes
             of
             the
             Ureters
             .
             For
             wind
             or
             water
             being
             forced
             in
             ,
             it
             flows
             indeed
             through
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             but
             it
             goes
             not
             out
             by
             the
             Pipes
             .
             Into
             the
             left
             Emulgent
             in
             some
             bodies
             there
             is
             implanted
             a
             branch
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               azugos
            
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             the
             cause
             of
             that
             Consent
             which
             is
             between
             the
             Chest
             and
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             which
             the
             Arteries
             do
             not
             a
             little
             further
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             
               Venae
               adiposae
            
             .
             The
             right
             being
             drawn
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             ,
             seldom
             
             from
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             the
             left
             from
             the
             Cava
             to
             the
             outward
             Coat
             ,
             which
             contain
             blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             Fat.
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             kidneys
             need
             no
             other
             Vessels
             to
             nourish
             them
             besides
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Vesica
               bilaria
            
             or
             Choler-bladder
             ,
             and
             the
             Piss-bladder
             ;
             for
             they
             do
             not
             draw
             a
             pure
             Excrement
             as
             those
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             Kidney
             hath
             one
             very
             small
             Nerve
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             from
             the
             Stomach-branch
             
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             distributed
             into
             its
             proper
             Membrane
             ,
             whence
             arises
             
             the
             Sympathy
             between
             the
             kidneys
             and
             the
             stomach
             ,
             as
             when
             persons
             diseased
             in
             their
             kidneys
             ,
             are
             troubled
             with
             stomach-sickness
             and
             vomiting
             .
             But
             there
             are
             a
             few
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             proceed
             from
             about
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             part
             of
             which
             enters
             into
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             kidneys
             with
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             and
             is
             disseminated
             through
             their
             substance
             .
             Hence
             persons
             having
             the
             stone
             in
             their
             kidneys
             ,
             have
             more
             vehement
             gravative
             and
             stretching
             pains
             :
             But
             their
             pain
             becomes
             more
             sharp
             ,
             when
             the
             stone
             enters
             into
             the
             narrow
             and
             very
             sensible
             Ureters
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             is
             the
             structure
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             
             in
             Mankind
             .
             For
             in
             a
             Dog
             it
             is
             otherwise
             ,
             in
             whose
             kidneys
             there
             are
             other
             Cavities
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             kidneys
             of
             a
             Man
             there
             are
             none
             ,
             save
             what
             are
             formed
             by
             the
             Emulgents
             and
             Ureters
             variously
             divided
             .
          
           
             Also
             there
             is
             a
             feigned
             Dream
             of
             some
             
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             touching
             the
             
               Cribrum
               benedictum
            
             by
             them
             so
             called
             .
             For
             they
             feigned
             that
             there
             were
             in
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             two
             Cavities
             seated
             according
             to
             their
             length
             :
             The
             one
             uppermost
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             wheyish
             blood
             should
             be
             poured
             out
             of
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             the
             other
             lowermost
             ,
             which
             a
             certain
             transverse
             Membrane
             was
             thought
             to
             sever
             like
             a
             seive
             bored
             through
             with
             very
             small
             holes
             ,
             which
             made
             them
             call
             it
             the
             Colander
             ,
             and
             the
             blessed
             seive
             ,
             through
             which
             they
             would
             have
             the
             Serum
             strained
             into
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             and
             the
             good
             blood
             to
             stay
             behind
             to
             nourish
             the
             kidneys
             .
             These
             Dreams
             of
             the
             Ancients
             Vesalius
             did
             rightly
             reject
             ;
             
             but
             he
             is
             mean
             while
             deceived
             ,
             while
             he
             would
             have
             such
             Cavities
             in
             the
             kidneys
             of
             men
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             in
             Dogs
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             wil
             not
             have
             the
             kidneys
             of
             a
             man
             or
             sheep
             to
             be
             cut
             up
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Fat.
             Riolanus
             defends
             this
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Colander
             or
             Seive
             ,
             but
             he
             explaines
             it
             only
             of
             the
             Caruncles
             (
             as
             I
             do
             )
             which
             are
             pierced
             through
             with
             very
             small
             holes
             .
          
           
             Their
             
               Use
               .
               Erasistratus
            
             and
             the
             followers
             
             of
             Asclepiades
             did
             conceive
             that
             Nature
             had
             made
             the
             kidneys
             in
             vain
             .
             And
             Aristotle
             somtimes
             saies
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             need
             of
             them
             .
             But
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             wheyish
             
             blood
             ,
             by
             the
             emulgent
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             so
             the
             mass
             of
             blood
             may
             be
             purged
             .
             The
             blood
             therefore
             going
             out
             through
             these
             Vessels
             ,
             is
             alwaies
             carried
             through
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             which
             are
             spred
             abroad
             through
             the
             whole
             flesh
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             go
             at
             last
             into
             very
             small
             passages
             ,
             so
             that
             at
             last
             the
             wheyish
             Humor
             is
             poured
             right
             out
             into
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             kidneys
             :
             But
             the
             sanguine
             and
             laudable
             portion
             ,
             does
             partly
             remain
             to
             nourish
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             partly
             returns
             by
             little
             emulgent
             Veins
             which
             are
             open
             into
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
             The
             wheyish
             and
             watry
             part
             is
             strained
             through
             the
             Papillary
             Caruncles
             ,
             which
             have
             holes
             into
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             which
             grow
             together
             into
             one
             large
             Cavity
             or
             Expansion
             of
             the
             Ureter
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             wheyish
             
             humor
             is
             emptied
             ,
             and
             through
             the
             Ureters
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             where
             it
             becomes
             urin
             .
             And
             because
             urin
             is
             yellow
             ,
             a
             portion
             of
             yellow
             Choler
             not
             drawn
             out
             by
             the
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             is
             thought
             to
             pass
             along
             with
             the
             Serum
             or
             wheyish
             humor
             that
             the
             Ureters
             might
             be
             clensed
             by
             Choler
             ,
             as
             the
             Guts
             are
             .
          
           
             
               Olhafius
               ,
               Sennertus
               ,
               Olaus
               Wormius
               ,
            
             whom
             a
             great
             many
             others
             have
             followed
             ,
             
             as
             
               Hofman
               ,
               Meybome
               ,
               Horstius
               ,
               Loseleus
               ,
               Eichstadius
               ,
               Sperlinger
               ,
            
             and
             others
             have
             attributed
             to
             the
             Kidneys
             the
             preparation
             of
             Seed
             ,
             because
             hot
             Kidneys
             cause
             a
             propensity
             to
             fleshy
             lust
             ,
             and
             cold
             Kidneys
             indispose
             to
             Venery
             ,
             and
             because
             in
             Creatures
             that
             use
             Venery
             ,
             the
             kidneys
             have
             a
             rank
             smell
             and
             tast
             of
             Seed
             ,
             which
             in
             guelded
             Animals
             they
             have
             not
             .
             Because
             in
             a
             Gonorrhaea
             proceeding
             from
             aboundance
             of
             Sperm
             ,
             Remedies
             are
             successfully
             applied
             to
             the
             kidneys
             :
             because
             men
             are
             said
             to
             proceed
             from
             the
             Loins
             of
             their
             Progenitors
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             been
             famed
             for
             the
             seat
             of
             Lust
             :
             Because
             the
             Loins
             being
             whipped
             ,
             do
             raise
             an
             Appetite
             to
             Venery
             :
             And
             finally
             because
             in
             persons
             given
             up
             to
             lust
             ,
             the
             kidneys
             are
             consumed
             .
             Which
             Arguments
             are
             indeed
             of
             some
             weight
             ,
             unless
             peradventure
             that
             smell
             and
             rast
             happen
             to
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             nourished
             with
             such
             a
             nutriment
             as
             is
             the
             matter
             of
             Seed
             ,
             which
             is
             carried
             for
             the
             Generation
             thereof
             in
             bordering
             Vessels
             .
             And
             when
             the
             kidneys
             are
             hot
             or
             cold
             ,
             the
             neighbouring
             places
             are
             also
             hot
             or
             cold
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             matter
             of
             Seed
             is
             carried
             ,
             and
             in
             which
             it
             is
             altered
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Seed
             may
             have
             affinity
             to
             the
             Constitution
             of
             the
             kidneys
             .
             For
             
               Johannes
               Walaeus
            
             conceives
             
             that
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             blood
             cannot
             admit
             this
             use
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             for
             blood
             is
             not
             carried
             from
             the
             kidneys
             to
             the
             stones
             ,
             by
             the
             Emulgents
             and
             Veins
             :
             but
             it
             falls
             down
             only
             out
             of
             the
             Aorta
             by
             the
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             .
             But
             this
             action
             of
             the
             kidneys
             defended
             by
             such
             Learned
             men
             ,
             may
             be
             reconciled
             with
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             if
             we
             shall
             say
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             more
             wheyish
             part
             of
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             is
             drawn
             by
             the
             kidneys
             through
             the
             emulgent
             Arteries
             ,
             whereby
             the
             rest
             which
             descends
             right
             along
             through
             the
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             ,
             becomes
             more
             pure
             and
             fitter
             to
             make
             Seed
             .
             Of
             which
             this
             is
             a
             sign
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             attraction
             of
             the
             kidneys
             is
             weak
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             comes
             to
             the
             stones
             more
             wheyish
             then
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             ,
             the
             seed
             which
             is
             voided
             ,
             is
             unfit
             for
             Generation
             ,
             though
             plentiful
             in
             quantity
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             neighbouring
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             are
             irradiated
             and
             virtuated
             by
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             Brain
             irradiates
             the
             lower
             Parts
             ,
             by
             an
             inbred
             property
             resembling
             light
             .
             3.
             
             If
             any
             thing
             should
             be
             carried
             from
             the
             kidneys
             to
             the
             stones
             ,
             we
             might
             very
             well
             say
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             wheyish
             substance
             ,
             which
             stirs
             up
             a
             sharp
             titillation
             and
             strong
             provocation
             and
             desire
             to
             Venery
             .
             For
             I
             am
             not
             perswaded
             by
             the
             Arguments
             of
             Helmont
             ,
             that
             the
             salt
             of
             the
             Urin
             takes
             away
             the
             fruitfulness
             of
             the
             Seed
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             moderate
             ,
             seeing
             it
             helps
             the
             Seed
             both
             by
             its
             acrimony
             and
             fluidity
             or
             thinness
             of
             substance
             .
             Little
             Birds
             ,
             indeed
             ,
             though
             very
             lascivious
             ,
             have
             neither
             kidneys
             nor
             bladder
             ;
             yet
             they
             have
             somwhat
             that
             supplies
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             viz.
             certain
             Caruncles
             or
             little
             parcels
             of
             flesh
             ,
             which
             resemble
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             which
             are
             continued
             with
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             and
             Aorta
             ,
             Witness
             Aristotle
             and
             others
             .
          
           
             Beverovicius
             artributes
             a
             kind
             of
             Sanguification
             or
             Blood-making
             to
             
             the
             kidneys
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             they
             have
             a
             Parenchy●●
             and
             very
             many
             Vessels
             .
             But
             they
             might
             have
             their
             Parenchyma
             because
             of
             their
             Vessels
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             not
             be
             intangled
             one
             with
             another
             .
             And
             it
             was
             requisite
             they
             should
             have
             very
             many
             Vessels
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             plentifully
             purge
             away
             the
             Serum
             or
             wheyish
             part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             so
             that
             through
             very
             many
             and
             very
             small
             outlets
             ,
             the
             Whey
             might
             be
             issued
             out
             into
             the
             Caruncles
             ,
             without
             any
             considerable
             quantity
             of
             Blood
             therewith
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             the
             Kidneys
             which
             in
             healthy
             persons
             are
             red
             ,
             clear
             ,
             solid
             ;
             according
             to
             the
             kind
             of
             the
             Disease
             ,
             become
             somtimes
             obscure
             and
             blackish
             ,
             somtimes
             whiteish
             ;
             otherwhiles
             loose
             ,
             brittle
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             rotten
             ;
             and
             somtimes
             again
             ,
             hard
             and
             dried
             .
             But
             that
             might
             happen
             ,
             because
             as
             some
             other
             parts
             ,
             so
             the
             kidneys
             might
             be
             sick
             ,
             or
             through
             sickness
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             Concoction
             being
             somwhere
             hurt
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             be
             nourished
             with
             good
             blood
             .
             3.
             
             Because
             the
             Urins
             of
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             are
             crude
             :
             But
             of
             that
             another
             cause
             is
             commonly
             rendred
             .
             Viz.
             in
             that
             the
             kidneys
             being
             stopped
             ,
             the
             thinner
             part
             only
             of
             the
             Urin
             can
             make
             its
             way
             forth
             .
             4.
             
             Because
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             are
             wont
             to
             swell
             and
             look
             pale
             ,
             like
             those
             that
             are
             termed
             Leucophlegmatici
             .
             But
             this
             may
             easily
             happen
             ,
             because
             the
             kidneys
             either
             through
             weakness
             cannot
             sufficiently
             draw
             the
             wheyish
             humor
             out
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             or
             being
             stopped
             it
             cannot
             be
             duely
             expelled
             .
             But
             if
             he
             or
             any
             other
             shall
             affirm
             ,
             that
             allowing
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             these
             parts
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             there
             somwhat
             more
             changed
             ,
             then
             it
             was
             in
             its
             simple
             Vessel
             ,
             I
             shall
             not
             disagree
             with
             them
             therein
             .
             For
             themselves
             it
             is
             that
             they
             change
             the
             blood
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             for
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             body
             only
             ,
             that
             they
             purge
             out
             the
             wheyish
             Excrement
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XVIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Capsulae
             Atrabilariae
             ,
             or
             Black-choler
             Cases
             .
          
           
             THese
             Vessels
             are
             by
             most
             Anatomists
             neglected
             and
             not
             observed
             ,
             though
             they
             are
             evermore
             found
             in
             all
             Bodies
             ,
             what
             ever
             Archangelus
             saies
             to
             the
             contrary
             .
             Nor
             must
             we
             say
             that
             these
             Capsulae
             are
             made
             of
             a
             superfluous
             Matter
             ,
             as
             a
             sixt
             finger
             uses
             to
             be
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             beholden
             to
             
               Bartholomew
               Eustachius
            
             
             for
             the
             first
             discovery
             of
             these
             small
             Bodies
             ,
             who
             mentions
             them
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Kernels
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             Archangelus
             and
             
               Bauhinus
               .
               Casserius
            
             cals
             them
             
               Renes
               succenturiatos
            
             Deputy-kidneys
             or
             Auxiliary
             kidneys
             .
             I
             shall
             call
             them
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             use
             I
             allot
             them
             ,
             
               Capsulas
               atrabilarias
            
             ,
             Black-choler
             Cases
             .
          
           
             Now
             these
             Cases
             are
             so
             scated
             ,
             that
             they
             rest
             upon
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             kidneys
             on
             the
             outside
             ,
             where
             they
             look
             towards
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             being
             covered
             with
             Fat
             and
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             Their
             number
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             
             of
             the
             kidneys
             .
             For
             upon
             each
             kidney
             there
             rests
             a
             Case
             .
             I
             have
             once
             seen
             four
             of
             them
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             two
             greater
             being
             four
             square
             were
             seated
             above
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             smaller
             being
             round
             ,
             uneven
             ,
             and
             rough
             ,
             were
             placed
             beneath
             the
             emulgent
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             is
             not
             alwaies
             alike
             ;
             commonly
             that
             on
             the
             right
             side
             
             is
             bigger
             then
             that
             on
             the
             left
             ,
             yet
             somtimes
             the
             latter
             is
             bigger
             then
             the
             for●…
             ▪
             In
             a
             Child
             new
             born
             ,
             they
             are
             near
             as
             big
             as
             the
             
             kidneys
             ,
             peradventure
             because
             they
             are
             moister
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             and
             contain
             a
             more
             thin
             melancholy
             Juyce
             ,
             which
             because
             they
             do
             not
             strongly
             enough
             expel
             ,
             but
             treasure
             it
             up
             rather
             ,
             therefore
             these
             Cases
             are
             widened
             .
             But
             in
             grown
             persons
             they
             are
             straitned
             ,
             and
             become
             less
             ,
             though
             they
             abound
             more
             with
             Melancholy
             ,
             partly
             because
             the
             Melancholy
             being
             gathered
             by
             degrees
             ,
             is
             through
             the
             strength
             of
             nature
             by
             degrees
             expelled
             ;
             partly
             ,
             because
             the
             Serum
             in
             hotter
             persons
             is
             dried
             up
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             new
             born
             Infant
             abounded
             ;
             and
             partly
             because
             as
             the
             Reins
             grow
             bigger
             ,
             they
             are
             compressed
             .
             Yet
             I
             have
             once
             observed
             them
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             aboundance
             of
             black
             Choler
             ,
             twice
             as
             big
             as
             ordinary
             ,
             whereas
             commonly
             they
             are
             no
             bigger
             then
             a
             large
             vomiting
             Nut.
             
          
           
             They
             have
             an
             apparent
             internal
             Cavity
             ,
             both
             in
             persons
             grown
             and
             new-born
             
             babes
             ,
             compassing
             the
             inner
             circumference
             of
             the
             whole
             Case
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             are
             found
             to
             contain
             a
             dreggie
             and
             black
             humor
             ,
             so
             that
             even
             the
             inner
             sides
             are
             coloured
             with
             the
             said
             blackness
             .
             In
             Infants
             I
             have
             seen
             to
             my
             thinking
             wheyish
             blood
             in
             them
             .
             I
             admire
             that
             Riolanus
             could
             not
             ,
             or
             would
             not
             see
             this
             Cavity
             ,
             for
             though
             he
             cries
             that
             it
             is
             so
             small
             ,
             that
             it
             will
             hardly
             admit
             a
             little
             Pea
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             somtimes
             wider
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             so
             large
             ,
             as
             to
             contain
             many
             peasen
             compressed
             ,
             and
             we
             can
             thrust
             a
             Probe
             into
             it
             ,
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             ,
             without
             violence
             .
             It
             contains
             therefore
             a
             large
             Cavity
             ,
             respecting
             the
             smalness
             of
             its
             Body
             .
             Nor
             hath
             Nature
             ever
             labour'd
             in
             vain
             ,
             no
             not
             in
             the
             smallest
             spaces
             of
             the
             Capillary
             Veins
             .
             It
             is
             a
             small
             matter
             which
             they
             can
             hold
             ,
             yet
             it
             may
             be
             counted
             much
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             successively
             received
             in
             ,
             and
             cast
             out
             again
             .
             This
             Humor
             might
             have
             been
             indeed
             allayed
             and
             sweetned
             by
             the
             admixture
             of
             blood
             ,
             as
             Choler
             also
             might
             ,
             yet
             Vessels
             and
             Receptacles
             are
             ordained
             for
             both
             these
             Excrements
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             might
             not
             be
             polluted
             .
          
           
             In
             Shape
             and
             Substance
             they
             many
             times
             resemble
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             save
             that
             
             their
             substance
             is
             a
             little
             looser
             ;
             so
             that
             they
             seem
             little
             kidneys
             resting
             upon
             the
             great
             ones
             .
             Which
             perhaps
             was
             the
             Reason
             that
             Casserius
             did
             call
             them
             Auxiliary
             kidneys
             :
             But
             more
             frequently
             their
             substance
             is
             flat
             like
             a
             Cake
             (
             howbeit
             hollow
             within
             )
             and
             their
             shape
             is
             round-long
             and
             somwhat
             square
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             are
             three
             corner'd
             ,
             seldom
             round
             ;
             for
             they
             are
             seldom
             seen
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             shape
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             knit
             where
             they
             rest
             unto
             the
             external
             Membrane
             of
             the
             kidneys
             
             so
             fast
             ,
             that
             negligent
             Dissecters
             ,
             when
             they
             take
             out
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             leave
             them
             sticking
             to
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             Reason
             that
             many
             observe
             them
             not
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             
               Vessels
               :
               Veins
            
             ,
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             derived
             to
             them
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             
             Emulgents
             .
             Somtimes
             also
             a
             Vein
             is
             sent
             thither
             from
             the
             kidney
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             also
             a
             branch
             near
             the
             Liver
             from
             the
             Cava
             is
             brought
             thereto
             ,
             somtimes
             also
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               adiposa
            
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             from
             all
             those
             places
             ,
             somtimes
             with
             a
             single
             ,
             otherwhiles
             with
             a
             double
             branch
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             have
             a
             single
             Artery
             from
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             somtimes
             a
             double
             one
             ;
             and
             otherwhiles
             they
             have
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             one
             while
             a
             single
             branch
             ,
             otherwhiles
             three
             together
             .
          
           
             These
             Cases
             have
             Nerves
             also
             .
             For
             about
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             some
             branches
             of
             Nerves
             mixed
             together
             are
             produced
             ,
             one
             part
             of
             which
             goes
             unto
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             and
             these
             Cases
             which
             rest
             upon
             them
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               Capsulae
               Atrabilariae
               in
               Men
               and
               other
               Creatures
               ,
               are
               here
               described
               .
               In
               all
               which
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               The
               XX.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               explained
               .
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               being
               round
               in
               men
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               being
               Trianguler
               in
               men
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               being
               square
               and
               O●
               all
               in
               men
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               in
               a
               Lamb●
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               in
               the
               fish
               ,
               Tu●sio
            
             
               The
               Capsulae
               or
               Cases
               ,
               in
               an
               Ox●
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     Represents
                     the
                     Cases
                     whole
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     Shews
                     them
                     dissected
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     internal
                     Cavities
                     may
                     be
                     seen
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     of
                     various
                     Forms
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     Points
                     out
                     their
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     ,
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     Aorta
                     and
                     Cava
                     ,
                     and
                     from
                     the
                     Emulgents
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     Is
                     the
                     Vena
                     cava
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     Is
                     the
                     Arteria
                     Aorta
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Vessels
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     ,
                     called
                     Emulgents
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Kidneys
                     cropped
                     off
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               Page
               5●
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XIX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Vreters
             ,
             or
             Vrin-channels
             .
          
           
             THe
             Ureters
             or
             Urin-carryers
             ,
             are
             
             round-long
             Vessels
             or
             Channels
             ,
             arising
             out
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             planted
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             carry
             the
             Urin
             from
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             The
             Ureters
             are
             commonly
             two
             in
             Number
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             somtimes
             
             two
             ,
             &
             somtimes
             more
             ,
             yet
             al
             growing
             into
             one
             before
             their
             Insertion
             ,
             as
             also
             
               Carolus
               Stephanus
            
             observed
             in
             a
             certain
             Body
             .
             But
             the
             far
             renowned
             Riolanus
             ,
             in
             a
             body
             infected
             with
             the
             venereal
             Pox
             ,
             saw
             two
             Ureters
             on
             either
             side
             ,
             inserted
             into
             the
             bladder
             at
             ●…s
             places
             ,
             the
             one
             towards
             the
             neck
             ,
             the
             other
             in
             
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             .
             
               Salomon
               Albertus
            
             observed
             three
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             and
             but
             one
             on
             the
             left
             .
             I
             have
             frequently
             observed
             the
             like
             difference
             ,
             as
             among
             other
             things
             I
             shew
             in
             my
             
               Rare
               Anatomical
               Histories
            
             .
          
           
             
               Their
               Situation
            
             .
             They
             run
             through
             many
             parts
             in
             their
             beginning
             ,
             middle
             ,
             
             and
             end
             .
             Their
             beginning
             is
             in
             the
             kidneys
             themselves
             ,
             what
             ever
             
               Hofman
               ,
               Riolanus
               ,
               Laurenberg
            
             ,
             and
             Plempius
             say
             to
             the
             contrary
             ;
             in
             which
             they
             rise
             like
             Roots
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             as
             a
             Vein
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             Nor
             does
             their
             similitude
             with
             the
             Bladder
             move
             me
             ;
             because
             ,
             1.
             
             The
             Nature
             of
             the
             Ureters
             is
             peculiar
             and
             distinct
             from
             them
             both
             .
             2.
             
             They
             are
             not
             much
             unlike
             the
             belly
             of
             the
             kidneys
             .
             3.
             
             All
             Parts
             do
             carry
             with
             them
             the
             nature
             and
             colour
             of
             their
             Original
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Aorta
             and
             the
             Cava
             .
             Nor
             does
             their
             cleaving
             fast
             to
             the
             Bladder
             infer
             any
             thing
             ,
             seeing
             the
             connexion
             is
             not
             greater
             there
             then
             in
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             being
             conveniently
             separable
             ,
             between
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Bladder
             and
             the
             Muscle
             .
             And
             therefore
             this
             Original
             
             is
             in
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             out
             of
             nine
             or
             ten
             little
             Pipes
             or
             Channels
             ,
             to
             each
             of
             which
             the
             Caruncles
             aforesaid
             are
             applied
             ,
             though
             the
             Caruncles
             may
             be
             also
             applied
             to
             their
             middle
             part
             being
             bored
             through
             .
             Now
             those
             Pipes
             go
             into
             fewer
             and
             greater
             branches
             ,
             commonly
             into
             three
             ,
             distributed
             into
             the
             upper
             ,
             middle
             ,
             and
             lower
             Region
             of
             the
             kidney
             .
             These
             grow
             afterwards
             into
             one
             large
             Cavity
             which
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             flat
             side
             of
             the
             kidney
             .
             The
             middle
             part
             ,
             is
             the
             whole
             
             long-round
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             ,
             resting
             upon
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             between
             two
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             with
             which
          
           
             The
             Ureters
             
               are
               fastned
            
             ;
             above
             to
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             below
             to
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             
             with
             the
             inner
             substance
             whereof
             they
             make
             one
             continued
             Body
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             pluckt
             away
             without
             breaking
             .
             Their
             End
             is
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             implanted
             ,
             being
             
             carried
             obliquely
             a
             fingers
             breadth
             ,
             between
             the
             proper
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             and
             it
             s
             circumvolved
             Muscle
             ,
             not
             far
             from
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             in
             its
             hinder
             part
             .
             And
             besides
             the
             oblique
             Insertion
             of
             the
             Ureters
             
             (
             which
             cannot
             at
             al
             ,
             or
             very
             highly
             hinder
             the
             regress
             of
             the
             wheyish
             Humor
             into
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             broad
             )
             two
             little
             Membranes
             are
             placed
             in
             the
             Implantation
             ,
             like
             the
             Valves
             in
             bellows
             ,
             shutting
             up
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Urin
             cannot
             go
             back
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Bladder
             being
             blown
             up
             ,
             will
             not
             admit
             so
             much
             as
             any
             wind
             .
             
               Laurentius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             and
             Plempius
             deny
             these
             Valves
             ,
             contrary
             to
             all
             other
             Anatomists
             .
             But
             though
             the
             passage
             be
             crooked
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             open
             enough
             .
             The
             Gut
             Colon
             is
             not
             a
             little
             wreathed
             ,
             and
             the
             Ileon
             more
             then
             that
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             have
             a
             Valve
             affixed
             .
             Yea
             they
             are
             themselves
             forced
             to
             confess
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             Membranes
             clapt
             together
             ,
             do
             exactly
             shut
             up
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             and
             what
             hinders
             but
             that
             they
             may
             be
             termed
             Valves
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             their
             Magnitude
             .
             They
             are
             long-round
             Vessels
             ,
             thick
             and
             
             hollow
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             straws
             .
             But
             in
             Dissections
             of
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             Stone
             ,
             we
             have
             often
             seen
             their
             Cavity
             so
             wide
             as
             to
             admit
             two
             fingers
             ,
             yea
             and
             as
             big
             as
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             there
             Figure
             ,
             they
             are
             round
             Vessels
             like
             Water-pipes
             ,
             a
             little
             crooked
             like
             the
             letter
             ,
             
             S.
             
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             double
             Membrane
             :
             The
             
             one
             common
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             for
             strength
             sake
             ,
             the
             other
             proper
             ,
             like
             the
             inner
             substance
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             and
             continued
             therewith
             ,
             white
             (
             whence
             some
             and
             Celsus
             among
             the
             rest
             call
             them
             the
             white
             Veins
             )
             bloodles
             ,
             nervous
             ,
             thick
             ,
             strong
             furnished
             with
             straight
             and
             crooked
             Fibres
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             stretched
             .
          
           
             They
             receive
             small
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             from
             
             the
             neighbouring
             Parts
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             and
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             Whence
             they
             have
             an
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             and
             are
             pained
             when
             stones
             pass
             through
             them
             ,
             which
             sense
             of
             pain
             is
             encreased
             ,
             by
             the
             distention
             of
             these
             membranous
             Bodies
             ,
             caused
             by
             great
             stones
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             that
             through
             them
             as
             Conduit-pipes
             ,
             
             the
             Urin
             separated
             from
             the
             Blood
             by
             the
             kidneys
             ,
             may
             be
             carried
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ;
             and
             somtimes
             Gravel
             and
             Stones
             ,
             Worms
             ,
             Pins
             ,
             Ha●●
             ,
             Quittor
             ,
             Blood
             ,
             &c.
             
             Now
             the
             Urin
             is
             carried
             by
             a
             manifest
             Passage
             formerly
             explained
             into
             the
             bladder
             ,
             which
             Passage
             ,
             because
             Asclepiades
             was
             ignorant
             of
             ,
             he
             would
             have
             the
             Urin
             
             carried
             into
             the
             bladder
             ,
             after
             a
             blind
             manner
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             first
             resolved
             into
             a
             vapor
             ,
             and
             did
             so
             sweat
             through
             ,
             and
             afterward
             became
             an
             humor
             as
             before
             :
             Which
             transudation
             Paracelsus
             likewise
             held
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XX.
            
             Of
             the
             Piss-bladder
          
           
             THis
             Bladder
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             lowest
             
             part
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             between
             two
             Coats
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             in
             a
             Cavity
             fashioned
             by
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             the
             Hip
             and
             Share-bones
             (
             as
             it
             were
             in
             a
             little
             belly
             of
             its
             own
             ,
             separate
             from
             the
             Paunch
             )
             in
             men
             above
             the
             
               〈…〉
               rectum
            
             or
             Arse-gut
             ;
             in
             women
             between
             the
             〈…〉
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Shar●…
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             varies
             ,
             for
             the
             greater
             the
             Lungs
             are
             ,
             the
             greater
             is
             the
             bladder
             ,
             so
             
             that
             those
             Live-wights
             which
             have
             no
             Lungs
             ,
             have
             no
             bladder
             ;
             and
             according
             as
             it
             is
             variously
             distended
             .
             For
             somtimes
             being
             full
             ,
             it
             does
             so
             strout
             in
             the
             belly
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             felt
             by
             the
             hand
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             being
             empty
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             Dissections
             hardly
             discerned
             at
             first
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             smallness
             ,
             being
             no
             bigger
             then
             a
             large
             Pear
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXI
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               expresses
               the
               Coats
               of
               the
               Bladder
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Seed-bladders
               seated
               in
               the
               Hinder-part
               thereof
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     common
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     It
                     s
                     middle
                     Coat
                     ,
                     furnished
                     with
                     musculous
                     Fibres
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     inmost
                     wrinkled
                     Coat
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Sphincter
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kernels
                     called
                  
                   Prostarae
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     Their
                     Insertion
                     between
                     the
                     two
                     Coats
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     Coat
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     being
                     opened
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Orifices
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                     widened
                     in
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Vasa
                     deferentia
                     ,
                     or
                     carrying
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Seminal
                     Bladders
                     displaid
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kernels
                     called
                  
                   Prostatae
                   divided
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     An
                     Hole
                     going
                     from
                     the
                     Bladders
                     into
                     the
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Piss-pipe
                     ,
                     furnishe
                     with
                     a
                     Valve
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     common
                     Passage
                     of
                     Piss
                     and
                     Seed
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Hinder
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     ,
                     with
                     its
                     External
                     Coat
                     taken
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Ureters
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Vessels
                     which
                     carry
                     away
                     the
                     Seed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Seed-cases
                     ,
                     or
                     Capsulae
                     Seminales
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     Their
                     End.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Seed-bladders
                     expressing
                     divers
                     Cells
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kernels
                     called
                  
                   Prostatae
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Piss-pipe
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               52
            
          
           
             The
             Bottom
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             also
             to
             the
             Navil
             ,
             by
             an
             intermediate
             
             Ligament
             ,
             called
             Urachus
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             Navil-arteries
             dried
             up
             ,
             least
             when
             a
             man
             walks
             upright
             ,
             the
             bottom
             should
             rest
             upon
             the
             Neck
             .
             Hence
             is
             the
             Sympathy
             between
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             bladder
             and
             the
             Navil
             .
             The
             neck
             of
             the
             bladder
             is
             fastned
             in
             Women
             to
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             the
             neighboring
             Hip-bones
             ;
             in
             Men
             to
             〈…〉
             
               Rectum
               Intestinum
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             
             Substan●
             ●…tly
             membranous
             for
             strengths
             〈…〉
             because
             of
             exten●…
             
             and
             w●…ether
             ,
             ●…ly
             fleshy
             ,
             because
             of
             motion
             .
             For
             it
             hath
             two
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             one
             Muscle
             infolding
             the
             whole
             bladder
             ,
             which
             all
             other
             Anatomists
             except
             Aquapendent
             ,
             do
             make
             to
             be
             a
             third
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Membrane
            
             is
             outmost
             and
             common
             ,
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             strong
             
             and
             thick
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             is
             inmost
             ,
             and
             proper
             ,
             thin
             ,
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             interwoven
             with
             all
             kind
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             admit
             of
             much
             distention
             and
             contraction
             [
             wherein
             there
             are
             very
             many
             wrinkles
             ,
             in
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             ,
             and
             little
             cavities
             are
             engraven
             which
             hold
             stones
             ,
             being
             caused
             through
             long
             want
             of
             distention
             ]
             And
             it
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             
             fleshy
             Crust
             ,
             or
             wrinkled
             Coat
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             made
             of
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             ●…igestion
             ,
             least
             the
             innemost
             Coar
             should
             be
             
             by
             the
             sharpness
             of
             the
             Urine
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             betwixt
             this
             proper
             and
             the
             outmost
             Coat
             ,
             is
             by
             others
             called
             the
             second
             proper
             Membrane
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             they
             grant
             to
             be
             thick
             ,
             and
             furnished
             with
             fleshy
             Fibres
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             is
             rather
             a
             Muscle
             encompassing
             the
             whole
             Bladder
             :
             because
             it
             hath
             Fibres
             
             visibly
             fleshy
             ,
             inserted
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             bladder
             :
             So
             that
             ,
             as
             the
             circular
             Muscle
             called
             Sphincter
             ,
             does
             cloze
             the
             bladder
             ,
             that
             our
             water
             may
             not
             pass
             from
             us
             against
             our
             wills
             ,
             so
             this
             Muscle
             does
             help
             the
             voidance
             of
             our
             water
             ,
             whilest
             by
             contracting
             it self
             ,
             it
             squeezes
             the
             bladder
             .
             And
             this
             is
             ,
             indeed
             ,
             the
             Opinion
             of
             my
             Master
             Aquapendent
             ;
             the
             truth
             whereof
             Walaeus
             was
             wont
             thus
             to
             prove
             in
             the
             Dissection
             of
             live
             Dogs
             :
             having
             cut
             off
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             he
             makes
             a
             small
             piercing
             wound
             into
             the
             bladder
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             wound
             or
             hole
             ,
             the
             urin
             spins
             out
             as
             far
             ,
             as
             naturally
             it
             does
             from
             the
             Yard
             :
             yet
             I
             shal
             not
             refuse
             to
             grant
             thus
             much
             to
             other
             Authors
             :
             Viz.
             that
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             or
             Belly
             ,
             do
             also
             help
             forward
             the
             Expulsion
             of
             Urin.
             It
             ma
             es
             nothing
             against
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             stomach
             ,
             and
             Guts
             ,
             and
             Womb
             ,
             have
             the
             like
             fleshy
             membrane
             ;
             for
             they
             also
             did
             need
             such
             an
             one
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             more
             easily
             be
             widened
             and
             contracted
             .
             Hence
             ,
             though
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Bladder
             be
             more
             fleshy
             ,
             yet
             in
             a
             large
             sense
             ,
             the
             Membrane
             of
             these
             other
             parts
             may
             likewise
             be
             termed
             musculous
             .
             But
             the
             condition
             of
             Spirituous
             blood
             ,
             forcibly
             issuing
             forth
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             dull
             and
             lazie
             urin
             are
             different
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             the
             precedent
             blood
             is
             forced
             on
             by
             that
             which
             follows
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Laws
             of
             Circulation
             ,
             and
             the
             inbred
             Faculty
             .
          
           
             The
             Bladder
             hath
             three
             Holes
             :
             Two
             a
             little
             before
             the
             Neck
             ,
             where
             the
             Ureters
             
             are
             inserted
             ,
             of
             which
             before
             ,
             the
             third
             is
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             to
             let
             out
             the
             Urin.
             
          
           
             Now
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             is
             its
             narrower
             
             part
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Urin
             is
             voided
             .
             In
             Men
             this
             Neck
             is
             more
             
               long-round
               ,
               narrow
            
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             writhen
             ,
             because
             being
             placed
             under
             the
             bodies
             which
             compose
             the
             Yard
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             upwards
             ,
             under
             the
             Share-bones
             ,
             from
             the
             Fundament
             to
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             Yard
             :
             To
             which
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             two
             Kernels
             are
             adjoyned
             ,
             called
             the
             Prostatae
             .
             In
             Women
             the
             
               Neck
               of
               the
               Bladder
            
             is
             
               short
               and
               broad
            
             ,
             stretched
             forth-right
             downwards
             ,
             and
             implanted
             above
             into
             the
             Neck
             of
             their
             Womb.
             In
             both
             Sexes
             the
             Neck
             is
             fleshy
             (
             which
             therefore
             heals
             ,
             being
             wounded
             ,
             whereas
             wounds
             in
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             bladder
             are
             deadly
             )
             interwoven
             with
             very
             many
             Fibres
             ,
             especially
             such
             as
             run
             athwart
             ,
             which
             purse
             up
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             bladder
             ,
             that
             our
             water
             may
             not
             pass
             from
             us
             against
             our
             wills
             ,
             and
             this
             orbicular
             Muscle
             is
             
             therefore
             called
             the
             Sphincter
             .
             Which
             if
             it
             be
             over
             cooled
             ,
             or
             troubled
             with
             the
             Palsie
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             Disease
             ,
             the
             Patient
             cannot
             hold
             his
             water
             .
          
           
             The
             Bladder
             hath
             Veins
             ,
             termed
             
               Venae
               Hypogastricae
            
             ,
             implanted
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             its
             
             Neck
             ,
             which
             being
             variously
             distributed
             through
             the
             bladder
             ,
             are
             mutually
             conjoyned
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             are
             penetrable
             by
             mutual
             holes
             from
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             easily
             pass
             out
             of
             one
             branch
             into
             another
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Sylvius
             ,
             that
             the
             nutritive
             blood
             brought
             in
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             may
             return
             by
             the
             Veins
             .
             Now
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             Bladder
             hath
             Veins
             ,
             is
             ,
             because
             it
             draws
             a
             meer
             Excrement
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Urin
             ,
             with
             which
             it
             cannot
             be
             nourished
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Hypogastrica
             in
             Men
             ,
             in
             Women
             from
             the
             Vessels
             which
             go
             into
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             considerable
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Medulla
             of
             Ossacrum
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             contain
             Urin
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             the
             
             Bodies
             Chamber-pot
             ;
             also
             Stones
             it
             contains
             and
             Gravel
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             other
             things
             ,
             as
             Hairs
             ,
             Witness
             
               Galen
               ,
               Donatus
               ,
               Hollerius
               ,
               Shenkius
               ,
               Tulpius
            
             ;
             Worms
             ,
             by
             report
             of
             
               Hollerius
               ,
               Mundanella
               ,
               Dodonaeus
            
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             was
             a
             late
             Instance
             at
             Hafnia
             ,
             Pinns
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             most
             strange
             ,
             Pot-herbs
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             late
             Observation
             of
             
               John
               van
               Horn.
            
             And
             its
             next
             use
             is
             to
             expel
             the
             said
             Urin
             contained
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Seedpraeparatory
             Vessels
             in
             Men.
             
          
           
             HItherto
             we
             have
             handled
             the
             Organs
             of
             Nutrition
             ;
             those
             of
             Procrea
             ion
             or
             Generation
             come
             next
             to
             be
             spoken
             of
             ,
             which
             are
             different
             in
             Men
             from
             those
             in
             Women
             .
             In
             Men
             those
             which
             first
             present
             themselves
             ,
             are
          
           
             The
             
               twofold
               Spermatick
               Vessels
            
             ,
             viz.
             
             the
             two
             Spermatick
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             
               right
               hand
               Vein
            
             ,
             arises
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             a
             little
             below
             the
             Rise
             of
             the
             Emulgent
             :
             The
             left
             springs
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             it
             should
             go
             over
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             there
             would
             be
             danger
             of
             breaking
             ,
             or
             ●ather
             least
             by
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Artery
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             Vein
             ,
             should
             be
             in
             some
             sort
             stopped
             and
             hindered
             .
             Therefore
             it
             hath
             its
             Rise
             seldom
             from
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             from
             both
             places
             .
          
           
             Both
             the
             
               Seminal
               Arteries
            
             do
             arise
             from
             the
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             ,
             or
             great
             Artery
             :
             Almost
             two
             fingers
             breadths
             distance
             from
             the
             Emulgents
             .
          
           
             These
             Vessels
             are
             in
             Men
             greater
             
             then
             in
             Women
             ;
             and
             the
             Arteries
             are
             larger
             then
             the
             Veins
             ,
             because
             very
             much
             Heat
             ,
             and
             Vital
             Spirit
             ,
             and
             Arterial
             blood
             are
             requisite
             ,
             for
             to
             make
             the
             Seed
             .
             Somtimes
             one
             Artery
             is
             wanting
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             both
             ,
             peradventure
             in
             such
             as
             cannot
             ingender
             .
          
           
             These
             Vessels
             are
             somwhat
             distant
             
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ;
             they
             are
             obliquely
             carried
             above
             the
             Ureters
             to
             the
             Groyns
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             progress
             ,
             these
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             joyned
             by
             infinite
             Anastomoses
             (
             so
             that
             the
             Arteries
             are
             so
             coupled
             within
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             but
             one
             Vessel
             )
             and
             they
             are
             knit
             together
             by
             a
             Membrane
             arising
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             are
             afterwards
             carried
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Stone
             ,
             like
             the
             tendrils
             of
             a
             Vine
             ,
             being
             so
             interwoven
             ,
             that
             a
             curious
             eye
             cannot
             distinguish
             a
             Vein
             from
             an
             Artery
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               comprehends
               the
               Kidneys
               ,
               Bladder
               ,
               Yard
               ,
               and
               Seminary
               Vessels
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               wont
               to
               be
               shewed
               ,
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               explained
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Auxiliary
                     Kidneys
                     ,
                     or
                     Deputy-kidneys
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     true
                     Kidneys
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spermatick
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spermatick
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     cava
                     ,
                     divided
                     into
                     the
                     Iliack
                     Branches
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     trunk
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     ,
                     divided
                     in
                     like
                     manner
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   IIII.
                   
                     The
                     Ureters
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vessels
                     which
                     prepare
                     the
                     Seed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     Vessels
                     where
                     they
                     make
                     the
                     Vasa
                     pampiniformia
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Stones
                     covered
                     with
                     all
                     their
                     Coats
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Vessels
                     which
                     carry
                     away
                     the
                     Seed
                     going
                     behind
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     Piss-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Kernels
                     called
                  
                   Prostatae
                   .
                
                 
                   RR.
                   
                     The
                     Muscles
                     which
                     raise
                     the
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     other
                     Muscles
                     which
                     widen
                     the
                     Piss-pipe
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     Body
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     The
                     Fore-skin
                     covering
                     the
                     Nut
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               54
            
          
           
             These
             Praeparatory
             Vessels
             of
             Generation
             ,
             when
             they
             come
             unto
             the
             Stone
             ,
             are
             not
             changed
             into
             the
             carrying
             Vessels
             ,
             as
             if
             one
             continued
             body
             with
             them
             as
             many
             imagine
             .
             But
             they
             pierce
             through
             the
             proper
             Coat
             of
             the
             Stone
             ,
             and
             are
             spred
             through
             the
             substance
             thereof
             ,
             and
             so
             obliterated
             .
          
           
             The
             
               use
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Arteries
            
             ,
             is
             to
             carry
             Blood
             and
             Spirit
             to
             the
             Stones
             ,
             and
             
             in
             those
             various
             interweavings
             to
             prepare
             the
             same
             ,
             by
             a
             vertue
             which
             they
             fetch
             from
             the
             stones
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             long
             stay
             and
             accurate
             Concoction
             ,
             and
             sifting
             in
             those
             crooked
             Mazes
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             becom
             Seed
             ,
             and
             may
             nourish
             the
             Stones
             ,
             for
             which
             nourishments
             sake
             ,
             in
             those
             that
             are
             not
             yet
             of
             ripe
             age
             ,
             these
             Arteries
             carry
             blood
             ,
             before
             they
             can
             labor
             and
             make
             Seed
             .
             Now
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Spermatick
             Veins
             ,
             closely
             interwoven
             with
             the
             Arteries
             about
             the
             Stones
             ,
             and
             joyned
             to
             them
             by
             mutual
             Anastomoses
             ,
             is
             ,
             to
             carry
             back
             that
             blood
             which
             remains
             superfluous
             ,
             after
             the
             Stones
             are
             nourished
             ,
             and
             the
             Seed
             made
             ,
             unto
             the
             left
             Emulgent
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             
             Vena
             ●…ediately
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             where
             the
             S●…in
             is
             commonly
             propagated
             from
             t●…
             there
             an●
             need
             to
             fear
             ,
             least
             this
             return
             of
             the
             blood
             through
             the
             Veins
             should
             withdraw
             matter
             from
             the
             Seed
             ,
             or
             that
             the
             generating
             Spirit
             ,
             should
             return
             upwards
             from
             the
             stones
             .
             For
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             intricate
             mixture
             and
             intertexture
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             no
             part
             goes
             back
             ,
             save
             what
             the
             stones
             dismiss
             ,
             as
             not
             necessary
             for
             themselves
             ,
             nor
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             do
             for
             the
             most
             part
             find
             the
             Arteries
             which
             bring
             the
             blood
             greater
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             which
             carry
             it
             back
             lesser
             ,
             because
             the
             Stones
             do
             not
             return
             so
             much
             as
             they
             receive
             .
             And
             that
             the
             Spirit
             is
             retained
             ,
             the
             silent
             course
             of
             the
             blood
             through
             the
             Veins
             ,
             is
             a
             token
             .
             Which
             blood
             ,
             verily
             ,
             is
             retained
             in
             the
             stones
             from
             flowing
             back
             ,
             by
             the
             same
             power
             whereby
             it
             is
             retained
             in
             other
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXII
            
             .
             Concerning
             the
             Stones
             .
          
           
             THe
             Stones
             or
             Testicles
             so
             called
             ,
             as
             witnessing
             
             the
             courage
             and
             strength
             of
             a
             
             man
             ,
             without
             which
             a
             man
             was
             no
             sufficient
             witness
             in
             the
             Roman
             Court
             ,
             are
             also
             called
             Did●●●i
             or
             Gemelli
             Twins
             ,
             because
             commonly
          
           
             They
             are
             in
             Number
             two
             .
             Seldom
             one
             great
             one
             and
             no
             more
             ,
             as
             in
             Sylla
             
             and
             Cotta
             ,
             Witness
             A●rianus
             ;
             seldomer
             three
             ,
             as
             in
             Agathocles
             the
             Tyrant
             of
             Sicilie
             ,
             and
             some
             Families
             of
             Italy
             of
             the
             Colci
             ,
             especially
             at
             Bergoma
             ,
             and
             others
             at
             Paris
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Fernelius
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             proper
             to
             a
             renowned
             Family
             in
             
               Germany
               ,
            
             ;
             and
             four
             ,
             which
             Aristotle
             partly
             observed
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             the
             Father
             ,
             so
             small
             that
             they
             proved
             barren
             ,
             because
             either
             they
             do
             not
             sufficiently
             digest
             the
             matter
             of
             Seed
             ,
             or
             they
             do
             not
             easily
             receive
             the
             same
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             straitness
             of
             their
             passages
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             externally
             in
             Men
             ,
             
             without
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             under
             the
             Belly
             ,
             at
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             in
             their
             Cod
             or
             Covering
             .
             1.
             
             For
             Chastities
             sake
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Aristotle
             .
             For
             such
             live-wights
             as
             have
             their
             Stones
             hid
             within
             their
             Body
             ,
             are
             very
             lecherous
             ,
             do
             often
             couple
             ,
             and
             get
             many
             young
             ones
             .
             2.
             
             That
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             longer
             passage
             ,
             the
             greater
             stay
             of
             the
             Seminal
             matter
             ,
             may
             cause
             the
             better
             preparation
             .
             3.
             
             Laurembergius
             would
             have
             them
             nearer
             that
             external
             place
             wherein
             they
             were
             to
             generate
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Womb.
             But
             that
             nearness
             ,
             doubtless
             ,
             helps
             nothing
             to
             Generation
             ,
             though
             the
             nearness
             of
             the
             Yard
             does
             :
             Nor
             do
             we
             find
             this
             observed
             in
             many
             Animals
             which
             generate
             out
             of
             themselves
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Stones
             have
             lain
             hid
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             until
             Puberty
             or
             Ripeness
             of
             Age
             fit
             for
             Generation
             ,
             
               Martinus
               Rulandus
            
             proves
             in
             two
             Histories
             ,
             Pareus
             in
             one
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             in
             a
             story
             not
             unlike
             .
             In
             which
             kind
             of
             persons
             ,
             if
             the
             Yard
             should
             also
             lie
             hid
             ,
             we
             should
             ever
             and
             anon
             have
             an
             appearing
             change
             of
             Sexes
             .
          
           
             The
             Epididymides
             rest
             athwart
             upon
             the
             Stones
             ,
             and
             compass
             them
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             being
             a
             kind
             of
             little
             Stones
             ,
             oblong
             ,
             round
             ,
             white
             ,
             and
             wreathed
             ,
             but
             at
             both
             ends
             ,
             somwhat
             sharp
             ,
             of
             which
             see
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             in
             men
             does
             commonly
             answer
             that
             of
             a
             small
             
             Hens
             Eg.
             And
             in
             men
             the
             Stones
             are
             greater
             then
             in
             women
             .
          
           
             The
             Figure
             of
             the
             Stones
             is
             Oval
             .
             
             Which
             Figure
             varies
             somtimes
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             neighboring
             Vessels
             more
             or
             less
             turgent
             :
             And
             therefore
             some
             say
             the
             right
             Testicle
             is
             more
             full
             vein'd
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             more
             hot
             ,
             and
             have
             seed
             better
             digested
             .
             Whence
             Hippocrates
             calls
             it
             the
             Boygetter
             ,
             because
             it
             receives
             more
             pure
             and
             hot
             blood
             and
             Spirits
             out
             of
             the
             great
             Vessel
             ,
             viz.
             the
             great
             Artery
             .
             The
             left
             Stone
             is
             
             thought
             to
             contain
             
               colder
               Seed
            
             ,
             more
             wheyish
             and
             and
             weak
             ,
             because
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             the
             matter
             is
             beleived
             to
             be
             brought
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Hippocrates
             cals
             this
             Stone
             the
             Girl-getter
             .
             Whence
             that
             common
             Saying
             ,
             Wenches
             are
             begot
             by
             the
             left
             Stone
             in
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Womb
             ;
             Boys
             by
             the
             right
             Stone
             in
             the
             right
             side
             .
             And
             Hippocrates
             saies
             ,
             
               there
               is
               in
               a
               man
               as
               wel
               as
               in
               a
               woman
               both
               male
               and
               foemale
               Seed
               ,
            
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             hotter
             and
             colder
             .
             But
             I
             am
             not
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             wenches
             are
             alwaies
             begotten
             by
             the
             left
             Stone
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             receives
             a
             colder
             sort
             of
             Seed
             ,
             for
             ,
             1.
             
             There
             are
             ever
             and
             anon
             Virago's
             or
             manly
             Women
             ,
             which
             exceed
             Men
             in
             strength
             and
             courage
             .
             2.
             
             Blood
             is
             communicated
             from
             the
             great
             Artery
             ,
             as
             well
             to
             the
             left
             Stone
             as
             to
             the
             right
             .
             3.
             
             The
             
               Arteria
               Spermatica
            
             is
             oftner
             wanting
             on
             the
             right
             side
             then
             on
             the
             left
             .
             But
             the
             Generation
             of
             the
             fra●ler
             Sex
             ,
             depends
             not
             so
             much
             upon
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             left
             Testicle
             ,
             as
             upon
             the
             cold
             Constitution
             of
             both
             the
             Stones
             ,
             or
             rather
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             which
             administers
             Matter
             for
             the
             Seed
             .
             Howbeit
             the
             left
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             are
             generally
             said
             to
             be
             colder
             then
             the
             right
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             the
             right
             Stone
             is
             fuller
             of
             Seed
             ,
             doth
             swel
             more
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             greater
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             ,
             so
             that
             Nature
             seems
             to
             design
             the
             Generation
             of
             Foemales
             more
             then
             of
             Males
             .
             It
             was
             therefore
             ill
             said
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             that
             Nature
             of
             her self
             did
             alwaies
             
             intend
             the
             Generation
             of
             Males
             ,
             as
             being
             most
             perfect
             ,
             and
             that
             a
             Foemale
             is
             ingendred
             ,
             when
             Nature
             being
             hindered
             ,
             could
             not
             ingender
             a
             Male
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             Woman
             is
             in
             his
             account
             a
             kind
             of
             Monster
             in
             Nature
             .
             Howbeit
             Nature
             seems
             more
             sollicitous
             for
             the
             
             Generation
             of
             Women
             then
             of
             Men
             ,
             for
             the
             Causes
             aforesaid
             ,
             nor
             does
             Nature
             alwaies
             regard
             that
             which
             is
             best
             or
             most
             perfect
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             most
             necessary
             ,
             as
             a
             woman
             is
             :
             For
             many
             of
             them
             are
             but
             enough
             for
             one
             man.
             For
             women
             when
             they
             are
             big
             with
             Child
             ,
             are
             useless
             to
             a
             man
             ;
             also
             they
             are
             short
             lived
             ,
             nor
             can
             they
             bear
             so
             long
             ,
             as
             a
             man
             can
             beget
             .
             But
             of
             this
             ,
             I
             have
             discoursed
             more
             fully
             ,
             
               in
               my
            
             12.
             
             
               Anatomical
               Controversie
               de
               patribus
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Testicles
             have
             Coats
             and
             Coverings
             ,
             
             some
             proper
             ,
             others
             common
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             
               two
               Coats
               common
            
             to
             them
             
             and
             other
             parts
             ,
             to
             defend
             them
             from
             external
             injuries
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             formed
             of
             a
             thinner
             skin
             
             and
             scarf-skin
             ,
             then
             is
             to
             be
             found
             in
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             Scrotum
             or
             Scortum
             ,
             hanging
             out
             like
             a
             purse
             or
             bag
             ,
             and
             subject
             to
             the
             touch
             .
             
               T
               is
               soft
               and
               wrinkled
            
             ,
             void
             of
             Fat
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             be
             more
             easily
             extended
             and
             
             wrinkled
             together
             :
             because
             the
             oylie
             matter
             which
             should
             make
             Fat
             ,
             goes
             into
             the
             Stones
             to
             make
             Seed
             .
             In
             the
             lower
             part
             it
             hath
             a
             line
             running
             out
             according
             to
             the
             length
             thereof
             ,
             which
             divides
             it
             into
             a
             right
             and
             left
             part
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             a
             suture
             or
             seam
             ,
          
           
             The
             second
             Coat
             consists
             of
             a
             fleshy
             Pannicle
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             thinner
             then
             is
             found
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             full
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             called
             dartos
             .
             Which
             Covering
             is
             by
             others
             comprehended
             under
             the
             term
             Scrotum
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             Coat
             or
             Coverings
             ,
             which
             on
             
             either
             side
             do
             cloath
             each
             Stone
             are
             three
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             proper
             Coat
             is
             called
             Vaginalis
             the
             scabberd
             Coat
             ,
             and
             by
             some
             Helico●ides
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             shape
             ,
             which
             is
             thin
             ,
             but
             yet
             strong
             ,
             full
             of
             Veins
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             processes
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             It
             cleavs
             to
             the
             Dartos
             ,
             by
             many
             membranous
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             others
             have
             reckoned
             for
             a
             peculiar
             Coat
             .
             Whence
             it
             is
             externally
             rough
             ,
             internally
             smooth
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             termed
             Eruthroeides
             the
             red
             Coat
             ,
             being
             furnished
             with
             some
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             bred
             out
             of
             the
             Cremaster
             ,
             and
             inwardly
             spred
             over
             the
             former
             .
             Rufus
             names
             this
             in
             the
             first
             place
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             and
             Veslingus
             following
             him
             ,
             account
             it
             the
             first
             Coat
             ,
             because
             it
             compasses
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             is
             propagated
             from
             the
             Cremaster
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Coats
               of
               the
               Stones
               ,
               their
               Substance
               ,
               and
               Vessels
               are
               propounded
               in
               this
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Skin
                   of
                   the
                   Cod
                   separated
                   .
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   The
                   fleshy
                   Membrane
                   which
                   ●●
                   here
                   called
                   Dartos
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   first
                   Coat
                   of
                   the
                   Stones
                   called
                   Elythroeides
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Cremaster
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   second
                   Coat
                   of
                   the
                   Stones
                   ,
                   which
                   the
                   Author
                   calls
                   Erythroides
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Coat
                   of
                   the
                   Stones
                   called
                   Albuginea
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   kernelly
                   Substance
                   of
                   the
                   Stone
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Pyramidal
                   or
                   Pampiniform
                   Vessel
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   Epididymis
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   Parastates
                   variciformis
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   A
                   Portion
                   of
                   the
                   preparatory
                   Vessels
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   Pyramidal
                   Vessel
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Epididymis
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   Parastates
                   variciformis
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Stone
                   covered
                   with
                   its
                   proper
                   Membrane
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   A
                   Portion
                   of
                   the
                   Vas
                   deferens
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Veins
                   and
                   Arteries
                   in
                   the
                   Pyramidal
                   Vessel
                   laid
                   open
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Epididymis
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Parastates
                   variciformis
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   Vas
                   deferens
                   .
                
              
            
             
               Page
               56
            
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Stones
             is
             glandulous
             ,
             white
             ,
             soft
             ,
             loose
             and
             spongy
             ,
             by
             
             reason
             of
             very
             many
             Vessels
             there
             dispersed
             and
             loose
             ,
             though
             without
             Cavity
             ,
             as
             the
             Liver
             also
             and
             the
             Spleen
             have
             no
             Cavities
             .
             They
             have
             Vessels
             of
             all
             
             kinds
             .
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Seminary
             Vessels
             :
             An
             indifferent
             large
             Nerve
             from
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ;
             somtimes
             also
             they
             have
             two
             Nerves
             from
             the
             one
             and
             twentieth
             pare
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             conjoyned
             to
             the
             Seminal
             Vessels
             ,
             carried
             with
             them
             through
             the
             production
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             disseminated
             into
             the
             Tunicles
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             on
             each
             side
             one
             Muscle
             ,
             arising
             from
             a
             strong
             Ligament
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             
             Share-bone
             ,
             where
             the
             transverse
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             end
             ,
             of
             which
             they
             seem
             to
             the
             Parts
             .
             They
             go
             along
             through
             the
             production
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             which
             they
             compass
             about
             well-near
             ,
             and
             grow
             to
             the
             beginnings
             of
             the
             Stones
             .
             They
             are
             ●●●●ed
             Cremasteres
             or
             Suspensores
             ,
             hangers
             or
             sustainers
             ,
             for
             they
             hold
             up
             the
             Stones
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             too
             much
             draw
             down
             the
             Seminal
             Vessels
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             Carnal
             conjunction
             ,
             they
             draw
             back
             the
             Stones
             ,
             that
             the
             Seed-channel
             being
             shortned
             ,
             the
             Sperm
             may
             be
             sooner
             and
             easier
             conveigh'd
             into
             the
             Womb.
             In
             some
             persons
             these
             Muscles
             are
             capable
             of
             voluntary
             motion
             ,
             who
             can
             draw
             up
             ,
             and
             let
             down
             their
             Stones
             as
             they
             list
             :
             where
             these
             Muscles
             are
             doubtless
             stronger
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             only
             hold
             the
             Stones
             suspended
             ,
             but
             move
             them
             from
             place
             to
             place
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Stones
             is
             ,
             by
             their
             
             Heat
             and
             inbred
             Faculty
             ,
             to
             make
             seed
             .
             For
             the
             Efficient
             cause
             of
             Seed
             is
             the
             proper
             flesh
             or
             substance
             of
             the
             Stones
             ,
             both
             in
             regard
             of
             their
             hot
             and
             moist
             temper
             of
             their
             specifick
             Property
             ;
             since
             no
             flesh
             in
             the
             Body
             is
             found
             like
             that
             of
             the
             Stones
             .
             Now
             they
             turn
             the
             blood
             being
             prepared
             into
             Seed
             ,
             which
             is
             requisite
             to
             preserve
             the
             Species
             of
             Mankind
             :
             And
             that
             which
             remains
             over
             and
             above
             ,
             either
             goes
             back
             by
             the
             Spermatick
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             turns
             to
             nourishment
             for
             the
             
             Stones
             .
             Nor
             can
             Seed
             be
             ordinarily
             
             bred
             without
             the
             Stones
             ,
             nor
             perfect
             Animals
             without
             them
             ,
             for
             from
             them
             the
             Seed
             receives
             both
             its
             form
             and
             colour
             .
             That
             some
             have
             ingendred
             without
             Stones
             ,
             though
             not
             according
             to
             the
             ordinary
             Course
             of
             Nature
             ,
             Smetius
             in
             his
             Miscellanies
             ,
             Fontanus
             in
             his
             Physica
             ,
             
               Cabrolius
               ,
               Hofmannus
               de
               Generatione
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             do
             testifie
             .
             Now
             the
             place
             wherein
             the
             Seed
             is
             bred
             ,
             is
             not
             any
             large
             Cavity
             in
             the
             Stone
             ,
             but
             certain
             very
             small
             Vessels
             therein
             formed
             ,
             covered
             with
             a
             very
             delicate
             thin
             Coat
             ,
             as
             Vesalius
             rightly
             teaches
             .
             Now
             these
             following
             Authors
             after
             Aristotle
             ,
             have
             taken
             away
             the
             faculty
             of
             Seed-making
             from
             the
             Stones
             ,
             viz.
             
               Fallopius
               ,
               Cabrolius
               ,
               Posthius
               ,
               Casparus
               Hofmannus
               ,
               Caesar
               Cremoninus
               ,
               Adrianus
               Spigelius
               ,
               Regius
               ,
            
             and
             others
             ,
             because
             the
             Matter
             of
             Seed
             does
             not
             go
             into
             the
             Stones
             ,
             nor
             is
             there
             ever
             any
             Seed
             found
             in
             them
             .
             But
             they
             wil
             have
             them
             principally
             to
             be
             Receptacles
             for
             the
             wheyish
             Humor
             which
             flows
             in
             with
             the
             Blood
             ;
             which
             they
             collect
             from
             their
             glandulous
             substance
             ,
             and
             the
             largeness
             of
             the
             left
             Stone
             .
             But
             they
             are
             confuted
             by
             Eunuchs
             and
             gelt
             persons
             ,
             whose
             Stones
             being
             cut
             out
             or
             bruised
             ,
             they
             become
             unable
             to
             engender
             .
             Also
             Seed
             hath
             been
             frequently
             observed
             in
             the
             Stones
             .
             Witness
             Dodonaeus
             in
             his
             39.
             
             Observation
             touching
             a
             Spanish
             Soldier
             ,
             
               Hofman
               de
               Generatione
            
             Chap.
             18.
             
             Carpus
             and
             Riolanus
             .
             It
             is
             indeed
             not
             to
             be
             found
             in
             some
             Bodies
             ,
             because
             it
             was
             not
             bred
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             some
             sickness
             ,
             or
             Imprisonment
             ,
             or
             upon
             Death
             the
             Spirits
             being
             dissipated
             ,
             a
             watry
             Liquor
             appears
             instead
             thereof
             .
             Nor
             can
             the
             Seed
             come
             to
             the
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             otherwise
             then
             by
             the
             Testicles
             ,
             which
             begin
             at
             the
             Stones
             ,
             as
             the
             praeparatory
             Vessels
             end
             in
             them
             ,
             by
             the
             Observation
             of
             very
             many
             Anatomists
             ,
             and
             why
             the
             left
             Stone
             is
             greater
             then
             the
             right
             ,
             another
             reason
             is
             alleadged
             by
             learned
             men
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Stones
             seems
             to
             give
             strength
             and
             courage
             to
             Mens
             bodies
             ,
             as
             may
             
             be
             seen
             in
             gelded
             persons
             ,
             who
             are
             changed
             well-near
             into
             Women
             ,
             in
             their
             Habit
             of
             Body
             ,
             Temperament
             ,
             Manners
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             doubtless
             the
             stones
             do
             exceedingly
             sympathize
             with
             the
             upper
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             especially
             with
             the
             Heart
             .
             For
             we
             see
             that
             cordial
             and
             cooling
             Epithems
             in
             fainting
             Fits
             and
             bleeding
             at
             the
             Nose
             ,
             being
             applied
             to
             the
             Stones
             ,
             do
             help
             as
             if
             they
             were
             applied
             to
             the
             very
             Heart
             and
             Part
             affected
             .
             The
             Cause
             hereof
             is
             hard
             to
             tell
             ;
             
               Jaccbinus
               ,
               Laurentius
               ,
               Hofmannus
            
             ,
             conceive
             that
             it
             comes
             to
             pass
             by
             reason
             of
             Passions
             of
             the
             Mind
             ,
             which
             are
             joyned
             with
             fleshly
             Lust
             .
             But
             Eunuchs
             also
             are
             lustful
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             great
             Lovers
             of
             Women
             :
             And
             Eunuchs
             are
             often
             transported
             with
             anger
             and
             other
             Passions
             of
             the
             Mind
             ,
             but
             they
             receive
             not
             never
             the
             more
             the
             Habit
             of
             Men.
             Galen
             seems
             to
             have
             been
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             a
             Spirit
             was
             bred
             in
             the
             Stones
             and
             diffused
             thence
             al
             the
             Body
             over
             .
             But
             glandulous
             Bodies
             of
             the
             number
             of
             which
             the
             Stones
             are
             ,
             are
             unfit
             to
             engender
             an
             hot
             Spirit
             ;
             nor
             are
             there
             any
             Passages
             about
             the
             Stones
             ,
             for
             the
             distribution
             of
             that
             new
             Spirit
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Galen
             .
             Nor
             is
             therefore
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Mercatus
             allowable
             ,
             viz.
             that
             those
             Spirits
             are
             not
             indeed
             bred
             there
             ;
             but
             that
             the
             Vital
             Spirits
             are
             collected
             in
             the
             Stones
             in
             great
             quantity
             ,
             that
             from
             them
             they
             may
             return
             back
             into
             the
             whole
             Body
             ;
             for
             those
             which
             are
             there
             collected
             ,
             are
             collected
             to
             engender
             Seed
             .
             But
             the
             Opinion
             of
             
               Thomas
               a
               Vega
            
             does
             better
             please
             me
             ,
             til
             I
             shall
             find
             a
             more
             probable
             ,
             viz.
             that
             a
             Seminal
             Air
             is
             raised
             up
             in
             the
             Generation
             of
             Seed
             ,
             which
             thus
             changes
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             The
             flesh
             truly
             of
             ungelt
             Creatures
             ,
             hath
             a
             rammish
             tast
             of
             the
             Seed
             ,
             which
             the
             flesh
             of
             such
             as
             are
             gelt
             hath
             not
             .
             This
             Vapor
             or
             Air
             of
             the
             Seed
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             either
             by
             the
             inner
             Pores
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             Veins
             which
             reconveigh
             to
             the
             Heart
             the
             superfluities
             of
             the
             generated
             Seed
             .
             Helmont
             imagines
             the
             Stones
             do
             act
             by
             a
             ruling
             power
             ,
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             as
             the
             stomach
             does
             upon
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             Womb
             upon
             the
             upper
             Parts
             ,
             and
             that
             without
             any
             right
             waies
             or
             marks
             ;
             which
             nevertheless
             an
             Anatomist
             seeks
             to
             find
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             possible
             .
             Vestingus
             ingeniously
             makes
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             change
             of
             voice
             ,
             temperament
             ,
             strength
             ,
             &c.
             in
             persons
             guelded
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             oppression
             of
             their
             inbred
             Heat
             by
             plenty
             of
             Matter
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             turn
             to
             Seed
             .
             Now
             their
             Sympathy
             with
             the
             Heart
             ,
             depends
             partly
             upon
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             partly
             (
             for
             we
             hold
             the
             Circulation
             in
             the
             Stones
             )
             from
             the
             foresaid
             Veins
             ,
             returning
             back
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             which
             both
             the
             vertues
             of
             Cordials
             ascend
             ,
             and
             of
             cooling
             Medicaments
             ,
             even
             as
             we
             apply
             Cordials
             and
             Coolers
             to
             the
             Hands
             ,
             with
             like
             success
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             ,
             the
             Ejaculatoria
             ,
             the
             Parastatae
             ,
             Seminal
             Bladders
             ,
             and
             the
             Prostatae
             .
          
           
             WEE
             have
             propounded
             the
             Spermatick
             praeparatory
             Vessels
             above
             ,
             which
             end
             into
             the
             Stones
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             carry
             Matter
             to
             make
             Seed
             .
          
           
             Now
             there
             are
             other
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             begin
             at
             the
             Stones
             ,
             and
             end
             at
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             whither
             they
             carry
             and
             there
             squirt
             out
             the
             Seed
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             made
             in
             the
             Stones
             .
             And
             these
             are
             termed
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             ,
             or
             Vessels
             that
             carry
             away
             the
             Seed
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             two
             in
             number
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             .
          
           
             Now
             we
             divide
             these
             Vessels
             into
             the
             Beginning
             ,
             Middle
             ,
             and
             End.
             
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             are
             termed
             Parastatae
             ,
             
             as
             if
             you
             would
             say
             idle
             attenders
             upon
             the
             stones
             ,
             ceremonious
             waiters
             ,
             also
             
               Corpora
               varicosa
            
             or
             variciformia
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             twisted
             and
             wreathed
             ,
             like
             those
             crooked
             black
             Veins
             called
             
               Varices
               .
               Galen
            
             in
             his
             Interpretation
             of
             hard
             words
             used
             by
             Hippocrates
             calls
             them
             Epididymides
             ,
             
             because
             they
             rest
             upon
             the
             stones
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             others
             distinguish
             by
             a
             peculiar
             use
             ,
             as
             that
             they
             prepare
             the
             seed
             ;
             and
             the
             Parastatae
             do
             add
             more
             perfection
             thereto
             :
             Others
             invert
             the
             Matter
             ,
             and
             perswade
             themselves
             that
             the
             Parastatae
             prepare
             the
             seed
             ,
             and
             the
             Epididymides
             finish
             it
             ,
             which
             Opinion
             of
             theirs
             they
             have
             received
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             how
             well
             ,
             from
             the
             ancient
             Physitians
             .
             And
             they
             are
             oblong
             Vessels
             ,
             placed
             upon
             the
             stones
             ,
             white
             ,
             thick
             ,
             and
             round
             ,
             a
             little
             depressed
             ,
             and
             solid
             ,
             growing
             narrow
             by
             little
             and
             little
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             their
             Substance
             ,
             t
             is
             of
             a
             middle
             nature
             betwixt
             that
             of
             the
             stones
             
             and
             that
             of
             the
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             .
             For
             their
             substance
             is
             softer
             then
             the
             latter
             ,
             and
             harder
             then
             the
             former
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             glandulous
             within
             ,
             and
             fungous
             ;
             and
             externally
             membranous
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             their
             Original
             ,
             the
             Opinion
             of
             
             Spigelius
             and
             other
             late
             Anatomists
             ,
             does
             against
             all
             former
             Authority
             thus
             determine
             :
             viz.
             that
             
             they
             arise
             by
             continuation
             from
             the
             Seminary
             Vessels
             ,
             so
             that
             both
             the
             Praeparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             the
             Parastatae
             ,
             and
             the
             Out-carrying
             Vessels
             ,
             are
             but
             one
             continued
             Body
             ,
             receiving
             divers
             Names
             according
             to
             its
             different
             Parts
             ,
             and
             their
             respective
             Offices
             and
             Situations
             .
          
           
             But
             Walaeus
             conceives
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             more
             suitable
             to
             what
             appears
             in
             Dissection
             ,
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             these
             Vessels
             do
             not
             arise
             from
             the
             praeparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             but
             are
             rather
             mixed
             with
             them
             ,
             fastned
             to
             ,
             and
             opened
             into
             them
             :
             and
             that
             as
             he
             supposes
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             blood
             forced
             in
             by
             the
             Praeparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             may
             deposite
             that
             Matter
             which
             it
             contains
             fit
             to
             breed
             seed
             ,
             into
             the
             little
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             .
             But
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             unfit
             for
             Nutrition
             and
             Generation
             of
             Seed
             ,
             is
             by
             other
             Anastomoses
             shed
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             by
             Circulation
             returns
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             have
             their
             Original
             from
             the
             stones
             .
             by
             means
             of
             innumerable
             small
             Pipes
             or
             white
             Fibres
             .
             And
             there
             is
             no
             communion
             at
             all
             between
             the
             Vessel
             that
             carries
             away
             the
             Seed
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             Arteries
             of
             the
             stones
             ,
             which
             Vesalius
             conceives
             to
             be
             apparent
             in
             Dissections
             .
             Yet
             are
             they
             fastned
             to
             the
             inmost
             Coat
             of
             the
             stones
             ,
             though
             they
             have
             a
             proper
             Coat
             of
             their
             own
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Parastatae
             ,
             is
             to
             perfect
             and
             finish
             the
             seed
             ,
             by
             a
             power
             which
             they
             
             receive
             from
             the
             stones
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             while
             the
             seed
             abides
             in
             them
             ,
             it
             comes
             to
             pass
             that
             vehement
             and
             frequent
             Lust
             is
             not
             provoked
             .
          
           
             The
             Ejaculatory
             or
             squirting
             Vessels
             ,
             are
             simply
             termed
             the
             Middle
             ,
             because
             they
             carry
             seed
             from
             the
             stones
             and
             the
             
               Corpora
               varicosa
            
             ,
             to
             the
             seminal
             bladders
             :
             for
             they
             are
             seen
             to
             carry
             a
             whiteish
             Humor
             ,
             yea
             and
             the
             Parastatae
             are
             frequently
             found
             full
             of
             seed
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             Substance
             white
             and
             nervous
             ;
             and
             their
             Figure
             is
             round
             and
             long
             :
             They
             have
             an
             obscure
             Cavity
             ,
             because
             the
             seed
             by
             means
             of
             the
             spirits
             whereof
             it
             is
             full
             ,
             does
             easily
             pass
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             is
             partly
             in
             the
             Cod
             ,
             partly
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             above
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             or
             Share-bone
             .
             For
             they
             are
             carried
             upwards
             ,
             and
             are
             knit
             to
             the
             Praeparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             by
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             so
             pass
             along
             to
             the
             Flanks
             and
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             which
             for
             that
             cause
             have
             a
             slight
             Cavity
             .
             And
             afterwards
             being
             turned
             back
             downwards
             ,
             they
             are
             carried
             above
             the
             Ureters
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             above
             the
             
               rectum
               Intestinum
            
             ,
             they
             are
             on
             each
             side
             widened
             at
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             where
          
           
             Their
             End
             is
             ,
             and
             these
             Vessels
             so
             widened
             do
             constitute
          
           
             The
             
               seminary
               Bladders
            
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             in
             number
             like
             little
             Cells
             ,
             and
             seem
             
             to
             make
             on
             each
             side
             one
             remarkable
             ,
             great
             ,
             and
             winding
             one
             ,
             because
             one
             goes
             into
             another
             ,
             which
             you
             cannot
             compare
             to
             anything
             better
             then
             to
             a
             bunch
             of
             Grapes
             .
             The
             Cavities
             do
             neatly
             represent
             the
             Cells
             of
             a
             Pomegranate
             in
             order
             and
             figure
             .
             Rondeletius
             did
             first
             of
             al
             describe
             these
             Bladders
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             Fallopius
             .
             These
             nervous
             Bladders
             are
             seated
             between
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Piss-bladder
             and
             the
             Arse-gut
             ,
             by
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             deferent
             Vessels
             ,
             a
             little
             before
             the
             said
             Vessels
             grow
             thick
             ,
             and
             unite
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             contain
             the
             seed
             being
             wrought
             ,
             and
             to
             reserve
             the
             same
             til
             time
             of
             Copulation
             ,
             so
             that
             there
             may
             be
             seed
             sufficient
             to
             beget
             many
             Children
             .
             And
             therefore
             that
             ●…ouder
             which
             Aristotle
             relates
             of
             a
             Bull
             that
             engendred
             
             after
             his
             sto●●s
             were
             cut
             off
             :
             though
             others
             attribute
             this
             effect
             to
             the
             Prostatae
             ,
             as
             Archangelus
             and
             Columbus
             .
             Now
             the
             seed
             may
             be
             contained
             in
             these
             Cells
             many
             months
             together
             ,
             and
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             multitude
             of
             these
             little
             Bladders
             ,
             seed
             may
             be
             voided
             in
             many
             Acts
             of
             Copulation
             ;
             and
             all
             not
             spent
             at
             one
             Essay
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             seed
             is
             contained
             in
             these
             
             little
             Bladderkies
             ,
             besides
             the
             Authority
             of
             
               Fallopius
               ,
               Platerus
               ,
               Laurentius
               ,
               Aquapendent
               ,
            
             and
             Casserius
             ,
             it
             is
             manifest
             by
             this
             Experiment
             :
             If
             you
             squeez
             them
             ,
             presently
             feed
             is
             forced
             into
             the
             Pipe
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             just
             like
             Milk
             out
             of
             the
             Dug
             ,
             or
             piss
             out
             of
             the
             Piss-bladder
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             if
             you
             press
             the
             Prostatae
             with
             your
             finger
             ,
             yet
             nothing
             comes
             
             away
             ,
             unless
             you
             press
             the
             Bladders
             also
             .
             And
             that
             the
             seed
             does
             not
             continually
             distil
             and
             drop
             out
             of
             them
             ,
             into
             Urinary
             passage
             ,
             a
             little
             Caruncle
             hinders
             ,
             which
             stops
             their
             hole
             ▪
             The
             perpetual
             seat
             of
             a
             virulent
             Gonorrhaea
             ,
             hath
             been
             by
             the
             Observation
             of
             late
             Anatomists
             found
             to
             be
             in
             these
             Bladders
             ,
             for
             upon
             Dissection
             there
             hath
             been
             found
             an
             evident
             Imposthumation
             in
             these
             parts
             .
             From
             the
             situation
             of
             these
             Bladders
             and
             of
             the
             stones
             ,
             without
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             Riolanus
             would
             give
             a
             reason
             why
             men
             are
             not
             so
             cruelly
             infested
             with
             the
             filthy
             vapors
             of
             corrupt
             seed
             ,
             as
             women
             are
             .
             But
             the
             Peritonaeum
             does
             not
             hinder
             the
             evaporations
             of
             the
             seed
             ,
             because
             the
             Veins
             do
             inwardly
             open
             upwards
             .
             Also
             Viragoes
             or
             mannish
             women
             ,
             are
             not
             troubled
             with
             the
             said
             vapors
             .
             The
             reason
             must
             therefore
             be
             sought
             in
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             seed
             ,
             which
             being
             in
             men
             and
             manly
             women
             more
             benigne
             ,
             does
             neither
             go
             to
             ,
             nor
             infect
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             After
             the
             Constitution
             of
             the
             seminary
             Bladders
             these
             deferent
             Vessels
             are
             united
             into
             one
             smal
             passage
             which
             goes
             into
             the
             Prostatae
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Prostatae
             ,
             as
             if
             you
             
             would
             say
             the
             Waiters
             ,
             are
             two
             Kernels
             ,
             manifesty
             differing
             from
             the
             seed
             bladders
             ,
             in
             use
             ,
             form
             ,
             situation
             ,
             and
             magnitude
             ,
             though
             Hofman
             think
             otherwise
             ;
             their
          
           
             Situation
             is
             at
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             above
             the
             Sphincter
             or
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             at
             the
             neck
             thereof
             .
             Columbus
             calls
             them
             
               Prostatae
               ,
               Vesalius
               glandulosum
               corpus
               ,
               Fallopius
               glandulosion
               assistens
               ,
            
             others
             call
             them
             the
             little
             stones
             ,
             to
             difference
             them
             from
             the
             true
             stones
             .
             Before
             and
             behind
             they
             are
             flat
             ,
             on
             the
             sides
             round
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             commonly
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Walnut
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             is
             spongy
             ,
             and
             yet
             harder
             and
             whiter
             then
             that
             of
             other
             Kernels
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             covered
             with
             a
             thicker
             Membrane
             ;
             all
             which
             is
             to
             hinder
             the
             ovlie
             substance
             ,
             of
             it self
             apt
             to
             run
             ,
             from
             passing
             out
             .
             And
             because
             they
             are
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             therefore
             they
             cause
             pleasure
             in
             Copulation
             .
             These
             Kernels
             are
             open
             by
             certain
             Pores
             into
             the
             Urethra
             or
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             which
             is
             evidently
             apparent
             in
             such
             as
             have
             died
             of
             the
             Gonorrhaea
             ,
             of
             which
             Gonorrhaea
             these
             Pores
             being
             dilated
             are
             many
             times
             the
             seat
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             to
             contain
             an
             oylie
             ,
             slippery
             ,
             and
             sat
             Humor
             ,
             which
             is
             pressed
             forth
             when
             need
             requires
             ,
             to
             daub
             the
             Urinary
             passage
             ,
             to
             defend
             it
             from
             the
             acrimony
             of
             the
             seed
             or
             urin
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             not
             fall
             in
             through
             driness
             ,
             but
             may
             remain
             slippery
             ;
             because
             through
             it
             in
             Copulation
             ,
             the
             said
             Humor
             does
             suddenly
             flow
             out
             of
             the
             seed
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             that
             which
             Galen
             ment
             ,
             when
             he
             said
             that
             they
             contained
             a
             certain
             Humor
             like
             seed
             ,
             but
             much
             thinner
             ,
             the
             use
             of
             which
             Humor
             ,
             is
             to
             excite
             Lust
             ,
             
             and
             to
             cause
             Delight
             in
             Carnal
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             Mean
             while
             ,
             
               Spigelius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             and
             others
             do
             conceive
             that
             they
             contain
             
             seed
             ,
             which
             is
             there
             collected
             ,
             and
             thence
             voided
             ,
             having
             attained
             some
             further
             perfection
             ,
             as
             Veslingus
             conceives
             .
             Others
             as
             Laurentius
             ,
             conceive
             they
             do
             both
             ;
             for
             he
             will
             have
             the
             Prostatae
             both
             to
             thicken
             the
             seed
             ,
             and
             to
             breed
             a
             thin
             humor
             ,
             and
             excite
             titillation
             .
             But
             that
             they
             do
             not
             contain
             seed
             ,
             their
             compression
             shews
             ,
             which
             voides
             none
             ,
             unless
             the
             Vesicles
             or
             seed-bladders
             be
             withal
             compressed
             .
             And
             seeing
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             Gonorrhaea
             is
             here
             ,
             
             which
             we
             frequently
             observe
             to
             continue
             many
             years
             ,
             without
             any
             remarkable
             Detriment
             to
             Health
             ,
             it
             is
             unlikely
             that
             the
             seed
             flows
             from
             the
             Prostatae
             .
             I
             saw
             a
             man
             at
             Padua
             ,
             who
             was
             troubled
             thirty
             years
             with
             the
             Gonorrhaea
             ,
             and
             hath
             it
             still
             ,
             being
             otherwise
             in
             Health
             .
             The
             seed
             therfore
             is
             not
             contained
             in
             them
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             stay
             there
             ,
             though
             it
             may
             pass
             through
             .
          
           
             Others
             do
             conceive
             ,
             that
             they
             help
             to
             make
             the
             seed
             ,
             yea
             that
             they
             and
             the
             
             bladders
             are
             the
             only
             seed-makers
             ,
             as
             Regius
             endeavors
             to
             prove
             .
             Which
             if
             it
             were
             true
             ,
             guelded
             persons
             might
             engender
             .
             Guelded
             persons
             do
             indeed
             send
             forth
             a
             moist
             matter
             resembling
             seed
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             provoked
             to
             Venery
             ,
             but
             they
             can
             get
             no
             Children
             .
             And
             if
             they
             have
             been
             observed
             at
             any
             time
             to
             engender
             ,
             according
             to
             what
             is
             related
             of
             guelded
             Horses
             and
             Bulls
             ;
             there
             was
             doubtless
             remaining
             in
             the
             seed-bladders
             ,
             so
             much
             seed
             made
             by
             the
             stones
             ,
             as
             might
             serve
             for
             one
             bout
             of
             Generation
             .
             But
             if
             they
             engendred
             more
             then
             once
             ,
             doubtless
             one
             stone
             was
             left
             behind
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             guelded
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXIV
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Yard
             .
          
           
             THe
             Genital
             Member
             of
             a
             Man
             is
             commonly
             
             called
             in
             Latin
             
               Penis
               a
               pendendo
            
             ,
             because
             it
             hangs
             ,
             also
             Virga
             the
             Rod
             or
             Yard
             ,
             Colis
             ,
             &c.
             
             Many
             other
             Names
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             put
             upon
             it
             ,
             which
             are
             better
             past
             over
             then
             mentioned
             .
             In
             English
             t
             is
             most
             usually
             termed
             the
             Yard
             or
             
               Prick
               .
               Plato
            
             in
             his
             Timaeus
             compares
             it
             to
             a
             certain
             living
             Creature
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             an
             Appetite
             to
             Generation
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             it
             is
             indeed
             the
             Part
             and
             Instrument
             of
             a
             Live-wight
             ,
             and
             the
             Faculty
             of
             Appetite
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             seated
             at
             the
             Roots
             of
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             ,
             that
             carnal
             Copulation
             might
             more
             conveniently
             
             be
             accomplished
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             might
             be
             no
             impediment
             to
             other
             parts
             ▪
             it
             is
             placed
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             because
             only
             one
             in
             number
             .
             Yet
             there
             was
             once
             a
             man
             dissected
             at
             Bononia
             who
             had
             two
             Yards
             .
             Which
             also
             Obsequens
             relates
             of
             a
             Boy
             ,
             among
             his
             Prodigies
             .
             Another
             named
             Anna
             ,
             being
             lately
             a
             vagrant
             in
             Italy
             ,
             had
             no
             Yard
             ,
             but
             instead
             thereof
             a
             certain
             piece
             of
             spongy
             flesh
             under
             his
             Navil
             ,
             which
             Nature
             had
             provided
             him
             to
             piss
             withal
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             round
             and
             long
             ;
             but
             not
             exactly
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             broader
             on
             the
             upper
             ●ide
             ,
             
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             consisting
             in
             thickness
             and
             
             length
             ,
             does
             vary
             ,
             both
             in
             the
             several
             sorts
             of
             Animals
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Individual
             Creatures
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             .
             Particularly
             ,
             t
             is
             in
             Man
             so
             great
             as
             was
             necessary
             to
             propagate
             his
             species
             or
             kind
             :
             But
             proportionally
             shorter
             then
             in
             many
             Brutes
             ,
             because
             Mankind
             couples
             after
             another
             manner
             then
             those
             beasts
             do
             .
             In
             particular
             Men
             ,
             there
             is
             exceeding
             great
             variety
             .
             For
             it
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             greater
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             1.
             
             In
             little
             Men.
             2.
             
             In
             such
             as
             abstain
             from
             carnal
             Embracements
             ,
             if
             we
             beleive
             Galen
             .
             3.
             
             If
             the
             Navil-strings
             be
             not
             tied
             close
             to
             the
             Navil
             in
             Infants
             ;
             for
             otherwise
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Urachus
             or
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             the
             Bladder
             and
             neighboring
             Parts
             ,
             are
             drawn
             more
             upwards
             .
             Yet
             Spigelius
             is
             herein
             of
             a
             quite
             contrary
             mind
             .
             4.
             
             In
             such
             as
             have
             large
             Noses
             .
             For
             the
             proportion
             of
             the
             Yard
             answers
             that
             of
             the
             Nose
             very
             much
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             beleive
             Physiognomists
             .
             5.
             
             In
             Block-heads
             and
             dull-pated
             Asses
             .
             Some
             Nations
             have
             this
             Member
             larger
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             as
             the
             Aethiopians
             or
             Blackmores
             .
          
           
             It
             consists
             of
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             Skin
             ,
             fleshy
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             a
             proper
             substance
             of
             its
             own
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             void
             of
             Fat
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             fattest
             
             men
             .
             And
             it
             is
             a
             great
             question
             why
             there
             is
             no
             Fat
             found
             either
             in
             it
             or
             about
             it
             .
             Some
             ,
             as
             Laurentius
             ,
             think
             it
             is
             because
             fat
             through
             its
             softness
             would
             hinder
             its
             erection
             :
             But
             the
             Yard
             will
             stand
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Bodies
             thereof
             are
             blown
             up
             .
             Others
             make
             the
             Cause
             to
             be
             least
             the
             weight
             thereof
             should
             do
             hurt
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Yard
             might
             not
             grow
             too
             great
             .
             But
             if
             there
             were
             a
             little
             Fat
             ,
             it
             would
             add
             nothing
             to
             the
             weight
             ,
             nor
             would
             it
             enlarge
             the
             Yard
             over
             much
             .
             The
             truer
             Cause
             therefore
             is
             this
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             therefore
             no
             Fat
             ,
             that
             its
             sense
             might
             not
             be
             dulled
             ,
             and
             the
             pleasure
             of
             Copulation
             abated
             ,
             when
             the
             Fat
             should
             melt
             by
             rubbing
             the
             Yard
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             proper
             Substance
             is
             not
             boney
             as
             it
             is
             in
             a
             Dog
             ,
             a
             Wolf
             ,
             a
             Fox
             ,
             a
             Whale
             ,
             
             &c.
             but
             peculiar
             and
             proper
             to
             it self
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             no
             where
             to
             be
             found
             in
             any
             
             other
             Part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             Now
             there
             are
             four
             proper
             Parts
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             the
             Urethra
             or
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             the
             Nut
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             nervous
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             The
             URETHRA
             or
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             is
             a
             nervous
             
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             ,
             alwaies
             of
             the
             same
             size
             ,
             from
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             bladder
             (
             to
             which
             it
             is
             joyned
             ,
             but
             does
             not
             arise
             therefrom
             ,
             nor
             communicate
             therewith
             )
             like
             a
             long
             neck
             ,
             to
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Yard
             ;
             save
             where
             the
             Nut
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             nervous
             Bodies
             .
             For
             there
             indeed
             it
             hath
             a
             superficial
             Cavern
             or
             Hollowness
             ,
             in
             which
             an
             Ulcer
             and
             intollerable
             pain
             does
             somtimes
             happen
             ▪
             when
             some
             corro●i●e
             humor
             is
             th●●●
             collected
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             a
             Gonorrhaea
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             occasion
             .
             It
             is
             exceedingly
             widened
             in
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             .
             Alpinus
             saw
             it
             so
             wide
             in
             Aegypt
             ,
             that
             it
             would
             receive
             a
             large
             Hazel-nut
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             easily
             blown
             up
             ,
             to
             draw
             out
             the
             stone
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             are
             those
             Pores
             ,
             through
             which
             we
             said
             before
             the
             seed
             stills
             forth
             .
             There
             is
             also
             a
             
               little
               Membrane
            
             or
             Caruncle
             like
             a
             Valve
             stretched
             before
             it
             ,
             to
             keep
             the
             seed
             and
             urin
             from
             returning
             into
             the
             spermatick
             Vessels
             .
             It
             is
             eroded
             or
             fretted
             by
             sharp
             Humors
             ,
             or
             by
             use
             of
             the
             Catheter
             ,
             whence
             follows
             a
             perpetual
             Gonorrhaea
             .
             Riolanus
             observs
             that
             it
             is
             found
             in
             Boys
             ,
             till
             the
             twentieth
             year
             of
             their
             Age
             ,
             but
             I
             see
             no
             cause
             why
             it
             should
             not
             remain
             in
             their
             after
             Age
             ,
             when
             the
             encrease
             of
             seed
             ,
             makes
             it
             more
             necessary
             then
             formerly
             .
          
           
             The
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Yard
             do
             embrace
             and
             touch
             this
             Urethra
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             ●…d
             back
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             so
             reaches
             to
             the
             N●…
             the
             figure
             of
             an
             S.
             
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXIV
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               All
               the
               Parts
               of
               the
               Yard
               are
               represented
               in
               this
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     Surface
                     of
                     the
                     Urethra
                     being
                     dissected
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Urethra
                     which
                     makes
                     its
                     way
                     into
                     the
                     Nut.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Nut
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Nervous
                     Bodies
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Nervous
                     Body
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     blackish
                     Pith
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Body
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Nut
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                     made
                     ●are
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Nervous
                     Body
                     ,
                     all
                     the
                     spongy
                     Substance
                     being
                     taken
                     out
                     of
                     it
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Nerve
                     which
                     goes
                     into
                     the
                     said
                     Body
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Artery
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Body
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     transparent
                     Partition
                     ,
                     by
                  
                   Spigelius
                   
                     so
                     called
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     Veins
                     running
                     along
                     the
                     Back
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   Arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Nerves
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Nut
                     of
                     the
                     Yard
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               Shews
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Yard
               in
               their
               places
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Parts
                     about
                     the
                     Buttocks
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Region
                     of
                     the
                     Share
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Yard
                     with
                     its
                     Skin
                     ●●ead
                     off
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Nervous
                     Bodies
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Urethra
                     or
                     Piss-pipe
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     Muscles
                     which
                     widen
                     the
                     Piss-pipe
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     Muscles
                     which
                     raise
                     the
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     aa
                     .
                     Their
                     Beginning
                     cut
                     off
                     from
                     the
                     Hip-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Fundament
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Sphincter
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Fundament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     Muscles
                     which
                     draw
                     up
                     the
                     Arse-gut
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               60
            
          
           
             One
             Membrane
             is
             internal
             and
             thin
             ,
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             as
             those
             can
             witness
             who
             are
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             .
             With
             which
             also
             the
             Nut
             is
             covered
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             bred
             out
             of
             the
             thin
             Membrane
             ,
             which
             cloaths
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
             The
             other
             is
             external
             ,
             more
             fleshy
             and
             furnished
             with
             transverse
             Nerves
             .
             The
             middle
             part
             of
             its
             proper
             substance
             ,
             is
             loose
             ,
             spongy
             ,
             and
             black
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             distended
             together
             with
             the
             nervous
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Urethra●…mon
             passage
             for
             the
             Urin
             ,
             Seed
             ,
             and
             o●…
          
           
             The
             Nut
             or
             Head
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             is
             the
             
             outmost
             swelling
             part
             thereof
             ,
             roundish
             or
             pointed
             ,
             even
             and
             compassed
             with
             a
             Circle
             like
             a
             Crown
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Flesh
             more
             sensible
             and
             solid
             then
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             covered
             with
             an
             exceeding
             thin
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             soft
             and
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             for
             Titillations
             sake
             .
             In
             some
             Men
             it
             is
             more
             sharp
             ,
             in
             others
             more
             blunt
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             Coat
             or
             Covering
             called
             the
             Fore-skin
             ,
             or
             
               Praeputium
               a
               putando
            
             ,
             from
             cutting
             off
             ,
             for
             the
             Jews
             and
             Turks
             cut
             it
             off
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             nick-nam'd
             Apellae
             
             and
             Recutiti
             ,
             skinless
             or
             skin-cut
             .
             In
             which
             Nations
             t
             is
             wonderful
             what
             Vestingus
             told
             me
             himself
             saw
             ,
             viz.
             that
             in
             young
             Boys
             it
             grows
             out
             so
             long
             and
             pointed
             ,
             that
             it
             resembles
             a
             tayl
             .
             Hildanus
             observed
             it
             in
             a
             certain
             person
             very
             great
             and
             fleshy
             .
             At
             the
             lower
             end
             it
             is
             tied
             to
             the
             Nut
             by
             a
             Membrane
             or
             Band
             termed
             Fraenum
             the
             Bridle
             ,
             which
             is
             terminated
             in
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             Nut.
             Some
             will
             have
             it
             to
             be
             made
             up
             of
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
             
               Carolus
               Stephanus
            
             thinks
             it
             is
             composed
             of
             a
             Combination
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             and
             a
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             The
             
               two
               nervous
               Bodies
            
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             
             one
             ,
             do
             make
             up
             the
             remaining
             and
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Yard
             :
             the
             whole
             substance
             whereof
             is
             like
             a
             most
             thick
             spungy
             Artery
             ,
             stuffed
             with
             flesh
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             substance
             thereof
             is
             twofold
             ,
             the
             first
             external
             ,
             compact
             ,
             hard
             ,
             and
             nervous
             ;
             the
             other
             internal
             ,
             spungy
             ,
             thin
             ,
             and
             hollow
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             dark-red
             colour
             enclining
             to
             black
             ;
             and
             therefore
             Vesalius
             saies
             t
             is
             filled
             with
             a
             great
             deal
             of
             black
             Blood
             ,
             like
             a
             Pudding
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             substance
             is
             rare
             and
             pory
             ,
             
             that
             it
             may
             be
             filled
             with
             Spirit
             ,
             and
             Venal
             and
             Arterial
             Blood
             ;
             by
             which
             means
             the
             nervous
             substance
             thereof
             is
             the
             more
             stretched
             ,
             and
             the
             Spirits
             are
             not
             soon
             dissipated
             ,
             whence
             proceeds
             the
             hardness
             and
             stiffness
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             for
             Copulations
             sake
             ,
             as
             that
             the
             man
             might
             squirt
             his
             seed
             right
             out
             as
             far
             as
             might
             be
             ,
             even
             to
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             after
             the
             Yard
             hath
             been
             moved
             in
             the
             female
             Privity
             .
          
           
             These
             two
             Bodies
             have
             their
             Original
             from
             the
             lower
             parts
             of
             the
             Hip-bones
             ,
             as
             from
             a
             firm
             and
             stable
             Foundation
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             are
             strongly
             tied
             with
             two
             Ligaments
             ;
             where
             in
             their
             Rise
             they
             keep
             some
             distance
             ,
             that
             place
             may
             be
             allowed
             to
             the
             Urethra
             ;
             and
             then
             they
             are
             carried
             upwards
             ,
             and
             grow
             into
             one
             about
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Share-bone
             (
             like
             the
             two
             horns
             of
             the
             letter
             y
             )
             but
             so
             as
             they
             do
             not
             both
             remain
             perfect
             ,
             but
             they
             loose
             near
             a
             third
             part
             of
             their
             nervous
             substance
             .
             Howbeit
             they
             remain
             distinct
             ,
             by
             the
             coming
             between
             of
             some
             membranous
             partition
             (
             which
             consists
             not
             of
             a
             double
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             at
             the
             Rise
             of
             the
             Bodies
             ,
             but
             of
             one
             single
             one
             )
             very
             thin
             and
             transparent
             ,
             strengthned
             with
             nervous
             and
             strong
             transverse
             fibres
             ;
             which
             fibres
             are
             ranked
             and
             ordered
             like
             a
             Weavers
             Comb.
             
          
           
             All
             kind
             of
             Vessels
             enter
             into
             the
             Yard
             ,
             
               Nerves
               ,
               Veins
            
             ,
             and
             
               Arteries
               .
               1.
               
               External
            
             ones
             running
             in
             the
             Skin
             ,
             very
             frequent
             ,
             from
             the
             Pudenda
             ,
             and
             also
             internal
             ones
             spred
             through
             its
             Body
             .
             They
             are
             therefore
             mistaken
             ,
             that
             think
             the
             Yard
             is
             destitute
             of
             Veins
             .
             It
             s
             internal
             Arteries
             are
             two
             remarkable
             ones
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Hypogastrica
             ,
             which
             are
             inserted
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             growing
             together
             of
             the
             Bodies
             ,
             and
             are
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             But
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             where
             the
             Septum
             or
             partition
             is
             thinnest
             ,
             they
             send
             branches
             up
             and
             down
             ,
             through
             the
             spaces
             of
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             the
             right
             Artery
             into
             the
             left
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             left
             Artery
             into
             the
             right
             Body
             ,
             carrying
             Spirit
             and
             Blood
             ,
             to
             blow
             up
             ,
             erect
             ,
             and
             nourish
             the
             Yard
             .
             The
             Nerves
             also
             are
             disseminated
             from
             the
             Marrow
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             through
             the
             Yard
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             external
             and
             Skin-nerves
             ,
             as
             the
             internal
             ,
             and
             those
             remarkable
             ones
             ,
             which
             ascend
             through
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             forked
             division
             ,
             and
             are
             thence
             disseminated
             into
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             Nut
             ;
             that
             there
             might
             be
             an
             exquisite
             sense
             and
             delectation
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Yard
             hath
             two
             pare
             of
             Muscles
             .
             
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pare
            
             short
             and
             thick
             ,
             are
             the
             Yard
             Erectors
             ;
             this
             pare
             arises
             nervous
             ,
             under
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             from
             an
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Hip
             ,
             and
             growing
             fleshy
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             into
             which
             it
             is
             inserted
             ,
             not
             far
             from
             their
             Original
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             to
             raise
             and
             keep
             the
             Yard
             up
             in
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               Pare
               which
               widens
               the
               Urethra
            
             is
             longer
             ,
             but
             thinner
             or
             leaner
             .
             These
             two
             fleshy
             Muscles
             arise
             from
             the
             Sphincter
             of
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             following
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Yard
             :
             then
             they
             are
             carried
             beneath
             and
             inserted
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Urethra
             ,
             about
             the
             middle
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             widen
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             both
             in
             pissing
             ,
             and
             especially
             in
             Copulation
             ,
             when
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             Yard
             are
             full
             ,
             that
             the
             Egress
             of
             the
             Seed
             may
             not
             be
             hindred
             .
             And
             in
             these
             Muscles
             is
             the
             place
             where
             Surgeons
             do
             commonly
             take
             out
             stones
             .
             The
             Line
             of
             the
             Cod
             being
             drawn
             to
             one
             side
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             length
             ,
             and
             not
             according
             to
             their
             breadth
             as
             
               Marianus
               sanctus
            
             notes
             against
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             an
             hollow
             Catheter
             being
             thrust
             into
             the
             Ureter
             ,
             upon
             which
             ,
             the
             Incision
             is
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             which
             manner
             of
             cutting
             Aquapendent
             describes
             and
             approves
             of
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Yard
             is
             for
             Copulation
             :
             
             which
             a
             man
             cannot
             rightly
             perform
             without
             the
             Erection
             of
             his
             Yard
             ,
             and
             the
             squirting
             out
             of
             the
             Seed
             which
             follows
             thereupon
             .
             For
             the
             man
             squirts
             his
             Seed
             right
             out
             into
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             where
             being
             afterward
             joyned
             with
             the
             womans
             Seed
             ,
             an
             drawn
             in
             ,
             and
             retained
             by
             the
             Womb
             ,
             Conception
             is
             said
             
             to
             be
             made
             .
          
           
             A
             secondary
             Use
             thereof
             is
             to
             void
             urin
             ,
             yet
             was
             it
             not
             therefore
             made
             ,
             seeing
             women
             do
             make
             water
             without
             it
             .
             By
             reason
             of
             this
             twofold
             use
             of
             the
             yard
             ,
             the
             Arabians
             make
             two
             passages
             ,
             as
             Vesalius
             tells
             us
             ,
             who
             observed
             such
             a
             like
             Conformation
             in
             a
             certain
             person
             .
          
           
             In
             some
             the
             Nut
             of
             their
             Yard
             is
             not
             bored
             through
             in
             the
             sore
             part
             where
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             ,
             as
             Hofman
             hath
             noted
             out
             of
             Aristotle
             and
             Paulus
             ,
             who
             cannot
             make
             water
             if
             their
             Yard
             do
             not
             stand
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             sit
             .
             Others
             ,
             and
             that
             more
             frequently
             ,
             have
             it
             imperforated
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             .
             They
             are
             both
             unapt
             for
             Generation
             .
             Somtimes
             the
             Yard
             hath
             no
             passage
             at
             all
             as
             
               Julius
               Obsequens
            
             hath
             observed
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXV
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Parts
             serving
             for
             Generation
             in
             Women
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Spermatick
             Praeparatory
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             THe
             Parts
             serving
             for
             Generation
             in
             
             Women
             ,
             do
             some
             of
             them
             agree
             after
             a
             sort
             with
             those
             in
             Men
             ,
             as
             the
             spermatick
             Vessels
             ,
             the
             Stones
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Vasa
               deferentia
            
             ,
             or
             Vessels
             that
             carry
             away
             the
             Seed
             .
             Others
             are
             wholly
             different
             ,
             as
             the
             Womb
             with
             its
             Bottom
             ,
             Orifice
             ,
             and
             Neck
             ,
             the
             Hymen
             ,
             the
             M●●tle-shap'd
             Caruncles
             ,
             the
             Vulva
             with
             its
             Wings
             ,
             t●…itoris
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Hillocks
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXV
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Parts
               which
               in
               Women
               serve
               for
               Generation
               are
               represented
               in
               this
               TABLE
               ,
               in
               their
               Natural
               Order
               and
               Situation
               ;
               also
               the
               internal
               Structure
               of
               a
               Womans
               Dug
               ,
               is
               represented
               in
               the
               same
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Liver
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   Place
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Gall-bladder
                   with
                   the
                   Porus
                   bilarius
                   or
                   Gall-passage
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   A
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   Gut
                   Duodenum
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   Pancreas
                   or
                   Sweet-bread
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   Situation
                   ,
                   through
                   which
                   Vessels
                   go
                   into
                   the
                   Spleen
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Body
                   of
                   the
                   Spleen
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   descendent
                   Trunk
                   of
                   Vena
                   cava
                   with
                   its
                   Branchings
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   The
                   descendent
                   Trunk
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   Artery
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   variously
                   branched
                   beneath
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   Emulgent
                   Vessels
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   true
                   Kidneys
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   The
                   Auxiliary
                   or
                   Deputy
                   Kidneys
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   The
                   Ureters
                   going
                   down
                   to
                   the
                   Bladder
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   Bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Piss-bladder
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   Insertion
                   of
                   the
                   Uracbus
                   into
                   the
                   bottom
                   thereof
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   A
                   Portion
                   of
                   the
                   Arse-gut
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   Praeparatory
                   Vessels
                   from
                   both
                   sides
                   .
                
                 
                   Q.
                   The
                   Rise
                   of
                   the
                   Praeparatory
                   Vessels
                   from
                   the
                   Trunk
                   .
                
                 
                   R.
                   The
                   Place
                   where
                   the
                   Trunks
                   of
                   the
                   Cava
                   and
                   Aorta
                   do
                   branch
                   themselves
                   ,
                   where
                   an
                   Artery
                   goes
                   over
                   a
                   Vein
                   .
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   Portions
                   of
                   the
                   Navil-arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   T.
                   The
                   Bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Womb.
                   
                
                 
                   VV.
                   The
                   Womans
                   Stones
                   .
                
                 
                   XX.
                   Vessels
                   which
                   carry
                   the
                   Seed
                   from
                   their
                   Stones
                   to
                   the
                   Womb.
                   
                
                 
                   ZZ
                   .
                   The
                   Trumpets
                   of
                   the
                   Womb
                   ,
                   by
                   Fallopius
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   blind
                   Passage
                   of
                   the
                   Seed
                   .
                
                 
                   YY
                   .
                   The
                   two
                   upper
                   Ligaments
                   of
                   the
                   Womb
                   ,
                   resembling
                   the
                   Wings
                   of
                   Batts
                   or
                   Flitter-mice
                   .
                
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   The
                   two
                   lower
                   Ligaments
                   of
                   the
                   Womb
                   ,
                   round
                   ,
                   cut
                   off
                   from
                   the
                   Share
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   The
                   Hollow
                   of
                   the
                   Flank-bone
                   or
                   Os
                   Ilij
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   in
                   Women
                   larger
                   then
                   in
                   Men.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   The
                   Characters
                   of
                   the
                   Dug
                   explained
                   .
                
                 
                   ccc
                   .
                   Vessels
                   spred
                   over
                   the
                   Surface
                   of
                   the
                   Dug
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   The
                   greatest
                   and
                   middlemost
                   Kernel
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   Nipple
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               62
            
          
           
             For
             we
             must
             not
             think
             with
             
               Galen
               ,
               Archangelus
               ,
               Fallopius
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             that
             these
             Female
             Genital
             Members
             ,
             differ
             from
             those
             of
             Men
             only
             in
             Situation
             .
             Which
             Opinion
             was
             hatched
             by
             those
             who
             accounted
             a
             Woman
             to
             be
             only
             an
             imperfect
             Man
             ;
             and
             that
             her
             Genital
             Members
             could
             not
             be
             thrust
             out
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             coldness
             of
             her
             temper
             ;
             as
             in
             Men
             they
             are
             thrust
             out
             by
             vertue
             of
             their
             greater
             Heat
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             ,
             the
             generative
             Parts
             in
             Women
             differ
             from
             those
             in
             Men
             ,
             not
             only
             in
             Situation
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             universal
             Fabrick
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             Numbe●
             ▪
             Surface
             ,
             Magnitude
             ,
             Cavity
             ,
             Figure
             ,
             Office
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             sufficiently
             manifest
             to
             a
             skilful
             〈◊〉
             to
             any
             〈◊〉
             that
             will
             compare
             what
             follows
             to
             what
             went
             before
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             falsity
             of
             their
             Opinion
             is
             
             sufficiently
             apparent
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             the
             sundry
             Conjectures
             which
             they
             bring
             .
             For
             some
             liken
             the
             Womb
             to
             the
             Cod
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             and
             some
             to
             the
             Nut
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
             Some
             will
             have
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             to
             answer
             the
             Mans
             Yard
             ,
             and
             others
             will
             have
             the
             Clitoris
             .
             Which
             Conceits
             falling
             to
             the
             ground
             by
             their
             own
             weakness
             ,
             I
             shall
             proceed
             to
             explain
             the
             Parts
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Spermatick
               praeparatory
               Vessels
            
             
             in
             Women
             agree
             with
             those
             of
             Men
             ,
             
             in
             their
             Number
             ,
             Original
             ,
             and
             Office
             ,
             &c.
             
             I
             must
             now
             therefore
             only
             tell
             you
             wherein
             they
             differ
             .
          
           
             They
             differ
             first
             in
             Magnitude
             .
             These
             Vessels
             in
             women
             are
             shorter
             ,
             because
             
             of
             the
             short
             way
             they
             are
             to
             go
             ,
             but
             therefore
             they
             have
             many
             turnings
             and
             windings
             which
             make
             up
             the
             
               Corpus
               varicosum
            
             :
             to
             the
             end
             the
             seed
             may
             stay
             long
             enough
             to
             receive
             due
             preparation
             .
             In
             the
             next
             place
             they
             differ
             in
             their
             Implantation
             .
             For
             in
             women
             they
             are
             not
             totally
             carried
             to
             the
             stones
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             divided
             in
             the
             middle
             way
             :
             and
             the
             greater
             part
             goes
             to
             the
             stone
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             
               Corpus
               varicosum
            
             ,
             and
             the
             lesser
             part
             ends
             into
             the
             womb
             ,
             into
             whose
             sides
             it
             is
             disseminated
             ,
             especially
             to
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             bottom
             ,
             for
             to
             nourish
             the
             Womb
             and
             the
             Child
             therein
             ;
             and
             that
             by
             those
             Vessels
             some
             part
             of
             the
             menstrual
             blood
             may
             be
             purged
             forth
             in
             such
             as
             are
             not
             with
             Child
             .
             For
             the
             lesser
             branch
             being
             tripartite
             ,
             is
             below
             the
             stone
             divided
             into
             three
             branches
             ,
             one
             of
             which
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             ,
             runs
             out
             into
             the
             womb
             ,
             the
             other
             is
             distributed
             to
             the
             deferent
             Vessel
             or
             Trumper
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             round
             Ligament
             ;
             the
             third
             branch
             creeping
             along
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Womb
             through
             the
             common
             Membrane
             ,
             ends
             near
             the
             trueneck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             insinuating
             it self
             also
             among
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Veins
             ,
             with
             which
             and
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             they
             are
             joyned
             by
             Anastomoses
             .
             Of
             which
             see
             
               Zerbus
               ,
               Fallopius
               ,
               Platerus
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             who
             have
             shewn
             Riolanus
             and
             my self
             the
             way
             .
             That
             is
             a
             rare
             case
             ,
             which
             is
             figured
             out
             by
             Beslerus
             ,
             viz.
             for
             the
             spermatick
             Arteries
             to
             be
             joyned
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             with
             the
             Emulgent
             Artery
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             in
             women
             these
             Vessels
             go
             not
             out
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             nor
             reach
             to
             the
             Share-bone
             :
             because
             the
             Stones
             and
             Womb
             are
             seated
             within
             .
          
           
             These
             seminal
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             intertwined
             with
             many
             wonderful
             Anastomoses
             ,
             for
             the
             preparation
             of
             seed
             .
             Yea
             and
             the
             Veins
             do
             receive
             into
             themselves
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Arantius
             and
             Riolanus
             .
             Yet
             I
             remember
             the
             Arteries
             were
             wanting
             in
             a
             woman
             that
             had
             bore
             male
             Children
             ,
             and
             
               Franciscus
               Zanchez
            
             relates
             how
             they
             were
             turned
             into
             stone
             in
             a
             woman
             of
             Tolouse
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVI
            
             .
             Of
             Womens
             Stones
             .
          
           
             NOw
             the
             Stones
             of
             Women
             ,
             though
             
             as
             to
             their
             use
             ,
             they
             partly
             agree
             with
             those
             in
             Men
             ;
             yet
             in
             many
             things
             respecting
             their
             structure
             ,
             they
             differ
             from
             them
             .
             And
          
           
             
               1.
               in
               respect
               of
               their
               Situation
               ;
               which
               they
               have
               within
               in
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Belly
               ,
               two
               fingers
               breadth
               above
               the
               bottom
               ,
               in
               such
               as
               are
               not
               with
               Child
               ,
               and
               are
               knit
               by
               means
               of
               certain
               Ligaments
               above
               the
               same
               :
               viz.
               to
               the
               end
               they
               might
               be
               hotter
               ,
               and
               
               consequently
               more
               fruitful
               ;
               since
               they
               were
               to
               work
               a
               matter
               of
               which
               alone
               Mankind
               was
               to
               be
               generated
               ,
               the
               seed
               of
               the
               man
               being
               added
               not
               as
               a
               material
               ,
               but
               an
               efficient
               Cause
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               Magnitude
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               so
               great
               in
               women
               as
               in
               men
               ,
               unless
               very
               seldom
               .
               For
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               encrease
               of
               Heat
               ,
               they
               are
               contracted
               after
               a
               woman
               is
               past
               fourteen
               ,
               whereas
               they
               are
               before
               that
               time
               distended
               more
               largely
               being
               full
               of
               a
               white
               Juyce
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               In
               their
               external
               Surface
               which
               is
               more
               uneven
               ,
               then
               that
               of
               a
               mans
               stones
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               In
               Figure
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               so
               round
               ,
               but
               broad
               and
               flat
               on
               the
               fore
               and
               hinder-parts
               .
               Also
               the
               stones
               are
               within
               more
               hollow
               ,
               and
               more
               full
               of
               spermatick
               moisture
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               In
               Substance
               which
               some
               conceive
               to
               be
               harder
               then
               that
               of
               mens
               stones
               ,
               but
               others
               conceive
               ,
               and
               that
               more
               truly
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               softer
               ,
               and
               if
               you
               take
               off
               the
               Membrane
               ,
               you
               shall
               find
               them
               conglomerated
               or
               knobbed
               together
               of
               divers
               little
               Kernels
               and
               Bladders
               ,
               but
               seldom
               like
               those
               of
               men
               .
               In
               some
               great
               sea-fish
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               difference
               of
               the
               stones
               of
               the
               Males
               and
               Females
               ,
               in
               substance
               ,
               but
               only
               in
               the
               size
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               In
               Temperament
               ,
               which
               is
               commonly
               accounted
               more
               cold
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               seed
               contained
               in
               them
               ,
               is
               more
               moist
               ,
               thin
               ,
               and
               waterish
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               In
               Coats
               .
               For
               they
               are
               covered
               with
               one
               only
               Coat
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               otherwise
               in
               a
               close
               place
               .
               And
               that
               Coat
               sticks
               exceeding
               strongly
               to
               them
               ,
               and
               is
               by
               Galen
               termed
               Dartos
               .
               Howbeit
               ,
               where
               the
               stones
               receive
               the
               seminal
               Vessels
               ,
               they
               are
               covered
               half
               over
               with
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               In
               Connexion
               ;
               for
               they
               are
               knit
               unto
               the
               womb
               by
               two
               manifest
               passages
               ,
               or
               rather
               the
               one
               of
               them
               is
               an
               obscure
               one
               ,
               out
               of
               which
               during
               carnal
               Copulation
               ,
               there
               is
               shed
               ,
               not
               a
               wheyish
               substance
               ,
               but
               the
               womans
               seed
               .
            
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             to
             make
             seed
             which
             helps
             to
             generate
             after
             its
             way
             and
             manner
             :
             which
             Aristotle
             against
             all
             Reason
             and
             Experience
             ,
             was
             bold
             to
             deny
             to
             women
             ,
             in
             some
             places
             of
             his
             Writings
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             express
             Doctrine
             of
             
               Hippocrates
               de
               Genitura
            
             ,
             where
             he
             tells
             us
             that
             women
             also
             send
             forth
             seed
             out
             of
             their
             Bodies
             ,
             somtimes
             into
             their
             womb
             ,
             whereby
             it
             is
             moistned
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             without
             ,
             if
             the
             Orifice
             thereof
             do
             gape
             over
             much
             .
             Now
             that
             in
             the
             Womb
             it
             helps
             to
             the
             Generation
             ,
             he
             thereby
             demonstrates
             ,
             in
             that
             if
             after
             Copulation
             .
             The
             woman
             shal
             not
             conceive
             ,
             the
             seed
             which
             they
             have
             both
             of
             them
             voided
             ,
             does
             flow
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             But
             some
             other
             Anatomists
             deny
             that
             these
             stones
             do
             make
             seed
             .
             But
             they
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             meet
             Kernels
             ,
             to
             receive
             that
             moisture
             which
             needs
             abound
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Cremoninus
             ;
             or
             that
             they
             are
             only
             made
             for
             a
             mark
             and
             sign
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             Conceits
             of
             Rhodiginus
             ,
             and
             of
             Hofman
             since
             him
             ,
             who
             account
             them
             rather
             Carcasses
             of
             stones
             then
             true
             stones
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             small
             ,
             void
             of
             Juyce
             ,
             and
             uncompact
             .
             But
             as
             for
             what
             concerns
             Humidity
             we
             deny
             that
             Argument
             ,
             and
             say
             1.
             
             That
             there
             was
             no
             need
             of
             so
             much
             preparation
             to
             water
             the
             womb
             .
             One
             Vessel
             gently
             carrying
             a
             wheyish
             Humor
             ,
             might
             have
             served
             that
             turn
             ,
             yea
             the
             Pores
             alone
             might
             have
             sufficed
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             well
             known
             to
             happen
             in
             a
             clammy
             humor
             distilling
             into
             the
             Knee
             .
             2.
             
             They
             may
             answer
             both
             Intents
             ,
             viz.
             Generation
             and
             Irrigation
             .
             3.
             
             Experience
             tells
             us
             that
             seed
             and
             no
             other
             humor
             hath
             issued
             out
             of
             the
             stones
             of
             women
             being
             dissected
             .
             Guinterius
             was
             hindred
             in
             his
             Dissection
             ,
             by
             the
             plentiful
             eruption
             thereof
             .
             The
             nocturnal
             pollutions
             of
             women
             testifie
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             women
             became
             barren
             ,
             when
             in
             ancient
             times
             they
             were
             guelded
             or
             spayed
             ,
             Witness
             
               Athenaeus
               .
               Galen
            
             experimented
             the
             same
             in
             Sows
             .
             Varro
             writes
             that
             Cows
             being
             guelt
             ,
             do
             conceive
             if
             they
             go
             to
             Bull
             presently
             after
             .
             4.
             
             The
             said
             seed
             is
             found
             in
             the
             Dissections
             of
             women
             ,
             if
             they
             are
             lusty
             and
             free
             from
             D●●ases
             ▪
             In
             them
             and
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             ,
             Beslerus
             ha●…und
             the
             stones
             swelling
             with
             seed
             ,
             which
             
             he
             hath
             expressed
             by
             a
             neat
             Picture
             .
             5.
             
             That
             it
             is
             true
             seed
             ,
             we
             may
             gather
             from
             a
             real
             and
             sensible
             effect
             thereof
             ,
             like
             that
             of
             the
             seed
             of
             men
             ,
             as
             Moles
             ,
             and
             imperfect
             Eggs
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             difference
             of
             Sex
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Male
             adds
             Life
             and
             Perfection
             .
             6.
             
             Women
             have
             sufficient
             heat
             to
             make
             seed
             ,
             and
             sufficient
             instruments
             to
             that
             end
             ;
             yea
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             them
             are
             better
             provided
             then
             men
             .
             Their
             stones
             are
             indeed
             smal
             and
             little
             ,
             but
             not
             void
             of
             Juyce
             .
             Their
             number
             does
             recompence
             their
             smalness
             ,
             even
             as
             we
             somtimes
             see
             more
             Juyce
             prest
             out
             of
             a
             Bunch
             of
             Grapes
             ,
             then
             a
             solid
             and
             whole
             Apple
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Vessels
             that
             carry
             away
             the
             Seed
             ,
             especially
             the
             Trumpet
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             COncerning
             the
             Vessels
             which
             carry
             away
             the
             Female-seed
             ,
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Anatomists
             hath
             been
             hitherto
             somwhat
             intricate
             ,
             partly
             through
             varity
             of
             opinions
             ,
             and
             partly
             the
             obscurity
             of
             the
             matter
             it self
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             I
             shall
             endeavor
             to
             reduce
             ,
             and
             as
             much
             as
             may
             be
             to
             illustrate
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             
               deferent
               Vessels
            
             are
             taken
             either
             in
             a
             large
             or
             a
             strict
             signification
             .
             Strictly
             for
             those
             same
             obscure
             Passages
             and
             Vessels
             only
             ,
             which
             carry
             part
             of
             the
             seed
             bred
             in
             the
             stones
             ,
             into
             the
             womb
             .
             Largely
             and
             generally
             ,
             1.
             
             For
             the
             preparatory
             Vessels
             also
             ,
             2.
             
             For
             them
             and
             the
             Womb-trumpet
             ,
             which
             others
             refer
             to
             the
             servatory
             and
             jaculatory
             Vessel
             .
             I
             shall
             speak
             of
             both
             briefly
             and
             distinctly
             .
          
           
             The
             
               deferent
               Vessels
            
             are
             properly
             those
             small
             passages
             derived
             from
             the
             stones
             ,
             either
             to
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             short
             passage
             ,
             or
             disseminated
             at
             the
             trumpets
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             with
             sundry
             ,
             and
             those
             exceeding
             small
             Twigs
             ,
             resembling
             the
             
               Venae
               lacteae
            
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             spermatick
             preparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             continued
             with
             them
             ,
             however
             here
             they
             change
             their
             name
             and
             use
             ,
             because
             they
             immediately
             pass
             over
             ,
             and
             lick
             the
             stones
             .
          
           
             Galen
             conceives
             that
             the
             former
             is
             only
             inserted
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Cornua
             ,
             or
             the
             wombs
             horns
             ,
             and
             other
             Anatomists
             are
             of
             the
             same
             opinion
             ,
             who
             profess
             they
             could
             find
             no
             other
             Insertion
             .
             But
             
               Zerbus
               ,
               Fernelius
               ,
               Laurentius
            
             ,
             found
             another
             Branch
             herefrom
             ,
             which
             goes
             not
             into
             the
             bottom
             as
             the
             former
             ,
             but
             into
             the
             Neck
             ,
             so
             that
             one
             part
             of
             this
             deferent
             Vessel
             which
             is
             the
             shorter
             but
             larger
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Horn
             of
             the
             same
             side
             ,
             and
             there
             poures
             out
             such
             seed
             as
             it
             hath
             ,
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             womb
             :
             but
             the
             other
             part
             being
             the
             narrower
             and
             longer
             ,
             is
             carried
             along
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             below
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             Varolius
             hath
             also
             made
             mention
             of
             this
             Part
             ,
             and
             saies
             it
             is
             so
             small
             in
             such
             as
             have
             never
             conceived
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             found
             ,
             save
             by
             a
             skilful
             Anatomist
             ,
             but
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             it
             is
             very
             large
             .
             Spigelius
             ,
             because
             he
             could
             not
             somtimes
             find
             it
             ,
             did
             count
             it
             a
             sport
             of
             Nature
             .
             Vestingus
             does
             seem
             to
             allow
             of
             it
             ,
             seeing
             he
             brings
             seminal
             Matter
             from
             the
             stones
             ,
             to
             the
             bottom
             and
             sheath
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             this
             way
             .
             I
             should
             willingly
             assent
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Spigelius
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             seldom
             seen
             .
             Little
             Branches
             indeed
             are
             alwaies
             disseminated
             unto
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             but
             the●
             〈…〉
             directly
             from
             the
             preparatory
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             bring
             blood
             rather
             then
             seed
             ,
             of
             which
             see
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             especially
             
               Platerus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             and
             my
             Father
             Bartholinus
             beneath
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             these
             Vessels
             is
             ,
             partly
             to
             carry
             the
             seminal
             Matter
             to
             the
             Trumpets
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             there
             further
             accomplished
             ,
             and
             better
             wrought
             ,
             and
             reserved
             for
             further
             use
             ,
             and
             partly
             to
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             Where
             another
             Branch
             ends
             into
             the
             Neck
             ,
             the
             seminal
             Humidity
             is
             voided
             this
             way
             also
             ,
             causing
             greater
             delight
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             length
             of
             the
             way
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             
               deferent
               Vessel
            
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             keep
             the
             Seed
             before
             it
             be
             squirted
             out
             ,
             is
             the
             Trumpet
             of
             
               the
               Womb
            
             ,
             by
             Fallopius
             so
             called
             ,
             from
             the
             likeness
             it
             hath
             to
             a
             Trumpet
             of
             War
             ,
             which
             he
             thus
             describes
             .
             There
             arises
             a
             seminal
             Passage
             ,
             small
             and
             very
             strait
             ,
             nervous
             ,
             and
             white
             ,
             from
             the
             Horn
             of
             the
             womb
             it self
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             hath
             gone
             a
             little
             therefrom
             ,
             it
             grows
             broader
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             and
             crisps
             it self
             like
             the
             tendrel
             of
             a
             Vine
             ,
             till
             it
             comes
             towards
             the
             end
             .
             Then
             dismissing
             its
             wrinkled
             Crispations
             ,
             and
             becoming
             very
             broad
             ,
             it
             ends
             into
             a
             certain
             Extremity
             ,
             which
             seems
             membranous
             and
             fleshy
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             red
             Colour
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             becomes
             very
             torn
             and
             ragged
             ,
             like
             the
             jagged
             edges
             of
             worn
             clouts
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             large
             hole
             ,
             which
             lies
             alwaies
             shut
             ,
             those
             jagged
             ends
             alwaies
             falling
             in
             upon
             it
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             if
             they
             be
             diligently
             opened
             and
             widened
             ,
             they
             represent
             the
             broad
             end
             of
             a
             brazen
             Trumpet
             .
          
           
             I
             shall
             handle
             the
             Particulars
             more
             distinctly
             .
             The
             
               Trumpets
               arise
            
             from
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             by
             one
             end
             ,
             nor
             do
             they
             reach
             with
             their
             other
             end
             to
             the
             Stones
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             remarkable
             Part.
             And
             therefore
             they
             are
             not
             manifestly
             passable
             in
             this
             other
             Part
             ,
             but
             shut
             up
             and
             blind
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             are
             like
             the
             
               Intestinum
               caecum
            
             ,
             and
             are
             as
             it
             were
             an
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Womb.
             But
             this
             shutting
             up
             may
             be
             made
             according
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Fallopius
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             who
             was
             since
             him
             ,
             challenges
             for
             his
             own
             ,
             by
             the
             fringes
             and
             jagged
             ends
             of
             the
             Trumpets
             ,
             falling
             together
             ,
             like
             Raggs
             of
             Cloath
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             two
             in
             Number
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             so
             as
             to
             compass
             half
             the
             Stones
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             distant
             from
             the
             Stones
             ,
             on
             every
             side
             ,
             near
             half
             a
             fingers
             breadth
             ,
             unless
             the
             womb
             be
             diseased
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             are
             drawn
             up
             nearer
             to
             the
             Stones
             .
             They
             are
             ordinarily
             fastned
             only
             by
             very
             thin
             Membranes
             ,
             not
             unlike
             the
             wings
             of
             Bats
             or
             Flitter-mice
             ,
             through
             which
             many
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             disseminated
             ,
             carried
             from
             the
             Stones
             into
             these
             Passages
             ,
             and
             carrying
             Seed
             out
             of
             the
             Stones
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             is
             nervous
             ,
             white
             ,
             thick
             and
             hard
             .
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             is
             round
             and
             hollow
             .
             Somtimes
             their
             Cavity
             so
             praeternaturally
             widened
             ,
             as
             to
             contain
             a
             Mole
             ,
             which
             Marquardus
             relates
             in
             his
             
               Empirica
               Praxi
            
             ;
             somtimes
             a
             Child
             ,
             Examples
             whereof
             are
             recited
             by
             Riolanus
             .
             Nor
             could
             he
             see
             any
             other
             waies
             for
             the
             mans
             seed
             to
             enter
             ,
             save
             the
             turning
             and
             winding
             Passages
             of
             those
             Vessels
             .
             But
             in
             a
             living
             woman
             ,
             the
             mans
             seed
             full
             of
             spirits
             ,
             might
             easily
             be
             drawn
             thither
             ,
             by
             the
             widened
             waies
             of
             the
             womb
             misaffected
             ,
             which
             Passages
             being
             afterwards
             (
             Conception
             being
             made
             ,
             and
             the
             Trumpets
             distended
             )
             shut
             up
             ,
             were
             not
             seen
             by
             Dissectors
             .
             Or
             whether
             hath
             there
             not
             been
             a
             shapeless
             Mole
             ,
             or
             a
             Child
             without
             life
             been
             shaped
             ,
             without
             the
             seed
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             of
             the
             Mothers
             seed
             only
             contained
             in
             the
             Trumpets
             ;
             which
             having
             received
             no
             life
             from
             any
             Father
             ,
             and
             the
             passages
             being
             shut
             up
             ,
             it
             grew
             great
             ,
             and
             kil'd
             the
             Mother
             ?
          
           
             In
             the
             Natural
             Figure
             let
             us
             consider
             the
             Beginning
             ,
             Middle
             ,
             and
             End.
             The
             Insertion
             o●
             Beginning
             is
             at
             
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             large
             ,
             where
             it
             attains
             a
             nervous
             Pipe
             ,
             stretched
             out
             to
             the
             middle
             well-near
             of
             the
             Trumpet
             ,
             hollow
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             transmit
             the
             Seed
             to
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             The
             Middle
             being
             capacious
             ,
             shews
             certain
             little
             Cells
             ,
             containing
             white
             seed
             .
             The
             End
             is
             narrower
             ,
             though
             it
             carry
             some
             wideness
             with
             it
             .
             Howbeit
             before
             the
             End
             ,
             it
             is
             wreathed
             and
             crisped
             like
             the
             tendrel
             of
             a
             Vine
             ,
             as
             is
             visible
             in
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             .
          
           
             The
             Passage
             therefore
             of
             the
             Trumpets
             ,
             is
             not
             in
             all
             parts
             straight
             ,
             but
             winding
             ,
             because
             the
             way
             is
             short
             from
             the
             stones
             to
             the
             womb
             .
             But
             the
             pleasure
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             short
             ,
             when
             the
             seed
             is
             poured
             plentifully
             out
             of
             the
             stones
             into
             the
             horns
             of
             the
             womb
             in
             Copulation
             .
             And
             look
             what
             the
             Seed-bladders
             are
             in
             Men
             ,
             as
             to
             preserve
             the
             seed
             ,
             these
             blind
             passages
             may
             be
             the
             same
             in
             Women
             ,
             when
             they
             couple
             oftentimes
             ,
             and
             stil
             void
             seed
             .
             For
             they
             may
             be
             so
             termed
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             annexed
             to
             the
             stones
             by
             little
             Membranes
             ,
             that
             by
             Vessels
             brought
             to
             them
             from
             the
             stones
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             milkie
             and
             mesaraick
             Veins
             ,
             they
             may
             easily
             draw
             the
             seed
             by
             them
             concocted
             ,
             and
             lay
             it
             up
             within
             themselves
             for
             future
             occasion
             ,
             and
             send
             it
             forth
             when
             need
             requires
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             According
             to
             Fallopius
             to
             serve
             as
             Chimneys
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             sooty
             vapors
             of
             the
             womb
             may
             exhale
             .
             Which
             I
             for
             my
             part
             cannot
             believe
             .
             For
             the
             sooty
             Vapors
             are
             condensed
             ,
             and
             being
             resolved
             into
             water
             ,
             are
             reserved
             till
             the
             time
             of
             Child-birth
             ,
             or
             ascend
             by
             insensible
             Pores
             ,
             or
             breath
             out
             at
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             both
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             ,
             because
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             is
             never
             so
             close
             shut
             as
             to
             hinder
             ,
             as
             the
             Examples
             of
             Superfoetation
             testifie
             ,
             as
             in
             such
             as
             are
             not
             with
             Child
             .
             Nor
             can
             I
             wel
             tel
             how
             the
             sooty
             vapors
             should
             find
             way
             through
             these
             crooked
             Passages
             .
             2.
             
             According
             to
             the
             said
             Fallopius
             in
             his
             Observations
             ,
             they
             make
             seed
             ,
             because
             he
             alwaies
             found
             seed
             in
             them
             ,
             but
             never
             saw
             any
             in
             the
             stones
             ;
             to
             which
             I
             answered
             before
             .
             3.
             
             Their
             true
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             seed
             out
             of
             the
             stones
             ,
             by
             blind
             passages
             of
             the
             Vessels
             dispersed
             through
             the
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             is
             drawn
             to
             perfect
             the
             same
             by
             some
             tarriance
             in
             the
             Tendrels
             and
             Cells
             ,
             by
             the
             irradiation
             of
             the
             vertue
             of
             the
             stones
             ;
             that
             it
             may
             be
             more
             fit
             for
             a
             Child
             to
             be
             made
             of
             ;
             finally
             to
             carry
             it
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             Act
             of
             Copulation
             ,
             by
             those
             little
             Pipes
             implanted
             in
             the
             Horns
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             meet
             the
             mans
             seed
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             womb
             or
             its
             Neck
             ,
             to
             cause
             Conception
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXVIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Womb
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Womb
             is
             by
             the
             Latins
             termed
             Uterus
             ,
             from
             Uter
             a
             Bottle
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             hollowness
             ,
             in
             which
             Sense
             Tacitus
             does
             use
             
               Uterum
               Navis
            
             for
             the
             Keel
             of
             a
             Ship.
             Isidorus
             saies
             t
             is
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             t
             is
             on
             each
             side
             one
             :
             in
             a
             more
             large
             signification
             t
             is
             termed
             Venter
             in
             the
             Digests
             and
             Institutes
             .
             Also
             t
             is
             called
             
               Matrix
               ,
               Utriculus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Loci
               muliebres
            
             ,
             where
             consist
             the
             beginnings
             of
             Generation
             ,
             according
             to
             Varro
             .
             In
             other
             Animals
             ,
             according
             to
             Pliny
             ,
             t
             is
             termed
             Vulva
             ,
             especially
             in
             Sows
             ,
             which
             the
             ancient
             Romans
             did
             account
             a
             delicate
             Dish
             :
             Of
             which
             see
             Plutrach
             ,
             and
             Langius
             in
             his
             Epistles
             ,
             also
             
               Martial
               ,
               Horace
               ,
               Apitius
               ,
               Athenaeus
               ,
            
             and
             among
             late
             Writers
             
               Castellanus
               .
               Hofman
            
             conceives
             that
             Vulva
             is
             corrupted
             from
             Bulga
             ,
             and
             Bulga
             a
             Word
             used
             by
             Lucilius
             and
             Varro
             ,
             is
             originally
             French
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Festus
             ,
             who
             renders
             it
             a
             Bag.
             Nonius
             interprets
             it
             to
             be
             a
             Satchel
             or
             Knapsack
             hanging
             about
             a
             Mans
             Arm.
             See
             hereof
             Vossius
             .
             But
             the
             term
             Vulva
             is
             approved
             by
             Celsus
             ,
             and
             the
             Authors
             formerly
             commended
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             in
             the
             Hypogastrium
             ,
             or
             
             the
             lower
             Part
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             which
             is
             framed
             in
             the
             Cavity
             termed
             Pelvis
             ,
             by
             the
             Ossacrum
             and
             the
             Flank-bones
             .
             And
             therefore
             that
             Pelvis
             or
             Basin
             ,
             is
             larger
             in
             Women
             :
             and
             therefore
             they
             have
             Buttocks
             greater
             and
             wider
             .
             Now
             it
             was
             requisite
             that
             it
             should
             be
             so
             placed
             ,
             that
             the
             Womb
             might
             be
             distended
             according
             to
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Child
             might
             be
             conveniently
             excluded
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             the
             Womb
             is
             placed
             in
             the
             middle
             inclining
             to
             no
             side
             ,
             save
             somtimes
             when
             a
             Woman
             is
             of
             Child
             with
             a
             Boy
             or
             a
             Girl
             :
             for
             then
             the
             Child
             lies
             more
             to
             the
             right
             or
             left
             side
             ,
             though
             that
             be
             no
             certain
             Rule
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             lies
             between
             the
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             or
             Arsegut
             ,
             which
             is
             beneath
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             Bladder
             which
             lies
             upon
             it
             ,
             as
             between
             two
             Pillows
             .
             Why
             therefore
             should
             we
             be
             proud
             who
             are
             bred
             between
             Dung
             and
             Urin
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             is
             considered
             in
             length
             
             depth
             ,
             and
             thickness
             ,
             and
             all
             these
             vary
             in
             respect
             of
             Bodies
             ,
             Age
             ,
             and
             Venery
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Length
             in
             those
             of
             a
             middle
             stature
             ,
             who
             use
             Venery
             ,
             from
             the
             external
             Privity
             to
             the
             bottoms
             end
             ,
             is
             commonly
             eleven
             fingers
             ;
             the
             bottom
             is
             three
             fingers
             .
          
           
             The
             Breadth
             of
             the
             bottom
             ,
             is
             two
             or
             three
             fingers
             ,
             because
             in
             Women
             not
             with
             Child
             the
             latitude
             of
             the
             bottom
             and
             neck
             is
             one
             and
             the
             same
             .
             And
             hence
             the
             amplitude
             may
             easily
             be
             conjectured
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             Virgins
             ,
             which
             have
             not
             attained
             to
             ripeness
             of
             Age
             ,
             it
             is
             little
             and
             less
             then
             the
             Bladder
             :
             in
             such
             as
             are
             full
             of
             Age
             it
             is
             greater
             :
             yet
             if
             they
             abstain
             from
             Venery
             it
             is
             small
             enough
             ,
             though
             thick
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             also
             in
             very
             old
             Women
             .
             But
             it
             is
             greater
             in
             such
             as
             have
             oft
             conceived
             ,
             and
             bore
             Children
             :
             that
             a
             man
             may
             well
             near
             grasp
             it
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             unless
             when
             the
             Women
             are
             great
             with
             Child
             :
             for
             then
             it
             is
             more
             and
             more
             enlarged
             ,
             and
             whereas
             before
             Gravidation
             ,
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             did
             not
             pass
             beyond
             the
             beginning
             of
             Ossacrum
             ,
             it
             reaches
             afterward
             to
             the
             Navil
             and
             beyond
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             rests
             upon
             the
             thin
             Guts
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXVI
               .
               TABLE
               ▪
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               t●●
               Generative
               Parts
               of
               Wome●
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     side
                     deputy-Kidney
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     deputy-Kidney
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Kidney
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     side
                     emulgent
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     right
                     side
                     emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     cava
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     emulgent
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     left
                     emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     spermatick
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     spermatick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     spermatick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     spermatick
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Stones
                     in
                     Women
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     A
                     broad
                     Ligament
                     ,
                     like
                     the
                     wings
                     of
                     Bats
                     or
                     Flitter-mice
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Trumpets
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     round
                     Ligaments
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     cut
                     off
                     at
                     the
                     Share
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   VV.
                   
                     The
                     Hypogastrick
                     Veins
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   XX.
                   
                     The
                     Hypogastrick
                     Arteries
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     ,
                     carried
                     unto
                     the
                     Neck
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Y.
                   
                     The
                     Sheath
                     or
                     Scabberd
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   Z.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Intestinum
                     rectum
                     ,
                     or
                     Arse-gut
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     aa
                     .
                     The
                     Ureters
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     bb
                     .
                     The
                     Vasa
                     pampiniformia
                     ,
                     or
                     Vessels
                     crisped
                     like
                     the
                     Tendrels
                     of
                     a
                     Vine
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     cc.
                     A
                     Passage
                     or
                     deferent
                     Vessel
                     to
                     carry
                     from
                     the
                     Stones
                     to
                     the
                     Horns
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               66
            
          
           
             The
             Figure
             of
             the
             Womb
             is
             by
             some
             
             counted
             round
             ,
             by
             others
             Pear-fashion'd
             .
             But
             though
             the
             Womb
             encline
             to
             roundness
             that
             it
             may
             be
             of
             the
             greater
             capacity
             ;
             yet
             we
             conceive
             with
             Soranus
             and
             Fallopius
             ,
             that
             its
             bottom
             may
             best
             of
             all
             be
             resembled
             to
             a
             Gourd
             ;
             because
             it
             is
             by
             little
             and
             little
             straitned
             downwards
             .
             But
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             resembles
             an
             oblong
             and
             round
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             .
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             is
             either
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             or
             of
             the
             Bottom
             .
          
           
             The
             Neck
             is
             tied
             by
             its
             own
             substance
             ,
             and
             by
             membranes
             ;
             but
             the
             Bottom
             by
             peculiar
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             foreside
             the
             Neck
             grows
             to
             the
             Piss-bladder
             and
             the
             Share-bones
             ,
             by
             Membranes
             arising
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             In
             the
             hinder
             part
             to
             the
             Ossacrum
             ,
             and
             the
             
               rectum
               Intestinum
            
             ,
             with
             some
             Fatness
             .
             But
             about
             the
             Privity
             it
             grows
             together
             with
             the
             Fundament
             .
             On
             the
             sides
             ,
             it
             is
             loosely
             knit
             by
             certain
             Membranes
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             The
             Bottom
             is
             not
             fastned
             by
             its
             
             Substance
             ,
             but
             is
             free
             ,
             because
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             moved
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             said
             in
             its
             Action
             (
             w●●refore
             a
             Venetian
             woman
             died
             of
             pains
             in
             
             her
             womb
             ,
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             being
             tied
             by
             the
             Call
             )
             but
             in
             the
             sides
             it
             is
             knit
             by
             
               two
               pare
               of
               Ligaments
            
             ,
             whose
             use
             is
             to
             hold
             the
             womb
             suspended
             or
             dangling
             .
          
           
             
               One
               upper
               pare
            
             is
             broad
             and
             membranous
             ,
             and
             is
             held
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Muscles
             
             of
             the
             Loins
             ;
             and
             it
             ends
             into
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             near
             the
             horns
             .
             It
             is
             loose
             and
             soft
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             distended
             and
             contracted
             .
             Aretaeus
             likens
             it
             to
             the
             wings
             of
             Bats
             or
             Flitter-mice
             .
             And
             by
             help
             of
             this
             pare
             ,
             the
             bottom
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Flank
             .
             But
             because
             it
             is
             interwoven
             with
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             therefore
             Vesalius
             and
             Archangelus
             have
             ,
             perhaps
             not
             unjustly
             ,
             reckon'd
             them
             to
             be
             Muscles
             .
             Now
             they
             carry
             along
             the
             praeparatory
             and
             deferent
             Vessels
             ,
             even
             as
             they
             contain
             the
             Stones
             .
             Now
             this
             pare
             of
             Ligaments
             or
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             somtimes
             loosned
             
             by
             violence
             ,
             difficult
             Labor
             in
             Childbed
             ,
             weight
             of
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             &c.
             so
             that
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             fals
             into
             the
             Privity
             ,
             somtimes
             with
             the
             Neck
             inverted
             ;
             also
             somtimes
             it
             hangs
             out
             ,
             and
             is
             cut
             off
             ;
             in
             which
             case
             also
             it
             is
             necessary
             that
             there
             be
             a
             Solution
             of
             the
             Connexion
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             The
             
               other
               pare
            
             is
             lower
             ,
             being
             round
             like
             Earth-worms
             ,
             reddish
             like
             Muscles
             
             (
             whereupon
             some
             have
             conceived
             them
             to
             be
             Muscles
             ,
             that
             perform
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Cremasters
             in
             Men
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Womb
             is
             by
             them
             moved
             up
             and
             down
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             is
             established
             and
             strengthned
             ,
             in
             carrying
             Burthens
             ,
             expelling
             the
             Child
             ,
             Outcries
             ,
             and
             Labors
             ,
             in
             Deflux
             of
             Humors
             into
             this
             Part
             ,
             which
             Opinion
             Pinaeus
             embraces
             .
             Also
             it
             is
             hollow
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             end
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             at
             its
             beginning
             touching
             the
             deferent
             Vessels
             ,
             it
             ascends
             to
             the
             Groins
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             spermatick
             Vessels
             in
             men
             ,
             so
             these
             Ligaments
             in
             Women
             ,
             pass
             along
             through
             the
             productions
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             obliquely
             descendent
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             are
             obliterated
             into
             Fat
             ,
             or
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Bones
             near
             the
             Clitoris
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             are
             fastned
             ,
             and
             degenerated
             into
             a
             broad
             and
             nervous
             thinness
             .
             Where
             two
             other
             Muscles
             begin
             ,
             without
             the
             Belly
             ,
             being
             thin
             and
             broad
             ,
             cloathing
             the
             whole
             inner
             face
             of
             the
             Lips
             ;
             by
             help
             of
             which
             ,
             some
             women
             move
             the
             Lips.
             The
             remaining
             part
             of
             the
             foresaid
             Ligament
             ,
             runs
             to
             the
             Knee
             ,
             and
             afterward
             into
             a
             Membrane
             of
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             acquaints
             us
             ,
             that
             women
             with
             Child
             do
             in
             their
             first
             months
             complain
             of
             a
             pain
             in
             the
             inside
             of
             their
             Thighs
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             Part
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             As
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             to
             draw
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             upwards
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             fall
             down
             in
             relaxations
             ,
             in
             bearing
             of
             weights
             ,
             and
             in
             taking
             off
             pains
             ;
             which
             nevertheless
             be
             more
             rightly
             said
             of
             the
             pare
             .
             2.
             
             To
             hinder
             the
             ascent
             of
             the
             womb
             towards
             the
             upper
             parts
             ,
             which
             of
             it self
             cannot
             happen
             ,
             unless
             wi●hal
             the
             Privities
             which
             are
             continued
             therewith
             ,
             and
             the
             sheath
             be
             drawn
             upwards
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             womb
             relaxed
             ,
             and
             distended
             ,
             it
             often
             happens
             .
             3.
             
             Riolanus
             suspects
             that
             the
             excrementitious
             Humors
             of
             the
             womb
             are
             somtimes
             carried
             into
             the
             Kernels
             of
             the
             Groins
             ,
             by
             these
             Ligaments
             ,
             where
             also
             he
             hath
             found
             venereous
             B●bo's
             raised
             .
             Otherwise
             ,
             Hippocrates
             draws
             the
             Bubo's
             in
             the
             Groins
             of
             Women
             from
             their
             Courses
             ,
             which
             
               Aurelius
               Severinus
            
             refers
             to
             critical
             Abscesses
             ,
             and
             Arantius
             seeks
             out
             their
             Passages
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             turgent
             Humer
             is
             carried
             from
             the
             womb
             to
             the
             Groins
             .
             I
             put
             the
             Arteries
             in
             place
             of
             Veins
             ,
             whereby
             Excrements
             are
             both
             here
             and
             in
             other
             parts
             ,
             carried
             to
             the
             extremities
             or
             outmost
             places
             in
             the
             Body
             .
             4.
             
             Spigelius
             in
             a
             Woman
             kil'd
             with
             over
             much
             carnal
             Copulation
             ,
             observed
             these
             Ligaments
             near
             the
             Womb
             ,
             full
             of
             Seed
             .
             Which
             makes
             me
             suspect
             that
             these
             Ligaments
             ,
             having
             received
             a
             Seminal
             Moisture
             ,
             do
             moisten
             the
             neighbouring
             Parts
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             ,
             that
             all
             Parts
             may
             more
             easily
             be
             loosned
             and
             stretched
             in
             Virgins
             and
             barren
             Women
             ,
             they
             are
             meer
             Ligaments
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             Moisture
             defend
             the
             womb
             from
             the
             violence
             of
             burning
             Heat
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             womb
             is
             membranous
             ,
             
             that
             it
             may
             be
             dilated
             and
             contracted
             ,
             as
             need
             shall
             require
             ,
             furnished
             with
             many
             pleits
             and
             folds
             ,
             which
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             are
             stretched
             our
             ,
             to
             widen
             the
             womb
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             contracted
             when
             the
             Child
             is
             excluded
             ,
             and
             in
             aged
             women
             .
             Besides
             these
             pleits
             ,
             it
             hath
             in
             women
             with
             child
             Pipes
             and
             large
             Cavities
             ,
             or
             Cells
             exceeding
             manifest
             .
             Now
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             womb
             is
             made
             up
             of
             a
             common
             and
             proper
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             common
             is
             doubled
             ,
             and
             grows
             
             to
             the
             sides
             on
             each
             hand
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             being
             exceeding
             thick
             ,
             and
             most
             firm
             for
             strength
             ,
             smooth
             every
             where
             ,
             save
             where
             the
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             enter
             ,
             or
             the
             Ligaments
             go
             out
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             and
             internal
             is
             also
             double
             ;
             though
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             discern
             so
             much
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             close
             adhaesion
             ,
             save
             in
             Exulcerations
             .
             And
             be●ween
             both
             there
             were
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             found
             in
             the
             Stomach
             :
             which
             some
             call
             the
             proper
             Substance
             and
             Parenchyma
             of
             the
             womb
             (
             whereinto
             a
             spungie
             Body
             is
             here
             and
             there
             strewed
             )
             and
             the
             use
             thereof
             is
             to
             heat
             the
             womb
             .
             But
             these
             Membranes
             are
             not
             of
             the
             same
             thickness
             alwaies
             :
             as
             was
             said
             before
             ,
             when
             I
             spake
             of
             the
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             The
             Vessels
             of
             the
             womb
             are
             Veins
             ,
             Arteries
             ,
             
             and
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             accompanying
             one
             another
             ,
             are
             carried
             between
             the
             Coats
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             pour
             forth
             their
             Blood
             into
             those
             membranous
             Pipes
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             but
             are
             not
             carried
             into
             the
             inmost
             Cavity
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             And
             they
             are
             twofold
             :
             some
             arise
             from
             above
             ,
             others
             from
             beneath
             .
             For
             ,
             from
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             parts
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             from
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             the
             Blood
             ought
             to
             come
             ,
             both
             that
             in
             the
             monthly
             terms
             ,
             the
             whol
             Body
             may
             be
             purged
             ,
             and
             also
             that
             in
             the
             time
             of
             a
             womans
             going
             with
             child
             ,
             her
             Fruit
             might
             be
             nourished
             .
             Those
             which
             come
             
               from
               above
            
             ,
             do
             creep
             all
             the
             womb
             over
             ,
             but
             especially
             in
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             Branches
             derived
             from
             the
             Seminal
             Vessels
             ,
             before
             the
             praeparatory
             Vessels
             are
             constituted
             ,
             and
             also
             from
             the
             Haemorrhoidal
             Branch
             ,
             whence
             there
             is
             so
             great
             a
             Consent
             between
             the
             Womb
             and
             the
             Spleen
             .
             The
             left
             ends
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             joyned
             with
             the
             right
             ends
             :
             that
             
             the
             right
             part
             may
             also
             be
             augmented
             with
             plenty
             of
             Blood.
             The
             Menstrual
             blood
             is
             shed
             forth
             by
             the
             Arteries
             in
             Women
             not
             with
             Child
             :
             and
             therefore
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             if
             about
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Menstrual
             Flux
             ,
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             Arteries
             may
             be
             made
             greater
             ,
             then
             the
             blood
             is
             more
             vehemently
             forced
             into
             the
             womb
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             Menstrual
             Flux
             furthered
             .
             We
             see
             also
             when
             we
             have
             given
             Cordials
             appropriate
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             stirring
             the
             Spirituous
             part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             that
             then
             the
             Courses
             encline
             to
             flow
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             Menstrual
             blood
             in
             healthy
             women
             ,
             declares
             that
             it
             is
             Arterial
             blood
             .
             Now
             it
             r●ns
             back
             again
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             the
             Veins
             ▪
             ●…d
             to
             the
             Arteries
             ▪
             for
             all
             that
             Blood
             
             neither
             can
             ,
             nor
             must
             be
             voided
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             obstructed
             ,
             because
             the
             blood
             cannot
             freely
             pass
             upward
             out
             of
             the
             lesser
             Veins
             of
             the
             womb
             into
             the
             greater
             ,
             the
             Menstrual
             blood
             is
             collected
             in
             great
             quantity
             ,
             and
             makes
             great
             commotions
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             Those
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             which
             come
             
               from
               beneath
            
             and
             ascend
             ,
             do
             arise
             from
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Branches
             of
             the
             Cava
             and
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             creep
             through
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             bottom
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             every
             where
             joyned
             with
             the
             superior
             ones
             .
             For
             very
             broad
             Vessels
             are
             united
             through
             the
             bottom
             ,
             both
             without
             ,
             and
             
             in
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             Anastomoses
             do
             more
             appear
             in
             menstrual
             women
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             as
             are
             with
             Child
             .
             And
             they
             may
             be
             easily
             observed
             ,
             if
             in
             dead
             Bodies
             some
             of
             them
             be
             blown
             up
             .
             For
             they
             all
             swell
             by
             that
             blast
             into
             one
             .
             The
             Mouths
             of
             these
             Vessels
             or
             Pipes
             rather
             ,
             do
             enter
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             bottom
             ,
             and
             are
             called
             Acetabula
             or
             Cotylidones
             Cups
             or
             Saucers
             :
             which
             gape
             and
             are
             opened
             ,
             when
             the
             Menstrua
             are
             purged
             .
             And
             in
             Women
             with
             Child
             ,
             when
             the
             womb-liver
             is
             joyned
             to
             them
             (
             in
             Beasts
             the
             Verticilli
             or
             Tufts
             )
             drawing
             blood
             for
             the
             Child
             .
             And
             because
             Branches
             are
             carried
             into
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             from
             these
             Vessels
             ,
             by
             them
             women
             with
             Child
             that
             are
             Plethorick
             ,
             may
             void
             Menstrual
             blood
             in
             their
             first
             months
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             more
             blood
             then
             needs
             to
             nourish
             the
             Child
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             probable
             ,
             that
             that
             blood
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             :
             for
             the
             Child
             would
             be
             suffocated
             ,
             and
             through
             too
             great
             opening
             of
             the
             internal
             mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             Abortion
             might
             follow
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             observable
             ,
             that
             the
             Vessels
             
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             do
             in
             the
             time
             of
             a
             a
             womans
             going
             with
             Child
             so
             swell
             with
             blood
             ,
             especially
             about
             the
             time
             of
             Childbirth
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             as
             big
             as
             the
             Emulgent
             Veins
             ,
             or
             half
             as
             big
             as
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             or
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             very
             many
             in
             number
             ,
             are
             carried
             from
             the
             pares
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             sixt
             Conjugation
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             to
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             the
             parts
             about
             the
             Privities
             for
             pleasures
             sake
             :
             as
             also
             to
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Bottom
             .
             Whence
             there
             is
             a
             great
             Sympathy
             betwixt
             the
             Womb
             and
             the
             Brain
             .
             To
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Bottom
             few
             Nerves
             are
             carried
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             intertwisted
             like
             a
             Net.
             
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXVII
               .
               TABLE
               ▪
            
             
               The
               Womb
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               with
               the
               Stones
               ,
               and
               all
               kind
               of
               Vessels
               fastned
               thereunto
               ,
               and
               the
               Piss-bladder
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Piss-bladder
                     turned
                     upside
                     down
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Insertion
                     of
                     the
                     Ureters
                     into
                     the
                     Bladder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     or
                     Sheath
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     into
                     which
                     very
                     many
                     Vessels
                     are
                     disseminated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   EEEE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     low
                     and
                     round
                     Ligaments
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vas
                     caecum
                     .
                     or
                     trumpet
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     fastned
                     to
                     this
                     upper
                     and
                     broad
                     Ligament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     same
                     Vessel
                     on
                     the
                     opposite
                     side
                     ,
                     separate
                     from
                     the
                     broad
                     Ligament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     deferent
                     Vessels
                     of
                     both
                     sides
                     ,
                     ending
                     from
                     the
                     Stones
                     to
                     the
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     and
                     membranous
                     Ligament
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     resembled
                     to
                     the
                     wings
                     of
                     Batts
                     ,
                     through
                     which
                     very
                     many
                     Vessels
                     are
                     disseminated
                     ,
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     praeparatory
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     praeparatory
                     Vessels
                     of
                     one
                     side
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     not
                     freed
                     from
                     the
                     membranous
                     Ligament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     praeparatory
                     Vessels
                     of
                     the
                     other
                     side
                     ,
                     freed
                     from
                     the
                     membranous
                     Ligament
                     ,
                     that
                     their
                     Insertion
                     into
                     the
                     Stone
                     may
                     be
                     discerned
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Stones
                     of
                     which
                     the
                     right
                     is
                     covered
                     with
                     its
                     Membrane
                     and
                     the
                     left
                     quite
                     naked
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     Very
                     many
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     spred
                     abroad
                     into
                     the
                     Neck
                     and
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     serving
                     for
                     the
                     monthly
                     Purgation
                     and
                     the
                     Nourishment
                     of
                     the
                     Child
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     Nerves
                     spred
                     up
                     and
                     down
                     through
                     the
                     Body
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     represented
                     by
                     the
                     Graver
                     too
                     large
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     lowermore
                     round
                     Ligaments
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Region
                     wherein
                     the
                     inner
                     Mouth
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     is
                     placed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Stone
                     covered
                     with
                     its
                     Membrane
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     deferent
                     Vessels
                     reaching
                     from
                     the
                     Stones
                     to
                     the
                     Horns
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     and
                     membranous
                     Ligament
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     ,
                     fastning
                     the
                     deferent
                     Vessels
                     to
                     the
                     Stones
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Stone
                     separated
                     therefrom
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     glandulous
                     or
                     kernelly
                     Substance
                     of
                     the
                     Stone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     ,
                     commonly
                     called
                     the
                     Sheath
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     Passages
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     deferent
                     Vessel
                     ,
                     and
                     carried
                     into
                     the
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     womb
                     ,
                     into
                     which
                     they
                     say
                     Women
                     with
                     Child
                     do
                     squirt
                     their
                     Seed
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               69
            
          
           
             That
             Conception
             hath
             been
             made
             ,
             and
             a
             Child
             formed
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             some
             Examples
             testifie
             .
             Touching
             the
             Trumpet
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             I
             spake
             before
             ,
             from
             the
             Relation
             of
             Riolanus
             .
             
             That
             a
             Child
             was
             conceived
             in
             the
             Stomach
             of
             a
             young
             woman
             the
             Wife
             of
             an
             abominable
             Taylor
             ,
             and
             voided
             by
             her
             mouth
             the
             length
             of
             a
             mans
             finger
             ,
             but
             well
             shaped
             in
             all
             Parts
             external
             and
             internal
             .
             Salmuth
             informs
             us
             ,
             describing
             the
             Story
             from
             the
             Letters
             of
             Komelerius
             to
             
               Gothofredus
               Hofmannus
            
             ,
             nor
             does
             he
             doubt
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Story
             .
             That
             the
             same
             may
             be
             performed
             in
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             those
             Superfoetations
             ,
             seem
             to
             demonstrate
             ,
             which
             are
             voided
             in
             the
             first
             place
             to
             make
             more
             room
             for
             the
             larger
             Conception
             in
             the
             womb
             .
             But
             these
             are
             to
             be
             accounted
             very
             rare
             and
             praeternatural
             cases
             ,
             if
             true
             .
             But
             Superfoetation
             ,
             whether
             in
             the
             womb
             or
             without
             ,
             depends
             from
             the
             virtue
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             reaching
             all
             over
             the
             whole
             Body
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             womb
             is
             therefore
             necessary
             to
             preserve
             the
             Species
             or
             kind
             .
             Howbeit
             it
             contributes
             also
             to
             the
             health
             of
             the
             Individual
             ,
             as
             the
             emunctory
             or
             clenser
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             Howbeit
             very
             many
             women
             have
             lived
             very
             long
             ,
             and
             happily
             without
             it
             ,
             witness
             
               Abenzoar
               ,
               Aegineta
               ,
               Wierus
               ,
               Zacutus
               .
            
             When
             it
             hath
             fallen
             out
             putrified
             ,
             it
             hath
             been
             all
             in
             a
             manner
             cut
             off
             without
             danger
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observations
             of
             
               Rhases
               ,
               Carpus
               ,
               Mercurialis
               ,
               Langius
               ,
               a
               Vega
               ,
               Paraeus
               ,
               Baubinus
               ,
            
             and
             others
             .
             Fernelius
             tells
             us
             he
             saw
             a
             childing
             woman
             ,
             who
             voided
             with
             her
             Child
             her
             whole
             womb
             ,
             pluckt
             away
             by
             the
             roots
             ,
             without
             danger
             of
             life
             .
             Saxonius
             relates
             other
             Stories
             of
             like
             Nature
             .
             Saronus
             saies
             that
             Sows
             are
             made
             more
             corpulent
             in
             Galatia
             ,
             by
             cutting
             out
             their
             wombs
             .
             Pliny
             tells
             us
             that
             Sows
             were
             hung
             up
             by
             their
             sore
             Legs
             ,
             and
             had
             their
             stones
             and
             wombs
             cut
             out
             ,
             that
             so
             looseing
             the
             use
             of
             Venery
             ,
             they
             might
             become
             more
             fat
             and
             delectable
             to
             the
             Palate
             .
             Nor
             is
             it
             without
             reason
             ,
             because
             the
             womb
             is
             the
             Mother
             of
             many
             Diseases
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Obstruction
             of
             the
             narrow
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             the
             ready
             falling
             down
             of
             Humors
             ,
             which
             when
             the
             womb
             is
             away
             ,
             are
             more
             readily
             purged
             out
             by
             a
             larger
             passage
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             another
             action
             of
             the
             womb
             is
             said
             to
             be
             a
             certain
             Natural
             motion
             :
             
             whence
             Plate
             would
             have
             the
             womb
             to
             be
             a
             certain
             Animal
             or
             Live-wight
             ,
             and
             Aretius
             saies
             it
             is
             an
             Animal
             in
             an
             Animal
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             motion
             .
             For
             in
             carnal
             Copulation
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             is
             poffessed
             with
             a
             desire
             to
             conceive
             ,
             it
             is
             moved
             now
             up
             and
             then
             down
             ,
             and
             gapes
             to
             receive
             the
             Yard
             ,
             as
             a
             Beast
             gapes
             for
             its
             Food
             .
             And
             somtimes
             it
             is
             moved
             downwards
             ,
             to
             expel
             the
             Child
             and
             Secondine
             ,
             with
             so
             much
             violence
             ,
             that
             it
             falls
             out
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             it
             is
             moved
             with
             ,
             rejoyces
             in
             ,
             and
             is
             delighted
             with
             sweet
             smelling
             things
             :
             but
             it
             shuns
             stinking
             and
             strong
             smelling
             things
             ,
             as
             Castoreum
             ,
             Asafoetida
             ,
             &c.
             
             Hence
             Aristotle
             saies
             ,
             that
             women
             with
             child
             will
             miscarry
             at
             the
             smell
             of
             a
             Candle-●●uff
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             womb
             is
             sensible
             of
             C●…
             not
             under
             the
             formality
             of
             Odours
             ,
             but
             is
             only
             affected
             by
             the
             delicate
             and
             subtile
             vaporous
             matter
             conjoyned
             .
             Even
             as
             we
             see
             al
             the
             Spirits
             recreated
             ,
             by
             sweet
             smelling
             things
             ,
             not
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             smell
             precisely
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             vapor
             conjoyned
             therewith
             ,
             which
             is
             familiar
             and
             acceptable
             to
             the
             Spirit
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Genital
             parts
             of
             women
             are
             the
             sooner
             affected
             ,
             because
             they
             have
             an
             exceeding
             quick
             Sense
             .
             And
             because
             sweet
             smelling
             things
             have
             good
             and
             pleasing
             Vapors
             joyned
             with
             them
             ;
             and
             stinking
             things
             have
             filthy
             and
             ugly
             Vapors
             ;
             therefore
             by
             the
             latter
             ,
             the
             Spirits
             are
             made
             more
             impure
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             womb
             is
             full
             of
             Spirits
             ,
             therefore
             she
             is
             delighted
             with
             sweet
             and
             fragrant
             things
             ,
             and
             abominates
             such
             as
             are
             stinking
             .
          
           
             And
             nevertheless
             ,
             some
             women
             are
             
             found
             whose
             wombs
             are
             badly
             constituted
             ,
             who
             are
             put
             into
             Fits
             of
             the
             Mother
             by
             sweet
             smelling
             things
             ,
             and
             cured
             by
             such
             as
             stink
             :
             because
             Nature
             being
             provoked
             to
             Expulsion
             by
             the
             latter
             ,
             does
             with
             the
             stinking
             Vapors
             expel
             the
             morbifick
             Matter
             .
             But
             with
             the
             former
             filthy
             Vapors
             are
             stirred
             up
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             before
             lay
             hid
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             ascend
             to
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             Heart
             ,
             Brain
             ,
             &c.
             whence
             proceed
             strangling
             Fits
             of
             the
             Mother
             .
             Now
             these
             Vapors
             ascend
             partly
             by
             the
             sensible
             Pores
             ,
             and
             partly
             by
             the
             Veins
             running
             back
             ,
             and
             carrying
             the
             said
             Vapors
             with
             the
             uterine
             Blood
             :
             for
             I
             cannot
             allow
             of
             the
             power
             Helmont
             assigns
             to
             his
             ruling
             Parts
             ,
             without
             manifest
             and
             known
             Passages
             .
             Now
             the
             womb
             it self
             does
             not
             ascend
             ,
             nor
             is
             it
             moved
             out
             of
             its
             place
             ,
             unless
             being
             distended
             ,
             it
             takes
             up
             more
             room
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             roule
             up
             and
             down
             like
             a
             Bowl
             or
             Globe
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             as
             Hippocrates
             and
             Fernelius
             have
             imagined
             .
             Nor
             do
             the
             horns
             of
             the
             womb
             being
             swelled
             ,
             move
             any
             more
             then
             the
             womb
             it self
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             suspects
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             fastned
             by
             their
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             they
             cannot
             shed
             their
             Seed
             into
             the
             Belly
             ,
             the
             waies
             being
             stopped
             ,
             but
             Vapors
             have
             an
             ●asie
             motion
             ,
             which
             being
             dissipated
             ,
             the
             Swelling
             of
             the
             Belly
             presently
             falls
             .
          
           
             Besides
             its
             Sense
             of
             Smelling
             ,
             Tasting
             ,
             Feeling
             ,
             it
             is
             furnished
             according
             to
             Helment
             ,
             with
             a
             kind
             of
             brutish
             Understanding
             ,
             which
             makes
             it
             rage
             ,
             if
             all
             things
             go
             not
             according
             to
             its
             desire
             .
             But
             these
             things
             favor
             of
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Plato
             ,
             who
             improperly
             did
             compare
             the
             womb
             to
             a
             living
             Creature
             .
             Whence
             that
             fury
             proceeds
             ,
             I
             have
             already
             declared
             .
             As
             for
             what
             that
             same
             Novellist
             Helmont
             saies
             ,
             that
             it
             lives
             many
             times
             ,
             and
             keeps
             a
             coile
             after
             a
             woman
             is
             dead
             ,
             no
             man
             will
             easily
             believe
             it
             .
             For
             its
             life
             depends
             upon
             the
             life
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             ;
             and
             if
             it
             stir
             after
             death
             ,
             either
             that
             motion
             proceeds
             from
             winds
             ,
             or
             from
             a
             Child
             seeking
             its
             way
             out
             ,
             after
             the
             Mother
             is
             dead
             ,
             as
             sundry
             Examples
             demonstrate
             .
             
               Sphinx
               Theologico-Philosophica
            
             ,
             tells
             us
             that
             the
             Mother
             being
             dead
             ,
             a
             Child
             suddenly
             issued
             out
             of
             her
             womb
             ,
             and
             cried
             lustily
             .
             After
             which
             manner
             Laurentius
             describes
             the
             Birth
             of
             Scipio
             and
             
               Manilius
               .
               Eberus
            
             hath
             two
             Examples
             of
             a
             Child
             born
             after
             the
             Mothers
             death
             ,
             as
             also
             
               Johannes
               Matthaeus
            
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             cases
             are
             fresh
             in
             the
             memory
             of
             many
             here
             at
             Hafnia
             .
             But
             in
             opposition
             to
             
               Winchlerus
               ,
               Sperlingerus
            
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             deny
             it
             ,
             we
             must
             observe
             ,
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Child
             must
             necessarily
             be
             strong
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Mothers
             womb
             must
             be
             large
             .
             3.
             
             That
             the
             Mother
             being
             dead
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             must
             be
             widened
             ,
             and
             her
             Thighs
             spred
             ,
             or
             else
             the
             Child
             will
             be
             strangled
             before
             it
             can
             come
             forth
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               Chap.
               XXIX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             its
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             WEE
             have
             treated
             hitherto
             of
             
             the
             Womb
             in
             General
             ,
             and
             its
             similar
             Parts
             .
             The
             
               dissimilar
               Parts
            
             follow
             ,
             into
             which
             we
             have
             divided
             the
             same
             :
             viz.
             the
             Bottom
             ,
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             the
             Privity
             ,
             with
             the
             Parts
             annexed
             .
          
           
             The
             Fundus
             or
             Bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             is
             that
             part
             which
             reaches
             from
             the
             internal
             Orifice
             to
             the
             End
             upwards
             .
             We
             divide
             it
             into
             the
             lower
             and
             narrower
             part
             and
             the
             larger
             upper
             part
             ;
             to
             which
             we
             ad
             a
             third
             part
             viz.
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             The
             
               lower
               and
               narrow
            
             part
             ,
             is
             that
             between
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             
             the
             beginning
             ,
             largeness
             thereof
             ,
             and
             it
             may
             be
             called
             the
             short
             Neck
             ,
             to
             difference
             it
             from
             the
             true
             and
             long
             Neck
             .
             For
             before
             the
             wideness
             of
             the
             womb
             begins
             ,
             between
             it
             and
             the
             inner
             Mouth
             ,
             there
             interceeds
             another
             Neck
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             or
             narrower
             Channel
             ,
             then
             the
             largeness
             of
             the
             Bottom
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             observed
             both
             in
             Man
             and
             Beast
             .
             And
             Fallopius
             is
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             this
             part
             was
             called
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             by
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             as
             
               Galen
               ,
               Soranus
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Pinaeus
             reckons
             this
             part
             to
             be
             as
             long
             as
             a
             mans
             thumb
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             it
             to
             be
             five
             fingers
             breadth
             ,
             long
             in
             a
             Doe
             .
          
           
             The
             Cavity
             hereof
             is
             not
             large
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             will
             admit
             a
             Probe
             or
             large
             Quil
             .
             
             It
             is
             rough
             ,
             least
             the
             Seed
             which
             hath
             been
             drawn
             in
             ,
             should
             flow
             out
             again
             ,
             as
             happens
             in
             some
             barren
             women
             ,
             which
             have
             this
             part
             slippery
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             bad
             Humors
             .
             This
             roughness
             arises
             from
             wrinkles
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Pinaeus
             ,
             have
             their
             Roots
             situate
             beneath
             ,
             and
             their
             Edg
             tending
             inwards
             or
             upwards
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             easily
             admit
             ,
             hardly
             let
             go
             any
             thing
             .
          
           
             The
             large
             and
             
               upper
               Part
            
             is
             chiefly
             termed
             Fundus
             or
             the
             Bottom
             ,
             and
             this
             Part
             
             is
             properly
             called
             the
             Womb
             or
             Matrix
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             the
             principal
             Part
             for
             whose
             sake
             the
             rest
             were
             made
             ,
             being
             wider
             and
             larger
             then
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             seated
             above
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             or
             Share-bone
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             there
             dilated
             and
             widened
             .
          
           
             The
             womb
             hath
             in
             a
             woman
             only
             one
             Cavity
             ,
             not
             distinguished
             into
             any
             
             Cells
             ,
             as
             some
             falsly
             attribute
             therunto
             seven
             Cells
             .
             In
             Brutes
             it
             is
             commonly
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             and
             therefore
             those
             parts
             are
             called
             the
             two
             Horns
             of
             the
             womb
             :
             though
             the
             
             form
             of
             Horns
             is
             not
             conspicuous
             in
             all
             Brutes
             ,
             but
             in
             Cows
             ,
             Does
             ,
             Sheep
             ,
             Goats
             ,
             &c.
             
             Howbeit
             in
             imitation
             thereof
             ,
             Authors
             have
             attributed
             horns
             to
             the
             wombs
             of
             women
             ,
             because
             on
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             bottom
             thereof
             ,
             there
             is
             on
             each
             side
             some
             protuberancy
             ,
             where
             the
             deferent
             Vessels
             are
             inserted
             .
             But
             the
             womb
             of
             a
             woman
             is
             very
             seldom
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             in
             Beasts
             ,
             as
             it
             hath
             been
             observed
             in
             some
             by
             the
             Brother
             of
             
               Baubinus
               ,
               Sylvius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             and
             Obsequens
             before
             them
             .
             And
             I
             doubt
             whether
             their
             wombs
             be
             so
             divided
             ,
             who
             bear
             two
             or
             more
             Children
             at
             a
             Birth
             .
             The
             last
             year
             many
             women
             at
             Hafnia
             bore
             Twins
             contrary
             to
             their
             custom
             ,
             yea
             and
             some
             three
             Children
             at
             a
             Birth
             ,
             which
             they
             never
             did
             before
             nor
             since
             .
             We
             must
             not
             therefore
             account
             that
             to
             be
             proper
             to
             Families
             ,
             or
             attribute
             the
             same
             to
             the
             wombs
             being
             double
             ,
             which
             properly
             belongs
             to
             the
             Seed
             .
             Also
             that
             they
             are
             not
             conceived
             in
             a
             double
             womb
             ,
             the
             womb-cake
             testifies
             ,
             which
             alone
             is
             sufficient
             for
             many
             Children
             ,
             only
             it
             hath
             so
             many
             strings
             fastned
             to
             it
             in
             several
             places
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             Children
             ,
             as
             Besterus
             hath
             lately
             described
             it
             in
             a
             like
             History
             .
          
           
             Yet
             is
             it
             divided
             into
             the
             right
             and
             left
             part
             .
             In
             the
             former
             Boys
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ingendred
             :
             in
             the
             latter
             Girls
             .
             And
             it
             seldom
             happens
             otherwise
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Hippocrates
             and
             Galen
             .
             Hunters
             have
             this
             sign
             whereby
             they
             known
             whether
             the
             Beast
             they
             hunt
             have
             a
             male
             or
             female
             in
             her
             belly
             ,
             for
             if
             when
             she
             is
             struck
             dead
             ,
             she
             fall
             on
             her
             right
             side
             ,
             they
             conclude
             she
             is
             big
             of
             a
             Male
             ,
             because
             the
             burthen
             she
             goes
             with
             is
             most
             weighty
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ;
             if
             on
             the
             left
             she
             fall
             ,
             they
             judg
             it
             is
             a
             Female
             .
             T
             is
             reported
             that
             women
             with
             child
             of
             a
             Boy
             ,
             do
             lift
             their
             right
             foot
             higher
             then
             their
             left
             ,
             as
             they
             walk
             ,
             as
             Salmuth
             gives
             us
             to
             understand
             ,
             all
             which
             signs
             are
             nevertheless
             fallacious
             .
             Hippocrates
             and
             his
             followers
             do
             reckon
             other
             signs
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             proper
             for
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             The
             right
             and
             left
             side
             are
             differenced
             by
             a
             Line
             or
             Seam
             which
             sticks
             up
             obscurely
             ,
             which
             Aristotle
             termes
             the
             Median
             Line
             .
             The
             like
             Line
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             under
             the
             Navil
             ,
             dividing
             that
             Region
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             which
             they
             conceive
             to
             be
             then
             more
             visible
             ,
             when
             women
             bear
             twins
             .
             But
             in
             some
             women
             with
             child
             I
             have
             seen
             this
             Line
             manifest
             ,
             who
             bore
             afterwards
             only
             one
             Child
             .
          
           
             The
             outward
             Surface
             is
             smooth
             and
             even
             ,
             and
             covered
             as
             it
             were
             with
             a
             watry
             Humor
             .
             The
             inner
             part
             hath
             many
             Porosities
             ,
             which
             are
             Mouths
             ,
             through
             which
             in
             the
             time
             of
             a
             womans
             going
             with
             child
             ,
             blood
             easily
             passes
             out
             of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             womb
             to
             nourish
             the
             Infant
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             receive
             the
             Seed
             ,
             contain
             the
             Child
             ,
             nourish
             it
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             
               The
               Orifice
               or
               inner
               Mouth
               of
               the
               womb
            
             
             is
             oblong
             ,
             and
             transverse
             ,
             but
             very
             narrow
             (
             but
             when
             it
             gapes
             ,
             it
             is
             round
             and
             orbicular
             ,
             which
             is
             perhaps
             the
             cause
             why
             the
             German
             Midwives
             call
             it
             the
             Rose
             ,
             and
             the
             French
             Midwives
             ,
             the
             Crown
             of
             the
             Mother
             )
             like
             the
             Hole
             of
             the
             Nut
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             that
             no
             hurtful
             thing
             may
             enter
             in
             ,
             nor
             the
             Seed
             drawn
             thither
             ,
             easily
             pass
             out
             .
             If
             at
             any
             time
             it
             fall
             out
             of
             the
             Privity
             ,
             or
             be
             turned
             inside
             out
             ,
             it
             resembles
             exactly
             the
             Mouth
             of
             a
             Tench
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Situation
             thereof
             be
             changed
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             be
             not
             just
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             looking
             towardst
             he
             bottom
             ,
             t
             is
             conceived
             a
             Man
             cannot
             squirt
             his
             Seed
             thereinto
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Seed
             will
             sooner
             flow
             back
             ,
             then
             the
             woman
             conceive
             .
             If
             it
             be
             quite
             absent
             ,
             which
             seldom
             falls
             out
             ,
             an
             uncurable
             Barrenness
             
             is
             thereby
             caused
             .
             As
             also
             Barrenness
             is
             caused
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             otherwise
             affected
             ,
             viz.
             with
             Cancers
             ,
             scirrhous
             Tumors
             ,
             Obstructions
             ,
             Callosity
             ,
             over
             much
             Fatness
             :
             especially
             through
             over
             much
             Humectation
             and
             Relaxation
             ,
             either
             through
             over
             much
             Copulation
             as
             in
             Whores
             ,
             or
             through
             too
             great
             a
             Flux
             of
             Humors
             .
          
           
             In
             women
             with
             child
             a
             glewish
             clammy
             Matter
             grows
             to
             the
             Orifice
             ,
             and
             fills
             the
             short
             Neck
             well-near
             ;
             that
             these
             Parts
             being
             moistned
             ,
             may
             more
             easily
             be
             opened
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Travel
             .
          
           
             Within
             the
             Channel
             of
             this
             Mouth
             to
             the
             lower
             part
             thereof
             ,
             grows
             its
             little
             bunch
             ,
             which
             does
             more
             exactly
             shut
             ●…ole
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             
               Riolanus
               ▪
            
             
             He
             also
             informs
             us
             that
             about
             this
             little
             bunch
             ,
             there
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             Pores
             or
             little
             Holes
             ,
             which
             seem
             to
             be
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             deferent
             Vessels
             ,
             ending
             at
             the
             Neck
             .
             Columbus
             found
             those
             Vessels
             implanted
             like
             the
             teeth
             of
             a
             comb
             ,
             full
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             By
             this
             Orifice
             ,
             the
             womb
             draws
             the
             Seed
             into
             it
             ,
             which
             being
             conceived
             ,
             it
             is
             
             said
             to
             be
             shut
             so
             close
             ,
             that
             the
             point
             of
             a
             needle
             cannot
             enter
             .
             And
             therefore
             Physitians
             do
             vainly
             squirt
             Liquors
             thereinto
             with
             a
             Syringe
             ,
             and
             Whores
             endeavor
             in
             
             vain
             to
             draw
             out
             the
             Conception
             .
             But
             it
             is
             opened
             in
             Superfoetation
             ,
             in
             the
             Ejection
             of
             a
             bad
             Conception
             without
             hurt
             to
             the
             Child
             ,
             which
             somtimes
             happens
             in
             the
             Emission
             of
             Seed
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             especially
             opened
             after
             a
             wonderful
             manner
             at
             the
             time
             of
             Child-birth
             ,
             when
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             widened
             according
             to
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             wideness
             is
             in
             a
             manner
             equal
             from
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             womb
             to
             the
             Privity
             ,
             whereout
             the
             Child
             passes
             .
             And
             this
             saies
             Galen
             we
             may
             wonder
             at
             ,
             but
             we
             cannot
             understand
             .
             And
             he
             admonishes
             us
             upon
             this
             occasion
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             our
             duty
             to
             acknowledg
             the
             Wisedom
             and
             Power
             of
             him
             that
             made
             us
             .
             But
             this
             Orifice
             as
             well
             as
             the
             womb
             ,
             does
             chiefly
             consist
             of
             wrinkled
             Membranes
             ,
             which
             being
             smoothed
             out
             ,
             will
             admit
             of
             unimaginable
             Dilatation
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             greater
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             IN
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Womb
             we
             have
             
             observed
             three
             things
             ;
             the
             Bottom
             it self
             ,
             the
             
               lesser
               Neck
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Orifice
             .
             In
             the
             greater
             Neck
             also
             ,
             three
             things
             are
             to
             be
             noted
             .
             The
             Neck
             it self
             ,
             the
             Hymen
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Bladder
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Hymen
             we
             shall
             treat
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             The
             Neck
             or
             Channel
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             is
             by
             Aristotle
             also
             somtimes
             called
             Matrix
             ,
             and
             the
             Door
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             Fallopius
             calls
             it
             
               Sinus
               pudoris
            
             ,
             the
             Privity
             .
             It
             is
             a
             long
             Channel
             ,
             being
             hollow
             even
             when
             the
             Child
             is
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             admitting
             both
             a
             Probe
             and
             a
             mans
             finger
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             such
             as
             are
             new
             born
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             between
             the
             external
             and
             the
             internal
             Mouth
             ,
             receiving
             the
             Yard
             like
             a
             sheath
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
             The
             Neck
             is
             somwhat
             writhen
             and
             crooked
             ,
             also
             it
             is
             shorter
             and
             straiter
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             loose
             ,
             and
             fals
             together
             ;
             that
             the
             internal
             parts
             may
             not
             be
             refrigerated
             .
             But
             it
             is
             straight
             and
             widened
             1.
             
             In
             carnal
             Copulation
             .
             2.
             
             In
             the
             monthly
             Flux
             .
             3.
             
             In
             the
             time
             of
             Child-birth
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             exceedingly
             stretched
             according
             to
             the
             Shape
             of
             the
             Child
             ;
             whence
             also
             proceeds
             the
             exceeding
             great
             pains
             of
             women
             in
             travel
             :
             and
             then
             as
             also
             during
             their
             Courses
             ,
             women
             are
             very
             much
             cooled
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
             The
             length
             thereof
             is
             eight
             fingers
             breadth
             commonly
             ,
             or
             seven
             ;
             so
             as
             to
             be
             as
             long
             as
             a
             Mans
             longest
             finger
             .
             It
             is
             as
             wide
             as
             the
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             or
             Arse-gut
             .
             But
             the
             longitude
             and
             latitude
             of
             this
             part
             are
             so
             various
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             describe
             them
             .
             For
             in
             carnal
             Copulation
             ,
             it
             accommodates
             it self
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Yard
             ,
             and
             this
             Neck
             becomes
             longer
             or
             shorter
             ,
             broader
             ,
             or
             narrower
             ,
             and
             swells
             sundry
             waies
             according
             to
             the
             lust
             of
             the
             woman
             .
             And
             when
             that
             happens
             ,
             the
             Caruncles
             swell
             with
             Spirits
             which
             fill
             them
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             Cows
             and
             Bitche●…
             desire
             Copulation
             ;
             but
             the
             Channel
             is
             made
             narrower
             and
             less
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             Act
             of
             Generation
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             more
             close
             embrace
             the
             Yard
             :
             and
             therefore
             its
          
           
             Substance
             is
             of
             an
             hard
             and
             nervous
             flesh
             ,
             and
             somwhat
             spungy
             ,
             like
             the
             Yard
             ;
             that
             it
             may
             be
             widened
             and
             contracted
             within
             ,
             the
             upper
             part
             is
             wrinkled
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             not
             distended
             ,
             but
             
             being
             widened
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             slippery
             and
             smooth
             .
             Howbeit
             in
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             also
             when
             it
             is
             distended
             ,
             there
             are
             many
             orbicular
             wrinkles
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             channel
             near
             the
             Privity
             ,
             most
             of
             all
             in
             the
             fore
             part
             next
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             less
             towards
             the
             Intestinum
             rectum
             on
             which
             it
             rests
             ;
             and
             they
             serve
             for
             the
             greater
             Titillation
             caused
             by
             the
             rubbing
             of
             the
             Nut
             of
             the
             Yard
             against
             the
             said
             wrinkles
             .
             And
             in
             young
             Maids
             these
             wrinkles
             are
             straiter
             ,
             and
             the
             Neck
             narrower
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Menstrual
             blood
             is
             voided
             ;
             also
             in
             grown
             persons
             that
             are
             yet
             Virgins
             .
             But
             the
             wrinkles
             are
             worn
             out
             ,
             and
             the
             sides
             become
             callous
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             frequent
             rubbing
             ,
             1.
             
             In
             old
             women
             .
             2.
             
             In
             such
             as
             have
             used
             much
             Copulation
             ,
             or
             have
             frequently
             bore
             Children
             .
             3.
             
             In
             those
             that
             have
             been
             troubled
             with
             a
             long
             Flux
             of
             the
             Courses
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Whites
             .
             And
             in
             all
             these
             the
             substance
             does
             also
             become
             harder
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             becomes
             at
             last
             gristley
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             old
             women
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             have
             born
             many
             Children
             .
             But
             in
             young
             Maidens
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             soft
             and
             delicate
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Neck
             is
             to
             receive
             the
             Yard
             being
             raised
             ,
             and
             to
             draw
             out
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             Finally
             ,
             beyond
             the
             middle
             towards
             
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             in
             the
             fore
             and
             upper
             part
             ,
             not
             far
             from
             the
             Privity
             ,
             comes
             the
             
               Insertion
               of
               the
               Bladder
            
             into
             sight
             ,
             that
             the
             Urin
             may
             there
             be
             voided
             by
             the
             common
             Passage
             .
             It
             is
             as
             long
             as
             a
             knucle
             of
             ones
             finger
             ,
             without
             fleshy
             ,
             or
             rather
             covered
             with
             a
             fleshy
             Sphincter
             .
             Pinaeus
             observes
             that
             it
             is
             black
             within
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             substance
             with
             the
             Piss-pipe
             in
             Men
             ,
             as
             any
             man
             may
             see
             ,
             now
             Riolanus
             that
             told
             us
             so
             .
          
           
             Wierus
             hath
             noted
             in
             his
             Observations
             ,
             that
             the
             outer
             extremity
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             does
             not
             in
             all
             women
             appear
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             in
             many
             t
             is
             seen
             above
             the
             outer
             straits
             of
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             under
             the
             Nymph
             ;
             in
             some
             few
             it
             lies
             hid
             inwardly
             ,
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Privity
             .
             But
             the
             entrance
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             is
             sound
             on
             the
             back-side
             ,
             when
             the
             Membrane
             called
             Hymen
             is
             there
             :
             of
             which
             we
             are
             now
             to
             speak
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXXI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Membrane
             called
             Hymen
             .
          
           
             THe
             Hymen
             or
             Membrane
             called
             
             Eugion
             ,
             is
             by
             others
             called
             the
             closure
             of
             Virginity
             ,
             and
             the
             Flower
             of
             Virginity
             ,
             because
             where
             it
             is
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             sign
             of
             Virginity
             .
          
           
             Now
             
               whether
               or
               no
               there
               is
               any
               sign
               of
            
             
             Virginity
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             doubted
             .
             For
             all
             Men
             find
             that
             marry
             Virgins
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             somwhat
             that
             hinders
             their
             Yard
             from
             going
             in
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             thrust
             forward
             with
             great
             force
             and
             strength
             .
             Whence
             Terence
             saies
             the
             first
             Copulation
             of
             a
             Virgin
             is
             exceeding
             painful
             .
             And
             at
             that
             time
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             blood
             issue
             with
             great
             pain
             ,
             more
             or
             less
             ;
             which
             Blood
             is
             also
             called
             ●…er
             of
             Viro.
             
          
           
           
             For
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             widening
             of
             the
             
             strait
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             the
             tearring
             of
             the
             Hymen
             ,
             all
             Virgins
             have
             pain
             and
             a
             Flux
             of
             blood
             in
             their
             first
             Copulation
             .
             Younger
             Virgins
             have
             more
             pain
             and
             less
             Flux
             of
             blood
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             driness
             of
             the
             Hymen
             and
             the
             smallness
             of
             their
             Vessels
             ;
             but
             those
             that
             are
             older
             ,
             and
             have
             had
             their
             Courses
             ,
             have
             less
             pain
             and
             greater
             flux
             of
             blood
             ,
             for
             the
             contrary
             causes
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             her
             Courses
             flow
             ,
             or
             have
             flowed
             a
             little
             before
             :
             the
             Yard
             is
             easily
             
             admitted
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Relaxation
             of
             those
             Parts
             ,
             whence
             there
             is
             little
             or
             no
             pain
             ,
             and
             little
             or
             no
             flux
             of
             blood
             .
             And
             therefore
             Maids
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             married
             at
             that
             season
             ,
             least
             the
             Bridegroom
             come
             to
             suspect
             the
             Virginity
             of
             his
             Bride
             .
          
           
             Now
             what
             it
             is
             that
             hinders
             the
             Yard
             from
             entring
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             in
             
             what
             part
             the
             token
             of
             Virginity
             consists
             ,
             there
             are
             sundry
             Opinions
             and
             Differences
             .
          
           
             I.
             The
             Arabians
             say
             the
             Hymen
             is
             
             a
             piece
             formed
             of
             five
             Veins
             at
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             inserted
             on
             either
             side
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Mouths
             of
             the
             right-side
             Veins
             are
             joyned
             with
             those
             on
             the
             left
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             Fancies
             .
          
           
             II.
             Others
             (
             among
             whom
             are
             Fernelius
             and
             Ulmus
             )
             do
             say
             that
             the
             
             sides
             of
             the
             Neck
             grow
             together
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             separated
             and
             widened
             ,
             the
             Veins
             are
             broken
             which
             run
             in
             those
             Parts
             .
             But
             this
             is
             contrary
             to
             Experience
             ,
             which
             witnesses
             ,
             that
             in
             little
             Girls
             the
             Neck
             hath
             its
             Cavity
             ,
             nor
             do
             the
             sides
             thereof
             stick
             together
             .
          
           
             III.
             Others
             say
             it
             is
             a
             transverse
             Membrane
             .
             
          
           
             And
             herein
             they
             are
             right
             .
             But
             they
             are
             deceived
             ,
             who
             have
             feigned
             it
             to
             have
             Holes
             in
             it
             like
             a
             Seive
             ,
             and
             placed
             it
             in
             the
             lowest
             end
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
             through
             which
             they
             would
             have
             the
             Urin
             to
             be
             voided
             .
          
           
             IV.
             The
             newest
             Opinion
             of
             all
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             
               Severinus
               Pinaeus
            
             ,
             a
             most
             
             expert
             Surgeon
             of
             Paris
             ,
             who
             hath
             wrote
             an
             whole
             Book
             of
             the
             Notes
             of
             Virginity
             ,
             not
             unprofitable
             to
             be
             read
             .
             Now
             he
             accounts
             the
             four
             Myrtle-shap'd
             Caruncles
             to
             be
             the
             Hymen
             ,
             tied
             together
             by
             a
             small
             Membrane
             ,
             placed
             in
             the
             outer
             part
             of
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ;
             of
             which
             hereafter
             .
             And
             some
             learned
             men
             are
             at
             this
             day
             of
             his
             Opinion
             ,
             as
             Bauhinus
             for
             one
             .
             I
             could
             find
             no
             other
             in
             a
             young
             Girl
             ,
             lately
             dissected
             in
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             V.
             The
             more
             common
             Opinion
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Hymen
             is
             a
             transverse
             Membrane
             
             going
             athwart
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             a
             little
             above
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             which
             resists
             the
             first
             Entrance
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
             And
             many
             Experiments
             and
             Authorities
             stand
             up
             for
             this
             Opinion
             .
             And
             in
             the
             first
             place
             of
             four
             most
             renowned
             Anatomists
             ,
             of
             
               Padua
               ,
               Vesalius
               ,
               Fallopius
               ,
               Aquapendent
               ,
            
             and
             Casserius
             .
             And
             all
             Antiquity
             had
             some
             knowledg
             hereof
             .
             Hence
             the
             Author
             of
             that
             old
             Friers
             verse
             ,
             or
             riming
             verse
             .
          
           
             Est
             magnum
             crimen
             perrumpere
             virginis
             hymen
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             a
             huge
             sin
             to
             break
             the
             skin
             of
             a
             Virgins
             Gim.
             
          
           
             
               Archangelus
               ,
               Alexander
               Benedictus
            
             ,
             and
             Wierus
             assent
             hereunto
             .
             Carpus
             also
             knew
             as
             m●…ger
             seem
             to
             have
             been
             ignorant
             hereof
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Sect.
             of
             his
             175.
             
             Exercitation
             ,
             where
             he
             speaks
             of
             a
             Root
             that
             extreamly
             excites
             Lust
             .
             For
             he
             saies
             ;
             
               If
               any
               shall
               piss
               thereon
               ,
               they
               say
               he
               will
               presently
               be
               full
               of
               fleshy
               desires
               :
               Virgins
               that
               look
               to
               Cattle
               in
               the
               fields
               ,
               if
               they
               sit
               thereon
               or
               make
               water
               ,
               t
               is
               said
               the
               skin
               in
               their
               Privity
               will
               break
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               been
               defloured
               by
               a
               Man.
               Columbus
            
             and
             Sebizius
             did
             three
             times
             find
             it
             ,
             Baubinus
             twice
             ,
             as
             he
             averrs
             in
             his
             Book
             of
             the
             similar
             Parts
             ,
             and
             Wolfius
             seems
             in
             his
             Institutions
             to
             assent
             thereunto
             ,
             who
             witnesses
             that
             he
             found
             it
             at
             
               Padua
               .
               Adrianus
               Spigelius
            
             affirms
             that
             he
             found
             it
             in
             all
             the
             Virgins
             that
             ever
             he
             did
             cut
             up
             ,
             and
             I
             my self
             and
             Veslingus
             at
             the
             same
             time
             saw
             it
             at
             Padua
             .
             Nor
             is
             it
             necessary
             to
             bring
             all
             the
             Authorities
             which
             might
             be
             had
             in
             this
             subject
             to
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             And
             whereas
             Columbus
             and
             Paraeus
             
             deny
             that
             it
             is
             alwaies
             found
             ,
             and
             Laurentius
             saies
             he
             could
             never
             find
             it
             :
             the
             reason
             was
             that
             they
             wanted
             Bodies
             to
             dissect
             ,
             or
             were
             negligent
             in
             their
             work
             :
             or
             they
             might
             dissect
             supposed
             Virgins
             who
             had
             been
             defloured
             .
             Or
             if
             they
             dissected
             young
             Virgins
             ,
             they
             through
             wantonness
             do
             somtimes
             with
             their
             fingers
             break
             the
             said
             Skin
             or
             Membrane
             .
             But
             if
             they
             shall
             say
             they
             did
             cut
             up
             abortive
             Births
             ,
             Girls
             of
             two
             or
             three
             years
             old
             &c.
             
             I
             answer
             t
             is
             incredible
             that
             the
             Hymen
             should
             be
             wanting
             in
             such
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Authorities
             and
             Experiences
             of
             skilful
             Anatomists
             forecited
             ,
             are
             against
             it
             .
             Again
             ,
             if
             in
             some
             by
             them
             dissected
             ,
             it
             was
             wanting
             ;
             by
             the
             same
             right
             that
             they
             say
             this
             Membrane
             is
             praeternaturally
             present
             ,
             we
             shall
             say
             it
             was
             praeternaturally
             absent
             .
             For
             it
             is
             seldom
             absent
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             present
             .
             And
             others
             that
             are
             for
             Laurentius
             against
             us
             ,
             such
             as
             Capivaccius
             and
             Augenius
             ,
             are
             to
             be
             rejected
             as
             persons
             not
             skilled
             in
             Astronomie
             .
          
           
             VI.
             There
             is
             a
             midling
             Opinion
             
             of
             
               Melchior
               Sebizius
            
             ,
             viz.
             that
             all
             the
             signs
             of
             Virginity
             must
             be
             joyned
             together
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             present
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Hymen
             or
             Skin
             so
             called
             is
             absent
             ,
             we
             must
             rest
             in
             the
             straitness
             of
             the
             Neck
             and
             other
             marks
             ,
             which
             being
             widened
             in
             the
             first
             Copulation
             ,
             pain
             and
             effusion
             of
             blood
             follows
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Solution
             of
             Continuity
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             thus
             promised
             ,
             let
             us
             come
             to
             the
             Structure
             of
             this
             Hymen
             or
             thin
             Skin
             which
             goes
             cross
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             situate
             in
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             near
             the
             end
             thereof
             ,
             just
             behind
             the
             Insertion
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             or
             a
             little
             more
             inward
             .
             For
             the
             Situation
             does
             now
             and
             then
             vary
             ,
             though
             the
             difference
             is
             but
             little
             .
             And
             there
             this
             Membrane
             goes
             cross
             the
             Cavity
             ,
             like
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             it
             hath
             an
             hole
             like
             a
             ring
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             grown
             Maids
             ,
             it
             will
             admit
             the
             top
             of
             ones
             little
             finger
             ,
             through
             which
             hole
             the
             Courses
             flow
             .
          
           
             But
             Aquapendent
             hath
             many
             times
             found
             this
             hole
             in
             a
             threefold
             difference
             .
             
          
           
             I.
             As
             being
             Naturally
             constituted
             ,
             and
             just
             opposite
             to
             the
             external
             Privity
             .
          
           
             II.
             Higher
             ,
             and
             not
             just
             against
             the
             Privity
             .
          
           
             III.
             That
             in
             the
             middle
             was
             no
             round
             hole
             ,
             but
             a
             chink
             somwhat
             long
             .
             Sebezius
             likens
             it
             to
             the
             horned
             Moon
             a
             little
             full
             .
             For
             Nature
             sports
             her self
             in
             the
             variety
             of
             Shape
             .
          
           
             But
             seldom
             is
             the
             Hymen
             without
             any
             holes
             〈…〉
             then
             the
             Courses
             cannot
             come
             away
             ,
             whence
             f●…
             last
             Dis●…
             Death
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             ope●…
          
           
           
             Its
             Magnitude
             .
             On
             its
             sides
             ,
             where
             it
             grows
             to
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             t
             is
             thicker
             then
             in
             the
             middle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
             It
             is
             continued
             to
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             grew
             out
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             partly
             membranous
             ,
             partly
             fleshy
             ,
             nor
             yet
             very
             thick
             .
             And
             in
             some
             it
             is
             thinner
             and
             weaker
             then
             in
             others
             .
             As
             in
             the
             Prayan
             Virgins
             of
             Campania
             ,
             who
             are
             there
             all
             devirginated
             after
             twelve
             years
             of
             age
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             partly
             of
             their
             own
             Bodies
             breaking
             the
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             I
             was
             told
             by
             Relation
             of
             Friends
             there
             .
             In
             some
             it
             is
             more
             soild
             and
             thick
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             so
             strong
             ,
             that
             it
             must
             be
             cut
             open
             ,
             especially
             when
             the
             Bridegroom
             is
             lazie
             and
             impotent
             :
             for
             if
             he
             be
             a
             lusty
             Carle
             ,
             he
             is
             wont
             after
             some
             months
             labor
             ,
             to
             make
             his
             way
             through
             .
          
           
             This
             Membrane
             is
             furnished
             with
             many
             
               little
               Veins
            
             ,
             which
             being
             broken
             in
             the
             first
             Copulation
             ,
             pain
             and
             blood-shed
             arises
             .
             Finally
             ,
             it
             wears
             away
             at
             last
             ,
             either
             through
             Copulation
             ,
             or
             wanton
             rubbing
             ;
             even
             as
             in
             men
             the
             Fraenum
             or
             bridle
             of
             the
             Yard
             is
             somtimes
             torn
             .
          
           
             But
             there
             is
             a
             great
             and
             serious
             Question
             ,
             
               whether
               or
               no
               in
               the
               first
               carnal
               Act
               ,
               all
            
             
             
               Virgins
               must
               needs
               void
               Blood
            
             ,
             as
             a
             certain
             sign
             of
             their
             Virginity
             ?
          
           
             I
             answer
             ,
             that
             it
             happens
             so
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             and
             ought
             alwaies
             so
             to
             happen
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             22.
             of
             Deuteronomie
             ,
             at
             Marriages
             the
             bloody
             cloath
             was
             shewed
             to
             the
             Elders
             ,
             as
             a
             witness
             of
             the
             Virginity
             of
             the
             Bride
             .
             
               Leo
               Africanus
            
             saies
             the
             same
             custom
             was
             used
             in
             Mauritania
             ,
             and
             I
             was
             told
             by
             a
             Syrian
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             observed
             at
             this
             very
             day
             in
             
               Syria
               .
               Augenius
            
             indeed
             out
             of
             
               Rabbi
               Salomon
            
             and
             Lyranus
             ,
             do
             understand
             this
             Text
             Metaphorically
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             spreading
             of
             the
             Garment
             did
             signifie
             ,
             the
             words
             of
             witnesses
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Chastity
             of
             the
             Bride
             was
             diligently
             enquired
             into
             and
             declared
             .
             But
             the
             best
             Interpreters
             retain
             the
             Litteral
             Sense
             of
             the
             Words
             .
             Sebizius
             proves
             that
             it
             was
             to
             them
             a
             perpetual
             sign
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             Their
             Virgins
             were
             married
             very
             young
             .
             2.
             
             Every
             one
             was
             careful
             of
             himseif
             because
             of
             the
             Law
             of
             Jehova●
             .
             Others
             contrarywise
             conceive
             that
             it
             was
             a
             sign
             for
             the
             most
             part
             .
             Marius
             excepts
             when
             the
             Bridegroom
             is
             impotent
             ,
             and
             a
             Surgeon
             may
             easily
             judg
             in
             such
             a
             case
             .
             Sennertus
             saies
             in
             that
             Law
             the
             affirmative
             Inference
             is
             good
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             negative
             ;
             and
             that
             nothing
             else
             can
             be
             concluded
             ,
             but
             that
             where
             it
             is
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             sign
             of
             Virginity
             .
             Therefore
             it
             may
             be
             hindred
             ,
             and
             not
             appear
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               If
               Virgins
               break
               it
               through
               wantonness
               with
               their
               fingers
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               Instrument
               .
               Hence
               it
               is
               that
               some
               Nations
               ,
               sow
               up
               the
               Privities
               of
               Girls
               new
               born
               ,
               leaving
               a
               little
               way
               for
               the
               Urin
               to
               come
               forth
               ;
               nor
               do
               they
               open
               it
               till
               the
               time
               of
               Marriage
               :
               and
               then
               the
               Bridegroom
               causes
               it
               to
               be
               opened
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               be
               sure
               he
               hath
               a
               Virgin.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               If
               it
               be
               the
               time
               of
               her
               Courses
               ,
               or
               she
               have
               had
               them
               a
               little
               before
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               If
               the
               Chink
               in
               the
               Hymen
               be
               very
               long
               ,
               for
               then
               there
               happens
               only
               a
               Dilatation
               and
               no
               breaking
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               If
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               Womb
               be
               very
               wide
               ,
               and
               the
               Yard
               not
               sufficiently
               thick
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               If
               the
               Man
               thrust
               in
               his
               Yard
               cleverly
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               If
               the
               Virgin
               have
               had
               the
               falling
               down
               of
               the
               womb
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Hymen
               was
               broke
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               If
               the
               Virgin
               be
               in
               years
               before
               she
               is
               married
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               If
               by
               continual
               Deflux
               of
               sharp
               Humors
               ,
               the
               ●n
               be
               either
               moistued
               or
               fretted
               ,
               which
               frequen●…pens
               in
               sickly
               men
               ,
               through
               fault
               of
               their
               Con●…
               badness
               of
               the
               Climate
               〈…〉
               healthly
               Hebrew
               Virgins
               ,
               being
               in
               a
               good
               Climate
               ,
               and
               of
               a
               strong
               Constitution
               ,
               did
               easily
               by
               care
               avoid
               these
               Inconveniences
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Hymen
             is
             ,
             to
             defend
             the
             internal
             Parts
             from
             external
             Injury
             .
             2.
             
             To
             testifie
             a
             Maids
             Virginity
             .
          
           
             Now
             a
             Maid
             may
             conceive
             without
             
             hurting
             the
             token
             of
             her
             Virginity
             ,
             which
             
               Americus
               Vesputius
            
             relates
             to
             have
             been
             common
             in
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             Speronus
             and
             Peramatus
             prove
             the
             same
             .
             T
             is
             reported
             that
             at
             Paris
             a
             certain
             woman
             in
             this
             present
             Age
             wherein
             we
             live
             ,
             was
             got
             with
             Child
             ,
             without
             any
             Detriment
             to
             her
             Virginal
             Parts
             ,
             and
             a
             like
             History
             is
             related
             by
             Clementina
             .
             Which
             we
             may
             conceive
             to
             be
             done
             five
             manner
             of
             waies
             ,
             reckoned
             up
             by
             Plempius
             and
             Sinibaldus
             ,
             which
             for
             Honors
             sake
             ,
             I
             shall
             here
             omit
             .
             Nor
             does
             this
             any
             waies
             prejudice
             the
             Conception
             of
             our
             Savior
             ,
             which
             was
             performed
             without
             any
             of
             these
             waies
             ,
             without
             the
             Embracement
             of
             any
             Man
             ,
             and
             only
             by
             the
             overshadowing
             of
             the
             Holy
             Spirit
             ,
             of
             which
             it
             belongs
             to
             Divines
             to
             treat
             .
             If
             we
             believe
             Suidas
             ,
             the
             Membrance
             was
             by
             the
             Midwives
             found
             in
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             question'd
             ,
             whether
             she
             had
             lost
             her
             Virginity
             or
             no
             ;
             which
             I
             conceive
             to
             have
             been
             inconsistent
             with
             the
             Modesty
             of
             that
             blessed
             Virgin.
             The
             living
             
               Simon
               Magus
            
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             be
             reputed
             for
             a
             God
             ,
             boasted
             that
             he
             was
             born
             of
             his
             Mother
             Rachel
             ,
             she
             being
             a
             Virgin.
             St.
             Augustine
             conceits
             that
             in
             the
             State
             of
             Innocence
             ,
             the
             Seed
             of
             the
             Man
             might
             be
             conveighed
             into
             the
             Womb
             of
             the
             Woman
             ,
             her
             Virginity
             remaining
             uncorrupted
             ,
             even
             as
             now
             Menstrual
             blood
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             of
             a
             Virgin
             ,
             without
             any
             Detriment
             to
             her
             Virginity
             .
             Which
             Opinion
             Vives
             does
             explain
             and
             approve
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             Women
             can
             become
             fruitful
             without
             the
             Seed
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             is
             incredible
             .
             For
             Caranza
             judges
             that
             Story
             of
             
               Pomponius
               Mela
            
             ,
             of
             certain
             hairy
             women
             in
             an
             Island
             ,
             which
             are
             fruitful
             without
             any
             Copulation
             of
             Men
             ,
             to
             be
             a
             Fable
             .
             Touching
             Incuboe
             ,
             the
             Question
             is
             different
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             handled
             in
             another
             place
             .
             It
             was
             lately
             reported
             in
             France
             ,
             that
             
               Magdalena
               ●●
               A●vermont
            
             the
             Wife
             of
             
               Hieronymus
               Augustus
               de
               Montelione
            
             a
             French
             Knight
             ,
             did
             conceive
             a
             Son
             called
             Emmanuel
             ,
             only
             by
             imagination
             ,
             which
             
               de
               Lord
            
             a
             Professer
             at
             Monpelier
             ,
             made
             to
             be
             suspected
             ,
             and
             
               P.
               Sanchius
            
             in
             the
             same
             place
             did
             wish
             me
             not
             to
             believe
             it
             .
             Old
             Authors
             relate
             that
             Mares
             in
             Portugal
             ,
             do
             conceive
             by
             the
             wind
             ,
             
               Ludovicus
               Carrius
            
             does
             justifie
             their
             report
             .
             But
             Justinus
             the
             Epitomizer
             ,
             does
             more
             rightly
             explain
             their
             meaning
             to
             have
             been
             only
             to
             note
             the
             fruitfulness
             of
             those
             Mares
             ,
             and
             the
             speediness
             of
             their
             Conception
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Womans
             external
             Privity
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             WHere
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ends
             ,
             there
             begins
             the
             last
             and
             outmost
             part
             of
             the
             womb
             ,
             viz.
             The
             
               Womans
               Privity
            
             ,
             or
             the
             outward
             Orifice
             ,
             or
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             ;
             others
             call
             it
             
               Vulva
               quasi
               valva
            
             ,
             as
             if
             you
             would
             say
             a
             folding
             Door
             ,
             also
             
               Cunnus
               a
               cuneo
            
             from
             a
             wedg
             ,
             or
             from
             an
             Impression
             [
             
               whence
               in
               a
               Manuscript
               of
               English
               Receipts
               ,
               I
               have
               found
               it
               called
            
             the
             Print
             ]
             Plautus
             calls
             it
             Saltus
             ,
             a
             Wood
             or
             Grove
             ,
             or
             
             straight
             .
             Also
             by
             another
             Metaphor
             he
             calls
             it
             Concha
             the
             Shell-fish
             ,
             and
             Na●●●
             the
             Ship
             ;
             others
             commonly
             call
             it
             
               Natura
               muliebris
            
             ,
             the
             Womans
             Nature
             .
             Varre
             tells
             us
             the
             Romans
             called
             it
             Porca
             the
             Furrow
             or
             Parsley-bed
             ,
             the
             Sow
             .
             And
             what
             Experience
             of
             biting
             made
             ,
             Suidas
             and
             Eustathius
             call
             it
             cuneiron
             or
             cuona
             ,
             the
             Dog
             ,
             let
             those
             judg
             that
             can
             speak
             by
             Experience
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             only
             one
             in
             
               Number
               .
               Obsequens
            
             tells
             of
             a
             Woman
             that
             had
             two
             Privities
             ,
             and
             Licetus
             hath
             observed
             many
             such
             as
             Monsters
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             external
             ,
             in
             the
             former
             Region
             of
             the
             Share-bones
             ,
             where
             very
             
             many
             parts
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             without
             Dissection
             ,
             and
             some
             without
             drawing
             open
             the
             Lips
             ;
             as
             the
             Hairs
             of
             the
             Share
             ,
             the
             Lips
             ,
             and
             the
             Hillocks
             themselves
             ;
             the
             great
             external
             Chink
             ,
             the
             Wings
             ,
             the
             Tentigo
             ;
             but
             some
             parts
             cannot
             be
             seen
             without
             drawing
             the
             Lips
             aside
             ,
             as
             the
             
               fossa
               navicularis
            
             ,
             the
             two
             smaller
             Chinks
             by
             the
             Nymphs
             ,
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             Clitoris
             ,
             the
             Hole
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             with
             with
             a
             fleshy
             Valve
             ,
             the
             wrinkled
             Chink
             or
             immediate
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             with
             four
             Caruncles
             ,
             and
             as
             many
             Membranes
             :
             where
             afterwards
             the
             Channel
             begins
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             .
          
           
             The
             Hairs
             of
             the
             Share
             in
             such
             as
             are
             ripe
             ,
             break
             out
             about
             the
             Lips
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             close
             the
             Chink
             .
             And
             they
             are
             in
             Women
             more
             curled
             then
             in
             Maids
             ;
             of
             sundry
             colors
             ,
             being
             produced
             by
             Nature
             ,
             partly
             the
             shelter
             ,
             and
             partly
             to
             cover
             these
             parts
             ,
             which
             she
             judges
             ought
             in
             decency
             to
             be
             covered
             .
             But
             the
             Italian
             and
             Eastern
             Women
             out
             of
             a
             desire
             of
             cleanliness
             and
             neatness
             ,
             do
             by
             Art
             remove
             these
             Hairs
             as
             unprofitable
             .
          
           
             The
             Lips
             being
             drawn
             open
             ,
             there
             appears
             1.
             
             MAGNA
             FOSSA
             the
             large
             
             Trench
             or
             Ditch
             ,
             with
             the
             outer
             GREAT
             CHINK
             ,
             and
             we
             may
             call
             the
             foresaid
             Ditch
             
               Fossa
               navicularis
            
             the
             Boat
             trench
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             likeness
             to
             a
             little
             Boat
             or
             Ship.
             For
             it
             is
             backwards
             more
             deep
             and
             broad
             ,
             that
             the
             lower
             and
             after-end
             might
             degenerate
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Ditch
             or
             Trench
             .
             In
             this
             Ditch
             the
             Lips
             being
             opened
             ,
             two
             Holes
             appear
             ,
             but
             hardly
             visible
             ,
             save
             in
             live
             bodies
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             a
             good
             quantity
             of
             wheyish
             Humor
             Issues
             ,
             which
             moistens
             the
             Mans
             Share
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Copulation
             .
             The
             Orifice
             or
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             this
             Ditch
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             Ditch
             with
             the
             external
             Chink
             were
             to
             be
             large
             ,
             that
             the
             Child
             might
             in
             the
             external
             part
             come
             out
             more
             easily
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Skin
             cannot
             be
             so
             stretched
             ,
             as
             the
             membranous
             Substance
             within
             may
             be
             .
          
           
             Then
             we
             meet
             with
             two
             COLLATERAL
             CHINKS
             ,
             which
             are
             less
             :
             the
             right
             and
             the
             left
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             between
             the
             Lips
             and
             the
             Wings
             .
          
           
             Now
             in
             this
             large
             Ditch
             ,
             there
             are
             first
             of
             all
             to
             be
             seen
             certain
             Caruncles
             or
             little
             Parcels
             of
             flesh
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             are
             now
             to
             discourse
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Myrtle-shaped
             Caruncles
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Ditch
             or
             
             Trench
             aforesaid
             ,
             appear
             four
             CARUNCLES
             or
             little
             Particles
             of
             flesh
             ,
             presently
             after
             the
             Wings
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             so
             situate
             that
             each
             possesses
             a
             corner
             ,
             and
             oppose
             one
             another
             in
             manner
             of
             a
             quadrangle
             .
          
           
             One
             of
             them
             is
             before
             in
             the
             circumference
             of
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             urinary
             Passage
             ,
             to
             shut
             the
             same
             (
             it
             being
             greater
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             forked
             )
             least
             after
             the
             water
             is
             voided
             ,
             any
             external
             thing
             as
             Air
             ,
             &c.
             should
             enter
             into
             the
             Bladder
             .
          
           
             The
             secon
             opposite
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             is
             situate
             behind
             ,
             the
             two
             remaining
             ones
             are
             Collateral
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             resembles
             the
             Berries
             of
             Myrtle
             .
          
           
             Their
             Size
             varies
             ,
             for
             some
             have
             their
             shorter
             ,
             longer
             ,
             thicker
             ,
             and
             thinner
             then
             others
             .
             Howbeit
             they
             abide
             til
             extream
             old
             Age
             ,
             and
             wear
             not
             away
             so
             much
             as
             in
             those
             that
             have
             used
             frequent
             Copulation
             and
             frequent
             Child-bearing
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             some
             Membranes
             joyned
             to
             them
             ,
             which
             Pinaeus
             together
             with
             the
             Caruncles
             terms
             Valves
             :
             so
             that
             their
             substance
             is
             partly
             fleshy
             and
             partly
             membranous
             .
          
           
             The
             Hole
             in
             the
             middle
             between
             these
             Caruncles
             ,
             is
             of
             various
             size
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             age
             of
             the
             Party
             .
             Howbeit
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             ,
             that
             in
             Virgins
             it
             equals
             a
             third
             part
             of
             the
             great
             Chink
             .
          
           
             Also
             He
             conceives
             ,
             these
             Caruncles
             are
             made
             by
             the
             wrinkling
             of
             the
             fleshy
             sheath
             of
             the
             Privity
             ,
             that
             the
             external
             part
             being
             narrower
             then
             the
             sheath
             ,
             may
             in
             time
             of
             travel
             be
             widened
             as
             much
             as
             it
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             a
             Child-bed
             Woman
             ,
             after
             she
             was
             brought
             to
             bed
             ,
             he
             observed
             them
             for
             seven
             daies
             quite
             obliterated
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             distention
             of
             the
             Privity
             ,
             nor
             is
             there
             any
             appearance
             of
             them
             till
             the
             Privity
             be
             again
             straitned
             and
             reduced
             to
             its
             Natural
             form
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             I.
             to
             defend
             the
             internal
             parts
             ,
             while
             they
             immediately
             shut
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             that
             no
             Air
             ,
             Dust
             ,
             &c.
             may
             enter
             .
             To
             which
             end
             also
             the
             Nymphs
             and
             Lips
             of
             the
             Privity
             do
             serve
             .
          
           
             II.
             Fortitillation
             and
             pleasure
             ,
             while
             they
             are
             swolen
             ,
             and
             strongly
             strain
             ,
             and
             milk
             the
             Yard
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             especially
             in
             young
             Lasses
             .
          
           
             But
             Pinaeus
             will
             have
             their
             use
             to
             be
             far
             different
             .
             For
             he
             saies
             these
             Caruncles
             ,
             whose
             Extremities
             are
             fleshy
             Membranes
             ,
             are
             so
             bound
             together
             ,
             as
             to
             leave
             only
             a
             little
             hole
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             make
             the
             Hymen
             or
             true
             Mark
             of
             Virginity
             .
             Nor
             will
             he
             have
             it
             seated
             across
             or
             athwart
             ,
             but
             long-waies
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             whole
             Hymen
             should
             make
             an
             obtuse
             cone
             ,
             or
             a
             cone
             with
             the
             sharp
             end
             cut
             off
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXIV
            
             .
             Of
             the
             CLITORIS
             .
          
           
             FAllopius
             arrogates
             unto
             himself
             the
             Invention
             or
             first
             Observation
             of
             this
             Part.
             And
             Columbus
             gloriously
             ,
             as
             in
             other
             things
             he
             is
             wont
             ,
             attributes
             it
             to
             himself
             .
             Whereas
             nevertheless
             
               Avicenna
               ,
               Albucasis
               ,
               Ruffus
               ,
               Pollux
            
             and
             others
             ,
             have
             made
             mention
             hereof
             in
             their
             Writings
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXVIII
               ,
               TABLE
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               comprehends
               the
               Sheath
               of
               the
               Womb
               ,
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               ,
               and
               the
               external
               Female
               Privity
               ,
               both
               in
               Virgins
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               are
               defloured
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     dissected
                     cross-waies
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     the
                     Bottom
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Womb.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Mouth
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     in
                     a
                     woman
                     that
                     hath
                     bore
                     a
                     child
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     rugged
                     inside
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     cut
                     open
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     round
                     Ligaments
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Nymph
                     or
                     Clitoris
                     rather
                     in
                     its
                     proper
                     Situation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Hairs
                     of
                     the
                     Privities
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Insertion
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Bladder
                     near
                     the
                     Privity
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Privity
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     wings
                     of
                     the
                     Privity
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Neck
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     cut
                     off
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Body
                     of
                     the
                     Clitoris
                     sticking
                     up
                     under
                     the
                     Skin
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     outer
                     Lips
                     of
                     the
                     Privity
                     separated
                     one
                     from
                     another
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Alae
                     or
                     wings
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Nymphs
                     likewise
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Caruncle
                     placed
                     about
                     the
                     Urin-hole
                     (
                     a
                     )
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     fleshy
                     Myrtle-shap'd
                     Productions
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     Membranous
                     Expansions
                     which
                     contain
                     the
                     Chink
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               Presents
               the
               Privity
               of
               a
               Girl
               .
               
                 
                   
                     a.
                     The
                     Clitoris
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     bb
                     .
                     The
                     Lips
                     of
                     the
                     Privity
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     cc.
                     The
                     Wings
                     or
                     Nymphs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     d.
                     The
                     Orisice
                     of
                     the
                     Urethra
                     or
                     Piss-pipe
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ●
                     .
                     ff
                     .
                     h.
                     Four
                     Myrtle-shap'd
                     Caruncles
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     e.
                     The
                     upmost
                     Caruncle
                     which
                     is
                     divided
                     into
                     two
                     ,
                     and
                     shuts
                     the
                     Passage
                     of
                     the
                     Piss-pipe
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ●
                     .
                     The
                     Hole
                     of
                     the
                     Hymen
                     or
                  
                   Virginity-skin
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ●
                     .
                     The
                     lowest
                     Caruncle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ●
                     .
                     The
                     Fundament
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     k.
                     The
                     Perinaeum
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               Letter
               A.
               Shews
               the
               Membrane
               drawn
               cross
               the
               Privity
               ,
               which
               some
               have
               taken
               to
               be
               the
               Hymen
               or
               Virginal-skin
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VI.
               Shews
               the
               Clitoris
               separated
               from
               the
               Privity
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     top
                     of
                     the
                     Clitoris
                     resembling
                     the
                     Nut
                     of
                     a
                     Mans
                     Yard
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Fore-skin
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Thighs
                     of
                     the
                     Clitoris
                     cut
                     off
                     from
                     the
                     protuberancy
                     of
                     the
                     Hip
                     or
                     Huckle
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VII
               .
               The
               Clitoris
               cut
               asunder
               athwart
               ,
               its
               inward
               spungy
               Substance
               is
               apparent
               .
            
             
               page
               76
            
          
           
             Now
             the
             CLITORIS
             is
             a
             small
             Production
             .
             
          
           
             It
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Share
             ,
             in
             the
             upper
             and
             former
             end
             of
             the
             great
             Chink
             ,
             where
          
           
           
             Its
             Size
             is
             commonly
             small
             ;
             it
             lies
             hid
             for
             the
             most
             part
             under
             the
             Nymphs
             in
             its
             beginning
             ,
             and
             afterward
             it
             sticks
             out
             a
             little
             .
             For
             in
             Lasses
             that
             begin
             to
             be
             amorous
             ,
             the
             Clitoris
             does
             first
             discover
             it self
             .
             It
             is
             in
             several
             persons
             greater
             or
             lesser
             :
             in
             some
             it
             hangs
             out
             like
             a
             mans
             Yard
             ,
             namely
             when
             young
             Wenches
             do
             frequently
             and
             continually
             handle
             and
             rub
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             Examples
             restifie
             .
             But
             that
             it
             should
             grow
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Gooses
             neck
             ,
             as
             Platerus
             relates
             of
             one
             ,
             is
             altogether
             praeternatural
             and
             monstrous
             .
             Tulpius
             hath
             a
             like
             Story
             of
             one
             that
             had
             it
             as
             long
             as
             half
             a
             mans
             finger
             ,
             and
             as
             thick
             as
             a
             Boys
             Prick
             ,
             which
             made
             her
             willing
             to
             have
             to
             do
             with
             Women
             in
             a
             Carnal
             way
             .
             But
             the
             more
             this
             part
             encreases
             ,
             the
             more
             does
             it
             hinder
             a
             man
             in
             his
             business
             .
             For
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Copulation
             it
             swells
             like
             a
             mans
             Yard
             ,
             and
             being
             erected
             ,
             provokes
             to
             Lust
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             not
             boney
             (
             though
             it
             was
             so
             in
             a
             Venetian
             Courtezan
             ,
             who
             
             had
             it
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             the
             hardness
             whereof
             did
             inflame
             the
             Yards
             of
             the
             Lovers
             )
             but
             as
             that
             of
             a
             mans
             Yard
             ,
             it
             consists
             of
             two
             nervous
             Bodies
             hard
             and
             thick
             ,
             within
             porous
             and
             spungy
             (
             that
             this
             part
             might
             rise
             and
             fall
             )
             arising
             distinctly
             from
             the
             Hip-bones
             ,
             about
             the
             brims
             of
             the
             said
             Bones
             .
             But
             they
             are
             joyned
             together
             about
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             and
             make
             up
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
             Its
             Muscles
             are
             ,
             according
             to
             Pinaeus
             three
             ,
             according
             to
             Riolanus
             
             and
             Veslingus
             four
             ,
             like
             as
             in
             a
             mans
             Yard
             ,
             and
             serving
             to
             the
             same
             Intent
             .
             The
             two
             uppermost
             round
             ones
             ,
             rest
             upon
             longer
             Ligaments
             ,
             and
             proceed
             from
             one
             and
             the
             same
             place
             ;
             the
             two
             others
             being
             lower
             ,
             broad
             ,
             and
             fleshy
             ,
             proceed
             from
             the
             Sphincter
             of
             the
             Fundament
             .
          
           
             The
             outmost
             End
             or
             Head
             ,
             sticking
             out
             like
             the
             nut
             of
             a
             mans
             Yard
             (
             the
             rest
             lying
             hid
             )
             is
             called
             TENTIGO
             ,
             having
             an
             hole
             as
             a
             mans
             
             Yard
             ,
             but
             no
             thoroughfar
             .
          
           
             It
             seems
             to
             be
             covered
             with
             a
             Fore-skin
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             of
             a
             small
             Skin
             arising
             from
             the
             Conjunction
             of
             the
             Wings
             .
          
           
             Also
             it
             hath
             Vessels
             of
             all
             sorts
             brought
             unto
             it
             .
             
          
           
             
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
            
             common
             to
             it
             and
             the
             Privity
             ,
             a
             Nerve
             from
             the
             sixt
             Conjugation
             ,
             all
             more
             large
             then
             the
             Nature
             of
             its
             Body
             might
             seem
             to
             require
             ,
             to
             cause
             an
             exact
             Feeling
             and
             Erection
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             be
             the
             Seat
             of
             Delectation
             and
             Love.
             And
             it
             is
             like
             the
             Froenulum
             or
             Bridle
             
             on
             the
             Nut
             of
             a
             mans
             Yard
             .
             For
             by
             the
             rubbing
             thereof
             ,
             the
             Seed
             is
             brought
             away
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             Aquapendent
             conceives
             that
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Clitoris
             ,
             is
             to
             sustain
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             Bellonius
             and
             Iovius
             do
             conceive
             that
             this
             is
             the
             part
             wherein
             the
             Aethiopians
             were
             wont
             to
             circumcise
             women
             .
             Aetius
             and
             Aegineta
             do
             shew
             us
             how
             to
             cut
             it
             off
             ,
             confounding
             it
             with
             the
             Nymph
             .
             And
             even
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             the
             Eastern
             Nations
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             its
             bignes
             extraordinary
             ,
             do
             sear
             it
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             grow
             no
             more
             .
             And
             they
             hire
             ancient
             women
             to
             perform
             this
             Piece
             of
             Surgery
             ,
             which
             they
             improperly
             term
             Circumcision
             .
             And
             it
             is
             to
             those
             people
             as
             necessary
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             deformed
             greatness
             of
             the
             Clitoris
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             comely
             ;
             for
             at
             Alcair
             in
             Aegypt
             ,
             Wenches
             go
             naked
             after
             this
             Circumcision
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             married
             ,
             they
             wear
             a
             Smock
             only
             .
             Of
             which
             things
             is
             also
             this
             kind
             of
             Circumcision
             ,
             I
             have
             discoursed
             at
             large
             in
             my
             
               Puerperial
               Antiquities
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXV
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Wings
             and
             Lips.
             
          
           
             TWo
             red
             Productions
             offer
             themselves
             to
             our
             view
             between
             the
             Lips
             ,
             which
             they
             term
             pterugia
             and
             ALAS
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             Wings
             .
          
           
             Galen
             calls
             them
             NYMPHS
             ,
             either
             
             because
             they
             do
             first
             admit
             the
             bridegroom
             ,
             or
             because
             they
             have
             charge
             of
             the
             Waters
             and
             Humors
             issuing
             forth
             .
             For
             between
             them
             as
             it
             were
             two
             walls
             ,
             the
             urin
             is
             cast
             out
             to
             a
             good
             distance
             with
             an
             hissing
             noise
             ,
             without
             wetting
             the
             Lips
             of
             the
             Privity
             .
             Others
             call
             them
             the
             Curicular
             Caruncles
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             between
             the
             two
             Lips.
             
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             is
             not
             alwaies
             alike
             :
             for
             somtimes
             one
             Wing
             ,
             otherwhiles
             both
             ,
             seldomer
             in
             Virgins
             then
             in
             women
             ,
             do
             grow
             so
             big
             ,
             especially
             being
             frequently
             drawn
             by
             the
             fingers
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             by
             an
             Afflux
             of
             Humors
             ▪
             that
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             impediments
             thereby
             happening
             ,
             t
             is
             necessary
             to
             cut
             them
             .
             And
             Galen
             tells
             us
             that
             this
             Disease
             is
             frequent
             among
             the
             Aegyptians
             ;
             so
             that
             they
             are
             faln
             to
             cut
             them
             in
             Virgins
             that
             are
             to
             marry
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             women
             also
             ;
             and
             Aeetius
             and
             Aegineta
             do
             speak
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             ,
             which
             others
             will
             have
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             Clitoris
             .
             And
             they
             are
             in
             the
             right
             as
             I
             conceive
             ,
             because
             the
             Clitoris
             being
             over
             long
             ,
             may
             hinder
             the
             amorous
             Embracement
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             raised
             like
             the
             Yard
             ;
             but
             the
             Nymphs
             cannot
             be
             this
             way
             troublesom
             ,
             which
             are
             softer
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             do
             hang
             down
             very
             long
             ,
             yea
             in
             Whores
             that
             trade
             with
             these
             Parts
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             in
             Number
             two
             ;
             the
             right
             and
             the
             left
             ,
             now
             they
             are
             in
             the
             beginning
             commonly
             joyned
             together
             ,
             where
             they
             make
             a
             fleshy
             Production
             ,
             like
             a
             Fore-skin
             cloathing
             the
             Clitoris
             .
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             is
             triangular
             ,
             but
             one
             angle
             is
             blunter
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             viz.
             that
             which
             comes
             without
             the
             Lips.
             It
             is
             like
             a
             Cocks-comb
             :
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             haply
             by
             Juvenal
             termed
             Crista
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Coloi●
             is
             red
             like
             a
             Cocks-comb
             under
             his
             throat
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             thin
             Coat
             rather
             then
             Skin
             ,
             as
             the
             Lips
             and
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             partly
             membranous
             ,
             soft
             ,
             and
             spungy
             (
             bred
             peradventure
             of
             the
             doubling
             in
             of
             the
             Skin
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             great
             Chink
             )
             and
             partly
             fleshy
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Myrtle-shap'd
             Caruncles
             .
             And
             moreover
             that
             the
             Urin
             might
             be
             conveighed
             between
             them
             ,
             as
             between
             two
             wals
             .
             Some
             conceive
             they
             serve
             as
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             to
             suspend
             and
             straiten
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             in
             Virgins
             ,
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             external
             Chink
             ,
             which
             seems
             unlikely
             .
             The
             Lips
             perform
             that
             Office
             ,
             and
             the
             Nymphs
             should
             rather
             straiten
             such
             as
             are
             defloured
             ,
             in
             whom
             they
             are
             longer
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             LIPS
             ,
             between
             which
             the
             external
             Chink
             consists
             ,
             have
             certain
             
             risings
             adorned
             with
             hair
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             
               Monticuli
               Veneris
            
             ,
             the
             Hillocks
             of
             Venus
             .
             In
             women
             they
             are
             flatter
             then
             in
             maidens
             .
             This
             Part
             is
             that
             which
             is
             properly
             termed
             the
             Privity
             .
             These
             Hillocks
             are
             longish
             ,
             soft
             Bodies
             ,
             of
             such
             a
             Substance
             ,
             the
             like
             whereof
             is
             not
             to
             be
             found
             in
             the
             whole
             Body
             again
             ▪
             for
             it
             consists
             partly
             of
             Skin
             ,
             and
             partly
             of
             spungy
             Flesh
             ,
             under
             which
             is
             placed
             a
             parcel
             of
             hard
             Fat.
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             Juncture
             of
             the
             Lips
             ,
             is
             in
             Virgins
             right
             ,
             
             strait
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             a
             ligamentish
             Substance
             for
             firmness
             ;
             but
             in
             such
             as
             have
             lost
             their
             Maiden-head
             ,
             it
             is
             loose
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             as
             have
             had
             a
             Child
             ,
             yet
             looser
             ;
             as
             Riolanus
             hath
             found
             by
             Experience
             ,
             and
             any
             body
             else
             may
             find
             that
             covers
             the
             Glory
             of
             such
             Experiments
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             hath
             been
             hinted
             before
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXXVI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Membranes
             which
             infold
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             ALL
             the
             Parts
             serving
             for
             Generation
             ,
             both
             in
             Men
             and
             Women
             are
             explained
             .
             But
             because
             my
             design
             is
             to
             discourse
             of
             what
             ever
             comes
             under
             knife
             of
             an
             Anatomist
             ,
             I
             must
             also
             propound
             some
             things
             which
             are
             contained
             in
             the
             Womb
             of
             a
             woman
             with
             child
             ,
             such
             as
             are
          
           
             I.
             The
             Infant
             ,
             whose
             Structure
             differs
             
             only
             in
             some
             things
             ,
             from
             that
             of
             a
             grown
             person
             .
             Which
             I
             shall
             briefly
             recount
             ,
             as
             I
             did
             publickly
             ,
             not
             long
             since
             demonstrate
             the
             same
             ,
             at
             the
             Diffection
             of
             a
             Child
             .
             Now
             the
             parts
             of
             a
             large
             Child
             differ
             from
             those
             of
             a
             render
             Embryo
             ,
             and
             the
             parts
             of
             both
             these
             from
             those
             of
             a
             grown
             Man.
             1.
             
             In
             Magnitude
             ,
             either
             proportionate
             to
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             or
             less
             proportionate
             .
             2.
             
             In
             Colour
             ,
             some
             parts
             are
             more
             red
             ,
             some
             more
             pale
             then
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             .
             3.
             
             In
             Shape
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Kidneys
             and
             Head.
             4.
             
             In
             Cavity
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Navil
             and
             Heart
             .
             5.
             
             In
             Number
             ,
             either
             abounding
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             Breast
             ,
             and
             Sutures
             of
             the
             Skull
             ;
             or
             deficient
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Call
             ,
             some
             Bones
             ,
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             Wrist
             ,
             &c.
             6.
             
             In
             Hardness
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             said
             Bones
             .
             7.
             
             In
             Situation
             ,
             as
             the
             Teeth
             .
             8.
             
             In
             Use
             ,
             as
             the
             Navil-vessels
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Gut
             Caecum
             ,
             &c.
             9.
             
             In
             Motion
             ,
             as
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             &c.
             10.
             
             In
             Excrements
             .
             11.
             
             In
             Strength
             and
             Perfection
             of
             the
             Whole
             .
          
           
             
               The
               XXIX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               how
               the
               Parts
               of
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               differ
               from
               those
               of
               a
               grown
               Person
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Deputy-kidneys
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     true
                     Kidneys
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     distinguished
                     into
                     sundry
                     Kernels
                     ,
                     il
                     expressed
                     by
                     the
                     Graver
                     ,
                     in
                     respect
                     of
                     their
                     Situation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     magna
                     ,
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     branches
                     go
                     to
                     the
                     Deputies
                     and
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     cava
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     the
                     Emulgents
                     proceed
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     little
                     Veins
                     of
                     the
                     Deputies
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Posture
               of
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               which
               does
               nevertheless
               somtimes
               vary
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Head
                     of
                     the
                     Child
                     hanging
                     downwards
                     ,
                     so
                     as
                     its
                     Nose
                     is
                     bid
                     between
                     its
                     Knees
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Buttocks
                     to
                     which
                     the
                     Heels
                     are
                     applied
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Arms.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Cord
                     drawn
                     along
                     its
                     Neck
                     ,
                     and
                     turned
                     back
                     over
                     its
                     Fore-head
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     continued
                     with
                     the
                     Womb-cake
                     ,
                     expressed
                     in
                     the
                     next
                     Figure
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     Chorion
                     divided
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     Amnios
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     covering
                     the
                     Cord.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     hollow
                     and
                     inner
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     womb-cake
                     which
                     looks
                     towards
                     the
                     Child
                     ,
                     with
                     the
                     Twigs
                     of
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     twisted
                     Cord.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               Shews
               the
               outside
               of
               the
               Placenta
               ,
               which
               cleavs
               to
               the
               Womb
               ,
               though
               here
               separated
               ,
               with
               the
               Clifts
               and
               Chinks
               [
               EEEE
               ]
               which
               vary
               in
               Number
               and
               Depth
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               Shews
               the
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               young
               Child
               ,
               in
               very
               many
               things
               differing
               from
               that
               of
               a
               Person
               grown
               up
               ;
               as
               appears
               by
               the
               Text
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Deputy-kidneys
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     true
                     Kidneys
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     distinguished
                     into
                     sundry
                     Kernels
                     ,
                     il
                     expressed
                     by
                     the
                     Graver
                     ,
                     in
                     respect
                     of
                     their
                     Situation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     magna
                     ,
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     branches
                     go
                     to
                     the
                     Deputies
                     and
                     the
                     Kidneys
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     cava
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     the
                     Emulgents
                     proceed
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     little
                     Veins
                     of
                     the
                     Deputies
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Posture
               of
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               which
               does
               nevertheless
               somtimes
               vary
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Head
                     of
                     the
                     Child
                     hanging
                     downwards
                     ,
                     so
                     as
                     its
                     Nose
                     is
                     bid
                     between
                     its
                     Knees
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Buttocks
                     to
                     which
                     the
                     Heels
                     are
                     applied
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Arms.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Cord
                     drawn
                     along
                     its
                     Neck
                     ,
                     and
                     turned
                     back
                     over
                     its
                     Fore-head
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     continued
                     with
                     the
                     Womb-cake
                     ,
                     expressed
                     in
                     the
                     next
                     Figure
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     Chorion
                     divided
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     Amnios
                     ,
                     as
                     yet
                     covering
                     the
                     Cord.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     hollow
                     and
                     inner
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     womb-cake
                     which
                     looks
                     towards
                     the
                     Child
                     ,
                     with
                     the
                     Twigs
                     of
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     twisted
                     Cord.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               Shews
               the
               outside
               of
               the
               Placenta
               ,
               which
               cleavs
               to
               the
               Womb
               ,
               though
               here
               separated
               ,
               with
               the
               Clifts
               and
               Chinks
               [
               EEEE
               ]
               which
               vary
               in
               Number
               and
               Depth
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               Shews
               the
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               young
               Child
               ,
               in
               very
               many
               things
               differing
               from
               that
               of
               a
               Person
               grown
               up
               ;
               as
               appears
               by
               the
               Text
            
          
           
           
             These
             things
             will
             be
             more
             evident
             ,
             if
             we
             shall
             run
             over
             all
             the
             particles
             which
             are
             in
             a
             Child
             different
             from
             the
             parts
             of
             our
             Bodies
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               Umbilical
               or
               Navil-Vessels
               ,
               vulgarly
               called
               the
               
                 Navil
                 strings
              
               ,
               are
               three
               ,
               and
               hollow
               throughout
               to
               pass
               and
               repass
               the
               Mothers
               blood
               ,
               which
               in
               grown
               persons
               turn
               to
               Ligaments
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               There
               is
               little
               or
               no
               appearance
               of
               the
               Call
               ,
               because
               there
               is
               as
               yet
               no
               publick
               digestion
               of
               the
               Stomach
               or
               Guts
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               sufficiently
               cherished
               by
               the
               Members
               of
               the
               Child
               folded
               together
               and
               the
               hear
               of
               the
               Womb.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               stomach
               is
               smal
               ,
               no
               bigger
               then
               a
               Wall-nut
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               most
               part
               empty
               ,
               there
               being
               no
               publick
               Concoction
               ,
               or
               it
               is
               moistened
               with
               a
               clammy
               Humor
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 Caecum
                 intestinum
              
               is
               large
               ,
               somtimes
               thick
               ,
               other
               whiles
               long
               ,
               for
               the
               most
               part
               ful
               of
               Excrements
               ,
               of
               which
               I
               spake
               before
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               
                 thin
                 Guts
              
               appear
               contracted
               ,
               colored
               with
               yellow
               Excrements
               descending
               through
               the
               Gall-bladder
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               thick
               Guts
               especially
               the
               Rectum
               ,
               do
               contain
               thick
               black
               Excrements
               ,
               from
               the
               private
               digestion
               ,
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Guts
               ,
               Liver
               and
               Spleen
               or
               of
               the
               Spleen
               only
               ,
               voided
               hither
               by
               the
               Caeliaca
               ,
               or
               of
               the
               Liver
               alone
               ,
               purged
               out
               by
               the
               Choler-passage
               .
               They
               are
               black
               ,
               through
               their
               long
               stay
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               
                 true
                 Kidneys
              
               ,
               are
               compacted
               of
               very
               many
               Kernels
               .
               The
               deputy
               Kidneys
               are
               large
               and
               more
               hollow
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               The
               Liver
               with
               its
               〈◊〉
               fills
               both
               the
               Hypochondria
               .
               The
               Spleen
               is
               smal
               ,
               because
               there
               is
               yet
               no
               fermentation
               in
               the
               Stomach
               and
               Veins
               .
               The
               color
               of
               both
               ,
               is
               more
               bright
               and
               red
               ,
               then
               in
               a
               grown
               person
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               In
               the
               Dugs
               there
               are
               no
               kernels
               ,
               only
               a
               little
               sign
               of
               a
               Nipple
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               The
               Thymus
               growing
               to
               the
               Vessels
               ,
               is
               visible
               beyond
               the
               Heart
               with
               a
               threefold
               large
               kernel
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               The
               Ears
               of
               the
               Heart
               are
               large
               ,
               especially
               the
               right
               Ear
               ,
               and
               pale
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               The
               Unions
               of
               the
               Vessels
               in
               the
               Heart
               ,
               by
               Anastomosis
               and
               a
               little
               Channel
               ,
               are
               singular
               ,
               of
               which
               we
               shall
               speak
               in
               the
               following
               Book
               .
            
             
               13.
               
               The
               Lungs
               shine
               with
               a
               yellow
               redness
               ,
               which
               is
               afterwards
               allayed
               by
               their
               motion
               .
               Because
               they
               are
               at
               present
               immoveable
               ,
               because
               transpiration
               alone
               and
               the
               Ventilation
               of
               the
               Mothers
               Blood
               do
               suffice
               the
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               unless
               it
               happen
               to
               cry
               in
               the
               Womb.
               
            
             
               14.
               
               In
               the
               Head
               all
               things
               are
               large
               .
               The
               Eyes
               stick
               out
               ,
               the
               skull
               is
               exceeding
               big
               ,
               but
               divided
               into
               many
               parts
               ,
               the
               brain
               is
               soft
               and
               commonly
               overflows
               with
               moisture
               ;
               the
               Pericranium
               continued
               with
               the
               
                 Dura
                 mater
              
               ,
               passes
               through
               the
               Sutures
               .
            
             
               15.
               
               In
               the
               Skeleton
               ,
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               are
               soft
               in
               the
               first
               months
               ,
               afterwards
               some
               are
               hard
               ,
               according
               as
               they
               are
               of
               use
               ,
               as
               the
               Ribs
               ;
               some
               are
               gristly
               ,
               as
               the
               Brest-bone
               ,
               the
               Wrist-bone
               ,
               and
               the
               Tarsus
               or
               beginning
               of
               the
               Foot
               (
               all
               without
               any
               hard
               Apophyses
               or
               Epiphyses
               )
               which
               nevertheless
               in
               tract
               of
               time
               do
               grow
               to
               a
               bony
               hardness
               ,
               the
               middle
               parts
               growing
               hard
               first
               :
               and
               after
               their
               hardning
               some
               remaine
               one
               continued
               bone
               ,
               others
               are
               divided
               into
               many
               Particles
               .
            
             
               16.
               
               The
               Crown
               of
               the
               Head
               remains
               very
               long
               open
               ,
               covered
               only
               with
               a
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               by
               little
               and
               little
               with
               age
               grows
               close
               up
               .
               The
               Sagittal
               future
               reaches
               to
               the
               Nose
               .
               The
               greater
               Conjunctions
               of
               the
               bones
               are
               moveable
               ,
               placed
               one
               upon
               another
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               coming
               out
               of
               the
               Womb
               ,
               the
               skul
               being
               pressed
               ,
               may
               give
               way
               to
               the
               straitness
               of
               the
               passage
               .
               The
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               is
               divided
               into
               four
               parts
               .
               The
               Bones
               of
               the
               Nose
               and
               both
               the
               Jawes
               are
               divided
               ,
               a
               Gristle
               coming
               between
               .
               The
               Teeth
               lie
               hid
               in
               their
               sockets
               ,
               covered
               with
               the
               Gums
               .
               The
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
               ,
               have
               no
               sharp
               productions
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               not
               hurt
               the
               Womb.
               The
               Breast-bone
               being
               soft
               ,
               hath
               in
               the
               middle
               according
               to
               the
               length
               thereof
               ,
               four
               little
               round
               bones
               ,
               Plane
               and
               Pory
               .
               Also
               the
               
                 Planke
                 ,
                 Hip
              
               and
               Share-bones
               are
               distinguished
               by
               Gristles
               .
               The
               Carpus
               and
               Tarsus
               are
               Gristly
               ,
               and
               afterward
               as
               the
               Child
               grows
               bigger
               ,
               they
               are
               spread
               out
               into
               divers
               bones
               ,
               when
               there
               is
               a
               necessity
               of
               using
               the
               Hands
               and
               Feet
               ,
               to
               handle
               and
               go
               .
            
             
               17.
               
               In
               the
               
                 outward
                 parts
              
               ,
               as
               the
               Skin
               ,
               Hairs
               ,
               Nails
               ,
               &c.
               there
               is
               some
               difference
               ,
               known
               to
               all
               .
            
          
           
             II.
             The
             Membranes
             which
             invest
             the
             Child
             ,
             cloath
             and
             cover
             it
             :
             of
             which
             in
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             Navil-vessels
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             Chapter
             following
             .
          
           
             The
             MEMBRANES
             which
             infold
             the
             Child
             ;
             are
             the
             first
             thing
             bred
             in
             the
             Womb
             after
             Conception
             ,
             to
             fence
             the
             nobler
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             with
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             smallest
             Conceptions
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             Authority
             of
             all
             Authors
             well-near
             does
             testifie
             .
          
           
             Their
             
               Efficient
               cause
            
             ,
             is
             the
             formative
             faculty
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             
             the
             Heat
             of
             the
             Womb
             ;
             as
             the
             Heat
             is
             wont
             to
             cause
             a
             crust
             upon
             Bread
             or
             Gruel
             .
             For
             then
             ,
          
           
             
               I.
               The
               Crust
               would
               stick
               hard
               to
               the
               Child
               and
               could
               not
               be
               separated
               .
            
             
               II.
               The
               Heat
               of
               the
               Womb
               is
               not
               so
               great
               ,
               as
               to
               be
               able
               to
               bake
               the
               substance
               of
               the
               Seed
               in
               so
               short
               a
               time
               ;
               whereas
               these
               Membranes
               are
               bred
               well
               near
               immediately
               after
               the
               Conception
               .
               And
               if
               there
               were
               so
               great
               Heat
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               no
               Conception
               could
               be
               made
               ,
               according
               to
               Hippocrates
               in
               the
               62.
               
               Aphorism
               of
               his
               
                 fifth
                 Book
              
               .
            
          
           
             We
             conceive
             their
             matter
             to
             be
             
             the
             thicker
             part
             of
             the
             womans
             seed
             .
             Others
             ,
             as
             Arantius
             ,
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             productions
             of
             the
             inner
             Tunicles
             ,
             the
             Chorion
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             and
             the
             Amnion
             of
             the
             
               Membrana
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Others
             that
             the
             Mothers
             seed
             alone
             makes
             these
             Memibranes
             :
             others
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             made
             as
             well
             of
             the
             mans
             as
             the
             Womans
             seed
             .
          
           
             These
             Membranes
             in
             Man-kind
             
             are
             two
             ,
             in
             brute
             Beasts
             three
             :
             which
             being
             joyned
             and
             growing
             together
             ,
             do
             make
             the
             SECUNDINE
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Because
               it
               is
               the
               second
               tabernacle
               of
               the
               Child
               ,
               next
               the
               Womb.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Because
               it
               comes
               away
               by
               a
               second
               birth
               ,
               after
               the
               Child
               .
               [
               Hence
               in
               English
               we
               call
               it
               the
               After-birth
               .
               ]
            
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Membrane
            
             is
             termed
             AMNIOS
             because
             of
             of
             its
             softness
             and
             thinness
             ,
             also
             
               Agnina
               ,
               Charta
               Virginea
               ,
               Indusium
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             And
             it
             is
             the
             thinnest
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             white
             ,
             soft
             ,
             transparent
             ,
             furnished
             with
             a
             few
             very
             smal
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             dispersed
             within
             the
             foldings
             thereof
             .
             It
             compasses
             the
             Child
             immediately
             and
             cleaves
             every
             where
             almost
             to
             the
             Chorion
             ,
             especially
             at
             the
             ends
             ,
             about
             the
             Womb-Cake
             ,
             united
             in
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             where
             the
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             come
             forth
             .
             Yet
             we
             can
             easily
             separate
             it
             from
             the
             Chorion
             .
             There
             is
             in
             it
             
             plenty
             of
             Moisture
             and
             Humors
             wherein
             the
             child
             swims
             which
             proceeds
             in
             Brutes
             from
             Sweat
             ,
             in
             Mankind
             from
             Sweat
             and
             Urin.
             But
             Aquapendent
             having
             observed
             that
             in
             Brutes
             
             the
             Sweat
             and
             Urin
             were
             contained
             in
             several
             little
             Membranes
             ,
             the
             latter
             more
             low
             and
             externally
             in
             the
             Chorion
             ,
             the
             former
             higher
             ,
             and
             more
             inwardly
             in
             the
             Amnion
             ;
             he
             thought
             it
             was
             so
             in
             Mankind
             much
             more
             .
             But
             Experience
             and
             Reason
             are
             against
             it
             ,
             because
             there
             are
             no
             Passages
             to
             the
             Chorion
             .
             And
             because
             we
             do
             not
             find
             the
             Urachus
             open
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             therefore
             the
             Urin
             cannot
             be
             thence
             collected
             in
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             but
             is
             voided
             by
             the
             Yard
             if
             it
             be
             troublesom
             ,
             and
             the
             remainder
             is
             kept
             till
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Birth
             ,
             in
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             which
             in
             Children
             new
             born
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             distended
             and
             full
             ,
             but
             in
             Brutes
             empty
             .
             Nor
             does
             the
             sharpness
             of
             the
             Urin
             offend
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             It
             is
             but
             little
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             benignity
             and
             purity
             of
             its
             Nourishment
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Skin
             is
             daubed
             with
             a
             clammy
             Humor
             ,
             and
             Brutes
             are
             defended
             by
             their
             hairiness
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Use
             is
          
           
             I.
             That
             the
             Child
             floating
             therein
             as
             in
             a
             Bath
             ,
             may
             be
             higher
             and
             less
             burthensom
             to
             the
             Mother
             .
          
           
             II.
             That
             the
             Child
             may
             not
             strike
             against
             any
             neighboring
             hard
             Parts
             .
          
           
             III.
             That
             in
             the
             Birth
             ,
             the
             Membrane
             being
             broke
             ,
             this
             Humor
             running
             out
             ,
             may
             make
             the
             way
             through
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             smooth
             ,
             easie
             ,
             and
             slippery
             .
          
           
             Part
             of
             the
             Amnios
             does
             ever
             and
             anon
             hang
             about
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Child
             when
             it
             comes
             forth
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Child
             is
             said
             to
             be
             Galeatus
             or
             Helmeted
             .
             This
             Helmet
             the
             Midwives
             diligently
             observe
             for
             divers
             respects
             ,
             and
             they
             prognosticate
             good
             fortune
             to
             the
             Child
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             use
             it
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             red
             ;
             but
             if
             it
             be
             black
             ,
             the
             praesage
             bad
             fortune
             .
          
           
             
               Paraeus
               ,
               Lemnius
            
             and
             others
             ,
             conceive
             that
             the
             happy
             and
             strong
             Labor
             of
             the
             Mother
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             that
             the
             foresaid
             Helmet
             comes
             out
             with
             the
             child
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             troublesom
             Labor
             it
             is
             left
             behind
             .
             Spigelius
             contrariwife
             ,
             thinks
             that
             when
             the
             Mother
             and
             child
             are
             weak
             ,
             it
             comes
             away
             .
             Besterus
             makes
             the
             Reason
             to
             be
             the
             roughness
             of
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             which
             the
             child
             is
             not
             able
             to
             break
             through
             ,
             or
             the
             weakness
             of
             the
             child
             ,
             for
             which
             cause
             it
             seldom
             lives
             to
             ripeness
             of
             Age.
             I
             have
             seen
             both
             those
             that
             have
             come
             into
             the
             world
             with
             this
             Helmet
             ,
             and
             those
             without
             it
             ,
             miserable
             ;
             and
             by
             chance
             it
             comes
             to
             cleave
             both
             to
             the
             Heads
             of
             strong
             and
             weak
             children
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             Membrane
             is
             termed
             Chorion
             ,
             because
             it
             compasses
             the
             child
             like
             a
             Circle
             .
          
           
             This
             immediately
             compasses
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             lies
             beneath
             it
             in
             a
             round
             shape
             like
             a
             Pancake
             ,
             whose
             inner
             or
             hollow
             part
             it
             covers
             and
             invelops
             ,
             spreading
             it self
             out
             according
             to
             the
             measure
             thereof
             .
             It
             is
             hardly
             separated
             therefrom
             ,
             and
             it
             strongly
             unites
             the
             Vessels
             to
             the
             Womb-liver
             ,
             and
             bears
             them
             up
             .
             Towards
             the
             child
             it
             is
             more
             smooth
             and
             slippery
             ,
             but
             where
             it
             is
             spread
             under
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             and
             fastned
             thereto
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             rough
             :
             also
             it
             is
             sufficiently
             thick
             and
             double
             .
             In
             Brutes
             the
             Cotyledons
             
             cleave
             hereunto
             ,
             which
             consist
             of
             a
             fleshy
             and
             spungy
             substance
             .
             But
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             this
             Membrane
             cleavs
             immediately
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             by
             a
             certain
             round
             and
             reddish
             lump
             of
             flesh
             ,
             fastned
             to
             one
             part
             only
             of
             the
             womb
             (
             commonly
             the
             upper
             and
             former
             part
             )
             nor
             does
             it
             compass
             the
             whole
             child
             ;
             being
             framed
             of
             an
             innumerable
             company
             of
             Branches
             ,
             of
             Veins
             ,
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             among
             which
             bl●●d
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             seems
             to
             be
             shed
             and
             interlarded
             .
          
           
             That
             same
             round
             Mass
             is
             called
             PLACENTA
             UTERI
             the
             Womb-pancake
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             Shape
             ;
             also
             the
             WOMB
             LIVER
             :
             which
             I
             will
             now
             exactly
             describe
             according
             as
             it
             hath
             been
             my
             hap
             to
             see
             it
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             circular
             ,
             but
             the
             Circumference
             unequal
             ,
             in
             which
             I
             have
             observed
             five
             Prominences
             ranked
             in
             due
             order
             ,
             and
             the
             Membrane
             Chorion
             in
             the
             intermediate
             spaces
             ,
             thicker
             then
             ordinary
             .
             Where
             it
             looks
             towards
             the
             Womb
             ,
             it
             is
             rough
             and
             waved
             ,
             like
             baked
             bread
             that
             hath
             chinks
             in
             it
             ;
             and
             being
             cut
             in
             this
             part
             ,
             it
             discovers
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             fibres
             ,
             which
             if
             you
             follow
             ,
             they
             will
             bring
             you
             to
             the
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             one
             in
             Number
             ,
             even
             in
             those
             who
             bear
             two
             or
             more
             children
             at
             a
             burthen
             .
             For
             into
             one
             Womb-cake
             ,
             so
             many
             Cords
             are
             inserted
             in
             divers
             places
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             children
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             varies
             according
             to
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             Bodies
             and
             the
             children●
             Yet
             it
             is
             about
             a
             foot
             in
             the
             Diameter
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             thereof
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             Body
             wove
             together
             of
             infinite
             little
             fibres
             ,
             blood
             as
             it
             were
             congealed
             being
             interposed
             ,
             which
             is
             easily
             separated
             .
             Seeing
             therefore
             it
             hath
             a
             Parenchyma
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             ,
             if
             like
             a
             kind
             of
             ,
             Liver
             it
             make
             or
             prepare
             blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             child
             .
          
           
             The
             Nature
             and
             Appearance
             of
             the
             Substance
             ,
             is
             not
             every
             where
             alike
             .
             For
             here
             and
             there
             it
             is
             glandulous
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             Hillocks
             ,
             as
             being
             the
             Emunctories
             of
             the
             childs
             Work-house
             ,
             placed
             in
             the
             outmost
             Verges
             .
             It
             is
             thicker
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             hillocks
             ;
             and
             thin
             about
             the
             brims
             ,
             variously
             interwoven
             with
             the
             Capillary
             Veins
             :
             For
             ,
          
           
             It
             hath
             Vessels
             ,
             viz.
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             running
             through
             the
             same
             ,
             from
             the
             Umbelical
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             by
             little
             and
             little
             are
             all
             extenuated
             about
             the
             brims
             of
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             making
             wonderful
             contextures
             ,
             closely
             sticking
             to
             the
             Substance
             thereof
             ,
             so
             that
             no
             part
             of
             the
             Branches
             is
             void
             .
             They
             are
             joyned
             together
             by
             various
             Anastomoses
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             hereafter
             described
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             child
             runs
             back
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             .
             For
             I
             have
             observed
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             how
             that
             the
             blood
             contained
             ,
             may
             easily
             by
             ones
             finger
             or
             an
             instrument
             ,
             be
             forced
             towards
             the
             Trunk
             or
             Cord
             ,
             but
             not
             towards
             the
             Womb-cake
             .
             The
             contrary
             where
             to
             happens
             in
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             by
             impulse
             of
             the
             finger
             ,
             do
             easily
             send
             the
             blood
             to
             the
             Womb-liver
             ,
             but
             hardly
             to
             the
             Trunk
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             1.
             
             To
             support
             the
             Navil-vessels
             ,
             under
             which
             it
             is
             spred
             as
             a
             Pillow
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               XXX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               naked
               ,
               al
               the
               Coats
               both
               proper
               and
               common
               being
               divided
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     Portions
                     of
                     the
                     Chorion
                     dissected
                     and
                     removed
                     from
                     their
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     Amnios
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Womb
                     dissected
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Womb-cake
                     or
                     womb-liver
                     ,
                     being
                     a
                     Lump
                     of
                     Flesh
                     furnished
                     with
                     divers
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     Child
                     receives
                     its
                     nourishment
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Branching
                     of
                     the
                     Vessels
                     ,
                     which
                     in
                     this
                     place
                     make
                     one
                     Ligament
                     to
                     cover
                     the
                     Umbilical
                     Vessels
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Band
                     or
                     Ligament
                     ,
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     Umbelical
                     Vessels
                     are
                     carried
                     from
                     the
                     Womb-cake
                     to
                     the
                     Navil
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Situaton
                     of
                     a
                     perfect
                     Child
                     in
                     the
                     Womb
                     ,
                     ready
                     to
                     be
                     born
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Implantation
                     of
                     the
                     Umbilical
                     or
                     Navil-vessels
                     into
                     the
                     Navil
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             third
             called
             ALLANTOIDES
             the
             Pudding-membrane
             ,
             does
             not
             cloath
             the
             whol
             conception
             ,
             but
             compasses
             it
             round
             like
             a
             Girdle
             ,
             or
             a
             Pudding
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             receive
             Urin
             from
             the
             Urachus
             in
             Brutes
             .
             For
             in
             Mankind
             there
             is
             no
             such
             Membrane
             :
             for
             the
             child
             in
             a
             woman
             ,
             its
             Urin
             is
             received
             by
             the
             Amnios
             mingled
             with
             Sweat
             :
             or
             is
             kept
             in
             the
             Bladder
             till
             the
             Birth-time
             .
             And
             therefore
             Spigelius
             cannot
             be
             excused
             ,
             for
             admitting
             this
             Membrane
             in
             Mankind
             ;
             whose
             Description
             (
             because
             it
             belongs
             not
             to
             this
             Anatomy
             )
             he
             that
             desires
             to
             see
             ,
             let
             him
             look
             in
             Aquapendent
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXXVII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Vmbelical
             or
             Navil-vessels
             .
          
           
             THe
             Membranes
             being
             diffected
             and
             removed
             ,
             the
             UMBELICAL
             Vessels
             come
             in
             view
             ,
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Navil
             ,
             the
             child
             being
             excluded
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             a
             little
             forced
             up
             to
             nourish
             the
             s●me
             ,
             they
             are
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             being
             tied
             in
             a
             knot
             ,
             do
             make
          
           
             The
             NAVIL
             which
             is
             in
             the
             〈…〉
             
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             yea
             and
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             if
             you
             measure
             it
             with
             a
             circle
             ,
             the
             Arms
             being
             stretched
             out
             .
          
           
             Now
             there
             are
             four
             Navil-vessels
             :
             ONE
             VEIN
             ,
             TWO
             ARTERIES
             ,
             and
             the
             URACHUS
             .
             Which
             are
             covered
             and
             veiled
             as
             it
             were
             with
             a
             certain
             common
          
           
             Coat
             or
             Crust
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             
               Intestinulus
               ,
               Funiculus
               ,
               Laqueus
            
             ,
             &c.
             which
             does
             not
             only
             wrap
             up
             all
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             but
             also
             distinguishes
             them
             one
             from
             another
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             Use
             of
             this
             Coat
             ,
             is
             to
             keep
             the
             Vessels
             from
             being
             intangled
             one
             within
             another
             ,
             broken
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             way
             hurt
             .
          
           
             The
             VENA
             UMBILICALIS
             ,
             much
             
             greater
             then
             the
             Artery
             ,
             being
             carried
             through
             the
             two
             Coats
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             is
             bred
             in
             the
             first
             place
             before
             all
             other
             Veins
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             Perfection
             ,
             because
             it
             ought
             to
             afford
             nourishment
             to
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             seen
             inserted
             into
             the
             Liver
             by
             a
             
             Cleft
             ,
             and
             goes
             through
             the
             Navil
             ,
             somtimes
             simple
             ,
             otherwhiles
             double
             ,
             and
             divided
             into
             two
             Branches
             ,
             the
             length
             of
             about
             an
             F●ll
             and
             half
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             
             to
             the
             Womb-cake
             .
             And
             it
             is
             variously
             coiled
             or
             rouled
             about
             ,
             that
             its
             length-might
             prove
             no
             hinderance
             .
             From
             the
             Navil
             it
             goes
             over
             the
             Breast
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             it
             is
             obliquely
             carried
             over
             the
             right
             and
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Throat
             and
             Neck
             ,
             turning
             it self
             back
             at
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             so
             over
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Fore-head
             unto
             the
             Womb-cake
             ;
             somtimes
             also
             by
             this
             simple
             flexure
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             it
             compasses
             the
             Neck
             like
             a
             chain
             .
             All
             which
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             whole
             Cord
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Vessels
             contained
             therein
             .
             And
             this
             Journey
             being
             finished
             ,
             it
             spreads
             infinite
             Branches
             through
             the
             Secondine
             ,
             till
             it
             loose
             it self
             into
             exceeding
             delicate
             fine
             hairy
             thrids
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             Blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             Child
             ,
             and
             to
             carry
             it
             into
             its
             Liver
             ,
             Now
             
             the
             way
             is
             doubtful
             .
             Most
             men
             perswade
             themselves
             ,
             that
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             are
             joyned
             with
             the
             little
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             and
             that
             from
             them
             joyntly
             blood
             is
             derived
             into
             the
             Navil-vessels
             to
             the
             Child
             .
             But
             the
             Arteries
             are
             to
             be
             excluded
             from
             this
             Office
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             not
             joyned
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             nor
             ought
             they
             to
             carry
             any
             thing
             to
             the
             child
             ,
             but
             to
             carry
             back
             from
             the
             child
             to
             the
             womb-cake
             .
             The
             Veins
             do
             only
             bring
             thither
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             a
             twofold
             way
             ,
             either
             immediately
             from
             the
             womb
             ,
             or
             mediately
             .
             Immediately
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             womb
             ;
             mediately
             ,
             when
             by
             the
             interceeding
             or
             going
             between
             of
             any
             fleshy
             Substance
             whatsoever
             ,
             both
             in
             Mankind
             and
             Beasts
             (
             which
             is
             alwaies
             for
             the
             most
             part
             glewed
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             violently
             broke
             off
             in
             the
             Birth
             )
             it
             is
             sucked
             through
             Pipes
             ,
             first
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             into
             the
             outer
             parts
             of
             the
             womb-cake
             ,
             and
             thence
             into
             the
             Capillary
             Veins
             thereof
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             least
             into
             the
             greater
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             it
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             Umbilical
             Trunk
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
             Nor
             does
             it
             slip
             through
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             womb
             into
             the
             Pipes
             ,
             because
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             Veins
             does
             not
             nourish
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             brought
             in
             by
             the
             Arteries
             in
             a
             woman
             with
             child
             ,
             and
             goes
             up
             back
             again
             by
             the
             Veins
             ,
             in
             a
             woman
             not
             with
             child
             .
          
           
             This
             Vein
             seems
             full
             of
             certain
             Knots
             :
             which
             are
             nothing
             but
             a
             more
             thick
             and
             
             fleshy
             Constitution
             of
             the
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             in
             those
             Parts
             ;
             and
             a
             wider
             opening
             ,
             wherewith
             as
             a
             spoon
             ,
             the
             Blood
             is
             drawn
             in
             ,
             in
             its
             long
             Journey
             ,
             and
             is
             by
             little
             and
             little
             stopped
             ,
             least
             it
             flow
             too
             violently
             ;
             that
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             there
             the
             longer
             labored
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             :
             and
             that
             the
             Vessels
             may
             be
             stronger
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Number
             of
             these
             Knots
             ,
             the
             Midwives
             do
             guess
             the
             number
             of
             Children
             that
             a
             woman
             shal
             bear
             :
             and
             if
             the
             Knot
             which
             first
             follows
             ,
             be
             white
             and
             narrow
             ,
             they
             foretel
             that
             the
             next
             child
             will
             be
             a
             Girl
             ,
             if
             red
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             swelling
             ,
             that
             it
             will
             be
             a
             Boy
             .
             The
             first
             Divination
             is
             vain
             ;
             for
             there
             are
             as
             many
             Knots
             in
             the
             Navil
             of
             the
             last
             child
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             first
             .
             But
             the
             latter
             may
             be
             excused
             by
             the
             defect
             or
             abundance
             of
             Natural
             heat
             ,
             whence
             the
             Diversity
             of
             Sexes
             arises
             .
             From
             the
             distance
             of
             the
             Knots
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             they
             foretel
             that
             the
             Conceptions
             will
             be
             sooner
             or
             longer
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             will
             be
             Twins
             ,
             if
             one
             Knot
             rest
             upon
             ,
             or
             be
             near
             to
             another
             .
             Which
             we
             have
             often
             found
             to
             be
             false
             ,
             though
             chance
             ,
             do
             now
             and
             then
             confirm
             the
             hope
             of
             credulous
             women
             .
          
           
             Two
             ARTERIES
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Iliack
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             are
             carried
             with
             the
             Vein
             
             after
             the
             foresaid
             manner
             to
             the
             womb-cake
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             spred
             about
             in
             divers
             Branches
             ,
             whose
             Use
             is
             not
             ,
             as
             hath
             hitherto
             been
             believed
             ,
             to
             bring
             to
             the
             child
             vital
             Spirit
             with
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             because
             these
             Arteries
             are
             not
             joyned
             to
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             most
             certain
             Observation
             of
             Arantius
             ;
             but
             to
             carry
             back
             part
             of
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             superfluous
             to
             the
             Nourishment
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             by
             the
             two
             Iliack
             Branches
             into
             the
             Placenta
             or
             Womb-cake
             ,
             partly
             to
             nourish
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             fill
             it
             with
             vital
             Spirit
             .
             Partly
             that
             the
             Blood
             may
             there
             be
             made
             more
             perfect
             ,
             being
             weakned
             by
             a
             long
             Journey
             ,
             and
             nourishing
             the
             Membranes
             ;
             which
             afterwards
             runs
             back
             again
             to
             the
             Child
             ,
             by
             the
             hairy
             twigs
             of
             the
             veins
             joyned
             thereto
             ,
             with
             that
             new
             blood
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             This
             Motion
             is
             confirmed
             by
             Experience
             .
             I
             have
             often
             pressed
             the
             swelling
             veins
             with
             my
             finger
             ,
             and
             have
             observed
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             easily
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             vein
             towards
             the
             Child
             ,
             not
             to
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             where
             the
             knots
             like
             valves
             do
             stop
             the
             same
             ;
             contrariwise
             ,
             it
             is
             easily
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Womb-cake
             .
             The
             same
             is
             manifest
             by
             Ligatures
             .
             For
             the
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             of
             a
             live
             Child
             being
             bound
             ,
             as
             yet
             cleaving
             to
             the
             Mother
             being
             alive
             ,
             Walaeus
             hath
             observed
             and
             others
             after
             him
             ,
             that
             they
             pulse
             between
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Child
             ,
             but
             have
             no
             Pulse
             between
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Mothers
             womb
             .
          
           
             For
             this
             Motions
             sake
             the
             venal
             and
             
             Arterial
             branches
             are
             joyned
             together
             by
             Anastomoses
             ,
             within
             the
             Womb-cake
             ,
             that
             the
             Passage
             might
             be
             ready
             for
             the
             blood
             to
             run
             back
             out
             of
             the
             little
             Arteries
             ,
             into
             the
             little
             Veins
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             here
             ,
             following
             my
             own
             sight
             ,
             observed
             several
             waies
             of
             Anastomoses
             .
             For
             somtimes
             the
             twigs
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             do
             go
             one
             over
             another
             cross-wise
             ,
             both
             internally
             and
             externally
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             are
             joyned
             by
             Insertion
             ,
             somtimes
             they
             couple
             side
             to
             side
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             they
             are
             wreathed
             .
             The
             smallest
             Twigs
             of
             the
             Branches
             are
             inoculated
             into
             the
             greater
             ,
             united
             in
             like
             manner
             ,
             but
             with
             more
             blunt
             Anastomoses
             ,
             till
             the
             Arteries
             are
             reduced
             to
             four
             Branches
             ,
             the
             Vein
             to
             two
             ,
             which
             at
             last
             grow
             into
             the
             trunks
             of
             their
             own
             kind
             ,
             springing
             out
             of
             the
             Womb-cake
             .
             The
             Arteries
             go
             about
             the
             veins
             ,
             and
             do
             partly
             accompany
             them
             ,
             and
             partly
             creep
             alone
             by
             themselves
             .
             I
             suspect
             that
             there
             are
             Anastomoses
             only
             in
             those
             places
             ,
             wherein
             they
             are
             necessary
             for
             the
             passing
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             veins
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             solitary
             veins
             do
             suck
             fresh
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             Without
             the
             Navil
             and
             Womb-cake
             ,
             
             these
             vessels
             being
             united
             ,
             as
             they
             pass
             along
             like
             a
             Rope
             ,
             they
             are
             well
             twisted
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             yet
             for
             the
             most
             part
             by
             an
             orderly
             Circumvolution
             ,
             even
             as
             a
             larger
             Rope
             is
             made
             of
             smaller
             cords
             twisted
             together
             ,
             representing
             the
             wreathings
             of
             our
             Unicorns
             Horn
             ,
             which
             we
             could
             easily
             perceive
             by
             holding
             it
             to
             the
             light
             .
             Which
             is
             so
             contrived
             1.
             
             Least
             by
             the
             winding
             passage
             of
             the
             Navil-vessels
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             should
             be
             hindred
             ,
             seeing
             every
             vessel
             that
             is
             twisted
             ,
             keeps
             it
             course
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             womb
             might
             receive
             its
             pittance
             of
             Nourishment
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             without
             danger
             of
             choaking
             .
             3.
             
             That
             by
             this
             wreathed
             and
             crooked
             Journey
             ,
             the
             future
             A●●ment
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             might
             be
             by
             little
             and
             little
             purged
             and
             clarified
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             in
             the
             twisting
             of
             the
             cord
             1.
             
             That
             knots
             and
             spots
             are
             transparent
             in
             the
             vein
             and
             not
             in
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Blood
             appearing
             through
             a
             thinner
             Coat
             .
             2.
             
             That
             a
             spans
             distance
             from
             the
             Conjunction
             there
             appears
             ,
             a
             wonderful
             contexture
             ,
             and
             a
             rougher
             and
             more
             confused
             twisting
             then
             in
             other
             Parts
             .
             3.
             
             In
             the
             outer
             Coat
             of
             the
             Intestinulum
             ,
             infinite
             cuts
             and
             lines
             are
             seen
             imprinted
             as
             it
             
             were
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             length
             thereof
             ,
             colored
             on
             the
             outside
             with
             blood
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Cerebellum
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Length
             was
             before
             noted
             ,
             viz.
             an
             ell
             and
             an
             half
             ,
             in
             a
             grown
             child
             ,
             or
             three
             
             spans
             ,
             that
             the
             child
             may
             stir
             more
             easily
             ,
             the
             blood
             may
             be
             better
             prepared
             ,
             and
             the
             secondine
             drawn
             out
             .
             If
             this
             cord
             be
             somtime
             either
             overtwisted
             ,
             or
             by
             motion
             wrapped
             about
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             child
             ,
             there
             is
             danger
             that
             the
             child
             will
             be
             strangled
             ,
             and
             the
             Mother
             have
             an
             hard
             labor
             ,
             because
             the
             child
             is
             drawn
             back
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             shortness
             of
             the
             cord
             ,
             nor
             can
             it
             bear
             the
             violence
             of
             an
             indiscreet
             Midwife
             .
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             twisted
             divers
             times
             about
             the
             Neck
             of
             a
             child
             ,
             whereby
             the
             birth
             was
             retarded
             for
             divers
             hours
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             child
             came
             forth
             it
             could
             hardly
             breath
             :
             if
             in
             such
             a
             case
             the
             childs
             Face
             be
             red
             t
             is
             a
             good
             sign
             ,
             but
             a
             deadly
             token
             if
             the
             Face
             be
             black
             and
             blew
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             as
             thick
             as
             a
             mans
             Finger
             ,
             because
             
             strength
             and
             a
             just
             capacity
             is
             requisite
             to
             sustain
             the
             Vessels
             .
             When
             it
             is
             dry
             it
             becomes
             smaller
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             kept
             to
             procure
             other
             births
             ,
          
           
             
               The
               XXXI
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               It
               shews
               the
               Child
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Womb
               ,
               but
               fastned
               still
               to
               the
               Womb-Cake
               ,
               the
               Umbilical
               Vessels
               being
               separated
               about
               their
               Rise
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Abdomen
                     or
                     Belly
                     opened
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Liver
                     of
                     the
                     Child
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Piss-bladder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Guts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Urachus
                     or
                     Piss-pipe
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     Vessels
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Body
                     joyned
                     together
                     by
                     one
                     Membrane
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     or
                     Navil-vessels
                     extended
                     from
                     the
                     Chorion
                     to
                     the
                     Child
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     A
                     Ligature
                     which
                     makes
                     the
                     Veins
                     beneath
                     it
                     ful
                     and
                     the
                     Arteries
                     lanke
                     and
                     empty
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LLLL
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     dispersed
                     through
                     the
                     Womb-cake
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MMM
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Womb-cake
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               83.
               
            
          
           
             The
             Child
             being
             
             born
             ,
             the
             rope
             must
             be
             tied
             near
             the
             Belly
             ,
             the
             distance
             of
             two
             or
             three
             Fingers
             breadths
             ,
             with
             a
             strong
             thred
             wound
             often
             about
             ,
             and
             about
             three
             Fingers
             from
             the
             binding
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             the
             Navil
             must
             be
             lookt
             to
             ,
             till
             it
             dry
             and
             fall
             off
             ,
             of
             its
             own
             accord
             .
             Now
             the
             times
             of
             its
             falling
             of
             are
             uncertain
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Constitution
             of
             the
             child
             ,
             and
             the
             plenty
             of
             Blood
             which
             flows
             thereto
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Midwives
             Prognosticate
             how
             long
             the
             child
             shall
             live
             .
             If
             it
             fall
             of
             the
             fift
             day
             from
             the
             hour
             it
             was
             tied
             ,
             they
             foretell
             the
             children
             will
             be
             long-lived
             ;
             if
             on
             the
             third
             day
             ,
             they
             say
             they
             shall
             be
             short-lived
             .
          
           
             The
             Navil
             being
             thus
             shaped
             and
             confirmed
             ,
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             strong
             Skin
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             preternaturally
             stretched
             to
             an
             immense
             degree
             ,
             to
             receive
             the
             Guts
             in
             a
             Rupture
             of
             the
             Navil
             ,
             such
             as
             Severinus
             hath
             described
             in
             a
             Picture
             ,
             and
             as
             my self
             have
             seen
             at
             Hafnia
             in
             an
             ancient
             Woman
             .
          
           
             In
             some
             there
             is
             a
             passage
             through
             the
             Navil
             into
             the
             Belly
             .
             Alpinus
             reports
             that
             the
             Aegyptians
             cure
             a
             bloody
             Flux
             ,
             by
             thrusting
             their
             Fingers
             into
             the
             Patients
             Navil
             ,
             and
             turning
             it
             divers
             times
             about
             .
             Dung
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Navil
             of
             a
             Student
             ,
             and
             Worms
             like
             Earth-worms
             with
             quittor
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Navil
             of
             a
             Boy
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             
               Salmuth
               .
               Tulpius
            
             saw
             quittor
             which
             Nature
             sent
             from
             the
             Chest
             ,
             come
             out
             at
             the
             Navil
             ,
             and
             Folius
             found
             Stones
             bred
             here
             .
             I.
             D.
             Horstius
             observed
             blood
             flow
             from
             the
             Navil
             in
             a
             certain
             Gentleman
             ,
             monthly
             .
             And
             he
             
             tels
             us
             of
             a
             Boy
             who
             had
             a
             wheyish
             liquor
             like
             Urin
             dropping
             from
             his
             Navil
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             fresh
             blood
             .
             For
             the
             inner
             Vessels
             are
             many
             times
             opened
             ,
             by
             the
             Acrimony
             of
             the
             blood
             and
             wheyish
             humors
             .
             Also
             the
             Navil
             doth
             insensibly
             open
             it self
             when
             purgatives
             ,
             Medicines
             for
             the
             Mother
             and
             to
             kill
             the
             Worms
             ,
             &c.
             are
             applied
             thereto
             .
          
           
             Now
             these
             Vessels
             ,
             after
             the
             Child
             is
             born
             ,
             do
             within
             the
             Belly
             degenerate
             into
             Ligaments
             :
             the
             Vein
             to
             a
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             Arteries
             into
             lateral
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Bladder
             .
             Because
             their
             use
             is
             now
             lost
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             longer
             any
             passage
             of
             the
             Mothers
             blood
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             somtimes
             preternaturally
             opened
             as
             in
             the
             examples
             alleadged
             .
             Yet
             are
             they
             not
             of
             so
             great
             moment
             ,
             that
             
             their
             breaking
             or
             cutting
             off
             ,
             should
             cause
             death
             ,
             as
             some
             and
             among
             them
             Laurentius
             imagine
             ,
             being
             questionles
             abused
             by
             some
             Fabulous
             story
             .
             For
             they
             report
             that
             the
             Aegyptians
             punish
             Robbers
             by
             flaying
             them
             alive
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             leave
             the
             Navil
             untoucht
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             tormented
             the
             longer
             :
             for
             they
             think
             when
             the
             Navil
             is
             cut
             off
             a
             man
             must
             needs
             die
             ,
             the
             four
             Vessels
             being
             destroyed
             .
             But
             Riolanus
             a
             man
             of
             great
             experience
             saw
             contrary
             examples
             ,
             and
             any
             man
             may
             judg
             by
             a
             Rupture
             of
             the
             Navil
             .
             If
             death
             follow
             ,
             it
             is
             by
             accident
             ,
             the
             inner
             parts
             being
             also
             hurt
             ,
             and
             a
             wide
             dore
             opened
             for
             all
             hurtful
             things
             to
             enter
             .
             Sperlinger
             conceives
             that
             they
             are
             choaked
             ,
             because
             the
             Navil
             being
             cut
             off
             ,
             the
             Liver
             falls
             down
             and
             draws
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             the
             Organ
             of
             breathing
             .
             But
             1.
             
             This
             shortness
             of
             breath
             doth
             not
             cause
             sudden
             death
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Liver
             is
             held
             up
             by
             another
             strong
             Ligament
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Vessel
             ,
             the
             Urachus
             or
             Piss-pipe
             ,
             which
             is
             half
             as
             little
             again
             as
             the
             
             Artery
             ,
             consists
             of
             two
             parts
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Riolanus
             ;
             the
             inner
             ,
             which
             is
             Nervous
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             inner
             coat
             of
             the
             Bladder
             the
             outer
             which
             is
             more
             Membranous
             ,
             from
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             bladder
             .
             It
             is
             not
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             in
             Beasts
             as
             in
             Mankind
             .
          
           
             In
             Beasts
             t
             is
             carryed
             without
             the
             Navil
             between
             two
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             is
             at
             last
             spred
             out
             and
             widened
             into
             the
             Coat
             which
             is
             termed
             Allantoides
             ,
             where
             Urin
             is
             collected
             and
             reserved
             ,
             till
             the
             young
             one
             is
             brought
             forth
             .
             And
             therefore
             this
             Vessel
             is
             termed
             Urachus
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             Piss-pipe
             .
          
           
             In
             Mankind
             ,
             1.
             
             It
             doth
             not
             go
             without
             the
             Navil
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             doth
             not
             make
             the
             Coat
             Allantoides
             ,
             for
             which
             cause
             the
             Child
             hath
             only
             two
             Coats
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Urachus
             is
             not
             hollow
             throughout
             according
             to
             the
             experiments
             
             of
             
               Carpus
               ,
               Arantius
               ,
               Cortesius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             and
             others
             ,
             whom
             I
             have
             found
             to
             be
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             in
             such
             Bodies
             as
             I
             have
             dissected
             both
             old
             and
             young
             ,
             though
             Aquapendens
             and
             Spigelius
             would
             ▪
             perswade
             us
             otherwise
             .
             But
             it
             is
             a
             little
             Cord
             or
             Ligament
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             bladder
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             and
             sustained
             ,
             least
             when
             it
             is
             distended
             with
             Urin
             ,
             its
             Neck
             should
             be
             squeezed
             :
             Though
             I
             deny
             not
             but
             that
             the
             same
             thing
             is
             done
             by
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             But
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             voids
             Urin
             by
             its
             Yard
             into
             the
             Membarne
             Amnios
             (
             which
             makes
             it
             so
             ful
             of
             Liquor
             )
             and
             a
             great
             part
             is
             retained
             also
             in
             the
             bladder
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             that
             new
             born
             Children
             ,
             for
             the
             first
             daies
             are
             in
             a
             manner
             continually
             pissing
             .
             Aqua-pendens
             denies
             this
             because
             ,
             1.
             
             The
             motive
             faculty
             doth
             not
             exercise
             it self
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             2.
             
             No
             Muscle
             Acts.
             3.
             
             Neither
             doth
             Nature
             use
             so
             different
             a
             manner
             of
             voiding
             Urin
             in
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             .
             But
             I
             answer
             ,
             1.
             
             That
             the
             various
             moving
             of
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             which
             Big-bellied
             Women
             feel
             ,
             doth
             witness
             that
             the
             Child
             hath
             a
             moving
             faculty
             though
             imperfect
             .
             2.
             
             The
             bladder
             is
             provoked
             to
             excretion
             ,
             by
             the
             over
             great
             quantity
             and
             sharpness
             of
             the
             Serum
             ,
             or
             wheyish
             humor
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Coat
             called
             Allantoides
             which
             is
             not
             in
             Man-kind
             ,
             doth
             shew
             the
             difference
             between
             Man
             and
             beast
             .
          
           
             Uarolus
             will
             have
             all
             the
             Urin
             to
             be
             contained
             in
             the
             bladder
             ,
             till
             the
             birth
             time
             .
             But
             then
             it
             would
             be
             broken
             with
             over
             stretching
             ;
             and
             whence
             comes
             all
             the
             liquor
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Coat
             Amnios
             .
          
           
             
               Aqua-pendens
               ,
               Spigelius
            
             and
             almost
             all
             others
             will
             have
             it
             go
             out
             by
             the
             Urachus
             ,
             and
             be
             collected
             between
             the
             Amnios
             and
             Allantoides
             ,
             as
             in
             beasts
             .
             But
             seeing
             it
             is
             not
             perforated
             ,
             but
             solid
             in
             Man-kind
             ,
             it
             cannot
             admit
             the
             Urin.
             For
             it
             cannot
             be
             strained
             through
             ,
             without
             a
             manifest
             passage
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             thick
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             way
             might
             hold
             in
             grown
             Persons
             .
             Veslingius
             propounds
             both
             these
             opinions
             and
             determins
             nothing
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             no
             more
             Porous
             in
             a
             young
             child
             then
             a
             grown
             person
             .
             And
             Laurentius
             eagerly
             defends
             this
             opinion
             out
             of
             Galen
             ,
             bringing
             the
             examples
             of
             some
             ,
             who
             when
             their
             Urin
             was
             stopt
             ,
             did
             void
             it
             at
             their
             Navil
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             answer
             :
             This
             is
             done
             praeternaturally
             ,
             
             as
             it
             is
             also
             a
             known
             opinion
             of
             many
             ,
             that
             the
             Umbilical
             Vein
             hath
             been
             preternaturally
             opened
             in
             Hydropical
             persons
             ,
             and
             voided
             the
             Water
             .
             And
             Laurentius
             himself
             confesses
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             four
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             do
             turn
             to
             Ligaments
             ;
             wherein
             he
             is
             right
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             dried
             .
             How
             therefore
             can
             they
             be
             opened
             unless
             preternaturally
             ?
             So
             it
             was
             I
             conceive
             preternaturally
             opened
             in
             the
             same
             Italian
             called
             Anna
             ,
             who
             hath
             no
             Yard
             ,
             in
             stead
             whereof
             a
             spungy
             bit
             of
             flesh
             hung
             out
             under
             his
             Navil
             ,
             whence
             the
             Urin
             dropt
             .
             Fernelius
             and
             others
             have
             other
             examples
             of
             the
             Urachus
             opened
             .
          
           
             Before
             the
             Production
             of
             all
             the
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             seed
             being
             curdled
             in
             the
             top
             of
             the
             hinder
             part
             ,
             two
             certain
             Roots
             are
             inserted
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             from
             the
             horns
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             first
             observed
             by
             Varolius
             and
             called
             
               Radices
               Dorsales
            
             ,
             the
             back
             Roots
             which
             are
             obliterated
             ,
             when
             the
             rudiments
             of
             the
             Child
             are
             framed
             ,
             touching
             which
             Riolanus
             explains
             Abensina
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SECOND
           BOOK
           ;
           OF
           THE
           Middle
           Venter
           or
           Cavity
           .
        
         
           THe
           
             middle
             Venter
          
           or
           Belly
           termed
           Thorax
           the
           Chest
           ,
           and
           by
           
           some
           absolutely
           Venter
           ,
           is
           all
           that
           which
           is
           circumscribed
           above
           ,
           by
           Clavicles
           or
           Channel-bones
           ;
           beneath
           the
           Midriff
           ;
           on
           the
           foreside
           by
           the
           Breast-bone
           ;
           on
           the
           hinder
           part
           by
           the
           Bones
           of
           the
           Back
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           sides
           by
           the
           Ribs
           .
        
         
           The
           fore-part
           is
           called
           Sternon
           and
           Pectus
           ,
           &c.
           the
           Hinder-part
           ,
           the
           Back
           ;
           the
           Lateral
           Parts
           are
           termed
           the
           Sides
           .
        
         
           Howbeit
           the
           Ancients
           as
           Hypocrates
           and
           Aristotle
           ,
           &c.
           did
           comprehend
           all
           
           from
           the
           Channel-bones
           as
           far
           as
           to
           the
           Privities
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           the
           middle
           and
           lower
           Belly
           under
           the
           Name
           of
           Chest
           .
           And
           therefore
           in
           this
           Sense
           Hypocrates
           did
           well
           write
           ,
           that
           the
           Liver
           is
           seated
           in
           the
           Chest
           :
           which
           other
           unskilful
           persons
           not
           understanding
           ,
           did
           imagine
           that
           Hypocrates
           was
           ill
           versed
           in
           Anatomy
           .
        
         
           It
           s
           Figure
           is
           after
           a
           sort
           Oval
           ,
           though
           not
           exactly
           ,
           and
           Hypocrates
           compares
           it
           
           to
           a
           Tortoise
           or
           the
           Belly
           of
           a
           Lute
           .
           In
           Mankind
           ,
           it
           is
           more
           bunching
           in
           the
           fore-part
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Brest-bone
           it
           is
           flatter
           ,
           about
           the
           sides
           round
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           bowing
           of
           the
           Ribs
           ,
           in
           the
           Back
           more
           flat
           .
        
         
           It
           s
           Magnitude
           in
           General
           ,
           varies
           according
           to
           the
           different
           degree
           of
           Heat
           :
           
           for
           by
           the
           wideness
           of
           the
           Chest
           we
           measure
           the
           Heat
           of
           the
           Heart
           .
           But
           in
           particular
           persons
           it
           is
           larger
           towards
           the
           lower
           Belly
           ,
           where
           the
           vital
           bowels
           are
           concealed
           ,
           and
           grows
           narrower
           by
           little
           and
           little
           at
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Neck
           .
        
         
           It
           s
           outer
           Substance
           is
           partly
           bony
           ,
           partly
           fleshy
           .
           
        
         
           This
           middle
           Belly
           is
           not
           wholly
           fleshy
           as
           the
           lower
           is
           ,
           1.
           
           Because
           it
           was
           not
           to
           contain
           any
           Parts
           ,
           that
           were
           very
           much
           to
           be
           stretched
           .
           2.
           
           That
           over-much
           Fat
           might
           be
           bred
           there
           ,
           and
           hinder
           Respiration
           .
        
         
           Yet
           is
           it
           partly
           fleshy
           ,
           because
           it
           contains
           Parts
           which-ought
           to
           be
           moved
           ,
           as
           the
           Heart
           and
           Lungs
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           same
           Cause
           ,
        
         
           It
           could
           not
           be
           altogether
           bony
           ,
           like
           the
           Skull
           ;
           for
           that
           is
           a
           very
           rare
           case
           which
           Cardan
           mentions
           in
           his
           11.
           
           Book
           of
           Subtilties
           ,
           Page
           458.
           in
           my
           Edition
           ,
           of
           a
           Man
           that
           instead
           of
           Ribs
           ,
           had
           one
           continued
           Bone
           ●rom
           the
           Throat
           to
           the
           Flanks
           .
        
         
           Yet
           is
           it
           in
           part
           bony
           ,
           for
           to
           safeguard
           the
           noble
           Parts
           .
           For
           ,
        
         
           Its
           Use
           is
           ,
           to
           contain
           the
           vital
           Parts
           as
           the
           
           lower
           and
           first
           Belly
           contains
           the
           Natural
           .
        
         
           Now
           
             the
             Parts
          
           likewise
           of
           
             this
             Belly
          
           are
           
           either
           containing
           or
           contained
           :
           and
           the
           former
           either
           common
           or
           proper
           .
        
         
           The
           Common
           are
           the
           same
           which
           are
           in
           
           the
           lower
           Belly
           .
           Howbeit
           these
           things
           following
           are
           here
           to
           be
           observed
           .
        
         
           The
           Skin
           of
           the
           middle
           Belly
           is
           hairy
           
           under
           the
           Arm-pits
           .
           These
           Hairs
           are
           called
           
             Subalares
             Pili
          
           ,
           being
           useful
           to
           keep
           those
           Parts
           from
           wearing
           and
           fretting
           ,
           in
           the
           Motion
           of
           the
           Arms
           ,
           seeing
           they
           exceedingly
           and
           quickly
           sweat
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           termed
           the
           Emunctories
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           receiving
           the
           Excrements
           thereof
           (
           in
           some
           also
           that
           are
           hotter
           of
           constitution
           and
           strong-hearted
           the
           breast
           is
           hairy
           )
           as
           the
           Groins
           are
           called
           the
           Emunctories
           of
           the
           Liver
           .
        
         
           Moreover
           ,
           there
           is
           little
           Fat
           found
           in
           the
           Chest
           ,
           if
           you
           except
           the
           Dugs
           ,
           that
           
           Respiration
           may
           not
           be
           hurt
           by
           the
           weight
           thereof
           .
           For
           by
           reason
           of
           its
           bony
           part
           ,
           so
           great
           plenty
           of
           the
           matter
           of
           Fat
           could
           not
           flow
           into
           it
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           lower
           Belly
           ,
           which
           is
           wholly
           fleshy
           ,
           and
           therefore
           alwayes
           the
           fattest
           part
           of
           the
           body
           ;
           the
           middle
           belly
           or
           Cavity
           is
           indifferently
           stored
           with
           Fat
           ;
           the
           Head
           is
           least
           fat
           of
           all
           .
           But
           the
           fat
           it self
           being
           otherwise
           white
           ,
           is
           wont
           in
           the
           chest
           to
           appear
           a
           little
           more
           yellow
           then
           ordinary
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           heat
           of
           the
           vital
           Parts
           which
           lye
           under
           the
           same
           ▪
        
         
           The
           proper
           Parts
           besides
           the
           Muscles
           ,
           Bones
           ,
           &c.
           are
           the
           Dugs
           of
           both
           Sexes
           ,
           
           the
           Midriff
           ,
           the
           Membrane
           of
           the
           Sides
           termed
           Pleura
           ,
           and
           the
           Mediastinum
           or
           Partition-wall
           .
        
         
           The
           Parts
           contained
           are
           the
           Bowels
           and
           Vessels
           .
           The
           Bowels
           ,
           are
           the
           Heart
           with
           its
           Heart-bag
           or
           Pericardium
           ,
           the
           Lungs
           and
           part
           of
           the
           Wesand
           or
           Wind-pipe
           ,
           o●
           
             aspera
             Arteria
          
           .
           The
           Vessels
           are
           
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Venae
             cava
             and
             Arteria
             magna
             ,
          
           underpropped
           with
           the
           Thymus
           or
           Kernel
           in
           the
           Throat
           .
           and
           sundry
           Nerves
           .
        
         
           
           
             
               Chap.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Dugs
             .
          
           
             ACcording
             to
             our
             Anatomical
             Method
             ,
             
             the
             first
             Parts
             in
             the
             Chest
             which
             we
             dissect
             ,
             as
             soon
             as
             we
             have
             done
             with
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             are
             the
             Dugs
             .
             Now
             we
             shall
             treat
             of
             the
             Dugs
             of
             Women
             ,
             casting
             in
             between
             while
             ,
             wherein
             those
             of
             Men
             differ
             therefrom
             .
          
           
             The
             Scituation
             of
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Brest
             ,
             above
             the
             Pectoral
             
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             draws
             to
             the
             Shoulder
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             of
             the
             nearness
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             receive
             heat
             .
             2.
             
             For
             Comeliness
             sake
             .
             3.
             
             For
             the
             more
             convenient
             giving
             of
             suck
             :
             because
             the
             Infant
             cannot
             presently
             walk
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             Brutes
             ,
             but
             being
             embraced
             in
             his
             Mothers
             Arms
             ,
             it
             is
             applied
             to
             the
             Dugs
             .
             No
             other
             Creatures
             have
             Dugs
             in
             their
             Breasts
             saving
             the
             Apes
             ,
             who
             hold
             their
             young
             ones
             in
             their
             Arms
             likewise
             .
             Laurentius
             tells
             us
             the
             Elephant
             does
             the
             like
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             sayes
             as
             much
             of
             the
             Bat
             or
             Flitter-mouse
             .
             Some
             great
             Sea-fishes
             of
             the
             Whale-kind
             have
             Dugs
             on
             their
             Brests
             ,
             full
             of
             Milk
             ,
             as
             we
             lately
             observed
             in
             a
             Whale
             that
             came
             out
             of
             Norwey
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             two
             in
             Number
             :
             not
             because
             of
             Twins
             ;
             but
             that
             one
             being
             hurt
             ,
             the
             
             other
             might
             supply
             its
             Office.
             Howbeit
             Varro
             reports
             ,
             that
             Sows
             will
             have
             so
             many
             Pigs
             as
             they
             have
             teats
             .
             Walaeus
             in
             a
             certain
             woman
             observed
             three
             Dugs
             ,
             two
             on
             the
             left
             side
             of
             her
             Brest
             ,
             and
             one
             on
             the
             right
             .
             And
             Cabrolius
             observed
             in
             a
             certain
             woman
             four
             Dugs
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             two
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             their
             Magnitude
             .
             In
             Girls
             new
             born
             ,
             there
             is
             only
             a
             Print
             or
             Mark
             visible
             
             on
             the
             brest
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             by
             little
             and
             little
             it
             swells
             ,
             and
             in
             little
             wenches
             hardly
             any
             thing
             appears
             beside
             the
             teats
             ,
             untill
             by
             degrees
             they
             grow
             to
             the
             bigness
             and
             shape
             of
             Apples
             ;
             and
             when
             they
             are
             raised
             two
             fingers
             high
             ,
             their
             Courses
             begin
             to
             flow
             .
             In
             old
             women
             they
             wither
             away
             ,
             so
             that
             nothing
             appears
             but
             the
             Nipples
             ,
             the
             Fat
             and
             Kernels
             being
             consumed
             .
          
           
             In
             women
             they
             swel
             more
             ,
             and
             in
             women
             with
             child
             the
             last
             moneths
             ,
             they
             are
             more
             and
             more
             encreased
             .
          
           
             In
             men
             they
             do
             not
             rise
             so
             high
             as
             in
             women
             ,
             because
             ordinarily
             they
             were
             
             not
             to
             breed
             milk
             [
             yet
             because
             of
             the
             equality
             of
             the
             kind
             ,
             it
             was
             convenient
             that
             men
             should
             have
             them
             as
             well
             as
             women
             .
             ]
             And
             therefore
             in
             men
             ,
             the
             Dugs
             are
             commonly
             without
             Kernels
             :
             yet
             in
             burly
             people
             ,
             the
             Fat
             which
             is
             under
             them
             raised
             the
             breasts
             .
             In
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Sengea
             ,
             the
             Dugs
             of
             women
             hang
             as
             low
             as
             their
             Bellies
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             Isle
             of
             Arnabo
             ,
             't
             is
             said
             they
             turn
             them
             over
             their
             shoulders
             to
             their
             backs
             ,
             and
             there
             suckle
             their
             children
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             is
             roundish
             .
             They
             represent
             as
             it
             were
             an
             half
             Globe
             .
             And
             in
             
             some
             because
             of
             their
             over-great
             weight
             they
             hang
             down
             .
          
           
             The
             Dug
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             Nipple
             
             and
             the
             Dug
             it self
             .
             For
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Dug
             there
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             a
             peculiar
             Substance
             ,
             which
             ,
          
           
             Is
             called
             Papilla
             ,
             the
             Teat
             or
             Nipple
             ,
             being
             spungy
             ,
             like
             the
             Nut
             of
             a
             
             Mans
             Yard
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             will
             fall
             and
             rise
             when
             it
             is
             suckt
             or
             handled
             .
             For
             it
             hath
             an
             excellent
             and
             exquisite
             Sense
             of
             feeling
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             Centre
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             Nerves
             ▪
             Veins
             ,
             and
             Arteries
             do
             meet
             .
             Which
             is
             apparent
             from
             the
             Delicacy
             of
             its
             Sense
             ,
             and
             the
             redness
             of
             its
             color
             ,
             a
             sure
             token
             of
             Blood
             brought
             in
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Concourse
             whereof
             ,
             Chyrurgeons
             do
             judg
             Cancers
             and
             other
             Tumors
             about
             the
             Nipple
             pernicious
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             believes
             that
             the
             Skin
             is
             doubled
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             compressed
             :
             but
             the
             doubling
             would
             make
             it
             thicker
             .
             But
             the
             Skin
             is
             exceeding
             tender
             ,
             easily
             rubbed
             off
             ,
             and
             apt
             to
             be
             pained
             when
             the
             Child
             sucks
             very
             freely
             .
             Only
             in
             old
             women
             it
             grows
             thick
             .
             Not
             is
             the
             Nipple
             any
             other
             where
             made
             of
             the
             Skin
             straitned
             or
             folded
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Nipples
             turn
             upwards
             ,
             a
             Male
             child
             is
             in
             the
             Mothers
             womb
             ,
             if
             downwards
             a
             Girl
             according
             to
             the
             Tradition
             of
             Hypocrates
             ,
             which
             hath
             not
             been
             as
             yet
             ratified
             by
             the
             confession
             of
             women
             with
             child
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             Number
             ,
             there
             is
             one
             Nipple
             on
             each
             Dug
             .
             Hollerius
             saw
             two
             Nipples
             upon
             one
             Dug
             ,
             which
             both
             yielded
             Milk.
             
          
           
             Their
             Colour
             in
             Virgins
             is
             red
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             give
             suck
             it
             enclines
             to
             black
             and
             blew
             ,
             and
             in
             them
             also
             they
             are
             more
             sticking
             out
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Infants
             sucking
             ;
             in
             such
             as
             are
             past
             Child-bearing
             ,
             the
             Nipples
             are
             of
             a
             black
             color
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             Circle
             round
             about
             them
             which
             is
             called
             Areola
             the
             little
             Parsley-bed
             ,
             in
             Virgins
             pale
             and
             knotty
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             are
             with
             child
             and
             give
             suck
             ,
             brown
             ,
             in
             old
             women
             black
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             bored
             through
             the
             middle
             ,
             with
             very
             small
             holes
             for
             the
             Milk
             to
             pass
             through
             :
             For
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Nipple
             is
             to
             be
             instead
             of
             a
             Pipe
             or
             Funnel
             ,
             to
             put
             into
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             Infant
             ,
             whereout
             it
             may
             suck
             the
             Milk
             :
             Secondly
             ,
             to
             serve
             for
             a
             pleasing
             Titillation
             ,
             whereby
             Mothers
             and
             Nurses
             are
             enticed
             the
             more
             willingly
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             certain
             Sense
             of
             pleasure
             to
             give
             their
             children
             suck
             .
          
           
             The
             Dugs
             do
             inwardly
             consist
             of
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             
             Vessels
             ,
             Kernels
             ,
             or
             rather
             kernellish
             Bodies
             ,
             and
             Fat
             :
             though
             the
             two
             last
             do
             chiefly
             make
             up
             the
             Dugs
             ;
             the
             Kernels
             and
             Fat
             lye
             concealed
             between
             the
             Membrane
             and
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             fleshy
             Membrane
             does
             fasten
             the
             kernellish
             Substance
             which
             it
             compasses
             ,
             unto
             the
             Muscles
             which
             lye
             thereunder
             .
          
           
             The
             Kernels
             are
             many
             :
             In
             Virgins
             more
             hard
             ,
             in
             old
             women
             consumed
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             are
             with
             child
             and
             give
             suck
             ,
             more
             swelling
             and
             pappie
             .
             Yet
             there
             is
             one
             great
             one
             ,
             just
             under
             the
             Nipple
             ,
             which
             the
             other
             lesser
             ones
             do
             compass
             about
             ,
             and
             infinite
             textures
             of
             Vessels
             lye
             between
             them
             .
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             a
             womans
             Dug
             to
             consist
             of
             one
             continued
             Kernel
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             many
             ,
             the
             contrary
             whereto
             we
             see
             in
             scirrhous
             and
             cancerous
             Tumors
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             to
             turn
             Blood
             into
             Milk.
             And
             the
             use
             of
             the
             fat
             of
             the
             Dug
             is
             to
             encrease
             heat
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             the
             Dug
             of
             an
             even
             round
             shape
             .
             And
             therefore
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Fat
             consumed
             by
             some
             Disease
             or
             old
             Age
             ,
             they
             hang
             ill
             favoredly
             like
             empty
             Bladders
             ,
             and
             are
             unfit
             to
             make
             Milk.
             
          
           
             The
             Vessels
             .
             The
             Dugs
             receive
             their
             Skin
             and
             external
             Veins
             from
             the
             Axillary
             ,
             which
             are
             called
             the
             
               Thoracicae
               Superiores
               ,
               the
               upper
               Chest-veins
               ,
            
             which
             in
             women
             with
             child
             and
             such
             as
             give
             suck
             ,
             are
             often
             black
             and
             blew
             visible
             .
             They
             receive
             other
             internal
             Veins
             ,
             brought
             thither
             a
             long
             way
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             might
             be
             the
             longer
             therein
             wrought
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Mammariae
             
             Venae
             or
             Dug-veins
             ,
             which
             descend
             
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Axillary
             Vein
             ,
             under
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             to
             the
             Glandules
             or
             Kernels
             of
             the
             Dugs
             .
             These
             are
             met
             by
             other
             ascendent
             Veins
             ,
             by
             the
             right
             Muscles
             ,
             of
             which
             before
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Infant
             being
             born
             ,
             the
             Blood
             is
             carried
             no
             longer
             
             to
             the
             womb
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             and
             is
             turned
             into
             Milk.
             And
             hence
             it
             is
             that
             women
             which
             give
             suck
             ,
             have
             seldom
             their
             Courses
             .
             Hence
             also
             ,
             when
             the
             Children
             suck
             over-much
             ,
             Blood
             comes
             out
             at
             the
             nipples
             .
             Yea
             ,
             it
             hath
             been
             observed
             that
             a
             womans
             courses
             have
             come
             away
             through
             her
             Dugs
             ,
             and
             Milk
             by
             her
             womb
             ;
             howbeit
             ,
             this
             is
             a
             rare
             chance
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Matter
             of
             Milk
             ,
             be
             it
             what
             it
             will
             ,
             cannot
             according
             to
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             Bloods
             Circulation
             ,
             be
             carried
             by
             the
             Veins
             to
             the
             Dugs
             .
             The
             
               Venae
               mammariae
            
             or
             Dug-veins
             ,
             do
             only
             carry
             back
             what
             remains
             superfluous
             ,
             after
             the
             Child
             is
             nourished
             ,
             and
             Milk
             made
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             they
             are
             seldome
             joyned
             with
             the
             Epigastrick
             Veins
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             too
             few
             and
             small
             ,
             alone
             to
             carry
             so
             much
             blood
             from
             the
             womb
             ,
             as
             may
             suffice
             a
             Child
             that
             is
             a
             liberal
             Sucker
             .
          
           
             Their
             Arteries
             proceed
             from
             the
             upper
             Trunk
             of
             the
             great
             Artery
             :
             and
             
             from
             the
             Subclavian
             branches
             ,
             which
             are
             joyned
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             with
             the
             Epigastrick
             Arteries
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
             The
             
               Th
               racicae
               Arteriae
            
             or
             Chest
             arteries
             ,
             so
             plentifully
             and
             evidently
             ,
             that
             in
             cancerous
             Tumors
             of
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             a
             woman
             hath
             bled
             to
             death
             by
             them
             ,
             of
             which
             case
             I
             remember
             some
             Examples
             .
             Hence
             it
             seems
             more
             likely
             ,
             blood
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             Dugs
             to
             make
             Milk
             ,
             which
             blood
             being
             consumed
             in
             fat
             and
             elderly
             women
             they
             are
             therefore
             none
             of
             the
             best
             Nurses
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             women
             which
             give
             suck
             ,
             receive
             great
             damage
             by
             loosing
             their
             blood
             ;
             contrariwise
             they
             are
             advantaged
             ,
             by
             whatever
             may
             draw
             and
             provoke
             their
             blood
             to
             their
             Dugs
             ,
             as
             by
             rubbing
             them
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Now
             
               Prosper
               Martianus
            
             and
             
               Petrus
               Castellus
            
             do
             maintain
             out
             of
             Hypocrates
             ,
             that
             
             the
             matter
             of
             Milk
             is
             twofold
             ,
             viz.
             Blood
             and
             Chyle
             :
             and
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             matter
             thereof
             ,
             is
             pressed
             out
             of
             Meats
             and
             Drinks
             ,
             not
             yet
             digested
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             into
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             by
             the
             Child
             swelling
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             after
             the
             Child
             is
             born
             ,
             by
             the
             passages
             made
             wide
             by
             sucking
             :
             and
             that
             another
             small
             part
             is
             made
             of
             blood
             ascending
             from
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             is
             rather
             to
             be
             reckoned
             as
             an
             Efficient
             cause
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             Heat
             ,
             then
             of
             a
             Material
             cause
             .
          
           
             That
             Blood
             alone
             is
             not
             the
             matter
             of
             Milk
             ,
             besides
             the
             Authority
             of
             Hypocrates
             ,
             they
             prove
             ,
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Otherwise
               it
               were
               impossible
               that
               a
               woman
               should
               live
               ,
               voiding
               two
               pounds
               of
               blood
               every
               day
               ,
               in
               the
               form
               of
               Milk.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               When
               a
               woman
               gives
               suck
               ,
               her
               Courses
               flow
               ,
               which
               in
               the
               first
               moneths
               of
               her
               going
               with
               child
               ,
               are
               suppressed
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               When
               a
               woman
               left
               breeding
               Milk
               ,
               she
               would
               fall
               into
               a
               dangerous
               Pl●thory
               ,
               or
               fulness
               of
               Blood.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               There
               would
               be
               no
               Child-bed
               Purgations
               at
               all
               ,
               the
               Milk
               being
               so
               violently
               carried
               into
               the
               Dugs
               ,
               the
               second
               day
               after
               Child-birth
               ,
               that
               it
               causes
               a
               Feaver
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Nature
               would
               then
               have
               framed
               greater
               Vessels
               from
               the
               womb
               unto
               the
               Dugs
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               Milk
               would
               not
               retain
               the
               smell
               ,
               and
               vertue
               or
               operation
               of
               the
               Meats
               eaten
               ,
               because
               these
               things
               are
               changed
               in
               the
               blood
               .
            
             
               7
               The
               Blood
               collected
               into
               the
               Dugs
               ,
               does
               breed
               Madness
               .
               
                 Aphor.
                 40.
                 
                 Sect.
              
               5.
               
            
          
           
             But
             that
             it
             depends
             upon
             the
             Stomach
             
             and
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             these
             following
             Reasons
             evince
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               force
               and
               efficacy
               of
               Purgatives
               ,
               is
               after
               some
               hours
               violently
               carried
               into
               the
               Dugs
               ,
               as
               divers
               Experiments
               do
               teach
               .
               Yea
               and
               our
               Country-women
               ,
               when
               children
               that
               have
               the
               cough
               ,
               suck
               at
               their
               breasts
               ,
               they
               drink
               pectoral
               Decoctions
               ,
               and
               believe
               that
               the
               sucking
               child
               does
               presently
               draw
               them
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               If
               a
               Nurse
               do
               swallow
               an
               hair
               in
               her
               meat
               and
               drink
               ;
               it
               comes
               into
               her
               Dugs
               according
               to
               Aristotle
               ,
               and
               sticking
               in
               the
               Nipples
               ,
               it
               causes
               the
               Disease
               Trichiasis
               or
               
                 Hair
                 in
                 the
                 Nipple
              
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               A
               branch
               of
               Cichory
               according
               to
               the
               Observation
               of
               Martianus
               ,
               hath
               come
               out
               of
               a
               womans
               Dug
               ,
               which
               she
               had
               eaten
               the
               night
               before
               at
               Supper
               :
               and
               bran
               hath
               been
               seen
               in
               the
               Excrements
               of
               a
               child
               that
               only
               lived
               with
               sucking
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Nurses
               perceive
               as
               soon
               as
               ever
               they
               have
               eaten
               and
               drunken
               ,
               the
               going
               down
               of
               the
               Milk
               ,
               and
               the
               swelling
               fulness
               of
               their
               Dugs
               .
               Yea
               ,
               and
               our
               Nurses
               are
               extraordinary
               careful
               not
               to
               eat
               ,
               while
               they
               give
               their
               children
               suck
               ,
               for
               otherwise
               the
               children
               should
               suck
               undigested
               Milk.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               Castellus
               pleads
               their
               Scituation
               over
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               not
               near
               the
               Liver
               or
               Womb
               ,
               excepting
               in
               beasts
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               Milk
               is
               colder
               then
               the
               Blood
               ,
               and
               leaves
               more
               Excrement
               in
               her
               that
               gives
               suck
               ,
               then
               blood
               does
               in
               the
               Embryo
               or
               child
               in
               the
               womb
               .
            
          
           
             Howbeit
             we
             find
             many
             difficulties
             in
             this
             new
             Opinion
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             no
             small
             moment
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               There
               are
               no
               manifest
               passages
               from
               
               the
               Stomach
               to
               the
               Dugs
               ,
               which
               if
               any
               man
               can
               find
               ,
               I
               shall
               willingly
               acknowledg
               my self
               convinced
               .
               Martianus
               ,
               indeed
               ,
               
                 Castellus
                 ,
                 Vestingus
              
               ,
               and
               Horstius
               do
               talk
               of
               invisible
               passages
               ,
               like
               the
               milkie
               Veins
               ,
               which
               cannot
               be
               discerned
               in
               a
               dead
               body
               ;
               or
               at
               least
               they
               conceive
               the
               Pores
               of
               the
               flesh
               may
               suffice
               to
               admit
               a
               passage
               for
               milkie
               Vapors
               .
               But
               the
               Pores
               seem
               too
               narrow
               for
               thick
               Chyle
               to
               pass
               through
               ,
               which
               in
               the
               Mesentery
               did
               require
               large
               milkie
               Veins
               ,
               which
               any
               body
               may
               discern
               .
               A
               subtile
               Spirit
               and
               thin
               Vapors
               with
               smoakie
               steams
               ,
               do
               pass
               through
               the
               Pores
               ,
               and
               not
               the
               Chylus
               ,
               nor
               blood
               ,
               according
               to
               Nature
               ;
               for
               if
               so
               ,
               then
               there
               were
               no
               use
               of
               Vessels
               .
               Nor
               is
               the
               Infant
               satisfied
               only
               with
               Vapors
               .
               I
               willingly
               acknowledg
               ,
               that
               Nature
               endeavors
               the
               translation
               of
               Humors
               from
               one
               part
               to
               another
               by
               unknown
               wayes
               ,
               but
               she
               does
               it
               compelled
               ,
               and
               besides
               her
               customary
               Course
               ,
               whereas
               the
               breeding
               of
               Milk
               is
               a
               constant
               and
               ordinary
               thing
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Dugs
               being
               heated
               by
               any
               other
               cause
               whatsoever
               ,
               do
               not
               breed
               Milk
               ,
               but
               the
               action
               is
               hindred
               by
               the
               said
               Heat
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Nurses
               confess
               ,
               that
               after
               they
               have
               drunk
               ,
               the
               Milk
               does
               manifestly
               descend
               out
               of
               their
               backs
               ,
               and
               from
               about
               their
               Channel-bones
               ,
               and
               puts
               them
               to
               some
               little
               pain
               .
               For
               there
               the
               Chest-arteries
               are
               seated
               ,
               and
               not
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               A
               tender
               Infant
               should
               be
               ill
               nourished
               with
               undigested
               meat
               ,
               having
               been
               vsed
               to
               be
               nourished
               with
               blood
               before
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Out
               of
               the
               Nipples
               of
               Children
               newly
               come
               out
               of
               the
               Womb
               ,
               before
               the
               use
               of
               meat
               ,
               a
               wheyish
               matter
               drops
               like
               Milk
               ,
               before
               they
               have
               eaten
               any
               meat
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               What
               shall
               we
               say
               to
               that
               Aphorism
               of
               Hypocrates
               ?
               
               
                 If
                 a
                 Woman
                 want
                 her
                 Courses
                 ,
                 neither
                 any
                 shivering
                 o
                 Feaver
                 following
                 thereupon
                 ,
                 and
                 she
                 loath
                 her
                 Meat
                 :
                 Make
                 account
                 that
                 she
                 is
                 with
                 Child
                 .
              
            
             
               7.
               
               Cows
               ,
               when
               they
               eat
               grass
               after
               hay
               ,
               or
               hay
               after
               grass
               ,
               before
               the
               fifteenth
               day
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               perfect
               change
               either
               in
               the
               Constitution
               or
               colour
               of
               their
               Milk
               or
               Butter
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Observation
               of
               Walaeus
               ;
               yet
               they
               perfectly
               change
               their
               Chyle
               the
               first
               day
               ,
               but
               their
               Blood
               more
               slowly
               .
               Also
               our
               Nurses
               observe
               ,
               that
               after
               they
               have
               slept
               ,
               and
               their
               Meat
               is
               digested
               ,
               their
               Dugs
               make
               Milk
               ,
               which
               does
               not
               so
               happen
               ,
               if
               they
               want
               sleep
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               Hogeland
               proves
               by
               Famines
               and
               Seiges
               ,
               that
               when
               all
               the
               Nutriment
               of
               the
               Nurse
               is
               turned
               into
               perfect
               blood
               ,
               yet
               nevertheless
               Milk
               is
               bred
               in
               the
               Dugs
               .
            
          
           
             Wherefore
             until
             some
             diligent
             hand
             shall
             have
             found
             evident
             wayes
             and
             passages
             ,
             
             for
             the
             Answering
             of
             the
             contrary
             Arguments
             :
             You
             are
             to
             Note
             .
             1.
             
             That
             we
             admit
             of
             the
             Chyle
             as
             the
             remote
             matter
             of
             Milk
             ,
             but
             not
             as
             the
             immediate
             matter
             thereof
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Blood
             being
             plentifully
             evacuated
             by
             the
             Milk
             ,
             is
             bred
             again
             by
             plentiful
             meat
             and
             drink
             ;
             and
             therefore
             the
             plenty
             of
             Milk
             ceases
             when
             there
             is
             little
             drink
             taken
             in
             ,
             as
             all
             Nurses
             do
             testifie
             .
             Morcover
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             of
             a
             Sanguin
             complexion
             afford
             most
             Milk
             ,
             whereas
             those
             that
             are
             of
             a
             tender
             constitution
             grow
             lean
             by
             giving
             Suck
             .
             3.
             
             That
             all
             the
             blood
             which
             is
             poured
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             is
             not
             turned
             into
             Milk
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             more
             wheyish
             part
             ,
             a
             great
             deal
             running
             back
             by
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             4.
             
             That
             Women
             which
             give
             suck
             have
             their
             Courses
             ,
             because
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Womb
             are
             then
             more
             enlarged
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             first
             moneths
             of
             their
             going
             with
             Child
             :
             and
             ever
             and
             anon
             they
             flow
             sparingly
             from
             Nurses
             ,
             and
             leave
             off
             by
             fits
             .
             Also
             Women
             that
             give
             suck
             seldom
             conceive
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             of
             a
             Plethorick
             habit
             of
             body
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             full
             of
             good
             blood
             .
             Our
             Women
             when
             they
             would
             wean
             a
             Boy
             ,
             if
             their
             Dugs
             swell
             ,
             they
             do
             by
             certain
             Medicines
             keep
             back
             the
             Milk
             ,
             by
             straitning
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             that
             the
             matter
             thereof
             may
             not
             enter
             nor
             be
             drawn
             that
             way
             .
             6.
             
             That
             the
             Breast
             and
             Dug-Arteries
             are
             large
             ,
             and
             are
             more
             and
             more
             widened
             by
             continual
             sucking
             .
             7.
             
             That
             the
             Milk
             doth
             drink
             in
             the
             faculty
             of
             Meats
             and
             Purgatives
             ,
             even
             by
             mediation
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             which
             conserves
             the
             color
             and
             faculty
             of
             the
             meats
             ,
             though
             sundry
             digestions
             have
             preceded
             ;
             though
             vapors
             alone
             be
             raised
             ,
             and
             the
             substance
             ascend
             not
             .
             8.
             
             That
             many
             things
             are
             performed
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             singular
             constitution
             of
             particular
             persons
             ,
             yea
             and
             many
             things
             which
             rarely
             happen
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             Milk
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             Dugs
             of
             that
             Man
             at
             Cous
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             things
             thence
             voided
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             are
             carried
             from
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             especially
             the
             fift
             ,
             for
             to
             cause
             
             sense
             ,
             and
             they
             end
             in
             the
             Nipple
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             Vessels
             ,
             the
             Dugs
             have
             also
             white
             Pipes
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             
             of
             later
             Anatomists
             ,
             springing
             from
             the
             whole
             Circumference
             of
             the
             lower
             part
             which
             growing
             narrower
             ,
             do
             alwayes
             meet
             together
             ,
             wherein
             Milk
             being
             made
             ,
             is
             preserved
             for
             use
             .
             Whether
             or
             no
             they
             are
             nothing
             but
             widened
             Arteries
             ,
             becoming
             white
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             change
             of
             the
             milk
             and
             the
             bordering
             kernels
             (
             which
             I
             am
             willing
             to
             believe
             )
             I
             leave
             to
             acuter
             Eyes
             and
             Wits
             to
             determine
             .
             They
             treasure
             up
             the
             Milk
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             occasion
             of
             omitting
             to
             give
             the
             Infant
             suck
             :
             and
             when
             that
             use
             is
             over
             ,
             they
             grow
             as
             small
             as
             the
             most
             Capillary
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             General
             in
             Women
             and
             Men
             ,
             to
             be
             safeguards
             to
             the
             
             Heart
             :
             hence
             Nature
             hath
             given
             Men
             of
             cold
             Complexions
             larger
             Dugs
             then
             ordinary
             ;
             and
             Women
             that
             loose
             their
             Dugs
             become
             rough-voiced
             ,
             according
             to
             Hypocrates
             .
             Nor
             doth
             the
             pectoral
             Muscle
             hinder
             ,
             which
             performs
             the
             same
             Office
             ,
             which
             is
             Riolanus
             his
             Objection
             ;
             for
             the
             more
             noble
             parts
             require
             great
             fencing
             ,
             even
             by
             the
             smallest
             thing
             ,
             as
             the
             Eyes
             from
             the
             Eye-brows
             ,
             the
             Heart
             from
             the
             water
             in
             the
             Heart-bag
             or
             Pericardium
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             II.
             In
             women
             their
             use
             is
             to
             breed
             Milk
             ,
             to
             nourish
             the
             young
             Infant
             .
             For
             the
             Child
             was
             nourisht
             by
             blood
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             milk
             is
             the
             same
             blood
             only
             whitened
             ,
             so
             that
             Nature
             seems
             to
             have
             put
             a
             trick
             upon
             living
             Creatures
             by
             obtruding
             upon
             them
             the
             gentler
             appearance
             of
             white
             milk
             ,
             in
             place
             of
             red
             blood
             ,
             as
             Plato
             hath
             it
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             Cause
             that
             the
             People
             of
             Savoy
             and
             Daulphine
             did
             anciently
             prohibit
             their
             Preists
             ,
             the
             use
             of
             milk
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Now
             the
             Efficient
             Cause
             of
             milk
             ,
             
             is
             not
             the
             Womb
             ,
             where
             milk
             was
             never
             observed
             ,
             nor
             do
             the
             Dugs
             breed
             milk
             ,
             by
             that
             vertue
             thereof
             which
             it self
             wants
             ;
             nor
             of
             the
             Veins
             or
             Arteries
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             the
             nearest
             ,
             can
             the
             vertue
             be
             communicated
             from
             the
             Dugs
             .
             For
             as
             for
             what
             Baronius
             relates
             of
             St.
             Paul
             ,
             how
             when
             he
             was
             beheaded
             ,
             not
             blood
             but
             milk
             ran
             from
             his
             Neck
             ,
             either
             it
             was
             a
             miracle
             ,
             if
             true
             ;
             or
             a
             serous
             humor
             flowed
             out
             ,
             which
             sometimes
             flows
             from
             the
             Arm
             ,
             when
             a
             Vein
             is
             opened
             ,
             and
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             very
             like
             to
             milk
             ,
             or
             finally
             the
             Liquor
             of
             Kernels
             being
             cut
             ,
             did
             resemble
             milk
             .
             But
             the
             true
             efficient
             cause
             of
             the
             milk
             ,
             is
             that
             same
             kernelly
             flesh
             of
             the
             Dugs
             ,
             unto
             which
             there
             is
             none
             like
             ,
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             .
             Now
             it
             works
             this
             moderate
             Concoction
             by
             the
             propriety
             of
             its
             substance
             ,
             and
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             proper
             temperament
             .
             
               Aulus
               Gellius
            
             conceives
             the
             milk
             becomes
             white
             ,
             by
             Reason
             of
             plenty
             of
             heat
             and
             spirit
             Book
             12.
             
             Chap.
             1.
             
             But
             I
             am
             more
             enclined
             to
             believe
             ,
             that
             milk
             is
             white
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             assimilated
             to
             the
             Dugs
             that
             are
             of
             the
             same
             color
             .
          
           
             Somtimes
             therefore
             (
             though
             it
             
             happen
             seldom
             )
             milk
             may
             be
             bred
             in
             Virgins
             ,
             and
             in
             Women
             not
             with
             Child
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Bodinus
             in
             his
             Theatre
             of
             Nature
             ,
             of
             
               Joachinus
               Camerarius
            
             in
             Schenkius
             ,
             of
             
               Petrus
               Castell●s
            
             touching
             one
             Angela
             of
             Messina
             ,
             of
             
               A.
               Benedictus
            
             and
             Christopher
             a
             Vega
             concerning
             a
             Girle
             of
             Bridges
             ,
             and
             of
             others
             .
             In
             Scania
             in
             our
             Country
             ,
             a
             maid
             was
             lately
             accused
             to
             have
             plaid
             the
             Whore
             ,
             because
             she
             had
             milk
             in
             her
             Dugs
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             she
             proved
             to
             be
             a
             propriety
             of
             her
             Family
             ,
             by
             producing
             her
             young
             brother
             who
             likewise
             had
             milk
             in
             his
             Breasts
             .
             Infants
             new
             born
             shed
             a
             wheyish
             milky
             liquor
             out
             of
             their
             Nipples
             .
             These
             examples
             are
             confirmed
             by
             the
             Authority
             o●
             Hypocrates
             in
             the
             39.
             
             Aphorism
             of
             his
             
               fifth
               Section
            
             ,
             where
             Women
             have
             milk
             though
             neither
             with
             Child
             ,
             nor
             lately
             delivered
             .
             And
             this
             happens
             ,
             when
             the
             Dugs
             are
             filled
             with
             abundance
             of
             spirituous
             blood
             ,
             and
             suppression
             of
             Courses
             be
             joyned
             thereto
             :
             for
             then
             the
             Glandulous
             substance
             digests
             more
             then
             is
             necessary
             to
             nourish
             the
             Woman
             .
             Yea
             ,
             in
             men
             that
             are
             fleshy
             ,
             large-dug'd
             ,
             and
             cold
             ,
             of
             constitution
             ,
             a
             milky
             humor
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             milk
             is
             frequently
             seen
             ;
             especially
             if
             their
             Nipples
             be
             frequently
             suck'r
             ,
             and
             their
             Dugs
             rubbed
             ,
             as
             
             the
             examples
             of
             many
             do
             testfie
             .
             Aristotle
             writes
             of
             a
             certain
             Hee-goat
             in
             the
             I
             stand
             Le●…s
             ,
             who
             yeilded
             so
             much
             milk
             ,
             that
             C●rds
             were
             made
             thereof
             .
             Matthiolus
             ,
             tels
             us
             that
             in
             sundry
             places
             of
             Bohemia
             ,
             three
             Goat-Bucks
             were
             found
             ,
             that
             gave
             milk
             ,
             by
             which
             persons
             that
             had
             the
             Falling-sickness
             were
             Cured
             .
             Others
             have
             seen
             Men
             ,
             out
             of
             whose
             Dugs
             store
             of
             milk
             came
             .
             Aben-sina
             saw
             so
             much
             milk
             milked
             from
             a
             Man
             ,
             that
             a
             Cheese
             was
             made
             thereof
             .
             
               C.
               Schenkius
            
             relates
             that
             
               Laurentius
               Wolfius
            
             had
             store
             of
             milk
             in
             his
             Breasts
             ,
             from
             his
             youth
             ,
             till
             he
             was
             fifty
             years
             old
             .
             
               Jo.
               Rhodius
            
             had
             such
             an
             Host
             in
             England
             ,
             and
             Santorellus
             knew
             a
             Calabrian
             ,
             who
             his
             Wife
             being
             dead
             ,
             and
             he
             unable
             to
             give
             wages
             to
             a
             Nurse
             ,
             did
             nourish
             his
             own
             Child
             with
             his
             own
             milk
             .
             Walaeus
             saw
             a
             Flemming
             of
             like
             Nature
             ,
             who
             being
             even
             forty
             years
             of
             Age
             ,
             could
             milk
             abundance
             of
             milk
             out
             of
             huge
             Dugs
             which
             he
             had
             .
             
               A.
               Benedictus
            
             relates
             the
             story
             of
             a
             Father
             that
             gave
             his
             Son
             suck
             .
             And
             
               Nicolaus
               Gemma
               ,
               Vesalius
               ,
               M.
               Donatus
               ,
               Aqua-pendens
               ,
               H.
               Eugubius
               ,
               Baricellus
               ,
            
             do
             witness
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             and
             I
             have
             allready
             told
             you
             as
             much
             of
             a
             Boy
             of
             Scania
             in
             our
             Countrey
             of
             Denmarke
             ,
             and
             Cardan
             saw
             a
             man
             thirty
             four
             years
             old
             ,
             out
             of
             whose
             Dugs
             so
             much
             milk
             did
             run
             ,
             as
             would
             have
             suffised
             to
             suckle
             a
             Child
             .
             They
             relate
             how
             that
             in
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             all
             men
             well-near
             abound
             with
             milk
             .
             Now
             that
             this
             was
             true
             milk
             which
             we
             have
             related
             did
             run
             from
             men
             ,
             is
             hence
             apparent
             because
             ,
             it
             was
             as
             fit
             to
             nourish
             children
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Women
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Dugs
             in
             Women
             is
             to
             adorne
             them
             ,
             and
             render
             them
             the
             more
             delectable
             to
             Men.
             
          
           
             IV.
             They
             serve
             to
             receive
             Excrementious
             moisture
             .
             Whereupon
             their
             Dugs
             being
             cut
             off
             ,
             Women
             incur
             sundry
             Diseases
             ;
             because
             the
             blood
             which
             ascends
             finding
             no
             Vessels
             to
             receive
             it
             ,
             runs
             hastily
             into
             the
             principal
             parts
             ,
             the
             Heart
             ,
             Lungs
             ,
             &c
             ,
             Which
             danger
             I
             conceive
             the
             Amazones
             did
             study
             to
             avoid
             ,
             by
             their
             so
             vehement
             exercising
             themselves
             in
             warfare
             .
             Some
             cut
             the
             Dug
             off
             when
             it
             is
             cancered
             ,
             but
             the
             operation
             is
             dangerous
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             bleeding
             which
             follows
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
            
             Of
             the
             Intercostal
             ,
             or
             Rib-between
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             SUndry
             Muscles
             which
             we
             meet
             
             within
             the
             Chest
             shall
             be
             first
             of
             all
             explained
             in
             the
             fourth
             Book
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Method
             of
             Section
             .
             But
             the
             Intercostal
             or
             Rib-between
             Muscles
             ,
             so
             called
             ;
             because
             they
             are
             interwoven
             between
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             must
             be
             explained
             in
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             are
             totally
             fleshy
             ,
             forty
             four
             in
             number
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             two
             and
             
             twenty
             ;
             eleven
             external
             ;
             and
             as
             many
             internal
             .
             For
             evermore
             between
             two
             Ribs
             ,
             two
             Muscles
             rest
             one
             upon
             another
             :
             and
             there
             are
             eleven
             Intervals
             or
             Spaces
             between
             the
             Ribs
             .
             Others
             have
             done
             ill
             to
             make
             their
             Number
             
             sixty
             eight
             .
             For
             in
             the
             Intervals
             of
             the
             true
             Ribs
             ,
             they
             have
             made
             divers
             Muscles
             lying
             hid
             between
             the
             boney
             parts
             of
             those
             Ribs
             ,
             differing
             from
             those
             which
             are
             found
             between
             the
             Gristley
             parts
             .
          
           
             The
             External
             ones
             arise
             from
             the
             lower
             parts
             of
             the
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             descending
             obliquely
             towards
             the
             back-parts
             ,
             they
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             upper
             parts
             of
             the
             lower
             Ribs
             .
             The
             Internal
             contrary
             wi●e
             .
          
           
             The
             External
             end
             at
             the
             Cartilages
             :
             The
             Internal
             fil
             the
             spaces
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             Ribs
             and
             Gristles
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             oblique
             Fibres
             and
             mutually
             cross
             one
             the
             other
             like
             this
             Le●●●
             X
             ,
             because
             the
             Muscles
             are
             otherwise
             short
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             smalness
             of
             the
             Intervals
             .
             Hence
             in
             the
             opening
             such
             as
             have
             a
             suppuration
             in
             their
             Chest
             ,
             Section
             is
             to
             be
             made
             straight
             according
             to
             the
             Course
             of
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             nor
             overthwart
             ,
          
           
             They
             have
             received
             sundry
             Vessels
             .
             Veins
             from
             the
             Azygos
             and
             upper
             Intercostal
             ,
             Arteries
             from
             both
             the
             Intercostals
             .
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ;
             joyned
             to
             them
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Back
             .
          
           
             Their
             use
             ,
             is
             to
             Dilate
             and
             Contract
             
             the
             Chest
             ;
             the
             external
             imitate
             the
             drawing
             of
             the
             Subclavius
             :
             By
             raising
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             straitning
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             help
             towards
             Exspiration
             .
             The
             internal
             draw
             away
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             by
             enlarging
             the
             Chest
             help
             the
             Drawing
             in
             of
             the
             breath
             .
             Galen
             ,
             contrarywise
             ,
             makes
             the
             external
             serve
             for
             drawing
             in
             ,
             and
             the
             internal
             for
             blowing
             out
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             whose
             opinion
             is
             favored
             by
             Vestingius
             ,
          
           
             Others
             with
             Vesalius
             ,
             will
             have
             the
             external
             Muscles
             to
             thrust
             the
             lower
             Ribs
             upwards
             ,
             and
             the
             internal
             ones
             to
             draw
             the
             upper
             Muscles
             downwards
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             so
             mutually
             assist
             one
             another
             in
             straitning
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             But
             we
             should
             rather
             think
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Internal
             ones
             are
             quiet
             ,
             the
             External
             do
             act
             by
             themselves
             .
          
           
             
               Fallopius
               ,
               Arantius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             do
             account
             them
             only
             to
             be
             fleshy
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             whereby
             they
             are
             knit
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             because
             the
             Ribs
             cannot
             be
             moved
             of
             themselves
             ,
             save
             by
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             But
             the
             Thorachick
             or
             Chest
             Muscles
             being
             unmoved
             ,
             the
             Ribs
             are
             often
             moved
             by
             help
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             receiving
             some
             impulse
             also
             from
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             .
             The
             Ligaments
             of
             a
             Muscle
             are
             never
             bare
             .
             The
             Ribs
             may
             be
             fastned
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             likewise
             moved
             by
             these
             ,
             which
             is
             common
             to
             all
             other
             Muscles
             .
             Howbeit
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Ribs
             is
             obscure
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             inarticulated
             in
             one
             part
             only
             ,
             and
             the
             parts
             between
             the
             Ribs
             are
             narrow
             ;
             But
             their
             Number
             supplies
             their
             smalness
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               III.
            
             Of
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               I
               ▪
               TABLE
               ▪
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               This
               Figure
               presents
               the
               External
               proper
               Parts
               of
               the
               Breast
               ,
               also
               Delineates
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               Midriff
               in
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Pectoral
                   Muscle
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   same
                   out
                   of
                   its
                   Situation
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Serratus
                   major
                   Anticus
                   ,
                   or
                   Greaterfore-side-Saw-muscle
                   in
                   its
                   own
                   place
                   ,
                   being
                   partly
                   visible
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   same
                   out
                   of
                   its
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Serratus
                   anticus
                   minor
                   ,
                   lesser
                   foreside-Sawmuscle
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Claviculae
                   or
                   Chanel
                   bones
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Subclavian
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   HHH
                   .
                   The
                   Intercostal
                   ,
                   or
                   Rib-between
                   Muscles
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   The
                   Diaphragma
                   or
                   Midriff
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   descendent
                   Artery
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   An
                   Hole
                   for
                   the
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   descendent
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   An
                   Hole
                   for
                   the
                   Gullet
                   passing
                   through
                   the
                   Diaphragma
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   The
                   Venae
                   Phrenicae
                   or
                   Phrenick
                   Veins
                   so
                   called
                   .
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   The
                   Phrenick
                   Arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   The
                   two
                   Appendices
                   or
                   Appurtenances
                   of
                   the
                   Diaphragma
                   .
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   termed
                   Psoas
                   .
                
                 
                   RR.
                   The
                   
                     Musculi
                     Quadrati
                  
                   or
                   square
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Loynes
                   .
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   The
                   internal
                   Cavity
                   of
                   
                     Os
                     Ilium
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Flanck-bone
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               ●●
            
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             overthwart
             ,
             or
             across
             
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             because
             it
             enclines
             a
             little
             downwards
             ,
             oblique
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             circularly
             round
             ,
             saving
             
             the
             long
             Appurtenances
             .
          
           
             This
             Muscle
             is
             in
             Number
             only
             one
             ,
             because
             
             of
             the
             unity
             of
             its
             Action
             common
             to
             both
             sides
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             a
             great
             one
             .
             Meyssonerius
             saw
             a
             double
             Midriff
             at
             Lyons
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             answers
             the
             Diametral
             
             wideness
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             which
             is
             
             comprehended
             between
             the
             lower
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             back
             and
             the
             Ribs
             .
             Hence
             great
             and
             whaley
             flesh
             ,
             because
             they
             have
             longer
             and
             more
             Ribs
             then
             we
             have
             ,
             have
             a
             larger
             midriff
             ,
             creeping
             mean-while
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
             For
             ,
          
           
             For
             it
             seems
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             by
             two
             somwhat
             
             long
             fleshy
             parts
             (
             which
             cleave
             to
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             great
             Artery
             ,
             and
             growing
             by
             little
             and
             little
             wider
             ,
             about
             the
             lowest
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             they
             grow
             together
             ,
             where
             this
             Muscle
             begins
             to
             grow
             Circular
             )
             and
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Chest
             round
             about
             ,
             beingknit
             where
             it
             is
             fleshy
             to
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             Ribs
             :
             though
             we
             should
             do
             peradventure
             more
             rightly
             ,
             to
             make
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             ,
             in
             its
             whole
             Circumference
             ,
             as
             well
             from
             the
             Loyns
             as
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             which
             Galen
             doth
             also
             somwhere
             insinuate
             :
             For
             seeing
             it
             could
             not
             be
             knit
             to
             the
             eleventh
             Vertebra
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             great
             Artery
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Lumbal
             muscle
             ,
             it
             is
             strongly
             inserted
             ,
             by
             its
             two
             smal
             appurtenances
             to
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loyns
             .
          
           
             Galen
             somwhere
             (
             whom
             
               Sylvius
               ,
               Vesalius
               ,
               Aquapendens
               ,
               Spigelius
            
             and
             many
             more
             follow
             )
             will
             have
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             to
             be
             the
             Head
             thereof
             ,
             because
             the
             Nerves
             are
             there
             inserted
             ,
             and
             the
             Centre
             in
             a
             Circle
             ,
             upon
             which
             one
             point
             of
             the
             compass
             doth
             rest
             ,
             while
             the
             other
             is
             carryed
             about
             ,
             may
             be
             well
             taken
             for
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             said
             Circle
             .
             But
             as
             it
             is
             a
             peculiar
             muscle
             ,
             in
             Situation
             ,
             Action
             ,
             Figure
             ,
             Nobility
             ,
             &c.
             so
             hath
             it
             somwhat
             peculiar
             in
             this
             point
             .
             But
             the
             beginning
             or
             Head
             cannot
             be
             in
             this
             Centre
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             moveable
             ,
             and
             the
             Ribs
             and
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             in
             respect
             thereof
             immoveable
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             Nervous
             or
             Tendinous
             part
             ,
             is
             the
             End
             of
             the
             muscles
             ,
             and
             not
             their
             Head.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             fleshy
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             
             Nervous
             and
             Membranous
             ,
             where
             a
             Membranous
             Centre
             shews
             it self
             and
             a
             
               Nervous
               circle
            
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             to
             which
             fleshy
             Fibres
             do
             run
             ,
             from
             the
             Circumference
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             as
             to
             their
             Centre
             .
             Whence
             necessarily
             the
             middle
             part
             of
             the
             motive
             muscle
             is
             Nervous
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             it
             could
             not
             be
             moved
             .
             Secondarily
             ,
             it
             helps
             to
             strength
             ,
             in
             a
             perpetual
             motion
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             suspension
             of
             the
             bowels
             which
             adhere
             thereunto
             ;
             moreover
             it
             serves
             to
             secure
             the
             Vessels
             which
             pass
             through
             .
             To
             sustain
             the
             beating
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             to
             be
             strong
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             suspects
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             A
             soft
             part
             doth
             easily
             give
             way
             and
             yeild
             to
             a
             blow
             .
             2.
             
             The
             point
             of
             the
             Heart
             doth
             not
             strike
             against
             the
             Midriff
             in
             its
             pulsation
             ,
             for
             the
             Heart
             smites
             the
             breast
             when
             it
             is
             erected
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             and
             is
             contracted
             at
             the
             sides
             ;
             in
             the
             Diastole
             when
             it
             descends
             to
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             it
             becomes
             soft
             and
             flaggy
             ,
             and
             gives
             no
             pulsation
             .
          
           
             Note
             that
             Wounds
             in
             the
             Nervous
             Centre
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             are
             by
             all
             accounted
             deadly
             ,
             whether
             because
             a
             Nervous
             part
             being
             offended
             ,
             doth
             induce
             a
             Convulsion
             ,
             or
             because
             it
             cleaves
             to
             the
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             and
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             or
             because
             respiration
             perishes
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             placed
             over
             the
             same
             is
             likewise
             hurt
             ;
             for
             the
             Pericardium
             and
             Liver
             being
             hurt
             ,
             do
             admit
             cure
             .
             A
             wound
             is
             more
             safely
             made
             in
             the
             fleshy
             Circumference
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             double
             membrane
             ,
             for
             strength
             .
             The
             upper
             is
             
             from
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             is
             firmly
             fastned
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             also
             the
             Lobes
             or
             Laps
             of
             the
             Lungs
             by
             little
             smal
             Fiberkies
             ;
             the
             lower
             is
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
             Also
             it
             hath
             its
             proper
             substance
             ,
             formerly
             described
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Holes
             :
             some
             being
             very
             exceeding
             
             little
             ,
             and
             others
             great
             .
             Those
             very
             little
             ones
             are
             the
             Pores
             ,
             through
             which
             vapors
             arise
             from
             the
             inferior
             parts
             .
             They
             are
             widned
             by
             the
             perpetual
             motion
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             not
             by
             Odours
             and
             Fumes
             ,
             as
             Helmont
             believes
             .
             Otherwise
             ,
             because
             the
             Membrane
             is
             thick
             ,
             it
             hinders
             the
             drinking
             in
             of
             thick
             vapors
             ,
             and
             will
             not
             let
             them
             ascend
             without
             the
             Vessels
             .
             Among
             the
             greater
             ,
             there
             is
             one
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Nervous
             part
             ,
             to
             give
             a
             passage
             to
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             :
             Another
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             greater
             and
             somwhat
             backwarder
             ,
             for
             the
             letting
             through
             of
             the
             Gullet
             or
             Oesophagus
             with
             tw●…
             Nerves
             which
             go
             unto
             the
             Stomach
             .
             And
             where
             it
             arises
             about
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             there
             appears
             a
             division
             ,
             for
             the
             through-fare
             of
             the
             great
             Artery
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               sine
               Pari
            
             ,
             or
             Vein
             without
             fellow
             .
             These
             wide
             holes
             do
             admit
             from
             the
             inferior
             parts
             ,
             the
             passage
             of
             thick
             Vapors
             with
             the
             blood
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             prohibited
             by
             the
             Diaphragma
             .
             Hence
             in
             the
             29.
             
             Aphorisme
             of
             the
             
               fift
               Section
            
             't
             is
             said
             ,
             in
             a
             Fruitful
             Women
             ,
             her
             lower
             parts
             being
             perfumed
             ,
             the
             scent
             goes
             up
             to
             her
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             its
             Vessels
             .
             It
             has
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             
             from
             the
             Neighbouring
             Vessels
             vena
             cava
             and
             Arteria
             magna
             ,
             called
             
               Venae
               phrenicae
            
             :
             and
             sometimes
             from
             the
             Vena
             adiposa
          
           
             Nerves
             are
             spred
             through
             its
             whole
             Substance
             ,
             being
             ▪
             brought
             from
             the
             spinal
             marrow
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             between
             the
             fourth
             and
             fift
             Vertebra
             :
             which
             is
             proper
             to
             this
             part
             ,
             and
             common
             to
             no
             other
             internal
             part
             under
             the
             Channel
             bones
             ,
             because
             according
             to
             the
             Conjecture
             of
             the
             renowned
             Hofman
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             to
             lie
             open
             to
             external
             wounds
             or
             Blowes
             ,
             least
             we
             should
             be
             masters
             of
             our
             own
             Life
             or
             Death
             .
             But
             instruments
             of
             death
             are
             every
             where
             obvious
             ,
             which
             the
             Love
             of
             Life
             and
             Fear
             of
             God
             hinders
             us
             from
             makeing
             use
             of
             .
             Now
             they
             are
             carried
             through
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             are
             propped
             up
             by
             the
             mediastinum
             .
             Other
             Anatomists
             have
             observed
             other
             Nervs
             passing
             that
             way
             from
             beneath
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             costal
             and
             stomachick
             Branches
             .
             And
             because
             the
             Nervs
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             are
             
             in
             their
             passage
             mingled
             with
             certain
             little
             twigs
             ,
             which
             are
             spread
             abroad
             into
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Jaws
             and
             Lips
             ;
             hence
             when
             the
             Diaphragma
             is
             smitten
             there
             arises
             a
             kind
             of
             Laughter
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             real
             Laughter
             ,
             but
             a
             counterfeit
             one
             such
             as
             they
             call
             
               Risus
               Sardonius
            
             the
             Sardonian
             Laughter
             ,
             because
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Face
             suffering
             a
             Convulsion
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             and
             the
             Jaws
             and
             Lips
             being
             moved
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             ,
             the
             partie
             seems
             to
             laugh
             .
             Such
             was
             the
             laughter
             of
             Thycenis
             in
             Hippocrates
             and
             of
             Agnerus
             in
             our
             Countryman
             Sarco
             his
             relations
             ,
             who
             was
             cut
             asunder
             in
             the
             middle
             with
             a
             sharp
             sword
             :
             also
             of
             that
             man
             in
             Aristotle
             whose
             Midriff
             being
             in
             the
             fight
             pierced
             with
             a
             Dart
             ,
             made
             him
             die
             laughing
             .
             Pliny
             relates
             as
             much
             of
             other
             Fencers
             ,
             and
             Homer
             tells
             us
             that
             Juno
             laught
             with
             her
             Lips
             when
             her
             Forehead
             scowled
             .
          
           
             Galen
             makes
             the
             Cause
             of
             the
             Sardonian
             Laughter
             ▪
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Musculus
             latus
             quadratus
             ,
             the
             broad
             square
             Muscle
             .
             But
             it
             reaches
             not
             to
             the
             Lips
             ,
             
               Laurentinus
               Politianus
            
             ,
             makes
             the
             spirits
             to
             be
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             Convulsion
             ,
             which
             because
             of
             the
             sense
             they
             have
             of
             some
             troublesome
             thing
             ,
             run
             back
             to
             the
             upper
             parts
             .
             Mancinius
             will
             have
             the
             Heart
             to
             be
             widened
             ,
             and
             the
             face
             drawn
             into
             the
             posture
             of
             laughing
             ,
             by
             the
             hear
             which
             
             is
             raised
             by
             tickling
             and
             wounds
             ,
             because
             he
             will
             have
             the
             Heart
             to
             be
             the
             seat
             of
             Laughter
             ,
             in
             defence
             of
             Aristotle
             whom
             Physitians
             have
             confuted
             .
             Riolanus
             has
             sometimes
             observed
             laughter
             to
             arise
             in
             the
             guelding
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             forerunner
             of
             a
             deadly
             Convulsion
             ;
             for
             which
             cause
             he
             condemns
             our
             reason
             drawn
             from
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             not
             giving
             us
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             any
             better
             reason
             viz.
             why
             laughter
             should
             arise
             upon
             the
             wounding
             or
             hurting
             the
             nerves
             of
             the
             Midriff
             and
             Privities
             ,
             and
             not
             when
             any
             other
             nerves
             are
             wounded
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             1
             To
             help
             free
             Respiration
             ;
             for
             violent
             respiration
             is
             assisted
             by
             the
             muscles
             
             of
             the
             Chest
             ;
             the
             former
             Respiration
             
             Galen
             ●erms
             gentle
             or
             small
             ,
             which
             depends
             only
             upon
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             the
             other
             strong
             ,
             the
             intercostal
             muscles
             assisting
             thereto
             ,
             a
             third
             sublime
             ,
             where
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             intercostal
             or
             rib
             between
             muscles
             ,
             and
             muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             do
             act
             all
             together
             .
             Birds
             indeed
             ,
             though
             they
             breathe
             have
             no
             Midriff
             ,
             but
             their
             breathing
             which
             is
             light
             and
             scarse
             perceptible
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             lightness
             of
             their
             bodies
             ,
             is
             performed
             by
             their
             Lungs
             and
             Chest
             .
             Contrariwise
             Fishes
             which
             breathe
             not
             have
             a
             Midriff
             ,
             but
             membranous
             ,
             to
             seperate
             one
             Belly
             from
             another
             .
             In
             the
             greater
             sort
             of
             Sea
             fishes
             of
             the
             whaley
             kind
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             a
             fleshy
             Midriff
             like
             that
             of
             Creatures
             which
             live
             on
             the
             Land.
             
          
           
             Now
             the
             motion
             thereof
             is
             thus
             :
             when
             the
             Breath
             is
             drawn
             in
             ,
             the
             
             Midriff
             is
             stretched
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             blowne
             out
             ,
             it
             is
             remitted
             or
             slackned
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             Arantius
             and
             Laurentius
             .
             Of
             whom
             the
             latter
             will
             have
             the
             Midriff
             contrary
             to
             all
             other
             muscles
             to
             draw
             towards
             its
             end
             ,
             and
             he
             will
             have
             the
             fibres
             which
             run
             out
             from
             the
             Circumference
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             to
             be
             equally
             contracted
             ,
             and
             the
             ribs
             to
             be
             drawn
             to
             the
             nervous
             Circle
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             cause
             respiration
             .
             But
             how
             can
             the
             membranous
             Centre
             of
             the
             Septum
             ,
             draw
             the
             ribs
             to
             its
             self
             and
             contract
             the
             whole
             Chest
             unless
             haply
             because
             it
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             .
             But
             I
             have
             observed
             more
             then
             once
             in
             dissections
             of
             living
             Bodies
             ,
             that
             the
             Midriff
             is
             stretched
             out
             ,
             when
             the
             Creature
             draws
             in
             its
             Breath
             .
             For
             the
             Guts
             are
             driven
             downwards
             by
             the
             Midriff
             when
             the
             Breath
             is
             blown
             out
             ,
             and
             they
             ascend
             again
             when
             the
             Breath
             is
             drawn
             in
             ,
             which
             also
             any
             man
             without
             Anatomical
             Section
             ,
             may
             perceive
             in
             himself
             ,
             by
             laying
             his
             Hand
             upon
             his
             Belly
             .
             In
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             the
             Guts
             and
             Stomach
             ,
             when
             the
             Breath
             is
             drawn
             in
             ascend
             into
             the
             Chest
             ,
             which
             Paraeus
             twice
             observed
             ,
             which
             differs
             only
             according
             to
             more
             or
             less
             ,
             from
             the
             naturall
             course
             of
             breathing
             .
             Now
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Midriff
             ought
             to
             be
             such
             ,
             because
             the
             Chest
             when
             the
             Breath
             is
             drawn
             in
             ,
             must
             be
             widened
             to
             receive
             and
             contain
             the
             Air
             and
             swoln
             Lungs
             ;
             and
             contrarywise
             ,
             when
             the
             Air
             is
             breathed
             out
             ,
             the
             Chest
             ought
             to
             be
             straitned
             ,
             because
             then
             the
             sooty
             vapours
             are
             expelled
             ,
             and
             the
             Lungs
             flag
             and
             become
             small
             again
             ,
             and
             therefore
             in
             the
             former
             case
             the
             Midriff
             is
             lifted
             up
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             latter
             depressed
             .
          
           
             
               Jo.
               Walaeus
            
             besides
             that
             motion
             ,
             whereby
             the
             fleshy
             part
             gives
             way
             inwardly
             ,
             has
             observed
             another
             motion
             in
             the
             Diaphragma
             during
             the
             drawing
             in
             of
             the
             breath
             ,
             whereby
             the
             fleshy
             part
             thereof
             being
             contracted
             into
             it self
             ,
             comes
             to
             have
             folds
             in
             it
             ,
             so
             that
             one
             portion
             of
             the
             fleshy
             part
             is
             placed
             upon
             another
             :
             and
             he
             observed
             that
             this
             folding
             is
             chiefly
             about
             the
             Appendices
             or
             Appurtenances
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             breath
             is
             strongly
             drawn
             in
             :
             and
             he
             conceivs
             that
             by
             this
             means
             the
             Midriff
             is
             the
             more
             shortened
             ,
             and
             the
             Chest
             by
             the
             lifting
             up
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             more
             widened
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             assist
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             belly
             ,
             in
             their
             compression
             ,
             when
             they
             would
             force
             out
             the
             Excrements
             and
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             womb
             :
             for
             from
             above
             it
             thrusts
             the
             Guts
             downwards
             .
             Hence
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Platerus
             ,
             when
             the
             belly
             is
             costive
             ,
             Sneezing
             and
             Coughing
             do
             help
             ,
             because
             thereby
             the
             Midriff
             and
             Dung
             conteined
             in
             the
             Guts
             ,
             are
             driven
             downwards
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Strugling
             of
             the
             said
             Midriff
             and
             its
             bearing
             down
             ,
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             belly
             and
             Urine
             come
             away
             of
             themselves
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             and
             in
             such
             as
             are
             put
             to
             death
             by
             hanging
             .
          
           
             III.
             To
             distinguish
             the
             lower
             belly
             with
             the
             natural
             parts
             ,
             from
             the
             middle
             belly
             with
             its
             vital
             parts
             ,
             least
             from
             the
             Ignoble
             parts
             frequent
             vapours
             should
             ascend
             ,
             to
             the
             parts
             more
             noble
             ,
             as
             the
             Heart
             &c.
             
          
           
             IV.
             According
             to
             Hippocrates
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             Fan
             of
             the
             lower
             belly
             ,
             which
             fannes
             and
             cooles
             the
             Hypocondria
             or
             parts
             under
             the
             snort
             ribs
             .
          
           
             V.
             Others
             suppose
             it
             causes
             natural
             respiration
             ,
             because
             it
             depends
             not
             upon
             our
             will
             and
             pleasure
             ,
             and
             moves
             when
             we
             are
             asleep
             ,
             and
             never
             so
             much
             as
             think
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             by
             help
             thereof
             ,
             Men
             in
             Apoplexies
             do
             for
             a
             season
             breathe
             .
             But
             Piccolhomineus
             does
             more
             rightly
             assign
             a
             voluntary
             motion
             thereunto
             ,
             howbeit
             only
             when
             some
             necessity
             constrains
             ,
             as
             in
             easing
             of
             the
             belly
             ,
             pissing
             ,
             and
             fetching
             of
             breath
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             a
             Muscle
             of
             a
             nature
             by
             it self
             ;
             but
             not
             a
             motion
             absolutely
             or
             simply
             voluntary
             ,
             which
             is
             discerned
             in
             progression
             &
             apprehension
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             in
             going
             and
             handleing
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             motion
             ceases
             in
             a
             strong
             Apoplexy
             ,
             only
             transpiration
             does
             then
             remain
             :
             but
             in
             a
             light
             Apoplexy
             ,
             we
             see
             the
             Diaphragma
             also
             moved
             with
             the
             Chest
             muscles
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             
               Pleura
               ,
               Mediastinum
            
             ,
             and
             Thymus
             .
          
           
             THe
             PLEURA
             or
             Rib-coate
             ,
             which
             the
             Greeks
             call
             Chitòn
             
             hupezocòs
             ,
             or
             absolutely
             bumèn
             ,
             is
             a
             membrane
             which
             on
             the
             inside
             cloathes
             the
             cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             hard
             and
             white
             ,
             but
             in
             some
             pleuretick
             persons
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             ,
             black
             and
             blew
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             that
             Practitioners
             conceive
             that
             this
             is
             affected
             in
             the
             Pleurisie
             ,
             which
             notwithstanding
             is
             demonstrated
             to
             happen
             secondarily
             ,
             by
             
               Manelphus
               ,
               Cletus
               ,
               Platerus
               ,
               Zacchius
               ,
               Vitaglianus
               ,
               Benedictus
               .
            
             It
             is
             somewhat
             thicker
             and
             stronger
             then
             the
             Peritoneum
             .
             
             Ariseing
             from
             the
             Coats
             ,
             which
             cover
             the
             intercostal
             nerves
             which
             proceed
             out
             of
             the
             Backbone
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             which
             it
             is
             continued
             with
             the
             Coats
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             thicker
             in
             the
             Back
             ,
             to
             whose
             vertebra's
             it
             cleavs
             as
             it
             were
             inseperably
             .
             Hofmannus
             will
             have
             it
             arise
             from
             the
             Breast-bone
             rather
             than
             the
             vertebra's
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             wherein
             he
             is
             out
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             proved
             in
             my
             Animadversions
             upon
             Hofman
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             
               Anatomical
               Colledge
            
             .
             In
             diseases
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             it
             becomes
             many
             times
             ten-fold
             thicker
             :
             though
             others
             say
             it
             is
             so
             attenuated
             in
             pleuritick
             persons
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             hardly
             be
             descerned
             .
             Fallopius
             saw
             it
             of
             a
             thick
             callous
             substance
             ,
             in
             a
             Dropsie
             
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             Platerus
             saw
             it
             in
             like
             manner
             swoln
             by
             a
             Scirrhous
             Tumor
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             every
             where
             double
             ,
             that
             the
             Vessels
             may
             be
             carryed
             within
             the
             folding
             thereof
             .
             The
             outer
             part
             which
             looks
             towards
             the
             Chest
             ,
             is
             harder
             and
             thicker
             ,
             the
             inner
             part
             being
             
             fastned
             to
             the
             Ribs
             is
             thinner
             .
             Between
             these
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Pleurisie
             is
             often
             collected
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             between
             the
             Pleura
             and
             Muscles
             .
             Galen
             makes
             it
             to
             be
             single
             ,
             and
             will
             allow
             it
             to
             be
             double
             ,
             only
             about
             the
             Mediastinum
             .
             Riolanus
             explains
             that
             same
             Duplicature
             to
             mean
             its
             thickness
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             shewed
             without
             tearing
             .
             The
             contrary
             whereto
             is
             manifest
             in
             the
             swoln
             sides
             of
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Pleurisie
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             its
             inner
             surface
             smooth
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             by
             its
             roughness
             hurt
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             its
             outer
             more
             rough
             that
             it
             might
             be
             the
             stronglyer
             fastned
             .
          
           
             Somtimes
             it
             is
             found
             furnished
             with
             a
             little
             fat
             (
             as
             there
             is
             also
             now
             and
             then
             in
             the
             Peritonaeum
             )
             near
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             back
             ,
             where
             the
             Vessels
             are
             greater
             then
             ordinary
             .
          
           
             The
             Ribs
             also
             have
             their
             Periosteum
             or
             Membrane
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             the
             third
             coat
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             and
             others
             
               Membrana
               Circumossalis
            
             the
             bone-about
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             very
             many
             Holes
             ,
             the
             lowermore
             
             of
             which
             I
             have
             reckoned
             up
             in
             the
             History
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             the
             upper
             are
             there
             where
             it
             affords
             passage
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             the
             
               Arteria
               aorta
            
             ,
             the
             Wezand
             or
             
               Aspera
               arteria
            
             ,
             the
             Gullet
             and
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             sixt
             Pare
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             its
             VESSELS
             .
             It
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             solitary
             Vein
             or
             
               Vena
               fine
               Pari
            
             ,
             and
             the
             upper
             Intercostal
             or
             Rib-between
             Vein
             ;
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Intercostal
             or
             Rib-between
             Artery
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             great
             Artery
             ;
             Nerves
             ,
             twelve
             in
             number
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             foreside
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             And
             therefore
             wounds
             in
             this
             part
             are
             attended
             with
             most
             grievous
             pains
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             USE
             is
             .
             1.
             
             According
             to
             Galen
             to
             plaster
             over
             the
             whole
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             and
             to
             render
             it
             smooth
             and
             even
             ,
             that
             the
             Lungs
             migt
             not
             be
             hurt
             in
             their
             motion
             .
             2.
             
             To
             cloath
             the
             Chest
             and
             its
             parts
             on
             the
             inside
             (
             even
             as
             the
             Peritonaeum
             affords
             coats
             to
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             )
             and
             to
             constitute
             the
             Partition
             Membrane
             .
             Or
             ,
          
           
             MEDIASTINUM
             ,
             Which
             is
             an
             of-spring
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             being
             a
             doubl●
             Membrane
             ;
             separating
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             and
             the
             Lungs
             into
             two
             parts
             .
             For
             after
             that
             the
             Pleura
             having
             taken
             its
             Original
             about
             the
             Back
             hath
             ascended
             by
             the
             sides
             to
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             taking
             its
             course
             again
             towards
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             right
             out
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Brest
             to
             the
             Back
             .
             Being
             fastned
             on
             each
             hand
             to
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             this
             Membrane
             is
             not
             obscurely
             double
             ,
             as
             is
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             but
             visibly
             ,
             being
             constituted
             of
             the
             Pleura
             doubled
             ;
             and
             there
             seems
             at
             first
             sight
             to
             be
             as
             great
             a
             space
             between
             both
             ,
             under
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             as
             the
             breadth
             of
             the
             Breast-bone
             comes
             to
             .
             But
             this
             is
             only
             in
             appearance
             and
             not
             really
             so
             ;
             for
             that
             same
             Cavity
             under
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             is
             then
             only
             caused
             ,
             when
             the
             Breast-bone
             is
             in
             dissection
             ,
             pluckt
             from
             the
             Mediastinum
             ,
             for
             before
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             are
             most
             closely
             united
             one
             to
             another
             .
             Which
             it
             is
             strange
             that
             no
             Anatomist
             did
             observe
             before
             
               Ad
               Falcoburgius
            
             .
             After
             him
             ,
             I
             have
             often
             made
             the
             Experiment
             ,
             in
             grown
             persons
             and
             Children
             new
             born
             ,
             in
             Land-beasts
             and
             large
             Sea-fishes
             ;
             nor
             could
             I
             shew
             any
             Cavity
             betwixt
             the
             Mediastinum
             and
             Breast-bone
             ,
             no
             not
             to
             the
             most
             expert
             Spectators
             ,
             but
             I
             found
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             former
             sticking
             close
             by
             certain
             Fibres
             to
             the
             latter
             ,
             which
             we
             forcibly
             separated
             with
             a
             Penknife
             .
             Which
             that
             it
             might
             be
             more
             apparent
             ,
             the
             inwards
             of
             the
             Belly
             and
             the
             Midriff
             being
             taken
             away
             ,
             I
             made
             it
             visible
             to
             the
             Eyes
             of
             all
             that
             were
             present
             .
             These
             things
             are
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             lesser
             Cavity
             (
             to
             satisfie
             Riolanus
             who
             is
             my
             Adversary
             in
             this
             point
             )
             between
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             and
             the
             sternum
             :
             For
             the
             greater
             ,
             wherein
             the
             evermoveing
             Heart
             is
             seated
             ,
             no
             man
             in
             his
             right
             wits
             will
             ever
             deny
             .
             In
             this
             greater
             Cavity
             ,
             or
             in
             this
             Duplicature●
             if
             a
             wound
             inflicted
             on
             the
             foreside
             shall
             penetrate
             ,
             lightly
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Heart
             settling
             beneath
             remain
             unhurt
             ,
             it
             is
             sufficiently
             void
             of
             Peril
             and
             safe
             enough
             ;
             which
             one
             unskillfull
             in
             Anatomy
             would
             pronounce
             deadly
             ,
             But
             towards
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             the
             Cavity
             grows
             narrow
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             and
             the
             Membranes
             meet
             together
             .
             But
             in
             the
             middle
             the
             Cavity
             is
             wider
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             fore
             part
             of
             the
             said
             Cavity
             ,
             the
             Heart
             and
             Vena
             Cava
             are
             placed
             ;
             in
             the
             latter
             part
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             with
             the
             Stomach
             Nerves
             .
             If
             in
             this
             Cavity
             humors
             praeternaturally
             assemble
             and
             putrifie
             ,
             they
             may
             safely
             be
             let
             out
             by
             boreing
             an
             hole
             in
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Columbus
             and
             Hofmannus
             ,
             which
             
               Nicolaus
               Fontanus
            
             doth
             notwithstanding
             deny
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             of
             a
             thinner
             and
             softer
             substance
             then
             the
             Pleura
             ;
             and
             about
             the
             Vessels
             
             t
             is
             frequently
             full
             of
             fat
             like
             the
             Call.
             
          
           
             For
             Vessels
             ,
             it
             hath
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Dug-vessels
             and
             the
             solitary
             Vein
             or
             Vena
             
             
               sine
               Pari
            
             ,
             applied
             inwardly
             to
             the
             breast-bone
             ,
             which
             being
             taken
             away
             they
             become
             visible
             :
             Also
             it
             hath
             its
             own
             proper
             Vein
             called
             Mediastana
             ,
             which
             is
             somtimes
             one
             and
             large
             ,
             other
             whiles
             double
             and
             smal
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Phrenick
             and
             Stomachick
             Nerves
             are
             carryed
             through
             this
             Duplicature
             ,
             and
             afford
             branches
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             .
          
           
             The
             
               use
               of
               the
               Mediastinum
            
             is
             ,
             I.
             To
             
             divide
             the
             Chest
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             that
             one
             Division
             of
             the
             Lungs
             being
             hurt
             by
             a
             wound
             or
             otherwise
             ,
             the
             other
             might
             perform
             its
             office
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             hang
             the
             Heart
             and
             Heart-bag
             dangling
             in
             so
             free
             a
             posture
             ,
             as
             to
             strike
             against
             no
             part
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             III.
             To
             sustaine
             the
             Vessels
             running
             through
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Midriff
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             by
             the
             weight
             of
             the
             Bowels
             be
             drawn
             too
             much
             downwards
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               II.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               Brest-bone
               cut
               off
               and
               lifted
               up
               ,
               also
               the
               Mediastinum
               and
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               with
               the
               Midriff
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     surface
                     of
                     the
                     Brest-bone
                     and
                     the
                     Gristles
                     interwoven
                     therein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Dug-Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     descending
                     beneath
                     the
                     Brest-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Glandulous
                     Body
                     called
                  
                   Thymus
                   .
                
                 
                   DDDD
                   .
                   
                     The
                     sides
                     of
                     the
                     Mediastinum
                     pluck●
                     asunder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     distance
                     between
                     the
                     two
                     Membranes
                     of
                     the
                     Mediastinum
                     which
                     is
                     caused
                     by
                     its
                     forcible
                     separation
                     from
                     the
                     Brest-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Protuberancy
                     of
                     the
                     Mediastinum
                     ,
                     where
                     the
                     Heart
                     is
                     seated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Lungs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Midriff
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Cartilago
                     Ensiformis
                     ,
                     the
                     Sword-like
                     Gristle
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Midriff
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Nerve
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Midriff
                     a
                     little
                     separated
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     naked
                     substance
                     of
                     the
                     Midriff
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Hole
                     for
                     the
                     Gullet
                     to
                     descend
                     through
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     hole
                     or
                     the
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GGG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Membranous
                     part
                     or
                     Centre
                     of
                     the
                     Midriff
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HHH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Portions
                     or
                     Appendices
                     thereof
                     ,
                     between
                     which
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     descends
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               Represents
               that
               same
               Glandulous
               Body
               ,
               seated
               by
               the
               Larynx
               ▪
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Glandules
                     or
                     Kernels
                     which
                     naturally
                     breed
                     upon
                     the
                     Larynx
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     jugular
                     Vein
                     ,
                     out
                     of
                     which
                     two
                     smal
                     twigs
                     proceeding
                     ,
                     do
                     spread
                     themselves
                     through
                     the
                     substance
                     of
                     the
                     Glandules
                     or
                     Kernels
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               94
            
          
           
             Blood-conveighing
             Vessels
             do
             pass
             through
             this
             Thymus
             or
             Sweet-bread
             ;
             howbeit
             in
             the
             substance
             thereof
             ,
             being
             dissected
             ,
             we
             cannot
             manifestly
             disscerne
             any
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             therefore
             of
             the
             Thymus
             is
             1.
             
             To
             underprop
             those
             great
             Vessels
             which
             ascend
             that
             way
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
               ,
               Arteria
               magna
            
             ,
             and
             their
             branches
             passing
             along
             to
             the
             Arms
             and
             Shoulder-blades
             .
             2.
             
             Also
             for
             safeguard
             ,
             as
             is
             usual
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Vessels
             may
             not
             be
             hurt
             by
             touching
             upon
             the
             bones
             .
             3.
             
             That
             it
             may
             be
             as
             it
             were
             a
             cover
             and
             fence
             for
             the
             Heart
             ,
             for
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             as
             a
             Bulwork
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             stands
             in
             need
             of
             ,
             because
             as
             yet
             it
             stirs
             not
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             hath
             a
             large
             Thymus
             ,
             as
             a
             Sturgeon
             also
             hath
             and
             other
             Creatures
             which
             live
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             external
             cold
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               Chap.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Heart-bag
             and
             the
             Humor
             contained
             therein
             .
          
           
             THe
             Pericardium
             which
             some
             term
             
             the
             Coat
             ,
             Case
             ,
             Box
             ,
             Chamber
             ,
             Cover
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             Heart-bag
             ,
             &c.
             is
             a
             Membrane
             compassing
             the
             whole
             Heart
             ,
             whose
             Figure
             it
             therefore
             Emulates
             ,
             as
             also
             its
             Magnitude
             :
             But
             it
             is
             so
             far
             distant
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             is
             necessary
             for
             the
             Hearts
             motion
             ,
             and
             the
             reception
             of
             the
             Liquor
             contained
             in
             this
             Bag.
             Columbus
             assures
             us
             ,
             that
             a
             Scholar
             of
             his
             had
             no
             Pericardium
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             at
             the
             Basis
             from
             the
             Coates
             which
             compass
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             Pleura
             (
             for
             this
             Coat
             is
             not
             between
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Pericardium
             )
             where
             for
             their
             sakes
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             five
             Holes
             ;
             viz.
             for
             the
             ingate
             and
             outgate
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             
             letting
             out
             of
             the
             other
             three
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             more
             to
             the
             left
             side
             then
             the
             right
             ;
             and
             more
             to
             the
             fore
             then
             the
             
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             knit
             circularly
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             ,
             with
             very
             many
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             to
             
             the
             neighbouring
             parts
             ,
             but
             especially
             the
             Nervous
             circle
             of
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             it
             cleaves
             exceeding
             close
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             thing
             peculiar
             to
             Mankind
             :
             For
             herein
             a
             Man
             differs
             from
             Dogs
             and
             Apes
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             other
             Creatures
             likewise
             ,
             the
             difference
             holes
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             
               External
               Surface
            
             is
             Fibrous
             ,
             the
             Internal
             slippery
             ,
             and
             both
             void
             of
             fat
             .
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             thick
             and
             hard
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             harder
             then
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             
             softer
             then
             a
             bone
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
             It
             hath
             smal
             Veins
             .
             below
             
             from
             the
             Phrenick
             Vessels
             ,
             above
             from
             the
             Axillary
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             no
             Arteries
             that
             can
             well
             be
             seen
             ;
             peradventure
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             so
             near
             the
             Heart
             .
             Yet
             doubtless
             it
             hath
             some
             although
             hard
             to
             be
             discerned
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             very
             smal
             Nerves
             ,
             from
             the
             left
             Recurrent
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             twigs
             of
             the
             Septum
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             I.
             To
             be
             a
             firme
             tabernacle
             for
             the
             Heart
             ,
             that
             in
             its
             motion
             it
             might
             not
             
             strike
             against
             the
             hard
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             contain
             a
             wheyish
             or
             Watry
             Humor
             ,
             like
             Urin
             to
             see
             to
             ,
             though
             neither
             sharpe
             nor
             Salt
             ,
             transparently
             clear
             ,
             in
             some
             like
             water
             ,
             wherein
             flesh
             hath
             been
             washt
             ;
             
               Guil.
               Toletus
            
             in
             Burgensis
             calls
             it
             a
             flegmatick
             Humor
             of
             an
             unpleasing
             tast
             .
             And
             because
             of
             this
             Liquor
             Galen
             resembles
             the
             Heart
             to
             a
             Bladder
             .
          
           
             This
             Humor
             is
             found
             in
             all
             Animals
             naturally
             constituted
             ,
             both
             
             living
             and
             dead
             ,
             yea
             and
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             dissection
             of
             bodies
             both
             living
             and
             dead
             :
             But
             in
             some
             more
             in
             others
             less
             ;
             in
             persons
             that
             are
             in
             a
             Consumption
             ,
             it
             is
             very
             little
             and
             inclining
             to
             yellowness
             .
             In
             persons
             Pleuritick
             it
             is
             now
             and
             then
             of
             a
             quittorish
             nature
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Salmuth
             .
          
           
             In
             dead
             bodies
             t
             is
             more
             plentyful
             :
             Because
             then
             very
             many
             Spirits
             are
             
             in
             the
             cooled
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             condensed
             into
             water
             .
             In
             Women
             ▪
             Children
             ,
             and
             aged
             persons
             ,
             t
             is
             more
             plentyful
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             debility
             of
             their
             heat
             .
          
           
             If
             it
             happen
             to
             be
             in
             two
             great
             a
             quantity
             ,
             Palpitation
             of
             Heart
             ,
             and
             a
             suffocating
             death
             follows
             therefrom
             :
             if
             it
             be
             quite
             consumed
             ,
             a
             Consumption
             of
             the
             body
             happens
             .
             But
             that
             it
             may
             be
             bread
             a
             fresh
             when
             it
             is
             spent
             ,
             we
             see
             clearly
             in
             those
             whose
             Heart-bag
             being
             wounded
             ,
             the
             said
             Liquor
             hath
             run
             out
             ;
             for
             in
             
               Johannes
               Saviolus
            
             ,
             his
             Heart-bag
             being
             wounded
             with
             a
             Dagger
             ,
             water
             issued
             at
             every
             Pulse
             of
             his
             Heart
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             wound
             ,
             yet
             was
             he
             happily
             cured
             by
             the
             Renowned
             Veslingus
             .
          
           
             Whence
             this
             water
             should
             have
             
             its
             original
             ,
             the
             opinions
             of
             learned
             men
             are
             different
             .
          
           
             I.
             The
             first
             Opinion
             is
             of
             those
             ,
             who
             will
             have
             it
             to
             be
             sent
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             seeing
             Blood-letting
             cures
             the
             Panting
             of
             the
             Heart
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Super
             abundance
             of
             this
             Liquor
             :
             And
             they
             conceive
             that
             this
             waterish
             Liquor
             is
             forced
             out
             by
             the
             fervent
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             stick
             of
             wood
             when
             it
             burns
             the
             sap
             runs
             out
             .
             Of
             kin
             to
             this
             is
             the
             Opinion
             of
             
               Nicolas
               Massa
            
             ,
             which
             will
             have
             it
             to
             proceed
             from
             the
             strainings
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             which
             come
             from
             the
             Liver
             to
             the
             Ear
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             And
             Hofman
             is
             much
             of
             his
             mind
             ,
             who
             maintaines
             that
             it
             is
             part
             of
             that
             wheyish
             moisture
             which
             ascends
             to
             the
             Heart
             with
             the
             blood
             ;
             but
             because
             the
             motion
             thereof
             is
             perpetual
             ,
             there
             would
             no
             smal
             danger
             arise
             ,
             from
             so
             large
             an
             Afflux
             of
             Humors
             .
             I
             let
             pass
             ,
             how
             that
             the
             stronger
             persons
             ,
             whose
             blood
             is
             moved
             most
             swiftly
             ,
             have
             less
             quantity
             of
             this
             Water
             then
             those
             that
             are
             weaker
             .
          
           
             II.
             Others
             ,
             and
             among
             them
             Hippocrates
             seems
             to
             make
             one
             ,
             will
             have
             it
             to
             proceed
             from
             our
             drink
             ,
             some
             portion
             whereof
             they
             conceive
             peirces
             like
             Dew
             out
             of
             the
             
               Asperia
               Arteria
            
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             .
          
           
             III.
             Some
             conceive
             it
             proceeds
             from
             a
             Watry
             matter
             in
             the
             Seed
             ,
             as
             the
             inbred
             Air
             of
             the
             Ears
             ,
             is
             thought
             to
             proceed
             from
             a
             windy
             matter
             in
             the
             said
             seed
             .
          
           
             IV.
             Of
             kin
             hereunto
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             Jasolinus
             ,
             who
             will
             have
             it
             to
             be
             a
             select
             ,
             most
             perfect
             and
             Elaborate
             portion
             of
             the
             serons
             Humor
             ,
             sent
             thither
             by
             Nature
             it self
             ,
             haply
             in
             the
             first
             formation
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             through
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             besides
             another
             part
             of
             the
             drink
             ,
             of
             which
             Hippocrates
             speaks
             ,
             and
             he
             has
             experiments
             touching
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             V.
             Some
             say
             it
             proceeds
             from
             the
             watry
             Excrements
             of
             the
             third
             digestion
             .
          
           
             VI.
             Others
             from
             the
             spittle
             ,
             slipping
             out
             of
             the
             Kernels
             of
             the
             Tongue
             into
             the
             Wezand
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             into
             the
             Arteries
             and
             Heart
             .
          
           
             VII
             .
             Others
             ,
             from
             the
             fat
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             agitation
             turned
             into
             water
             .
          
           
             VIII
             .
             Others
             from
             the
             thicker
             part
             of
             the
             Air
             which
             we
             draw
             in
             ,
             being
             changed
             into
             water
             .
          
           
             IX
             .
             And
             lastly
             ,
             some
             think
             (
             which
             I
             conceive
             to
             be
             most
             likely
             )
             that
             it
             proceeds
             from
             moist
             Vapors
             and
             Exhalations
             ,
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Humors
             of
             the
             Heart
             by
             the
             motion
             and
             Heat
             theerof
             ,
             and
             thrust
             forth
             into
             the
             Heart-bag
             and
             there
             congealed
             into
             water
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             compactness
             of
             the
             said
             Heart-bag
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             I.
             To
             moisten
             and
             cool
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             and
             to
             facilitate
             the
             motion
             thereof
             .
             And
             therefore
             those
             in
             whom
             it
             is
             consumed
             ,
             have
             their
             Hearts
             roasted
             :
             As
             it
             happened
             to
             Casimire
             the
             
             Marques
             of
             Brandenburg
             :
             And
             to
             that
             young
             man
             of
             Rome
             ,
             mentioned
             by
             
               Panarolus
               .
               Hofmannus
            
             being
             of
             a
             contrary
             mind
             ,
             will
             needs
             have
             it
             to
             be
             as
             a
             Spur
             and
             Incitement
             of
             Heat
             ;
             as
             Smiths
             are
             wont
             to
             dip
             their
             wisps
             of
             Straw
             in
             Water
             that
             they
             may
             burn
             the
             longer
             :
             And
             as
             Wood
             is
             sprinkled
             with
             Water
             to
             make
             it
             burn
             more
             lustily
             .
             But
             those
             bundles
             of
             Straw
             are
             preserved
             by
             the
             water
             ,
             because
             their
             substance
             being
             made
             more
             moist
             and
             Tenacious
             ,
             is
             not
             so
             soon
             consumed
             .
             But
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             preserved
             by
             its
             radical
             moisture
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             blood
             continually
             flowing
             in
             ,
             nor
             doth
             it
             need
             any
             Incitement
             from
             the
             Water
             ,
             for
             if
             so
             ,
             then
             the
             Heart
             would
             be
             more
             hot
             and
             lusty
             in
             old
             persons
             ,
             who
             have
             most
             water
             in
             their
             Heart-bags
             ,
             II.
             It
             serves
             to
             make
             fat
             by
             congelation
             .
             III.
             That
             the
             Heart
             by
             swimming
             therein
             ,
             may
             be
             less
             ponderous
             ,
             and
             may
             not
             strike
             against
             any
             part
             .
          
           
             An
             HUMOR
             likewise
             is
             commonly
             found
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             resembling
             blood
             and
             water
             mingled
             together
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Chest
             are
             smeared
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             overheated
             nor
             overdryed
             .
             Hence
             the
             side
             of
             our
             Saviour
             being
             opened
             ,
             blood
             and
             water
             flowed
             out
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             suddan
             flux
             ,
             and
             mixture
             of
             blood
             and
             the
             Authorities
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             I
             have
             at
             large
             proved
             ,
             in
             my
             Dispute
             of
             the
             side
             of
             Christ
             ,
             against
             
               Laurentius
               ,
               Arias
               Montanus
               ,
               Bertinus
               ,
               Nancelius
               ,
               Poza
               ,
               Tremellius
               ,
               Beza
               ,
               Tirinus
               ,
               Grotius
            
             and
             others
             ,
             who
             would
             have
             it
             to
             proceed
             from
             his
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             ,
             also
             against
             
               Collius
               ,
               Tarnovius
               ,
               Brentius
               ,
               Laurenbergius
            
             among
             the
             late
             writers
             ,
             and
             
               Cyprianus
               ,
               Prudentius
               ,
               Brigitta
               ,
               Vida
               ,
               Sannazarius
               ,
               Vigerius
               ,
               &c.
            
             who
             would
             fetch
             it
             from
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             being
             wounded
             .
             Now
             the
             Objection
             of
             
               P.
               Laurenbergius
            
             is
             not
             worth
             a
             button
             ,
             who
             saies
             there
             was
             not
             enough
             of
             the
             said
             Liquor
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             ;
             because
             1.
             
             The
             natural
             quantity
             might
             suffice
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Evangelists
             do
             not
             record
             that
             it
             come
             away
             in
             a
             great
             quantity
             .
             2.
             
             It
             might
             be
             augmented
             in
             that
             last
             conflict
             for
             life
             ,
             notwithstanding
             the
             great
             perfection
             of
             his
             Body
             ,
             which
             being
             for
             our
             Redemption
             made
             liable
             to
             temporary
             passions
             ,
             underwent
             death
             it self
             .
             3.
             
             I
             have
             at
             Padua
             somtimes
             observed
             so
             great
             a
             quantity
             of
             Water
             in
             this
             part
             ,
             that
             it
             hung
             down
             like
             a
             great
             purse
             ,
             the
             Midriff
             being
             depressed
             by
             its
             weight
             .
             Jasolinus
             in
             wound
             of
             the
             Chest
             (
             the
             inner
             parts
             being
             unhurt
             )
             did
             somtimes
             collect
             every
             day
             five
             measures
             of
             water
             called
             Heminae
             ,
             for
             thirty
             daies
             together
             ,
             which
             the
             Membranes
             being
             inflamed
             ,
             was
             dried
             up
             and
             diminished
             ,
             but
             when
             the
             Inflammation
             was
             cured
             ,
             it
             returned
             in
             its
             former
             Quantity
             .
          
           
             In
             a
             Boy
             at
             Paris
             ,
             who
             died
             of
             the
             small
             pox
             ,
             I
             being
             present
             ,
             store
             of
             water
             was
             found
             in
             this
             part
             ,
             but
             of
             a
             green
             colour
             ,
             of
             which
             else-where
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VI.
            
             Of
             the
             Heart
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Heart
             is
             called
             in
             Latine
             COR
             
               à
               currendo
            
             from
             running
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             motion
             ;
             some
             peradventure
             will
             derive
             it
             from
             the
             Greek
             name
             Kêr
             which
             they
             derive
             from
             céo
             which
             signifies
             to
             burn
             :
             the
             Greeks
             term
             it
             cardia
             ,
             we
             the
             Heart
             ,
             quasi
             bieròn
             a
             sacred
             thing
             .
             It
             is
             the
             principall
             part
             of
             a
             living
             Creature
             ,
             which
             none
             is
             found
             to
             want
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             hurting
             whereof
             the
             Creaure
             does
             for
             the
             most
             part
             immediately
             die
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             fountain
             of
             Life
             ,
             and
             labors
             the
             vital
             Spirits
             ,
             which
             having
             made
             ,
             it
             distributes
             ,
             by
             the
             Arteries
             arising
             from
             it self
             ,
             into
             the
             whol
             body
             ,
             Yet
             may
             you
             find
             examples
             in
             Schenkius
             of
             those
             that
             have
             had
             no
             Hearts
             .
             See
             also
             Gellius
             book
             the
             16.
             
             Chap.
             15.
             
             Galen
             relates
             that
             beasts
             sacrificed
             have
             lowed
             at
             the
             Altar
             ,
             after
             their
             Hearts
             were
             taken
             out
             ;
             and
             the
             Lord
             Verulam
             tells
             of
             a
             man
             who
             spake
             three
             or
             four
             words
             of
             a
             prayer
             ,
             when
             his
             Heart
             was
             pluckt
             out
             of
             his
             Body
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             hand
             of
             the
             Executioner
             .
             Plinie
             tells
             us
             the
             entrails
             were
             twice
             found
             without
             any
             Heart
             ,
             when
             Caesar
             sacrificed
             ,
             and
             
               Julius
               Obsequens
            
             saies
             the
             same
             .
             The
             Lives
             of
             such
             persons
             were
             maintained
             by
             the
             remainders
             of
             arterial
             Blood.
             And
             Spigelius
             suspects
             that
             among
             the
             Bowells
             ,
             the
             Heart
             was
             rather
             hid
             ,
             and
             unfound
             then
             wanting
             ,
             who
             saw
             so
             much
             fat
             in
             an
             Ostrich
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             might
             easily
             have
             bin
             deceived
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             think
             the
             Fowl
             had
             no
             Heart
             .
             Peradventure
             those
             Hearts
             of
             the
             sacrifices
             were
             stole
             away
             by
             the
             Devil
             .
          
           
             A
             Live-wight
             dies
             not
             with
             every
             hurt
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             For
             the
             Heart
             undergoes
             all
             kind
             of
             diseases
             .
             1.
             
             Putrefaction
             ,
             witness
             Galen
             ,
             in
             a
             pestilential
             and
             a
             putrid
             Fever
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Consumption
             according
             to
             Plinie
             ,
             to
             be
             dried
             like
             a
             roasted
             warden
             ,
             according
             to
             Jordanus
             .
             to
             be
             wholly
             consumed
             by
             immoderate
             Heat
             ,
             as
             Tileseus
             averr's
             .
             3.
             
             Inflammation
             ,
             in
             which
             Case
             it
             cannot
             live
             a
             natural
             day
             ,
             as
             Saxonius
             found
             by
             experience
             in
             a
             certain
             Reader
             .
             4.
             
             
               Filthy
               hollow
               Ulcers
            
             have
             bin
             found
             therein
             by
             
               Fernelius
               ,
               Trincavellius
               ,
               Riverius
            
             .
             5.
             
             Divers
             kinds
             of
             
               Tumors
               ,
               Columbus
            
             saw
             an
             hard
             Tumor
             in
             the
             left
             ventricle
             of
             a
             Cardinal
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             an
             Egg.
             Benevenius
             saw
             a
             swelling
             of
             black
             flesh
             .
             
               Massa
               ,
               Hollerius
               ,
               Bauhinus
            
             ,
             and
             Joubertus
             ,
             have
             other
             like
             Stories
             .
             I
             lately
             found
             in
             the
             Parenchyma
             of
             an
             Oxes
             Heart
             on
             the
             left
             side
             a
             swelling
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Pigeons
             Egg
             ,
             in
             a
             double
             Coat
             ,
             full
             of
             Whey
             and
             Flegm
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             out
             side
             Gesner
             saw
             an
             Excrescence
             of
             Flesh
             ,
             in
             the
             Basis
             the
             quantity
             of
             an
             ounce
             and
             six
             drams
             Bavius
             makes
             mention
             of
             the
             Membrane
             eaten
             and
             fretted
             away
             round
             about
             .
          
           
             Also
             Histories
             shew
             that
             it
             will
             bear
             wounds
             for
             a
             season
             .
             Paraeus
             tells
             of
             one
             wounded
             in
             the
             Heart
             who
             ran
             two
             hundred
             paces
             .
             Jacotius
             tells
             of
             an
             Hart
             that
             carried
             an
             old
             arrow
             fixed
             in
             its
             Heart
             ,
             which
             is
             confirmed
             by
             
               Thomas
               à
               Vega
            
             and
             
               Alexandrius
               .
               Galen
            
             saw
             an
             Hare
             wounded
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             run
             a
             darts
             cast
             after
             the
             wound
             received
             .
             Of
             a
             Student
             at
             
               Ingolstade
               ,
               Sennertus
            
             and
             Iohnstonus
             tells
             us
             ,
             who
             had
             both
             the
             ventricles
             of
             his
             Heart
             peirced
             through
             with
             a
             weapon
             ,
             and
             
               Nicholas
               Mullerus
            
             of
             a
             Souldier
             who
             lived
             fifteen
             daies
             after
             he
             had
             received
             a
             wound
             in
             his
             Heart
             ,
             of
             which
             he
             hung
             up
             a
             Table
             at
             Groeningen
             .
             He
             recounts
             many
             like
             examples
             seen
             by
             himself
             ,
             and
             Tulpius
             tells
             us
             of
             one
             that
             lived
             two
             daies
             ,
             being
             wounded
             in
             the
             right
             ventricle
             .
             Glandorpius
             tells
             us
             after
             Sanctorius
             ,
             that
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Rabbit
             was
             pierced
             with
             a
             sharp
             Instrument
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             lived
             many
             months
             after
             .
          
           
             Wee
             must
             therefore
             note
          
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               Heart
               can
               endure
               Diseases
               ,
               but
               because
               it
               lies
               far
               from
               the
               way
               of
               medicines
               ,
               it
               cannot
               hold
               out
               so
               well
               as
               other
               parts
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               ,
               as
               Galen
               tells
               us
               ,
               if
               the
               wounds
               do
               pierce
               into
               the
               belly
               thereof
               ,
               the
               party
               or
               Creature
               wounded
               dies
               ,
               of
               necessity
               ,
               but
               if
               they
               be
               in
               the
               Substance
               thereof
               ,
               it
               may
               live
               a
               day
               and
               a
               night
               ,
               but
               then
               Inflammation
               arising
               death
               follows
               .
            
             
               3
               That
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               does
               more
               easily
               bear
               an
               hurt
               ,
               because
               upon
               the
               left
               depends
               the
               life
               of
               the
               whol
               Body
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Both
               Ventricles
               may
               endure
               a
               small
               time
               after
               they
               are
               hurt
               ,
               if
               the
               Vessels
               that
               continue
               the
               motion
               of
               the
               blood
               ,
               be
               undamnified
               .
            
          
           
           
             The
             Heart
             is
             one
             in
             
               Number
               ,
               Theophrastus
            
             writes
             ,
             that
             in
             Paphlagonia
             Partridges
             have
             two
             Hearts
             ,
             an
             example
             whereof
             Galen
             relates
             in
             a
             man
             ,
             in
             his
             anatomical
             administrations
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             not
             considering
             the
             leggs
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             
             in
             brutes
             ;
             in
             which
             the
             Heart
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             for
             moveableness
             and
             Securities
             sake
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Chest
             likewise
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             on
             all
             sides
             compassed
             with
             the
             Lungs
             .
             Now
             the
             Heart
             in
             respect
             of
             its
             basis
             ,
             is
             exactly
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             that
             nourshing
             blood
             and
             spirit
             might
             more
             commodiously
             be
             distributed
             into
             the
             whole
             body
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             the
             Motion
             thereof
             is
             more
             discernable
             in
             the
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             1
             Because
             in
             its
             left
             Ventricle
             the
             vital
             spirit
             is
             contained
             ,
             and
             from
             
             thence
             arises
             the
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             ,
             hence
             the
             common
             people
             imagin
             that
             a
             Mans
             Heart
             resides
             in
             his
             left
             Side
             ,
             but
             Practitioners
             applie
             Cordials
             to
             the
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             2
             Because
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Heart
             enclines
             towards
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             under
             
             the
             left
             nipple
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             give
             way
             to
             the
             Diaphragma
             :
             now
             to
             the
             right
             hand
             it
             could
             not
             decline
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Vena
             cava
             ,
             which
             ascends
             there
             through
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             Sometimes
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Heart
             enclines
             to
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             and
             such
             persons
             are
             left
             handed
             if
             we
             beleive
             Massa
             ,
             those
             whose
             Heart
             is
             exactly
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             use
             both
             hands
             alike
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             its
             Magnitude
             .
             In
             a
             man
             proportionably
             the
             Heart
             is
             greater
             then
             
             in
             other
             Creatures
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             brain
             and
             Liver
             .
             According
             to
             the
             common
             Course
             of
             Nature
             ,
             it
             equalls
             six
             fingers
             breadths
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             four
             in
             breadth
             .
             Otherwise
             ,
             the
             greatness
             of
             the
             Heart
             differs
             according
             to
             the
             Difference
             of
             the
             Age
             and
             Temperament
             .
             For
             persons
             cold
             of
             Constitution
             ,
             and
             fearfull
             have
             great
             Hearts
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             are
             more
             hot
             and
             confident
             ,
             have
             little
             Hearts
             :
             Of
             which
             see
             Donatus
             .
             Hence
             Aristotle
             saies
             of
             fearfull
             Creatures
             ,
             as
             the
             Hare
             ,
             Deer
             ,
             Mouse
             ,
             Hyena
             ,
             Ass
             ,
             Weazel
             ,
             &c.
             that
             they
             have
             a
             great
             Heart
             ,
             considering
             the
             proportion
             of
             their
             bodies
             .
             The
             Philosiphers
             of
             AEgypt
             ,
             in
             ancient
             times
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             Herodotus
             in
             his
             Euterpe
             ,
             have
             dreamed
             these
             things
             of
             the
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             That
             the
             Heart
             of
             such
             Persons
             ,
             as
             are
             not
             wasted
             by
             any
             violent
             disease
             ,
             does
             every
             yeer
             grow
             two
             drams
             heavier
             ,
             till
             they
             become
             fifty
             yeers
             old
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             of
             fifty
             yeers
             Age
             ,
             his
             Heart
             weighs
             an
             hundred
             drams
             :
             but
             from
             the
             fiftyeth
             year
             to
             the
             hundredth
             ,
             by
             a
             retrograde
             or
             back
             motion
             ,
             it
             looses
             every
             yeer
             two
             drams
             ,
             till
             it
             vanish
             away
             ,
             and
             the
             party
             die
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             conick
             ,
             because
             it
             ends
             in
             a
             point
             .
             It
             s
             upper
             part
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             full
             vessels
             therein
             ,
             is
             broad
             and
             round
             ,
             although
             not
             exactly
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             the
             Root
             and
             Head
             ,
             and
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             :
             the
             lower
             part
             being
             sharper
             is
             called
             
               conus
               ,
               mucro
               ,
               vertex
               ,
               cuspis
            
             and
             
               apex
               Cordis
            
             ;
             the
             cone
             ,
             point
             ,
             top
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Hippocrates
             calls
             it
             the
             end
             and
             taile
             .
             On
             the
             foreside
             the
             Heart
             is
             more
             bossie
             ,
             on
             the
             hinder
             side
             more
             flat
             .
             In
             the
             contractions
             the
             whole
             Heart
             is
             longer
             as
             some
             hold
             ,
             but
             broader
             and
             more
             drawn
             together
             according
             to
             others
             ;
             in
             its
             Dilatations
             or
             Widenings
             it
             is
             greatest
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             globous
             figure
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             speak
             more
             exactly
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             is
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             and
             the
             Midriff
             by
             the
             Pericardium
             ;
             but
             to
             
             other
             parts
             by
             its
             Vessels
             ,
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Basis
             .
             the
             point
             being
             free
             ,
             and
             hanging
             dangling
             like
             a
             bell
             in
             the
             Steeple
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             the
             more
             easily
             be
             drawn
             back
             to
             its
             Basis
             ,
             or
             moved
             to
             the
             Sides
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             first
             membranous
             ,
             like
             a
             Bladder
             ,
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             afterward
             from
             the
             mothers
             blood
             there
             grows
             flesh
             or
             a
             solid
             ,
             thick
             and
             compacted
             parenchyma
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               it
               might
               endure
               the
               perpetuity
               
               of
               the
               Motion
               :
               for
               a
               fence
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               might
               more
               forcibly
               drive
               the
               blood
               to
               places
               far
               distant
               in
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
             
               2
               Least
               the
               subtile
               and
               lightfull
               Spirits
               contained
               even
               in
               the
               moveable
               blood
               should
               exhale
               together
               with
               the
               inbred
               heat
               .
            
          
           
             In
             the
             right
             side
             the
             wall
             is
             less
             thick
             ,
             because
             it
             sends
             blood
             only
             to
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             which
             have
             their
             venal
             blood
             not
             so
             subtile
             .
             The
             strength
             of
             the
             left
             side
             is
             greater
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             stronger
             motion
             to
             drive
             on
             the
             blood
             ,
             to
             supply
             the
             necessity
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             .
             In
             the
             point
             ,
             the
             flesh
             is
             thicker
             and
             harder
             not
             so
             much
             because
             it
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             moved
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             conceives
             ,
             as
             because
             it
             is
             free
             ,
             contracting
             the
             whole
             Heart
             in
             a
             brief
             manner
             ,
             and
             destiture
             of
             Vessels
             and
             Ears
             .
             In
             its
             Basis
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             so
             much
             softer
             as
             thinner
             .
             whose
             Vessels
             and
             Ears
             do
             recompence
             what
             it
             wants
             of
             firmness
             .
             Now
             this
             flesh
             hath
             all
             kinds
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             so
             mingled
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             and
             so
             compact
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             easily
             discerned
             ;
             partly
             for
             strength
             ,
             partly
             for
             motion
             .
             For
             all
             these
             Fibres
             being
             stretched
             in
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             Heart
             they
             draw
             together
             the
             Ventricles
             and
             the
             inner
             sides
             ,
             to
             help
             the
             Protrysion
             or
             thrusting
             forward
             of
             the
             blood
             .
          
           
             This
             substance
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             Coat
             
             hardly
             separable
             ,
             for
             the
             greater
             firmness
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             grows
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             not
             of
             the
             efficient
             Cause
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             Fat
             about
             the
             Pasis
             of
             the
             Heart
             but
             hardly
             about
             the
             Cone
             or
             sharpe
             End
             thereof
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             moistned
             by
             the
             liquor
             of
             the
             Heart-bag
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             anoint
             the
             Veins
             about
             the
             Heart
             .
             2.
             
             And
             to
             moisten
             the
             Heart
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             be
             dryed
             by
             motion
             .
             3.
             
             To
             heat
             the
             water
             in
             the
             Heart-bag
             ,
             as
             the
             fat
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             doth
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             conjecture
             of
             
               John
               Daniel
               Horstius
            
             .
             Somtimes
             it
             is
             quite
             hid
             with
             the
             said
             fat
             ,
             which
             
               Spegelius
               ,
               Riolanus
               ,
               Jessenius
            
             observed
             in
             a
             prince
             of
             Lunaeburg
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             by-standers
             are
             apt
             to
             be
             deluded
             and
             think
             there
             is
             no
             Heart
             .
          
           
             It
             was
             nevertheless
             rightly
             said
             by
             
             
               Aristotle
               ,
               Galen
            
             and
             Avicenna
             ,
             that
             fat
             called
             Pimele
             could
             not
             grow
             about
             any
             hot
             part
             ,
             as
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             the
             Veins
             ,
             &c.
             
             For
             this
             kind
             of
             Fat
             is
             easily
             melted
             by
             heat
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             ,
             to
             stea●
             Adeps
             or
             Tallow
             ,
             which
             differs
             much
             from
             Pimele
             or
             Greasie
             fat
             ,
             in
             substance
             ,
             consistency
             and
             place
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             demonstrated
             in
             my
             
               Vindiciae
               Anatomicae
            
             from
             
               Pollux
               ,
               Suidas
               ,
               Erotianus
            
             and
             others
             ,
             may
             grow
             about
             such
             parts
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             not
             easily
             melted
             .
             Which
             makes
             a
             sputtering
             when
             it
             is
             put
             to
             the
             flame
             of
             a
             Candle
             ,
             because
             of
             a
             watry
             substance
             mingled
             therewith
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Jasolinus
             ,
             which
             hinders
             it
             from
             suddain
             congealing
             :
             so
             that
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             that
             it
             is
             not
             melted
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Now
             this
             same
             Tallow
             is
             bred
             about
             the
             Heart
             ,
             either
             
             because
             the
             Heart
             being
             of
             a
             very
             hard
             substance
             is
             nourished
             with
             thick
             blood
             ,
             of
             which
             suet
             is
             bred
             ;
             or
             because
             Excrementitious
             dregs
             are
             bred
             of
             the
             Nutriment
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             or
             because
             the
             blood
             is
             much
             stirred
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             great
             Agitation
             of
             Milk
             ,
             better
             is
             extracted
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             Achillinus
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             Vessels
             .
             The
             Heart
             hath
             a
             Vein
             which
             is
             termed
             Coronaria
             the
             
             Crown-vein
             ,
             because
             it
             incircles
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             is
             somtimes
             double
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             Cava
             ,
             without
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             about
             whose
             Basis
             it
             Expatiates
             in
             a
             large
             tract
             from
             the
             right
             Eare
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             wide
             Channel
             it
             compasses
             about
             externally
             to
             the
             left
             Ear
             ,
             which
             it
             doth
             not
             enter
             ,
             but
             turns
             aside
             into
             the
             Parenchyma
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Hence
             it
             spreads
             its
             branches
             downwards
             through
             the
             surface
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             the
             greatest
             store
             through
             the
             left
             side
             thereof
             ,
             because
             the
             flesh
             is
             there
             thicker
             .
             A
             smal
             valve
             is
             fastned
             in
             its
             original
             ,
             which
             grants
             entrance
             to
             the
             blood
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             but
             will
             not
             suffer
             it
             to
             go
             out
             .
          
           
             
               The
               III.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               the
               Situation
               of
               the
               Heart
               in
               the
               Body
               and
               the
               going
               out
               of
               certain
               Vessels
               therefrom
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Heart
                   in
                   its
                   natural
                   Situation
                   enclosed
                   in
                   the
                   Heart-bag
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   Lungs
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Nervous
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Midriff
                   .
                
                 
                   DDD
                   .
                   The
                   flesby
                   portion
                   thereof
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Vena
                   Cava
                   above
                   the
                   Heart
                   ,
                   going
                   upwards
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   said
                   Vein
                   peircing
                   the
                   Midriff
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   great
                   Artery
                   arising
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   Its
                   branches
                   to
                   med
                   Carotides
                   ,
                   the
                   Drowsie-Arteries
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   point
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   enclining
                   to
                   the
                   left
                   side
                   of
                   the
                   Body
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   The
                   Nerves
                   of
                   the
                   sixt
                   Conjugation
                   ,
                   from
                   which
                   the
                   recurrent
                   Nerves
                   do
                   spring
                   ,
                   which
                   distribute
                   five
                   branches
                   to
                   the
                   Heart-bag
                   &
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   left
                   Ear
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   The
                   right
                   Ear.
                   
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   Vessels
                   of
                   the
                   Heart-bag
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   The
                   
                     Cartilago
                     Scutiformis
                  
                   ,
                   Sheild-fashioned
                   Gristle
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   The
                   first
                   pare
                   of
                   the
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Larynx
                   in
                   their
                   proper
                   place
                   ,
                
                 
                   Q.
                   The
                   Situation
                   of
                   
                     Os
                     Hyoides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   R.
                   The
                   
                     Aspera
                     Arteria
                  
                   or
                   Wezand
                   .
                
                 
                   S.
                   The
                   Axillary
                   Artery
                   ,
                   about
                   the
                   Original
                   whereof
                   ,
                   the
                   Right-hand
                   Recurrent
                   Nerve
                   begins
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               98
            
          
           
             As
             for
             its
             Use
             .
             Some
             have
             perswaded
             themselves
             ,
             that
             it
             serves
             to
             nourish
             the
             external
             part
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             lesser
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             creeps
             about
             the
             external
             surface
             only
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             is
             nourished
             with
             Arterial
             blood
             .
             Others
             will
             have
             it
             to
             nourish
             the
             whole
             Heart
             .
             Licetus
             assignes
             its
             Office
             to
             strain
             the
             blood
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             I
             wonder
             at
             ,
             Because
             1.
             
             It
             is
             exceeding
             smal
             .
             2.
             
             It
             creeps
             about
             the
             External
             parts
             .
             3.
             
             It
             arises
             externally
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
             and
             not
             from
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Botallus
             seems
             to
             have
             acknowledged
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             whose
             opinion
             examined
             by
             Walaeus
             .
             Others
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             ,
             make
             it
             serve
             not
             so
             much
             for
             Nutrition
             ,
             as
             to
             repaire
             the
             fat
             ;
             but
             ,
             first
             it
             reaches
             farther
             then
             the
             fat
             .
             2.
             
             No
             branches
             thereof
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             fat
             .
             3.
             
             The
             fat
             may
             be
             generated
             from
             
             Vapors
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             without
             any
             Veins
             .
             The
             
               true
               Use
            
             of
             the
             Coronary
             Vein
             is
             ,
             to
             bring
             back
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             other
             Veins
             ,
             when
             it
             returnes
             from
             nourishing
             the
             heart
             ,
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             again
             ,
             which
             the
             Situation
             of
             the
             Valves
             doth
             hint
             unto
             us
             ,
             and
             the
             unfitness
             of
             this
             blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             solid
             substance
             or
             Parenclyma
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             two
             Coronary
             Arteries
             from
             the
             great
             one
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             in
             its
             original
             ,
             before
             it
             passes
             out
             of
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             furnished
             with
             a
             Valve
             which
             prohibits
             the
             regress
             of
             the
             Blood.
             Through
             these
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             moved
             and
             Pulse
             ,
             blood
             is
             carryed
             to
             nourish
             the
             heart
             and
             Ears
             ,
             and
             here
             is
             made
             a
             peculiar
             kind
             of
             Circulation
             ,
             as
             Harvy
             teaches
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             out
             of
             them
             into
             the
             Coronary
             Veins
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             it
             slides
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             being
             to
             be
             forced
             again
             through
             the
             Lungs
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             Now
             some
             men
             perswade
             themselves
             ,
             and
             especially
             Hogelandius
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             which
             remains
             after
             Nutrition
             ,
             doth
             not
             all
             pass
             back
             through
             the
             Veins
             ,
             but
             that
             some
             particles
             thereof
             sweat
             through
             the
             Parenchyma
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             and
             cause
             Fermentation
             in
             the
             Generation
             of
             Arterial
             blood
             .
             But
             1.
             
             The
             Fermentation
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             any
             ,
             may
             be
             made
             by
             the
             reliques
             contained
             in
             the
             Cavities
             .
             2.
             
             The
             coronary
             Vessels
             ,
             do
             not
             reach
             unto
             the
             Ventricles
             .
             3.
             
             T
             is
             hard
             when
             the
             body
             is
             in
             health
             ,
             for
             the
             blood
             to
             sweat
             through
             so
             hard
             and
             compact
             a
             flesh
             ,
             unless
             the
             blood
             be
             very
             wheyish
             ,
             and
             the
             body
             of
             a
             thin
             Texture
             .
             4.
             
             Why
             doth
             not
             the
             blood
             sweat
             through
             the
             Skin
             ,
             which
             in
             some
             parts
             is
             very
             thin
             ?
             5.
             
             No
             particle
             remains
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             save
             what
             is
             ordained
             for
             the
             nourishment
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             it
             hath
             likewise
             ,
             obscure
             ones
             ,
             from
             the
             sixt
             conjugation
             ,
             inserted
             into
             three
             places
             :
             One
             being
             terminated
             into
             the
             heart
             it self
             :
             Another
             into
             its
             Ears
             ;
             A
             third
             among
             its
             greater
             Vessels
             ,
             to
             cause
             sense
             and
             not
             motion
             according
             to
             Piccolhomineus
             ,
             because
             the
             Nerve
             being
             cut
             asunder
             the
             heart
             moves
             nevertheless
             .
             The
             heart
             hath
             not
             many
             Nerves
             ,
             but
             a
             great
             Contexture
             of
             Fibres
             like
             to
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             Aristotle
             perhaps
             reckoning
             for
             Nerves
             ,
             said
             the
             heart
             was
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
             But
             that
             may
             be
             Materially
             true
             ,
             not
             formally
             .
             Yet
             I
             have
             seen
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             a
             Sow
             ,
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Nerves
             with
             intangled
             twigs
             towards
             the
             Cone
             or
             Point
             ,
             carryed
             from
             the
             Septum
             to
             the
             Wall
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
          
           
             Yet
             that
             is
             false
             which
             Fallopius
             tells
             us
             ,
             that
             a
             great
             Squadron
             of
             Nerves
             is
             
             spread
             up
             and
             down
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             resembling
             a
             Net
             :
             For
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             no
             Animal
             motion
             ,
             but
             a
             natural
             motion
             ,
             because
             the
             heart
             is
             no
             Muscle
             :
             For
             the
             heart
             is
             moved
             without
             our
             will
             ,
             and
             it
             beats
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             before
             the
             Child
             hath
             received
             the
             Animal
             faculty
             .
             And
             Galen
             did
             rightly
             deny
             that
             the
             heart
             was
             a
             Muscle
             .
             
             1.
             
             Because
             it
             hath
             all
             kind
             of
             Fibres
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             a
             Muscle
             is
             the
             Instrument
             of
             voluntary
             motion
             .
             But
             if
             any
             one
             shall
             say
             the
             heart
             is
             a
             Muscle
             subservient
             to
             natural
             motion
             ,
             I
             shall
             oppose
             such
             an
             improper
             manner
             of
             speaking
             :
             And
             so
             that
             of
             Hippocrates
             may
             be
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             heart
             is
             a
             muscle
             .
             For
             he
             defines
             a
             Muscle
             to
             be
             flesh
             made
             up
             into
             an
             Orbicular
             shape
             .
             Others
             conceive
             that
             being
             long
             boyled
             it
             resembles
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             that
             then
             it
             is
             not
             one
             ,
             but
             divers
             Muscles
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             divers
             motions
             contracted
             into
             themselves
             .
             Others
             grant
             it
             to
             be
             a
             Muscle
             of
             a
             nature
             by
             it self
             ,
             as
             the
             Midrifl
             ,
             which
             is
             perpetually
             moved
             .
             Walaeus
             most
             rightly
             of
             all
             others
             calls
             it
             not
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             but
             saies
             it
             is
             contracted
             in
             its
             motion
             like
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             by
             Fibres
             interwoven
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             and
             especially
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             like
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             in
             such
             as
             chew
             their
             meat
             .
          
           
             The
             Temperament
             of
             the
             heart
             in
             respect
             
             of
             active
             Qualities
             is
             hot
             ,
             yea
             the
             hottest
             of
             al
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             How
             beit
             with
             a
             gentle
             and
             light-ful
             heat
             ,
             not
             scorching
             and
             burning
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             rightly
             disposed
             .
             And
             therefore
             t
             is
             no
             wonder
             ,
             that
             in
             live
             dissections
             ,
             somtimes
             we
             feel
             so
             little
             heat
             in
             the
             heart
             with
             our
             Finger
             ,
             especially
             when
             our
             Skin
             is
             thick
             ,
             we
             hold
             it
             but
             a
             little
             while
             ,
             and
             the
             external
             Air
             is
             not
             rightly
             prepared
             before
             hand
             .
             It
             communicates
             the
             same
             heat
             to
             other
             parts
             ,
             and
             renders
             ths
             Arterial
             blood
             fit
             to
             nourish
             ,
             which
             heat
             being
             asswaged
             in
             the
             Veins
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             long
             jorney
             ,
             it
             must
             of
             necessity
             run
             back
             again
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             refurnished
             and
             restored
             with
             the
             same
             heat
             .
             But
             vain
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             Averroes
             ,
             that
             the
             heart
             is
             cold
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             cold
             parts
             which
             it
             contains
             ,
             viz.
             its
             Vessels
             and
             Valves
             :
             Unless
             haply
             he
             ment
             the
             heart
             void
             of
             Spirit
             ,
             as
             many
             will
             have
             it
             .
          
           
             Those
             whose
             heart
             is
             hotter
             then
             ordinary
             
             have
             their
             Breast
             rough
             with
             hair
             ,
             and
             the
             parts
             near
             their
             Hypochondria
             ;
             and
             those
             men
             are
             angryly
             inclind
             ,
             and
             daring
             .
          
           
             Seldom
             is
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             heart
             so
             
             great
             ,
             as
             that
             it self
             should
             thereby
             become
             rough
             with
             hair
             ,
             such
             as
             Pliny
             and
             
               Valerius
               Maximus
            
             tell
             us
             was
             found
             in
             Aristomenes
             a
             Micenian
             ;
             and
             in
             Hermogenes●
             a
             ●…cian
             ,
             
               Coelius
               Rodiginus
            
             relates
             :
             and
             
               Benevenius
               ,
               Z●…
               Lusitanus
            
             and
             Murelus
             avouch
             that
             they
             saw
             such
             ●●●●ry
             heart
             in
             certain
             Famous
             Theives
             .
             Now
             such
             〈…〉
             are
             audacious
             in
             the
             highest
             degree
             ,
             extream
             〈…〉
             crasty
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             wicked
             .
             
             Riola●●●
             ●●us
             ,
             that
             the
             matter
             of
             these
             haires
             ,
             is
             the
             thi●●●or
             things
             of
             that
             wheyish
             humor
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Heart-bag
             .
             But
             I
             am
             more
             apt
             to
             beleive
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             plenty
             of
             Fuliginous
             Excrements
             springing
             from
             an
             hot
             heart
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             the
             passive
             Quallities
             ,
             the
             Heart
             is
             moist
             ,
             viz.
             more
             moist
             then
             the
             Skin
             ,
             but
             drier
             then
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             because
             harder
             :
             for
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             bodie
             ,
             look
             how
             much
             softer
             they
             are
             then
             the
             Skin
             ,
             by
             so
             much
             are
             they
             moister
             then
             it
             .
             It
             is
             a
             most
             rare
             Case
             for
             a
             mans
             Heart
             to
             be
             so
             solid
             ,
             dense
             and
             compact
             ,
             as
             that
             it
             will
             not
             burn
             ,
             such
             as
             was
             the
             Heart
             of
             Germanicus
             the
             son
             of
             Drusus
             ;
             or
             cartilaginous
             ,
             such
             as
             Riolanus
             observed
             in
             a
             wicked
             fellow
             .
          
           
             The
             primary
             Use
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             According
             to
             
               Harvey
               ,
               Baccius
            
             ,
             and
             other
             of
             his
             followers
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             then
             to
             be
             the
             Instrument
             of
             the
             Soul
             ,
             to
             force
             and
             urge
             the
             venal
             blood
             received
             from
             the
             Ears
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             by
             whose
             assistance
             it
             dispenses
             Nutriment
             to
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             and
             is
             rather
             joyned
             as
             an
             Assistant
             to
             the
             Ears
             ,
             that
             being
             of
             greater
             force
             ,
             it
             may
             supply
             the
             defect
             of
             the
             Ears
             .
          
           
             But
             this
             is
             a
             secondary
             use
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             For
             1.
             
             Nutriment
             was
             to
             be
             prepar'd
             &
             filled
             with
             vital
             heat
             ,
             which
             it
             has
             not
             else
             where
             save
             from
             the
             heart
             .
             2.
             
             Nature
             might
             have
             provided
             for
             this
             passage
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             by
             some
             other
             member
             not
             so
             laboriously
             framed
             ,
             3.
             
             The
             necessity
             of
             the
             Heart
             would
             not
             be
             so
             great
             as
             it
             is
             .
             4.
             
             It
             is
             a
             signe
             that
             some
             farther
             thing
             is
             performed
             i●
             
             the
             Heart
             ,
             in
             that
             venal
             blood
             does
             not
             nourish
             ,
             before
             it
             enters
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             primary
             action
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             to
             be
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             Fountain
             of
             Heat
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             spred
             into
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             whereby
             the
             parts
             are
             animated
             and
             sustained
             .
             Swowneing
             teaches
             so
             much
             and
             other
             defects
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             being
             intercepted
             ,
             the
             Members
             of
             the
             Body
             begin
             to
             flag
             and
             being
             destitute
             of
             heat
             ,
             become
             stupid
             .
             And
             therefore
             cordials
             do
             good
             in
             such
             cases
             ,
             which
             stir
             up
             the
             languishing
             and
             nummed
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Also
             the
             Dissection
             of
             living
             Creatures
             does
             shew
             ,
             that
             the
             Heart
             is
             hot
             ,
             yea
             that
             the
             heart
             of
             a
             Creature
             being
             taken
             out
             and
             newly
             dead
             ,
             a
             warm
             finger
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             warm
             thing
             being
             laid
             upon
             it
             ,
             is
             seen
             to
             come
             to
             its
             self
             again
             and
             to
             stir
             ,
             which
             the
             Lord
             
               Bacon
               Constantine
               ,
               Harvey
            
             ,
             and
             others
             have
             observed
             in
             a
             Dove
             ,
             an
             Eele
             ,
             a
             Salmon
             ,
             and
             a
             Man.
             
          
           
             It
             is
             therefore
             the
             Fountain
             of
             Heat
             ,
             both
             in
             respect
             of
             its
             Substance
             and
             of
             the
             Blood
             contained
             in
             it
             .
             I
             joyn
             both
             together
             .
             For
             the
             Heat
             springs
             not
             from
             the
             blood
             alone
             ,
             as
             Harvey
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             Heart
             in
             an
             Egg
             ,
             and
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             before
             it
             is
             perfect
             and
             hollowed
             with
             ventricles
             ,
             is
             hot
             and
             moves
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             heat
             remains
             in
             Hearts
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             and
             cut
             up
             .
             The
             blood
             which
             flows
             thither
             from
             the
             Coronary
             Vessels
             ,
             flowes
             thither
             for
             Nutritions
             sake
             and
             to
             preserve
             the
             Heat
             .
             Nor
             are
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             sanguine
             parts
             ,
             therefore
             judged
             to
             be
             hotter
             then
             other
             parts
             because
             they
             more
             abound
             with
             any
             heat
             ,
             but
             because
             they
             have
             Arteries
             full
             of
             arterial
             blood
             ,
             and
             depend
             upon
             the
             influence
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             blood
             is
             heated
             .
             So
             that
             unless
             all
             the
             blood
             did
             pass
             through
             the
             heart
             ,
             the
             parts
             would
             never
             grow
             hot
             ,
             and
             the
             further
             the
             blood
             goes
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             by
             so
             much
             the
             sloer
             in
             its
             motion
             ,
             and
             the
             colder
             it
             growes
             .
             That
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             heart
             makes
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Bodie
             cold
             ,
             though
             full
             of
             blood
             ,
             the
             slowness
             of
             the
             Pulse
             is
             a
             sign
             .
          
           
             Nor
             do
             the
             Blood
             and
             Heart
             grow
             hot
             only
             from
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             the
             followers
             of
             
               Des
               Cartes
            
             wil
             have
             it
             ,
             for
             1.
             they
             grant
             that
             the
             fiery
             atomes
             or
             indivisible
             particles
             of
             fire
             ,
             are
             excited
             and
             put
             into
             action
             by
             motion
             ,
             though
             they
             are
             only
             brought
             into
             play
             ,
             but
             not
             produced
             by
             the
             said
             motion
             .
             2.
             
             Many
             things
             are
             moved
             without
             waxeing
             hot
             ,
             as
             water
             ,
             unless
             they
             have
             an
             inbred
             principle
             of
             heat
             .
             3.
             
             Before
             motion
             there
             was
             heat
             proceeding
             from
             the
             seminary
             original
             ,
             which
             is
             afterwards
             preserved
             by
             continual
             motion
             .
          
           
             III.
             Not
             so
             much
             to
             make
             as
             to
             perfect
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             It
             makes
             Arterial
             Blood
             and
             perfects
             the
             venal
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Veins
             .
             For
             they
             are
             out
             who
             attribute
             too
             much
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             heart
             alone
             did
             make
             blood
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             they
             also
             are
             mistaken
             ,
             who
             maintaine
             that
             the
             heart
             contributes
             nothing
             to
             blood-makeing
             .
             I
             goe
             in
             a
             middle
             way
             .
             The
             Liver
             challenges
             the
             first
             makeing
             of
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             formerly
             demonstrated
             ,
             which
             because
             it
             is
             not
             there
             perfected
             ,
             being
             to
             thick
             and
             unfit
             to
             nourish
             ,
             it
             is
             necessary
             that
             it
             should
             receive
             its
             perfection
             from
             other
             parts
             .
             No
             part
             is
             fit
             for
             this
             work
             save
             the
             heart
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             of
             the
             first
             parts
             generated
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             through
             which
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             all
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             body
             has
             its
             passage
             .
             That
             the
             Lungs
             and
             heart-ears
             should
             perform
             their
             Office
             ,
             no
             man
             will
             beleive
             .
          
           
             The
             heart
             perfects
             
               two
               sorts
            
             of
             
               Blood
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Liver
            
             and
             
               that
               of
               the
               Veins
            
             .
             That
             of
             the
             Liver
             is
             twofold
             ,
             the
             ●●●
             of
             the
             Vena
             portae
             ,
             the
             other
             a
             cruder
             sort
             newly
             ●…f
             Chyle
             .
             The
             Vein
             blood
             i●
             likewise
             twofold
             one
             of
             the
             descendent
             trunk
             of
             vena
             cava
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             the
             ascendent
             trunk
             of
             the
             said
             vein
             .
             It
             receivs
             the
             Liver
             blood
             through
             the
             Cava
             ,
             to
             which
             another
             joyns
             it self
             out
             of
             the
             lower
             and
             upper
             Truuk
             ,
             which
             remaining
             over
             and
             above
             after
             the
             parts
             are
             nourished
             ,
             by
             its
             long
             journey
             is
             become
             pauled
             and
             sluggish
             ,
             and
             has
             lost
             its
             heat
             ,
             which
             is
             necessary
             for
             pulsation
             and
             nutrition
             .
          
           
             This
             perfection
             which
             the
             Blood
             receivs
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             hereby
             confirmed
             ,
             in
             that
             the
             blood
             when
             it
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             has
             not
             altogether
             the
             same
             Consistence
             nor
             Colour
             ,
             which
             it
             had
             when
             it
             entred
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             .
             The
             diversity
             consists
             in
             Heat
             and
             plenty
             of
             Spirits
             ,
             wherewith
             it
             is
             furnished
             when
             it
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             which
             it
             wants
             when
             it
             enters
             thereinto
             ;
             and
             in
             Effect
             or
             Operation
             ,
             for
             that
             which
             goes
             out
             is
             fit
             to
             nourish
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             enters
             in
             is
             most
             unfit
             ,
             Vital
             Spirits
             are
             added
             by
             the
             inbred
             faculty
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             the
             sooty
             vapors
             are
             taken
             away
             by
             that
             most
             short
             Concoction
             ,
             being
             evacuated
             by
             the
             Lungs
             and
             Pericardium
             or
             heart-bag
             .
          
           
             For
             what
             parts
             does
             the
             heart
             perfect
             and
             renew
             the
             blood
             .
          
           
             The
             ancients
             did
             beleive
             that
             the
             Heart
             made
             blood
             only
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             .
             But
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             lungs
             are
             greater
             then
             is
             requisite
             only
             for
             their
             Nutrition
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             continually
             more
             blood
             forced
             thither
             by
             the
             pulsation
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             then
             could
             any
             waies
             be
             useful
             for
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             unless
             they
             were
             to
             be
             nourished
             with
             as
             much
             blood
             as
             is
             sufficient
             for
             the
             whole
             Bodie
             .
             And
             that
             all
             is
             not
             consumed
             upon
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             the
             blood
             which
             returnes
             is
             a
             witness
             ,
             which
             runs
             in
             great
             plenty
             at
             every
             pulsation
             ,
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             through
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             which
             in
             live
             anatomies
             being
             tied
             ,
             is
             seen
             to
             swell
             betwixt
             the
             ligature
             and
             the
             Lungs
             .
             For
             there
             is
             no
             way
             for
             it
             to
             return
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             the
             passage
             being
             stopped
             by
             the
             close
             shutting
             of
             the
             mitre-fashionned
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             right
             Ventricle
             therefore
             is
             busied
             about
             blood
             which
             is
             to
             be
             sent
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             the
             left
             doth
             perfect
             the
             blood
             which
             flows
             back
             from
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             being
             there
             impraegnated
             with
             air
             ,
             for
             the
             Nutrition
             of
             the
             whole
             Bodie
             .
             For
             the
             arterial
             blood
             alone
             is
             that
             which
             nourishes
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             only
             fit
             for
             nutrition
             ,
             and
             it
             alone
             is
             forced
             through
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             utmost
             parts
             of
             the
             Bodie
             .
          
           
             To
             perfect
             this
             blood
             many
             things
             
             concur
             .
             1.
             
             Heat
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             dull
             and
             lasie
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             crude
             blood
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             returning
             blood
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             2.
             
             
               Vital
               Spirit
            
             which
             by
             the
             confession
             of
             all
             men
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             joyned
             therewith
             ,
             3.
             
             Light
             the
             companion
             of
             the
             Spirits
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             blood
             receives
             a
             more
             Illustrious
             color
             ,
             is
             moved
             and
             made
             fit
             for
             Nutrition
             .
             4.
             
             A
             certain
             light
             and
             momentary
             Concoction
             ,
             sweetning
             the
             crude
             :
             parts
             ,
             attenuating
             the
             whole
             substance
             ,
             and
             drawing
             forth
             the
             latent
             flame
             .
             5.
             
             The
             whole
             Fabrick
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             internal
             and
             external
             ,
             and
             the
             Vessels
             both
             receiving
             and
             expelling
             .
             6.
             
             The
             separation
             of
             Excrements
             ,
             though
             the
             receptacles
             of
             the
             said
             Excrements
             are
             not
             very
             manifest
             .
             The
             
               sooty
               Vapors
            
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             do
             evaporate
             through
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             .
             The
             
               Watry
               Vapors
            
             of
             both
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             are
             congealed
             into
             the
             water
             of
             the
             Heart-bag
             ,
             and
             are
             spent
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Hairs
             under
             the
             Arms.
             The
             
               remaining
               Excrements
            
             continue
             mixed
             with
             the
             Blood
             ,
             and
             are
             carryed
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             the
             wheyish
             parts
             are
             purged
             by
             the
             emulgent
             Arteries
             into
             the
             
             Kidneys
             ,
             and
             by
             sweats
             into
             the
             habit
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             the
             thicker
             parts
             by
             the
             Hemorrhoidal
             Arteries
             and
             the
             Ramus
             Mesentericus
             .
             Some
             parts
             return
             with
             the
             blood
             through
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             that
             by
             several
             repeated
             courses
             ,
             there
             ,
             they
             may
             be
             at
             last
             mastered
             and
             overcome
             .
          
           
             
               Whether
               or
               no
               is
               the
               Blood
               equally
               perfected
               in
               the
               right
               and
               left
               Ventricle
               ?
            
             
          
           
             Although
             the
             heat
             of
             both
             the
             Ventricles
             doth
             seem
             to
             be
             equal
             ,
             because
             in
             Mankind
             they
             are
             both
             made
             of
             spiritful
             seed
             ,
             and
             as
             much
             is
             afforded
             to
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             by
             the
             Liver-blood
             ,
             and
             the
             returning
             blood
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             left
             by
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             moreover
             in
             Live
             Anatomies
             we
             can
             hardly
             perceive
             that
             the
             one
             is
             hotter
             then
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             Yet
             that
             in
             the
             left
             the
             blood
             receives
             greater
             perfection
             ,
             these
             signs
             and
             tokens
             do
             perswade
             me
             ;
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               It
               receives
               the
               Blood
               in
               some
               measure
               prepared
               from
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               It
               ought
               to
               perfect
               it
               for
               the
               whole
               Body
               ,
               whereas
               the
               right
               perfects
               it
               only
               for
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               It
               hath
               thicker
               Walls
               ,
               more
               compacted
               fleshy
               Pillars
               ,
               wherewith
               the
               heat
               is
               both
               more
               easily
               preserved
               and
               reverberated
               ,
               and
               the
               blood
               more
               strongly
               driven
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               blood
               is
               therein
               more
               frequently
               clottered
               by
               heat
               ,
               and
               Cartilaginous
               and
               boney
               substances
               appear
               being
               dryed
               by
               heat
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               When
               the
               left
               Ventricle
               is
               hurt
               ,
               there
               is
               greater
               danger
               of
               death
               ,
               then
               when
               the
               right
               is
               hurt
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               Many
               Live-wights
               want
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               In
               dying
               persons
               it
               is
               sooner
               dead
               and
               void
               of
               motion
               then
               the
               right
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               The
               Cavity
               thereof
               is
               more
               narrow
               ,
               and
               therefore
               it
               doth
               more
               easily
               preserve
               and
               perfect
               that
               which
               is
               contained
               therein
               .
            
          
           
             We
             cannot
             exactly
             define
             
               the
               place
            
             .
             It
             is
             the
             whole
             Cavity
             ,
             endued
             with
             the
             virtue
             of
             the
             Parenchyma
             ,
             because
             the
             blood
             fils
             the
             whole
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             and
             the
             inbred
             spirit
             ,
             is
             every
             where
             diffused
             .
             Nor
             is
             there
             any
             token
             ,
             of
             any
             stay
             which
             the
             whole
             blood
             makes
             in
             one
             place
             more
             then
             another
             ,
             nor
             of
             any
             peculiar
             virtue
             of
             any
             particle
             .
          
           
             The
             Time.
             It
             is
             perfected
             in
             a
             Moment
             ,
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               It
               is
               forthwith
               received
               and
               expelled
               ,
               and
               makes
               no
               tarriance
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               From
               its
               abidance
               there
               ,
               the
               blood
               would
               not
               be
               perfected
               but
               become
               adust
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               flame
               on
               the
               Candle
               snuf
               ,
               lights
               another
               Candle
               in
               the
               twinckling
               of
               an
               Eye
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Arterial
               Blood
               doth
               continually
               run
               to
               the
               extremities
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               therefore
               it
               ought
               to
               be
               continually
               and
               suddenly
               perfected
               in
               the
               Heart
               .
            
          
           
             IV.
             A
             fourth
             use
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             perpetually
             to
             move
             .
             1.
             
             That
             it
             might
             preserve
             the
             Blood
             and
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             from
             putrefaction
             .
             2.
             
             That
             it
             may
             help
             the
             heat
             and
             Elaboration
             of
             the
             Blood.
             3.
             
             That
             it
             might
             kindle
             and
             stir
             up
             the
             vital
             Light.
             4.
             
             That
             it
             might
             send
             fitting
             nourishment
             to
             all
             parts
             .
          
           
             This
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             termed
             PULSUS
             the
             PULSE
             ,
             which
             is
             continual
             
             without
             ceasing
             ,
             raised
             by
             the
             influent
             Blood
             ,
             and
             the
             Pulsifick
             or
             Pulsative
             faculty
             ,
             there
             resident
             .
          
           
             It
             consists
             of
             a
             
               Systole
               ,
               Diastole
               ●…systole
            
             .
             
             Which
             must
             be
             diligently
             ●…ned
             by
             all
             their
             causes
             ,
             according
             as
             Oc●…
             Inspection
             of
             living
             Bodies
             and
             reason
             shall
             Dictate
             .
          
           
             Systole
             ,
             being
             the
             proper
             and
             natural
             motion
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             a
             contraction
             and
             drawing
             of
             the
             heart
             into
             a
             narrow
             compass
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             by
             that
             means
             be
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             through
             the
             Vena
             Arterialis
             ,
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             through
             the
             Aorta
             into
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
          
           
             Diastole
             ,
             being
             an
             accidental
             motion
             ,
             is
             the
             widning
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             that
             Blood
             may
             be
             drawn
             in
             through
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             and
             through
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             into
             the
             left
             ,
          
           
             Peri-systole
             is
             a
             certain
             rest
             and
             stop
             going
             between
             both
             motions
             ,
             when
             the
             Blood
             is
             about
             to
             enter
             into
             or
             go
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             so
             smal
             in
             healthy
             persons
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             discerned
             ,
             being
             very
             manifest
             in
             such
             as
             are
             at
             the
             point
             of
             death
             ,
             It
             is
             only
             one
             between
             the
             Systole
             and
             Diastole
             ,
             or
             between
             the
             Diastole
             and
             Systole
             .
             This
             is
             the
             natural
             state
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             motions
             two
             others
             are
             Observed
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             A
             certain
             Undation
             or
             waving
             towards
             one
             side
             according
             to
             the
             carriage
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             did
             gently
             wreath
             it self
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             an
             horse
             when
             he
             is
             drinking
             ;
             of
             which
             Harvey
             speaks
             .
             2.
             
             A
             trembling
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             cut
             in
             sunder
             .
             The
             former
             depends
             upon
             the
             Situation
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             :
             The
             latter
             is
             preternatural
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             not
             arising
             from
             other
             particles
             or
             smal
             Bodies
             ,
             sent
             in
             by
             the
             Coronaria
             ,
             which
             is
             then
             cut
             in
             sunder
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             remainders
             of
             the
             vital
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             We
             are
             taught
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             
             our
             Eyes
             ,
             that
             in
             every
             Diastole
             blood
             is
             plentifully
             received
             in
             ,
             and
             in
             every
             Systole
             plentyfully
             expelled
             ,
             both
             into
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             and
             the
             Aorta
             .
             This
             appears
             I
             say
             to
             our
             Eye-sight
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             By
             Ligatures
             or
             bindings
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             .
             If
             the
             Cava
             and
             the
             Aorta
             with
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Lungs
             shall
             be
             bound
             or
             pressed
             down
             with
             the
             Finger
             or
             any
             other
             Instrument
             on
             either
             side
             ;
             we
             shall
             manifestly
             perceive
             that
             the
             part
             of
             the
             Cava
             which
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Heart
             is
             made
             empty
             ;
             that
             in
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             it
             is
             filled
             ,
             and
             thereby
             the
             Heart
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             Ascendent
             and
             Descendent
             Vein
             ,
             on
             this
             side
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             doth
             swel
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             ,
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             being
             tied
             near
             the
             heart
             ,
             by
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             left
             Ear
             ,
             it
             is
             made
             void
             and
             empty
             on
             this
             side
             the
             Ligature
             where
             it
             looks
             towards
             the
             heart
             ,
             but
             towards
             the
             Lungs
             it
             arises
             and
             swels
             .
             The
             Arterial
             Vessels
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             do
             shew
             themselves
             in
             a
             contrary
             fashion
             :
             For
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             being
             tied
             ,
             it
             swels
             towards
             the
             heart
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             filled
             by
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ;
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             being
             bound
             ,
             swels
             between
             the
             heart
             and
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             being
             filled
             by
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Besides
             the
             Ligatures
             ,
             we
             may
             gather
             as
             much
             from
             the
             vessels
             being
             opened
             or
             wounded
             .
             The
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             and
             the
             
               Aorta
               Arteria
            
             being
             opned
             by
             a
             Lancet
             ,
             at
             every
             Systole
             or
             Elevation
             and
             Contraction
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             it
             pours
             forth
             plenty
             of
             blood
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             the
             heart
             continues
             strong
             ,
             for
             when
             it
             languishes
             ,
             it
             intermits
             some
             Pulses
             ,
             before
             it
             voids
             any
             Blood.
             Now
             we
             observe
             no
             such
             thing
             ,
             when
             the
             Cava
             or
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             ,
             are
             opened
             between
             the
             heart
             and
             the
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               IV.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               doth
               in
               some
               measure
               express
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Heart
               in
               a
               Living-Creature
               ,
               and
               the
               Circulation
               of
               the
               Blood.
               
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Lungs
                     drawn
                     back
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Aorta
                     Artery
                     bound
                     ,
                     and
                     swelling
                     towards
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     An
                     Orifice
                     made
                     in
                     the
                     swoln
                     part
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Arteriosa
                     tied
                     ,
                     in
                     like
                     manner
                     swelling
                     towards
                     the
                     Heart
                     ,
                     growing
                     yellow
                     where
                     it
                     looks
                     towards
                     the
                     Lungs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ee
                     .
                     The
                     Ears
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Fore-side
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     ,
                     being
                     in
                     the
                     Systole
                     somwhat
                     hard
                     ,
                     and
                     bent
                     ,
                     and
                     with
                     its
                     sides
                     extended
                     ,
                     its
                     point
                     being
                     drawn
                     back
                     to
                     the
                     Basis
                     or
                     broad
                     End.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     gg
                     .
                     The
                     Coronary
                     Vessels
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               form
               of
               the
               Heart
               in
               its
               Diastole
               ,
               and
               the
               motion
               of
               Humors
               in
               its
               vessels
               .
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Venosa
                     without
                     binding
                     ,
                     being
                     ful
                     towards
                     the
                     Lungs
                     ,
                     empty
                     towards
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   b.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Ear
                     ,
                     which
                     receives
                     blood
                     from
                     the
                     Arteria
                     Venosa
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     tied
                     ,
                     empty
                     towards
                     the
                     Heart
                     ,
                     ful
                     towards
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   d.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Ear
                     swoln
                     or
                     heaving
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     hinder-side
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     ,
                     as
                     it
                     is
                     in
                     its
                     Diastole
                     ,
                     flagging
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ff
                     .
                     The
                     hinder
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Lungs
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     bunching
                     or
                     Bossie
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               and
               IV.
               Represents
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Earlets
               or
               little
               Ears
               of
               the
               heart
               .
               The
               third
               Figure
               Represents
               the
               left
               Earlet
               ;
               The
               fourth
               ,
               shews
               the
               Right
               
                 
                   aaa
                   .
                   3.
                   4.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Plane
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Earlet
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   b.
                   3.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Orifice
                     of
                     Arteria
                     venosa
                     .
                     4.
                     
                     The
                     Orifice
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   cccc
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   
                     The
                     three-pointed
                     Valves
                     with
                     seven
                     Fibres
                     ,
                     in
                     4.
                     the
                     same
                     with
                     five
                     only
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ddd
                     .
                     The
                     larger
                     fleshy
                     Pillars
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     eeee
                     .
                     The
                     lesser
                     fleshy
                     Pillars
                     ,
                     Interwoven
                     one
                     within
                     another
                     with
                     wonderful
                     artifice
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     fff
                     .
                     Many-fold
                     Cavities
                     formed
                     between
                     the
                     Pillars
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               102
            
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             swelling
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Flagging
             thereof
             ,
             being
             Palpable
             and
             visible
             to
             the
             external
             sense
             ,
             do
             sufficiently
             demonstrate
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             made
             strait
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             that
             of
             necessity
             somwhat
             must
             be
             squeezed
             out
             as
             it
             were
             forcibly
             ,
             and
             that
             when
             it
             is
             widened
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             be
             filled
             with
             humors
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             The
             Ventricles
             in
             the
             Diastole
             appear
             greater
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Systole
             lesser
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             From
             the
             largness
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             :
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             ,
             do
             open
             into
             the
             heart
             with
             wider
             mouths
             ,
             then
             to
             suffer
             only
             a
             smal
             quantity
             of
             blood
             to
             enter
             .
             Also
             the
             Arterial
             vein
             and
             the
             Aorta
             are
             larger
             ,
             then
             to
             send
             forth
             nothing
             ,
             or
             only
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             The
             Quantity
             of
             Blood
             which
             fills
             
             the
             Heart
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             and
             which
             goes
             out
             by
             the
             Systole
             at
             every
             pulsa●…
             not
             be
             exactly
             measured
             ▪
             be●…ies
             according
             to
             the
             different
             state
             of
             the
             
             heart
             ,
             and
             the
             temper
             of
             Animals
             ,
             their
             Age
             ,
             Sex
             ,
             course
             of
             Diet
             and
             Life
             ,
             &c.
             
             It
             is
             apparent
             to
             our
             Eyes
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             that
             much
             is
             received
             and
             expelled
             .
             But
             it
             moves
             not
             in
             and
             out
             in
             so
             great
             quantities
             in
             persons
             that
             are
             well
             in
             health
             ,
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             more
             quiet
             and
             hath
             the
             command
             of
             it self
             .
             The
             Antients
             supposed
             that
             a
             drop
             or
             two
             was
             enough
             at
             a
             time
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             blood
             did
             freely
             pass
             and
             repass
             the
             same
             way
             .
             But
             one
             drop
             of
             blood
             unaltered
             ,
             is
             not
             able
             to
             fill
             the
             heart
             ,
             nor
             doth
             provoke
             it
             to
             pulsation
             ,
             not
             to
             speak
             how
             the
             foresaid
             experiments
             do
             shew
             the
             plenty
             that
             passes
             to
             and
             fro
             .
             Now
             the
             Valves
             do
             hinder
             the
             free
             passage
             and
             repassage
             of
             the
             blood
             by
             the
             same
             waies
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             three
             pointed
             ones
             or
             Tricuspides
             so
             called
             ,
             do
             hinder
             the
             blood
             which
             enters
             the
             heart
             from
             passing
             back
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             and
             the
             Mitre-shap'd
             Valves
             do
             hinder
             the
             blood
             which
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             heart
             from
             returning
             the
             same
             way
             .
          
           
             
               Later
               Physitians
            
             ,
             are
             divided
             in
             their
             opinions
             .
             Some
             suppose
             that
             a
             drop
             or
             two
             is
             either
             so
             rarified
             as
             to
             fill
             the
             heart
             ,
             amongst
             whom
             is
             
               Des
               Cartes
            
             ;
             or
             is
             turned
             into
             spirit
             ,
             as
             
               Riolanu's
               Primrose
               ,
               Leichner
            
             and
             others
             suppose
             ,
             who
             measure
             it
             by
             grains
             ,
             whom
             we
             shall
             answer
             when
             we
             come
             to
             the
             Causes
             :
             Others
             being
             Patrons
             and
             favourers
             of
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             as
             
               Harvey
               ,
               Walaeus
               ,
               Conringius
               ,
               Slegelius
               ,
               &c.
            
             do
             calculate
             the
             quantity
             ,
             by
             ounces
             ,
             drams
             and
             scruples
             .
          
           
             To
             clear
             up
             this
             Question
             ,
             three
             things
             are
             to
             be
             considered
             ,
             1.
             
             How
             much
             blood
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             heart
             .
             2.
             
             How
             much
             is
             expelled
             or
             driven
             out
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             in
             its
             Systole
             ;
             whether
             all
             that
             enters
             the
             Heart
             in
             its
             Diastole
             ,
             is
             squirted
             out
             in
             the
             next
             Systole
             .
             3.
             
             How
             many
             pulsations
             the
             heart
             makes
             in
             one
             hour
             ;
             or
             how
             often
             the
             heart
             receives
             somwhat
             by
             its
             Diastole
             ,
             and
             expels
             somwhat
             by
             its
             Systole
             ,
             in
             the
             space
             of
             an
             hour
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             In
             the
             heart
             being
             in
             its
             
               Diastole
               ,
               Harvey
            
             hath
             found
             above
             two
             ounces
             of
             blood
             .
             Also
             Plempius
             found
             near
             upon
             two
             ounces
             of
             blood
             ,
             in
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             heart
             of
             a
             man
             that
             was
             hanged
             .
             Riolanus
             will
             hardly
             allow
             half
             an
             ounce
             in
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             one
             that
             was
             hanged
             ,
             and
             saies
             there
             was
             more
             blood
             in
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             .
             Hogeland
             also
             wil
             have
             half
             an
             ounce
             or
             a
             dram
             at
             least
             ,
             to
             enter
             ,
             at
             every
             opening
             of
             the
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Now
             the
             quantity
             of
             all
             the
             blood
             contained
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             doth
             seldom
             exceed
             twenty
             four
             pounds
             ,
             or
             come
             short
             of
             fifteen
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             In
             the
             Systole
             there
             is
             expelled
             either
             a
             fourth
             part
             ,
             or
             a
             fist
             ,
             or
             a
             sixt
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             an
             eight
             ,
             or
             all
             together
             that
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             Harvey
             supposes
             half
             an
             ounce
             in
             a
             man
             ,
             or
             three
             drams
             ,
             or
             one
             dram
             ,
             in
             a
             Sheep
             and
             a
             Dog
             he
             saies
             a
             scruple
             .
             And
             he
             proves
             the
             same
             by
             that
             suddain
             effusion
             of
             all
             the
             blood
             ,
             if
             the
             very
             least
             Artery
             be
             cut
             ,
             and
             because
             in
             the
             space
             of
             one
             half
             hour
             ,
             all
             the
             blood
             may
             be
             passed
             through
             the
             heart
             ,
             he
             certainly
             concludes
             ,
             that
             in
             every
             Systole
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             much
             blood
             is
             expelled
             .
             Conringius
             approves
             of
             his
             Computation
             .
             Walaeus
             admits
             of
             half
             an
             ounce
             ,
             but
             he
             supposes
             only
             one
             scruple
             ,
             as
             doth
             
               Slegelius
               .
               Regius
            
             has
             many
             times
             observed
             half
             an
             ounce
             ,
             somtimes
             two
             or
             three
             drams
             ,
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             a
             Dog
             dissected
             .
             Hogeland
             contents
             himself
             with
             a
             dram
             .
             I
             being
             more
             sparing
             suppose
             half
             a
             scruple
             ,
             in
             the
             smallest
             proportion
             to
             the
             quantity
             which
             issues
             in
             such
             as
             ●…ded
             .
             For
             there
             goes
             not
             out
             so
             much
             i●…
             free
             heart
             ,
             ●s
             in
             one
             that
             is
             bound
             and
             forced
             ;
             〈…〉
             there
             so
             much
             expelled
             in
             the
             following
             Systole
             ,
             as
             was
             drawn
             in
             by
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             some
             part
             sticks
             in
             the
             hollow
             pits
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             much
             states
             in
             the
             Cavity
             formed
             by
             the
             production
             of
             the
             three
             pointed
             Valves
             and
             Distinct
             as
             it
             were
             from
             the
             Ventricle
             ;
             finally
             ,
             the
             heart
             cannot
             be
             so
             straitly
             contracted
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             as
             to
             squeeze
             out
             every
             jot
             of
             the
             Blood
             therein
             contained
             .
             Therefore
             Conringius
             doth
             rightly
             suspect
             that
             abides
             there
             the
             space
             of
             one
             or
             two
             Pulses
             ,
             till
             by
             little
             and
             little
             it
             raise
             it self
             ,
             which
             I
             understand
             of
             the
             reliques
             and
             part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             not
             of
             the
             whole
             received
             by
             the
             foregoing
             Diastole
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Primrose
             numbred
             in
             one
             hour
             700
             pulsations
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             
               Riolanus
               2000.
               
               Walaeus
            
             and
             
               Regius
               3000
               ,
               Harvey
            
             ,
             2000.
             in
             some
             4000
             ,
             6000
             ,
             8000.
             
             
               Cardan
               4000.
               
               Plempius
               4450.
               
               Slegelius
            
             4876.
             
             I
             have
             told
             upon
             mine
             own
             wrist
             about
             4400
             ,
             But
             the
             number
             varies
             according
             to
             the
             Age
             ,
             Temperament
             ,
             Diet
             &c.
             of
             every
             person
             .
             So
             many
             Systoles
             therefore
             and
             so
             many
             Diastoles
             there
             will
             be
             in
             one
             hour
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             the
             Heart
             is
             vigorous
             ,
             for
             a
             languishing
             heart
             has
             more
             Diastoles
             then
             Systoles
             .
          
           
             From
             these
             three
             Praemises
             I
             have
             calculated
             ,
             how
             much
             blood
             may
             in
             an
             hour
             be
             squirted
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             its
             sundry
             pulsations
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   From
                   1
                   scruple
                   3000
                
                 
                   times
                   repeated
                   ,
                   arise
                   .
                
                 
                   10l
                   .
                   5
                   ounces
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   1
                   scruple
                   4000
                
                 
                   13l
                   .
                   10
                   oun
                   .
                   5
                   dr
                   .
                   1
                   scr
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   1
                   scruple
                   4450
                
                 
                   15l
                   .
                   5
                   oun
                   .
                   3
                   dr
                   .
                   1
                   scr
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   half
                   a
                   scruple
                   4400
                
                 
                   7l
                   .
                   7
                   oun
                   .
                   5
                   drās
                   ,
                   1
                   scr
                
              
               
                 
                   1
                   dram
                   2000
                
                 
                   20
                   l.
                   10
                   ounces
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   2
                   drams
                   2000
                
                 
                   41
                   l.
                   8
                   ounces
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   half
                   an
                   ounce
                   2000
                
                 
                   83
                   l.
                   4
                   ounces
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   1
                   ounce
                   2000
                
                 
                   166
                   l.
                   8
                   ounces
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             Now
             supposeing
             all
             the
             blood
             contained
             in
             a
             mans
             body
             to
             be
             fifteen
             pounds
             ,
             if
             that
             be
             taken
             away
             which
             goeth
             into
             the
             Nutriment
             of
             the
             parts
             ,
             the
             defect
             whereof
             is
             suplied
             by
             new
             blood
             bred
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             it
             will
             follow
             ,
          
           
             
               1
               That
               more
               blood
               passes
               through
               the
               Heart
               every
               hour
               ,
               then
               can
               be
               afforded
               by
               the
               Concoction
               of
               the
               Liver
               and
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               2
               That
               all
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Body
               passeth
               through
               the
               Heart
               ,
               in
               the
               space
               of
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               hour
               ,
               or
               half
               an
               hour
               ,
               or
               an
               hour
               ,
               or
               an
               hour
               and
               an
               half
               ,
               or
               two
               houres
               at
               the
               most
               .
               For
               I
               cannot
               agree
               to
               Riolanus
               his
               conceit
               ,
               that
               the
               blood
               is
               circulated
               only
               once
               or
               twice
               in
               a
               day
               ,
               because
               he
               builds
               upon
               a
               false
               supposition
               of
               drops
               ,
               and
               that
               only
               half
               the
               blood
               is
               circulated
               .
            
             
               3
               That
               the
               parts
               to
               be
               nourished
               do
               not
               need
               so
               much
               blood
               for
               their
               nourishment
               .
            
             
               4
               Because
               neither
               the
               Vessels
               are
               broken
               ,
               nor
               the
               Arterial
               blood
               can
               run
               back
               again
               because
               of
               the
               valves
               nor
               is
               elsewhere
               dissipated
               ,
               of
               necessity
               it
               runs
               back
               through
               the
               Veins
               into
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               the
               Circulation
               is
               performed
               ,
               of
               which
               I
               shall
               speak
               more
               in
               my
               book
               of
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               .
            
          
           
             What
             the
             form
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             in
             its
             Systole
             and
             Diastole
             ,
             is
             known
             by
             
             three
             tokens
             .
             1
             By
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             living
             Creatures
             2
             By
             the
             Comodity
             and
             Convenience
             of
             motion
             and
             Rest
             .
             3.
             
             By
             the
             carriage
             of
             the
             fibres
             and
             the
             situation
             of
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Systole
          
           
             
               1
               The
               Point
               of
               the
               Heart
               draws
               up
               to
               the
               basis
               or
               broad
               end
               ,
               and
               it
               becomes
               broader
               because
               it
               is
               busied
               in
               expelling
               the
               blood
               ,
               the
               length
               〈…〉
               being
               changed
               ,
               into
               breadth
               ,
               because
               the
               basis
               ●●●
               broad
               ●nd
               is
               immoveable
               in
               respect
               of
               the
               point
               ,
               
               which
               is
               tied
               to
               no
               Vessels
               .
               But
               according
               to
               the
               observation
               of
               Walaeus
               in
               those
               living
               Creatures
               ,
               whose
               
                 Aorta
                 Arteria
              
               does
               not
               proceed
               from
               the
               Basis
               ,
               the
               broad
               end
               or
               basis
               of
               the
               Hea●t
               withdraws
               it self
               from
               the
               Point
               .
               Riolanus
               will
               have
               the
               Pasis
               of
               the
               Heart
               alwaies
               to
               draw
               towards
               the
               Cone
               or
               Point
               thereof
               ,
               because
               the
               said
               Cone
               is
               harder
               then
               to
               be
               drawn
               or
               bended
               backwards
               .
               But
               else
               where
               ,
               he
               denies
               that
               the
               Basis
               being
               strongly
               fastened
               to
               the
               vessels
               ,
               can
               be
               drawn
               towards
               the
               Point
               .
               And
               therefore
               other
               ,
               whom
               he
               and
               Slegelius
               do
               follow
               ,
               conceive
               that
               it
               is
               extended
               long-waies
               ,
               that
               its
               walls
               being
               contracted
               ,
               it
               may
               expel
               the
               Blood.
               But
               then
               the
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Vessels
               being
               drawn
               downwards
               in
               the
               lengthening
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               would
               be
               shut
               ,
               and
               a
               contrary
               motion
               would
               happen
               ;
               besides
               that
               living
               Anatomies
               do
               shew
               ,
               that
               the
               heart
               becomes
               shorter
               in
               its
               Systole
               .
               Nor
               can
               it
               appear
               longer
               but
               shorter
               ,
               if
               either
               the
               point
               draws
               to
               the
               Basis
               or
               the
               Basis
               to
               the
               point
               .
               Both
               forms
               serve
               for
               expulsion
               of
               the
               blood
               ,
               for
               whether
               you
               press
               a
               bladder
               ful
               of
               water
               longwaies
               or
               broadwaies
               ,
               you
               will
               squeeze
               out
               the
               water
               as
               soon
               one
               way
               as
               another
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               inner
               walls
               are
               on
               each
               side
               ,
               drawn
               up
               to
               themselves
               towards
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               contracted
               and
               straitned
               ,
               as
               we
               find
               by
               putting
               our
               Finger
               in
               :
               But
               the
               outer
               parts
               being
               swelled
               ,
               seem
               to
               be
               made
               broader
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               contraction
               of
               all
               the
               parts
               ,
               blown
               up
               in
               the
               distension
               .
               It
               differs
               therefore
               from
               Galens
               Systole
               ,
               which
               Leichnerus
               will
               have
               to
               be
               drawn
               likewise
               into
               it self
               ,
               the
               Longitude
               of
               the
               Heart
               being
               changed
               into
               Latitude
               .
               For
               indeed
               and
               in
               truth
               the
               Diastole
               is
               ,
               when
               the
               heart
               is
               made
               wider
               ,
               either
               long-waies
               or
               broad-waies
               ,
               to
               the
               intent
               that
               it
               may
               be
               filled
               ,
               unless
               the
               inner
               parts
               be
               straitned
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               foreside
               of
               the
               heart
               is
               lift
               up
               towards
               the
               Breast-bone
               ,
               especially
               obout
               the
               Basis
               .
               For
               the
               Broad
               end
               or
               Basis
               of
               the
               heart
               ,
               smites
               the
               Breast
               where
               the
               Pulse
               is
               felt
               ,
               because
               that
               part
               is
               raised
               ,
               and
               nearest
               the
               Breast-bone
               ;
               in
               the
               Systole
               the
               Heart
               is
               ,
               vigorated
               and
               mettlesome
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               Diastole
               ,
               and
               then
               the
               Arteries
               are
               dilated
               and
               filled
               ,
               whereas
               the
               heart
               is
               emptied
               in
               the
               Systole
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               same
               time
               the
               Pulse
               is
               felt
               ,
               in
               the
               Wrist
               and
               the
               Breast
               ,
               at
               one
               and
               the
               same
               time
               .
               But
               the
               Pulse
               is
               most
               of
               all
               discerned
               ,
               in
               the
               left
               side
               of
               the
               Breast
               ,
               because
               there
               is
               the
               Orisice
               of
               the
               Arteria
               Aorta
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               whole
               heart
               becomes
               every
               where
               tight
               and
               hard
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               It
               is
               more
               contracted
               and
               straiter
               then
               within
               ,
               and
               less
               in
               bulke
               ,
               which
               we
               judg
               by
               our
               sight
               and
               feeling
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               It
               appears
               white
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               more
               imperfect
               sort
               of
               Animals
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               voidance
               of
               blood
               in
               its
               Systole
               .
            
          
           
             In
             the
             Perisystole
             ,
             when
             the
             heart
             is
             loose
             and
             soft
             ,
             before
             the
             Diastole
             follows
             ,
             and
             the
             heart
             is
             in
             its
             properstate
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               point
               withdraws
               it self
               from
               the
               Basis
               ,
               and
               the
               Basis
               from
               the
               point
               in
               some
               persons
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               lateral
               parts
               internal
               and
               external
               do
               extend
               themselves
               towards
               the
               Ribs
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               foreside
               falls
               in
               ,
               the
               hinder
               part
               is
               depressed
               ,
               especially
               above
               at
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               accurate
               Observation
               of
               Walaeus
               .
            
          
           
             The
             other
             Perisystole
             which
             goes
             before
             the
             Systole
             ,
             is
             hardly
             by
             any
             notes
             discernable
             from
             the
             
               Diastole
               ▪
            
          
           
             In
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             which
             Backius
             tells
             us
             
             begins
             in
             the
             middle
             way
             to
             Dilatation
             ,
             and
             ends
             in
             the
             middle
             way
             to
             contraction
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               upper
               side
               is
               lifted
               up
               and
               swolne
               by
               blood
               flowing
               in
               on
               either
               hand
               by
               the
               Venal
               Vessels
               ,
               the
               swelling
               proceeding
               by
               little
               &
               little
               to
               the
               point
               .
               But
               it
               doth
               not
               then
               smite
               the
               Breast
               ,
               as
               Laurentius
               and
               Rosellus
               would
               have
               it
               ,
               because
               the
               Arteries
               undergo
               the
               Systole
               ,
               and
               the
               heart
               ceases
               from
               expulsion
               ,
               for
               which
               cause
               it
               is
               not
               Vigorated
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               It
               is
               more
               flagging
               and
               softer
               ,
               because
               it
               suffers
               in
               its
               reception
               of
               blood
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               fides
               remain
               more
               lank
               and
               extended
               ,
               and
               the
               Cavities
               remain
               wider
               ,
               and
               therefore
               when
               a
               man
               puts
               his
               Finger
               into
               a
               living
               heart
               ,
               he
               feels
               no
               constriction
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               It
               is
               red
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               thinness
               of
               the
               walls
               ,
               and
               the
               Blood
               received
               in
               ,
               which
               is
               Transparent
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               Cone
               departing
               from
               the
               Basis
               in
               the
               Perisystole
               ,
               renders
               the
               heart
               more
               long
               .
               that
               it
               may
               be
               more
               capacious
               to
               receive
               the
               blood
               .
               That
               it
               is
               drawn
               back
               towards
               the
               Cone
               ,
               as
               many
               write
               ,
               our
               Eye-sight
               will
               not
               allow
               us
               to
               believe
               ,
               nor
               can
               it
               or
               ought
               it
               so
               to
               be
               .
               It
               cannot
               because
               the
               Fibres
               are
               relaxed
               and
               not
               bent
               ;
               nor
               ought
               it
               ,
               because
               it
               must
               be
               enlarged
               to
               receive
               ,
               which
               you
               may
               in
               vain
               expect
               ,
               the
               Ventricles
               being
               straitned
               and
               revelled
               .
               Nor
               do
               I
               assent
               to
               
                 Des
                 Cartes
              
               and
               Regius
               men
               of
               most
               subtile
               wits
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               Diastole
               the
               point
               draws
               near
               to
               the
               Basis
               ,
               in
               the
               Systole
               it
               departs
               therefrom
               ;
               for
               they
               confound
               the
               Perisystole
               or
               quiet
               posture
               of
               the
               heart
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               heart
               is
               soft
               ,
               loose
               and
               void
               of
               blood
               ,
               before
               the
               Diastole
               is
               performed
               ,
               after
               the
               Systole
               is
               ended
               .
               Moreover
               ,
               Walaeus
               believes
               ,
               that
               those
               men
               were
               deceived
               ,
               who
               in
               a
               wounded
               living
               heart
               ,
               pretend
               to
               have
               seen
               blood
               expelled
               in
               the
               Diastole
               ;
               because
               they
               took
               that
               to
               be
               the
               Dilatation
               ,
               which
               was
               indeed
               and
               in
               truth
               the
               contraction
               .
               The
               blood
               which
               goes
               out
               of
               the
               wound
               ,
               goes
               out
               in
               the
               Diastole
               ,
               not
               driven
               by
               the
               Pulse
               ,
               but
               because
               the
               way
               lies
               open
               downwards
               ,
               it
               gently
               slides
               out
               ,
               drop
               by
               drop
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             Cause
             of
             the
             motion
             
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             either
             immediate
             or
             remote
             .
             The
             Immediate
             is
             twofold
             ,
             the
             Blood
             and
             the
             Pulsifick
             faculty
             .
             Pulsifick
             or
             
               Pulsative
               faculty
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             either
             remains
             in
             the
             same
             quantity
             as
             it
             flowed
             in
             ,
             or
             it
             is
             changed
             in
             quantity
             by
             boiling
             ,
             working
             and
             rarifying
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Pure
             blood
             and
             sincere
             ,
             flowing
             in
             through
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             Arteria
             Venosa
             ,
             and
             remaining
             such
             ,
             only
             becoming
             more
             perfect
             and
             vital
             ,
             raises
             the
             heart
             into
             a
             Tumor
             like
             water
             in
             a
             Bladder
             or
             Skin-bottle
             ,
             which
             being
             for
             the
             greatest
             part
             distended
             ,
             because
             the
             plenty
             of
             blood
             is
             burthensome
             ,
             it
             raises
             its
             self
             to
             expel
             the
             same
             ,
             by
             gathering
             together
             its
             Fibres
             ;
             and
             this
             motion
             happens
             to
             the
             heart
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             as
             the
             motions
             of
             other
             Members
             ,
             viz
             ,
             the
             stomach
             ,
             Guts
             ,
             Bladder
             ,
             Womb
             ,
             which
             are
             extended
             by
             the
             reception
             of
             Chylus
             ,
             Whey
             ,
             Wine
             ,
             Blood
             ,
             &c.
             which
             being
             expelled
             they
             fall
             again
             ;
             and
             like
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             are
             stretched
             being
             swoln
             with
             Animal
             Spirits
             .
             By
             this
             Blood
             the
             Heart
             is
             continually
             moved
             ,
             as
             a
             Mill-wheele
             is
             by
             the
             perpetual
             falling
             down
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             which
             ceasing
             the
             Wheel
             stands
             still
             .
             There
             is
             plenty
             of
             blood
             enough
             to
             distend
             it
             ,
             no●
             so
             much
             furnished
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             as
             from
             the
             〈◊〉
             and
             descendent
             branches
             of
             the
             Cava
             ,
             running
             
             back
             from
             the
             remotest
             Veinulets
             or
             smallest
             branches
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             continually
             forced
             along
             ,
             with
             Celerity
             and
             Vehemency
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Demonstrations
             and
             Doctrine
             of
             Harvey
             and
             Walaeus
             .
             I
             shall
             justifie
             what
             I
             now
             say
             with
             only
             one
             experiment
             :
             If
             the
             Vessels
             which
             bring
             into
             the
             heart
             be
             tied
             and
             so
             stopt
             ,
             the
             Hearts
             motion
             ceases
             ,
             and
             there
             remains
             nothing
             but
             a
             Wavering
             and
             a
             Palpitation
             ;
             but
             the
             Ligature
             being
             loosned
             ,
             it
             recovers
             its
             motion
             .
          
           
             Aristotle
             makes
             the
             Cause
             to
             be
             Blood
             which
             is
             not
             pure
             ,
             nor
             in
             so
             great
             quantity
             as
             to
             be
             able
             of
             it self
             to
             distend
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             boyling
             and
             working
             ,
             which
             boyling
             of
             the
             blood
             many
             have
             followed
             ,
             though
             explained
             after
             a
             different
             manner
             .
             
               Caesar
               Cremoninus
            
             makes
             the
             cause
             to
             be
             the
             resistency
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             swelling
             thereof
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Ebullition
             ,
             which
             afterward
             falls
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             inbred
             heavyness
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             parts
             puft
             up
             with
             wind
             ,
             do
             of
             their
             own
             accord
             settle
             when
             the
             wind
             is
             out
             ,
             and
             the
             heaving
             of
             the
             Earth
             caused
             by
             repletion
             and
             blowing
             up
             of
             wind
             ,
             settles
             again
             ,
             by
             the
             peculiar
             heavyness
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
             
               Caspar
               Hofman
            
             flies
             to
             the
             inaequality
             of
             the
             boyling
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             boyling
             water
             ,
             part
             whereof
             ascends
             and
             part
             descends
             .
          
           
             Others
             do
             interpret
             the
             matter
             with
             greater
             subtilty
             saying
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             changed
             into
             an
             Airie
             spirit
             .
             Primerose
             saies
             ,
             that
             blood
             just
             as
             Milk
             ,
             Honey
             ,
             and
             very
             many
             things
             besides
             ,
             doth
             exceeding
             swel
             and
             rise
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             become
             nothing
             but
             a
             kind
             of
             Spirit
             or
             light
             Air.
             Leichnerus
             saith
             that
             of
             one
             grain
             of
             good
             blood
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             Cordial
             Balsam
             is
             made
             :
             even
             as
             by
             one
             grain
             of
             Odoriferous
             Gum
             cast
             upon
             a
             Cole
             ,
             an
             whole
             Chamber
             is
             filled
             with
             a
             delitious
             smel
             .
          
           
             But
             many
             difficulties
             stand
             in
             the
             way
             of
             this
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               No
               boyling
               is
               of
               it self
               equal
               ,
               but
               the
               Pulse
               is
               somtimes
               equal
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Pulse
               should
               be
               greater
               according
               as
               the
               Boyling
               is
               greater
               .
               But
               the
               boyling
               of
               the
               blood
               is
               greatest
               in
               burning
               Fevers
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               extremity
               of
               bubbling
               heat
               and
               the
               various
               nature
               of
               the
               Blood
               ,
               yet
               is
               the
               Pulse
               in
               such
               cases
               very
               smal
               ,
               and
               in
               Putrid
               Fevers
               it
               is
               evermore
               little
               in
               the
               beginning
               according
               to
               Galen
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               In
               live
               Anatomies
               ,
               if
               you
               wound
               the
               heart
               or
               the
               Arteries
               near
               the
               heart
               ,
               pure
               blood
               leaps
               out
               abundantly
               ,
               not
               frothy
               ,
               nor
               boyling
               ,
               nor
               heaving
               ,
               and
               it
               continues
               as
               it
               came
               forth
               .
               Nor
               can
               it
               in
               a
               moment
               of
               time
               ,
               either
               boyl
               in
               the
               Heart
               or
               Leave
               boyling
               ,
               if
               it
               did
               boyl
               .
               Yea
               and
               if
               in
               two
               Vessels
               you
               shall
               receive
               the
               veiny
               blood
               out
               of
               the
               Cava
               near
               the
               heart
               and
               the
               Arterial
               blood
               out
               of
               the
               Aorta
               near
               its
               orignal
               ,
               you
               shall
               find
               no
               difference
               :
               neither
               at
               the
               first
               ,
               nor
               afterwards
               .
               This
               
                 Harvey
                 ,
                 Walaeus
              
               ,
               and
               as
               many
               as
               have
               made
               trial
               can
               witness
               with
               me
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               It
               cannot
               all
               be
               turned
               into
               pure
               spirit
               by
               the
               heart
               ,
               nor
               ought
               it
               so
               to
               be
               .
               Not
               the
               former
               ,
               because
               there
               is
               not
               so
               much
               heat
               in
               a
               sound
               heart
               ,
               nor
               can
               the
               blood
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Arteries
               set
               over
               a
               great
               fire
               be
               all
               extenuated
               ,
               as
               Conringius
               hath
               observed
               .
               Not
               the
               latter
               ,
               because
               the
               parts
               for
               whose
               nourishment
               it
               is
               ordained
               ,
               are
               not
               meerly
               spiritual
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Plunging
               into
               cold
               water
               would
               asswage
               the
               boyling
               .
               But
               the
               Arm
               being
               hard
               bound
               till
               it
               swel
               and
               grow
               red
               again
               ,
               and
               then
               thrust
               into
               most
               cold
               Water
               or
               Snow
               ,
               when
               you
               unbind
               the
               same
               you
               shall
               perceive
               how
               much
               the
               Blood
               returning
               to
               the
               Heart
               doth
               cool
               the
               same
               ,
               as
               Harvey
               hath
               taught
               us
               .
            
          
           
             The
             most
             subtile
             
               Renatus
               des
               Crates
            
             and
             
               Cornelius
               Hogelandius
            
             ,
             and
             
               Henricus
               Regius
            
             who
             tread
             in
             his
             footsteps
             ,
             with
             equal
             commendation
             ,
             do
             after
             another
             manner
             demonstrate
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             proceed
             from
             a
             Drop
             or
             two
             of
             blood
             rarified
             :
             when
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             are
             not
             distended
             with
             blood
             ,
             of
             necessity
             two
             large
             drops
             do
             fall
             thereinto
             ,
             one
             out
             of
             the
             Cava
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             another
             out
             of
             the
             
               venosa
               Arteria
            
             into
             the
             left
             ,
             because
             those
             two
             Vessels
             are
             alwaies
             full
             ,
             and
             their
             Mouths
             towards
             the
             Heart
             are
             open
             ,
             which
             drops
             because
             of
             their
             aptness
             to
             be
             dilated
             ,
             and
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             remainders
             of
             blood
             therein
             burning
             ,
             presently
             they
             are
             set
             on
             fire
             and
             dilated
             by
             rarefaction
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Valves
             through
             which
             the
             drops
             entred
             are
             shut
             and
             the
             Heart
             is
             distended
             .
             But
             because
             of
             the
             straitness
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             the
             blood
             rarifying
             more
             and
             more
             cannot
             there
             abide
             ,
             therefore
             at
             the
             same
             moment
             of
             time
             ,
             it
             opens
             in
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             the
             three
             Valves
             of
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             which
             look
             from
             without
             inwards
             ,
             and
             being
             agitated
             by
             heat
             ,
             it
             breaks
             out
             through
             the
             said
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             and
             by
             distending
             the
             same
             and
             al
             its
             branches
             and
             driving
             on
             the
             blood
             ,
             makes
             them
             beat
             the
             Pulse
             :
             but
             in
             the
             left
             ventricle
             it
             opens
             the
             three
             valves
             of
             Arteria
             magna
             looking
             from
             without
             inwards
             ,
             and
             through
             them
             breaks
             into
             the
             great
             Artery
             ,
             which
             it
             widens
             ,
             and
             drives
             the
             next
             blood
             warmed
             and
             ex●…led
             by
             the
             former
             pulsations
             ,
             into
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             thereby
             distended
             .
             And
             so
             they
             conceive
             the
             Diastole
             is
             caused
             .
             And
             they
             say
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             Systole
             is
             ,
             because
             the
             blood
             being
             expelled
             out
             of
             the
             ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Heart
             is
             in
             part
             evacuated
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             it self
             in
             the
             Arteries
             cooled
             ,
             wherefore
             of
             necessity
             the
             heart
             and
             Arteries
             must
             flag
             and
             sink
             ,
             whereupon
             way
             is
             again
             made
             for
             two
             drops
             more
             to
             enter
             ,
             that
             so
             the
             Diastole
             may
             be
             repeated
             .
          
           
             I
             dare
             not
             deny
             a
             light
             Rarefaction
             from
             a
             gentle
             heat
             ,
             such
             as
             we
             observe
             in
             the
             opening
             of
             a
             Vein
             ,
             and
             I
             grant
             that
             it
             may
             be
             somtimes
             praeternaturally
             augmented
             ;
             but
             that
             a
             few
             drops
             should
             be
             rarified
             into
             so
             great
             a
             bulk
             ,
             as
             to
             cause
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             be
             cooled
             in
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             many
             Arguments
             ,
             besides
             those
             before
             those
             opposed
             to
             the
             Ebullition
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             do
             disswade
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Living
               Dissections
               ,
               in
               which
               neither
               when
               the
               Heart
               ,
               nor
               when
               the
               Arteries
               are
               wounded
               ,
               does
               the
               blood
               come
               out
               drop
               by
               drop
               or
               rarified
               ,
               but
               pure
               ,
               such
               as
               the
               Ear
               had
               forced
               out
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Heart
               being
               cut
               in
               pieces
               or
               pricked
               ,
               is
               seen
               to
               pulse
               ,
               without
               any
               rarefaction
               of
               blood
               ,
               which
               is
               but
               imaginary
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               In
               strong
               Dogs
               the
               point
               of
               the
               Heart
               being
               cut
               off
               ,
               Walaeus
               observed
               ,
               that
               when
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Efflux
               of
               Blood
               ,
               it
               was
               not
               half
               full
               ,
               it
               was
               nevertheless
               erected
               ,
               but
               not
               filled
               by
               rarefaction
               :
               but
               when
               it
               was
               contracted
               ,
               that
               portion
               of
               blood
               which
               remained
               in
               the
               Heart
               ,
               was
               cast
               out
               to
               the
               distance
               of
               more
               then
               four
               Feet
               .
               It
               is
               in
               vain
               to
               call
               in
               the
               outward
               Coldness
               of
               the
               Air
               as
               an
               assistant
               cause
               :
               for
               the
               blood
               in
               the
               Heart
               doth
               not
               grow
               cold
               in
               a
               moment
               ,
               the
               heat
               thereof
               being
               yet
               Vigorous
               ,
               as
               a
               boyling
               pot
               taken
               from
               the
               fire
               and
               uncovered
               doth
               not
               immediately
               cease
               to
               boyl
               but
               after
               some
               time
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               
                 Jacobus
                 Back
              
               doth
               elegantly
               devince
               the
               same
               from
               the
               structure
               of
               the
               heart
               and
               its
               Vessels
               .
               For
               the
               Musculous
               flesh
               of
               the
               heart
               being
               firme
               and
               
               strong
               ,
               is
               unapt
               to
               rise
               and
               fall
               by
               the
               bare
               Rarefaction
               of
               the
               blood
               .
               A
               more
               vehement
               action
               is
               requisite
               to
               move
               this
               vast
               bulk
               .
               Also
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               heart
               should
               have
               had
               a
               greater
               Orifice
               ,
               and
               the
               rarefied
               blood
               being
               to
               go
               forth
               would
               require
               a
               larger
               space
               ,
               then
               then
               was
               necessary
               for
               its
               entrance
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               A
               Confusion
               would
               arise
               in
               the
               motions
               of
               the
               Heart
               and
               valves
               ,
               as
               he
               observes
               .
               The
               Diastole
               of
               both
               of
               them
               would
               be
               performed
               in
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               valves
               should
               be
               useless
               ,
               both
               which
               is
               repugnant
               to
               experience
               .
               Moreover
               the
               valves
               must
               ,
               be
               both
               shut
               and
               open
               ,
               in
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Arterie
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               That
               it
               should
               be
               cooled
               in
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               neither
               reason
               or
               occular
               inspection
               will
               permit
               .
               It
               is
               drawn
               hot
               out
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               differing
               little
               or
               nothing
               from
               that
               which
               is
               contained
               either
               in
               the
               Heart
               ,
               or
               near
               it
               .
               In
               the
               small
               Arteries
               there
               is
               indeed
               no
               Pulse
               felt
               ,
               but
               that
               is
               to
               be
               imputed
               to
               the
               smalness
               of
               the
               vessels
               and
               their
               distance
               from
               the
               Heart
               which
               forces
               the
               blood
               .
               Nor
               ought
               it
               because
               it
               enters
               into
               the
               Capillary
               Vessels
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               nourish
               the
               parts
               with
               hot
               Blood
               ,
               not
               with
               such
               as
               is
               cooled
               and
               thickned
               ,
               before
               it
               is
               changed
               into
               the
               secondary
               humors
               .
               And
               what
               use
               is
               there
               of
               rarefaction
               ,
               if
               it
               presently
               settle
               again
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Experiments
             and
             Reasons
             which
             learned
             men
             bring
             to
             the
             contrary
             ,
             from
             an
             Eele
             and
             an
             hunting
             dog
             ,
             from
             the
             contraction
             of
             the
             members
             by
             Cold
             from
             palpitations
             ,
             from
             spirit
             of
             wine
             resembling
             the
             Pulse
             ,
             from
             vehement
             protrusion
             &c.
             are
             easily
             answered
             if
             you
             consider
          
           
             
               1
               That
               a
               certain
               motion
               is
               restored
               even
               in
               Hearts
               that
               are
               dead
               ,
               by
               exciteing
               their
               heat
               as
               in
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               Fault
               is
               in
               the
               Vessels
               contracted
               by
               Colds
               not
               in
               the
               Blood.
               when
               they
               fall
               in
               and
               flag
               .
            
             
               3
               Palpitations
               arise
               from
               plenty
               of
               blood
               ,
               as
               examples
               testifie
               ,
               suppression
               of
               the
               Courses
               ,
               and
               the
               cure
               by
               blood-letting
               .
            
             
               4
               In
               the
               Heart
               there
               is
               an
               even
               motion
               ,
               different
               from
               that
               which
               raised
               by
               spirit
               of
               wine
               or
               any
               thing
               else
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               protrusion
               by
               pure
               blood
               is
               more
               vehement
               ,
               if
               the
               faculty
               concur
               ,
               and
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Heart
               be
               united
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               Heart
               is
               in
               its
               Perisystole
               or
               very
               near
               it
               ,
               when
               in
               the
               point
               cut
               off
               ,
               no
               dilatation
               is
               observed
               ,
               if
               it
               continue
               still
               in
               the
               Systole
               ,
               the
               dilatation
               is
               not
               felt
               ,
               till
               the
               Diastole
               follow
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               pulsifick
               Faculty
            
             implanted
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             joyned
             with
             
             the
             blood
             as
             the
             cause
             of
             its
             motion
             ,
             either
             that
             it
             may
             guide
             the
             influx
             and
             egress
             of
             blood
             ,
             and
             assist
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             would
             otherwise
             proceed
             disorderly
             ,
             as
             I
             explain
             the
             matter
             ;
             or
             that
             it
             might
             of
             it self
             produce
             the
             motion
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             conserved
             ,
             if
             the
             perpetual
             flux
             of
             the
             blood
             should
             be
             stopped
             .
             That
             the
             Heart
             stands
             in
             need
             of
             such
             a
             faculty
             I
             prove
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Because
               the
               Pulse
               would
               be
               alwaies
               unequal
               ,
               the
               influx
               being
               unequal
               ,
               unless
               directed
               by
               some
               Faculty
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               When
               the
               Heart
               in
               Feavers
               is
               more
               vehemently
               moved
               then
               ordinary
               ,
               through
               the
               urgency
               of
               heat
               ,
               and
               in
               dying
               persons
               Nature
               being
               at
               the
               last
               pinch
               ,
               and
               using
               all
               her
               might
               ,
               yet
               is
               the
               motion
               of
               the
               heart
               weak
               ,
               as
               appears
               by
               the
               Pulse
               ,
               because
               the
               inbred
               Faculty
               is
               either
               lost
               or
               weakned
               .
               Contrariwise
               ,
               though
               the
               said
               Faculty
               be
               strong
               ,
               and
               the
               influx
               of
               the
               blood
               cease
               or
               be
               hindred
               ,
               after
               large
               bleedings
               ,
               or
               by
               reason
               of
               Obstruction
               of
               the
               Vessels
               ,
               either
               in
               the
               whole
               Habit
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               or
               the
               passages
               thereof
               ,
               or
               near
               the
               Heart
               ,
               the
               Motion
               of
               the
               Heart
               fails
               .
               And
               therefore
               both
               are
               to
               be
               joyned
               together
               as
               primary
               Causes
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Any
               Particles
               of
               the
               Heart
               being
               cut
               off
               ,
               do
               pulse
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               reliques
               of
               this
               Faculty
               or
               Spirit
               remaining
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Heart
               being
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               or
               cut
               in
               pieces
               ,
               lightly
               pricked
               with
               a
               pin
               ,
               does
               presently
               pulse
               ,
               as
               Walaeus
               hath
               observed
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               It
               were
               contrary
               to
               the
               Majesty
               of
               the
               principal
               Part
               ,
               to
               be
               moved
               by
               another
               whether
               it
               will
               or
               no
               ,
               without
               any
               assistance
               from
               itself
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               receive
               a
               violent
               Impression
               .
            
          
           
             Regius
             hath
             substituted
             the
             influx
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             into
             the
             fibres
             of
             the
             Heart
             instead
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             ,
             and
             Hogeland
             the
             little
             petite
             Atomes
             of
             the
             blood
             moved
             in
             the
             Parenchyma
             .
             But
             we
             must
             know
             in
             the
             first
             place
             1.
             
             That
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             Natural
             which
             lasts
             perpetually
             ,
             yea
             against
             our
             wills
             ,
             and
             when
             we
             are
             asleep
             ,
             and
             not
             Animal
             .
             2.
             
             That
             we
             exclude
             not
             the
             Spirits
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             Souls
             Servants
             and
             Instruments
             .
             3.
             
             The
             small
             Boddikies
             or
             indivisible
             Particles
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             have
             all
             dropped
             out
             in
             dis●ected
             Hearts
             ,
             because
             the
             
               Vena
               coronaria
            
             was
             cut
             asunder
             .
             And
             that
             if
             any
             reliques
             of
             the
             said
             Bodikies
             did
             remain
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             be
             excited
             to
             motion
             ,
             either
             by
             pricking
             alone
             ,
             or
             by
             raising
             heat
             ,
             unless
             a
             Spirit
             or
             Faculty
             be
             allowed
             ,
             which
             being
             extinguished
             ,
             though
             the
             pieces
             of
             the
             Heart
             be
             laid
             in
             never
             so
             hot
             a
             place
             ,
             they
             will
             never
             pant
             .
          
           
             Among
             the
             
               Remote
               Causes
            
             there
             is
          
           
             1
             The
             vital
             Spirit
             ,
             as
             well
             that
             
             which
             is
             implanted
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             comes
             thither
             from
             without
             ,
             with
             beat
             sufficiently
             manifest
             in
             live
             dissections
             ,
             and
             which
             warms
             the
             whole
             Bodie
             .
             And
             that
             either
             not
             
               shineing
               with
               light
            
             ,
             as
             most
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             or
             ▪
             shineing
             .
             That
             a
             lightfull
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             requisite
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             many
             things
             argue
             .
             1
             The
             motion
             of
             the
             Elements
             is
             simple
             ,
             never
             circular
             ,
             and
             light
             moves
             it self
             and
             the
             humors
             with
             a
             circular
             motion
             .
             2
             The
             Heart
             and
             the
             Blood
             are
             more
             quickly
             moved
             by
             light
             then
             otherwise
             they
             could
             be
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             twinkleing
             of
             an
             eye
             ,
             dazeles
             all
             things
             ,
             illuminates
             all
             things
             .
             3.
             
             There
             is
             in
             all
             particular
             parts
             besides
             the
             obscure
             principles
             of
             the
             Elements
             ,
             also
             a
             lightfull
             part
             propagated
             from
             the
             seed
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             preserved
             by
             a
             like
             flame
             ,
             kindled
             from
             the
             Heart
             4
             In
             Hippocrates
             to
             dream
             of
             pure
             and
             brightly
             shining
             starrs
             ,
             signifies
             Health
             of
             Bodie
             .
             5
             No
             Homor
             although
             hot
             ,
             does
             pant
             and
             move
             it self
             ,
             unless
             a
             burning
             flame
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             spirit
             of
             wine
             ,
             a
             Candle
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             .
             6
             In
             Glow-wormes
             their
             hinder-part
             only
             pants
             and
             shines
             ,
             where
             their
             Heart
             is
             ,
             of
             whose
             light
             I
             have
             discoursed
             in
             my
             
               Second
               Book
               of
               the
               light
               of
               Animals
            
             Chap
             11
             and
             12.
             
             That
             the
             vital
             spirit
             is
             really
             endued
             with
             light
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             an
             inbred
             light
             in
             the
             Blood
             and
             Heart
             ,
             which
             helps
             forward
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             I
             have
             demonstrated
             in
             my
             said
             Treatise
             Lib.
             7.
             
             Cap.
             5.
             23.
             
             H●●mont
             consents
             that
             the
             animated
             spirit
             ,
             in
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             inlightned
             by
             the
             former
             light
             ,
             is
             the
             Mover
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             After
             Caimus
             and
             other
             ancient
             Authors
             ,
             Ent
             asserts
             the
             same
             thing
             touching
             the
             flame
             ,
             raised
             out
             of
             the
             Seed
             in
             the
             first
             bladder
             of
             the
             Heart
             raised
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Hen
             which
             hatcheth
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             all
             shineing
             forth
             ,
             when
             the
             Lungs
             perform
             their
             office
             .
             yet
             he
             errs
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             external
             widening
             he
             begs
             ,
             in
             the
             Construction
             more
             inwardly
             he
             tends
             to
             the
             beginning
             :
             for
             in
             the
             Systole
             all
             that
             illuminats
             
             is
             expelled
             ,
             and
             then
             it
             is
             vigorated
             in
             a
             narrow
             heart
             ,
             which
             is
             evident
             in
             optick
             tubes
             and
             hollow
             glasses
             .
             I
             ad
             that
             in
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             it
             sets
             on
             fire
             and
             kindles
             by
             the
             Systole
             from
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             the
             vital
             flame
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             Shape
             and
             Conformation
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             Vessels
             being
             exceeding
             well
             fitted
             to
             receive
             and
             expell
             the
             blood
             .
             Especially
             the
             fibres
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             
               fleshy
               columns
            
             .
             These
             make
             not
             so
             much
             for
             the
             Strength
             of
             the
             Heart
             alone
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             motion
             .
             For
             all
             the
             fibres
             being
             contracted
             greater
             and
             lesser
             ,
             in
             the
             walls
             and
             septum
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             Harvey
             are
             circular
             ,
             as
             in
             an
             artificial
             Net
             ,
             or
             Purse
             squeezed
             ,
             the
             contents
             are
             expelled
             .
             They
             are
             stretched
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             and
             remitted
             in
             the
             Diastole
             .
             By
             help
             of
             the
             smaller
             fibres
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             flesh
             is
             interwoven
             ,
             a
             languishing
             constriction
             is
             made
             ,
             but
             to
             a
             stronger
             ,
             those
             greater
             fleshy
             ones
             concur
             contained
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             which
             Walaeus
             often
             observed
             in
             live
             Bodies
             dissected
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Blood
             and
             the
             extream
             parts
             ,
             the
             pulse
             is
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             ceasing
             ,
             the
             motion
             also
             ceases
             .
             Now
             it
             begins
             from
             the
             vena
             cava
             ,
             and
             is
             continued
             from
             the
             Auricula
             dextra
             ,
             by
             and
             by
             from
             the
             right
             ventricle
             into
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             ,
             or
             if
             the
             point
             be
             cut
             off
             ,
             externally
             from
             the
             
               Arteria
               venosa
            
             into
             the
             left
             Earelet
             ,
             thence
             into
             the
             left
             Venricle
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             the
             Pulse
             is
             felt
             by
             a
             manifest
             constriction
             to
             goe
             into
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             in
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             living
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             They
             drive
             ,
             because
             1
             The
             Blood
             is
             offensive
             by
             its
             Quantity
             .
             2
             They
             are
             moved
             being
             irritated
             by
             any
             external
             force
             .
             3
             Blood
             is
             continually
             suppeditated
             .
             For
             Blood
             thrusts
             and
             drives
             on
             Blood
             ,
             so
             that
             even
             after
             the
             Heart
             has
             bin
             taken
             out
             of
             Bodies
             ,
             Walaeus
             has
             seen
             a
             quick
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             veins
             .
             Which
             nevertheless
             did
             not
             happen
             by
             any
             proper
             power
             ,
             which
             the
             Blood
             has
             to
             move
             it self
             ,
             but
             partly
             by
             the
             driveing
             of
             the
             
               external
               parts
            
             ,
             which
             remitt
             or
             send
             back
             that
             which
             remains
             after
             nutrition
             as
             bur●…ensome
             and
             superfluous
             ,
             partly
             by
             a
             spontaneous
             contraction
             of
             the
             Vessels
             filled
             with
             Blood
             ,
             whose
             Arteries
             in
             living
             Bodies
             being
             bound
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             do
             swell
             ;
             towards
             the
             extream
             parts
             they
             are
             empty
             :
             But
             the
             Veins
             too
             near
             the
             smallest
             branches
             and
             the
             parts
             from
             which
             they
             bring
             back
             the
             Blood
             are
             puffed
             up
             ,
             but
             are
             flat
             where
             they
             look
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             drive
             the
             Blood
             ;
             in
             a
             word
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             contraction
             of
             the
             muscles
             and
             their
             driving
             ,
             in
             the
             fleshy
             and
             outward
             parts
             ,
             as
             Harvey
             observes
             .
          
           
             4
             The
             Attraction
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             Parts
             ,
             least
             they
             be
             destitute
             of
             aliment
             profitable
             and
             sufficient
             for
             them
             ,
             which
             we
             observe
             according
             to
             Nature
             in
             those
             parts
             that
             are
             nourished
             ;
             but
             besides
             nature
             in
             wounds
             ,
             Ulcers
             ,
             Tumors
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             this
             may
             easily
             be
             done
             ,
             because
             the
             blood
             dispersed
             in
             all
             places
             ,
             is
             immediately
             fastened
             to
             the
             Heart
             and
             Parts
             which
             draw
             it
             ,
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             cava
             and
             Arteries
             assisting
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             special
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Earlets
             ,
             Cavities
             ,
             Septum
             ,
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             Valves
             .
          
           
             THe
             parts
             of
             the
             Heart
             which
             are
             specially
             to
             be
             considered
             are
             either
             externally
             seen
             as
             the
             Earlets
             ;
             or
             within
             only
             ,
             as
             the
             Ventricles
             or
             two
             Cavities
             ,
             the
             Septum
             or
             partition
             ,
             and
             the
             Vessels
             with
             the
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             Earlets
             or
             little
             Ears
             ,
             were
             so
             termed
             ,
             not
             from
             hearing
             ,
             but
             because
             
             of
             some
             resemblance
             in
             their
             shape
             .
             For
             from
             a
             long
             Basis
             they
             end
             in
             a
             blunt
             point
             (
             howbeit
             the
             left
             is
             more
             accumulated
             )
             of
             an
             obtuse
             triangle
             ;
             and
             they
             have
             a
             Cavity
             ,
             that
             the
             Ventricles
             might
             be
             produced
             before
             the
             Heart
             .
             For
             that
             same
             pulsing
             Bladder
             in
             an
             Eg
             ,
             is
             the
             Earlets
             ,
             
             because
             they
             were
             necessary
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             though
             the
             Heart
             were
             not
             so
             soon
             necessary
             ,
             which
             afterwards
             grows
             upon
             the
             Bladder
             .
             Others
             give
             another
             reason
             ,
             because
             the
             Earlets
             observe
             the
             same
             proportion
             in
             their
             pulsing
             as
             the
             Bladder
             had
             .
             But
             this
             is
             very
             hard
             to
             distinguish
             in
             the
             first
             Generation
             .
             Others
             take
             the
             Bladder
             for
             the
             Heart
             ,
             whose
             Expansions
             or
             Earlets
             appear
             red
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             transparent
             ,
             but
             the
             Heart
             is
             not
             seen
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             plenty
             of
             Seed
             ,
             and
             Pulse
             intermitted
             .
             I
             suspect
             that
             both
             may
             lie
             hid
             under
             the
             Vesicula
             or
             bladderkie
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Earlets
             are
             presently
             drawn
             and
             moved
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             use
             .
             Otherwise
             it
             would
             seem
             inconvenient
             that
             the
             Appendix
             should
             be
             greater
             then
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             Nor
             is
             the
             Heart
             a
             bare
             Parenchyma
             or
             affusion
             of
             blood
             .
             It
             hath
             Cavities
             produced
             doubtless
             out
             of
             the
             foresaid
             Bladderkie
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             EARLETS
             are
             Processes
             or
             Appendixes
             ;
             and
             according
             to
             Hofman
             ,
             nothing
             but
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Heart
             attenuated
             and
             widened
             .
             Which
             I
             know
             not
             how
             true
             it
             is
             .
             I
             should
             rather
             say
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             neighboring
             Vessels
             dilated
             ,
             although
             they
             are
             made
             first
             of
             Seed
             out
             of
             the
             bladder
             ,
             and
             are
             the
             first
             motion
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             in
             dying
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             situate
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             before
             the
             Orifices
             of
             the
             vessels
             
             venal
             to
             which
             they
             cleave
             ,
             and
             whereby
             they
             are
             mediately
             joyned
             to
             the
             heart
             .
             They
             are
             on
             each
             ●ide
             one
          
           
             For
             two
             they
             are
             in
             Number
             ,
             answerable
             
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Hearts
             Ventricles
             ,
             the
             right
             Earlet
             being
             greater
             ,
             and
             the
             left
             smaller
             .
             And
             both
             are
             large
             in
             an
             Embryo
             or
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             :
             the
             former
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             with
             which
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             one
             common
             body
             ;
             the
             latter
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Earlets
             is
             peculiar
             ,
             
             such
             as
             there
             is
             none
             in
             any
             other
             part
             ;
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             singular
             use
             .
             Howbeit
             they
             are
             thin
             and
             soft
             ,
             for
             their
             more
             easie
             contraction
             and
             nervous
             for
             strengths
             sake
             .
             But
             the
             left
             is
             more
             hard
             ,
             a
             little
             more
             fleshy
             and
             thicker
             :
             yet
             the
             Heart
             is
             not
             so
             .
             Howbeit
             they
             answer
             in
             a
             certain
             proportion
             to
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Their
             external
             Surface
             ,
             when
             they
             
             are
             extended
             and
             full
             ,
             is
             even
             and
             bossie
             or
             bunching
             (
             but
             their
             circumference
             unequal
             )
             when
             they
             are
             contracted
             ,
             it
             is
             wrinkled
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             left
             it
             is
             more
             wrinkled
             then
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             because
             the
             inner
             fabrick
             is
             more
             turning
             and
             winding
             ,
             and
             hath
             more
             pits
             in
             it
             ,
             for
          
           
             The
             Earlets
             being
             inwardly
             dissected
             and
             spread
             open
             ,
             do
             discover
             unto
             us
             1.
             a
             certain
             flesh-membranous
             plain
             ,
             stretched
             out
             to
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             treble
             pointed
             Valves
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             fibres
             of
             the
             Valves
             are
             fastned
             .
             2.
             
             About
             the
             whole
             circumference
             fleshie
             Columnes
             grow
             out
             ,
             first
             the
             great
             crooked
             ones
             ,
             
             out
             of
             which
             Spring
             many
             lesser
             ones
             ,
             with
             a
             wonderful
             and
             neat
             contexture
             ,
             somtimes
             single
             ,
             somtimes
             wreathed
             ,
             and
             infolded
             either
             with
             the
             great
             ones
             ,
             or
             with
             one
             another
             .
             
             3.
             
             Between
             these
             Columnes
             deep
             Pits
             are
             seen
             ,
             more
             in
             the
             left
             ,
             fewer
             in
             the
             right
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             partition
             of
             each
             Earlet
             .
             Folius
             hath
             found
             out
             many
             
               little
               Holes
            
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             also
             seen
             ,
             through
             which
             he
             conceives
             the
             blood
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             need
             of
             less
             matter
             .
             But
             seeing
             they
             are
             rarely
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             nor
             do
             they
             penetrate
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             yea
             they
             are
             less
             ,
             I
             am
             more
             apt
             to
             think
             they
             are
             Pores
             common
             to
             many
             ,
             serving
             for
             motion
             ,
             or
             the
             nutrition
             of
             the
             Part.
             
          
           
             Botallus
             hath
             found
             a
             Passage
             sufficiently
             visible
             near
             the
             right
             Earlet
             ,
             which
             goes
             presently
             right
             out
             ,
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
             This
             Walaeus
             explains
             to
             be
             ment
             of
             the
             oval
             hole
             ,
             or
             that
             passage
             by
             him
             observed
             ,
             which
             goes
             obliquely
             out
             of
             one
             Earlet
             into
             the
             other
             .
             Such
             an
             one
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             in
             Oxen
             and
             Goats
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             the
             coronal
             Vein
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             pierce
             into
             the
             left
             Earlet
             ,
             but
             descends
             into
             the
             Parenchyma
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             
               The
               V.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               Shews
               the
               Heart
               cut
               in
               sunder
               athwart
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Basis
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Point
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Earlet
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Earlet
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Shape
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     Ventricle
                     like
                     an
                     half
                     Moon
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     Ventricle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     partition
                     between
                     the
                     Ventricles
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Vena
               cava
               with
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               dissected
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Orifice
                     of
                     the
                     Coronary
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Appearance
                     of
                     an
                     Anastomosis
                     ,
                     between
                     the
                     Vena
                     cava
                     &
                     Vena
                     pulmonalis
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     trebble-pointed
                     Valves
                     with
                     the
                     Fiberkies
                     wherewith
                     they
                     are
                     fastned
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Ventricle
                     cut
                     long-waies
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Ventricle
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     opened
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sigma-fashion'd
                     Valves
                     ,
                     visible
                     in
                     the
                     Vena
                     arteriosa
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IIII.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     venosa
                     dissected
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Print
                     of
                     an
                     Anastomosis
                     between
                     the
                     Arteria
                     venosa
                     and
                     Vena
                     cava
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Mitre-shap'd
                     Valves
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Ventricle
                     opened
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     great
                     Artery
                     cut
                     asunder
                     near
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Semilunary
                     Valves
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     Orifice
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               108
            
          
           
             Their
             Motion
             is
             manifest
             to
             the
             sense
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             
             blood
             rushing
             in
             ,
             and
             filling
             them
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             swell
             in
             living
             bodies
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             contracting
             themselves
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             their
             fleshy
             fibres
             contracted
             into
             themselves
             ,
             endeavoring
             to
             force
             the
             blood
             out
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             three
             parts
             of
             their
             motion
             ;
             
               Systole
               ,
               Diastole
            
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             or
             pause
             which
             comes
             between
             them
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             discerned
             ,
             save
             in
             persons
             ready
             to
             die
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             performed
             so
             swiftly
             in
             sound
             persons
             ,
             that
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             confounded
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             performed
             all
             at
             once
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             discharge
             of
             a
             Gun
             ,
             all
             seems
             to
             be
             performed
             in
             the
             twinkling
             of
             the
             eye
             ,
             and
             in
             swallowing
             ,
             as
             Harvey
             informs
             us
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Diastole
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             blood
             received
             from
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             Arteria
             Venosa
             .
             The
             Systole
             is
             performed
             ,
             when
             the
             Earlets
             being
             filled
             ,
             do
             by
             contracting
             themselves
             ,
             expel
             the
             Blood
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             The
             Diastole
             and
             Systole
             of
             both
             the
             Earlets
             ,
             do
             happen
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             When
             the
             right
             Earlet
             undergoes
             its
             Diastole
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             left
             Ear
             undergoes
             the
             same
             ;
             when
             the
             latter
             is
             contracted
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             the
             former
             also
             expels
             .
             But
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             Earlets
             ,
             happens
             at
             different
             times
             ,
             as
             also
             both
             their
             Systoles
             .
             The
             Systole
             of
             the
             Earlets
             happens
             at
             the
             same
             time
             with
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             and
             contrarily
             ,
             and
             the
             constriction
             of
             the
             Earlets
             doth
             alwaies
             forego
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             both
             in
             healthy
             persons
             and
             in
             such
             as
             are
             at
             the
             point
             of
             death
             .
             But
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             former
             is
             more
             lasting
             then
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             latter
             ,
             When
             the
             left
             ventricle
             ceases
             ,
             the
             left
             Earlet
             still
             continues
             pulsing
             ,
             which
             being
             extinct
             ,
             the
             remaining
             motion
             is
             in
             the
             right
             ventricle
             ,
             and
             that
             ceasing
             ,
             the
             right
             Earlet
             proceeds
             panting
             ,
             being
             the
             last
             that
             dies
             ,
             save
             that
             when
             it
             ceases
             ,
             a
             certain
             trembling
             motion
             doth
             as
             yet
             continue
             in
             the
             blood
             which
             flows
             in
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             driving
             of
             the
             extream
             parts
             .
          
           
             Their
             use
             ,
             is
          
           
             
               I.
               To
               be
               Store-houses
               to
               the
               Heart
               ;
               for
               they
               first
               received
               the
               
               Blood
               and
               Air
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               not
               suddenly
               rush
               into
               the
               heart
               ,
               whence
               the
               heart
               might
               be
               hurt
               ,
               and
               the
               Animal
               faculty
               suffocated
               .
               And
               hence
               it
               is
               that
               they
               are
               placed
               only
               at
               the
               vessels
               which
               pour
               into
               the
               heart
               ,
               and
               not
               at
               the
               Arteries
               which
               void
               the
               blood
               forth
               .
            
             
               II.
               To
               safeguard
               the
               vessels
               to
               which
               they
               are
               joyned
               .
            
             
               III.
               To
               be
               instead
               of
               a
               cooling
               Fan
               to
               the
               Heart
               ,
               according
               to
               Hippocrates
               .
            
             
               IV.
               According
               to
               Walaeus
               ,
               to
               be
               in
               place
               of
               a
               measure
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               vena
               Cava
               and
               Arteriosa
               do
               measure
               the
               blood
               into
               the
               heart
               ,
               for
               seeing
               all
               the
               blood
               was
               not
               to
               go
               out
               ,
               at
               every
               pulse
               ,
               but
               the
               greatest
               part
               was
               to
               stay
               behind
               to
               be
               further
               perfected
               ,
               nature
               joyned
               the
               Earlets
               to
               the
               heart
               ,
               as
               vessels
               which
               should
               give
               in
               so
               much
               blood
               to
               the
               Heart
               ,
               as
               was
               naturally
               to
               be
               cast
               forth
               at
               every
               pulsation
               .
               For
               which
               cause
               he
               thinks
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               the
               right
               Earlet
               is
               greater
               then
               the
               left
               ,
               because
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               is
               more
               Capacious
               then
               the
               left
               ,
               and
               like-more
               is
               voided
               therefrom
               then
               from
               the
               left
               ,
               viz.
               sooty
               Exhalations
               and
               the
               Nutriment
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
          
           
             The
             CAVITIES
             of
             the
             Heart
             or
             its
             Ventricles
             ,
             Chambers
             ,
             or
             Caves
             &c.
             
             are
             not
             three
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             falsely
             ascribes
             to
             greater
             Beasts
             ,
             for
             three
             are
             not
             found
             ,
             no
             not
             in
             a
             Whale
             ,
             but
             only
             two
             ,
             as
             Walaeus
             and
             Sylvius
             have
             observed
             in
             the
             dissection
             of
             a
             young
             Whale
             .
             Nor
             did
             Galen
             at
             Rome
             find
             more
             in
             an
             Elephant
             .
             And
             by
             a
             very
             rare
             chance
             three
             were
             observed
             by
             
               Aemilius
               Parisanus
            
             at
             Venice
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             certain
             Coverlid-maker
             .
             And
             Veslingius
             twice
             observed
             the
             like
             .
             Also
             Walaeus
             saw
             a
             third
             Ventricle
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             an
             Oxe
             .
             Caesalpinus
             observed
             three
             in
             Birds
             and
             Fishes
             ,
             and
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             doth
             easily
             appear
             to
             be
             divided
             into
             two
             near
             the
             point
             ,
             by
             a
             certain
             thin
             Partition
             ,
             yet
             in
             truth
             both
             come
             into
             one
             .
             Licetus
             understands
             that
             same
             third
             Ventricle
             of
             Aristole
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             Prominency
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             turned
             in
             beyond
             the
             left
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             commonly
             so
             called
             is
             Aristotles
             middle
             Ventricle
             .
             Conringius
             doth
             otherwise
             excuse
             Aristotle
             ,
             viz.
             that
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             in
             his
             account
             is
             whence
             the
             Cava
             arises
             ,
             the
             middle
             whence
             the
             Aorta
             springs
             and
             the
             left
             ,
             whence
             the
             Arteria
             Venosa
             or
             left
             Earlet
             arises
             ,
             which
             being
             the
             least
             of
             all
             ,
             is
             in
             smal
             Live-Creatures
             hardly
             visible
             .
             But
             so
             there
             should
             be
             four
             Ventricles
             ,
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             being
             added
             ,
             as
             at
             first
             sight
             may
             seem
             ,
             not
             three
             only
             .
             There
             are
             therefore
             only
             two
             Cavities
             found
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Live-wight
             ,
             the
             right
             and
             the
             left
             ,
             having
             their
             inner
             surface
             uneven
             and
             rough
             ,
             especially
             the
             left
             .
             The
             Heart
             of
             a
             certain
             Polander
             cut
             up
             by
             Riolanus
             ,
             was
             perfectly
             solid
             ,
             having
             no
             Ventricles
             at
             all
             .
          
           
             Many
             Pits
             are
             formed
             in
             them
             by
             the
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             in
             the
             right
             more
             ,
             but
             narrower
             ,
             in
             the
             left
             fewer
             ,
             but
             deeper
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             contain
             the
             blood
             received
             in
             ,
             hence
             in
             the
             Constriction
             of
             a
             Living
             Heart
             they
             are
             lesser
             ,
             in
             the
             Dilatation
             wider
             .
             The
             Pits
             are
             constituted
             and
             fenced
             by
          
           
             Those
             
               fleshy
               Particles
            
             termed
             La●ertuli
             Musclekies
             ,
             somtimes
             round
             ,
             sometimes
             
             thin
             ,
             being
             five
             or
             more
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             two
             only
             visible
             in
             the
             left
             ,
             but
             very
             thick
             ends
             .
             Veslingus
             observes
             that
             the
             larger
             have
             Pores
             which
             pass
             through
             them
             .
             The
             use
             of
             them
             ,
             is
             according
             to
             some
             ,
             to
             be
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Massa
             counts
             them
             little
             Muscles
             .
             Vesalius
             and
             Riolanus
             call
             them
             
               Columnae
               carneae
            
             ,
             fleshy
             Pillars
             ,
             which
             being
             contracted
             ,
             do
             further
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Parisanus
             saies
             by
             help
             of
             them
             the
             Heart
             contracts
             it self
             ,
             Walaeus
             also
             hath
             observed
             in
             live
             Dissections
             ,
             that
             they
             assist
             the
             Contraction
             or
             Systole
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             especially
             when
             it
             is
             strong
             and
             vehement
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             their
             swelling
             begins
             at
             their
             Basis
             ,
             and
             goes
             on
             by
             little
             and
             little
             unto
             the
             point
             .
             Harvey
             saies
             they
             draw
             the
             Cone
             or
             Point
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             the
             Basis
             or
             broad
             end
             thereof
             ,
             by
             their
             obliqu●
             fibres
             .
             And
             he
             is
             apt
             to
             think
             that
             heat
             is
             carried
             through
             all
             of
             them
             .
             
               A.
               Benedictus
            
             and
             Ent
             ,
             that
             they
             hinder
             the
             blood
             from
             going
             into
             Clotters
             ,
             while
             it
             is
             shaken
             and
             agitated
             by
             them
             .
             Ba●●●us
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             instead
             of
             Ropes
             and
             Bands
             ,
             to
             hinder
             least
             in
             the
             Contractions
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Valves
             being
             forced
             beyond
             their
             pitch
             and
             overshot
             ,
             should
             be
             unable
             to
             retain
             the
             Blood.
             Slegelius
             will
             have
             it
             that
             they
             are
             contracted
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             shut
             the
             Orifices
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Cava
             and
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             by
             their
             Fibrekies
             .
             All
             these
             Opinions
             are
             true
             and
             must
             be
             joyned
             together
             ,
             as
             will
             manifestly
             appear
             to
             him
             that
             shall
             accurately
             consider
             the
             times
             of
             the
             motions
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Many
             things
             are
             preternaturally
             
             found
             in
             the
             ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             Bauhin
             hath
             sound
             bits
             of
             far
             ,
             and
             our
             most
             expert
             Countryman
             Wormius
             hath
             took
             out
             of
             both
             the
             ventricles
             certain
             Caruncles
             or
             smal
             particles
             of
             Flesh
             ,
             whiteish
             within
             ,
             but
             of
             a
             shining
             red
             color
             without
             ;
             which
             I
             also
             have
             long
             since
             found
             ,
             at
             Padua
             and
             at
             Hasnia
             in
             my
             Dissections
             ,
             both
             of
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             ,
             Erastus
             hath
             found
             a
             Flegmatick
             concretion
             ,
             like
             yellow
             marrow
             ,
             which
             is
             found
             ,
             in
             the
             boyled
             bones
             of
             Oxen.
             Vesalius
             two
             pounds
             of
             Glandulous
             and
             blackish
             flesh
             ,
             Benivenius
             a
             Gobbit
             of
             flesh
             like
             a
             Medlar
             .
          
           
             Salvius
             hath
             observed
             Worms
             ,
             as
             also
             
               I.
               D.
               Horstius
            
             at
             
               Confluentia
               ;
               May
            
             a
             twibladed
             Snake
             like
             a
             Whip
             at
             London
             ,
             and
             
               M
               ,
               A.
               Severinus
            
             much
             such
             another
             at
             
               Naples
               .
               Hollerius
            
             found
             stones
             (
             with
             an
             Impostume
             )
             in
             a
             woman
             troubled
             with
             the
             stone
             ;
             and
             Wierus
             stones
             as
             big
             as
             Pease
             .
          
           
           
             Bones
             are
             more
             rarely
             found
             in
             the
             Hearts
             of
             Men.
             Yet
             Gemma
             did
             once
             
             find
             some
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             twice
             ,
             in
             the
             dead
             body
             of
             president
             Nicolas
             being
             eighty
             years
             of
             Age
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Queen
             Mother
             of
             Lewis
             the
             thirteen
             King
             of
             France
             ,
             being
             after
             her
             decease
             opened
             to
             be
             Imbalmed
             .
             
               Johannes
               Trullus
            
             sound
             one
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             
               Pope
               Urban
            
             the
             eighth
             of
             a
             triangular
             Figure
             representing
             the
             letter
             T.
             
               Simon
               Pauli
            
             my
             Renowned
             Praedecessor
             in
             the
             Anatomical
             Theatre
             ,
             took
             a
             bone
             as
             hard
             as
             a
             stone
             of
             a
             Figure
             of
             the
             Pythagoraean
             letter
             Y
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Man
             of
             Hasnia
             forty
             years
             of
             Age
             ,
             the
             bigness
             of
             a
             Wallnut
             ,
             and
             the
             shape
             not
             unlike
             the
             Heart
             .
             I
             conceive
             they
             are
             all
             bred
             through
             the
             dryness
             and
             slow
             motion
             of
             the
             Humors
             in
             aged
             and
             sick
             Persons
             .
             Yet
             nature
             makes
             use
             of
             this
             defect
             to
             provoke
             and
             quicken
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             when
             it
             passes
             slowly
             ,
             as
             waters
             flow
             more
             easily
             when
             a
             peice
             of
             wood
             is
             cast
             in
             ,
             or
             that
             all
             the
             blood
             may
             not
             clotter
             ,
             as
             our
             Women
             and
             Butchers
             stir
             their
             blood
             about
             with
             a
             stick
             ,
             when
             they
             intend
             thereof
             to
             make
             Puddings
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             go
             into
             Clotters
             .
          
           
             The
             
               right
               Ventricle
            
             receives
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Vena
             cava
             ,
             which
             Vein
             it
             receives
             into
             
             it self
             :
             And
             therefore
             it
             hath
             not
             so
             thick
             a
             flesh
             or
             wal
             ,
             as
             the
             left
             hath
             ,
             that
             their
             might
             be
             an
             even
             poise
             ,
             seeing
             it
             contains
             more
             matter
             ,
             and
             bears
             a
             greater
             weight
             then
             the
             left
             .
             Nor
             is
             there
             so
             perfect
             a
             Concoction
             made
             in
             this
             Ventricle
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             left
             in
             which
             there
             is
             more
             heat
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             not
             exactly
             round
             but
             semicircular
             ,
             resembling
             the
             Moon
             encreasing
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             reach
             to
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Point
             ,
             but
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             as
             it
             were
             an
             Appendix
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             which
             when
             the
             left
             is
             taken
             away
             ,
             seems
             still
             as
             it
             were
             to
             represent
             an
             whole
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Yet
             is
             it
             deeper
             and
             larger
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             store
             of
             blood
             ,
             which
             it
             was
             to
             contain
             ,
             both
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             vital
             Spirits
             in
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
             For
          
           
             Its
             Use
             is
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               receive
               blood
               out
               of
               the
               vena
               cava
               ,
               to
               nourish
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               the
               said
               blood
               being
               poured
               into
               the
               Lungs
               through
               the
               
                 Vena
                 arteriosa
              
               .
               Therefore
               Fishes
               which
               have
               no
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               draw
               no
               Air
               in
               at
               their
               Mouths
               ,
               are
               without
               this
               Ventricle
               ,
               having
               no
               more
               then
               one
               .
               This
               right
               Ventricle
               therefore
               ,
               does
               concoct
               and
               attenuate
               the
               Blood
               ,
               for
               the
               Nourishment
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               II.
               To
               send
               the
               thinner
               part
               of
               the
               Blood
               through
               the
               Septum
               or
               partition
               ,
               into
               the
               left
               Ventricle
               ,
               to
               make
               vital
               Spirits
               ;
               and
               the
               thicker
               part
               through
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               both
               to
               nourish
               them
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               may
               return
               to
               the
               left
               ventricle
               ,
               for
               the
               Nutriment
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
             
               III.
               Further
               to
               perfect
               and
               prepare
               the
               blood
               which
               runs
               back
               as
               superfluous
               after
               the
               extream
               parts
               are
               nourished
               ,
               and
               the
               crude
               blood
               which
               is
               bred
               in
               the
               Liver
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               left
               Ventricle
            
             is
             narrower
             ,
             but
             more
             noble
             ;
             having
             a
             round
             Cavity
             ,
             
             and
             which
             reaches
             unto
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             It
             s
             flesh
             or
             wall
             is
             three
             times
             as
             thick
             as
             that
             of
             the
             right
             ventricle
             .
             Also
             it
             is
             harder
             ,
             that
             the
             vital
             Spirits
             may
             not
             exhale
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             might
             be
             stronger
             ,
             being
             to
             be
             forced
             into
             the
             farthest
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             make
             vital
             Spirit
             and
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             of
             a
             twofold
             matter
             ,
             I.
             Of
             blood
             prepared
             in
             the
             right
             ventricle
             ,
             and
             passed
             through
             the
             Septum
             and
             the
             Lungs
             .
             II.
             Of
             Air
             drawn
             in
             by
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Nostrils
             ,
             prepared
             in
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             transmitted
             through
             the
             
               Arteria
               venosa
            
             with
             the
             blood
             into
             the
             left
             ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             to
             kindle
             and
             ventilate
             the
             vital
             flame
             ,
             yea
             and
             to
             nourish
             the
             same
             .
             The
             latter
             fishes
             stand
             in
             need
             of
             and
             Leucophlegmatick
             persons
             ,
             the
             former
             such
             as
             are
             seated
             in
             a
             narrow
             or
             infected
             place
             ,
             or
             are
             under
             extream
             heat
             ,
             for
             fear
             of
             suffocation
             and
             extinction
             of
             the
             flame
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             therefore
             of
             both
             ventricles
             is
             in
             a
             manner
             the
             same
             ,
             viz.
             to
             generate
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             and
             to
             perfect
             the
             venal
             ,
             and
             to
             receive
             the
             same
             running
             back
             from
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             through
             the
             veins
             ,
             and
             to
             expel
             the
             perfect
             blood
             through
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             farthest
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             thereby
             nourished
             .
             This
             is
             proved
             by
             the
             Conformations
             of
             the
             ventricles
             ,
             which
             in
             part
             are
             like
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             in
             the
             right
             two
             vessels
             ,
             a
             Vein
             and
             an
             Artery
             carrying
             out
             ,
             and
             bringing
             back
             and
             as
             many
             in
             the
             left
             .
             In
             the
             former
             are
             two
             sorts
             of
             Valves
             the
             trebble
             pointed
             ,
             and
             Mitre-shap'd
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             in
             the
             latter
             .
             The
             left
             expels
             and
             receives
             as
             much
             as
             the
             right
             ,
             save
             that
             it
             is
             consumed
             in
             nourishing
             the
             Lungs
             and
             the
             Heart
             .
             Yet
             their
             different
             Constitution
             and
             Magnitude
             ,
             argues
             some
             difference
             .
             Whence
             1.
             
             There
             is
             a
             different
             Coction
             in
             the
             one
             and
             other
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             demonstrated
             above
             .
             2.
             
             The
             right
             works
             for
             the
             Lungs
             the
             left
             for
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             3.
             
             The
             right
             sends
             sooty
             Exhalations
             and
             blood
             to
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             the
             left
             receives
             from
             the
             Lungs
             Blood
             Impraegnated
             with
             Aire
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             a
             Septum
             or
             Partition
             between
             the
             two
             Ventricles
             ,
             which
             is
             thick
             like
             the
             other
             Wall
             of
             the
             left
             ventricle
             (
             which
             Columbus
             once
             observed
             to
             be
             Gristley
             )
             hollow
             on
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             bunching
             ,
             full
             of
             hollownesses
             and
             holes
             .
             which
             some
             suppose
             to
             be
             the
             third
             ventricle
             of
             Aristotle
             ;
             which
             hollownesses
             or
             Caves
             are
             more
             large
             towards
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             but
             their
             utmost
             ends
             towards
             the
             left
             side
             are
             hardly
             discernable
             .
             Helmont
             describes
             them
             to
             be
             triangular
             ,
             whose
             Cone
             ending
             in
             the
             left
             ventricle
             ,
             is
             easily
             stopped
             ,
             but
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             said
             triangle
             in
             the
             right
             ventricle
             ,
             is
             never
             stopped
             save
             in
             Death
             .
             But
             I
             have
             seen
             them
             Circular
             so
             that
             they
             could
             easily
             admit
             a
             Pease
             ,
             but
             ▪
             obtuse
             towards
             the
             left
             Hand
             .
          
           
             That
             they
             are
             open
             is
             the
             opinion
             
             of
             the
             Ancients
             and
             of
             many
             Anatomists
             which
             follow
             them
             .
             
               Gassendus
               ▪
            
             saw
             Payanus
             at
             Ajax
             shew
             the
             Septum
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             have
             through-fares
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             sundry
             windings
             and
             crooked
             Con●-holes
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             lightly
             putting
             in
             his
             Probe
             ,
             without
             any
             violence
             ,
             which
             he
             wreathed
             gently
             and
             turned
             it
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             and
             to
             the
             sides
             .
             And
             although
             by
             a
             Probe
             breaking
             the
             tender
             flesh
             of
             the
             Septum
             ,
             we
             may
             easily
             make
             a
             way
             ,
             yet
             we
             may
             not
             doubt
             of
             the
             Eyewitness
             of
             Gassendus
             nor
             of
             the
             Dexterity
             of
             Payanus
             ;
             seeing
             I
             also
             of
             late
             found
             the
             partion
             of
             a
             Sows
             Heart
             ,
             in
             many
             places
             obliquely
             perforated
             with
             manifest
             great
             Pores
             ,
             which
             were
             open
             of
             themselves
             without
             the
             use
             of
             a
             Probe
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             admit
             a
             large
             Pease
             ;
             but
             when
             I
             put
             in
             my
             Probe
             ,
             it
             brought
             me
             to
             the
             left
             ventricle
             ,
             where
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             as
             it
             were
             an
             Anastomosis
             was
             placed
             ,
             hindering
             any
             regress
             .
             Riolanus
             also
             hath
             seen
             it
             bored
             through
             towards
             the
             point
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             most
             thin
             .
             Walaeus
             in
             the
             Partition
             of
             an
             Oxes
             Heart
             ,
             did
             somtimes
             find
             a
             Cavity
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             open
             into
             the
             left
             ventricle
             about
             the
             point
             
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             length
             and
             breadth
             of
             a
             Mans
             Fore-finger
             ,
             which
             he
             conceives
             to
             be
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             mention'd
             by
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             Yet
             are
             they
             not
             alwaies
             open
             in
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             because
             in
             living
             bodies
             they
             are
             kept
             open
             ,
             by
             the
             continual
             agitation
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             ceasing
             ,
             they
             are
             not
             so
             visible
             to
             the
             Eye-sight
             ,
             even
             as
             we
             see
             no
             manifest
             passages
             ,
             when
             the
             sweat
             breaks
             out
             plentifully
             through
             the
             Skin
             ,
             nor
             when
             the
             seed
             breakes
             out
             of
             the
             Kernels
             and
             Spermatick
             vessels
             ,
             into
             the
             Urinary
             passage
             :
             nor
             the
             Pores
             by
             which
             the
             Empyema
             or
             out
             of
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             peirces
             into
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             through
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             or
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             branches
             of
             Porta
             into
             the
             Cava
             .
             Caelsus
             is
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             where
             he
             saies
             ,
             that
             nothing
             is
             more
             foolish
             ,
             then
             to
             think
             that
             look
             what
             and
             how
             it
             is
             in
             a
             living
             Man
             ,
             so
             it
             must
             needs
             be
             in
             one
             that
             is
             dying
             ,
             Yea
             that
             is
             dead
             .
             Whence
             many
             (
             as
             
               Columbus
               ,
               Spigelius
               ,
               Hofman
               ,
               Harvey
               ,
               &c.
            
             )
             have
             denyed
             that
             any
             thing
             passes
             through
             this
             Septum
             or
             Partition
             .
             But
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             that
             they
             make
             a
             doubt
             of
             it
             :
             For
             ,
          
           
             I.
             They
             are
             so
             crooked
             and
             winding
             ,
             that
             a
             Probe
             cannot
             easily
             pass
             through
             them
             .
             Howbeit
             these
             Pores
             become
             more
             conspicuous
             ,
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             an
             Ox
             long
             boyled
             ,
             as
             
               Bauhinus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             my self
             with
             others
             can
             witness
             .
             And
             you
             are
             to
             observe
             ,
             in
             opposition
             to
             Hofman
             and
             Plempius
             that
             deny
             it
             .
             that
             in
             the
             boyling
             a
             moderation
             must
             be
             used
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Fibres
             in
             living
             Bodies
             do
             never
             stick
             so
             close
             together
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             leave
             Pores
             ,
             as
             the
             Nerves
             do
             shew
             ,
             finally
             ,
             that
             the
             quickest-sighted
             Anatomists
             can
             see
             no
             Membrane
             in
             the
             boyled
             Hearts
             of
             Oxen.
             II.
             In
             dead
             Bodies
             all
             passages
             fall
             in
             and
             shrink
             together
             .
             III.
             That
             an
             extream
             straitness
             was
             requisite
             in
             the
             End
             ;
             because
             the
             thinnest
             part
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             is
             strained
             as
             it
             were
             in
             that
             part
             :
             And
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             ,
             because
             these
             holes
             are
             not
             in
             vain
             ,
             therfore
             ,
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Septum
             or
             Partition
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             thinner
             
             blood
             may
             pass
             there-through
             into
             the
             lef
             ventricle
             ,
             for
             the
             Generation
             of
             vital
             blood
             and
             spirit
             ,
             which
             is
             afterwards
             distributed
             through
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             for
             to
             preserve
             and
             stir
             up
             the
             life
             and
             natural
             heat
             .
             But
             the
             thicker
             and
             greater
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             by
             a
             natural
             and
             ordinary
             way
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             violent
             only
             ,
             is
             communicated
             to
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             through
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             by
             mediation
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             left
             ventricle
             it
             may
             be
             mingled
             with
             that
             which
             sweats
             through
             the
             Septum
             .
             The
             thicker
             part
             is
             ordained
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             return
             back
             to
             the
             left
             ventricle
             t
             is
             tempered
             with
             Air.
             The
             thinner
             part
             passing
             through
             the
             Septum
             ,
             nourishes
             the
             same
             in
             its
             passage
             ,
             because
             the
             external
             Coronary
             vessels
             do
             only
             creep
             through
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             long
             and
             dangerous
             journey
             through
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             it
             would
             vanish
             away
             and
             come
             to
             nothing
             .
             By
             this
             way
             only
             such
             as
             dive
             deep
             into
             the
             Sea
             ,
             and
             those
             that
             are
             hanged
             for
             a
             smal
             while
             ,
             do
             live
             a
             while
             and
             come
             to
             themselves
             ,
             after
             the
             motion
             of
             their
             Lungs
             is
             ceased
             .
          
           
             The
             Motion
             of
             the
             Septum
             or
             Partition
             doth
             help
             forward
             this
             passage
             ,
             which
             that
             it
             is
             moved
             according
             to
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             I
             have
             these
             signs
             and
             tokens
             ;
             Because
             1.
             
             It
             is
             furnished
             with
             Circular
             Fibres
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Walls
             ,
             in
             a
             boyled
             Heart
             ,
             such
             in
             a
             manner
             as
             are
             in
             the
             Sphincter
             Muscle
             ,
             as
             Harvey
             testifies
             ,
             which
             seeing
             them
             move
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             they
             must
             as
             well
             move
             the
             Septum
             .
             2.
             
             A
             certain
             Palpitation
             is
             felt
             ,
             if
             you
             put
             in
             your
             Finger
             into
             a
             living
             Heart
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             of
             Walaeus
             .
             3.
             
             In
             Creatures
             ready
             to
             die
             ,
             when
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             left
             ventricle
             ceases
             ,
             the
             Septum
             follows
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             as
             the
             same
             Harvey
             observes
             :
             and
             if
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             be
             wounded
             ,
             Riolanus
             tells
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             remains
             in
             the
             Septum
             in
             his
             Observations
             .
             Yet
             the
             same
             Riolanus
             in
             another
             place
             being
             wiser
             ,
             denies
             that
             it
             is
             moveable
             ,
             unless
             towards
             the
             Basis
             where
             it
             is
             soft
             gives
             way
             a
             little
             ,
             and
             that
             so
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             that
             the
             passage
             may
             be
             maintained
             ,
             because
             when
             the
             Ventricles
             are
             dilated
             above
             the
             through-far'd
             Septum
             ,
             and
             straitned
             again
             like
             Bellows
             ,
             the
             little
             holes
             would
             be
             shut
             up
             .
             But
             there
             is
             no
             fear
             .
             For
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             when
             the
             point
             is
             drawn
             back
             to
             the
             Basis
             ,
             the
             Pores
             are
             opened
             in
             the
             Septum
             moved
             upwards
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             at
             once
             pass
             both
             the
             Septum
             and
             the
             Lungs
             .
             Contrarywise
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             because
             the
             Heart
             is
             distended
             long
             waies
             ,
             the
             pores
             are
             drawn
             back
             with
             the
             Septum
             ,
             and
             are
             shut
             up
             ,
             until
             the
             Heart
             be
             filled
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             the
             Heart-vessels
             there
             are
             found
             
             four
             remarkeable
             ones
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             which
             Hippocrates
             calls
             the
             Fountanes
             of
             Humane
             Nature
             .
             Into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             are
             inserted
             two
             Veins
             ;
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             and
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             ;
             into
             the
             left
             ,
             as
             many
             Arteries
             ;
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             .
             Before
             all
             which
             are
             placed
             within
             eleven
             Valves
             or
             little
             dores
             ,
             made
             of
             the
             Tunicles
             of
             their
             Vessels
             widened
             and
             stretched
             out
             .
             The
             Veins
             which
             bring
             in
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Cava
             and
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             have
             trebble-pointed
             valves
             ,
             looking
             from
             without
             inwards
             ;
             the
             Arteries
             which
             
               carry
               away
            
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Aorta
             and
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             have
             Sigma-shap'd
             or
             Mitre-fashion'd
             valves
             open
             inwards
             ,
             shut
             outwards
             .
             The
             former
             admit
             blood
             into
             the
             Heart
             ;
             being
             open
             they
             suffer
             the
             blood
             to
             flow
             out
             ,
             being
             shut
             they
             hinder
             it
             from
             returning
             the
             same
             way
             .
             The
             trebble-pointed
             valves
             do
             not
             only
             wink
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             close
             shut
             by
             the
             blood
             distending
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             constriction
             of
             the
             Heart
             which
             straitens
             the
             vessels
             .
             The
             Sigmoides
             or
             Sigma-shap'd
             are
             shut
             by
             the
             Relaxation
             and
             falling
             in
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Fibres
             being
             stretched
             out
             long-waies
             ,
             they
             are
             drawn
             downwards
             with
             the
             Walls
             and
             so
             shut
             ,
             like
             the
             Chains
             in
             Draw-bridges
             .
          
           
             The
             Trebble-pointed
             or
             Tricuspides
             ,
             are
             opened
             by
             the
             impulse
             of
             new
             blood
             through
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             and
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Fibres
             being
             drawn
             downwards
             ,
             they
             are
             opened
             ;
             But
             the
             Mitre-shap'd
             valves
             ,
             are
             open'd
             in
             the
             Systole
             by
             the
             Constriction
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             urgeing
             its
             way
             out
             .
             Also
             they
             may
             be
             praeternaturally
             shut
             ,
             by
             the
             blood
             expelled
             and
             standing
             seated
             in
             the
             full
             vessells
             ,
             to
             which
             ,
             endeavouring
             to
             run
             back
             ,
             they
             make
             resistance
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             conformation
             ,
             which
             Artifice
             of
             Nature
             ,
             we
             see
             every
             where
             imitated
             by
             the
             Flood-gates
             and
             Locks
             made
             upon
             Rivers
             .
             But
             that
             according
             to
             nature
             they
             are
             not
             shut
             by
             the
             returning
             of
             the
             expulsed
             blood
             ,
             as
             some
             conceive
             Walaeus
             proves
             ,
             Because
             1.
             
             Our
             senses
             observe
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             carried
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             not
             to
             the
             Heart
             by
             the
             Arteries
             .
             2.
             
             In
             a
             rare
             and
             languishing
             Pulse
             ,
             the
             Artery
             doth
             not
             rise
             or
             swel
             last
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             it
             swels
             there
             first
             .
             3.
             
             If
             an
             Artery
             be
             tied
             two
             fingers
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             it
             be
             so
             opened
             betwixt
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             valves
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             freely
             pass
             forth
             ,
             yet
             the
             valves
             will
             divers
             times
             straitly
             be
             shut
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             is
             orderly
             moved
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               VI.
               
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               This
               first
               FIGURE
               shewes
               the
               right
               side
               of
               the
               Heart
               entire
               ,
               and
               withall
               the
               Earlet
               cut
               off
               ,
               and
               the
               Vessels
               which
               goe
               out
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               but
               especially
               the
               Anastomosis
               by
               which
               Folius
               will
               have
               the
               Blood
               to
               flow
               from
               the
               right
               into
               the
               left
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   The
                   Heart
                   in
                   its
                   proper
                   posture
                   ,
                   over
                   the
                   Surface
                   whereof
                   ,
                   the
                   Vena
                   Coronaria
                   is
                   disseminated
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   right
                   Earlet
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   ,
                   partly
                   dissected
                   ,
                   partly
                   intire
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   A
                   certain
                   white
                   and
                   circular
                   place
                   between
                   the
                   Earlets
                   ,
                   in
                   which
                   on
                   one
                   side
                   ,
                   under
                   a
                   certain
                   little
                   skin
                   like
                   a
                   valve
                   ,
                   an
                   Anastomosis
                   is
                   found
                   ,
                   that
                   is
                   a
                   wreathed
                   winding
                   hole
                   ,
                   through
                   which
                   Folius
                   will
                   have
                   the
                   Blood
                   to
                   pass
                   ,
                   into
                   the
                   left
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   vena
                   cava
                   dissected
                   ,
                   as
                   far
                   as
                   to
                   the
                   Situation
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Vena
                   Aorta
                   which
                   goes
                   to
                   the
                   Throat
                   and
                   Arms
                   dissected
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Arteria
                   magna
                   ascending
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   same
                   descending
                   near
                   the
                   Back-bone
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   An
                   Arterial
                   Pipe
                   ,
                   which
                   joines
                   the
                   great
                   Arterie
                   with
                   the
                   Arteria
                   venosa
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   Arteria
                   venesa
                   yssuing
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Vena
                   Arteriosa
                   ,
                   Nurse
                   of
                   the
                   Lungs
                   ,
                   yssueing
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   left
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   aaaa
                   .
                   The
                   Vena
                   coronaria
                   radicated
                   and
                   diffused
                   through
                   the
                   surface
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   b.
                   The
                   beginning
                   of
                   this
                   Vena
                   coronaria
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   Earlet
                   near
                   the
                   Vena
                   cava
                   .
                
                 
                   cccc
                   .
                   A
                   certain
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Earlet
                   dissected
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   The
                   other
                   part
                   remaining
                   yet
                   intire
                   .
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   A
                   Probe
                   thrust
                   into
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   .
                
                 
                   f.
                   A
                   little
                   skin
                   like
                   a
                   Valve
                   placed
                   at
                   the
                   mouth
                   of
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   .
                
                 
                   gggg
                   .
                   The
                   Branches
                   of
                   vena
                   cava
                   ,
                   spred
                   up
                   and
                   down
                   and
                   rooted
                   in
                   the
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   hhh
                   .
                   Ascendent
                   branches
                   of
                   the
                   Arteria
                   Magna
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               This
               other
               Figure
               shewes
               the
               left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               Earlet
               dissected
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               going
               out
               of
               the
               Probe
               ,
               demonstrated
               in
               the
               first
               Figure
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Heart
                   cut
                   open
                   through
                   the
                   whole
                   left
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   An
                   exact
                   Representation
                   of
                   the
                   said
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Egress
                   of
                   the
                   Probe
                   ,
                   through
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   ,
                   from
                   the
                   right
                   into
                   the
                   left
                   Earlet
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   A
                   Valve
                   placed
                   at
                   the
                   mouth
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   Artery
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   left
                   Earlet
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   dissected
                   ,
                   being
                   less
                   then
                   the
                   right
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Arteria
                   Venosa
                   going
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   The
                   Arteria
                   Magna
                   ascending
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   said
                   Artery
                   descending
                   near
                   the
                   Back-bone
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   Arterial
                   Pipe
                   knitting
                   the
                   Vena
                   Arteriosa
                   to
                   the
                   Magna
                   Arteria
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Trunk
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   Artery
                   ,
                   ascending
                   to
                   the
                   Arms
                   and
                   Throat
                   .
                
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   A
                   certain
                   part
                   of
                   Vena
                   Coronaria
                   dispersed
                   through
                   the
                   surface
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   ,
                   the
                   smallest
                   part
                   thereof
                   is
                   visible
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   The
                   Arteria
                   Coronaria
                   dissected
                   .
                
                 
                   cccc
                   .
                   The
                   left
                   Earlet
                   cut
                   open
                   as
                   far
                   as
                   to
                   the
                   Vena
                   Arteriosa
                   .
                
                 
                   dddd
                   .
                   Certain
                   Nervous
                   particles
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   very
                   Ventricle
                   of
                   the
                   Heart
                   ,
                   accounted
                   Nerves
                   by
                   Aristotle
                   .
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   The
                   Probe
                   thrust
                   in
                   through
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   .
                
                 
                   fff
                   .
                   Certain
                   smal
                   holes
                   ,
                   through
                   which
                   Folius
                   will
                   have
                   the
                   blood
                   to
                   pass
                   ,
                   while
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   grows
                   together
                   ,
                   and
                   there
                   is
                   need
                   of
                   less
                   matter
                   .
                
                 
                   g.
                   A
                   Valve
                   on
                   the
                   side
                   also
                   set
                   before
                   the
                   Anastomosis
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               112
            
          
           
           
             And
             therefore
             many
             of
             the
             Ancients
             and
             
               later
               writers
            
             are
             deceived
             ,
             who
             imagined
             that
             the
             blood
             did
             freely
             pass
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             back
             again
             thereto
             .
             And
             that
             the
             valves
             do
             not
             naturally
             close
             and
             open
             ,
             appears
             by
             a
             Tumor
             in
             the
             Arteries
             between
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             emptying
             of
             the
             veins
             near
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               vessel
            
             is
             the
             VENA
             CAVA
             inserted
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             large
             and
             
             gaping
             Orifice
             ,
             three
             times
             greater
             then
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             seems
             rather
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             then
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             especially
             seeing
             it
             sticks
             so
             firmly
             to
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             separated
             therefrom
             .
          
           
             Whether
             it
             hath
             any
             motion
             is
             hard
             to
             determine
             .
             Aristotle
             and
             Galen
             seem
             to
             have
             been
             of
             that
             opinion
             ;
             but
             the
             Interpreters
             expound
             those
             places
             to
             mean
             an
             obscure
             motion
             .
             But
             Walaeus
             hath
             discovered
             a
             manifest
             motion
             therein
             ,
             from
             the
             Jugulum
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             but
             most
             evident
             near
             the
             heart
             :
             and
             that
             therefore
             even
             in
             that
             place
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             is
             furnished
             with
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             whereof
             it
             is
             destitute
             in
             other
             places
             .
             Also
             Ent
             hath
             observed
             that
             the
             vena
             Cava
             of
             a
             dead
             Beast
             ,
             being
             with
             a
             mans
             Finger
             lightly
             touched
             in
             the
             Belly
             near
             the
             Thighs
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             did
             express
             a
             trembling
             motion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             bring
             in
             Blood
             from
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             by
             its
             ascending
             and
             descending
             Trunks
             .
          
           
             A
             
               Membranous
               Circle
            
             grows
             to
             the
             Orifice
             thereof
             ,
             to
             strengthen
             the
             heart
             :
             Which
             is
             presently
             split
             into
             three
             strong
             Membranous
             .
          
           
             VALVES
             ,
             termed
             Janitrices
             ,
             Gatewarders
             ,
             looking
             from
             without
             inwards
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             indeed
             enter
             ;
             but
             not
             return
             back
             into
             the
             Cava
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             termed
             TRICUSPIDES
             ,
             trebble-pointed
             ,
             by
             the
             Greeks
             Trichlochines
             ,
             
             because
             they
             are
             like
             the
             Triangular
             heads
             of
             Darts
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             shut
             ,
             and
             fall
             close
             one
             to
             another
             .
          
           
             They
             grow
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             valves
             do
             ,
             to
             many
             shreds
             (
             in
             the
             Cava
             commonly
             each
             one
             to
             five
             remarkeable
             Threds
             ,
             intertwisted
             with
             many
             little
             ones
             )
             whereby
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             that
             
               fleshy
               particle
            
             ,
             before
             explained
             ;
             which
             some
             call
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             others
             as
             Aristotle
             perhaps
             ,
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             The
             VENA
             ARTERIALIS
             or
             
               vas
               Arteriosum
            
             ,
             the
             Arterial
             veins
             or
             Arterial
             vessel
             .
             
             Others
             call
             it
             
               Arteria
               Pulmonaris
            
             ,
             the
             
               Lungs
               Artery
            
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             in
             truth
             an
             Artery
             ,
             both
             in
             Substance
             and
             Use
             .
          
           
             T
             was
             called
             a
             Vein
             first
             by
             Herophilus
             and
             afterwards
             by
             most
             other
             Anatomists
             ,
             before
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             blood
             was
             found
             out
             ,
             from
             its
             Office
             ,
             because
             it
             sends
             blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             termed
             an
             Artery
             ,
             I.
             By
             reason
             of
             its
             Substance
             ,
             which
             consists
             not
             of
             a
             
             single
             Coat
             ,
             as
             a
             vein
             doth
             ,
             but
             of
             a
             double
             one
             .
             II.
             Because
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             it
             performs
             the
             Office
             of
             an
             Artery
             ,
             and
             Pulses
             as
             shall
             be
             said
             in
             the
             next
             Chapter
             ,
             As
             also
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             ,
             because
             it
             carries
             Nutritive
             blood
             to
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             which
             is
             partly
             wrought
             in
             the
             right
             ventricle
             .
          
           
             This
             vessel
             passes
             out
             of
             the
             heart
             with
             a
             smaller
             Orifice
             ,
             and
             yet
             greater
             
             then
             the
             Lungs
             stand
             in
             need
             of
             :
             For
             Columbus
             and
             Arantius
             observe
             ,
             that
             two
             Fingers
             have
             been
             thrust
             thereinto
             ;
             and
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             the
             greater
             ,
             because
             it
             receives
             blood
             from
             the
             continual
             pulsation
             of
             the
             right
             side
             of
             the
             heart
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             resting
             upon
             the
             Arteria
             Magna
             and
             inclining
             to
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             it
             goes
             to
             the
             right
             and
             left
             parts
             of
             the
             Lungs
             with
             a
             double
             branch
             ,
             a
             right
             and
             a
             left
             :
             Which
             afterward
             spend
             themselves
             into
             sundry
             branches
             in
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             It
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             receive
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             and
             to
             carry
             it
             to
             the
             Lungs
             for
             their
             nourishment
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             the
             observations
             of
             latter
             Authors
             ,
             to
             pass
             over
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             blood
             through
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             the
             blood
             from
             sliding
             back
             again
             into
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             Three
             VALVES
             are
             placed
             therein
             ,
             
             arising
             from
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             vein
             it self
             ,
             looking
             from
             without
             inwards
             ,
             and
             resembling
             an
             half
             Circle
             ,
             or
             the
             letter
             Sigma
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             anciently
             figured
             ,
             and
             did
             resemble
             the
             Latine
             letter
             C.
             
          
           
             The
             ARTERIA
             VENOSA
             ,
             which
             others
             
             call
             
               Vena
               Pulmonaria
            
             ,
             is
             the
             third
             Vessel
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             which
             is
             seen
             in
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             termed
             an
             Artery
             because
             of
             its
             Office
             :
             For
             I.
             It
             Pulses
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             united
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             but
             it
             moves
             not
             by
             a
             proper
             motion
             of
             its
             own
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             neither
             an
             Artery
             ,
             nor
             doth
             it
             carry
             pure
             Arterial
             blood
             .
             II.
             It
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             called
             a
             VEIN
             ,
             1.
             
             Because
             of
             its
             
             Substance
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             it
             performs
             the
             office
             of
             a
             vein
             .
             And
             it
             is
             produced
             as
             it
             were
             from
             the
             Cava
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             is
             joyned
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             .
             Yea
             and
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             ,
             it
             carries
             blood
             also
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             doth
             the
             Cava
             .
          
           
             It
             Arises
             with
             a
             round
             and
             great
             Orifice
             (
             greater
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Arteria
             Magna
             )
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             presently
             after
             its
             egress
             ,
             just
             in
             a
             manner
             as
             if
             it
             arose
             with
             a
             twofold
             mouth
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             disseminated
             into
             the
             right
             and
             left
             part
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             .
          
           
             I.
             In
             its
             Dilatation
             to
             draw
             Air
             to
             
             the
             heart
             ,
             not
             bare
             and
             simple
             Air
             ,
             but
             mixed
             with
             the
             blood
             which
             returns
             from
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             for
             the
             Generation
             of
             vital
             spirits
             and
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             and
             to
             nourish
             and
             kindle
             up
             the
             vital
             flame
             .
             For
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             being
             opened
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             ,
             doth
             pour
             blood
             and
             not
             pure
             air
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             which
             for
             the
             most
             part
             we
             observe
             thicker
             then
             ordinary
             in
             the
             Carcasses
             of
             Men
             and
             Beasts
             ,
             because
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             left
             ventricle
             ceasing
             ,
             the
             blood
             received
             in
             this
             vein
             ,
             cannot
             be
             driven
             or
             drawn
             to
             the
             heart
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             is
             cut
             or
             opened
             ,
             there
             appears
             no
             air
             ,
             because
             the
             air
             is
             not
             pure
             and
             simple
             ,
             being
             mixed
             throughout
             with
             blood
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Lungs
             of
             a
             living
             or
             dead
             Creature
             are
             by
             Art
             blown
             up
             ,
             not
             a
             jot
             of
             air
             is
             perceived
             to
             come
             thence
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             because
             the
             Carriage
             of
             blood
             is
             wanting
             ,
             and
             the
             natural
             Drawer
             and
             Driver
             is
             also
             wanting
             .
             But
             that
             the
             air
             such
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             doth
             come
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             their
             Examples
             do
             testifie
             ,
             who
             have
             been
             stifled
             with
             the
             sums
             of
             Quick-silver
             .
             Coles
             ,
             Lime
             ,
             &c.
             And
             otherwise
             the
             Lungs
             and
             Lung-pipes
             were
             made
             in
             vain
             .
          
           
             II.
             In
             the
             Contraction
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             thrust
             out
             a
             portion
             of
             vital
             blood
             ,
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             together
             with
             
             sooty
             exhalations
             ;
             which
             is
             an
             old
             opinion
             .
             But
             that
             in
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             blood
             or
             sooty
             steams
             should
             be
             carried
             this
             way
             .
             1.
             
             The
             Valves
             hinder
             ,
             which
             will
             not
             suffer
             any
             thing
             to
             return
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Arteria
             venosa
             being
             tied
             ,
             doth
             swel
             towards
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             is
             lank
             and
             emptied
             near
             the
             heart
             .
             3.
             
             Being
             opened
             it
             pours
             forth
             blood
             on
             this
             side
             the
             band
             ,
             but
             beyond
             it
             being
             opened
             it
             voids
             neither
             blood
             nor
             sooty
             exhalations
             .
             4.
             
             The
             sooty
             steams
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ,
             do
             evaporate
             through
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             turn
             into
             water
             in
             the
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             ,
             breed
             the
             hairs
             in
             the
             Arm-pits
             ,
             and
             exale
             into
             the
             whole
             habit
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             through
             the
             Aorta
             .
             5.
             
             The
             air
             which
             goes
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             the
             sooty
             steams
             which
             go
             out
             with
             the
             blood
             ,
             should
             be
             carried
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             in
             contrary
             motions
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             thing
             unusal
             in
             the
             natural
             course
             observed
             in
             the
             body
             .
             For
             though
             ever
             and
             anon
             Excrements
             are
             driven
             from
             and
             Nutriment
             is
             drawn
             to
             the
             same
             part
             ,
             yet
             the
             way
             is
             different
             ,
             especially
             where
             the
             afflux
             is
             continual
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             from
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             or
             at
             least
             they
             are
             performed
             at
             different
             times
             .
             Therefore
             .
          
           
             III.
             In
             the
             contraction
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             it
             drives
             blood
             which
             is
             superfluous
             after
             the
             nourishment
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             runs
             back
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             Two
             VALVES
             only
             are
             placed
             at
             the
             Orifice
             of
             this
             vessel
             ,
             which
             look
             from
             
             without
             inwards
             (
             bred
             out
             of
             the
             Nervous
             circle
             which
             grows
             out
             of
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             heart
             )
             which
             being
             joyned
             together
             do
             resemble
             a
             Bishops
             Mitre
             ,
             They
             are
             greater
             then
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Cava
             ,
             have
             longer
             threds
             (
             and
             each
             hath
             seven
             large
             ones
             ,
             besides
             little
             ones
             annexed
             to
             them
             ,
             which
             from
             a
             broad
             Basis
             do
             commonly
             end
             into
             a
             sharp
             point
             )
             and
             for
             strengths
             sake
             very
             many
             fleshy
             Explantations
             .
             Therefore
             two
             were
             sufficient
             to
             shut
             the
             Orifice
             close
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             greater
             then
             others
             ,
             the
             Fibres
             longer
             and
             larger
             ,
             the
             Columnes
             or
             Pillars
             stronger
             ,
             and
             the
             Orifice
             it self
             is
             more
             Ovall-shap'd
             ,
             then
             that
             of
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             The
             ARTERIA
             MAGNA
             or
             
               great
               Artery
            
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             root
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             
             is
             another
             vessel
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             from
             whence
             it
             proceeds
             and
             arises
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             Orifice
             hereof
             ,
             is
             placed
             instead
             of
             a
             Prop
             ,
             not
             in
             Men
             ,
             but
             in
             certain
             Beasts
             ,
             as
             Harts
             ,
             Oxen
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             &c.
             a
             certain
             hard
             substance
             ,
             which
             is
             somtimes
             Gristly
             ,
             somtimes
             Boney
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             greatness
             and
             Age
             of
             the
             Beasts
             .
             In
             man
             the
             most
             noble
             and
             strongest
             ,
             Harvey
             saw
             a
             portion
             of
             this
             Artery
             turned
             into
             a
             round
             bone
             ,
             near
             the
             Heart
             ,
             whence
             he
             concludes
             that
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             blood
             alone
             ,
             not
             by
             any
             Pulsifick
             faculty
             ,
             derived
             through
             the
             Membranes
             .
             Also
             
               Johannes
               Schroderus
            
             writes
             that
             the
             meeting
             together
             of
             the
             Arteries
             in
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             was
             in
             an
             heart
             degenerated
             into
             a
             bone
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             to
             communicate
             the
             Vital
             spirit
             ,
             with
             the
             Nutritive
             Arterial
             
             blood
             ,
             received
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             unto
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             for
             Nutrition
             and
             life
             ;
             which
             that
             it
             may
             not
             pass
             back
             again
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             Three
             Valves
             are
             placed
             (
             like
             those
             in
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             exactly
             shut
             )
             looking
             from
             
             without
             inwards
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Sigmiodes
             or
             Sigma-shap'd
             Valves
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VIII
            
             .
             How
             the
             Vessels
             are
             united
             in
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             THe
             Vessels
             in
             the
             heart
             are
             otherwise
             
             disposed
             when
             the
             Child
             is
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             then
             they
             are
             after
             it
             is
             born
             ;
             which
             though
             Galen
             knew
             and
             made
             mention
             thereof
             ;
             yet
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             Anatomists
             have
             either
             neglected
             the
             same
             ,
             or
             have
             delivered
             falsities
             thereabout
             ,
             by
             saying
             that
             the
             Unions
             of
             the
             vessels
             were
             some
             of
             them
             only
             made
             by
             a
             Chanel
             ,
             others
             only
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Conjunctions
             or
             UNIONS
             
             
               of
               the
            
             VESSELS
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             are
             twofold
             :
          
           
             One
             is
             made
             by
             an
             Anastomosis
             ,
             another
             by
             a
             Chanel
             .
          
           
             By
             Anastomosis
             an
             Union
             is
             made
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             the
             Arteria
             Venosa
             ,
             under
             the
             right
             Earlet
             ,
             near
             the
             Coronaria
             ,
             before
             the
             Cava
             doth
             absolutely
             open
             it self
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             .
             The
             hole
             is
             large
             and
             of
             an
             Oval
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Now
             Nature
             contrived
             this
             Union
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             ,
             1.
             
             By
             reason
             of
             Vicinity
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             of
             the
             likeness
             of
             substances
             .
          
           
             Before
             this
             hole
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             Arteria
             venosa
             is
             placed
             a
             Pendulous
             ,
             thin
             ,
             hard
             ,
             little
             Membrane
             ,
             larger
             then
             the
             hole
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             I.
             According
             to
             the
             Doctrin
             
             of
             Galen
             and
             his
             Clients
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             be
             carried
             through
             this
             hole
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Cava
             into
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             (
             not
             into
             the
             right
             ventricle
             ,
             for
             vital
             spirit
             is
             not
             yet
             bred
             ,
             nor
             do
             the
             Lungs
             need
             blood
             so
             attenuated
             )
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             because
             they
             could
             not
             otherwise
             be
             nourished
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             because
             in
             it
             the
             heart
             hath
             no
             motion
             whereby
             the
             blood
             might
             be
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             right
             ventricle
             into
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             :
             And
             therefore
             this
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             is
             a
             vein
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             But
             that
             it
             serves
             the
             turn
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             divers
             things
             Evince
             observed
             by
             the
             favorers
             of
             the
             Circular
             Motion
             .
             For
             1.
             
             The
             Heart
             is
             moved
             even
             in
             an
             imperfect
             Child
             ,
             after
             the
             third
             moneth
             ,
             as
             Egs
             and
             Embryo's
             do
             testifie
             .
             But
             before
             the
             third
             moneth
             only
             a
             little
             Bladder
             of
             the
             Earlet
             pants
             ,
             as
             in
             Insects
             before
             the
             Heart
             is
             perfectly
             hollowed
             .
             But
             this
             motion
             were
             in
             vain
             ,
             if
             the
             Heart
             should
             not
             receive
             or
             expel
             any
             thing
             .
             2.
             
             The
             blood
             by
             the
             Anastomosis
             is
             immediately
             poured
             into
             the
             left
             Ear
             ,
             and
             is
             necessarily
             thence
             conveighed
             by
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             into
             the
             left
             ventricle
             .
             3.
             
             All
             the
             blood
             is
             carried
             through
             these
             Unions
             ,
             doubtless
             not
             for
             the
             sake
             of
             the
             Lungs
             alone
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             nourished
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             although
             void
             of
             motion
             ,
             the
             veins
             in
             part
             gaping
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             is
             nourished
             with
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             which
             can
             come
             from
             no
             place
             but
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             demonstrated
             hereafter
             .
             Therefore
             ,
          
           
             II.
             The
             true
             use
             is
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             conveigh
             part
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Cava
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             into
             the
             left
             ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             cannot
             go
             thither
             the
             ordinary
             way
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             neither
             dilating
             themselves
             nor
             Respireing
             .
             In
             which
             passage
             the
             right
             ventricle
             also
             draws
             somwhat
             to
             it self
             ▪
          
           
           
             And
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             not
             slide
             back
             into
             the
             Cava
             ,
             a
             little
             Membrane
             
             there
             placed
             hinders
             ,
             when
             it
             fals
             in
             and
             settles
             .
          
           
             A
             little
             while
             after
             the
             Birth
             this
             
             Hole
             grows
             together
             and
             is
             dried
             up
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             man
             would
             think
             the
             place
             had
             never
             been
             perforated
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             plenty
             of
             blood
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             ,
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Lungs
             now
             opened
             and
             inlarged
             directly
             to
             the
             left
             Earlet
             ,
             which
             suffers
             not
             a
             smal
             quantity
             of
             blood
             to
             flow
             out
             of
             the
             Anastomosis
             ,
             whereupon
             being
             shut
             it
             grows
             together
             .
             Howbeit
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             it
             remains
             for
             a
             season
             open
             .
             Pinaeus
             observed
             it
             thrice
             ,
             Riolanus
             once
             ,
             and
             my self
             more
             then
             once
             .
             Botallus
             most
             frequently
             in
             Calves
             ,
             Sows
             .
             Dogs
             of
             a
             large
             size
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             would
             have
             it
             to
             be
             alwaies
             and
             naturally
             open
             ,
             that
             blood
             might
             pass
             this
             way
             out
             of
             the
             right
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             .
             
               Caecilius
               Folius
            
             treading
             in
             his
             Foot-steps
             ,
             thinks
             it
             is
             open
             in
             all
             Men
             ,
             to
             the
             same
             end
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             but
             contrary
             to
             experience
             .
             For
             it
             is
             then
             only
             open
             ,
             when
             Nature
             hath
             shut
             up
             other
             passages
             ,
             as
             I
             saw
             at
             Padua
             in
             that
             old
             Man
             ,
             whose
             Arteria
             venosa
             was
             stopped
             with
             Flegm
             .
             In
             Water-fowl
             and
             other
             Animals
             that
             live
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             as
             Ducks
             ,
             Castors
             ,
             Swans
             ,
             Bitturns
             ,
             &c.
             it
             is
             alwaies
             open
             ,
             because
             they
             live
             now
             and
             then
             in
             the
             Water
             ,
             without
             the
             Use
             of
             their
             Lungs
             .
             And
             I
             have
             somtimes
             observed
             in
             dead
             bodies
             the
             little
             Membrane
             winking
             ,
             and
             receiving
             the
             Probe
             without
             any
             violence
             ,
             but
             I
             cannot
             allow
             that
             it
             is
             so
             alwaies
             .
             And
             that
             light
             opening
             would
             be
             unprofitable
             .
             For
             the
             passage
             of
             so
             much
             blood
             .
          
           
             Another
             Union
             is
             by
             a
             longish
             Channel
             ,
             
             viz.
             that
             of
             the
             vena
             Arterialis
             ,
             and
             the
             Arteria
             Magna
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             distant
             one
             from
             another
             .
          
           
             
               The
               VII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               are
               presented
               the
               Unions
               of
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Heart
               in
               a
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
               ,
               also
               the
               Heart
               incompast
               with
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               the
               smal
               twigs
               of
               the
               Wesand
               or
               Wind-pipe
               call'd
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Heart
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Ascendent
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Descendent
                     Trunk
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Ascendent
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Arteria
                     Magna
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     e.
                     The
                     Axillary
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     f.
                     The
                     Descendent
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     g.
                     The
                     Earlet
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Ventricle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     An
                     Anastomosis
                     as
                     it
                     appears
                     in
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     little
                     Heart
                     of
                     a
                     Child
                     in
                     the
                     Womb.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Arteria
                     Magna
                     ,
                     springing
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Artery
                     going
                     down-wards
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Arteriosa
                     drawn
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ee
                     .
                     The
                     Channel
                     between
                     the
                     Vena
                     Arteriosa
                     and
                     Arteria
                     Magna
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ff
                     .
                     The
                     Rise
                     of
                     the
                     Arteries
                     termed
                  
                   Carotides
                   
                     or
                     drousie
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     g.
                     The
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Subclavian
                     right
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     sixt
                     Pare
                     going
                     towards
                     the
                     Lungs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     Nerve
                     on
                     the
                     left
                     side
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     middle
                     Branch
                     between
                     the
                     two
                     Nerves
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Off-spring
                     thereof
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     carried
                     to
                     the
                     Pericardium
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     greater
                     Branches
                     of
                     Aspera
                     Arteria
                     ,
                     which
                     on
                     the
                     back-sides
                     are
                     Membranous
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     hinder
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Lungs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     proper
                     Membrane
                     of
                     the
                     Lungs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     A
                     remaining
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     Pericardium
                     or
                     Heart-bag
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Heart
                     in
                     its
                     proper
                     place
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Aspera
                     Arteria
                     or
                     Wesand
                     ,
                     cut
                     off
                     under
                     th●
                     Larynx
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     right
                     Branch
                     ,
                     divided
                     first
                     into
                     two
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     Arteria
                     Aspera
                     ,
                     distributed
                     in
                     like
                     manner
                     into
                     greater
                     and
                     lesser
                     Branches
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ddd
                     .
                     The
                     Extremities
                     of
                     the
                     Branches
                     ,
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               115
            
          
           
           
             by
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ]
             where
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             had
             three
             parts
             ;
             the
             least
             whereof
             notwithstanding
             is
             the
             Channel
             .
          
           
             In
             Infants
             of
             three
             or
             four
             years
             old
             ,
             it
             is
             stil
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             but
             without
             any
             through-passage
             :
             
             in
             grown
             persons
             t
             is
             by
             little
             and
             little
             attenuated
             and
             dried
             ,
             being
             distitute
             of
             all
             Nutriment
             ,
             because
             no
             Humors
             pass
             any
             longer
             through
             the
             same
             ,
             until
             through
             absence
             of
             Life
             and
             Nourishment
             ,
             it
             Putrifies
             and
             Consumes
             quite
             away
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             I.
             According
             to
             the
             Mind
             of
             Galen
             ,
             that
             the
             vital
             Spirit
             being
             received
             
             from
             the
             Navil-Arteries
             into
             the
             Arteria
             Magna
             ,
             may
             from
             hence
             be
             carried
             ,
             through
             that
             Channel
             into
             the
             vena
             Arteriosa
             and
             so
             straight
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             to
             maintain
             Life
             .
             But
             ,
             1.
             
             It
             serves
             not
             the
             Lungs
             alone
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Navil-Arteries
             do
             bring
             out
             of
             the
             Arteria
             Magna
             ,
             but
             carry
             nothing
             thereinto
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Pipe
             is
             greater
             then
             to
             serve
             only
             to
             carry
             Spirits
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Lungs
             of
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             being
             red
             ,
             are
             not
             nourished
             only
             with
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             II.
             According
             to
             Petrejus
             and
             Hofmannus
             ,
             to
             bring
             Arterial
             blood
             to
             nourish
             the
             Lungs
             .
             Who
             had
             said
             well
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             not
             omitted
             the
             good
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             .
          
           
             III.
             According
             to
             late
             Writers
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             which
             slides
             out
             of
             the
             upper
             Trunk
             of
             Cava
             into
             the
             right
             ventricle
             may
             pass
             through
             this
             Pipe
             ,
             the
             greatest
             part
             thereof
             indeed
             to
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             that
             so
             with
             the
             rest
             it
             may
             nourish
             and
             enliven
             the
             whole
             body
             of
             the
             Embryo
             ;
             but
             the
             least
             portion
             of
             all
             goes
             up
             to
             the
             Lungs
             by
             the
             ordinary
             way
             .
          
           
             Both
             the
             ventricles
             in
             the
             Child
             perform
             one
             and
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             and
             part
             the
             blood
             which
             is
             to
             be
             carried
             ,
             because
             the
             more
             perfect
             blood
             is
             supplied
             by
             the
             Mother
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Walls
             are
             a
             like
             thick
             .
             And
             the
             two
             ventricles
             in
             the
             Child
             which
             doth
             not
             respire
             ,
             perform
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             in
             imperfect
             Animals
             void
             of
             Lungs
             ,
             is
             accomplished
             by
             one
             ventricle
             .
          
           
             This
             Pipe
             therefore
             assists
             the
             Anastomosis
             in
             transporting
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             because
             either
             of
             the
             waies
             would
             otherwise
             be
             two
             narrow
             .
             For
             I
             have
             observed
             in
             a
             Girle
             new
             Borne
             ,
             by
             me
             publickly
             dissected
             ,
             that
             the
             Pipe
             was
             wanting
             ,
             because
             the
             Anastomosis
             was
             larger
             then
             ordinary
             :
             and
             there
             is
             reason
             for
             it
             .
             The
             Lungs
             must
             be
             nourished
             and
             the
             whole
             body
             must
             be
             nourished
             .
             Which
             can
             never
             be
             effected
             ,
             unless
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             be
             distributed
             out
             of
             the
             Aorta
             .
             It
             comes
             not
             from
             the
             Mother
             through
             the
             Iliack
             Arteries
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             not
             joyned
             to
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             besides
             their
             motion
             is
             contrary
             ,
             as
             the
             binding
             of
             the
             Navil
             Arteries
             doth
             shew
             .
             For
             the
             Navil-Arteries
             derived
             from
             the
             Child
             ,
             do
             swel
             towards
             the
             Heart
             thereof
             ,
             and
             towards
             the
             Placenta
             or
             Womb-cake
             they
             are
             empty
             ;
             for
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             in
             the
             Child
             ▪
             after
             it
             is
             nourished
             ,
             runs
             back
             through
             the
             Iliack
             veins
             to
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             as
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Child
             which
             must
             be
             nourished
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             it
             passes
             again
             into
             the
             Navil-veins
             ,
             and
             is
             mixed
             with
             that
             other
             blood
             which
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             veins
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             runs
             joyntly
             back
             again
             to
             the
             Liver
             and
             Heart
             of
             the
             Child
             ,
             that
             the
             Circulation
             may
             be
             repeated
             .
             Now
             it
             flows
             conveniently
             out
             of
             this
             vena
             Arteriosa
             through
             the
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             into
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             Situation
             downwards
             ,
             and
             its
             crooked
             insertion
             into
             the
             Aorta
             .
             Therefore
             seeing
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             is
             not
             carried
             fr●●
             the
             Mother
             ,
             upwards
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             neither
             can
             the
             Lungs
             be
             nourished
             thereby
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               IX
            
             .
             Touching
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             THe
             Lungs
             called
             i●
             Latin
             Pulmones
             
             in
             Greek
             Pneumoe●'s
             or
             Pleumones
             ,
             have
             their
             name
             from
             Respiration
             or
             drawing
             in
             and
             blowing
             out
             the
             Air
             :
             because
             they
             are
             given
             to
             Animals
             living
             in
             their
             Air
             and
             breathing
             ,
             but
             not
             to
             fishes
             which
             have
             neither
             Neck
             nor
             Voice
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             
             Breast
             or
             Chest
             ,
             which
             they
             fil
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             distended
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             divided
             into
             the
             right
             and
             
             left
             part
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             :
             that
             one
             part
             being
             hurt
             ,
             the
             other
             may
             
             yet
             perform
             the
             Office.
             Each
             of
             these
             parts
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             Lobes
             ,
             Laps
             or
             Scollups
             ,
             about
             the
             fourth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             upper
             is
             shorter
             then
             the
             lower
             ;
             seldom
             is
             one
             part
             divided
             into
             three
             Lobes
             ,
             as
             in
             Brutes
             ;
             because
             a
             man
             goes
             bolt
             upright
             ,
             Brutes
             looking
             downwards
             ▪
             nor
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             shortness
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             could
             any
             thing
             lie
             between
             the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Liver
             ,
             except
             the
             Midrif
             .
             Yet
             oftentimes
             
               Piccolhomineus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             and
             my self
             ,
             have
             after
             Hippocrates
             and
             
               Russus
               Ephesius
            
             observed
             three
             .
             Now
             the
             Lungs
             embrace
             the
             Heart
             with
             their
             Scollups
             as
             with
             certain
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             Their
             shape
             resembles
             that
             of
             an
             
             Ox-hoofe
             .
             On
             the
             outside
             towards
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             are
             Bossie
             or
             bunching
             out
             ,
             on
             the
             inside
             they
             are
             hollow
             ,
             where
             they
             embrace
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Their
             Colour
             in
             the
             Child
             is
             red
             like
             
             that
             of
             the
             Liver
             :
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             nourishment
             is
             receives
             from
             its
             Mother
             ;
             in
             grown
             persons
             t
             is
             yellowish
             Pale
             ;
             somtime
             Ash-color'd
             :
             in
             such
             as
             have
             died
             of
             a
             long
             sickness
             blackish
             .
             In
             some
             persons
             healthy
             enough
             .
             I
             have
             seen
             them
             Party
             colored
             ,
             like
             Marble
             .
             In
             that
             part
             where
             it
             is
             knit
             unto
             the
             Chest
             by
             Fibres
             ,
             t
             is
             red
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             T
             is
             Knit
             in
             the
             Fore-part
             to
             the
             Brest-bone
             
             by
             the
             Mediastinum
             ,
             behind
             to
             the
             Vertebra's
             ;
             somtimes
             the
             Lungs
             at
             the
             sides
             grow
             to
             the
             Pleura
             by
             certain
             Fibrous
             bands
             ,
             whence
             arises
             a
             lasting
             shortness
             of
             Breath
             .
             Now
             this
             Connexion
             doth
             frequently
             deceive
             Physitians
             ,
             nor
             knowing
             or
             discerning
             Penetrating
             wounds
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             
               Nicolas
               Massa
            
             conceives
             this
             Connexion
             profitable
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             be
             oppressed
             with
             the
             bulk
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             or
             the
             facility
             or
             breathing
             should
             be
             hindred
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             saies
             he
             evermore
             found
             this
             a●●esion
             .
             I
             have
             cheifly
             observed
             it
             about
             the
             lower
             Ribs
             .
             near
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             press
             and
             bear
             upon
             it
             .
             Others
             say
             the
             Lungs
             are
             bound
             to
             Fibres
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             wounds
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             they
             might
             follow
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             though
             with
             a
             weaker
             motion
             .
             Hippocrates
             in
             his
             second
             Book
             
               de
               Morbis
            
             calls
             it
             the
             Lungs
             slipt
             
             down
             to
             the
             side
             ;
             and
             this
             comes
             to
             pass
             either
             from
             ones
             Birth
             ,
             or
             after
             a
             Pleurisie
             ,
             or
             by
             reason
             of
             Tenacious
             and
             clammy
             flegm
             interposing
             it self
             ;
             o●
             from
             some
             external
             cause
             ,
             as
             negligent
             
             Curing
             of
             a
             wounded
             or
             suppurated
             Chest
             .
             Also
             the
             Lungs
             cleave
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             and
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             is
             compact
             and
             thick
             ;
             so
             that
             
             being
             cast
             into
             Water
             it
             sinks
             ,
             which
             the
             Lungs
             of
             grown
             persons
             will
             not
             do
             .
             But
             after
             the
             Birth
             ,
             because
             it
             begins
             to
             be
             moved
             with
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             heat
             and
             motion
             the
             Heart
             becomes
             light
             and
             soft
             ,
             lax
             ,
             rare
             and
             spungy
             ;
             so
             that
             the
             Lungs
             will
             be
             easily
             raised
             and
             fall
             again
             ,
             and
             easily
             receive
             the
             Air
             :
             Which
             may
             be
             seen
             by
             the
             use
             of
             a
             Pare
             of
             bellows
             in
             dead
             bodies
             .
             Helmont
             hath
             seen
             the
             Lungs
             hard
             and
             stoney
             ,
             in
             an
             Asthmatical
             person
             ,
             and
             Salmuth
             observes
             that
             little
             stones
             have
             been
             there
             generated
             in
             shortness
             of
             Breath
             .
             Also
             touching
             stones
             we
             have
             the
             Testimony
             of
             
               Galen
               ,
               Trallianus
               ,
               Aegineta
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Lungs
             are
             compassed
             with
             a
             thin
             light
             Membrane
             ,
             furnisht
             with
             many
             
             Pores
             which
             Pores
             are
             sufficiently
             visible
             ,
             when
             the
             Lungs
             are
             blown
             up
             with
             a
             pair
             of
             bellows
             ,
             and
             
               Job
               .
               Walaeus
            
             hath
             observed
             the
             said
             Pores
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             a
             large
             Pease
             .
             This
             way
             the
             Sanies
             or
             Corrupt
             matter
             of
             the
             Chest
             may
             Penetrate
             and
             come
             away
             by
             Coughing
             .
             This
             Membrane
             is
             produced
             from
             the
             encompassing
             Pleura
             .
             For
             when
             the
             Vessels
             enter
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             they
             devest
             themselves
             of
             their
             Coat
             ,
             which
             grows
             out
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             which
             doth
             afterwards
             invest
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             The
             Vessels
             .
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Lungs
             is
             interwoven
             with
             three
             sorts
             of
             
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             make
             not
             a
             little
             also
             for
             strength
             .
             Two
             proceed
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             of
             which
             before
             :
             The
             
               Vena
               Arterialis
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               Venalis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             proper
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Trachea
             or
             Aspera
             arteria
             so
             called
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             If
             these
             Vessels
             be
             fretted
             asunder
             as
             in
             persons
             Phcisical
             ,
             or
             having
             the
             Consumption
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             many
             times
             plenty
             of
             blood
             is
             cast
             forth
             ,
             or
             some
             Cartilaginous
             substance
             ;
             yea
             and
             the
             Vessels
             themselves
             of
             the
             Lungs
             intire
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             seen
             ,
             and
             Tulpius
             hath
             two
             examples
             .
             And
             oftentimes
             persons
             in
             a
             Consumption
             die
             suddenly
             ,
             because
             the
             greater
             Vessels
             being
             fretted
             asunder
             ,
             the
             Heart
             is
             strangled
             with
             blood
             issuing
             there
             from
             .
          
           
             These
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Lungs
             are
             great
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             because
             they
             wanted
             
             much
             blood
             ,
             for
             their
             substance
             is
             very
             smal
             ,
             setting
             aside
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             nor
             needed
             they
             so
             much
             blood
             as
             is
             sufficient
             to
             nourish
             the
             whole
             body
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             great
             ,
             because
             the
             greatest
             portion
             of
             the
             blood
             is
             carryed
             this
             way
             out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             left
             by
             those
             wide
             passages
             ,
             for
             the
             more
             subtile
             blood
             can
             find
             its
             way
             through
             the
             obscure
             Pores
             of
             the
             Septum
             .
             This
             passage
             is
             proved
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               By
               the
               greatness
               of
               the
               vessels
               .
               For
               the
               vena
               arteriosa
               and
               the
               arteria
               venosa
               are
               most
               large
               .
               And
               because
               the
               former
               is
               a
               vessel
               which
               carries
               out
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               it
               is
               furnished
               with
               the
               Mitre-fashion'd
               valves
               ,
               which
               hinder
               the
               blood
               from
               passing
               out
               of
               the
               Lungs
               the
               same
               way
               ;
               and
               the
               latter
               bringing
               blood
               out
               of
               the
               Lungs
               into
               the
               Heart
               ,
               has
               the
               treble-pointed
               valves
               ,
               hindring
               the
               blood
               from
               returning
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Great
               Quantity
               of
               Blood
               is
               continually
               sent
               by
               the
               Pulse
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               through
               the
               vena
               arteriosa
               and
               thence
               through
               the
               arteria
               venosa
               unto
               the
               left
               ventricle
               ,
               which
               is
               further
               confirmed
               by
               Ocular
               Inspection
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               By
               Ligatures
               in
               living
               Anatomies
               .
               For
               the
               Vena
               arteriosa
               swels
               towards
               the
               
               Heart
               ;
               but
               near
               the
               Lungs
               it
               is
               empty
               ;
               the
               Arteria
               venosa
               contrarywise
               ,
               swels
               towards
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               but
               is
               empty
               towards
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               being
               wounded
               ,
               or
               the
               Arteria
               aorta
               ,
               great
               plenty
               of
               blood
               will
               issue
               ,
               as
               long
               as
               life
               remains
               ,
               till
               all
               the
               blood
               in
               the
               body
               be
               run
               out
               .
               And
               from
               what
               other
               place
               can
               it
               come
               ,
               seeing
               so
               much
               is
               not
               contained
               in
               the
               Heart
               ,
               but
               out
               of
               the
               Lungs
               through
               the
               Arteria
               venosa
               ,
               which
               had
               drawn
               the
               Blood
               out
               of
               the
               Vena
               arteriosa
               by
               the
               Anastomoses
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               In
               the
               Arteria
               venosa
               as
               well
               of
               a
               living
               as
               a
               dead
               Body
               ,
               so
               much
               Blood
               is
               found
               ,
               that
               it
               hath
               often
               hindred
               me
               in
               my
               publick
               Dissections
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               By
               the
               similitude
               of
               the
               Vessels
               one
               with
               another
               .
               The
               Vena
               arteriosa
               carrying
               out
               of
               the
               Heart
               into
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               is
               just
               like
               the
               Aorta
               in
               substance
               ,
               largeness
               ,
               neighbourhood
               ,
               and
               Valves
               .
               The
               Arteria
               venosa
               doth
               in
               like
               manner
               resemble
               the
               Vena
               cava
               by
               straitness
               of
               Connexion
               ,
               substance
               of
               a
               Vein
               ,
               Earlets
               and
               treble-pointed
               Valves
               .
            
          
           
             This
             Circulation
             through
             the
             Lungs
             
             is
             furthered
             ,
             1.
             
             By
             the
             widening
             of
             the
             Lungs
             when
             Air
             i●
             drawn
             in
             ,
             which
             being
             every
             where
             filled
             ,
             the
             vessels
             are
             distended
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             cease
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             either
             retarded
             ,
             or
             quite
             ceases
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             Situation
             of
             the
             vessels
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
             The
             Vena
             arteriosa
             is
             Disseminated
             in
             the
             hinder
             or
             Convex
             part
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             strongly
             moved
             by
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             doth
             cheifly
             possess
             the
             foremore
             and
             hollow
             part
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             might
             more
             readily
             slide
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             In
             the
             Middest
             of
             which
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Wind-pipe
             are
             seated
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             blowing
             out
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             they
             might
             receive
             sooty
             Exhalations
             from
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             ,
             and
             in
             drawing
             the
             Air
             in
             ,
             they
             might
             communicate
             the
             same
             to
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             .
             3.
             
             The
             anastomoses
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             vessels
             are
             joyned
             together
             ,
             both
             the
             branches
             which
             joyn
             mouth
             to
             mouth
             (
             though
             in
             dead
             bodies
             they
             cannot
             be
             discerned
             by
             the
             Eye-sight
             )
             and
             the
             Pores
             of
             the
             Parenchyma
             which
             is
             light
             and
             Porous
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             for
             the
             answering
             
             the
             objections
             made
             against
             this
             Circulation
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Lungs
             are
             not
             oppressed
             or
             burthened
             so
             long
             as
             they
             being
             sound
             ,
             the
             Blood
             perpetually
             glides
             through
             by
             Peice-meal
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             That
             the
             blood
             doth
             not
             drop
             out
             through
             the
             Pipes
             of
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             because
             partly
             they
             draw
             in
             only
             Air
             or
             sooty
             Exhalations
             ,
             and
             in
             no
             wise
             Blood
             of
             a
             thicker
             nature
             then
             they
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             preternaturally
             fretted
             in
             persons
             that
             have
             the
             Consumption
             ,
             partly
             because
             nature
             never
             ceases
             to
             drive
             found
             humors
             through
             the
             passages
             ordained
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             retains
             what
             is
             necessary
             ,
             which
             would
             otherwise
             go
             out
             at
             the
             passages
             of
             the
             Body
             being
             opened
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Although
             the
             Lungs
             of
             Dead
             bodies
             are
             whitish
             ,
             yet
             the
             vessels
             do
             manifestly
             transpire
             through
             the
             external
             Coat
             .
             The
             Parenchyma
             it self
             is
             frequently
             ful
             ,
             in
             persons
             strangled
             with
             blood
             ,
             in
             others
             it
             is
             found
             emptied
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             Pangs
             of
             Death
             it
             is
             forcibly
             excluded
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             In
             burning
             Feavers
             ,
             both
             the
             Lungs
             are
             hot
             ,
             and
             thereupon
             the
             voice
             is
             Hoarse
             and
             dry
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             oppressed
             ,
             as
             appeared
             in
             the
             Epidemical
             Feaver
             
             which
             raged
             up
             and
             down
             this
             year
             ,
             by
             which
             many
             were
             strangled
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             It
             is
             no
             good
             judging
             of
             the
             healthy
             state
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             from
             the
             preternatural
             state
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Very
             smal
             Nervulets
             from
             the
             sixth
             Pare
             are
             spred
             only
             through
             the
             Membrane
             
             thereof
             (
             which
             if
             it
             be
             inflamed
             ,
             a
             pain
             will
             be
             felt
             ,
             and
             communicated
             to
             the
             side
             it self
             and
             to
             the
             Back
             )
             not
             through
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             least
             by
             Reason
             of
             their
             continual
             motion
             they
             should
             be
             pained
             .
             Hence
             the
             Ulcers
             of
             the
             Lungs
             are
             without
             pain
             .
             Howbeit
             Riolanus
             allots
             very
             many
             Nerves
             to
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Lungs
             also
             ,
             drawn
             from
             the
             Implication
             and
             Contexture
             of
             the
             Stomach
             Nerves
             .
             I
             also
             have
             seen
             many
             spred
             abroad
             within
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             sixt
             Pare
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             in
             a
             manner
             accompanying
             the
             Bronchia
             or
             Lung-pipes
             ,
             derived
             from
             the
             hinder
             part
             ,
             and
             only
             a
             little
             twig
             conveig'd
             to
             the
             Membrane
             from
             the
             forepart
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Action
             of
             the
             Lungs
             is
             ,
             Authors
             Question
             .
             That
             they
             never
             move
             at
             all
             is
             Helmonts
             Paradox
             ,
             but
             serve
             only
             as
             a
             seive
             ,
             that
             the
             Air
             may
             pass
             pure
             into
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             alone
             do
             suffice
             for
             Respiration
             .
             But
             that
             they
             are
             indeed
             and
             in
             truth
             
             moved
             ,
             the
             cutting
             up
             of
             live
             bodies
             shews
             ,
             and
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             that
             they
             move
             long
             and
             strongly
             .
             Moreover
             that
             they
             may
             be
             moved
             ,
             any
             one
             may
             try
             with
             a
             pair
             of
             Bellows
             .
             Finally
             ,
             They
             ought
             to
             be
             moved
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             both
             the
             Heart
             would
             ●e
             suffocated
             ,
             and
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             would
             be
             hindred
             .
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             do
             indeed
             concur
             ,
             but
             secondarily
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             not
             joyned
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             moved
             Respiration
             may
             be
             stopped
             ,
             Yea
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             cut
             off
             in
             a
             living
             Anatomy
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             are
             moved
             nevertheless
             .
             But
             whether
             they
             are
             moved
             by
             their
             own
             proper
             force
             ,
             or
             by
             some
             other
             thing
             ,
             is
             a
             further
             Question
             .
             Averrhoes
             who
             is
             followed
             among
             the
             late
             writers
             by
             
               John
               Daniel
               Horstius
            
             ,
             conceives
             the
             Lungs
             are
             moved
             by
             their
             own
             proper
             force
             ,
             not
             following
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             saies
             he
             we
             must
             grant
             that
             a
             violent
             motion
             may
             be
             perpetual
             .
          
           
             But
             we
             are
             to
             hold
             ,
             that
             though
             the
             Lungs
             are
             the
             Vessel
             of
             Respiration
             ,
             yet
             they
             are
             so
             not
             by
             doing
             ,
             but
             by
             suffering
             .
             For
             they
             have
             no
             motive
             force
             of
             their
             own
             ,
             as
             Averrhoes
             will
             have
             it
             (
             because
             at
             our
             pleasure
             we
             can
             stop
             our
             breathing
             ,
             or
             quicken
             or
             retard
             the
             same
             )
             nor
             do
             they
             receive
             the
             principle
             of
             their
             motion
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             blood
             raising
             them
             ,
             as
             Aristole
             conceives
             ,
             and
             his
             followers
             ,
             For
             1.
             
             The
             efflux
             of
             the
             blood
             
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             made
             by
             the
             orninary
             motion
             ,
             but
             the
             Respiration
             is
             voluntary
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Cause
             of
             the
             Pulse
             and
             Respiration
             would
             be
             one
             and
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             they
             would
             be
             performed
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             But
             thirty
             Pulses
             answer
             one
             Respiration
             .
             3.
             
             While
             we
             draw
             in
             our
             Breath
             strongly
             ,
             and
             hold
             the
             air
             drawn
             in
             for
             a
             season
             ,
             the
             swelling
             of
             the
             Lungs
             should
             compel
             us
             to
             let
             our
             breath
             go
             ,
             because
             it
             lifts
             up
             the
             Chest
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             opinion
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Blood
             of
             the
             Heart
             doth
             not
             abide
             in
             the
             Lungs
             by
             an
             unequal
             retention
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             distend
             them
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             forthwith
             expelled
             according
             to
             nature
             .
             5.
             
             When
             it
             tarries
             longest
             in
             diseased
             Lungs
             ,
             it
             makes
             shortness
             of
             Breath
             or
             difficulty
             in
             breathing
             ,
             but
             no
             Tumor
             .
             6.
             
             In
             a
             strong
             Apoplexy
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ceases
             ,
             the
             Pulse
             being
             safe
             and
             the
             Heart
             unhurt
             .
          
           
             Nor
             are
             the
             Lungs
             raised
             up
             ,
             by
             the
             
             air
             forced
             in
             ,
             which
             when
             the
             Chest
             is
             lifted
             up
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             no
             other
             space
             whither
             it
             can
             go
             to
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             through
             the
             Aspera
             arteria
             or
             Wesand
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             as
             Falcoburgius
             and
             
               Des
               Cartes
            
             conceive
             ,
             and
             
               Hogelandius
               ,
               Regius
            
             ,
             and
             Prataeus
             who
             follow
             him
             :
             For
             1.
             
             The
             air
             may
             easily
             be
             condensed
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             proved
             by
             a
             thousand
             experiments
             ,
             as
             by
             Cupping-glasses
             ,
             Weather-glasses
             ,
             Whips
             ,
             Trumpets
             ,
             Winds
             and
             infinite
             things
             beside
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             may
             be
             most
             straitly
             compacted
             about
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             compressed
             within
             it self
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             the
             internal
             subtile
             nature
             of
             the
             air
             and
             dispersed
             by
             Atomes
             ,
             easily
             recollected
             one
             within
             another
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             external
             impulse
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             whereby
             it
             may
             more
             easily
             be
             condensed
             ,
             then
             driven
             into
             another
             place
             .
             2
             ,
             By
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chest
             or
             such
             a
             like
             body
             ,
             we
             do
             not
             see
             the
             lightest
             thing
             that
             is
             ,
             Agitated
             .
             By
             an
             hole
             in
             a
             Wall
             all
             Chinks
             and
             Dores
             being
             closely
             stopped
             ,
             our
             Nostrils
             being
             stopped
             ,
             we
             may
             with
             our
             Mouthes
             draw
             air
             out
             of
             the
             next
             Chamber
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             is
             not
             credible
             that
             the
             air
             moved
             by
             the
             Chest
             ,
             can
             reach
             with
             a
             strong
             motion
             ;
             and
             though
             air
             may
             penetrate
             into
             the
             Chamber
             ,
             through
             some
             chinks
             and
             Rifts
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             in
             so
             great
             quantity
             ,
             as
             to
             stretch
             the
             Chest
             so
             much
             as
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             stretched
             ,
             in
             free
             Respiration
             .
             The
             same
             experiment
             may
             be
             made
             in
             a
             Glass
             or
             Silver
             vessel
             applied
             close
             to
             ones
             Mouth
             .
             4.
             
             While
             I
             have
             held
             my
             Breath
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             my
             Belly
             to
             be
             moved
             above
             twenty
             times
             the
             while
             .
             But
             whether
             is
             the
             Air
             then
             driven
             ?
             Must
             it
             not
             needs
             be
             ,
             because
             all
             places
             are
             ful
             of
             bodies
             ,
             that
             the
             air
             next
             the
             Belly
             is
             compressed
             and
             condensed
             ?
             See
             more
             of
             this
             subject
             in
             my
             
               Vindiciae
               Anatomicae
            
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             peculiar
             Discourse
             .
          
           
             Therefore
             the
             Lungs
             do
             only
             follow
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chest
             to
             avoid
             Vacuum
             :
             And
             therefore
             only
             they
             receive
             the
             air
             drawn
             in
             ,
             because
             the
             Chest
             by
             widening
             it self
             ,
             fils
             the
             Lungs
             with
             air
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             
             arises
             from
             the
             Chest
             experience
             shews
             .
             For
             1.
             
             If
             air
             enter
             into
             the
             Chest
             ,
             being
             peirced
             through
             with
             a
             Wound
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             remain
             immoveable
             ,
             because
             they
             cannot
             follow
             the
             widening
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             the
             air
             insinuating
             it self
             through
             the
             wound
             ,
             into
             the
             empty
             space
             .
             But
             the
             Chest
             being
             sound
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             follow
             the
             widening
             thereof
             ,
             to
             avoid
             Vacuum
             ;
             as
             in
             Pipes
             ,
             Water
             is
             drawn
             upwards
             ,
             and
             Quittor
             ,
             Bullets
             ,
             Darts
             and
             other
             hard
             things
             are
             drawn
             out
             of
             body
             through
             the
             avoidance
             of
             Vacuum
             .
             2.
             
             If
             the
             Midriff
             of
             a
             live
             Creature
             be
             peirced
             through
             with
             a
             light
             wound
             ,
             Respiration
             is
             stopped
             ,
             the
             Chest
             falling
             in
             .
          
           
             But
             somwhat
             there
             is
             which
             hinders
             
             many
             worthy
             men
             from
             assenting
             to
             this
             cause
             of
             the
             Lungs
             motion
             ,
             because
             after
             the
             Chest
             is
             perfectly
             opened
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             are
             oftentimes
             moved
             along
             time
             ,
             with
             a
             vehement
             motion
             .
             But
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             
               Johannes
               Walaeus
               ,
               Franciscus
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             and
             
               Franciscus
               Vander
               Shagen
            
             ,
             that
             is
             not
             the
             motion
             of
             Constriction
             and
             Dilatation
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             natural
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             the
             motion
             of
             an
             whole
             Lobe
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             ,
             which
             motion
             happens
             ,
             because
             the
             Lungs
             are
             fasten'd
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             ,
             the
             Mediastinum
             to
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             and
             the
             Lungs
             are
             also
             
             seated
             near
             the
             Midriff
             :
             whence
             it
             happens
             ,
             while
             the
             Creature
             continues
             yet
             strong
             ,
             that
             either
             the
             Lungs
             with
             the
             Mediastinum
             are
             drawn
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             Midriff
             driven
             ,
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             ,
             not
             yet
             falling
             down
             nor
             loosing
             its
             motion
             ,
             which
             I
             observe
             in
             contradiction
             to
             the
             most
             learned
             Son
             of
             Horstius
             .
             Now
             that
             this
             motion
             proceeds
             not
             from
             the
             inbred
             force
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             doth
             hence
             appear
             ,
             in
             that
             alwaies
             when
             the
             Chest
             is
             depressed
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             are
             lifted
             up
             ,
             being
             forced
             by
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             which
             at
             that
             time
             rises
             a
             good
             height
             into
             the
             Chest
             ;
             and
             contrarywise
             the
             Chest
             being
             lifted
             up
             ,
             the
             Lungs
             are
             depressed
             .
             And
             because
             the
             Lungs
             are
             the
             Instrument
             of
             Respiration
             ,
             Hence
             it
             hath
             these
             following
             ,
          
           
             Uses
             ,
          
           
             
               I.
               According
               to
               
                 Plato
                 ,
                 Galen
              
               ,
               and
               Abensinae
               ,
               to
               be
               a
               soft
               Pillow
               and
               Cushion
               
               under
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               II.
               According
               to
               others
               who
               follow
               
                 Columbus
                 ▪
              
               to
               prepare
               and
               wellnigh
               generate
               the
               vital
               Spirits
               (
               which
               are
               afterwards
               to
               receive
               their
               perfection
               in
               the
               heart
               )
               whiles
               in
               them
               the
               blood
               is
               as
               it
               were
               Circulated
               ,
               first
               boyling
               with
               the
               heat
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               settled
               by
               the
               coldness
               of
               the
               air
               .
            
             
               III.
               It
               hath
               more
               proper
               uses
               when
               it
               is
               Dilated
               ,
               and
               when
               it
               is
               contracted
               .
            
          
           
             When
             the
             Lungs
             are
             Dilated
             ,
             they
             receive
             in
             the
             Air
             like
             a
             pair
             of
             Bellows
             through
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Wind-pipe
             .
          
           
             I.
             To
             prepare
             Aire
             for
             the
             Heart
             ,
             for
             the
             convenient
             nourishment
             of
             the
             
             lightful
             Spirit
             .
             For
             every
             quality
             of
             the
             Aire
             is
             not
             a
             friend
             to
             our
             Spirit
             ,
             as
             is
             seen
             in
             such
             ,
             as
             are
             kild
             with
             the
             smoak
             of
             Charcole
             ,
             and
             the
             steam
             of
             newly
             whited
             Walls
             .
          
           
             Helmont
             conceives
             that
             the
             Air
             is
             united
             to
             the
             spirit
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             receives
             a
             fermentation
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             accompanying
             the
             same
             they
             do
             both
             dispose
             the
             Blood
             to
             a
             total
             transpiration
             of
             it self
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             in
             the
             extremity
             of
             cold
             weather
             and
             at
             Sea
             ,
             we
             eat
             more
             heartily
             ,
             because
             the
             thinness
             of
             the
             Air
             disposes
             the
             blood
             to
             insensible
             transpiration
             .
             Backius
             is
             somwhat
             of
             the
             same
             mind
             ,
             who
             conceives
             that
             by
             the
             moist
             and
             thin
             body
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             made
             apt
             to
             run
             ,
             so
             as
             that
             it
             may
             be
             diffused
             into
             the
             smallest
             passages
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             Others
             ascribe
             both
             these
             effects
             to
             the
             abundance
             of
             Serosity
             in
             the
             Blood.
             Therefore
             Hippocrates
             saies
             that
             water
             is
             hungry
             ;
             and
             we
             see
             that
             such
             as
             are
             given
             to
             drink
             ,
             are
             enclined
             to
             sweat
             much
             ,
             as
             also
             Scorbutick
             persons
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             fan
             and
             cool
             the
             heat
             .
             For
             we
             see
             that
             the
             heat
             of
             our
             Bodies
             stands
             in
             
             need
             of
             somwhat
             that
             is
             cold
             ,
             without
             which
             it
             is
             extinguished
             ,
             as
             is
             apparent
             in
             such
             as
             stay
             long
             in
             very
             hot
             Baths
             ,
             as
             the
             flame
             of
             a
             Candle
             in
             a
             close
             place
             ,
             wanting
             Air
             goes
             out
             .
             And
             
             therefore
             the
             Lungs
             are
             called
             the
             Fan
             and
             cooler
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             Fishes
             in
             the
             Water
             and
             other
             Animals
             that
             have
             but
             on
             Ventricle
             in
             their
             Hearts
             ,
             are
             without
             Lungs
             ,
             because
             they
             do
             not
             want
             such
             a
             cooling
             .
             As
             also
             Infants
             in
             the
             
             Womb
             ,
             being
             fanned
             by
             their
             Mother
             ,
             and
             the
             wide
             Anastomoses
             ,
             have
             their
             Lungs
             without
             motion
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             having
             seen
             only
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             you
             may
             judg
             how
             hot
             any
             Creature
             is
             ;
             for
             Nature
             makes
             the
             Lungs
             the
             larger
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             the
             Heart
             is
             hotter
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Lungs
             are
             not
             absolutely
             necessary
             to
             Life
             ,
             but
             serve
             to
             accommodate
             the
             Heart
             .
             For
             instead
             of
             Lungs
             a
             boy
             of
             Amsterdam
             four
             years
             old
             ,
             had
             a
             little
             Bladder
             ful
             of
             a
             Membranous
             wind
             ,
             as
             
               Nicolas
               Fontanus
            
             a
             Physitian
             of
             that
             Citty
             doth
             testifie
             ,
             which
             being
             guarded
             with
             very
             smal
             Veins
             ,
             had
             its
             original
             from
             the
             Aspera
             Arteria
             or
             Wesand
             it self
             ,
             whose
             office
             it
             is
             to
             cool
             the
             Heart
             .
             Who
             nevertheless
             died
             of
             a
             Consumption
             ,
             because
             haply
             ,
             his
             Heart
             was
             not
             furnished
             with
             a
             sufficient
             quantity
             of
             Air.
             
          
           
             When
             the
             Lungs
             are
             contracted
             in
             Expiration
             ,
             they
             do
             again
             afford
             us
             a
             twofold
             use
             .
             I.
             Sooty
             Excrements
             do
             pass
             away
             through
             the
             same
             ,
             being
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             with
             the
             blood
             ,
             through
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             .
             II.
             To
             make
             an
             articulate
             voice
             in
             Men
             ,
             and
             an
             inarticulate
             sound
             in
             Beasts
             ,
             by
             affording
             Air
             to
             frame
             the
             voice
             .
             And
             therefore
             Creatures
             that
             have
             no
             Lungs
             ,
             are
             mute
             ,
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               X.
            
             Of
             the
             Lung-Pipe
             or
             Wesand
             .
          
           
             THe
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             
             is
             by
             the
             Ancients
             called
             Arteria
             ,
             because
             it
             contains
             Air
             :
             Galen
             and
             others
             
             call
             it
             
               Trachea
               arteria
            
             or
             the
             rough
             Artery
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             unevenness
             ,
             and
             to
             difference
             it
             from
             the
             smooth
             Arteries
             .
             Lactantius
             terms
             it
             
               Spiritualis
               Fistula
            
             ,
             the
             Spirit
             or
             Air-Pipe
             ,
             because
             the
             Air
             is
             breathed
             in
             and
             out
             thereby
             ,
             Now
             it
             is
             a
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             entring
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             with
             many
             branches
             ,
             which
             are
             by
             Hippocrates
             termed
             Syringae
             and
             Aortae
             ,
             whose
             head
             is
             termed
             Larynx
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             ;
             the
             rest
             of
             its
             Body
             is
             termed
             Bronchus
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             moistened
             with
             drink
             .
             For
             that
             some
             part
             of
             the
             drink
             doth
             pass
             even
             into
             the
             Wind-pipe
             and
             
             Lungs
             ,
             Hippocrates
             doth
             rightly
             prove
             by
             an
             Hog
             new
             kild
             ,
             in
             whose
             Lungs
             matter
             is
             found
             just
             so
             colored
             as
             the
             the
             drink
             was
             ,
             which
             he
             drunk
             immediately
             before
             he
             was
             killed
             .
             And
             that
             some
             drink
             may
             be
             carried
             through
             the
             Wind-pipe
             ,
             may
             be
             proved
             out
             of
             
               Julius
               Jasolinus
            
             an
             Anatomist
             of
             Naples
             ,
             who
             seeking
             in
             the
             body
             of
             a
             Noble
             person
             ,
             the
             Cause
             of
             his
             death
             ,
             found
             his
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             ,
             so
             distended
             with
             Humor
             ,
             that
             it
             being
             squeezed
             ,
             some
             of
             the
             said
             Humor
             came
             out
             at
             his
             mouth
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             its
             Situation
             :
             in
             Man-kind
             it
             
             rests
             upon
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             for
             it
             goes
             down
             from
             the
             mouth
             straight
             along
             to
             the
             Lungs
             :
             and
             at
             the
             fourth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             ,
             each
             of
             which
             goes
             into
             the
             Lungs
             of
             its
             respective
             side
             :
             they
             are
             again
             subdivided
             into
             two
             other
             branches
             ,
             and
             these
             again
             into
             others
             till
             at
             last
             they
             end
             into
             very
             smal
             twigs
             in
             the
             surface
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
             But
             the
             branches
             thereof
             which
             are
             greater
             then
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             entring
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             do
             go
             through
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             between
             the
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             which
             is
             hindermore
             ,
             and
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             which
             is
             before
             it
             :
             with
             which
             it
             is
             joyned
             by
             obscure
             Anastomoses
             ,
             or
             conjunctions
             of
             Mouths
             ,
             hardly
             discernable
             by
             our
             Eye-sight
             .
          
           
             In
             Bruits
             t
             is
             Situate
             much
             after
             the
             same
             
             
             manner
             .
             Yet
             we
             must
             note
             that
             it
             is
             different
             in
             a
             Swan
             ,
             and
             after
             a
             manner
             altogether
             singular
             .
             For
             being
             longer
             ,
             it
             insinuates
             it self
             by
             a
             crooked
             winding
             into
             a
             case
             of
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             from
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             case
             ,
             it
             returns
             upwards
             ,
             and
             having
             mounted
             the
             Channel-bones
             ,
             it
             bends
             it self
             towards
             the
             Chest
             .
             But
             before
             it
             reaches
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             t
             is
             propped
             by
             a
             certain
             boney
             Pipe
             ,
             broad
             above
             ,
             narrow
             beneath
             ,
             which
             in
             a
             Duck
             is
             round
             ,
             then
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             ,
             which
             swel
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             but
             grow
             smaller
             where
             they
             tend
             to
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             till
             they
             enter
             into
             them
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             double
             Membrane
             :
             one
             External
             ,
             another
             Internal
             .
             
          
           
             The
             External
             is
             a
             thin
             one
             arising
             from
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             and
             sticks
             close
             to
             the
             intermediate
             Lingaments
             of
             the
             Gristles
             ,
             and
             Ushers
             along
             the
             recurrent
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Internal
             being
             furnished
             with
             straight
             Fibres
             is
             thicker
             and
             more
             solid
             (
             most
             of
             all
             in
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             least
             of
             all
             in
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             indifferently
             in
             the
             middle
             Pipe
             )
             to
             the
             end
             it
             may
             not
             easily
             be
             hurt
             by
             Acrimonious
             drinks
             ,
             or
             other
             Liquors
             voided
             by
             Coughing
             ,
             or
             falling
             down
             from
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             Coat
             which
             compasses
             the
             Palate
             ,
             and
             therefore
             is
             continued
             with
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             smeared
             with
             a
             
               fat
               Humor
            
             to
             hinder
             its
             being
             dried
             up
             by
             motions
             ,
             loud
             cryings
             ,
             drawing
             in
             of
             hot
             Air
             ,
             going
             out
             of
             sharp
             sooty
             Exhalations
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             by
             the
             Superaboundance
             
             or
             Deficiency
             hereof
             the
             Voice
             is
             hurt
             .
             For
             in
             the
             former
             contracted
             by
             Distillations
             ,
             it
             becomes
             Hoarse
             ;
             in
             the
             latter
             through
             burning
             Feavers
             ,
             &c.
             
             It
             becomes
             squea●ing
             .
             If
             it
             overabound
             ,
             we
             are
             quite
             Dumb
             and
             unable
             to
             speak
             ,
             and
             the
             moisture
             being
             consumed
             our
             Speech
             returns
             again
             :
             which
             might
             happen
             in
             that
             same
             dumb
             Son
             of
             Craesus
             mentioned
             by
             Herodotus
             ,
             and
             in
             Aegle
             a
             Samian
             wrastler
             ,
             mentioned
             by
             
               Valerius
               Maximus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Zacharias
               Orphanus
            
             a
             Fool
             ,
             of
             whom
             
               Nicolas
               Fontanus
            
             tels
             a
             story
             in
             his
             Observations
             .
          
           
             This
             Coat
             is
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             raise
             it self
             to
             expel
             what
             ever
             is
             trouble-some
             thereunto
             .
          
           
             Between
             these
             two
             Membranes
             is
             the
             proper
             substance
             of
             the
             Trachea
             arteria
             ,
             which
             is
             partly
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             and
             partly
             of
             a
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             
               The
               VIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               Aspera
               Arteria
               ,
               the
               Oesophagus
               ,
               the
               recurrent
               Nerves
               about
               the
               Arteria
               Magna
               and
               the
               Arteria
               Axillaris
               ,
               behind
            
             
               FIG
               I
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Muscle
                   contracting
                   the
                   Oesophagus
                   .
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   The
                   Oesophagus
                   or
                   Gullet
                   .
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   The
                   Aspera
                   arteria
                   or
                   Wesand
                   placed
                   under
                   the
                   Throate
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   Membrane
                   between
                   the
                   Wesand
                   and
                   the
                   Gullet
                   .
                
                 
                   EEEE
                   .
                   The
                   Nerves
                   of
                   the
                   sixth
                   Conjugation
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   Nerves
                   of
                   the
                   Tongue
                   inserted
                   behind
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   The
                   right
                   recurrent
                   Nerve
                   ,
                   turned
                   back
                   to
                   the
                   Artery
                   of
                   the
                   Shoulder
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   left
                   recurrent
                   Nerve
                   about
                   the
                   Descendent
                   Trunk
                   of
                   the
                   Arteria
                   Magna
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   A
                   Nerve
                   tending
                   to
                   the
                   left
                   Orifice
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   and
                   to
                   the
                   Diaphragma
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   A
                   Nerve
                   descending
                   to
                   the
                   Diaphragma
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   jugular
                   Arteries
                   on
                   each
                   side
                   one
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   The
                   left
                   humeral
                   Artery
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   right
                   Humeral
                   or
                   Shoulder
                   Artery
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   The
                   Arteria
                   Magna
                   or
                   great
                   Artery
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   The
                   Trunks
                   of
                   the
                   Arteries
                   descending
                   to
                   the
                   Lungs
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               This
               Figure
               shews
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               Gullet
               with
               its
               Muscles
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   
                     Musculi
                     Cephalo-pharyngaei
                  
                   s●
                   called
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   
                     Musculi
                     Spheno-pharvngaei
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   
                     Musculi
                     S●●lopharyngaei
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   S●luncterd
                   awn
                   from
                   the
                   Gullet
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   In●de
                   of
                   the
                   Gullet
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Descending
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Gullet
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               120
            
          
           
             
             
               I.
               For
               the
               Voices
               sake
               :
               because
               that
               which
               makes
               a
               sound
               must
               be
               solid
               .
               
            
             
               II.
               Otherwise
               by
               reason
               of
               its
               softness
               it
               would
               alwaies
               fall
               together
               ,
               and
               would
               not
               easily
               be
               opened
               in
               Respiration
               .
            
          
           
             It
             was
             to
             be
             partly
             Ligamental
             ,
             and
             not
             wholly
             of
             a
             Gristly
             substance
             :
             for
             if
             it
             
             should
             consist
             of
             one
             only
             Gristle
             ,
             or
             many
             circular
             ones
             ,
          
           
             
               I.
               It
               would
               be
               evermore
               open
               ,
               and
               not
               somtimes
               widen
               and
               then
               fall
               together
               .
            
             
               II.
               It
               would
               bear
               hard
               upon
               the
               Gullet
               ,
               to
               which
               nevertheless
               ,
               it
               ought
               to
               give
               way
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               swallowing
               down
               of
               solid
               meats
               ,
               that
               the
               Throat
               or
               Gullet
               might
               be
               sufficiently
               widned
               .
               And
               so
               the
               Gristles
               help
               to
               frame
               the
               Voice
               ;
               and
               the
               Membranous
               Ligaments
               for
               Respiration
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Gristles
             are
             many
             ,
             round
             like
             Rings
             ,
             but
             not
             exactly
             .
             For
             on
             their
             backside
             ,
             where
             they
             touch
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             a
             fourth
             part
             of
             a
             circle
             is
             wanting
             ,
             in
             place
             whereof
             there
             is
             a
             Membranous
             substance
             .
          
           
             From
             their
             shape
             they
             are
             termed
             Sigma-shap'd
             resembling
             the
             old
             Greek
             letter
             C
             ,
             til
             they
             are
             fixed
             in
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             for
             then
             changing
             their
             Fignre
             ,
             they
             change
             their
             name
             .
             For
             the
             Wind-Pipes
             do
             there
             consist
             of
             perfect
             Gristles
             ,
             Round
             ,
             four
             square
             ,
             or
             Triangular
             ,
             but
             where
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Lungs
             they
             become
             Membranous
             .
          
           
             These
             Gristles
             are
             joyned
             together
             by
             Ligaments
             going
             between
             ,
             which
             in
             Men
             are
             more
             fleshy
             ,
             in
             brute
             Beasts
             more
             Membranous
             ;
             and
             in
             men
             the
             shew
             like
             little
             Muscles
             .
             And
             the
             Gristles
             do
             every
             where
             keep
             an
             equal
             di●…n
             from
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             higher
             ,
             the
             ●…ey
             ●hey
             are
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             
             Vessels
             ●●mmon
             wi●●
             others
             .
             Veins
             from
             the
             the
             external
             Jugulars
             ;
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Carotides
             ;
             Nerves
             ,
             from
             the
             Recurrent
             Nerves
             of
             the
             sixth
             pair
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             I.
             In
             drawing
             in
             the
             Air
             ,
             that
             by
             it
             as
             a
             Pipe
             ,
             the
             Air
             may
             be
             received
             
             from
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             as
             from
             a
             pair
             of
             Bellows
             .
             Hence
             comes
             that
             same
             Wheezing
             in
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Tissick
             ,
             the
             Pipes
             of
             the
             Wesand
             being
             stopped
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Air
             coming
             and
             going
             and
             not
             finding
             a
             free
             passage
             makes
             that
             Hissing
             noise
             .
          
           
             II.
             In
             blowing
             the
             Air
             out
             ,
             I.
             That
             through
             it
             Fuliginous
             Excrements
             may
             be
             voided
             at
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Nostrils
             .
             For
             which
             intent
             the
             mouths
             of
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             do
             so
             artificially
             joyn
             with
             the
             Mouths
             of
             the
             Aspera
             arteria
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             passage
             only
             for
             sooty
             steams
             but
             not
             for
             blood
             ,
             unless
             it
             come
             away
             by
             force
             and
             violent
             Coughing
             .
             In
             the
             next
             place
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             help
             to
             form
             the
             voice
             ,
             which
             it
             doth
             by
             expiration
             likewise
             ,
             though
             some
             Juglers
             frame
             their
             Voice
             by
             inspiration
             only
             or
             drawing
             in
             of
             their
             Breath
             .
             And
             therefore
             Hippocrates
             calls
             it
             the
             breathing
             and
             vocal
             Organ
             .
             A
             wonder
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             some
             Men
             can
             live
             long
             in
             the
             Water
             like
             Fishes
             ,
             by
             Nature
             and
             not
             by
             Art
             ,
             if
             Cardan
             is
             to
             be
             believed
             in
             the
             second
             Book
             
               de
               Subtilitate
            
             ,
             when
             he
             makes
             relation
             of
             one
             Calanus
             a
             Diver
             in
             Sicily
             ,
             who
             would
             lie
             three
             or
             four
             hours
             under
             the
             Water
             .
             And
             how
             in
             the
             West-indies
             everywhere
             ,
             such
             as
             dive
             for
             Pearl-oysters
             ,
             will
             lie
             an
             hour
             together
             under
             the
             Water
             .
             If
             they
             did
             this
             by
             some
             art
             ,
             it
             were
             not
             so
             wonderful
             .
             So
             the
             Aegyptians
             are
             most
             perfect
             divers
             ,
             and
             exercise
             Robberies
             that
             way
             .
             For
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             Description
             of
             
               Nicolus
               Christophori
               Radzivilij
            
             his
             journey
             to
             Hierusalem
             ,
             they
             lie
             lurking
             under
             the
             Waters
             ,
             and
             not
             being
             content
             to
             steal
             on
             land
             ,
             what
             ever
             they
             can
             catch
             they
             draw
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             away
             :
             and
             frequently
             they
             catch
             a
             man
             as
             he
             lies
             upon
             a
             Ships
             deck
             draw
             him
             under
             the
             water
             and
             kill
             and
             strip
             him
             of
             his
             cloathes
             :
             So
             that
             such
             as
             sail
             are
             said
             many
             times
             to
             watch
             all
             night
             armed
             ,
             And
             in
             the
             same
             parts
             ,
             aboundance
             of
             fisher
             men
             will
             dive
             under
             the
             water
             and
             catch
             fish
             with
             their
             hands
             ,
             and
             they
             will
             come
             up
             with
             a
             fish
             in
             cach
             Hand
             and
             a
             third
             in
             their
             mouths
             .
             These
             persons
             doubtless
             ,
             do
             either
             live
             only
             by
             Transpiration
             ,
             as
             such
             do
             that
             have
             fits
             of
             the
             Apoplexy
             and
             the
             Mother
             ;
             or
             they
             have
             Anastomoses
             open
             in
             their
             Hearts
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             which
             as
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             freely
             moved
             ▪
             without
             any
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Larynx
             .
          
           
             THe
             Head
             or
             beginning
             of
             this
             
             Lung-Pipe
             ,
             is
             termed
             LARYNX
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             voices
             Organ
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             Situate
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             for
             it
             is
          
           
             In
             Number
             one
             ,
             that
             there
             may
             be
             only
             
             one
             voice
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             round
             and
             almost
             circular
             ;
             
             because
             it
             was
             to
             be
             hollow
             for
             the
             voices
             sake
             ;
             but
             on
             the
             foreside
             it
             is
             more
             Extuberant
             ,
             on
             the
             hinder
             side
             depressed
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             give
             way
             to
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             time
             of
             swallowing
             ,
             in
             which
             while
             the
             Oesophagus
             is
             depressed
             ,
             the
             Larynx
             runs
             back
             upwards
             ,
             and
             so
             assists
             the
             swallowing
             ,
             both
             by
             giving
             way
             and
             bearing
             down
             that
             which
             is
             to
             be
             swallowed
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             varies
             according
             to
             
             the
             Ages
             of
             persons
             .
             For
             in
             younger
             persons
             the
             Larynx
             is
             strait
             which
             
             makes
             their
             voice
             shril
             :
             in
             grown
             persons
             t
             is
             wider
             ,
             and
             therefore
             their
             voice
             is
             bigger
             .
             To
             which
             also
             the
             length
             or
             shortness
             of
             the
             Larynx
             doth
             contribute
             :
             and
             if
             plenty
             of
             Air
             or
             Spirit
             be
             drawn
             and
             expelled
             ,
             the
             Voice
             becomes
             big
             ;
             if
             little
             ,
             it
             becomes
             smal
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             according
             to
             Galen
             there
             are
             two
             causes
             of
             a
             great
             Voice
             :
             
             the
             Largeness
             of
             the
             Aspera
             arteria
             ,
             and
             the
             strong
             blowing
             out
             of
             the
             air
             ,
             and
             Hippocrates
             saies
             both
             these
             are
             caused
             by
             great
             hear
             .
             And
             therefore
             
             in
             his
             Book
             of
             the
             Seed
             ,
             he
             teaches
             us
             that
             the
             stones
             do
             contribute
             to
             the
             formation
             of
             the
             Voice
             ,
             Hence
             Males
             when
             they
             grow
             of
             ripe
             years
             change
             their
             voice
             .
             A
             Guelded
             Horse
             looses
             his
             neighing
             .
             A
             Capon
             leaves
             his
             crowing
             or
             crows
             after
             a
             weaker
             fashion
             ,
             different
             from
             his
             former
             crowing
             .
          
           
             The
             Parts
             of
             the
             Larynx
             or
             about
             the
             Larynx
             :
             are
             
               Gristles
               ,
               Muscles
               ,
               Membranes
               ,
               Vessels
            
             and
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             Its
             Muscles
             do
             first
             of
             all
             offer
             themselves
             ,
             which
             move
             the
             Gristles
             ,
             which
             
             the
             Larynx
             is
             possest
             of
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             moved
             with
             a
             voluntary
             motion
             ,
             seeing
             we
             utter
             our
             Speech
             ,
             as
             we
             please
             our selves
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Muscles
             of
             a
             Mans
             Larynx
             ,
             are
             but
             thirteen
             ,
             four
             common
             and
             nine
             proper
             :
             though
             some
             make
             twenty
             ,
             other
             eighteen
             ,
             others
             fourteen
             .
          
           
             
               The
               IX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               Represents
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               with
               its
               Muscles
               and
               Gristles
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Gristle
                   cal'd
                   Shyroides
                   or
                   Scutiformis
                   ,
                   Sheild-fashioned
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   A
                   Pair
                   of
                   common
                   Muscles
                   called
                   Sternothyroides
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Another
                   pair
                   of
                   common
                   Muscles
                   called
                   Hyothyroides
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Epiglottis
                   lying
                   yet
                   hid
                   under
                   the
                   Scutiformis
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Scutiformis
                   or
                   Sheild-fashion'd
                   Gristle
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Its
                   Process
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   Two
                   Muscles
                   proper
                   to
                   the
                   Larynx
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   that
                   on
                   the
                   left
                   Hand
                   is
                   removed
                   from
                   its
                   place
                   ,
                   that
                   the
                   Ring-fashion
                   ●
                   Gristle
                   E.
                   may
                   be
                   seen
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Extuberancy
                   of
                   the
                   Ring-fashon'd
                   Gristle
                   ,
                   or
                   Cartilago
                   Annularis
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Aspera
                   Arteria
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   The
                   Bone
                   Hyoides
                   with
                   three
                   Extuberancies
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Epiglottis
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Sheild-fashion'd
                   Gristle
                   ,
                   hollow
                   on
                   the
                   Back-side
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   two
                   Muscles
                   cal'd
                   Cucullares
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   hinder
                   pair
                   of
                   the
                   Cricoarythenoides
                   so
                   called
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   hinder
                   and
                   Membranous
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Aspera
                   Arteria
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   cal'd
                   Arytenoides
                   ,
                   by
                   some
                   the
                   ninth
                   pair
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Concave
                   part
                   of
                   Cartilago
                   Scutiformis
                   dilated
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   third
                   pair
                   of
                   proper
                   Muscles
                   cal'd
                   
                     Cricoarythenoides
                     laterale
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   first
                   pair
                   of
                   proper
                   Muscles
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   fourth
                   pair
                   cal'd
                   
                     Thyroarythenoides
                     internum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   Insertion
                   of
                   the
                   recurrent
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   hinder
                   and
                   Membranous
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Aspera
                   Arteria
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Cartilago
                   Thyroides
                   or
                   Scutiformis
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   inferior
                   processes
                   thereof
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   It
                   s
                   Concave
                   Part.
                   
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VI.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   inside
                   of
                   the
                   Cartilago
                   Annularis
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   It
                   s
                   lower
                   and
                   fore-side
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   It
                   s
                   hinder
                   and
                   upper-side
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VII
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   B.
                   The
                   Cartilago
                   Arythenoides
                   according
                   to
                   its
                   hinder
                   side
                   joyned
                   ,
                   as
                   yet
                   to
                   the
                   Annularis
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   broader
                   and
                   Back-part
                   of
                   the
                   Annularis
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 FIG
                 .
                 VIII
                 .
                 IX
              
               .
               Shews
               the
               Gristles
               which
               constitute
               the
               Arythenoides
               ,
               Separate
               from
               the
               Annularis
               .
            
             
               page
               122.
               
            
          
           
             The
             Common
             are
             those
             which
             are
             implanted
             into
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             and
             yet
             
             do
             not
             arise
             therefrom
             .
          
           
             The
             Proper
             have
             both
             their
             original
             
             and
             termination
             in
             the
             Larynx
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pair
            
             of
             the
             common
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             Ancient
             Sternothyroides
             ,
             being
             lower
             more
             ,
             arises
             within
             from
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             its
             original
             being
             broad
             and
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             going
             a
             long
             by
             the
             Wezand
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             beneath
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Sheild-fashion'd
             Gristle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             straiten
             the
             Chink
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             by
             drawing
             down
             the
             Scutiformis
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               Pair
            
             called
             Hyothyroides
             ,
             being
             the
             uppermore
             ,
             arises
             from
             the
             lower
             side
             of
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             being
             broad
             and
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             touches
             the
             Scutiformis
             ,
             being
             implanted
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             said
             Scutiformis
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             widen
             the
             Chink
             ,
             by
             lifting
             up
             the
             Scutiformis
             ,
          
           
             Spigelius
             and
             Vestingius
             assign
             contrary
             offices
             to
             these
             :
             for
             they
             will
             have
             the
             first
             pair
             to
             widen
             and
             the
             second
             to
             straiten
             the
             Chink
             of
             the
             Larynx
             .
          
           
             Others
             do
             here
             add
             a
             
               third
               pair
            
             ,
             which
             Columbus
             nevertheless
             and
             Casserius
             do
             account
             but
             one
             Muscle
             .
          
           
           
             But
             this
             is
             rather
             
               Musculus
               Deglutitorius
            
             ,
             or
             a
             Swallowing
             muscle
             ,
             because
             arising
             from
             the
             Scutiformis
             tis
             wrapped
             about
             the
             Gullet
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             judged
             ,
             by
             contracting
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Scutiformis
             ,
             to
             straiten
             the
             Chink
             :
             but
             it
             is
             no
             Servant
             to
             the
             Larynx
             unless
             by
             accident
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               proper
               Pair
            
             ,
             arises
             on
             the
             foreside
             ,
             from
             the
             lowest
             part
             of
             the
             
             Scutiformis
             ,
             as
             the
             Insertion
             of
             the
             Nerves
             doth
             shew
             ,
             and
             ends
             at
             the
             Annularis
             .
             And
             therefore
             this
             pair
             may
             be
             termed
             Thyrocricoides
             ;
             but
             not
             ,
             as
             most
             Anatomists
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             
               Cricothyroides
               .
               Some
            
             will
             have
             it
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             fore-side
             of
             the
             Cricoides
             ,
             and
             to
             end
             into
             the
             lowest
             side
             of
             the
             Scutiformis
             .
             If
             it
             be
             broad
             and
             spred
             out
             side-waies
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             divided
             into
             two
             pair
             ,
             the
             foremore
             and
             the
             
               side
               pair
            
             ,
             and
             so
             Riolanus
             divides
             it
             .
             But
             it
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             single
             and
             smal
             enough
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Cartilago
             Annularis
             to
             the
             Scutiformis
             .
             (
             lightly
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             almost
             immoveable
             )
             so
             that
             they
             may
             be
             joyned
             together
             ,
             and
             kept
             in
             that
             posture
             .
             Others
             who
             differ
             about
             its
             original
             ,
             will
             have
             it
             to
             widen
             the
             Chink
             or
             the
             Scutiformis
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               Pair
            
             rises
             from
             the
             back
             side
             of
             the
             Annularis
             ,
             with
             a
             fleshy
             orignal
             ,
             and
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Glottalis
             or
             Arytaenoides
             ,
             with
             a
             Nervous
             end
             ,
             opening
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             by
             drawing
             asunder
             the
             two
             Gristles
             called
             Arytaenoides
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             are
             called
             
               Par
               Cricoarythenoides
               posticum
               .
               Casserius
            
             cals
             them
             
               Par
               Cucullare
            
             .
          
           
             The
             
               third
               pair
               ,
               Cricoarythenoides
               laterale
            
             ,
             arises
             above
             from
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Annularis
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Glottalis
             ,
             into
             the
             joynt
             ,
             there
             where
             it
             is
             not
             touched
             by
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             opens
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             oblique
             carriage
             of
             the
             Gristles
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             pair
             ,
             called
             Thyroarytenoides
             ,
             being
             inward
             and
             very
             broad
             ,
             proceeds
             from
             the
             Scutiformis
             ,
             viz.
             from
             its
             inner
             and
             fore
             part
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Cricoides
             likewise
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             suspects
             ,
             and
             ends
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Glottalis
             ,
             or
             the
             Arytaenoides
             ,
             which
             while
             it
             contracts
             and
             draws
             to
             the
             Thyroides
             ,
             it
             shuts
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             by
             a
             straight
             passage
             .
             When
             this
             pair
             is
             inflamed
             in
             a
             Sq●…ie
             ,
             it
             makes
             the
             Disease
             deadly
             ,
             because
             it
             exactly
             shurs
             the
             Chink
             .
          
           
             The
             
               ninth
               Muscle
            
             ,
             which
             others
             term
             
               Quintum
               par
               Arytenoides
            
             ,
             arises
             from
             the
             hinder
             line
             of
             the
             Guttalis
             ,
             and
             being
             carried
             along
             with
             transverse
             Fibres
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             sides
             thereof
             ,
             shutting
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             while
             it
             straitens
             the
             Cartilago
             Arytaenoides
             .
          
           
             For
             
               it
               is
               to
               be
               noted
            
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             proper
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             are
             ordained
             either
             to
             contract
             or
             widen
             the
             Chink
             ,
             which
             that
             it
             may
             be
             the
             more
             conveniently
             accomplished
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             widen
             and
             straiten
             the
             Thyroides
             ,
             others
             the
             Arytaenoides
             ,
             which
             Gristles
             do
             compass
             the
             Chink
             ,
             which
             being
             drawn
             in
             ,
             or
             widenest
             ,
             the
             Chink
             is
             withal
             made
             narrower
             or
             wider
             .
             Whence
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             I
             have
             not
             unskillfully
             propounded
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             upbraides
             me
             .
          
           
             The
             Epiglottis
             in
             Mankind
             has
             no
             Muscle
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             not
             voluntarily
             moved
             in
             Men
             ,
             as
             some
             vainly
             perswade
             themselves
             ;
             but
             is
             only
             depressed
             by
             the
             weight
             of
             such
             things
             as
             are
             swallowed
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             brute
             Beasts
             ,
             the
             Epiglottis
             hath
             Muscles
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             continually
             eating
             ,
             and
             chewing
             the
             Cud
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             a
             very
             great
             Epiglottis
             .
             And
             in
             them
             some
             Muscles
             arise
             from
             the
             Hyoides
             ,
             and
             are
             implanted
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Epiglottis
             ,
             which
             they
             lift
             up
             ;
             (
             and
             this
             pair
             Vesalius
             reckons
             to
             be
             the
             fift
             common
             pair
             )
             and
             others
             are
             seated
             between
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Epiglottis
             and
             the
             Cartilage
             ,
             shutting
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             
               are
               five
            
             :
             
             which
             in
             elderly
             persons
             do
             somtimes
             attain
             a
             boney
             hardness
             ;
             by
             means
             whereof
             ,
             some
             have
             scaped
             the
             danger
             of
             suffocation
             ,
             when
             they
             hung
             upon
             the
             Gallows
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Gristle
            
             is
             termed
             
               Cartilago
               Thuroides
            
             ,
             or
             
               Scutiformis
               ,
               Scutalis
               ,
               Clypealis
               ,
               Peltalis
               ,
            
             &c.
             from
             its
             shape
             ;
             because
             it
             resembles
             a
             sheild
             ,
             being
             in
             a
             manner
             four-square
             ,
             hollow
             within
             ,
             Bossie
             and
             bunching
             without
             ,
             but
             more
             in
             Men
             then
             in
             Women
             :
             because
             their
             Necks
             are
             made
             even
             ,
             for
             beauties
             sake
             ,
             by
             those
             Kernels
             placed
             by
             the
             Larynx
             .
             That
             same
             bunch
             which
             is
             seen
             on
             the
             foreside
             
             of
             the
             Nec●…s
             called
             
               Adams
               Apple
            
             ,
             because
             〈…〉
             common
             people
             have
             a
             beleife
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             judgment
             of
             God
             ,
             a
             part
             of
             that
             fatal
             Apple
             ,
             abode
             sticking
             in
             Adams
             Thro●●
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             communicated
             to
             his
             posterit●
             .
             It
             is
             distinguished
             in
             the
             middle
             with
             a
             line
             ,
             and
             therefore
             some
             have
             made
             it
             double
             ,
             whereas
             in
             truth
             it
             is
             very
             rarely
             found
             otherwise
             then
             single
             .
          
           
             In
             its
             Corners
             it
             hath
             processes
             ,
             above
             two
             long
             ones
             ,
             wherewith
             by
             help
             of
             a
             Li●…ment
             ,
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             lower
             sides
             of
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ;
             and
             beneath
             two
             likewise
             ,
             by
             which
             t
             is
             j●…d
             to
             the
             following
             Gristle
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             the
             Cricoeides
             or
             Annularis
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             round
             like
             a
             Ring
             ,
             and
             compasses
             the
             whole
             Larynx
             .
             Now
             it
             resembles
             the
             Turkes
             Ring
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             Arm
             their
             Thumbs
             when
             they
             shoot
             ,
             for
             the
             hinder
             part
             is
             broad
             and
             very
             thick
             .
             The
             fore
             part
             is
             straiter
             and
             drawn
             in
             like
             one
             of
             our
             Rings
             .
             T
             is
             vulgarly
             termed
             Innominata
             ,
             or
             the
             nameless
             Gristle
             ,
             because
             the
             ancients
             gave
             it
             no
             name
             .
             T
             is
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Gristles
             ,
             by
             help
             whereof
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Aspera
             Artera
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             immoveable
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             and
             fourth
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             for
             one
             ,
             when
             the
             Membrane
             is
             taken
             of
             appears
             to
             be
             double
             .
             T
             is
             called
             
               Arutainoeides
               ,
               Guttalis
            
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             resembling
             the
             spout
             of
             an
             Ewer
             ,
             whereout
             the
             Water
             is
             poured
             ,
             if
             the
             two
             processes
             of
             the
             upper
             part
             are
             considered
             ,
             which
             being
             joyned
             together
             do
             make
             up
             that
             little
             Chink
             which
             modulates
             the
             voice
             ,
             which
             others
             term
             
               ●…gula
               ,
               Parva
               Lingua
            
             ,
             or
             Glottis
             ,
             the
             〈…〉
             Tongue
             ,
             for
             the
             voice
             
             cannot
             be
             〈…〉
             through
             a
             narrow
             passage
             .
             This
             rests
             upon
             the
             upper
             and
             hinder
             side
             of
             the
             Cricoides
             ,
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Thyroides
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             place
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             a
             certain
             Hollowness
             ,
             which
             is
             formed
             between
             the
             Guttalis
             and
             the
             Scutalis
             ,
             by
             the
             Membranes
             which
             gather
             up
             the
             Cartilages
             ;
             into
             which
             if
             peradventure
             while
             one
             is
             speaking
             or
             laughing
             ,
             and
             the
             Epiglottis
             is
             open
             ,
             a
             cru●●
             of
             bread
             or
             a
             drop
             of
             drink
             do
             happen
             to
             fall
             ,
             it
             causes
             Coughing
             ,
             because
             it
             goes
             against
             the
             Course
             of
             the
             wind
             .
             But
             if
             any
             thing
             slide
             leasurely
             down
             the
             Chink
             ,
             by
             the
             Walls
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             it
             hinders
             not
             the
             wind
             ,
             and
             so
             causes
             no
             Coughing
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             is
             termed
             Epiglottis
             ,
             which
             covers
             and
             shuts
             the
             Chink
             ,
             least
             an
             considerable
             
             quantity
             of
             meat
             or
             drink
             should
             fall
             into
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Epiglottis
             being
             shur
             ,
             they
             might
             pass
             down
             the
             Gullet
             .
             But
             it
             is
             not
             exactly
             shut
             ,
             so
             that
             some
             smal
             quantity
             of
             drink
             may
             slip
             down
             the
             sides
             .
             For
             when
             we
             say
             that
             drink
             passes
             
             not
             into
             the
             Wesand
             and
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             of
             the
             greatest
             part
             ;
             for
             that
             some
             is
             carried
             thither
             ,
             I
             have
             shewed
             you
             before
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             we
             prescribe
             Electuaries
             and
             Lozenges
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             be
             held
             in
             the
             patients
             mouth
             ,
             his
             Head
             leaning
             backwards
             ,
             till
             they
             melt
             away
             ,
             that
             some
             portion
             of
             them
             may
             slip
             in
             by
             the
             Walls
             of
             the
             Wesand
             .
             T
             is
             opened
             when
             we
             Laugh
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Men
             must
             be
             careful
             that
             the●
             do
             not
             Laugh
             when
             they
             are
             supping
             of
             broath
             〈…〉
             the
             like
             .
             Also
             let
             such
             as
             are
             greedy
             eaters
             take
             ●…eah
             ,
             any
             meat
             get
             between
             the
             Epiglottis
             and
             the
             〈…〉
             whence
             immediately
             suffocation
             follows
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             se●●
             in
             a
             yong
             man
             of
             Hafnia
             ,
             who
             was
             suddainly
             choaked
             by
             a
             peice
             of
             Neats-tongue
             weighing
             an
             ounce
             and
             an
             halt
             ,
             greedily
             eaten
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Epiglottis
             is
             soft
             ,
             and
             its
             Shape
             resembles
             a
             Tongue
             ,
             or
             an
             I
             vie
             leaf
             ,
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             .
             And
             on
             either
             side
             a
             Membrane
             is
             fastend
             to
             the
             common
             mouth
             ;
             such
             an
             one
             as
             that
             which
             being
             daubed
             with
             a
             clammy
             Humor
             ,
             doth
             compass
             the
             inner
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             and
             the
             outside
             thereof
             is
             likewise
             covered
             thereby
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             Vessels
             .
             
          
           
             The
             Larynx
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             internal
             Jugular
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Arteries
             from
             the
             larger
             branch
             of
             the
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Nerves
             which
             Galen
             terms
             Vocales
             ,
             for
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             from
             the
             recurrent
             branch
             of
             the
             sixt
             pair
             .
          
           
             Two
             parcels
             of
             Kernels
             attend
             the
             same
             .
             
          
           
             One
             Parcel
             at
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             viz.
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Uvula
             〈…〉
             Gargareon
             which
             are
             called
             Tonsilla
             or
             Amyg●…
             also
             Paristhima
             and
             Antiades
             the
             Almonds
             of
             the
             Ears
             :
             which
             being
             Spongy
             (
             on
             each
             side
             one
             )
             ●o
             〈…〉
             the
             moisture
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             t●●●
             it
             into
             Spittle
             and
             therewith
             m●●sten
             the
             Throat
             ,
             Larynx
             ,
             
             Tongue
             and
             Oesophagus
             ;
             though
             it
             helps
             also
             our
             Tasting
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             performed
             without
             moisture
             .
             These
             Kernels
             are
             about
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             and
             are
             covered
             with
             the
             common
             Coat
             of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             receive
             Veins
             from
             the
             Jugulars
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             placed
             by
             them
             two
             little
             white
             Bladderkeys
             ,
             which
             receive
             ●ero●ity
             out
             of
             the
             Kernels
             ,
             and
             void
             forth
             into
             the
             Mouth
             .
             Riolanus
             doth
             acknowledg
             no
             such
             in
             a
             Man
             ,
             but
             Sustitutes
             in
             their
             stead
             Ligamental
             Membranes
             ,
             stretched
             out
             from
             the
             Uvula
             to
             the
             Almonds
             .
          
           
             Others
             stand
             by
             the
             lowerside
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             Cricoides
             and
             of
             the
             first
             ring
             of
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             being
             great
             and
             spongy
             ,
             through
             which
             Veins
             are
             spred
             ,
             from
             the
             Jugularis
             externa
             .
             In
             Women
             it
             is
             more
             Perspicuous
             ;
             in
             a
             Man
             and
             in
             an
             Ox
             ,
             more
             fleshy
             and
             red
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             bedew
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             with
             a
             clammy
             and
             fat
             ,
             but
             not
             fluid
             moisture
             ,
             that
             the
             Gristles
             may
             be
             more
             fit
             for
             motion
             ,
             and
             the
             voice
             may
             be
             made
             sweeter
             :
             which
             is
             imitated
             by
             those
             who
             anoint
             their
             pipes
             with
             Oyl
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               Larynx
            
             is
             to
             be
             the
             Organ
             of
             the
             Voice
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             
               Organs
               of
               the
               Voice
            
             are
             either
             Remote
             or
             Immediate
             .
          
           
             The
             Remote
             are
             the
             Chest
             and
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             without
             the
             Assistance
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             for
             if
             the
             four
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             should
             be
             tied
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             cut
             off
             ,
             yet
             a
             Dog
             can
             both
             run
             and
             bark
             ,
             as
             besides
             later
             Authors
             ,
             Galen
             did
             often
             experiment
             :
             and
             the
             illustrious
             Sr.
             
               Francis
               Bacon
            
             ,
             in
             his
             History
             of
             Life
             and
             Death
             ,
             Article
             15.
             tels
             of
             an
             unbowelled
             Man
             ,
             who
             after
             his
             Heart
             was
             taken
             out
             ,
             uttered
             three
             or
             four
             words
             of
             his
             Prayers
             .
          
           
             The
             Immediate
             are
             either
             preparatory
             ,
             as
             the
             Trachea
             ;
             or
             assistant
             as
             the
             Muscles
             and
             Nerves
             ;
             or
             conservatory
             ,
             as
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Throat
             .
             But
             the
             most
             principal
             part
             is
             the
             Larynx
             :
             and
             that
             part
             thereof
             termed
             Glottis
             is
             the
             next
             and
             adequate
             Organ
             of
             the
             Voice
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Voice
             is
             made
             after
             this
             
             ma●●er
             :
             the
             Air
             is
             suddenly
             and
             strongly
             blown
             out
             by
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             the
             Chink
             is
             moderately
             straitned
             ,
             where
             by
             the
             smiting
             of
             the
             Air
             the
             Voice
             is
             made
             ,
             as
             we
             perceive
             the
             wind
             to
             whistle
             through
             the
             Chink
             of
             a
             Dore.
             And
             therefore
             Aristotle
             cals
             the
             Voice
             a
             smiting
             of
             the
             Air
             ;
             understanding
             ,
             in
             a
             causal
             way
             of
             expression
             ,
             the
             Acton
             for
             the
             quality
             springing
             therefrom
             .
             And
             if
             the
             breath
             go
             out
             ,
             the
             Organ
             being
             wide
             open
             ,
             it
             causes
             a
             Sig●
             .
             
          
           
             And
             therefore
             ,
             that
             noise
             which
             Animals
             make
             cannot
             properly
             be
             termed
             a
             voice
             ,
             they
             wanting
             this
             Organ
             ;
             as
             the
             noise
             which
             some
             sishes
             make
             ,
             the
             croaking
             of
             Frogs
             ,
             and
             the
             ●re●king
             of
             Grass-hoppers
             .
             Aristotle
             tels
             us
             that
             the
             croaking
             of
             a
             Frog
             is
             made
             ,
             when
             the
             Lip
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             being
             equally
             let
             down
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             water
             being
             in
             their
             Throats
             '
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             which
             remains
             immoveable
             ,
             is
             so
             forcibly
             bent
             ,
             that
             their
             Eyes
             seem
             to
             sparkle
             .
             But
             ,
             it
             is
             evident
             ,
             that
             a
             Frog
             hath
             Lungs
             ,
             and
             a
             Chink
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Larynx
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Voice
             is
             an
             Animal
             sound
             ,
             made
             by
             the
             Glottis
             through
             
             smiting
             the
             Air
             as
             it
             is
             breathed
             in
             and
             out
             ,
             being
             produced
             to
             signifie
             the
             Conceptions
             of
             the
             Mind
             .
             And
             therefore
             Voice
             is
             only
             in
             living
             Creatures
             ,
             nor
             is
             every
             sound
             in
             them
             a
             Voice
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             made
             in
             the
             Glottis
             ;
             not
             Coughing
             ,
             nor
             hawking
             ,
             If
             any
             Fishes
             make
             a
             noise
             ,
             it
             is
             by
             their
             Gills
             or
             some
             such
             thing
             ,
             but
             not
             by
             their
             Mouths
             .
             Creatures
             without
             Blood
             and
             Insects
             ,
             as
             Bees
             Waspes
             ,
             Locusts
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             utter
             no
             Voice
             ,
             but
             as
             Aristotle
             rightly
             observes
             in
             his
             fourth
             Book
             
               de
               Historia
               Animalium
            
             ,
             they
             make
             a
             noise
             which
             proceeds
             from
             their
             Back
             ,
             as
             for
             example
             sake
             ,
             a
             Grass-hopper
             makes
             a
             noise
             ,
             by
             rubbing
             its
             wings
             one
             against
             another
             ;
             For
             in
             these
             insects
             there
             is
             contained
             a
             certain
             Spirit
             and
             Air
             ,
             in
             a
             Membrane
             beneath
             the
             Septum
             Transversum
             .
             Others
             will
             have
             it
             that
             insects
             make
             such
             noises
             by
             beating
             the
             Air
             after
             sundry
             manners
             with
             their
             wings
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Differences
               of
               Voices
            
             are
             infinite
             ,
             
             which
             are
             made
             ,
             1.
             
             By
             the
             Figuration
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             different
             Percussion
             and
             Modulation
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Pipes
             .
             3.
             
             From
             the
             largeness
             and
             other
             qualities
             of
             the
             Instruments
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             Wesand
             ,
             Lungs
             and
             Chest
             .
             4.
             
             According
             as
             the
             Voice
             comes
             to
             the
             Ear
             ,
             intire
             or
             mangled
             .
             And
             besides
             these
             differences
             ,
             every
             particular
             Beast
             hath
             a
             voice
             of
             its
             own
             ,
             which
             the
             Brutes
             themselves
             can
             accurately
             distinguish
             ,
             having
             herein
             a
             better
             hearing
             then
             Men.
             For
             a
             Lamb
             newly
             brought
             forth
             ,
             knows
             its
             Mothers
             bleating
             among
             a
             thousand
             Sheep
             ,
             and
             the
             Ew
             likewise
             knows
             the
             bleating
             of
             her
             own
             Lamb
             from
             all
             others
             .
             Which
             is
             also
             true
             of
             Henns
             and
             Chickens
             .
             For
             the
             same
             voice
             never
             happens
             ,
             because
             the
             Instruments
             do
             never
             agree
             in
             all
             things
             :
             even
             as
             
             Bells
             made
             of
             the
             same
             matter
             ,
             the
             same
             weight
             ,
             the
             same
             form
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             same
             workman
             ,
             do
             nevertheless
             alwayes
             differ
             in
             sound
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Parts
               of
               the
               Voice
               or
               Speech
               ,
            
             are
             
             Vowels
             and
             Consonants
             .
             We
             represent
             the
             Vowels
             only
             by
             five
             Letters
             ,
             because
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Tongue
             is
             only
             moved
             by
             so
             many
             motions
             .
             But
             when
             a
             Vowel
             is
             further
             cut
             and
             modified
             ,
             in
             the
             fore
             part
             of
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             by
             the
             Lips
             and
             Teeth
             ,
             it
             becomes
             a
             consonant
             ,
             which
             therefore
             cannot
             be
             uttered
             without
             a
             Vowel
             ,
             because
             that
             is
             its
             matter
             ,
             seeing
             it
             arises
             only
             from
             a
             Vowel
             modified
             and
             cut
             :
             just
             as
             from
             the
             confused
             sound
             of
             a
             Pipe
             ,
             an
             Articulate
             and
             Harmonious
             sound
             is
             made
             ,
             when
             after
             a
             certain
             Method
             ,
             the
             sounding
             Air
             is
             again
             stopped
             and
             cut
             by
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             OESOPHAGUS
             or
             Gullet
             .
          
           
             THe
             OESOPHAGUS
             which
             some
             term
             Gula
             ,
             others
             stomachus
             ,
             and
             
               Coelius
               Aurelianus
               Via
               stomachi
               and
               Ventris
            
             the
             way
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Belly
             ,
             in
             English
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             is
             the
             Pipe
             or
             Funnel
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             as
             the
             Wesand
             is
             the
             Pipe
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             so
             Scituate
             ,
             as
             that
             it
             begins
             in
             the
             Throat
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             termed
             Pharynx
             ,
             
             and
             from
             thence
             goes
             down
             right
             forward
             ,
             under
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             into
             the
             Stomach
             .
             And
             when
             it
             is
             come
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             fift
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             giving
             way
             to
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             which
             passes
             through
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             it
             bends
             to
             the
             right
             Hand
             ;
             afterwards
             it
             rises
             again
             to
             the
             left
             great
             Artery
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             eleventh
             Vertebra
             ,
             through
             the
             Diaphragma
             or
             Midriff
             it
             enters
             the
             left
             mouth
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             accompanied
             by
             two
             Nerves
             arising
             from
             the
             sixt
             pair
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             few
             Veins
             from
             the
             Cava
             ,
             the
             Azygos
             ,
             Intercostal
             and
             Jugular
             
             Veins
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Intercostal
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             the
             internal
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             And
             Nerves
             from
             the
             sixth
             pair
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             is
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             with
             the
             Jawes
             and
             Larynx
             ,
             by
             the
             Coat
             of
             
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             which
             is
             common
             to
             it
             and
             the
             Stomach
             .
             To
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             the
             Trachea
             and
             neighbouring
             parts
             'tis
             joyned
             by
             Membranes
             arising
             out
             of
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             And
             because
             it
             lies
             upon
             the
             Spina
             
             or
             Back-bone
             ,
             therefore
             when
             it
             is
             Diseased
             ,
             we
             apply
             external
             remedies
             to
             the
             Back-bone
             .
          
           
             A
             
               Glandulous
               Body
            
             grows
             to
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             affords
             
             moisture
             ,
             to
             wet
             the
             Cavity
             thereof
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             assist
             the
             swallowing
             of
             things
             .
             And
             somtimes
             it
             swels
             so
             much
             ,
             as
             to
             hinder
             the
             swallowing
             of
             all
             liquid
             meats
             and
             drink
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             consists
             of
             a
             triple
             Coat
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             more
             easily
             be
             stretched
             
             long-wayes
             and
             broad-wayes
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             common
             with
             the
             Stomach
             .
             This
             some
             will
             have
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             who
             are
             therein
             both
             mistaken
             .
             For
             it
             hath
             its
             rise
             ,
             there
             where
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Stomach
             arises
             ,
             viz.
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             one
             continued
             Body
             with
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             it
             is
             exceeding
             thin
             and
             in
             a
             manner
             destitute
             of
             all
             Fibres
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             the
             first
             Proper
             one
             ,
             the
             external
             being
             more
             fleshy
             ,
             thicker
             and
             softer
             ,
             then
             the
             other
             ;
             being
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Muscle
             bored
             through
             ,
             being
             commonly
             reputed
             to
             be
             interwoven
             with
             round
             and
             transverse
             Fibres
             .
             Also
             Hofman
             doth
             thereby
             prove
             it
             to
             be
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             because
             it
             suffers
             Convulsions
             and
             Palsies
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             second
             Proper
             one
             ,
             internal
             ,
             more
             Nervous
             ,
             somwhat
             subtile
             and
             harder
             ,
             being
             commonly
             said
             to
             be
             interwoven
             with
             streight
             and
             long
             Fibres
             .
             It
             is
             contained
             with
             that
             Membrane
             which
             covers
             the
             Palate
             ,
             Throat
             and
             Lips
             ,
             and
             therefore
             when
             a
             Man
             is
             ready
             to
             vomit
             ,
             his
             lower
             Lip
             trembles
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             vulgar
             opinion
             aforesaid
             ,
             our
             Eyes
             can
             witness
             ,
             that
             the
             inner
             Coat
             is
             furnished
             with
             transverse
             and
             circular
             Fibres
             ,
             the
             external
             with
             straight
             and
             longish
             ones
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Gullet
             which
             other
             
             have
             passed
             over
             in
             silence
             ,
             are
             four
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             I
             spoke
             of
             before
             ,
             treating
             
               de
               Larynge
            
             .
             It
             is
             only
             one
             like
             a
             Sphincter
             Muscle
             compassing
             the
             Gullet
             .
             And
             therefore
             
               Riolanus
               ,
               Spigelius
            
             ,
             and
             Ves●ingus
             term
             it
             
               Musculus
               Oesophagus
            
             ,
             being
             the
             Authors
             of
             that
             name
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             ,
             is
             the
             Sphaenopharyngaeus
             by
             them
             so
             called
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             internal
             acute
             process
             of
             the
             Sphaenoides
             ,
             and
             being
             obliquely
             implanted
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Oesophagus
             ,
             that
             it
             being
             drawn
             upwards
             and
             widened
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             the
             more
             wide
             to
             receive
             in
             meat
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             Stylopharyngaeus
             ,
             which
             arising
             from
             the
             Bodkin-shap'd
             acute
             process
             ,
             is
             stretched
             out
             to
             the
             sides
             of
             Oesophagus
             ;
             which
             both
             Dilates
             and
             Amplifies
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             ,
             is
             Cephalo-pharyngaeus
             ,
             commonly
             said
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Chin
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             late
             Authors
             ,
             from
             the
             lowest
             part
             of
             the
             Heads-top
             where
             it
             is
             nearest
             the
             Neck
             ;
             and
             is
             inserted
             with
             a
             various
             contexture
             of
             Fibres
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Oesophagus
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             larger
             :
             and
             therefore
             because
             of
             its
             Latitude
             and
             Fabrick
             ,
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             two
             .
          
           
             The
             Action
             therefore
             of
             the
             Oesophagus
             
             is
             Animal
             ;
             seeing
             it
             is
             performed
             by
             Muscles
             and
             not
             natural
             ,
             as
             the
             vulgar
             opinion
             is
             of
             all
             Authors
             ,
             and
             swallowing
             doth
             doubtless
             depend
             upon
             our
             free
             will
             and
             liberty
             .
          
           
             Now
             swallowing
             is
             performed
             after
             this
             manner
             :
             when
             any
             thing
             is
             to
             be
             swallowed
             ,
             that
             same
             first
             Muscle
             which
             Galen
             terms
             Sphincter
             doth
             every
             way
             contract
             it self
             ,
             whereupon
             its
             oblique
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             reach
             from
             the
             Oesophagus
             to
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             are
             made
             transverse
             ,
             which
             being
             done
             ,
             the
             Larynx
             is
             lifted
             up
             ,
             and
             the
             Gullet
             is
             depressed
             ;
             and
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Gullet
             so
             depressed
             ,
             is
             made
             more
             narrow
             .
             Hereunto
             the
             fourth
             Muscle
             is
             assistant
             .
             For
             as
             the
             first
             being
             contracted
             ,
             embraces
             the
             meat
             which
             by
             chewing
             is
             brought
             into
             a
             round
             Mass
             ,
             and
             so
             bears
             it
             down
             :
             so
             this
             fourth
             Muscle
             also
             contracting
             it self
             ,
             comes
             out
             as
             it
             were
             to
             help
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             meats
             received
             in
             at
             the
             Mouth
             may
             not
             go
             back
             ,
             it
             straitens
             and
             repels
             them
             on
             every
             side
             ,
             and
             transmits
             them
             into
             the
             Gullet
             ,
             so
             that
             by
             both
             these
             Muscles
             contracted
             ,
             and
             the
             Semicircular
             joyned
             therewith
             a
             perfect
             circle
             as
             it
             were
             and
             Sphincter
             is
             made
             ,
             viz.
             by
             the
             fourth
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Pharynx
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             first
             in
             the
             lower
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Gullet
             is
             ,
             that
             by
             it
             as
             by
             a
             Funnel
             ,
             meat
             and
             drink
             may
             be
             passed
             into
             the
             Stomach
             .
             And
             liquid
             things
             are
             indeed
             more
             easily
             swallowed
             then
             solid
             ;
             contrarywise
             in
             
             some
             sick
             persons
             solid
             meats
             are
             more
             readily
             swallowed
             then
             liquid
             ,
             because
             the
             faculty
             is
             more
             provoked
             by
             a
             stronger
             object
             ,
             being
             otherwise
             lulled
             a
             sleep
             as
             it
             were
             ;
             especially
             in
             the
             Palsie
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             AN
             Appendix
             or
             Appurtenance
             to
             the
             
             middle
             Belly
             .
             is
             the
             NECK
             ,
             as
             a
             medium
             between
             the
             Head
             and
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             termed
             Collum
             a
             Colendo
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             wont
             to
             be
             adorned
             :
             or
             a
             Colle
             
             from
             an
             Hillock
             ,
             for
             it
             arises
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             as
             an
             Hill
             out
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             oblong
             for
             the
             modulation
             of
             the
             
             Voice
             ;
             and
             therefore
             Animals
             which
             utter
             no
             true
             Voice
             ,
             as
             Fishes
             and
             Frogs
             ,
             have
             no
             Necks
             :
             and
             those
             which
             make
             the
             greatest
             Voice
             ,
             have
             the
             longest
             Necks
             ,
             as
             Cranes
             and
             Geese
             ,
             &c.
             
             By
             the
             use
             of
             Venery
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             Neck
             is
             altered
             ,
             because
             heat
             distends
             the
             Aspera
             Arteria
             ,
             the
             Carotides
             ,
             and
             the
             Jugular
             Veins
             .
             Whence
             it
             was
             an
             ordinary
             Practice
             among
             the
             Romans
             to
             measure
             the
             Brides
             Neck
             the
             day
             after
             the
             Wedding
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             knew
             whether
             she
             were
             a
             Virgin
             or
             Corrupted
             ,
             as
             we
             learn
             out
             of
             Catullus
             and
             Mercurialis
             .
          
           
             The
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Neck
             is
             properly
             termed
             Cervix
             .
             Now
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             
             Neck
             are
             either
             external
             ,
             as
             the
             Skin
             ,
             Muscles
             ,
             &c.
             or
             internal
             ;
             as
             the
             Vessels
             which
             run
             through
             the
             Trachea
             and
             Oesophagus
             :
             of
             the
             latter
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             of
             the
             rest
             I
             shall
             speak
             in
             their
             proper
             places
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Neck
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             For
             the
             Oesophagus
             ,
             Wesand
             ,
             and
             Lungs
             .
             Hence
             Creatures
             
             that
             have
             no
             Lungs
             ,
             as
             Fishes
             ,
             have
             no
             Necks
             .
             2.
             
             To
             be
             instead
             of
             an
             Hand
             to
             some
             Creatures
             ,
             to
             take
             their
             meat
             with
             ,
             according
             to
             Galen
             .
             3.
             
             That
             it
             may
             afford
             Nerves
             to
             the
             fore-parts
             ,
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             Cubit
             ,
             Hand
             ,
             Midriff
             ;
             for
             those
             creatures
             only
             have
             these
             parts
             who
             have
             Necks
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           THIRD
           BOOK
           OF
           THE
           Uppermost
           Cavity
           ,
           VIZ.
           THE
           HEAD
           .
        
         
           THe
           third
           or
           
             upper
             Venter
          
           or
           Cavity
           is
           the
           Head
           ,
           the
           chief
           mansion-house
           
           of
           the
           sensitive
           Soul
           which
           is
           placed
           in
           the
           top
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           for
           the
           Eyes
           sake
           ,
           which
           are
           there
           placed
           as
           in
           a
           Watch-tower
           ;
           and
           requisite
           it
           was
           that
           the
           Brain
           should
           be
           near
           the
           Eyes
           ,
           because
           they
           have
           soft
           Nerves
           ,
           which
           cannot
           be
           caried
           far
           .
        
         
           The
           Head
           is
           round
           like
           a
           Globe
           ,
           but
           a
           little
           flatned
           withal
           ,
           and
           longish
           .
           
        
         
           'T
           is
           greater
           in
           Man
           then
           other
           Creatures
           ,
           because
           of
           the
           Largeness
           of
           his
           
           Brain
           .
        
         
           And
           for
           more
           safeguard
           ,
           the
           Head
           is
           
           altogether
           bony
           .
        
         
           The
           Head
           is
           divided
           into
           the
           Hairy
           
           part
           ,
           and
           
             that
             which
             is
             without
             Hair.
          
           
        
         
           The
           former
           is
           termed
           Calva
           ,
           the
           latter
           Facies
           .
        
         
           The
           
             external
             parts
             of
             the
             Calva
          
           are
           these
           following
           .
           
        
         
           Sinciput
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           forepart
           reaching
           from
           the
           Forehead
           to
           the
           coronal
           Suture
           .
        
         
           Occiput
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           hinder
           part
           ,
           reaching
           from
           the
           Lambda-fashion'd
           Suture
           ,
           to
           the
           first
           Vertebra
           of
           the
           Neck
           .
        
         
           Vertex
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           part
           scituate
           between
           the
           two
           former
           ,
           bunching
           out
           .
        
         
           Tempora
           ,
           the
           Temples
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           Side-parts
           ,
           between
           the
           Eyes
           and
           the
           Ears
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           parts
           which
           constitute
           the
           Calva
           ,
           are
           some
           of
           them
           external
           and
           cloathing
           ,
           others
           internal
           and
           contained
           .
           The
           former
           are
           either
           common
           ,
           as
           the
           Scarf-skin
           ,
           the
           Hairy-skin
           ,
           the
           Fat
           ,
           the
           fleshy
           Membrane
           :
           or
           proper
           as
           the
           Pericardium
           ,
           Periostium
           ,
           the
           Muscles
           ,
           the
           Bones
           ,
           the
           Menings
           .
           The
           contained
           are
           the
           Brain
           ,
           the
           Petty-brain
           ,
           and
           the
           Marrow
           ,
           which
           is
           partly
           in
           the
           Skull
           ,
           partly
           in
           the
           Back-bone
           .
        
         
           The
           
             smooth
             part
          
           of
           the
           Head
           ,
           called
           the
           Face
           besides
           the
           parts
           containing
           ,
           hath
           
           parts
           proper
           to
           it self
           ,
           viz.
           the
           upper
           part
           which
           is
           called
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           and
           the
           lower
           in
           which
           are
           the
           Organs
           of
           the
           Senses
           ;
           as
           the
           
             Eyes
             ,
             Nostrils
             ,
             Ears
          
           ,
           and
           Mouth
           ,
           wherein
           the
           Tongue
           and
           other
           parts
           are
           concealed
           .
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Hairs
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Head
             there
             is
             the
             greatest
             plenty
             of
             Hair
             ,
             therefore
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Hair
             may
             conueniently
             be
             delivered
             in
             this
             place
             :
             though
             considered
             as
             an
             Excrement
             ,
             it
             does
             not
             belong
             to
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             Hairs
             are
             found
             well-near
             in
             all
             Creatures
             
             that
             engender
             their
             young
             ones
             within
             their
             bodies
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             assures
             us
             :
             instead
             whereof
             Fishes
             have
             scales
             ,
             Birds
             feathers
             ,
             and
             some
             Beasts
             as
             the
             Hedg-hog
             ,
             have
             long
             sharp
             prickles
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Hairs
             are
             indeed
             Bodies
             ,
             but
             not
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             unless
             in
             a
             very
             large
             signification
             ,
             as
             when
             we
             say
             some
             parts
             serve
             only
             to
             adorn
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             The
             
               immediate
               material
               Cause
            
             of
             which
             the
             hairs
             are
             made
             ,
             is
             certain
             fuliginous
             and
             excrementitious
             Vapors
             ,
             thick
             and
             earthy
             ,
             yet
             somwhat
             glewish
             and
             clammy
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             therefore
             false
             ,
             which
             some
             affirm
             ,
             
             that
             the
             Hairs
             and
             Nails
             are
             nourished
             and
             generated
             of
             good
             and
             laudable
             nutriment
             .
             For
             they
             grow
             even
             in
             persons
             consumed
             and
             pined
             away
             ,
             and
             being
             cut
             ,
             they
             grow
             again
             in
             all
             ages
             of
             a
             mans
             life
             ;
             and
             the
             oftner
             they
             are
             cut
             ,
             the
             sooner
             they
             grow
             again
             .
             Yea
             in
             dead
             men
             ,
             as
             on
             thieves
             upon
             the
             Gibbet
             ,
             &c.
             they
             grow
             .
             See
             Paraeus
             at
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Book
             ,
             who
             had
             an
             embalmed
             body
             in
             his
             house
             twenty
             four
             years
             together
             ,
             the
             Hairs
             and
             Nails
             whereof
             grew
             again
             as
             often
             as
             they
             cut
             them
             .
             They
             are
             therefore
             bred
             of
             sooty
             Steams
             and
             Vapors
             ,
             of
             the
             third
             Concoction
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             fleshy
             substance
             it self
             ,
             by
             whatsoever
             heat
             resolved
             into
             vapors
             .
          
           
             The
             remote
             Matter
             ,
             is
             nothing
             
             seminal
             out
             of
             which
             the
             hair
             sprouts
             as
             a
             flower
             ,
             nor
             any
             fat
             substance
             enclining
             
             to
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Seed
             or
             Blood
             ,
             but
             a
             superfluous
             moisture
             ;
             especially
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Kernels
             .
             And
             therefore
             where
             there
             are
             Kernels
             ,
             in
             those
             places
             there
             
             are
             commonly
             Hairs
             ,
             as
             at
             the
             Ears
             ,
             in
             the
             Arm-pits
             ,
             in
             the
             Groins
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             if
             somtimes
             there
             are
             Kernels
             without
             Hairs
             ,
             this
             want
             of
             hair
             springs
             from
             a
             too
             great
             quantity
             of
             humors
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             
               Matter
               in
               which
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Place
             where
             hairs
             are
             bred
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             too
             moist
             ,
             nor
             too
             dry
             ;
             as
             we
             see
             nothing
             grow
             in
             a
             wet
             fuliginous
             Soyle
             ,
             nor
             in
             ground
             over
             dry
             and
             parched
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             the
             Skin
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             a
             temperate
             part
             ,
             as
             the
             place
             of
             Generation
             
             of
             hairs
             ;
             but
             if
             it
             be
             too
             moist
             ,
             or
             too
             dry
             ,
             as
             in
             some
             persons
             it
             is
             ,
             the
             hair
             does
             not
             shoot
             forth
             :
             and
             therefore
             crusted
             Animals
             ,
             as
             Crabs
             ,
             Lobsters
             ,
             Oysters
             ,
             &c.
             have
             no
             hairs
             .
          
           
             The
             Skin
             therefore
             on
             which
             hairs
             must
             be
             bred
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             moderately
             dry
             ,
             least
             the
             hair
             should
             fall
             from
             its
             root
             ;
             but
             it
             must
             not
             be
             immoderately
             ,
             but
             laxe
             and
             rare
             ,
             least
             otherwise
             the
             hair
             should
             not
             make
             its
             way
             through
             .
             And
             therefore
             hairs
             may
             grow
             all
             over
             the
             skin
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             every
             where
             porous
             ,
             and
             every
             Pore
             hath
             the
             root
             of
             an
             hair
             fastned
             therein
             ,
             excepting
             the
             palmes
             of
             the
             hands
             and
             the
             soles
             of
             the
             feet
             ,
             which
             parts
             because
             of
             their
             continual
             motion
             and
             wearing
             ,
             have
             no
             hairs
             ,
             and
             because
             they
             were
             to
             be
             of
             an
             exquisite
             sense
             .
             And
             for
             this
             cause
             there
             grows
             no
             hair
             upon
             a
             Scar
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             no
             Pores
             .
          
           
             Hairs
             also
             do
             somtimes
             grow
             on
             the
             inner
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             in
             the
             Heart
             as
             was
             said
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             in
             the
             Urinary
             passages
             ,
             Witness
             
               Hypocrates
               ,
               Galen
               ,
               Schenkius
            
             .
             Hair
             was
             found
             in
             the
             stomach
             by
             ●●eer
             ,
             and
             lately
             in
             Norway
             bairs
             were
             voided
             by
             vomit
             from
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             whether
             bred
             there
             ,
             or
             taken
             in
             .
             At
             the
             Danish
             Hellespont
             red
             hairs
             were
             lately
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             musculous
             flesh
             of
             an
             Ox
             leg
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             Cause
             of
             hair
             ,
             is
             not
             the
             Soul
             ,
             nor
             any
             vegetative
             hair-making
             faculty
             ,
             but
             moderate
             heat
             ,
             drying
             up
             those
             fuliginous
             vapors
             ,
             and
             thrusting
             them
             forth
             into
             the
             pores
             of
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             These
             three
             things
             already
             explained
             ,
             are
             the
             chief
             Requisites
             for
             the
             Generation
             
             of
             Hair
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Matter
             ,
             the
             Place
             convenient
             ,
             and
             Heat
             .
          
           
             From
             whence
             by
             the
             Rule
             of
             Contraries
             ,
             the
             Cause
             of
             Baldness
             may
             be
             
             gathered
             ,
             viz.
             
          
           
             
               1.
               
               When
               Matter
               is
               wanting
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               When
               the
               Skin
               is
               Originally
               too
               dry
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               grows
               drier
               ,
               and
               is
               not
               moistened
               by
               any
               neighbouring
               part
               .
               Now
               the
               fore-part
               of
               the
               Head
               is
               here
               to
               be
               understood
               ,
               which
               is
               commonly
               the
               only
               bald
               place
               ;
               for
               no
               man
               ,
               according
               to
               Aristotle
               ,
               becomes
               bald
               on
               the
               hinder-part
               of
               his
               Head.
               For
               either
               Fat
               or
               other
               moisture
               in
               the
               hinder-part
               and
               the
               Temples
               keep
               them
               from
               baldness
               ;
               fat
               in
               the
               fore-part
               ,
               the
               Skin
               becomes
               dry
               and
               hard
               like
               a
               shell
               ,
               and
               therefore
               is
               bald
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               By
               reason
               of
               too
               much
               or
               too
               little
               heat
               .
               For
               weak
               heat
               does
               not
               sufficiently
               dry
               the
               matter
               ,
               as
               in
               cold
               and
               moist
               persons
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               are
               in
               years
               .
               And
               therefore
               the
               humor
               growing
               over
               hot
               by
               carnal
               Copulation
               ,
               is
               the
               cause
               of
               baldness
               ,
               and
               for
               this
               cause
               Boys
               and
               Eunuchs
               do
               not
               become
               bald
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Also
               four
               Husbandmen
               near
               Bruxells
               became
               bald
               by
               poyson
               ,
               as
               
                 Franciscus
                 de
                 Paz
              
               the
               King
               of
               Spains
               Physitian
               observed
               ,
               and
               wrote
               thereof
               ●o
               
                 Nicholas
                 Fontanus
              
               ;
               And
               Hamelmannus
               in
               his
               Annals
               tells
               of
               an
               Horse
               of
               the
               Count
               of
               Oldenburg
               ,
               which
               by
               poyson
               was
               made
               bald
               hither
               ,
               because
               this
               poyson
               had
               some
               specifical
               contrariety
               to
               the
               Hairs
               ,
               or
               because
               the
               Spirits
               being
               extinguished
               ,
               and
               the
               vigor
               of
               the
               Body
               quelled
               ,
               the
               roots
               of
               the
               hairs
               could
               not
               be
               retained
               in
               the
               Skin
               .
               Such
               a
               poyson
               is
               the
               fat
               of
               a
               certain
               Whale
               in
               the
               Island
               of
               Feroe
               ,
               newly
               taken
               out
               ,
               by
               which
               Copper-vessels
               are
               also
               broken
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Hairs
             are
             commonly
             divided
             into
             such
             as
             are
             bred
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             grow
             afterwards
             .
          
           
             Those
             bred
             in
             the
             Womb
             are
             threefold
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             of
             the
             Eye-lids
             ,
             
             and
             the
             Eye-brows
             .
          
           
             The
             Hairs
             which
             grow
             afterwards
             ,
             are
             such
             as
             spring
             up
             when
             a
             man
             comes
             to
             a
             just
             age
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             in
             a
             boy
             when
             he
             begins
             to
             breed
             Sperm
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             Maid
             when
             her
             Courses
             break
             forth
             ,
             for
             then
             the
             Skin
             grows
             open
             .
          
           
             Also
             these
             are
             threefold
             :
             for
             1.
             
             Hairs
             breed
             on
             the
             Share
             ,
             seldom
             in
             the
             Womb
             and
             the
             Heart
             .
             2.
             
             In
             the
             Arm-pits
             ,
             also
             in
             the
             Nostrils
             and
             Ears
             .
             3.
             
             On
             the
             Chins
             of
             men
             but
             not
             of
             women
             ;
             for
             in
             women
             their
             Courses
             spend
             the
             matter
             of
             hair
             which
             should
             make
             a
             beard
             ,
             and
             therefore
             somtimes
             ,
             when
             their
             Courses
             are
             poxt
             ,
             women
             have
             hairs
             growing
             on
             their
             Chins
             .
             It
             was
             a
             rare
             case
             for
             a
             young
             woman
             of
             thirty
             years
             of
             age
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             Arch-dutches
             of
             Austria's
             Women
             ,
             to
             have
             ever
             since
             she
             was
             a
             Girl
             ,
             before
             her
             courses
             brake
             forth
             ,
             a
             long
             beard
             with
             mustachios
             like
             a
             man.
             And
             I
             saw
             such
             a
             like
             Girl
             not
             long
             since
             in
             the
             Low-countries
             ,
             who
             was
             also
             hairy
             all
             her
             Body
             over
             .
             Lately
             
               Helena
               Marswin
            
             in
             Fionia
             ,
             had
             a
             Girl
             with
             a
             long
             beard
             of
             a
             reddish
             yellow
             colour
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             or
             Use
             of
             Hairs
             ,
             
          
           
             
               I.
               Is
               to
               cover
               the
               Parts
               .
            
             
               II.
               To
               adorn
               them
               .
               And
               this
               is
               chiefly
               seen
               in
               the
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Head
               and
               Face
               .
               For
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Hairs
                   of
                   the
                   Head
                   do
                   shield
                   
                   the
                   Brain
                   from
                   external
                   injuries
                   of
                   cold
                   and
                   heat
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                   So
                   in
                   Aethiopia
                   by
                   a
                   peculiar
                   thrumming
                   of
                   their
                   hairs
                   ,
                   they
                   are
                   defended
                   from
                   the
                   heat
                   .
                   And
                   as
                   a
                   man
                   hath
                   the
                   greatest
                   Brain
                   of
                   all
                   Creatures
                   ,
                   so
                   hath
                   he
                   thereon
                   most
                   plenty
                   of
                   hairs
                   .
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   They
                   moderately
                   heat
                   ,
                   as
                   otherwise
                   in
                   the
                   Head
                   there
                   is
                   no
                   Fat
                   to
                   keep
                   it
                   warm
                   :
                   but
                   rather
                   a
                   bony
                   substance
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   far
                   distant
                   from
                   the
                   Heart
                   .
                   Now
                   the
                   hairs
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   advice
                   of
                   the
                   Physitian
                   ,
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   let
                   grow
                   ,
                   or
                   to
                   be
                   cut
                   off
                   in
                   this
                   or
                   that
                   person
                   ,
                   but
                   they
                   must
                   not
                   be
                   shaven
                   off
                   ,
                   because
                   thereby
                   Defluxions
                   are
                   caused
                   .
                   So
                   also
                   the
                   beard
                   does
                   cherish
                   and
                   moderately
                   warm
                   the
                   Chin.
                   In
                   persons
                   that
                   are
                   recovering
                   out
                   of
                   sickness
                   ,
                   the
                   hair
                   must
                   not
                   be
                   cut
                   off
                   ,
                   for
                   fear
                   of
                   a
                   relapse
                   ,
                   touching
                   which
                   Question
                   see
                   Sitonus
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   They
                   adorn
                   :
                   for
                   bald
                   persons
                   and
                   
                   thin-hair'd
                   are
                   deformed
                   .
                   So
                   the
                   Beard
                   also
                   adorns
                   a
                   man
                   ,
                   and
                   makes
                   him
                   venetable
                   ,
                   especially
                   if
                   the
                   hairs
                   be
                   spred
                   all
                   about
                   .
                   But
                   in
                   women
                   there
                   was
                   no
                   need
                   of
                   so
                   venerable
                   an
                   appearance
                   .
                
              
            
             
               III.
               To
               purge
               the
               Humors
               and
               Spirits
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Body
               of
               superfluous
               sooty
               steams
               .
               And
               therefore
               frequent
               cutting
               the
               hair
               ,
               quickens
               the
               ●ight
               ,
               and
               Celsus
               in
               a
               long
               Defluxion
               of
               Rheum
               ,
               bids
               us
               cut
               the
               hair
               to
               the
               skin
               .
               
                 C.
                 Aurelianus
              
               sayes
               that
               in
               the
               Phrenzie
               ,
               when
               the
               hair
               is
               cut
               off
               ,
               the
               parts
               transpire
               ,
               being
               freed
               from
               a
               great
               burthen
               .
               Hence
               a
               reason
               may
               be
               drawn
               why
               Helmont
               .
               ●asting
               an
               Asses
               milk
               ,
               could
               tell
               
               whether
               she
               had
               been
               curried
               and
               combed
               that
               morning
               or
               not
               .
            
             
               IV.
               To
               afford
               signs
               whereby
               to
               know
               the
               Temperament
               ,
               Manners
               and
               hidden
               Diseases
               of
               every
               person
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Form
             of
             Hairs
             is
             not
             the
             Soul
             ,
             as
             many
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             because
             in
             persons
             
             that
             consume
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             are
             dead
             ,
             the
             hairs
             grow
             ;
             and
             those
             who
             conceive
             with
             Plempius
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             Soul
             in
             persons
             dead
             twenty
             four
             years
             ,
             I
             leave
             the
             Readers
             to
             make
             an
             estimate
             of
             their
             Wisdom
             .
             Nor
             do
             they
             retain
             a
             vegetative
             life
             in
             dead
             persons
             ,
             for
             so
             the
             whole
             man
             should
             not
             die
             ,
             nor
             is
             there
             any
             thing
             in
             a
             dead
             Carkass
             ,
             that
             should
             rather
             preserve
             this
             life
             ,
             then
             the
             sensitive
             or
             rational
             ,
             not
             to
             say
             that
             these
             ignoble
             Parts
             by
             the
             long-lasting
             of
             their
             lives
             ,
             should
             excel
             all
             other
             parts
             .
             Plants
             indeed
             spring
             living
             from
             the
             lifeless
             Earth
             ,
             but
             out
             of
             a
             living
             Seed
             ,
             which
             I
             deny
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Hairs
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             stick
             not
             in
             the
             Body
             like
             Plants
             ,
             nor
             are
             bred
             thereout
             .
             Nor
             must
             we
             say
             with
             Plotinus
             ,
             that
             certain
             reliques
             of
             life
             remain
             after
             death
             ,
             as
             warmed
             rooms
             remain
             hot
             ,
             when
             the
             fire
             is
             out
             ;
             for
             such
             Reliques
             of
             life
             could
             not
             remain
             so
             many
             years
             .
             The
             form
             therfore
             of
             the
             hairs
             may
             be
             described
             by
             their
             accidents
             ,
             which
             are
             these
             following
             .
          
           
             I.
             Magnitude
             :
             Now
             the
             Head-hairs
             are
             longest
             ,
             because
             the
             Brain
             is
             greater
             
             then
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Kernels
             :
             also
             they
             are
             thickest
             ,
             because
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Head
             is
             most
             thick
             ,
             howbeit
             it
             is
             laxe
             and
             open
             ,
             and
             contains
             sufficient
             moisture
             .
          
           
             According
             therefore
             as
             the
             Skin
             is
             thick
             or
             thin
             ,
             rare
             or
             compact
             ,
             and
             the
             humor
             plentiful
             or
             scanty
             ,
             and
             the
             heat
             weak
             or
             strong
             ,
             the
             hairs
             become
             thick
             or
             thin
             ,
             hard
             or
             soft
             ,
             plentiful
             or
             scanty
             ,
             &c.
             
             He
             had
             store
             of
             hair
             on
             his
             Head
             ,
             who
             could
             suffer
             himself
             to
             be
             shot
             in
             the
             head
             with
             a
             bullet
             ,
             and
             had
             no
             hurt
             ,
             whom
             Busbequius
             saw
             in
             his
             Voyage
             to
             Constantinople
             .
             Yet
             they
             grow
             not
             infinitely
             ,
             because
             the
             Exhalations
             are
             not
             so
             plentiful
             ,
             nor
             does
             the
             expulsive
             Faculty
             work
             infinitely
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Their
             Figure
             :
             The
             hairs
             are
             straight
             and
             flat
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             abound
             with
             moisture
             ,
             but
             curled
             
             in
             such
             as
             are
             dry
             .
             Therefore
             curled
             hair
             is
             harder
             then
             that
             which
             lies
             flat
             .
             Hence
             all
             Blackmores
             are
             curle-pated
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             dry
             Temperament
             .
             But
             the
             Scythians
             and
             Thracians
             have
             long
             flat
             hair
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             moist
             ,
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             .
             Again
             the
             hairs
             are
             straight
             because
             of
             the
             straightness
             of
             the
             passages
             through
             which
             they
             break
             forth
             ;
             and
             crisp
             because
             of
             the
             crookedness
             of
             the
             said
             passages
             .
             The
             augmenting
             Glass
             informs
             us
             that
             the
             hairs
             are
             quadrangular
             ;
             though
             others
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             round
             because
             of
             the
             roundness
             of
             the
             Pores
             .
          
           
             Also
             they
             are
             porous
             or
             hollow
             within
             ,
             as
             the
             Disease
             Plica
             in
             Poland
             does
             shew
             ,
             and
             the
             hairs
             of
             an
             Elk.
             Again
             because
             they
             may
             be
             split
             ,
             they
             have
             Pores
             ,
             according
             to
             Aristotles
             maxime
             .
          
           
             III.
             Their
             Colour
             :
             which
             in
             Brutes
             follows
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             Skin
             ;
             and
             in
             
             men
             is
             exceeding
             variable
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Country
             ,
             ambient
             Air
             predominant
             Humor
             ,
             Age
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             For
             those
             that
             dwell
             in
             hot
             and
             dry
             Countries
             ,
             have
             their
             hair
             not
             only
             dry
             ,
             crisp
             and
             brittle
             ,
             but
             also
             black
             ,
             as
             the
             Aegypians
             ,
             Arabians
             ,
             Indians
             ;
             also
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             Italians
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             the
             French
             have
             their
             hair
             for
             the
             most
             part
             black
             .
             They
             who
             dwell
             in
             cold
             and
             moist
             Countries
             ,
             have
             their
             hairs
             not
             only
             soft
             and
             ●t●aight
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             most
             part
             yellow
             or
             white
             ,
             as
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             
               Denmark
               ,
               England
               ,
               Norway
               ,
               Swedland
               ,
               Scythia
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             Again
             the
             predominant
             Humor
             makes
             the
             Colour
             of
             the
             hairs
             :
             as
             in
             flegmatick
             persons
             ,
             the
             hairs
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             white
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Variety
             of
             Heat
             makes
             variety
             of
             Colours
             :
             for
             immoderate
             heat
             makes
             black
             hairs
             :
             for
             a
             vaporous
             Excrement
             is
             raised
             by
             the
             heat
             ,
             and
             is
             changed
             into
             an
             exact
             sooty
             stream
             .
             But
             temperate
             heat
             makes
             the
             hairs
             yellow
             ;
             more
             temperate
             makes
             them
             red
             ;
             a
             weak
             heat
             makes
             them
             white
             .
             But
             both
             these
             causes
             of
             Colours
             do
             easily
             concur
             in
             the
             hair
             ,
             as
             when
             flegm
             abounds
             ,
             weakness
             of
             heat
             is
             joyned
             therewith
             ,
             and
             when
             Blood
             abounds
             ,
             heat
             is
             moderate
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Also
             a
             change
             in
             the
             Colour
             is
             made
             in
             respect
             of
             Age
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             other
             accidents
             .
             For
             grown
             persons
             have
             their
             hair
             not
             only
             thicker
             ,
             harder
             ,
             stronger
             and
             more
             plentiful
             ,
             but
             at
             length
             also
             grey
             and
             whiteish
             .
          
           
             But
             no
             Hairs
             on
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             are
             Naturally
             green
             ,
             or
             blew
             ,
             though
             there
             are
             both
             green
             and
             leek-colour'd
             Choler
             in
             Mans
             Body
             ;
             the
             cause
             whereof
             is
             not
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             hair
             ,
             uncapable
             of
             light
             ,
             as
             Cardan
             imagined
             ,
             because
             the
             hair
             is
             capable
             of
             being
             yellow
             ,
             its
             thickness
             nothing
             hindring
             ;
             but
             ,
             as
             Scaliger
             rightly
             philosophizes
             ,
             seeinge
             ,
             ●ry
             colour
             is
             not
             agreeable
             to
             every
             Plant
             ,
             no
             more
             is
             it
             to
             the
             hairs
             .
             Yet
             I
             have
             seen
             green
             hair'd
             men
             at
             Hafnia
             ,
             and
             those
             as
             work
             Metals
             have
             their
             hair
             commonly
             green
             .
             
               Marcellus
               Donatus
            
             relates
             of
             
               Antonius
               Maria
               Catabenus
            
             ,
             grey
             hair'd
             through
             Age
             ,
             how
             that
             much
             Choler
             mixt
             with
             blood
             abounding
             in
             his
             Body
             ,
             not
             only
             his
             Skin
             became
             of
             a
             Verdigreese
             or
             yellow-green
             colour
             ,
             but
             his
             grey
             hairs
             were
             also
             died
             of
             the
             same
             hue
             .
          
           
             The
             Ancients
             conceived
             that
             grey
             hairs
             
             did
             proceed
             from
             driness
             ,
             as
             the
             Leaves
             of
             Trees
             when
             they
             are
             dried
             ,
             look
             white
             .
          
           
             But
             Aristotle
             confutes
             them
             .
             For
             those
             who
             go
             with
             their
             heads
             covered
             ,
             do
             sooner
             grow
             grey
             ,
             and
             yet
             are
             not
             so
             dried
             ,
             as
             those
             that
             expose
             their
             heads
             bare
             to
             the
             air
             .
             Again
             some
             are
             grey
             as
             soon
             as
             they
             are
             born
             or
             quickly
             after
             ,
             which
             cannot
             proceed
             from
             Dryness
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             grow
             soonest
             grey
             that
             go
             
             alwaies
             with
             their
             Heads
             covered
             ,
             because
             the
             heat
             cannot
             be
             fanned
             ,
             but
             is
             overwhelmed
             and
             strangled
             ,
             which
             being
             extinguished
             ,
             an
             external
             heat
             is
             introduced
             ;
             so
             that
             putrefaction
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             grey
             hairs
             ,
             which
             sprung
             from
             scarsity
             of
             innate
             heat
             ,
             which
             cannot
             so
             digest
             the
             humors
             as
             in
             youth
             .
             And
             the
             outmost
             and
             smallest
             end
             of
             the
             hair
             is
             whitest
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             least
             heat
             .
          
           
             Now
             why
             a
             white
             Humor
             should
             arise
             from
             putrefaction
             ,
             the
             Cause
             is
             ,
             
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             because
             a
             great
             part
             is
             turned
             into
             Air
             ,
             which
             being
             well
             mixed
             with
             an
             earthy
             and
             warry
             Substance
             makes
             whiteness
             .
             Hence
             also
             it
             is
             apparent
             ,
             why
             men
             are
             soonest
             grey
             about
             their
             Temples
             ,
             because
             there
             great
             and
             fleshy
             Muscles
             are
             placed
             under
             the
             Skin
             ,
             which
             through
             moisture
             do
             easily
             putrifie
             .
             Add
             hereunto
             ,
             that
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             are
             very
             thin
             ,
             and
             therefore
             extraneous
             heat
             can
             easily
             pass
             through
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               Chap.
               II
            
             Of
             the
             Membranes
             without
             and
             within
             the
             Skull
             .
          
           
             THe
             EXTERNAL
             MEMBRANES
             which
             compass
             the
             Skull
             ,
             are
             two
             :
             The
             PERICRANIUM
             and
             the
             PERIOSTIUM
             which
             compass
             the
             Brain
             ;
             also
             there
             are
             two
             Meninges
             or
             Matres
             so
             called
             ,
             viz.
             DURA
             MATER
             and
             PIA
             MATER
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             a
             thick
             Membrane
             and
             a
             thin
             one
             ,
             which
             perform
             the
             same
             Office
             in
             their
             Cavity
             ,
             which
             the
             Pleura
             performs
             in
             the
             middle
             Cavity
             and
             the
             Peritonaeum
             in
             the
             lowest
             .
          
           
             The
             PERICRANEUM
             is
             a
             Membrane
             thin
             and
             soft
             ,
             compassing
             the
             Skull
             ,
             and
             
             springing
             from
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             coming
             out
             at
             the
             Sutures
             of
             the
             Skull
             .
          
           
             That
             it
             springs
             from
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             the
             extraordinary
             Consent
             between
             the
             Brain
             with
             its
             Meninges
             and
             the
             Pericraneum
             ,
             does
             sufficiently
             prove
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             by
             any
             other
             way
             more
             conveniently
             made
             forth
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             this
             production
             of
             the
             Pericranium
             from
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             is
             manifestly
             visible
             in
             Infants
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Moles
             of
             their
             Heads
             are
             not
             yet
             sufficiently
             closed
             .
             Those
             Fibres
             wherewith
             
               Horstius
               ,
               Spigelius
            
             ,
             and
             Laurenbergius
             do
             conceive
             that
             the
             Pericraneum
             is
             only
             fastned
             to
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             do
             not
             go
             unto
             the
             Throat
             :
             for
             the
             Bones
             being
             by
             little
             and
             little
             hardned
             and
             compressed
             ,
             that
             same
             Continuity
             of
             the
             Pericraneum
             and
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             was
             broken
             off
             with
             Age
             ,
             from
             whence
             arose
             that
             appearance
             of
             Fibres
             which
             hath
             deceived
             some
             .
          
           
             The
             PERIOSTIUM
             is
             a
             most
             thin
             and
             nervous
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             therefore
             exceeding
             
             sensible
             ,
             by
             help
             whereof
             ,
             all
             the
             bones
             saving
             the
             teeth
             being
             compassed
             therewith
             ,
             become
             sensible
             .
          
           
             I
             distinguish
             these
             two
             Membranes
             with
             Vesalius
             and
             Bauhinus
             against
             
               Fallopius
               ,
               Laurentius
            
             and
             others
             ,
             who
             confound
             them
             ,
             seeing
             they
             may
             be
             accurately
             separated
             by
             a
             skilful
             Anatomist
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             various
             Muscles
             about
             the
             Head
             shall
             be
             explained
             in
             their
             proper
             place
             .
          
           
             The
             CRASSA
             MENINX
             or
             harder
             Membrane
             called
             also
             DURA
             MATER
             ,
             
             because
             of
             its
             thickness
             and
             hardness
             ,
             and
             because
             many
             conceive
             all
             the
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Body
             do
             arise
             out
             of
             this
             and
             the
             
               tenuis
               Membrana
            
             or
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             ,
             does
             cover
             the
             Skull
             all
             over
             on
             the
             inside
             ,
             and
             all
             its
             Cavities
             and
             hollowness
             ;
             and
             sticks
             strongly
             to
             its
             Basis
             ,
             so
             that
             some
             have
             thought
             it
             took
             its
             Original
             from
             thence
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             compasses
             the
             Brain
             also
             loosely
             ,
             on
             the
             upper
             side
             ,
             and
             covers
             the
             inside
             of
             the
             Skull
             .
             (
             For
             wheras
             Hildanus
             and
             Varolius
             have
             observed
             that
             it
             is
             straitly
             fastned
             to
             the
             Skull
             ,
             that
             was
             besides
             the
             ordinary
             Course
             of
             Nature
             )
             that
             there
             may
             be
             some
             distance
             between
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             between
             the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Heart-bag
             ,
             both
             in
             living
             and
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             though
             in
             the
             latter
             it
             is
             greater
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             defect
             of
             Spirits
             and
             the
             falling
             in
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             I
             grant
             Olbafius
             and
             Hofmannus
             ;
             and
             this
             is
             so
             contrived
             that
             the
             swelling
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             may
             not
             be
             compressed
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             may
             be
             no
             hindrance
             of
             the
          
           
             
               Motion
               of
               the
               Brain
            
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             up
             of
             Systole
             and
             Diastole
             ,
             and
             is
             continual
             ,
             
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             newborn
             Children
             ,
             and
             most
             vehement
             pains
             of
             the
             head
             ,
             as
             
               Fabricius
               Hildanus
            
             hath
             observed
             :
             And
             I
             my self
             have
             frequently
             seen
             this
             motion
             in
             wounded
             persons
             .
             Strange
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             some
             learned
             men
             will
             needs
             deny
             this
             motion
             .
             But
             it
             is
             a
             very
             hard
             task
             to
             assign
             the
             true
             Cause
             of
             this
             motion
             :
             Some
             make
             it
             to
             be
             the
             Meninges
             ;
             others
             the
             Arteries
             ;
             others
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             But
             it
             is
             ill
             ascribed
             to
             the
             Meninges
             :
             for
             a
             great
             portion
             of
             the
             brain
             being
             taken
             away
             ,
             and
             the
             Meninges
             themselves
             ,
             the
             brain
             was
             observed
             to
             move
             in
             a
             living
             Sheep
             ,
             by
             the
             
               renowned
               Riolanus
            
             .
             They
             judg
             better
             who
             ascribe
             the
             same
             to
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             for
             the
             motions
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             Arteries
             do
             happen
             both
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             as
             may
             easily
             be
             observed
             in
             Fractures
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Heads
             of
             Infants
             .
             Yea
             and
             Walaeus
             observes
             that
             in
             those
             who
             being
             wounded
             in
             the
             Head
             to
             the
             Brain
             ,
             have
             extream
             anguish
             ,
             only
             certain
             conspicuous
             Arteries
             do
             move
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Brain
             ;
             and
             when
             the
             parties
             wounded
             gather
             strength
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             their
             Brain
             evidently
             returns
             .
             Also
             Coiter
             hath
             observed
             in
             living
             Lambs
             ,
             Kids
             and
             Dogs
             ,
             that
             the
             brain
             it self
             hath
             no
             motion
             but
             only
             the
             Arteries
             .
             To
             him
             Olbafius
             gives
             consent
             ,
             because
             the
             motion
             is
             most
             observable
             about
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             dura
             mater
             ,
             where
             are
             most
             Arteries
             .
             And
             therefore
             I
             conceive
             we
             must
             not
             have
             recourse
             to
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             :
             which
             is
             also
             soft
             and
             flaggie
             ,
             and
             sufficiently
             indisposed
             for
             motion
             .
             But
             the
             chiefest
             motion
             is
             observed
             at
             the
             full
             of
             the
             Moon
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             working
             of
             the
             humors
             at
             that
             season
             .
             But
             that
             also
             springs
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             are
             more
             distended
             with
             blood
             :
             for
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             becomes
             quicker
             or
             slower
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             various
             Influence
             of
             the
             Stars
             .
             That
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             brain
             should
             answer
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             I
             have
             no
             sufficient
             sign
             to
             prove
             .
          
           
             Now
             
               it
               is
               fastned
            
             to
             the
             pia
             mater
             and
             the
             brain
             ,
             by
             Vessels
             ;
             to
             the
             Skul
             by
             thin
             membranous
             fibres
             springing
             out
             of
             it self
             ,
             passing
             out
             through
             the
             futures
             ,
             and
             constituting
             the
             Pericranium
             .
          
           
             This
             Meninx
             or
             Coat
             is
             double
             ,
             as
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Membranes
             are
             .
             The
             external
             part
             respecting
             the
             Cranium
             ,
             is
             hard
             ,
             rough
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             small
             sense
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             hardness
             of
             the
             Skull
             which
             it
             was
             to
             touch
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             part
             is
             smooth
             ,
             slippery
             ,
             brightly
             shineing
             and
             white
             ,
             being
             more
             drenched
             with
             a
             waterish
             moisture
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             fourfold
             where
             it
             distinguishes
             the
             Brain
             from
             the
             petty-brain
             ,
             in
             which
             place
             Dogs
             have
             a
             bone
             underpropping
             their
             brain
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             bear
             hard
             upon
             the
             Cerebellum
             ,
             Branilet
             ,
             or
             petty-brain
             .
          
           
             But
             on
             the
             Crown
             of
             the
             Head
             it
             is
             doubled
             ,
             
             where
             it
             divides
             the
             brain
             into
             the
             right
             and
             left
             part
             :
             and
             because
             the
             Reduplication
             is
             in
             the
             hinder-part
             broad
             ,
             and
             grows
             afterwards
             narrow
             by
             degrees
             ,
             yet
             not
             to
             a
             point
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             represent
             a
             Reapers
             Sickle
             ,
             therefore
             
             they
             term
             this
             Body
             Falx
             the
             Sickle
             .
             And
             while
             it
             is
             thus
             multiplied
             ,
             it
             constitutes
             .
          
           
             
               Cavities
               hollownesses
            
             ,
             being
             receptacles
             of
             abounding
             blood
             and
             Spirits
             ,
             and
             they
             
             are
             four
             in
             number
             ;
             which
             Galen
             somtimes
             calls
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             dura
             Mater
             ;
             and
             others
             call
             them
             Sanguiductus
             ,
             Cisternes
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             
             
               The
               I.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               Represents
               the
               Coverings
               of
               the
               Brain
               both
               proper
               and
               common
               ,
               in
               the
               same
               order
               in
               which
               they
               are
               represented
               in
               Anatomical
               Dessections
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               Shews
               the
               enternal
               Parts
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Skin
                     and
                     the
                     Scarf-skin
                     with
                     the
                     Roots
                     of
                     the
                     Hairs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     true
                     Skin
                     separated
                     from
                     the
                     Scarf-skin
                     ,
                  
                   C.
                   
                
                 
                   DDD
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Membrana
                     Carnosa
                     furnished
                     with
                     little
                     Veins
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     Fore-head
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     own
                     proper
                     place
                     ,
                     receiving
                     the
                     Nerres
                     which
                     come
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     hole
                     ,
                  
                   O.
                   
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     Fat
                     spred
                     over
                     the
                     Skull
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Pericranium
                     lying
                     upon
                     the
                     Periostium
                     in
                     its
                     natural
                     Situation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     separated
                     from
                     the
                     Periostium
                     and
                     turned
                     inside
                     out
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Periostium
                     spred
                     out
                     upon
                     the
                     Skull
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     pluckt
                     of
                     from
                     the
                     Skull
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Skull
                     naked
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     Coronal
                     suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sagittal
                     suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     temporal
                     Muscle
                     as
                     yet
                     covered
                     with
                     the
                     Pericranium
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               The
               Skull
               being
               taken
               away
               this
               Figure
               discovers
               the
               Coats
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     dura
                     Mater
                     covering
                     the
                     left
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     bbb
                     .
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     sprinkled
                     up
                     and
                     down
                     the
                     same
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Brain
                     covered
                     only
                     with
                     the
                     p●a
                     Mater
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     dd
                     .
                     The
                     turnings
                     and
                     windings
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     eeee
                     .
                     Vessels
                     sprinkled
                     up
                     and
                     down
                     the
                     pia
                     Mater
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     dura
                     Mater
                     drawn
                     downwards
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GGG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     Cavity
                     engraven
                     in
                     the
                     dura
                     mater
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               131
            
          
           
             Cavities
             ,
             as
             Walaeus
             suspects
             ,
             or
             knit
             immediately
             to
             the
             Cavities
             themselves
             ,
             do
             disburthen
             themselves
             ,
             into
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             And
             these
             two
             being
             afterward
             united
             ,
             do
             make
             up
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             which
             is
             longest
             of
             all
             :
             For
             it
             goes
             all
             along
             the
             Head
             to
             the
             tops
             of
             
             the
             Nostrils
             .
             Galen
             somtimes
             calls
             it
             a
             Vein
             ,
             because
             it
             contains
             store
             of
             Blood.
             And
             when
             these
             Cavities
             are
             opened
             ,
             an
             immeasurable
             quantity
             of
             Blood
             comes
             out
             by
             the
             Nose
             ,
             which
             is
             supplied
             from
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fourth
               Cavity
            
             ,
             not
             reaching
             to
             the
             Skul
             as
             the
             former
             ,
             is
             short
             ,
             and
             goes
             inwardly
             between
             the
             Brain
             and
             the
             Brainelet
             ,
             unto
             the
             Glandula
             pinealis
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             ,
             where
             the
             three
             former
             meet
             together
             ,
             and
             this
             beginning
             some
             from
             Herophilus
             call
             Torcular
             the
             Wine-prest
             ;
             and
             Nymmannus
             conceives
             that
             this
             part
             is
             cheifly
             obstructed
             in
             the
             Apoplexy
             .
             But
             1.
             
             We
             do
             somtimes
             allow
             thereof
             ,
             as
             a
             remore
             Cause
             ▪
             for
             all
             that
             accident
             is
             to
             be
             referred
             to
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             .
             2.
             
             Vital
             blood
             may
             be
             brought
             to
             the
             Brain
             by
             the
             
               rete
               Mirabile
            
             ,
             whence
             Vessels
             go
             for
             Nutriments
             sake
             ,
             to
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Brain
          
           
             The
             third
             ,
             or
             the
             uppermost
             of
             the
             sickle
             ;
             and
             the
             fourth
             Cavities
             ,
             do
             seem
             to
             me
             to
             end
             into
             the
             two
             former
             ,
             or
             greater
             lateral
             ones
             ;
             in
             which
             I
             follow
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             exceedingly
             verst
             in
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             the
             Brain
             :
             and
             that
             not
             by
             a
             streight
             passage
             ,
             but
             inclining
             to
             the
             sides
             ;
             so
             that
             there
             is
             no
             common
             concourse
             of
             these
             four
             Ventricles
             ;
             though
             these
             greater
             lateral
             ones
             are
             joyned
             by
             an
             intermediate
             passage
             or
             Channel
             .
             Yet
             here
             also
             I
             have
             found
             some
             diversity
             according
             to
             the
             variety
             
             of
             subjects
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             have
             somtimes
             met
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             been
             separated
             .
             Riolanus
             makes
             the
             Torcular
             with
             Galen
             to
             be
             in
             the
             third
             longitudinal
             Cavity
             ,
             beca●se
             it
             distributes
             blood
             into
             all
             parts
             of
             
             the
             Brain
             and
             Brainlet
             or
             Cerebellum
             ,
             which
             Reason
             holds
             truer
             in
             reference
             to
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Besides
             those
             four
             Cavities
             or
             Ventricles
             already
             described
             ,
             
               three
               others
            
             ,
             by
             the
             Information
             
             of
             Sylvius
             have
             in
             dissection
             presented
             themselves
             to
             me
             ;
             which
             nevertheless
             ,
             I
             have
             not
             alwaies
             ,
             and
             I
             tell
             you
             so
             much
             ,
             least
             any
             man
             not
             finding
             them
             presently
             in
             one
             or
             two
             Bodies
             ,
             should
             accuse
             me
             of
             falshood
             .
             Riolanus
             accounts
             them
             to
             be
             Coherences
             of
             the
             Duglicated
             Brain
             ,
             spred
             under
             the
             greater
             once
             ▪
             by
             the
             intercedency
             of
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             .
             Which
             is
             nothing
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             Cavities
             as
             the
             others
             have
             ,
             nor
             are
             they
             naked
             Coherences
             .
          
           
             The
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             which
             was
             also
             observed
             by
             Vesalius
             ,
             is
             carried
             through
             the
             
             lowest
             part
             of
             the
             Sickle
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             have
             termed
             it
             ,
             the
             lower
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Sickle
             ;
             and
             for
             distinctions
             sake
             ,
             I
             have
             termed
             that
             which
             is
             commonly
             call'd
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             upper
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Sickle
             .
             This
             lower
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Sickle
             ,
             ends
             into
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             The
             
               other
               two
            
             smaller
             lateral
             ones
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             are
             distant
             about
             a
             thumbs
             breadth
             from
             the
             greater
             ,
             situate
             in
             the
             dura
             Mater
             which
             distinguisheth
             the
             Brain
             from
             the
             Brainlet
             ,
             not
             being
             so
             long
             as
             they
             .
             The
             one
             of
             them
             goes
             into
             the
             great
             lateral
             Cavity
             ;
             I
             have
             also
             seen
             them
             ending
             into
             the
             fourth
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Cavities
             ▪
             arise
             the
             branches
             or
             creeping
             jugular
             Veins
             ,
             and
             into
             them
             the
             
               Arteriae
               Carotides
            
             ,
             being
             distributed
             upwards
             and
             round
             about
             ,
             and
             opening
             into
             them
             by
             mutual
             Anastomoses
             .
          
           
             
               The
               II.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               Figure
               Represents
               the
               right
               side
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               cut
               away
               to
               a
               great
               depth
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               passage
               of
               the
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Nose
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   right
                   Ear.
                   
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Skin
                   of
                   the
                   Head
                   hanging
                   down
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   A
                   Rudiment
                   of
                   the
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Hind-part
                   of
                   the
                   Head.
                   
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Socket
                   of
                   the
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Forehead
                   Bone.
                   
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Bone
                   of
                   the
                   Hinder-Head
                   or
                   Occiput
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   left
                   side
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   ,
                   covered
                   as
                   yet
                   with
                   its
                   dura
                   Mater
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   The
                   dura
                   Mater
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   side
                   hanging
                   down
                   .
                
                 
                   KKK
                   .
                   The
                   Falx
                   or
                   Sickle
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   End
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   at
                   the
                   Galli
                   Crista
                   or
                   Cocks-Comb
                   .
                
                 
                   MMM
                   .
                   The
                   upper
                   Cavity
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   The
                   lower
                   Cavity
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   The
                   greater
                   Right-hand
                   lateral
                   Cavity
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   The
                   ingress
                   of
                   the
                   upper
                   Cavity
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   into
                   the
                   greater
                   lateral
                   Cavity
                   .
                
                 
                   Q.
                   The
                   fourth
                   Ventricle
                   between
                   the
                   Brain
                   and
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   .
                
                 
                   R.
                   The
                   ingress
                   of
                   the
                   fourth
                   Ventricle
                   into
                   the
                   greater
                   Lateral
                   one
                   .
                
                 
                   S.
                   The
                   common
                   passage
                   of
                   the
                   greater
                   lateral
                   cavities
                   .
                
                 
                   TT
                   .
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   those
                   great
                   Vessels
                   which
                   pass
                   into
                   the
                   upper
                   cavity
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   .
                
                 
                   VV.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   cleft
                   in
                   the
                   Brain
                   .
                
                 
                   ●
                   The
                   lower
                   and
                   outer
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   ,
                   where
                   a
                   little
                   twig
                   of
                   the
                   corotick
                   Artery
                   ,
                   peirces
                   as
                   far
                   as
                   the
                   Plexus
                   Choroides
                   .
                
                 
                   y.
                   The
                   hinder
                   and
                   larger
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   z.
                   A
                   roundish
                   cavity
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   resembling
                   the
                   finger
                   of
                   a
                   Glove
                   .
                
                 
                   a.
                   The
                   upper
                   and
                   inner
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   ,
                   under
                   the
                   Corpus
                   callosum
                   .
                
                 
                   b.
                   The
                   descent
                   and
                   orifice
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   going
                   into
                   the
                   third
                   or
                   middle-most
                   .
                
                 
                   ccc
                   .
                   The
                   Glandulous
                   intertexture
                   called
                   Chorocides
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   The
                   Root
                   of
                   the
                   spinal
                   Marrow
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   Brain
                   continued
                   to
                   the
                   root
                   of
                   the
                   spinal
                   Marrow
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   The
                   Corpus
                   callosum
                   so
                   called
                   .
                
                 
                   gggg
                   .
                   The
                   hinder
                   and
                   lower
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   ,
                   continued
                   to
                   the
                   Corpus
                   callosum
                   ,
                   and
                   forming
                   the
                   cavity
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   left
                   side
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   appearing
                   under
                   the
                   Falx
                   or
                   Sickle
                   .
                
                 
                   ii
                   Little
                   Arteries
                   creeping
                   along
                   the
                   Surface
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               132
            
          
           
             The
             Use
             therefore
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             is
             not
             so
             much
             to
             contain
             the
             two
             sorts
             of
             
             Blood
             ,
             received
             from
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ;
             as
             only
             to
             receive
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             ,
             by
             means
             whereof
             they
             Pulse
             .
             For
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             communicated
             to
             the
             Brain
             by
             the
             
               Arteria
               Cervicalis
            
             ,
             which
             remains
             over
             and
             above
             after
             the
             Nutriment
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             Brainlet
             ,
             and
             the
             Generation
             of
             Animal
             spirits
             ,
             is
             voided
             into
             these
             Caveties
             ,
             either
             immediately
             or
             mediately
             ,
             by
             the
             little
             twigs
             of
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             as
             Walaeus
             suspects
             ;
             and
             from
             thence
             through
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             which
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             thin
             Skin
             cleaving
             to
             their
             Walls
             ,
             it
             runs
             back
             downwards
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             wrought
             over
             again
             .
             For
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             circularly
             moved
             in
             the
             Brain
             also
             ,
             appears
             likewise
             by
             the
             Ligatures
             of
             live
             Creatures
             ;
             seeing
             the
             jugular
             being
             bound
             ,
             swels
             towards
             the
             Head
             ,
             but
             is
             empty
             and
             lank
             towards
             the
             Cava
             and
             Heart
             .
          
           
             
               P.
               Laurenberg
            
             conceives
             ●●●
             Animal
             Spirits
             are
             generated
             in
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             without
             any
             firm
             judgment
             or
             probable
             Reason
             .
          
           
             
               A.
               Kyperus
            
             a
             most
             learned
             Man
             ,
             conceives
             that
             a
             special
             use
             of
             these
             Cavities
             is
             ,
             to
             ventilate
             and
             cool
             the
             blood
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             service
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             the
             Generation
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             ;
             seeing
             the
             extremities
             of
             the
             Arteries
             do
             end
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Ventricles
             themselves
             are
             closed
             in
             by
             a
             single
             ,
             cold
             Membrane
             .
             But
             in
             my
             Judgment
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             does
             not
             come
             into
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             before
             it
             be
             cooled
             ,
             when
             it
             returns
             from
             the
             Generation
             of
             Spirits
             .
             And
             then
             it
             needs
             no
             cooling
             ,
             being
             to
             return
             immediately
             through
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               dura
               Mater
            
             is
             ,
             I.
             To
             cover
             the
             brain
             with
             the
             Marrow
             and
             Nerves
             thence
             arising
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             distinguish
             the
             Brain
             from
             the
             Brainlet
             ,
             and
             the
             Brain
             it self
             into
             two
             parts
             .
          
           
             III.
             To
             constitute
             the
             Pericranium
             ,
             while
             it
             sends
             Ligaments
             therefore
             ,
             through
             the
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             Th●
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             call'd
             so
             because
             of
             its
             thinness
             ,
             doth
             immediately
             enclose
             the
             
             Brain
             ,
             and
             its
             Parts
             and
             Ventricles
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             run
             about
             ;
             therefore
             it
             was
             to
             be
             thin
             and
             soft
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             of
             most
             exquisite
             sense
             .
             It
             is
             thicker
             in
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             ,
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             believe
             Olhofius
             .
             The
             sense
             of
             this
             Membrane
             was
             more
             dul
             in
             him
             that
             had
             three
             bones
             growing
             thereto
             without
             hurt
             ,
             which
             were
             seen
             at
             Paris
             by
             my
             Cosin-German
             
               Henricus
               Fuiren
            
             :
             &
             in
             that
             Venetian
             ,
             who
             had
             a
             pretty
             large
             tooched
             Bone
             ,
             growing
             in
             Falce
             or
             the
             Duplicature
             of
             the
             Meninx
             ,
             which
             Folius
             did
             shew
             me
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ;
             To
             cloath
             the
             Brain
             ,
             the
             Brainlet
             ,
             the
             Marrow
             and
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               III.
            
             Of
             the
             Brain
             and
             its
             Marrow
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             WIthin
             the
             Skul
             a
             threefold
             soft
             and
             white
             substance
             is
             to
             be
             considered
             :
             the
             BRAIN
             or
             foremore
             Part
             ,
             the
             BRAINLET
             or
             Cerebellum
             the
             hindmost
             part
             ,
             and
             the
             inmost
             partwhich
             lies
             deep
             under
             the
             Brain
             being
             a
             white
             MARROW
             ;
             which
             because
             others
             do
             ignorantly
             confound
             with
             the
             Brain
             it self
             ;
             I
             do
             thus
             truly
             set
             down
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             matter
             .
          
           
             The
             Brain
             commonly
             so
             called
             hath
             two
             parts
             ,
             the
             one
             Internal
             the
             other
             External
             .
          
           
             The
             External
             part
             is
             properly
             and
             
             stricktly
             called
             the
             BRAIN
             and
             is
             all
             that
             which
             appears
             outwardly
             soft
             ,
             of
             an
             Ash
             color
             or
             yellowish
             white
             ;
             which
             color
             some
             conceive
             to
             arise
             from
             an
             innumerable
             company
             of
             Veins
             there
             disseminated
             ;
             and
             this
             External
             substance
             is
             as
             it
             were
             the
             bark
             .
          
           
             The
             Internal
             is
             the
             remaining
             substance
             
             which
             lies
             hidden
             beneath
             the
             the
             former
             ,
             being
             more
             hard
             compact
             and
             white
             ,
             which
             we
             may
             call
             the
             MARROW
             ,
             in
             which
             are
             seated
             the
             Ventricles
             commonly
             so
             called
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             the
             Brain
             it self
             ;
             so
             that
          
           
             The
             Brain
             and
             Marrow
             it self
             Differ
             ,
             
             1.
             
             In
             Situation
             .
             2.
             
             In
             Color
             .
             3.
             
             In
             Consistency
             .
             4.
             
             By
             the
             going
             between
             of
             Lines
             .
             5.
             
             In
             Magnitude
             .
             6.
             
             In
             Figure
             .
             7.
             
             In
             Cavities
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             not
             in
             the
             Brain
             .
             8.
             
             In
             Nobility
             .
          
           
             The
             white
             part
             therefore
             of
             the
             Brain
             seems
             to
             be
             buryed
             in
             the
             Ash-color'd
             part
             ,
             as
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             is
             in
             the
             Glassie
             .
             And
             though
             these
             two
             substances
             ,
             the
             White
             and
             the
             Ash-color'd
             ,
             do
             in
             dead
             Carcasses
             putrified
             seem
             very
             closely
             united
             and
             continued
             one
             to
             another
             ;
             yet
             in
             the
             fresh
             bodies
             of
             healthy
             persons
             suddenly
             killed
             ,
             they
             are
             separated
             with
             sundry
             lines
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             may
             be
             very
             well
             actually
             severed
             ,
             if
             great
             Dexterity
             be
             used
             ,
             and
             Dissection
             be
             begun
             presently
             after
             the
             parties
             death
             ,
             otherwise
             they
             are
             overflowed
             with
             much
             moisture
             and
             fall
             in
             .
          
           
             This
             middlemost
             white
             substance
             or
             
             
               Marrow
               ,
               I
               divide
               into
               the
               round
            
             and
             
               long
               Parts
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Globous
             or
             
               round
               part
            
             ,
             which
             I
             
             shall
             call
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             resembles
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             and
             is
             of
             great
             bulk
             ,
             having
             in
             it
             three
             Cavities
             or
             Ventricles
             commonly
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             The
             long
             part
             ,
             which
             I
             will
             call
             the
             Tail
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             arises
             immediately
             out
             of
             the
             former
             like
             a
             certain
             Tail
             ,
             wherein
             is
             ingraven
             the
             
               Calamus
               Scriptorius
            
             or
             fourth
             
             Ventricle
             so
             called
             by
             some
             ;
             wherein
             I
             hold
             the
             true
             Generation
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             to
             be
             affected
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             long
             Portion
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             is
             the
             beginning
             and
             original
             of
             all
             Nerves
             whatsoever
             that
             are
             in
             that
             place
             ;
             contrary
             to
             what
             is
             commonly
             thought
             .
          
           
             Also
             this
             lengthened
             Marrow
             may
             be
             considered
             in
             a
             twofold
             manner
             :
             either
             as
             it
             remains
             still
             
               within
               the
               Skul
            
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Nerves
             arise
             therefrom
             ,
             which
             are
             vulgarly
             ;
             attributed
             to
             the
             Brain
             :
             or
             as
             it
             is
             without
             the
             Skull
             ,
             and
             slides
             into
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             gaining
             the
             title
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             young
             Learners
             may
             not
             be
             confounded
             ,
             I
             shall
             now
             propound
             the
             structure
             of
             the
             whole
             Brain
             commonly
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             The
             greatness
             of
             a
             Mans
             Brain
             is
             
             remarkable
             in
             proportion
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             observes
             .
             And
             for
             the
             most
             part
             a
             man
             hath
             twice
             as
             much
             
             Brain
             as
             an
             Ox
             ,
             viz.
             the
             quantity
             of
             four
             or
             five
             pound
             weight
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             a
             more
             noble
             Creature
             ,
             and
             perpaps
             because
             he
             goes
             bolt
             upright
             :
             for
             when
             when
             we
             would
             have
             any
             thing
             that
             is
             moveable
             to
             stand
             upright
             we
             put
             a
             great
             weight
             on
             the
             top
             ,
             to
             prevent
             its
             falling
             .
             Yet
             the
             scull
             of
             a
             monstrous
             beast
             lately
             found
             in
             Scania
             ,
             might
             preternaturally
             contain
             twice
             that
             quantity
             of
             Brain
             .
             The
             Skull
             it self
             is
             kept
             in
             the
             study
             of
             Wormius
             .
             And
             among
             Man-kind
             ,
             Men
             have
             
             more
             Brains
             then
             women
             .
             For
             to
             them
             the
             greatest
             brain
             is
             given
             ,
             that
             have
             most
             need
             of
             brains
             ,
             and
             greatest
             use
             of
             them
             ,
             for
             the
             exercise
             of
             sundry
             excellent
             Animal
             faculties
             .
             Yet
             Spigelius
             or
             Bucretius
             will
             not
             allow
             of
             this
             difference
             of
             the
             brains
             of
             the
             two
             Sexes
             ,
             moved
             doubtless
             by
             Ocular
             Inspection
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             Minds
             and
             Endowments
             of
             some
             Women
             ,
             which
             the
             foregoing
             Age
             and
             this
             of
             ours
             have
             brought
             forth
             .
             But
             Women
             are
             therefore
             said
             to
             have
             less
             brains
             then
             men
             ,
             because
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             have
             less
             bodies
             .
          
           
             
               The
               III.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
            
             
               This
               FIGURE
               presents
               the
               left
               side
               of
               the
               Brain
               bowed
               back
               into
               the
               place
               of
               the
               right
               ,
               which
               according
               to
               the
               foregoing
               Figure
               is
               taken
               away
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               great
               Clift
               of
               the
               said
               Side
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Ear.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Skin
                     of
                     the
                     Head
                     hanging
                     down
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     ●●rehead-Bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   
                     The
                     Socket
                     of
                     the
                     Eye
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   eee
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Hollowness
                     of
                     the
                     Skull
                     ,
                     wherein
                     the
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     was
                     contained
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     dura
                     Mater
                     hanging
                     down
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   hhhhh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     left
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     invested
                     with
                     the
                     pia
                     mater
                  
                
                 
                   iii.
                   
                     The
                     great
                     Clift
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     side
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     ,
                     seated
                     over
                     the
                     Root
                     of
                     the
                     Spinal
                     Marrow
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   kk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Root
                     of
                     the
                     Spinal
                     Marrow
                     ,
                     appearing
                     in
                     the
                     Bottom
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     Clift
                     ,
                     with
                     new
                     Rudiments
                     of
                     the
                     winding
                     ,
                     and
                     Vessels
                     there
                     distributed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   llll
                   .
                   
                     The
                     windings
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     ,
                     according
                     to
                     which
                     the
                     Branches
                     of
                     the
                     Carotick
                     Artery
                     are
                     distributed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   mmmm
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Branches
                     of
                     the
                     Carotick
                     Artery
                     ,
                     ending
                     into
                     the
                     larger
                     left-side
                     Ventricle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     The
                     greater
                     left-side
                     lateral
                     Cavity
                     or
                     Ventricle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   
                     The
                     smaller
                     left-hand
                     lateral
                     Ventricle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   p.
                   
                     The
                     Entrance
                     of
                     the
                     smaller
                     lateral
                     Ventricle
                     into
                     the
                     greater
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               134
            
          
           
             The
             outward
             surface
             of
             the
             brain
             is
             ful
             of
             turnings
             and
             windings
             like
             
             those
             of
             the
             Guts
             :
             which
             we
             must
             not
             say
             were
             made
             for
             understanding
             with
             Erasistratus
             ,
             seeing
             Asses
             also
             have
             them
             ;
             nor
             for
             lightness
             sake
             as
             Aristotle
             would
             have
             it
             ;
             nor
             that
             they
             are
             without
             End
             or
             Use
             ,
             as
             others
             conceit
             ;
             but
             that
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             brain
             might
             be
             more
             safely
             conveighed
             through
             those
             turnings
             and
             windings
             ,
             least
             they
             might
             by
             continual
             motion
             be
             in
             danger
             of
             breaking
             ,
             especially
             at
             the
             ful
             of
             the
             Moon
             ,
             when
             the
             brain
             doth
             most
             of
             all
             swel
             within
             the
             Skul
             .
          
           
             The
             windings
             of
             the
             brain
             (
             which
             I
             first
             learnt
             of
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             a
             great
             Anatomist
             )
             
             if
             you
             diligently
             examin
             the
             matter
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             to
             descend
             a
             good
             depth
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             brain
             doth
             gape
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             over
             &
             above
             that
             same
             middle
             division
             made
             by
             the
             Sickle
             ,
             with
             a
             winding
             clift
             ,
             which
             begins
             in
             the
             forepart
             ,
             about
             the
             roots
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             
             whence
             according
             to
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             ,
             it
             goes
             back
             above
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             divides
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             brain
             from
             the
             lower
             part
             .
             Yet
             now
             and
             then
             ,
             that
             same
             great
             Chink
             cannot
             be
             found
             or
             very
             hardly
             .
             Instead
             thereof
             I
             have
             found
             a
             certain
             smal
             lateral
             clift
             on
             each
             side
             easily
             separable
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             common
             section
             ,
             near
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             ful
             of
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             Surface
             hath
             sundry
             Extuberances
             and
             Cavities
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             said
             in
             the
             following
             discourse
             ▪
          
           
           
             The
             Colour
             is
             white
             ,
             because
             the
             brain
             ,
             as
             all
             other
             parts
             hath
             its
             original
             from
             
             the
             Seed
             ,
             but
             so
             ,
             that
             it
             hath
             less
             of
             Amplification
             then
             of
             Constitution
             :
             and
             therefore
             in
             extream
             fastings
             the
             brain
             suffers
             no
             diminution
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Temperament
             is
             cold
             and
             moist
             ,
             which
             appears
             from
             its
             whiteness
             and
             
             moistness
             .
             And
             therefore
             Hippocrates
             saies
             the
             brain
             is
             the
             seat
             of
             cold
             and
             clammy
             humors
             .
             For
             the
             overgreat
             heat
             of
             the
             brain
             is
             an
             hinderance
             both
             to
             Reason
             and
             Sleep
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             Phrenetick
             persons
             .
             Yet
             is
             it
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             spirits
             hotter
             then
             any
             Air
             ,
             as
             Galen
             rightly
             saies
             ;
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             so
             exceeding
             hot
             ▪
             as
             the
             Heart
          
           
             Its
             substance
             is
             proper
             to
             it self
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             not
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             besides
             .
             
             Hippocrates
             doth
             liken
             it
             to
             a
             Kernel
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Colour
             and
             plenty
             of
             moisture
             .
             It
             is
             soft
             and
             moist
             for
             the
             more
             easie
             impression
             of
             Images
             and
             Conceptions
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             the
             seat
             of
             Imagination
             :
             Yet
             is
             it
             not
             so
             soft
             as
             to
             run
             about
             ,
             but
             hath
             a
             consistent
             softness
             ,
             so
             that
             what
             is
             imprinted
             therein
             ,
             may
             continue
             for
             a
             season
             :
             for
             the
             brain
             is
             also
             the
             seat
             of
             Memory
             .
          
           
             The
             followers
             of
             Des-cartes
             doth
             weave
             the
             brain
             together
             of
             soft
             and
             pliable
             Fiberkies
             ,
             mutually
             touching
             one
             another
             ,
             with
             intermediate
             spaces
             of
             the
             pores
             ,
             by
             which
             Fiberkies
             the
             Images
             of
             Objects
             are
             imprinted
             upon
             the
             brain
             .
             They
             do
             indeed
             excellently
             explain
             the
             reason
             of
             Sense
             ,
             if
             this
             Hypothesis
             of
             theirs
             were
             true
             .
             But
             such
             Fiberkies
             are
             not
             found
             in
             the
             soft
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             unless
             we
             shall
             mean
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             the
             little
             Ropes
             of
             Nerves
             do
             arise
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             rare
             case
             for
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             to
             be
             quite
             wanting
             ,
             but
             Horstius
             saw
             it
             somtimes
             much
             diminished
             by
             over
             great
             use
             of
             carnal
             Embracements
             ,
             as
             his
             Epistles
             shew
             .
             Howbeit
             
               Schenckius
               ,
               Valleriola
               ,
               Carpus
               ,
               &c.
            
             saw
             a
             Boy
             without
             any
             brain
             ;
             as
             also
             
               Nicolas
               Fontanus
               at
               Amsterdam
            
             in
             the
             year
             1629
             ,
             who
             instead
             of
             a
             brain
             and
             spinal
             marrow
             ,
             found
             a
             very
             clear
             water
             enclosed
             in
             a
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             Sundry
             Vessels
             are
             Disseminated
             through
             the
             brain
             .
             For
             if
             you
             
             squeeze
             the
             substance
             thereof
             ,
             many
             little
             Dripplekies
             of
             blood
             do
             sweat
             out
             :
             and
             therefore
             I
             conclude
             with
             Galen
             that
             very
             many
             capillary
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             are
             there
             disseminated
             :
             which
             I
             have
             also
             divers
             times
             beheld
             with
             mine
             Eyes
             .
             Which
             will
             then
             principally
             happen
             ,
             as
             
               Fr.
               Silvius
            
             observes
             ,
             when
             the
             brain
             is
             Flaccid
             and
             Friable
             ,
             because
             he
             observed
             that
             then
             it
             would
             come
             of
             it self
             from
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             in
             dissection
             ;
             and
             especially
             if
             the
             Vessels
             by
             means
             of
             Age
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             waies
             ,
             are
             become
             more
             solid
             then
             ordinary
             .
          
           
             Now
             there
             are
             no
             Nerves
             Disseminated
             through
             the
             Brain
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             Void
             of
             all
             Sense
             .
          
           
             The
             Veins
             which
             are
             carryed
             through
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             are
             ,
             1.
             
             The
             five
             branches
             of
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             ,
             some
             of
             which
             go
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             dura
             mater
             ,
             others
             are
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             through
             the
             Coats
             and
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             .
             But
             they
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Walaeus
             ,
             are
             no
             other
             then
             ,
             2.
             very
             smal
             twigs
             ,
             which
             on
             either
             side
             go
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Cavities
             of
             dura
             mater
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             four
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Carotides
             and
             Cervicales
             ,
             whereof
             the
             former
             are
             disseminated
             into
             the
             brain
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             ,
             the
             latter
             into
             the
             Brainlet
             or
             Cerebellum
             .
             In
             the
             Chinks
             the
             same
             Carotick
             Arteries
             are
             carried
             in
             very
             great
             number
             ,
             both
             in
             the
             surface
             and
             the
             bottom
             ,
             which
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             conceives
             to
             be
             the
             cause
             of
             that
             same
             troublesome
             pulsing
             about
             the
             Temples
             in
             some
             kinds
             of
             Head-ach
             :
             though
             in
             the
             judgment
             of
             
               A.
               Kyperus
            
             the
             pulsation
             of
             the
             external
             Arteries
             adds
             somwhat
             hereunto
             ,
             as
             the
             Cure
             of
             the
             pain
             doth
             shew
             ,
             by
             opening
             the
             said
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               Brain
            
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             
             is
             to
             cool
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             Galen
             justly
             refutes
             ,
             because
             the
             brain
             is
             far
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             there
             are
             some
             Peripatericks
             who
             deny
             that
             Aristotle
             dissents
             from
             the
             Physitians
             ,
             while
             he
             saith
             the
             brain
             is
             made
             to
             temper
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             they
             will
             have
             it
             made
             to
             produce
             Animal
             spirits
             :
             In
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Animal
             spirits
             cannot
             be
             generated
             ,
             unless
             the
             vital
             Spirits
             be
             first
             cooled
             But
             ,
          
           
             The
             Use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             be
             the
             Mansion
             of
             the
             sensitive
             Soul
             ,
             for
             the
             performance
             of
             Animal
             Functions
             .
             Now
             the
             brain
             is
             no
             particular
             Organ
             of
             Sense
             ,
             as
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             Ears
             ,
             &c.
             but
             an
             universal
             one
             :
             for
             judgment
             is
             made
             in
             the
             brain
             of
             the
             Objects
             of
             all
             the
             Senses
             .
          
           
             Also
             it
             passes
             judgment
             touching
             
             Animal
             Motion
             ,
             whereas
             it self
             hath
             no
             Animal
             Motion
             :
             But
             it
             hath
             a
             Natural
             Motion
             ,
             communicated
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             that
             a
             perpetual
             one
             of
             widening
             and
             contracting
             it self
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             new-born
             Children
             ,
             in
             the
             forepart
             of
             whose
             Head
             ,
             the
             brain
             is
             seen
             to
             pant
             ,
             because
             their
             bones
             are
             as
             yet
             exceeding
             soft
             and
             plyable
             .
          
           
             In
             its
             Dilatation
             the
             brain
             draws
             vital
             Spirit
             with
             arterial
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             Air
             by
             the
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             In
             its
             contraction
             it
             forces
             the
             Animal
             spirits
             into
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             like
             Conduit
             pipes
             carry
             the
             said
             Spirit
             into
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             and
             therewith
             the
             faculties
             of
             Sense
             and
             Motion
             .
             And
             by
             the
             same
             Contraction
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             through
             the
             Veins
             unto
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             therefore
             of
             the
             Animal
             
             Spirits
             is
             two
             fold
             ;
             viz.
             Arterial
             blood
             ful
             of
             vital
             Spirit
             ,
             and
             Air.
             Touching
             the
             place
             of
             its
             Generation
             we
             shall
             speak
             hereafter
             .
             For
             I
             am
             not
             of
             their
             opinion
             who
             confirme
             that
             this
             Spirit
             is
             Generated
             in
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             or
             in
             those
             Ventricles
             in
             the
             forepart
             thereof
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Animal
             spirit
             may
             be
             contained
             and
             kept
             in
             the
             brain
             as
             in
             a
             Store-house
             ,
             after
             it
             is
             generated
             .
             And
             the
             substance
             ,
             truly
             ,
             of
             the
             Brain
             is
             a
             convenient
             House
             and
             Receptacle
             for
             the
             Animal
             spirit
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             the
             same
             with
             the
             internal
             Marrowy
             substance
             of
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             also
             contains
             the
             said
             Animal
             Spirit
             .
          
           
             Now
             I
             am
             of
             Opinion
             that
             in
             the
             
             Brain
             ,
             properly
             so
             called
             ,
             or
             the
             Rinde
             ,
             is
             contained
             Animal
             Spirit
             for
             Sense
             ;
             and
             that
             in
             the
             whole
             Marrow
             Head
             and
             Tail
             ,
             Spirits
             is
             kept
             for
             Motion
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             made
             manifest
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               Chap.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             Parts
             of
             the
             Brain
             in
             Particular
             ,
             and
             I.
             of
             the
             lengthened
             and
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             its
             noble
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             SOme
             with
             
               Galen
               ,
               Vesalius
               ,
               Fallopius
            
             ,
             
             intending
             to
             contemplate
             what
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Brain
             ,
             begin
             their
             Dissection
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             and
             proceed
             to
             the
             lower
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             do
             unfitly
             propound
             
             and
             explain
             many
             parts
             .
             I
             ,
             treading
             in
             the
             steps
             of
             
               Constantinus
               Varolus
            
             ,
             shall
             take
             a
             quite
             contrary
             Course
             ,
             yet
             such
             as
             is
             true
             and
             accurate
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             brain
             and
             so
             passing
             to
             the
             uppermost
             :
             and
             I
             shall
             afterward
             propound
             the
             order
             of
             parts
             from
             top
             to
             bottome
             ,
             for
             their
             sakes
             that
             will
             needs
             follow
             the
             vulgar
             and
             common
             way
             of
             Dissection
             ;
             where
             also
             a
             third
             way
             of
             Dissection
             shall
             be
             propounded
             .
          
           
             Beginning
             therefore
             at
             the
             lowest
             part
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             we
             meet
             
             first
             with
             the
             
               beginning
               of
               the
               lengthened
               Marrow
            
             ;
             the
             progress
             whereof
             because
             it
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Spina
             or
             Back-bone
             ,
             therefore
             it
             is
             termed
             Spinalis
             and
             Dorsalis
             ,
             Medulla
             ,
             the
             Spinal
             or
             Back-marrow
             .
          
           
             And
             if
             any
             one
             shall
             think
             we
             
             ought
             therefore
             to
             begin
             with
             the
             brain
             ,
             because
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             is
             said
             to
             take
             its
             beginning
             therefrom
             ;
             
             we
             answer
             ,
             that
             we
             make
             the
             Marrow
             both
             as
             it
             is
             within
             the
             Skull
             and
             in
             
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             beginning
             rather
             of
             the
             brain
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             brain
             being
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             certain
             double
             process
             or
             production
             of
             the
             Marrow
             it self
             .
          
           
             Which
             is
             yet
             more
             manifest
             to
             those
             that
             
             behold
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             Fishes
             ;
             for
             there
             the
             Head
             and
             Tail
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             is
             very
             great
             ,
             but
             the
             process
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             or
             the
             brain
             is
             very
             little
             :
             the
             Cause
             whereof
             is
             ,
             that
             Fishes
             use
             motion
             more
             then
             sense
             ,
             intimating
             that
             the
             brain
             or
             barke
             contributes
             more
             to
             sense
             ▪
             and
             the
             Marrow
             it self
             to
             Motion
             .
             Hence
             Fish
             are
             dull
             of
             Sense
             ,
             but
             very
             nimble
             in
             motion
             .
             And
             according
             to
             this
             opinion
             of
             ours
             that
             saying
             will
             be
             verified
             ,
             than
             an
             hard
             body
             is
             fittest
             for
             motion
             ,
             and
             softer
             for
             sence
             .
          
           
             
               The
               IV.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               fourth
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               the
               Brainlet
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               ,
               in
               several
               Figures
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Brainlet
                   or
                   Cerebellum
                   and
                   its
                   Globes
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Worm-like
                   process
                   of
                   the
                   Cerebellum
                   or
                   Brainlet
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   The
                   processes
                   of
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   ,
                   which
                   make
                   the
                   bridg
                   of
                   Varolius
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   beginning
                   of
                   the
                   spinal
                   Marrow
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   Two
                   roots
                   or
                   smaller
                   Processes
                   of
                   the
                   spinal
                   Marrow
                   arising
                   from
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   fourth
                   Ventricle
                   likened
                   to
                   a
                   Pen
                   ▪
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   cleaving
                   to
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   inner
                   whiteish
                   substance
                   of
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   .
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   The
                   outer
                   and
                   more
                   duskish
                   substance
                   compassing
                   the
                   white
                   about
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   An
                   Elegant
                   structure
                   of
                   the
                   Brainlet
                   Representing
                   the
                   branchings
                   of
                   Trees
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   appearance
                   of
                   the
                   brain
                   cut
                   off
                   in
                   the
                   middle
                   as
                   far
                   as
                   to
                   the
                   Ventricles
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   corp●s
                   callosum
                   drawn
                   a
                   little
                   to
                   the
                   left
                   ●ide
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Sickle
                   turned
                   backwards
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   The
                   right
                   fore
                   Ventricle
                   uncovered
                   above
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   left
                   Ventricle
                   open
                   in
                   like
                   manner
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Plexus
                   choroides
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   A
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Speculum
                   or
                   Septum
                   Lucidum
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   The
                   dura
                   Mater
                   drawn
                   away
                   on
                   both
                   ●ides
                   .
                
                 
                   ●●
                   .
                   The
                   two
                   Thighes
                   or
                   portions
                   of
                   the
                   Fornix
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               136
            
          
           
           
             The
             
               lengthened
               Marrow
            
             arises
             as
             some
             conceive
             from
             the
             brain
             alone
             ,
             according
             to
             others
             from
             the
             Brainlet
             or
             Cerebellum
             .
             But
             it
             hath
             both
             (
             to
             speak
             now
             at
             a
             vulgar
             rate
             )
             for
             its
             beginning
             .
          
           
             For
             it
             arises
             from
             four
             Roots
             or
             Foundations
             ;
             two
             of
             which
             are
             greater
             from
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             brain
             commonly
             so
             called
             ,
             two
             are
             lesser
             from
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Brainlet
             or
             petty
             Brain
             .
             From
             these
             united
             ,
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             seems
             to
             be
             constituted
             .
             But
             it
             is
             peradventure
             a
             more
             true
             opinion
             to
             think
             ,
             that
             those
             originals
             are
             processes
             of
             the
             Marrow
             it self
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             or
             lengthened
             Marrow
             ,
             is
             a
             little
             harder
             then
             that
             of
             the
             brain
             .
          
           
             One
             part
             thereof
             is
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             four
             Fingers
             breadths
             above
             the
             great
             Hole
             of
             
             the
             Hind-part
             of
             the
             Head.
             Another
             and
             the
             longest
             part
             thereof
             is
             
               without
               the
               Skull
            
             in
             the
             Vertebra's
             ,
             from
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Neck
             to
             the
             last
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             longish
             and
             round
             ,
             The
             Scripture
             calls
             it
             the
             Silver
             Cord.
             In
             its
             beginning
             it
             is
             thicker
             and
             larger
             then
             elsewhere
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             further
             divided
             into
             the
             right
             and
             left
             part
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             brain
             is
             ,
             by
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             
             which
             immediately
             invests
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Marrow
             of
             an
             Oxe
             indifferently
             boyled
             .
             Hence
             there
             may
             be
             a
             Palsie
             of
             only
             one
             side
             of
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             many
             little
             Cords
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             about
             the
             sixt
             and
             seventh
             Vertebra
             
             of
             the
             Chest
             :
             and
             if
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             of
             a
             body
             newly
             dead
             ▪
             be
             presently
             plunged
             in
             cold
             water
             ,
             and
             a
             separation
             of
             these
             cords
             made
             ,
             you
             may
             see
             the
             shape
             of
             an
             Horses
             tail
             ,
             (
             especially
             towards
             the
             end
             )
             divided
             into
             many
             long
             Hairs
             :
             so
             that
             according
             to
             Laurentius
             ,
             the
             Nerves
             also
             of
             the
             Back
             and
             Loyns
             ,
             do
             spring
             from
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             tripple
             Membrane
             ,
             the
             first
             which
             immediately
             
             covers
             it
             ,
             is
             from
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             from
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             and
             cleaves
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             Which
             two
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Spigelius
             ,
             are
             not
             separated
             any
             distance
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             within
             the
             Skul
             ,
             but
             touch
             one
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             being
             external
             springs
             according
             to
             Galen
             from
             a
             strong
             Ligament
             ,
             which
             binds
             together
             the
             foreparts
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             ends
             into
             a
             strong
             Coat
             ,
             least
             in
             bending
             or
             extending
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             the
             Marrow
             should
             be
             hurt
             .
          
           
             A
             thick
             and
             clammy
             humor
             is
             poured
             round
             about
             this
             Coat
             ,
             to
             moisten
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             the
             Marrow
             is
             shut
             up
             in
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             be
             hurt
             (
             as
             the
             brain
             is
             shut
             up
             in
             the
             Skul
             )
             seeing
             it
             is
             a
             noble
             part
             ,
             and
             the
             original
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Ancients
             called
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Spina
             or
             Back-bone
             
               Hieran
               Surigga
            
             ,
             the
             holy
             Pipe.
             
          
           
             In
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             Marrow
             ,
             while
             it
             is
             yet
             in
             the
             Skul
             ,
             there
             appears
             ingraven
             .
          
           
             An
             
               Hollow
               Cavity
            
             ,
             which
             Galen
             calls
             the
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Brainlet
             ;
             others
             
             call
             it
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             though
             it
             is
             not
             in
             the
             brain
             .
             But
             I
             shall
             term
             it
             the
             
               noble
               Ventricle
            
             of
             the
             Marrow
             .
             This
             is
             most
             solid
             ,
             most
             pure
             ,
             most
             subtile
             ,
             but
             least
             of
             all
             ,
             for
             it
             containes
             a
             matter
             of
             geater
             force
             and
             faculty
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             as
             Galen
             saies
             .
          
           
             And
             because
             ,
             after
             a
             straight
             even
             progress
             ,
             it
             is
             widened
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             and
             sharpened
             afterwards
             into
             a
             point
             ,
             because
             of
             this
             shape
             t
             is
             called
             
               Calamus
               Scriptorius
            
             ,
             the
             
               Writing
               Pen
               or
               Quil
            
             .
          
           
             Now
             from
             the
             Cerebellum
             or
             
             Brainlet
             ,
             which
             is
             joyned
             to
             this
             Marrow
             ,
             another
             and
             middle
             half
             of
             this
             Ventricle
             is
             constituted
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             a
             cover
             ;
             so
             that
             all
             this
             Cavity
             is
             between
             the
             brainlet
             and
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             ,
             or
             production
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             but
             the
             cheif
             Cavity
             is
             the
             lowermost
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             Ventricle
             I
             hold
             to
             
             be
             this
             ,
             viz.
             that
             it
             should
             be
             the
             place
             where
             Animal
             spirits
             are
             Generated
             and
             Elaborated
             .
             For
             this
             Ventricle
             is
             1.
             
             The
             most
             pure
             and
             subtile
             .
             2.
             
             It
             hath
             a
             Cavity
             sufficient
             for
             that
             purpose
             .
             3.
             
             It
             is
             seated
             in
             such
             a
             place
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             poure
             forth
             Animal
             spirits
             ,
             into
             all
             the
             Nerves
             round
             about
             it
             .
             And
             therefore
             Herophilus
             did
             rightly
             judg
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             the
             most
             principal
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             Nor
             can
             I
             devise
             how
             it
             came
             to
             pass
             
             that
             certain
             learned
             Men
             could
             not
             see
             these
             weighty
             Arguments
             ,
             who
             have
             written
             without
             cause
             ,
             that
             I
             assigned
             the
             Generation
             of
             Animal
             Spirits
             to
             the
             
               Calamus
               Scriptorius
            
             ,
             without
             any
             reasons
             moving
             me
             thereto
             .
          
           
             Now
             must
             we
             think
             with
             Spigelius
             ,
             that
             this
             Ventricle
             did
             only
             result
             by
             consequence
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             round
             particles
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             touching
             one
             another
             without
             any
             design
             of
             Nature
             :
             for
             Nature
             doth
             nothing
             to
             no
             end
             ,
             no
             not
             when
             she
             seems
             most
             of
             all
             to
             do
             so
             .
          
           
             Others
             conceive
             that
             the
             Animal
             Spirit
             is
             bred
             in
             the
             fore
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             But
             they
             are
             full
             of
             Excrements
             ,
             whose
             receptacles
             they
             rather
             are
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             
               Glandula
               Pituitaria
            
             unto
             them
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             they
             are
             often
             found
             filled
             with
             Flegm
             ,
             and
             abundance
             of
             water
             .
          
           
             Others
             in
             the
             
               Rete
               Mirabile
            
             ,
             others
             
             in
             the
             
               Plexus
               Choroides
            
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             these
             we
             hold
             the
             Animal
             Spirit
             is
             prepared
             ,
             but
             not
             Generated
             ,
             For
             nature
             is
             wont
             to
             provide
             intertwinings
             of
             Vessels
             for
             the
             preparation
             of
             any
             matter
             :
             and
             seeing
             these
             Vessels
             are
             so
             smal
             ,
             how
             can
             it
             be
             generated
             in
             them
             ,
             especially
             seeing
             so
             many
             Excrements
             of
             the
             brain
             flow
             through
             the
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             Others
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             wrought
             in
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             .
             Others
             in
             the
             lengthened
             body
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             .
             But
             the
             Generation
             of
             so
             subtile
             a
             Spirit
             ,
             did
             require
             some
             Cavity
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             allowed
             to
             the
             Generation
             of
             the
             vital
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             For
             which
             cause
             some
             have
             been
             induced
             to
             allot
             the
             making
             of
             the
             natural
             spirit
             to
             be
             in
             the
             right
             Vencle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             no
             Cavity
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             I
             am
             therefore
             of
             opinion
             that
             the
             Animal
             Spirit
             is
             prepared
             in
             the
             
               Rete
               Mirable
            
             ,
             and
             yet
             more
             in
             the
             
               Plexus
               Choroides
            
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             generated
             and
             wrought
             up
             in
             this
             Cavity
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               Elongata
            
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             ;
             and
             afterward
             ,
             as
             much
             of
             it
             as
             not
             derived
             into
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             and
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             is
             preserved
             and
             retained
             in
             the
             whole
             brain
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Store-house
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             lengthened
             and
             spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             the
             original
             of
             all
             the
             
             Nerves
             .
             For
             from
             that
             part
             thereof
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             those
             Nerves
             arise
             which
             are
             commonly
             attributed
             to
             the
             Brain
             ,
             being
             usually
             reckoned
             to
             be
             seven
             pair
             .
             But
             from
             the
             longest
             part
             thereof
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             Anatomists
             do
             reckon
             thirty
             pair
             of
             Nerves
             to
             arise
             ,
             viz.
             as
             many
             as
             there
             are
             holes
             in
             the
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             Mean
             while
             we
             must
             not
             so
             understand
             the
             matter
             ,
             as
             though
             only
             so
             many
             branches
             or
             Cords
             did
             thence
             arise
             .
             For
             every
             Nerve
             arise
             ▪
             with
             many
             little
             strings
             or
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             going
             out
             at
             the
             hole
             of
             any
             Vertebra
             ,
             are
             there
             joyned
             together
             by
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             as
             if
             the
             Nerve
             came
             out
             of
             one
             branch
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Cerebellum
             Brainlet
             ,
             Or
             Petty-Brain
             .
          
           
             THe
             Brainlet
             being
             as
             it
             were
             a
             little
             
             and
             private
             kind
             of
             Brain
             ,
             is
             a
             certain
             smaller
             portion
             ,
             placed
             under
             the
             Brain
             in
             the
             lower
             and
             after-part
             of
             the
             Occiput
             or
             Minder-Head
             :
             In
             Brutes
             it
             takes
             up
             commonly
             the
             whole
             Region
             of
             the
             Occiput
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             the
             same
             Substance
             ,
             
               Consistency
               ,
               Colour
            
             ,
             Motion
             ,
             &c.
             with
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Turnings
             and
             Windings
             it
             differs
             from
             the
             Brain
             .
             The
             brain
             
             hath
             sundry
             Circumvolutions
             with
             out
             any
             Method
             or
             Order
             ;
             the
             Brainlet
             hath
             circular
             and
             ordinate
             ones
             ,
             stretched
             one
             over
             another
             like
             Plates
             .
             They
             are
             differenced
             partly
             by
             interposed
             Vessels
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             pia
             mater
             ,
             which
             being
             separated
             ,
             the
             several
             Circles
             may
             be
             taken
             out
             after
             another
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             Substance
             is
             various
             ,
             whiteish
             and
             Ash-coloured
             ,
             which
             distributed
             certain
             Vessels
             as
             it
             were
             .
          
           
             The
             Vessels
             interposed
             betwixt
             the
             several
             plates
             ,
             are
             carried
             through
             the
             pia
             mater
             like
             nets
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             the
             accurate
             Observation
             of
             
               Francis
               Sylvins
            
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Arteria
             cervicalis
             ,
             do
             at
             last
             end
             into
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             constituted
             chiefly
             of
             two
             lateral
             parts
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             making
             a
             Globe
             as
             it
             were
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             two
             Processes
             or
             Excrescences
             ,
             termed
             Vermiformis
             or
             Worm-like
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             variously
             orbiculated
             ,
             and
             consist
             of
             many
             transverse
             portions
             ,
             coupled
             with
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             .
             Their
             Extremity
             being
             thin
             and
             convex
             ,
             is
             as
             big
             as
             a
             small
             ●a●e
             .
          
           
             And
             they
             are
             situate
             at
             the
             seat
             of
             the
             noble
             Cavity
             ,
             one
             before
             ,
             the
             other
             behind
             .
          
           
             About
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             in
             the
             Circumference
             of
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             same
             brainlet
             there
             proceed
             two
             other
             globous
             processes
             ,
             somtimes
             two
             of
             each
             side
             ,
             somtimes
             three
             .
             Those
             are
             greatest
             which
             are
             seated
             by
             the
             Vermiformis
             ,
             the
             rest
             are
             
             smaller
             .
             Varolius
             calls
             it
             the
             bridg
             of
             the
             brainlet
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             all
             the
             Processes
             is
             to
             hinder
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             from
             being
             obstructed
             ,
             by
             pressure
             of
             the
             brainlet
             .
             Laurentius
             saies
             they
             help
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             like
             a
             Valve
             ,
             because
             the
             Vermiformis
             being
             shortned
             opens
             the
             way
             ,
             which
             goes
             from
             the
             third
             to
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             ;
             when
             it
             is
             extended
             it
             shuts
             the
             Chink
             ,
             least
             the
             Spirits
             should
             go
             back
             into
             the
             upper
             Cavities
             .
             Riolanus
             dissents
             but
             little
             from
             him
             ,
             for
             he
             will
             have
             it
             to
             open
             and
             shut
             the
             entrance
             of
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             .
             But
             it
             is
             not
             moved
             of
             it self
             ,
             because
             ,
             as
             the
             brain
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             void
             of
             any
             proper
             motion
             ,
             unless
             you
             assign
             it
             to
             the
             Vessels
             or
             pia
             Mater
             ,
             which
             are
             very
             small
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             to
             the
             neighbouring
             Animal
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             Now
             I
             believe
             the
             use
             of
             the
             bridg
             is
             ,
             to
             combine
             and
             keep
             in
             compass
             the
             Circles
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             and
             as
             a
             bulwark
             to
             defend
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             .
             And
             therfore
             it
             would
             more
             properly
             be
             called
             a
             Sconce
             or
             Fence
             ,
             then
             a
             bridg
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             brainlet
             is
             the
             same
             with
             
             that
             of
             the
             brain
             .
             But
             Galen
             would
             have
             it
             to
             be
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             hard
             Nerves
             ;
             which
             is
             false
             .
             For
             no
             Nerves
             have
             their
             Original
             from
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VI.
            
             Of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Parts
             observed
             in
             the
             Brain
             ;
             viz.
             the
             Rete
             mirabile
             ,
             Glandula
             pituitaria
             ,
             Infundibulum
             ,
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             Corpus
             callosum
             ,
             Fornix
             ,
             Plexus
             ,
             Choroides
             ,
             Glandula
             pinealis
             .
          
           
             THe
             precedent
             parts
             being
             considered
             ,
             we
             must
             come
             now
             to
             those
             things
             ,
             which
             are
             presently
             visible
             ,
             about
             the
             Conjunction
             of
             the
             Optick
             Nerves
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             ;
             the
             
               Rete
               mirable
               ,
               Glandula
               pituitaria
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Infundibulum
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Rete
               mirable
            
             or
             
               wonderful
               Net
            
             ,
             
             which
             some
             call
             
               Plexus
               retiformis
            
             ,
             is
             so
             called
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             artificial
             and
             wonderful
             structure
             ,
             for
             it
             shews
             like
             many
             Nets
             heaped
             together
             .
             Now
             it
             hath
             another
             structure
             in
             Calves
             and
             Oxen
             ,
             in
             which
             Creatures
             it
             is
             also
             more
             manifestly
             discernable
             then
             in
             mankind
             ,
             though
             we
             must
             not
             say
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             Men
             as
             Vesalius
             doth
             ,
             
             though
             hard
             to
             discern
             .
             I
             remember
             nevertheles
             that
             it
             hath
             been
             wanting
             .
          
           
             This
             Net
             
               lies
               under
            
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             encompasses
             the
             Glandula
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Cavity
             of
             
               Os
               Sphaenoides
            
             .
          
           
             It
             consists
             (
             not
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             third
             Conjugation
             as
             Volcherus
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             but
             )
             of
             the
             Carotick
             and
             Cervical
             Arteries
             ,
             carried
             up
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             to
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             convey
             blood
             and
             Spirit
             in
             to
             this
             Net.
             
          
           
             Riolanus
             places
             the
             
               Rete
               mirabile
            
             at
             the
             same
             Basis
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             viz.
             The
             off-spring
             of
             the
             
               Plexus
               Choroides
            
             ,
             which
             creeps
             through
             the
             former
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             Net
             is
             ,
             that
             therein
             the
             blood
             and
             vital
             Spirit
             may
             be
             a
             very
             long
             time
             detained
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             preparation
             towards
             the
             Generation
             of
             Annimal
             Spirits
             may
             there
             be
             made
             .
             Also
             Waloeus
             hath
             observed
             that
             this
             Net
             doth
             consist
             of
             smal
             twigs
             of
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             ;
             that
             they
             may
             doubtless
             carry
             back
             such
             blood
             as
             is
             superfluous
             after
             the
             preparation
             of
             the
             Animal
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Glandula
               pituitaria
            
             or
             Rheumkernel
             ,
             
             is
             so
             called
             from
             its
             use
             ,
             because
             it
             
             receives
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             brain
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             through
             the
             Funnel
             .
             And
             
             therefore
             it
             is
             placed
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Funnel
             in
             the
             saddle
             of
             the
             
               Sphaenoides
               .
               Galen
            
             calls
             it
             barely
             Glandula
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             upper-side
             it
             is
             hollow
             ,
             beneath
             bossie
             or
             bunching
             .
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             harder
             and
             more
             compact
             then
             that
             of
             other
             Kernels
             .
             
          
           
             It
             is
             cloathed
             with
             the
             
               Pia
               Mater
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             the
             same
             ,
             with
             that
             of
             other
             
             Kernels
             ,
             viz.
             by
             its
             drinking
             spungy
             flesh
             to
             receive
             grosser
             Excrements
             (
             for
             the
             thin
             Vapor
             out
             at
             the
             Sutures
             )
             collected
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             many
             times
             in
             great
             quantities
             .
             For
             the
             brain
             being
             of
             
             great
             bulk
             ,
             did
             need
             much
             Aliment
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             breeds
             many
             Excrements
             ,
             especially
             when
             it
             is
             in
             any
             measure
             disordered
             .
             These
             Excrements
             the
             Kernel
             doth
             somtimes
             cast
             into
             the
             Palate
             of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             suffers
             them
             to
             drain
             away
             by
             the
             holes
             in
             the
             basis
             of
             the
             Skull
             .
          
           
             Others
             suppose
             the
             use
             of
             this
             Kernel
             to
             be
             ,
             to
             shut
             the
             Funnel
             ,
             least
             the
             Animal
             Spirits
             should
             go
             forth
             .
             For
             just
             over
             the
             
               Glandula
               Pituitaria
            
             or
             Rheum-Kernel
             ,
             is
          
           
             Infundibulum
             or
             Funnel
             ,
             so
             called
             
             from
             its
             shape
             ,
             for
             above
             the
             Head
             thereof
             is
             large
             ,
             the
             lower
             part
             is
             a
             long
             and
             strait
             pipe
             .
             Others
             call
             it
             Pelvis
             the
             Basin
             ,
             which
             words
             doth
             more
             properly
             belong
             to
             the
             Head
             ,
             or
             beginning
             of
             the
             Funnel
             then
             to
             the
             whole
             body
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             Funnel
             therefore
             is
             an
             Orbicular
             Cavity
             (
             somtimes
             triangular
             with
             sharp
             or
             blunt
             Angels
             )
             made
             of
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             ,
             where
             it
             ingirts
             the
             basis
             of
             the
             brain
             .
             It
             s
             beginning
             is
             large
             ,
             at
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ;
             through
             which
             the
             Excrements
             are
             packt
             away
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             into
             this
             Funnel
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             informs
             us
             that
             it
             hath
             four
             little
             pipes
             ,
             which
             distil
             Rheum
             or
             Phlegmatick
             serum
             through
             the
             four
             holes
             resting
             upon
             the
             
               Sellae
               Sphenoideae
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             of
             a
             dark
             Colour
             ,
             and
             if
             you
             open
             it
             you
             shall
             find
             it
             full
             of
             thick
             Flegm
             .
          
           
             
               The
               V.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               The
               Fornix
               being
               removed
               the
               Glandula
               Pinealis
               is
               here
               to
               be
               seen
               as
               also
               the
               third
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               the
               middle
               between
               the
               two
               foremore
               Ventricles
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Brain
                   cut
                   smooth
                   off
                   through
                   the
                   middle
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Fornix
                   took
                   away
                   and
                   turned
                   back
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Its
                   Expansions
                   or
                   binder
                   Thighs
                   .
                
                 
                   DDDD
                   .
                   The
                   bottom
                   of
                   the
                   right
                   and
                   left
                   Ventricles
                   ,
                   wherein
                   the
                   Vessels
                   appear
                   before
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   Their
                   Walls
                   or
                   Sides
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   foremore
                   hole
                   of
                   the
                   third
                   Ventricle
                   ,
                   which
                   some
                   call
                   Vulva
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   A
                   chink
                   denoting
                   the
                   third
                   Ventricle
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   Bunchings
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   called
                   Nates
                   ,
                   the
                   Buttocks
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   Protuberances
                   or
                   bunchings
                   called
                   Testes
                   the
                   Stones
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Glandula
                   Pinealis
                   or
                   Pine-kernel-●●●p'd
                   Glan-dulae
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               139
            
          
           
             Two
             little
             whiteish
             Kernels
             or
             Portuberancies
             of
             the
             brain
             are
             placed
             before
             this
             passage
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             the
             brain
             being
             turned
             upside
             down
             ,
             there
             where
             the
             Funnel
             receives
             wheyish
             E●c●●men●●●●●
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             being
             thus
             handled
             ,
             the
             
               Original
               of
               the
               Nerves
            
             follows
             in
             course
             the
             Section
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             which
             every
             where
             arise
             from
             the
             Marrow
             ;
             of
             which
             I
             shall
             speak
             in
             our
             Manual
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ventricles
             or
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Brain
             do
             follow
             .
          
           
             These
             according
             to
             the
             common
             manner
             of
             Section
             ,
             beginning
             from
             above
             ,
             are
             thought
             to
             be
             three
             :
             two
             
               foremore
               and
               uppermore
            
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             and
             
               one
               in
               the
               middle
            
             ,
             to
             which
             some
             add
             a
             fourth
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             spoke
             before
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             dissection
             be
             made
             after
             the
             new
             manner
             ,
             beginning
             from
             beneath
             ;
             there
             appear
             only
             two
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             third
             is
             common
             ,
             being
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             other
             two
             .
          
           
             I
             conceive
             that
             
               there
               is
               but
               one
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               brain
               ,
            
             which
             is
             in
             the
             
             middle
             ,
             but
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             ;
             or
             there
             are
             two
             processes
             ,
             which
             receiving
             the
             Excrements
             ,
             carry
             them
             into
             the
             middle
             it self
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             third
             .
             For
             there
             is
             one
             continued
             Cavity
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             Ventricles
             so
             called
             ,
             do
             end
             into
             a
             common
             Cavity
             .
          
           
             Mean
             while
             ,
             because
             this
             and
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Cavity
             seem
             diversly
             formed
             ,
             some
             distinction
             may
             be
             allowed
             for
             Doctrins
             sake
             .
          
           
             Those
             
               two
               Ventricles
            
             which
             are
             ill
             termed
             the
             foremore
             and
             uppermore
             (
             because
             
             they
             consist
             also
             in
             the
             hinder
             and
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             perhaps
             they
             might
             better
             be
             called
             the
             lateral
             Ventricles
             ,
             and
             with
             Vesalius
             the
             right
             and
             left
             )
             are
             the
             largest
             of
             all
             ,
             crooked
             ,
             full
             of
             windings
             ,
             Semicircular
             ,
             and
             cloathed
             with
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             commonly
             and
             not
             unfitly
             liken'd
             to
             the
             Moon
             when
             she
             is
             in
             the
             Wane
             ;
             although
             they
             are
             hardly
             ever
             demonstrated
             to
             be
             such
             in
             dissection
             .
             But
             seeing
             they
             are
             both
             oblong
             ,
             and
             very
             large
             in
             their
             hinder
             part
             ,
             they
             may
             also
             be
             likened
             to
             Horse-shoes
             .
             This
             round
             form
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             was
             first
             discovered
             by
             the
             most
             accurate
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             I
             have
             often
             demonstrated
             the
             same
             .
             But
             if
             you
             would
             find
             the
             true
             Figure
             ,
             you
             must
             cut
             the
             brain
             deep
             towards
             the
             Skul
             ,
             or
             the
             Temples
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             deeply
             sunk
             into
             the
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
            
             .
             For
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             towards
             the
             
               Septum
               lucidum
            
             is
             higher
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             towards
             the
             lateral
             part
             of
             the
             Skull
             is
             lower
             .
             The
             foremore
             and
             deeper
             parts
             ,
             are
             near
             to
             the
             Mammillary
             processes
             ,
             and
             if
             we
             believe
             
               Piccolhomineus
               ,
               Bauhinus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             ,
             they
             are
             in
             some
             manner
             transpassable
             ,
             especially
             in
             elderly
             persons
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             they
             run
             out
             in
             their
             hinder
             part
             by
             a
             straight
             Course
             ,
             where
             they
             form
             a
             Cavity
             which
             is
             somwhat
             round
             ,
             not
             unlike
             the
             Finger
             of
             a
             Glove
             ;
             this
             I
             remember
             hath
             been
             somtimes
             wanting
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             that
             these
             Ventricles
             do
             environ
             the
             lateral
             and
             hind
             parts
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             which
             also
             ,
             under
             the
             
               Plexus
               Choroides
            
             ,
             a
             part
             of
             the
             brain
             being
             wreathed
             and
             attenuated
             inwards
             ,
             and
             upwards
             making
             the
             Concameration
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             doth
             embrace
             with
             a
             selvidge
             as
             it
             were
             and
             a
             Fringe
             or
             lace
             ,
             which
             the
             praise
             worthy
             Sylvius
             wont
             so
             to
             call
             for
             likeness
             sake
             ,
             it
             being
             knit
             to
             the
             was
             foresaid
             roots
             by
             exceeding
             thin
             threds
             .
             If
             gently
             lifting
             up
             the
             Plexus
             ,
             you
             shall
             remove
             this
             lace
             from
             the
             Root
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             little
             Arteries
             creeping
             through
             the
             lower
             surface
             of
             the
             Ventricle
             ,
             continued
             to
             the
             Ne●-like
             Coronet
             of
             little
             Arteries
             investing
             the
             root
             ;
             by
             help
             of
             which
             ,
             this
             Lace
             seems
             to
             stick
             more
             close
             to
             the
             Root
             .
          
           
             But
             here
             you
             shall
             observe
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             an
             easie
             outgate
             for
             the
             Humors
             contained
             in
             the
             said
             Ventricles
             ,
             which
             may
             descend
             down
             along
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             therefore
             formed
             ,
             not
             in
             
             the
             Brain
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             marrow
             ,
             where
             they
             call
             it
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
            
             ,
             because
             the
             substance
             is
             there
             harder
             like
             a
             Callus
             ,
             where
             the
             Ventricles
             seem
             to
             rest
             upon
             the
             two
             foremore
             Extuberancies
             .
          
           
             The
             Conformation
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             which
             all
             cannot
             easily
             discerne
             ,
             I
             have
             by
             Anatomical
             Inspection
             and
             the
             Guidance
             of
             Sylvius
             ,
             learnt
             to
             be
             thus
             .
          
           
             Two
             Roots
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Morrow
             do
             penetrate
             a
             good
             depth
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             ;
             to
             the
             upper
             and
             former
             whereof
             ,
             especially
             where
             it
             looks
             inward
             ,
             the
             brain
             being
             continued
             (
             now
             I
             mean
             the
             whiteish
             and
             Ash-coloured
             part
             by
             the
             term
             Brain
             )
             it
             spreads
             it self
             every
             way
             ,
             especially
             outwards
             and
             backwards
             and
             by
             little
             and
             little
             wreathes
             and
             contracts
             its
             lower
             extremities
             inward
             and
             upwards
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             being
             attenuated
             ,
             it
             doth
             on
             all
             sides
             embrace
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             with
             a
             lace
             ,
             a
             little
             below
             the
             place
             where
             it
             springs
             therefrom
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             before
             ;
             and
             so
             forms
             the
             lateral
             Ventricles
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             the
             foremore
             and
             inner
             part
             ,
             and
             whiteish
             substance
             ascending
             from
             each
             Root
             ,
             and
             making
             one
             body
             cal'd
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
            
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             back
             ;
             and
             covering
             the
             middle
             distance
             between
             the
             Roots
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             ,
             and
             the
             wide
             mouths
             of
             the
             lateral
             Ventricles
             opened
             thereinto
             ▪
             framed
             by
             it self
             ,
             it
             makes
             the
             Fornix
             ,
             Arch
             or
             Vault
             ;
             and
             is
             continued
             to
             the
             hinder
             and
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Limbus
             or
             edge
             of
             each
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             Regius
             adds
             many
             pores
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             ;
             looking
             into
             the
             Fiberkies
             of
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Animal
             spirit
             is
             bred
             .
             But
             those
             pores
             and
             Fiberkies
             are
             invisible
             to
             the
             Eyes
             of
             Anatomists
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             distinguished
             by
             a
             loose
             and
             
             wrinkeld
             Partition-Skin
             :
             which
             if
             it
             be
             stretched
             out
             and
             held
             against
             the
             light
             ,
             it
             shines
             because
             of
             its
             transparency
             ,
             and
             is
             therefore
             cal'd
             
               Septum
               lucidum
            
             :
             which
             some
             will
             have
             to
             spring
             from
             a
             most
             thin
             portion
             of
             the
             brain
             it self
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             
               pia
               Mater
            
             doubled
             .
             But
             the
             former
             opinion
             is
             truer
             ,
             which
             you
             may
             perceive
             ,
             if
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             Sylvius
             having
             removed
             the
             brain
             and
             sickle
             of
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             you
             shall
             search
             the
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             opposite
             part
             ,
             and
             shall
             lift
             up
             that
             part
             of
             the
             brain
             which
             is
             continued
             with
             the
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
            
             ,
             at
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             third
             ventricle
             ;
             for
             then
             it
             may
             easily
             be
             seen
             ,
             and
             discerned
             to
             be
             a
             smal
             portion
             of
             the
             brain
             .
          
           
             The
             lower
             ,
             whiteish
             part
             ,
             where
             the
             ventricles
             
             are
             joyned
             ,
             is
             termed
          
           
             FORNIX
             the
             Arch
             ,
             or
             Testudo
             the
             Belly
             of
             a
             Li●e
             ,
             being
             of
             a
             Triangular
             Figure
             ,
             consisting
             of
             three
             shanks
             ,
             one
             before
             and
             two
             behind
             .
             In
             the
             common
             Method
             of
             Dissection
             ,
             this
             body
             is
             supposed
             to
             be
             spred
             out
             over
             the
             third
             ventricle
             ,
             and
             to
             lie
             beneath
             the
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
            
             .
          
           
             Under
             the
             Fornix
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             of
             Sylvius
             the
             
               Cheroides
               plexus
            
             of
             both
             sides
             ,
             is
             immediately
             carryed
             ,
             tending
             towards
             the
             
               Glandula
               pinealis
            
             ;
             under
             which
             Plexus
             ,
             in
             its
             upper
             part
             ,
             the
             two
             Roots
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             grow
             together
             ;
             so
             that
             here
             the
             Testudo
             ,
             is
             not
             seated
             immediately
             under
             the
             third
             ventricle
             .
          
           
             
               The
               VI.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               Figure
               presents
               the
               left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               being
               bent
               back
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               represented
               in
               the
               fift
               Figure
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   a.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Ear.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   b.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Ear.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   cccc
                   .
                   
                     The
                     bone
                     of
                     the
                     Forehead
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Skin
                     of
                     the
                     Head
                     hanging
                     down
                     on
                     either
                     side
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   eeeeeee
                   .
                   
                     The
                     dura
                     Mater
                     of
                     both
                     sides
                     hanging
                     down
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   fffffff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Brain
                     according
                     to
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     Ventricle
                     ,
                     divided
                     from
                     that
                     part
                     which
                     lies
                     over
                     the
                     Root
                     of
                     the
                     spinal
                     Marrow
                     ,
                     and
                     turned
                     backwards
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ggg
                   .
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     resting
                     upon
                     the
                     spinal
                     Marrow
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     A
                     great
                     chink
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     going
                     over
                     the
                     Root
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   iiiiiii
                   .
                   
                     The
                     inner
                     face
                     and
                     form
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     Ventricle
                     resembling
                     the
                     sharp
                     corner'd
                     Moon
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   k.
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     the
                     Ventricle
                     like
                     a
                     Gloves-finger
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   l.
                   
                     An
                     orifice
                     going
                     into
                     the
                     third
                     Ventricle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   mmm
                   .
                   
                     The
                     lace
                     sticking
                     to
                     the
                     Root
                     of
                     the
                     spinal
                     Marrow
                  
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     The
                     lace
                     removed
                     from
                     the
                     said
                     Root
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ooo
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Plexus
                     Choroides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ppp
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Root
                     of
                     the
                     spinal
                     Marrow
                     raised
                     up
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   qqq
                   .
                   
                     Vessels
                     creeping
                     up
                     and
                     down
                     the
                     inner
                     surface
                     of
                     the
                     Ventricle
                     ,
                     and
                     springing
                     for
                     a
                     great
                     part
                     ,
                     from
                     the
                     smal
                     Arteries
                     which
                     compass
                     the
                     Root
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   r.
                   
                     The
                     Septum
                     lucidum
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               141
            
          
           
             The
             third
             Ventricle
             commonly
             so
             called
             ,
             
             or
             the
             long
             Chink
             ,
             is
             the
             meeting
             together
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             aforesaid
             ,
             which
             is
             formed
             in
             the
             Centre
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             of
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Conjuction
             of
             two
             round
             Trunks
             proceeding
             out
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             It
             hath
             in
             it
             two
             passages
             ,
             the
             first
             foremore
             ,
             going
             downwards
             to
             the
             Glandula
             pituitaria
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             there
             void
             its
             Excrements
             :
             the
             other
             is
             hindermore
             ,
             cloathed
             with
             a
             Membrane
             ;
             which
             hole
             some
             call
             Anus
             ,
             the
             Fundament
             ;
             it
             goes
             beneath
             the
             Buttocks
             to
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             ,
             that
             the
             prepared
             matter
             of
             the
             Animal
             spirits
             ,
             may
             pass
             into
             the
             place
             and
             Womb
             as
             it
             were
             of
             their
             Generation
             .
          
           
             This
             hole
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             a
             space
             arising
             upon
             the
             mutuall
             contact
             of
             the
             
             four
             Trunks
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             ,
          
           
             Now
             the
             Nates
             or
             Buttocks
             ,
             and
             the
             Testes
             or
             Stones
             are
             four
             Orbicular
             prominences
             ,
             
             which
             they
             say
             are
             in
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             is
             falf
             .
             They
             call
             the
             two
             portions
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Medulla
             oblongata
             ,
             which
             arise
             from
             the
             Brainlet
             ,
             Nates
             ;
             and
             those
             two
             little
             ones
             of
             the
             Roots
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             they
             call
             Testes
             .
             And
             these
             parts
             are
             lower
             ,
             the
             other
             upper
             .
          
           
             These
             differences
             ,
             as
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             notes
             ,
             between
             the
             Testes
             and
             the
             Nates
             ,
             have
             place
             in
             Brutes
             rather
             then
             in
             Men
             ;
             for
             the
             Men
             they
             are
             commonly
             equal
             ,
             and
             many
             times
             the
             Testes
             are
             the
             bigger
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             is
             a
             trifling
             peice
             of
             business
             to
             impose
             such
             Names
             as
             these
             ;
             as
             also
             when
             they
             
             call
             the
             
               Glandula
               pinealis
               ,
               Penis
            
             ,
             and
             a
             certain
             long
             ditch
             between
             the
             Eminences
             they
             term
             Vulva
             .
          
           
             Between
             the
             fore-more
             Ventricles
             so
             called
             ,
             and
             the
             Seat
             of
             the
             Testudo
             ,
             there
             
             is
             ,
             the
             Plexus
             Choroidis
             or
             Reticularis
             so
             called
             ,
             being
             a
             contexture
             of
             very
             smal
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             sent
             partly
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             partly
             from
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             dura
             Mater
             in
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             .
             There
             is
             a
             glandulous
             substance
             interwoven
             within
             this
             Plexus
             ,
             and
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             pia
             Mater
             .
             The
             Plexus
             Choroides
             being
             truly
             glandulous
             ,
             does
             receive
             a
             little
             branch
             of
             the
             Carotick
             artery
             ,
             which
             pierces
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             which
             ends
             about
             the
             Glandula
             pinealis
             ,
             where
             it
             branches
             up
             and
             down
             through
             the
             lower
             Surface
             of
             the
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             hereof
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Rete
             mirabile
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             beginning
             of
             that
             hole
             ,
             which
             passes
             from
             the
             middle
             Ventricle
             into
             the
             noble
             
             Ventricle
             ,
             there
             is
             placed
             a
             certain
             Glandule
             or
             Kernel
             ,
             termed
             Pinealia
             the
             Pine-kernel
             Glandule
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             fashioned
             like
             the
             Kernel
             of
             a
             Pine-apple
             .
             The
             Greeks
             call
             it
             conarion
             or
             
               som●
               cono●ides
            
             ,
             some
             term
             it
             the
             Yard
             of
             the
             brain
             ▪
             
             It
             is
             of
             an
             hard
             substance
             ,
             of
             a
             yellowish
             and
             somtimes
             dark
             colour
             ,
             and
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             thin
             Membrane
             .
             In
             Creatures
             newly
             kil'd
             t
             is
             large
             ,
             in
             old
             karcasses
             ,
             being
             melted
             it
             is
             scarce
             apparent
             ,
             or
             is
             very
             small
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             men
             ,
             whose
             brains
             cannot
             be
             opened
             whil'st
             they
             are
             warm
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             say
             it
             spends
             like
             Camphire
             exposed
             to
             the
             air
             ,
             being
             also
             partly
             melted
             ,
             as
             Salt
             is
             in
             a
             moist
             place
             .
          
           
             According
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Sylvius
             a
             
               nervous
               little
               string
            
             does
             fasten
             this
             Kernel
             as
             it
             stands
             betwixt
             the
             Testes
             .
          
           
             Who
             also
             observed
             more
             then
             once
             certain
             granes
             of
             sand
             in
             this
             Kernel
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             also
             a
             little
             stone
             as
             big
             as
             the
             fourth
             part
             of
             a
             pease
             ,
             and
             somwhat
             round
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             Pine-kernel
             is
             like
             that
             of
             other
             kernels
             ,
             and
             especially
             to
             help
             the
             distribution
             of
             Vessels
             through
             the
             brain
             .
             Some
             will
             have
             it
             placed
             like
             a
             Valve
             before
             the
             hole
             which
             passes
             into
             the
             fourth
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             
               Des
               Cartes
            
             and
             his
             Followers
             
               Meyssonerius
               ,
               Regius
               ,
               Hogelandius
            
             ,
             do
             conceive
             that
             this
             Kernel
             being
             placed
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             which
             when
             a
             man
             is
             awake
             are
             distended
             with
             Spirits
             perpetually
             ,
             does
             1.
             
             Receive
             the
             motions
             of
             all
             Objects
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Soul
             in
             this
             part
             done
             by
             these
             motions
             ,
             does
             apprehend
             all
             external
             sensible
             Objects
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Ideas
             proceeding
             from
             the
             five
             Senses
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Centre
             ,
             and
             discern
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             does
             afterward
             by
             help
             thereof
             send
             Spirits
             into
             all
             parts
             ;
             as
             in
             a
             smal
             Sphaerical
             glass
             ,
             all
             things
             are
             received
             in
             the
             same
             order
             in
             which
             they
             are
             either
             in
             a
             Field
             or
             Chamber
             .
          
           
             For
             this
             cause
             Meyssonerius
             will
             have
             it
             to
             be
             of
             a
             
               conick
               Figure
            
             ,
             because
             Individuals
             require
             more
             space
             then
             sorts
             or
             kinds
             of
             things
             .
             And
             that
             these
             Idea's
             are
             diversly
             moved
             by
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             animal
             spirit
             ,
             but
             are
             alwaies
             found
             joyned
             by
             the
             Verb
             EST
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             their
             equality
             or
             inequality
             ,
             truth
             or
             falshood
             is
             compounded
             ,
             being
             compared
             together
             like
             two
             Lines
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             for
             this
             cause
             Infants
             do
             not
             presently
             speak
             nor
             reason
             ,
             because
             the
             slappiness
             of
             their
             brain
             gives
             not
             passage
             to
             the
             Idea's
             .
             And
             that
             the
             overgreat
             and
             confused
             motion
             of
             these
             Idea's
             in
             the
             Pine-shap'd
             kernel
             ,
             makes
             ravenings
             ,
             as
             in
             persons
             drunk
             ,
             phrentick
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             But
             many
             things
             there
             are
             which
             will
             not
             suffer
             me
             to
             embrace
             this
             new
             and
             witty
             Opinion
             .
             For
          
           
             
               1.
               
               It
               is
               too
               small
               and
               obscure
               a
               body
               ,
               to
               be
               able
               to
               represent
               clearly
               the
               Species
               of
               all
               things
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Species
               of
               all
               Senses
               do
               not
               come
               hither
               ,
               because
               the
               Nerves
               do
               not
               touch
               the
               Kernel
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               It
               is
               placed
               in
               the
               Quarter
               of
               Excrements
               ,
               whether
               they
               are
               purged
               out
               ,
               by
               the
               third
               ,
               and
               two
               foremore
               Ventricles
               ,
               where
               the
               Species
               or
               Representations
               of
               things
               would
               be
               defiled
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Species
               of
               things
               are
               perceived
               rather
               there
               whereto
               they
               are
               carried
               .
               But
               every
               sensory
               Nerve
               each
               in
               its
               place
               carries
               the
               Species
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               spinal
               Marrow
               ,
               and
               therefore
               each
               in
               their
               place
               are
               judged
               and
               received
               by
               the
               Soul
               ,
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               spinal
               Marrow
               .
               Moreover
               this
               Marrow
               is
               big
               enough
               ,
               globous
               ,
               hard
               ,
               and
               of
               a
               brighter
               colour
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Several
               Idea's
               would
               be
               confounded
               in
               this
               little
               body
               .
               The
               Eye
               indeed
               being
               likewise
               very
               small
               ,
               receives
               the
               Species
               or
               Representations
               of
               things
               without
               Consusion
               ,
               but
               they
               are
               only
               the
               visible
               Species
               ;
               whereas
               in
               this
               Kernel
               the
               divers
               Species
               of
               different
               Senses
               are
               to
               be
               received
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               There
               is
               hence
               no
               open
               or
               known
               passage
               to
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               as
               from
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Marrow
               ,
               nor
               any
               communion
               with
               some
               Nerves
               of
               the
               external
               senses
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Cavities
             or
             Ventricles
             
             of
             the
             brain
             is
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             Receptacles
             of
             Excrements
             ,
             which
             is
             apparent
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               From
               their
               Structure
               :
               for
               an
               hole
               goes
               from
               the
               Cavities
               to
               the
               Glandula
               pituitaria
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Surface
               of
               the
               Ventricles
               is
               continually
               moistned
               with
               a
               watry
               Humor
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               They
               are
               often
               found
               topful
               of
               flegm
               and
               watry
               moisture
               .
            
          
           
             Howbeit
             in
             this
             new
             Section
             after
             
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             funnel
             is
             shewed
             with
             the
             Glandula
             :
             the
             Marrow
             being
             lifted
             up
             ,
             first
             of
             all
             the
             Nates
             and
             the
             Testes
             are
             seen
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             hole
             into
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             ;
             afterwards
             divers
             Nerves
             ,
             the
             ,
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             brain
             with
             the
             hole
             into
             the
             funnel
             the
             Corpus
             callosum
             ,
             the
             Fornix
             ,
             the
             Plexus
             Choroides
             ,
             and
             the
             Glandula
             pinealis
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             the
             old
             and
             common
             way
             of
             
             Dissection
             ,
             these
             parts
             of
             the
             brain
             are
             shewed
             in
             order
             :
             The
             Corpus
             callosum
             ,
             the
             Septum
             tenue
             ,
             the
             two
             Extuberances
             ,
             upon
             which
             the
             Ventricles
             rest
             ;
             the
             two
             Ventricles
             ,
             commonly
             called
             the
             foremore
             ;
             the
             Fornix
             ,
             the
             Plexus
             Choroidis
             ,
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             ,
             it
             s
             two
             holes
             ,
             the
             Glandula
             pinealis
             ;
             and
             the
             brainlet
             being
             a
             little
             removed
             ,
             the
             Nates
             and
             Testes
             the
             brainlet
             ,
             the
             worm-fashion'd
             Processes
             ,
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             ,
             the
             Pelvis
             ,
             Glandula
             pituitaria
             ,
             and
             Rete
             mirabile
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             you
             will
             use
             the
             middle
             way
             of
             Dissection
             ,
             familiar
             to
             
               Fr.
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             thus
             
             you
             shall
             proceed
             .
             Take
             off
             the
             Skull
             as
             deep
             as
             conveniently
             you
             can
             .
             Then
             suffering
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             brain
             to
             remain
             untoucht
             ,
             with
             its
             Membrane
             ;
             begin
             your
             Dissection
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             first
             of
             all
             cutting
             asunder
             and
             removing
             the
             dura
             Mater
             ;
             then
             take
             away
             some
             particles
             of
             the
             brain
             with
             the
             pia
             Mater
             ,
             til
             you
             come
             to
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ventricle
             ,
             and
             then
             follow
             both
             its
             upper
             and
             lower
             passage
             with
             your
             Dissection
             ,
             as
             you
             see
             
             it
             done
             in
             the
             second
             Table
             .
             Separate
             the
             Limbus
             if
             you
             please
             ,
             with
             a
             blunt
             probe
             ,
             from
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             shew
             it
             ;
             though
             that
             may
             be
             more
             conveniently
             done
             in
             the
             opposite
             side
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             right
             side
             of
             the
             Brain
             being
             thus
             taken
             away
             ,
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Sickle
             are
             to
             be
             shewn
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             greater
             right
             side
             lateral
             Cavity
             ,
             and
             the
             oblique
             descend
             of
             the
             upper
             Cavity
             thereinto
             ,
             all
             which
             you
             have
             expressed
             in
             the
             foresaid
             Table
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             being
             thus
             done
             ,
             go
             to
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             and
             therein
             first
             cut
             asunder
             
             the
             dura
             Mater
             ,
             and
             remove
             it
             with
             the
             Falx
             or
             Sickle
             ;
             then
             gently
             remove
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             into
             the
             place
             of
             the
             right
             side
             newly
             removed
             ;
             and
             as
             you
             are
             doing
             this
             observe
             from
             Tab.
             3.
             the
             Vessels
             going
             into
             the
             lateral
             Cavity
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             rise
             up
             about
             the
             optick
             nerves
             ,
             and
             are
             distributed
             into
             very
             many
             branches
             ,
             creeping
             every
             where
             up
             and
             down
             the
             inner
             Substance
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             and
             especially
             the
             winding
             Surface
             thereof
             ,
             til
             at
             last
             they
             end
             into
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             .
             Then
             search
             out
             that
             same
             notable
             chink
             or
             clift
             ,
             between
             the
             windings
             ,
             
             which
             is
             figured
             out
             in
             the
             Table
             aforesaid
             ;
             and
             having
             cut
             the
             pia
             Mater
             ,
             open
             the
             sides
             thereof
             a
             lit-little
             with
             a
             Spa●●er
             ,
             that
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Carotides
             may
             better
             appear
             ,
             which
             are
             carried
             through
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             turnings
             ,
             with
             the
             Rudiments
             of
             new
             windings
             .
             But
             if
             ,
             before
             you
             shall
             begin
             to
             shew
             the
             brain
             ,
             you
             shall
             free
             the
             
             Carotick
             Arteries
             and
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             from
             the
             parts
             adjacent
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             bind
             them
             distinctly
             ;
             and
             then
             by
             a
             Wound
             made
             in
             an
             Artery
             shall
             put
             in
             a
             crooked
             hollow
             probe
             and
             blow
             ;
             the
             vessels
             disseminated
             through
             the
             whole
             brain
             wil
             swel
             ,
             as
             being
             branches
             of
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             ,
             until
             the
             air
             with
             the
             forced
             blood
             shall
             at
             length
             empty
             it self
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             :
             if
             by
             the
             foresaid
             hollow
             probe
             ,
             you
             shall
             in
             like
             manner
             blow
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             you
             will
             perceive
             their
             continuation
             and
             communion
             with
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             ,
             by
             the
             swelling
             and
             distention
             of
             the
             said
             Veins
             ;
             and
             will
             acknowledg
             that
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             is
             not
             a
             little
             confirmed
             by
             this
             pleasant
             Spectacle
             .
          
           
             Hence
             ,
             returning
             to
             a
             farther
             search
             into
             the
             fabrick
             of
             the
             brain
             ,
             and
             a
             wary
             Incision
             being
             made
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             side
             propounded
             ,
             search
             there
             for
             the
             larger
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ventricle
             ,
             and
             follow
             it
             with
             your
             Dissection
             to
             both
             the
             Ends
             ;
             then
             turn
             back
             every
             way
             the
             outer
             part
             of
             that
             which
             is
             dissected
             ,
             the
             middle
             part
             being
             kept
             upright
             ,
             which
             rests
             upon
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             is
             continued
             therewith
             ,
             which
             is
             excellently
             well
             expressed
             in
             Table
             the
             sixt
             ,
             in
             the
             Explication
             whereof
             ,
             what
             you
             see
             set
             down
             ,
             weigh
             in
             order
             .
          
           
             Finally
             ,
             taking
             away
             the
             Brain
             ,
             observe
             again
             all
             the
             Cavities
             and
             that
             more
             distinctly
             ;
             and
             then
             when
             you
             have
             seen
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             ,
             the
             Funnel
             ,
             the
             Glandula
             pituitaria
             ,
             the
             pares
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             after
             the
             usual
             manner
             ;
             go
             back
             again
             to
             the
             Penis
             ,
             Anus
             ,
             Testes
             ,
             Nates
             ,
             &c.
             and
             examine
             the
             brainlet
             and
             its
             parts
             .
          
           
             Nor
             will
             it
             be
             unprofitable
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             a
             new
             occasion
             of
             Dissection
             is
             offered
             ,
             so
             often
             to
             change
             the
             section
             in
             some
             part
             ;
             for
             so
             it
             will
             come
             to
             pass
             ,
             that
             you
             will
             alwaies
             observe
             somwhat
             which
             was
             unobserved
             before
             ,
             or
             neglected
             ,
             or
             not
             distinctly
             enough
             considered
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VII
            
             .
             Touching
             the
             Forehead
             .
          
           
             THe
             Hairy
             part
             of
             the
             Head
             being
             
             explained
             ,
             the
             smooth
             part
             or
             FACE
             follows
             ,
             which
             in
             man
             is
             void
             of
             Hairs
             ,
             otherwise
             then
             i●
             is
             in
             Beasts
             ,
             for
             Beauties
             sake
             ;
             it
             is
             also
             called
             Vultus
             because
             of
             the
             judgment
             of
             the
             wil
             ,
             which
             is
             Conspicuous
             of
             the
             Face
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             part
             thereof
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Forehead
             is
             termed
             
               Frons
               a
               ferendo
            
             from
             carrying
             ,
             
             as
             some
             conceive
             ,
             because
             it
             carries
             in
             it
             tokens
             of
             the
             mind
             :
             the
             rest
             thereof
             ,
             from
             the
             Eye-brows
             to
             the
             Chins
             end
             ,
             is
             the
             lower
             part
             ,
             in
             which
             are
             many
             other
             parts
             ,
             which
             are
             hereafter
             to
             be
             explained
             in
             order
             ,
             external
             and
             internal
             ,
             the
             Organs
             of
             the
             Senses
             ,
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             Nose
             ,
             Lips
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             The
             
               Skin
               of
               the
               Forehead
            
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             moved
             ,
             therefore
             it
             hath
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             
             Platerus
             terms
             the
             signifiers
             of
             the
             Affections
             of
             the
             Mind
             .
             Now
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             
             Forehead
             do
             lift
             up
             the
             Eye-brows
             ,
             and
             are
             thickest
             at
             the
             said
             Eye-brows
             .
          
           
             They
             arise
             from
             the
             Skull
             ,
             near
             the
             coronal
             Suture
             ,
             and
             are
             knit
             at
             the
             sides
             to
             the
             temporal
             Muscles
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             middle
             they
             are
             distinguished
             a
             little
             above
             ,
             but
             beneath
             they
             are
             so
             nearly
             associated
             ,
             that
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             one
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             end
             at
             the
             Eye-brows
             .
             Yet
             I
             have
             observed
             in
             a
             large
             nosed
             person
             ,
             that
             an
             Appendix
             of
             the
             said
             Muscles
             did
             reach
             to
             the
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             straight
             Fibres
             .
             Surgeons
             therefore
             must
             not
             cut
             them
             athwart
             ,
             least
             they
             destroy
             the
             lifting
             up
             of
             the
             Eye-brows
             ;
             but
             upwards
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             length
             .
             Hosman
             after
             Aquapendent
             stands
             for
             oblique
             fibres
             ,
             on
             the
             right
             side
             from
             the
             right
             hand
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             on
             the
             left
             side
             from
             the
             left
             hand
             to
             the
             right
             .
             But
             this
             they
             do
             against
             Experience
             ,
             ocular
             Inspection
             ,
             and
             Reason
             .
             For
             the
             skin
             of
             the
             Forehead
             is
             by
             a
             straight
             course
             ,
             either
             elevated
             or
             depressed
             by
             help
             of
             right
             fibres
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             cause
             of
             straight
             motion
             .
             In
             the
             point
             of
             right
             fibres
             ,
             we
             have
             the
             Consent
             of
             great
             Anatomists
             
               Vesalius
               ,
               Laurentius
               ,
               Bauhinus
               ,
               Platerus
               ,
               Veslingus
               ,
            
             &c.
             
          
           
             And
             because
             the
             skin
             of
             the
             Forehead
             grows
             close
             to
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             therefore
             both
             the
             Forehead
             and
             the
             Eye-brows
             are
             moved
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             there
             are
             somtimes
             also
             two
             Muscles
             in
             the
             
               binder
               part
               of
               the
               Head
            
             ,
             which
             move
             the
             skin
             thereof
             ,
             short
             ,
             thin
             and
             broad
             ,
             with
             straight
             fibres
             ,
             ending
             above
             into
             a
             broad
             Tendon
             ,
             and
             touching
             the
             hindermore
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Ears
             ,
             in
             their
             sides
             .
             Some
             men
             that
             are
             furnished
             with
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             can
             draw
             the
             skin
             of
             their
             Heads
             backwards
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Eyes
             .
          
           
             THe
             Eyes
             are
             termed
             
               Oculi
               ab
               occultando
            
             
             or
             occludendo
             from
             shutting
             or
             hiding
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             hid
             under
             the
             Eye-lids
             ;
             they
             are
             the
             Instruments
             of
             Sight
             made
             of
             Humors
             ,
             Membranes
             ,
             Muscles
             ,
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             other
             Parts
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             in
             an
             eminent
             place
             
             like
             Watch-men
             ,
             in
             boney
             Sockets
             covered
             with
             the
             Periostium
             for
             better
             Safeguards
             sake
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             in
             Number
             two
             ,
             for
             the
             
             perfection
             of
             Sight
             ,
             and
             that
             one
             being
             defective
             ,
             the
             other
             may
             supply
             its
             place
             and
             office
             .
             Howbeit
             both-Eyes
             see
             but
             one
             Object
             ,
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             double
             one
             ,
             whether
             because
             the
             knowing
             and
             judging
             Faculty
             is
             one
             ,
             as
             Aquapendent
             conceives
             ,
             or
             because
             the
             Axle-tree
             of
             the
             two
             visual
             Pyramides
             ,
             do
             pass
             along
             upon
             the
             same
             Surface
             of
             a
             plane
             as
             Galen
             expounds
             the
             matter
             ;
             or
             because
             of
             the
             exact
             similitude
             they
             have
             received
             from
             particular
             things
             from
             whence
             they
             came
             ,
             the
             internal
             sense
             judging
             only
             one
             and
             the
             same
             species
             ,
             as
             Aquiloniu●
             does
             philosophize
             .
             They
             are
             in
             Mankind
             very
             little
             distant
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             both
             for
             the
             Nobility
             and
             perfection
             of
             their
             Action
             ,
             and
             the
             Reception
             of
             visible
             species
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             round
             ;
             but
             a
             little
             longish
             ,
             
             like
             bulbous
             Roots
             whereupon
          
           
             Two
             Angles
             or
             Corners
             are
             made
             ,
             at
             the
             Socket
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Canthi
             ;
             the
             inner
             and
             greater
             at
             the
             Nose
             ,
             the
             outer
             and
             lesser
             at
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
           
             In
             and
             about
             the
             Eye
             ,
             there
             are
             sundry
             parts
             ,
             some
             without
             the
             Eye
             ,
             for
             safeguard
             
             or
             commodities
             sake
             ,
             as
             the
             Eye-lids
             with
             their
             Hair
             and
             the
             Eye-brows
             ,
             also
             Caruncles
             in
             the
             Corners
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ;
             other
             parts
             there
             are
             which
             con●…
             the
             Eye
             it self
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             
               Fat
               ,
               Muscles
               ,
               Membranes
            
             and
             Humors
             .
          
           
             Palpebrae
             the
             Eye-lids
             are
             parts
             which
             cover
             and
             shut
             the
             Eye
             ,
             which
             clense
             
             and
             putrifie
             the
             Cornea
             Tunica
             ,
             and
             likewise
             by
             their
             overshadowing
             render
             the
             Picture
             in
             the
             Retina
             more
             illustrious
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             
               Averrhoes
               ,
               Varolius
               ▪
               Plempius
            
             .
          
           
             The
             are
             
               made
               up
            
             of
             the
             Skin
             ,
             the
             Membrana
             carnosa
             ,
             Muscles
             ,
             a
             Coat
             ,
             the
             Tarsi
             and
             Hairs
             :
             and
             therefore
             their
             substance
             is
             soft
             ,
          
           
             The
             Eye-lid
             ,
             is
             either
             the
             lower
             which
             if
             we
             believe
             Galen
             ,
             is
             of
             it self
             immovable
             ,
             
             save
             in
             some
             birds
             .
             Yet
             Bauhin
             and
             Aqua-pendent
             do
             aver
             that
             they
             are
             really
             moved
             ,
             and
             Fallopius
             proves
             it
             by
             the
             example
             of
             a
             Sea-Calf
             ,
             and
             any
             one
             may
             prove
             the
             same
             in
             a
             Looking-glass
             ,
             wherein
             he
             may
             see
             his
             lower
             Eye-lid
             meet
             the
             upper
             .
             But
             either
             this
             motion
             is
             obscure
             or
             we
             must
             say
             with
             Vesalias
             and
             Sylvius
             that
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             circular
             Muscle
             doth
             lift
             up
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Eye-lid
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             lower
             part
             is
             drawn
             down
             ,
             by
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             notwithstanding
             is
             not
             true
             ,
             because
             the
             straight
             Muscle
             lift
             up
             ;
             or
             we
             must
             say
             with
             Piccolhomineus
             that
             they
             follow
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Cheeks
             ;
             or
             finally
             ,
             the
             Orbicular
             Muscles
             only
             moves
             the
             upper
             Eye-lid
             ,
             and
             doth
             but
             embrace
             the
             lower
             ,
             and
             knit
             it
             is
             a
             coupler
             .
             The
             other
             is
             the
             upper
             ,
             which
             is
             moved
             and
             that
             most
             swiftly
             .
             so
             that
             we
             compare
             a
             quick
             motion
             to
             the
             twinkling
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             
               The
               VII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURES
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eye
               in
               their
               natural
               Situation
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Eye-lid
               by
               it self
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   The
                   hollow
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Skul
                   cut
                   off
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   inner
                   and
                   whiteish
                   portion
                   of
                   the
                   Brain
                   dissected
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Brainlet
                   or
                   Cerebellum
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   meeting
                   and
                   union
                   of
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerves
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   parting
                   of
                   the
                   said
                   Nerves
                   going
                   to
                   each
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Caruncula
                   Lachrymalis
                   drawn
                   out
                   of
                   its
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   The
                   first
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Eye
                   called
                   Attollens
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   In
                   the
                   right
                   Eye
                   ,
                   shews
                   the
                   second
                   Eye-muscle
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Musculus
                   deprimens
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   In
                   both
                   Eyes
                   shews
                   the
                   Musculi
                   recti
                   interni
                   or
                   Adducentes
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   In
                   each
                   Eye
                   shews
                   the
                   recti
                   externi
                   or
                   Abducentes
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   quintus
                   ,
                   or
                   obliquus
                   externus
                   ,
                   is
                   shewed
                   in
                   the
                   right
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   sixt
                   Muscle
                   or
                   the
                   obliquus
                   ,
                   internus
                   ,
                   whose
                   Tendon
                   passes
                   through
                   the
                   Pully
                   ,
                   N.
                   
                
                 
                   O.
                   Shews
                   the
                   optick
                   Nerve
                   in
                   the
                   right
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   The
                   Cornea
                   Tunica
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   midst
                   whereof
                   is
                   the
                   Pupilla
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   optick
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Nerves
                   which
                   moves
                   the
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Trochlearis
                   Musculus
                   ,
                   whose
                   Tendon
                   ,
                   E.
                   goes
                   through
                   the
                   Pulley
                   ,
                   D.
                   
                
                 
                   F.
                   G.
                   The
                   Musculi
                   recti
                   ,
                   internal
                   and
                   external
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   proper
                   to
                   the
                   upper
                   Eye-lid
                   ,
                   contained
                   within
                   the
                   Socket
                   of
                   the
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   The
                   Eye-lids
                   cut
                   out
                   off
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   The
                   Cilia
                   ,
                   that
                   is
                   the
                   Ends
                   of
                   the
                   Eye-lids
                   adorned
                   with
                   Hair.
                   
                
              
            
             
               page
               144
            
          
           
             The
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             is
             thin
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             like
             
             another
             simple
             thin
             Membrane
             ;
             and
             therefore
             Aristotle
             said
             that
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Eye-lid
             was
             without
             flesh
             ,
             and
             being
             cut
             off
             ,
             like
             the
             Fore-skin
             ,
             it
             grows
             not
             again
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             cloathed
             with
             an
             inner
             Coat
             springing
             from
             the
             Pericranium
             ,
             exceeding
             thin
             and
             soft
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             hurt
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             which
             they
             touch
             .
          
           
             The
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Eye-lids
             are
             hard
             and
             Gristley
             ;
             but
             soft
             like
             smal
             Gristles
             ,
             and
             Semicircular
             ,
             the
             Greeks
             term
             them
             Tarsous
             ,
             the
             Latins
             CILIA
             whereon
             the
             Hairs
             are
             fastned
             
             (
             which
             some
             term
             Cilia
             )
             being
             straight
             because
             situate
             in
             an
             hard
             place
             ,
             keeping
             all
             waies
             in
             a
             manner
             the
             same
             greatness
             hindering
             smal
             and
             light
             matters
             from
             falling
             into
             the
             Eye
             ,
             and
             serving
             to
             direct
             the
             fight
             which
             Galen
             proves
             from
             such
             as
             have
             them
             fallen
             or
             pulled
             off
             ,
             who
             can
             hardly
             discerne
             things
             afar
             off
             ,
             especially
             if
             they
             be
             of
             a
             dark
             colour
             ,
             which
             Montaltus
             doth
             prove
             by
             the
             example
             of
             a
             youth
             at
             Lisbon
             .
          
           
             The
             SUPERCILIA
             or
             Eye-brows
             ,
             are
             Hairs
             growing
             at
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             
             Forehead
             ,
             above
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             intercepting
             such
             things
             ,
             as
             fall
             from
             the
             Head
             that
             they
             may
             not
             light
             into
             the
             Eyes
             .
          
           
             CARUNCULA
             a
             smal
             portion
             of
             flesh
             ,
             is
             placed
             at
             each
             great
             corner
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             containing
             Humor
             to
             moisten
             the
             Eye
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             placed
             over
             an
             hole
             bored
             in
             the
             Nose-bone
             ,
             which
             is
             
             called
             
               Punctum
               lachrymale
            
             (
             distinct
             from
             these
             two
             holes
             in
             the
             edge
             of
             the
             Eye-lids
             ,
             which
             Galen
             call
             Tremata
             ,
             and
             are
             most
             visible
             in
             living
             bodies
             ,
             especially
             of
             such
             as
             are
             inclined
             to
             weeping
             )
             least
             we
             should
             continually
             weep
             .
             But
             in
             an
             Oxe
             there
             is
             moreover
             a
             moveable
             Membrane
             ,
             which
             can
             shut
             the
             Eye
             ,
             though
             the
             Eye-lid
             be
             open
             ,
             by
             help
             whereof
             Brutes
             wink
             and
             cover
             their
             Eyes
             ,
             when
             they
             fear
             any
             thing
             should
             fall
             into
             or
             hit
             them
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             spaces
             between
             the
             muscles
             and
             sundry
             Vessels
             ,
             there
             is
             fat
             ,
             which
             
             heats
             ,
             moistens
             ,
             and
             so
             helps
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             and
             makes
             it
             round
             and
             even
             .
          
           
             The
             MUSCLES
             of
             Mens
             Eyes
             are
             
             six
             .
             Because
             they
             have
             so
             many
             distinct
             motions
             :
             four
             straight
             and
             two
             circular
             :
             all
             are
             seated
             within
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             and
             accompany
             the
             optick
             Nerve
             .
             All
             their
             Tendons
             being
             joyned
             together
             at
             the
             
               tunica
               Cornea
            
             ,
             under
             the
             Adnata
             ,
             do
             make
             that
             Coat
             which
             Columbus
             call
             
               Tunica
               innominata
            
             ,
             the
             
               Nameless
               coat
            
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             
             had
             not
             been
             known
             to
             the
             ancients
             ,
             whereas
             Galen
             hath
             made
             mention
             thereof
             ,
             in
             his
             tenth
             Book
             
               de
               Usu
               partium
            
             Chap.
             2.
             
             &
             8.
             though
             it
             be
             not
             properly
             a
             Coat
             ,
             but
             only
             divers
             Tendons
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             nor
             doth
             it
             compass
             the
             whole
             Eye
             .
             Yet
             by
             some
             it
             is
             called
             
               Tunica
               Tendinosa
            
             or
             Tendinea
             ,
             the
             Tendinous
             Coat
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Muscle
            
             being
             the
             upper
             and
             
             thicker
             is
             called
             Attollens
             the
             
               lefter
               up
            
             or
             Superbus
             ,
             the
             proud
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             opposite
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             being
             the
             smaller
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             ,
             is
             termed
             
             Deprimens
             the
             depresser
             ,
             and
             
               Musculus
               humilis
            
             the
             lowly
             Muscle
             ,
             because
             it
             draws
             the
             Eye
             downwards
             towards
             the
             Cheek-balls
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             placed
             in
             the
             greater
             Angle
             is
             
             called
             Adducens
             ,
             the
             
               drawer
               to
            
             ,
             and
             Bibitorius
             the
             drinking
             Muscle
             ,
             moving
             the
             Eye
             inwards
             towards
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             called
             Abducens
             the
             drawer
             
             from
             ,
             drawing
             the
             Eye
             towards
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Face
             to
             the
             smal
             cornerward
             ;
             t
             is
             also
             termed
             Indignatorius
             the
             Muscle
             of
             indgnation
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             four
             Muscles
             have
             the
             same
             beginning
             ,
             the
             same
             progress
             and
             end
             :
             for
             the
             beginning
             of
             them
             all
             is
             acute
             ,
             near
             the
             hole
             where
             the
             optick
             Nerve
             enters
             into
             the
             Socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             from
             the
             Membrane
             wherof
             they
             do
             arise
             :
             they
             have
             all
             a
             fleshy
             and
             round
             belly
             :
             their
             end
             is
             a
             very
             smal
             Tendon
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             ,
             at
             the
             Cornea
             .
          
           
             By
             these
             four
             acting
             together
             the
             Eye
             is
             drawn
             inwards
             ,
             and
             is
             kept
             from
             strring
             ,
             which
             holding
             is
             by
             Physitians
             called
             
               Motus
               tonicus
            
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             is
             lean
             ,
             round
             ,
             short
             ,
             oblique
             ,
             
             seated
             between
             the
             Eyes
             and
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             second
             and
             third
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             ascending
             by
             the
             outer
             corner
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             to
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             
               Cornea
               tunica
            
             by
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Iris.
             It
             whirles
             about
             the
             Eye
             obliquely
             downwards
             to
             the
             external
             Angle
             ,
             or
             corner
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             being
             the
             smallest
             of
             all
             ,
             and
             
             having
             the
             longest
             Tendon
             ,
             
               wheels
               the
               Eye
               about
            
             unto
             the
             inner
             Corner
             .
             For
             arising
             from
             a
             common
             beginning
             with
             the
             first
             four
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             right
             out
             to
             the
             inner
             Corner
             ;
             there
             it
             passes
             through
             the
             Pulley
             ,
             and
             ascends
             in
             a
             right
             Angle
             to
             that
             place
             where
             the
             fift
             was
             inserted
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             
               Trochlea
               Musculus
            
             the
             Pully-muscle
             ,
             because
             it
             wheeled
             about
             as
             it
             were
             through
             a
             Pulley
             which
             Pulley
             is
             a
             Gristle
             in
             the
             Eye
             sticking
             out
             ,
             first
             observed
             by
             Fallopius
             ,
             though
             Riolanus
             do
             also
             attribute
             the
             Invention
             thereof
             to
             Rondeletius
             who
             lived
             at
             the
             same
             time
             with
             him
             .
             T
             is
             situate
             at
             the
             upper
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             by
             the
             inner
             corner
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             and
             therefore
             in
             the
             Cure
             of
             
               Fistula
               lachrymalis
            
             ,
             the
             Surgeons
             ought
             to
             have
             a
             great
             care
             ,
             least
             they
             wrong
             this
             Pully
             ,
          
           
             These
             two
             last
             are
             termed
             Amatorij
             ,
             love
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             Circumactores
             ,
             rowling
             Muscles
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             .
             
               For
               by
               the
               help
               of
               these
               Muscles
               lovers
               cast
               Sheeps-Eyes
               one
               at
               another
               .
            
          
           
             There
             is
             yet
             a
             seventh
             Muscle
             in
             Brutes
             ,
             
             which
             may
             be
             divided
             into
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             or
             four
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             a
             short
             Muscle
             ,
             compassing
             the
             optick
             Nerve
             ,
             fat
             coming
             between
             ,
             and
             being
             fleshy
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             an
             hard
             Coat
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ;
             to
             hold
             up
             the
             Eyes
             of
             Brutes
             which
             look
             down
             towards
             the
             Ground
             ,
             and
             to
             enwrap
             the
             soft
             optick
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             An
             eigth
             membranous
             Muscle
             may
             be
             added
             ,
             wherewith
             Brutes
             do
             wink
             .
          
           
           
             Some
             Animals
             have
             no
             Muscles
             .
             Scaliger
             proved
             it
             by
             Dissection
             in
             Cats
             ,
             yet
             Casserius
             pictures
             out
             the
             Muscle
             of
             a
             Cats
             Eye
             .
             A
             Chameleon
             indeed
             hath
             no
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             yet
             moves
             his
             Eyes
             every
             way
             ,
             and
             either
             of
             them
             backwards
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             a
             wrinkled
             membrane
             furnisht
             with
             Fibres
             ,
             as
             Panarolus
             does
             aver
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             are
             sent
             to
             the
             Eye
             ,
             a
             Vein
             from
             the
             Jugulars
             ,
             an
             Artery
             from
             the
             Caroticks
             ,
             
             disseminated
             through
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             Fat
             ,
             and
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             Eyes
             have
             the
             two
             first
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             commonly
             reckoned
             :
             
             The
             first
             is
             the
             Optick
             or
             seeing
             pare
             being
             thick
             and
             porous
             ,
             carrying
             from
             the
             Brain
             the
             Faculty
             of
             seeing
             with
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             or
             carrying
             the
             visible
             Representations
             of
             things
             to
             the
             Brain
             .
             It
             is
             inserted
             behind
             ,
             into
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Tunica
             cornea
             ,
             to
             which
             from
             the
             hard
             Tunicle
             or
             external
             Membrane
             it
             communicates
             a
             Coat
             ,
             and
             passes
             more
             inward
             to
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Retina
             ,
             into
             which
             its
             marrowy
             substance
             is
             spred
             abroad
             ;
             and
             somtimes
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             vitrea
             tunica
             ,
             sticks
             to
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Marrow
             .
             In
             Brutes
             it
             is
             inserted
             obliquely
             ,
             and
             not
             into
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             cornea
             tunica
             ,
             but
             into
             the
             side
             .
             The
             second
             is
             the
             
               Moving
               pare
            
             ,
             which
             goes
             into
             the
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             sends
             a
             little
             Branch
             into
             every
             muscle
             .
             ●ut
             touching
             these
             Nerves
             I
             shal
             discourse
             more
             largely
             in
             my
             Manual
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Membranes
             besides
             the
             external
             and
             the
             conjunctive
             (
             which
             is
             
             common
             )
             are
             but
             three
             and
             the
             
               Humors
               three
            
             .
             And
             as
             in
             a
             Nerve
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             threefold
             substance
             which
             enters
             the
             Eye
             :
             so
             these
             three
             substances
             do
             make
             the
             three
             Coats
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
             For
             the
             first
             Coat
             arises
             from
             the
             dura
             Mater
             ;
             the
             second
             from
             the
             pia
             Mater
             ;
             the
             third
             from
             the
             marrowy
             substance
             in
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             Tunica
             
               adnata
               alba
            
             or
             conjunctiva
             is
             smooth
             and
             thin
             ,
             arising
             from
             
             the
             Pericraneum
             .
             Some
             will
             have
             it
             arise
             from
             the
             Periosteum
             ,
             and
             end
             at
             the
             Circle
             of
             the
             Iris
             ,
             after
             it
             hath
             communicated
             a
             Coat
             to
             the
             Eye-lid
             .
             It
             is
             the
             outmost
             Coat
             of
             all
             ,
             next
             the
             bone
             .
             Hippocrates
             calls
             it
             the
             White
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             It
             fastens
             the
             Eye
             to
             the
             Socket
             and
             inner
             Bones
             like
             a
             Ligament
             .
             
          
           
             It
             is
             of
             exquisite
             Sense
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             sprinkled
             about
             with
             very
             many
             little
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             not
             appearing
             
             save
             when
             there
             is
             an
             Afflux
             of
             Humors
             ,
             for
             then
             they
             swell
             and
             are
             very
             red
             as
             in
             the
             Opththalmia
             or
             Blearey'd
             soreness
             ,
             which
             Disease
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             Part.
             
          
           
             This
             Adnata
             being
             removed
             ,
             the
             first
             that
             offers
             it self
             ,
             is
             the
             Sclirotica
             or
             dura
             
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             arises
             from
             the
             dura
             Mater
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             thick
             ,
             stretched
             ,
             equal
             ,
             and
             dark
             on
             the
             back
             part
             .
             The
             forepart
             of
             this
             they
             call
             tunica
             Cornea
             ,
             because
             
             it
             is
             polished
             and
             transparent
             like
             an
             horn
             :
             for
             it
             may
             be
             scaled
             into
             four
             plates
             ,
             over
             which
             the
             Epidermis
             is
             placed
             ,
             and
             involves
             the
             whol
             forepart
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
             It
             is
             next
             the
             sclirotica
             or
             dura
             ,
             firmly
             cleaving
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Choroides
             ,
             yet
             joyned
             with
             the
             Chrystalline
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             separate
             the
             watry
             and
             glassie
             Humors
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             called
             Choroides
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             like
             the
             Chorion
             ,
             and
             Vessels
             are
             
             sprinkled
             up
             and
             down
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             pia
             Mater
             ,
             being
             from
             the
             first
             Original
             blackish
             ,
             especially
             within
             ,
             that
             the
             Idea's
             received
             in
             a
             dark
             place
             ,
             might
             be
             the
             more
             illustrious
             .
             In
             Brutes
             it
             is
             of
             several
             Colours
             ,
             somtimes
             watchet
             ,
             &c.
             
             Under
             the
             transparent
             Cornea
             it
             is
             in
             men
             somtimes
             skie-colour'd
             ,
             somtimes
             blew
             ,
             or
             grey
             ,
             which
             Colours
             are
             seen
             through
             the
             Cornea
             .
             This
             in
             its
             forepart
             is
             termed
             Uvea
             ,
             by
             reason
             it
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             a
             Grape
             ,
             in
             which
             part
             it
             is
             thick
             and
             doubled
             :
             it
             is
             moveable
             and
             according
             to
             the
             diversity
             of
             the
             Object
             or
             Light
             ,
             it
             is
             contracted
             and
             dilated
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             very
             well
             discern
             in
             Cats
             .
             This
             forepart
             is
             also
             perforated
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             to
             let
             in
             the
             Species
             or
             Representations
             of
             visible
             Objects
             ,
             where
          
           
             The
             Pupilla
             or
             sight
             of
             the
             Eye
             is
             formed
             ,
             
             which
             in
             Mankind
             is
             round
             :
             in
             some
             Brutes
             of
             an
             oblong
             shape
             ,
             or
             long
             and
             round
             .
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             the
             compass
             of
             this
             hole
             or
             the
             Crown
             thereof
             ,
             being
             drawn
             with
             the
             point
             of
             a
             Pen-knife
             ,
             to
             have
             been
             cut
             off
             orbicularly
             ,
             which
             may
             better
             be
             seen
             in
             an
             Ox
             eye
             boyled
             ,
             which
             makes
             him
             think
             this
             Circumference
             to
             be
             a
             distinct
             Membrane
             from
             the
             Uvea
             ,
             since
             it
             hath
             peculiar
             fibres
             .
             But
             this
             is
             confuted
             by
             Plempius
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             Verge
             of
             the
             uvea
             tunica
             hath
             divers
             colours
             ,
             hence
             arises
          
           
             The
             Iris
             or
             Circle
             ,
             which
             
               Galen
               ,
               Casserius
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             
             reckon
             to
             be
             sixfold
             ,
             and
             Plempius
             but
             threefold
             :
             a
             double
             narrow
             one
             at
             the
             White
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             a
             third
             at
             the
             Sight
             true
             and
             larger
             ,
             illustrated
             with
             a
             constant
             colour
             .
             This
             Circle
             is
             seen
             variously
             coloured
             ,
             and
             where
             it
             makes
             the
             Iris
             ,
             it
             is
             somtimes
             skie-coloured
             ,
             otherwhiles
             fierie
             ,
             grey
             ,
             black
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             From
             the
             Circumference
             of
             the
             Uvea
             ,
             where
             it
             s
             duplicated
             Membrane
             
             bends
             it self
             back
             to
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             there
             arises
             a
             Ligament
             or
             
               Interstitium
               ciliare
            
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             are
             certain
             then
             filaments
             produced
             out
             of
             the
             Uvea
             representing
             the
             black
             Lines
             of
             the
             Eye-lids
             ,
             like
             Hairs
             ,
             and
             they
             compass
             the
             Chrystalline
             humor
             ,
             which
             by
             help
             of
             these
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             neighboring
             parts
             :
             it
             is
             moved
             with
             the
             Uvea
             being
             moveable
             .
             Cartesius
             will
             have
             its
             use
             to
             be
             to
             move
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             that
             the
             Situation
             thereof
             may
             be
             changed
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             various
             necessity
             of
             sight
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             Retina
             or
             Amphiblestroides
             as
             the
             Greeks
             call
             it
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             Netfashion'd
             
             Coat
             ,
             made
             of
             the
             inner
             substance
             of
             the
             Brain
             or
             of
             some
             Nerve
             spred
             out
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             pia
             Mater
             withal
             accompanying
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             if
             we
             believe
             Galen
             and
             Casserius
             .
             Therefore
             this
             soft
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             snotty
             matter
             may
             be
             gathered
             together
             ,
             compassing
             the
             vitreous
             Humor
             and
             its
             vitreous
             Coat
             like
             a
             Net.
             It
             is
             an
             exceeding
             thin
             coat
             ,
             but
             more
             dark
             then
             lightsom
             ,
             mixt
             with
             an
             obscure
             Redness
             ,
             because
             the
             Species
             received
             ,
             are
             here
             stopped
             and
             represented
             ;
             yet
             is
             it
             a
             little
             snotty
             ,
             with
             which
             Snot
             is
             somtimes
             white
             ,
             for
             the
             illustration
             of
             the
             Species
             received
             .
             In
             my
             Judgment
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             sliminess
             of
             the
             marrowy
             Substance
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             semicircular
             ,
             like
             a
             Mitre
             ,
             and
             its
             sides
             are
             near
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             for
             the
             distinct
             Representation
             of
             the
             Species
             .
          
           
             Platerus
             saies
             it
             hath
             no
             Vessels
             ;
             contrary
             to
             
               Galen
               ,
               Casserius
               ,
               Sylvius
            
             and
             others
             ,
             and
             Experience
             it self
             :
             for
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Choroides
             and
             the
             sclirotica
             tunica
             ,
             have
             Vessels
             manifestly
             apparent
             in
             this
             Coat
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             nourished
             with
             its
             contents
             .
             This
             compassing
             yet
             farther
             becomes
             the
             Aranea
             or
             Chrystalloides
             ,
             
             the
             proper
             Tunicle
             of
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             ,
             cloathing
             the
             fore
             and
             hinder
             part
             thereof
             ,
             white
             ,
             most
             thin
             and
             transparent
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             is
             cal'd
             the
             Looking-glass
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               VIII
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               The
               TABLE
               shews
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               the
               Tunicles
               and
               the
               Humors
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   horney
                   tunicle
                   with
                   the
                   Pupilla
                   or
                   sight
                   to
                   be
                   seen
                   through
                   it
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   right
                   Muscle
                   that
                   lifteth
                   up
                   the
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   internal
                   right
                   Muscle
                   or
                   the
                   Muscle
                   drawing
                   to
                   ,
                   or
                   shutting
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   right
                   internal
                   Muscle
                   or
                   the
                   drawing
                   from
                   ,
                   or
                   opening
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   right
                   external
                   or
                   opening
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   internal
                   crooked
                   Muscle
                   called
                   Trochlearis
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   external
                   oblique
                   Muscle
                   below
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               Shews
               the
               Muscles
               in
               a
               Sheeps
               Eye
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Optick
                   Nerves
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   seventh
                   Muscle
                   that
                   is
                   about
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   proper
                   to
                   Beasts
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   The
                   straight
                   Muscles
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   trochlear
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   lowest
                   oblique
                   Muscle
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   The
                   adnata
                   tunicle
                   in
                   its
                   place
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   The
                   Cornea
                   or
                   horney
                   tunicle
                   .
                
                 
                   cc.
                   The
                   uvea
                   tunicle
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   The
                   tunicle
                   sclorotis
                   .
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   The
                   hard
                   Membrane
                   of
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   The
                   tunicle
                   Choroides
                   .
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   The
                   thin
                   Membrane
                   of
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   The
                   Net-tunicle
                   called
                   Retina
                
                 
                   ii
                   .
                   The
                   marrowy
                   Substance
                   of
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   l.
                   The
                   inward
                   Marrow
                   affixed
                   to
                   the
                   Vitrea
                   .
                
                 
                   mm.
                   The
                   Chrystal
                   tunicle
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   The
                   Pupilla
                   .
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   The
                   shineing
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Cornea
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   watry
                   Humor
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Chrystalline
                   Humor
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   glassie
                   Humor
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               The
               adnata
               Tunicle
               separated
               from
               its
               place
               ,
               with
               many
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Nerve
                   Optick
                   taken
                   from
                   the
                   dura
                   Mater
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   dura
                   Mater
                   going
                   about
                   the
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   .
                
                 
                   CC
                   The
                   Sclerotis
                   opened
                   ,
                   through
                   which
                   the
                   Uvea
                   is
                   seen
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VI.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Optick
                   Nerve
                   covered
                   only
                   with
                   the
                   pia
                   Mater
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   Choroides
                   taken
                   from
                   the
                   Sclerotis
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   The
                   Veins
                   of
                   the
                   Sclerotis
                   .
                
                 
                   DD
                   The
                   Sclerotis
                   turned
                   inside
                   out
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   Rupture
                   of
                   the
                   Sclerotis
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VII
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Nerve
                   Optick
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   Uvea
                   unfolded
                   and
                   separated
                   in
                   part
                   from
                   the
                   Retina
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   Part
                   of
                   the
                   Retina
                   laid
                   bare
                   from
                   the
                   Uvea
                   ,
                   made
                   too
                   obscure
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VIII
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Retina
                   laid
                   bare
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   The
                   White
                   of
                   the
                   Eye
                   or
                   tunica
                   conjunctiva
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Cornea
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   Pupilla
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IX
               .
               The
               glassie
               tunicles
               with
               the
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Eye-lids
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               X.
               The
               watry
               Humor
               thickned
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               which
               there
               is
               a
               hollow
               to
               receive
               the
               forepart
               of
               the
               Chrystalline
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               XI
               .
               The
               glassie
               Humor
               with
               the
               Christalline
               in
               the
               middle
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               XII
               .
               The
               Chrystalline
               tunicle
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               XIII
               .
               The
               Chrystalline
               Humor
               in
               its
               proportion
               .
            
             
               page
               147
            
          
           
           
             I
             add
             the
             
               tunica
               Vitrea
            
             ,
             which
             covers
             the
             vitreous
             
             or
             glassie
             Humor
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             that
             it
             run
             not
             about
             ,
             and
             separates
             it
             from
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             .
             It
             is
             of
             exceeding
             smoothness
             and
             thinness
             ,
             shed
             about
             the
             Humor
             like
             a
             thin
             Skin
             ,
             not
             only
             in
             the
             convex
             part
             of
             the
             said
             Humor
             ,
             but
             also
             in
             its
             concave
             part
             ,
             where
             it
             receives
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             where
             indeed
             it
             cleaves
             close
             to
             the
             Chrystalline
             Coat
             ,
             but
             is
             different
             from
             it
             .
             It
             is
             furnished
             with
             many
             ,
             but
             very
             little
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             inner
             portion
             of
             the
             marrowy
             Substance
             of
             the
             Optick
             Nerve
             ,
             cleaves
             to
             the
             Centre
             thereof
             .
             The
             form
             is
             such
             as
             that
             of
             the
             glassie
             Humor
             ,
             large
             and
             convex
             behind
             ,
             and
             concave
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             Humors
             of
             the
             Eyes
             are
             three
             ,
             the
             watry
             ,
             the
             glassie
             ,
             and
             the
             Chrystalline
             :
             of
             
             which
             the
             last
             is
             the
             most
             noble
             ,
             and
             by
             some
             termed
             the
             Soul
             and
             
               Centre
               of
               the
               eyes
            
             .
          
           
             The
             watry
             because
             thin
             and
             fluxive
             like
             
             water
             ,
             occupies
             the
             whole
             space
             between
             the
             Tunica
             cornea
             ,
             and
             the
             fore
             part
             of
             the
             Chrystalline
             .
             Riolanus
             also
             proves
             that
             it
             is
             poured
             round
             about
             the
             vitreous
             Humor
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             of
             it
             is
             contained
             within
             the
             whole
             
               uvea
               tunica
            
             ;
             because
             the
             Eye
             being
             cut
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             ,
             water
             flows
             out
             as
             much
             as
             if
             it
             were
             cut
             before
             .
             But
             if
             the
             
               vitrea
               tunica
            
             be
             also
             cut
             with
             a
             large
             Wound
             ,
             no
             wonder
             if
             water
             flow
             from
             thence
             ,
             which
             Plempius
             also
             notes
             ;
             not
             to
             say
             how
             easily
             the
             inner
             parts
             are
             broken
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             rudely
             fingred
             .
             In
             the
             Humor
             Suffusions
             are
             made
             .
          
           
             This
             Humor
             is
             no
             animated
             part
             ,
             
             but
             seems
             only
             to
             be
             an
             Excrement
             remaining
             after
             the
             Nutrition
             of
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             :
             for
             it
             is
             both
             consumed
             in
             Diseases
             ,
             and
             lost
             in
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ;
             the
             other
             two
             humors
             are
             animated
             parts
             ,
             seeing
             they
             have
             their
             proper
             circumscription
             ,
             are
             nourished
             with
             blood
             brought
             Veinlets
             ,
             when
             perished
             they
             are
             not
             restored
             ,
             and
             are
             bred
             in
             the
             Womb
             :
             and
             the
             Chrystalline
             of
             the
             most
             pure
             lightful
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               watry
            
             Humor
             is
             to
             defend
             the
             bordering
             parts
             from
             driness
             :
             others
             add
             ,
             that
             as
             a
             medium
             it
             serves
             to
             break
             the
             brightness
             continually
             flowing
             in
             ,
             and
             to
             greaten
             the
             Representations
             of
             the
             Objects
             ,
             being
             straitned
             in
             the
             Pupilla
             or
             Sight
             .
          
           
             The
             Vitreous
             or
             glassie
             Humor
             is
             seen
             behind
             ,
             like
             molten
             Glass
             ,
             softer
             then
             
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             then
             which
             it
             is
             nevertheless
             five
             times
             bigger
             ,
             and
             twice
             as
             big
             as
             the
             watry
             Humor
             .
             It
             is
             round
             in
             its
             hinder
             part
             ,
             plane
             before
             ,
             but
             being
             concave
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             it
             makes
             an
             hollowness
             wherein
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             is
             placed
             as
             in
             a
             Pillow
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             not
             barely
             to
             nourish
             the
             Chrystalline
             ,
             as
             Galen
             conceived
             ,
             but
             to
             prepare
             and
             communicate
             Nourishment
             thereto
             .
             According
             to
             Aquapendent
             from
             whom
             Riolanus
             had
             the
             notion
             ,
             that
             the
             light
             carried
             beyond
             the
             chrystalline
             may
             not
             return
             defiled
             by
             dark
             and
             other
             coloured
             tinctures
             ,
             and
             so
             disturb
             the
             Sight
             .
             Platerus
             more
             rightly
             ,
             that
             the
             splendid
             vitreous
             Humor
             might
             fill
             up
             a
             necessary
             space
             between
             the
             Chrystalline
             and
             the
             Retina
             ,
             which
             others
             explain
             more
             clearly
             ,
             that
             the
             glassie
             .
             Humor
             may
             give
             a
             passage
             to
             the
             Species
             to
             the
             Retina
             ,
             and
             may
             refract
             them
             from
             Perpendiculars
             .
          
           
             The
             Chrystalline
             (
             which
             some
             call
             the
             icie
             because
             of
             its
             firmness
             )
             is
             so
             called
             
             from
             its
             exceeding
             bright
             and
             shineing
             colour
             ,
             which
             it
             hath
             ,
             being
             free
             from
             all
             other
             colours
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             receive
             all
             colours
             ,
             it
             is
             shineing
             ,
             indifferently
             ●●rd
             round
             behind
             ,
             with
             some
             longness
             ,
             flat
             on
             the
             foreside
             :
             howbeit
             according
             to
             the
             sundry
             affections
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             this
             form
             is
             variously
             changed
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             chief
             Medium
             of
             sight
             ,
             as
             a
             glass
             held
             before
             the
             hole
             ,
             receives
             the
             external
             species
             into
             a
             dark
             Closet
             ,
             even
             so
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             ,
             both
             receives
             and
             collects
             the
             Species
             or
             Representations
             of
             things
             .
             And
             because
             the
             humor
             is
             transparent
             ,
             the
             Species
             are
             no●
             stopped
             therein
             ,
             nor
             colours
             perceived
             ,
             which
             most
             Anatomists
             have
             beleived
             after
             Galen
             ;
             for
             otherwise
             there
             were
             no
             reason
             why
             they
             should
             not
             be
             as
             well
             perceived
             in
             the
             Cornea
             ,
             and
             vitreous
             Humor
             ,
             both
             transparent
             and
             animated
             .
             Therefore
             the
             sight
             is
             not
             primarily
             made
             in
             this
             Humor
             ,
             but
             the
             Species
             are
             discerned
             in
             the
             
               retina
               tunica
            
             ,
             because
             there
             they
             are
             stopped
             by
             a
             dark
             Body
             ,
             as
             we
             seen
             on
             the
             Wall
             of
             a
             Chamber
             ,
             when
             the
             Windows
             are
             shut
             .
          
           
             Scheinerus
             conceives
             ,
             that
             the
             Species
             which
             did
             represent
             all
             things
             the
             bottom
             upwards
             ,
             are
             corrected
             and
             refracted
             in
             the
             Chrystalline
             Humor
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             represent
             all
             things
             in
             their
             due
             posture
             .
             But
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             
               Job
               .
               Walaeus
               ,
               Fr.
               Sylvius
               ,
            
             and
             
               Fr.
               Vander
               Schagen
            
             ,
             the
             Choroides
             ,
             the
             Sclirotica
             ,
             and
             Retina
             tunica
             ,
             being
             taken
             away
             from
             behind
             ,
             all
             things
             are
             seen
             by
             the
             Eye
             ,
             and
             represented
             with
             the
             bottom
             upwards
             ;
             very
             small
             in
             an
             Oxes
             Eye
             ,
             somwhat
             greater
             in
             a
             Mans.
             Plempius
             proves
             the
             same
             by
             an
             Experiment
             of
             a
             glass
             Instrument
             filled
             with
             the
             three
             Humors
             ,
             placed
             before
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             Window
             ,
             where
             all
             things
             appear
             on
             the
             Wall
             with
             the
             wrong
             side
             upwards
             .
             And
             doubtless
             the
             Species
             must
             needs
             be
             represented
             with
             the
             bottom
             upwards
             in
             the
             Retina
             ,
             otherwise
             we
             should
             see
             all
             things
             the
             wrong
             end
             upwards
             ,
             and
             not
             right
             ,
             which
             Keplerus
             hereby
             demonstrates
             ,
             because
             in
             passion
             the
             Patients
             must
             be
             just
             opposite
             against
             the
             Agents
             .
          
           
             Others
             will
             have
             it
             ,
             that
             our
             Judgment
             corrects
             the
             depraved
             Figure
             ,
             which
             discerns
             the
             just
             Magnitude
             of
             things
             by
             very
             small
             Species
             received
             .
             Others
             alledg
             the
             common
             Sense
             ,
             which
             seeing
             the
             inverted
             species
             ,
             behind
             and
             above
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Retina
             ,
             apprehends
             them
             in
             their
             true
             posture
             .
             Finally
             others
             say
             that
             a
             true
             Judgment
             is
             therefore
             made
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             made
             by
             a
             right
             Line
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               IX
            
             .
             Concerning
             the
             Ears
             .
          
           
             THe
             Organ
             of
             Hearing
             ,
             viz.
             the
             EARS
             are
             either
             external
             or
             internal
             .
          
           
             The
             external
             which
             are
             by
             some
             termed
             Auriculae
             the
             Earlets
             ,
             are
             in
             Mankind
             of
             a
             semicircular
             Figure
             ,
             convex
             without
             ,
             concave
             within
             .
          
           
             The
             outer
             Ear
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             part
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             is
             broader
             ,
             and
             by
             some
             
             called
             Pinna
             ,
             by
             others
             Ala.
             The
             lower
             is
             soft
             and
             hanging
             down
             ,
             termed
             
               Fibra
               ,
               Auricula
               infima
               ,
               Lobus
               .
            
          
           
             The
             outer
             Circumference
             of
             the
             Ear
             is
             called
             Helix
             ,
             also
             Capreolus
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             wreathed
             formed
             .
             The
             inner
             part
             opposite
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             is
             termed
             Scapha
             or
             Anthelix
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             hereof
             is
             a
             large
             Cavity
             ,
             the
             principal
             part
             of
             the
             external
             Ear
             ,
             called
             Concha
             .
             But
             the
             Cavity
             near
             the
             
               Meatus
               auditorius
            
             or
             Hearing-passage
             ,
             where
             Ear-wax
             is
             collected
             ,
             is
             cal'd
             Alvearium
             .
             Towards
             the
             Temples
             there
             grows
             a
             certain
             eminency
             like
             a
             covering
             ,
             which
             either
             receives
             or
             hinders
             
             things
             that
             would
             go
             into
             the
             Eare
             ,
             and
             is
             termed
             Hircus
             the
             Goat
             ,
             because
             Hairs
             grow
             thereon
             .
          
           
             The
             Parts
             whereof
             the
             external
             Ear
             is
             composed
             ,
             are
             either
             common
             ,
             as
             the
             Skarf-Skin
             ,
             the
             Skin
             ,
             a
             Nervous
             Membrane
             ,
             Flesh
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             Fat
             in
             the
             Lobe
             :
             Or
             Proper
             ,
             as
             Muscles
             ,
             Vessels
             ,
             and
             a
             Gristle
             .
          
           
             The
             Skin
             is
             exceeding
             thin
             ,
             cleaving
             to
             a
             little
             Flesh
             with
             a
             firm
             Gristle
             ;
             and
             as
             in
             
             the
             Palms
             of
             the
             Hands
             a
             Nervous
             Membrane
             is
             firmly
             fasten'd
             thereto
             ;
             by
             the
             sense
             whereof
             it
             happens
             that
             cold
             water
             sprinkled
             on
             the
             Lap
             or
             Lobe
             of
             the
             Ear
             doth
             cool
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
             In
             the
             Lobe
             it
             is
             so
             mingled
             with
             Flesh
             ,
             that
             it
             becomes
             thereby
             fattish
             ,
             fleshy
             and
             spungy
             :
             Hence
             the
             Lobe
             is
             soft
             and
             flexible
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             may
             be
             bored
             with
             no
             great
             trouble
             ,
             and
             therefore
             some
             hang
             Jewels
             and
             Ear-rings
             thereon
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             Vessels
             :
             it
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             Jugulars
             .
             
          
           
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             Little
             Nerves
             ,
             two
             from
             behind
             ,
             and
             two
             from
             the
             sides
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             second
             pair
             termed
             Cervicale
             .
          
           
             Muscles
             rightly
             conspicuous
             in
             such
             as
             move
             their
             Ears
             ,
             are
             common
             or
             
             proper
             .
             which
             it
             was
             my
             luck
             once
             to
             see
             ,
             and
             such
             Justinian
             must
             have
             had
             ,
             whose
             Ears
             could
             move
             as
             Procopius
             describes
             him
             .
             But
             in
             most
             people
             the
             Ears
             are
             unmoveable
             ,
             both
             because
             of
             the
             smalness
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             
             because
             there
             was
             little
             need
             of
             their
             motion
             ,
             because
             a
             Man
             can
             do
             that
             with
             his
             Hands
             which
             Beasts
             do
             with
             their
             Ears
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             drive
             away
             flies
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             Muscle
             is
             common
             to
             the
             Ear
             
             and
             each
             Lip
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             a
             part
             of
             the
             first
             Muscle
             which
             moves
             the
             Cheeks
             ,
             and
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             termed
             Quadratus
             ,
             the
             
               square
               Muscle
            
             ,
             sufficiently
             thin
             and
             broad
             .
             It
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Ear
             under
             the
             Lobe
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             draw
             the
             Ear
             to
             one
             side
             downwards
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             proper
             and
             seated
             more
             foreward
             ,
             leaning
             upon
             the
             temporal
             
             Muscle
             ,
             from
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Forehead
             (
             from
             which
             it
             differs
             by
             the
             carriage
             of
             the
             Fibres
             )
             arising
             somtimes
             with
             a
             round
             ,
             otherwhiles
             with
             a
             corner'd
             beginning
             ,
             and
             being
             Tendinous
             ,
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             narrower
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             move
             the
             Ear
             upwards
             and
             forewards
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             and
             hinder
             more
             arises
             above
             the
             
               Processus
               mammillaris
            
             ,
             from
             
             the
             hind-part
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             its
             Muscle
             ,
             with
             a
             narrow
             beginning
             ;
             afterward
             growing
             broader
             and
             divided
             as
             it
             were
             into
             three
             parts
             ,
             it
             goes
             hindlongs
             to
             the
             Ear
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             draw
             it
             ,
             somwhat
             backwards
             and
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             arising
             from
             the
             
               Processus
               mammillaris
            
             ,
             being
             broad
             ,
             grows
             narrower
             
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             till
             at
             last
             it
             ends
             in
             a
             Tendon
             .
             This
             Muscle
             is
             rather
             threefold
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             three
             Insertions
             ,
             yet
             all
             spring
             confused
             from
             one
             place
             .
             Some
             of
             these
             are
             somtimes
             wanting
             ,
             otherwhiles
             they
             are
             all
             found
             ;
             somtimes
             there
             are
             more
             ,
             nature
             variously
             sporting
             her self
             in
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Ear.
             
          
           
             The
             Ears
             Gristle
             ,
             is
             a
             substance
             tied
             to
             the
             
               Os
               petrosum
            
             ,
             by
             a
             strong
             
             Ligament
             springing
             from
             the
             Pericranium
             .
          
           
             Certain
             Kernels
             there
             are
             outwardly
             
             about
             the
             Ears
             ,
             thick
             and
             large
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Parotides
             ,
             though
             this
             word
             do
             also
             signifie
             the
             swellings
             of
             the
             said
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             not
             only
             behind
             the
             
             Ears
             ,
             as
             is
             commonly
             imagined
             ,
             but
             on
             both
             sides
             and
             under
             the
             Ear
             ,
             but
             not
             above
             .
          
           
             These
             Kernels
             by
             the
             Ears
             are
             called
             the
             Emunctories
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             because
             they
             receive
             the
             Excrements
             thereof
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             also
             many
             other
             Kernels
             in
             
             the
             whole
             space
             which
             is
             under
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             ,
             in
             which
             many
             Diseases
             are
             bred
             ,
             and
             swellings
             called
             Scophulae
             in
             some
             Creatures
             ,
             as
             wild
             Swine
             .
             The
             common
             people
             count
             these
             Kernels
             a
             dainty
             dish
             and
             cal
             them
             Sweet-breads
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             moisten
             the
             parts
             ,
             and
             to
             assist
             in
             the
             divisions
             of
             the
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               External
               Ear
            
             is
             ,
          
           
             I.
             For
             Ornament
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             English
             ,
             Dutch
             and
             other
             Nations
             punish
             Male-factors
             by
             cutting
             of
             their
             Ears
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             saveguard
             the
             Brain
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             be
             hurt
             by
             the
             Air
             suddenly
             rushing
             in
             .
          
           
             III.
             To
             be
             the
             Organ
             of
             Hearing
             ,
             
             not
             principal
             ,
             but
             assistant
             .
             The
             true
             Organ
             lies
             within
             ,
             as
             doth
             that
             of
             the
             swelling
             .
             And
             as
             the
             Nose
             being
             cut
             off
             a
             Man
             can
             smel
             though
             imperfectly
             ;
             so
             if
             the
             Ears
             be
             quite
             cut
             off
             close
             to
             a
             Mans
             Head
             ,
             he
             can
             Hear
             ,
             but
             dully
             ,
             confusedly
             ,
             with
             a
             m●●mering
             noise
             ,
             so
             that
             Articulate
             words
             will
             seem
             as
             the
             noise
             of
             Water-streams
             ,
             or
             the
             screekings
             of
             Grass-hoppers
             ,
             as
             they
             know
             who
             have
             lost
             their
             Ears
             .
             Yea
             ,
             and
             the
             Hearing
             of
             that
             Ear
             which
             is
             not
             cut
             off
             ,
             is
             dammaged
             ,
             unless
             the
             cut
             Ear
             be
             stopped
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             therefore
             
               of
               the
               External
               Ear
            
             ,
             is
             more
             readily
             and
             rightly
             to
             receive
             sounds
             ;
             and
             to
             gather
             them
             when
             they
             are
             scattered
             in
             the
             Air
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             come
             unto
             the
             Drum
             without
             violence
             ,
             being
             first
             moderated
             and
             allayed
             in
             the
             hollow
             and
             winding
             passages
             .
             Hence
             ,
             least
             sounds
             which
             are
             diven
             towards
             the
             Ears
             ,
             should
             slip
             beside
             ,
             Beasts
             turn
             their
             Ears
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             to
             sounds
             .
             Hence
             also
             the
             Emperor
             Hadrianus
             ;
             that
             he
             might
             heat
             more
             distinctly
             ,
             would
             hold
             the
             hollow
             of
             his
             Hand
             before
             his
             Ears
             ,
             which
             also
             deaf
             persons
             frequently
             practise
             .
             Hence
             some
             Scythians
             ,
             whose
             earlets
             ar
             mortified
             and
             rottted
             of
             with
             cold
             ,
             doth
             apply
             a
             Fish-shell
             to
             their
             Ears
             ,
             that
             the
             Air
             being
             detained
             in
             the
             Cavity
             thereof
             ,
             may
             be
             more
             easily
             received
             ,
             that
             so
             they
             may
             hear
             the
             better
             .
             Hence
             ,
             they
             hear
             most
             exactly
             ,
             whose
             Ears
             stick
             furthest
             out
             from
             their
             Heads
             ,
             and
             if
             our
             Ears
             were
             not
             too
             much
             pressed
             down
             ,
             what
             by
             long
             lying
             upon
             them
             .
             what
             by
             the
             binding
             of
             Nurses
             ,
             we
             should
             hear
             better
             then
             we
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Internal
               Ear
            
             hath
             also
             sundry
             parts
             
             contained
             in
             the
             
               Os
               petrosum
            
             ,
             and
             besides
             the
             parts
             and
             little
             cavernes
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             there
             are
             :
             
               The
               Drum
            
             ,
             two
             
               Muscles
               ,
               the
               Vessels
            
             and
             
               inbred
               Air.
            
             
          
           
             In
             the
             auditory
             passage
             cloathed
             with
             Skin
             ,
             through
             which
             sounds
             are
             carryed
             ,
             is
             found
             a
             Cholerick
             clammy
             humor
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             cal'd
             Cerumen
             .
             Ear-wax
             ,
             being
             purged
             from
             the
             Brain
             ▪
             but
             Intrinsically
             it
             is
             obliquely
             placed
             before
             this
             hole
             or
             passage
             of
             Hearing
             .
          
           
           
           
           
           
           
             There
             is
             a
             certain
             Partition
             ,
             or
             little
             Orbicular
             Menbrane
             ,
             compassed
             with
             a
             boney
             circle
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             Myrinx
             ,
             others
             
               Sextum
               Membraneum
            
             and
             Mediastinum
             ,
             others
             Tympanum
             ,
             but
             some
             rightly
             
               mympani
               Membranula
            
             .
             For
             it
             is
             
             stretched
             before
             the
             internal
             Cavity
             containing
             the
             congenit
             Air
             ,
             as
             the
             Parchment
             or
             Velam
             on
             a
             Drum
             Head.
             Casserius
             conceives
             that
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Pericranium
             ,
             but
             Veslingius
             believe
             that
             it
             is
             an
             expansion
             of
             the
             Periosteum
             ,
             who
             hath
             also
             observed
             it
             to
             be
             double
             ,
             and
             also
             frequently
             crusted
             over
             by
             thickned
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             
               exceeding
               dry
            
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             sound
             the
             better
             ,
             for
             dry
             bodies
             are
             fittest
             for
             sound
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             Transparent
             thin
             and
             subtile
             ,
             that
             the
             sounds
             may
             more
             easily
             pass
             through
             
             to
             the
             implanted
             Air
             :
             For
             those
             that
             have
             it
             thick
             from
             their
             birth
             ,
             have
             an
             incurable
             Deafness
             ,
             as
             those
             also
             who
             have
             a
             thick
             Coat
             growing
             over
             the
             same
             without
             ,
             the
             Cure
             whereof
             is
             nevertheless
             taught
             by
             Paulus
             ;
             and
             if
             this
             happen
             from
             the
             birth
             ,
             such
             persons
             continue
             for
             the
             most
             part
             Dumb
             ,
             because
             they
             can
             neither
             conceive
             in
             their
             mind
             nor
             utter
             with
             their
             Tongue
             such
             words
             as
             they
             have
             never
             hard
             .
             But
             if
             a
             Snotty
             matter
             cleave
             thereto
             within
             ,
             or
             a
             thick
             Humor
             
             flow
             thereto
             ,
             a
             thickness
             of
             Hearing
             or
             a
             Deafness
             incurbale
             is
             thereby
             caused
             .
             If
             a
             thin
             Humor
             flow
             thereto
             ,
             there
             arise
             tinklings
             and
             noises
             in
             the
             Ears
             .
          
           
             Finally
             it
             is
             Nervous
             ,
             of
             so
             exquisite
             a
             Sense
             that
             ,
             it
             can
             neither
             bear
             the
             putting
             in
             of
             a
             Probe
             ,
             nor
             sharp
             Humors
             ;
             yet
             is
             it
             strong
             so
             as
             to
             endure
             against
             external
             Injuries
             ;
             for
             being
             hurt
             or
             corroded
             it
             causes
             thickness
             of
             Hearing
             or
             Deafness
             ,
             as
             they
             find
             by
             experience
             ,
             who
             have
             it
             hurt
             by
             the
             noise
             of
             great
             Guns
             or
             Bells
             ,
             or
             in
             whom
             it
             is
             broken
             by
             swimming
             .
             For
             the
             safeguard
             therefore
             hereof
             ,
             there
             are
             three
             little
             Bones
             added
             within
             (
             of
             which
             ,
             the
             Hammer
             sticks
             fast
             to
             the
             Drum
             ,
             and
             is
             seen
             through
             the
             same
             )
             and
             two
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             thereof
             is
             ,
             to
             shut
             the
             passage
             of
             hearing
             ,
             and
             to
             separate
             the
             innate
             Air
             from
             that
             which
             is
             external
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             it
             within
             .
             Also
             to
             save
             it
             from
             Dust
             ,
             Water
             ,
             creeping
             things
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Within
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Tympanum
             ,
             thereis
             an
             
               Internal
               Cavity
            
             in
             the
             
             Bone
             ,
             containing
             a
             certain
             Air
             ,
             which
             some
             term
             the
             inbred
             ,
             Congenit
             and
             complanted
             Air
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             placed
             in
             the
             Ears
             at
             the
             first
             formation
             ,
             being
             pure
             ,
             subtile
             and
             immoveable
             :
             which
             some
             count
             the
             internal
             Medium
             of
             Hearing
             ,
             others
             the
             Organ
             it self
             of
             that
             Sense
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             two
             Muscles
             of
             the
             inner
             Ear
             according
             to
             Anatomists
             .
             
          
           
             They
             call
             the
             first
             the
             Internal
             ,
             seated
             in
             the
             
               Os
               petreum
            
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             Tendon
             :
             The
             one
             being
             fixed
             to
             the
             higher
             process
             of
             the
             Hammer
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             its
             Neck
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Hammer
             obliquely
             inwards
             ,
             and
             to
             carry
             it
             inwards
             from
             the
             Anvil
             ,
             and
             the
             process
             of
             the
             Hammer
             being
             bowed
             back
             ,
             to
             drive
             the
             little
             Membrane
             inwards
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               is
               external
            
             ,
             found
             out
             by
             Casserius
             ,
             though
             Aquapendent
             doth
             likewise
             attribute
             to
             himself
             the
             Invention
             thereof
             ;
             it
             is
             exceeding
             smal
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             consisting
             in
             the
             upper
             Region
             of
             the
             Auditory
             passage
             ,
             with
             its
             Tendon
             implanted
             into
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Membrane
             ,
             there
             where
             the
             Hammer
             is
             inwardly
             joyned
             to
             the
             said
             Membrane
             .
             So
             that
             Parisanus
             labours
             in
             Vain
             by
             denying
             this
             Membrane
             in
             contradiction
             to
             Casserius
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Membrane
             with
             the
             Hammer
             outwards
             .
          
           
             A
             certain
             smal
             Gristly
             passage
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             which
             goes
             from
             the
             Concha
             of
             the
             Ear
             near
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Pterygoidean
             process
             ,
             to
             the
             Palate
             .
             Fallopius
             saies
             it
             is
             a
             conveighance
             of
             Water
             ,
             
               furnished
               with
               a
               smal
               Valve
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             ,
             an
             old
             Master
             of
             Anatomy
             ,
             denying
             that
             there
             is
             any
             such
             Valve
             to
             be
             found
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             hereof
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             purge
             the
             
             inbred
             Air
             ,
             for
             this
             way
             Excrements
             pass
             from
             the
             Ear
             into
             the
             mouth
             ,
             but
             ,
             not
             back
             again
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             a
             Valve
             to
             hinder
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             Reason
             that
             Masticatories
             are
             very
             helpful
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Ears
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             let
             in
             sound
             in
             Deaf
             and
             stopped
             Ears
             .
          
           
             Varro
             writes
             and
             Pliny
             with
             Archelaus
             ,
             that
             Goats
             draw
             in
             Breath
             at
             their
             Ears
             ,
             which
             Aristotle
             reports
             of
             Alcmeon
             .
             And
             such
             as
             are
             somwhat
             thick
             of
             hearing
             ,
             do
             perceive
             words
             more
             distinctly
             when
             they
             Gape
             ,
             and
             when
             our
             Ears
             are
             stopped
             ,
             we
             can
             hear
             our
             own
             Speech
             though
             weakly
             .
             Such
             as
             have
             the
             Venereal
             Disease
             ,
             are
             hurt
             not
             only
             with
             cold
             Air
             ,
             but
             with
             any
             other
             uneven
             noise
             ,
             passing
             through
             their
             Mouth
             into
             their
             Ears
             ,
             as
             Tulpius
             observes
             ,
             who
             also
             hath
             observed
             that
             two
             persons
             troubled
             with
             the
             Orthopnaea
             ,
             were
             saved
             from
             choaking
             ,
             by
             voiding
             their
             Breath
             out
             at
             their
             Ears
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             this
             passage
             .
             Those
             do
             abuse
             this
             passage
             ,
             who
             render
             the
             smoak
             of
             Tobacco
             which
             they
             take
             ,
             through
             their
             Ears
             .
          
           
             Finally
             ,
             we
             meet
             with
             the
             
               Nervous
               Auditories
            
             or
             Hearing
             Nerve
             ,
             which
             proceeds
             from
             the
             fift
             pair
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             entring
             the
             Ear
             through
             the
             hole
             of
             
               Os
               Petrosum
            
             .
             It
             touches
             the
             Cochlea
             and
             the
             Labyrinth
             with
             a
             double
             branch
             that
             it
             may
             in
             both
             places
             perfect
             the
             Hearing
             .
             To
             which
             a
             Branch
             is
             added
             to
             move
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             fourth
             pair
             ,
             and
             cleft
             in
             two
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               X.
            
             Of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             ANother
             Organ
             of
             Sense
             follows
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Nose
             the
             Instrument
             of
             smelling
             ,
             given
             to
             Men
             and
             fourfooted
             Beast
             that
             bring
             fourth
             living
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             divided
             ,
             as
             the
             Ear
             ,
             into
             the
             External
             and
             Internal
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             Internal
             hath
             Bones
             and
             Nerves
             ,
             
             with
             the
             Mammillary
             processes
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             
               their
               place
            
             .
          
           
             The
             External
             is
             Extrinsecally
             divided
             into
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             part
             .
          
           
             The
             
               upper
               part
            
             which
             is
             boney
             and
             immoveable
             ,
             is
             termed
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             it
             s
             Acuminated
             part
             ,
             Spina
             .
             The
             lower
             part
             is
             Gristley
             and
             moveable
             ,
             the
             utmost
             end
             wherof
             is
             termed
             Globulus
             and
             Orbiculus
             ,
             by
             the
             only
             feeling
             whereof
             
               Michael
               Scotus
            
             pretends
             to
             tel
             whether
             a
             Maiden
             have
             lost
             her
             Virginity
             .
             The
             lateral
             or
             side
             parts
             are
             termed
             
               Pterugia
               alae
               ,
               Pinnae
            
             ;
             that
             is
             Wings
             or
             Pinnacles
             ,
             that
             fleshy
             part
             which
             sticks
             out
             in
             the
             middle
             near
             the
             Lips
             ,
             is
             called
             Columna
             the
             Pillar
             .
          
           
             The
             Nose
             is
             divided
             within
             ,
             by
             a
             partition
             Wall
             ,
             into
             two
             Holes
             or
             Cavities
             which
             they
             call
             Nares
             the
             
             Nostrils
             :
             that
             one
             hole
             being
             stopped
             ,
             we
             may
             draw
             in
             and
             pass
             out
             the
             Air
             by
             the
             other
             .
             And
             when
             both
             are
             stopped
             ,
             the
             Mouth
             supplies
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             .
             Now
             each
             hole
             is
             again
             divided
             about
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Nose
             
               into
               two
               parts
            
             :
             the
             one
             ascends
             upwards
             ,
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Spongiosum
            
             ;
             the
             other
             goes
             above
             the
             Palate
             into
             the
             Throat
             and
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
             Hence
             drink
             somtimes
             comes
             out
             at
             the
             Nostrils
             :
             and
             things
             put
             into
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             the
             Nose
             being
             shut
             ,
             are
             wont
             to
             slip
             into
             the
             Mouth
             .
             Hence
             also
             the
             thicker
             Excrements
             also
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             while
             they
             are
             carryed
             downward
             to
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             may
             slide
             into
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             or
             be
             brought
             thither
             by
             Hawking
             ,
             and
             so
             purged
             out
             at
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             situate
             in
             an
             high
             place
             ,
             viz.
             between
             the
             Eyes
             .
             1.
             
             For
             comelyness
             Sake
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             all
             smels
             mount
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             Magnitude
             varies
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Figure
             ,
             for
             some
             have
             great
             Noses
             ,
             others
             little
             Noses
             ,
             some
             Hawkenoses
             and
             Roman-noses
             ,
             and
             others
             saddle-noses
             &c.
             
             Touching
             which
             Physiognomists
             Discourse
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             consists
             of
             the
             Scarf●-Skin
             ,
             
             
               Skin
               ,
               Muscles
               ,
               Bones
               ,
               Gristles
               ,
               Vessels
               ,
            
             and
             Tunicles
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Skin
             is
             thin
             ,
             and
             void
             of
             fat
             ,
             that
             
             it
             may
             not
             grow
             too
             much
             ;
             under
             the
             partion
             in
             the
             Colomme
             it
             is
             thick
             and
             Spungy
             ;
             so
             that
             it
             is
             like
             a
             Gristle
             and
             is
             compast
             with
             Hairs
             termed
             Vibrissae
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             eight
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             
             especially
             in
             large
             Nosed
             people
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             smal
             because
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Nose
             is
             little
             .
             
               Four
               serve
               to
               widen
               the
               Nose
               ,
            
             while
             the
             Alae
             or
             Wings
             being
             drawn
             upwards
             ,
             they
             open
             the
             holes
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             .
             And
             there
             are
             
               four
               more
               which
               straiten
               the
               Nose
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               two
               first
               widners
            
             being
             fleshy
             ,
             do
             arise
             from
             the
             Cheek-bone
             ,
             near
             the
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Lips
             ,
             which
             they
             make
             a
             third
             .
             They
             are
             inserted
             partly
             into
             a
             part
             of
             the
             upper
             Lip
             ,
             partly
             into
             the
             lower
             Wing
             .
             Casserius
             found
             them
             resembling
             the
             leaves
             of
             Myrtle
             .
          
           
             
               The
               IX
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Forehead
               ,
               Eye-lids
               ,
               Nose
               ,
               Cheeks
               ,
               Lips
               ,
               lower
               Jaw
               and
               Ear-let
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   a.
                   The
                   Pericranium
                   .
                
                 
                   b.
                   The
                   Periosteum
                   .
                
                 
                   c.
                   The
                   Hairy
                   Skin
                   or
                   Scalpe
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   The
                   Skull
                   made
                   bare
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   temporal
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   f.
                   The
                   upper
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Ear.
                   
                
                 
                   g.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Hind-part
                   of
                   the
                   Head
                   ,
                   stretched
                   out
                   to
                   the
                   hinder
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Ears
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Fore-head
                   .
                
                 
                   i.
                   A
                   frontal
                   Appendix
                   spred
                   out
                   upon
                   the
                   Back
                   of
                   the
                   Nose
                   .
                
                 
                   kkk
                   .
                   The
                   orbicular
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Eye
                   .
                
                 
                   l.
                   The
                   triangular
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Nostrils
                   .
                
                 
                   m.
                   The
                   common
                   muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Lips
                   ,
                   which
                   lefts
                   up
                   .
                
                 
                   n.
                   The
                   first
                   proper
                   muscle
                   of
                   the
                   upper
                   Lip.
                   
                
                 
                   o.
                   The
                   second
                   proper
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   upper
                   Lip.
                   
                
                 
                   p.
                   The
                   trumpeters
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   q.
                   The
                   chewing
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   r.
                   The
                   common
                   Muscle
                   depressing
                   the
                   Lips.
                   
                
                 
                   s
                   .
                   The
                   proper
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   lower
                   Lip
                   ,
                   caled
                   Mentalis
                   deprimens
                   .
                
                 
                   tt
                   .
                   The
                   third
                   commmon
                   Orbicular
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Lips.
                   
                
                 
                   u.
                   The
                   Circular
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Nose
                   .
                
                 
                   xxx
                   .
                   The
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Earlet
                   termed
                   Helix
                   .
                
                 
                   y.
                   The
                   opposite
                   Part
                   cal'd
                   Anthelix
                   .
                
                 
                   z.
                   The
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Ear-let
                   cal'd
                   Tragus
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Antitragus
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   The
                   Lobe
                   or
                   lap
                   of
                   the
                   Earlet
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               151
            
          
           
             The
             
               other
               two
            
             which
             are
             commonly
             triangular
             ,
             and
             like
             the
             Greek
             letter
             Δ
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             with
             a
             sharp
             and
             fleshy
             beginning
             ,
             do
             grow
             from
             the
             Suture
             of
             the
             Forehead
             by
             the
             
               Foramen
               lachrymale
            
             or
             Tear-hole
             ,
             and
             are
             implanted
             into
             the
             Spina
             or
             the
             Pinnae
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
             I
             have
             somtimes
             observed
             an
             Appendix
             thereof
             to
             have
             descended
             to
             the
             upper
             Lip
             ,
             viz
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             cannot
             lift
             up
             their
             Nose
             without
             their
             Lips.
             Casserius
             against
             the
             mind
             of
             all
             Anatomists
             ,
             draws
             its
             original
             from
             the
             Pinnae
             of
             the
             Nose
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             moveable
             .
          
           
             The
             
               two
               first
               Str●itners
            
             ,
             which
             are
             little
             do
             arise
             
             fleshy
             ,
             about
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Pinnae
             ,
             are
             carried
             along
             transversly
             ,
             and
             inserted
             into
             the
             corners
             of
             the
             Alae
             .
             Casserius
             did
             first
             of
             all
             observe
             a
             portion
             thereof
             and
             describe
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             alwaies
             found
             ;
             for
             more
             often
             the
             circular
             Sphincter
             involves
             the
             Pinnae
             of
             the
             Nose
             orbicularly
             .
             The
             Use
             thereof
             is
             a
             little
             to
             shut
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             depressing
             the
             Pinnae
             .
          
           
             The
             
               remaining
               two
            
             are
             exceeding
             firm
             and
             membranous
             ,
             lying
             hid
             under
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             in
             the
             inner
             part
             .
             They
             arise
             from
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Nose-bone
             ,
             and
             are
             implanted
             into
             the
             Pinnae
             or
             Wings
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Nose
             aforesaid
             ,
             I
             have
             found
             on
             the
             Nose-back
             of
             a
             certain
             person
             ,
             a
             
               fleshy
               Muscle
            
             ,
             thin
             ,
             stretched
             right
             out
             from
             the
             frontal
             muscle
             ,
             with
             a
             broad
             Basis
             ,
             and
             ending
             soon
             after
             ,
             narrower
             about
             the
             outmost
             Gristle
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             Gristles
             do
             make
             up
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             are
             five
             
             in
             number
             .
          
           
             The
             
               two
               uppermost
            
             being
             broad
             ones
             ,
             do
             stick
             unto
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             the
             more
             they
             descend
             ,
             the
             softer
             they
             grow
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Nose
             hath
             a
             substance
             ,
             partly
             gristly
             and
             partly
             ligamental
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             being
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             other
             two
             ,
             make
             sthe
             partition-wall
             between
             the
             two
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             By
             these
             are
             placed
             the
             
               other
               two
            
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Pinnae
             of
             the
             Nose
             are
             constituted
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             tied
             together
             by
             membranous
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             Vessels
             .
             It
             hath
             Veins
             from
             the
             Jugulars
             .
             
          
           
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             from
             the
             third
             pare
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             which
             goes
             through
             the
             holes
             common
             to
             the
             Nose
             and
             eyes
             ,
             at
             the
             greater
             corner
             into
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             the
             Palate
             .
          
           
             The
             Coat
             which
             cloaths
             the
             Nostrils
             is
             from
             the
             dura
             Mater
             ,
             and
             common
             to
             
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             Palate
             ,
             Tongue
             ,
             Larynx
             ,
             Gullet
             and
             Stomach
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             Nostrils
             it
             is
             thinner
             and
             of
             exquisite
             sense
             ;
             for
             being
             vexed
             it
             causes
             Sneezing
             :
             it
             is
             
             bred
             with
             many
             little
             holes
             which
             go
             into
             the
             
               Os
               cribrosum
            
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             informs
             us
             that
             within
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             there
             are
             spungy
             parcels
             of
             flesh
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             of
             a
             reddish
             colour
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             spungy
             bones
             of
             the
             Nose
             are
             filled
             ,
             of
             which
             being
             swelled
             ,
             the
             Disease
             in
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             called
             Polypus
             ,
             is
             bred
             ,
             touching
             the
             pulling
             out
             and
             cure
             whereof
             ,
             read
             Tulpius
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Use
               of
               the
               outer
               Nose
               is
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               through
               it
               air
               may
               enter
               into
               
               the
               Brain
               for
               the
               needs
               of
               the
               Animal
               Spirits
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               by
               it
               air
               may
               enter
               into
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               for
               the
               cooling
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               to
               breed
               vital
               Spirits
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               by
               the
               Nostrils
               Odours
               may
               be
               carried
               to
               the
               Mammillary
               processes
               ,
               which
               lie
               concealed
               above
               the
               
                 Os
                 cribrosum
              
               .
               And
               therefore
               they
               whose
               Nose
               is
               cut
               off
               at
               the
               Roots
               ,
               cannot
               smell
               at
               all
               ,
               or
               badly
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               That
               the
               Excrements
               of
               the
               Brain
               may
               flow
               down
               there
               through
               ,
               as
               by
               a
               Channel
               .
               Which
               is
               but
               a
               secondary
               use
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               because
               
                 Jo.
                 Walaeus
                 ,
                 Jo.
                 Dom.
                 Sala
              
               my
               Masters
               and
               my self
               ,
               have
               known
               some
               persons
               that
               never
               voided
               any
               Excrements
               at
               their
               Nose
            
             
               5.
               
               It
               is
               also
               somtimes
               assistant
               to
               the
               Voice
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               It
               adds
               an
               Ornament
               to
               the
               Face
               .
               It
               is
               storied
               in
               the
               Chronicles
               of
               England
               ,
               how
               a
               company
               of
               honest
               Maidens
               of
               that
               Country
               ,
               in
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Daneish
               War
               ,
               did
               cut
               off
               their
               own
               Noses
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               preserve
               their
               Maidenheads
               from
               the
               violence
               of
               the
               Daneish
               Soldiers
               ,
               by
               this
               deformity
               .
               This
               was
               the
               punishment
               of
               Adulterers
               in
               Aegypt
               ,
               which
               also
               Jebovah
               threatens
               to
               the
               Inhabitants
               of
               Hierusalem
               ,
               by
               the
               Prophet
               Ezekiel
               .
               In
               our
               Historiographer
               Saxo
               ,
               we
               read
               how
               Hialto
               deformed
               a
               Curtezan
               by
               cutting
               off
               her
               Nose
               ,
               when
               she
               asked
               him
               who
               should
               be
               her
               next
               Lover
               .
               And
               therefore
               because
               it
               makes
               much
               for
               the
               Ornament
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               the
               
                 Chirurgia
                 Curtorum
              
               was
               invented
               ,
               teaching
               how
               to
               supply
               a
               Nose
               in
               the
               room
               of
               that
               which
               is
               cut
               off
               ,
               of
               which
               see
               Tagliacotius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             Cheeks
             and
             Lips.
             
          
           
             THe
             last
             Organ
             of
             Sense
             remains
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Tongue
             the
             Organ
             of
             Tasting
             ,
             which
             before
             I
             explain
             ,
             I
             must
             propound
             the
             external
             parts
             about
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             the
             internal
             parts
             in
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             The
             external
             parts
             about
             the
             mouth
             are
             sundry
             .
             The
             upper
             part
             under
             the
             
             Eyes
             ,
             between
             the
             Nose
             and
             the
             Ears
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             usual
             Redness
             ,
             and
             the
             unusual
             by
             reason
             of
             blushing
             ,
             is
             called
             
               Pudoris
               sedes
            
             the
             
               Seat
               of
               shamefastness
               ,
               Maium
            
             or
             Pomum
             the
             Apple
             ,
             also
             
               Circulus
               Faciei
            
             ,
             the
             Circle
             of
             the
             Face
             .
          
           
             The
             lower
             and
             looser
             part
             which
             may
             be
             blown
             up
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Trumpeters
             ,
             is
             termed
             Bucca
             the
             Cheek
             ,
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Lip
             is
             called
             Mystax
             .
             The
             Cavity
             imprinted
             therein
             and
             dividing
             the
             same
             ,
             is
             called
             Philtrum
             ,
             from
             its
             loveliness
             .
             Now
             the
             Lips
             are
             two
             ,
             the
             upper
             and
             the
             lower
             ,
             and
             the
             chink
             between
             both
             ,
             is
             termed
             Os
             the
             Mouth
             .
             The
             outer
             parts
             of
             the
             Lips
             which
             hang
             over
             ,
             are
             called
             Prolabia
             .
             The
             lower
             part
             under
             the
             lower
             Lip
             is
             called
             Mentum
             the
             Chin
             ;
             the
             fleshy
             part
             under
             the
             Chin
             is
             termed
             Buccula
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Mouth
             consists
             of
             parts
             ,
             partly
             boney
             ,
             as
             the
             upper
             and
             
               lower
               Jaw
            
             with
             the
             teeth
             ;
             partly
             fleshy
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Lips
               ,
               Lip-muscles
               ,
               Cheek-muscles
            
             ,
             and
             
               lower
               Jaw-muscles
            
             .
          
           
             The
             whole
             inner
             capacity
             of
             the
             Mouth
             is
             cloarhed
             with
             a
             thick
             Coat
             ,
             which
             goes
             also
             about
             the
             Gums
             and
             Lips
             ,
             and
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             doubled
             when
             it
             constitutes
             the
             Uvula
             .
          
           
             
               The
               
                 Uses
                 of
                 the
                 Mouth
              
               are
               :
               
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               receive
               in
               Meat
               and
               Drink
               ,
               and
               to
               prepare
               the
               same
               ,
               or
               begin
               Chylification
               the
               beginning
               ,
               of
               which
               is
               performed
               in
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               receive
               in
               and
               let
               out
               the
               Air.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               speak
               and
               frame
               the
               Voice
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               To
               give
               passage
               to
               the
               Excrements
               of
               the
               lungs
               ,
               the
               Head
               and
               Stomach
               ,
               by
               hawking
               ,
               spitting
               ,
               and
               vomiting
               .
            
          
           
             
               Two
               pare
               of
               Muscles
            
             there
             are
             ,
             common
             
             to
             the
             Cheeks
             and
             Lips
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             two
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             that
             same
             broad
             and
             square
             muscle
             lying
             under
             the
             skin
             of
             the
             neck
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             did
             not
             distinguish
             from
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             about
             the
             Channel-bones
             ,
             and
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             and
             with
             oblique
             Fibres
             (
             which
             a
             Surgeon
             must
             diligently
             observe
             ,
             least
             he
             cut
             them
             freely
             and
             athwart
             ,
             and
             so
             make
             the
             Cheeks
             to
             be
             pulled
             
             away
             to
             one
             side
             )
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             Chin
             ,
             the
             Lips
             and
             Root
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             of
             the
             Ears
             :
             which
             parts
             also
             it
             moves
             to
             the
             part
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             first
             cramped
             in
             
             the
             
               Spasmus
               Cynicus
            
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             lies
             under
             this
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             Cheeks
             with
             its
             Bulk
             ,
             and
             therefore
             is
             termed
             Buccinator
             the
             trumpetting
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             is
             most
             conspicuous
             in
             Trumpetters
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             round
             like
             a
             Circle
             ,
             thin
             and
             membranous
             ;
             interwoven
             with
             sundry
             Fibres
             ,
             
             inseparably
             clothed
             with
             the
             coat
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Centre
             hereof
             Casserius
             hath
             observed
             a
             certain
             strong
             band
             ,
             breeding
             from
             without
             ,
             and
             creeping
             to
             the
             Cheek-bone
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             terminated
             into
             a
             certain
             small
             and
             lean
             Muscle
             ,
             directly
             opposite
             to
             the
             Bucca
             .
          
           
             This
             Muscle
             arises
             from
             the
             upper
             Cheek-bone
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             lower
             ,
             at
             the
             Roo●s
             of
             the
             Gums
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             move
             the
             Cheeks
             and
             Lips
             :
             and
             it
             is
             to
             the
             teeth
             instead
             of
             an
             hand
             ,
             while
             it
             thrusts
             the
             meat
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             to
             the
             teeth
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             more
             exactly
             chewed
             .
          
           
             The
             Lips
             consist
             of
             undigested
             spungy
             flesh
             (
             Fallopius
             reckons
             it
             for
             the
             ninth
             pare
             
             of
             Muscles
             which
             move
             the
             Lips
             )
             whose
             Skin
             is
             so
             mingled
             with
             Muscles
             ,
             that
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             musculous
             Skin
             ,
             or
             a
             skinny
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             covered
             with
             a
             Coat
             common
             to
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Stomath
             :
             
             and
             thence
             it
             is
             that
             in
             such
             as
             are
             ready
             to
             vomit
             ,
             the
             lower
             Lip
             trembles
             .
          
           
             The
             parts
             of
             the
             Lips
             which
             touch
             one
             another
             are
             red
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             afflux
             of
             blood
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               shut
               in
               the
               Mouth
               and
               Teeth
               ,
               and
               to
               defend
               the
               inner
               parts
               from
               cold
               and
               external
               Injuries
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               the
               conveniency
               of
               Eating
               and
               Drinking
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               the
               Voice
               and
               Speech
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               To
               cast
               out
               the
               Spittle
               ,
               and
               therefore
               that
               Servants
               might
               not
               spit
               nor
               speak
               ,
               they
               were
               bound
               with
               Skins
               ,
               as
               
                 Ammianus
                 Marcellinus
              
               informs
               us
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               For
               Ornament
               .
            
          
           
             There
             are
             some
             
               proper
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lips
            
             besides
             the
             common
             ones
             aforesaid
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             may
             vary
             in
             respect
             of
             number
             .
             Some
             reckon
             fewer
             ,
             and
             others
             more
             :
             for
             some
             are
             by
             some
             Authors
             counted
             simple
             ,
             which
             others
             reckon
             to
             be
             manifold
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             Muscles
             which
             move
             the
             upper
             Lip
             ,
             are
             on
             each
             side
             two
             .
             Three
             there
             are
             which
             move
             both
             Lips.
             The
             lower
             Lip
             is
             moved
             only
             by
             one
             proper
             pare
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pare
            
             proper
             to
             the
             upper
             lip
             ,
             is
             a
             remarkable
             pare
             described
             by
             Fallopius
             ,
             
             which
             
               slipping
               down
            
             from
             the
             corner
             betwixt
             the
             Eyes
             and
             Nose
             ,
             is
             straight
             way
             sunk
             into
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             upper
             Lip.
             
          
           
             The
             other
             pare
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             just
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Cheeks
             under
             the
             Socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             thin
             but
             broad
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             sunk
             into
             store
             of
             Fat
             ,
             is
             carried
             down
             wards
             right
             on
             ,
             to
             the
             upper
             Lip
             ,
             which
             moves
             it
             directly
             upwards
             with
             the
             first
             pare
             .
             Sometimes
             also
             it
             is
             obliquely
             inserted
             into
             the
             confines
             of
             both
             the
             Lips
             ,
             wherefore
             some
             do
             make
             two
             pare
             therof
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pare
            
             common
             to
             both
             Lips
             ,
             is
             long
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             broad
             at
             the
             
             beginning
             ;
             arises
             outwardly
             from
             the
             Jugal
             process
             ,
             and
             descending
             obliquely
             through
             the
             Cheeks
             ,
             it
             is
             terminated
             in
             the
             space
             between
             the
             two
             Lips.
             Sometimes
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             from
             the
             beginning
             drawn
             out
             as
             a
             Rope
             to
             the
             first
             proper
             pare
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ;
             to
             draw
             both
             the
             Lips
             obliquely
             upwards
             towards
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               common
               pare
            
             of
             the
             Lips
             ,
             from
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             to
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             chin
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             arises
             with
             a
             broad
             beginning
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             stretched
             out
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             chin
             ,
             grows
             by
             little
             and
             little
             narrower
             '
             till
             it
             is
             obliquely
             inserted
             into
             the
             same
             confine
             of
             each
             Lip
             ,
             but
             lower
             ,
             which
             draws
             away
             the
             Lips
             obliquely
             downwards
             and
             outwards
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             grin
             and
             gern
             for
             anger
             .
          
           
             The
             
               third
               Muscle
            
             common
             to
             the
             two
             Lips
             is
             circular
             like
             a
             Sphincter
             encompassing
             and
             constituting
             the
             whole
             Mouth
             ,
             spungy
             ,
             and
             firmly
             sticking
             to
             the
             ruddy
             Skin
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Mouth
             together
             ,
             when
             people
             simper
             as
             Virgins
             are
             wont
             to
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             
               proper
               pare
            
             of
             the
             
               lower
               Lip
            
             is
             called
             
             
               Par
               Mentale
            
             ,
             the
             
               Chin-pare
               ;
               arising
            
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Chin
             with
             a
             broad
             beginning
             ,
             and
             aseends
             directly
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             lower
             Lip
             ,
             which
             it
             moves
             downwards
             .
          
           
             Now
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Lips
             ,
             are
             so
             mixed
             with
             the
             Skin
             ,
             that
             the
             Fibres
             do
             cross
             one
             another
             mutually
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             motions
             of
             the
             Lips
             are
             very
             divers
             .
          
           
             To
             cause
             that
             exquisite
             Sense
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Lips
             ,
             Branches
             of
             Nerves
             are
             sent
             thither
             ,
             and
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             from
             the
             neighbouring
             places
             :
             from
             whence
             that
             same
             ruddy
             splendor
             of
             the
             Lips
             proceeds
             ,
             a
             note
             of
             Beauty
             and
             of
             Health
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Muscles
               of
               the
               lower
               Jaw
            
             (
             for
             it
             is
             
             moved
             )
             the
             upper
             being
             immoveable
             )
             some
             reckon
             eight
             ,
             others
             ten
             ,
             called
             
               Masticatorij
               ,
               Mansorij
               ,
               Molares
            
             ,
             Chewers
             ,
             Eaters
             ,
             Grinders
             ,
             because
             they
             serve
             for
             the
             chewing
             or
             grinding
             of
             the
             meat
             .
             One
             only
             pare
             depresses
             the
             Jaw
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             apt
             to
             go
             downwards
             of
             it self
             :
             the
             other
             pares
             setch
             it
             up
             ,
             which
             are
             exceeding
             strong
             ones
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             some
             can
             take
             heavy
             weights
             from
             the
             ground
             with
             their
             teeth
             ,
             and
             so
             carry
             them
             .
             Hence
             phrantick
             and
             otherwise
             distracted
             persons
             do
             shut
             their
             mouths
             with
             so
             much
             stubbornness
             and
             strength
             ,
             that
             they
             can
             hardly
             be
             opened
             with
             great
             force
             and
             iron
             Instruments
             .
             Contrariwise
             ,
             the
             stubbornest
             person
             in
             the
             World
             may
             be
             compelled
             without
             much
             ado
             ,
             to
             shut
             his
             or
             her
             mouth
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             Muscle
             is
             termed
             Crotaphites
             ,
             
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             from
             its
             Scituation
             ,
             because
             it
             possesses
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             greatest
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             firm
             and
             strong
             ,
             yet
             firmer
             and
             stronger
             in
             some
             Beasts
             ,
             as
             Lyons
             ,
             Wolves
             ,
             Dogs
             ,
             Swine
             ,
             &c.
             which
             were
             naturally
             to
             bite
             hard
             ▪
          
           
             Forth
             End
             of
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             begining
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             ,
             which
             
             it
             moves
             and
             draws
             upwards
             ,
             and
             so
             shuts
             the
             mouth
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             terminated
             in
             a
             sharp
             process
             ,
             with
             a
             tendinous
             Nerve
             short
             and
             strong
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Temples
             wich
             a
             beginning
             broad
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             semicircular
             ,
             and
             by
             little
             and
             little
             grows
             narrower
             as
             it
             descends
             .
          
           
             Three
             Nerves
             are
             on
             each
             side
             inserted
             
             thereinto
             ,
             two
             from
             the
             third
             pare
             ,
             another
             from
             the
             fift
             pare
             .
             And
             therefore
             this
             Muscle
             being
             wounded
             or
             bruised
             ,
             there
             is
             great
             danger
             of
             Convulsion
             and
             
             of
             Death
             in
             conclusion
             ;
             especially
             if
             the
             lower
             part
             be
             hurt
             which
             is
             most
             Nervous
             .
             And
             because
             of
             the
             distention
             hereof
             ,
             Hypocrates
             did
             pronounce
             the
             Luxation
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             to
             be
             deadly
             ;
             unless
             it
             were
             put
             presently
             in
             joynt
             again
             .
          
           
             For
             safeguard
             sake
             ,
             Nature
             hath
             given
             it
             ,
             1.
             
             A
             Membrane
             thick
             and
             hard
             ,
             and
             black
             and
             blew
             in
             color
             ,
             wherewith
             it
             is
             covered
             ,
             and
             shines
             with
             a
             neat
             color
             ;
             the
             Pericraneum
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Muscle
             being
             all
             fleshy
             ,
             doth
             there
             stick
             to
             the
             bone
             without
             the
             Pericranium
             .
             2.
             
             The
             
               Os
               jugale
            
             over
             the
             lower
             part
             Tendinous
             and
             Nervous
             .
             3.
             
             She
             hath
             fenced
             the
             Tendon
             with
             flesh
             above
             and
             beneath
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             Muscle
             is
             the
             
               Mansorius
               primus
               ,
               first
               chewer
            
             ,
             called
             
               Masseter
               ,
               Molitor
            
             ,
             
             and
             Mandibularis
             ,
             or
             Lateralis
             ,
             seated
             in
             the
             Cheeks
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             a
             double
             Head
             :
             the
             one
             fleshy
             ,
             the
             other
             Nervous
             ,
             from
             the
             
               Os
               jugale
            
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             bone
             of
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             .
             It
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Jaw-bone
             (
             by
             a
             Connexion
             sufficiently
             broad
             and
             strong
             )
             which
             it
             turns
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             are
             eating
             .
             For
             the
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Head
             do
             so
             interfere
             and
             cross
             one
             another
             ,
             that
             they
             move
             the
             Jaw
             both
             forwards
             and
             backwards
             and
             side-wayes
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             pair
             is
             the
             Pterygoides
             or
             
               Alare
               externum
            
             ,
             the
             outward
             Wing-muscle
             ,
             the
             
             finding
             whereof
             we
             owe
             to
             Fallopius
             ;
             but
             Vesalius
             accounts
             it
             a
             part
             of
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             .
             'T
             is
             seated
             under
             the
             temporal
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Sphaenoideum
            
             and
             the
             external
             
               processus
               Alaris
            
             ,
             with
             a
             beginning
             partly
             Nervous
             and
             partly
             fleshy
             .
             
               'T
               is
               implanted
            
             into
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             and
             the
             inner
             seat
             of
             the
             Head
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             move
             forwards
             and
             thrust
             out
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             termed
             
               Mansorius
               alter
            
             ,
             the
             other
             Chewer
             ,
             or
             
               Alaris
               internus
            
             ,
             being
             
             thick
             and
             short
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             Nervous
             from
             the
             Productions
             of
             
               Os
               Sphaenoideum
            
             called
             
               Alatae
               internae
            
             ;
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             inner
             and
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Jaw
             ,
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             strong
             Tendon
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Jaw
             upward
             and
             backward
             ,
             to
             assist
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             is
             termed
             Graphyoides
             ,
             because
             
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             Appendix
             Styloides
             ,
             Membranou
             ,
             s
             and
             broad
             ,
             and
             soon
             becoming
             round
             and
             fleshy
             ,
             t
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Chin.
             Hence
             it
             is
             seen
             to
             have
             a
             double
             belly
             ,
             and
             therefore
             't
             is
             also
             termed
             Digastricus
             ,
             twi-belly
             .
             'T
             is
             fastned
             to
             a
             Ligament
             least
             it
             should
             go
             too
             far
             back
             .
             For
             ,
          
           
             Its
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Jaw
             downwards
             and
             so
             to
             open
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             Others
             do
             reckon
             for
             another
             pair
             ,
             part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               quadratus
            
             ,
             fixed
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Chin.
             Which
             broadest
             Muscle
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             the
             Channel
             bone
             and
             the
             Shoulder
             tip
             ,
             and
             covering
             the
             Neck
             and
             the
             whole
             Face
             ,
             after
             
               Galen
               ,
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             and
             
               Theophilus
               ,
               Riolanus
            
             describes
             in
             this
             place
             .
             I
             spoke
             thereof
             ,
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               12.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Parts
             contained
             in
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Gums
             ,
             Palate
             ,
             Uvula
             ,
             Fauces
             ,
             and
             Throat-bone
             .
          
           
             PArts
             contained
             in
             the
             Mouth
             besides
             the
             Teeth
             :
             are
             the
             
               Gums
               ,
               Palate
               ,
               Uvula
               ,
               Fauces
               ,
               Tongue-bone
               ,
               Tongue
               ,
               Almonds
               or
               Tonsillae
               ,
               Larrnx
               ,
               and
               beginning
               of
               the
               Gullet
               .
            
             Of
             the
             three
             later
             I
             spoke
             in
             my
             second
             Book
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Connexion
             of
             Parts
             .
             Of
             the
             five
             former
             ,
             we
             will
             treat
             in
             this
             Chapter
             and
             of
             the
             Tongue
             in
             the
             Chapter
             following
             .
          
           
             GINGIVA
             the
             Gum
             ,
             is
             an
             hard
             flesh
             compassing
             the
             Teeth
             like
             a
             Rampart
             ,
             and
             in
             
             such
             as
             have
             lost
             their
             Teeth
             ,
             serving
             in
             some
             measure
             to
             chew
             their
             meat
             :
             which
             being
             either
             eaten
             away
             ,
             or
             too
             much
             relaxed
             ,
             or
             overdryed
             ,
             the
             Teeth
             become
             loose
             ,
             or
             fall
             out
             .
          
           
             PALATUM
             the
             Palate
             ,
             is
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Mouth
             moderately
             hollow
             ,
             like
             the
             
             Roof
             of
             an
             House
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             called
             the
             Heaven
             of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             is
             the
             Basis
             or
             Foundation
             on
             which
             the
             Brain
             rests
             ,
             being
             made
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sphaenoideum
            
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             invested
             with
             a
             
               thick
               Coat
            
             arising
             from
             the
             
               dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             which
             covers
             the
             Cheeks
             and
             whole
             mouth
             on
             their
             Insides
             ,
             and
             is
             common
             to
             the
             Gullet
             and
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             therefore
             there
             is
             also
             a
             consent
             between
             these
             parts
             .
             Nor
             can
             we
             purge
             the
             Head
             with
             Masticatories
             ,
             unless
             we
             purge
             also
             the
             Stomach
             by
             the
             Palate
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             furnished
             with
             
               small
               Nerves
            
             for
             Sense
             .
          
           
             The
             UVULA
             hangs
             from
             the
             Palate
             further
             into
             the
             Mouth
             near
             the
             passages
             
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             over
             the
             Chink
             of
             the
             Larynx
             among
             the
             Almonds
             or
             Kernels
             so
             called
             .
             Some
             call
             it
             Gargareon
             ,
             from
             the
             noise
             it
             makes
             when
             we
             Gargle
             any
             Liquor
             ;
             't
             is
             also
             called
             Gurgulio
             and
             Columna
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             Process
             made
             of
             a
             Glandulous
             ,
             Spungy
             and
             red
             Substance
             ,
             which
             Columbus
             doth
             suppose
             to
             be
             made
             of
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Palate
             Reduplicated
             in
             that
             place
             .
             Riolanus
             rather
             believes
             that
             it
             is
             flesh
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             are
             carried
             to
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             
               roundel
               '
               long
            
             ,
             thicker
             above
             ,
             and
             ends
             in
             an
             acute
             Figure
             obtusely
             .
             It
             is
             
             suspended
             and
             held
             up
             by
             two
             little
             Muscles
             ,
             an
             Internal
             and
             an
             External
             pair
             ,
             either
             to
             stir
             the
             Uvula
             Forward
             and
             Backward
             in
             the
             time
             of
             swallowing
             ,
             or
             when
             it
             is
             relaxed
             with
             Humors
             and
             falls
             down
             ,
             to
             draw
             it
             up
             again
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             ,
             from
             Aretaeus
             ,
             the
             
               Author
               of
               Anatomia
               Vivorum
               ,
               Abensina
            
             and
             Carpus
             ,
             describes
             two
             broad
             Ligaments
             fastening
             the
             Uvula
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             like
             to
             wings
             spred
             abroad
             ,
             which
             the
             Arabians
             term
             Galsamach
             of
             which
             he
             is
             worthy
             to
             be
             consulted
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             by
             reason
             of
             Humors
             too
             much
             flowing
             in
             ,
             it
             hangs
             two
             much
             
             down
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Casus
               Uvulae
            
             the
             
               falling
               down
               of
               the
               Palate
               of
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             Which
             if
             it
             cannot
             be
             restored
             to
             its
             place
             by
             Medicaments
             nor
             manual
             operation
             ,
             s
             it
             is
             wont
             to
             be
             burnt
             and
             cut
             by
             Skilful
             Chirurgeo●u
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               X.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               are
               shewn
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
                 ,
                 Uvula
              
               ,
               and
               certain
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Gargareon
                     or
                     Uvula
                     ,
                     in
                     English
                     the
                     Palate
                     of
                     the
                     Mouth
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     An
                     outward
                     pair
                     of
                     Muscles
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     Its
                     tendon
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     An
                     inner
                     pair
                     of
                     Muscles
                     ,
                     a
                     little
                     compressed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Roof
                     of
                     the
                     Mouto
                     ,
                     at
                     which
                     the
                     Uvula
                     bangs
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               &
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Basis
                     of
                  
                   Os
                   Hyoides
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     sides
                     or
                     borns
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Bone.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     Two
                     Gristly
                     Appendixes
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     tongue
                     ,
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     external
                     Face
                     of
                     the
                     Styloides
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     second
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     tongue
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     A
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     third
                     pair
                     called
                  
                   Genio-glossum
                   .
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     fift
                     pair
                  
                   Cerato-glossum
                   ,
                   
                     scituate
                     without
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     tasting
                     Nerves
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     tongue
                     moving
                     Nerves
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     A
                     muscle
                     of
                  
                   Os
                   Hyoides
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Processus
                     Styl
                     formis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   Os
                   Hyoidis
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Cartilago
                   Scutiformis
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     Two
                     muscles
                     proper
                     to
                     the
                     Larynz
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               155
            
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             moderate
             ,
             the
             coldness
             of
             the
             Air
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             suddenly
             rush
             into
             the
             Lungs
             :
             and
             therefore
             those
             that
             have
             lost
             the
             Palate
             of
             their
             Mouths
             dye
             of
             a
             Consumption
             .
          
           
             Some
             think
             it
             helps
             to
             modulate
             the
             Voice
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             call
             it
             
               Plectrum
               vocis
            
             ,
             the
             
             striking
             quil
             of
             the
             Voice
             .
             But
             though
             it
             be
             wounded
             or
             quite
             cut
             off
             ,
             yet
             is
             not
             the
             voice
             hurt
             ,
             unless
             some
             neighbouring
             parts
             ,
             which
             assist
             the
             voice
             are
             also
             damaged
             :
             for
             then
             by
             the
             roughness
             of
             those
             parts
             ,
             caused
             by
             those
             Catarrhes
             ,
             which
             have
             eaten
             the
             Uvula
             ,
             the
             Voice
             becomes
             Hoarse
             .
          
           
             A
             second
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             hinder
             drink
             from
             passing
             out
             of
             the
             Mouth
             into
             the
             Nostrils
             .
             And
             therefore
             Salmuth
             tels
             of
             the
             Son
             of
             a
             Man
             called
             John
             ,
             who
             being
             born
             without
             any
             Uvula
             or
             Almonds
             ,
             voided
             the
             Milk
             which
             he
             suckt
             ,
             out
             of
             his
             Nose
             ,
             and
             did
             not
             live
             long
             .
          
           
             By
             FAUCES
             sometimes
             we
             understand
             the
             whole
             wideness
             of
             the
             Mouth
             :
             but
             more
             strictly
             it
             is
             meant
             of
             the
             hinder
             and
             lower
             part
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             seen
             ,
             but
             when
             the
             Mouth
             is
             wide
             open
             and
             the
             Tongue
             held
             down
             ,
             the
             Greeks
             term
             it
             Pharynx
             ,
             howbeit
             that
             word
             in
             Hypocrates
             doth
             oftentimes
             signifie
             the
             Diseases
             of
             this
             part
             ,
             as
             Inflammation
             ,
             &c.
             
             Galen
             calls
             it
             Isthmus
             because
             of
             the
             narrowness
             of
             the
             place
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Fauces
             is
             that
             Bone
             which
             from
             the
             shape
             of
             the
             Greek
             letter
             v
             is
             
             called
             
               Hyoides
               ,
               Hypsiloides
            
             ,
             also
             from
             resemblance
             to
             the
             letter
             Λ
             Lambdoides
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             Upsilon
             or
             Lambda-shaped
             Bone.
             'T
             is
             also
             called
             
               Os
               gutturis
            
             ,
             the
             Throat-bone
             ,
             and
             
               Os
               linguae
            
             ,
             the
             Tongue-bone
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             must
             treat
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             History
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             not
             fastned
             to
             the
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Bone
             is
             the
             Basis
             and
             Foundation
             of
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             upon
             which
             it
             is
             placed
             and
             moved
             :
             and
             it
             is
             set
             before
             the
             Larynx
             .
          
           
             It
             consists
             of
             sundry
             little
             bones
             ,
             three
             at
             least
             ,
             sometimes
             of
             five
             ,
             seven
             ,
             
             nine
             .
          
           
             The
             middle
             Bone
             is
             the
             greatest
             ,
             bunching
             without
             ,
             hollow
             within
             ,
             under
             which
             sticks
             the
             
             Epiglottis
             ;
             it
             hath
             processes
             termed
             
               Cornua
               ,
               borns
            
             two
             in
             Number
             ,
             consisting
             of
             Bones
             more
             or
             fewer
             ,
             greater
             or
             lesser
             .
          
           
             Four
             Gristles
             are
             added
             ,
             two
             are
             somewhat
             great
             ,
             long
             and
             round
             ,
             in
             the
             Belly
             of
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             two
             also
             besides
             the
             Horns
             ,
             which
             in
             some
             persons
             become
             bony
             .
          
           
             Its
             processes
             are
             fastened
             to
             the
             Ligaments
             and
             ends
             of
             the
             Styloides
             ,
             also
             with
             the
             Cartilago
             guttalis
             .
          
           
             This
             
               Bone
               is
               moved
            
             ,
             but
             not
             except
             the
             Tongue
             be
             moved
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             
             hath
             four
             pair
             of
             Muscles
             common
             to
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             nor
             can
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tongue
             be
             shewed
             till
             they
             are
             removed
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pair
            
             lies
             concealed
             in
             the
             fore-part
             ,
             under
             the
             Skin
             ,
             resting
             upon
             the
             Wesand
             and
             the
             Cartilago
             Scutalis
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             fleshy
             beginning
             ,
             from
             the
             higher
             and
             inner
             Region
             of
             the
             Breast-bone
             ;
             and
             therefore
             this
             pair
             is
             called
             Sterno-hyoides
             .
             It
             s
             End
             is
             fleshy
             ,
             in
             the
             Basis
             of
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             .
             And
             in
             the
             middle
             according
             to
             their
             leng●h
             ,
             these
             Muscles
             are
             divided
             with
             a
             line
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             right
             down
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             being
             under
             the
             Chin
             and
             the
             fift
             pair
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             ;
             is
             large
             ,
             short
             and
             all
             fleshy
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             ,
             with
             a
             various
             carriage
             of
             Fibres
             :
             it
             is
             ended
             in
             the
             middle
             seat
             of
             the
             Hyoides
             .
             Some
             call
             it
             Genio-hyoides
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             right
             upwards
             and
             a
             little
             forwards
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             lean
             and
             round
             ,
             seated
             under
             the
             Chin
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Appendix
             of
             Styloides
             ;
             it
             ends
             into
             the
             horns
             of
             the
             Hyoides
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             are
             bored
             through
             the
             middle
             ,
             for
             the
             Muscle
             which
             opens
             the
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             move
             sidewayes
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             obliquely
             upwards
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             Stylo-cerato-hyoides
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             being
             lean
             and
             long
             ,
             lies
             concealed
             under
             that
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Scapula
             which
             they
             count
             the
             fourth
             ,
             moving
             downwards
             and
             obliquely
             side-wayes
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             upper
             side
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             near
             the
             processus
             Coracoides
             ,
             and
             therefore
             't
             is
             called
             Coraco-hyoides
             :
             it
             is
             carryed
             upwards
             obliquely
             to
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             under
             that
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Head
             which
             is
             counted
             the
             seventh
             .
             And
             this
             pair
             is
             long
             ,
             hath
             two
             Bellies
             ,
             and
             is
             extenuated
             in
             the
             middle
             like
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             like
             that
             which
             draws
             down
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             Some
             add
             to
             these
             a
             
               fift
               pair
            
             ,
             which
             is
             indeed
             proper
             to
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             Riolanus
             indeed
             the
             Mylo-glossum
             and
             therefore
             he
             terms
             it
             Mylo-hyoideum
             ;
             but
             Vestingus
             the
             Genio-glossum
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             calls
             it
             the
             
               Geniohyoides
               internum
            
             :
             which
             arising
             inwardly
             from
             the
             Chin
             under
             the
             
               Par
               Genio-hyoideum
            
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Hyoides
             ,
             which
             it
             draws
             straight
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             is
             
          
           
             I.
             To
             be
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             tongue
             ,
             and
             yet
             but
             obscurely
             moveable
             :
             least
             as
             Walaeus
             conceives
             ,
             it
             should
             perpetually
             hang
             in
             the
             Throat
             ,
             and
             hinder
             the
             swallowing
             of
             Meat
             ;
             but
             it
             moves
             forward
             in
             swallowing
             ,
             and
             so
             makes
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Guller
             more
             wide
             .
          
           
             II.
             That
             from
             it
             many
             Muscles
             might
             arise
             of
             the
             tongue
             and
             Larynx
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               13.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Tongue
             .
          
           
             THe
             TONGUE
             called
             
               Lingua
               a
               lingendo
            
             
             from
             licking
             .
          
           
             Is
             placed
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             in
             the
             Mouth
             
             under
             the
             Palate
             thereof
             :
          
           
             Is
             in
             Number
             one
             ,
             in
             Sea-Calfes
             two
             ,
             in
             
             Serpents
             divided
             into
             three
             parts
             ,
             in
             Lizards
             and
             Snakes
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             .
          
           
             In
             Man
             't
             is
             long
             ,
             broad
             and
             thick
             ,
             and
             
             thicker
             at
             the
             Root
             ,
             thinner
             and
             sharper
             at
             the
             End.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             size
             is
             moderate
             answerable
             to
             the
             mouth
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             be
             too
             great
             ,
             so
             that
             
             it
             cannot
             move
             readily
             ,
             it
             makes
             a
             man
             Lispe
             and
             Stutter
             ;
             and
             if
             it
             be
             oversoft
             and
             moist
             as
             in
             young
             Children
             ,
             they
             cannot
             speak
             plainly
             .
             
               Galen
               ,
               Carnerarius
               ,
               Zacutus
               Lusitanus
            
             and
             
               M.
               Donatus
            
             ,
             have
             observed
             the
             tongue
             grown
             to
             so
             monstrous
             a
             greatness
             ,
             that
             it
             could
             not
             be
             contained
             within
             the
             mouth
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             the
             Connexion
             ,
             in
             fishes
             the
             whole
             tongue
             cleaves
             to
             their
             mouth
             ;
             
             in
             mankind
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             its
             hinder
             part
             fastned
             to
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             also
             to
             the
             Fauces
             and
             Tonsillae
             .
             Beneath
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             its
             body
             't
             is
             fastned
             with
             a
             strong
             membranous
             Ligament
             for
             strength
             and
             stabilities
             sake
             ;
             also
             for
             the
             insertion
             of
             its
             proper
             muscles
             ,
             whose
             extremity
             is
             termed
             Fraenulum
             ;
             nor
             can
             any
             other
             string
             be
             found
             different
             from
             this
             .
             This
             in
             many
             new
             born
             Children
             ,
             doth
             so
             tie
             the
             whole
             tongue
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             wont
             to
             be
             torn
             by
             the
             Nail
             of
             the
             Midwife
             (
             which
             is
             nevertheless
             a
             Pernitious
             course
             and
             
             not
             to
             be
             allowed
             )
             or
             the
             small
             Knife
             of
             a
             Chirurgeon
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             hinder
             the
             Childs
             sucking
             or
             future
             speaking
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             freely
             turn
             and
             move
             it self
             .
             Howbeit
             for
             want
             of
             skill
             ,
             they
             cut
             it
             in
             all
             Infants
             indifferently
             ,
             whereas
             not
             one
             of
             a
             thousand
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             let
             alone
             ,
             doth
             stammer
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             Coat
             (
             hard
             in
             such
             
             as
             use
             to
             swallow
             very
             hot
             Liquors
             )
             ordinarily
             thin
             ,
             soft
             ,
             and
             porous
             ,
             that
             tasts
             may
             easily
             peirce
             into
             the
             tongues
             fleshy
          
           
             Substance
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             peculiar
             kind
             of
             
             flesh
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             not
             in
             the
             Body
             besides
             (
             and
             it
             is
             the
             Organ
             of
             tast
             ,
             not
             the
             Coat
             ,
             as
             Galen
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             nor
             the
             Nervus
             Gustatorius
             ,
             as
             some
             from
             Columbus
             )
             soft
             ,
             loose
             ,
             rare
             and
             spungy
             ,
             to
             drink
             in
             the
             tasts
             brought
             to
             it
             with
             some
             humidity
             .
             In
             Fishes
             and
             some
             other
             Animals
             't
             is
             bony
             .
             It
             is
             rather
             of
             a
             kernelly
             then
             a
             Musculous
             substance
             ,
             especially
             about
             the
             Basis
             thereof
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             tongue
             is
             no
             Muscle
             ,
             seeing
             
             it
             hath
             no
             Fibres
             ,
             nor
             moves
             any
             other
             part
             ,
             but
             is
             moved
             by
             its
             Muscles
             .
             Others
             add
             this
             Reason
             ,
             because
             then
             motion
             would
             be
             made
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             the
             tail
             of
             a
             Muscle
             should
             be
             moveable
             ▪
             the
             head
             immoveable
             .
             But
             this
             Reason
             is
             false
             .
             For
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             tongue
             is
             near
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             and
             arises
             as
             it
             were
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Hyoides
            
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             Vessels
             .
             Two
             remarkable
             Veins
             
             are
             to
             be
             seen
             under
             the
             tongue
             ,
             which
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             opened
             in
             Quinzies
             and
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Fauces
             ,
             termed
             Raninae
             from
             their
             color
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             external
             Jugulars
             ,
             these
          
           
           
             Two
             pretty
             big
             Arteries
             do
             accompany
             ,
             from
             the
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             both
             those
             of
             motion
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             Sense
             :
             a
             thicker
             pair
             creeping
             through
             the
             inner
             parts
             ,
             from
             the
             seventh
             conjugation
             ,
             which
             being
             obstructed
             or
             not
             reaching
             to
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             the
             tast
             is
             lost
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             of
             Columbus
             .
             A
             thinner
             pair
             runs
             through
             the
             outer
             parts
             of
             the
             Tongues
             Coat
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             fourth
             conjugation
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             say
             ,
             from
             the
             third
             .
          
           
             The
             Tongue
             is
             distinguished
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             its
             surface
             ,
             into
             the
             right
             and
             
             left
             part
             ,
             by
             a
             certain
             
               white
               line
            
             ,
             which
             Hippocrates
             terms
             Mediana
             .
          
           
             The
             
               muscles
               proper
            
             to
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             ending
             
             in
             its
             substance
             ,
             are
             by
             some
             Anatomists
             reckoned
             to
             be
             six
             ,
             by
             others
             nine
             ,
             by
             some
             ten
             ,
             by
             others
             eleven
             ,
             which
             move
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             ;
             forewards
             and
             backwards
             ;
             to
             the
             right
             hand
             and
             to
             the
             left
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               pair
            
             ,
             which
             in
             Oxen
             is
             double
             fleshy
             and
             thick
             ,
             arises
             from
             the
             out
             side
             of
             the
             Appendix
             Styloides
             ,
             being
             Maigre
             in
             Mankind
             :
             it
             ends
             with
             transverse
             Fibres
             ,
             into
             both
             sides
             of
             the
             Tongue
             ,
             about
             the
             middle
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             move
             the
             Tongue
             inwards
             .
             But
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Fibres
             interwoven
             ,
             they
             lift
             the
             Tongue
             upwards
             if
             they
             act
             both
             together
             ;
             but
             upwards
             only
             to
             one
             side
             ,
             if
             only
             one
             of
             them
             act
             .
             This
             pair
             is
             called
             Styloglossum
             .
          
           
             The
             
               second
               pair
            
             is
             called
             
               Myloglossum
               ,
               arising
            
             from
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             lower
             jaw
             ,
             at
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             grinding
             Teeth
             .
             T
             is
             inserted
             under
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             tongue
             ,
             into
             the
             tongues
             Ligament
             .
             Riolanus
             will
             have
             it
             belong
             to
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             because
             it
             touches
             not
             the
             tongue
             .
             But
             it
             suffices
             to
             move
             the
             tongue
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             affixed
             to
             the
             Ligament
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             ;
             when
             one
             acts
             ,
             the
             tongue
             is
             moved
             obliquely
             upwards
             ;
             when
             both
             act
             ,
             it
             moves
             with
             its
             point
             right
             to
             the
             Palate
             and
             upper
             teeth
             .
          
           
             
               The
               XI
               .
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               expresses
               the
               Muscles
               of
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               and
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Body
                     of
                     the
                     lower
                     Jaw
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Body
                     of
                  
                   Os
                   Hyoides
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     pair
                     of
                     Muscles
                     called
                  
                   Sternohyoides
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     One
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     pair
                     in
                     its
                     situation
                     ,
                     the
                     other
                     removed
                     therefrom
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     third
                     pair
                     bored
                     in
                     the
                     middle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     fourth
                     pair
                     Coraco-hyoides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     A
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     fourth
                     pair
                     of
                     the
                     Muscles
                     of
                     the
                     tongue
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Parenchyma
                     of
                     the
                     tongue
                     into
                     which
                     the
                     Nerves
                     are
                     inserted
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     A
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     fift
                     pair
                     of
                     tongue
                     Muscles
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     A
                     Muscle
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     pair
                     of
                     tongue
                     Muscles
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     common
                     muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Larynx
                     ,
                     cal'd
                  
                   Sternothyroidei
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     Other
                     common
                     muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Larynx
                     ,
                  
                   Hyothyroidei
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Gristles
                     of
                     the
                     Aspera
                     Arteria
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     A
                     muscle
                     of
                     the
                     lower
                     Jaw
                     cal'd
                  
                   Digastricus
                   ,
                   Twibelly
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     Portions
                     of
                     the
                     processus
                  
                   Styloides
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               157
            
          
           
             The
             
               third
               pair
            
             arises
             inwardly
             at
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Chin
             ,
             whence
             t
             is
             called
             Geneo-glossum
             ;
             it
             ends
             ,
             well-near
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             tongue
             inwardly
             .
             Veslingius
             will
             have
             it
             fastned
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             reckons
             it
             amongst
             the
             Muscles
             thereof
             .
             And
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             diversity
             of
             its
             Fibres
             ,
             it
             seems
             to
             perform
             contrary
             actions
             :
             for
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Fibres
             ,
             which
             is
             towards
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             tongue
             ,
             being
             drawn
             towards
             the
             Original
             ,
             the
             tongue
             is
             thrust
             without
             the
             Lips
             ;
             but
             the
             smallest
             part
             of
             the
             Fibres
             acting
             ,
             t
             is
             drawn
             inwards
             .
             This
             pair
             hath
             inscriptions
             as
             if
             it
             were
             many
             Muscles
             .
          
           
           
             The
             
               fourth
               pair
               arises
            
             fleshy
             out
             of
             the
             upper
             and
             middle
             Region
             of
             the
             
               Os
               hyoides
            
             ,
             and
             is
             terminated
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             after
             it
             is
             drawn
             out
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             tongue
             .
             It
             is
             somtimes
             obscurely
             divided
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             many
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             the
             tongue
             right
             in
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             depress
             the
             same
             .
             And
             it
             is
             called
             Basioglossum
             ,
             or
             Hypsiloglossum
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fift
               pair
            
             is
             called
             Cerato-glossum
             ,
             because
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             upper
             horns
             of
             the
             Hyoides
             ,
             and
             is
             obliquely
             inserted
             into
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             tongue
             ,
             near
             the
             Root
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Its
             arises
             somtimes
             from
             the
             lower
             horns
             ,
             viz.
             when
             the
             higher
             are
             wanting
             ,
             especially
             in
             Women
             .
             And
             this
             pair
             is
             double
             in
             Oxen.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             move
             the
             tongue
             directly
             downwards
             towards
             the
             inner
             parts
             ,
             when
             both
             act
             ;
             but
             if
             only
             one
             be
             contracted
             ,
             it
             moves
             it
             to
             the
             right
             or
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             By
             others
             an
             eleventh
             Muscle
             is
             added
             ,
             which
             yet
             is
             no
             Muscle
             ,
             because
             it
             consists
             not
             of
             fleshy
             Fibres
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             a
             parcel
             of
             flesh
             ,
             consisting
             of
             very
             many
             Kernels
             and
             far
             ,
             situate
             at
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             tongue
             ,
             and
             appearing
             when
             the
             foresaid
             Muscles
             are
             taken
             away
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             tongue
             may
             be
             moistened
             by
             this
             plenty
             of
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Tongue
             is
             :
             
          
           
             
               I.
               To
               be
               the
               Instrument
               of
               Tast
               .
            
             
               II.
               Of
               Speech
               .
            
             
               III.
               To
               further
               the
               chewing
               of
               Meat
               ,
               by
               turning
               it
               this
               way
               and
               that
               way
               .
            
             
               IV.
               To
               lick
               with
               .
            
          
           
             By
             all
             which
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             the
             tongue
             is
             not
             necessary
             to
             the
             very
             being
             of
             life
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             well
             being
             :
             for
             the
             part
             thereof
             may
             be
             cut
             off
             without
             danger
             of
             life
             or
             health
             ,
             
               Zacutus
               ,
               Walaeus
            
             and
             others
             after
             Galen
             ,
             have
             found
             by
             experience
             .
             
               Abenzoar
               ,
               Joubertus
               ,
               Forestus
            
             ,
             have
             observed
             that
             Stones
             have
             bred
             under
             the
             tongue
             ,
             hindring
             Speech
             ,
             till
             they
             were
             cut
             out
             ;
             and
             I
             remember
             that
             long
             since
             such
             stones
             were
             taken
             out
             at
             Padua
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FOURTH
           BOOK
           OF
           THE
           LIMBS
           .
        
         
           BY
           Limbs
           we
           understand
           those
           Members
           which
           grow
           as
           it
           were
           
           out
           from
           the
           Trunk
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           viz.
           the
           ARMES
           above
           ,
           the
           LEGS
           beneath
           .
           In
           which
           are
           chiefly
           considered
           the
           Muscles
           ,
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           Nerves
           
           and
           Bones
           .
           Of
           the
           four
           last
           I
           shall
           treat
           ,
           in
           the
           four
           following
           Manuals
           :
           but
           of
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Limbs
           in
           this
           Book
           ,
           as
           also
           of
           the
           neighboring
           Parts
           ,
           viz.
           the
           Head
           ,
           Neck
           ,
           Chest
           ,
           Back
           ,
           &c.
           their
           Muscles
           ;
           not
           because
           they
           appertain
           to
           the
           Limbs
           ,
           but
           because
           in
           the
           Order
           of
           Dissection
           ,
           an
           Anatomist
           cannot
           shew
           them
           before
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Limbs
           .
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Arm
             and
             Hand
             in
             General
             with
             the
             Nails
             .
          
           
             ARistotle
             calls
             the
             Arm
             with
             its
             Hand
             ,
             
             
               Organon
               Organón
            
             ,
             the
             Instrument
             of
             Instruments
             ,
             wherewith
             Man
             otherwise
             naked
             and
             unarmed
             is
             guifted
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             not
             be
             inferior
             to
             the
             Brute-beasts
             and
             conquered
             by
             them
             ;
             but
             may
             overcome
             them
             ,
             making
             for
             himself
             Weapons
             ,
             and
             other
             necessary
             Instruments
             .
             Man
             therefore
             hath
             received
             Reason
             and
             Hands
             ,
             which
             Beasts
             have
             not
             ;
             and
             the
             Hand
             is
             his
             Servant
             and
             Instrument
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             old
             Writers
             Hippocrates
             and
             Galen
             by
             HAND
             did
             understand
             that
             
             Part
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             from
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             to
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             termed
             
               summa
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             And
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             Arm
             and
             Hand
             strictly
             so
             called
             ,
             or
             the
             
               extrema
               manus
            
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             Arm
             is
             divided
             again
             ,
             into
             the
             Shoulder
             and
             Cubit
             ,
             the
             Shoulder
             is
             the
             part
             of
             the
             Arm
             from
             the
             Shoulder-tip
             to
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Elbow
             .
          
           
             The
             Cubit
             is
             that
             part
             from
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Elbow
             unto
             the
             Wrist
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Manus
               extrema
            
             or
             
               Hand
               properly
               so
               called
               ,
               is
               divided
               into
               the
               Brachiale
            
             or
             Wrist
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             part
             between
             the
             Elbow
             and
             Palm
             ;
             into
             the
             Postbrachiale
             or
             Metacarpum
             ,
             after-wrist
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             part
             between
             the
             Wrist
             and
             beginning
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             and
             into
             the
             Fingers
             .
             The
             Postbrachial
             part
             internal
             is
             called
             the
             Palm
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             the
             external
             part
             is
             called
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             many
             Fingers
             ,
             that
             the
             action
             
             of
             the
             Hand
             might
             be
             the
             better
             performed
             ,
             which
             is
             laying
             hold
             :
             also
             that
             we
             might
             be
             able
             to
             take
             up
             the
             smallest
             matters
             ,
             which
             we
             do
             by
             two
             fingers
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             of
             many-shaped
             Figures
             :
             and
             because
             all
             things
             could
             not
             be
             comprehended
             with
             one
             hand
             ,
             two
             were
             made
             that
             meeting
             together
             ,
             the
             one
             might
             help
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             right
             Hand
             is
             more
             active
             commonly
             and
             more
             ready
             for
             motion
             ,
             not
             
             for
             those
             causes
             which
             others
             childishly
             cite
             ,
             but
             1.
             
             Because
             in
             a
             mans
             right
             side
             is
             the
             
               Vena
               sine
               pari
            
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             peradventure
             is
             double
             in
             such
             as
             can
             use
             both
             hands
             alike
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             the
             bones
             are
             more
             heavy
             in
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             Shoulder-blade
             and
             whol
             arm
             ,
             then
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             as
             some
             men
             know
             for
             certain
             ;
             which
             may
             proceed
             from
             an
             impression
             of
             more
             plentiful
             Heat
             in
             the
             Mothers
             Womb
             ,
             the
             right
             part
             wherof
             is
             hotter
             then
             the
             other
             .
             Hence
             Aristotle
             teaches
             ,
             that
             naturally
             the
             right
             hand
             excels
             the
             left
             ;
             and
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             he
             tells
             us
             the
             first
             endeavor
             of
             motion
             is
             on
             the
             right
             side
             ;
             so
             that
             when
             a
             man
             is
             about
             to
             walk
             ,
             first
             moves
             his
             right
             Leg
             ;
             a
             Bird
             about
             to
             flie
             ,
             moves
             first
             its
             right
             wing
             .
             3.
             
             Because
             the
             trunk
             of
             the
             Subclavian
             Artery
             is
             greater
             on
             the
             right
             side
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             as
             they
             know
             that
             have
             diligently
             considered
             the
             matter
             in
             opposition
             to
             Riolanus
             ,
             though
             the
             difference
             is
             not
             ,
             neither
             needed
             to
             be
             very
             great
             .
             Plato
             conceives
             that
             all
             men
             are
             naturally
             ambidexters
             ,
             viz.
             that
             they
             can
             use
             both
             hands
             alike
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             mens
             unskilfulness
             and
             ignorance
             that
             makes
             them
             right
             handed
             only
             or
             left
             handed
             .
             But
             Aristotle
             is
             of
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             from
             our
             first
             Formation
             ,
             the
             right
             sides
             of
             our
             Bodies
             ,
             are
             alwaies
             in
             a
             manner
             hotter
             and
             stronger
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             unless
             any
             man
             by
             much
             custom
             ,
             and
             much
             exercise
             ,
             do
             draw
             much
             Heat
             and
             Spirit
             to
             his
             left
             Hand
             that
             he
             may
             become
             Ambidexter
             ,
             and
             able
             to
             use
             it
             as
             his
             right
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Fingers
             for
             perfection
             of
             Action
             
             are
             made
             five
             in
             number
             ,
             differing
             in
             length
             and
             thickness
             .
             T
             is
             besides
             nature
             ,
             if
             either
             the
             Fingers
             be
             quite
             wanting
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             seen
             at
             Malta
             and
             at
             Florence
             ;
             or
             if
             in
             place
             of
             true
             Fingers
             there
             appear
             only
             certain
             soft
             
             marks
             as
             big
             as
             Peason
             ,
             which
             I
             lately
             observed
             here
             at
             Hafnia
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             cal'd
             Pollex
             a
             Pollendo
             because
             of
             its
             strength
             ,
             and
             it
             alone
             is
             opposed
             to
             the
             whole
             four
             ,
             when
             any
             thing
             is
             to
             be
             taken
             up
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             thick
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             cal'd
             Index
             and
             Demonstrator
             ,
             the
             shewer
             ,
             or
             pointer
             :
             because
             therewith
             we
             point
             at
             any
             thing
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             longest
             and
             middlemost
             ,
             cal'd
             Impudicus
             the
             shameless
             ,
             because
             Physitians
             use
             it
             in
             filthy
             and
             stinking
             places
             ;
             not
             is
             it
             wont
             to
             be
             adorned
             with
             Rings
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             termed
             Medicus
             ,
             also
             Annularis
             ,
             the
             Ring-finger
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             adorned
             with
             a
             Gold
             Ring
             before
             any
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             common
             bu●
             false
             opinion
             Repugnant
             to
             Anatomy
             ,
             viz.
             that
             a
             Vein
             should
             come
             from
             the
             Heart
             to
             this
             Finger
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ;
             now
             the
             Heart
             is
             comforted
             with
             Gold.
             
          
           
             The
             fift
             cal'd
             Auricularis
             the
             Ear-finger
             ,
             because
             fittest
             to
             pick
             the
             Ears
             ,
             is
             smallest
             ,
             
               and
               by
               us
               cal'd
               the
               little
               Finger
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Cause
             therefore
             of
             
               laying
               hold
            
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             or
             
             as
             others
             speak
             less
             accurately
             ,
             its
             chiefest
             use
             ,
             is
             the
             apt
             composition
             of
             the
             
             whole
             Hand
             .
             Yet
             the
             chief
             Organ
             of
             this
             motion
             is
             a
             Muscle
             :
             the
             strength
             is
             in
             the
             Bones
             ,
             which
             are
             three
             in
             every
             finger
             ,
             the
             lower
             of
             which
             as
             the
             sustainer
             is
             alwaies
             greater
             then
             that
             which
             is
             above
             it
             and
             stronger
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Joynts
             they
             are
             furnished
             on
             each
             fide
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             on
             which
             an
             Oyly
             moisture
             is
             poured
             out
             for
             Hummectations
             sake
             ,
             and
             to
             Facilitate
             the
             motion
             .
          
           
             A
             secondary
             use
             of
             the
             Arms
             and
             Hands
             as
             Kyperus
             learnedly
             Discourses
             ,
             is
             the
             better
             to
             help
             our
             going
             by
             their
             weight
             and
             ballancing
             ;
             Yea
             and
             to
             speed
             our
             going
             ;
             and
             therefore
             dancers
             on
             the
             Ropes
             ,
             whose
             Foot
             is
             broader
             then
             that
             which
             they
             tread
             on
             ,
             do
             bear
             themselves
             up
             with
             long
             Poles
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             dance
             a
             pace
             ,
             they
             ballance
             themselves
             with
             their
             Hands
             ,
             which
             they
             move
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             .
          
           
             The
             Nails
             are
             placed
             externally
             on
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             
             the
             Toes
             :
             whose
             upmost
             part
             being
             white
             ,
             is
             called
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Nailes
             ,
             the
             white
             half
             Moon
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             Skin
             which
             grows
             to
             the
             Root
             .
          
           
             Their
             matter
             is
             not
             Alimentary
             Humors
             ;
             as
             
               Aemilius
               ,
               Parisanus
            
             and
             Plempius
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             but
             thick
             Excrements
             ,
             not
             which
             ascend
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             
               Rosa
               Anglicana
            
             conceives
             ;
             or
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             Bones
             and
             Gristles
             ,
             as
             the
             great
             Hippocrates
             doth
             affirm
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             is
             that
             heat
             which
             the
             Soul
             directs
             to
             this
             rather
             then
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             But
             the
             Nailes
             are
             not
             made
             by
             the
             Soul
             ,
             as
             Parisanus
             and
             Plempius
             contend
             ,
             because
             in
             Cacochymick
             and
             Phlegmatick
             persons
             they
             grow
             more
             abundantly
             ,
             in
             such
             as
             have
             been
             twenty
             five
             years
             dead
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             observation
             of
             Pareus
             .
             Nor
             are
             we
             moved
             when
             they
             say
             that
             there
             is
             a
             great
             variety
             of
             colours
             in
             horns
             and
             shels
             of
             Fishes
             ,
             for
             they
             no
             more
             prove
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Soul
             in
             such
             things
             ,
             then
             in
             party
             coloured
             and
             speckled
             Marble
             .
          
           
             Their
             End
             and
             Use
             is
             ,
          
           
             
               I.
               To
               fence
               the
               ends
               of
               the
               Fingers
               and
               Toes
               which
               are
               exceeding
               soft
               ,
               and
               to
               saveguard
               them
               by
               their
               hardness
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               may
               more
               easily
               take
               up
               any
               thing
               .
               So
               in
               the
               Feet
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               resist
               the
               hardness
               of
               the
               Ground
               and
               stand
               firm
               .
               And
               therefore
               it
               was
               ill
               said
               by
               him
               of
               old
               ,
               that
               the
               Gods
               had
               erred
               in
               their
               placeing
               the
               Nails
               .
            
             
               II.
               For
               ornament
               :
               and
               therefore
               we
               cover
               our
               Fingers
               when
               the
               Nails
               are
               impaired
               .
            
             
               III.
               To
               rub
               ,
               scrarch
               and
               defend
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               secondary
               use
               .
            
             
               IV.
               To
               free
               the
               Body
               from
               superfluous
               Humors
               and
               steams
               Fuliginous
               .
            
             
               V.
               To
               afford
               Physiognomists
               and
               Physitians
               tokens
               of
               Life
               and
               Health
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               divers
               authors
               .
               And
               Achmetes
               ch
               .
               74.
               75.
               interprets
               dreams
               concerning
               them
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Tradition
               of
               the
               Indians
               ,
               Persians
               and
               Aegyptians
               .
            
          
           
             Their
             form
             we
             gather
             from
             the
             Accidents
             .
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             is
             somwhat
             convex
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             apply
             themselves
             to
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             substance
             indifferently
             hard
             that
             they
             may
             resist
             ,
             but
             yet
             flexible
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             yeild
             a
             little
             and
             not
             break
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             Transparent
             and
             therefore
             
             variously
             coloured
             :
             for
             according
             to
             the
             flesh
             beneath
             them
             ,
             they
             are
             red
             ,
             blewish
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             therefore
             Physitians
             are
             wont
             to
             observe
             the
             Colour
             of
             the
             Nails
             ;
             for
             the
             Nails
             ,
             for
             examples
             sake
             ,
             grow
             pale
             when
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             deficient
             ;
             in
             such
             as
             are
             at
             deaths
             door
             they
             are
             livid
             and
             brown
             .
             Those
             same
             white
             spots
             which
             in
             yong
             people
             somtimes
             appear
             in
             their
             Nails
             ,
             spring
             from
             a
             vigorous
             heat
             ,
             which
             drives
             hidden
             Excrements
             to
             the
             Nails
             ,
             and
             separates
             them
             from
             others
             of
             a
             different
             Nature
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             knit
             about
             the
             Root
             with
             a
             
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             Skin
             grows
             about
             them
             without
             ;
             and
             flesh
             grows
             under
             them
             ,
             or
             rather
             the
             tendons
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             there
             dilated
             :
             there
             is
             therefore
             in
             that
             place
             an
             exquisite
             sense
             ,
             and
             great
             pain
             when
             they
             are
             hurt
             .
          
           
             And
             so
             much
             may
             suffice
             to
             have
             spoken
             of
             the
             Nails
             ,
             briefly
             ,
             and
             by
             way
             of
             Compendium
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               II.
            
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Brachium
             ,
             peculiarly
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             THe
             common
             containing
             Parts
             being
             removed
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Scarf-skin
             ,
             the
             Skin
             ,
             the
             Fat
             ,
             the
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             ,
             &c.
             the
             MUSCLES
             shew
             themselves
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             motion
             is
             made
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             am
             to
             treat
             in
             this
             whole
             Book
             ;
             in
             a
             convenient
             place
             ,
             though
             Hofman
             think
             otherwise
             ,
             especially
             because
             the
             Doctrin
             of
             the
             Muscles
             is
             useful
             and
             necessary
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             Issues
             ,
             Wounds
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             in
             the
             other
             parts
             they
             could
             not
             be
             treated
             off
             .
          
           
             Now
             touching
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Arm
             in
             general
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             that
             the
             inner
             Muscles
             do
             mostly
             serve
             to
             bend
             ,
             and
             the
             outer
             to
             extend
             .
             And
             in
             the
             whole
             Arm
             the
             internal
             Muscles
             are
             more
             and
             stronger
             then
             the
             external
             ,
             because
             bending
             is
             more
             worthy
             then
             the
             extension
             .
          
           
             The
             Humerus
             is
             variously
             moved
             ,
             
             and
             therefore
             it
             hath
             sundry
             Muscles
             ,
             partly
             lying
             upon
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             partly
             growing
             to
             the
             Scapulae
             or
             Shoulder-blades
             ,
             &c.
             
             Some
             reckon
             them
             seven
             ,
             others
          
           
           
           
             
             
             
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               all
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Body
               described
               by
               the
               Authour
               ,
               which
               are
               to
               be
               seen
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   Neck
                   ,
                   called
                   
                     Musculi
                     long
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Muscles
                   Scalenus
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Mastoides
                   which
                   bends
                   the
                   Head.
                   
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   The
                   Vertebra's
                   of
                   the
                   Neck
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Levator
                   Scapulae
                   ,
                   lifter
                   of
                   the
                   Shoulder
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Claviculae
                   or
                   Chanel
                   bones
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Breast-bone
                   ,
                   call'd
                   Sternum
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Acromon
                   or
                   Shoulder-tip
                   .
                
                 
                   ii
                   .
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Subclavius
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   The
                   Pectoral
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   Muscles
                   Deltoides
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Biceps
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   perforatus
                   ,
                   or
                   bored
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   The
                   Serratus
                   minor
                   ,
                   or
                   Smaller-saw-muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   The
                   greater
                   Saw-muscle
                   ,
                   or
                   Serratus
                   ma●or
                   .
                
                 
                   qqqq
                   .
                   The
                   Intercostal
                   or
                   Rib
                   between
                   Muscles
                   .
                
                 
                   RRRR
                   .
                   The
                   branchiaeus
                   on
                   each
                   Arm
                   ,
                   conspicuous
                   from
                   each
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Biceps
                   .
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   The
                   first
                   Arm
                   extender
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Longus
                   .
                
                 
                   TT
                   .
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Radij
                   pronator
                   rotundus
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   Radij
                   Pronator
                   Quadratus
                   .
                
                 
                   W.
                   Supinator
                   Radij
                   primus
                   .
                
                 
                   X.
                   Carpi
                   flexor
                   primus
                   or
                   externus
                   .
                
                 
                   Y.
                   Musculus
                   palmaris
                   .
                
                 
                   Z.
                   Carpi
                   flexor
                   alter
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   internus
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Os
                   Radij
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Os
                   Cubiti
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Ligament
                   which
                   fastens
                   the
                   Cubitus
                   to
                   the
                   Radi●●
                   ?
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Digitorum
                   flexor
                   sublimus
                   or
                   Perforatus
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Profundus
                   or
                   Perforans
                   ,
                   under
                   the
                   former
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Musculi
                   Lumbricales
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Flexor
                   pollicis
                   or
                   Thumb-bender
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   The
                   Muscles
                   which
                   draw
                   the
                   Thumb
                   towards
                   the
                   Hand
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   following
                   Characters
                   serve
                   to
                   point
                   out
                   those
                   Muscles
                   ,
                   which
                   run
                   out
                   from
                   the
                   Region
                   of
                   the
                   Loyns
                   to
                   the
                   End
                   of
                   the
                   Feet
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   forepart
                   of
                   the
                   Body
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Ps●as
                   or
                   Lumbaris
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   Iliacus
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   The
                   Obturator
                   internus
                   .
                
                 
                   DDDD
                   .
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Triceps
                   ,
                   or
                   Tripple-headed
                   Muscle
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Lividus
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   The
                   Rectus
                   in
                   its
                   scituation
                   ,
                   but
                   on
                   the
                   right
                   Leg
                   hanging
                   by
                   its
                   End.
                   
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   The
                   Vastus
                   internus
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Vastus
                   externus
                   ,
                   which
                   on
                   the
                   right
                   Leg
                   hangs
                   separated
                   .
                
                 
                   H.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   membranosus
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Fascia
                   lata
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Crureus
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   longus
                   ,
                   Fascialis
                   or
                   Sartorius
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   gracilis
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Tabiaeus
                   anticus
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   peroneus
                   Biceps
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   The
                   Muscle
                   which
                   extends
                   the
                   four
                   Toes
                   of
                   the
                   Foot.
                   
                
                 
                   Q.
                   The
                   Muscle
                   which
                   extends
                   the
                   great
                   Toe
                   .
                
                 
                   R.
                   The
                   Musculus
                   Gastroenemius
                   .
                
                 
                   rrrr
                   .
                   The
                   Musculi
                   Interossei
                   .
                
                 
                   S.
                   The
                   transverse
                   Ligament
                   of
                   the
                   Foot.
                   
                
                 
                   T.
                   The
                   Tibia
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   The
                   Fibula
                   .
                
                 
                   X.
                   The
                   Patella
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             eight
             and
             Casserius
             nine
             .
             For
             the
             Arm
             is
             said
             to
             be
             lift
             up
             by
             two
             Muscles
             ,
             Deltoides
             and
             Supra-spinatus
             ;
             and
             downwards
             by
             two
             ,
             the
             
               Ani
               scalptor
            
             and
             
               Rotundus
               major
            
             :
             forewards
             by
             one
             alone
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Pectoralis
             ;
             backwards
             by
             three
             ,
             the
             Infra-spinatus
             and
             Sub-scapularis
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Transversus
               brevior
            
             .
             But
             they
             conceive
             the
             circular
             motion
             thereof
             is
             caused
             by
             all
             of
             them
             acting
             one
             after
             another
             :
             but
             others
             will
             have
             the
             Arm
             to
             be
             wheeled
             about
             by
             the
             
               Infra-spinatus
               ,
               Supraspinatus
            
             ,
             and
             Sub-scapularis
             .
             But
             I
             shall
             in
             recounting
             them
             follow
             the
             order
             of
             Dissection
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             termed
             Pectoralis
             ,
             because
             it
             takes
             up
             the
             Breast
             or
             forepart
             of
             the
             Chest
             being
             great
             and
             fleshy
             ;
             which
             Galen
             conceived
             might
             be
             divided
             into
             three
             or
             four
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             wellnigh
             the
             whole
             Brest-bone
             ,
             and
             the
             Gristles
             thereto
             annexed
             ;
             where
             it
             is
             a
             little
             tendinous
             in
             part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             ,
             and
             the
             fift
             ,
             sixt
             and
             seventh
             true
             Ribs
             .
             'T
             is
             implanted
             with
             a
             short
             ,
             broad
             Nervous
             and
             strong
             tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             between
             the
             Deltoides
             and
             the
             Biceps
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             move
             the
             Arm
             to
             the
             Brest
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             Fibres
             are
             contracted
             more
             to
             the
             upper
             or
             lower
             part
             or
             right
             forward
             ,
             so
             doth
             the
             Arm
             incline
             this
             way
             or
             that
             way
             .
             This
             is
             the
             Muscle
             which
             suffers
             in
             that
             torment
             which
             the
             Italians
             call
             
               Tratta
               de
               corda
            
             ,
             the
             Strappado
             .
             For
             it
             is
             very
             much
             haled
             and
             drawn
             a
             sunder
             ,
             when
             the
             Arms
             are
             pulled
             forcibly
             backwards
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             called
             Deltoides
             ,
             from
             its
             likeness
             to
             the
             Greek
             letter
             Δ
             also
             
               Triangularis
               Humeralis
            
             ,
             which
             is
             fleshy
             and
             so
             abides
             ,
             and
             is
             spread
             upon
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             ,
             looking
             towards
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             with
             a
             fleshy
             end
             indeed
             ,
             but
             yet
             a
             strong
             tendon
             lies
             concealed
             therein
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             lift
             up
             the
             Arm.
             In
             the
             
             middle
             hereof
             the
             Ancients
             were
             wont
             to
             make
             Fontanels
             or
             Issues
             ;
             but
             others
             in
             the
             external
             part
             of
             the
             said
             Muscles
             :
             but
             an
             Issue
             is
             better
             made
             in
             the
             space
             between
             the
             Deltoides
             and
             the
             Biceps
             ,
             as
             I
             shew
             in
             
               my
               Treatise
               of
               Issues
            
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             There
             is
             the
             Cephalick
             or
             Head
             Vein
             .
             2.
             
             It
             is
             between
             two
             Muscles
             .
             3.
             
             It
             may
             be
             very
             well
             seen
             and
             dressed
             by
             the
             Patient
             .
             Now
             the
             place
             is
             exactly
             found
             below
             the
             Shoulder
             joynt
             ,
             four
             or
             five
             Fingers
             bredth
             ,
             where
             when
             you
             bend
             the
             Arm
             you
             may
             feel
             the
             space
             between
             the
             two
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             the
             Arm
             being
             lift
             up
             ,
             it
             is
             Circumscribed
             in
             fat
             persons
             with
             a
             small
             Cavity
             ,
             as
             
               Claudinus
               ,
               Solenander
            
             and
             others
             observe
             .
             Ferrara
             measures
             four
             Fingers
             bredth
             from
             the
             Elbow
             upwards
             .
             See
             also
             Glandorpius
             .
          
           
           
             The
             third
             is
             
               broadest
               of
               all
            
             ,
             and
             with
             its
             fellow
             covers
             almost
             the
             whole
             Back
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             
               Ani
               Scalptor
               ,
               Clawbreech
            
             ,
             because
             it
             draws
             the
             Arm
             backwards
             and
             downwards
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             with
             a
             membranous
             and
             very
             broad
             beginning
             ,
             from
             the
             points
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Back
             bone
             ,
             from
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             and
             Ilium
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             six
             :
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             It
             is
             inserted
             between
             the
             Pectoral
             and
             the
             round
             Muscle
             ,
             with
             a
             strong
             ,
             short
             and
             broad
             Tendon
             .
             It
             s
             shape
             is
             triangular
             .
          
           
             Fallopius
             out
             of
             Galen
             against
             Vesalius
             ,
             doth
             teach
             that
             this
             Muscle
             is
             furnished
             with
             a
             new
             ,
             but
             very
             smal
             beginning
             ,
             while
             from
             the
             lower
             Corner
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             ,
             it
             receives
             very
             many
             fleshy
             Fibres
             .
             This
             Muscle
             because
             it
             hath
             a
             large
             beginning
             ,
             and
             therefore
             divers
             Fibres
             ;
             according
             as
             they
             are
             variously
             contracted
             ,
             so
             the
             Shoulder
             is
             either
             drawn
             more
             upwards
             or
             depressed
             more
             downwards
             .
             And
             because
             it
             also
             passes
             through
             the
             lower
             corner
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             blade
             therefore
             it
             lightly
             draws
             the
             same
             also
             away
             with
             the
             Shoulder
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             called
             
               Rotundus
               major
            
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             obliquely
             seated
             behind
             ,
             under
             the
             Axilla
             ,
             being
             fleshy
             ,
             thick
             ,
             and
             rounder
             then
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             fleshy
             from
             the
             Rib
             of
             the
             lower
             Scapula
             ,
             and
             ascending
             a
             little
             with
             its
             tendon
             ,
             short
             ,
             broad
             ,
             and
             strong
             ,
             it
             is
             implanted
             with
             the
             Pectoral
             ,
             into
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Humerus
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             the
             Arm
             downwards
             and
             backwards
             ,
             and
             to
             work
             contrary
             to
             the
             Deltoides
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             short
             and
             round
             ,
             quite
             fleshy
             ,
             which
             arises
             with
             a
             sharp
             beginning
             out
             of
             the
             lowest
             corner
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ;
             after
             it
             grows
             thicker
             and
             thicker
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             its
             belly
             ,
             and
             thence
             growing
             smaller
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             it
             terminates
             with
             an
             acute
             end
             into
             that
             Ligament
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             is
             involved
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             an
             oblique
             Scituation
             ,
             and
             some
             call
             it
             
               Transversus
               musculus
               brevior
            
             ,
             others
             
               Rotundus
               minor
            
             .
             And
             it
             is
             the
             eighth
             in
             Fallopius
             his
             account
             :
             which
             Muscle
             others
             suppose
             to
             be
             a
             certain
             portion
             of
             the
             fourth
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             is
             called
             Infra-spinatus
             ,
             also
             
               Superscapularis
               inferior
            
             ,
             because
             it
             covers
             the
             whole
             external
             bunching
             part
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             whose
             form
             also
             it
             bears
             ;
             but
             becoming
             more
             narrow
             ,
             it
             is
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             short
             Ligament
             inserted
             into
             the
             Shoulder
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             thought
             to
             wheel
             the
             Arm
             backwards
             and
             outwards
             .
             
          
           
             The
             seventh
             is
             the
             Supraspinatus
             ,
             also
             
               Superscapularis
               superior
            
             ,
             also
             
               Rotundus
               minor
            
             ;
             it
             is
             fleshy
             and
             somewhat
             longish
             ,
             over
             the
             Armpit
             ;
             it
             fills
             the
             Cavity
             between
             the
             upper
             Rib
             of
             the
             scapula
             ,
             and
             the
             Spina
             thereof
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             it
             grows
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             inserted
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             strong
             tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             at
             the
             Ligament
             of
             the
             joynt
             ,
             being
             carryed
             above
             the
             first
             joynt
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             former
             .
             Others
             conceive
             it
             moves
             upwards
             with
             the
             Deltois
             .
          
           
             The
             eighth
             is
             termed
             Subscapularis
             or
             Immersus
             ;
             being
             very
             fleshy
             ,
             it
             quarters
             betwixt
             the
             Scapula
             and
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             takes
             up
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             inserted
             with
             a
             broad
             tendon
             ,
             internally
             ,
             into
             the
             second
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Humerus
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             bring
             about
             the
             Arm
             inwards
             .
          
           
             The
             ninth
             Muscle
             was
             first
             observed
             by
             Arantius
             and
             Placentinus
             ,
             being
             in
             the
             former
             part
             of
             the
             Arm
             and
             called
             Perforatus
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             
               Coracoides
               Processus
            
             of
             the
             Scapula
             (
             and
             is
             therefore
             by
             Riolanus
             called
             Coracordeus
             ,
             or
             Coracobrachiaeus
             )
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             about
             the
             middle
             ,
             by
             the
             tendon
             of
             the
             Deltoides
             .
             It
             hath
             a
             beginning
             nervous
             and
             short
             ,
             a
             long
             round
             Belly
             sufficiently
             corpulent
             ,
             and
             a
             strong
             tendon
             .
             It
             s
             Belly
             hath
             an
             hole
             bored
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             gives
             passage
             to
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             are
             distributed
             to
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubit
             .
             This
             Muscle
             others
             have
             only
             termed
             a
             Musculous
             Portion
             of
             the
             Biceps
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             useful
             to
             draw
             the
             Arm
             to
             the
             Process
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ;
             or
             draw
             it
             forward
             upon
             the
             Breast
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               3.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Scapula
             or
             Shoulder-blade
             .
          
           
             BEcause
             the
             Scapula
             is
             moved
             forward
             and
             backward
             ;
             upward
             ,
             and
             downward
             ;
             therefore
             it
             hath
             received
             
               four
               Muscles
            
             .
             To
             which
             nevertheless
             others
             add
             two
             more
             ,
             
             viz.
             the
             
               Serratus
               major
            
             and
             the
             Digastricus
             ,
             but
             they
             do
             not
             well
             .
             For
             the
             later
             is
             proper
             to
             the
             Oshyoides
             ,
             the
             former
             to
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             I.
             The
             first
             is
             called
             SERRATUS
             MINOR
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             spred
             under
             the
             
               Musculus
               pectoralis
            
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             four
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             excepting
             the
             first
             and
             ascending
             obliquely
             upwards
             ,
             with
             an
             end
             partly
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             partly
             tendinous
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Scapula
             by
             the
             
               Proceslus
               ancoriformis
            
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             forward
             into
             the
             Breast
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             second
             is
             by
             Galen
             called
             Trapezius
             ,
             others
             term
             it
             Cucullaris
             ,
             because
             it
             resembles
             a
             Friars
             Cowl
             .
             But
             that
             this
             Muscle
             was
             given
             our
             first
             Parents
             ,
             as
             the
             Badge
             of
             a
             religious
             life
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             conjectures
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             believe
             ,
             because
             others
             are
             religious
             that
             wear
             no
             Cowles
             ,
             and
             many
             are
             irreligious
             that
             wear
             them
             ,
             whether
             you
             look
             at
             their
             Profession
             or
             Manners
             .
             However
             this
             Name
             was
             given
             this
             Muscle
             by
             Christian
             Physitians
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             likeness
             to
             a
             Monks
             Cowl
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             fleshy
             and
             thin
             from
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Head.
             From
             whence
             it
             descends
             to
             the
             eighth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             as
             also
             from
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Head
             growing
             small
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             and
             the
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             But
             because
             of
             its
             various
             Original
             and
             various
             Fibres
             ,
          
           
             It
             variously
             moves
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             upwards
             ,
             obliquely
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             Fibres
             obliquely
             descending
             from
             the
             hind-part
             of
             the
             head
             to
             the
             Omoplata
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             denies
             in
             vain
             ;
             downwards
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             carriage
             of
             fibres
             ,
             ascending
             from
             the
             eighth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Back
             ;
             and
             right
             out
             to
             the
             Back
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             right
             fibres
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             stretched
             out
             to
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             third
             is
             the
             Rhomboides
             from
             its
             figure
             like
             a
             Diamond
             ,
             scituate
             under
             the
             Cucullaris
             ,
             thin
             and
             broad
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             three
             lower
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             and
             the
             three
             upper
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             with
             ,
             the
             same
             latitude
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             back
             a
             little
             obliquely
             upwards
             .
          
           
             IV.
             Is
             the
             Levator
             ,
             which
             others
             call
             the
             Muscle
             of
             Patience
             ;
             because
             those
             whose
             Affairs
             go
             cross
             ,
             are
             wont
             to
             lift
             up
             their
             Shoulders
             :
             it
             is
             above
             the
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             five
             transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             with
             sundry
             beginnings
             (
             which
             
             makes
             it
             seem
             divers
             Muscles
             )
             which
             soon
             grow
             into
             one
             :
             and
             its
             Insertion
             is
             in
             the
             higher
             and
             lower
             corner
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             fleshy
             tendon
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             forward
             and
             lift
             up
             the
             Scapula
             and
             the
             Humerus
             .
          
           
             With
             these
             Muscles
             the
             Scapula
             is
             moved
             directly
             or
             of
             it self
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Brachium
               per
               accidens
            
             ,
             accidentally
             ;
             as
             the
             Scapula
             is
             accidentally
             moved
             by
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Brachium
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               4.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             or
             which
             serve
             for
             Respiration
             .
          
           
             VEry
             many
             Muscles
             serve
             for
             Respiration
             ;
             as
             the
             Midriff
             ,
             all
             the
             Intercostal
             Muscles
             ,
             some
             of
             the
             Belly
             (
             of
             which
             I
             have
             treated
             in
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Book
             )
             and
             some
          
           
             
               Proper
               to
               the
            
             CHEST
             ,
             which
             are
             reckoned
             
               on
               each
               side
            
             six
             ;
             to
             which
             nevertheless
             Fallopius
             adds
             three
             in
             the
             Neck
             ;
             which
             in
             Vesalius
             are
             parts
             of
             Muscles
             possessing
             the
             Breast
             and
             Back
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             do
             grow
             thereto
             :
             two
             in
             the
             forepart
             ,
             subclavius
             and
             
               triangularis
               ;
               Serratus
               major
            
             possesses
             the
             Sides
             ;
             the
             rest
             are
             in
             the
             hinder-part
             ,
             viz.
             the
             two
             
               Serrati
               postici
            
             and
             the
             Sacrolumbus
             .
          
           
             I.
             The
             SUBCLAVIUS
             ,
             because
             't
             is
             seated
             under
             the
             Clavicula
             ,
             fills
             the
             place
             between
             it
             and
             the
             first
             Rib.
             Platerus
             reckons
             it
             amongst
             the
             Intercostals
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             fleshy
             from
             the
             inner
             and
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             :
             it
             is
             inserted
             fleshy
             into
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             first
             Rib
             ,
             which
             it
             draws
             upwards
             and
             outwards
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             first
             muscle
             which
             dilates
             or
             distends
             the
             Chest
             .
             To
             this
             Spigelius
             assigns
             a
             contrary
             use
             ,
             viz.
             to
             draw
             the
             Clavicula
             downwards
             ▪
             which
             nevertheless
             is
             of
             it self
             immoveable
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             ascribes
             thereunto
             a
             Rise
             and
             an
             Insertion
             contrary
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             SERRATUS
             MAJOR
             ,
             is
             a
             great
             ,
             broad
             ,
             and
             every
             way
             fleshy
             muscle
             ,
             with
             the
             oblique
             descendent
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             it
             makes
             a
             Saw-like
             Combination
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             fleshy
             ,
             from
             the
             internal
             Basis
             of
             the
             Scapula
             .
             Riolanus
             hath
             observed
             an
             higher
             Original
             thereof
             ,
             from
             the
             two
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Clavicula
             ,
             which
             two
             Ribs
             seem
             immoveable
             .
             It
             is
             carried
             by
             its
             tendon
             ,
             with
             five
             unequal
             ends
             ,
             to
             the
             five
             true
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             to
             two
             bastard
             Ribs
             ;
             which
             it
             lifts
             up
             .
             Spigelius
             also
             and
             Veslingus
             do
             ascribe
             a
             contrary
             Use
             hereunto
             ,
             and
             consequently
             a
             contrary
             Original
             ,
             and
             Insertion
             ,
          
           
             III.
             SERRATUS
             POSTICUS
             SUPERIOR
             minor
             ,
             does
             quarter
             under
             the
             Rhomboides
             in
             the
             Back
             ,
             between
             the
             two
             Shoulder-blades
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             membranous
             from
             the
             lower
             Spines
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Back
             :
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             three
             Intervals
             of
             the
             four
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             being
             tripartite
             :
             and
             it
             draws
             those
             Ribs
             upwards
             .
          
           
             IV.
             SERRATUS
             POSTICUS
             INFERIOR
             major
             ,
             is
             membranons
             and
             broad
             almost
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             under
             the
             
               Musculus
               latissimus
            
             or
             
               Ani
               scalptor
               arising
            
             from
             the
             Spines
             or
             sharp
             points
             of
             the
             lower
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             It
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Intervals
             of
             the
             four
             lower
             Ribs
             ,
             being
             parted
             as
             it
             were
             into
             Fingers
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             to
             widen
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             V.
             Is
             spred
             under
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             by
             others
             supposed
             to
             be
             common
             to
             the
             Back
             and
             Chest
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             SACROLUMBUS
             ,
             because
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             Os
             sacrum
             ,
             and
             the
             sharp
             points
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             It
             is
             fleshy
             within
             ,
             nervous
             without
             .
             It
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             lower
             Ribs
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             tendon
             ,
             one
             external
             which
             is
             strongest
             ,
             the
             other
             internal
             .
             It
             is
             not
             easily
             separated
             from
             the
             lowest
             muscle
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             parcel
             thereof
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             according
             to
             Veslingus
             ,
             to
             contract
             the
             Chest
             .
             Spigelius
             conceives
             as
             I
             do
             ,
             that
             because
             it
             grows
             out
             of
             one
             beginning
             with
             the
             
               Musculus
               longissimus
            
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             that
             therefore
             it
             extends
             and
             raises
             up
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             VI.
             Is
             the
             TRIANGULARIS
             ,
             small
             and
             subtile
             ,
             in
             lean
             persons
             scarce
             fleshy
             ,
             it
             lies
             inwardly
             concealed
             under
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             lower
             part
             whereof
             ,
             it
             hath
             its
             Original
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             may
             conveniently
             be
             called
             the
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Breast-bone
             .
             It
             s
             obliquely
             inserted
             into
             the
             lower
             Gristles
             ,
             which
             it
             draws
             to
             ,
             and
             straitens
             the
             Chest
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             THe
             HEAD
             is
             moved
             ,
             either
             secondarily
             by
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             motion
             thereof
             ;
             or
             primarily
             upon
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             is
             immediately
             and
             closely
             joyned
             ,
             bein
             bent
             forward
             and
             backward
             .
             It
             is
             turned
             round
             upon
             the
             tooth-fashioned
             Process
             of
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             (
             on
             which
             the
             hind-part
             of
             the
             Head
             rests
             ,
             and
             to
             which
             it
             is
             firmly
             fastned
             )
             as
             it
             were
             upon
             an
             Axle-tree
             ;
             which
             motion
             is
             performed
             by
             nine
             pare
             of
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             pare
             is
             long
             and
             thick
             ,
             by
             some
             called
             Splenium
             ,
             spred
             out
             on
             each
             side
             upon
             the
             Vertebrae
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             a
             double
             beginning
             ,
             one
             from
             the
             Spinae
             of
             the
             upper
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             another
             from
             the
             five
             lower
             Spinae
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             from
             which
             it
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Occiput
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             the
             Head
             directly
             backwards
             .
             But
             if
             only
             one
             do
             act
             ,
             the
             motion
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             made
             circularly
             to
             one
             side
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             implicated
             and
             complicated
             ,
             and
             therefore
             termed
             Complexum
             .
             It
             seems
             to
             consist
             as
             it
             were
             of
             three
             Muscles
             .
             It
             hath
             divers
             beginnings
             ,
             at
             the
             seventh
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             at
             the
             first
             ,
             third
             and
             fourth
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             after
             a
             different
             manner
             implanted
             into
             the
             Occiput
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             observes
             touching
             the
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Splenium
             and
             the
             Complexus
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             cross-wayes
             intersected
             ,
             and
             disposed
             for
             the
             strength
             of
             both
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             
               third
               Pare
            
             is
             scituate
             under
             the
             second
             ,
             small
             and
             thick
             ,
             which
             Vesalius
             would
             have
             to
             be
             the
             fourth
             part
             of
             the
             former
             Muscle
             .
             It
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             hindermore
             Root
             of
             the
             
               Processus
               mammillaris
            
             Its
             Use
             is
             ,
             lightly
             to
             bring
             the
             Head
             backwards
             ;
             and
             if
             but
             one
             act
             ,
             to
             bring
             it
             backwards
             to
             one
             side
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             pare
             is
             called
             
               Rectum
               majus
            
             ,
             being
             small
             ,
             fleshy
             and
             lean
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             ends
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Occiput
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             pare
             called
             
               Rectum
               minus
            
             ,
             lies
             concealed
             under
             the
             former
             pare
             .
             It
             s
             Rise
             is
             from
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             its
             insertion
             and
             Use
             is
             as
             of
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             is
             the
             
               Obliquum
               superius
            
             ,
             which
             lies
             also
             beneath
             .
             It
             rises
             according
             to
             some
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Occiput
             ,
             and
             descending
             is
             inserted
             athwart
             ,
             into
             the
             points
             of
             the
             Processes
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             But
             others
             among
             whom
             Veslingus
             do
             rightly
             think
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Process
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             ,
             and
             ends
             into
             the
             Occiput
             ▪
             
             by
             the
             outward
             side
             of
             the
             Recti
             .
          
           
             The
             seventh
             called
             
               Obliquum
               inferius
               ,
               arises
            
             from
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             transverse
             Process
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             two
             oblique
             Muscles
             ,
             is
             to
             bring
             the
             Head
             about
             to
             the
             Sides
             .
          
           
             The
             eighth
             called
             
               Mastoides
               ,
               arises
            
             long
             and
             round
             in
             the
             forepart
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             double
             ,
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Brest-bone
             and
             the
             Clavicula
             :
             it
             is
             inserted
             with
             a
             fleshy
             and
             thick
             End
             ,
             into
             the
             Mammillary
             Process
             ,
             which
             it
             embraces
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             turn
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             A
             ninth
             pare
             is
             added
             by
             Fallopius
             ,
             under
             the
             Throat
             ,
             in
             the
             forepart
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             lying
             near
             the
             first
             pare
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             It
             arises
             nervous
             from
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             which
             it
             turns
             in
             like
             manner
             with
             the
             former
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               6.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Neck
             ▪
          
           
             THe
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Neck
             are
             on
             each
             side
             four
             .
             The
             two
             first
             extend
             ,
             the
             two
             others
             do
             bend
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             I.
             The
             two
             LONG
             ONES
             lye
             hid
             under
             the
             Oesophagus
             or
             Gullet
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             with
             a
             beginning
             fleshy
             and
             sharp
             ,
             they
             ascend
             into
             the
             extuberant
             Process
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             ,
             with
             an
             acute
             tendon
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Occiput
             ,
             near
             its
             great
             Hole
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             bend
             the
             Neck
             right
             forwards
             and
             the
             Head
             withal
             :
             and
             if
             but
             one
             act
             ,
             it
             turns
             it
             on
             the
             one
             side
             .
          
           
             The
             SCALENI
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             some
             count
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             have
             a
             peculiar
             Hole
             ,
             through
             which
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             enter
             into
             the
             Arms.
             They
             arise
             fleshy
             ,
             at
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             from
             the
             first
             Rib
             ;
             they
             are
             inserted
             inwardly
             into
             all
             the
             Vertebra's
             for
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             especially
             into
             their
             transverse
             Processes
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             TRANSVERSALES
             duo
             ,
             seated
             in
             the
             back
             ,
             
               do
               rise
               from
            
             the
             six
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             which
             are
             uppermost
             and
             outmost
             :
             they
             are
             inserted
             externally
             into
             all
             the
             transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             And
             between
             these
             Nerves
             go
             out
             .
             Their
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             extend
             or
             to
             bend
             backwards
             ,
             but
             if
             one
             act
             alone
             ,
             to
             move
             obliquely
             .
          
           
             IV.
             The
             two
             SPINATI
             possess
             the
             whole
             Neck
             between
             the
             Spinae
             ,
             and
             are
             long
             and
             large
             .
             They
             arise
             from
             five
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             seven
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             They
             are
             strongly
             implanted
             into
             the
             whole
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             .
             Their
             Use
             is
             the
             same
             as
             of
             the
             third
             pare
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               7.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Back
             and
             Loins
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Spine
               of
               the
               Back
            
             or
             Back-bone
             is
             moved
             forward
             ,
             backward
             ,
             to
             the
             right
             and
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             and
             circularly
             .
             Yea
             ,
             and
             in
             tumblers
             we
             may
             see
             infinite
             motions
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             For
             tendons
             are
             brought
             to
             all
             the
             Vertebra's
             ,
             as
             though
             the
             Muscles
             were
             many
             and
             infinite
             ;
             which
             tendons
             nevertheless
             many
             Anatomists
             do
             refer
             to
             some
             one
             great
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             one
             Muscle
             hath
             many
             tendons
             .
             But
             commonly
             ,
             they
             make
             four
             pare
             of
             Muscles
             of
             the
             back
             :
             where
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             if
             only
             one
             act
             ,
             the
             back-bone
             is
             moved
             side-wayes
             ,
             if
             the
             pare
             acts
             ,
             it
             is
             either
             bended
             or
             extended
             .
          
           
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               certain
               Muscles
               which
               do
               first
               offer
               themselves
               to
               sight
               ,
               in
               the
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Head
                     called
                     Complexi
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Muscles
                     called
                     Splenij
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Levators
                     Scapulae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Trapezius
                     or
                     Cucullaris
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Supra-spinatus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Infra-spinatus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Rotundus
                     major
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   
                     The
                     Rotundus
                     minor
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Rhomboides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Dorsi
                     latissimus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     Serratus
                     posticus
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     Serratus
                     posticus
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Dorsi
                     longissimus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sacrolumbus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   P.
                   
                     The
                     Quadratus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Q.
                   
                     The
                     Sacer
                     Dorsi
                     musculus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     Musculus
                     longus
                     which
                     extends
                     the
                     Arm.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   S.
                   
                     The
                     Musculus
                     brevis
                     ,
                     the
                     other
                     Arm-extender
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   TT
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Supinator
                     Brachij
                     alter
                     ,
                     according
                     to
                     our
                     Author
                     ,
                     see
                     the
                     first
                     pare
                     in
                     the
                     next
                     Table
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     The
                     Extensor
                     Carpi
                     primus
                     ,
                     which
                     some
                     term
                     Bicornis
                     here
                     hanging
                     down
                     ▪
                  
                
                 
                   W.
                   
                     The
                     Extensor
                     Carpi
                     secundus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   XXxx
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Extensores
                     Digitorum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Z.
                   
                     The
                     External
                     Apophysis
                     of
                     the
                     Shoulder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Deltoides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     Brachieus
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   These
                   following
                   Characters
                   demonstrate
                   the
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   lower
                   Limbs
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Glutaeus
                     major
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Glutaeus
                     medius
                     in
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Pyriformis
                     Musculus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Ob●uratus
                     internus
                     or
                     Marsupialis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Biceps
                     which
                     bends
                     the
                     Leg.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   ●g
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Seminervosus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Gracilis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     The
                     Triceps
                     of
                     the
                     left
                     Side
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Vastus
                     externus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Triceps
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Side
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     Popliteus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Castro●nemij
                     ,
                     which
                     on
                     the
                     left
                     side
                     are
                     ●●
                     their
                     proper
                     Scituation
                     ,
                     on
                     the
                     right
                     side
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     same
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Musculus
                     soleus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     Musculus
                     plantaris
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
             
             
               between
               164
               and
               165
            
             
          
           
             The
             second
             being
             called
             LONGISSIMUM
             ,
             arises
             with
             an
             acute
             and
             strong
             Tendon
             ,
             without
             tendinous
             ,
             within
             fleshy
             ,
             from
             the
             end
             of
             Os
             sacrum
             ,
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             the
             Os
             Ilij
             ;
             having
             the
             same
             beginning
             with
             the
             Sacrolumbus
             ,
             wherewith
             it
             is
             in
             a
             manner
             confounded
             ,
             til
             in
             the
             Progress
             it
             is
             separated
             the
             refrom
             ,
             by
             the
             lowest
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             And
             it
             is
             joyned
             afterward
             to
             each
             transverse
             process
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             and
             Back
             ,
             unto
             which
             it
             affords
             tendons
             like
             Claspes
             ,
             and
             at
             length
             ends
             somtimes
             into
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             somtimes
             at
             the
             mammillary
             processes
             ,
             near
             the
             Temples-bone
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             extend
             the
             Chest
             ,
             Loins
             ,
             and
             their
             Vertebra's
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             under
             this
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             is
             called
             SACRUM
             ,
             because
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             behind
             ,
             being
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             ends
             into
             the
             Spina
             of
             the
             twelfth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             (
             or
             as
             others
             say
             ,
             into
             the
             Spines
             also
             ,
             and
             oblique
             processes
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Loins
             )
             with
             sundry
             tendons
             .
             The
             Use
             is
             as
             of
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             the
             SEMISPINATUM
             ,
             arising
             where
             the
             former
             ends
             ,
             and
             embracing
             all
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             giving
             them
             tendons
             ;
             and
             
               it
               ends
            
             into
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             rear
             up
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             If
             all
             eight
             act
             ,
             they
             hold
             the
             Back
             straight
             ,
             and
             do
             as
             it
             were
             sustain
             a
             man.
             Nor
             are
             there
             any
             muscles
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             save
             these
             ,
             and
             what
             have
             been
             explained
             before
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             omitted
             ,
             as
             Riolanus
             objects
             ,
             or
             whereof
             I
             have
             been
             ignorant
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               8.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubitus
             and
             Radius
             .
          
           
             THe
             Muscles
             of
             the
             CUBIT
             ,
             according
             
             to
             the
             arbitrary
             Method
             of
             Dissection
             follow
             .
             Yet
             I
             do
             advise
             the
             Dissector
             ,
             that
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Radius
             are
             not
             to
             be
             shewed
             immediately
             after
             those
             ,
             but
             last
             of
             all
             ;
             but
             after
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             fingers
             ,
             thumb
             and
             wrist
             ;
             because
             the
             Muscles
             of
             these
             parts
             being
             shewn
             and
             removed
             ,
             the
             Insertions
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             are
             more
             couveniently
             discerned
             .
             Otherwise
             the
             Brachium
             may
             follow
             next
             after
             the
             demonstration
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubitus
             and
             Radius
             ,
             by
             an
             Order
             free
             for
             any
             one
             to
             follow
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubit
             are
             four
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             RADIUS
             as
             many
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             two
             Benders
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             as
             the
             Biceps
             and
             Brachiaeus
             :
             two
             Extenders
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Longus
             and
             the
             Brevis
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             two
             Pronators
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             the
             Rotundus
             and
             the
             Quadratus
             ,
             and
             two
             Supinators
             ,
             the
             Longior
             and
             Brevior
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             proper
             Motion
             of
             the
             Cubit
             is
             flexion
             and
             extension
             .
             But
             the
             Radius
             makes
             the
             whole
             Arm
             prone
             or
             supine
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             of
             the
             Cubit
             is
             termed
             BICEPS
             ;
             because
             of
             its
             double
             distinct
             Beginning
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             the
             one
             tendinous
             and
             round
             ,
             from
             the
             upper
             lie
             of
             the
             Acerabulum
             ,
             the
             other
             broader
             and
             less
             tendinous
             ,
             from
             the
             
               Processus
               ancoriformis
            
             .
             And
             it
             is
             inserted
             with
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             and
             possesses
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             Arm
             with
             its
             Body
             .
             The
             tendon
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ought
             in
             Blood-letting
             to
             be
             taken
             heed
             of
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             lying
             under
             this
             ,
             and
             spred
             out
             upon
             the
             bone
             it self
             ,
             being
             short
             ,
             is
             called
             BRACHIAEUS
             ;
             't
             is
             all
             fleshy
             ,
             less
             then
             the
             former
             ;
             artses
             from
             the
             middle
             bone
             of
             the
             Brachium
             ,
             and
             is
             before
             inserted
             into
             the
             common
             beginning
             of
             the
             Cubitus
             and
             Radius
             ,
             and
             the
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Joynt
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             EXTENDENS
             primus
             and
             LONGUS
             ,
             it
             arises
             with
             a
             double
             beginning
             ,
             from
             the
             lower
             Rib
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             is
             ended
             being
             fleshy
             in
             the
             Olecranum
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             the
             EXTENDENS
             secundus
             and
             BREVIS
             ;
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             is
             behind
             mixed
             with
             the
             precedent
             ,
             and
             occupies
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ;
             and
             it
             ends
             into
             the
             part
             of
             the
             Olecranum
             on
             which
             we
             lean
             .
          
           
             Casserius
             adds
             a
             fift
             called
             
               tertius
               extendens
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             fourth
             Muscle
             ;
             but
             he
             counts
             it
             a
             distinct
             Muscle
             ,
             as
             later
             Anatomists
             Riolanus
             and
             Veslingus
             do
             ,
             which
             they
             term
             Anconeus
             .
             But
             he
             would
             have
             it
             to
             be
             a
             portion
             of
             his
             Brachiaeus
             ,
             because
             it
             sticks
             sometimes
             close
             to
             the
             fleshy
             Extremity
             thereof
             ,
             and
             to
             answer
             to
             the
             Poplitaeus
             ,
             that
             an
             equality
             may
             be
             maintained
             between
             the
             foot
             and
             the
             hand
             .
             It
             springs
             out
             of
             the
             hinder
             extremity
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             by
             the
             end
             of
             the
             fourth
             and
             third
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             passing
             beyond
             the
             Joynt
             of
             the
             Cubir
             ,
             it
             is
             also
             inserted
             by
             its
             hinder
             and
             lateral
             part
             ,
             yet
             not
             above
             a
             fingers
             bredth
             beyond
             the
             Olecranum
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Os
               Cubiti
            
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             Galen
             seems
             to
             add
             a
             sixt
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             fourth
             Extender
             ,
             viz.
             a
             fleshy
             Lump
             hudled
             up
             of
             the
             two
             former
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             calls
             
               Brachiaeus
               externus
            
             ,
             to
             difference
             it
             from
             the
             
               Brachiaeus
               intern
               is
               flectens
            
             ,
             because
             being
             spred
             out
             upon
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Brachium
             ,
             it
             is
             placed
             under
             the
             two
             former
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Radius
             is
             termed
             ROTUNDUS
             ,
             or
             Teres
             ;
             from
             the
             inner
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Arm
             by
             a
             strong
             and
             fleshy
             beginning
             ,
             it
             ends
             obliquely
             very
             near
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             with
             a
             fleshy
             end
             ,
             and
             likewise
             a
             membranous
             tendon
             ,
             which
             Spigelius
             writes
             ,
             does
             go
             again
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             and
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             outward
             side
             of
             the
             said
             Radius
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             QUADRATUS
             ,
             reaching
             from
             the
             lowest
             part
             of
             the
             Cubita
             ,
             into
             the
             lowest
             of
             the
             Radiu●s
             ,
             wholly
             fleshy
             ,
             every
             where
             two
             fingers
             broad
             ;
             it
             goes
             above
             that
             Ligament
             common
             to
             the
             Radius
             and
             Cubitus
             .
             These
             are
             the
             
               Manus
               pr●natores
            
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             SUPINATOR
             PRIMUS
             ,
             from
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Brachium
             growing
             sharp
             ,
             till
             it
             reach
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             inserted
             with
             a
             tendinous
             End.
             
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             the
             SUPINATOR
             ALTER
             ,
             growing
             from
             the
             outward
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             fleshy
             ,
             membranous
             without
             ,
             fleshy
             within
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             middle
             wel-near
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             Among
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Radius
             Casserius
             once
             found
             two
             little
             ones
             ,
             and
             very
             small
             ,
             about
             the
             Joynt
             Cubit
             ,
             and
             proceeding
             in
             an
             opposite
             fashion
             ,
             and
             moving
             the
             Radius
             Prone
             and
             Supine
             like
             a
             Pulley
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             I
             found
             them
             not
             as
             yet
             .
             I
             have
             somtimes
             seen
             in
             their
             place
             ,
             in
             a
             musculous
             man
             ,
             one
             triangular
             
             Muscle
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             and
             ending
             about
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             with
             a
             fleshy
             and
             narrow
             end
             ,
             nor
             was
             it
             the
             portion
             of
             any
             Muscle
             ,
             all
             which
             we
             had
             before
             diligently
             separated
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap
               9.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Wrist
             and
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             TO
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             WRIST
             and
             the
             Hollow
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             is
             the
             Musculus
             PALMARIS
             referred
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             inner
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             with
             a
             round
             and
             tendinous
             beginning
             ,
             spred
             almost
             over
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             it
             is
             stretched
             out
             over
             the
             Hollow
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             and
             cleaves
             exceeding
             fast
             to
             the
             Skin
             :
             where
             under
             the
             Skin
             in
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             hand
             is
             a
             broad
             Tendon
             ;
             whence
             proceeds
             that
             exquisite
             Sense
             which
             is
             in
             that
             part
             :
             and
             it
             ends
             into
             the
             first
             Intervals
             between
             the
             Joynts
             of
             the
             Fingers
             :
             it
             seems
             to
             have
             been
             made
             ,
             that
             the
             Hand
             might
             take
             the
             better
             hold
             ,
             when
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Palm
             is
             wrinkled
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             they
             add
             the
             
               Membrana
               carnosa
            
             which
             they
             will
             have
             to
             open
             the
             Palm
             of
             the
             Hand
             when
             it
             is
             contracted
             ;
             also
             a
             
               four
               squa
               e
               Parcel
            
             of
             Flesh
             growing
             out
             of
             that
             Membrane
             ,
             resembling
             certain
             Muscles
             ;
             either
             to
             extend
             the
             Palm
             when
             the
             Hand
             is
             open
             ,
             as
             Spigelius
             conceives
             ,
             or
             to
             make
             it
             hollow
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             would
             have
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Wrist
             or
             CARPUS
             are
             four
             ;
             two
             Benders
             which
             are
             internal
             ;
             two
             Extenders
             ,
             which
             are
             external
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Bender
            
             (
             which
             Riolanus
             calls
             
               Cubiteus
               internus
            
             ,
             to
             whom
             we
             are
             beholden
             for
             these
             Names
             )
             arising
             from
             the
             internal
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             and
             being
             stretched
             over
             the
             Elbow
             ,
             it
             is
             implanted
             with
             a
             thick
             Tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Wrist
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             ,
             
               Radius
               internus
            
             because
             it
             is
             drawn
             along
             the
             Radius
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             same
             
               beginning
               ,
               ends
            
             into
             the
             first
             Bone
             of
             the
             Metacarpium
             ,
             under
             the
             fore-finger
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               which
               are
               visible
               in
               the
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               those
               which
               lay
               by
               them
               or
               over
               them
               being
               removed
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Head
                     called
                  
                   Recti
                   minores
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Recti
                     majores
                     so
                     called
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                     The
                     obliqui
                     Superiores
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     obliqui
                     Inferiores
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Levator
                     Scapulae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Rotundus
                     minor
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Serratus
                     major
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Musculi
                     transversales
                     belonging
                     to
                     the
                     Neck
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ffff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spinari
                     duo
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sacrolumbus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Dorsi
                     longissimus
                     in
                     its
                     proper
                     Scituation
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     ,
                     that
                     it
                     may
                     be
                     seen
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Semispinatus
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     sacer
                     Musculus
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Musculi
                     Quadrati
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Supinator
                     Brachij
                  
                   ,
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Extensor
                     Carpi
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Bicornis
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     proper
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   P.
                   
                     The
                     other
                     Extensor
                     Carpi
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Extensores
                     Digitorum
                     out
                     of
                     their
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     Extensor
                     Indicis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Pollicem
                     extendentes
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   These
                   following
                   Characters
                   design
                   the
                   Muscles
                   of
                   the
                   lower
                   Limbs
                   .
                
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Glutaeus
                     medius
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Glutoeus
                     minimus
                     in
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Pyriformis
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Marsupialis
                     ,
                     or
                     Obturator
                     internus
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     same
                     in
                     the
                     left
                     side
                     out
                     of
                     its
                     place
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     Marsupium
                     neatly
                     expressed
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Obturator
                     externus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     fourth
                     of
                     the
                     Quadragemini
                     ,
                     by
                     the
                     Author
                     called
                  
                   Quadratus
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     Biceps
                     which
                     bends
                     the
                     Leg.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Semimembranosus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Seminervosus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Gracilis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Musculus
                     triceps
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ●
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Crureus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Tibieus
                     posticus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Flexor
                     Digitorum
                     Pedis
                     ,
                     Magn●●
                     or
                     Perforans
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     Flexor
                     minor
                     or
                     Perforatus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   SSS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Flexor
                     Pollicis
                  
                   ,
                
                 
                   t.
                   
                     The
                     Pollicis
                     Adductor
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   u.
                   
                     The
                     Pollicis
                     Abductor
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   x.
                   
                     The
                     Abductor
                     minimi
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   z.
                   
                     The
                     fleshy
                     Mass
                     in
                     the
                     Sole
                     of
                     the
                     Foot.
                     
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             
               other
               ,
               Cubiteus
               externus
            
             ,
             from
             the
             same
             beginning
             ,
             through
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             goes
             with
             one
             Tendon
             into
             the
             fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Metacarpe
             under
             the
             little
             Finger
             .
          
           
             The
             FINGERS
             are
             
               bended
               ,
               extended
               ,
               drawn
               to
               ,
            
             and
             
               drawn
               away
            
             .
          
           
             Bended
             by
             the
             Muscles
             Sublimis
             and
             Profundus
             .
          
           
             The
             former
             from
             the
             inner
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             before
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             is
             divided
             into
             four
             Tendons
             ,
             inclosed
             in
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             in
             a
             Ring
             :
             they
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             second
             Joynting
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             a
             Cleft
             being
             first
             made
             ,
             which
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             following
             Muscle
             do
             pass
             through
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             termed
             Perforatus
             ,
             the
             bored
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             later
             spred
             out
             under
             the
             former
             and
             like
             unto
             it
             ,
             is
             inserted
             through
             the
             Clifts
             of
             the
             former
             Tendons
             ,
             into
             the
             Joynting
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             called
             Perforans
             ,
             the
             Borer
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             these
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             .
             1.
             
             That
             by
             an
             elegant
             Workmanship
             of
             Nature
             ,
             a
             long
             slit
             is
             made
             in
             each
             of
             them
             ,
             that
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             third
             Joynting
             may
             pass
             through
             
             
             
             
             
             them
             as
             through
             an
             Arch.
             2.
             
             That
             the
             membranous
             sheath
             does
             straitly
             embrace
             and
             keep
             in
             the
             said
             Tendons
             ,
             least
             in
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             hand
             ;
             they
             should
             be
             removed
             out
             of
             their
             place
             .
             3.
             
             That
             a
             strong
             membranous
             Ring
             does
             in
             the
             wrist
             bind
             together
             all
             the
             Tendons
             internal
             and
             external
             ,
             which
             being
             cut
             asunder
             ,
             they
             are
             easily
             removed
             out
             of
             their
             places
             .
          
           
             
               Iacobus
               Silvius
            
             reckons
             the
             Extensores
             for
             one
             Muscle
             ;
             and
             calls
             it
             Tensor
             Digitorum
             ,
             whereas
             both
             their
             Originals
             and
             Insertions
             do
             vary
             .
             They
             are
             two
             and
             arise
             commonly
             from
             the
             external
             Apophyfis
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             and
             the
             ring-fashioned
             ligament
             ,
             and
             with
             their
             bored
             ligaments
             ,
             being
             first
             collected
             ,
             they
             are
             then
             inserted
             confusedly
             into
             the
             second
             and
             third
             joynt
             .
          
           
             The
             Fingers
             are
             drawn
             to
             by
             four
             muscles
             called
             Lumbricales
             or
             Vermiculares
             worm-fashioned
             muscles
             ,
             from
             their
             shape
             and
             smallness
             .
             They
             arise
             from
             the
             tendons
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               profundus
            
             ,
             and
             being
             drawn
             out
             along
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             fingers
             ,
             they
             are
             obliquely
             carried
             unto
             the
             third
             joynting
             .
             Spigelius
             and
             Vestingus
             will
             have
             them
             to
             be
             inserted
             by
             a
             round
             tendon
             only
             into
             the
             first
             joynting
             ,
             whom
             I
             have
             somtimes
             found
             to
             be
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             their
             tendon
             being
             mixed
             with
             the
             membranes
             of
             the
             interjuncture
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Abductores
               interossei
            
             are
             six
             ,
             in
             the
             spaces
             of
             the
             Metacarp
             ,
             three
             external
             and
             three
             internal
             ,
             which
             joyning
             with
             the
             vermiculary
             do
             go
             along
             the
             outsides
             and
             insides
             of
             the
             fingers
             ,
             and
             stretch
             their
             tendons
             to
             the
             three
             inter-joyntings
             .
             They
             serve
             in
             some
             measure
             for
             extension
             .
             The
             External
             rest
             upon
             the
             Palm
             ,
             the
             Internal
             upon
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             between
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Metacarp
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             which
             bend
             the
             Thumb
             are
             two
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             radius
             is
             inserted
             into
             one
             of
             the
             joynts
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             arising
             from
             the
             wrist
             bone
             ,
             under
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             said
             Thumb
             .
             It
             lies
             wholly
             under
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             two
             Extendentes
             or
             stretchers
             out
             ,
             which
             arise
             from
             the
             Cubit
             .
             The
             first
             reaches
             unto
             the
             third
             Interjuncture
             ,
             the
             other
             unto
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             ,
             with
             many
             tendons
             ;
             sometimes
             one
             ,
             sometimes
             two
             ,
             and
             otherwhiles
             three
             .
          
           
             The
             Abducentes
             are
             three
             ;
             two
             arising
             from
             the
             Metacarpium
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             from
             the
             bone
             of
             the
             Metacarp
             ,
             which
             looks
             towards
             the
             forefinger
             :
             which
             Riolanus
             calls
             Autithenar
             ,
             as
             the
             other
             the
             former
             of
             the
             bringers
             to
             ,
             
               Hypothenar
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Abducentes
             or
             drawers
             away
             are
             three
             nameless
             muscles
             ,
             save
             that
             the
             said
             Riolanus
             calls
             one
             of
             them
             Thenar
             .
          
           
             The
             Forefinger
             has
             two
             proper
             muscles
             ,
             which
             some
             confound
             ,
             the
             first
             is
             the
             Abductor
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             first
             Interjoynting
             of
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             and
             terminated
             into
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Forefinger
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             said
             Fore-finger
             is
             drawn
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             towards
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             is
             the
             
               Indicis
               extensor
            
             the
             stretcher
             of
             the
             Forefinger
             which
             Riolanus
             calls
             Indicatorem
             the
             pointer
             ,
             as
             also
             Veslingus
             ,
             though
             he
             confound
             it
             with
             the
             Abductor
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             middle
             and
             external
             part
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             and
             ends
             with
             a
             double
             tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             second
             interjointure
             of
             the
             forefinger
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             also
             two
             muscles
             proper
             to
             the
             smallest
             finger
             ,
             the
             Abductor
             and
             Extensor
             .
             The
             former
             may
             be
             parted
             into
             many
             :
             It
             arises
             in
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             hand
             ▪
             from
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             wrist
             bones
             of
             the
             second
             rank
             ,
             and
             ends
             externally
             into
             the
             side
             of
             the
             first
             joint
             of
             the
             said
             finger
             .
             Aquapendent
             and
             others
             that
             have
             since
             followed
             him
             ,
             do
             hold
             that
             it
             draws
             the
             little
             finger
             outwardly
             ,
             from
             the
             rest
             .
             
               Extensor
               proprius
            
             ,
             which
             Riolanus
             exactly
             seperates
             from
             the
             great
             one
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             radius
             ,
             and
             carryed
             along
             Cubitus
             and
             the
             Radius
             ,
             is
             externally
             inserted
             into
             the
             finger
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             tendon
             ,
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap
               10.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Legg
             and
             Thigh
             in
             generall
             .
          
           
             PES
             the
             Leg
             and
             Thigh
             ,
             is
             all
             between
             
             the
             Buttocks
             and
             the
             Toes
             of
             the
             Feet
             :
             Others
             call
             it
             
               magnus
               pes
            
             ,
             the
             great
             Foot
             ,
             and
             Crus
             .
             It
             is
             divided
             into
             its
             parts
             ,
             as
             the
             Arm
             ,
             in
             a
             manner
             not
             unlike
             ,
             viz.
             Into
             the
             
               Fem●
               ,
               Tibia
            
             ,
             and
             
               Parous
               Pes.
            
             
          
           
             Again
             the
             
               Parous
               Pes
            
             is
             divided
             into
             
               Pedium
               ,
               Metapedium
            
             ,
             and
             Digiti
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Leg
             and
             Thigh
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             the
             Instrument
             of
             walking
             :
             which
             is
             performed
             by
             stirring
             and
             sitting
             .
             For
             one
             Leg
             being
             firmly
             set
             upon
             the
             ground
             ,
             we
             move
             and
             bring
             about
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             our
             Foot
             being
             firmly
             fixt
             ,
             keeps
             us
             from
             falling
             :
             and
             so
             we
             come
             to
             walk
             .
             The
             setting
             therefore
             of
             our
             Leg
             is
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             but
             the
             motion
             proceeds
             from
             the
             Leg
             ,
             which
             the
             length
             or
             shortness
             of
             the
             Leg
             does
             either
             help
             or
             hinder
             ;
             and
             therefore
             birds
             because
             they
             were
             to
             flie
             ,
             that
             their
             bulk
             might
             not
             hinder
             them
             ,
             they
             have
             a
             short
             Thigh
             and
             long
             Feet
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             going
             be
             slow
             .
             But
             Men
             go
             slower
             then
             Dogs
             ,
             bcause
             the
             successive
             putting
             on
             of
             their
             Foot
             from
             the
             Heel
             to
             the
             Toes
             ,
             slackens
             their
             motion
             ;
             whereas
             Dogs
             with
             one
             motion
             of
             their
             little
             Feet
             do
             pass
             along
             .
             Some
             do
             conceive
             that
             the
             length
             of
             a
             womans
             Leg
             helps
             to
             generation
             .
             Now
             there
             i●
             an
             Incision
             made
             into
             our
             knees
             and
             heel
             ,
             that
             we
             might
             not
             go
             leaping
             .
          
           
             This
             Motion
             is
             variously
             made
             by
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             Leg
             and
             Foot.
             We
             are
             therefore
             now
             to
             treat
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             whole
             Leg.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap
               11.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             THe
             Thigh
             is
             bended
             by
             two
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             in
             the
             Belly
             ,
             and
             is
             termed
             Psoa
             or
             the
             
               Musculus
               Lumbaris
            
             it
             arises
             with
             a
             fleshy
             beginning
             from
             the
             upper
             Vertebraes
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             forepart
             of
             the
             small
             Trochanter
             ,
             with
             a
             round
             and
             strong
             tendon
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             muscle
             called
             Psoas
             minor
             I
             found
             in
             a
             strong
             fleshy
             body
             at
             Hafnia
             ,
             1651.
             differing
             from
             that
             which
             Riolanus
             brags
             to
             have
             seen
             .
             For
             the
             greater
             part
             i●●ay
             under
             ,
             but
             outwardly
             inclined
             more
             to
             the
             sides
             .
             The
             beginning
             was
             fleshy
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             muscle
             was
             three
             fingers
             broad
             .
             It
             was
             inserted
             fleshy
             ,
             into
             the
             upper
             brim
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             backwards
             ,
             where
             the
             
               Iliacus
               internus
            
             arises
             .
             I
             conceived
             that
             its
             use
             was
             to
             spread
             as
             a
             pillow
             under
             the
             greater
             muscle
             ,
             because
             the
             Os
             Ilij
             is
             of
             it self
             immoveable
             ,
             or
             to
             hold
             the
             Os
             Ilij
             upright
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             not
             burthen
             a
             man
             too
             much
             when
             he
             stands
             .
             
               Michael
               Lyserus
            
             a
             most
             expert
             Anatomist
             can
             witness
             the
             same
             with
             me
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ilia
               us
               secundus
            
             is
             inserted
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             with
             a
             tendon
             which
             grows
             to
             the
             tendon
             of
             the
             precedent
             muscle
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             whole
             internal
             cavity
             of
             the
             Os
             Ilij
             ,
             by
             a
             small
             and
             fleshy
             beginning
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Thigh
             is
             extended
             by
             three
             muscles
             of
             the
             Buttocks
             termed
             Glutaei
             .
          
           
             I.
             Is
             the
             
               Major
               ,
               externus
               &
               amplissimus
            
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             Crupper
             ,
             the
             spina
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             ,
             and
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             ;
             and
             ends
             into
             the
             Os
             Femoris
             ,
             under
             the
             great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             other
             is
             the
             medius
             or
             middlemost
             in
             Scituation
             and
             Magnitude
             .
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             inner
             side
             of
             the
             Spina
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             ,
             ending
             into
             this
             great
             Trochanter
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             strong
             tendon
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             third
             called
             minimus
             the
             smallest
             ,
             lies
             concealed
             under
             the
             middlemost
             ;
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             back
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             near
             the
             Acetabulum
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             strong
             tendon
             ,
             and
             Ends
             into
             the
             great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             These
             three
             do
             make
             up
             the
             fleshy
             Substance
             of
             the
             Buttocks
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Thigh
               is
               drawn
               to
               ,
               and
               wheeled
               about
               inwards
            
             by
             three
             muscles
             ,
             which
             many
             do
             reckon
             for
             one
             ,
             and
             call
             it
             triceps
             triple
             headed
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             threefold
             beginning
             .
             1.
             
             Is
             from
             the
             upper
             joynting
             of
             the
             Os
             pubis
             .
             2.
             
             Is
             from
             the
             lowest
             joynting
             of
             Os
             pubis
             .
             3.
             
             Is
             from
             the
             middle
             part
             of
             the
             said
             bone
             .
             They
             are
             inserted
             first
             of
             all
             into
             the
             inner
             head
             of
             the
             Thigh
             bone
             ,
             near
             the
             Ham
             ,
             with
             a
             round
             tendon
             or
             into
             the
             rough
             line
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
             2.
             
             To
             the
             upper
             ,
             partly
             .
             3.
             
             Partly
             to
             the
             lower
             ,
             at
             the
             Rorator
             minor
             .
             Riolanus
             has
             other
             insertions
             :
             For
             he
             will
             have
             the
             first
             to
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             the
             second
             to
             be
             produced
             with
             a
             very
             strong
             Tendon
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             End
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             the
             third
             below
             the
             neck
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             To
             these
             Spigelius
             and
             Veslingus
             do
             add
             one
             which
             they
             call
             Lividus
             arising
             at
             the
             joyning
             of
             Os
             pubis
             ,
             near
             the
             Gristle
             ,
             and
             implanted
             with
             a
             short
             tendon
             ,
             into
             the
             inner
             side
             of
             the
             thigh
             :
             but
             they
             grant
             that
             this
             is
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
             But
             they
             do
             ill
             to
             reckon
             it
             among
             the
             bending
             Muscles
             .
             But
             Riolanus
             calls
             it
             Pectineus
             and
             reckons
             it
             for
             a
             bender
             ,
             yet
             acknowledges
             that
             it
             is
             the
             uppermost
             and
             fourth
             portion
             of
             the
             triceps
             ,
             which
             with
             Fallopius
             he
             divides
             into
             four
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             indeed
             it
             seems
             to
             have
             so
             many
             parts
             .
          
           
             
               It
               is
               drawn
               away
               and
               turned
               about
               outwards
               by
               six
            
             Muscles
             ▪
             the
             Quadrigemini
             and
             the
             two
             Obturatores
             .
          
           
             The
             Quadrigemini
             are
             in
             a
             manner
             one
             like
             another
             ,
             and
             little
             ,
             placed
             as
             it
             were
             athwart
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             lower
             and
             outer
             part
             of
             the
             Os
             Sacrum
             ,
             the
             bunch
             of
             Os
             Ischij
             ,
             and
             the
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Hip-bone
             .
             They
             are
             inserted
             into
             that
             space
             which
             is
             between
             the
             two
             Trochanters
             .
             The
             first
             Quadrigeminus
             is
             called
             Pyriformis
             Pear-fashioned
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             shape
             ,
             and
             
               Iliaeus
               externus
            
             from
             its
             Scituation
             ;
             the
             rest
             want
             names
             ,
             save
             the
             fourth
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Quadratus
             .
          
           
             The
             Obturatores
             stoppers
             ,
             take
             up
             the
             wide
             hole
             between
             the
             Os
             pubis
             and
             Os
             Isehij
             .
             And
             they
             are
             external
             or
             internal
             ,
             the
             former
             arising
             from
             the
             outer
             Circle
             of
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             share
             :
             the
             latter
             from
             the
             inner
             and
             they
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             great
             Trochanter
             :
             the
             inner
             may
             be
             termed
             Bursalis
             or
             purse-fashioned
             because
             it
             hides
             the
             fourfold
             tendons
             in
             a
             fleshy
             purse
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             nearly
             shaped
             by
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             quadrigeminal
             Muscles
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               12.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Legg
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Leg
               is
               bent
            
             by
             the
             four
             musculi
             postici
             .
          
           
             One
             of
             them
             has
             two
             Heads
             ,
             termed
             Bioeps
             ,
             the
             first
             from
             the
             joyning
             of
             the
             Os
             pubis
             ,
             the
             second
             from
             the
             outer
             part
             of
             the
             thigh
             ,
             and
             both
             of
             them
             are
             inserted
             with
             one
             tendon
             ,
             the
             fleshy
             substance
             being
             first
             increased
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             into
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Leg.
             
          
           
             The
             second
             called
             
               Semimembranosus
               arises
            
             from
             the
             swelling
             of
             the
             Ischium
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             inner
             side
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             backwards
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             the
             Seminervosus
             ,
             and
             has
             the
             same
             beginning
             and
             the
             same
             end
             with
             the
             former
             ,
             save
             that
             in
             the
             hinder
             parts
             it
             is
             carried
             little
             forward
             obliquely
             ,
             before
             it
             terminates
             at
             the
             inside
             of
             the
             Leg.
             
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             the
             Gracilis
             ,
             which
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             and
             arises
             from
             the
             joyning
             of
             the
             share-bone
             .
          
           
             Four
             Muscles
             extend
             the
             Leg.
             
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             the
             Rectus
             ,
             arising
             with
             an
             acute
             tendon
             from
             the
             outer
             and
             lower
             Spine
             of
             the
             Ilium
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             and
             third
             are
             the
             two
             Vasti
             ,
             the
             external
             arising
             from
             the
             whole
             root
             ,
             the
             great
             Trochanters
             ,
             and
             the
             bone
             of
             the
             Thigh
             which
             lies
             under
             :
             the
             Inner
             from
             the
             small
             Trochanter
             :
             they
             are
             terminated
             on
             each
             hand
             at
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Rectus
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             the
             Crureus
             ,
             fixed
             to
             the
             Thigh
             bone
             ,
             as
             the
             Brachiaeus
             is
             to
             the
             Brachium
             .
          
           
             These
             four
             Muscles
             ,
             are
             terminated
             into
             one
             tendon
             ,
             which
             embracing
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             flesh
             into
             it self
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             before
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             and
             is
             there
             instead
             of
             a
             Ligament
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             Two
             Muscles
             ,
             pul
             it
             to
             ,
             inwards
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             the
             
               longus
               ,
               fascialis
            
             or
             sartorius
             which
             Spigelius
             and
             Veslingus
             reckon
             among
             the
             benders
             ,
             on
             which
             Tailors
             or
             Borchers
             rest
             themselves
             when
             they
             sit
             cross-leg'd
             .
             It
             is
             well
             nigh
             the
             longest
             of
             all
             muscles
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             former
             Spina
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             ,
             and
             descending
             obliquely
             unto
             the
             inner
             and
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Leg.
             
          
           
             The
             other
             is
             the
             
               Popliteus
               arising
            
             from
             the
             lower
             and
             outer
             extuberancy
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             and
             being
             inserted
             four-square
             into
             the
             inner
             and
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             leg
             obliquely
             .
          
           
             The
             Abductor
             is
             one
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Membranosus
             and
             
               fascia
               lata
            
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             fleshy
             from
             the
             Spina
             of
             Os
             Ilij
             ,
             and
             is
             carried
             obliquely
             ,
             into
             the
             outer
             part
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             and
             with
             its
             most
             broad
             and
             long
             tendon
             ,
             invests
             well-near
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               13.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Feet
             .
          
           
             THe
             Foot
             is
             bended
             and
             extended
             .
             Two
             muscles
             bend
             it
             forwards
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             is
             termed
             
               tibiaeus
               anticus
            
             ,
             affixed
             to
             the
             Leg
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             process
             thereof
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Os
             Pedij
             ,
             before
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             with
             a
             tendon
             which
             at
             the
             end
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             is
             
               Peroneus
               biceps
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             for
             two
             muscles
             ,
             one
             head
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             Epiphisis
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             the
             other
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Perone
             .
             It
             has
             a
             double
             tendon
             the
             lesser
             carried
             into
             the
             bone
             of
             the
             little
             toe
             ;
             and
             the
             greater
             going
             obliquely
             under
             the
             sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Os
             pedij
             just
             against
             the
             great
             toe
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             extended
             backwards
             by
             the
             four
             
               Postici
               ,
               duo
               gemelli
            
             ,
             the
             internal
             and
             the
             external
             ,
             called
             Gastrocnemij
             ,
             because
             they
             constitute
             the
             ankle
             ,
             and
             arise
             from
             the
             inner
             and
             outer
             head
             of
             the
             thigh
             under
             the
             Ham.
             The
             third
             being
             cal'd
             soleus
             is
             added
             to
             these
             beneath
             ,
             
             arising
             from
             the
             hindermore
             appendix
             of
             the
             fibula
             .
             These
             three
             muscles
             are
             terminated
             into
             a
             most
             thick
             and
             strong
             tendon
             ,
             to
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Heel
             and
             Pterna
             ,
             by
             which
             beasts
             being
             killed
             ,
             are
             usually
             hung
             up
             .
             Hypocrates
             did
             term
             it
             chorda
             :
             where
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             fracture
             of
             the
             Heel
             ,
             he
             sayes
             that
             hiccuping
             and
             convulsive
             feavers
             do
             follow
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             is
             called
             plantaris
             and
             answers
             to
             the
             palmaris
             in
             the
             hand
             ;
             it
             is
             lean
             and
             meagre
             ,
             and
             degenerates
             into
             a
             long
             tendon
             ,
             and
             covering
             the
             whole
             sole
             of
             the
             foot
             ,
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             outward
             head
             of
             the
             Thigh
             bone
             ,
             under
             the
             Ham
             :
             and
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             five
             toes
             ,
             and
             has
             the
             same
             use
             here
             which
             it
             has
             in
             the
             Hand
             :
             though
             the
             comparison
             of
             one
             to
             the
             other
             holds
             not
             out
             very
             exact
             .
             Veslingus
             has
             observed
             that
             this
             muscle
             has
             sometimes
             been
             wanting
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Tibiaeus
               posticus
            
             must
             be
             added
             to
             these
             ,
             which
             Spigelius
             reckons
             amongst
             the
             oblique
             movers
             ,
             and
             Riolanus
             among
             the
             extenders
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               14.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Toes
             .
          
           
             THe
             Toes
             of
             the
             foot
             are
             moved
             by
             muscles
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             fingers
             of
             the
             hand
             .
          
           
             Two
             muscles
             bend
             the
             Toes
             ,
             the
             Magnus
             which
             answers
             to
             the
             profundus
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             Epiphisis
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             under
             the
             sole
             is
             divided
             into
             four
             tendons
             ,
             which
             boreing
             through
             the
             minor
             ,
             they
             are
             implanted
             into
             the
             third
             Articulation
             of
             the
             four
             toes
             .
             The
             Minor
             answering
             to
             the
             sublimis
             ,
             is
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             sole
             of
             the
             foot
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             pterna
             or
             heel
             bone
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             second
             articulation
             of
             the
             four
             toes
             ,
             to
             which
             before
             it
             comes
             it
             is
             bored
             thorough
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             transmit
             the
             tendons
             of
             the
             foremost
             Muscle
             :
             and
             therefore
             this
             is
             called
             perforatus
             ,
             the
             other
             perforans
             .
          
           
             One
             muscle
             extends
             the
             four
             toes
             of
             the
             foot
             ,
             which
             is
             by
             some
             divided
             into
             two
             ;
             arising
             from
             the
             upper
             and
             outer
             part
             of
             the
             tibia
             ,
             and
             having
             four
             tendons
             ,
             which
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             second
             and
             third
             Interjuncture
             .
          
           
             The
             four
             wormfashioned
             Muscles
             do
             
               draw
               them
               to
            
             ,
             answering
             to
             those
             in
             the
             Hand
             ,
             some
             flesh
             being
             intersprinkled
             from
             the
             Heel
             :
             They
             are
             fastned
             by
             so
             many
             tendons
             to
             the
             first
             interjoynting
             .
          
           
             The
             ten
             Interossei
             do
             draw
             them
             away
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             pedium
             ,
             and
             falling
             the
             void
             spaces
             of
             the
             Metapedium
             ,
             they
             are
             external
             or
             internal
             ,
             the
             former
             with
             a
             broad
             tendon
             do
             arise
             by
             the
             sides
             ,
             to
             the
             first
             interjoynting
             of
             the
             toes
             by
             the
             sides
             ;
             the
             latter
             at
             the
             second
             interjoynting
             :
             but
             the
             ninth
             serves
             for
             the
             drawing-to
             of
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             the
             tenth
             for
             the
             drawing
             to
             of
             the
             little
             toe
             .
          
           
             The
             
               great
               Toe
            
             has
             peculiar
             muscles
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             bent
             by
             one
             only
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             fibula
             ,
             and
             inserted
             into
             the
             third
             interjointing
             (
             Riolanus
             sayes
             the
             first
             )
             of
             the
             great
             toe
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             extended
             by
             another
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Fibula
             (
             or
             as
             some
             say
             from
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             tibia
             ,
             where
             it
             recedes
             from
             the
             Fibula
             )
             which
             is
             oftentimes
             divided
             into
             two
             tendons
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             brought
             to
             ,
             with
             one
             ,
             inwardly
             fastned
             to
             the
             greatest
             bone
             of
             the
             pedium
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             
               drawn
               away
            
             by
             one
             arising
             fleshy
             from
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             heel
             ,
             and
             entring
             extrinsecally
             into
             the
             first
             bone
             of
             the
             great
             toe
             .
          
           
             Now
             there
             is
             a
             
               new
               muscle
            
             found
             out
             above
             the
             Interosseans
             ,
             the
             first
             Inventor
             whereof
             is
             Casserius
             ;
             who
             calls
             it
             tranversalis
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             situation
             .
             Veslingus
             call
             it
             the
             
               Adductor
               pollicis
               minor
            
             ,
             which
             use
             nature
             seems
             to
             have
             intended
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             nervous
             and
             broad
             ,
             from
             the
             ligament
             of
             the
             first
             interjuncture
             of
             the
             little
             Toe
             ,
             and
             sometime
             from
             one
             of
             the
             toes
             next
             the
             little
             toe
             ;
             and
             by
             and
             by
             becoming
             fleshy
             and
             so
             continuing
             ,
             it
             is
             carried
             athwart
             over
             the
             first
             joints
             of
             the
             fingers
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             short
             and
             broad
             tendon
             ,
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             first
             joynt
             of
             the
             Great-toe
             ,
             a
             little
             inwards
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             hereof
             is
             ,
             to
             secure
             our
             walking
             ,
             when
             we
             pass
             through
             rough
             wayes
             ,
             full
             of
             round
             flints
             ,
             or
             over
             any
             other
             small
             ,
             slippery
             ,
             or
             rowling
             passage
             .
             For
             by
             help
             of
             this
             muscle
             ,
             the
             foot
             does
             accommodate
             it self
             ,
             to
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             Bodies
             we
             tread
             on
             ,
             and
             layes
             hold
             thereon
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             make
             its
             passage
             more
             stead-fast
             .
          
           
             The
             Abductor
             of
             the
             little
             toe
             ,
             sticking
             in
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             foot
             broad
             and
             vast
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             same
             part
             of
             the
             heel
             ,
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             first
             Interjuncture
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             observed
             a
             peculiar
             bender
             of
             the
             little
             toe
             ,
             long
             ,
             round
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             and
             divided
             with
             two
             tendons
             about
             the
             insertion
             of
             the
             toe
             .
          
           
             Finally
             a
             
               fleshy
               mass
            
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             in
             the
             sole
             of
             the
             foot
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             in
             the
             Palm
             of
             the
             hand
             ,
             wherewith
             our
             footing
             is
             fastened
             as
             with
             a
             cushion
             ,
             and
             the
             tendons
             of
             the
             muscles
             do
             lie
             hidden
             ,
             in
             a
             soft
             Pillow
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           FIRST
           MANUAL
           Concerning
           the
           Veins
           ,
           Answering
           to
           the
           FIRST
           BOOK
           OF
           THE
           Lower
           Belly
           .
        
         
           ABove
           ,
           in
           the
           Proaem
           of
           this
           Anatomical
           work
           ,
           I
           promised
           
             four
             Books
          
           ,
           and
           
             four
             little
             Books
             or
             Manuals
          
           .
           Four
           Books
           touching
           the
           three
           Cavities
           and
           the
           Limbs
           ;
           Four
           
             Manuals
             ,
             viz.
          
           touching
           the
           
             Veins
             ,
             Arteries
             ,
             Nerves
          
           and
           Bones
           .
           Now
           every
           Manual
           answers
           to
           its
           Book
           .
           Because
           from
           the
           lower
           Cavity
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           principal
           part
           thereof
           ,
           the
           Liver
           arise
           the
           Veins
           ;
           from
           the
           Heart
           in
           the
           middle
           Cavity
           the
           Arteries
           ;
           from
           the
           Marrow
           in
           the
           third
           Cavity
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Limbs
           the
           Bones
           do
           answer
           .
           And
           even
           as
           the
           Bones
           joyned
           together
           do
           make
           a
           peculiar
           Fabrick
           or
           Skeleton
           ,
           representing
           the
           form
           of
           the
           whol
           Animal
           ;
           so
           also
           do
           the
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           and
           Nerves
           .
           And
           
             Gulielmus
             Fabricius
             Hildanus
          
           a
           Famous
           Chyrurgeon
           hath
           such
           a
           Frame
           of
           all
           the
           Veins
           of
           the
           Body
           artificially
           separated
           ;
           and
           at
           Padua
           by
           the
           Instruction
           of
           
             Ad.
             Spigelius
          
           ,
           and
           
             John
             Veslingius
          
           ,
           and
           
             John
             Leonicenus
          
           such
           Frames
           of
           the
           Veins
           Arteries
           and
           Nerves
           seperated
           from
           the
           body
           ,
           are
           commonly
           to
           be
           seen
           at
           Padua
           ;
           and
           the
           like
           is
           to
           be
           seen
           here
           at
           Hafnia
           acurately
           made
           ,
           and
           explained
           in
           four
           very
           great
           Tables
           ,
           in
           the
           Custody
           of
           the
           renowned
           D.
           D.
           
             Henricus
             Fuiren
          
           my
           Cosin
           Germane
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Veins
             ,
             Arteries
          
           and
           Nerves
           are
           Organs
           or
           common
           vessels
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           through
           which
           some
           spirit
           ,
           with
           or
           without
           Blood
           ,
           is
           carried
           from
           some
           principal
           member
           ,
           into
           sundry
           parts
           of
           the
           Body
           .
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               1.
            
             
             Of
             a
             Vein
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             AVein
             is
             a
             common
             Organ
             ,
             round
             ,
             long
             ,
             
             hollow
             like
             a
             channel
             or
             Conduit
             pipe
             ,
             fit
             to
             carry
             or
             bring
             back
             Blood
             and
             Natural
             Spirit
             .
          
           
             The
             term
             Vein
             was
             by
             the
             Ancients
             given
             both
             to
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ;
             but
             they
             cal'd
             the
             Arteries
             pulsing
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             not
             pulsing
             Veins
             ,
             and
             some
             called
             Vein
             ,
             the
             greater
             Vein
             ,
             and
             an
             Artery
             the
             lesser
             Vein
             and
             the
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             of
             a
             Vein
             ,
             is
             the
             proper
             vein-making
             power
             or
             faculty
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             is
             a
             clammy
             and
             cold
             portion
             of
             the
             Seed
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             principle
             of
             a
             Veins
             Original
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Principle
             of
             Dispensation
             
             from
             whence
             the
             Veins
             arise
             ,
             is
             the
             Liver
             (
             not
             to
             speak
             of
             some
             ancient
             triflers
             ,
             who
             would
             derive
             the
             Veins
             from
             the
             Brain
             )
             and
             not
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             would
             have
             it
             .
             For
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Blood
               is
               made
               in
               the
               Liver
               .
               And
               
               therefore
               't
               is
               like
               the
               original
               and
               rise
               of
               the
               Veins
               is
               there
               ▪
               and
               that
               the
               first
               sanguisication
               is
               not
               made
               in
               the
               Heart
               is
               apparent
               ,
               because
               there
               are
               no
               passages
               to
               conveigh
               the
               Chylus
               to
               the
               Heart
               ;
               again
               there
               are
               no
               receptacles
               for
               the
               Excrements
               of
               the
               first
               concoction
               placed
               by
               the
               Heart
               .
               But
               all
               these
               requisites
               are
               found
               in
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Blood
               is
               carried
               from
               the
               Liver
               to
               the
               Heart
               ,
               but
               not
               from
               the
               Heart
               immediately
               to
               the
               Liver
               .
               For
               Blood
               cannot
               go
               out
               of
               the
               Heart
               into
               the
               Liver
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               Valves
               ;
               though
               mediately
               when
               it
               runs
               back
               out
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               it
               may
               be
               carried
               thither
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Fishes
               have
               no
               right
               Ventricle
               in
               their
               Hearts
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               would
               have
               Blood
               to
               be
               made
               ;
               and
               out
               of
               which
               they
               would
               have
               the
               Veins
               to
               arise
               ,
               and
               the
               Fishes
               have
               both
               Veins
               and
               Blood.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               touches
               not
               the
               Heart
               but
               the
               Liver
               ,
               which
               the
               Cava
               also
               touches
               :
               which
               two
               Veins
               are
               the
               greatest
               in
               the
               whole
               body
               .
               But
               according
               to
               Aristotle
               
               all
               Veins
               ought
               to
               be
               continued
               with
               the
               Heart
               .
               You
               wil
               say
               ;
               the
               
                 Vena
                 arteriosa
              
               does
               not
               touch
               the
               Liver
               .
               I
               answer
               ,
               neither
               ought
               if
               so
               to
               do
               :
               because
               it
               hath
               the
               substance
               of
               an
               Artery
               ,
               and
               therefore
               arises
               from
               the
               Heart
               .
               But
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               ,
               is
               a
               Vein
               in
               substance
               and
               use
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Child
               in
               the
               womb
               ,
               was
               continued
               with
               the
               Cava
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               In
               the
               Child
               in
               the
               womb
               ,
               the
               Navil-vein
               with
               Blood
               goes
               into
               the
               Liver
               ,
               not
               into
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               If
               the
               Veins
               should
               arise
               from
               the
               Heart
               ,
               they
               would
               pulse
               as
               the
               Arteries
               do
               ,
               for
               the
               whole
               Heart
               pulses
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               Sanguification
               is
               never
               hurt
               ,
               but
               when
               the
               Liver
               is
               hurt
               ,
               as
               in
               a
               Dropsie
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             chief
             reasons
             for
             this
             Opinion
             :
             but
             many
             other
             reasons
             of
             other
             men
             against
             Aristot●●
             I
             reject
             as
             weak
             and
             easily
             refuted
             ,
             as
             also
             many
             weak
             reasons
             of
             the
             Peripateticks
             ,
             against
             this
             Opinion
             which
             we
             assert
             ,
             which
             any
             one
             may
             easily
             answer
             ,
             if
             he
             be
             at
             least
             but
             lightly
             skilled
             in
             Anatomy
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             and
             Vse
             of
             a
             Vein
             is
             ,
          
           
             I.
             According
             to
             the
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Ancient●
             
             to
             carry
             Blood
             and
             Natural
             Spirit
             with
             the
             Natural
             faculty
             ,
             from
             the
             Liver
             into
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             to
             nourish
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             But
             Nature
             hath
             revealed
             otherwise
             to
             their
             Posterity
             :
             for
             neither
             do
             the
             Veins
             
             carry
             any
             thing
             from
             the
             Liver
             to
             nourish
             the
             parts
             with
             ,
             nor
             is
             the
             Venal
             Blood
             useful
             for
             nutrition
             .
             But
             they
             bring
             ▪
             back
             all
             the
             Blood
             ,
             only
             to
             the
             Heart
             by
             Circulation
             ,
             either
             mediately
             by
             the
             ●iver
             ,
             as
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             ,
             or
             immediately
             ,
             as
             the
             Cava
             ;
             and
             that
             either
             from
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             from
             the
             smallest
             branches
             to
             the
             greatest
             ,
             by
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             branch
             ;
             or
             from
             the
             Liver
             whether
             it
             be
             there
             generated
             ,
             or
             is
             derived
             from
             the
             Mesaraicks
             and
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             they
             bring
             the
             Blood
             to
             the
             Heart
             as
             to
             the
             Centre
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             bring
             it
             from
             the
             smallest
             parts
             as
             from
             the
             Circumference
             ,
             is
             evidently
             provided
             by
             ocular
             Inspection
             ,
             Experiments
             ,
             and
             Reason
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               In
               Blood-letting
               ,
               the
               Arm
               being
               bound
               above
               the
               Elbow
               ,
               beyond
               the
               Ligature
               ,
               the
               Vein
               swels
               not
               ,
               nor
               if
               you
               should
               open
               a
               Vein
               would
               the
               Blood
               flow
               out
               (
               which
               is
               to
               be
               observed
               in
               opposition
               to
               the
               Authority
               of
               
                 Scribonius
                 Largu●
              
               )
               unless
               very
               little
               ,
               or
               if
               there
               were
               some
               Anastomosis
               of
               a
               Vein
               ,
               with
               an
               Artery
               in
               some
               parts
               above
               .
               But
               on
               this
               side
               the
               Ligature
               under
               the
               Elbow
               ,
               both
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Arm
               swel
               ,
               and
               being
               opened
               they
               void
               as
               much
               Blood
               as
               you
               wil
               ,
               yea
               all
               that
               is
               in
               the
               body
               .
               Likewise
               if
               with
               your
               finger
               you
               press
               the
               Vein
               below
               the
               Orifice
               ,
               the
               blood
               stops
               ,
               if
               you
               take
               away
               your
               finger
               it
               runs
               again
               :
               whence
               we
               gather
               that
               the
               blood
               runs
               from
               the
               outmost
               small
               Veins
               of
               the
               body
               upwards
               unto
               the
               great
               Veins
               and
               the
               Heart
               ;
               and
               not
               from
               the
               upper
               and
               greater
               Veins
               into
               the
               lower
               ,
               smaller
               ,
               and
               more
               remote
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Without
               Blood-letting
               ,
               the
               Veins
               being
               pressed
               with
               the
               finger
               shew
               as
               much
               :
               for
               if
               in
               an
               Arm
               either
               hot
               ,
               or
               whose
               Veins
               naturally
               swell
               ,
               you
               force
               the
               blood
               downwards
               with
               your
               finger
               towards
               the
               fingers
               ,
               there
               follows
               no
               blood
               in
               the
               upper
               part
               of
               the
               Vein
               ,
               but
               it
               appears
               empty
               .
               Contrariwise
               ,
               if
               you
               force
               the
               blood
               from
               the
               Fingers-ward
               upwards
               ,
               you
               shall
               presently
               see
               the
               Veins
               full
               ,
               more
               blood
               following
               that
               which
               you
               forced
               up
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               If
               you
               shall
               plunge
               your
               Arms
               and
               Legs
               into
               cold
               Water
               or
               Snow
               ,
               being
               first
               bound
               ,
               when
               you
               unbind
               the
               same
               ,
               you
               shal
               perceive
               your
               Heart
               offended
               and
               made
               cold
               ,
               by
               the
               cold
               blood
               ascending
               thereunto
               ;
               and
               it
               will
               be
               warmed
               if
               you
               put
               your
               Legs
               or
               Arms
               as
               aforesaid
               into
               hot
               water
               .
               Nor
               is
               it
               any
               other
               way
               by
               which
               cordiall
               Epithems
               applied
               to
               the
               Wrists
               and
               Privities
               do
               good
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               In
               persons
               that
               are
               hanged
               ,
               their
               Heads
               and
               Faces
               become
               red
               ,
               the
               Veins
               being
               distended
               ,
               because
               the
               recourse
               of
               the
               Blood
               into
               the
               Heart
               i●
               hindred
               ▪
               as
               in
               opening
               of
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Head
               ,
               the
               upper
               parts
               in
               the
               Head
               swell
               ,
               the
               other
               parts
               towards
               the
               Heart
               being
               empty
               .
               But
               the
               Halter
               being
               loosed
               from
               the
               dead
               body
               ,
               the
               swelling
               and
               redness
               of
               the
               Face
               does
               fall
               by
               little
               and
               little
               ,
               unless
               the
               Blood
               which
               is
               forced
               into
               the
               smallest
               Veins
               cannot
               run
               back
               again
               because
               of
               the
               coldness
               of
               the
               parts
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               In
               Dissections
               of
               Live-Animals
               ,
               the
               matter
               is
               most
               evident
               .
               For
               in
               what
               part
               of
               the
               body
               soever
               you
               bind
               a
               Vein
               ,
               it
               appears
               lank
               and
               empty
               on
               that
               side
               of
               the
               Ligature
               next
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               other
               side
               it
               swels
               where
               it
               is
               furthest
               from
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               neerest
               the
               extream
               parts
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               In
               a
               living
               Anatomy
               ,
               if
               you
               lift
               up
               a
               Vein
               and
               open
               it
               being
               tied
               ,
               beyond
               the
               Ligature
               plenty
               of
               Blood
               flows
               out
               ,
               on
               this
               side
               nothing
               at
               all
               ,
               which
               you
               shall
               find
               true
               in
               the
               crural
               and
               jugular
               Veins
               of
               any
               Creature
               whatsoever
               ,
               though
               you
               cut
               the
               Veins
               quite
               in
               sunder
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               often
               experimented
               with
               the
               great
               Walaeus
               ,
               and
               Harvey
               was
               not
               ignorant
               thereof
               .
            
             
               7
               ,
               The
               Valves
               of
               the
               Veins
               do
               conspire
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               which
               are
               so
               contrived
               ,
               that
               they
               stand
               all
               wide
               open
               towards
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               afford
               an
               easie
               passage
               from
               the
               smallest
               Veins
               to
               the
               greatest
               ,
               and
               from
               thence
               to
               the
               Heart
               .
               But
               from
               the
               Heart
               and
               great
               Veins
               ,
               being
               shut
               they
               suffer
               nothing
               to
               go
               back
               ,
               no
               not
               Water
               driven
               by
               force
               ,
               or
               a
               Probe
               ,
               unless
               being
               hurt
               they
               gape
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               The
               Liver
               sends
               only
               to
               the
               Heart
               ;
               the
               Heart
               only
               to
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               Arteries
               ;
               as
               hath
               been
               already
               demonstrated
               concerning
               the
               Heart
               .
               Seeing
               therefore
               the
               Blood
               by
               continual
               pulsation
               is
               sent
               in
               so
               great
               quantity
               in
               all
               parts
               ,
               and
               yet
               cannot
               be
               repaired
               by
               Diet
               ,
               nor
               can
               return
               back
               to
               the
               Heart
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Miter-fashioned
               Valves
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               nor
               abide
               stil
               in
               the
               Arteries
               which
               are
               continually
               driving
               the
               same
               ,
               nor
               finally
               is
               there
               so
               much
               spent
               by
               the
               parts
               to
               be
               nourished
               ;
               it
               follows
               ,
               that
               what
               remains
               over
               and
               above
               is
               brought
               back
               again
               to
               the
               heart
               ,
               and
               enters
               the
               Veins
               by
               Circulation
               .
               Whereof
               although
               some
               dark
               Footsteps
               are
               extant
               in
               the
               writings
               of
               the
               Ancients
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               proved
               in
               my
               Book
               
                 de
                 Luce
                 Animalium
              
               ,
               and
               Walaeus
               and
               Riolanus
               do
               afterward
               declare
               the
               same
               at
               large
               ;
               yet
               it
               hath
               been
               more
               ●●●erly
               manifested
               in
               this
               Age
               of
               ours
               to
               that
               most
               ingenious
               Venetian
               
                 Paul
                 Sarpias
                 Fulgentius
              
               as
               relates
               from
               his
               papers
               ,
               and
               soon
               after
               to
               Harvey
               an
               Englishman
               ,
               to
               whom
               the
               commendations
               and
               praise
               of
               first
               publishing
               the
               same
               to
               the
               World
               and
               proving
               i●
               by
               many
               Arguments
               and
               Experiments
               ,
               are
               justly
               due
               ,
               finally
               to
               Walaeus
               and
               others
               approving
               the
               same
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Primary
             End
             therefore
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             to
             carry
             and
             recarry
             Blood
             unto
             the
             Heart
             the
             secondary
             ends
             may
             be
             these
             following
             .
          
           
             II.
             A
             little
             to
             prepare
             the
             said
             Blood
             ,
             
             as
             do
             the
             
               Rami
               Lactei
            
             ,
             or
             to
             finish
             and
             perfect
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             a
             small
             portion
             of
             
               Vena
               Cavae
            
             between
             the
             Liver
             and
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             III.
             To
             perserve
             the
             Blood
             ,
             as
             the
             proper
             place
             preserves
             that
             which
             is
             placed
             therein
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             may
             be
             in
             a
             speedy
             passage
             ,
             and
             to
             retain
             it
             within
             its
             bounds
             .
             For
             extravenated
             Blood
             ,
             or
             Blood
             out
             of
             its
             natural
             place
             ,
             viz.
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             curdles
             and
             putrefies
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             Veins
             themselves
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             ill
             affected
             ,
             and
             the
             course
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             ▪
             stopped
             ,
             somtimes
             the
             Blood
             is
             found
             congealed
             ,
             witness
             Fernelius
             :
             somtimes
             a
             fatty
             substance
             is
             found
             instead
             of
             Blood
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             Bontius
             saw
             among
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             IV.
             Some
             would
             have
             the
             red
             veins
             to
             make
             Blood
             ,
             and
             the
             milkie
             veins
             to
             make
             Chyle
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             quite
             mistaken
             .
          
           
             The
             Form
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             taken
             from
             sundry
             Accidents
             .
          
           
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             that
             of
             a
             Conduit
             pipe
             .
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             varies
             .
             For
             the
             Veins
             are
             great
             in
             the
             Livet
             ,
             as
             in
             their
             Original
             ;
             in
             the
             
             Lungs
             because
             they
             are
             hot
             ,
             soft
             ,
             and
             in
             perpepetual
             motion
             ,
             and
             theresote
             they
             need
             much
             nourishment
             ,
             because
             much
             of
             their
             substance
             spends
             ;
             but
             especially
             because
             all
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             Body
             passes
             this
             way
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             right
             into
             the
             left
             Venrricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             proved
             already
             .
             In
             the
             Heart
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             heat
             ,
             and
             because
             it
             is
             to
             furnish
             the
             whole
             Body
             with
             Arterial
             Blood
             ,
             received
             in
             and
             sent
             out
             by
             continual
             pulsings
             .
             Also
             the
             emulgent
             Veins
             are
             great
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             plenty
             of
             blood
             and
             serosities
             ,
             which
             is
             brought
             back
             from
             the
             Kidnies
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
             But
             where
             the
             substance
             of
             a
             part
             is
             lasting
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             easily
             dissipated
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             smal
             quantity
             of
             Heat
             ,
             the
             Veins
             are
             lesser
             as
             in
             the
             Brain
             ,
             where
             the
             Veins
             do
             not
             alwaies
             easily
             appear
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Bones
             ,
             where
             they
             never
             manifestly
             appear
             ,
             though
             the
             Animal
             be
             great
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             parts
             towards
             the
             ends
             they
             are
             very
             small
             ,
             and
             are
             divided
             into
             Capillary
             Veins
             ,
             sprinkled
             into
             ,
             &
             commonly
             confounded
             with
             the
             flesh
             ,
             that
             the
             superfluous
             Blood
             may
             be
             better
             received
             into
             them
             ;
             which
             is
             one
             way
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             is
             mediately
             passed
             through
             the
             porous
             flesh
             to
             the
             Veins
             ,
             which
             way
             also
             Blood
             made
             of
             Chyle
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             is
             infused
             into
             the
             little
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Venae
               Cava
            
             .
             The
             other
             is
             ,
             by
             the
             Arteries
             immediately
             .
             For
             ,
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             is
             such
             with
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             every
             Vein
             is
             for
             the
             most
             part
             attended
             
             with
             an
             Artery
             ,
             over
             which
             it
             lies
             and
             which
             it
             touches
             .
             Gale●
             tels
             us
             a
             a
             Vein
             is
             seldom
             found
             without
             Arteries
             ;
             but
             no
             Artery
             is
             ever
             found
             without
             a
             Vein
             .
          
           
             But
             there
             is
             in
             the
             Body
             a
             mutual
             Anastomosis
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             :
             that
             
             they
             may
             conspire
             together
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             receive
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             Spirit
             &
             Blood
             ;
             which
             is
             apparent
             from
             reason
             ,
             because
             ,
             1.
             
             If
             the
             Veins
             be
             quite
             emptied
             ,
             the
             Arteries
             are
             empty
             also
             .
             Moreover
             out
             of
             a
             Vein
             opened
             in
             the
             Arm
             or
             Hand
             ,
             all
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             Body
             may
             be
             let
             out
             ,
             which
             ,
             because
             it
             cannot
             be
             contained
             or
             generated
             in
             the
             Hand
             ,
             it
             must
             necessarily
             come
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             beneath
             and
             round
             about
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Anastomoses
             :
             whereof
             this
             also
             is
             a
             token
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             of
             the
             Arm
             be
             tied
             very
             hard
             ,
             the
             Blood
             ceases
             running
             and
             the
             pulse
             stops
             it
             beating
             ,
             til
             the
             band
             be
             slackned
             .
             2.
             
             They
             are
             necessary
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Circular
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             seeing
             the
             pores
             of
             the
             Flesh
             are
             not
             sufficient
             ,
             save
             in
             a
             slow
             course
             ,
             and
             subtile
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Moreover
             they
             may
             be
             demonstrated
             in
             many
             places
             to
             the
             Eye-sight
             ,
             where
             the
             Conjunctions
             of
             the
             Veins
             with
             the
             Arteries
             are
             visible
             ,
             viz.
             in
             the
             Brain
             ,
             in
             the
             
               Plexus
               Chorides
            
             ,
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             in
             the
             Lungs
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             .
             and
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             ,
             with
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Aspera
               Arteria
            
             or
             Wesand
             .
             Of
             the
             Thoracick
             branches
             descending
             ,
             with
             the
             intercostal
             Veins
             .
             Also
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             with
             the
             Mammary
             vessels
             are
             joyned
             mouth
             to
             mouth
             under
             the
             
               Musculi
               Recti
            
             in
             the
             Abdomen
             .
             But
             the
             Anastomoses
             or
             mutual
             conjunction
             of
             the
             mouths
             of
             the
             Cava
             and
             Portae
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             are
             in
             a
             special
             manner
             manifest
             ;
             so
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             seminary
             vessels
             ,
             the
             Navil-strings
             ,
             and
             the
             extemities
             of
             the
             Hands
             and
             Feet
             .
          
           
             Though
             the
             Anastomoses
             or
             conjunctions
             
             of
             vessels
             ,
             are
             in
             reason
             necessary
             ,
             and
             manifest
             to
             the
             Eye-sight
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             not
             all
             
               manifestly
               discernable
            
             by
             the
             Sight
             ..
             I
             made
             experiment
             in
             the
             Liver
             of
             an
             Ox
             and
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             diligently
             separating
             all
             the
             substance
             from
             the
             vessels
             ;
             yet
             could
             I
             not
             either
             with
             a
             Probe
             ,
             or
             a
             Knife
             ,
             or
             a
             pair
             of
             Bellows
             find
             the
             Anastomoses
             of
             
               Vena
               Cavae
            
             and
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             open
             ,
             but
             all
             blind
             ,
             in
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             though
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             doubted
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             are
             open
             in
             in
             living
             bodies
             ,
             where
             all
             the
             passages
             are
             inlarged
             by
             Heat
             .
          
           
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               Anast●mases
               of
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               and
               Porta
               in
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               TABLE
               I.
               
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A
                   
                     The
                     descending
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     and
                     Porta
                     in
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     porta
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Gall-Badder
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dddddd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     greater
                     branches
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cavae
                     Dissemina●●d
                     through
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ●●●
                   .
                   
                     The
                     branches
                     of
                     Vena
                     Porta
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ffff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Paral●l
                     Anastomosis
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Cava
                     with
                     the
                     Vena
                     Portae
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   
                     The
                     second
                     Anastomosis
                     of
                     Trunk
                     wi●h
                     Trunk
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     third
                     cross
                     Anastomosis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ii
                   .
                   
                     The
                     fourth
                     Anastomosis
                     mixt
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   kk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     fif●
                     Anastomosis
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     oblique
                     or
                     angular
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               303
            
          
           
           
             I
             found
             them
             to
             be
             of
             divers
             kinds
             .
             The
             first
             Paralel
             when
             the
             utmost
             twigs
             are
             joyned
             
             one
             to
             another
             in
             right
             lines
             .
             The
             second
             is
             of
             Trunk
             with
             Trunk
             ,
             a
             transverse
             vessel
             going
             between
             .
             The
             third
             is
             cross-fashion'd
             ,
             when
             either
             the
             Branches
             go
             over
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             or
             the
             Trunk
             go
             over
             the
             Branches
             cross-wise
             ,
             or
             the
             Branches
             over
             the
             Branches
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             .
             The
             fourth
             is
             mixt
             of
             the
             Cross-fashion'd
             and
             the
             oblique
             .
             The
             fist
             is
             oblique
             or
             angular
             ,
             when
             the
             Branches
             are
             mutually
             inserted
             obliquely
             .
             I
             have
             before
             explained
             the
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Navil-vessels
             .
             Now
             the
             Anastomoses
             between
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             are
             either
             in
             the
             Trunks
             or
             the
             Capillary
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             Veins
             are
             somtimes
             invested
             with
             a
             common
             Membrane
             ,
             or
             some
             external
             
             thick
             one
             ,
             borrowed
             from
             the
             Neighboring
             parts
             ,
             when
             either
             they
             are
             suspended
             and
             carried
             a
             long
             way
             ,
             and
             are
             without
             the
             Bowels
             and
             Muscles
             ;
             or
             when
             they
             rest
             upon
             hard
             bodies
             .
             This
             happens
             in
             the
             lowest
             Belly
             ,
             to
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Peritoneum
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Chest
             from
             the
             Pleura
             .
          
           
             But
             where
             a
             Vein
             is
             inserted
             either
             into
             some
             Bowell
             or
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             it
             needs
             not
             this
             common
             coat
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             It
             is
             otherwise
             sufficiently
             susteined
             .
             2.
             
             Otherwise
             the
             ready
             sweating
             through
             of
             the
             blood
             would
             be
             hindred
             .
             3.
             
             And
             the
             laying
             down
             of
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             Vein
             .
             4.
             
             It
             would
             not
             so
             soon
             be
             sensible
             of
             the
             force
             of
             the
             substance
             of
             any
             Bowell
             .
             5.
             
             It
             would
             more
             hardly
             imbibe
             the
             Blood
             which
             is
             superfluous
             after
             the
             nourishment
             of
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Veins
             being
             so
             compassed
             with
             Membranes
             do
             
               not
               feel
            
             (
             unless
             they
             have
             Nerves
             neer
             them
             )
             of
             themselves
             and
             by
             their
             own
             Nature
             ,
             neither
             the
             acrimony
             of
             the
             Humors
             contained
             ,
             nor
             cutting
             or
             burning
             .
             And
             therefore
             Aristotle
             saies
             in
             his
             third
             Book
             
               de
               Historia
               Animalium
            
             chap.
             5.
             
             A
             Nerve
             cannot
             endure
             the
             Fire
             ,
             but
             a
             Vein
             can
             .
             And
             Galen
             in
             his
             sixt
             
               de
               usu
               partium
            
             chap
             ▪
             ●●
             .
             saies
             that
             if
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             be
             cut
             ,
             burnt
             ,
             or
             tied
             ,
             they
             feel
             it
             not
             at
             all
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               II.
            
             Of
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             of
             the
             Valves
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Substance
               of
               the
               Veins
            
             is
             Membranous
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             more
             easily
             stretch
             and
             shrink
             in
             again
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             only
             one
             Coat
             ,
             which
             is
             proper
             to
             them
             (
             the
             Arteries
             have
             two
             )
             being
             thin
             and
             rare
             ;
             because
             through
             it
             the
             blood
             is
             to
             be
             received
             after
             the
             parts
             are
             nourished
             .
             it
             carries
             not
             back
             such
             stirring
             and
             hot
             blood
             as
             the
             Arteries
             carry
             ;
             because
             it
             is
             grown
             cold
             and
             returns
             quietly
             to
             the
             Heart
             without
             any
             beating
             of
             the
             Pulse
             that
             it
             may
             be
             there
             again
             perfected
             .
          
           
             Some
             conceive
             that
             a
             Vein
             is
             interwoven
             
             with
             a
             triple
             kind
             of
             Fibres
             :
             but
             they
             ad
             ,
             that
             those
             fibres
             are
             there
             obscurely
             ,
             and
             only
             potentially
             ,
             nor
             can
             be
             moved
             out
             of
             their
             place
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             most
             strait
             contexture
             .
             But
             I
             rather
             conceive
             with
             Vesalius
             ,
             that
             others
             imagin
             Fibres
             to
             be
             there
             ,
             which
             are
             no
             more
             there
             than
             in
             Leather
             .
             for
             when
             we
             pull
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Reins
             all
             in
             pieces
             ,
             no
             fibres
             are
             there
             to
             be
             seen
             .
             But
             some
             Authors
             attribute
             fibres
             to
             the
             Veins
             ,
             because
             they
             have
             praeconceived
             this
             opinion
             ,
             that
             Attraction
             ,
             Expulsion
             and
             Retention
             are
             performed
             by
             sundry
             sorts
             of
             fibres
             ,
             whenas
             the
             fibres
             if
             they
             have
             any
             are
             to
             strengthen
             them
             .
          
           
             Harvey
             and
             W●…
             do
             suspect
             that
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             Veins
             is
             driven
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             the
             fibres
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             I
             conceive
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             by
             the
             motion
             and
             contraction
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             with
             which
             the
             Veins
             are
             mingled
             ,
             they
             not
             resisting
             .
             Yea
             ,
             and
             it
             may
             be
             driven
             by
             the
             blood
             continually
             following
             ,
             from
             the
             parts
             and
             Arteries
             moved
             by
             the
             Pulse
             .
             But
             others
             alleadge
             attraction
             to
             be
             made
             by
             heat
             ,
             without
             the
             fibres
             .
          
           
             Within
             the
             Veins
             are
             found
             certain
             
             Valves
             or
             
               little
               folding
               Gates
            
             ,
             which
             Bauhine
             saies
             are
             mentioned
             by
             Avicenna
             ,
             under
             the
             name
             of
             Cells
             .
             Aquapendens
             saies
             himself
             was
             the
             finder
             of
             them
             in
             the
             year
             1574.
             to
             whom
             
               Paulus
               Servita
            
             or
             Sarpi
             the
             Venetian
             gave
             the
             first
             hint
             though
             it
             seems
             apparent
             by
             his
             Isagoge
             ,
             that
             
               Jacobus
               Silvius
            
             had
             also
             some
             knowledg
             of
             them
             .
             But
             after
             him
             or
             with
             him
             mention
             was
             made
             of
             these
             Valves
             by
             
               Salomon
               Albertus
               ,
               Axc●●ng●l●s
               Pi●holhomineus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Casper●●
               Bauhinus
               ;
               Laurentius
            
             doth
             hardly
             once
             speak
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             occasion
             of
             Aquapendents
             finding
             of
             them
             was
             this
             :
             he
             observed
             that
             
             if
             he
             prest
             the
             Veins
             ,
             or
             by
             rubbing
             endeavored
             to
             force
             the
             Blood
             downwards
             ,
             its
             course
             did
             seem
             to
             be
             stopped
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             Arms
             of
             persons
             bound
             to
             be
             let
             Blood
             ,
             certain
             knots
             apper
             to
             swell
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Valves
             ;
             and
             in
             some
             persons
             ,
             as
             Porters
             and
             Plough-men
             ,
             they
             are
             seen
             to
             swel
             in
             their
             Thighs
             like
             the
             Varices
             .
          
           
             And
             here
             seems
             to
             consist
             the
             Cause
             of
             the
             Varices
             ;
             because
             thick
             Blood
             and
             by
             
             its
             heaviness
             unapt
             to
             move
             upwards
             ,
             being
             long
             retained
             in
             the
             Valves
             ,
             makes
             a
             dilatation
             of
             the
             said
             Valves
             :
             for
             without
             the
             Valves
             the
             Veins
             would
             swel
             uniformly
             and
             all
             of
             an
             equal
             Bigness
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             manner
             of
             Varices
             .
          
           
             And
             because
             this
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             Valves
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             is
             known
             to
             few
             ,
             I
             shall
             propound
             the
             same
             more
             exactly
             ,
             according
             to
             my
             manner
             of
             handling
             rare
             subjects
             .
          
           
             These
             Valves
             are
             most
             ,
             thin
             little
             Membranes
             (
             thicker
             in
             the
             Orifices
             of
             
             of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Heart
             )
             in
             the
             inner
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Veins
             ;
             and
             certain
             particles
             as
             it
             were
             of
             the
             coat
             of
             the
             Veins
             ;
             because
             there
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             most
             thin
             ,
             where
             th●se
             Membranes
             do
             go
             from
             it
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             
             Veins
             ,
             but
             especially
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Limbs
             ,
             viz.
             of
             the
             Arms
             and
             Legs
             ,
             after
             the
             Kernels
             of
             the
             Arm-pits
             and
             and
             Groyns
             .
             Beginning
             presently
             after
             the
             rise
             of
             the
             Branches
             ,
             not
             in
             the
             Rises
             themselves
             .
             Now
             there
             are
             two
             found
             in
             the
             inner
             orifice
             of
             the
             jugular
             Vein
             ,
             looking
             from
             above
             downwards
             ;
             the
             rest
             look
             from
             below
             upwards
             ,
             as
             many
             in
             the
             Cephalica
             ,
             the
             Basilica
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Legs
             and
             Thighs
             .
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               II.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               in
               Fig.
               1.
               shews
               the
               Valves
               of
               the
               Veins
               in
               a
               bound
               Arm
               ,
               in
               Fig.
               2.
               and
               3.
               
               The
               crural
               Veins
               the
               inside
               outward
               ,
               with
               their
               Valves
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     A
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Cephalica
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BF
                   .
                   
                     A
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Basilica
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Mediana
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     A
                     Branch
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cephalica
                     ,
                     to
                     which
                     the
                     Mediana
                     was
                     joyned
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HHHH
                   .
                   
                     Represent
                     the
                     knots
                     in
                     the
                     Veins
                     ,
                     caused
                     by
                     the
                     Valves
                     there
                     placed
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   IK
                   .
                   
                     One
                     Crural
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   LM
                   .
                   
                     The
                     other
                     Crural
                     vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   NNNN
                   .
                   
                     The
                     valves
                     of
                     the
                     Veins
                     fil'd
                     with
                     Cotton-wool
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OOO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     said
                     valves
                     of
                     the
                     Veins
                     empty
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FIG
                   .
                   V.
                   
                     Shews
                     the
                     single
                     valves
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Basilica
                     looking
                     upwards
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FIG
                   .
                   VI.
                   
                     In
                     the
                     Crural
                     vein
                     opened
                     double
                     valves
                     are
                     seen
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               30●
            
          
           
             Now
             the
             Valves
             are
             so
             situate
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             their
             Orifices
             upwards
             towards
             the
             roots
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             are
             shut
             beneath
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             look
             towards
             the
             Heart
             .
             And
             the
             workmanship
             of
             Nature
             is
             remarkable
             in
             their
             situation
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             have
             their
             postures
             looking
             the
             same
             way
             one
             following
             another
             ,
             as
             knots
             in
             the
             Branches
             and
             Stalks
             of
             Plants
             .
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             they
             are
             not
             in
             a
             right
             line
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             or
             placed
             on
             the
             same
             side
             ,
             least
             the
             whole
             Blood
             should
             flow
             streight
             in
             through
             the
             free
             part
             of
             the
             vessel
             .
             So
             the
             lower
             Valves
             do
             stop
             ,
             what
             the
             upper
             have
             let
             slip
             :
             and
             if
             all
             the
             doors
             of
             the
             Valves
             had
             been
             disposed
             in
             one
             right
             line
             ,
             there
             had
             been
             little
             or
             no
             delay
             made
             in
             the
             regress
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             they
             are
             situate
             at
             Distances
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             vessel
             ,
             sometimes
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             four
             ,
             or
             five
             fingers
             distance
             ;
             that
             if
             the
             Blood
             by
             some
             default
             should
             be
             compelled
             to
             flow
             backwards
             ,
             and
             should
             pass
             the
             upper
             Valves
             ,
             falling
             on
             upon
             the
             other
             Valves
             following
             ,
             it
             might
             be
             stopped
             and
             hindered
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             their
             Magnitude
             they
             are
             greater
             where
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             plenty
             of
             Blood
             
             the
             Recourse
             is
             most
             vehement
             ,
             and
             therefore
             greater
             inconvenience
             was
             to
             be
             feared
             to
             happen
             ,
             either
             to
             the
             parts
             which
             would
             be
             too
             much
             oppressed
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             Heart
             least
             it
             should
             be
             destitute
             of
             Blood
             ;
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Basilica
             and
             in
             the
             Crar●●
             Vein
             at
             the
             Groyns
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             all
             the
             Valves
             varies
             ,
             
             as
             also
             their
             distances
             ;
             for
             there
             are
             more
             Valves
             in
             those
             ▪
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Who
               abound
               with
               melancholly
               Blood
               ,
               or
               contrarily
               with
               very
               cholerick
               and
               thin
               Blood
               ;
               because
               both
               those
               humors
               do
               not
               only
               easily
               resist
               the
               Driver
               ,
               but
               when
               they
               are
               driven
               ,
               by
               their
               weight
               and
               tenuity
               ,
               they
               easily
               flow
               back
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               great
               or
               more
               fleshy
               Bodies
               and
               consequently
               having
               more
               Veins
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               In
               such
               as
               have
               the
               broadest
               vessels
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               In
               such
               who
               have
               long
               and
               streight
               Veins
               ;
               for
               in
               such
               as
               are
               oblique
               ,
               the
               crookedness
               of
               the
               vessels
               gives
               some
               stop
               to
               the
               running
               back
               of
               the
               Blood.
               
            
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             number
             of
             Valves
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             place
             doth
             not
             exceed
             two
             .
             For
             they
             are
             seated
             at
             distances
             ,
             somtimes
             one
             ,
             otherwhiles
             two
             at
             most
             ;
             not
             a●
             any
             time
             three
             ,
             as
             we
             find
             in
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heartt
             ▪
             because
             in
             the
             Heart
             a
             greater
             orifice
             is
             to
             be
             shut
             ,
             and
             the
             Ventricle
             underneath
             is
             larger
             ,
             yea
             and
             the
             greate●
             violence
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             hot
             Heart
             ,
             did
             require
             more
             stops
             ,
             But
             in
             the
             progress
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             their
             Branching
             diminishes
             their
             Magnitude
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             is
             slower
             in
             
             motion
             .
             Therefore
             where
             the
             Veins
             are
             yet
             pretty
             big
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             danger
             from
             the
             plenty
             of
             Blood
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             doors
             ,
             but
             otherwise
             but
             only
             one
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             likens
             the
             Nail
             on
             a
             Mans
             finger
             or
             the
             horned
             Moon
             ,
             such
             as
             you
             see
             in
             
             the
             sigma-shap'd
             Valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             exceeding
             thin
             ,
             but
             withall
             
             very
             compact
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             break
             by
             a
             strong
             incourse
             of
             the
             blood
             .
             And
             this
             is
             apparent
             from
             the
             Varices
             ,
             where
             they
             can
             contein
             the
             blood
             a
             very
             long
             time
             .
          
           
             The
             Vse
             is
             I.
             To
             strengthen
             the
             Veins
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Arteries
             are
             otherwise
             made
             strong
             by
             the
             
             doubleness
             of
             their
             coats
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             chief
             use
             according
             to
             Aquapendent
             and
             most
             Anatomists
             following
             him
             ,
             is
             to
             stop
             the
             motion
             of
             heavy
             and
             fluid
             Blood
             ,
             which
             runs
             violently
             into
             the
             Arms
             and
             Thighs
             ,
             and
             Legs
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             downward
             position
             ;
             but
             especially
             in
             most
             vehement
             motion
             and
             exercise
             ,
             where
             through
             the
             power
             of
             exceeding
             heat
             ,
             the
             Blood
             would
             rush
             impetuously
             into
             the
             Limbs
             ,
             and
             so
             1.
             
             The
             inner
             and
             more
             noble
             parts
             would
             be
             defrauded
             of
             their
             nutriment
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Veins
             of
             the
             Limbs
             would
             be
             too
             much
             stretched
             ,
             and
             in
             danger
             of
             breaking
             ,
             and
             consequently
             the
             Arms
             and
             Legs
             would
             be
             alwaies
             swelled
             .
          
           
             But
             this
             use
             is
             rejected
             by
             Harvey
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             In
             the
             Jugulars
             they
             look
             downwards
             .
             
             2.
             
             In
             the
             emulgent
             and
             Mesenterick
             branches
             ,
             they
             look
             towards
             the
             Porta
             and
             Cavae
             .
             3.
             
             There
             are
             none
             ●o
             the
             Arteries
             .
             4.
             
             Dogs
             and
             Oxen
             have
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             the
             division
             of
             the
             crural
             Veins
             ,
             in
             whom
             because
             of
             their
             going
             downwards
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             such
             thing
             as
             aforesaid
             to
             be
             feared
             .
             5.
             
             The
             Blood
             of
             its
             own
             accord
             is
             slowly
             enough
             driven
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             Veins
             into
             the
             lesser
             Branches
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             hotter
             into
             colder
             places
             .
             And
             therefore
             according
             to
             his
             principles
             ,
             and
             the
             principles
             of
             Circulation
             ,
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Valves
             is
             ,
          
           
             III.
             Lest
             the
             Blood
             should
             move
             out
             of
             the
             great
             veins
             into
             the
             little
             ones
             and
             so
             tear
             them
             ;
             or
             from
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Body
             into
             the
             outmost
             parts
             ,
             but
             rather
             from
             the
             extremities
             to
             the
             Centre
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             do
             the
             same
             thing
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             which
             the
             Sigma
             and
             Mitershap'd
             Valves
             do
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Jugular
             Vein
             internal
             they
             perform
             the
             same
             Office
             ,
             least
             in
             the
             bowing
             back
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             the
             Blood
             should
             return
             into
             the
             Brain
             ,
             and
             like
             a
             Flood
             oppress
             the
             same
             ,
             disturb
             the
             Animal
             Functions
             ,
             and
             breed
             a
             sanguine
             Apoplexy
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               3.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Division
             of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Portae
            
             and
             the
             
               Venae
               Lacteae
            
             .
          
           
             ALL
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             are
             referred
             unto
             two
             as
             their
             Mothers
             ;
             viz.
             the
             
               Vena
               Portae
            
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             to
             which
             is
             joyned
             a
             third
             kind
             of
             vessels
             found
             out
             by
             Asellius
             viz
             ,
             the
             Milky
             Veins
             ,
             of
             which
             we
             shal
             speak
             by
             and
             by
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ven●
               Portae
            
             its
             Original
             and
             Root
             is
             the
             
               Vena
               Umbilicalis
            
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             spake
             
               in
               the
               first
               Book
            
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             all
             the
             Veins
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             Now
             it
             is
             termed
             
               Vena
               Portae
            
             ,
             or
             
               Quae
               ad
               Portas
               est
            
             ,
             the
             Gate-vein
             ,
             and
             
             Vein
             at
             the
             Gates
             ,
             and
             
               Vena
               ostiaria
            
             ,
             the
             Door-vein
             ;
             because
             through
             the
             roots
             thereof
             ,
             or
             ,
             as
             others
             wil
             have
             it
             ,
             its
             branches
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             ,
             the
             Chyle
             being
             su●t
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Guts
             was
             anciently
             thought
             to
             be
             carried
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             by
             Gates
             into
             the
             Liver
             .
             The
             Arabians
             cal'd
             it
             
               Vena
               Lactea
            
             ,
             because
             they
             thought
             it
             drew
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             white
             like
             Milk.
             
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             greatest
             Vein
             in
             the
             Body
             next
             the
             Cava
             ,
             and
             is
             commonly
             said
             to
             arise
             out
             of
             the
             hollow
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             so
             compact
             as
             the
             Cava
             ,
             but
             more
             loose
             and
             soft
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             Trunk
             and
             Branches
             .
          
           
             The
             Branches
             are
             upper
             and
             lower
             :
             
             and
             some
             call
             the
             former
             Roots
             ,
             others
             the
             latter
             .
          
           
             They
             call
             the
             former
             Roots
             ▪
             because
             this
             Vein
             is
             said
             to
             have
             its
             original
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             :
             the
             latter
             ,
             because
             as
             Roots
             suck
             matter
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             into
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Tree
             :
             even
             so
             also
             the
             
               Venae
               Mes●raicae
            
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             lower
             branches
             of
             Portae
             ,
             do
             suck
             Chyle
             like
             Roots
             (
             according
             to
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             out
             late
             opinion
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             )
             and
             carry
             it
             to
             the
             Liver
             by
             the
             Trunk
             and
             upper
             Branches
             ;
             and
             therefore
             the
             Meseraick
             Veins
             are
             termed
             the
             
               Livers
               Hands
            
             .
             We
             may
             therefore
             call
             them
             all
             ,
             both
             branches
             and
             roots
             ,
             in
             a
             different
             respect
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             Branches
             ,
             four
             or
             five
             of
             them
             are
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             the
             hollow
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             which
             afterwards
             ,
             beneath
             and
             without
             the
             Liver
             ,
             grow
             into
             one
             Trunk
             .
             Touching
             these
             and
             their
             Anastomoses
             ,
             see
             above
             ,
             
               in
               the
               Chap.
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               Book
               the
            
             1.
             
          
           
             The
             Trunk
             before
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             lower
             Branches
             ,
             sends
             two
             small
             Veins
             to
             the
             Gall-bladder
             which
             are
             termed
             
               Cysticae
               gemellae
            
             ;
             another
             Vein
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             which
             is
             therefore
             cal'd
             
               Gastrica
               dextra
            
             .
          
           
             Afterward
             the
             Trunk
             inclining
             to
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             remarkable
             lower
             Branches
             :
             the
             one
             higher
             and
             lesser
             ,
             going
             towards
             the
             left
             side
             ;
             the
             other
             lower
             and
             larger
             on
             the
             right
             side
             .
          
           
             The
             former
             is
             called
             Splenicus
             ,
             because
             it
             
             goes
             into
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             &
             before
             it
             is
             divided
             it
             spreads
             from
             it self
             two
             upper
             Branches
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             the
             
               Gastrica
               minor
            
             and
             
               Gastrica
               major
            
             ,
             the
             largest
             of
             all
             the
             Stomach
             Veins
             ,
             which
             afterwards
             constitutes
             the
             
             the
             Coronaria
             .
             Then
             it
             sends
             lower
             branches
             to
             the
             Call
             and
             one
             to
             the
             Pancreas
             .
          
           
             These
             being
             thus
             constituted
             ,
             the
             Truncus
             
             Splenicus
             is
             divided
             ,
             into
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             Branch
             .
             The
             ●o
             mer
             produces
             the
             
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             and
             other
             little
             branches
             carried
             into
             the
             Spleen
             .
             The
             latter
             produces
             
             two
             Veins
             for
             the
             Call
             and
             Stomach
             which
             are
             termed
             
               Epiplois
               sinistra
            
             and
             
               Gastroepiplois
               sinistra
            
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             rest
             of
             its
             small
             branches
             ,
             are
             spent
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ramus
               dexter
            
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             before
             it
             is
             divided
             ,
             produces
             two
             Veins
             ,
             
             1.
             
             To
             the
             right
             side
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Call.
             2.
             
             To
             the
             Guts
             ,
             viz.
             the
             middle
             of
             Duodenum
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Jejunum
             :
             whence
             certain
             capillary
             twigs
             go
             through
             the
             Pancreas
             and
             Call
             upwards
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             an
             whole
             large
             Branch
             goes
             into
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             and
             being
             carried
             between
             
             the
             two
             coats
             thereof
             ,
             it
             is
             distributed
             into
             three
             notable
             Branches
             ,
             called
             
               Rami
               mesenterici
            
             ,
             the
             Mesenteric
             branches
             .
          
           
             The
             right-hand
             mesenteric
             branch
             is
             two-fold
             ,
             which
             spends
             it self
             into
             fourteen
             nameless
             branches
             ,
             and
             these
             again
             into
             innumerable
             Off-springs
             of
             Veins
             termed
             the
             
               Mesaraick
               Veins
            
             in
             the
             Guts
             ,
             
               Iejunum
               ,
               Ileon
            
             and
             Caecum
             and
             part
             of
             Colon.
             
             whos
             's
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               III
               ▪
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               the
               Branchings
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               within
               and
               without
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     port●
                     going
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   bbbbb
                   .
                   
                     Its
                     branchings
                     in
                     the
                     Liver
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     or
                     Navil-vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Venae
                     Cystica
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ●
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Implantation
                     of
                     the
                     Coronary
                     Vein
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     Venae
                     portae
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     splenick
                     Branch
                     therof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   
                     The
                     Rise
                     of
                     the
                     Coronaria
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     ,
                     which
                     after
                     it
                     hath
                     bestowed
                     many
                     branches
                     upon
                     the
                     Stomach
                     it self
                     ,
                     being
                     turned
                     back
                     towards
                     the
                     Pylorus
                     ,
                     it
                     is
                     implanted
                     into
                     the
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Venae
                     portae
                     it self
                     ,
                     where
                     the
                     letter
                     ●
                     stands
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   iii
                   
                     Little
                     branches
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     splenica
                     ,
                     distributed
                     through
                     the
                     Pancreas
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   kkkk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     manifold
                     ingress
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Ven●
                     splenica
                     into
                     the
                     Spleen
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     Vas
                     breve
                     so
                     called
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   m.
                   
                     The
                     Gastroepiploica
                     sinistra
                     ,
                     which
                     runs
                     out
                     upon
                     the
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     ,
                     and
                     affords
                     many
                     branches
                     both
                     to
                     to
                     the
                     Stomach
                     it self
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     the
                     Call.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   n.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Epiploica
                     sinistra
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ooo
                   .
                   
                     Little
                     branches
                     disseminated
                     through
                     the
                     bottom
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ppp
                   .
                   
                     Branches
                     which
                     run
                     out
                     through
                     the
                     Call.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   q.
                   
                     Another
                     Epiploica
                     superior
                     to
                     the
                     precedent
                     ,
                     for
                     it
                     runs
                     before
                     it
                     ,
                     through
                     the
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Call
                     ,
                     which
                     comes
                     neerest
                     the
                     Loyns
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     Rise
                     of
                     the
                     internal
                     Haemorrhoidal
                     Vein
                     ,
                     which
                  
                
                 
                   SSS
                   .
                   
                     Diffuses
                     Branches
                     through
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     and
                     at
                     last
                     where
                     this
                     mark
                     stands
                     
                     it
                     sends
                     forth
                     the
                     Haemorrhoid
                     Veins
                     so
                     called
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     The
                     Gastro-epiploica
                     dextra
                     ,
                     from
                     which
                     many
                     branches
                     arise
                     that
                     are
                     disseminated
                     through
                     the
                     Call
                     and
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               307
            
          
           
             Harvey
             to
             refute
             the
             milkie
             veins
             ,
             and
             withall
             to
             maintain
             his
             Circulation
             in
             the
             
             Mesentery
             ,
             does
             suppose
             that
             as
             the
             Navil-veins
             draw
             in
             alimentary
             juyce
             from
             the
             Liquors
             of
             the
             Egg
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             to
             nourish
             and
             increase
             the
             Chick●…
             even
             so
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             do
             suck
             Chyle
             out
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             even
             in
             a
             grown
             person
             .
             But
             then
             they
             should
             carry
             Chyle
             and
             Blood
             together
             ,
             and
             so
             divers
             juyces
             would
             be
             jumbled
             together
             ,
             such
             as
             were
             digested
             with
             those
             that
             are
             indigested
             .
             And
             what
             need
             is
             there
             to
             confound
             Vessels
             that
             Nature
             hath
             distinguished
             .
             And
             every
             one
             knows
             ,
             that
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Navil-vessels
             ,
             is
             different
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             womb
             and
             ,
             grown
             person
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             According
             to
             the
             same
             Antients
             ,
             to
             prepare
             the
             said
             Chyle
             in
             some
             measure
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             it
             the
             rudiments
             of
             Blood.
             which
             would
             be
             true
             if
             the
             Hypothesis
             were
             true
             .
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               IV.
               
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               represents
               the
               milkie
               Veins
               in
               the
               Fish
               cal'd
               Orbis
               ,
               or
               the
               Lump-fish
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   The
                   Stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   Appendixes
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   in
                   which
                   the
                   Venae
                   Lacteae
                   or
                   milkie
                   Veins
                   are
                   evident
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   The
                   Guts
                   drawn
                   to
                   one
                   side
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   
                     Intestinum
                     Rectum
                  
                   or
                   Arse-Gut
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Liver
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   third
                   Lobe
                   of
                   the
                   Liver
                   ,
                   into
                   which
                   the
                   milkie
                   veins
                   are
                   inserted
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   A
                   white
                   kernell
                   of
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   swelling
                   with
                   Chyle
                   ,
                   out
                   of
                   which
                   Veins
                   are
                   carried
                   unto
                   third
                   the
                   Lobe
                   .
                
                 
                   hhh
                   .
                   The
                   milkie
                   Veins
                   .
                
                 
                   iii.
                   The
                   Branches
                   of
                   the
                   Mesaraick
                   Veins
                   .
                
                 
                   k.
                   The
                   Trunck
                   of
                   the
                   Vena
                   portae
                   .
                
                 
                   lll
                   .
                   The
                   Mesentery
                   .
                
                 
                   m.
                   The
                   Gall-Blidder
                   .
                
              
            
             
               Page
               308
            
          
           
             4
             According
             to
             others
             and
             my
             Father
             Bartholinus
             amongst
             the
             rest
             ,
             to
             carry
             thick
             blood
             made
             in
             the
             Spleen
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             Guts
             to
             nourish
             them
             .
             which
             were
             true
             did
             not
             the
             Circulation
             teach
             otherwise
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             found
             out
             since
             his
             time
             .
             And
             that
             same
             blood
             would
             be
             more
             fit
             to
             nourish
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             abundance
             of
             Arteries
             in
             the
             Spleen
             .
             The
             Vessels
             being
             changed
             ,
             this
             Opinion
             would
             be
             absolutely
             true
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             Asellius
             ,
             who
             rightly
             assigns
             the
             milkie
             veins
             to
             carry
             Chyle
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             hath
             shewn
             that
             these
             common
             mesaraick
             Veins
             do
             serve
             to
             no
             other
             intent
             ,
             then
             to
             bring
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             to
             nourish
             the
             Guts
             .
             which
             use
             ,
             being
             before
             refuted
             ,
             he
             is
             therein
             to
             be
             excused
             ,
             who
             was
             likewise
             ignorant
             of
             the
             true
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             Their
             true
             Use
             is
             to
             bring
             the
             Blood
             back
             after
             the
             the
             nutriment
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             which
             had
             bin
             carried
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             by
             the
             mesaraick
             Arteries
             .
             This
             is
             apparent
             by
             Ligatures
             in
             living
             Creatures
             ,
             which
             Walaeus
             practised
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             swell
             towards
             the
             Liver
             ,
             but
             are
             empty
             towards
             the
             Guts
             .
             The
             Valves
             shew
             as
             much
             ,
             which
             were
             by
             Harvey
             found
             out
             in
             the
             mesaraick
             veins
             ,
             looking
             towards
             the
             Cava
             and
             the
             venae
             portae
             ,
             which
             Columbus
             also
             observed
             ,
             and
             which
             hinder
             the
             blood
             of
             vena
             portae
             from
             passing
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
             Nor
             does
             the
             Conflux
             of
             humors
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             about
             the
             Guts
             hinder
             ,
             whither
             the
             Humors
             flow
             thither
             of
             their
             own
             accord
             or
             provoked
             by
             medicaments
             ;
             because
             this
             passage
             of
             the
             Humors
             is
             certainly
             through
             the
             mesenterick
             Arteries
             which
             neither
             Spigelius
             denies
             ,
             nor
             those
             that
             maintaine
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             The
             left
             Mesenterick
             branch
             is
             spread
             abroad
             into
             the
             left
             and
             middlemost
             part
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             ,
             and
             part
             of
             the
             Colon
             from
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             
               Iniestinum
               rectum
            
             .
             Hence
             arises
             the
             
               Vena
               Haemorrhoidalis
            
             interna
             so
             called
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             following
             and
             proper
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             This
             Age
             of
             ours
             being
             clearer
             sighted
             then
             the
             former
             ,
             has
             found
             
             out
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             in
             the
             Mesentery
             so
             called
             ,
             from
             the
             white
             colour
             of
             the
             Chyle
             in
             them
             ,
             which
             besides
             the
             Mesaraicks
             ,
             make
             a
             fourth
             kind
             of
             vessels
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Chylus
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             Liver
             .
             Erasistratus
             in
             Galen
             had
             a
             glimpse
             of
             these
             veins
             ,
             but
             after
             him
             ,
             the
             first
             that
             discovered
             them
             was
             
               Caspar
               Asellius
            
             an
             Anatomist
             of
             Ticinum
             ,
             in
             the
             dissection
             of
             a
             living
             dog
             well
             fed
             ,
             on
             the
             twenty
             third
             of
             July
             in
             ,
             the
             yeer
             1622.
             
             In
             whose
             footsteps
             accurate
             Anatomists
             treading
             ,
             who
             prised
             nothing
             more
             then
             truth
             ,
             have
             found
             by
             testimony
             of
             their
             eyes
             ,
             that
             those
             same
             vessels
             full
             of
             a
             milkie
             juyce
             ,
             are
             peculiar
             passages
             different
             from
             the
             Mesaraicks
             .
             For
             in
             living
             Creatures
             they
             are
             allwayes
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             dissected
             about
             four
             hours
             after
             they
             have
             been
             well
             fed
             ,
             viz.
             when
             the
             Chylus
             is
             distributed
             :
             for
             after
             that
             time
             they
             are
             not
             to
             be
             seen
             ,
             howbeit
             ,
             though
             empty
             ,
             they
             alwaies
             appear
             like
             little
             fibres
             which
             have
             deceived
             some
             ,
             making
             them
             to
             take
             these
             vessels
             for
             nervs
             :
             but
             they
             are
             out
             ,
             because
             nervs
             neither
             have
             such
             a
             Chyle
             as
             this
             ,
             nor
             Valves
             nor
             any
             cavity
             .
             Nor
             are
             the
             Mesentery
             and
             Guts
             so
             sensible
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             a
             few
             nervs
             from
             the
             sixt
             
             Conjugation
             .
             Some
             have
             conceived
             these
             vessels
             to
             be
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             contrary
             to
             sense
             ,
             which
             acknowledges
             here
             a
             simple
             coat
             ,
             and
             no
             motion
             .
             Only
             the
             not
             knowing
             of
             their
             Trunk
             ,
             does
             keep
             some
             learned
             men
             as
             yet
             in
             suspense
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             could
             be
             demonstrated
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             they
             would
             be
             of
             out
             mind
             .
             But
             although
             their
             Trunk
             and
             Original
             be
             unknown
             yet
             no
             man
             should
             doubt
             of
             the
             existency
             of
             these
             Veins
             any
             more
             then
             the
             Inhabitants
             about
             Nilus
             doubt
             of
             the
             Existency
             of
             that
             River
             ,
             whose
             Head
             is
             unknown
             .
             And
             others
             account
             it
             no
             impossible
             thing
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             by
             their
             twigs
             be
             implanted
             into
             the
             Liver
             without
             any
             Trunk
             .
             Yea
             and
             it
             seems
             not
             improbable
             to
             the
             renowned
             Kyperus
             and
             Regius
             ,
             that
             the
             milkie
             veins
             being
             confounded
             with
             the
             Mesaraicks
             in
             the
             Pancreas
             or
             great
             kernel
             ,
             do
             there
             empty
             their
             Chyle
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               Portae
            
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             is
             carried
             by
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             mixed
             with
             the
             Fermentum
             brought
             from
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             so
             receive
             the
             Rudiments
             of
             Blood.
             But
             I
             shal
             by
             and
             by
             shew
             that
             the
             milkie
             veins
             have
             branches
             which
             reach
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             inserted
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             will
             briefly
             relate
             the
             History
             of
             these
             milkie
             veins
             ,
             following
             the
             guidance
             
             of
             Asellius
             and
             others
             ,
             and
             mine
             own
             Experience
             ,
             who
             have
             diligently
             viewed
             them
             ,
             in
             live
             Animals
             ,
             and
             Men
             newly
             hanged
             and
             choaked
             .
          
           
             These
             vessels
             are
             termed
             Lactes
             or
             Lactea
             
             Vasa
             also
             
               Venae
               lacteae
            
             either
             from
             Lacio
             a
             word
             out
             of
             date
             ,
             signifying
             Allicio
             ,
             I
             draw
             ,
             or
             
               a
               lacte
            
             from
             Milk
             ,
             which
             they
             resemble
             in
             whiteness
             ,
             softness
             and
             fatness
             ;
             even
             as
             the
             Ancients
             and
             later
             Writers
             have
             given
             the
             same
             name
             ,
             to
             the
             small
             Guts
             ,
             the
             mesaraick
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             for
             the
             same
             cause
             ,
             though
             the
             agreement
             and
             verity
             be
             not
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             They
             were
             quite
             unknown
             to
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             if
             you
             except
             Erasistratus
             ,
             who
             in
             Kids
             that
             had
             lately
             sukt
             ,
             saw
             certain
             obscure
             Arteries
             which
             were
             soon
             filled
             with
             milk
             ,
             yet
             most
             Ancients
             were
             ignorant
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             one
             sort
             of
             vessels
             to
             carry
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             and
             others
             to
             carry
             the
             Blood.
             But
             they
             may
             be
             easily
             excused
             ,
             by
             indifferent
             Censurers
             ,
             because
             they
             commonly
             dissected
             Animals
             that
             had
             been
             strangled
             ,
             in
             which
             bodies
             ,
             unless
             they
             ●e
             tied
             ,
             they
             suddenly
             disappear
             .
             Galen
             who
             had
             made
             more
             than
             six
             hundred
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             did
             without
             doubt
             take
             them
             for
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             is
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             
             accompanied
             with
             Fat
             ,
             which
             cherishes
             that
             Heat
             which
             is
             necessary
             for
             the
             attraction
             and
             preparation
             of
             the
             Chylus
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             carried
             through
             the
             Mesenterium
             ,
             from
             the
             Guts
             ,
             by
             an
             oblique
             passage
             ,
             between
             its
             two
             coats
             ,
             partly
             separate
             from
             the
             other
             vessels
             ,
             partly
             together
             with
             them
             ,
             somtimes
             streight
             along
             ,
             otherwhiles
             going
             over
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             cutting
             them
             crosswise
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             through
             many
             Kernels
             ,
             placed
             chiefly
             at
             the
             parting
             of
             the
             branches
             ;
             they
             are
             carried
             ,
             I
             say
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Pancreas
             .
             In
             the
             Pancreas
             or
             great
             kernel
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             which
             Asellius
             after
             Fallopius
             calls
             Pancreas
             ,
             they
             are
             wreathed
             and
             wrought
             together
             like
             a
             Lattice
             ,
             this
             way
             and
             that
             way
             ,
             into
             very
             many
             and
             those
             inexplicable
             wreathings
             and
             Labyrinths
             .
          
           
             From
             thence
             again
             ,
             having
             sent
             greater
             branches
             by
             the
             sides
             of
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             also
             twigs
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             they
             enter
             with
             small
             Branches
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             From
             thence
             ,
             being
             carried
             to
             the
             Liver
             it self
             ,
             and
             split
             into
             very
             small
             fibres
             ,
             they
             are
             so
             long
             spred
             up
             and
             down
             into
             the
             flesh
             thereof
             ,
             every
             way
             ,
             til
             they
             are
             at
             length
             quite
             obliterated
             .
          
           
             But
             into
             what
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             either
             the
             Trunk
             or
             Branches
             are
             inserted
             ,
             
             I
             have
             not
             found
             by
             any
             as
             yet
             determined
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             sudden
             Efflux
             of
             the
             Humors
             .
             I
             ,
             in
             the
             dissection
             of
             the
             fish
             cal'd
             Orbis
             ,
             by
             our
             Country-men
             Steenbud
             ,
             by
             G●s●er
             Sea-Hare
             ,
             by
             Clusius
             the
             frog-mouth'd
             Orbis
             ,
             by
             the
             Islanders
             Roemaffue
             from
             the
             color
             of
             its
             Belly
             ;
             both
             Male
             and
             Female
             here
             at
             Hasnia
             frequently
             repeated
             ,
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             most
             learned
             
               Wormius
               ,
               Sperlingerus
               ,
               Simon
               Pauli
               ,
               Fuerinus
               ,
            
             and
             others
             ,
             have
             found
             and
             demonstrated
             not
             only
             many
             daies
             after
             ,
             great
             plenty
             of
             milkie
             veins
             ,
             full
             of
             the
             white
             milkie
             humor
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             true
             place
             of
             their
             Insertion
             .
             which
             was
             the
             third
             Lobe
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             that
             same
             little
             soft
             one
             described
             by
             Spigelius
             ,
             into
             which
             there
             entred
             a
             milkey
             branch
             sufficiently
             great
             ,
             from
             the
             large
             kernel
             seated
             not
             far
             off
             ,
             and
             swelling
             with
             the
             milkey
             humor
             ,
             unto
             which
             kernel
             ,
             the
             most
             of
             the
             milky
             veins
             out
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             and
             the
             appurtenances
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             had
             their
             Course
             .
             Nor
             is
             it
             to
             be
             doubted
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             same
             betides
             in
             men
             and
             other
             Creatures
             Nature
             so
             sharing
             the
             business
             ,
             that
             to
             each
             Lobe
             its
             Trunk
             may
             be
             assigned
             .
             Now
             from
             this
             they
             go
             further
             ,
             with
             the
             branches
             of
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             inwardly
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Lobes
             ,
             and
             their
             Parenchyma
             .
             And
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             about
             this
             third
             Lobe
             ,
             where
             the
             milkey
             veins
             are
             inserted
             ,
             the
             Gall-Bladder
             is
             placed
             ,
             either
             to
             assist
             Concoction
             which
             begins
             there
             ,
             or
             to
             receive
             the
             cholerick
             Excrement
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Concoction
             of
             the
             Chylus
             is
             separated
             therefrom
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             are
             inserted
             into
             all
             the
             Guts
             ,
             vea
             even
             the
             Duodenum
             ,
             but
             especially
             into
             the
             smaller
             Guts
             ,
             not
             so
             many
             into
             thick
             ones
             ,
             nor
             are
             any
             of
             them
             carried
             to
             the
             Stomach
             or
             the
             Spleen
             .
             And
             least
             the
             Chylus
             once
             received
             should
             slip
             back
             again
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             they
             are
             furnished
             with
             Valves
             which
             look
             from
             within
             outward
             ,
             which
             wil
             not
             admit
             the
             Chyle
             though
             driven
             back
             with
             Violence
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             of
             a
             Vein
             ,
             which
             it
             resembles
             
             in
             structure
             and
             all
             things
             else
             ,
             excepting
             the
             milkie
             juyce
             .
             Of
             which
             there
             are
             th●●●
             compounding
             parts
             ,
             Fibres
             ,
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             Flesh
             .
             They
             have
             but
             one
             single
             Membrane
             ,
             wherein
             they
             differ
             from
             Arteries
             ,
             neither
             are
             they
             here
             cloathed
             with
             so
             thick
             a
             coat
             ,
             no
             more
             than
             in
             other
             remote
             parts
             ,
             though
             in
             the
             Mesentery
             they
             receive
             from
             it
             another
             external
             coat
             .
             Asellius
             doth
             attribute
             to
             them
             all
             kinds
             of
             fibres
             ,
             Right
             ,
             Transverse
             ,
             Oblique
             ,
             for
             Drawing
             ,
             Retaining
             ,
             and
             Expelling
             ;
             though
             Walaeus
             by
             Ligature
             do
             teach
             ,
             that
             the
             Chyle
             is
             rather
             thrust
             in
             them
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             by
             the
             Guts
             contracted
             and
             driving
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             others
             conceive
             that
             it
             is
             drawn
             by
             the
             Liver
             it self
             .
          
           
             The
             Flesh
             which
             grows
             to
             the
             Membrane
             ,
             fils
             up
             the
             spaces
             between
             the
             fibres
             ,
             whose
             use
             besides
             is
             ,
             to
             prepare
             the
             Chyle
             before
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             Quantity
             they
             grow
             continually
             
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             being
             all
             of
             one
             Trunk
             though
             their
             magnitude
             be
             not
             equal
             ,
             some
             being
             greater
             others
             lesser
             .
             Now
             they
             are
             small
             ,
             least
             the
             thick
             and
             unprofitable
             parts
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             should
             go
             into
             them
             together
             ,
             and
             least
             distribution
             should
             be
             made
             too
             suddenly
             and
             tumultuously
             ,
             which
             Frambesarius
             observes
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             infinite
             in
             Number
             ,
             dispersed
             
             through
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Guts
             ,
             Mesentery
             and
             Pancreas
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             more
             in
             number
             than
             the
             vulgar
             Mesenterick
             Veins
             ,
             that
             their
             plenty
             may
             make
             amends
             for
             their
             smallness
             .
          
           
             
               As
               to
               the
               first
               active
               Qualities
               ,
            
             they
             are
             colder
             than
             ordinary
             Veins
             ,
             because
             the
             Chyle
             which
             they
             carry
             is
             colder
             than
             Blood.
             In
             respect
             of
             the
             passive
             qualities
             ,
             they
             are
             dry
             ,
             yet
             moister
             than
             the
             common
             Veins
             .
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               V
               ▪
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               Represents
               the
               milkie
               Veins
               ,
               or
               
                 Venae
                 Lacteae
              
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   &c.
                   The
                   Mesaraick
                   branches
                   of
                   the
                   Venae
                   portae
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   branches
                   of
                   the
                   Arteria
                   Coeliaca
                   ,
                   which
                   accompany
                   the
                   same
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   &c.
                   The
                   Venae
                   Lacteae
                   or
                   milkie
                   Veins
                   ,
                   which
                   being
                   bound
                   in
                   the
                   lower
                   parts
                   do
                   discocover
                   the
                   Valves
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   The
                   Nerves
                   running
                   up
                   and
                   down
                   through
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   Bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   The
                   Pylorus
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   The
                   Gut
                   Duodenum
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   The
                   Gut
                   Iejunum
                   .
                
                 
                   H
                   The
                   Gut
                   Ileum
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   A
                   Vein
                   and
                   Artery
                   creeping
                   through
                   the
                   bottom
                   of
                   the
                   Stomach
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   Pa
                   t
                   of
                   the
                   Call.
                   
                
                 
                   L.
                   The
                   great
                   Kernel
                   in
                   the
                   rise
                   of
                   the
                   Mesentery
                   which
                   Asellius
                   cals
                   the
                   Pancreas
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               310
            
          
           
             Their
             Action
             and
             proper
             
             Use
             is
             1.
             
             To
             deliver
             up
             the
             Chylus
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             not
             by
             the
             Mesaraicks
             as
             hath
             been
             hitherto
             believed
             ,
             by
             which
             neither
             the
             Chylus
             ascends
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             nor
             the
             blood
             descends
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             be●ore
             .
             Nor
             let
             the
             abundance
             of
             the
             said
             Mesaraicks
             trouble
             us
             ,
             which
             the
             cold
             and
             bloodless
             Guts
             do
             not
             need
             ;
             because
             doubtless
             they
             need
             ●ore
             of
             Heat
             and
             much
             nourishment
             ,
             administred
             by
             the
             abundance
             of
             mesaraick
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             therefore
             plenty
             of
             Veins
             ought
             to
             answer
             the
             plenty
             of
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             carry
             back
             the
             superfluous
             blood
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             II
             To
             render
             the
             Chyle
             more
             fit
             to
             receive
             the
             form
             of
             Blood
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
             But
             they
             are
             deceived
             who
             do
             assigne
             to
             them
             the
             blood-makeing
             faculty
             ,
             for
             the
             Chylus
             is
             not
             at
             all
             changed
             in
             colour
             till
             it
             come
             unto
             the
             Liver
             ,
             where
             it
             begins
             by
             little
             and
             little
             to
             grow
             reddish
             or
             paleish
             .
          
           
             III
             They
             much
             conduce
             to
             facilitate
             the
             Art
             of
             Physick
             .
             For
             1
             They
             discover
             a
             ready
             way
             for
             distribution
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             which
             has
             hitherto
             bin
             very
             much
             controverted
             ,
             without
             any
             fear
             of
             a
             contrary
             motion
             or
             confu●●on
             .
             2
             They
             shew
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             made
             in
             the
             Liver
             and
             its
             flesh
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             veins
             .
             3
             That
             the
             sucking
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             no
             cause
             of
             Hunger
             ,
             because
             none
             are
             carried
             to
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             IV
             They
             declare
             the
             Causes
             of
             some
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Body
             which
             were
             before
             obscure
             ,
             viz.
             of
             the
             chylous
             flux
             of
             the
             Guts
             ;
             of
             pineing
             away
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             N●…
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             kernels
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             〈…〉
             with
             ●…s
             swellings
             ,
             of
             intermitting
             Agues
             ●…d
             in
             the
             Mesar●um
             ,
             Hypocondriacal
             Melancholy
             &c.
             
          
           
             V
             The
             learned
             Gassendus
             conceives
             that
             by
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             the
             white
             juyce
             contained
             in
             them
             is
             carried
             over
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             to
             breed
             Fat
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             true
             Chylus
             is
             brought
             the
             neerest
             way
             by
             the
             Porus
             biliarius
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             unto
             the
             Liver
             ;
             But
             neither
             of
             these
             may
             be
             granted
             .
             Not
             the
             former
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             reasons
             brought
             before
             ,
             Book
             the
             7
             against
             Folius
             ,
             touching
             the
             matter
             of
             Fat
             which
             Riolanus
             approves
             and
             commends
             ;
             nor
             the
             latter
             ,
             because
             the
             Chyle
             would
             be
             infected
             by
             meeting
             with
             bitter
             Choler
             ,
             though
             that
             renowned
             man
             allows
             in
             case
             of
             necessity
             ,
             the
             Jejunum
             being
             obstructed
             ,
             it
             may
             so
             be
             done
             .
          
           
             And
             so
             much
             may
             suffice
             touching
             the
             History
             so
             the
             Venae
             Lacteae
             ,
             to
             which
             there
             is
             hardly
             any
             thing
             remainning
             to
             be
             added
             ,
             unless
             the
             cause
             of
             their
             sudden
             disappearing
             ,
             which
             is
             sufficiently
             controverted
             ▪
             which
             is
             not
             to
             be
             imputed
             to
             the
             spiritual
             disposition
             of
             the
             Chylus
             which
             suddenly
             vanishes
             away
             ,
             as
             Asellius
             did
             at
             first
             beleive
             ,
             because
             the
             Chylus
             being
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Veins
             does
             keep
             its
             colour
             a
             very
             long
             time
             ,
             not
             vanishing
             away
             ,
             but
             becoming
             waterish
             .
             But
             to
             that
             which
             did
             afterward
             seem
             probable
             to
             Asellius
             viz.
             the
             strong
             drawing
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             in
             so
             great
             Anxiety
             of
             the
             Ainmal
             ,
             all
             
             this
             may
             be
             attributed
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             spirits
             being
             consumed
             ,
             they
             need
             new
             Blood
             and
             Chyle
             speedily
             to
             be
             digested
             .
             And
             hence
             a
             reason
             may
             be
             rendred
             ,
             why
             the
             Venae
             lacteae
             in
             a
             man
             hang'd
             at
             Amsterdam
             cut
             up
             by
             Dr.
             Tulpiu●
             ,
             remained
             visible
             many
             daies
             after
             ;
             such
             as
             have
             bin
             divers
             times
             s●en
             by
             Veslingius
             at
             Padua
             ,
             and
             Folius
             at
             Venice
             :
             For
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             pains
             broke
             off
             by
             choaking
             ,
             there
             could
             be
             no
             drawing
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
             For
             whereas
             in
             a
             Girle
             ten
             months
             old
             ,
             Veslingus
             found
             these
             Veins
             swelling
             :
             I
             ascribe
             that
             to
             a
             like
             weakness
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             or
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             milkie
             humor
             .
             I
             also
             saw
             at
             Hafnia
             the
             last
             yeer
             ,
             the
             milkey
             veins
             in
             
               Sueno
               Olai
            
             of
             Vardberg
             (
             who
             was
             immediately
             choak'd
             with
             a
             peice
             of
             neats-tongue
             ,
             having
             before
             eaten
             and
             drank
             plentifully
             )
             visible
             in
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             because
             respiration
             being
             hindred
             by
             the
             bit
             of
             tongue
             ,
             and
             his
             heart
             being
             suffocated
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             necessity
             for
             the
             Liver
             to
             draw
             any
             Chylus
             .
             But
             
               P.
               Laurembergius
            
             as
             a
             man
             ignorant
             of
             this
             Anatomy
             does
             vainly
             imagine
             with
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             these
             veins
             do
             disappear
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             recourse
             of
             the
             Chylus
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             the
             Valves
             being
             loose
             and
             flaggie
             :
             for
             ,
             1
             Do
             all
             you
             can
             ,
             you
             shall
             never
             bring
             the
             Chylus
             back
             ,
             in
             dead
             bodies
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
             2
             If
             a
             vein
             be
             tied
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             passage
             is
             left
             open
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             both
             towards
             the
             Liver
             and
             the
             Guts
             :
             where
             it
             looks
             to
             the
             Liver
             it
             is
             emptie
             ,
             but
             it
             swells
             exceedingly
             towards
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             be
             left
             in
             that
             posture
             for
             some
             daies
             together
             the
             Chyle
             will
             not
             slip
             back
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Haemorrhoidal
               Veins
            
             are
             those
             which
             are
             in
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             
             or
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             ,
             and
             are
             also
             extrinsecally
             visible
             ,
             which
             in
             some
             men
             at
             set
             times
             do
             open
             of
             their
             own
             accord
             ,
             and
             void
             forth
             dreggie
             Blood
             ,
             which
             evacuation
             does
             much
             conduce
             to
             Health
             .
          
           
             These
             Veins
             are
             not
             of
             one
             kind
             ,
             as
             the
             Ancients
             and
             many
             
             later
             writers
             have
             Imagined
             :
             But
             some
             are
             termed
             internal
             ,
             which
             arise
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             others
             external
             ,
             from
             the
             Cava
             ,
             with
             which
             the
             haemorrhoidal
             Arteries
             are
             associated
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Humors
             to
             be
             evacuated
             ,
             are
             carryed
             .
          
           
             The
             Ancients
             knew
             only
             the
             Internal
             ones
             ,
             as
             being
             commended
             in
             melancholick
             and
             spleenetick
             diseases
             :
             and
             they
             may
             be
             opened
             about
             the
             fundament
             ,
             or
             leeches
             may
             be
             applied
             to
             them
             ,
             whereas
             otherwise
             no
             branches
             of
             the
             Vena
             portae
             which
             lies
             concealed
             within
             ,
             do
             go
             out
             to
             the
             skin
             ,
             which
             can
             be
             opened
             .
          
           
             The
             internal
             and
             external
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             differ
             one
             from
             
             another
             .
          
           
             I
             In
             their
             Original
             .
             For
             the
             Internal
             arises
             as
             was
             said
             before
             ,
             From
             the
             Vena
             portae
             ,
             and
             descends
             along
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Colon
             ,
             under
             the
             right
             gut
             ,
             the
             end
             whereof
             or
             Fundament
             ,
             it
             circularly
             embraces
             with
             certain
             smal
             twigs
             .
             It
             arises
             sometimes
             from
             the
             Ramus
             splenicus
             ,
             from
             whence
             is
             the
             Vas
             breve
             .
             But
             seldome
             which
             Casserius
             once
             observed
             ,
             from
             the
             Spleen
             it self
             .
             Veslingus
             observed
             it
             twice
             or
             thrice
             ,
             and
             therefore
             
               Robert
               Flud
            
             is
             out
             ,
             who
             condemns
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             ,
             because
             they
             void
             not
             from
             the
             Spleen
             ▪
             but
             rather
             from
             the
             Mesenterie
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             dammage
             of
             the
             Guts
             and
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             external
             Haemorrhoides
             arise
             from
             the
             Hypogastri●k
             branch
             of
             the
             Cava
             .
          
           
             II
             By
             their
             Insertion
             For
             the
             internal
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Intestinum
             rectum
             ,
             which
             is
             membranous
             ,
             and
             required
             thick
             Blood
             made
             in
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             communicated
             by
             the
             Arteria
             Coeliaca
             or
             Splenica
             .
          
           
             The
             external
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Musculous
             Substance
             of
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             which
             required
             purer
             Blood
             ,
             elaborated
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             brought
             hither
             by
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             III
             In
             Number
             ,
             the
             Internal
             is
             one
             in
             number
             ,
             the
             external
             is
             threefold
             .
          
           
             IV
             In
             the
             
               Quality
               of
               the
               Blood
               contained
            
             .
             The
             Blood
             of
             the
             inner
             is
             thick
             and
             black
             ,
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             outer
             is
             thinner
             and
             redder
             .
          
           
             V
             In
             their
             Use
             The
             internal
             empty
             the
             Vena
             port●
             successively
             ,
             but
             first
             the
             Spleenick
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             help
             the
             Obstructions
             of
             the
             Spleen
             :
             the
             external
             empty
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             ,
             the
             Liver
             by
             accident
             ,
             but
             primarily
             the
             great
             Arterie
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             ;
             yea
             their
             evacuation
             cures
             diseases
             springing
             from
             Blood
             ,
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             Chest
             ,
             &c.
             
             Which
             Hippocrates
             hints
             in
             his
             Aphorismes
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             internal
             are
             said
             to
             cure
             the
             Cacochymia
             ,
             or
             badness
             of
             Humors
             ,
             the
             external
             the
             Ple●horia
             or
             fullness
             of
             good
             Blood.
             
          
           
             VI
             
               In
               the
               plentiful
               profusion
               of
               Blood.
            
             The
             flux
             of
             the
             internal
             ones
             is
             not
             so
             plentiful
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             external
             is
             sometimes
             so
             large
             ,
             that
             men
             die
             by
             the
             extremity
             thereof
             ,
             or
             fal
             into
             greivous
             diseases
             .
          
           
             VII
             In
             the
             Evacuation
             of
             the
             external
             ones
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             Paine
             nor
             Gripeing
             of
             the
             Eelly
             ;
             and
             some
             times
             also
             no
             paine
             in
             the
             Fundament
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             flux
             of
             the
             inner
             Haemorrhoides
             ,
             there
             is
             greivous
             paine
             .
          
           
             VIII
             The
             Internal
             do
             alone
             descend
             ,
             unaccompanyed
             with
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             howbeit
             either
             the
             Arteries
             are
             hidden
             ,
             or
             they
             depend
             of
             Arteries
             in
             the
             upper-more
             .
          
           
             The
             external
             descend
             with
             the
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             manifestly
             ;
             and
             therefore
             the
             external
             are
             more
             properly
             called
             
               Vasa
               Haemorrhoidalia
            
             ,
             to
             include
             the
             Arteries
             with
             the
             Veins
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             ascending
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               sine
               pari
            
             .
          
           
             
               VEna
               Cava
            
             called
             also
             
               Vena
               magna
            
             
             and
             maxima
             ,
             the
             great
             vein
             and
             the
             greatest
             vein
             ,
             by
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             exceeding
             largness
             ,
             and
             by
             
               Aurelianus
               ,
               Venae
               crassa
            
             the
             thick
             Vein
             ,
             is
             the
             largest
             Vein
             in
             our
             whole
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             Mother
             of
             all
             other
             Veins
             which
             do
             not
             proceed
             from
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             ;
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             bunching
             or
             convex
             side
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             therefore
             by
             Hippocrates
             termed
             the
             Liver
             vein
             ,
             haveing
             spread
             many
             Veins
             through
             the
             
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             which
             about
             the
             top
             are
             collected
             into
             one
             Trunk
             it
             is
             presently
             divided
             into
             the
             upper
             or
             ascendent
             ,
             and
             the
             lower
             and
             descendent
             Trunks
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ascendent
               Trunk
            
             peirces
             the
             Midrif
             ,
             
             is
             spread
             about
             through
             the
             Chest
             ,
             Neck
             ,
             Head
             and
             Arms.
             Now
             it
             is
             carried
             undivided
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Jugulum
             .
             Mean
             while
             four
             branches
             arise
             there
             from
             .
          
           
             1
             Phreni●●s
             or
             the
             Midrif
             vein
             ,
             on
             
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             whence
             also
             branches
             are
             sent
             to
             the
             Pericardium
             and
             Mediastinum
             .
             That
             Quittor
             in
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Empyema
             ,
             is
             carried
             by
             this
             Vein
             to
             
             the
             Kidnies
             and
             Bladder
             
               M.
               A.
               Severinus
            
             ingeniously
             proves
             ,
             because
             1.
             
             The
             quittor
             must
             needs
             rest
             at
             the
             bottom
             of
             the
             Midriff
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Septum
             it
             is
             easily
             made
             thin
             .
             3.
             
             By
             the
             same
             motion
             the
             mouths
             of
             the
             vessels
             are
             opened
             .
             which
             may
             more
             truly
             be
             said
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             carry
             Blood
             to
             the
             Kidnies
             by
             their
             emulgent
             Branches
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Blood
             sundry
             excrements
             ,
             as
             quittor
             ,
             Serum
             &c.
             
          
           
             Afterwards
             the
             
               Vena
               cavae
            
             ascends
             by
             the
             Septum
             ,
             and
             boring
             its
             passage
             through
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             it
             goes
             a
             little
             towards
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             and
             infinuates
             it self
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             with
             a
             large
             hole
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             joyned
             on
             all
             sides
             to
             the
             left
             Ear-let
             :
             and
             there
             is
             made
             ,
          
           
             2
             The
             
               Vena
               Coronaria
            
             ,
             which
             is
             somtimes
             double
             ,
             compassing
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             at
             the
             Rise
             whereof
             a
             little
             Valve
             is
             placed
             ,
             not
             suffering
             the
             Blood
             to
             return
             into
             the
             Trunk
             .
             For
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             a
             continued
             passage
             to
             the
             Artery
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             therefrom
             receive
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             return
             to
             the
             Cavae
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             the
             ascendent
             Trunk
             does
             at
             last
             ,
             bore
             its
             way
             through
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             and
             taking
             the
             former
             shape
             ,
             it
             had
             under
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             smaller
             ,
             thorugh
             the
             middle
             division
             of
             the
             Lungs
             (
             no
             more
             upon
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             where
             now
             the
             Gullet
             and
             Wesand
             rest
             )
             it
             ascends
             to
             the
             Jugulum
             .
             Mean
             while
             there
             is
             bred
          
           
             3.
             
             A
             remarkable
             Vein
             above
             the
             Heart
             called
             
               Ayzgos
               ,
               sine
               pari
            
             ,
             the
             Vein
             without
             a
             fellow
             ,
             because
             in
             a
             Man
             and
             a
             Dog
             ,
             it
             is
             commonly
             but
             one
             ,
             quartering
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             without
             another
             on
             the
             other
             side
             .
             But
             there
             are
             two
             in
             some
             Creatures
             which
             chew
             the
             cud
             ,
             as
             Goats
             ,
             and
             in
             Swine
             &c.
             
             And
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             two
             ,
             once
             I
             found
             none
             at
             all
             ,
             instead
             whereof
             on
             each
             side
             there
             descended
             a
             Branch
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               Subclavia
            
             .
          
           
             It
             arises
             from
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Cava
             but
             more
             towards
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             and
             descends
             through
             the
             right
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Chest
             :
             but
             in
             Sheep
             contrariwise
             ,
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Cavae
             ,
             and
             descends
             through
             the
             left
             .
             In
             a
             Man
             after
             its
             Beginning
             ,
             which
             is
             between
             the
             fourth
             and
             fist
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             it
             bends
             a
             little
             back
             towards
             the
             right
             side
             and
             outwardly
             ,
             unto
             the
             eighth
             or
             ninth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Chest
             ;
             where
             it
             begins
             to
             possess
             the
             very
             middle
             space
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             it
             presently
             after
             its
             rise
             ,
             to
             descend
             right
             forward
             ,
             above
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             and
             to
             send
             out
             branches
             on
             each
             side
             .
          
           
             This
             
               Truncus
               sine
               pari
            
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             eight
             lower
             Ribs
             ,
             sends
             out
             on
             each
             hand
             Intercostal
             branches
             ,
             which
             are
             somtimes
             here
             and
             there
             joyned
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             ,
             with
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             
             Thoracica
             inferior
             which
             arises
             from
             the
             Basilica
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Intercostal
             Arteries
             .
             And
             therefore
             a
             Vein
             is
             not
             alwaies
             
             to
             be
             opened
             in
             a
             Pleurisie
             of
             the
             right
             side
             ,
             as
             Vesalius
             would
             have
             it
             .
          
           
             Neer
             the
             Eighth
             Rib
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             Branches
             .
          
           
             The
             one
             being
             somtimes
             the
             greater
             ,
             ascends
             under
             the
             Diaphragma
             to
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             somtimes
             into
             the
             Cavae
             above
             or
             beneath
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             somtimes
             into
             the
             Emulgent
             it self
             .
             This
             way
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             vulgar
             Doctrine
             ,
             pleuritick
             
             persous
             ,
             are
             many
             times
             critically
             purged
             by
             Urine
             ,
             and
             void
             out
             that
             way
             abundance
             of
             Quittor
             :
             which
             matter
             may
             more
             truly
             be
             said
             to
             be
             purged
             out
             by
             the
             emulgent
             Arteries
             ,
             by
             mediation
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             
               on
               the
               right
               hand
            
             ,
             goes
             to
             the
             Cavae
             and
             is
             joyned
             thereto
             ,
             seldom
             to
             the
             Emulgent
             ,
             somtimes
             bove
             ,
             the
             Emulgent
             .
             Often
             times
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             last
             somtimes
             into
             the
             first
             lumbal
             Vessel
             ;
             for
             which
             cause
             ,
             in
             the
             beginning
             
             of
             a
             Pleurisie
             ,
             the
             Ham-vein
             may
             be
             opened
             ,
             to
             draw
             away
             the
             Blood
             ,
             which
             would
             otherwise
             ascend
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             and
             small
             Veins
             ,
             into
             this
             Vein
             .
          
           
             And
             whereas
             Hollerius
             and
             Amatus
             dream
             that
             this
             Vein
             hath
             Valves
             in
             its
             
             Beginning
             ,
             it
             is
             false
             .
             and
             therefore
             false
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Cavae
             being
             evacuated
             ,
             the
             
               Vena
               sine
               pari
            
             is
             not
             evacuated
             ,
             because
             the
             Regurgitation
             is
             hindred
             by
             the
             Valves
             .
             Fallopius
             denies
             them
             ,
             because
             he
             saw
             both
             Wind
             and
             Blood
             regurgitate
             from
             thence
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             
               Intercostalis
               superior
            
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             which
             is
             sent
             to
             the
             Intervals
             of
             the
             four
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             when
             the
             Azygos
             hath
             not
             sent
             branches
             to
             all
             the
             Intervals
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               6.
            
             
             Of
             the
             
               Vena
               subclavia
            
             and
             its
             Branches
             ,
             and
             the
             Jugulars
             .
          
           
             THe
             Branches
             aforesaid
             being
             constituted
             ,
             
             the
             Cavae
             ascends
             to
             the
             Claviculae
             ,
             underpropped
             with
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             commonly
             thought
             to
             be
             divided
             ,
             and
             in
             many
             Anatomical
             Tables
             is
             so
             represented
             ,
             into
             four
             parts
             ,
             on
             either
             side
             into
             an
             upper
             part
             and
             a
             lower
             .
             whence
             a
             common
             Error
             of
             
             Practitioners
             arises
             who
             scrupulously
             open
             the
             Basilica
             Vein
             ,
             in
             parts
             affected
             beneath
             the
             Neck
             ;
             the
             Cephalica
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Head.
             But
             at
             the
             
             Claviculae
             ●
             channel-bones
             the
             
               truncus
               vena
               cavae
            
             is
             divided
             not
             into
             four
             branches
             but
             two
             only
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             the
             right
             and
             left
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Subclavij
             and
             by
             some
             Axillares
             .
          
           
             Wherefore
             it
             matters
             not
             in
             Diseases
             below
             the
             Neck
             ,
             whether
             you
             open
             the
             
             Basilica
             or
             Cephalick
             Vein
             :
             for
             the
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               Cavae
            
             is
             alike
             emptied
             ,
             for
             the
             Cephalica
             and
             Basilica
             proceed
             from
             one
             root
             .
             The
             Chyrurgeon
             ought
             to
             cut
             that
             which
             of
             the
             two
             is
             most
             apparent
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Head
             (
             if
             the
             Circulation
             did
             not
             perswade
             the
             contrary
             )
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             Cephalick
             Vein
             would
             help
             a
             little
             more
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             a
             branch
             inserted
             thereinto
             proceeding
             from
             the
             external
             jugular
             ;
             which
             I
             have
             observed
             more
             than
             once
             in
             divers
             Bodies
             .
             But
             the
             Case
             is
             all
             one
             ,
             because
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             exclude
             all
             this
             Difference
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Subclavian
             Veins
             there
             arise
             both
             upper
             and
             lower
             Veins
             ;
             and
             the
             lower
             both
             before
             and
             after
             division
             :
             before
             the
             division
             ,
             four
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               Mammaria
               (
               whose
               original
               doth
               notwithstanding
               many
               times
               vary
               )
               on
               each
               side
               one
               ,
               somtimes
               without
               a
               fellow
               ,
               descending
               into
               the
               Duggs
               ,
               of
               which
               I
               have
               made
               frequent
               mention
               .
               This
               by
               way
               of
               Anastomosis
               ,
               is
               somtimes
               joyned
               to
               the
               Epigastrica
               under
               the
               right
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Mediastina
               which
               comes
               to
               the
               Mediastinum
               and
               the
               Thymus
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Cervicalis
               for
               the
               Muscles
               which
               lie
               upon
               the
               Vertebra's
               and
               for
               the
               Marrow
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               
                 Muscula
                 inferior
              
               ,
               for
               the
               lower
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Neck
               and
               the
               upper
               of
               the
               Breast
               .
               and
               this
               also
               arises
               somtimes
               ,
               from
               the
               external
               Jugular
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               propounds
               the
               chief
               distribution
               of
               
                 Vena
                 cavae
              
               through
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     Cavae
                     below
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     Its
                     Trunk
                     above
                     the
                     Heart
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     An
                     hole
                     whereby
                     it
                     gapes
                     into
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Subclavian
                     Branches
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   
                     The
                     mammary
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   f.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Mediastina
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Venae
                     cervicales
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Venae
                     Vertebrales
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   iiii
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Jugulares
                     externae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   kkkk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Jugulares
                     internae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Lllll.
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     Azygos
                     or
                     sine
                     Pari.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   mm.
                   
                     The
                     Intercostalis
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Rami
                     phrenici
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ooooo
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Branches
                     of
                     Cava
                     through
                     the
                     Liver
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   p.
                   
                     The
                     Scapularis
                     intern●
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   q.
                   
                     The
                     Scapularis
                     extern●
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   r.
                   
                     The
                     Thoracica
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   s.
                   
                     The
                     Thoracica
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     Cephalica
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     external
                     Branch
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   X.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     internal
                     branch
                     which
                     in
                     part
                     constitutes
                     the
                     Mediana
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ZZ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Basilica
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     Its
                     first
                     Bough
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     external
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     Bough
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     internal
                     branch
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     Bough
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     third
                     Bough
                     constituting
                     the
                     other
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Mediana
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Salvatella
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   These
                   following
                   Characters
                   design
                   the
                   lower
                   Veins
                   .
                
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Emulgent
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Spermatick
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ccc
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Veins
                     of
                     the
                     Kidney-kernels
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dddd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Lumbal
                     Veins
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Rami
                     Iliaci
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sacra
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     Iliacus
                     externus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     Iliacus
                     Internus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   kk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                     media
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     Venae
                     Epigastricae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   mmmm
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Hypogastricae
                     Venae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vena
                     pudenda
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Crural
                     Branch
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Qqqq.
                   
                     The
                     Venae
                     Saphaena
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   rr
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ischias
                     minor
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ssss
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ttt
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Poplitaea
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   uu
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Suralis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   xx
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ischias
                     major
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               313
            
          
           
             Basilica
             ,
             as
             shal
             be
             said
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             touching
             Veins
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             From
             the
             Axillary
             after
             its
             division
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Basilica
             arise
             two
             Veins
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             
               Thoracica
               superior
            
             spent
             into
             the
             Muscles
             spred
             upon
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             into
             Womens
             Dugs
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Inferior
             which
             somtimes
             grows
             out
             of
             
             the
             superior
             creeping
             all
             over
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             whose
             branches
             are
             joyned
             by
             
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             with
             the
             Branches
             of
             
               Vena
               sine
               pari
            
             which
             proceed
             out
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             subclavian
             trunk
             ,
             there
             first
             arises
             
               muscula
               superior
            
             ,
             spread
             out
             near
             the
             jugularis
             externa
             ,
             into
             the
             skin
             ,
             and
             muscles
             of
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             And
             afterwards
             ,
          
           
             The
             jugular
             Veins
             ,
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             they
             ascend
             in
             the
             Jugulum
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             
             the
             Neck
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             internal
             or
             external
             .
          
           
             External
             ,
             which
             sometimes
             ,
             either
             in
             its
             original
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             its
             passage
             ,
             is
             twofold
             ,
             creeping
             upwards
             under
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             provides
             for
             the
             external
             parts
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             Face
             ,
             Neck
             ,
             and
             Fauces
             .
             For
             under
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             internal
             and
             external
             branch
             .
             The
             internal
             goes
             unto
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Mouth
             ,
             Fauces
             ,
             Hyoides
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             exterior
             being
             under
             the
             Ear
             propped
             with
             kernels
             ,
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ;
             one
             part
             is
             caried
             into
             the
             fore-parts
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             the
             Nose
             and
             Cheeks
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Forehead
             being
             joyned
             with
             a
             Branch
             of
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             it
             makes
             the
             Vein
             of
             the
             Forehead
             which
             is
             usually
             opened
             .
             The
             other
             is
             carried
             through
             the
             sides
             ,
             the
             Temples
             ,
             and
             the
             Occiput
             .
             This
             the
             wise
             Severinus
             opens
             with
             very
             great
             successe
             ,
             in
             the
             Head-ach
             ,
             Hoarsness
             ,
             Shortness
             of
             Breath
             ,
             Pleurisie
             ,
             pain
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             Tetters
             ,
             Squinzy
             ,
             and
             which
             I
             was
             present
             and
             saw
             ,
             in
             Varices
             of
             the
             Face
             .
             Mean
             while
             these
             branches
             are
             variously
             mingled
             in
             the
             Head
             and
             the
             Crown
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             The
             internal
             Jugular
             in
             men
             is
             the
             greater
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             abundance
             of
             Brains
             ,
             but
             in
             Beasts
             it
             is
             contrarywise
             T
             is
             called
             Apaplecta
             ,
             and
             does
             ascend
             to
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Trachea
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             sends
             branches
             .
             Reaching
             to
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Skull
             in
             its
             hinder-part
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             .
             The
             one
             which
             is
             the
             greater
             ,
             is
             carryed
             backwards
             with
             the
             lesser
             branch
             of
             the
             Carotick
             Arterie
             ,
             through
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             for
             the
             sixt
             Pare
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             enters
             into
             the
             cavity
             of
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             .
             The
             other
             being
             lesser
             ,
             entring
             at
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             pare
             ,
             is
             spent
             into
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               7.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Arms
             and
             Hands
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               axillary
               Vein
            
             as
             we
             have
             observed
             in
             the
             foregoing
             Chapter
             ,
             is
             divided
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             into
             two
             remarkeable
             Branches
             :
             the
             upper
             and
             lesser
             ,
             or
             the
             Vena
             Cephalica
             ,
             and
             the
             lower
             and
             greater
             or
             Easilica
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             is
             called
             Vena
             
               humeraria
               Cubiti
               inferior
               ,
               Cephalica
            
             or
             Capitalis
             ,
             the
             Head-vein
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             wont
             to
             be
             opened
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             by
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             and
             by
             later
             Surgeons
             also
             either
             out
             of
             Ignorance
             or
             Superstition
             .
          
           
             In
             Brutes
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             external
             Jugular
             ,
             in
             Men
             allwaies
             from
             the
             axillary
             ,
             yet
             so
             that
             from
             the
             external
             Jugular
             a
             short
             twig
             may
             be
             inserted
             into
             the
             Cephalica
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             carried
             in
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             between
             the
             fleshy
             Membrane
             and
             Coat
             of
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             
               external
               branch
            
             termed
             
               Funis
               Brachii
            
             ,
             at
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             wrist
             ,
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             ,
             is
             joyned
             to
             a
             branch
             of
             the
             Basilica
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             arising
             into
             the
             outer
             side
             of
             the
             wrist
             ,
             passing
             along
             between
             the
             ring
             finger
             and
             the
             little
             finger
             ,
             it
             is
             called
             Salvatella
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Arabians
             term
             Siele
             ,
             who
             as
             others
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             commend
             the
             opening
             thereof
             in
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             against
             melancholick
             diseases
             ,
             acute
             Fevers
             ,
             and
             tertian
             Agues
             ,
             but
             in
             vain
             ,
             and
             upon
             no
             ground
             at
             all
             .
             As
             
               Joh.
               Bap●
               .
               Sylvaticus
            
             has
             proved
             in
             a
             distinct
             Treatise
             ,
             and
             Severinus
             lately
             ,
             whatever
             Spigelius
             may
             dispute
             touching
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             in
             the
             extream
             parts
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Spleen
             abounds
             :
             For
             the
             Spleen
             is
             more
             remote
             ,
             and
             any
             other
             part
             may
             be
             as
             wel
             opened
             for
             there
             are
             Anastomoses
             in
             a
             manner
             every
             where
             .
          
           
             They
             make
             that
             the
             
               inner
               branch
            
             of
             the
             Cephalica
             which
             constitutes
             the
             mediana
             .
          
           
             Basilica
             by
             some
             call'd
             
               Cubiti
               interior
               ,
               Epatica
               ,
               Jecoraria
               ,
            
             &c.
             the
             Liver
             vein
             ,
             because
             in
             diseases
             of
             the
             Liver
             it
             is
             usually
             opened
             :
             but
             in
             the
             left
             side
             t
             is
             termed
             Lienaris
             the
             Spleen
             vein
             because
             the
             opening
             thereof
             is
             commended
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             upon
             no
             ground
             at
             all
             .
          
           
             But
             let
             Surgeons
             take
             heed
             when
             they
             open
             this
             Vein
             ,
             least
             they
             
             wound
             a
             Nerve
             of
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             pare
             ,
             which
             lies
             neer
             the
             same
             ,
             whence
             follows
             great
             pain
             ,
             a
             Feaver
             ,
             Convulsion
             ,
             and
             Death
             .
             Also
             Arteries
             lie
             beneath
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             being
             hurt
             ,
             causes
             au
             Aueurisma
             and
             effusion
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             This
             Vein
             is
             divided
             into
             more
             Boughes
             then
             the
             Head
             vein
             .
             Under
             the
             tendon
             of
             the
             pectoral
             muscle
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             three
             Branches
             .
          
           
             I
             The
             first
             goes
             along
             with
             that
             Nerve
             of
             the
             Arme
             ,
             which
             they
             cal
             the
             fourth
             .
          
           
             II
             The
             next
             is
             termed
             Medius
             and
             Profundus
             ,
             beneath
             the
             Elboe
             Joynt
             divided
             into
             an
             external
             and
             an
             internal
             branch
             ,
             separated
             but
             a
             little
             way
             one
             from
             another
             .
             The
             former
             provides
             for
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             Forefinger
             ,
             and
             Middlefinger
             ;
             as
             also
             for
             the
             external
             muscles
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
             The
             latter
             being
             stretched
             along
             the
             middle
             bone
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             servs
             the
             Middlefinger
             ,
             the
             Rinfinger
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             finger
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             internal
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             III
             The
             Subcutaneus
             is
             divided
             at
             the
             inner
             swelling
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             is
             divided
             into
             a
             foremore
             and
             hindermore
             Branch
             :
             The
             latter
             descends
             under
             the
             Ulna
             by
             the
             little
             finger
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             a
             Branch
             of
             the
             Cephalica
             .
             The
             former
             as
             it
             passes
             along
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             produces
             another
             remarkeable
             Vein
             ,
             which
             proceeds
             sometimes
             directly
             ,
             otherwhiles
             with
             various
             turnings
             unto
             the
             wrist
             .
             And
             then
             as
             it
             is
             carried
             along
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             with
             the
             inner
             Branch
             of
             the
             Cephalica
             ,
             it
             makes
             a
             common
             Vein
             which
             is
             called
          
           
             Mediana
             by
             
               Avicen
               nigra
            
             ,
             t
             is
             cald
             the
             mediana
             or
             middle
             Vein
             because
             of
             its
             Sitnation
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Arm.
             It
             is
             frequently
             opened
             without
             danger
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             no
             Nerve
             beneath
             it
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             Tendon
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
             From
             this
             or
             rather
             from
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Basilica
             ,
             whence
             this
             arises
             ,
             a
             branch
             is
             sent
             forth
             ,
             which
             being
             divided
             above
             the
             Radius
             ,
             produces
             an
             exteriour
             branch
             ,
             between
             the
             Thumb
             and
             the
             Forefinger
             ,
             which
             some
             cal
             Cephalica
             ,
             others
             Occularis
             ,
             and
             some
             again
             as
             
               Mundinus
               ,
               Salvatella
            
             ,
             and
             another
             more
             inward
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             middle
             finger
             ,
             and
             the
             Ring
             finger
             ,
             which
             some
             as
             Rhasis
             count
             the
             Sielc
             or
             rather
             Seilem
             of
             Avicenna
             .
          
           
             But
             touching
             the
             Distribution
             of
             all
             these
             Veins
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             
             they
             differ
             in
             several
             Bodies
             ,
             and
             are
             seldome
             in
             one
             man
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             in
             another
             ;
             yea
             the
             right
             side
             of
             the
             same
             man
             does
             rarely
             agree
             with
             the
             lest
             ;
             and
             in
             like
             manner
             they
             varie
             in
             Magnitude
             ,
             in
             several
             persons
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               VIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             descending
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Thighes
             .
          
           
             THe
             lower
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             proceeding
             out
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             called
             the
             descendent
             Trunk
             ,
             is
             more
             narrow
             then
             the
             upper
             or
             ascendent
             (
             which
             servs
             very
             many
             parts
             )
             and
             proceeds
             undivided
             accompanied
             with
             with
             a
             great
             Arterie
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             fourth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Loyns
             .
             Mean
             while
             it
             sends
             forth
             these
             folowing
             Boughes
             .
          
           
             
               I
               The
               
                 Vene
                 adiposae
              
               which
               servs
               the
               Coat
               of
               the
               Kidneyes
               and
               their
               Fat
               ,
               the
               left
               of
               which
               ,
               is
               commonly
               higher
               then
               the
               right
               .
            
             
               II
               The
               emulgent
               Veins
               ,
               descending
               to
               the
               Kidneyes
               by
               a
               short
               and
               crooked
               passage
               ,
               sometimes
               with
               a
               threefold
               Rise
               ,
               bringing
               back
               the
               wheyish
               Blood
               being
               purified
               from
               the
               Kidnyes
               into
               the
               Vena
               Cava
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               Spermatick
               Veins
               of
               which
               in
               the
               first
               Book
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Lumbaces
               or
               Loyn-veins
               somtimes
               two
               ,
               somtimes
               three
               ,
               which
               are
               carried
               betwixt
               the
               four
               Vertebra's
               of
               the
               Loyns
               .
               From
               these
               some
               write
               that
               they
               have
               observed
               two
               Veins
               ascending
               ,
               within
               the
               Vertebra's
               ,
               on
               each
               hand
               to
               the
               side
               of
               the
               spinal
               marrow
               in
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               makes
               them
               conjecture
               ,
               that
               a
               portion
               of
               the
               seminary
               matter
               is
               brought
               from
               the
               Brain
               .
            
          
           
             These
             being
             thus
             constituted
             ,
             the
             Trunk
             going
             towards
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             at
             the
             fourth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             it
             goes
             under
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             which
             before
             was
             under
             it
             ,
             and
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             equal
             Branches
             ,
             termed
             
               Rami
               Ilij
            
             or
             Iliaci
             ,
             because
             they
             go
             over
             the
             
               Os
               Ilij
            
             and
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             unto
             the
             Thighes
             .
          
           
             About
             the
             division
             it self
             ,
             there
             arise
             two
             Veins
             ;
             the
             
               Muscula
               superior
            
             serving
             the
             Peritonaeum
             and
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Loyns
             and
             Belly
             ,
             and
             the
             Sacra
             ,
             somtimes
             single
             ,
             otherwhiles
             double
             ,
             for
             the
             Marrow
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             Afterward
             the
             
               Ramus
               Iliacus
            
             is
             forked
             out
             on
             each
             side
             into
             the
             external
             greater
             ,
             and
             the
             internal
             lesser
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             inner
             two
             Veins
             sprout
             ;
             the
             
               Muscula
               media
            
             without
             ,
             serving
             the
             Muscles
             seated
             on
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Hip
             ,
             and
             the
             skin
             of
             the
             Buttocks
             ;
             and
             the
             Hypogastrica
             which
             is
             remarkable
             ,
             somtimes
             double
             ,
             serving
             very
             many
             parts
             of
             the
             Hypogastrium
             ,
             as
             the
             Muscles
             of
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             ,
             whence
             are
             the
             
               Haemorhoides
               externae
            
             ;
             the
             Bladder
             and
             its
             Neck
             ,
             the
             Yard
             ,
             the
             lower
             side
             and
             neck
             of
             the
             womb
             .
             whence
             are
             those
             Veins
             by
             which
             menstrual
             Blood
             is
             many
             times
             thought
             to
             be
             purged
             in
             Virgins
             and
             Women
             with
             Child
             ;
             which
             nevertheless
             seldom
             happens
             ,
             when
             the
             
               Venae
               Hypogastricae
            
             do
             cumulate
             thick
             Blood
             ,
             and
             send
             it
             not
             back
             unto
             the
             Trunck
             ,
             then
             they
             may
             be
             opened
             ,
             but
             otherwise
             ,
             they
             are
             indeed
             suppressed
             ;
             but
             they
             ascend
             unto
             the
             Heart
             by
             the
             
               Vena
               Cavae
            
             ,
             and
             cause
             palpitations
             and
             other
             symptomes
             .
             But
             when
             they
             are
             right
             ,
             the
             Courses
             are
             naturally
             voided
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             appears
             by
             their
             florid
             color
             ,
             and
             the
             common
             Office
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             carry
             unto
             the
             parts
             of
             body
             .
             Walaeus
             proves
             this
             also
             by
             other
             tokens
             in
             his
             Epistles
             .
             This
             branch
             when
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             crural
             branch
             internal
             ,
             doth
             cease
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             outer
             ,
             three
             :
             two
             before
             it
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Peritoneum
             ,
             and
             one
             afterward
             :
             the
             first
             is
             the
             Epigastricae
             (
             which
             seldom
             arises
             from
             the
             crural
             )
             to
             serve
             the
             Peritoneum
             and
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ;
             the
             chief
             part
             ascends
             ,
             under
             the
             right
             Muscles
             to
             the
             Mammariae
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             are
             often
             joyned
             about
             the
             Navil
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             
               Vena
               pudendae
            
             ,
             which
             serves
             the
             Privy
             Parts
             in
             Men
             and
             Women
             ;
             it
             goes
             athwart
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             
               Muscula
               inferior
            
             ,
             going
             over
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Hip-joynt
             ,
             to
             serve
             the
             Muscles
             and
             skin
             of
             that
             part
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             its
             Branches
             are
             termed
             Crurals
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               9.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Crural
             Veins
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Venae
               Crurales
            
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Arteries
             and
             Nerves
             passing
             along
             ,
             are
             in
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Thigh
             interwoven
             with
             frequent
             kernels
             ,
             for
             firmness
             sake
             .
             Afterwards
             there
             arise
             from
             the
             crural
             Ve●●
             six
             branches
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Saphaeda
               (
               so
               cal'd
               because
               of
               its
               apparency
               more
               than
               other
               foot-Veins
               )
               or
               
                 Venae
                 m●leoli
              
               the
               Anckle-vein
               ,
               is
               long
               and
               remarkable
               ,
               it
               is
               carried
               along
               in
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Thigh
               ,
               with
               a
               Nerve
               stretched
               by
               it
               ,
               between
               the
               Skin
               and
               
                 Membran●
                 Carnosa
              
               to
               the
               Knee
               ,
               and
               along
               the
               inner
               part
               of
               the
               Leg
               ,
               it
               goes
               to
               the
               inner
               Anckle
               .
               And
               it
               is
               variously
               distributed
               into
               the
               upper
               parts
               of
               the
               Foot
               ,
               towards
               the
               Toes
               ,
               especially
               the
               great
               Toe
               .
               This
               is
               opened
               about
               the
               Ankle
               ,
               in
               Diseases
               of
               the
               Womb
               ,
               especially
               when
               the
               Courses
               are
               stopt
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               Gonorrhaea
               to
               evacuate
               or
               revell
               the
               Blood
               which
               otherwise
               would
               ascend
               too
               plentifully
               unto
               the
               Womb
               and
               Genitals
               .
               Now
               it
               must
               be
               opened
               where
               it
               is
               most
               apparent
               ,
               whether
               it
               be
               on
               the
               Back
               or
               side
               of
               the
               Foot.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Ischias
                 minor
              
               is
               opposite
               to
               the
               former
               .
               for
               it
               is
               a
               short
               outer
               branch
               ,
               springing
               from
               the
               crural
               :
               it
               is
               carried
               outwardly
               and
               athwart
               into
               the
               skin
               of
               the
               Hip
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscles
               of
               that
               place
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Muscula
               ,
               arises
               from
               a
               Trunk
               ,
               which
               lies
               hid
               among
               the
               Muscles
               :
               it
               is
               a
               double
               and
               remarkable
               Branch
               ,
               distributed
               among
               the
               Muscles
               seated
               in
               the
               Thigh
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Poplitea
               the
               Ham-vein
               ,
               is
               made
               of
               a
               double
               Crural
               branch
               mingled
               together
               ,
               and
               runs
               streight
               along
               under
               the
               Skin
               ,
               behind
               ,
               through
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               bending
               of
               the
               Ham
               ,
               as
               far
               as
               to
               the
               Heel
               ,
               somtimes
               to
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Outer
               Ankle
               .
               This
               Vein
               is
               commonly
               supposed
               to
               have
               been
               frequently
               open'd
               by
               the
               Ancients
               ,
               under
               the
               Knee
               ,
               and
               
                 Paulus
                 Magnus
              
               a
               Chyrurgeon
               of
               Rome
               ,
               did
               once
               open
               it
               .
               But
               because
               it
               lies
               exceeding
               deep
               ,
               and
               cannot
               be
               seen
               ,
               we
               must
               suppose
               it
               cannot
               be
               opened
               :
               and
               perhaps
               this
               is
               not
               the
               
                 Venae
                 poplitea
              
               of
               the
               Ancients
               ,
               especially
               seeing
               Galen
               is
               exceeding
               various
               in
               his
               description
               thereof
               ,
               and
               calls
               it
               somtimes
               the
               Vein
               in
               the
               Ham
               ,
               somtimes
               about
               the
               Ham
               ,
               somtimes
               at
               the
               Knee
               ,
               otherwhiles
               under
               the
               Knee
               ;
               peradventure
               he
               meant
               the
               Ankle-vein
               ,
               which
               descends
               to
               the
               inner
               bunching
               of
               the
               Leg
               ,
               and
               is
               indeed
               conspicuous
               enough
               under
               the
               Knee
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Is
               cal'd
               Suralis
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               great
               Vein
               ;
               and
               is
               divided
               into
               the
               external
               and
               lesser
               ,
               and
               the
               internal
               and
               greater
               branch
               ,
               and
               each
               of
               them
               again
               into
               exterior
               and
               interior
               .
               It
               is
               distributed
               amongst
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               calf
               of
               the
               Leg.
               On
               the
               back
               of
               the
               Foot
               ,
               being
               mixed
               with
               the
               branches
               of
               the
               Poplitea
               ,
               it
               makes
               that
               same
               various
               texture
               of
               Veins
               ,
               which
               is
               apparent
               under
               the
               Skin
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               
                 Ischias
                 Major
              
               gives
               a
               part
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Calf
               ,
               and
               then
               spends
               it self
               into
               ten
               branches
               ,
               bestowing
               a
               couple
               upon
               each
               Toe
               .
            
          
           
             Touching
             all
             these
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               all
               these
               branches
               ,
               do
               send
               divers
               tigs
               outwards
               to
               the
               Skin
               ,
               which
               are
               termed
               Skin-veins
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               all
               these
               branches
               are
               diversly
               disposed
               in
               different
               men
               ,
               as
               was
               said
               in
               the
               Arms
               ;
               nor
               is
               there
               alwaies
               the
               same
               carriage
               of
               Veins
               ,
               in
               both
               the
               Legs
               of
               the
               same
               person
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               there
               is
               also
               no
               great
               choyce
               to
               be
               made
               in
               opening
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Feet
               ;
               seeing
               they
               are
               all
               derived
               from
               one
               Trunk
               ,
               and
               the
               Blood
               ascends
               from
               the
               extream
               parts
               and
               Arteries
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SECOND
           MANUAL
           Of
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           Answering
           to
           the
           SECOND
           BOOK
           Touching
           the
           Middle
           Cavity
           or
           Chest
           .
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Arteries
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             ARteria
             an
             Artery
             so
             called
             from
             containing
             
             and
             preserving
             Air
             or
             spirit
             ;
             was
             by
             the
             Antients
             
               Hippocrates
               ,
               Plato
            
             and
             Aristotle
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Wind-pipe
             ,
             which
             also
             Hippocrates
             calls
             
               Arteria
               magna
               .
               Galen
            
             makes
             a
             distinction
             and
             cals
             the
             Wind-pipe
             
               Aspera
               Arteria
            
             the
             rough
             Artery
             ,
             and
             those
             whereof
             we
             are
             now
             to
             treat
             
               Arteriae
               leves
            
             the
             smooth
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             Hippocrates
             cals
             
               Arterias
               parvas
               ,
               Aristotle
            
             somtimes
             
               Venam
               Aortam
            
             ,
             otherwhiles
             simply
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             Now
             an
             Artery
             properly
             so
             called
             ,
             is
             a
             common
             Organ
             ,
             round
             ,
             long
             ,
             hollow
             like
             a
             
             pipe
             ;
             consisting
             of
             a
             double
             Coat
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             fit
             to
             carry
             Blood
             and
             vital
             spirits
             to
             all
             parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             is
             the
             proper
             Artery-making
             faculty
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             called
             Artoropoietice
             .
          
           
             The
             matter
             whereof
             it
             is
             made
             ,
             is
             a
             clammy
             and
             cold
             part
             of
             the
             seed
             ,
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             Beginning
             of
             its
             Generation
             .
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             of
             its
             Dispensation
             ,
             is
             not
             the
             Brain
             ,
             as
             
               Pelops
               Galen's
            
             Master
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             but
             the
             Heart
             by
             the
             Consent
             of
             all
             Philosophers
             and
             Physitians
             .
             And
             indeed
             the
             Arteries
             proceed
             out
             of
             the
             left
             Chamber
             or
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             not
             the
             middlemost
             ,
             which
             Aristotle
             seigns
             to
             himself
             ,
             and
             would
             have
             the
             Aorta
             to
             proceed
             therefrom
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             proceeds
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             
               Venosa
               Arteria
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             ,
             but
             these
             out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ;
             of
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             already
             in
             the
             
               second
               Book
            
             .
          
           
             Their
             End
             or
             Use
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             Inasmuch
             as
             
             they
             are
             Conduit-pipes
             ,
             they
             carry
             the
             Blood
             and
             vital
             or
             arterial
             spirit
             made
             in
             the
             Heart
             (
             for
             Spirit
             alone
             without
             Blood
             is
             not
             contained
             in
             the
             Arteries
             )
             to
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             1.
             
             To
             communicate
             life
             or
             vital
             faculty
             ,
             that
             the
             vital
             spirit
             implanted
             in
             the
             parts
             ,
             and
             their
             Native
             heat
             may
             be
             sustained
             and
             cherished
             .
             2.
             
             That
             animal
             spirit
             may
             be
             bred
             ,
             in
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Marrow
             .
             3.
             
             For
             the
             nourishment
             of
             all
             the
             parts
             ,
             which
             are
             nourished
             by
             these
             only
             and
             their
             Blood
             and
             not
             by
             the
             venal
             Blood
             or
             Veins
             .
             4.
             
             To
             carry
             the
             Excrements
             of
             the
             Body
             and
             the
             Blood
             therewith
             mingled
             ,
             either
             to
             the
             outer
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             to
             the
             Kidnies
             ,
             or
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             or
             the
             Womb
             ,
             or
             the
             haemorrhoid
             Veins
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             II.
             Inasmuch
             as
             they
             are
             moved
             and
             
             pulse
             perpetually
             ;
             they
             afford
             this
             benefit
             .
             1.
             
             That
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             parts
             is
             fanned
             ,
             cooled
             and
             tempered
             ,
             and
             so
             a
             symmetrie
             or
             due
             proportion
             of
             Heat
             is
             preserved
             .
             which
             is
             caused
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             by
             the
             Airs
             being
             drawn
             in
             ,
             when
             the
             Artery
             is
             widened
             ,
             to
             avoid
             Vacuum
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             arterial
             Blood
             continually
             flowing
             in
             ,
             impregnated
             with
             Air.
             2.
             
             That
             this
             nourishing
             arterial
             Blood
             ,
             may
             be
             continually
             poured
             into
             the
             smallest
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             into
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             For
             
               in
               the
               first
               place
            
             ,
             the
             Heart
             by
             continuall
             pulsing
             ,
             drives
             the
             Blood
             into
             the
             greater
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             because
             they
             cannot
             let
             it
             return
             because
             of
             the
             Valves
             ,
             and
             are
             too
             strong
             to
             break
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             be
             driven
             to
             to
             the
             very
             smallest
             Arteries
             and
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             And
             those
             parts
             not
             being
             nourished
             with
             all
             that
             is
             forced
             in
             ,
             do
             send
             back
             that
             which
             is
             superfluous
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             that
             so
             it
             may
             be
             circulated
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             an
             Arterie
             being
             bound
             in
             any
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             it
             is
             filled
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             otherwise
             than
             the
             Veins
             ;
             contrariwise
             towards
             the
             smallest
             Arteries
             and
             the
             parts
             it
             is
             emptied
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             In
             Blood-letting
             ,
             the
             Arm
             being
             indifferently
             
             hard
             bound
             and
             the
             pulse
             remaining
             ,
             the
             Arm
             is
             filled
             ,
             and
             a
             Vein
             being
             opened
             below
             the
             band
             ,
             Blood
             plentifully
             issues
             ,
             which
             because
             it
             cannot
             come
             out
             of
             the
             Veins
             which
             lying
             higher
             are
             stopped
             by
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             be
             brought
             from
             the
             Arteries
             beneath
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             in
             live-Creatures
             dissected
             ,
             this
             Tumor
             of
             the
             Arteries
             is
             observed
             neer
             their
             Original
             ,
             and
             a
             lankness
             towards
             the
             extream
             parts
             of
             Body
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             go
             ;
             and
             when
             they
             are
             opened
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             mighty
             flux
             of
             blood
             ,
             on
             this
             side
             the
             band
             ,
             none
             beyond
             it
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             the
             same
             is
             to
             be
             seen
             by
             an
             Aneurisma
             .
             3.
             
             Least
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             Veins
             to
             which
             they
             are
             joyned
             ,
             should
             be
             stil
             ,
             and
             putrifie
             like
             standing
             waters
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Heart
             may
             not
             be
             destitute
             of
             Blood
             in
             its
             continual
             expulsion
             ,
             by
             the
             driving
             Arteries
             it
             is
             continually
             filled
             again
             through
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             This
             Motion
             of
             the
             Arteries
             called
             the
             Pulse
             ,
             is
             caused
             ,
             either
             by
             the
             faculty
             alone
             ,
             
             whether
             seated
             in
             the
             Arteries
             themselves
             ,
             as
             Praxagoras
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             or
             flowing
             from
             the
             Heart
             by
             the
             coats
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             as
             Galen
             and
             infinite
             Physitians
             after
             him
             have
             taught
             ,
             especially
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             little
             Reed
             put
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             under
             which
             they
             are
             not
             mov'd
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Intercepton
             of
             their
             coat
             ,
             til
             it
             be
             taken
             away
             .
             again
             ,
             because
             as
             the
             Heart
             is
             contracted
             and
             widened
             ,
             so
             are
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             laying
             one
             hand
             to
             the
             region
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             and
             by
             wounds
             in
             the
             Heart
             and
             Arteries
             :
             or
             by
             the
             Blood
             either
             boyling
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             ,
             or
             rarefied
             according
             to
             
               Des
               Cartes
            
             ,
             or
             meerly
             distending
             as
             Harvey
             hath
             proved
             :
             or
             from
             both
             the
             Blood
             filling
             ,
             and
             the
             faculty
             directing
             ,
             which
             is
             my
             opinion
             .
             For
             that
             the
             Arteries
             are
             moved
             and
             distended
             by
             the
             Blood
             ,
             I
             prove
             .
             1.
             
             The
             Heart
             by
             its
             perpetual
             pulsing
             ,
             expels
             great
             store
             of
             Blood
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             demostrated
             in
             my
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             2.
             
             That
             the
             same
             Blood
             doth
             fill
             and
             move
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             the
             Artery
             it self
             shews
             ,
             being
             laid
             bare
             ,
             into
             which
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             you
             shall
             feel
             with
             your
             fingers
             the
             Blood
             driven
             in
             to
             flow
             down
             ,
             with
             which
             it
             is
             dilated
             .
             3.
             
             When
             an
             Artery
             is
             opened
             ,
             Blood
             leaps
             out
             ,
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             as
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             4.
             
             Harvey
             saw
             a
             portion
             of
             the
             descendent
             Artery
             with
             two
             crural
             branches
             a
             span
             long
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             a
             Gentleman
             ,
             which
             was
             turned
             into
             a
             fistulous
             hollow
             bone
             ,
             and
             nevertheless
             the
             Blood
             which
             when
             he
             was
             living
             ,
             descended
             through
             the
             the
             Cavity
             thereof
             into
             his
             Legs
             ,
             did
             move
             the
             Arteries
             beneath
             ,
             by
             its
             impulse
             .
             The
             same
             hath
             been
             observed
             by
             others
             in
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             5.
             
             In
             an
             Aneurisma
             the
             flesh
             is
             manifestly
             seen
             to
             pulse
             ,
             as
             formerly
             the
             Artery
             being
             sound
             was
             wont
             to
             do
             by
             the
             afflux
             of
             Blood.
             6.
             
             The
             waving
             ,
             Worm-creeping
             pulse
             ,
             do
             argue
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             the
             judgment
             of
             Walaeus
             .
             7.
             
             Harvey
             gives
             us
             another
             rare
             experiment
             ,
             made
             with
             the
             Guts
             of
             a
             Dog
             ,
             Wolf
             or
             other
             Creature
             dried
             ,
             blown
             up
             and
             filled
             with
             Water
             .
             For
             if
             we
             smite
             one
             end
             with
             our
             Finger
             ,
             and
             lay
             our
             fingers
             to
             the
             other
             end
             ,
             we
             may
             cleerly
             perceive
             every
             stroak
             ,
             and
             the
             difference
             of
             the
             motion
             .
             Howbeit
             I
             conceive
             the
             faculty
             ought
             to
             be
             joyned
             hereto
             ,
             communicated
             to
             the
             Coats
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             help
             whereof
             ,
             they
             are
             contracted
             and
             widned
             ;
             because
             ,
             1.
             
             Otherwise
             the
             Flux
             of
             the
             Blood
             would
             be
             inordinate
             ,
             and
             the
             pulse
             alwaies
             unequal
             .
             2.
             
             All
             the
             Arteries
             are
             dilated
             or
             contracted
             in
             one
             moment
             ,
             but
             the
             Blood
             alone
             fils
             the
             Arteries
             successively
             and
             moves
             them
             part
             after
             part
             .
             Indeed
             ,
             Gloves
             being
             blown
             into
             ,
             all
             the
             fingers
             are
             puffed
             up
             at
             once
             ,
             which
             Harvey
             objects
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             Basin
             the
             blow
             and
             motion
             are
             at
             once
             in
             both
             ends
             :
             but
             corporeal
             blood
             is
             of
             another
             Nature
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             moved
             like
             species
             or
             Winds
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Faculties
             or
             Irradiation
             of
             vital
             light
             ,
             may
             run
             through
             all
             parts
             in
             the
             twinkling
             of
             an
             Eve
             ,
             like
             the
             Light
             of
             the
             Sun.
             See
             more
             of
             this
             in
             the
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             4.
             
             Hence
             within
             Galen
             his
             Reed
             the
             Artery
             is
             obscurely
             moved
             ,
             because
             the
             swift
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ceases
             when
             the
             Faculty
             is
             hindred
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             Harvey
             and
             Walaeus
             argue
             differently
             about
             this
             difficult
             Experiment
             .
          
           
             Now
             all
             the
             Arteries
             are
             widened
             
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             contracted
             ,
             and
             contracted
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             widened
             ,
             which
             is
             certain
             from
             the
             dissection
             of
             an
             Artery
             and
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             from
             Ligatures
             ,
             nor
             was
             it
             so
             long
             ago
             unknown
             to
             Erasistratus
             ,
             and
             reason
             confirmes
             the
             same
             ,
             because
             when
             the
             Heart
             expels
             ,
             then
             are
             the
             the
             Arteries
             filled
             with
             its
             Blood.
             Yet
             have
             they
             not
             contrary
             pulses
             ,
             as
             we
             find
             by
             laying
             our
             hand
             to
             the
             wrist
             and
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             for
             the
             pulse
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             perceived
             by
             us
             in
             its
             Systole
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             the
             Arteries
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             filled
             ,
             because
             the
             two
             motions
             ,
             are
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
             The
             smallest
             capillary
             Arteries
             are
             not
             perceived
             to
             pulse
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             not
             so
             much
             force
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             therefore
             we
             can
             hardly
             discern
             them
             from
             the
             Veins
             .
             also
             they
             have
             thin
             Coats
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             seen
             through
             them
             ,
             as
             through
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             The
             Form
             is
             apparent
             from
             the
             Accidents
             ;
             howbeit
             the
             form
             of
             an
             Arterie
             is
             the
             Substancial
             Soul
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             besides
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             is
             deep
             ,
             allwaies
             under
             the
             Veins
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             more
             safe
             ,
             and
             that
             not
             only
             in
             the
             external
             ,
             but
             the
             internal
             parts
             also
             ,
             if
             you
             except
             the
             Belly
             ,
             a
             little
             below
             the
             Kidneies
             :
             For
             after
             that
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             descending
             from
             the
             Diaphragma
             ,
             have
             passed
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Kidneies
             ,
             the
             Cava
             hides
             it self
             under
             the
             Aorta
             through
             all
             that
             region
             ,
             til
             they
             pass
             out
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ;
             for
             then
             the
             Arterie
             does
             again
             side
             it selfe
             under
             the
             Cava
             .
             The
             Cause
             whereof
             Plempius
             conceives
             to
             be
             this
             ;
             that
             otherwise
             there
             would
             have
             bin
             danger
             ,
             least
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Body
             often
             happening
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             the
             Vena
             cava
             having
             but
             a
             single
             Coat
             ,
             would
             have
             resisted
             the
             said
             motion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             is
             sufficiently
             great
             ,
             but
             
             the
             descending
             part
             of
             the
             Arterle
             is
             greater
             ,
             the
             ascendent
             lesser
             ,
             because
             the
             Number
             of
             the
             internal
             parts
             is
             greater
             then
             of
             the
             external
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Arteries
             is
             fewer
             then
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             because
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             quick
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             slow
             through
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             therefore
             there
             are
             many
             receptacles
             provided
             for
             that
             Blood
             which
             is
             collected
             by
             certain
             pulses
             .
             Yet
             there
             are
             more
             Arteries
             then
             we
             think
             ,
             or
             can
             be
             discerned
             by
             us
             ,
             because
             the
             capillary
             Arteries
             are
             exceeding
             like
             to
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             is
             like
             a
             Pipe
             or
             Channel
             ,
             smooth
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             long
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             their
             Passages
             .
             Some
             Arteries
             are
             terminated
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             by
             which
             expulsion
             of
             Excrements
             is
             caused
             ;
             some
             have
             their
             mouths
             terminated
             into
             the
             Skin
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             external
             air
             is
             attracted
             (
             in
             Transpiration
             which
             is
             performed
             also
             by
             the
             Veins
             )
             and
             sooty
             steams
             expelled
             .
             Platerus
             denies
             that
             they
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Bones
             ,
             but
             Spigelius
             observed
             at
             Padua
             ,
             in
             a
             great
             corruption
             of
             the
             
               O●
               Tibiae
            
             ,
             that
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Bone
             was
             bored
             through
             by
             an
             Arterie
             .
             which
             perhaps
             Aristotle
             had
             likewise
             seen
             ,
             because
             he
             sayes
             that
             Arteries
             end
             into
             a
             solid
             Substance
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             compassed
             (
             like
             the
             
             Veins
             )
             sometimes
             with
             a
             membrane
             thick
             and
             common
             ,
             from
             the
             Neighbouring
             parts
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             without
             the
             B●wels
             and
             the
             Muscles
             ;
             and
             such
             Arteries
             as
             have
             a
             membran●
             joyned
             to
             them
             with
             Nerves
             in
             it
             ,
             do
             feel
             ;
             whence
             Galen
             said
             the
             Pulse
             was
             inflamed
             ,
             also
             that
             an
             Arterie
             did
             feel
             ,
             and
             was
             pained
             ,
             which
             one
             at
             Padua
             found
             in
             his
             inner
             parts
             ,
             who
             dying
             with
             a
             mighty
             pain
             in
             his
             Loyns
             ,
             Stones
             like
             a
             Mans
             Nailes
             were
             found
             in
             his
             Lumbal
             Arteries
             .
             But
             other
             Arteries
             are
             without
             Sense
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Arteries
             is
             membranous
             ,
             
             so
             that
             they
             may
             be
             distended
             and
             compressed
             more
             then
             the
             Veins
             .
             Fallopius
             thought
             
             their
             Substance
             to
             be
             gristly
             ,
             because
             he
             observed
             that
             it
             did
             degenerate
             into
             a
             boney
             nature
             ;
             which
             also
             Vestingus
             ,
             saw
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             Harvey
             ,
             in
             the
             great
             Arterie
             above
             the
             Valves
             ,
             near
             the
             Heart
             of
             an
             old
             Man.
             But
             that
             many
             things
             are
             changed
             into
             a
             boney
             substance
             ,
             which
             were
             not
             grisley
             
             Columbus
             teaches
             in
             the
             
               septum
               Cordis
            
             .
             Now
             an
             Arterie
             consists
             of
             two
             peculiar
             Coats
             .
          
           
             The
             Exterior
             is
             thin
             ,
             soft
             ,
             rare
             ,
             as
             the
             Coat
             of
             a
             Vein
             is
             .
          
           
             The
             interior
             is
             compact
             ,
             hard
             ,
             and
             very
             thick
             ,
             viz.
             five
             times
             thicker
             then
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Veins
             :
             And
             therefore
             Herophilus
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Arteries
             were
             six
             times
             thicker
             then
             the
             Veins
             ,
             for
             this
             Cause
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             strong
             in
             their
             perpetual
             motion
             ,
             and
             that
             their
             thin
             Blood
             should
             not
             soon
             vanish
             and
             fly
             away
             ,
             being
             spirituous
             and
             vaporous
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             the
             opening
             of
             an
             Arterie
             ,
             the
             incision
             must
             be
             made
             deep
             ,
             with
             a
             broad
             and
             sharp
             Lancet
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             deep
             Situation
             of
             the
             Arterie
             ,
             and
             thickness
             of
             the
             Skin
             .
             The
             opening
             of
             an
             Arterie
             is
             allowed
             of
             by
             these
             
             ancients
             
               Oribasius
               ,
               Aegineta
               ,
               Aetius
               ,
               Actuarius
               ,
               Aurelianus
               ,
               Abensina
               .
            
             With
             good
             success
             Galen
             practised
             it
             ,
             in
             a
             disease
             of
             the
             Eyes
             proceeding
             from
             hot
             Blood
             ,
             ful
             of
             vapors
             ,
             and
             in
             pains
             of
             the
             Hips
             .
             Panarolus
             at
             Rome
             uses
             the
             same
             kind
             of
             remedie
             in
             a
             Phrenzie
             ,
             and
             Alpinus
             writes
             that
             it
             is
             frequent
             in
             Aegipt
             ,
             which
             Paraeus
             did
             likewise
             exercise
             in
             
               France
               ,
               M.
               Aurelius
               Severinus
            
             at
             Naples
             ,
             and
             
               Paulus
               Moth
            
             with
             us
             ,
             excellent
             Physitians
             and
             Surgeons
             ,
             do
             happily
             open
             them
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             good
             of
             their
             Patients
             ,
             especially
             in
             diseases
             of
             the
             Head
             ;
             in
             which
             nevertheless
             ,
             the
             opening
             of
             an
             Arterie
             may
             seem
             usless
             ,
             because
             1
             Vaporous
             and
             hot
             Blood
             is
             as
             well
             carried
             by
             the
             inner
             carotick
             Arteries
             unto
             the
             Brain
             ,
             from
             the
             Basis
             to
             the
             
               plexus
               retiformis
            
             ,
             as
             wel
             as
             by
             the
             external
             ones
             ,
             which
             are
             opened
             .
             2
             The
             same
             Blood
             returnes
             through
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             sure
             Laws
             of
             Circulation
             .
             But
             seeing
             it
             did
             certainly
             profit
             the
             Patients
             ,
             I
             conceive
             it
             was
             practised
             rather
             by
             way
             of
             preservation
             ,
             then
             of
             Cure.
             For
             the
             antecedent
             cause
             being
             somewhat
             evacuated
             by
             the
             outer
             Arteries
             ,
             the
             conjunct
             cause
             is
             easily
             extruded
             by
             the
             jugular
             Veins
             .
             More
             over
             ,
             some
             external
             Vein
             or
             Arterie
             may
             be
             obstructed
             ,
             so
             that
             neither
             the
             latter
             can
             send
             ,
             nor
             the
             former
             receive
             ,
             unless
             they
             be
             opened
             .
          
           
             Galen
             ads
             a
             third
             Coat
             ,
             in
             their
             inner
             Surface
             ,
             like
             a
             Cobweb
             for
             Thinness
             ,
             appearing
             in
             great
             Arteries
             about
             the
             Original
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               2.
            
             
             Of
             the
             ascendent
             Trunk
             of
             the
             great
             Arterie
             .
          
           
             THe
             distribution
             of
             the
             Arteries
             which
             alwaies
             in
             a
             manner
             ,
             accompany
             the
             Veins
             ,
             wil
             be
             more
             easy
             and
             short
             ;
             because
             the
             dessemination
             of
             the
             Veins
             is
             already
             understood
             from
             what
             has
             bin
             said
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             or
             crassa
             ,
             the
             great
             or
             thick
             Artery
             the
             mother
             of
             the
             other
             Arteries
             ,
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             with
             a
             gapeing
             Orifice
             or
             vvide
             mouth
             ;
             where
             within
             the
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-Bag
             ,
             it
             breeds
             from
             it self
             the
             Arteria
          
           
             Coronaria
             ,
             compassing
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             sometimes
             single
             ,
             sometimes
             double
             ,
             afterward
             ,
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Heart-bag
             ,
             t
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             lesser
             Trunk
             ascending
             ,
             and
             the
             greater
             Trunk
             descending
             .
          
           
             The
             lesser
             and
             
               upper
               Trunk
            
             resting
             upon
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             does
             provide
             for
             all
             parts
             quartered
             above
             the
             Heart
             :
             and
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             
               Subclavius
               Ramus
               dexter
            
             ,
             which
             is
             higher
             and
             much
             the
             larger
             ,
             and
             the
             sinister
             ,
             rising
             more
             low
             and
             going
             obliquely
             to
             the
             Arm.
             
          
           
             Afterward
             the
             whole
             Trunk
             sustained
             by
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             divides
             it self
             into
             two
             Carotides
             or
             Sleep-arteries
             unequal
             ,
             which
             go
             right
             upwards
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Arteriae
               subclaviae
            
             before
             they
             go
             out
             of
             the
             Chest
             (
             for
             then
             they
             are
             termed
             Axillares
             when
             they
             are
             out
             )
             from
             their
             lower
             part
             ,
             do
             produce
             the
             
               Intercostales
               superiores
            
             to
             the
             Intervals
             of
             three
             or
             four
             of
             the
             upper
             Ribs
             ;
             from
             their
             upper
             part
             .
             1.
             
             The
             Mammariae
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Cervicales
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Musculae
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Axillaris
             before
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             Arm
             ,
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             ,
             doth
             arise
             the
             
               Thoracica
               superior
               ,
               Thoracica
               inferior
            
             ,
             and
             Scapularis
             :
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             ,
             the
             Humeraria
             .
             The
             remainder
             ,
             goes
             from
             the
             Axillary
             on
             each
             side
             to
             the
             Arm.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
            
             Of
             the
             Arteria
             Carotides
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Arteriae
               Carotides
            
             do
             ascend
             upwards
             right
             to
             the
             Head
             by
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Wesand
             ,
             being
             knit
             unto
             the
             internal
             Jugulars
             :
             for
             the
             internal
             Veins
             do
             not
             accompany
             the
             Arteries
             .
             When
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Fauces
             ,
             before
             they
             enter
             the
             Skul
             ,
             they
             give
             branches
             to
             the
             Larynx
             and
             the
             Tongue
             :
             and
             then
             a
             division
             is
             made
             into
             the
             outer
             and
             inner
             branch
             .
          
           
             The
             outer
             being
             the
             smaller
             ,
             furnishes
             the
             Cheeks
             and
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Face
             ;
             and
             then
             at
             the
             root
             of
             the
             Ears
             ,
             't
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             ;
             the
             one
             is
             sent
             to
             the
             hinder
             parts
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             whence
             arise
             two
             branches
             entring
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             ,
             to
             furnish
             the
             Lip
             ,
             and
             the
             roots
             of
             all
             the
             lower
             Teeth
             :
             the
             other
             goes
             to
             the
             Temples
             ,
             the
             Forehead
             ,
             and
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Face
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             at
             the
             saddle
             of
             
               Os
               Sphaenodes
            
             under
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             ,
             makes
             the
             
               Rete
               mirabile
            
             ,
             and
             then
             passes
             through
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             ,
             and
             sends
             forth
             two
             branches
             .
             1.
             
             The
             lesser
             with
             the
             Nerve
             optick
             to
             the
             Eyes
             .
             2.
             
             The
             greater
             ascending
             to
             to
             the
             side
             of
             the
             
               Glandula
               pituitaria
            
             ,
             and
             distributed
             through
             the
             
               pia
               maior
            
             and
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               4.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             whole
             Hand
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Axillary
               Arterie
            
             ,
             is
             carried
             along
             through
             the
             Arm
             ,
             descending
             between
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             with
             a
             Vein
             and
             Nerve
             of
             the
             Arm
             which
             they
             count
             to
             be
             the
             fourth
             .
          
           
             Under
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Elbow
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             fair
             branches
             ;
             the
             upper
             and
             the
             lower
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             goes
             right
             on
             through
             the
             middle
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             where
             Physitions
             feel
             the
             Pulse
             ;
             afterward
             proceeding
             under
             the
             ring-shap'd
             Ligament
             ,
             it
             bestows
             branches
             upon
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             Fore-finger
             ,
             and
             Middle-finger
             .
          
           
             The
             lower
             running
             through
             the
             Ulna
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ;
             furnishes
             the
             Mid-finger
             Ring-finger
             and
             little
             finger
             :
             and
             so
             it
             proceeds
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             whence
             we
             feel
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Pulse
             beneath
             ,
             especially
             in
             lean
             persons
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             have
             a
             great
             Pulse
             .
             But
             we
             better
             perceive
             the
             pulsing
             of
             the
             former
             branch
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             less
             obscured
             and
             hid
             by
             Tendons
             .
          
           
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               distribution
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               or
               Aorta
               ,
               through
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Beginning
                     of
                     the
                     Arteria
                     magna
                     arising
                     cut
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     It
                     s
                     Trunk
                     ascending
                     ,
                     from
                     whence
                     arise
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     Subclaviae
                     ,
                     and
                     from
                     these
                  
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     carotides
                     ,
                     which
                     afterwards
                     produce
                  
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     exterior
                     and
                  
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     interior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     Vertebrales
                     or
                     Cervicales
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     Musculae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ii
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     Mammariae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   kk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     intercostal
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ll
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Scapularis
                     interna
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   mm.
                   
                     Scapularis
                     externa
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     Thoracica
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   
                     Thoracica
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   pp.
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     axillaris
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Qq
                   
                     It
                     s
                     upper
                     branch
                     dispersed
                     through
                     the
                     Arm
                     to
                     the
                     Wrist
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Rr.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     inferior
                     branch
                     going
                     also
                     to
                     the
                     Hand
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   These
                   following
                   Characters
                   denote
                   the
                   Arteries
                   which
                   spring
                   from
                   the
                   descendent
                   Trunk
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Artery
                     descending
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   aaaa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     Intercostal
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Phrenicae
                     Arteriae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Caeliaca
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     branch
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     left
                     branch
                     or
                     Arteria
                     Splenica
                     ,
                     sprinkled
                     with
                     very
                     small
                     twigs
                     through
                     the
                     Spleen
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   f.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Gastrica
                     dextra
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   g.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Gastrepiploica
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Epiploica
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   kk
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Mesenterica
                     superior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ll
                   .
                   
                     The
                     emulgent
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   mm.
                   
                     The
                     Spermatick
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   nnnn
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteriae
                     Lumbares
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   oo
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mesenterica
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   pp.
                   
                     The
                     Rami
                     Iliaci
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Qq.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Iliaca
                     externa
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Rr.
                   
                     The
                     Iliaca
                     interna
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   S.
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Sacra
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   tt
                   .
                   
                     Arteriae
                     Hypogastricae
                     going
                     to
                     the
                     Arse-gu
                     ▪
                     and
                     the
                     Privities
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   uu
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Hypogastricae
                     which
                     go
                     to
                     the
                     Womb.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   XX.
                   
                     The
                     Umbilical
                     Arteries
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ZZ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Epigastricae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Cruralis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     pudenda
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                     inferior
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Muscula
                     ,
                     Cruralis
                     ,
                     external
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Muscula
                     cruralis
                     interna
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Poplitaeus
                     Ramus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     Suralis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     Branches
                     spent
                     upon
                     the
                     Foot
                     and
                     its
                     To●s
                     ▪
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               319
            
          
        
         
           
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             great
             Arterie
             .
          
           
             THe
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             or
             great
             Arterie
             descending
             is
             greater
             ,
             because
             it
             sends
             out
             branches
             from
             it self
             ,
             into
             the
             middle
             and
             lower
             belly
             ,
             as
             also
             into
             the
             Thighes
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Chest
             or
             middle
             Bellie
             ,
             two
             Arteries
             proceed
             from
             the
             greater
             Trunk
             .
          
           
             I
             The
             
               Intercostales
               inferiores
            
             which
             go
             unto
             the
             Intervalls
             of
             eight
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             the
             neighbouring
             Muscles
             .
             For
             it
             seldom
             happens
             ,
             that
             the
             Vein
             sine
             pari
             ,
             has
             to
             accompany
             it
             an
             Arterie
             sine
             pari
             ,
             ariseing
             from
             the
             Trunk
             .
             By
             these
             intercostals
             if
             we
             beleive
             Spigelius
             ,
             quittor
             and
             water
             collected
             in
             the
             Chest
             ,
             are
             received
             into
             the
             great
             Arterie
             ,
             and
             thence
             by
             the
             ▪
             emulgent
             Veins
             carried
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             which
             has
             also
             reason
             to
             back
             it
             ,
             because
             the
             congested
             matter
             is
             more
             easily
             hurried
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             the
             way
             is
             shorter
             .
             I
             add
             that
             quittor
             more
             readily
             follows
             the
             natural
             motion
             of
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             then
             of
             the
             venal
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             Phrenica
             to
             serve
             the
             Midriff
             and
             Pericardium
             ,
             or
             Heart-bag
             .
          
           
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             Trunk
             peirces
             through
             the
             Clift
             of
             the
             Septum
             ,
             and
             spreads
             branches
             through
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             some
             of
             which
             accompany
             the
             branches
             of
             vena
             portae
             ,
             others
             the
             Branches
             of
             Vena
             Cava
             .
             Those
             which
             accompany
             the
             Branches
             of
             vena
             portae
             are
             three
             ;
          
           
             
               Coeliaca
               Arteria
               ,
               Mesenterica
               Superior
               &
               Inferior
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Caeliaca
             ,
             so
             called
             because
             it
             sends
             many
             branches
             unto
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             proceeds
             foreward
             from
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             being
             under
             propped
             by
             the
             Call
             ,
             and
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             
               Ramus
               dexter
            
             which
             is
             the
             smaller
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Sinister
               Ramus
            
             which
             is
             the
             larger
             ,
             which
             under
             the
             hinder
             region
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             are
             knit
             to
             the
             Vena
             Portae
             in
             the
             Pancreas
             .
          
           
             The
             Dexter
             ascending
             to
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             proceeding
             a
             little
             forwards
             ,
             on
             the
             higher
             side
             produces
             
               Gastrica
               dextra
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Cysticae
               gemellae
            
             ;
             from
             its
             lower
             part
             ,
             
               Epiploe
               dextra
               ,
               Intestinalis
            
             ,
             and
             
               Gastroepiploïs
               dextra
            
             ,
             in
             imitation
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             .
             therefore
             let
             what
             was
             said
             there
             ,
             be
             here
             repeated
             .
             The
             Remainder
             from
             the
             
               Ramus
               dexter
            
             goes
             into
             the
             hollow
             surface
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             The
             Sinister
             or
             
               Arteria
               Splenica
            
             ,
             is
             greater
             than
             the
             Dexter
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             be
             easily
             obstructed
             by
             thick
             juyces
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             may
             pour
             sufficient
             vital
             blood
             ,
             into
             the
             Spleen
             .
             This
             Artery
             drawn
             out
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               Splenica
            
             ,
             by
             a
             bending
             and
             crooked
             Course
             goes
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             then
             spreads
             branches
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             
               Vena
               Splenica
            
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Mesenterica
               superior
            
             is
             distributed
             welnigh
             into
             the
             whole
             Mesentery
             ,
             and
             constitutes
             the
             
               Arteriae
               Mesaraicae
            
             ,
             in
             the
             Gut
             Jejunum
             ,
             Ileon
             and
             part
             of
             Colon
             :
             whose
             use
             is
             ,
             1.
             
             To
             communicate
             native
             heat
             into
             the
             neighbouring
             parts
             ,
             and
             those
             whereinto
             they
             are
             inserted
             .
             2.
             
             In
             a
             sickly
             state
             to
             receive
             the
             Excrement
             -
             of
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             as
             the
             Mesaraick
             Veins
             do
             ,
             to
             empty
             them
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             which
             use
             was
             first
             found
             out
             by
             Spigelius
             .
             3.
             
             Some
             conceive
             the
             Mesaraick
             Arteries
             draw
             Chyle
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             of
             their
             Carriage
             .
             2.
             
             Because
             of
             their
             Ends.
             3.
             
             Of
             their
             Contents
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Authority
             of
             Galen
             in
             his
             4.
             
               de
               usu
               partium
            
             and
             in
             his
             Treatise
             
               An
               in
               Arteria
               sit
               sanguis
               ch
               .
            
             5.
             whom
             Hofman
             follows
             .
             But
             they
             cannot
             draw
             Chyle
             ,
             because
             Chyle
             was
             never
             seen
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Arteries
             receive
             nothing
             from
             the
             parts
             ,
             but
             communicate
             somewhat
             to
             those
             parts
             whereinto
             they
             are
             inserted
             .
             Nor
             do
             they
             draw
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             Varolus
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             valves
             hinder
             :
             and
             the
             Chyle
             is
             not
             natural
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
             Nor
             to
             the
             Liver
             or
             Spleen
             ,
             as
             others
             suppose
             ,
             because
             only
             the
             Splenick
             Arteries
             do
             carry
             vital
             Blood
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             only
             one
             little
             Artery
             implanted
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
             Nor
             is
             it
             returned
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             as
             Spigelius
             imagins
             ,
             for
             so
             there
             would
             be
             labour
             in
             vain
             ;
             Nor
             do
             they
             carry
             this
             Chyle
             to
             the
             Caeliaca
             :
             because
             nothing
             ascends
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             all
             descends
             by
             them
             to
             the
             parts
             .
             Therefore
             4.
             
             The
             true
             use
             of
             the
             Mesaraick
             Arteries
             according
             to
             the
             Principles
             of
             Walaeus
             is
             ,
             to
             carry
             Arterial
             blood
             to
             the
             Guts
             ,
             for
             their
             nutriment
             .
             Which
             motion
             of
             the
             Humors
             ,
             Ligatures
             do
             shew
             in
             live-Anatomies
             .
             For
             the
             Mesaraick
             Arteries
             being
             bound
             ,
             do
             swell
             towards
             the
             Trunk
             and
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             are
             empty
             towards
             the
             Guts
             ,
             which
             suck
             in
             the
             blood
             ,
             and
             send
             back
             what
             is
             superfluous
             ,
             through
             the
             mesaraick
             Veins
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Blood
             is
             also
             circularly
             
             moved
             in
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             coeliac
             and
             mesenterick
             Arteries
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               portae
            
             ,
             notwithstanding
             Riolanus
             his
             denying
             the
             same
             ,
             by
             his
             motion
             through
             the
             Trunks
             ,
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               There
               is
               the
               same
               Necessity
               which
               is
               in
               the
               Heart
               and
               other
               parts
               ,
               the
               same
               Profit
               and
               the
               same
               Urgency
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Seeing
               there
               is
               an
               impulse
               of
               Blood
               without
               intermission
               ,
               into
               the
               Meseraic
               and
               Coeliack
               Arteries
               ,
               of
               necessity
               ,
               they
               must
               either
               break
               ,
               or
               Tumors
               and
               other
               Diseases
               must
               arise
               in
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               or
               it
               must
               run
               back
               again
               to
               the
               branches
               of
               the
               Portae
            
             
               3.
               
               Ligatures
               demonstrate
               the
               same
               here
               ,
               as
               in
               other
               places
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Valves
               observed
               by
               Harvey
               in
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 splenicus
              
               ,
               permit
               the
               Blood
               to
               run
               back
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               .
            
          
           
             As
             to
             the
             contrary
             reasons
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               is
               not
               so
               impure
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               compared
               with
               that
               of
               the
               Cava
               ,
               but
               that
               it
               is
               somtimes
               purer
               than
               it
               ;
               and
               though
               it
               be
               more
               dreggy
               ,
               there
               is
               the
               more
               need
               for
               it
               to
               run
               back
               ,
               to
               be
               made
               more
               pure
               by
               the
               Liver
               and
               Heart
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               there
               are
               in
               the
               Liver
               Anastomoses
               either
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 portae
              
               and
               
                 Vena
                 cava
              
               (
               though
               they
               are
               not
               so
               apparent
               in
               a
               dead
               body
               )
               or
               such
               as
               open
               into
               the
               parenchyma
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Somtimes
               there
               is
               a
               remarkable
               palpitation
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 coeliaca
              
               in
               hypochondriacal
               disorders
               ,
               which
               also
               Mercatus
               and
               Fernelius
               have
               observed
               ,
               without
               any
               mutation
               of
               the
               Pulse
               ,
               viz.
               the
               Hypochondrium
               being
               ill
               affected
               with
               Wind
               ,
               or
               with
               some
               distemper
               ,
               whereby
               the
               same
               Blood
               coming
               from
               the
               Heart
               ,
               may
               be
               changed
               in
               this
               Region
               :
               but
               that
               by
               the
               Palpitation
               of
               the
               lower
               parts
               ,
               the
               Heart
               is
               many
               times
               changed
               ,
               Tulpius
               hath
               an
               Example
               .
               See
               also
               other
               Arguments
               ,
               learnedly
               resuted
               by
               Slegelius
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               Mesenterica
               inferior
            
             ,
             is
             distributed
             into
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             and
             the
             left
             side
             of
             Colon.
             
          
           
             But
             the
             other
             Arteries
             which
             accompany
             the
             Branches
             of
             Cava
             ,
             are
             these
             following
             ,
             excepting
             the
             
               Mesenterica
               inferior
            
             .
             For
             in
             this
             order
             the
             branches
             break
             forth
             from
             the
             
               Arteria
               magna
            
             ,
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             .
             1.
             
             Caeliaca
             .
             2.
             
             
               Mesenterica
               superior
            
             .
             3.
             
             The
             Emulgent
             .
             4.
             
             The
             Spermatick
             .
             5.
             
             The
             
               Mesenterica
               inferior
            
             .
             6.
             
             The
             Lumbares
             ;
             from
             which
             two
             Arteries
             are
             thought
             to
             accompany
             two
             Veins
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             7.
             
             
               Muscula
               superior
            
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             the
             Aorta
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Ossacrum
             ,
             goes
             above
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             and
             no
             longer
             under
             ,
             least
             smiting
             against
             some
             Bone
             in
             its
             perpetual
             motion
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             hurt
             ;
             also
             that
             the
             fore-parts
             ,
             the
             shops
             of
             generation
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             need
             of
             Heat
             ,
             might
             be
             neer
             the
             great
             Artery
             .
             And
             in
             this
             place
             it
             is
             called
             ▪
          
           
             Iliaca
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             divided
             like
             the
             Cava
             into
             the
             two
             Iliac
             Trunks
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             them
             into
             the
             inner
             and
             and
             lesser
             branch
             ,
             and
             the
             outer
             and
             greater
             which
             go
             to
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             But
             before
             they
             become
             crural
             ,
             they
             send
             out
             on
             each
             
             side
             six
             branches
             .
             The
             Sacra
             presently
             after
             the
             bipartition
             :
             from
             the
             inner
             Trunk
             the
             
               Muscula
               inferior
            
             ,
             the
             Hypogastrica
             and
             
               ●mbilical
               Arteries
            
             :
             from
             the
             Epigastrica
             and
             Pudenda
             ;
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             Artery
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             Thigh
             ●nd
             makes
             the
             Crural
             Arteries
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               6.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Crural
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             OF
             the
             Crural
             Arteries
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             are
             constituted
             these
             following
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Above
             the
             Ham
             ,
             for
             the
             exterior
             parts
             of
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             
               Muscula
               curalis
               externa
            
             ,
             to
             the
             foremore
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thighs
             ,
             from
             the
             inner
             ,
             the
             
               Muscula
               crutalis
               interna
            
             ,
             to
             the
             inner
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ;
             and
             this
             is
             mingled
             at
             the
             Knee
             ,
             with
             a
             small
             branch
             or
             twig
             of
             the
             Hypogastrica
             .
          
           
             Under
             the
             Ham
             arise
             three
             branches
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               Popliteus
               ,
               into
               the
               hinder
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thigh
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Suralis
               ,
               which
               is
               divided
               into
               the
               
                 Tibicus
                 exterior
              
               ,
               the
               
                 posterior
                 altus
              
               and
               
                 posterior
                 humilis
              
               ,
               ●●●
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Leg.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               rest
               is
               spent
               upon
               the
               Foot
               and
               its
               ●oes
               ▪
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           THIRD
           MANUAL
           Of
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           Answering
           to
           the
           THIRD
           BOOK
           OF
           THE
           HEAD
           .
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Nerves
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             BY
             the
             Term
             Nervus
             the
             Ancients
             did
             
             sometimes
             signifie
             a
             Ligament
             or
             Band
             ,
             hence
             the
             Comaedian
             saies
             ,
             He
             will
             come
             to
             the
             
               Halter
               ,
               in
               Nervum
               ibit
            
             :
             but
             it
             properly
             signifies
             a
             common
             Organ
             ,
             which
             together
             with
             animal
             spirits
             ,
             carries
             the
             faculty
             of
             moving
             and
             feeling
             ,
             wherefore
             Aurelianus
             calls
             the
             Nerves
             
               seasuales
               vi●
            
             .
          
           
             A
             Nerve
             therefore
             is
             a
             common
             Organ
             long
             and
             round
             ,
             to
             carry
             the
             Animal
             faculty
             
             lodged
             in
             the
             Animal
             spirit
             ,
             into
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             is
             the
             Nerve-making
             faculty
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             according
             to
             Hypocrates
             ,
             is
             a
             clammy
             and
             cold
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             ,
             heated
             but
             not
             burnt
             :
             and
             Galen
             saies
             't
             is
             a
             matter
             white
             ,
             thick
             and
             roapie
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             Beginning
             of
             its
             Generation
             .
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Dispensation
             of
             Nerves
             or
             the
             part
             whence
             the
             Nerves
             immediately
             
             arise
             ,
             is
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             ,
             partly
             as
             it
             is
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             and
             partly
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Back-bone
             .
             Within
             the
             Skull
             arise
             those
             which
             are
             commonly
             said
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             viz.
             the
             seven
             pair
             of
             Nerves
             :
             and
             in
             the
             Back-bone
             thirty
             .
             And
             this
             most
             true
             opinion
             is
             confirmed
             ,
             not
             only
             by
             the
             similitude
             of
             the
             Marrowie
             and
             Nervie
             Substance
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             ocular
             experience
             .
          
           
             Aristotle
             would
             have
             them
             arise
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             who
             is
             followed
             by
             
               Alexander
               ,
               Averroes
            
             
             and
             Apo●easis
             ,
             who
             nevertheless
             say
             it
             comes
             by
             mediation
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             Others
             would
             have
             the
             Nerves
             to
             be
             nothing
             else
             but
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             continued
             ,
             and
             degenerating
             into
             Nerves
             :
             as
             Praxagoras
             of
             old
             ,
             in
             our
             daies
             
               Cesalpinus
               ,
               Reusnerus
               ,
               Hofmannus
            
             ,
             and
             Martianus
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             out
             ;
             seeing
             1.
             
             In
             the
             Brain
             there
             is
             no
             Conjunction
             of
             Arteries
             and
             Nerves
             by
             Anastomoses
             .
             2.
             
             An
             Artery
             being
             hurt
             or
             cut
             in
             the
             Head
             ,
             no
             Convulsion
             follows
             .
             3.
             
             The
             distinct
             Rise
             of
             the
             Nerves
             in
             the
             Brain
             is
             apparent
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Arteries
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Erasistratus
             did
             conceive
             they
             came
             from
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
            
             .
          
           
             At
             this
             day
             many
             Physitians
             conceive
             with
             Galen
             ,
             that
             some
             Nerves
             arise
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             :
             who
             are
             all
             confuted
             by
             
               Ocular
               inspection
            
             .
          
           
             Their
             End
             and
             Use
             is
             ,
             to
             carry
             the
             Animal
             faculty
             with
             the
             Animal
             spirit
             ,
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             like
             conduit
             pipes
             ,
             into
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Sensory
               ,
               as
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               Ears
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Motive
               ,
               as
               the
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               All
               in
               a
               manner
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               in
               general
               perceive
               and
               understand
               what
               causeth
               pain
               .
            
          
           
             And
             therefore
             the
             Nerves
             inserted
             into
             the
             parts
             ,
             do
             give
             to
             the
             said
             parts
             either
             Sense
             alone
             ,
             or
             Motion
             alone
             ,
             or
             both
             Sense
             and
             Motion
             :
             nor
             is
             there
             any
             voluntary
             motion
             or
             sense
             without
             the
             help
             of
             a
             Nerve
             ;
             and
             therefore
             a
             Nerve
             being
             cut
             ,
             that
             part
             is
             presently
             deprived
             of
             Sense
             and
             Motion
             .
          
           
             The
             Nerves
             therefore
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             do
             afford
             
             to
             the
             parts
             either
             Sense
             or
             Motion
             ,
             according
             as
             they
             are
             disseminated
             into
             such
             and
             such
             parts
             ,
             because
             the
             Nerves
             of
             themselves
             are
             not
             sensitive
             or
             motive
             .
             So
             that
             if
             they
             be
             implanted
             into
             Muscles
             the
             Organs
             of
             Motion
             ,
             they
             are
             termed
             motive
             Nerves
             ;
             if
             into
             the
             Instruments
             of
             sense
             ,
             sensitive
             .
             Many
             times
             also
             according
             to
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Parts
             ,
             one
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             affords
             both
             sense
             and
             motion
             .
             As
             the
             sixt
             pare
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             commonly
             so
             called
             ,
             is
             communicated
             to
             the
             Bowels
             of
             the
             middle
             and
             lower
             Belly
             to
             cause
             the
             Sense
             of
             Feeling
             ;
             and
             when
             it
             becomes
             recurrent
             ,
             it
             bestows
             
             motion
             upon
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             .
             The
             optick
             pare
             so
             called
             ,
             gives
             only
             sense
             ,
             because
             implanted
             into
             the
             Eyes
             only
             .
             But
             the
             other
             pare
             which
             is
             termed
             
               motorium
               par●
            
             ,
             the
             moving
             pare
             ,
             and
             arises
             from
             the
             marrow
             as
             well
             as
             the
             former
             ,
             causes
             motion
             because
             it
             is
             implanted
             into
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Eyes
             .
          
           
             The
             Situation
             of
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             for
             securities
             sake
             ,
             is
             more
             profound
             and
             deep
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             Magnitude
             is
             various
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             Organs
             and
             dignity
             of
             the
             Actions
             ,
             their
             Assiduity
             and
             Magnitude
             .
             The
             optick
             Nerves
             are
             great
             ,
             because
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Eyes
             is
             so
             ;
             also
             those
             Nerves
             are
             most
             thick
             which
             are
             sent
             to
             remote
             and
             many
             parts
             ,
             as
             the
             Limbs
             ;
             indifferent
             in
             the
             sensory
             parts
             ;
             for
             because
             they
             were
             to
             be
             soft
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             be
             very
             small
             :
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             neerest
             parts
             are
             smallest
             of
             all
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Face
             .
          
           
             The
             Nerves
             are
             commonly
             said
             to
             be
             
               seven
               and
               thirty
               pare
            
             in
             number
             ;
             seven
             pare
             
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             I
             say
             arise
             not
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             and
             thirty
             from
             the
             Marrow
             in
             the
             Back-bone
             .
             But
             I
             say
             that
             indeed
             &
             in
             truth
             ,
             those
             seven
             pare
             ,
             are
             ten
             pare
             ,
             as
             shal
             be
             made
             apparent
             in
             the
             
               following
               Chapter
            
             :
             and
             so
             I
             make
             forty
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             :
             
               ten
               arising
               within
               the
               Skull
            
             ,
             and
             thirty
             without
             in
             the
             Back-bone
             .
          
           
             The
             former
             were
             indeed
             by
             the
             Ancients
             reckon'd
             to
             be
             only
             seven
             in
             number
             ,
             and
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             they
             comprehended
             in
             this
             verse
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Optica
                 prima
                 ,
                 Oculos
                 movet
                 altera
                 ,
                 tertia
                 gustat
              
            
             
               
                 Quartaque
                 Quinta
                 audit
                 ,
                 vaga
                 sexta
                 est
                 ,
                 septima
                 linguae
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 First
                 sees
                 ,
                 next
                 moves
                 the
                 Eyes
                 ;
                 third
                 ,
                 fourth
                 do
                 tast
                 ,
              
            
             
               
                 Fist
                 hears
                 ,
                 sixt
                 roams
                 ,
                 seventh
                 moves
                 the
                 Tongue
                 too
                 fast
                 .
              
            
          
           
             But
             the
             smelling
             pare
             was
             by
             them
             omitted
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             they
             make
             the
             third
             pare
             ,
             is
             double
             and
             distinct
             ;
             so
             the
             fist
             is
             double
             ;
             one
             pare
             of
             which
             duplicity
             ,
             some
             have
             made
             to
             be
             an
             eighth
             pare
             ,
             for
             Archangelus
             reckon'd
             eight
             pare
             ,
             Columbus
             nine
             ,
             and
             I
             ten
             ,
             as
             stall
             be
             said
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             thirty
             pare
             of
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Back
             are
             so
             divided
             ,
             that
             seven
             are
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             twelve
             of
             the
             Chest
             or
             Back
             (
             others
             say
             eleven
             )
             five
             of
             the
             Loyns
             (
             sometimes
             four
             )
             and
             six
             of
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             Nerves
             do
             sprout
             out
             of
             both
             sides
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             termed
             Pares
             of
             
               Nerves
               ,
               Susug●●●
            
             conjugations
             or
             coupling
             of
             Nerves
             .
             And
             it
             is
             necessary
             for
             a
             Physitian
             to
             know
             their
             originals
             
             and
             distinctions
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             understand
             to
             which
             part
             of
             the
             Back-bone
             Topicks
             are
             to
             be
             applied
             ,
             when
             motion
             or
             sense
             ,
             or
             both
             are
             impaired
             in
             the
             Face
             ,
             Neck
             ,
             Hands
             ,
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             Yard
             ,
             Fundament
             ,
             Womb
             ,
             Bladder
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Moreover
             as
             to
             number
             ,
             you
             must
             know
             that
             every
             Nerve
             hath
             its
             mate
             or
             Companion
             ,
             
             except
             the
             last
             or
             lowest
             proceeding
             from
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             The
             figure
             of
             the
             Nerves
             is
             long
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             
             smooth
             like
             Conduit
             pipes
             ;
             but
             without
             any
             hollowness
             as
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             have
             :
             because
             the
             later
             with
             Spirit
             were
             to
             carry
             Blood
             ,
             but
             the
             Nerves
             carry
             only
             Spirit
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             the
             Father
             excepts
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Privity
             manifestly
             hollow
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             his
             Son
             excuses
             to
             have
             been
             meant
             of
             the
             hollow
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Privity
             ,
             who
             is
             better
             verst
             in
             Anatomy
             than
             his
             Father
             was
             ,
             and
             so
             also
             Laurentius
             spoke
             .
             Severinus
             in
             his
             Zootome
             ,
             saies
             ,
             the
             Nerves
             of
             a
             
               Bulls
               pizzle
            
             are
             hollow
             .
             Galen
             also
             adds
             the
             Optick
             Nerves
             ,
             
             which
             he
             will
             have
             to
             be
             hollow
             and
             perforated
             ,
             sensibly
             and
             manifestly
             :
             for
             the
             discerning
             whereof
             he
             conceives
             three
             things
             are
             necessary
             ,
             viz.
             That
             1.
             
             The
             Animal
             be
             great
             .
             2.
             
             That
             it
             be
             cut
             up
             as
             soon
             as
             killed
             .
             3.
             
             That
             the
             Air
             be
             cleer
             and
             bright
             .
             Plempius
             doth
             also
             require
             three
             things
             more
             ,
             that
             the
             Nerve
             be
             cut
             asunder
             with
             a
             most
             sharp
             Knife
             ,
             that
             it
             be
             not
             squeezed
             nor
             stretched
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             be
             cut
             beyond
             the
             growing
             together
             of
             the
             two
             Nerves
             .
             
               Cornclius
               Gemma
            
             subscribes
             to
             Galen
             ,
             who
             attributes
             rather
             a
             passage
             to
             be
             seen
             like
             a
             prick
             in
             the
             inner
             substance
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             Others
             conceive
             the
             porosity
             is
             better
             seen
             in
             the
             optick
             Nerves
             being
             boiled
             .
             Fallopius
             saies
             that
             Galen
             thought
             thus
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             Bodies
             of
             Apes
             which
             he
             dissected
             ,
             all
             Nerves
             are
             pervions
             .
             Howbeit
             Spigelius
             admits
             only
             certain
             passages
             in
             the
             beginnings
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             where
             they
             grow
             together
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             towards
             the
             Eyes
             it
             vanishes
             .
             I
             also
             saw
             a
             Cavity
             and
             Publickly
             did
             shew
             the
             same
             in
             a
             dead
             body
             ,
             after
             they
             were
             joyned
             ,
             and
             before
             they
             entred
             into
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             But
             
               Vesalius
               ,
               Eustachius
            
             ,
             and
             Coiterus
             ,
             deny
             these
             Nerves
             to
             have
             any
             Cavity
             against
             Galen
             ,
             and
             so
             do
             others
             ,
             and
             produce
             experiments
             which
             succeed
             not
             ,
             unless
             the
             conditions
             aforesaid
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Nerves
             do
             want
             a
             manifest
             Cavity
             ,
             but
             they
             have
             Pores
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             subtile
             spirit●
             pa●s
             ,
             least
             we
             should
             grant
             penetration
             of
             bodies
             which
             is
             impossible
             .
             These
             pores
             are
             double
             according
             to
             
               Hogeland
               ,
               lesser
            
             and
             greater
             ,
             through
             the
             former
             subtil
             aerial
             bodies
             pass
             to
             move
             the
             parts
             ;
             by
             the
             later
             ,
             bodies
             less
             subtil
             .
             Neither
             of
             them
             is
             discernable
             to
             the
             Sense
             .
             Nor
             are
             there
             two
             sorts
             of
             Spirits
             in
             the
             Brain
             .
             I
             am
             rather
             apt
             to
             believe
             that
             according
             to
             the
             Indigence
             of
             every
             part
             and
             the
             pleasure
             of
             the
             will
             and
             the
             Imagination
             ,
             sometimes
             more
             spirit
             passes
             through
             the
             greater
             ,
             sometimes
             less
             through
             the
             lesser
             ,
             which
             the
             more
             plentiful
             or
             scanty
             influx
             of
             the
             Spirit
             doth
             make
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             all
             the
             Nerves
             do
             consist
             ,
             none
             excepted
             ,
             of
             many
             nervous
             fibres
             or
             filaments
             which
             grow
             mutually
             together
             by
             little
             Membranes
             .
             I
             my self
             ,
             with
             
               Johannes
               Leonicenus
            
             ,
             a
             right
             diligent
             Anatomist
             ,
             have
             observed
             the
             Trunk
             of
             Nerves
             neer
             the
             Hips
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             dissected
             ,
             to
             shew
             a
             Cavity
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             consisting
             of
             an
             infinite
             contexture
             of
             fibres
             ,
             like
             little
             Worms
             ,
             whereas
             elsewhere
             it
             is
             one
             continued
             body
             ,
             with
             cohaering
             and
             continued
             fibres
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Nerves
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             threefold
             :
             the
             internal
             ,
             white
             ,
             and
             marrowish
             (
             by
             which
             as
             the
             Centre
             the
             action
             is
             performed
             )
             from
             the
             marrow
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             but
             more
             compact
             and
             thickned
             ;
             and
             an
             external
             ,
             being
             a
             twofold
             coat
             ;
             the
             outer
             harder
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
            
             ;
             the
             inner
             finer
             ,
             from
             the
             
               Pia
               Mater
            
             .
             Which
             Membranes
             do
             the
             same
             for
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             the
             Dura
             and
             
               Pia
               Mater
            
             do
             for
             the
             Brain
             .
             Howbeit
             this
             distinction
             of
             Substances
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             searcht
             out
             ,
             rather
             by
             Reason
             than
             by
             Sense
             .
          
           
             Cartefius
             supposes
             that
             there
             are
             Valves
             in
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             stop
             the
             Spirit
             that
             it
             may
             not
             flow
             back
             ,
             otherwise
             the
             parts
             cannot
             be
             moved
             .
             But
             it
             seems
             to
             me
             ,
             the
             Spirits
             may
             not
             be
             retained
             in
             the
             parts
             ,
             which
             the
             Soul
             that
             directed
             the
             Spirit
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Valve
             ,
             shall
             direct
             it
             into
             the
             very
             parts
             .
             For
             no
             Anatomist
             as
             yet
             hath
             observed
             any
             Valves
             .
             Nor
             can
             subtile
             Spirits
             be
             stopped
             by
             Valves
             .
             Nor
             would
             Apoplexies
             or
             Palsies
             so
             easily
             happen
             ,
             if
             the
             Spirits
             could
             be
             detained
             in
             the
             parts
             by
             Valves
             .
          
           
             Besides
             Valves
             
               H.
               Regius
            
             introduces
             likewise
             a
             circulation
             of
             the
             animal
             Spirits
             in
             the
             Nerves
             .
             For
             after
             they
             are
             distributed
             from
             the
             Brain
             to
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             he
             conceives
             part
             is
             dissipated
             by
             insensible
             Transpiration
             ,
             and
             part
             being
             insinuated
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             is
             mingled
             with
             the
             Blood
             ,
             and
             returns
             with
             it
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             thence
             again
             into
             the
             Brain
             and
             Nerves
             .
             He
             proves
             this
             by
             the
             example
             of
             a
             Snail
             enclosed
             in
             a
             glass
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             spirits
             through
             its
             transparent
             Body
             ,
             are
             seen
             to
             move
             and
             pass
             from
             the
             Tail
             through
             the
             Belly
             ,
             to
             the
             Head
             ;
             and
             from
             the
             Head
             through
             the
             Back
             ,
             to
             return
             to
             the
             Tayl
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             Head
             again
             ▪
          
           
           
             But
             some
             doubts
             with-hold
             me
             from
             assenting
             to
             this
             witty
             conjecture
             ,
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Walaeus
               searching
               out
               the
               Motion
               of
               the
               Animal
               spirits
               with
               all
               his
               diligence
               ,
               could
               finde
               nothing
               but
               the
               motion
               and
               distention
               of
               the
               Muscles
               .
               For
               the
               Nerves
               being
               bound
               ,
               do
               not
               swell
               ,
               nor
               are
               distended
               ,
               and
               being
               cut
               ●sonder
               ,
               they
               shew
               no
               other
               motion
               ,
               but
               that
               they
               are
               contracted
               into
               themselves
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               There
               is
               no
               need
               that
               the
               spirits
               should
               run
               back
               to
               the
               Veins
               ,
               because
               being
               subtile
               they
               are
               easily
               consumed
               ,
               and
               by
               his
               own
               Confession
               do
               insensibly
               exhale
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               New
               spirit
               is
               evermore
               supplied
               from
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               may
               supply
               the
               Defect
               of
               that
               which
               is
               consumed
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Veins
               need
               none
               ,
               because
               they
               possess
               that
               spirit
               which
               is
               proper
               to
               the
               Blood
               ,
               nor
               are
               they
               moved
               with
               animal
               motion
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               Nerves
               themselves
               are
               not
               moved
               by
               Systole
               and
               Diastole
               ,
               nor
               of
               themselves
               as
               was
               said
               ,
               because
               it
               appears
               not
               when
               they
               are
               bound
               ,
               and
               they
               move
               with
               a
               voluntary
               motion
               by
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               not
               by
               the
               arteries
               because
               they
               are
               smaller
               and
               go
               not
               into
               them
               :
               finally
               the
               Nerves
               are
               unfit
               for
               such
               a
               motion
               because
               of
               their
               Slipperiness
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               In
               a
               Snail
               the
               Spirit
               aforesaid
               is
               instead
               of
               Blood
               ,
               which
               Snails
               have
               not
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               I
               have
               seen
               those
               who
               had
               their
               senses
               perfect
               ,
               and
               the
               motion
               of
               all
               their
               parts
               free
               to
               the
               last
               gasp
               ,
               whose
               Pulse
               did
               nevertheless
               intermit
               for
               certain
               daies
               ,
               where
               there
               was
               no
               regress
               of
               the
               Spirits
               to
               the
               Veins
               ,
               freely
               passing
               nevertheless
               from
               the
               Brain
               to
               the
               parts
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               as
               long
               as
               there
               was
               any
               left
               .
            
          
           
             It
             is
             now
             to
             be
             observed
             that
             all
             the
             Nerves
             are
             not
             alike
             hard
             or
             soft
             ;
             whence
             Galen
             reckons
             
             some
             
               Nerves
               soft
            
             ,
             others
             hard
             :
             the
             former
             he
             calls
             sensitive
             ,
             the
             later
             motive
             .
             Now
             the
             Nerve
             become
             harder
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Because
               of
               their
               Production
               ,
               as
               being
               to
               go
               a
               great
               wav●
               or
               through
               some
               hard
               Body
               ,
               or
               by
               a
               crooked
               way
               .
               And
               by
               how
               much
               they
               are
               further
               from
               the
               Brain
               ,
               by
               so
               much
               the
               harder
               they
               are
               .
               Hence
               the
               short
               Nerves
               ,
               as
               those
               of
               the
               Sight
               .
               Taste
               ,
               Hearing
               are
               soft
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               the
               Smelling
               softest
               of
               all
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 For
                 use
              
               ,
               for
               hard
               Nerves
               are
               held
               to
               be
               fitter
               for
               motion
               ,
               soft
               ones
               for
               sense
               .
               And
               therefore
               the
               Organs
               of
               the
               Senses
               have
               received
               soft
               Nerves
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               be
               the
               sooner
               affected
               by
               a
               sensible
               object
               occurring
               .
               Now
               all
               parts
               which
               have
               voluntary
               
               motion
               have
               hard
               Nerves
               ,
               because
               that
               which
               is
               hard
               is
               fittest
               to
               act
               ,
               that
               which
               is
               soft
               to
               suffer
               .
            
          
           
             The
             ●se
             therefore
             of
             all
             the
             Nerves
             is
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               carry
               
                 animal
                 Spirits
              
               to
               all
               parts
               for
               sense
               and
               motion
               ,
               which
               appears
               when
               they
               are
               hurt
               .
               For
               if
               they
               are
               obstructed
               in
               the
               beginning
               or
               totally
               ,
               they
               both
               perish
               and
               an
               Apoplexy
               is
               caused
               :
               or
               in
               part
               ,
               and
               then
               one
               part
               of
               the
               Body
               is
               deprived
               of
               sense
               and
               motion
               .
               If
               they
               are
               cut
               asunder
               ,
               the
               motion
               of
               that
               part
               is
               lost
               ,
               into
               which
               they
               were
               inserted
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               diffuse
               
                 Animal
                 light
              
               into
               the
               parts
               .
               For
               the
               animal
               Spirits
               could
               not
               so
               soon
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               either
               in
               a
               Ligature
               ,
               or
               Obstruction
               of
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               but
               that
               those
               Spirits
               which
               remain
               in
               the
               part
               ,
               might
               cause
               motion
               or
               sense
               .
               Therefore
               the
               direction
               of
               the
               Brain
               proceeds
               from
               some
               what
               else
               ,
               which
               being
               taken
               away
               ,
               the
               parts
               presently
               cease
               from
               performing
               their
               functions
               ,
               even
               as
               the
               Hammer
               is
               by
               the
               Hand
               directed
               unto
               the
               Anvil
               ,
               and
               a
               Staff
               is
               directed
               when
               it
               is
               hurled
               ,
               which
               others
               endeavour
               to
               explain
               by
               some
               hot
               Acci●ent
               beside
               the
               Animal
               Spirit
               .
               But
               I
               suppose
               these
               things
               are
               done
               by
               a
               light
               which
               irradiates
               from
               the
               Brain
               ,
               with
               the
               spirits
               ,
               which
               being
               intercepted
               ,
               the
               parts
               are
               immediately
               deprived
               of
               Sense
               and
               Motion
               ,
               as
               the
               light
               of
               the
               Sun
               is
               taken
               away
               by
               a
               Cloud
               ,
               and
               the
               light
               of
               a
               Candle
               ,
               by
               holding
               a
               mans
               hand
               before
               it
               .
               For
               ,
            
          
           
             
               1.
               
               No
               other
               influent
               cause
               ,
               can
               slow
               in
               so
               suddenly
               ,
               and
               be
               withdrawn
               so
               suddenly
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Light
               is
               the
               cause
               of
               all
               motion
               wellnear
               in
               the
               Univers●
               and
               nothing
               is
               swifter
               than
               it
               is
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Sometimes
               it
               remains
               after
               interception
               ,
               but
               not
               long
               ,
               as
               light
               received
               into
               the
               Bononian
               Stone
               ,
               and
               a
               Stick
               by
               me
               violently
               darted
               ,
               and
               broken
               in
               the
               middle
               way
               ,
               does
               fly
               yet
               further
               ,
               by
               the
               motion
               impressed
               from
               my
               hand
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               Temper
               of
               the
               Body
               follows
               the
               Figure
               and
               Temper
               of
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               therefore
               
                 Jo●
                 .
                 Damascenus
              
               in
               the
               seventh
               Aphorisme
               to
               his
               Son
               ,
               advises
               ,
               in
               giving
               of
               Medicaments
               to
               avoid
               such
               as
               dissolve
               the
               force
               of
               the
               Nerves
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               2.
            
             
             Of
             the
             ten
             Pare
             of
             Nervs
             ,
             which
             arise
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             from
             the
             Medulla
             Oblongata
             ,
             and
             their
             progress
             .
          
           
             I
             Make
             the
             first
             Pare
             to
             be
             
               Par
               Olfactorium
            
             the
             Smellingpare
             ,
             whose
             processes
             are
             termed
             Mammillares
             .
             And
             these
             processes
             have
             been
             sufficiently
             known
             to
             all
             :
             but
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             are
             fastned
             behind
             ,
             and
             well
             near
             continued
             ,
             to
             none
             or
             very
             few
             .
          
           
             These
             Nerves
             slip
             out
             of
             the
             Marrow
             about
             
             the
             Saddle
             of
             the
             Sphaenoides
             ,
             near
             the
             foremore
             Ventricles
             ,
             and
             have
             the
             carriage
             ,
             colour
             ,
             and
             use
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             reckon
             them
             for
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             For
             they
             must
             not
             therefore
             be
             robbed
             
             of
             the
             Name
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             because
             they
             pass
             not
             without
             the
             Skul
             ,
             and
             
               Dura
               Mater
            
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             afterward
             invested
             herewith
             ,
             for
             then
             all
             the
             other
             Nerves
             as
             long
             as
             they
             are
             within
             the
             Skull
             ,
             must
             not
             be
             called
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             were
             absurd
             .
          
           
             To
             these
             Nerves
             are
             adjoyned
             two
             thick
             
             portions
             or
             processes
             called
             
               Processus
               Mammillares
            
             ,
             papillares
             :
             the
             Teat-like
             processes
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             in
             Number
             ,
             two
             ,
             
               white
               ,
               soft
               ,
               broad
               ,
               longish
               ,
            
             in
             men
             thin
             and
             sruall
             ,
             in
             Brutes
             greater
             ,
             especially
             in
             Dogs
             ,
             and
             other
             Creatures
             that
             have
             an
             exquisite
             Smell
             .
          
           
             For
             ,
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             these
             Processes
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             the
             true
             
             Organs
             of
             Smelling
             ▪
             and
             not
             the
             Nose
             nor
             its
             coat
             .
          
           
             These
             Processes
             are
             placed
             in
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             behinde
             the
             Colander-bone
             ,
             and
             to
             it
             being
             covered
             with
             the
             
               Dura
               Meniax
            
             they
             put
             a
             face
             .
             Through
             the
             Colander-bone
             the
             Odours
             ascend
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Second
               Pare
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             the
             first
             ,
             is
             the
             Optick
             or
             seeing
             pare
             ,
             because
             it
             carries
             the
             seeing
             Spirits
             to
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             or
             the
             representations
             of
             visible
             objects
             to
             the
             Brain
             ,
             but
             not
             humours
             from
             the
             Brain
             to
             the
             Eye
             to
             nourish
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             fiction
             of
             
               Caesalpinis
               .
               Hicro●hilus
            
             calls
             them
             
               poros
               opticos
            
             or
             meatus
             ,
             the
             optick
             pores
             or
             passages
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             thought
             to
             be
             hollow
             .
          
           
             These
             Nerves
             ,
             of
             all
             the
             ten
             pare
             ,
             are
             the
             greatest
             and
             thickest
             ,
             but
             softer
             than
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             
               They
               arise
            
             ,
             not
             as
             the
             
               common
               Opinion
            
             is
             ,
             
             from
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Brain
             ;
             for
             their
             original
             must
             be
             sought
             further
             ,
             towards
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             carried
             between
             the
             Brain
             ,
             and
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             arise
             out
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             first
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Medulla
             
             oblongata
             ,
             growing
             out
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
             But
             Riolanus
             demonstrates
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             turned
             round
             about
             those
             great
             Eminencies
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             which
             G●●●
             c●●s
             
               Thata●os
               nervorum
               opticorum
            
             ,
             which
             reach
             unto
             the
             foremore
             Ventricles
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             fetch
             optick
             spirits
             from
             thence
             .
          
           
             And
             having
             proceeded
             a
             while
             ,
             they
             are
             neer
             the
             middle
             way
             united
             above
             
             the
             saddle
             of
             
               Os
               Sphaeno●des
            
             ,
             not
             by
             a
             simple
             touch
             or
             intersection
             ,
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             but
             a
             total
             confusion
             and
             mingling
             of
             their
             Substances
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             suffer
             the
             less
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             a
             long
             passage
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             softness
             .
             
               Vesalius
               ,
               Aquapendens
            
             and
             Valverda
             have
             observed
             that
             they
             have
             somtimes
             continued
             divided
             ,
             in
             their
             whole
             Course
             .
             Vesalius
             also
             observed
             that
             in
             a
             Woman
             they
             were
             joyned
             only
             by
             mutual
             Contact
             ,
             whose
             right
             Eye
             had
             been
             withered
             from
             a
             Child
             ;
             because
             the
             right
             Nerve
             was
             smaller
             than
             the
             left
             ,
             beyond
             the
             Conjunction
             .
             But
             in
             most
             bodies
             the
             inner
             substance
             of
             the
             Nerves
             is
             confounded
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             observed
             by
             accurate
             Inquisition
             .
          
           
             The
             growing
             together
             of
             the
             optick
             nerves
             ,
             was
             therfore
             contrived
             by
             Nature
             ,
             either
             left
             the
             sensible
             object
             being
             received
             in
             by
             both
             Eyes
             should
             seem
             double
             ,
             or
             that
             the
             Visive
             spirit
             might
             ,
             if
             need
             were
             ,
             be
             all
             conveighed
             into
             one
             Eye
             which
             are
             the
             conjectures
             of
             Galen
             ,
             or
             finally
             for
             strength
             and
             stability
             here
             necessary
             ,
             least
             in
             Concussions
             of
             the
             Brain
             they
             might
             hap
             to
             be
             broken
             or
             distorted
             ,
             or
             least
             through
             the
             softness
             and
             moistness
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             optick
             Nerves
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             distillations
             and
             other
             Excrements
             they
             might
             become
             flaggie
             ,
             and
             so
             driven
             out
             of
             their
             right
             station
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             Plempius
             .
          
           
             Soon
             after
             being
             seperated
             they
             go
             out
             of
             the
             Skull
             into
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Eyes
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             but
             much
             lower
             in
             Beasts
             ,
             because
             they
             look
             more
             sidewaies
             .
          
           
             Within
             the
             Skull
             they
             are
             cloathed
             only
             with
             the
             
               Pia
               mater
            
             ;
             but
             from
             the
             holes
             ,
             which
             pass
             to
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             they
             are
             covered
             with
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             .
             Afterward
             it
             spreads
             the
             latter
             to
             the
             
               Sclirotica
               tunica
            
             ,
             the
             former
             to
             the
             
               Tunica
               choroïdes
            
             ,
             and
             its
             inner
             marrowy
             substance
             to
             the
             Retina
             .
          
           
             The
             
               third
               pare
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             the
             second
             ,
             is
             the
             
               motorium
               oculorum
            
             ,
             the
             Eye-mover
             ,
             next
             unto
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             This
             pare
             is
             thought
             by
             vulgar
             Anatomists
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             
             neer
             the
             original
             of
             the
             first
             pare
             .
             But
             it
             reaches
             to
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             goes
             beneath
             the
             Opticks
             cross-wise
             ,
             and
          
           
             Arises
             at
             the
             inmost
             part
             of
             the
             
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               medulla
               oblongata
            
             ,
             where
             in
             their
             Rise
             ,
             these
             two
             motive-nerves
             are
             so
             united
             as
             to
             touch
             one
             another
             ,
             yea
             to
             become
             one
             continued
             Body
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             ,
             that
             when
             one
             Eye
             moves
             ,
             the
             other
             is
             moved
             also
             .
          
           
             This
             Pare
             is
             lesser
             and
             harder
             than
             the
             former
             and
             stretched
             out
             by
             the
             visive
             
             pare
             ;
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Skull
             at
             other
             holes
             to
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Eyes
             and
             Ey-lids
             .
             It
             sometimes
             though
             seldom
             sends
             a
             branch
             to
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             ;
             and
             that
             is
             the
             Cause
             that
             the
             said
             Muscle
             being
             hurt
             ,
             the
             Eye
             is
             hurt
             ,
             and
             the
             Eye
             being
             hurt
             that
             is
             hurt
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Fourth
               ,
               Fift
            
             and
             Sixt
             pares
             are
             much
             confounded
             by
             Anatomists
             .
             For
             some
             make
             the
             fourth
             and
             fift
             Pare
             one
             ,
             and
             call
             it
             the
             third
             Pare
             ,
             consisting
             of
             two
             roots
             ;
             the
             lesser
             of
             which
             some
             do
             make
             the
             third
             pare
             ,
             and
             they
             themselves
             do
             make
             the
             fift
             and
             sixt
             pare
             one
             ,
             viz
             ,
             the
             fourth
             pare
             by
             them
             so
             called
             .
             But
             those
             who
             reckon
             it
             for
             one
             ,
             they
             count
             the
             fourth
             pare
             ,
             according
             to
             my
             reckoning
             ,
             for
             the
             lesser
             root
             of
             the
             third
             pares
             and
             the
             sixt
             pare
             for
             the
             fourth
             .
             whereas
             we
             distinguish
             all
             these
             pares
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fourth
               pare
            
             therefore
             ,
             which
             others
             as
             Bauhin●
             count
             the
             third
             ;
             others
             as
             Fallopius
             the
             eighth
             pare
             ;
             others
             badly
             ,
             the
             lesser
             root
             of
             the
             third
             pare
             :
             for
             it
             hath
             nothing
             common
             with
             the
             following
             pare
             ,
             is
             not
             joyned
             to
             it
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             Beginning
             or
             the
             Progress
             ,
             and
             grows
             out
             of
             the
             order
             of
             other
             pares
             ●
             according
             to
             some
          
           
             From
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             ;
             according
             to
             others
             it
             grows
             with
             a
             very
             small
             Nerve
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             lowest
             and
             hinder
             seat
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               Cerebri
            
             or
             marrow
             of
             the
             Brain
             :
             then
             it
             is
             carried
             forwards
             ,
             and
             fastned
             to
             the
             second
             pare
             ,
             it
             goes
             with
             it
             out
             at
             the
             common
             hole
             ,
             enters
             the
             socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             and
             sends
             one
             from
             it self
             branches
          
           
             Into
             the
             fat
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             the
             fift
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             peculiar
             hole
             of
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Fore-head
             ,
             it
             goes
             out
             to
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Fore-head
             ,
             and
             the
             upper
             Eye-lid
             .
             And
             these
             are
             furnished
             by
             its
             
               first
               branch
            
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             furnishes
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             upper
             Lip
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             and
             the
             Lip
             it self
             and
             Gums
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             by
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             serves
             the
             coat
             of
             the
             said
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             serves
             the
             inner
             part
             of
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             .
             All
             which
             branches
             Fallopius
             doth
             attribute
             to
             the
             two
             following
             Conjugations
             :
             but
             my
             distribution
             is
             propounded
             by
             
               Vesalius
               ,
               Columbus
               ,
               P●uerus
            
             ,
             and
             Bauhinus
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fift
               Pare
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             the
             thicker
             root
             of
             the
             third
             pare
             ;
             is
             commonly
             thought
             to
             furnish
             the
             Tongue
             with
             the
             sense
             of
             Tasting
             .
          
           
             This
             arises
             neer
             the
             following
             Conjugation
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             ,
             and
             presently
             after
             its
             passage
             through
             the
             
               Os
               sphenoïdes
            
             ,
             a
             writhen
             branch
             comes
             out
             like
             a
             tendrel
             of
             a
             Vine
             (
             which
             some
             think
             is
             done
             to
             make
             it
             harder
             )
             and
             is
             united
             with
             two
             little
             twigs
             of
             the
             auditory
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             It
             furnishes
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             the
             Temporal
             Muscle
             ,
             the
             chewing
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Cheeks
             ,
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             the
             Gums
             and
             Teeth
             (
             for
             by
             their
             means
             the
             Teeth
             have
             all
             the
             sense
             they
             have
             )
             the
             Muscle
             that
             lies
             concealed
             in
             the
             mouth
             and
             the
             lower
             Lip.
             
          
           
             The
             
               sixt
               pare
            
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             
               Quarta
               Conjugatio
            
             ,
             others
             the
             smaller
             root
             of
             the
             fourth
             Conjugation
             ,
          
           
             Hath
             a
             smaller
             Original
             ,
             next
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             somwhat
             harder
             than
             it
             .
          
           
             It
             goes
             through
             a
             common
             hole
             with
             
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             doth
             not
             therefore
             become
             one
             pare
             with
             the
             former
             :
             for
             the
             third
             ,
             fourth
             ,
             and
             seventh
             pare
             ,
             as
             I
             reckon
             them
             ,
             do
             also
             pass
             through
             one
             and
             the
             same
             hole
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             Palate
             .
             Others
             would
             have
             this
             pare
             also
             to
             serve
             the
             sense
             of
             Tasting
             .
          
           
             The
             
               seventh
               pare
            
             ,
             which
             others
             count
             the
             eighth
             ,
             others
             the
             ninth
             ,
             others
             the
             smaller
             portion
             of
             the
             fift
             pare
             ,
             when
             as
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             it
             is
             a
             peculiar
             pare
             smaller
             and
             harder
             than
             the
             fift
             ,
             also
             distinct
             therefrom
             in
             its
             original
             and
             progress
             :
          
           
             For
             it
             arises
             a
             little
             before
             the
             fift
             commonly
             so
             called
             ,
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             ,
             and
             going
             over
             the
             third
             pare
             ,
             and
             cutting
             the
             same
             ,
             it
             proceeds
             along
             between
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             pare
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             carried
             upwards
             and
             forewards
             ,
             towards
             the
             sides
             .
          
           
             It
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             hole
             with
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             pare
             ,
             and
             is
             commonly
             quite
             spent
             upon
             the
             
               Musculus
               abducen●
            
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
             But
             that
             is
             a
             question
             ,
             which
             others
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             temporal
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             into
             that
             which
             lies
             concealed
             in
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Eighth
               pare
            
             which
             others
             count
             the
             fift
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Auditorium
             ,
             the
             Hearing
             pare
             ,
             arises
             close
             by
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             only
             a
             little
             below
             .
             It
             enters
             the
             
               Os
               petrosum
            
             ,
             and
             is
             divid●d
             into
             the
             greater
             branch
             ,
             which
             being
             spred
             out
             ,
             they
             wil
             have
             to
             make
             the
             Drum
             ,
             and
             the
             lesser
             broad
             below
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             would
             accompany
             the
             sixt
             Conjugation
             .
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               ▪
               ●
               ▪
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               Original
               of
               the
               Nerves
               to
               be
               seen
               in
               the
               Brain
               turned
               underside
               upwards
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Smelling
                     Nerves
                     reckoned
                     by
                     our
                     Author
                     for
                     the
                     first
                     pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     bb
                     .
                     Their
                     mammillary
                     processes
                     ,
                     or
                     Teat-like
                     productions
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     optick
                     Nerves
                     cut
                     off
                     neer
                     the
                     Eye-holes
                     ;
                     the
                     second
                     pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Glandula
                     pituitaria
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Inf●ndibilum
                     or
                     Funnel
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ff
                     .
                     Two
                     white
                     kernels
                     set
                     before
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     Brain
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     greater
                     Branch
                     of
                     the
                     Carotick
                     Artery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Arteria
                     Cervicalis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     The
                     Beginning
                     of
                     the
                     spinal
                     marrow
                     within
                     the
                     Skul
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Kkk.
                     The
                     small
                     branches
                     of
                     the
                     Arteries
                     ,
                     which
                     others
                     call
                     the
                     Ret●
                     mirabile
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     Nerves
                     of
                     the
                     third
                     pare
                     according
                     to
                     our
                     Author
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     Beginnings
                     of
                     the
                     Nerves
                     of
                     the
                     fift
                     pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Nervi
                     Auditorij
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     eighth
                     pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Beginnings
                     of
                     the
                     ninth
                     Pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Rise
                     of
                     the
                     tenth
                     Pare
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cerebellum
                     or
                     Brainlet
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               326
            
          
           
             It
             sends
             branches
             through
             the
             first
             and
             
             second
             Vertebra
             to
             the
             proper
             Musces
             of
             the
             Larynx
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             picking
             our
             Ears
             too
             deep
             ,
             a
             dry
             Cough
             is
             caused
             .
             It
             is
             thought
             somtimes
             to
             send
             branches
             to
             the
             Arm
             ,
             with
             the
             fourth
             ,
             fift
             and
             sixt
             of
             the
             Arm
             ;
             and
             somtimes
             into
             the
             whole
             Foot
             ,
             with
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             after
             it
             hath
             accompanied
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             going
             downwards
             .
          
           
             The
             
               ninth
               pare
            
             which
             others
             call
             
               par
               sextum
            
             and
             vagum
             ,
             the
             fixt
             and
             roaming
             or
             wandring
             pare
             ;
             because
             it
             furnishes
             very
             many
             parts
             here
             and
             there
             ,
             yea
             and
             all
             the
             internal
             parts
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             and
             lower
             Bellies
             ,
             which
             receive
             branches
             for
             sense
             ,
             seeing
             they
             are
             soft
             bodies
             ,
             nor
             can
             away
             with
             the
             harder
             sort
             of
             Nerves
             springing
             from
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             .
             And
             because
             of
             the
             long
             way
             they
             go
             ,
             they
             are
             cloathed
             with
             strong
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             are
             carried
             united
             to
             the
             neighboring
             parts
             .
          
           
             This
             Pare
             arises
             a
             little
             beneath
             the
             foregoing
             ,
             sundry
             fibres
             being
             presently
             united
             .
          
           
             It
             goes
             out
             through
             the
             hole
             of
             the
             Occiput
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             
               Ramus
               major
               jugularis
               internae
            
             had
             ascended
             :
             and
             not
             fa●
             from
             its
             egress
             it
             provides
             for
             the
             Muscles
             seated
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             especially
             the
             Cucularis
             .
             Then
             the
             Trunk
             descends
             ,
             and
             is
             knit
             with
             the
             last
             pare
             ,
             the
             Carotick
             Artery
             ,
             and
             Jugular
             Vein
             ;
             and
             sends
             branches
             ath●art
             ,
             through
             the
             Membrane
             and
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             also
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Hyoides
             and
             the
             Fauces
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             the
             Tongue
             .
          
           
             Then
             descending
             between
             the
             Carotick
             and
             Jugularis
             ,
             to
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Wesand
             above
             the
             Jugulum
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             on
             each
             side
             into
             the
             exterior
             and
             interior
             branch
             .
          
           
             The
             Exterior
             constitutes
             the
             recurrent
             
             Nerves
             or
             vocal
             Nerves
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             they
             being
             wounded
             the
             living
             Creature
             looses
             ●●●
             voyce
             ;
             so
             that
             if
             one
             be
             cut
             asunder
             ,
             half
             the
             Voyce
             is
             los●
             ▪
             if
             both
             ,
             the
             animal
             becomes
             dumbe
             .
             they
             are
             also
             termed
             reversivi
             or
             recursivi
             ,
             running-back
             ;
             for
             first
             they
             descend
             ,
             and
             they
             turn
             afterwards
             back
             again
             as
             it
             were
             about
             an
             Axle-tree
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             the
             right
             about
             the
             
               Arteria
               axillaris
            
             ,
             the
             left
             about
             the
             descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Artery
             :
             and
             afterward
             they
             ascend
             as
             high
             as
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             give
             numerous
             branches
             ▪
             which
             recursion
             was
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             because
             th●
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Larynx
             have
             their
             Heads
             ,
             not
             above
             but
             beneath
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             the
             
               Exterior
               dexter
            
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             presently
             after
             the
             division
             ,
             furnishes
             the
             Muscles
             arising
             from
             the
             Breast-bone
             and
             Clavicula
             ;
             then
             the
             right
             Recurrent
             being
             constituted
             for
             the
             most
             part
             of
             three
             little
             twigs
             bended
             back
             and
             united
             ,
             it
             descends
             obliquely
             under
             the
             Jugulum
             ,
             and
             in
             its
             passage
             shoots
             out
             little
             branches
             for
             the
             Coat
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             the
             Pericardium
             and
             the
             Heart
             ;
             and
             then
             makes
             the
             right
             stomachic
             ,
             under
             the
             Gullet
             joyned
             to
             the
             lest
             ;
             and
             passing
             through
             the
             Septum
             ,
             it
             goes
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Stomach
             to
             the
             lest
             branch
             .
          
           
           
             The
             
               Exterior
               Sinister
            
             ,
             furnishing
             the
             Parts
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             constituting
             the
             left
             Recurrent
             ,
             it
             sends
             forth
             the
             
               Stomachicus
               ●sinister
               ▪
            
             which
             with
             its
             fellow
             compasses
             the
             orifice
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             the
             remainder
             goes
             to
             the
             Pylorus
             and
             hollow
             of
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Interior
               dexter
            
             first
             of
             all
             gives
             a
             Branch
             of
             it self
             ,
             at
             the
             roots
             of
             the
             ribs
             ,
             to
             every
             intercostal
             Nerve
             ;
             and
             then
             with
             the
             great
             Arterie
             it
             passes
             through
             the
             Septum
             ,
             and
             furnishes
             the
             whole
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             till
             it
             reach
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Os
             Sacrum
             .
             And
             then
             it
             goes
             into
             three
             Branches
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Goes
               to
               the
               Call
               ,
               from
               whence
               arise
               other
               three
               twigs
               ,
               1
               To
               the
               Colon
               ,
               
               hence
               after
               a
               long
               Colick
               comes
               hoarsness
               .
               2
               the
               smallest
               scarsely
               visible
               ,
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Guts
               .
               3
               To
               the
               right
               side
               of
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               the
               upper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Call
               ,
               the
               Coat
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               and
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               .
            
             
               II.
               The
               inferior
               to
               the
               right
               Kidney
               .
               Hence
               they
               assigne
               the
               cause
               
               of
               Vomiting
               ,
               in
               fits
               of
               the
               Stone
               in
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               III.
               The
               greatest
               to
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               Guts
               ,
               and
               right
               side
               of
               the
               Bladder
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               Interior
               sinister
            
             in
             its
             side
             is
             distributed
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             save
             that
             in
             stead
             of
             the
             Liver
             part
             thereof
             goes
             unto
             the
             Spleen
             .
             But
             from
             both
             the
             interiors
             ,
             sometimes
             Branches
             are
             sent
             unto
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             distribution
             of
             the
             sixt
             Pare
             according
             to
             the
             vulgar
             computation
             ,
             the
             Ninth
             according
             to
             my
             account
             .
          
           
             
               The
               II.
               TABLE
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               ▪
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               lower
               Branchings
               of
               the
               sixt
               pare
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               which
               our
               Author
               calls
               the
               Ninth
               others
               the
               wandring
               or
               roaming
               pare
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   
                     The
                     comeing
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Nerves
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Skull
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     externus
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Ramus
                     internus
                     on
                     both
                     sides
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     A
                     remarkable
                     Branch
                     spred
                     into
                     the
                     Tongue
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ee
                   .
                   
                     A
                     Branch
                     ariseing
                     from
                     the
                     same
                     on
                     each
                     side
                     ,
                     which
                     goes
                     to
                     the
                     Muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Larynx
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   
                     Another
                     twig
                     which
                     goes
                     with
                     the
                     former
                     to
                     the
                     Larynx
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   gg
                   .
                   
                     Twigs
                     ariseing
                     from
                     the
                     external
                     Branch
                     ,
                     and
                     propagated
                     to
                     the
                     Muscles
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   hh
                   .
                   
                     The
                     conjunction
                     externi
                     Rami
                     singularis
                     ,
                     with
                     Nerves
                     which
                     arise
                     from
                     the
                     plexus
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ii
                   .
                   
                     The
                     recurrent
                     Nerve
                     on
                     each
                     side
                     ▪
                  
                
                 
                   k.
                   
                     The
                     more
                     internal
                     Branch
                     ariseing
                     near
                     the
                     first
                     Rib
                     of
                     the
                     Chest
                     ,
                     which
                     bestows
                     the
                     twig
                     thus
                     X
                     marked
                     upon
                     the
                     Trunk
                     of
                     the
                     Wesand
                     ,
                     and
                     then
                     descending
                     ends
                     into
                     the
                     Pericardium
                     or
                     Heart-bag
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   l.
                   
                     A
                     little
                     Branch
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     recurrent
                     ,
                     which
                     descending
                     produceth
                     another
                     twig
                     out
                     of
                     it self
                     ,
                     and
                     goes
                     into
                     the
                     pericardium
                     ,
                     and
                     at
                     last
                     is
                     implanted
                     into
                     the
                     external
                     Branch
                  
                
                 
                   m.
                   
                     The
                     twig
                     arising
                     ,
                     as
                     was
                     said
                     ,
                     from
                     the
                     same
                     ,
                     and
                     diffused
                     into
                     the
                     pericardium
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   nn
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     twigs
                     arising
                     from
                     the
                     external
                     Branch
                     ,
                     the
                     one
                     of
                     which
                     is
                     implanted
                     into
                     the
                     Substance
                     of
                     the
                     Heart
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     other
                     tends
                     to
                     the
                     Beginnings
                     of
                     the
                     Vessells
                     ▪
                  
                
                 
                   o.
                   
                     The
                     aforesaid
                     Branch
                     implanted
                     into
                     the
                     pericardium
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   pppp
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Plexus
                     or
                     contexture
                     of
                     both
                     Branches
                     ,
                     viz.
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     and
                     left
                     ,
                     about
                     the
                     Gulles
                     ,
                     near
                     the
                     upper
                     Ori●●●●
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   qqqq
                   .
                   
                     Twigs
                     spred
                     abroad
                     into
                     the
                     Lungs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   rrrr
                   .
                   
                     Branches
                     propagated
                     into
                     the
                     upper
                     parts
                     ,
                     especially
                     of
                     the
                     Stomach
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ffff
                   .
                   
                     Four
                     remarkable
                     Branches
                     ,
                     which
                     descending
                     into
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     ,
                     are
                     spred
                     abroad
                     ●●
                     the
                     gu●●s
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   tt
                   .
                   
                     The
                     right
                     and
                     left
                     Nerve-twig
                     of
                     the
                     Kidneyes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   u.
                   
                     The
                     Nerv-twig
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   x.
                   
                     The
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               327
            
          
           
           
             The
             
               tenth
               and
               last
               pare
            
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             arising
             within
             the
             skul
             in
             the
             hind
             part
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Medulla
             oblongata
             when
             in
             is
             ready
             to
             slide
             into
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             is
             as
             others
             reckon
             the
             seventh
             pare
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             harder
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             it
             springs
             from
             divers
             roots
             afterwards
             united
             ,
             and
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Skul
             at
             a
             crooked
             hole
             propper
             to
             it self
             .
             And
             soon
             after
             it
             is
             with
             strong
             membranes
             joyned
             ,
             not
             mixed
             with
             the
             precedent
             pare
             ,
             for
             safe-gaurd
             sake
             .
             And
             then
             it
             is
             separated
             again
             ,
             and
             goes
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             it
             into
             the
             tongue
             ,
             and
             some
             small
             part
             into
             the
             Muscles
             of
             
               Os
               hyoïdes
            
             and
             the
             Larynx
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               III.
            
             Of
             the
             Nerves
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Nerves
             arising
             from
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             whole
             Arm.
             
          
           
             ANd
             so
             much
             for
             those
             ten
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             within
             the
             skul
             :
             the
             other
             pares
             do
             now
             follow
             ,
             which
             are
             thirty
             in
             number
             ,
             somtimes
             nine
             and
             twenty
             ,
             from
             the
             same
             beginning
             ,
             viz.
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             being
             passed
             out
             of
             the
             Skull
             into
             the
             Back-bone
             :
             where
             it
             is
             termed
             
               Medulla
               ▪
               spinalis
            
             or
             Dorsalis
             ,
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             Now
             the
             little
             Nerves
             proceed
             out
             of
             the
             holes
             of
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             in
             a
             continued
             course
             bending
             themselves
             inward
             ,
             from
             the
             uppermost
             to
             the
             lowermost
             .
          
           
             
               Out
               of
               the
               Marrow
            
             ,
             while
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Neck
             ,
             there
             arise
             
               seven
               pare
            
             of
             Nerves
             as
             some
             reckon
             ,
             eight
             pare
             as
             others
             count
             ,
             disseminated
             into
             the
             whole
             outward
             Head
             and
             the
             neighbouring
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               and
               second
            
             pare
             have
             this
             peculiar
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             that
             they
             proceed
             not
             from
             the
             sides
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             fore
             and
             hinder
             part
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             peculiar
             Articulation
             of
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             first
             pare
             arises
             between
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             .
             
               Joh.
               Leonicenus
            
             of
             Padua
             ,
             a
             dextrous
             Anatomist
             in
             taking
             out
             of
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             denied
             that
             there
             was
             any
             such
             pare
             as
             this
             ,
             because
             he
             could
             neither
             see
             it
             ,
             nor
             can
             ●●
             come
             out
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             having
             no
             hole
             ,
             and
             sticking
             closely
             to
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             and
             the
             Occiput
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             pare
             arises
             between
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Vertebra
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             in
             order
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             and
             second
             pare
             are
             disseminated
             into
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Ears
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             and
             fourth
             into
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cheeks
             ,
             also
             those
             which
             are
             common
             to
             the
             Head
             and
             Neck
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             with
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             fourth
             and
             sixt
             ,
             do
             make
             the
             remarkable
             midrif
             Nerves
             :
             and
             the
             fift
             with
             the
             foresaid
             ,
             sends
             a
             part
             backwards
             ,
             and
             a
             part
             forward
             into
             the
             Muscles
             bowing
             the
             Head
             ;
             those
             of
             the
             Arms
             ,
             Shoulderblades
             ,
             and
             the
             Skin
             there
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             to
             the
             Arms
             and
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             .
          
           
             The
             seventh
             is
             joyned
             with
             two
             of
             its
             Neighbours
             ,
             viz.
             the
             sixt
             of
             the
             Neck
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             whose
             greatest
             part
             goes
             to
             the
             Arms
             and
             as
             far
             as
             the
             Hands
             .
          
           
             For
             there
             are
             carried
             
               into
               the
               Arms
               five
            
             or
             six
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             viz.
             from
             the
             
               fift
               ,
               sixt
            
             ,
             and
             seventh
             pares
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             also
             from
             the
             first
             and
             second
             pares
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
             which
             when
             they
             first
             break
             forth
             ,
             they
             are
             all
             mixed
             and
             united
             ,
             nor
             are
             separated
             without
             dammage
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             they
             are
             severally
             divided
             into
             the
             foresaid
             Pares
             ;
             to
             the
             End
             haply
             ,
             that
             by
             that
             light
             concourse
             ,
             a
             collection
             might
             be
             made
             of
             animal
             spirits
             .
             Hence
             Topick
             Medicaments
             ,
             in
             a
             Palsie
             ,
             or
             Convulsion
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Arm
             being
             affected
             must
             be
             applied
             on
             the
             side
             of
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Back
             and
             the
             Neck
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Nerves
             proceed
             ,
             not
             directly
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             either
             of
             the
             Back
             or
             Neck
             ,
             unless
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             common
             beginning
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               Pare
            
             ,
             from
             the
             fift
             pare
             of
             the
             
             Neck
             ,
             goes
             chiefly
             into
             the
             Deltoides
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             leaving
             a
             part
             which
             accompanies
             the
             
               Vena
               humeraria
            
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             being
             thicker
             ,
             is
             carried
             through
             the
             Middle
             and
             Forepart
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             where
             it
             furnishes
             the
             
               Musculus
               biceps
            
             ,
             whereupon
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             third
             Nerve
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             going
             downwards
             ,
             it
             salutes
             the
             
               Supinator
               longior
            
             with
             a
             twig
             :
             but
             at
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             somtimes
             into
             Two
             ,
             otherwhites
             into
             three
             branches
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               The
               upper
               and
               lesser
               ,
               goes
               along
               the
               outside
               of
               the
               Arm
               ,
               to
               the
               outer
               part
               of
               the
               first
               or
               second
               Interjuncture
               of
               the
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               middle
               and
               thicker
               descends
               obliquely
               within
               the
               Cubit
               to
               the
               Wrist
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               lower
               ,
               being
               stretched
               along
               by
               the
               inner
               branch
               of
               the
               Basilica
               ,
               is
               spent
               into
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Cubit
               and
               Hand
               .
            
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             former
             ,
             under
             the
             Muscle
             Biceps
             ,
             it
             provides
             for
             the
             Brachiaeus
             and
             the
             inside
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             being
             the
             thickest
             ,
             goes
             along
             with
             the
             
               Vena
               profunda
            
             and
             the
             Artery
             ,
             Afterwards
             is
             variously
             divided
             .
             Now
             it
             furnishes
             the
             Muscles
             which
             extend
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             the
             fore
             and
             the
             middle
             Finger
             ,
             and
             the
             Muscles
             which
             stretch
             the
             Fingers
             out
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             stretcht
             along
             by
             the
             former
             ,
             between
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             which
             it
             furnishes
             descending
             through
             the
             lower
             and
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             Cubit
             (
             where
             when
             we
             strike
             against
             any
             thing
             or
             compress
             the
             Nerve
             ,
             we
             feel
             a
             nummedness
             in
             our
             fingers
             )
             in
             the
             middle
             thereof
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             .
          
           
             
               One
               branch
            
             goes
             externally
             through
             the
             Ulna
             to
             the
             Middle
             Finger
             ,
             Ring-finger
             ,
             and
             little
             Finger
             .
             On
             the
             Inside
             of
             the
             Fingers
             for
             securities
             sake
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             give
             place
             in
             laying
             hold
             of
             any
             thing
             ,
             for
             there
             Wounds
             are
             more
             pernicious
             than
             in
             the
             middle
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             goes
             inwardly
             through
             the
             Ulna
             betwixt
             the
             Finger-bending
             Muscles
             as
             far
             as
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             and
             sends
             branches
             to
             the
             same
             parts
             as
             the
             former
             sent
             to
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             is
             spent
             into
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             going
             betwixt
             the
             Skin
             and
             the
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               FIGURE
               presents
               the
               spinal
               Marrow
               and
               the
               Nerves
               derived
               therefrom
               to
               the
               Limbs
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     spinal
                     Marrow
                     ●e●r
                     the
                     Skull
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     bbbb
                     .
                     The
                     Boughs
                     orderly
                     propagated
                     from
                     the
                     Medulla
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ccc
                     .
                     The
                     Body
                     it self
                     of
                     the
                     Marrrow
                     ,
                     half
                     included
                     within
                     the
                     Vertebrae
                     ,
                     above
                     which
                     little
                     Veins
                     and
                     Arteries
                     spread
                     themselves
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     DDdd
                     .
                     Branches
                     arising
                     from
                     three
                     pare
                     of
                     Nerves
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     ,
                     and
                     two
                     of
                     the
                     Chest
                     ,
                     to
                     be
                     distributed
                     into
                     the
                     Hand
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Contexture
                     and
                     Commixion
                     of
                     those
                     Nerves
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ff
                     .
                     The
                     first
                     pare
                     of
                     Nerves
                     of
                     the
                     Hands
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     gg
                     .
                     The
                     second
                     Pare
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     hh
                     .
                     The
                     third
                     Pare
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ii
                     .
                     The
                     fourth
                     Pare
                     bigger
                     than
                     the
                     rest
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     kk
                     .
                     The
                     fift
                     pare
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     l.
                     The
                     sixt
                     pare
                     which
                     is
                     under
                     the
                     Skin
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Thigh
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     second
                     Nerve
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ooo
                     .
                     The
                     branch
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     Nerve
                     which
                     accompanies
                     the
                     Saphaena
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     third
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Thigh
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     fourth
                     Nerve
                     of
                     the
                     Thigh
                     ,
                     thickest
                     of
                     all
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     rr
                     .
                     The
                     Ramus
                     externus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ss
                     .
                     The
                     Ramus
                     internus
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               333
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             the
             Back
             and
             Loyns
             .
          
           
             FRom
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             Back
             arise
             
               twelve
               pare
            
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             reckon
             eleven
             all
             and
             every
             of
             which
             after
             thir
             ▪
             Egress
             are
             divided
             into
             the
             greater
             and
             lesser
             branches
             :
             the
             one
             of
             which
             is
             carried
             forward
             ,
             the
             other
             backward
             ,
             being
             bowed
             backwards
             .
          
           
             The
             foremore
             branches
             ,
             are
             sent
             into
             all
             the
             Intercostal
             spaces
             ,
             the
             internal
             and
             external
             ones
             (
             both
             which
             I
             have
             somtimes
             seen
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             )
             for
             the
             Muscles
             which
             lie
             upon
             the
             Chest
             ,
             also
             for
             the
             oblique
             descendent
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
          
           
             The
             hindermore
             and
             lesser
             branches
             go
             backwards
             to
             the
             spines
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             Muscles
             which
             grow
             to
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             are
             partly
             consumed
             ,
             and
             partly
             into
             those
             which
             grow
             from
             these
             points
             of
             the
             Spines
             ,
             as
             into
             the
             
               Rhomboides
               ,
               Cuculares
               ,
               &c.
            
             
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             spinal
             Marow
             when
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             there
             arise
             somtimes
             five
             ,
             somtimes
             four
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             :
             which
             pares
             are
             greater
             than
             those
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             And
             each
             of
             these
             is
             divided
             into
             the
             foremore
             and
             hinder
             branches
             ,
             which
             are
             disseminated
             ,
             partly
             into
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Loyns
             and
             Hypogastrium
             ,
             and
             partly
             into
             the
             Thighes
             .
             For
          
           
             
               1.
               
               This
               Pare
               gives
               a
               branch
               to
               the
               fleshy
               parts
               of
               the
               Midriff
               ;
               and
               then
               provides
               for
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Belly
               and
               Loyns
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               It
               affords
               branches
               to
               some
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thigh
               and
               Leg
               ,
               and
               as
               many
               suppose
               ,
               a
               branch
               to
               the
               Spermatick
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               It
               goes
               to
               the
               Knee
               and
               its
               Skin
               ,
               and
               part
               accompanies
               the
               Saphaena
               ,
               and
               part
               goes
               to
               the
               Muscles
               which
               rest
               upon
               the
               Loyns
               .
            
             
               
               4.
               
               Among
               the
               Lumbal
               ones
               ,
               it
               is
               the
               greatest
               ,
               proceeding
               to
               the
               fore
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thigh
               and
               Leg
               ,
               as
               far
               as
               to
               the
               Knee
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               I
               passes
               through
               the
               hole
               ,
               which
               is
               betwixt
               the
               Hip-bone
               ,
               the
               Share
               and
               Flank
               bones
               ,
               and
               bestows
               branches
               upon
               some
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thigh
               ,
               Yard
               ,
               neck
               of
               the
               Womb
               and
               Bladder
               .
            
          
           
             But
             the
             greatest
             branches
             go
             from
             these
             three
             parts
             ,
             unto
             the
             Thighs
             as
             shal
             be
             said
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Nerves
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             Marrow
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             whole
             Foot.
             
          
           
             OUt
             of
             the
             
               spinal
               Marrow
            
             contained
             in
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             there
             arises
             five
             pare
             of
             Nerves
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             reckon
             them
             six
             pare
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             four
             ,
             uppermost
             of
             which
             ,
             and
             the
             three
             lowest
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             arise
             the
             
               crural
               Nerves
            
             ,
             descending
             between
             the
             Feet
             ,
             which
             being
             in
             their
             Rise
             joyned
             like
             a
             little
             Net
             ,
             do
             soon
             after
             sprinkle
             three
             branches
             from
             themselves
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             said
             by
             and
             by
             touching
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             Feet
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             
               first
               par●
            
             of
             Nerves
             of
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ,
             is
             divided
             like
             the
             Lumbal
             Nerves
             ,
             into
             a
             foremore
             and
             hindermore
             branch
             .
             But
             the
             five
             following
             Pares
             otherwise
             .
             For
             before
             they
             go
             out
             ,
             they
             are
             on
             each
             side
             double
             ,
             and
             on
             each
             side
             one
             Nerve
             goes
             into
             the
             fore
             parts
             ,
             another
             into
             the
             hinder
             parts
             .
             The
             hindermore
             branches
             are
             dissminated
             like
             the
             hinder
             Lumbals
             ,
             viz
             ,
             into
             the
             hindermore
             neighbouring
             parts
             .
          
           
             The
             three
             foremore
             which
             are
             uppermost
             ,
             do
             go
             into
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             the
             two
             lower
             to
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Fundament
             and
             Bladder
             ;
             and
             some
             to
             the
             Interfoemineum
             and
             Scrotum
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Marrow
             of
             the
             
             Back
             ,
             doth
             produce
             
               only
               one
            
             branch
             out
             of
             it self
             which
             is
             therfore
             termed
             
               Sine
               pari
            
             ,
             without
             a
             Ma●e
             or
             fellow
             ;
             yet
             somtimes
             it
             hath
             a
             fellow
             .
             It
             spends
             it self
             into
             the
             Skin
             ,
             between
             the
             Buttocks
             and
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             and
             into
             certain
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             Now
             follow
             the
             
               Nerves
               which
               go
               into
               the
               Thigh
               ,
            
             which
             before
             were
             said
             to
             be
             four
             in
             number
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
               and
               third
            
             are
             shorter
             ,
             and
             reach
             only
             to
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             the
             second
             is
             longer
             ,
             and
             goes
             also
             to
             the
             Leg
             ,
             the
             fourth
             is
             longest
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             being
             made
             up
             of
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             pares
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ,
             descending
             to
             the
             small
             Trochanter
             ,
             spends
             it self
             into
             the
             Skin
             and
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             and
             is
             ended
             above
             the
             Knee
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             arising
             from
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             descends
             with
             the
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             to
             the
             Thigh
             through
             the
             Groyns
             ,
             it
             goes
             to
             the
             foremore
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             and
             is
             spread
             about
             the
             Knee
             .
             But
             it
             sends
             a
             remarkable
             branch
             inwardly
             with
             the
             Saphaena
             to
             the
             Ankle
             .
          
           
             The
             
               third
               arises
            
             in
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             fourth
             and
             fift
             Vertebra
             ,
             passes
             through
             the
             hole
             of
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             ,
             to
             some
             upper
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Yard
             ,
             arising
             out
             of
             the
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Thigh
             in
             the
             Groyn
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             the
             thickest
             ,
             longest
             ,
             hardest
             and
             driest
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             made
             up
             of
             four
             pare
             of
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ;
             it
             furnishes
             the
             Skin
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             and
             certain
             Muscles
             thereof
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             the
             Log
             and
             Foot.
             I
             have
             somtimes
             observed
             this
             to
             have
             a
             double
             rise
             ,
             and
             a
             double
             progress
             ,
             the
             one
             External
             the
             other
             Internal
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             same
             great
             Trunk
             under
             the
             Ham
             ,
             is
             divided
             into
             an
             external
             and
             an
             internal
             Branch
             .
          
           
             The
             external
             goes
             to
             the
             Ham
             ,
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             the
             
               Musculi
               peronaei
            
             ,
             and
             the
             outer
             Ankle
             .
          
           
             The
             Internal
             and
             greater
             goes
             along
             the
             Leg
             to
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Feet
             and
             Foes
             ;
             the
             inner
             Ankle
             ,
             the
             great
             Toe
             and
             sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             :
             and
             bestows
             two
             twigs
             upon
             each
             Toe
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Nerves
             therefore
             well-neer
             ,
             which
             go
             into
             the
             whole
             Leg
             and
             Foot
             ,
             do
             arise
             from
             the
             only
             greatest
             crural
             Nerve
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           Fourth
           and
           last
           Manual
           OF
           THE
           BONES
           And
           also
           of
           the
           Gristles
           and
           Ligaments
           Answering
           the
           FOURTH
           BOOK
           Of
           the
           Limbs
           .
        
         
           IN
           the
           last
           place
           ,
           I
           shall
           briefly
           (
           as
           I
           
           have
           done
           other
           things
           )
           explain
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Bones
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           last
           place
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           because
           when
           all
           things
           else
           are
           removed
           and
           separated
           ,
           then
           only
           the
           Bones
           come
           in
           view
           ,
           and
           are
           subject
           to
           examination
           .
           The
           most
           diligent
           Riolanus
           treats
           in
           two
           places
           of
           his
           Enchiridion
           ,
           of
           the
           Bones
           ,
           once
           as
           they
           appear
           in
           the
           dead
           Carkas
           ,
           when
           the
           Mūscles
           are
           cut
           off
           ,
           and
           again
           as
           they
           are
           dried
           in
           a
           Skeleton
           .
           But
           this
           Ostentation
           is
           superfluous
           in
           a
           compendium
           .
           For
           by
           the
           same
           reason
           we
           should
           make
           a
           new
           Anatomical
           discourse
           ,
           of
           the
           Veins
           ,
           Arteries
           ,
           Nerves
           ,
           Guts
           ,
           Stomach
           ,
           Womb
           ,
           and
           other
           Parts
           taken
           out
           ,
           and
           dried
           ,
           and
           commonly
           hung
           up
           for
           shew
           in
           the
           Anatmoical
           Theatres
           .
           There
           is
           no
           use
           of
           the
           latter
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Bones
           ,
           unless
           to
           help
           the
           Memory
           ,
           nor
           is
           it
           perfectly
           understood
           without
           the
           former
           .
           And
           therefore
           other
           Anatomists
           ,
           with
           the
           parts
           demonstrate
           the
           Bones
           lying
           beneath
           them
           ,
           in
           the
           dead
           body
           .
           I
           shal
           therefore
           only
           busie
           my self
           with
           the
           first
           ,
           and
           therewith
           .
        
         
           Joyn
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           Gristles
           and
           Ligaments
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           Because
           of
           the
           similitude
           of
           their
           substance
           :
           for
           these
           three
           similar
           
           parts
           are
           very
           neer
           of
           kin
           ,
           A
           Bone
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           and
           a
           Ligament
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           seem
           to
           differ
           only
           gradually
           in
           respect
           of
           more
           and
           less
           one
           from
           another
           .
           For
           a
           Bone
           is
           the
           hardest
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           a
           little
           softer
           ,
           yet
           so
           as
           that
           it
           may
           turn
           to
           a
           Bone
           ,
           as
           we
           see
           in
           the
           tender
           Bones
           of
           Infants
           ,
           which
           at
           first
           were
           gristy
           .
           A
           Ligament
           is
           yet
           softer
           than
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           which
           also
           it self
           somtimes
           turns
           to
           a
           Bone
           ,
           as
           in
           decrepit
           Persons
           .
           Hence
           many
           attribute
           the
           same
           matter
           to
           a
           Bone
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           a
           Ligament
           ,
           yea
           and
           a
           Tendon
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           Because
           of
           the
           Nearness
           of
           Place
           ;
           for
           a
           Bone
           ,
           a
           Gristle
           ,
           and
           a
           Ligament
           do
           for
           the
           most
           part
           accompany
           one
           another
           ,
           and
           are
           found
           joyned
           together
           .
           For
           the
           Bones
           are
           tied
           with
           the
           Ligaments
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           are
           tied
           ,
           they
           are
           covered
           about
           their
           Heads
           ,
           with
           a
           Gristly
           Crust
           or
           Cover
           .
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               I.
            
             Of
             the
             Bones
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Nature
             of
             the
             Bones
             is
             easily
             known
             ,
             if
             we
             shal
             but
             orderly
             propound
             their
             Causes
             and
             Accident●
             or
             Adjuncts
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ma●●●
               out
               of
               which
            
             the
             Bones
             are
             bred
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             ,
             is
             an
             earthy
             Excrement
             ,
             with
             Fat
             and
             Moisture
             added
             thereto
             .
             Aristotle
             also
             calls
             it
             
               Excrementum
               seminale
            
             ,
             an
             excrement
             of
             the
             Seed
             .
             Galen
             saies
             it
             is
             the
             thicker
             and
             harder
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             dried
             .
          
           
             Now
             some
             Bones
             are
             perfectly
             generated
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             as
             those
             in
             the
             Ear
             which
             serve
             the
             Sense
             of
             Hearing
             ,
             being
             the
             smallest
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             ;
             others
             imperfectly
             ,
             as
             the
             Teeth
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             in
             which
             at
             first
             somwhat
             is
             wanting
             ▪
             either
             a
             process
             ,
             o●
             an
             Appendix
             ,
             &c.
             ▪
          
           
           
             Moreover
             ,
             all
             other
             Bones
             save
             the
             Teeth
             have
             a
             certain
             determination
             of
             their
             growth
             :
             but
             the
             Teeth
             grow
             continually
             ,
             for
             if
             one
             Tooth
             be
             removed
             ,
             that
             just
             against
             it
             grows
             longer
             :
             which
             Nature
             therefore
             ordained
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             alwaies
             wearing
             through
             grinding
             and
             chewing
             the
             Meat
             .
          
           
             
               Their
               remote
               nutritive
               Matter
            
             ,
             is
             thought
             to
             be
             the
             thicker
             and
             more
             earthy
             part
             of
             
             the
             Blood
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             as
             it
             were
             excrementitious
             ,
             flowing
             in
             through
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             where
             in
             the
             Caverns
             of
             the
             Bones
             it
             may
             be
             digested
             ,
             for
             Platerus
             denies
             that
             the
             Bones
             have
             Arteries
             ,
             wherein
             Spigelius
             contradicts
             him
             :
             if
             there
             be
             Veins
             ,
             there
             will
             doubtless
             be
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             inconspicuous
             to
             the
             sight
             as
             the
             Veins
             are
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Bones
             of
             Animals
             newly
             brought
             forth
             ,
             the
             Marrow
             is
             as
             yet
             bloody
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Immediate
               nutritive
               Matter
            
             of
             the
             hollowed
             Bones
             ,
             according
             to
             Hippocrates
             and
             Galen
             ,
             is
             the
             Marrow
             contained
             in
             the
             said
             Bones
             (
             who
             are
             contradicted
             by
             Aristotle
             and
             other
             Peripetaticks
             ,
             who
             will
             have
             the
             Marrow
             to
             be
             rather
             the
             excrement
             of
             the
             Bones
             )
             as
             in
             Gristles
             that
             same
             snotty
             matter
             which
             lies
             round
             about
             them
             ,
             is
             their
             immediate
             nutritive
             Matter
             ;
             and
             in
             Ligaments
             ,
             Membranes
             and
             Nerves
             ,
             that
             same
             clammy
             humor
             shed
             in
             amongst
             them
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             
               solid
               Bones
            
             not
             hollowed
             ,
             the
             immediate
             Nutritive
             matter
             ,
             is
             thick
             Blood
             sent
             in
             through
             the
             pores
             ;
             because
             1.
             
             Being
             broken
             they
             are
             joyned
             with
             a
             Callus
             ,
             bred
             of
             the
             Remainders
             of
             the
             alimentary
             Blood.
             2.
             
             They
             are
             liable
             to
             Imposthumation
             in
             their
             Substance
             ,
             the
             superfluities
             of
             the
             nourishment
             putrifying
             in
             the
             pores
             .
             Hofman
             allows
             that
             they
             are
             nourished
             with
             Blood
             contained
             in
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Marrow
             serves
             the
             Blood
             ,
             by
             carrying
             the
             solid
             part
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             is
             the
             
               Vis
               o●●ifica
            
             ,
             or
             Bone-making
             faculty
             ,
             or
             the
             innate
             faculty
             ,
             acting
             by
             the
             Assistance
             of
             Heat
             .
          
           
             The
             Form
             of
             a
             Bone
             is
             the
             Soul
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             whole
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             next
             place
             the
             
               ratiō
               formalis
            
             whereby
             a
             Bone
             is
             a
             Bone
             and
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             2.
             
               de
               Gen.
               Anim.
               cap.
            
             1.
             
             And
             therefore
             the
             Bones
             of
             dead
             persons
             are
             not
             properly
             but
             equivocally
             Bones
             .
             The
             Accidents
             or
             Adjuncts
             of
             Bones
             ,
             are
             their
             sundry
             Figures
             ,
             Solidity
             ,
             Strength
             ,
             &c.
             of
             which
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             or
             Use
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             is
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               be
               the
               Foundations
               and
               Supporters
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               ,
               like
               Pillars
               or
               Foundations
               in
               Houses
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               be
               as
               a
               Safeguard
               for
               some
               parts
               ,
               as
               the
               Skull
               saveguards
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               serve
               for
               going
               ,
               as
               is
               apparent
               in
               the
               Thighes
               and
               Legs
               .
               and
               therefore
               Serpents
               ,
               
               Worms
               and
               other
               Creepers
               ,
               which
               have
               no
               Legs
               ,
               cannot
               go
               ,
               but
               are
               forced
               to
               crawl
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               There
               are
               some
               private
               uses
               of
               divers
               Bones
               ,
               of
               which
               in
               the
               special
               History
               of
               Bones
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Certain
               Medicinal
               Uses
               there
               are
               of
               Bones
               .
               Their
               Pouder
               cures
               a
               Cancer
               ,
               Fevers
               ,
               any
               Fluxes
               .
               Their
               Oyl
               is
               good
               for
               the
               Gout
               ,
               the
               Magistery
               of
               a
               Mans
               Skull
               is
               good
               against
               the
               Falling-sickness
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               triangular
               Bones
               of
               the
               Occiput
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             The
             Situation
             of
             the
             Bones
             is
             deep
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             the
             Foundations
             and
             Upholders
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             They
             vary
             in
             Magnitude
             according
             to
             the
             variety
             of
             their
             Utilities
             .
             Great
             are
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             Thigh
             ,
             Arm
             ,
             Shoulder
             ,
             &c.
             
             Small
             those
             of
             the
             Ear
             serving
             for
             Hearing
             ,
             the
             Sesamoidean
             Bones
             ,
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             the
             Wrist-bones
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             They
             are
             many
             in
             number
             and
             not
             one
             only
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             variety
             
             of
             motions
             ;
             and
             lest
             that
             one
             being
             hurt
             ,
             all
             should
             be
             hurt
             .
          
           
             Now
             a
             monstrous
             thing
             it
             is
             for
             a
             Child
             to
             be
             born
             without
             Bones
             ,
             such
             an
             one
             as
             Hippocrates
             speaks
             of
             ,
             being
             a
             Boy
             ,
             four
             fingers
             big
             ,
             but
             not
             long-liv'd
             the
             like
             to
             which
             Forestus
             also
             saw
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             all
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             is
             not
             the
             same
             in
             all
             Persons
             .
             For
             in
             Children
             they
             are
             more
             ,
             which
             by
             degrees
             grow
             together
             and
             become
             fewer
             .
             Others
             may
             number
             the
             Epiphysis
             by
             themselves
             as
             distinct
             Bones
             ,
             and
             so
             make
             a
             mighty
             number
             .
             Others
             may
             omit
             the
             Sesamoidean
             and
             other
             small
             Bones
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             are
             seldom
             found
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Carotick
             Arteries
             :
             and
             so
             doth
             Archangelus
             who
             reckons
             but
             two
             hundred
             forty
             nine
             :
             others
             make
             commonly
             three
             hundred
             and
             four
             .
             Others
             as
             many
             as
             there
             are
             daies
             in
             the
             year
             .
          
           
             They
             vary
             in
             Figure
             some
             are
             round
             ,
             others
             flat
             ,
             some
             sharp
             ,
             others
             blunt
             ,
             &c.
             as
             shal
             be
             shewed
             when
             we
             come
             to
             speak
             severally
             of
             the
             particulars
             .
          
           
             The
             Colour
             in
             such
             as
             are
             naturally
             constituted
             ,
             is
             white
             ,
             mixt
             with
             a
             very
             little
             red
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             all
             of
             them
             externally
             inclosed
             (
             not
             internally
             )
             with
             the
             Periostium
             ,
             excepting
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             sesamoidean
             Bones
             ,
             and
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             other
             Bones
             where
             they
             are
             mutually
             joyned
             one
             to
             another
             .
             And
             the
             Periostium
             is
             exquisitely
             sensible
             :
             
             but
             the
             Bones
             themselves
             want
             the
             sense
             of
             Feeling
             ,
             excepting
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             to
             whom
             we
             may
             attribute
             some
             Sense
             ,
             seeing
             they
             feel
             exceeding
             cold
             Air
             or
             Water
             ,
             yea
             with
             their
             Ends
             :
             especially
             when
             the
             Teeth
             are
             on
             Edge
             ,
             before
             it
             reach
             to
             the
             little
             Membranes
             and
             Nerves
             ,
             by
             help
             wherof
             they
             are
             thought
             to
             Feel
             .
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             of
             the
             Bones
             is
             various
             .
             But
             the
             mutual
             and
             artificial
             hanging
             together
             of
             all
             the
             Bones
             is
             by
             the
             Greeks
             cal'd
             Skeleton
             ,
             as
             if
             you
             would
             say
             a
             dried
             Carcass
             from
             Skellein
             to
             drie
             .
             Being
             compacted
             partly
             with
             the
             natural
             Ligaments
             dried
             with
             the
             Bones
             ,
             &
             partly
             with
             artificial
             ones
             ,
             somtimes
             bolt
             upright
             ,
             otherwhiles
             in
             the
             posture
             of
             sitting
             ;
             which
             doth
             not
             properly
             belong
             to
             Anatomy
             ,
             but
             the
             other
             Natural
             Osteology
             ,
             framed
             by
             Nature
             ,
             and
             adorned
             with
             its
             own
             moist
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             natural
             Cohaerence
             or
             Connexion
             ,
             according
             to
             Galen
             ,
             is
             made
             either
             
               Cat
               '
               árthron
            
             by
             way
             of
             Joynting
             ;
             or
             
               catà
               sumphusin
            
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             growing
             together
             .
          
           
             He
             makes
             Arthron
             a
             Joynt
             to
             be
             double
             ;
             viz.
             Diarthrosis
             or
             by
             way
             of
             Diarticulation
             or
             joynting
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             
               Enárthrosis
               ,
               Arthrodia
            
             and
             Gigglumos
             :
             or
             Sunarthrosis
             ,
             such
             as
             he
             reckons
             
               Suture
               ,
               Harmonie
            
             and
             Gomphosis
          
           
             Moreover
             Symphysis
             or
             growing
             together
             ,
             is
             said
             to
             be
             with
             or
             without
             a
             Medium
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             shall
             thus
             divide
             the
             Connexions
             of
             the
             Bones
             .
          
           
             The
             Bones
             are
             fastned
             together
             either
             by
             Articulation
             or
             Joynting
             ;
             or
             by
             Symphysis
             or
             growing
             together
             .
          
           
             Articulation
             or
             Joynting
             is
             with
             motion
             ,
             and
             that
             either
             obscure
             (
             which
             others
             cal
             neuter
             or
             doubtful
             Articulation
             )
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Ribs
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             also
             of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Wrist
             and
             Pedium
             ;
             or
             evident
             loose
             and
             manifest
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             called
          
           
             Diarthrosis
             ,
             of
             which
             there
             are
             three
             sorts
             :
          
           
             
               I.
               Enarthrosis
               Inarticulation
               ,
               which
               is
               when
               there
               is
               a
               great
               quantity
               both
               of
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Bone
               receiving
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Bone
               which
               is
               received
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Thigh
               with
               the
               Huckle-bone
               .
            
             
               II.
               Arthrodia
               ,
               is
               where
               the
               Cavity
               receiving
               is
               superficial
               ,
               and
               the
               Head
               received
               flat
               :
               as
               is
               that
               of
               the
               lower
               Jaw
               with
               the
               Bone
               of
               the
               Temples
               .
            
             
               III.
               Gigglumos
               ,
               when
               the
               same
               Bone
               both
               receives
               ,
               so
               that
               contiguous
               bones
               do
               mutually
               enter
               one
               into
               another
               .
               And
               it
               is
               done
               three
               manner
               of
               waies
               :
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   When
                   the
                   same
                   bone
                   is
                   received
                   by
                   one
                   bone
                   which
                   receives
                   the
                   same
                   again
                   mutually
                   ;
                   as
                   we
                   see
                   in
                   the
                   Articulation
                   of
                   the
                   Shoulder-bone
                   with
                   the
                   Cubit
                   .
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   When
                   one
                   bone
                   receives
                   and
                   is
                   received
                   of
                   another
                   ,
                   as
                   in
                   the
                   Vertebrae
                   .
                   For
                   the
                   Vertebra
                   being
                   placed
                   in
                   the
                   middle
                   ,
                   receives
                   the
                   upper
                   and
                   is
                   received
                   by
                   the
                   lower
                   .
                
                 
                   
                   3.
                   
                   In
                   manner
                   of
                   a
                   wheel
                   ,
                   as
                   that
                   of
                   the
                   second
                   Vertebra
                   of
                   the
                   Neck
                   with
                   the
                   first
                   ;
                   where
                   upon
                   the
                   Axel-tree
                   as
                   it
                   were
                   of
                   one
                   Vertebra
                   ,
                   another
                   is
                   turned
                   and
                   wheeled
                   about
                   ,
                
              
            
          
           
             By
             Sumphusis
             or
             growing
             together
             ,
             Bones
             are
             fastned
             ,
             when
             the
             Connexion
             is
             without
             motion
             ,
             and
             two
             Bones
             do
             only
             touch
             one
             another
             ,
             or
             approach
             mutually
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             growing
             together
             is
             either
             without
             a
             medium
             or
             with
             it
             .
          
           
             
               Without
               a
               Medium
            
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Rhaphé
               a
               Suture
               as
               in
               the
               Skul
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Harmonia
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               joyning
               of
               Bones
               by
               a
               single
               Line
               ,
               streight
               ,
               oblique
               ,
               or
               circular
               :
               as
               in
               bones
               of
               the
               upper
               Jaw
               and
               the
               Nose
               .
               And
               so
               all
               Epiphyses
               in
               a
               manner
               are
               joyned
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Gomphosis
               that
               is
               to
               say
               Nailing
               ,
               when
               one
               Bone
               is
               fastned
               into
               another
               as
               a
               Nail
               in
               a
               Post
               ,
               as
               the
               Teeth
               in
               the
               Jaw-bones
               .
            
          
           
             These
             three
             sorts
             Galen
             and
             others
             following
             him
             ,
             have
             comprehended
             under
             Synarthrosis
             as
             the
             Genus
             or
             kind
             .
             But
             they
             are
             out
             :
             because
             Bones
             thus
             joyned
             have
             no
             motion
             ▪
             yet
             peradventure
             they
             may
             some
             waies
             pertain
             to
             Synarthrosis
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             firmness
             they
             afford
             to
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             .
          
           
             
               With
               a
               Medium
            
             there
             is
             also
             a
             threefold
             growing
             together
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             threefold
             body
             coming
             between
             as
             the
             Medium
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               A
               Gristle
               and
               the
               conjunction
               is
               called
               Sunchondrosis
               .
               as
               in
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               lower
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               the
               Share-bones
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               A
               Ligament
               and
               it
               is
               termed
               Sunneurosis
               ,
               as
               is
               seen
               in
               the
               Union
               of
               the
               Huckle-bone
               with
               the
               Thigh
               bone
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Flesh
               or
               a
               Muscle
               ,
               and
               it
               is
               called
               Sussarcosis
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 hyoides
              
               with
               the
               Scapula
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Bones
             is
             hard
             ,
             but
             not
             with
             driness
             in
             an
             healthy
             State
             ,
             but
             with
             a
             shining
             fattiness
             .
             to
             which
             others
             joyn
             an
             acid
             or
             sharp
             spirit
             and
             a
             volatil
             Salt
             ,
             in
             which
             regard
             they
             easily
             take
             fire
             and
             are
             burnt
             instead
             of
             Wood
             ,
             as
             the
             Rogus
             of
             the
             Romans
             or
             their
             Funeral-fires
             did
             witness
             [
             
               and
               our
               English
               Bonefires
            
             ,
             for
             anciently
             (
             and
             yet
             in
             the
             
             North
             )
             they
             kept
             their
             Bones
             of
             Beef
             &c.
             til
             an
             occasion
             of
             Triumph
             ,
             and
             then
             brought
             them
             out
             for
             joy
             to
             make
             Bone-fires
             ]
             otherwise
             they
             would
             easily
             be
             broken
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             calcined
             Bones
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             old
             Woman
             ,
             whose
             Members
             would
             break
             at
             the
             least
             touch
             ,
             as
             
               Nic.
               Fontanus
            
             relates
             in
             his
             Observations
             .
             And
             Galen
             tels
             of
             some
             bones
             that
             would
             turn
             to
             Sand
             and
             Dust
             ,
             like
             rotten
             wood
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             effect
             of
             driness
             .
          
           
             The
             Less
             this
             Hardness
             of
             the
             Bones
             is
             ,
             the
             better
             do
             broken
             bones
             grow
             together
             and
             unite
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             Persons
             that
             are
             come
             to
             years
             ,
             they
             do
             not
             truly
             grow
             together
             ,
             nor
             are
             regenerated
             ,
             but
             are
             as
             it
             were
             glewed
             together
             ,
             by
             the
             coming
             between
             of
             another
             substance
             like
             Glue
             ,
             which
             they
             term
             
               Callus
               .
               Galen
            
             cals
             it
             Porus.
             Now
             a
             Callus
             somtimes
             happens
             beside
             the
             Intent
             of
             Nature
             ,
             through
             overgreat
             plenty
             of
             Aliment
             and
             bad
             Nutrition
             :
             viz.
             when
             by
             a
             boney
             callus
             ,
             the
             three
             upper
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Neck
             are
             so
             glewed
             together
             as
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             but
             one
             bone
             :
             or
             when
             the
             first
             Vetebra
             is
             glewed
             to
             the
             Skul
             ;
             and
             such
             persons
             cannot
             express
             their
             consent
             or
             dissent
             ,
             by
             moving
             their
             Head
             forwards
             or
             backwards
             as
             the
             manner
             is
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             a
             greater
             hardness
             in
             some
             Bones
             than
             in
             others
             ,
             as
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             other
             Bones
             are
             softer
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Spongiosum
            
             ,
             the
             last
             bones
             of
             the
             Fingers
             &c.
             
             
               Fernelius
               ,
               Ruellius
               ,
               Hollerius
            
             have
             found
             all
             the
             bones
             so
             preternaturally
             soft
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             bowed
             like
             Wax
             ,
             and
             that
             chiefly
             by
             the
             venereal
             Pox
             ,
             witness
             
               M.
               Donatus
            
             .
             The
             
               Cartilago
               insiformis
            
             proves
             somtimes
             so
             soft
             and
             flaggie
             ,
             that
             it
             falls
             ,
             of
             which
             see
             Codronchius
             .
          
           
             The
             
               parts
               of
               the
               Bones
            
             are
             solid
             or
             Hollow
             ,
             yet
             Plinie
             tels
             us
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             some
             that
             lived
             whose
             bones
             were
             solid
             ,
             without
             any
             hollowness
             ,
             who
             are
             by
             him
             called
             Cornei
             ,
             and
             that
             such
             persons
             are
             known
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             never
             sweat
             nor
             thirst
             .
             which
             Salinus
             avouches
             of
             one
             Lyddanus
             a
             Syracusian
             .
             But
             both
             these
             Authors
             can
             somtimes
             drop
             leasings
             .
          
           
             The
             Cavities
             are
             either
             within
             where
             the
             Marrow
             is
             ,
             which
             cavities
             nevertheless
             are
             not
             every
             where
             conspicuous
             ;
             or
             without
             at
             the
             joyntings
             ;
             which
             hollownesses
             if
             they
             are
             deep
             ,
             they
             are
             called
             Cotúlai
             or
             Cotulides
             (
             not
             co●ul●dones
             )
             also
             Acetabula
             ,
             Sawcers
             .
             Cotyle
             was
             among
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             a
             measure
             of
             Liquors
             ,
             containing
             as
             much
             as
             their
             Hemina
             ;
             also
             a
             kind
             of
             Drinking
             Cup
             ,
             as
             some
             suppose
             If
             the
             Cavities
             are
             shallow
             ,
             they
             are
             called
             Glênai
             and
             Glenoeideîs
             from
             the
             form
             of
             the
             Eyes
             hollowness
             when
             the
             Eye-lids
             are
             shut
             .
          
           
             The
             solid
             parts
             of
             the
             Bones
             are
             three
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             and
             principal
             is
             called
             Os
             ,
             and
             is
             the
             hardest
             part
             ,
             seated
             commonly
             in
             the
             middle
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             by
             the
             Greeks
             called
             Apophysis
             ,
             also
             they
             term
             it
             Probolen
             and
             Ecph●se●in
             &c.
             the
             Latines
             call
             it
             
               Processus
               ,
               Productio
               ,
               Projectura
               ,
               Extuberantia
               &c.
               
            
             It
             is
             a
             part
             of
             a
             bone
             ,
             not
             only
             touching
             as
             Epiphusis
             ,
             but
             continued
             bunching
             out
             beyond
             the
             plain
             surface
             of
             the
             Bone
             :
             such
             as
             many
             are
             in
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             also
             in
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             chief
             Use
             is
             for
             the
             original
             and
             Insertion
             of
             parts
             ,
             as
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             Epiphusis
             ,
             or
             
               Appendix
               ,
               Adnascentia
               ,
               Additamentum
            
             ;
             being
             a
             bone
             growing
             upon
             a
             bone
             ,
             by
             a
             simple
             and
             immediate
             Contact
             ,
             though
             not
             with
             so
             very
             plain
             a
             Surface
             ,
             but
             a
             little
             mutual
             Ingress
             of
             Heads
             and
             Hollows
             ,
             like
             Ginglumus
             ,
             though
             without
             motion
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Epiphyses
             is
             rare
             and
             loose
             ,
             being
             at
             first
             for
             the
             most
             part
             gristly
             ;
             but
             in
             persons
             grown
             to
             years
             ,
             it
             is
             hardned
             ,
             and
             turns
             to
             a
             bone
             :
             yea
             in
             elderly
             persons
             ,
             the
             Epiphysis
             is
             so
             united
             to
             the
             bone
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             but
             one
             contined
             bone
             ,
          
           
             At
             the
             Ends
             of
             the
             Epiphysis
             a
             Gristle
             is
             placed
             .
          
           
             But
             all
             Bones
             have
             not
             these
             Epiphuses
             growing
             to
             them
             :
             yet
             there
             are
             divers
             of
             them
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             on
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tibia
             and
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             viz.
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             at
             the
             Tree
             and
             Foot
             &c.
             
             Also
             the
             Tooth
             of
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             ,
             the
             
               Rotator
               magnus
            
             ,
             the
             
               Appendices
               Styloydes
            
             ,
             are
             Epiphyses
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             Eppiphyses
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               In
               soft
               bones
               they
               are
               instead
               of
               covers
               ,
               that
               the
               Marrow
               may
               not
               run
               out
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               They
               serve
               for
               firmness
               ,
               for
               that
               Basis
               is
               most
               firm
               which
               is
               broadest
               and
               largest
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               from
               them
               Ligaments
               may
               arise
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               According
               to
               Pavius
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               be
               as
               it
               were
               an
               intermediate
               matter
               ,
               to
               be
               inserted
               betwixt
               a
               bone
               and
               Ligaments
               ,
               as
               the
               Membranes
               betwixt
               the
               Brain
               and
               Skull
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Apophysis
             are
             in
             some
             places
             called
             Capita
             Heads
             ;
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             Cervices
             Necks
             ;
             in
             other
             places
             Tubercula
             bunches
             ;
             in
             some
             place
             Spina
             thorns
             ;
             in
             other
             places
             Mucrones
             sharp
             points
             .
             But
             the
             parts
             which
             at
             the
             round
             of
             the
             Cavities
             ,
             stick
             out
             and
             hang
             over
             like
             Lips
             ,
             are
             called
             Supercilia
             Brows
             ,
             and
             Labra
             Lips.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               II.
            
             Of
             Gristles
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             GRistles
             next
             to
             Bones
             are
             the
             hardest
             similar
             parts
             ▪
             and
             almost
             just
             of
             the
             same
             Nature
             with
             Bones
             ,
             for
             such
             Beasts
             as
             have
             no
             Bones
             ,
             have
             Gristles
             instead
             of
             Bones
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             But
             they
             differ
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             softer
             than
             Bones
             ,
             though
             harder
             than
             Ligaments
             :
             and
             though
             very
             many
             Gristles
             are
             in
             process
             of
             time
             turn'd
             into
             Bones
             [
             as
             
               Cardan
               ▪
            
             
             shews
             by
             the
             example
             of
             a
             Thief
             of
             Milaine
             ,
             whose
             wesand
             was
             become
             boney
             .
             Also
             many
             Sceletons
             of
             my
             Kinsman
             
               Henry
               Fuirenus
            
             declare
             ,
             that
             the
             Cartilago
             scutiformis
             ,
             or
             sheid-fashion'd
             Gristle
             ,
             is
             changed
             into
             the
             hard
             substance
             of
             a
             Bone
             ,
             which
             I
             also
             have
             observed
             in
             Dissections
             ]
             yet
             all
             Gristles
             are
             not
             so
             ,
             as
             the
             Ensiformis
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Share
             ,
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             and
             Ears
             :
             which
             nevertheless
             somtime
             ,
             in
             aged
             persons
             are
             turned
             into
             Bones
             .
             Moreover
             a
             Gristle
             hath
             no
             Marrow
             ,
             no
             Cavities
             nor
             Caverns
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             is
             the
             
               Gristl-making
               power
            
             or
             faculty
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             is
             the
             same
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             from
             wich
             he
             wil
             have
             them
             to
             differ
             only
             gradually
             .
             According
             to
             Galen
             it
             is
             an
             earthy
             but
             withall
             moist
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             ,
             partly
             clammy
             and
             glewish
             ,
             partly
             fat
             :
             but
             more
             clammy
             than
             fat
             .
          
           
             Its
             Use
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Is
               principally
               to
               render
               motion
               more
               easie
               and
               lasting
               in
               the
               Joynts
               ,
               whiles
               it
               anoynts
               the
               parts
               of
               the
               Bones
               ,
               least
               by
               mutual
               rubbing
               one
               against
               another
               ,
               they
               should
               wear
               and
               fret
               .
               Hence
               in
               some
               Joynts
               are
               found
               Gristles
               which
               crustover
               two
               bones
               joyned
               together
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               defend
               the
               parts
               from
               external
               injuries
               .
               For
               they
               are
               not
               easily
               bruised
               and
               broken
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               hard
               and
               not
               friable
               ,
               nor
               are
               they
               easily
               cut
               and
               squeezed
               as
               the
               soft
               and
               fleshy
               parts
               .
               Hence
               the
               extream
               parts
               of
               the
               Nose
               are
               gristly
               .
               Hence
               Gristles
               are
               joyned
               to
               the
               Breast-bone
               and
               Ribs
               ,
               to
               defend
               the
               Heart
               and
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               the
               Gristle
               Ensiformis
               ,
               to
               defend
               the
               Midriff
               and
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               make
               such
               a
               Connexion
               of
               the
               Bones
               as
               is
               termed
               Sunchondrosis
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               To
               shape
               parts
               prominent
               or
               hollow
               ;
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               Ears
               ,
               Larynx
               and
               Wesand
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               To
               fill
               up
               hollownesses
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               Joynts
               ,
               as
               is
               seen
               in
               the
               Knee
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               To
               serve
               for
               a
               cover
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Epiglottis
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               To
               be
               as
               an
               underpropper
               to
               sustain
               somwhat
               ,
               as
               the
               Gristles
               of
               the
               Eyelids
               bear
               the
               Hairs
               .
            
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             is
             various
             ,
             for
             Gristles
             are
             found
             in
             sundry
             parts
             ,
             in
             the
             Eye-lids
             ,
             Nose
             ,
             Ear
             ,
             Larynx
             ,
             Wezand
             ,
             Spine
             ,
             Chest
             ,
             Ear-lets
             ,
             of
             all
             and
             every
             of
             which
             in
             their
             places
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             also
             varies
             :
             so
             also
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             is
             divers
             ,
             as
             ring-fashion'd
             ,
             Sheild-shap'd
             ,
             Sword-like
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             As
             to
             their
             Connexion
             .
             Some
             Gristles
             constitute
             parts
             of
             themselves
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             Xyphoidis
             ,
             the
             Coccyx
             :
             others
             grow
             to
             bones
             ,
             which
             knit
             them
             together
             ,
             either
             without
             any
             other
             medium
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Share
             and
             Breast-bones
             ,
             or
             by
             common
             Ligaments
             coming
             between
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Connexion
             by
             Diárthrosis
             .
          
           
             In
             Substance
             ,
             some
             are
             harder
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             in
             time
             become
             boney
             ;
             others
             are
             softer
             ,
             fastning
             the
             Joynts
             ,
             and
             resembling
             the
             Nature
             in
             a
             manner
             of
             Ligaments
             ,
             and
             are
             therefore
             called
             
               Chondro-syndusmoi
               ,
               Gristly
               Ligaments
            
             .
          
           
             Now
             though
             their
             Substance
             be
             hard
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             flexible
             and
             tough
             because
             less
             cold
             and
             dry
             than
             a
             bone
             ,
             and
             because
             compassed
             with
             a
             snotty
             matter
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             Substance
             of
             theirs
             is
             void
             of
             sense
             ;
             because
             it
             hath
             no
             acquaintance
             with
             Nerves
             nor
             Membranes
             .
             Nor
             was
             it
             requisite
             that
             it
             should
             feel
             ,
             least
             in
             motion
             when
             the
             Gristles
             rub
             and
             strike
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             pain
             should
             be
             caused
             .
          
           
             In
             other
             things
             they
             agree
             with
             Bones
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               III.
            
             Of
             Ligaments
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             LIgamentum
             a
             Band
             or
             Tie
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Greeks
             called
             Súndesmos
             .
             The
             Ancients
             ,
             as
             
               Hippocrates
               ,
               Aristotle
            
             and
             Galen
             somwhere
             ,
             call
             it
             Nervum
             and
             
               Nervum
               colligatum
            
             a
             Nerve
             ,
             and
             a
             twisted
             Nerve
             or
             Nerve
             tied
             together
             ;
             because
             in
             shape
             and
             colour
             it
             counterfets
             a
             Nerve
             :
             and
             otherwise
             the
             term
             Ligament
             ,
             may
             in
             a
             large
             signification
             be
             applied
             to
             any
             part
             ,
             which
             fastens
             divers
             parts
             together
             .
             Also
             Galen
             calls
             the
             beginning
             of
             a
             Muscle
             Ligamentum
             ,
             part
             whereof
             is
             thought
             to
             turn
             to
             a
             Tendon
             .
             All
             these
             are
             improper
             acceptations
             .
             I
             shall
             now
             decipher
             a
             Ligament
             properly
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Efficient
             is
             the
             Ligament-making
             Power
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Matter
             is
             a
             clammy
             roaping
             part
             of
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             ,
             like
             a
             cord
             to
             bind
             together
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             especially
             the
             Bones
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             keep
             them
             together
             ,
             in
             the
             Head
             ,
             Chest
             ,
             Back
             ,
             and
             Limbs
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             dislocated
             or
             dispointed
             .
          
           
             Because
             of
             its
             most
             strong
             cleaving
             thereunto
             ,
             a
             Ligagament
             is
             said
             to
             arise
             (
             though
             it
             be
             indeed
             made
             of
             the
             Seed
             )
             from
             the
             Bone
             primarily
             ,
             somtimes
             from
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             gristly
             bone
             or
             Membrane
             :
             and
             it
             s
             said
             to
             be
             inserted
             into
             a
             Bone
             ,
             Gristle
             ,
             Muscle
             ,
             or
             some
             part
             .
             Or
             if
             you
             would
             rather
             have
             it
             so
             ;
             Ligaments
             grow
             among
             the
             Bones
             ,
             of
             in
             the
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
             Some
             are
             without
             among
             the
             Bones
             ,
             as
             the
             grisly
             Ligaments
             so
             called
             ,
             which
             are
             thick
             and
             commonly
             round
             :
             others
             are
             wound
             externally
             about
             the
             bones
             which
             are
             thin
             and
             membranous
             .
          
           
             As
             to
             Figure
             :
             some
             are
             broader
             which
             Anatomists
             term
             membranous
             Ligaments
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ;
             others
             are
             longer
             ,
             which
             are
             called
             Nervous
             Ligaments
             .
             And
             they
             call
             them
             so
             because
             of
             their
             resemblance
             ,
             not
             as
             if
             a
             Ligament
             were
             truly
             membranous
             or
             nervous
             .
             So
             they
             are
             called
             membranous
             ,
             which
             being
             broad
             and
             thin
             do
             compass
             the
             Joynts
             ,
             also
             which
             are
             wrapt
             about
             Tendons
             and
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             solid
             ,
             white
             ,
             bloodless
             ,
             softer
             than
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             harder
             than
             Nerves
             and
             Membranes
             :
             for
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             of
             a
             middle
             Nature
             betwixt
             a
             Gristle
             and
             a
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             without
             Cavity
             ,
             Sense
             or
             Motion
             .
             It
             was
             to
             be
             without
             Sense
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             be
             alwaies
             pained
             in
             Motions
             ;
             when
             as
             the
             Ligaments
             are
             made
             somtimes
             longer
             and
             shorter
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             are
             contracted
             and
             extended
             .
             Some
             nevertheless
             wil
             have
             membranous
             Ligaments
             to
             feel
             ,
             but
             they
             must
             grant
             it
             to
             be
             so
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             membranes
             and
             not
             of
             their
             own
             proper
             substance
             .
          
           
             For
             this
             substance
             of
             theirs
             is
             as
             Galen
             tels
             us
             divisible
             into
             fibres
             visible
             to
             the
             sight
             ,
             which
             experience
             also
             confirms
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             Substance
             is
             in
             some
             places
             softer
             and
             more
             membranous
             than
             in
             others
             ,
             as
             in
             all
             Ligaments
             wel-neer
             ,
             which
             go
             round
             about
             the
             Joynts
             ;
             and
             among
             these
             ,
             it
             is
             softer
             about
             the
             Joynt
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             than
             about
             that
             of
             the
             Hip
             ;
             and
             yet
             softer
             where
             it
             goes
             about
             the
             inter-joyntings
             of
             the
             fingers
             .
             But
             in
             other
             places
             the
             substance
             is
             harder
             ▪
             and
             as
             it
             were
             in
             part
             gristly
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             in
             such
             places
             termed
             gristly
             Ligaments
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             such
             as
             lie
             concealed
             among
             the
             Bones
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             goes
             from
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             into
             the
             Hip-joynt
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               IV.
            
             Of
             the
             Skull
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             WE
             divide
             all
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             
             into
             the
             HEAD
             ,
             TRUNK
             ,
             and
             LIMBS
             ;
             and
             them
             into
             the
             Arms
             &
             Legs
             .
          
           
             The
             whole
             structure
             of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             is
             termed
             CRANIUM
             the
             Skul
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             Crános
             an
             Helmet
             ;
             some
             term
             it
             Calva
             and
             Calvaria
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             and
             Magnitude
             follow
             the
             Brain
             and
             correspond
             thereunto
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             natural
             or
             non-natural
             and
             depraved
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             natural
             figure
             is
             round
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             hold
             the
             more
             ,
             yet
             a
             little
             longish
             towards
             the
             fore
             and
             hindparts
             ,
             where
             it
             branches
             forth
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             contain
             the
             Brain
             and
             Brainlet
             ;
             
             on
             the
             sides
             it
             is
             flatted
             ,
             but
             more
             towards
             the
             fore-parts
             ;
             and
             therefore
             the
             hind-part
             of
             the
             Head
             is
             of
             greater
             capacity
             than
             the
             forepart
             :
             of
             which
             Albovinus
             King
             of
             the
             Longbeards
             or
             Lombards
             made
             a
             Drinking
             Cup
             for
             Festival
             daies
             ,
             as
             Diaconus
             relates
             in
             his
             History
             .
          
           
             The
             depraved
             and
             non-natural
             Figure
             thereof
             is
             manifold
             .
             
          
           
             
               1.
               
               When
               the
               foremore
               protuberancie
               of
               the
               Head
               is
               wanting
               ;
               and
               such
               persons
               are
               counted
               foolish
               and
               mad
               ,
               for
               want
               of
               Brain
               ,
               which
               ought
               to
               be
               most
               plentiful
               in
               the
               forepart
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               When
               the
               Hinder
               Protuberancy
               or
               bunching
               forth
               is
               wanting
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               When
               both
               are
               wantings
               so
               that
               the
               Head
               is
               round
               as
               a
               Ball
               ,
               such
               as
               the
               Heads
               of
               the
               Turks
               and
               Greenlanders
               are
               thought
               to
               be
               .
               And
               these
               three
               depraved
               figures
               Hippocrates
               doth
               acknowledg
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               fourth
               Figure
               Galen
               adds
               ,
               which
               he
               conceives
               may
               be
               imagined
               but
               not
               really
               found
               ,
               when
               the
               length
               is
               changed
               into
               breadth
               .
               But
               Vesalius
               saies
               he
               saw
               such
               an
               one
               at
               Venice
               ,
               and
               at
               Bononia
               .
            
             
               
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 fift
                 way
                 may
                 be
                 added
                 also
                 out
                 of
                 Hippocrates
                 ,
                 an
                 acuminated
                 or
                 oval
                 Figure
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Head
                 rises
                 up
                 like
                 a
                 Sugar-loaf
                 :
                 which
                 shape
                 in
                 some
                 Nations
                 Hippocrates
                 tels
                 us
                 had
                 a
                 great
                 reputation
                 of
                 Gentility
                 ,
                 and
                 may
                 be
                 formed
                 by
                 Midwives
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 swathe
                 the
                 Childs
                 Head
                 into
                 such
                 a
                 shape
                 and
                 so
                 preserve
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 at
                 last
                 Nature
                 transfers
                 such
                 kind
                 of
                 Heads
                 from
                 Parents
                 to
                 Children
                 .
                 The
                 same
                 Hippocrates
                 in
                 his
                 Epidemicks
                 ,
                 brings
                 in
                 two
                 kinds
                 of
                 thus
                 shap'd
                 Heads
                 ,
                 one
                 with
                 the
                 strength
                 of
                 the
                 parts
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 with
                 weakness
                 of
                 the
                 said
                 parts
                 .
                 And
                 such
                 a
                 figure
                 of
                 Heads
                 ,
                 is
                 at
                 this
                 day
                 more
                 frequent
                 in
                 some
                 Countries
                 than
                 in
                 others
                 .
              
               
                 But
                 now
                 I
                 wil
                 add
                 other
                 figures
                 which
                 I
                 have
                 observed
                 in
                 many
                 Skuls
                 ,
                 especially
                 in
                 Italy
                 .
              
            
             
               6.
               
               When
               the
               right
               side
               branches
               out
               .
               
            
             
               7.
               
               When
               the
               left
               side
               sticks
               out
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               When
               the
               right
               part
               of
               that
               bunchiness
               which
               naturally
               should
               be
               before
               is
               wanting
               ,
               and
               the
               left
               sticks
               out
               very
               much
               ,
               in
               some
               more
               .
               others
               less
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               When
               the
               left
               side
               of
               the
               said
               Protuberancy
               is
               wanting
               ,
               and
               the
               right
               sticks
               out
               more
               than
               ordinary
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               When
               the
               right
               part
               of
               the
               Hinder
               Prominency
               is
               away
               .
            
             
               11.
               
               When
               the
               left
               part
               of
               the
               said
               hinder
               Protuberancy
               is
               away
               .
            
          
           
             And
             thus
             I
             make
             
               twelve
               shapes
            
             of
             the
             Head
             in
             all
             ,
             one
             natural
             and
             eleven
             depraved
             ,
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Skul
             is
             boney
             ,
             to
             secure
             the
             soft
             Brain
             .
             But
             in
             Children
             new
             born
             it
             is
             softer
             then
             ordinary
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             cartilaginous
             and
             membranous
             ,
             especially
             about
             the
             Sutures
             ,
             and
             most
             of
             all
             in
             the
             middle
             and
             upper
             region
             of
             the
             Head
             :
             and
             all
             these
             for
             the
             making
             the
             Birth
             more
             easie
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             give
             a
             little
             way
             when
             it
             is
             pressed
             .
             But
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Skul
             is
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Thick
               ,
               not
               thin
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               more
               strongly
               resist
               external
               injuries
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Rare
               not
               compact
               .
               1.
               
               Least
               it
               should
               weigh
               too
               much
               .
               2.
               
               That
               it
               might
               contain
               Juyce
               for
               nourishment
               ,
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               vapors
               may
               exhale
               .
            
          
           
             Now
             this
             Substance
             of
             the
             Skul
             doth
             consist
             as
             it
             were
             of
             a
             double
             boord
             or
             plate
             .
             It
             is
             seldom
             simple
             and
             single
             without
             a
             Meditullium
             or
             middle
             matter
             ,
             as
             I
             found
             it
             in
             the
             Dissection
             of
             a
             certain
             person
             ,
             and
             seldomer
             hath
             it
             three
             boords
             ,
             But
             for
             the
             most
             part
             two
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             .
             some
             call
             them
             Diploas
             ,
             the
             outer
             whereof
             being
             unhurt
             ,
             the
             inner
             may
             be
             hurt
             .
             And
             each
             of
             these
             plates
             is
             commonly
             polished
             within
             and
             without
             ,
             smooth
             and
             thick
             .
             Hence
             it
             appears
             how
             thick
             the
             Skul
             is
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             every
             where
             in
             a
             manner
             double
             .
          
           
             I
             say
             in
             a
             manner
             or
             wel-neer
             ,
             which
             others
             do
             not
             observe
             :
             for
             in
             some
             places
             the
             Skul
             is
             single
             ,
             thin
             and
             transparent
             .
             without
             any
             distance
             of
             plates
             .
             And
             therefore
             some
             Chirurgeons
             
             are
             deceived
             ,
             who
             in
             taking
             away
             the
             first
             Plate
             do
             think
             they
             must
             so
             long
             cut
             and
             prick
             ,
             til
             blood
             comes
             out
             .
             The
             external
             Plate
             is
             somtimes
             eaten
             off
             by
             the
             Venereal
             Disease
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             it
             sprouts
             forth
             Gums
             by
             force
             of
             the
             said
             Disease
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             rarity
             or
             light
             composure
             of
             the
             Skul
             appears
             from
             that
             
               middle
               substance
            
             between
             each
             Plate
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             meditullium
             .
             This
             Substance
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             is
             rare
             or
             light
             ,
             lax
             ,
             and
             receives
             little
             Veins
             :
             which
             also
             Hippocrates
             knew
             ,
             who
             therefore
             warns
             us
             that
             the
             Skul
             is
             very
             easily
             inflamed
             ,
             and
             therefore
             when
             the
             Trepan
             is
             used
             ,
             the
             Iron
             must
             divers
             times
             be
             dipt
             in
             Milk
             and
             Water
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             is
             external
             or
             internal
             .
          
           
             The
             
               upper
               External
            
             is
             smooth
             and
             even
             ;
             the
             lower
             or
             Basis
             ,
             is
             rough
             and
             uneven
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             sundry
             Appendices
             and
             Processes
             .
          
           
             The
             
               upper
               Internal
            
             is
             hollow
             ,
             smooth
             ;
             save
             that
             it
             hath
             the
             Marks
             of
             Veins
             ,
             and
             certain
             Cavities
             ,
             wherein
             the
             
               dura
               mater
            
             grows
             :
             the
             lower
             is
             very
             uneven
             by
             reason
             of
             divers
             protuberancies
             .
          
           
             And
             every
             where
             there
             are
             frequent
             holes
             in
             the
             Skull
             ,
             very
             small
             and
             placed
             without
             order
             ,
             through
             which
             small
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             pass
             ,
             to
             the
             inner
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             and
             the
             
               dura
               Menynx
            
             .
             But
             somtimes
             they
             are
             not
             to
             be
             found
             .
          
           
             At
             length
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             come
             to
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             we
             must
             know
             that
             the
             Skul
             doth
             not
             consist
             of
             one
             only
             Bone
             ,
             least
             by
             one
             wound
             the
             whole
             Skul
             should
             be
             broken
             in
             pieces
             ;
             but
             of
             divers
             :
             which
             are
             fastned
             together
             by
             the
             Sutures
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             And
             some
             are
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             others
             of
             the
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skull
             in
             persons
             grown
             to
             ripe
             years
             are
             eight
             .
             whereof
             two
             
               are
               common
            
             to
             the
             Skul
             ,
             with
             the
             upper
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             viz.
             the
             cundiforme
             and
             the
             spongiosum
             .
             But
             there
             are
             
               six
               proper
            
             bones
             ,
             which
             make
             up
             the
             Skul
             it self
             :
             One
             of
             the
             Forehead
             (
             in
             new
             born
             Children
             two
             )
             two
             of
             the
             Forepart
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             Hind-part
             (
             in
             an
             Infant
             four
             )
             two
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
             And
             there
             lie
             hid
             in
             the
             Auditory
             passages
             ,
             other
             six
             bones
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             three
             little
             ones
             :
             the
             Hammer
             ,
             the
             Anvil
             ,
             and
             the
             Stirrup
             ,
             to
             which
             a
             fourth
             is
             added
             called
             Orbiculare
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             there
             are
             perpetually
             in
             the
             
               Skull
               fourteen
            
             or
             sixteen
             Bones
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Skul
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               be
               the
               Mansion
               and
               Bulwork
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               of
               it self
               is
               soft
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               through
               it
               Vapors
               may
               pass
               .
            
          
           
             To
             the
             former
             use
             ,
             its
             thickness
             and
             hardness
             is
             subservient
             ;
             to
             the
             latter
             its
             rarity
             and
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             On
             the
             Skul
             of
             a
             Man
             somtimes
             Horns
             grow
             ,
             one
             whiles
             soft
             ,
             another
             while
             hard
             like
             Rams
             Horns
             ;
             sometimes
             fixed
             to
             the
             Skul
             ,
             otherwhiles
             to
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             they
             proceed
             from
             a
             thick
             ,
             clammy
             and
             melancholick
             humor
             .
             There
             are
             examples
             hereof
             in
             
               Paraeus
               ,
               Thuanus
               ,
               Hildanus
               ,
               Renodaeus
               ,
               Zacutus
               ,
               Severinus
               ,
            
             and
             others
             ;
             I
             also
             saw
             two
             horns
             ,
             one
             at
             Padua
             in
             a
             Nunn
             ,
             another
             at
             Purmeraem
             in
             Holland
             in
             an
             old
             Woman
             ,
             which
             was
             sufficiently
             long
             and
             hard
             :
             I
             have
             discoursed
             of
             these
             Horns
             in
             my
             new
             Observations
             
               de
               Unicornu
            
             ,
             of
             the
             Unicorn
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               V.
            
             Of
             the
             Sutures
             of
             the
             Skull
             .
          
           
             A
             Suture
             is
             a
             sort
             of
             connexion
             resembling
             the
             putting
             together
             of
             two
             Saws
             ,
             tooth
             within
             tooth
             ,
             or
             the
             making
             up
             of
             a
             Garment
             of
             many
             torn
             patches
             .
          
           
             Such
             Sutures
             there
             are
             many
             in
             a
             mans
             Head
             :
             for
             an
             Head
             is
             seldom
             found
             without
             any
             Suture
             ,
             such
             as
             Aristotle
             
             saw
             ,
             and
             at
             Helmstadt
             and
             the
             
             Monastery
             of
             Heilbrun
             in
             France
             such
             an
             one
             is
             shewed
             (
             as
             a
             Rarity
             )
             and
             is
             every
             where
             to
             be
             met
             with
             .
          
           
             And
             such
             persons
             have
             not
             their
             Heads
             so
             liable
             to
             external
             injuries
             ,
             but
             very
             much
             to
             inward
             Infirmities
             ,
             because
             transpiration
             is
             thereby
             made
             more
             difficult
             .
             By
             which
             distinction
             ,
             Falopius
             and
             Columbus
             do
             reconcile
             Celsus
             and
             
               Robertus
               Constantinus
            
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             whom
             wrote
             ,
             that
             the
             Head
             which
             had
             no
             Sutures
             was
             most
             liable
             to
             sickness
             ,
             the
             latter
             that
             the
             Head
             without
             Sutures
             was
             more
             subject
             .
          
           
             Somtimes
             through
             Age
             and
             Driness
             ,
             the
             Sutures
             do
             so
             grow
             together
             in
             aged
             persons
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             scarce
             to
             be
             seen
             ;
             whereas
             they
             are
             in
             the
             mean
             season
             ,
             more
             visible
             in
             young
             persons
             .
             Somtimes
             the
             coronal
             suture
             is
             only
             seen
             obliterated
             ;
             but
             the
             temporal
             do
             hardly
             vanish
             ,
             except
             all
             the
             other
             be
             first
             defaced
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             and
             Situation
             of
             the
             Sutures
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             in
             a
             Woman
             and
             in
             a
             Man
             ,
             contrary
             to
             what
             Aristotle
             thought
             ;
             nor
             doth
             it
             vary
             in
             respect
             
             of
             figures
             ,
             as
             Hippocrates
             and
             Galen
             would
             have
             it
             ,
             unless
             very
             rarely
             .
             For
             
               M.
               A.
               Severinus
            
             observed
             between
             the
             saggiteal
             and
             Lambda-fashion'd
             suture
             ,
             another
             over
             and
             above
             of
             a
             triangular
             shape
             ,
             and
             neer
             the
             end
             of
             the
             said
             Sutures
             in
             another
             Skul
             ,
             a
             new
             oval
             Suture
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             Sutures
             of
             the
             Head
             of
             a
             certain
             Fool
             ,
             did
             vary
             in
             figure
             ,
             which
             all
             stuck
             up
             with
             one
             Hillock
             as
             it
             were
             .
             which
             I
             saw
             in
             three
             Epileptick
             Children
             at
             Naples
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             coronal
             Suture
             ,
             which
             did
             suggest
             a
             new
             Cause
             and
             Cure
             of
             the
             Epilepsie
             or
             Falling-sickness
             .
          
           
             The
             Sutures
             which
             knit
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             are
             some
             of
             them
             called
             true
             and
             proper
             ,
             others
             false
             and
             Bastard
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             termed
             true
             ,
             which
             meet
             together
             like
             the
             teeth
             of
             Combs
             ,
             or
             like
             Saws
             ,
             put
             together
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             somtimes
             seen
             after
             Contusion
             movable
             ,
             which
             also
             in
             most
             Skuls
             that
             are
             over
             dried
             in
             the
             Earth
             is
             common
             .
             They
             are
             also
             loose
             in
             Children
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             open
             in
             Hydrocephalic
             or
             Water-headed
             Children
             ,
             as
             I
             saw
             in
             a
             Boy
             at
             Hafnia
             ,
             like
             to
             that
             which
             Severinus
             pictures
             out
             in
             his
             Treatise
             of
             Imposthumes
             ,
             and
             Donatus
             describes
             .
          
           
             The
             bastard
             Sutures
             are
             joyned
             like
             Scales
             and
             Tiles
             on
             an
             house-top
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             termed
             
               Squamosae
               conglu●inationes
            
             ,
             Scaley-conjunctions
             ,
             and
             may
             rather
             be
             termed
             joynings
             ,
             seeing
             they
             are
             more
             like
             to
             an
             Harmonia
             then
             a
             Suture
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             three
             true
             ones
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Is
               the
               foremore
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               Coronalis
               .
               1.
               
               Because
               the
               Ancients
               wore
               
               Crowns
               on
               that
               part
               of
               their
               Heads
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Because
               it
               hath
               some
               resemblance
               to
               a
               Crown
               or
               Circle
               :
            
          
           
             For
             from
             the
             Temples
             it
             ascends
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             athwart
             ,
             to
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Head.
             The
             Arabians
             call
             this
             suture
             Arcualis
             and
             Puppis
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             joyn
             the
             Fore-head
             bone
             with
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Hinder-head
             ,
             and
             to
             distinguish
             them
             therefrom
             .
             The
             place
             of
             the
             coronal
             Suture
             is
             sound
             out
             in
             a
             living
             person
             ,
             either
             by
             carrying
             the
             hand
             upwards
             from
             the
             Wrist
             along
             the
             Nose
             ,
             or
             by
             drawing
             a
             Thred
             out
             from
             Ear
             to
             Ear
             ,
             and
             another
             cross
             the
             same
             from
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             That
             which
             is
             opposite
             to
             this
             ,
             is
             behind
             and
             in
             the
             Occiput
             or
             Hinder-head
             .
             'T
             is
             called
             Lamdoeidès
             the
             Lamda-shap'd
             ,
             from
             the
             Greek
             letter
             A.
             some
             call
             it
             hupsiloïdes
             from
             the
             letter
             upsilon
             ,
             also
             
               prorae
               sutura
            
             .
          
           
             This
             ascends
             obliquely
             ,
             from
             the
             Base
             of
             the
             Hinder-head
             ,
             to
             each
             Ear
             ,
             grows
             into
             an
             Angle
             .
             Somtimes
             when
             the
             Hinder-head
             is
             large
             or
             otherwise
             ,
             't
             is
             divided
             by
             a
             transverse
             suture
             ,
             simple
             ,
             or
             double
             :
             somtimes
             there
             is
             a
             double
             triple
             Suture
             as
             if
             a
             greater
             triangle
             did
             contain
             one
             or
             two
             lesser
             Triangles
             within
             the
             same
             :
             where
             the
             Bones
             so
             comprehended
             ,
             
             are
             termed
             
               ossicula
               triangularia
            
             ,
             the
             little
             three-cornerd
             bones
             ,
             commended
             ,
             in
             the
             Falling-sickness
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             triangular
             bones
             ,
             
               Olaus
               Worm
            
             a
             rare
             man
             ,
             found
             others
             in
             the
             Lambda-like
             Suture
             ,
             which
             perforated
             both
             the
             Boards
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             observed
             as
             yet
             by
             very
             sew
             .
             Three
             for
             the
             most
             part
             on
             the
             right
             ,
             as
             many
             on
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             differing
             in
             magnitude
             ,
             figure
             and
             situation
             ,
             which
             also
             are
             accurately
             discerned
             and
             distinguished
             in
             Infants
             .
             The
             lowest
             is
             seen
             at
             the
             
               Processus
               mammillares
            
             ,
             the
             middlemost
             a
             little
             higher
             ,
             scarce
             half
             a
             Fingers
             breadth
             ,
             the
             third
             a
             little
             further
             distinct
             from
             the
             second
             .
             Pavius
             found
             only
             two
             like
             to
             these
             ,
             circumscribed
             with
             their
             little
             Sutures
             or
             seams
             ,
             which
             he
             doubts
             whether
             he
             should
             refer
             them
             to
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Occiput
             or
             the
             Bregma
             .
          
           
             In
             Shape
             they
             are
             Various
             ,
             Triangular
             ,
             Oblong
             ,
             Oval
             .
             somtimes
             in
             living
             persons
             I
             have
             observed
             them
             to
             grow
             so
             high
             ,
             that
             I
             could
             Feel
             them
             with
             my
             Fingers
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             been
             Epiphysis
             or
             somewhat
             growing
             upon
             the
             Bone.
             
          
           
             All
             are
             larger
             on
             the
             left
             side
             .
             but
             the
             greatest
             exceeds
             not
             the
             Nail
             of
             a
             Mans
             thumb
             .
          
           
             They
             appear
             more
             distinct
             on
             the
             inner
             &
             Concave
             side
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             than
             in
             the
             outward
             and
             convex
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             all
             more
             cleerly
             discern'd
             when
             the
             Skul
             is
             taken
             away
             ,
          
           
             We
             are
             nevertheless
             to
             observe
             that
             these
             bones
             of
             Worm
             do
             in
             divers
             Skuls
             vary
             ,
             both
             in
             Number
             ,
             Magnitude
             ,
             Figure
             ,
             Situation
             ;
             so
             that
             somtimes
             there
             are
             four
             ,
             somtimes
             two
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             Right
             line
             only
             ,
             somtimes
             in
             the
             very
             Juncture
             of
             the
             Sagittal
             with
             the
             Lambda-shap'd
             ;
             sometimes
             also
             in
             the
             Scaley
             temporal
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             ,
             I
             believe
             ,
             is
             1.
             
             That
             the
             Sutures
             being
             inlarged
             thereabouts
             ,
             might
             afford
             a
             more
             free
             passage
             for
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             That
             the
             Skul
             being
             made
             up
             of
             more
             bones
             ,
             might
             be
             more
             safe
             in
             Blows
             and
             Contusions
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             this
             Lambda-like
             Suture
             ,
             is
             to
             distinguish
             the
             bone
             of
             the
             Occiput
             or
             Hinder-head
             ,
             from
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             ,
             and
             the
             forepart
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             In
             the
             middle
             betwixt
             these
             two
             is
             the
             Suture
             ter●red
             Sagittalis
             or
             Arrow-shap'd
             ,
             because
             it
             runs
             in
             a
             streight
             line
             all
             along
             the
             Head
             ,
             like
             an
             Arrow
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             Coronal
             and
             Lambda-shap'd
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             Somtimes
             it
             proceeds
             through
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Coronal
             Suture
             and
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             Fore-head
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Nose
             ,
             especially
             in
             Infants
             :
             in
             some
             also
             it
             cuts
             part
             of
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Occiput
             or
             Hinder-head
             .
             I
             remember
             it
             hath
             been
             somtimes
             wanting
             .
          
           
             This
             Suture
             is
             termed
             Virgata
             and
             Recta
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             distinguish
             and
             joyn
             together
             the
             two
             bones
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             or
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             Those
             two
             Suture
             are
             commonly
             called
             
             Nendosae
             or
             Bastard
             sutures
             ,
             which
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             called
             Squamosae
             Scalie
             ,
             Corticales
             and
             Temporales
             ,
             because
             they
             circumscribe
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
             Now
             this
             Connexion
             like
             Scales
             was
             necessary
             ,
             because
             the
             Temple-bones
             ,
             being
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             very
             thick
             would
             have
             been
             to
             heavy
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             not
             been
             made
             by
             little
             and
             little
             thinner
             in
             their
             upper
             part
             ,
             and
             joyned
             to
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             atenuated
             by
             little
             and
             little
             like
             Scales
             .
          
           
             Now
             there
             are
             many
             spurious
             Sutures
             
             every
             where
             in
             the
             Skul
             ,
             also
             many
             harmonies
             ,
             where
             the
             bones
             are
             joyned
             together
             :
             in
             the
             Palate
             bone
             a
             peculiar
             Suture
             is
             seen
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             
             
               TABLE
               I.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     A
                     Portion
                     of
                     the
                     Sagittal
                     Suture
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Lambda-like
                     Suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Skull
                     cut
                     with
                     a
                     Saw.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     Bone
                     of
                     Worm
                     ,
                     on
                     the
                     left
                     quarter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     second
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     third
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     of
                     the
                     right
                     Quarter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     second
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     third
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     great
                     hole
                     of
                     the
                     Skull
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     mammillary
                     productions
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               341
            
          
           
             
               II.
               That
               by
               them
               the
               
                 Dura
                 mater
              
               may
               be
               tied
               and
               held
               up
               ,
               least
               it
               should
               squeez
               the
               inner
               parts
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               III.
               That
               the
               said
               
                 dura
                 mater
              
               might
               by
               them
               send
               out
               fibres
               to
               constitute
               the
               Pericraneum
               and
               the
               Periosteum
               .
            
             
               IV.
               That
               Vessels
               may
               go
               in
               and
               out
               ,
               to
               nourish
               and
               in●iven
               the
               parts
               ;
               which
               Vessels
               are
               by
               Fallopius
               cal'd
               
                 Venae
                 puppis
              
               .
            
             
               V.
               That
               one
               Bone
               being
               broken
               the
               others
               might
               remain
               whole
               .
               And
               therfore
               
                 Galen
                 ,
                 Paulus
                 ,
                 Guido
              
               and
               Fallopius
               ,
               denie
               that
               there
               can
               be
               any
               contra●issure
               or
               Counter-cleft
               ,
               save
               in
               a
               solid
               Head
               without
               Sutures
               :
               Hippocrates
               writes
               the
               Contrary
               ,
               and
               cals
               it
               a
               Misfortune
               ,
               as
               also
               Celsus
               and
               others
               ,
               and
               Fallopius
               himself
               ,
               Paraeus
               and
               Pavius
               relate
               examples
               ,
               and
               before
               them
               Soranus
               ,
               taking
               a
               similitude
               from
               a
               Glass
               Bottle
               ,
               which
               oftentimes
               ,
               being
               struck
               on
               the
               one
               side
               ,
               is
               crakt
               on
               the
               opposite
               part
               .
            
             
               VI.
               That
               Topical
               Medicines
               being
               outwardly
               applied
               ,
               may
               more
               easily
               penetrate
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               6.
            
             
             Of
             the
             proper
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skull
             in
             particular
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               first
               Bone
            
             is
             the
             OS
             FRONTIS
             ,
             the
             Forehead
             bone
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             
               Coronale
               ,
               Inverecundum
               ,
               Os
               puppis
               :
            
             which
             hath
          
           
             A
             Figure
             imperfectly
             circular
             ;
             more
             perfect
             where
             it
             is
             circumscribed
             with
             the
             Coronal
             Suture
             ,
             more
             imperfect
             neer
             the
             Eyes
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             thinner
             than
             that
             of
             the
             
               Os
               occipitis
            
             or
             Hinder-head
             bone
             ,
             and
             thicker
             than
             the
             
               Ossa
               sincipitis
            
             ,
             or
             bones
             of
             the
             foremore
             part
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             It
             is
             twofold
             in
             Children
             new-born
             ,
             distinguished
             by
             the
             sagittal
             Suture
             :
             also
             framed
             of
             a
             twofold
             Plate
             ,
             an
             external
             and
             internal
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Nose
             above
             the
             Eye-brows
             ,
             there
             are
             large
             Cavities
             commonly
             
             two
             in
             number
             ,
             between
             the
             two
             plates
             ,
             somtimes
             cloathed
             with
             a
             green
             Membrane
             and
             separated
             ,
             containing
             a
             certain
             soft
             and
             marrowish
             body
             .
             But
             these
             Cavities
             are
             not
             1.
             
             In
             Children
             til
             they
             are
             a
             year
             old
             .
             2.
             
             In
             such
             as
             have
             a
             flat
             and
             Saddle-face
             .
             3.
             
             In
             such
             whose
             Fore-head
             is
             divided
             .
          
           
             The
             said
             Cavities
             have
             holes
             which
             end
             into
             the
             wide
             spaces
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             :
             and
             another
             which
             ends
             into
             the
             Skul
             ,
             above
             the
             Septum
             of
             the
             
               Os
               spongiosum
            
             to
             distinguish
             the
             Organs
             of
             Smelling
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Use
               of
               these
               Cavities
            
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               make
               the
               Voyce
               Melod●●●●
               and
               Sounding
               ;
               because
               they
               are
               not
               in
               such
               who
               have
               a
               bad
               Speech
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Some
               conceive
               they
               serve
               for
               the
               Air
               to
               be
               elaborated
               in
               ,
               to
               generate
               animal
               spirits
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               they
               may
               contain
               the
               Air
               which
               is
               drawn
               into
               the
               Nostrils
               and
               brings
               the
               smels
               of
               things
               along
               with
               it
               ,
               from
               whence
               it
               passes
               leisurely
               to
               the
               Organs
               of
               Smelling
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               Brain
               to
               alter
               the
               ●ame
               ,
               and
               reduce
               it
               to
               its
               natural
               State
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               disordered
               .
               And
               therefore
               it
               is
               that
               many
               times
               an
               whole
               day
               together
               a
               smel
               is
               perceived
               in
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Others
               suppose
               ,
               they
               serve
               to
               collect
               Excrements
               ,
               not
               only
               thick
               but
               watry
               ,
               which
               being
               carried
               to
               the
               
                 Glandula
                 lachrymalis
              
               ,
               do
               make
               Tears
               .
            
             
               5.
               some
               conceive
               that
               the
               marrowy
               matter
               therein
               contained
               ,
               doth
               pass
               through
               the
               hole
               of
               the
               greater
               Corner
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               and
               moisten
               the
               Eye
               make
               it
               glib
               and
               slippery
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               move
               the
               Easier
               .
            
          
           
             This
             Bone
             hath
             Processes
             :
             one
             at
             the
             greater
             Corner
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             another
             at
             the
             lesser
             ,
             to
             constitute
             the
             upper
             pare
             of
             the
             Eye-hole
             or
             Socket
             .
             There
             are
             also
             two
             cornerd
             Eminencies
             or
             risings
             on
             each
             side
             o●e
             ,
             towards
             the
             Temples
             ,
             which
             are
             termed
             Horns
             ;
             by
             Albucasis
             ,
             Dionysisci
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Definitions
             and
             Heliodorus
             the
             Physitian
             ;
             and
             if
             that
             boney
             Tumor
             be
             only
             on
             one
             side
             Ingrassias
             calls
             it
             Dionysiscus
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             three
             holes
             ;
             one
             more
             inward
             of
             which
             before
             ,
             which
             ends
             into
             the
             Skul
             :
             two
             outward
             ,
             at
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Eye-brows
             ,
             for
             the
             thorough-fare
             ,
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             third
             Conjugation
             to
             the
             Forehead
             .
          
           
             The
             Second
             and
             Third
             are
             the
             two
             Bones
             of
             the
             Sincipu●
             or
             Vertex
             ,
             which
             some
             call
             Parietalia
             ,
             others
             
               Arcualia
               ,
               Nervalia
               ,
               Rationis
            
             or
             Cogitationis
             ,
             of
             reason
             or
             thought
             :
             the
             Greeks
             
               Brég●a●os
               o●●â
            
             ,
             because
             the
             most
             moist
             and
             sofe
             Brain
             ,
             is
             placed
             under
             them
             .
          
           
             In
             Shape
             they
             are
             four
             square
             and
             unequal
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             is
             more
             rare
             and
             infirm
             
             then
             of
             other
             Bones
             ,
             because
             the
             Head
             in
             this
             part
             ,
             wants
             very
             much
             evaporation
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Wounds
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             are
             deadly
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               .
               II.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               TABLE
               are
               presented
               the
               Bones
               and
               Sutures
               of
               the
               Skul
               ,
               as
               also
               the
               parts
               of
               both
               the
               Jaw-bones
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Coronal
                     Suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     A
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     sagittal
                     Suture
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     scalie
                     Suture
                     of
                     the
                     Bones
                     of
                     the
                     Temples
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     frontis
                     ,
                     or
                     Bone
                     of
                     the
                     Fore-head
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     Processes
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Bone
                     ,
                     to
                     the
                     grater
                     corner
                     of
                     the
                     Eye
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     Another
                     process
                     to
                     the
                     lesser
                     corner
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     An
                     hole
                     for
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     Nerves
                     expressed
                     on
                     one
                     side
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     Os
                     Bregmatis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Bone
                     of
                     the
                     Temples
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     Its
                     Appendix
                     cal'd
                     Styloïdes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     mamillary
                     process
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     Another
                     process
                     thereof
                     ,
                     which
                     makes
                     the
                     Os
                     jugale
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     first
                     bone
                     of
                     the
                     lower
                     Jaw
                     according
                     to
                     our
                     Author
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   O.
                   
                     The
                     second
                     Bone.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   P.
                   
                     The
                     hole
                     of
                     this
                     Bone
                     ,
                     neer
                     which
                     is
                     the
                     Caruncula
                     Lachrymalis
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   QQ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     third
                     Bone
                     of
                     the
                     upper
                     Jaw
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   RR.
                   
                     The
                     fourth
                     Bone
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   S.
                   
                     The
                     Partition
                     of
                     the
                     Nostrils
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   T.
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     Jaw-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   u.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     outer
                     and
                     lesser
                     hole
                     ,
                     the
                     greater
                     is
                     to
                     be
                     seen
                     within
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   X.
                   
                     The
                     process
                     of
                     that
                     Jaw-bone
                     ,
                     termed
                     Corone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Z.
                   
                     The
                     other
                     blunted
                     Process
                     called
                     Condilodes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Dent●s
                     Incisores
                     or
                     Cutting
                     Teeth
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Dog-teeth
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Grinders
                     or
                     Grinding-teeth
                     ,
                     Molares
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Coronal
                     Suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Sagittal
                     Suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Lambdoidea
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     frontis
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Bone
                     ,
                     of
                     the
                     Sinciput
                     ,
                     Bregma
                     ,
                     or
                     ●or●…
                     of
                     ●●●
                     Head.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     Os
                     Occipitis
                     or
                     Hinder-head
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               342
            
          
           
             In
             Infants
             ,
             that
             part
             which
             is
             at
             the
             Conjunction
             of
             the
             coronal
             and
             Sagittal
             Sutures
             is
             found
             Membranous
             ,
             and
             soft
             ,
             and
             among
             all
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             it
             last
             receives
             a
             boney
             hardness
             ,
             then
             when
             the
             Child
             begins
             to
             speak
             distinctly
             and
             intelligibly
             ▪
             while
             it
             remains
             Membranous
             and
             soft
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             so
             thick
             as
             afterwards
             ,
             but
             transparent
             .
             Hence
             in
             Children
             there
             is
             observed
             in
             that
             place
             a
             Gap
             or
             Chink
             ,
             which
             some
             term
             Fontanella
             and
             
               ●ons
               pulsatilis
            
             ;
             where
             also
             they
             are
             wont
             to
             make
             Issues
             in
             desparate
             Catarrhs
             .
             I
             have
             once
             observed
             this
             part
             in
             a
             person
             grown
             up
             ,
             to
             have
             been
             not
             yet
             boney
             ,
             but
             membranous
             as
             in
             Children
             ,
             viz.
             in
             a
             man
             of
             years
             of
             Age.
             〈…〉
             Woman
             of
             twenty
             six
             years
             old
             ,
             found
             it
             re●…
             open
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             within
             superficial
             Cavities
             ,
             being
             the
             in
             ●…sions
             of
             Veins
             ,
             and
             without
             certain
             small
             holes
             .
          
           
             The
             
               fourth
               Bone
            
             of
             the
             Occiput
             which
             some
             call
             〈…〉
             
               Os
               prorae
               ,
               Os
               memorioe
               ,
               Os
               pixidis
               ,
            
             the
             G●…
             doth
             constitute
             almost
             the
             whole
             hinde●…
             part
             of
             the
             Skul
             .
          
           
             Which
             in
             grown
             persons
             is
             commonly
             b●…
             double
             or
             treble
             ;
             in
             Children
             it
             con●…
             part
             of
             four
             seldom
             of
             five
             bones
             ▪
          
           
           
             Its
             Figure
             is
             of
             a
             Sphaetical
             triangle
             ▪
          
           
             Its
             Substance
             is
             the
             thickest
             and
             most
             compact
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             (
             because
             there
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             is
             seated
             ,
             and
             there
             the
             Nerves
             arise
             as
             from
             a
             Fountain
             )
             especially
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Skul
             ,
             save
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             great
             hole
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             most
             thin
             (
             and
             therefore
             in
             this
             respect
             Aristotle
             did
             well
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             the
             thinnest
             Bone
             of
             all
             ,
             which
             Columbus
             taxes
             )
             and
             therefore
             for
             safeties
             sake
             ,
             there
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             thereof
             a
             long
             Prominency
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             
               five
               holes
            
             ,
             one
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             neer
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             
               Medulla
               oblongata
            
             passeth
             forth
             ;
             the
             rest
             are
             lesser
             serving
             for
             the
             going
             out
             of
             Nerves
             and
             the
             entrance
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             nine
             Cavities
             ,
             seven
             within
             and
             two
             without
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             before
             two
             broad
             Processes
             at
             the
             Basis
             (
             in
             Children
             they
             are
             Epiphyses
             )
             covered
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             within
             more
             eminent
             ,
             inserted
             into
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             ,
             for
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Head.
             There
             is
             another
             small
             Process
             behind
             ,
             joyned
             to
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Hinder-head
             of
             Dogs
             ,
             there
             is
             another
             small
             bone
             between
             the
             Brain
             
             and
             the
             Brainlet
             ,
             which
             is
             triangular
             :
             that
             it
             may
             as
             a
             Prop
             sustain
             their
             going
             with
             their
             heads
             downwards
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             and
             sixt
             ,
             are
             the
             
               Temple
               Bones
            
             ,
             by
             the
             Ears
             ;
             some
             call
             them
             
               Lapidos●
               ,
               Petrosa
               ,
               Sa●ea
               ,
               Squamiformia
               Mendofa
               ,
            
             and
             others
             Parietalia
             and
             Aercualia
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             is
             uneven
             (
             but
             rather
             circular
             than
             three
             square
             )
             because
             of
             their
             manifold
             Substance
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             Rocks
             and
             craggy
             Clifts
             ;
             for
             which
             cause
             they
             are
             also
             called
             
               Ossa
               petrosa
            
             the
             rocky
             bones
             .
             But
             in
             their
             upper
             part
             they
             are
             attenuated
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             be
             transparent
             ,
             where
             they
             lie
             under
             the
             temporal
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             ,
             like
             Scales
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             six
             holes
             without
             ,
             two
             within
             ▪
             the
             first
             external
             hole
             is
             large
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Auditory
             passage
             ;
             the
             rest
             are
             small
             ,
             for
             Vessels
             to
             pass
             thorough
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             two
             Cavities
             .
             The
             outer
             is
             covered
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ▪
             ,
             and
             receives
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             .
             The
             inner
             is
             longish
             ,
             common
             to
             the
             
               Os
               occipitis
            
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               III.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               demonstrates
               the
               inner
               structure
               of
               the
               Organ
               of
               Hearing
               ,
               with
               the
               little
               Auditory
               Bones
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   Os
                   temporis
                   ,
                   the
                   Temple
                   Bone.
                   
                
                 
                   bbb
                   .
                   The
                   scalie
                   Suture
                   of
                   the
                   said
                   Bone.
                   
                
                 
                   cc.
                   
                   The
                   Os
                   spongiosum
                   ,
                   or
                   Spungy-bone
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   The
                   Cavity
                   into
                   which
                   the
                   Auditory
                   Nerve
                   is
                   inserted
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   boney
                   Circle
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   The
                   greater
                   winding
                   of
                   the
                   Cochlea
                   .
                
                 
                   ggg
                   .
                   Three
                   boney
                   half-circles
                   ,
                   which
                   form
                   the
                   Labyrinth
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   The
                   Malleus
                   or
                   Hammer
                   in
                   its
                   situation
                   .
                
                 
                   i.
                   The
                   Anvil
                   or
                   Incus
                   .
                
                 
                   k.
                   The
                   Stapes
                   or
                   Stirrup
                   .
                
                 
                   l.
                   The
                   external
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Ear.
                   
                
                 
                   m.
                   The
                   internal
                   Muscle
                   of
                   the
                   Ear
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   see
                   
                     B.
                     3.
                     chap.
                     9.
                  
                   
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   aaa
                   .
                   The
                   Labyrinth
                   .
                
                 
                   b.
                   The
                   Cochlea
                   .
                
                 
                   c.
                   The
                   oval
                   hole
                   where
                   the
                   Stapes
                   is
                   seated
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   Fallopius
                   his
                   Aquae-ductus
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   Fenestra
                   Rotunda
                   ,
                   round
                   window
                   .
                
                 
                   ff
                   .
                   Little
                   holes
                   to
                   let
                   out
                   Veins
                   and
                   Arteries
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   aa
                   .
                   The
                   Cochlea
                   dissected
                   .
                
                 
                   bb
                   .
                   An
                   intermediate
                   space
                   or
                   thing
                   dividing
                   the
                   Cochlea
                   into
                   two
                   wreaths
                   .
                
                 
                   c.
                   A
                   round
                   hole
                   ,
                   ending
                   into
                   the
                   Cavity
                   of
                   Hearing
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   lower
                   wreath
                   of
                   Cochlea
                   .
                
                 
                   ddd
                   .
                   The
                   wreathings
                   or
                   Circumvolutions
                   of
                   the
                   Labyrinth
                   opened
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   Fenestra
                   ovalis
                   ,
                   or
                   oval
                   window
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   a.
                   The
                   round
                   Head
                   of
                   the
                   Malleus
                   or
                   Hammer
                   .
                
                 
                   b.
                   Its
                   end
                   whereby
                   't
                   is
                   fastned
                   to
                   the
                   Drum.
                   
                
                 
                   c.
                   The
                   smaller
                   process
                   of
                   the
                   Malleus
                   ,
                   Mallet
                   or
                   Hammer
                   .
                
                 
                   d.
                   The
                   larger
                   and
                   more
                   fine
                   process
                   thereof
                   ,
                   first
                   observed
                   by
                   Folius
                   .
                
                 
                   e.
                   The
                   Incus
                   or
                   Anvil
                   ,
                   whose
                   upper
                   part
                   hath
                   a
                   Cavity
                   to
                   receive
                   the
                   Head
                   of
                   the
                   Hammer
                   .
                
                 
                   f.
                   The
                   longer
                   process
                   of
                   the
                   Anvil
                   ,
                   to
                   which
                   the
                   Stirrup
                   is
                   fastned
                   .
                
                 
                   h.
                   The
                   Stapes
                   or
                   Stirrup
                   .
                
                 
                   i.
                   A
                   fourth
                   little
                   bone
                   fastned
                   to
                   the
                   Stapes
                   or
                   Stirrup
                   by
                   a
                   Ligament
                   ,
                   first
                   observed
                   by
                   
                     Fr.
                     Sylvius
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               
               
                 
                   Shews
                   the
                   boney
                   Circle
                   in
                   Infants
                   ,
                   to
                   which
                   the
                   Membrane
                   of
                   the
                   Drum
                   is
                   fastened
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               343
            
          
           
           
             It
             hath
             a
             certain
             Appendix
             ,
             sharp
             ,
             long
             and
             small
             ,
             and
             therefore
             called
             
               Styloīdes
               ,
               Belenoïnes
               ,
               Graphioïdes
               ,
               Plectrum
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             It
             is
             soon
             broke
             off
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             not
             in
             all
             Skuls
             ,
             especially
             such
             as
             are
             dug
             out
             of
             the
             ground
             .
             In
             grown
             persons
             't
             is
             hony
             ,
             in
             Infants
             Gristly
             .
             It
             is
             a
             little
             crooked
             ,
             like
             a
             Cocks
             Spur.
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             three
             Processes
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Is
               external
               and
               obtuse
               ,
               thick
               ,
               short
               and
               cavernous
               ,
               
                 id
                 est
              
               ,
               having
               holes
               like
               a
               Spunge
               in
               it
               ;
               it
               s
               cal'd
               from
               its
               shape
               ,
               Mammillaris
               ,
               Dug
               like
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Is
               External
               also
               ,
               and
               a
               portion
               of
               
                 Os
                 jugale
              
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               
                 Os
                 jugale
              
               or
               Lygomatis
               ,
               seated
               under
               the
               Eye
               ,
               is
               not
               a
               peculiar
               bone
               ,
               but
               is
               made
               up
               of
               the
               Processes
               of
               two
               bones
               ;
               the
               one
               is
               that
               newly
               mentioned
               ,
               the
               other
               is
               that
               of
               the
               Jaw
               ,
               joyned
               by
               an
               oblique
               Suture
               ,
               making
               as
               it
               were
               a
               Bridg
               :
               whose
               use
               is
               to
               defend
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               temporal
               Muscle
               ,
               the
               Skul
               being
               otherwise
               but
               thin
               in
               that
               place
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Is
               Internal
               with
               a
               long
               protuberancy
               ,
               wherein
               there
               is
               a
               threefold
               Cavity
               :
               the
               Drum
               ,
               the
               Labyrinth
               ,
               the
               Cochlea
               ,
               also
               the
               bones
               which
               serve
               the
               Hearing
               .
               But
               if
               the
               outer
               passage
               before
               the
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               be
               reckoned
               ,
               there
               wil
               be
               four
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Auditory
               passage
               .
               The
               Ancients
               makes
               mention
               but
               of
               one
               Cavern
               .
            
          
           
             I.
             The
             first
             Cavity
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Tympanum
             or
             Concha
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             call
             it
             Pelvis
             ,
             
             and
             by
             Aristotle
             termed
             Cochlea
             ,
             is
             situate
             presently
             after
             the
             little
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Tympanum
             (
             about
             which
             goes
             a
             
               boney
               circle
            
             ,
             easily
             separable
             in
             Infants
             ,
             in
             elderly
             persons
             hardly
             )
             wherein
             is
             the
             Congenit
             or
             inbred
             Air
             ,
             also
             four
             little
             bones
             ,
             a
             Ligament
             and
             Muscles
             ,
             little
             Windows
             and
             a
             water-passage
             ;
             and
             from
             this
             Cavity
             a
             Channel
             goes
             into
             the
             palate
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
             It
             doth
             not
             transmit
             the
             Congenit
             Air
             ,
             which
             Nature
             studies
             to
             retain
             .
          
           
             The
             Fenestrae
             or
             Windows
             ,
             are
             two
             little
             holes
             in
             this
             Cavity
             :
             the
             
               one
               oval
            
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Cavity
             ,
             more
             towards
             the
             fore-part
             ,
             and
             higher
             ,
             upon
             which
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Stapes
             or
             Sti●rups
             rests
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             great
             measure
             shuts
             the
             same
             :
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             ,
             it
             opens
             it self
             into
             the
             Cochlea
             with
             a
             large
             overture
             ,
             and
             joyns
             it self
             also
             to
             the
             
               hinder
               hole
            
             which
             is
             lower
             in
             mankind
             ,
             lesser
             and
             narrower
             ?
             and
             this
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             channels
             ,
             divided
             by
             a
             very
             thin
             bony
             Scale
             :
             with
             the
             one
             it
             goes
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             oval
             window
             unto
             the
             Cochlea
             ,
             with
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Labyrinth
             ;
             and
             the
             hindermore
             channel
             is
             called
             Aquae-ductus
             ,
             also
             
               Meatus
               cochlearis
               ,
               Tortuosus
               ,
               Caecus
               ,
               Capreolaris
               ,
            
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             crooked
             winding
             passage
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             greater
             part
             of
             the
             Auditory
             Nerve
             is
             carried
             with
             the
             Artery
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             second
             being
             round
             and
             less
             than
             the
             former
             ,
             is
             called
             Cabyrinthus
             and
             fodina
             the
             Maze
             and
             Mettal-mine
             or
             Cole-mine
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             crooked
             manyfold
             turnings
             :
             behind
             the
             Fenestra
             ovals
             ,
             it
             joyns
             it self
             to
             the
             following
             Cavity
             .
             From
             this
             ,
             many
             waies
             run
             out
             ▪
             which
             they
             call
             
               Semicirculos
               osse●s
               excavatos
            
             ,
             hollowed
             boney
             Half-circles
             ,
             or
             funiculos
             little
             Ropes
             ,
             three
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             large
             at
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             then
             by
             little
             and
             little
             growing
             narrower
             ,
             cloathed
             with
             a
             little
             thin
             Membrane
             ,
             that
             the
             sounds
             may
             become
             more
             acute
             ,
             and
             being
             by
             little
             and
             little
             broken
             may
             so
             ascend
             unto
             the
             Brain
             .
             It
             hath
             four
             holes
             besides
             the
             oval
             ,
             and
             a
             fift
             which
             is
             terminated
             into
             the
             Cochlea
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             third
             is
             termed
             Cochlea
             because
             of
             its
             wreathed
             turning
             ,
             others
             call
             it
             
               Cavitas
               cochleata
               ,
               Buccinata
               ,
               An●rum
               buccinosum
               ,
            
             &c.
             for
             it
             hath
             three
             or
             four
             windings
             (
             those
             who
             are
             thick
             of
             Hearing
             have
             only
             one
             or
             two
             )
             mutually
             receiving
             one
             another
             ,
             and
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             very
             exceeding
             thin
             and
             most
             soft
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             is
             adorned
             with
             infinite
             little
             Veins
             ,
             which
             being
             twined
             about
             the
             wreathings
             of
             the
             Cochlea
             ,
             doth
             by
             many
             branches
             creep
             into
             the
             secret
             turnings
             of
             the
             Labyrinth
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               7.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Bones
             which
             serve
             the
             Sense
             of
             Hearing
             .
          
           
             THere
             follow
             eight
             other
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             which
             are
             least
             of
             all
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             four
             ,
             being
             the
             Bones
             subservient
             to
             the
             sense
             of
             Hearing
             ,
             called
             from
             their
             shapes
             ,
             Malleus
             the
             Mallet
             or
             Hammer
             ,
             Incus
             the
             Anvil
             ,
             Stapes
             the
             Stirrup
             ,
             and
             the
             Orbicular
             bone
             :
             all
             which
             were
             unknown
             to
             the
             Ancients
             .
             The
             two
             first
             were
             found
             out
             by
             
               Jacobus
               Carpus
            
             ,
             who
             was
             afterwards
             followed
             by
             
               Massa
               ,
               Jacobus
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             and
             Vesalius
             :
             and
             he
             being
             admonished
             by
             Fallopius
             ,
             at
             last
             made
             mention
             of
             the
             third
             ,
             whose
             first
             finder
             out
             was
             Ingrassias
             ;
             although
             Eustachius
             and
             Columbus
             do
             arrogate
             the
             Invention
             hereof
             unto
             themselves
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             Auditory
             Bone
             ,
             was
             found
             out
             and
             shewed
             to
             me
             by
             
               Franciscus
               Sylvius
            
             ,
             being
             round
             and
             small
             ,
             and
             by
             
               N.
               Fontanus
            
             likened
             to
             the
             Scale
             of
             a
             Pike
             :
             annexed
             by
             a
             small
             Ligament
             to
             the
             Stirrup
             side
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             Anvil
             ;
             which
             you
             shall
             more
             easily
             find
             in
             the
             boyled
             Calves
             Heads
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             are
             bigger
             than
             in
             the
             Heads
             of
             Men
             :
             howbeit
             in
             a
             Man
             it
             is
             visible
             enough
             .
             Pavius
             found
             in
             the
             Head
             of
             an
             Ox
             a
             year
             old
             ,
             one
             like
             this
             ,
             of
             a
             sesamoidean
             shape
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             situate
             in
             the
             first
             Cavity
             or
             Concha
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             a
             Substance
             hard
             and
             dense
             ,
             hollow
             within
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             lighter
             ,
             and
             might
             contain
             in
             them
             ,
             Marrow
             for
             their
             nourishment
             ,
             without
             any
             Periosteum
             about
             them
             :
             also
             that
             they
             might
             make
             the
             Ai●
             drie●
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             along
             ,
             like
             those
             Ropes
             which
             are
             fastened
             to
             doors
             to
             make
             them
             open
             and
             shut
             again
             of
             themselves
             .
             They
             are
             as
             perfect
             in
             new-born
             Children
             as
             in
             those
             that
             are
             grown
             up
             ;
             though
             not
             so
             hard
             ,
             but
             more
             moist
             ,
             for
             which
             cause
             Infants
             are
             dull
             of
             Hearing
             .
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             .
             The
             Hammer
             by
             its
             process
             sticks
             fast
             to
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Drum
             ,
             beyond
             the
             middle
             ,
             like
             a
             tail
             turned
             back
             ;
             the
             head
             whereof
             is
             articulated
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             of
             the
             Anvil
             ,
             having
             a
             small
             Process
             ,
             that
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               rotundus
            
             may
             be
             applied
             thereto
             ;
             it
             hath
             also
             a
             longer
             Process
             ,
             but
             smaller
             ,
             first
             observed
             by
             
               Caecilius
               Folius
            
             ,
             to
             which
             another
             Muscle
             is
             fastened
             ,
             which
             belongs
             to
             the
             external
             Ear.
             It
             rests
             athwart
             upon
             the
             bony
             circle
             ,
             with
             which
             perhaps
             it
             grows
             together
             in
             persons
             that
             are
             of
             years
             ,
             for
             commonly
             in
             Children
             it
             is
             only
             visible
             ,
             in
             others
             it
             is
             easily
             broken
             because
             of
             its
             fineness
             ,
             when
             the
             bones
             are
             taken
             out
             .
          
           
             The
             Anvil
             resembling
             a
             grinding
             Tooth
             ,
             lies
             under
             the
             Hammer
             ,
             having
             beneath
             two
             processes
             ;
             the
             one
             shorter
             resting
             upon
             the
             
               Os
               squamosum
            
             ,
             the
             other
             longer
             ,
             sustaining
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Stirup
             or
             triangular
             bone
             ,
             which
             rests
             upon
             the
             Cochlea
             ,
             till
             it
             is
             sunk
             into
             the
             broad
             Basis
             of
             the
             
               Fenestra
               ovalis
            
             ,
             or
             oval
             window
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             is
             fastned
             by
             a
             loose
             Ligament
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             may
             be
             lightly
             raised
             ,
             but
             not
             moved
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             .
          
           
             These
             three
             little
             bones
             ,
             are
             joyned
             with
             a
             very
             fine
             Ligament
             ,
             which
             is
             stretched
             over
             the
             whole
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             the
             strings
             over
             the
             bottom
             of
             a
             Drum.
             
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             these
             little
             bones
             is
             not
             to
             make
             a
             sound
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             species
             of
             sound
             being
             received
             ,
             may
             pass
             to
             the
             lower
             parts
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             may
             be
             a
             passage
             for
             the
             excrements
             of
             the
             Ears
             .
             For
             the
             Stirrup
             shutting
             the
             oval
             or
             upper
             window
             ,
             is
             moved
             by
             the
             Anvil
             (
             whereupon
             the
             window
             is
             opened
             ,
             that
             the
             species
             or
             representation
             of
             Sounds
             may
             pass
             into
             the
             Nerve
             ,
             and
             the
             Anvil
             being
             smitten
             by
             the
             Hammer
             ,
             and
             the
             Hammer
             by
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Drum
             ,
             through
             the
             impulse
             of
             the
             external
             Air
             (
             which
             the
             Hammer
             hinders
             from
             being
             driven
             too
             far
             forwards
             )
             which
             while
             it
             is
             in
             doing
             ,
             the
             membrane
             of
             the
             Drum
             is
             droven
             inwards
             ▪
             and
             becomes
             bunching
             out
             ,
             whereby
             the
             inbred
             Air
             is
             affected
             ,
             which
             wandring
             through
             the
             Cochlea
             causes
             ,
             that
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             Auditory
             
             Nerve
             ,
             do
             receive
             the
             species
             of
             sounds
             ,
             brought
             in
             by
             the
             windows
             ,
             and
             communicate
             the
             same
             to
             the
             Brain
             .
             And
             thus
             the
             Hammer
             is
             moved
             only
             inwards
             .
             But
             in
             the
             recourse
             ,
             it
             is
             moved
             outwards
             ,
             with
             the
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Drum
             ,
             by
             that
             very
             little
             Muscle
             found
             out
             by
             Casserius
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               VIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Bones
             common
             to
             the
             Head
             and
             upper
             Jaw
             ,
             viz.
             Os
             cuneiforme
             and
             Os
             spongiosum
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Os
               Sphaenoides
            
             or
             Cuneiforme
             ,
             or
             Wedg-fashion'd
             Bone
             ,
             so
             called
             because
             as
             they
             say
             ,
             it
             hath
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             Wedg
             ;
             was
             by
             the
             Ancients
             called
             Polumorphos
             or
             many-form'd
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             sundry
             processes
             within
             and
             without
             whereby
             it
             is
             made
             rugged
             and
             uneven
             :
             others
             call
             it
             
               Os
               Paxillare
               ,
               Os
               Colatorij
               ,
               Os
               Palati
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             'T
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             is
             placed
             under
             the
             Brain
             as
             a
             foundation
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             touches
             well-neer
             all
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             upper
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             
               one
               Bone
            
             in
             grown
             persons
             :
             but
             it
             is
             at
             first
             made
             of
             four
             which
             are
             afterwards
             united
             .
          
           
             The
             Processes
             are
             sundry
             .
          
           
             Outwardly
             there
             are
             two
             remarkable
             ones
             ,
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             palate
             ,
             cal'd
             
               Pterigoeides
               ,
               aliformes
            
             ,
             Wing-fashion'd
             ,
             because
             they
             resemble
             the
             wings
             of
             Batts
             or
             Flittermice
             ,
             and
             are
             furnished
             with
             a
             longish
             Cavity
             .
          
           
             Inwardly
             there
             are
             four
             little
             ones
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             two
             ,
             having
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             Turkish
             Saddle
             .
             and
             therefore
             this
             process
             is
             termed
             
               Sella
               Sphaenoidis
            
             ,
             the
             saddle
             of
             
               Os
               Sphaenoïdes
            
             ;
             in
             which
             process
             being
             square
             and
             broad
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Cavity
             to
             hold
             the
             
               Glandula
               pituitaria
            
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             Saddle
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Cave
             full
             of
             little
             holes
             ,
             that
             the
             inbreathed
             Air
             ,
             may
             be
             elaborated
             to
             make
             Spirits
             ,
             and
             that
             flegmatick
             excrements
             ,
             may
             distill
             through
             the
             funnel
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             sundry
             holes
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Vessels
             this
             way
             and
             that
             .
          
           
             OS
             SPONGOIDES
             ,
             spongiosum
             or
             Spongiforme
             ,
             the
             spunge-like
             bone
             ,
             being
             seated
             in
             the
             middle
             basis
             of
             the
             Forehead
             ,
             and
             filling
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             is
             also
             called
             
               ethmoeïdes
               ,
               Cribriforme
            
             or
             Cribrosum
             ,
             the
             Seive-fashion'd
             bone
             :
             because
          
           
             It
             s
             inner
             side
             ,
             where
             it
             joyns
             to
             the
             Head
             ,
             is
             pierced
             through
             with
             many
             holes
             like
             a
             Sieve
             ,
             winding
             and
             turning
             ,
             but
             not
             streight
             ;
             and
             this
             part
             properly
             is
             ,
             and
             ought
             to
             be
             called
             Cribros●
             ,
             Sieve-fashion'd
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             in
             its
             middle
             a
             
               sharp
               Process
            
             ,
             resembling
             a
             
               Cocks
               comb
            
             ,
             by
             which
             as
             a
             Partition
             this
             bone
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             :
             And
             to
             this
             upper
             process
             another
             is
             opposed
             below
             ,
             distinguishing
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             where
             the
             outer
             part
             of
             this
             bone
             is
             ,
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             without
             the
             Skul
             ,
             being
             light
             and
             spungie
             ,
             and
             therefore
             there
             properly
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             also
             another
             part
             thin
             ,
             solid
             and
             smooth
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             a
             small
             portion
             whereof
             it
             constitutes
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             not
             a
             part
             of
             the
             upper
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             as
             Vesalius
             would
             have
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               spongie
               part
            
             is
             ,
             to
             alter
             the
             Air
             drawn
             in
             with
             Smels
             .
          
           
             The
             chief
             Use
             of
             the
             Sieve-fashion'd
             part
             is
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               To
               admit
               the
               Air
               for
               Animal
               spirits
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               the
               Species
               of
               odours
               may
               with
               the
               Air
               be
               carried
               to
               the
               mammillary
               processes
               ,
               the
               Organs
               of
               smelling
               ,
               which
               end
               into
               these
               holes
               .
               And
               therefore
               in
               the
               Disease
               Co●yza
               ,
               this
               bone
               being
               obstructed
               ,
               the
               smelling
               is
               lost
               .
            
          
           
             A
             secondary
             use
             ,
             is
             the
             purging
             of
             the
             Brain
             ▪
             for
             flegm
             is
             not
             only
             voided
             by
             the
             
               Glandul●
               pituitaria
            
             into
             the
             Palate
             ,
             but
             it
             drops
             down
             also
             into
             the
             
               Os
               cribrosum
            
             and
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             if
             the
             upper
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             so
             called
             ,
             do
             abound
             with
             too
             much
             Flegm
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             this
             Flux
             is
             preternatural
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               IX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Jaw
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Jaw-Bones
             are
             the
             foundations
             of
             the
             whole
             Face
             ,
             the
             upper
             above
             the
             mouth
             the
             lower
             beneath
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             upper
             ,
             which
             Celsus
             calls
             Mala
             ,
             is
             the
             boney
             part
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             comprehending
             the
             lower
             and
             lateral
             parts
             of
             the
             Eye-socket
             ,
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             the
             Cheeks
             ,
             the
             Palate
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             row
             of
             the
             upper
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             Jaw-bone
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             is
             shorter
             and
             rounder
             than
             in
             Brutes
             ,
             for
             Beauties
             sake
             ,
             also
             it
             is
             immoveable
             as
             it
             is
             in
             Beasts
             ,
             saving
             the
             Parrot
             ,
             the
             Phaenicopterus
             ,
             and
             the
             Crocodile
             as
             wel
             that
             which
             lives
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             as
             the
             Land-Crocodile
             ;
             yet
             do
             they
             not
             move
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             only
             ,
             but
             their
             whole
             Head
             withall
             being
             straitly
             fasten'd
             thereto
             ,
             as
             Vipers
             do
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             is
             to
             be
             said
             of
             the
             Parrot
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             in
             Mankind
             and
             other
             Creatures
             ,
             is
             only
             movable
             ,
             save
             in
             the
             Crocodile
             ,
             which
             hath
             it
             so
             united
             to
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             no
             waies
             be
             stirred
             ;
             but
             the
             Parrot
             moves
             both
             .
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             is
             without
             motion
             in
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             ,
             by
             a
             Suture
             or
             Harmonie
             whereby
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             many
             bones
             of
             its
             own
             ,
             of
             which
             it
             is
             composed
             ,
             and
             other
             bones
             placed
             round
             about
             ;
             in
             the
             lower
             by
             way
             of
             Sunchondrosis
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Chin.
             But
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             the
             Gristle
             is
             so
             turned
             into
             a
             Bone
             ,
             that
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             seems
             to
             be
             one
             only
             bone
             ,
             whereas
             before
             it
             consisted
             of
             two
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Brim
             or
             Circuit
             of
             each
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             which
             place
             Galen
             calls
             Ph●●●●an
             ,
             we
             meet
             with
             Cavities
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Teeth
             are
             fasten'd
             ,
             which
             Galen
             terms
             Bóthria
             ,
             the
             Latines
             
               Alveolos
               ,
               Loculos
               ,
               Fossulas
               ,
               Praesepiola
               ,
               Mortariola
               .
            
          
           
             These
             holes
             according
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             teeth
             in
             them
             ,
             are
             somtimes
             single
             ,
             otherwhiles
             threfold
             :
             somtimes
             they
             are
             obliterated
             and
             shut
             up
             ,
             the
             Teeth
             being
             fallen
             or
             pluckt
             out
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             breed
             anew
             ,
             by
             fresh
             Teeth
             breaking
             out
             .
             In
             old
             Age
             ,
             frequently
             these
             holes
             are
             obliterated
             ,
             the
             Teeth
             being
             lost
             ,
             and
             the
             Gums
             become
             sharper
             and
             harder
             ,
             so
             that
             old
             folks
             chew
             their
             meat
             with
             them
             instead
             of
             Teeth
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               X.
            
             Of
             the
             Bones
             proper
             to
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Bones
               proper
               to
               the
               upper
               Jaw
               ,
            
             are
             eleven
             on
             each
             side
             five
             ,
             and
             one
             without
             a
             fellow
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             being
             in
             a
             manner
             triangular
             ,
             doth
             make
             up
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             socket
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             the
             lesser
             Eye-corner
             ▪
             and
             part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               jugale
            
             and
             of
             the
             Cheek-bone
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             makes
             the
             greater
             Eye-corner
             where
             there
             is
             an
             hole
             which
             passes
             into
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             by
             which
             a
             Caruncle
             is
             placed
             .
          
           
             Here
             those
             Imposthumes
             are
             made
             which
             they
             call
             aegilopas
             ,
             which
             if
             they
             be
             unskilfully
             or
             negligently
             handled
             ,
             they
             pierce
             to
             the
             Bone
             ,
             and
             cause
             the
             
               Fistula
               Lachrymalis
            
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             a
             little
             Bone
             ,
             and
             the
             least
             among
             the
             upper
             Jaw-bones
             ,
             Thin
             ,
             Transparent
             ,
             Loosly
             ,
             Adhereing
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             is
             easily
             broken
             and
             lost
             :
             and
             therefore
             't
             is
             seldom
             found
             in
             Skuls
             dug
             out
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             a
             very
             great
             one
             ,
             by
             which
             are
             constituted
             the
             large
             region
             of
             the
             Palate
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             lower
             socket
             
             containing
             the
             Teeth
             .
             It
             hath
             large
             Cavities
             (
             and
             holes
             through
             which
             vessels
             pass
             )
             on
             both
             sides
             remarkable
             ,
             both
             for
             to
             make
             it
             lighter
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             might
             contain
             Marrow
             to
             nourish
             the
             Bones
             and
             the
             upper
             Teeth
             .
             Others
             say
             to
             help
             to
             frame
             the
             Voyce
             .
             In
             Children
             they
             are
             not
             hollowed
             til
             after
             some
             years
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             then
             cover'd
             with
             a
             very
             thin
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             with
             its
             companion
             ,
             doth
             constitute
             the
             upper
             and
             more
             eminent
             boney
             part
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             thin
             ,
             hard
             ,
             solid
             and
             quadrangular
             .
          
           
             And
             these
             two
             external
             bones
             of
             the
             Nose
             are
             divided
             with
             a
             Suture
             .
             Within
             they
             are
             rough
             ,
             that
             the
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Nose
             ,
             may
             be
             the
             better
             fastened
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             another
             inner
             bone
             (
             which
             is
             the
             third
             of
             the
             Nose
             )
             cleaving
             to
             the
             process
             of
             the
             
               Os
               spongiosum
            
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Septum
               narium
            
             because
             it
             distinguishes
             the
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               IV.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               the
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               Skul
               ,
               to
               be
               seen
               within
               and
               without
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Boards
                     of
                     the
                     Skull
                     with
                     the
                     marrowy
                     substance
                     between
                     them
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     in
                     the
                     Forehead
                     bone
                     ,
                     ending
                     into
                     the
                     wideness
                     of
                     the
                     Nostrils
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     cc.
                     
                     The
                     Os
                     Cribrosum
                     or
                     Sieve-like
                     bone
                     full
                     of
                     little
                     holes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     acute
                     process
                     resembling
                     a
                     Cocks
                     combe
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     inmore
                     and
                     foremore
                     processes
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     Sphaenoides
                     or
                     Cuneiforme
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     inner
                     and
                     hindermore
                     processes
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Bone.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     holes
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     bone
                     for
                     the
                     optick
                     Nerves
                     to
                     pass
                     out
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     cut
                     in
                     the
                     middle
                     of
                     the
                     Saddle
                     ,
                     wherein
                     the
                     Glandula
                     pituitaria
                     is
                     contained
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Another
                     cavity
                     where●●●●
                     the
                     conjunction
                     of
                     the
                     optick
                     Nerves
                     doth
                     rest
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     Shew
                     the
                     holes
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     cuneiforme
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     vessels
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     Shew
                     the
                     holes
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     cuneiforme
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     vessels
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     Shew
                     the
                     holes
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     cuneiforme
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     passage
                     of
                     the
                     vessels
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Processus
                     petrosus
                     of
                     the
                     Temples-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     oo
                     .
                     An
                     hole
                     in
                     the
                     said
                     process
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     Auditory
                     Nerve
                     to
                     pass
                     through
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     pp.
                     An
                     Additament
                     or
                     Appendix
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     Occipitis
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Q.
                   
                     The
                     greatest
                     hole
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     occipitis
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     spinal
                     marrow
                     passes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   RR.
                   
                     The
                     Cavities
                     of
                     the
                     Os
                     occipitis
                     within
                     the
                     Skull
                     ,
                     in
                     which
                     the
                     Cerebellum
                     or
                     Brainlet
                     rests
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     fift
                     bone
                     of
                     the
                     upper
                     Jaw
                     ,
                     distinguished
                     by
                     a
                     Suture
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     jugale
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     Holes
                     opening
                     into
                     the
                     wideness
                     of
                     the
                     Nostrils
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     partition
                     of
                     the
                     Nostril
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     eleventh
                     bone
                     of
                     the
                     upper
                     Jaw
                     ,
                     which
                  
                   Columbus
                   
                     cals
                     Aratrum
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     external
                     processes
                     of
                     Os
                     cuneiforme
                     ,
                     like
                     Bats
                     wings
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     gg
                     .
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     these
                     Processes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     the
                     Temple-bone
                     ,
                     receiving
                     the
                     Head
                     of
                     the
                     bower
                     Jawbone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     An
                     Additament
                     or
                     Appendix
                     to
                     the
                     Os
                     occipitis
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     processes
                     of
                     the
                     Temple-bones
                     ,
                     cal'd
                     Styloides
                     processus
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     mammillary
                     processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     Two
                     Heads
                     or
                     processes
                     at
                     the
                     Basis
                     of
                     Os
                     Occipitis
                     ,
                     whereby
                     it
                     is
                     articulated
                     into
                     the
                     first
                     Vertebra
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     The
                     greatest
                     hole
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     Bone.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     two
                     sides
                     of
                     Os
                     Occipitis
                     ,
                     furnished
                     with
                     divers
                     protuberancies
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             To
             these
             ten
             Columbus
             ads
             the
             eleventh
             ,
             like
             a
             Plough
             ,
             the
             inmost
             and
             middlemost
             above
             the
             Palate
             ,
             shutting
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             like
             a
             partition
             wall
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               lower
               Jaw-bone
            
             in
             grown
             persons
             ,
             consists
             of
             one
             Bone
             only
             ,
             in
             Children
             till
             seven
             year
             old
             of
             two
             ,
             which
             are
             joyned
             together
             by
             way
             of
             Sunchondrosis
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Greek
             letter
             u
             or
             like
             a
             Bow.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             exceeding
             hard
             and
             strong
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             hold
             out
             in
             biting
             and
             chewing
             ;
             within
             hollow
             ,
             where
             Marrow
             is
             contained
             to
             nourish
             it
             and
             the
             teeth
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             two
             Holes
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             which
             go
             quite
             through
             the
             Jaw-bone
             like
             a
             Pipe
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             bristle
             put
             in
             at
             one
             hole
             will
             come
             out
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             one
             is
             more
             inward
             ,
             hindermore
             and
             greater
             ,
             receiving
             in
             a
             part
             of
             those
             Nerves
             which
             we
             reckon
             to
             be
             the
             fift
             pare
             ,
             to
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             teeth
             ,
             with
             a
             little
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             is
             more
             outward
             ,
             less
             round
             ,
             by
             which
             a
             Branch
             of
             the
             foresaid
             Nerve
             received
             in
             ,
             is
             sent
             out
             to
             the
             lower
             Lip.
             
          
           
             It
             hath
             sundry
             Asperities
             and
             Cavities
             for
             the
             Risings
             and
             Insertions
             of
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Also
             on
             each
             side
             two
             Processes
             called
             Horns
             ,
             carried
             upwards
             .
          
           
             
               One
               goes
               out
               forwards
            
             broad
             and
             thin
             ,
             whose
             point
             or
             sharp
             end
             is
             called
             Corone
             ,
             into
             which
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Temporal
             Muscle
             is
             implanted
             .
             And
             therefore
             Hippocrates
             counts
             the
             Luxation
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw-bone
             deadly
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             hindermore
             ,
             is
             carried
             backwards
             ;
             representing
             a
             little
             bunch
             and
             is
             called
             condulodes
             ,
             having
             a
             little
             Head
             coverd
             with
             a
             gristly
             crust
             ,
             under
             which
             there
             is
             a
             longish
             Neck
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             Process
             the
             Articulation
             is
             made
             with
             the
             Temple
             bones
             ,
             where
             yet
             another
             Gristle
             is
             placed
             between
             the
             Cavity
             and
             the
             gristly
             head
             ,
             to
             facilitate
             the
             motion
             .
             Also
             a
             common
             membranous
             Ligament
             doth
             cover
             this
             Articulation
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Teeth
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             THe
             Teeth
             are
             called
             DENTES
             as
             if
             you
             would
             say
             Edentes
             ,
             Eaters
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             Greeks
             odontes
             as
             it
             were
             edôuntes
             Eaters
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             Bones
             properly
             so
             called
             ,
             hard
             and
             solid
             ,
             smooth
             and
             white
             ,
             like
             other
             Bones
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             some
             things
             peculiar
             which
             other
             bones
             have
             not
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             
             doth
             not
             exclude
             them
             from
             the
             number
             of
             Bones
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               They
               are
               harder
               than
               other
               Bones
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               bite
               and
               chew
               hard
               things
               ;
               and
               they
               are
               little
               less
               harder
               tha
               Stones
               ,
               nor
               can
               they
               easily
               be
               burnt
               in
               the
               Fire
               ,
               and
               whereas
               in
               the
               Sarcophagus
               or
               Flesh-eating
               Stone
               ,
               the
               whole
               body
               is
               consumed
               in
               forty
               daies
               ,
               the
               Teeth
               remain
               unimpaired
               ▪
               and
               therefore
               Tertullian
               writes
               that
               in
               them
               is
               the
               Seed
               of
               our
               future
               Resurrection
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Teeth
               are
               naked
               without
               any
               Periosteum
               ,
               least
               they
               should
               pain
               us
               when
               we
               chew
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Yet
               they
               have
               a
               Sense
               ,
               but
               more
               of
               the
               first
               than
               of
               the
               second
               Qualities
               ,
               and
               especially
               rather
               of
               what
               is
               cold
               than
               what
               is
               hot
               contrary
               to
               the
               Nature
               of
               flesh
               ,
               according
               to
               Hippocrates
               .
               and
               hence
               they
               are
               so
               an●
               to
               be
               set
               on
               edg
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               whole
               Tooth
               doth
               not
               feel
               of
               it self
               ,
               but
               the
               inner
               ,
               softer
               and
               more
               
               marrowy
               part
               ;
               which
               is
               covered
               over
               with
               an
               hard
               external
               part
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               pained
               ,
               neither
               by
               Fire
               ,
               nor
               Iron
               ,
               as
               in
               a
               Sword
               under
               the
               most
               hard
               rind
               of
               the
               Steel
               ,
               an
               Irony
               marrow
               less
               hard
               lies
               within
               ,
               and
               the
               Skin
               through
               the
               sensless
               Skars-skin
               doth
               feel
               ,
               so
               the
               inner
               part
               of
               the
               Tooth
               feels
               through
               the
               outmost
               ,
               into
               which
               inner
               part
               being
               hollow
               ,
               little
               soft
               Nerves
               enter
               and
               little
               cloathing
               Membranes
               .
               Hereupon
               a
               certain
               Nun
               at
               Padua
               causing
               a
               very
               long
               Tooth
               shee
               had
               above
               all
               the
               rest
               to
               be
               cut
               off
               to
               avoid
               the
               Deformity
               thereof
               ,
               shee
               presently
               fell
               down
               into
               a
               Convulsion
               and
               Epileptick
               fit
               .
               Now
               in
               the
               part
               of
               her
               Tooth
               which
               was
               cut
               off
               ,
               there
               appeared
               the
               tokens
               of
               a
               Nerve
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Hence
               ,
               they
               receive
               Nerves
               into
               their
               Cavity
               which
               other
               bones
               do
               not
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               They
               grow
               longer
               than
               any
               other
               of
               the
               Bones
               ,
               almost
               all
               a
               mans
               life
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               dayly
               worn
               ,
               by
               biting
               and
               grinding
               ;
               as
               
                 Gutta
                 cavat
                 lapidem
                 non
                 vi
                 sed
                 saepe
                 cadendo
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   hardest
                   Stone
                   a
                   dropping
                   House-Eve
                   hollows
                   ,
                
                 
                   Cause
                   drop
                   upon
                   drop
                   ,
                   drop
                   after
                   drop
                   still
                   follows
                   ,
                
                 
                   But
                   not
                   by
                   force
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             And
             look
             how
             much
             they
             wear
             away
             ,
             so
             much
             are
             they
             still
             augmented
             ▪
             which
             hence
             appears
             ;
             in
             that
             if
             any
             Tooth
             fall
             out
             and
             grow
             not
             again
             ,
             the
             opposite
             Tooth
             grows
             so
             much
             the
             longer
             ,
             as
             the
             empty
             space
             of
             the
             former
             Tooth
             comes
             to
             .
          
           
             Fallopius
             considering
             the
             praemises
             ,
             and
             how
             new
             Teeth
             are
             thought
             to
             breed
             ,
             he
             collects
             that
             the
             formative
             faculty
             remains
             alive
             in
             the
             Teeth
             to
             extream
             old
             age
             .
          
           
             Helmont
             counts
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Bone
             not
             to
             be
             meerly
             boney
             ,
             but
             as
             it
             were
             of
             a
             middle
             nature
             betwixt
             Bone
             and
             Stone
             ;
             because
             the
             Teeth
             turn
             to
             Stone
             whatever
             kind
             of
             food
             sticks
             long
             to
             them
             ,
             be
             it
             Bread
             ,
             Flesh
             ,
             Herbs
             ,
             Fish
             ,
             Apples
             ,
             Beans
             ,
             or
             Pease
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             there
             is
             no
             petrification
             or
             turning
             to
             Stone
             ,
             unless
             the
             things
             eaten
             be
             of
             a
             tartareous
             Nature
             ,
             but
             only
             a
             drying
             ,
             the
             moisture
             being
             consumed
             by
             the
             Spittle
             ;
             nor
             are
             the
             Teeth
             made
             bigger
             by
             that
             addition
             ,
             which
             somtimes
             is
             scraped
             off
             ,
             somtimes
             turne
             to
             clammy
             filth
             .
          
           
             The
             Teeth
             
               are
               bred
            
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             after
             
             the
             Generation
             of
             the
             Jaw-bones
             ,
             twelve
             in
             each
             Jaw
             ,
             or
             a
             few
             more
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             speak
             hereafter
             touching
             their
             number
             ,
             four
             Cutters
             ,
             two
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             six
             Grinders
             :
             which
             lie
             somwhat
             imperfect
             and
             concealed
             within
             the
             Jaws
             (
             for
             it
             is
             rare
             for
             an
             Infant
             to
             be
             born
             toothed
             )
             least
             the
             child
             as
             it
             sucks
             should
             hurt
             the
             Nipple
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             an
             Abortion
             ,
             or
             a
             young
             Infant
             ,
             small
             teeth
             may
             be
             pulled
             out
          
           
             They
             break
             out
             of
             the
             Gums
             sooner
             in
             Brutes
             (
             though
             Varro
             be
             otherwise
             minded
             as
             touching
             Horses
             )
             because
             they
             are
             sooner
             capable
             of
             solid
             meat
             ;
             in
             mankind
             at
             the
             seventh
             month
             or
             later
             ,
             after
             the
             Child
             is
             a
             year
             old
             :
             and
             the
             upper
             sooner
             than
             the
             lower
             ,
             yet
             in
             some
             the
             lowest
             first
             ,
             and
             among
             the
             rest
             ,
          
           
             The
             
               fore-teeth
               in
               the
               first
               place
            
             ,
             because
          
           
             
               1.
               
               They
               are
               most
               sharp
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               They
               are
               less
               then
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Because
               the
               Jaw-bone
               is
               there
               thinnest
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Because
               there
               is
               most
               need
               of
               them
               both
               to
               speak
               with
               and
               to
               cut
               and
               bite
               the
               meat
               .
            
          
           
             And
             at
             that
             time
             when
             the
             Teeth
             
             of
             Infants
             shoot
             forth
             ,
             Hippocrates
             tels
             us
             that
             Feavers
             ,
             Convulsions
             ,
             Fluxes
             of
             the
             Belly
             arise
             ,
             especially
             when
             the
             Dog-teeeth
             come
             forth
             :
             because
             when
             the
             Teeth
             make
             their
             way
             through
             the
             Gums
             ,
             they
             torment
             more
             than
             pricks
             in
             the
             Flesh
             .
          
           
             These
             Teeth
             have
             a
             Substance
             boney
             ,
             hard
             ,
             and
             hollow
             where
             they
             break
             out
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             hinder
             part
             they
             have
             a
             soft
             substance
             ,
             covered
             with
             a
             thin
             and
             transparent
             Membrane
             .
          
           
           
             And
             about
             the
             seventh
             and
             fourteenth
             yeer
             ,
             
               other
               Teeth
               are
               wont
               to
               break
               out
            
             (
             the
             
             former
             falling
             away
             )
             in
             both
             the
             Jaws
             ten
             ,
             four
             Cutters
             ,
             two
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             and
             four
             Grinders
             .
             And
             the
             former
             fall
             out
             in
             the
             fourth
             ,
             fift
             ,
             and
             sixt
             year
             .
             because
             the
             holes
             grow
             wider
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Teeth
             being
             at
             that
             time
             soft
             ,
             do
             grow
             loose
             and
             fall
             out
             .
             Nicephorus
             in
             his
             Interpretation
             of
             Dreams
             saies
             ,
             that
             for
             a
             man
             to
             dream
             he
             looses
             a
             Tooth
             another
             comes
             in
             the
             Rome
             ,
             betokens
             gain
             and
             unexpected
             Joy.
             If
             their
             Teeth
             do
             not
             shed
             ,
             the
             latter
             Teeth
             come
             out
             at
             new
             holes
             ,
             the
             upper
             commonly
             on
             the
             outside
             ,
             the
             lower
             on
             the
             inside
             ,
             as
             there
             were
             new
             ranks
             of
             Teeth
             .
             More
             frequently
             they
             spring
             out
             on
             the
             sides
             and
             augment
             the
             number
             .
          
           
             But
             these
             Teeth
             are
             not
             bred
             anew
             without
             the
             Womb
             :
             for
             then
             likewise
             
             Membranes
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Vessels
             and
             Ligaments
             might
             be
             bred
             anew
             :
             but
             the
             seeds
             of
             them
             lie
             within
             the
             Jaws
             .
             For
             Eustachius
             and
             Riolanus
             have
             observed
             some
             smaller
             Teeth
             at
             the
             back
             of
             the
             rest
             which
             fall
             out
             ,
             a
             very
             thin
             partition
             being
             removed
             which
             is
             found
             between
             the
             two
             sorts
             of
             Teeth
             .
             But
             a
             rare
             case
             it
             is
             for
             Teeth
             to
             breed
             again
             ,
             after
             many
             years
             and
             in
             old
             age
             .
             As
             Thuanus
             relates
             of
             a
             man
             that
             was
             an
             hundred
             yeer
             old
             :
             in
             our
             Fionia
             a
             man
             of
             an
             hundred
             and
             forty
             years
             of
             age
             ,
             had
             new
             Teeth
             .
             Helmont
             saw
             an
             old
             Man
             and
             Woman
             of
             sixty
             three
             yeers
             of
             age
             ,
             whose
             Teeth
             grew
             again
             with
             such
             pains
             as
             Children
             have
             when
             breed
             they
             teeth
             ,
             which
             was
             no
             token
             of
             their
             long
             living
             ,
             for
             both
             of
             them
             died
             that
             yeer
             .
             Sir
             
               Francis
               Bacon
            
             hath
             the
             like
             Example
             touching
             an
             old
             Man.
             
          
           
             But
             now
             let
             us
             speak
             of
             the
             Teeth
             in
             grown
             persons
             .
          
           
             The
             Teeth
             are
             seated
             in
             the
             Compass
             of
             the
             two
             Jaw-bones
             ,
             in
             Mankind
             ,
             shut
             up
             within
             his
             mouth
             ;
             in
             a
             Boar
             they
             stick
             out
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             Whale-fish
             cal'd
             Narhual
             in
             our
             Greenland
             ;
             which
             sends
             out
             an
             exceeding
             long
             wreathed
             Tooth
             ,
             ●ut
             of
             the
             left
             side
             of
             his
             upper
             Jaw
             ,
             which
             is
             commonly
             taken
             for
             the
             Unicorns
             horn
             ,
             and
             is
             yet
             of
             great
             value
             among
             Noble
             Men
             and
             Princes
             .
          
           
             In
             Magnitude
             they
             come
             short
             of
             the
             Teeth
             of
             other
             Animals
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             smallness
             of
             Mans
             mouth
             .
             And
             in
             Mankind
             some
             have
             greater
             ,
             others
             less
             .
          
           
             They
             vary
             in
             Figure
             .
             In
             Man
             they
             are
             of
             a
             threefold
             figure
             :
             Cutters
             ,
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             and
             Grinders
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             said
             in
             the
             following
             Chapter
             ;
             save
             that
             Fontanus
             observed
             in
             a
             certain
             Man
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             all
             Grinders
             which
             he
             had
             .
             In
             Creatures
             that
             
               chew
               the
               Cud
            
             they
             are
             double
             ;
             Cutters
             and
             Grinders
             .
             In
             Fishes
             they
             are
             in
             a
             manner
             all
             perfectly
             sharp
             ,
             excepting
             one
             kind
             of
             Whale
             ,
             which
             the
             Islanders
             call
             Springwall
             ,
             whose
             teeth
             are
             blunt
             ,
             but
             broad
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             is
             smooth
             and
             even
             .
          
           
             The
             Colour
             white
             ,
             and
             shining
             ,
             unless
             negligence
             ,
             Age
             ,
             or
             sickness
             hinder
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             is
             not
             the
             same
             in
             all
             Men
             ,
             for
             to
             let
             pass
             rarities
             ,
             viz.
             that
             some
             men
             are
             born
             with
             one
             continued
             tooth
             in
             their
             upper
             Jaw-bone
             (
             which
             they
             relate
             of
             Pyrrhus
             ,
             and
             a
             certain
             Groenlander
             brought
             hither
             in
             the
             Kings
             Ships
             )
             also
             of
             a
             double
             and
             tripple
             row
             of
             teeth
             ,
             such
             as
             I
             have
             seen
             in
             some
             Fishes
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             
               Lewis
               the
               thirteenth
            
             King
             of
             France
             had
             ,
             and
             which
             Solinus
             writes
             of
             Mantichora
             ,
             and
             is
             known
             of
             the
             Lamia
             ,
             which
             hath
             five
             ranks
             ,
             strangely
             ordered
             ,
             and
             among
             them
             exceeding
             sharp
             teeth
             ,
             resembling
             the
             stones
             called
             Glossopetrae
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Columna
             took
             the
             teeth
             of
             a
             Lamian
             turned
             to
             stone
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             Glossopetrae
             or
             precious
             Stones
             of
             Malta
             so
             called
             ,
             of
             which
             I
             have
             spoke
             elswhere
             .
             In
             a
             Sea-wolf
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             a
             double
             rank
             ,
             the
             former
             of
             sharp
             teeth
             ,
             the
             inner
             of
             grinders
             ,
             close
             joyned
             together
             ,
             which
             possess
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Palate
             .
             A
             man
             hath
             ordinarily
             but
             one
             rank
             in
             each
             Jaw-bone
             ,
             and
             
               twenty
               eight
            
             in
             all
             ,
             somtimes
             thirty
             ,
             in
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             sixteen
             ,
             in
             the
             lower
             fourteen
             ;
             but
             for
             the
             most
             part
             
               thirty
               two
            
             ,
             sixteen
             in
             each
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             But
             this
             number
             is
             seldom
             changed
             ,
             save
             in
             the
             grinders
             ,
             which
             somtimes
             are
             on
             each
             side
             five
             ,
             somtimes
             sour
             ;
             otherwhiles
             five
             above
             ,
             four
             beneath
             ,
             or
             five
             on
             the
             right
             ,
             and
             four
             on
             the
             left
             side
             ,
             or
             contrarily
             .
          
           
             A
             great
             number
             of
             teeth
             argues
             length
             
             of
             life
             ,
             few
             teeth
             a
             short
             life
             ,
             according
             to
             Galen
             and
             Hippocrates
             .
             And
             rightly
             .
             For
             the
             rarity
             and
             fewness
             of
             teeth
             is
             bad
             as
             a
             Sign
             and
             a
             Cause
             :
             for
             it
             argues
             want
             of
             matter
             ,
             and
             the
             weakness
             of
             the
             formative
             faculty
             .
             As
             a
             Cause
             :
             because
             few
             teeth
             cannot
             well
             prepare
             the
             meat
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             first
             digestion
             is
             hurt
             ,
             and
             consequently
             the
             second
             .
             But
             we
             must
             understand
             that
             this
             prediction
             holds
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             but
             not
             alwaies
             ,
             as
             Scaliger
             well
             disputes
             against
             Cardan
             in
             his
             271.
             
             Exercitation
             .
             For
             Augustus
             who
             lived
             seventy
             six
             years
             ,
             is
             said
             to
             have
             had
             thin
             ,
             few
             ,
             and
             scalie
             teeth
             ;
             and
             so
             likewise
             Forestus
             who
             lived
             above
             eighty
             years
             .
          
           
             Their
             Connexion
             is
             by
             way
             of
             Gomphosis
             ,
             for
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             fixed
             in
             their
             holes
             as
             nails
             in
             a
             post
             .
             Also
             they
             are
             tied
             by
             strong
             Bands
             unto
             their
             nests
             ,
             which
             bands
             stick
             to
             their
             roots
             ;
             and
             then
             the
             Gums
             compass
             them
             ,
             of
             which
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             
               outer
               Substance
            
             is
             more
             solid
             and
             hard
             ,
             not
             feeling
             ;
             the
             inner
             is
             a
             little
             more
             soft
             ,
             endued
             with
             sense
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             neighborhood
             of
             a
             Nerve
             and
             Membrane
             ,
             and
             hath
             in
             it
             a
             Cavity
             ,
             larger
             in
             Children
             then
             Elder
             persons
             ,
             and
             compassed
             about
             till
             they
             be
             seven
             years
             old
             ,
             with
             a
             
               thin
               Scale
            
             like
             the
             Combs
             of
             Bees
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             snotty
             matter
             ;
             in
             grown
             persons
             the
             humor
             being
             dried
             up
             ,
             it
             is
             diminished
             .
          
           
             This
             Cavity
             is
             cloathed
             with
             a
             
               little
               Membrane
            
             
             of
             exquisite
             Sense
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             imbibes
             some
             Humor
             flowing
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             extream
             Tooth-ach
             follows
             .
             In
             this
             begin
             Erosions
             ,
             Putrefactions
             ,
             and
             most
             painful
             Rottenness
             ;
             and
             herein
             somtimes
             grow
             the
             smallest
             sort
             of
             worms
             ,
             which
             exceedingly
             torment
             men
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             are
             carried
             to
             this
             Cavity
             ,
             by
             the
             holes
             of
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             As
             Veins
             to
             carry
             back
             the
             blood
             after
             nutrition
             and
             continual
             augmentation
             .
             Which
             are
             not
             seen
             so
             apparently
             in
             Mankind
             (
             as
             neither
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             
               adnata
               tunica
            
             of
             the
             Eyes
             )
             but
             they
             are
             manifestly
             seen
             in
             Oxen
             ,
             and
             are
             gathered
             from
             the
             sprinkling
             of
             blood
             in
             the
             Cavity
             .
          
           
             
               Little
               Arteries
            
             to
             afford
             Natural
             Heat
             and
             Blood
             for
             Nutrition
             and
             Alteration
             .
             And
             therefore
             upon
             an
             Inflamation
             ,
             a
             pulsative
             pain
             of
             the
             teeth
             is
             somtimes
             caused
             ▪
             which
             Galen
             experimented
             in
             himself
             .
             Hence
             much
             lightful
             ,
             shineing
             blood
             ,
             comes
             somtimes
             from
             a
             tooth
             that
             has
             an
             hole
             made
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             so
             as
             to
             cause
             death
             .
          
           
             
               Little
               Nerves
            
             tender
             and
             fine
             ,
             are
             carried
             to
             them
             from
             the
             first
             pare
             ,
             according
             as
             we
             reckon
             ,
             which
             go
             through
             the
             Roots
             into
             the
             Cavity
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             spred
             abroad
             within
             ,
             and
             by
             small
             twigs
             mingled
             with
             a
             certain
             mucilaginous
             Substance
             sound
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             teeth
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Teeth
          
           
             
               In
               the
               first
               and
               chiefest
               place
               ,
               is
               to
               chew
               and
               grinde
               the
               meat
               .
               And
               therefore
               such
               as
               have
               lost
               their
               teeth
               are
               fain
               to
               content
               themselves
               with
               suppings
               ;
               and
               therefore
               Nicephorus
               reckons
               that
               it
               is
               bad
               to
               dream
               of
               a
               mans
               teeth
               falling
               out
               ,
               and
               saies
               it
               signifies
               the
               loss
               of
               a
               Friend
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               They
               serve
               to
               form
               the
               voice
               (
               and
               therefore
               Children
               do
               not
               speak
               ,
               till
               their
               mouths
               are
               full
               of
               teeth
               )
               especially
               the
               fore
               teeth
               which
               help
               the
               framing
               of
               some
               certain
               Letters
               .
               Hence
               those
               that
               have
               lost
               their
               teeth
               ,
               cannot
               pronounce
               some
               Letters
               ,
               as
               for
               Example
               T.
               and
               R.
               in
               the
               speaking
               whereof
               ,
               the
               tongue
               
               being
               widened
               ,
               ●ought
               to
               rest
               upon
               the
               fore-teeth
               .
               Also
               the
               loss
               of
               the
               grinders
               hurts
               the
               Explication
               or
               plain
               Expression
               of
               the
               Words
               ,
               according
               to
               Galen
               ,
               
               so
               that
               the
               Speech
               becomes
               slower
               ,
               and
               less
               clear
               and
               easie
               .
               Let
               therefore
               such
               as
               have
               lost
               their
               teeth
               ,
               procure
               artificial
               ones
               to
               be
               set
               in
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               golden
               wire
               to
               be
               firmly
               fastned
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               Ornament
               .
               For
               such
               as
               want
               their
               teeth
               are
               thereby
               deformed
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Homer
               conceives
               the
               teeth
               are
               an
               edg
               to
               the
               tongue
               and
               Speech
               ,
               to
               keep
               in
               a
               mans
               words
               ,
               and
               prevent
               prating
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               In
               Brutes
               they
               serve
               to
               fight
               withal
               ,
               in
               which
               case
               a
               man
               uses
               his
               hands
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               In
               the
               said
               Brutes
               ,
               also
               to
               shew
               their
               Age.
               For
               the
               Age
               of
               an
               Horse
               is
               known
               ,
               by
               looking
               into
               his
               Mouth
               ,
               where
               before
               he
               is
               four
               years
               old
               that
               tooth
               to
               be
               seen
               which
               they
               term
               Gnomon
               ,
               when
               he
               is
               four
               year
               old
               ,
               there
               is
               another
               tooth
               seen
               with
               an
               hole
               in
               it
               that
               will
               hold
               a
               Pease
               ,
               which
               every
               year
               grows
               less
               and
               less
               ,
               till
               at
               eight
               years
               the
               tooth
               is
               filled
               up
               ,
               becomes
               smooth
               ,
               and
               no
               hole
               to
               be
               seen
               therein
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Teeth
             in
             Particular
             .
          
           
             IN
             respect
             of
             their
             threefold
             Shape
             ,
             their
             Situation
             ,
             and
             Office
             ,
             there
             are
             in
             Mankind
             
               three
               sort
            
             of
             Teeth
             :
             The
             Fore-teeth
             ,
             the
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             and
             the
             Grinders
             .
          
           
             The
             Fore-teeth
             ,
             from
             their
             Office
             which
             is
             to
             cut
             the
             meat
             ,
             are
             termed
             Incisores
             and
             
               Incisorij
               Cutters
            
             ,
             also
             Gelásinoi
             the
             laughing
             teeth
             ,
             because
             in
             laughing
             they
             are
             first
             discovered
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             placed
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             in
             each
             Jaw
             four
             (
             some
             have
             only
             two
             in
             a
             Jaw
             ,
             as
             large
             as
             four
             )
             broad
             and
             sharp
             like
             Swords
             ,
             shorter
             then
             the
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             and
             fixed
             in
             their
             Sockets
             with
             single
             Roots
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             fall
             the
             sooner
             out
             ,
             especially
             the
             uppermore
             .
             After
             these
             follow
             on
             either
             side
          
           
             The
             Dog-teeth
             ,
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             of
             their
             sharpness
             ,
             hardness
             ,
             and
             use
             ;
             for
             what
             the
             former
             cannot
             cut
             these
             do
             bruise
             and
             grind
             .
             They
             are
             commonly
             termed
             the
             Eye-teeth
             ,
             not
             as
             some
             think
             ,
             because
             they
             do
             almost
             touch
             the
             circumference
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             seeing
             they
             hardly
             reach
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             L●ps
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             ,
             but
             because
             a
             portion
             of
             that
             Nerve
             which
             moves
             the
             Eye
             ,
             is
             carried
             unto
             them
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             deeply
             rooted
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             counted
             dangerous
             to
             draw
             them
             ,
             also
             when
             they
             are
             pained
             ,
             the
             Eye-lids
             do
             pant
             a
             little
             .
          
           
             These
             teeth
             are
             two
             in
             each
             Jaw
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             broad
             and
             thick
             in
             their
             basis
             ,
             and
             
             sharp
             above
             .
             For
             a
             Man
             did
             not
             need
             many
             of
             these
             kind
             of
             teeth
             ,
             seeing
             he
             is
             a
             gentle
             Creature
             ,
             and
             hath
             hands
             to
             defend
             and
             offend
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             fastned
             with
             simple
             Roots
             as
             the
             Fore-teeth
             are
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             more
             deeply
             and
             firmly
             rooted
             :
             for
             their
             Roots
             exceed
             all
             the
             other
             teeth
             in
             depth
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             longer
             then
             the
             upper
             teeth
             .
          
           
             The
             remaining
             hindermore
             teeth
             are
             called
             Molares
             ,
             both
             from
             their
             shape
             resembling
             Mill-stones
             and
             their
             use
             ,
             because
             they
             grind
             the
             meat
             after
             it
             is
             cut
             ,
             they
             are
             rough
             and
             great
             ,
             hard
             and
             broad
             .
             The
             Germans
             call
             them
             the
             Cheek-teeth
             .
          
           
             In
             men
             they
             are
             
               more
               in
               number
            
             then
             the
             Cutters
             ;
             but
             the
             contrary
             holds
             in
             fierce
             Beasts
             ,
             which
             use
             their
             sharp
             also
             to
             fight
             with
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             commonly
             twenty
             ,
             on
             each
             hand
             in
             both
             the
             Jaws
             sive
             ,
             although
             the
             number
             varies
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             beor
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             last
             of
             these
             are
             termed
             
               Dentes
               Sapientiae
            
             ,
             the
             Teeth
             of
             Wisedom
             ,
             also
             the
             teeth
             of
             Sense
             and
             Understanding
             ,
             because
             they
             do
             then
             first
             break
             out
             (
             somtimes
             with
             very
             great
             pains
             ,
             and
             otherwailes
             without
             any
             pain
             )
             when
             men
             begin
             to
             be
             wise
             ,
             about
             the
             twenty
             eighth
             or
             thirtieth
             year
             of
             their
             Age
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             when
             they
             are
             very
             old
             ;
             Aristotle
             saw
             them
             break
             out
             in
             some
             when
             they
             were
             fourscore
             ,
             and
             Walaeus
             at
             the
             Age
             of
             eighty
             three
             years
             .
             Somtimes
             they
             hardly
             appear
             ,
             and
             otherwhiles
             they
             are
             scarce
             created
             ;
             the
             Latins
             call
             them
             Genuinos
             .
          
           
             These
             Teeth
             are
             fastned
             by
             divers
             roots
             ,
             
             either
             two
             and
             three
             ,
             as
             the
             lower
             Jaw-teeth
             ,
             or
             with
             three
             and
             four
             ,
             as
             the
             upper
             Jaw-teeth
             ,
             which
             have
             more
             roots
             then
             the
             other
             :
             Because
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               They
               hang
               of
               themselves
               ,
               otherwise
               then
               the
               lower
               teeth
               which
               are
               fastned
               partly
               by
               their
               own
               heaviness
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Because
               the
               Substance
               of
               the
               upper
               Jaw
               is
               more
               rare
               and
               soft
               .
            
          
           
             And
             so
             much
             for
             the
             first
             part
             of
             the
             
             Skeleton
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Head
             :
             Now
             follows
             the
             second
             Part
             ,
             or
             Trunk
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               14.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Back-bone
             and
             its
             Vertebra's
             in
             General
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Trunk
             or
             other
             Part
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             ,
             all
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back-bone
             are
             to
             be
             examined
             ,
             also
             the
             
               Ossa
               Ischij
            
             ,
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             the
             Chennel-bones
             ,
             and
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             .
          
           
             All
             that
             is
             termed
             the
             Spina
             or
             Back-bone
             ,
             
             which
             reaches
             from
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             to
             the
             
               Os
               coccygis
            
             ,
             or
             Crupper-bone
             .
             It
             is
             called
             Spina
             the
             Thorn
             ,
             because
             the
             ●inder
             part
             therof
             is
             all
             along
             sharp-pointed
             like
             a
             thorn
             branch
             .
          
           
             The
             Parts
             of
             the
             Spine
             or
             Back-bone
             are
             termed
             Sponduloi
             in
             Greek
             ,
             in
             Latin
             
               Vertebrae
               Whirl-bones
            
             ,
             or
             Turningbones
             ,
             because
             by
             means
             of
             them
             the
             Body
             is
             turned
             several
             waies
             .
          
           
             And
             these
             Bones
             of
             the
             Spina
             are
             divided
             into
             seven
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             twelve
             of
             the
             Back
             ;
             five
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             five
             or
             fix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             ;
             to
             which
             is
             added
             the
             Crupper-bone
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Vertebrae
             are
             hollowed
             ,
             to
             contain
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             they
             were
             to
             be
             many
             ,
             not
             one
             ,
             both
             for
             Motion
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             made
             forward
             and
             backward
             ;
             also
             that
             the
             hurting
             of
             one
             might
             not
             draw
             the
             whole
             Spine
             into
             consent
             .
             The
             Father
             of
             
               Nic.
               Fontanus
            
             saw
             five
             Vertebrae
             or
             Whirle-bones
             of
             the
             Spina
             in
             a
             cluster
             like
             a
             round
             ball
             ,
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             a
             Porter
             that
             carried
             burthens
             .
             And
             Pavius
             hath
             observed
             that
             in
             decrepit
             old
             people
             these
             Vertebrae
             grow
             together
             into
             one
             ,
             the
             moisture
             being
             dried
             up
             ,
             and
             the
             intermediate
             Ligaments
             hardned
             ,
             which
             he
             represents
             by
             a
             Picture
             .
             Tulpius
             saw
             the
             Back-bone
             in
             a
             Boy
             divided
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             and
             Salmuth
             hath
             seen
             it
             broke
             asunder
             in
             persons
             that
             were
             hanged
             .
          
           
             The
             Figure
             of
             the
             whole
             Back
             is
             ,
             that
             somtimes
             it
             inclines
             inwards
             ,
             as
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             to
             sustain
             the
             Gullet
             and
             aspera
             Arteria
             ;
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             for
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             and
             the
             Cava
             descending
             .
             
               Somtimes
               outwards
            
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             of
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             ;
             that
             there
             may
             be
             a
             larger
             space
             for
             the
             Heart
             ,
             Lungs
             ,
             Bladder
             ,
             Fundament
             and
             Womb.
             
          
           
             And
             these
             Parts
             do
             bend
             more
             outwards
             in
             Women
             ,
             for
             the
             sake
             of
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             Figure
             of
             each
             Vertebra
             above
             and
             beneath
             ,
             is
             plane
             and
             broad
             ,
             that
             luxation
             may
             not
             easily
             be
             caused
             ,
             round
             within
             ,
             convex
             and
             bunching
             out
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             neck
             broader
             and
             more
             even
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Wezand
             and
             Gullet
             resting
             thereupon
             .
             On
             the
             outer
             or
             Back-point
             ,
             the
             Vertebrae
             are
             furnished
             with
             many
             prominencies
             .
          
           
             For
             there
             are
             three
             kind
             of
             Processes
             in
             every
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             
             
               I.
               
                 Four
                 oblique
                 ones
              
               ,
               two
               on
               the
               upper
               part
               ascending
               ,
               two
               in
               the
               neither
               part
               descending
               .
            
             
               II.
               
                 Two
                 transverse
              
               ,
               for
               the
               Original
               and
               Insertion
               of
               the
               Muscles
               .
               And
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               broad
               and
               bored
               through
               ;
               in
               the
               Back
               thick
               ,
               solid
               and
               round
               ,
               excepting
               the
               eleventh
               and
               twelfth
               .
            
             
               III.
               
                 One
                 sharp
                 one
              
               ,
               in
               the
               hinder
               part
               ,
               which
               is
               properly
               called
               the
               Spine
               or
               Thorn
               ,
               and
               is
               wanting
               in
               the
               first
               Vertebra
               .
            
          
           
             They
             have
             five
             Appendixes
             .
             Two
             above
             and
             beneath
             at
             their
             Body
             ;
             as
             many
             at
             their
             transverse
             Processes
             ,
             and
             one
             at
             the
             extremity
             of
             the
             Spine
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             a
             most
             wide
             hole
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             each
             Vertebra
             for
             to
             keep
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             in
             .
             Also
             there
             are
             other
             holes
             in
             the
             sides
             ,
             which
             are
             lesser
             ,
             to
             let
             the
             nerves
             out
             ,
             which
             
               John
               Leonicenus
            
             affirm
             to
             go
             out
             only
             at
             the
             joyntings
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             each
             Vertebra
             ,
             is
             thicker
             and
             more
             spungie
             in
             the
             inside
             :
             to
             which
             grow
             the
             Epiphyses
             and
             Gristles
             .
             For
             the
             extream
             Parts
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             excepting
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             are
             furnished
             with
             Appendixes
             ,
             between
             which
             there
             come
             thick
             and
             soft
             Gristles
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             more
             easily
             moved
             ;
             so
             that
             above
             and
             beneath
             ,
             they
             have
             Gristles
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             are
             harder
             and
             drier
             ,
             because
             this
             Bone
             is
             immoveable
             .
          
           
             The
             Vertebrae
             are
             
               knit
               together
            
             by
             Articulation
             in
             the
             hinder
             part
             ,
             viz.
             by
             the
             way
             of
             Ginglumos
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             fore
             part
             by
             way
             of
             Symphysis
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             very
             strong
             Ligaments
             or
             Bands
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             are
             twofold
             .
          
           
             Some
             do
             knit
             the
             Vertebrae
             above
             and
             beneath
             ,
             and
             are
             shaped
             like
             the
             half
             Moon
             ,
             thick
             ,
             strong
             ,
             fibrous
             ,
             and
             snottie
             .
          
           
             Others
             arise
             from
             the
             Epiphyses
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             transverse
             as
             the
             sharp
             ones
             ,
             which
             are
             membranous
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Processes
             are
             more
             strongly
             tied
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XV.
            
             Of
             the
             Vertebroe
             or
             Whirl-bones
             of
             the
             Back
             in
             Particular
          
           
             THe
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             are
             commonly
             seven
             .
             In
             Brutes
             for
             the
             most
             part
             six
             only
             ,
             and
             Busbequius
             relates
             that
             the
             Hyena
             hath
             none
             ,
             who
             is
             confuted
             by
             the
             Skeleton
             of
             that
             Beast
             in
             the
             custody
             of
             
               P.
               Castellus
            
             .
             These
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             have
             some
             Peculiarities
             ,
             whereby
             they
             differ
             from
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Some
               of
               them
               have
               their
               transverse
               Processes
               cleft
               in
               two
               .
            
             
               II.
               Also
               they
               have
               them
               bored
               ,
               for
               the
               cervical
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               ,
               ascending
               into
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               III.
               They
               have
               a
               cloven
               Spine
               or
               thorny
               Point
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               two
               first
            
             are
             joyned
             by
             Ligaments
             to
             the
             hinder-part
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             stick
             most
             close
             to
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             have
             somwhat
             peculiar
             to
             themselves
             ,
             which
             the
             other
             five
             have
             not
             .
          
           
             I.
             Is
             termed
             Atlas
             ,
             because
             it
             seems
             to
             bear
             the
             Head
             up
             ,
             which
             rests
             upon
             the
             
             two
             hollows
             thereof
             .
             Some
             call
             it
             Epistropheus
             ,
             though
             more
             give
             that
             Name
             to
             the
             second
             .
             It
             
               hath
               no
               Spine
            
             or
             
               sharp
               Point
            
             ,
             least
             the
             two
             small
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head
             which
             arise
             from
             the
             second
             Vertebra
             ,
             should
             be
             hurt
             when
             the
             Head
             is
             stretched
             out
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             a
             thinner
             ,
             but
             more
             compact
             Substance
             .
             It
             receives
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             received
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             hath
             its
             Cavity
             covered
             with
             a
             Cartilage
             ,
             to
             receive
             the
             tooth
             of
             the
             following
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             II.
             Is
             called
             Epistropheus
             from
             turning
             :
             for
             out
             of
             the
             middle
             of
             its
             Body
             ,
             there
             rises
             an
             Appendix
             (
             others
             call
             it
             a
             Process
             )
             round
             and
             oblong
             ,
             like
             a
             Dogs
             tooth
             ,
             about
             which
             the
             Head
             with
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             is
             turned
             .
          
           
             Hence
             that
             Appendix
             is
             called
             a
             tooth
             ;
             yea
             and
             the
             whole
             Vertebra
             is
             by
             Hippoerates
             
             so
             called
             ,
             by
             the
             Luxation
             whereof
             ,
             he
             conceives
             an
             incurable
             Squinzie
             ,
             is
             often
             caused
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             of
             the
             Tooth
             is
             in
             some
             sort
             rough
             ,
             because
             thence
             proceeds
             the
             Ligament
             ,
             wherby
             it
             is
             bound
             to
             the
             Occiput
             or
             hind-part
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             about
             which
             also
             is
             wound
             a
             solid
             and
             round
             Ligament
             ,
             like
             a
             Nerve
             in
             shape
             ,
             wonderous
             artificially
             twisted
             ,
             that
             the
             Marrow
             may
             not
             be
             compressed
             and
             hurt
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             second
             Vertebra
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             first
             ,
             by
             a
             broad
             Ligament
             ,
             turned
             round
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             does
             more
             agree
             with
             the
             Vertebra's
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             hath
             its
             last
             Process
             not
             alwaies
             cloven
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
            
             are
             commonly
             twelve
             in
             number
             ;
             to
             which
             so
             many
             Ribs
             on
             each
             side
             are
             articulated
             :
             seldom
             one
             is
             wanting
             ;
             and
             there
             is
             seldomer
             one
             more
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             thicker
             then
             those
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             less
             solid
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             little
             holes
             ,
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             nourishing
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Is
               by
               the
               Ancients
               called
               Liphiá
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               higher
               ,
               and
               sticks
               out
               more
               then
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               II.
               Is
               termed
               Maschalister
               Axillaris
               the
               Arm-pit
               Vertebra
               .
            
          
           
             The
             rest
             are
             called
             Costales
             the
             Rib-vertebrae
             .
          
           
             The
             eleventh
             is
             termed
             Arrhep●s
             ,
             because
             the
             Spine
             or
             sharp
             point
             thereof
             is
             straight
             .
          
           
             The
             twelfth
             is
             called
             Diazostér
             the
             Girder
             .
          
           
             The
             five
             of
             the
             Loins
             are
             the
             thickest
             and
             greatest
             ,
             being
             full
             of
             little
             holes
             ,
             whose
             motion
             is
             looser
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             more
             easily
             stoop
             to
             the
             ground
             .
          
           
             The
             transverse
             Processes
             are
             longer
             ,
             but
             thinner
             ,
             excepting
             the
             first
             and
             fift
             ;
             but
             the
             Spines
             are
             thicker
             and
             broader
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Muscles
             and
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Back
             are
             fastned
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Is
             termed
             Nephrites
             ,
             from
             the
             Kidneys
             which
             re●
             thereupon
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             ,
             is
             by
             some
             called
             Asphalites
             ,
             the
             stablisher
             or
             underpropper
             .
          
           
             The
             rest
             agree
             with
             the
             others
             aforesaid
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Os
               sacrum
            
             or
             
               holy
               Bone
            
             follows
             ,
             so
             
             called
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             biggest
             of
             the
             Spine
             or
             Back-bone
             ,
             for
             the
             Ancients
             termed
             that
             which
             was
             great
             ,
             Sacred
             .
             Or
             because
             it
             lieth
             under
             the
             obscaene
             or
             privy
             Parts
             ,
             which
             Nature
             herself
             covers
             and
             hides
             :
             For
             Sacrum
             did
             also
             signifie
             execrable
             ,
             as
             Servius
             shews
             from
             Petronius
             ,
             commenting
             upon
             that
             Expression
             of
             
               Virgil
               ;
               Auri
               sacra
               fames
            
             :
             the
             cursed
             thirst
             of
             Gold.
             
          
           
             It
             is
             broad
             and
             immoveable
             ,
             being
             the
             Basis
             or
             Foundation
             of
             the
             Back
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             commonly
             triangular
             .
             It
             is
             in
             its
             fore-part
             hollow
             ,
             smooth
             and
             even
             ;
             behind
             it
             is
             bunching
             and
             rough
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vertebrae
             so
             called
             ,
             not
             in
             regard
             
             of
             use
             but
             similitude
             ,
             are
             five
             ,
             somtimes
             six
             ,
             in
             young
             Children
             easily
             separable
             ,
             in
             grown
             persons
             so
             glewed
             together
             ,
             that
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             but
             one
             Bone.
             
               Solomon
               Albertus
            
             and
             Pavius
             have
             somtimes
             observed
             them
             to
             be
             seven
             in
             Number
             .
          
           
             Galen
             makes
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             to
             consist
             of
             three
             Bones
             ;
             because
             he
             comprehends
             the
             other
             Bones
             of
             Os
             sacrum
             under
             the
             Crupper-bone
             ,
             and
             calls
             that
             an
             Epiphysis
             ,
             which
             others
             call
             
               Os
               Coccygis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Holes
             are
             not
             in
             its
             sides
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             fore-part
             (
             which
             are
             greater
             ,
             because
             there
             are
             greater
             Nerves
             )
             and
             the
             hinder-part
             :
             because
             at
             the
             sides
             in
             the
             Os
             Ilion
             or
             Flank-bone
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             three
             upper
             Cavities
             are
             engraven
             ,
             where
             the
             
               Ossa
               Ilij
            
             cleave
             ●o
             it
             .
          
           
           
             OS
             COCCYGIS
             the
             Cockow-bone
             ,
             so
             called
             from
             the
             Shape
             it
             hath
             of
             a
             Cuckows-bill
             ,
             is
             under
             the
             former
             ,
             consisting
             of
             three
             or
             four
             Bones
             ,
             and
             two
             Gristles
             .
             But
             I
             conceive
             there
             was
             a
             greater
             number
             of
             Bones
             and
             Gristles
             in
             that
             Danish
             Boy
             ,
             who
             had
             a
             Tail
             growing
             out
             at
             his
             Rump
             .
          
           
             Their
             Connexion
             is
             loose
             ,
             and
             in
             Women
             looser
             then
             in
             Men
             ,
             that
             they
             
             may
             give
             way
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             In
             the
             Voidance
             of
             large
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             In
             the
             time
             of
             Womens
             Travel
             ,
             that
             the
             cavity
             may
             be
             more
             wide
             .
             And
             therefore
             some
             conceive
             that
             this
             Bone
             only
             gives
             way
             in
             the
             Birth
             ,
             though
             Pinaeus
             be
             against
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Pains
             of
             Women
             in
             Travel
             depend
             upon
             the
             Concourse
             of
             little
             Nerves
             in
             that
             place
             .
             Afterwards
             in
             sitting
             it
             comes
             forwards
             ,
             and
             of
             its
             own
             accord
             returns
             into
             its
             place
             .
          
           
             This
             Bone
             in
             Men
             bends
             more
             inward
             to
             sustain
             the
             Intestinum
             rectum
             ;
             in
             Women
             outwards
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Cavity
             might
             be
             wider
             .
          
           
             This
             Bone
             being
             hurt
             or
             broken
             ,
             exceeding
             great
             ,
             pains
             are
             raised
             ,
             as
             the
             Stories
             related
             by
             Amatus
             and
             Donatus
             ,
             do
             witness
             .
             Hofman
             believes
             it
             is
             of
             no
             use
             ,
             but
             is
             only
             the
             mark
             of
             a
             tail
             ,
             as
             the
             Nipples
             in
             Men
             are
             only
             the
             signs
             or
             marks
             of
             Duggs
             .
             But
             the
             constant
             Doctrine
             of
             Galen
             is
             ,
             that
             all
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             are
             made
             for
             some
             Use
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               16.
            
             
             Of
             the
             Nameless
             Bone
             ,
             or
             Os
             Innominatum
             .
          
           
             THe
             OS
             INNOMINATUM
             or
             NAMELESS
             BONE
             ,
             which
             some
             term
             OS
             COXAE
             or
             ILIUM
             ,
             the
             Flank-bone
             ,
             consists
             of
             
               three
               Bones
               ,
               Ilium
               ,
               Pubis
               ,
            
             and
             Ischium
             joyned
             together
             by
             Gristles
             ,
             till
             the
             seventh
             year
             it
             appears
             distinguished
             by
             a
             threefold
             Line
             ,
             but
             in
             grown
             persons
             t
             is
             one
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Os
               Ilion
            
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             it
             contains
             the
             Gut
             Ilium
             ,
             is
             the
             first
             part
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             uppermore
             and
             broadest
             ,
             knit
             to
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             ,
             by
             a
             common
             membranous
             and
             most
             strong
             Ligament
             ,
             although
             a
             Gristle
             also
             comes
             between
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             semicircular
             and
             uneven
             Circumference
             ,
             is
             termed
             
               Spina
               Ossis
               Ilij
            
             ,
             whose
             inner
             part
             hollow
             and
             broad
             ,
             is
             termed
             Costa
             ,
             the
             Rib
             ;
             the
             outer
             part
             formed
             with
             unequal
             Lines
             ,
             is
             termed
             Dorsum
             ,
             the
             Back
             .
          
           
             This
             Bone
             is
             larger
             in
             Women
             ,
             and
             its
             Spine
             is
             drawn
             more
             out
             sidewaies
             ,
             that
             
             the
             Womb
             of
             a
             Woman
             with
             Child
             may
             better
             rest
             upon
             it
             .
             And
             therefore
             women
             with
             Child
             do
             a
             little
             complain
             of
             this
             Part
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             pulled
             asunder
             from
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             and
             other
             neighbouring
             Parts
             to
             which
             it
             cleaves
             .
          
           
             
               Os
               pubis
            
             or
             Pectinis
             ,
             the
             Share-bone
             ,
             is
             the
             second
             middlemore
             and
             foremore
             
             Part
             ;
             which
             Bone
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Sunchondrosis
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             a
             gristle
             coming
             between
             ;
             which
             in
             Women
             is
             twice
             as
             thick
             and
             loose
             or
             wide
             as
             in
             Men
             ,
             that
             these
             Bones
             in
             Child-birth
             may
             be
             (
             not
             dislocated
             or
             disjoynted
             ,
             but
             )
             loosned
             and
             made
             to
             gape
             ,
             when
             the
             Child
             strives
             to
             come
             forth
             .
             But
             now
             and
             then
             when
             the
             Childs
             greatness
             ,
             or
             the
             narrowness
             of
             the
             place
             requires
             ,
             the
             Share-bones
             are
             pulled
             asunder
             ,
             as
             ,
             besides
             the
             Authority
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             Paraeus
             and
             Riolanus
             have
             observed
             in
             the
             Dissections
             of
             Childing-women
             ,
             &c.
             and
             it
             is
             largely
             proved
             in
             the
             Anatomical
             Controversies
             of
             my
             
               Father
               Bartholinus
            
             :
             But
             this
             is
             not
             alwaies
             so
             ,
             namely
             when
             the
             Child
             is
             soft
             and
             apt
             to
             bend
             it self
             and
             comply
             with
             the
             straitness
             of
             the
             place
             when
             the
             way
             is
             slippery
             ,
             the
             Bones
             much
             widened
             ,
             &c.
             for
             then
             the
             loosning
             of
             the
             Gristle
             does
             suffice
             .
          
           
             But
             whether
             the
             Share-bones
             are
             moved
             is
             another
             question
             .
             
               Joh.
               Cajus
            
             affirms
             they
             are
             moved
             by
             help
             of
             the
             right
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
             Spigelius
             also
             saies
             they
             are
             moved
             after
             a
             peculiar
             manner
             upwards
             ,
             whiles
             the
             Body
             roules
             in
             the
             bed
             ,
             the
             Legs
             being
             lifted
             upwards
             Riolanus
             proves
             that
             the
             Share-bones
             are
             moved
             ,
             not
             alone
             ,
             but
             with
             the
             Hip-bone
             ,
             by
             help
             of
             the
             same
             Muscles
             ,
             this
             I
             say
             he
             proves
             by
             the
             Venereal
             Embracements
             ,
             in
             which
             these
             Parts
             are
             moved
             ;
             by
             the
             going
             of
             such
             whose
             Legs
             are
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             lastly
             by
             dancing
             .
          
           
             But
             some
             doubts
             do
             as
             yet
             make
             me
             scruple
             this
             Motion
             .
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Because
               Cajus
               himself
               confesses
               ,
               that
               the
               Share-bones
               (
               I
               add
               the
               rest
               )
               are
               not
               moved
               of
               their
               own
               Nature
               ,
               but
               by
               the
               bending
               of
               the
               Back-bone
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               These
               Bones
               being
               joyned
               together
               by
               Symphysis
               ,
               can
               have
               no
               motion
               ,
               which
               Riolanus
               himself
               confesses
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               I
               have
               assigned
               another
               Use
               for
               the
               right
               Muscles
               ,
               above
               in
               Book
               the
               first
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               These
               seeming
               Motions
               of
               the
               Bones
               ,
               are
               not
               proper
               to
               them
               ,
               but
               are
               motions
               of
               the
               Thigh
               or
               Back
               ,
               whose
               motion
               they
               follow
               .
               For
               in
               the
               Examples
               alleadged
               ,
               any
               man
               may
               experiment
               in
               himself
               ,
               that
               both
               his
               Thighs
               and
               Back
               are
               moved
               ;
               also
               he
               may
               by
               his
               hand
               perceive
               ,
               that
               both
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thigh
               called
               Glutaei
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               adjacent
               Muscles
               are
               moved
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               They
               ought
               to
               be
               immoveable
               ,
               because
               the
               upper
               Parts
               rest
               upon
               them
               as
               on
               a
               Foundation
               ,
               and
               we
               rest
               by
               sitting
               upon
               this
               Part.
               
            
          
           
             In
             Women
             that
             have
             been
             lately
             delivered
             ,
             these
             bones
             may
             be
             separated
             with
             the
             back
             of
             a
             thin
             knife
             ,
             which
             they
             cannot
             be
             in
             others
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             though
             the
             Share-bones
             are
             joyned
             by
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             yet
             they
             have
             likewise
             two
          
           
             Ligaments
             1.
             compasses
             them
             about
             circularly
             .
             2.
             
             Is
             membranous
             ,
             which
             possesses
             the
             hole
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             thin
             ,
             and
             for
             highness
             sake
             
             furnished
             with
             very
             great
             Holes
             ,
             which
             in
             women
             are
             more
             large
             and
             capacious
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Womb
             and
             Child
             ,
             for
             the
             inner
             and
             lower
             Processes
             do
             bunch
             more
             outwards
             .
          
           
             With
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             they
             constitute
             that
             Cavity
             which
             is
             termed
             Pelvis
             the
             
             Basin
             or
             Bowl
             ,
             wherein
             are
             seated
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             OS
             ISCHION
             or
             the
             Hip-bone
             is
             the
             third
             part
             ,
             which
             is
             lower
             and
             more
             outward
             ,
             wherein
             is
             a
             large
             and
             deep
             Cavity
             ,
             (
             they
             call
             it
             Acerabulum
             ,
             the
             Saucer
             ,
             and
             Pixis
             the
             Box
             )
             to
             receive
             the
             large
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             which
             if
             it
             fall
             out
             ,
             either
             by
             reason
             of
             some
             internal
             humore
             ,
             or
             outward
             chance
             ,
             a
             Luxation
             or
             Semiluxation
             is
             thereby
             caused
             .
             The
             gristley
             Process
             of
             this
             Cavity
             ,
             is
             termed
             Supercilium
             ,
             the
             Brow.
             
          
           
             The
             lowest
             Parts
             of
             this
             Bone
             are
             more
             distant
             in
             women
             then
             in
             men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             their
             Pelvis
             or
             Basin
             is
             larger
             then
             that
             in
             men
             .
          
           
             This
             Bone
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             Ligament
             ,
             growing
             out
             of
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             :
             The
             one
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             sharp
             Process
             of
             the
             Hip
             ,
             the
             other
             behind
             ,
             into
             its
             Appendix
             ,
             that
             the
             Intestinum
             rectum
             and
             its
             Muscles
             may
             be
             thereby
             sustained
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               17
            
             Of
             the
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             AS
             the
             
               Os
               Innominatum
            
             or
             Nameless
             Bone
             ,
             is
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Os
             sacrum
             ,
             so
             at
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             are
             the
             RIBS
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             ascending
             in
             the
             Explication
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             ,
             these
             are
             now
             to
             be
             explained
             ,
             as
             being
             the
             lateral
             Parts
             of
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               V.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURES
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               presents
               some
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               ,
               the
               Os
               sacrum
               ,
               Os
               innominatum
               ,
               the
               Ribs
               and
               Shoulder-blade
               peculiarly
               ,
               and
               their
               Particles
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               I.
               
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     foreside
                     of
                     the
                     first
                     Vertebra
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     termed
                  
                   Atlas
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     hole
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     Spinal
                     Marrow
                     descends
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     transverse
                     or
                     lateral
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   dd
                   .
                   
                     The
                     lateral
                     Holes
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     Arteries
                     ascend
                     to
                     the
                     Brain
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     Two
                     Cavities
                     receiving
                     the
                     Occiput
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               II.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     back-side
                     of
                     the
                     second
                     Vertebra
                     of
                     the
                     Nick.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     Its
                     Appendix
                     or
                     Process
                     ,
                     like
                     a
                     Tooth
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     Its
                     forked
                     Spine
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               III.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     hinderside
                     of
                     the
                     Backvertebra
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     upper
                     Surface
                     ,
                     less
                     solid
                     and
                     full
                     of
                     small
                     Holes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     transversal
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     hinder
                     Process
                     or
                     Spina
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IV.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     foreside
                     of
                     the
                     Vertebra
                     of
                     the
                     Loins
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     lower
                     Surface
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     most
                     part
                     covered
                     with
                     a
                     Gristle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     An
                     Hole
                     for
                     the
                     Marrow
                     to
                     pass
                     through
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     transverse
                     or
                     Literal
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     latter
                     Process
                     or
                     the
                     Spina
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     oblique
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               V.
               
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     hinder-side
                     of
                     Os
                     sacrum
                     ,
                     conspicuous
                     by
                     reason
                     of
                     its
                     Knobs
                     and
                     Roughness
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     Hole
                     for
                     the
                     descent
                     of
                     the
                     Spinal
                     Marrow
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     oblique
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     ddd
                     .
                     It
                     s
                     hindermore
                     Processes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     eeee
                     .
                     It
                     s
                     Holes
                     for
                     the
                     going
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Nerves
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ffff
                     .
                     It
                     s
                     hinder
                     Process
                     which
                     is
                     forked
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VI.
               Shews
               the
               
                 Os
                 coccygis
              
               or
               Crupper-bone
               ,
               consisting
               of
               four
               little
               Bones
               or
               Gristles
               .
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VII
               .
               Shews
               the
               Os
               Innominatum
               or
               Nameless
               Bone.
               
               
                 
                   AA
                   .
                   
                     Os
                     Ilium
                     one
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Nameless
                     Bone.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     bbb
                     .
                     The
                     Spine
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     Back
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   DDD
                   
                     Os
                     Pubis
                     the
                     Share-bone
                     ,
                     another
                     part
                     of
                     Os
                     Innominatum
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     large
                     Hole
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   FFF
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     Ischion
                     or
                     Huckle-bone
                     ,
                     a
                     third
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Nameless
                     〈◊〉
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     large
                     Cavity
                     or
                     Saucer
                  
                
                 
                   
                     hh
                     .
                     The
                     Brim
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Knob
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     Appendix
                     of
                     the
                     Huckle-bone
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               VIII
               .
               
                 
                   AAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Vertebrae
                     of
                     the
                     Back
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   BBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ribs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     ingraven
                     in
                     the
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Ribs
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     two
                     Knobs
                     of
                     the
                     Ribs
                     ,
                     by
                     help
                     whereof
                     they
                     are
                     joyned
                     to
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     
                       Transverse
                       Process
                       of
                       the
                       Vertebrae
                    
                     .
                     The
                     Hollowness
                     of
                     the
                     Vertebrae
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     the
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     lowest
                     Rib
                     ,
                     having
                     a
                     simple
                     Knob
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               FIG
               .
               IX
               .
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Clavicula
                     or
                     Channel-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     b.
                     It
                     s
                     small
                     Head
                     whereby
                     t
                     is
                     joyned
                     to
                     the
                     Breast-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     c.
                     It
                     s
                     other
                     end
                     whereby
                     t
                     is
                     joyned
                     to
                     the
                     Shoulder-blade
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   D.
                   
                     The
                     Scapula
                     or
                     Shoulder-blade
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     Its
                     first
                     Process
                     ,
                     called
                  
                   acromion
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     lesser
                     ,
                     lower
                     ,
                     and
                     sharp
                     Process
                     called
                  
                   coracoeides
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     It
                     s
                     shortest
                     Process
                     called
                  
                   Cervix
                   
                     the
                     Neck
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     hh
                     .
                     The
                     Basis
                     of
                     the
                     Shoulder-blade
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     i.
                     It
                     s
                     upper
                     Corner
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     k.
                     It
                     s
                     lower
                     Corner
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               page
               352
            
          
           
           
             The
             Situation
             of
             the
             Ribs
             in
             the
             Sides
             ,
             and
             the
             Greeks
             call
             them
             pleurai
             ,
             because
             they
             form
             the
             Sides
             .
          
           
             In
             Shape
             they
             resemble
             a
             bow
             ,
             or
             the
             lesser
             Segment
             of
             a
             Circle
             ,
             that
             the
             Chest
             might
             be
             the
             larger
             .
             
               Johan
               .
               Fontanus
            
             found
             a
             forked
             Rib
             ;
             and
             my self
             at
             Hafnia
             shewed
             the
             third
             Rib
             of
             the
             leftside
             ,
             as
             thick
             as
             two
             Ribs
             ,
             joyned
             to
             the
             Breast-bone
             with
             two
             shanks
             .
          
           
             At
             their
             rise
             they
             are
             narrower
             and
             rounder
             ,
             but
             the
             nearer
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Breast
             ,
             the
             broader
             they
             grow
             .
             In
             their
             upper
             part
             they
             are
             thicker
             .
             And
             the
             upper
             Ribs
             are
             more
             crooked
             ,
             and
             also
             shorter
             ;
             the
             middlemore
             are
             longer
             and
             broader
             ;
             the
             lower
             are
             cut
             again
             shorter
             .
          
           
             The
             
               external
               Surface
            
             is
             rough
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             fastned
             to
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             because
             the
             Ligaments
             which
             tie
             them
             do
             thence
             proceed
             :
             And
             there
             they
             are
             furnished
             with
             two
             little
             knobs
             :
             1.
             
             Is
             articulated
             to
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Vertebra
             .
             2.
             
             Is
             joyned
             to
             the
             transverse
             Process
             of
             the
             Vertebra
             .
             But
             the
             five
             lower
             are
             joyned
             by
             a
             simple
             knob
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             side
             is
             smooth
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             Membrane
             Pleura
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             lowest
             part
             there
             are
             Cavities
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             for
             the
             Vein
             ,
             Artery
             ,
             and
             Nerve
             ;
             which
             appears
             the
             more
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             they
             are
             nearer
             the
             Vertebra's
             .
          
           
             Where
             let
             Chirurgeons
             observe
             in
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             Chest
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             between
             
             the
             fift
             and
             sixt
             Rib
             ,
             the
             Section
             must
             be
             made
             from
             the
             top
             towards
             the
             bottome
             ,
             but
             not
             contrariwaies
             ▪
             least
             these
             Vessels
             should
             be
             hurt
             .
          
           
             The
             Ribs
             have
             Connexions
             ;
             one
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             another
             with
             the
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Breast-bone
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             is
             partly
             bony
             ,
             and
             partly
             gristly
             .
             
          
           
             1
             That
             the
             Chest
             may
             more
             easily
             be
             contracted
             and
             distended
             .
          
           
             2
             That
             a
             Fracture
             may
             not
             easily
             happen
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             bony
             in
             the
             part
             near
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             the
             lateral
             part
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             gristly
             near
             the
             Breast-bone
             to
             which
             they
             are
             joyned
             .
          
           
             For
             all
             the
             Ribs
             in
             the
             forepart
             ,
             have
             Gristles
             like
             Epiphyses
             ,
             which
             in
             women
             (
             not
             in
             men
             unless
             very
             old
             )
             through
             tract
             of
             time
             ,
             do
             grow
             hard
             as
             bones
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             more
             strongly
             sustain
             the
             Bulk
             of
             the
             Dugs
             resting
             upon
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             Gristles
             of
             the
             upper
             Ribs
             are
             harder
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             coupled
             with
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             Sternon
             or
             Brest-bone
             ;
             those
             of
             the
             lower
             are
             softer
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             Gristles
             .
             Moreover
             in
             its
             hinder
             part
             each
             hath
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             which
             is
             articulated
             with
             a
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             The
             Ribs
             are
             many
             in
             Number
             ,
             that
             the
             Chest
             may
             be
             more
             easily
             moved
             .
             Pa●samas
             
             in
             his
             Relations
             of
             Athens
             ,
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             
               Protophanes
               Magnesius
            
             ,
             had
             his
             Ribs
             fastned
             one
             to
             anothers
             from
             his
             shoulders
             to
             his
             bastard
             Ribs
             .
             
               Nicholas
               Fa●tanus
            
             saw
             three
             united
             and
             unseparable
             .
             For
             the
             most
             part
             they
             are
             on
             each
             fide
             twelve
             ,
             both
             in
             men
             and
             women
             .
             Seldome
             thirteen
             ,
             more
             rarely
             eleven
             .
             But
             often
             there
             is
             only
             one
             superfluous
             .
             T
             is
             therefore
             likely
             that
             in
             one
             side
             
             of
             Adam
             there
             were
             thirteen
             ribs
             ,
             one
             of
             which
             Jehovah
             took
             out
             with
             the
             musculous
             flesh
             growing
             thereto
             and
             turned
             into
             Eve
             ;
             or
             he
             had
             twelve
             ribs
             on
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             eleven
             on
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             Ribs
             are
             divided
             into
             
               true
               ,
               genuine
            
             and
             legitimate
             ;
             and
             
               bastard
               ,
               adulterate
            
             and
             illegitimate
             ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             are
             the
             seven
             upper
             ones
             ,
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             they
             do
             more
             perfect
             the
             
             Circle
             ,
             and
             touch
             the
             Brest-bone
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             have
             a
             perfect
             Articulation
             ;
             and
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             by
             a
             double
             knob
             as
             was
             said
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             uppermore
             are
             called
             
               antistrophoi
               ,
               retortae
            
             ,
             turned
             backwards
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             following
             are
             termed
             
               stertai
               ,
               solidae
            
             ,
             the
             solid
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             remaining
             three
             are
             cal'd
             sternitides
             ,
             the
             Pectoral
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             five
             lowest
             are
             called
             
               bastard
               Ribs
            
             ,
             because
             
             they
             are
             lesser
             ,
             softer
             ,
             shorter
             ,
             not
             do
             they
             reach
             to
             the
             Breast-bone
             (
             that
             dilatation
             may
             be
             there
             better
             made
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             )
             nor
             have
             they
             a
             perfect
             Articulation
             therewith
             ,
             but
             being
             knit
             only
             to
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             as
             if
             some
             part
             of
             them
             were
             cut
             off
             ,
             they
             end
             into
             longer
             Gristles
             than
             the
             true
             ones
             :
             Which
             being
             turned
             back
             upwards
             ,
             do
             stick
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             glewed
             together
             ,
             the
             last
             excepted
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             least
             ,
             and
             sticks
             to
             none
             ,
             and
             therefore
             t
             is
             truly
             spurious
             ,
             that
             a
             larger
             space
             may
             be
             for
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             upper
             Guts
             being
             distended
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             the
             eleventh
             sometimes
             and
             the
             twelfth
             ,
             are
             tied
             to
             the
             Septum
             tranversum
             :
             Sometimes
             ,
             the
             last
             grows
             to
             the
             oblique
             descendent
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             without
             the
             Midriff
             ;
             sometimes
             it
             hath
             the
             Circumscription
             of
             its
             proper
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             pulls
             it
             from
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Use
               of
               the
               Ribs
            
             is
             :
          
           
             
               1.
               
               [
               Especially
               of
               the
               true
               ones
               ]
               to
               defend
               the
               Breast
               and
               Bowels
               therein
               contained
               ,
               as
               the
               Heart
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               sustain
               the
               Muscles
               that
               serve
               for
               Respiration
               ,
               and
               some
               others
               of
               the
               Belly
               .
            
             
               [
               3.
               
               Of
               the
               bastard
               one
               ,
               ]
               to
               serve
               the
               Natural
               parts
               contained
               in
               the
               Belly
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XVIII
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Sternon
             or
             Breast-bone
             .
          
           
             THe
             Bone
             of
             the
             Breast
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             fore-part
             of
             the
             Chest
             rests
             upon
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             is
             spread
             thereupon
             (
             whence
             they
             suppose
             t
             is
             call'd
             Sternum
             )
             is
             by
             Hypocrates
             termed
             Stethos
             :
             which
             Word
             nevertheless
             sometimes
             signifies
             .
          
           
             
               1
               The
               whole
               forepart
               of
               the
               Chest
               .
            
             
               2
               Its
               Pain
               .
            
             
               3
               The
               Breast-bone
               as
               in
               this
               place
               .
            
             
               4
               The
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               5
               The
               Sword-fashion'd
               Gristle
               .
            
          
           
             Others
             call
             this
             bone
             
               Os
               Gladiale
            
             or
             Ensisorme
             the
             Sword-bone
             or
             Sword-fashion'd
             bone
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             Sword
             or
             rather
             such
             a
             Dagger
             as
             was
             used
             by
             the
             Ancients
             :
             for
             it
             is
             
               convex
               ,
               long
            
             and
             broad
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             is
             partly
             bony
             ,
             but
             fungous
             and
             red
             ,
             partly
             Gristly
             .
          
           
             It
             consists
             of
             
               divers
               bones
            
             ,
             not
             of
             one
             ,
             as
             is
             commonly
             seen
             in
             old
             Men
             ,
             the
             diversity
             of
             its
             bones
             appears
             ,
             when
             you
             remove
             its
             Membrances
             .
             In
             Infants
             it
             is
             wholly
             gristly
             ,
             excepting
             its
             first
             bone
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             upper
             bones
             are
             sooner
             made
             than
             the
             lower
             ,
             and
             the
             middle
             parts
             ,
             than
             the
             outmost
             :
             so
             that
             in
             conclusion
             ,
             eight
             bones
             are
             found
             in
             the
             Breast
             of
             a
             Child
             ,
             which
             after
             seven
             years
             grow
             together
             ,
             and
             become
             fewer
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             grown
             persons
             there
             are
             sometimes
             three
             ,
             sometimes
             four
             ,
             sometimes
             more
             bones
             .
             But
             the
             first
             and
             last
             remain
             in
             grown
             persons
             as
             in
             Children
             ;
             but
             the
             middle
             ones
             growing
             together
             ,
             the
             number
             of
             bones
             comes
             to
             vary
             in
             that
             place
             .
          
           
             These
             Bones
             are
             distinguished
             by
             transverse
             lines
             ,
             and
             are
             knit
             together
             by
             Sanchondrosis
             ;
             for
             the
             Gristles
             are
             interposed
             like
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             and
             
               uppermost
               bone
            
             ,
             is
             large
             and
             thick
             ,
             plain
             and
             uneven
             ,
             of
             an
             Halfmoon
             fashion
             above
             ,
             representing
             the
             joyning
             of
             a
             Dagger
             blade
             into
             the
             haft
             ,
             some
             term
             it
             Jugulum
             the
             Throat-pit
             ,
             others
             call
             it
             Furculam
             the
             little
             fork
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             on
             each
             side
             an
             hollowness
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             ,
             to
             
             receive
             the
             Heads
             of
             the
             Claviculae
             or
             Channel-bones
             ,
             in
             which
             copulation
             Gristles
             come
             between
             .
          
           
             And
             another
             Hollowness
             within
             engraven
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             give
             way
             to
             the
             descending
             Trachea
             or
             Wesand
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             is
             more
             narrow
             and
             hath
             many
             hollownesses
             on
             each
             side
             to
             receive
             the
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             yet
             less
             ,
             but
             broader
             than
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             ends
             into
             the
             Gristle
             
             which
             is
             termed
             
               Kup●o
               idès
            
             Sword-fashion'd
             ,
             and
             Mucronata
             pointed
             ,
             because
             towards
             the
             end
             it
             is
             sharp
             like
             the
             point
             of
             a
             Sword.
             The
             Arabians
             term
             it
             ,
             the
             Pomegranate
             ;
             Avicen
             calls
             it
             Epiglottalis
             ,
             and
             the
             common
             name
             is
             Scutiformis
             Shield-fashioned
             .
          
           
             This
             Gristle
             is
             triangular
             and
             oblong
             ,
             sometimes
             round
             at
             the
             End
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             broad
             ,
             otherwhiles
             cloven
             ,
             whence
             some
             call
             it
             Furc●lla
             the
             little
             fork
             ;
             't
             is
             seldome
             double
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             't
             is
             perforated
             ,
             for
             the
             Dug-veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             are
             accompanied
             by
             a
             Nerve
             .
             Sometimes
             in
             aged
             persons
             ,
             it
             attains
             a
             bony
             Substance
             ,
             Vestingus
             hath
             found
             it
             a
             Fingers
             length
             not
             without
             great
             hurt
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             trouble
             when
             a
             man
             bows
             himself
             .
             Pavius
             also
             saw
             here
             a
             bony
             Substance
             ,
             in
             a
             person
             troubled
             with
             extream
             shortness
             of
             breath
             .
          
           
             This
             if
             it
             be
             too
             much
             pressed
             and
             bowed
             inwards
             ,
             the
             parts
             beneath
             it
             are
             hurt
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Liver
             and
             Stomach
             ,
             and
             the
             Infants
             perish
             for
             want
             of
             Nutriment
             :
             of
             which
             see
             Condronchius
             and
             
               Septalius
               ,
               Zacutus
               ,
               Wilhelmus
               Piso
               .
            
             This
             Disease
             is
             by
             some
             Women
             cal'd
             ,
             the
             Hearts
             compression
             .
          
           
             Folius
             hath
             observed
             two
             Muscles
             placed
             on
             the
             side
             hereof
             ,
             by
             which
             this
             Gristle
             is
             lightly
             moved
             downwards
             and
             inwards
             .
          
           
             The
             Cavity
             appearing
             outwardly
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             is
             called
             Fovea
             ,
             or
             
               Scrobiculus
               Cordis
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Sternum
             or
             Breast-bone
             ,
          
           
             
               1.
               
               Like
               a
               shield
               to
               defend
               the
               Heart
               from
               external
               dangers
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               sustain
               the
               Mediastinum
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               collect
               the
               Ribs
               and
               fasten
               themselves
               one
               to
               another
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XIX
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Channel-bones
             and
             Shoulder-blades
             .
          
           
             THe
             Channel-bones
             are
             called
             
               Claviculae
               ,
               Cle●des
            
             in
             Greek
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             Keyes
             ;
             because
             they
             shut
             up
             the
             Chest
             ,
             and
             like
             Keyes
             do
             lock
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             to
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             or
             because
             they
             resemble
             the
             Keyes
             used
             by
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             which
             Spigelius
             saw
             in
             an
             old
             house
             at
             
               Padua
               .
               Celsus
            
             calls
             them
             Jugula
             a
             jungendo
             from
             joyning
             ,
             others
             call
             them
             
               Ligulas
               ,
               Os
               furcale
               ,
               Furcalem
               superi●rem
               .
            
          
           
             They
             are
             seated
             athwart
             under
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             on
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Breast
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             the
             Shape
             of
             a
             long
             Latine
             S
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             of
             two
             Semicircles
             ,
             set
             one
             to
             another
             contrariwise
             ,
             at
             the
             Throat
             externally
             they
             are
             convex
             ,
             inwardly
             a
             little
             hollowed
             ,
             that
             the
             velsels
             
             carried
             that
             way
             may
             not
             be
             compressed
             .
             But
             in
             Men
             they
             are
             more
             crooked
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             their
             Arms
             may
             be
             less
             hindred
             ,
             in
             Women
             less
             ,
             for
             beauties
             sake
             ,
             seeing
             the
             hollows
             in
             that
             place
             are
             not
             so
             visible
             in
             Women
             as
             in
             Men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Women
             are
             not
             so
             nimble
             to
             throw
             Stones
             as
             Men
             are
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             is
             thick
             ,
             but
             fistulous
             and
             fungous
             ;
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             often
             broken
             .
          
           
             Their
             Surface
             is
             rough
             and
             uneven
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             knit
             to
             the
             upper
             process
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             (
             by
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             which
             nevertheless
             grows
             not
             thereto
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             give
             way
             a
             little
             in
             the
             motions
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             and
             Arm
             ,
             only
             it
             is
             detained
             by
             Ligaments
             embracing
             the
             Joynt
             )
             by
             a
             broad
             and
             longish
             head
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Sternon
             or
             Breast-bone
             ,
             it
             is
             joyned
             ,
             by
             another
             little
             head
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             before
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             to
             serve
             the
             sundry
             motions
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             which
             because
             it
             rests
             upon
             this
             bone
             as
             on
             a
             prop
             ,
             therefore
             it
             is
             more
             easily
             moved
             upwards
             and
             backwards
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             Brutes
             have
             no
             channel-bones
             ,
             excepting
             the
             Ape
             ,
             Squiril
             ,
             Mouse
             ,
             and
             Hedge-hog
             or
             Urchin
             .
          
           
             
               Os
               Scapulae
            
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             is
             by
             the
             Greeks
             termed
             
               Omoplá●ē
               ▪
            
             because
             it
             makes
             
             the
             breadth
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             those
             that
             speak
             barbarously
             calls
             it
             Spatula
             .
             It
             is
             a
             bone
             broad
             and
             thin
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             middest
             ,
             but
             in
             its
             processes
             thick
             ,
             on
             each
             side
             one
             ,
             resting
             upon
             the
             upper
             Ribs
             ,
             behind
             ,
             like
             a
             Shield
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             is
             in
             a
             manner
             triangular
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             are
             sundry
             .
             The
             Internal
             is
             hollow
             ,
             the
             other
             part
             (
             which
             hath
             both
             a
             corner
             and
             an
             upper
             and
             lower
             Rib
             )
             is
             gibbous
             ,
             which
             is
             termed
             Testudo
             the
             Tortoise
             ,
             also
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             .
             There
             is
             also
             a
             certain
             Spine
             or
             sharp-point
             ,
             looking
             above
             and
             beneath
             the
             cavities
             which
             are
             termed
             Interscapulia
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             three
             Processes
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Is
               the
               extream
               part
               of
               the
               Spine
               lately
               spoke
               of
               ,
               and
               is
               called
               Aorōmiom
               the
               Shoulder-tip
               ,
               or
               
                 Summus
                 Humerus
              
               ,
               whereby
               't
               is
               joyned
               to
               the
               Clavicula
               or
               Channel-bone
               .
            
             
               II.
               Is
               lesser
               ,
               lower
               and
               sharp
               ,
               and
               from
               its
               likeness
               to
               a
               Crows
               bill
               ,
               'c
               is
               cal'd
               Coracoeid●s
               ;
               also
               A●churod●s
               from
               the
               likeness
               it
               hath
               to
               one
               part
               of
               an
               Anchor
               ,
               also
               Sigmo●idés
               and
               by
               this
               process
               ,
               the
               Shoulder
               bone
               is
               contained
               in
               its
               place
               .
            
             
               III.
               The
               shortest
               is
               termed
               Auchè
               cervix
               ,
               the
               Neck
               ;
               in
               the
               end
               whereof
               there
               is
               a
               superficial
               cavity
               ,
               whereunto
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Shoulder
               is
               inserted
               ,
               which
               that
               it
               may
               not
               easily
               slip
               cut
               ,
               the
               deepness
               of
               the
               Cavity
               is
               encreased
               by
               a
               thick
               Gristle
               ,
               compassing
               the
               Lips.
               And
               by
               this
               process
               and
               Cavity
               ,
               the
               Shoulder-blade
               is
               joyned
               with
               the
               Arm.
               
            
          
           
             It
             hath
             five
             Epiphyses
             ,
             three
             at
             the
             inside
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             Basis
             near
             the
             carriage
             of
             the
             Spina
             .
             Two
             of
             them
             produce
             Ligaments
             ,
             which
             joyn
             its
             head
             to
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             and
             the
             Shoulder-tip
             to
             the
             Clavicula
             .
             But
             common
             Ligaments
             thin
             and
             Membranous
             ,
             do
             compass
             the
             Joynt
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             and
             Arm.
             
          
           
             
               Use
               of
               the
               Scapula
               or
               Shoulder-blade
               .
            
          
           
             
               1.
               
               It
               serves
               to
               strengthen
               the
               Ribs
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               the
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Shoulder
               and
               Channel-bones
               ,
               and
               for
               their
               security
               .
               And
               therefore
               the
               Shoulder
               is
               seldome
               (
               without
               very
               great
               violence
               )
               dislocated
               or
               disjoynted
               upwards
               ,
               or
               to
               one
               side
               ,
               but
               for
               the
               most
               part
               downwards
               ,
               where
               no
               Shoulder-blade
               hinders
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               the
               implantation
               of
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Primarily
               for
               the
               action
               of
               laying
               hold
               according
               to
               Hofman
               ,
               to
               which
               they
               are
               subservient
               ,
               by
               inarticulation
               partly
               ,
               and
               partly
               by
               the
               explanation
               of
               certain
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Arm.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               Secondarily
               to
               cover
               the
               Heart
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XX.
            
             Of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             whole
             Arm
             and
             Hand
             .
          
           
             THe
             Bones
             of
             the
             Arm
             and
             Hand
             ,
             are
             divided
             into
             the
             Brachium
             or
             Arm
             peculiarly
             so
             called
             ,
             Cubitus
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             and
             
               Extrema
               manus
            
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Os
               Brachii
            
             or
             Arm-bone
             ,
             is
             a
             single
             Bone
             ,
             great
             and
             strong
             ,
             long
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             uneven
             .
             In
             its
             upper
             part
             it
             hath
             an
             Appendix
             or
             great
             Head
             ,
             growing
             to
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             round
             ,
             covered
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             and
             articulated
             with
             the
             Scapula
             by
             Diárthrosis
             .
          
           
             
             
             
             
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               This
               TABLE
               shews
               the
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               grown
               Body
               ,
               that
               the
               contexture
               of
               the
               Bones
               may
               be
               seen
               one
               with
               another
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     Bone
                     of
                     the
                     Forehead
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     bb
                     .
                     The
                     Coronal
                     Suture
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Temple
                     Bones
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     d.
                     The
                     Teat-like
                     production
                     or
                     Processus
                     mammillaris
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     jugula
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     Jaw-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     Jaw-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     hhh
                     .
                     The
                     Vertebrae
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   
                     iiiiii
                     .
                     The
                     Ribs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   KK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sternum
                     or
                     Breast-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   LL.
                   
                     The
                     Claviculae
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     inner-side
                     of
                     each
                     Shoulder-blade
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Arm-bone
                     or
                     Os
                     humeri
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Head
                     thereof
                     joynting
                     into
                     the
                     Shoulder
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     It
                     s
                     lower
                     part
                     articulated
                     with
                     the
                     Cubitus
                     and
                     Radius
                     '
                     where
                     is
                  
                
                 
                   
                     qq
                     .
                     The
                     inward
                     knob
                     thereof
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     rr
                     .
                     The
                     outer
                     knob
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   SS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Cubit
                     bone
                     called
                     Ulna
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   TT
                   .
                   
                     The
                     other
                     Cubit
                     bone
                     called
                     Radius
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     uu
                     .
                     The
                     Process
                     of
                     the
                     Ulna
                     ,
                     crooked
                     backwards
                     ,
                     which
                  
                   Galen
                   calls
                   olecranum
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     xx
                     .
                     The
                     lesser
                     process
                     of
                     the
                     Ulna
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   YY
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Wrist
                     consisting
                     of
                     eight
                     little
                     Bones
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ZZ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     M●tacarpus
                     consisting
                     of
                     four
                     Bones
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Finger
                     rows
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Thumb
                     compounded
                     of
                     three
                     bones
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   These
                   following
                   Characters
                   ,
                   do
                   point
                   to
                   the
                   lower
                   Bones
                   of
                   the
                   Skleleton
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Aaaaa
                     .
                     The
                     five
                     Vertebrae
                     of
                     the
                     Loyns
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     innerside
                     of
                     Os
                     Sacrum
                     with
                     its
                     holes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   CC.
                   
                     The
                     Cavity
                     of
                     Os
                     Ilii
                     ,
                     constituting
                     a
                     great
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Pelvis
                     or
                     Basin
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     Coxendicis
                     with
                     its
                     Acetabulum
                     or
                     Sawcer
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Share-bones
                     with
                     their
                     Holes
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     A
                     line
                     knitting
                     the
                     Share-bones
                     by
                     help
                     of
                     a
                     Gristle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Thigh-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     hh
                     .
                     The
                     round
                     head
                     of
                     the
                     said
                     bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ii
                     .
                     The
                     Neck
                     thereof
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     kk
                     .
                     The
                     external
                     process
                     of
                     the
                     Neck
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     great
                     Trochanter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     ll
                     .
                     The
                     other
                     process
                     or
                     less
                     Trochanter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     mmmm
                     .
                     The
                     lower
                     heads
                     of
                     the
                     Thigh-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   NN.
                   
                     The
                     Mola
                     ●●atella
                     or
                     Knee
                     pan
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Tibia
                     right
                     and
                     left
                     ,
                     in
                     which
                  
                
                 
                   
                     pppp
                     .
                     Shews
                     the
                     two
                     upper
                     Hollownesses
                     ,
                  
                
                 
                   
                     rr
                     .
                     Shews
                     the
                     Spina
                  
                   ,
                
                 
                   
                     ss
                     .
                     The
                     lower
                     Process
                     of
                     the
                     Ankle-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   TT
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Fibula
                     or
                     other
                     Leg-bone
                     so
                     called
                     ,
                     or
                     the
                     Pe●one
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     uu
                     .
                     It
                     s
                     lower
                     part
                     constituting
                     the
                     external
                     Ankle
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   XX.
                   
                     Seven
                     Bones
                     of
                     the
                     Tarsus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Astragalus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Calx
                     ,
                     Calcantum
                     or
                     Heel-bone
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     The
                     Os
                     cubiforme
                     ,
                     Die-fashioned-bone
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   YY
                   .
                   
                     The
                     bones
                     of
                     the
                     Metatarsus
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   ZZ
                   .
                   
                     The
                     bones
                     of
                     the
                     Toes
                     ,
                     of
                     which
                     two
                     are
                     reckoned
                     to
                     the
                     Great
                     Toe
                     and
                     to
                     the
                     other
                     Toes
                     three
                     a
                     piece
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               Place
               in
               here
               ,
               The
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               grown
               body
               .
            
          
           
             The
             lower
             part
             is
             articulated
             to
             the
             Cubitus
             and
             Radius
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             two
             processes
             ;
             the
             External
             which
             is
             less
             and
             crusted
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ;
             the
             Internal
             having
             two
             Hollows
             ;
             representing
             a
             Pulley
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Cubit
             being
             joyned
             by
             way
             of
             Ginglymos
             ,
             may
             be
             bent
             to
             a
             most
             acute
             angle
             ,
             but
             not
             extended
             beyond
             a
             right
             line
             .
          
           
             The
             Boats
             of
             the
             Cubit
             are
             two
             ,
             shorter
             than
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             and
             having
             Appendixes
             on
             either
             side
             ,
             resting
             mutually
             one
             upon
             another
             ,
             and
             joyned
             one
             to
             another
             by
             a
             Membranous
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             being
             lower
             ,
             greater
             and
             longer
             than
             the
             other
             ,
             is
             termed
             
               Ulna
               ,
               Cubitus
            
             ,
             by
             the
             barbarous
             Writers
             
               focile
               majus
            
             ;
             the
             other
             being
             upper
             and
             lesser
             ,
             is
             termed
             Radius
             ,
             or
             
               focile
               minus
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Ulna
             or
             Ell
             ,
             so
             called
             for
             some
             resemblance
             it
             hath
             to
             the
             Drapers
             Metwand
             termed
             an
             Ell
             ,
             in
             its
             upper
             part
             is
             articulated
             with
             the
             Shoulder
             by
             Ginglymos
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             hath
             there
             Processes
             ,
             and
             Hollows
             .
          
           
             The
             Processes
             are
             two
             ,
             longwise
             shaped
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             triangular
             ,
             rough
             ,
             that
             the
             Ligaments
             might
             strongly
             close
             upon
             the
             Joynt
             and
             compass
             the
             same
             fast
             .
             They
             are
             termed
             Co●d●ai
             ,
             that
             is
             Beaks
             ,
             Bills
             or
             Acorns
             .
             The
             foremore
             and
             uppermore
             is
             less
             ,
             and
             goes
             into
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             :
             the
             later
             is
             thicker
             and
             larger
             and
             ends
             in
             an
             obtuse
             angle
             ,
             and
             goes
             into
             the
             hinder
             hollow
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             .
             Galen
             calls
             it
             
               Olecranum
               ,
               Hippocrates
               Ancona
            
             ,
             the
             Latines
             Gibberum
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             middest
             of
             these
             is
             a
             great
             Cavity
             or
             Hollow
             ,
             like
             an
             half
             Circle
             ,
             whence
             't
             is
             called
             Sigmocides
             from
             the
             letter
             Sigma
             so
             shap'd
             of
             old
             by
             the
             Greeks
             .
             It
             hath
             as
             yet
             another
             smooth
             external
             lateral
             Cavity
             ,
             for
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             
               In
               the
               lower
               part
               it
               is
               articulated
            
             with
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             both
             by
             a
             Gristle
             going
             between
             ,
             as
             also
             by
             an
             acute
             process
             therefore
             termed
             
               Styloides
               ,
               Bodkin-like
            
             ;
             whence
             a
             Ligament
             arises
             ,
             which
             fastens
             the
             Cubit
             to
             the
             Wrist-joynt
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             Bone
             cal'd
             Radius
             is
             more
             oblique
             or
             crooked
             ,
             and
             is
             a
             little
             distant
             from
             the
             other
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             where
             a
             thin
             Ligament
             comes
             between
             :
             but
             above
             ,
             the
             Ulna
             receives
             the
             Radius
             ;
             beneath
             ,
             the
             Radius
             receives
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             
               upper
               part
            
             thereof
             is
             articulated
             with
             the
             outward
             part
             of
             the
             Brachium
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             Diarthrosis
             ,
             whence
             proceeds
             the
             forward
             and
             backward
             motion
             .
          
           
             The
             lower
             is
             articulated
             with
             an
             Appendix
             with
             the
             Wrist-bone
             ,
             at
             the
             greatest
             Finger
             .
          
           
             The
             upper
             part
             of
             this
             ,
             is
             thinner
             ,
             the
             lower
             thicker
             ;
             contrary
             to
             what
             is
             in
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             The
             Hand
             hath
             four
             sorts
             of
             Bones
             :
             those
             of
             the
             
               Carpus
               ,
               Brachiale
            
             or
             Wrist
             ;
             those
             of
             the
             Matacarpus
             or
             
               post
               brachiale
            
             ,
             the
             After-wrist
             ;
             those
             of
             the
             Fingers
             and
             the
             Sesamus-seedbones
             .
          
           
             The
             Carpus
             or
             Wrist
             ,
             which
             the
             Arabians
             call
             Rasetta
             ,
             hath
             eight
             distinct
             nameless
             Bones
             ,
             very
             unequal
             ,
             differing
             in
             Shape
             and
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             At
             their
             first
             original
             they
             are
             Gristles
             ,
             afterwards
             they
             become
             Spungie
             Bones
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             covered
             with
             very
             strong
             
               Gristly
               Ligaments
            
             and
             withall
             so
             fastned
             together
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             but
             one
             Bone.
             
          
           
             And
             these
             Ligaments
             arising
             from
             the
             lower
             processes
             of
             the
             Radius
             and
             Cubitus
             ,
             do
             serve
             for
             Articulation
             .
          
           
             But
             there
             are
             other
             Ligaments
             ,
             which
             are
             transverse
             and
             shaped
             like
             rings
             ,
             for
             to
             strengthen
             and
             safely
             to
             carry
             along
             the
             Tendons
             ,
             the
             internal
             ,
             containing
             the
             tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             which
             bend
             the
             Fingers
             ;
             and
             the
             external
             ,
             containing
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             which
             extend
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             which
             Ligaments
             or
             Bands
             ,
             though
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             one
             ,
             may
             be
             divided
             into
             many
             .
          
           
           
             The
             bones
             of
             the
             Wrist
             are
             dispersed
             in
             a
             certain
             order
             :
             for
             above
             ,
             there
             are
             four
             ,
             articulated
             with
             the
             Radius
             and
             the
             Cubitus
             :
             beneath
             as
             many
             ,
             knit
             to
             the
             four
             bones
             of
             the
             Metacarpus
             or
             After-wrist
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Metacarpium
               ,
               After-wrist
            
             ,
             or
             Palm
             ,
             hath
             four
             bones
             (
             others
             say
             five
             ,
             reckoning
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Thumb
             amongst
             them
             )
             shaped
             longwise
             and
             small
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Wrist
             by
             a
             Connexion
             of
             obscure
             motion
             ,
             and
             by
             
               Gristly
               Ligaments
            
             :
             with
             the
             Fingers
             by
             way
             of
             Ginglymos
             .
          
           
             These
             Bones
             are
             fistulous
             containing
             Marrow
             ,
             hollow
             within
             ,
             bossie
             without
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             Appendixes
             on
             each
             side
             ,
             which
             neer
             the
             fingers
             are
             round
             and
             longish
             heads
             ,
             going
             into
             the
             hollowness
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
             In
             the
             middle
             they
             gape
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             where
             the
             Muscles
             cal'd
             Inner●●ss●i
             do
             lye
             conceal'd
             .
          
           
             The
             bones
             of
             the
             Fingers
             are
             fiftee●
             ,
             in
             each
             Finger
             three
             .
             For
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Thumb
             is
             reckon'd
             in
             this
             number
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             a
             looser
             articulation
             than
             the
             post-brachialia
             .
          
           
             The
             row
             of
             Fingers
             on
             a
             hand
             the
             Greeks
             call
             
               Phalangas
               ▪
            
             because
             they
             resemble
             a
             rank
             of
             Souldiers
             in
             battle
             array
             .
          
           
             Each
             of
             the
             Fingers
             have
             Ligaments
             on
             their
             insides
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             length
             like
             Channels
             ,
             whereby
             they
             are
             fastned
             one
             to
             another
             .
          
           
             The
             bones
             of
             the
             Finger
             differ
             in
             Magnitude
             .
             For
             in
             every
             Finger
             ,
             the
             first
             is
             greates
             than
             the
             second
             ,
             the
             second
             than
             the
             third
             :
             and
             they
             are
             all
             thicker
             at
             the
             Joynt
             ,
             where
             their
             knobs
             are
             termed
             
               ●…duloi
               ,
               ●odi
               ,
               kno●
            
             .
          
           
             Without
             they
             are
             bunching
             ,
             within
             hollow
             and
             plain
             the
             better
             to
             lay
             hold
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             Processes
             above
             and
             beneath
             ,
             besides
             the
             bones
             of
             the
             third
             Interjuncture
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             not
             need
             above
             where
             they
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Nails
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               CHAP.
               XXI
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             whole
             Leg
             ,
             Foot
             and
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             THe
             Pes
             or
             Leg
             (
             taking
             the
             word
             in
             a
             large
             sence
             )
             is
             divided
             into
             three
             pa●ts
             ,
             as
             the
             Arm
             was
             :
             viz.
             into
             Femur
             the
             
               Thigh
               ,
               Tibiam
            
             the
             Shank
             ,
             and
             
               E●
               tr●mum
               pedem
            
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             ●emur
             (
             the
             Thigh
             )
             is
             so
             termed
             a
             ferendo
             from
             bearing
             ,
             because
             it
             bears
             and
             holds
             the
             Creature
             up
             ,
             it
             consists
             of
             one
             only
             Bone
             ,
             but
             the
             greatest
             and
             longest
             in
             the
             whole
             body
             ,
             whose
             fore
             and
             external
             part
             is
             more
             bunching
             ,
             the
             inner
             and
             hinder
             ,
             more
             Saddle-shap'd
             .
          
           
             For
             it
             descends
             obliquely
             inwards
             unto
             the
             Knee
             ;
             which
             Chirurgeons
             are
             to
             observe
             ,
             
             lest
             in
             the
             Fracture
             thereof
             they
             come
             to
             disorder
             this
             situation
             .
          
           
             The
             
               upper
               part
            
             hath
             three
             Processes
             ,
             which
             are
             rather
             Epiphyses
             ,
             and
             are
             easily
             sepaarated
             in
             young
             Children
             .
          
           
             I.
             Is
             a
             most
             great
             and
             round
             Head
             ,
             made
             of
             an
             Appendix
             ,
             which
             is
             inserted
             into
             the
             Acetabulum
             or
             hollow
             Sawcer
             of
             the
             Coxendix
             ,
             and
             is
             by
             a
             double
             Ligament
             fastned
             to
             the
             said
             Coxendix
             or
             Hip-bone
             :
             the
             o●e
             common
             ,
             broad
             ,
             membranous
             ,
             but
             thick
             enough
             ,
             compassing
             the
             Joynt
             round
             about
             ;
             the
             other
             ,
             round
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Gristle
             (
             as
             if
             it
             were
             a
             Gristly
             Nerve
             )
             betwixt
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             the
             Depth
             of
             the
             Cavity
             ,
             least
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Thigh
             fall
             out
             .
          
           
             The
             Neck
             hereof
             hath
             a
             double
             process
             furnished
             with
             an
             Appendix
             ,
             which
             Appendixes
             are
             easily
             pluckt
             asunder
             in
             Infants
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             grown
             persons
             .
          
           
             II.
             Is
             external
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             
               Magnus
               Trochanter
            
             or
             Rotator
             ,
             the
             great
             whirler
             or
             wheeler
             about
             ,
             having
             hollows
             ,
             Impressions
             ,
             and
             Lines
             .
          
           
             III.
             Is
             internal
             ,
             cal'd
             
               parvus
               Rotator
            
             .
          
           
             Whose
             Use
             is
             ,
             for
             the
             original
             and
             Insertion
             of
             those
             Muscles
             by
             which
             the
             motions
             are
             caused
             ●●
             and
             therefore
             also
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             called
             Trochanteres
             ,
             Wheelers
             of
             Whirlers
             about
             .
          
           
             The
             
               lower
               part
            
             is
             articulated
             or
             joynted
             with
             the
             shank
             by
             way
             of
             Ginglymos
             .
             For
             at
             the
             Knees
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             head
             ,
             the
             inner
             more
             thick
             ,
             the
             outer
             more
             broad
             and
             flat
             ,
             it
             enters
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ;
             between
             which
             heads
             there
             is
             a
             large
             space
             ,
             of
             a
             Thumbs-breadth
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             vessels
             do
             pass
             unto
             the
             Thighs
             with
             a
             Nerve
             of
             the
             fourth
             pare
             ;
             and
             wounds
             in
             this
             part
             are
             dangerous
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             Convulsions
             .
          
           
             Mola
             so
             called
             from
             its
             likeness
             to
             a
             mill-stone
             ;
             is
             a
             round
             and
             broad
             Bone
             ;
             it
             is
             in
             this
             place
             put
             upon
             the
             joynting
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Shank
             ,
             where
             the
             Knee
             is
             compas'd
             with
             a
             membranous
             Ligament
             ,
             all
             save
             the
             Mola
             ;
             others
             call
             it
             
               Rotula
               ,
               Patella
               ,
               Mola
               ,
               Scutum
               ,
               Os
               scutiforme
               ,
               &c.
            
             the
             Knee-pan
             ,
             because
             it
             constitutes
             the
             Knee
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             for
             some
             months
             in
             young
             Children
             ,
             is
             Gristly
             ,
             in
             grown
             persons
             it
             becomes
             bony
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             shap'd
             like
             a
             Buckler
             ,
             for
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             one
             part
             thicker
             than
             the
             rest
             ,
             bunches
             out
             .
          
           
             It
             growe
             to
             ,
             and
             is
             fastned
             by
             certain
             thick
             Tendons
             ,
             of
             some
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             movable
             ,
             and
             for
             to
             make
             the
             motion
             more
             easie
             ,
             inwardly
             at
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             't
             is
             cover'd
             with
             a
             slippery
             Gristle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             is
             :
             I.
             To
             strengthen
             the
             joynt
             in
             that
             part
             ,
             lest
             the
             Thigh
             should
             slip
             and
             be
             dislocated
             inwards
             ,
             and
             so
             a
             man
             shall
             fall
             ,
             especially
             walking
             downwards
             ,
             and
             much
             bending
             his
             Knee
             .
             'T
             is
             reported
             ,
             that
             in
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             ,
             Men
             bend
             their
             Knees
             as
             well
             backwarde
             as
             forwards
             .
          
           
             II.
             To
             defend
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Tibia
             the
             shank
             ,
             being
             that
             part
             which
             is
             between
             the
             Kne●
             and
             the
             Ankle
             ,
             consists
             of
             
               two
               Bones
            
             ,
             as
             the
             Cubitus
             or
             lower
             half
             of
             the
             Arm.
             
          
           
             The
             one
             being
             inner
             and
             greater
             ,
             is
             called
             by
             the
             name
             of
             the
             whole
             ,
             
               Tibia
               ,
               C●●me
            
             ;
             by
             some
             
               focile
               majus
               ,
               canna
               major
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             In
             an
             Elephant
             alone
             of
             all
             Creatures
             (
             as
             Bonitus
             informs
             us
             )
             there
             is
             a
             bending
             or
             joynting
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Shanks
             ,
             besides
             the
             other
             ordinary
             bendings
             common
             to
             all
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             
               upper
               part
            
             it
             hath
             a
             Process
             in
             the
             middle
             received
             by
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             and
             two
             cavities
             framed
             long-wise
             ,
             for
             the
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ;
             the
             depth
             of
             whose
             Hollows
             is
             encreased
             by
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             fastned
             thereto
             by
             Ligaments
             ,
             which
             is
             movable
             ,
             soft
             ,
             slippery
             ,
             and
             smeared
             with
             an
             Oyly
             moisture
             ,
             thick
             in
             its
             circuit
             ,
             th●●
             towards
             it
             Centre
             ,
             and
             therefore
             termed
             Lunata
             ,
             Moonshap'd
             .
          
           
             A
             knob
             growing
             there
             ,
             doth
             separate
             the
             two
             Cavities
             ,
             from
             the
             top
             whereof
             a
             strong
             Ligament
             proceeding
             ,
             it
             is
             fastned
             into
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             But
             from
             the
             fore
             and
             rough
             side
             come
             two
             Ligaments
             ,
             which
             encrease
             the
             Moon-fashion'd
             Gristles
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             foremore
             part
             which
             is
             sharp
             and
             long
             ,
             is
             termed
             Spina
             ,
             where
             the
             shape
             of
             the
             Bone
             is
             as
             it
             were
             triangular
             ,
             and
             so
             acute
             that
             it
             is
             like
             the
             edge
             of
             a
             Knife
             ,
             and
             therefore
             if
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Tibia
             or
             shank
             be
             strucken
             on
             this
             forepart
             ,
             it
             causeth
             exceeding
             pain
             ,
             because
             the
             neighbouring
             Skin
             and
             the
             Periosteum
             are
             cut
             by
             this
             sharp
             Bone
             as
             it
             were
             with
             a
             Knife
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             
               lower
               part
            
             there
             is
             a
             Process
             void
             of
             flesh
             ,
             sticking
             out
             with
             a
             bunch
             ,
             near
             the
             Foot
             ,
             and
             't
             is
             cal'd
             
               malleolus
               internus
            
             ,
             the
             inner
             Ankle-bone
             ;
             as
             the
             process
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ▪
             is
             termed
             
               malleolus
               externus
            
             ,
             the
             outer
             Ankle-b●ne
             .
          
           
             
               Fibula
               pe●●●e
            
             ,
             the
             Button
             ,
             because
             it
             seems
             to
             button
             together
             and
             joyn
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             shank
             ;
             is
             also
             cal'd
             Sura
             the
             Calf
             ,
             
               Canna
               minor
               ,
               Focile
               minus
               ,
               &c.
            
             and
             it
             is
             a
             smaller
             and
             lanker
             bone
             ,
             drawn
             along
             before
             the
             Tibia
             without
             ,
             as
             the
             Radius
             before
             the
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             
               In
               the
               Upper
               part
            
             ,
             its
             round
             head
             doth
             not
             touch
             the
             Knee
             ,
             but
             it
             subsists
             beneath
             :
             but
             
               with
               its
               lower
               ●●rt
            
             ,
             it
             goes
             beneath
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             and
             therefore
             't
             is
             as
             long
             a
             bone
             as
             the
             Tibia
             is
             .
          
           
           
             In
             the
             middle
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             hold
             a
             gaping
             distance
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Feet
             there
             placed
             ,
             in
             which
             space
             a
             thin
             broad
             Ligament
             joyns
             these
             Bones
             together
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             longitude
             ,
             't
             is
             joyned
             also
             to
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             by
             a
             common
             Ligament
             ,
             above
             and
             beneath
             .
          
           
             Beneath
             ,
             the
             Head
             becoming
             sharp
             ,
             hath
             an
             Appendix
             ,
             which
             growing
             thick
             ,
             begets
             a
             process
             called
             
               Malleolus
               externus
            
             the
             outer
             Ankle-bone
             which
             is
             lower
             than
             the
             inner
             Ankle-bone
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Bones
               of
               the
               Foot
            
             are
             divided
             as
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             into
             three
             parts
             :
             into
             the
             
               Tarsus
               ,
               Metatarsus
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Toes
             .
          
           
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             are
             seven
             ,
             though
             some
             number
             only
             the
             last
             four
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Tarsus
             ,
             because
             the
             three
             first
             have
             no
             Bones
             in
             the
             Hand
             answering
             to
             them
             .
          
           
             I.
             It
             's
             cal'd
             Astrágalos
             ,
             in
             Latine
             Talus
             ,
             and
             commonly
             
               Os
               Balistae
            
             the
             Sling-bone
             ,
             also
             Quatrio
             ,
             because
             of
             its
             four
             sides
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             placed
             beneath
             the
             shank
             bones
             as
             a
             Basis
             or
             foundation
             :
             for
             it
             is
             joyned
             with
             the
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Tibia
             by
             way
             of
             Ginglumos
             ;
             wherefore
             they
             have
             upon
             a
             long
             Neck
             ,
             on
             high
             ,
             round
             ,
             and
             smooth
             Head
             ,
             covered
             over
             with
             a
             Gristle
             ,
             in
             the
             middle
             whereof
             is
             a
             smooth
             Cavity
             :
             whereupon
             it
             comes
             to
             have
             on
             each
             side
             a
             brim
             or
             brow
             ,
             like
             a
             pully
             or
             little
             wheel
             on
             which
             a
             Rope
             runs
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             sides
             it
             receives
             on
             each
             hand
             the
             Ankle-bones
             :
             it
             's
             also
             joyned
             with
             the
             
               Os
               naviculare
            
             ;
             also
             below
             to
             the
             Heel
             ,
             with
             a
             double
             joynt
             ,
             where
             its
             lower
             part
             is
             uneven
             ,
             twice
             hollowed
             ,
             and
             thrice
             bunched
             .
             It
             receives
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Heel-bone
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             middest
             of
             these
             Joynts
             a
             Cavity
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             (
             to
             which
             the
             hollow
             of
             the
             Heel
             answers
             )
             wherein
             is
             contained
             fat
             and
             a
             slimy
             substance
             ,
             to
             moisten
             the
             gristly
             Ligaments
             ,
             which
             knit
             the
             Talus
             to
             the
             Bone
             ▪
             least
             in
             their
             motion
             they
             should
             be
             dried
             .
             Hence
             I
             have
             observed
             as
             often
             as
             there
             is
             scarsity
             of
             this
             moist
             and
             fat
             Substance
             or
             none
             at
             all
             ,
             either
             by
             means
             of
             a
             wound
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             cause
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             noise
             in
             a
             mans
             Foot
             when
             he
             walks
             ,
             by
             the
             knocking
             of
             the
             two
             bones
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             yet
             without
             pain
             ▪
             because
             there
             is
             no
             sensitive
             part
             within
             ,
             but
             only
             Bones
             ,
             Gristles
             and
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             II.
             Is
             the
             greatest
             and
             thickest
             in
             the
             Foot
             ,
             as
             being
             the
             chiefest
             stability
             thereof
             (
             as
             the
             Talus
             is
             chief
             for
             motion
             )
             and
             therefore
             't
             is
             joyned
             by
             many
             Ligaments
             to
             the
             Talus
             or
             Ankle
             ,
             and
             other
             adjacent
             Bones
          
           
             'T
             is
             called
             
               P●er●●●alx
               ;
               C●lcaneum
               ,
               pedis
               cal●●●
               ,
            
             the
             Spur
             of
             the
             Foot
             or
             Heel-bone
             ▪
             into
             which
             the
             greatest
             and
             strongest
             Chord
             or
             Tendon
             in
             the
             whole
             Body
             is
             fastned
             ,
             being
             made
             up
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             three
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             
               lower
               part
            
             is
             somewhat
             broad
             ,
             where
             it
             turns
             backwards
             ,
             that
             the
             Foot
             may
             more
             firmly
             be
             setled
             and
             strengthned
             ,
             otherwise
             a
             man
             would
             easily
             fall
             backwards
             .
          
           
             In
             its
             upper
             part
             ,
             it
             hath
             a
             large
             head
             ,
             going
             into
             that
             shallow
             cavity
             which
             receives
             the
             knob
             of
             the
             Talus
             .
             But
             it
             is
             also
             joyned
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Cubiforme
            
             or
             Die-fashion'd
             bone
             with
             its
             flat
             head
             .
          
           
             III.
             Is
             called
             
               Os
               naviculare
               ,
               Scaphoeid●s
            
             from
             the
             similitude
             of
             a
             Boat
             :
             't
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             Talus
             and
             the
             three
             hindermore
             bones
          
           
             IV.
             From
             the
             form
             of
             a
             Die
             or
             four
             square
             solid
             body
             called
             a
             Cube
             ,
             is
             termed
             Cubo-eides
             cube-fashion'd
             ,
             also
             
               Os
               t●sserae
            
             ,
             the
             Dice-bone
             ,
             by
             the
             Arabians
             
               Gran
               li●●sum
            
             ,
             by
             some
             others
             〈◊〉
             many
             shap'd
             or
             many-fac'd
             .
             Being
             greates
             than
             the
             rest
             ,
             't
             is
             
               placed
               before
            
             the
             Heel
             ,
             joyned
             by
             an
             uneven
             Surface
             ;
             with
             its
             other
             side
             't
             is
             joyned
             to
             the
             fourth
             and
             fift
             bone
             of
             the
             Pedium
             ;
             but
             within
             ,
             to
             the
             seventh
             bone
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             three
             ,
             anciently
             without
             names
             ,
             cal'd
             by
             
               Fallopius
               ,
               Calcoide●
               ,
               Cuneiformia
            
             ,
             wedg-shion'd
             ,
             are
             articulated
             to
             the
             Naviculare
             or
             Boat-fashion'd-bone
             :
             and
             they
             are
             a
             greater
             or
             middlesiz'd
             ,
             and
             a
             lesser
             from
             a
             broad
             Basis
             growing
             by
             little
             and
             little
             smaller
             and
             smaller
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Bones
               of
               the
               Metatarsus
            
             or
             Sole
             ,
             are
             five
             knit
             to
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             ;
             
               those
               of
               the
               Toes
            
             are
             fourteen
             ;
             because
             the
             great
             Toe
             is
             made
             up
             only
             of
             two
             Bones
             ,
             and
             the
             Interjunctures
             are
             shorter
             than
             in
             the
             Hand
             ,
             but
             those
             of
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             thicker
             than
             in
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             are
             like
             the
             Bones
             in
             the
             Hand
             which
             answer
             to
             them
             ;
             as
             the
             Ligaments
             also
             commonly
             answer
             .
          
           
             But
             under
             the
             sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             the
             Skin
             and
             Fat
             being
             removed
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Ligament
             broad
             and
             strong
             ;
             and
             from
             the
             lowest
             Bone
             of
             the
             Heel
             Sesamoidean
             little
             bones
             are
             inserted
             into
             all
             the
             ranks
             of
             Toes
             ,
             for
             the
             greater
             firmness
             of
             the
             whole
             Foot.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               Chap.
               XXII
               .
               and
               last
            
             .
             Of
             the
             Sesamoidean
             Bones
             .
          
           
             IN
             the
             Interjunctures
             of
             the
             Hands
             and
             Feet
             are
             found
             certain
             very
             little
             Bones
             called
             Sesaminis
             or
             Sesamoidea
             because
             they
             answer
             in
             likeness
             to
             Sesamus
             Seeds
             and
             also
             in
             their
             smallness
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             round
             and
             a
             little
             flat
             .
             
          
           
             They
             are
             less
             in
             the
             Feet
             th●●●
             in
             the
             Hands
             ,
             excepting
             in
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             greater
             than
             the
             Thumb
             is
             .
             In
             ancient
             persons
             they
             are
             greater
             and
             a
             little
             plane
             .
          
           
             They
             grow
             to
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             
             which
             move
             the
             Toes
             ,
             under
             which
             they
             lie
             concealed
             wrapt
             up
             in
             the
             Ligaments
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             come
             away
             with
             them
             in
             the
             clensing
             of
             the
             Bones
             unless
             great
             Care
             be
             used
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             they
             are
             gristly
             ,
             as
             in
             Children
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             are
             not
             very
             conspicuous
             ;
             otherwhiles
             bony
             ,
             covered
             with
             Gristles
             ,
             and
             inwardly
             Spungy
             and
             porous
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             commonly
             twelve
             in
             number
             in
             each
             Foot
             and
             Hand
             ,
             but
             sometimes
             sixteen
             ,
             nineteen
             ,
             twenty
             and
             more
             :
             sometimes
             there
             are
             only
             ten
             .
             They
             are
             more
             in
             number
             ,
             greater
             and
             harder
             ,
             in
             the
             inside
             of
             the
             hand
             than
             without
             ,
             in
             which
             
             Riolanus
             ●a●es
             there
             are
             none
             .
             Their
             number
             therefore
             is
             uncertain
             :
             for
             many
             are
             so
             small
             that
             they
             are
             not
             observed
             :
             and
             Nature
             herein
             as
             in
             a
             matter
             of
             small
             moment
             ,
             sometimes
             abounds
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             again
             comes
             short
             .
          
           
             But
             
               those
               two
            
             are
             chiefly
             remarkable
             for
             their
             greatness
             which
             are
             joined
             to
             the
             first
             Joynt
             of
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             at
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Bone
             Metatarsus
             ;
             one
             which
             is
             the
             greater
             ,
             placed
             under
             the
             Nervous
             part
             of
             that
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             bends
             the
             first
             Bone
             of
             the
             great
             Toe
             ,
             and
             the
             form
             and
             Size
             thereof
             ,
             is
             like
             the
             half
             of
             a
             great
             Pease
             ,
             the
             white
             skin
             being
             taken
             off
             :
             which
             little
             bone
             is
             by
             the
             Arabians
             called
             Albadara
             .
             Some
             Ancient
             Philosophers
             held
             that
             a
             Man
             should
             grow
             up
             again
             at
             length
             from
             this
             bone
             ,
             as
             from
             a
             Seed
             ,
             which
             
               Corn.
               Agrippa
            
             from
             the
             tradition
             of
             the
             Hebrews
             calls
             Luz
             .
             But
             another
             much
             less
             ,
             is
             placed
             under
             the
             second
             Joynt
             of
             the
             great
             Toe
             .
          
           
             And
             though
             most
             commonly
             these
             same
             very
             small
             bones
             are
             found
             in
             the
             Interjunctures
             of
             the
             Fingers
             and
             Toes
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             to
             be
             seen
             also
             in
             other
             places
             .
          
           
             As
             sometimes
             in
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             where
             the
             eighth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Wrist
             is
             fastned
             to
             the
             bone
             of
             the
             Metatarsus
             which
             sustains
             the
             little
             Finger
             ▪
             there
             is
             one
             which
             fills
             ●n
             hollow
             place
             there
             :
             and
             after
             the
             sa●ie
             manner
             here
             is
             the
             like
             Bone
             in
             the
             Tarsus
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             at
             the
             outside
             of
             the
             articulation
             of
             the
             ●i●t
             Bone
             of
             the
             Metacarpus
             which
             sustains
             the
             little
             Toe
             ,
             with
             the
             
               Os
               cubiforme
            
             ,
             or
             Die-fashion'd
             bone
             :
             also
             two
             little
             bones
             in
             the
             Ham
             by
             the
             
               Os
               fem●ri●
            
             ,
             which
             grow
             not
             in
             the
             Tendons
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             Beginnings
             of
             the
             two
             first
             Feet-moving
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             are
             found
             in
             old
             Men
             and
             in
             dry
             Creatures
             ,
             as
             Deer
             ,
             Dogs
             ,
             and
             Hares
             .
             Hereunto
             they
             refer
             that
             bony
             part
             in
             aged
             people
             ,
             which
             is
             placed
             against
             the
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
           
             Their
             Use
             is
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               To
               defend
               the
               Tendons
               ,
               and
               by
               their
               hardness
               to
               retain
               them
               in
               their
               motion
               ,
               least
               they
               should
               fall
               from
               the
               Joynt
               when
               it
               bunches
               out
               .
            
             
               II.
               To
               strengthen
               the
               Joynt
               and
               preserve
               it
               from
               Luxation
               .
            
             
               III.
               To
               fill
               up
               empty
               spaces
               .
               And
               while
               these
               things
               are
               performed
               by
               the
               said
               little
               Bones
               ,
               the
               Hands
               do
               thereby
               lay
               firmer
               and
               safer
               hold
               upon
               any
               ;
               and
               the
               Feet
               can
               stand
               and
               go
               more
               steadily
               ,
               especially
               on
               rough
               ground
               .
            
          
           
             
               To
               God
               our
               Creator
            
             be
             Praise
             ,
             Honour
             and
             Glory
             ,
             who
             hath
             form'd
             and
             fashion'd
             us
             so
             wonderfully
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         
           TWO
           EPISTLES
           OF
           Johannes
           Walaeus
           Concerning
           the
           Motion
           of
           the
           Chyle
           And
           the
           BLOOD
           .
           To
           Thomas
           Bartholinus
           The
           Son
           of
           CASPAR
           BARTHOLINUS
           .
        
         
           
             THE
             FIRST
             EPISTLE
             Concerning
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             and
             Blood
             ,
             TO
             
               Thomas
               Bartholinus
            
             the
             Son
             of
             Caspar
             .
             
          
           
             THe
             chief
             men
             in
             Church
             and
             Commonwealth
             have
             in
             all
             Ages
             contended
             about
             Primacy
             :
             but
             learned
             Men
             have
             in
             no
             Age
             more
             ambitiously
             striven
             who
             should
             seem
             most
             learned
             ,
             then
             at
             this
             present
             time
             .
             And
             to
             attain
             their
             desire
             very
             many
             are
             not
             afraid
             to
             assist
             themselves
             by
             Calumnies
             and
             other
             worse
             Arts.
             No
             man
             can
             publish
             in
             Print
             ,
             or
             communicate
             to
             his
             Friend
             any
             writing
             ,
             which
             some
             account
             excellent
             ,
             but
             he
             presently
             meets
             with
             a
             Detractor
             who
             will
             prick
             ,
             cut
             ,
             and
             tear
             him
             most
             cruelly
             .
             Now
             for
             a
             man
             to
             seek
             nothing
             else
             by
             his
             Cares
             and
             Labours
             ,
             but
             Envy
             and
             Vexation
             of
             Mind
             ,
             is
             extream
             madnesse
             .
          
           
           
             These
             Causes
             have
             (
             I
             confess
             )
             hindred
             me
             from
             satisfying
             your
             frequent
             Request
             ;
             and
             besides
             ,
             because
             I
             am
             not
             willing
             to
             determine
             of
             those
             things
             ,
             which
             long
             experience
             of
             years
             cannot
             either
             prove
             ,
             or
             sufficiently
             limit
             .
             Howbeit
             you
             continue
             your
             Request
             ,
             and
             I
             am
             much
             ashamed
             ,
             alwaies
             to
             deny
             you
             .
             Also
             a
             certain
             learned
             Man
             hath
             imposed
             a
             necessity
             upon
             me
             ,
             in
             a
             manner
             ,
             to
             discover
             to
             others
             my
             opinion
             concerning
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Blood.
             For
             certain
             Theses
             having
             been
             disputed
             concerning
             the
             Motion
             of
             
             the
             Blood
             ,
             my self
             being
             President
             of
             the
             Dispute
             ;
             though
             the
             Defendant
             truly
             professeth
             in
             his
             said
             Theses
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             his
             own
             ,
             yet
             he
             hath
             undertaken
             to
             tax
             and
             blame
             them
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             mine
             .
             And
             although
             that
             young
             man
             need
             not
             be
             ashamed
             of
             those
             Theses
             ,
             yet
             I
             would
             not
             have
             another
             mans
             Theses
             ,
             though
             disputed
             when
             I
             was
             President
             ,
             to
             be
             accounted
             mine
             .
             Neither
             can
             he
             be
             ignorant
             of
             the
             Reason
             ,
             who
             is
             acquainted
             with
             my
             Liberty
             in
             Disputing
             ,
             or
             the
             Custome
             of
             our
             University
             .
          
           
             Now
             therefore
             take
             my
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             as
             follows
             .
          
           
             That
             some
             hot
             blood
             which
             leaps
             out
             of
             the
             great
             Arteries
             being
             opened
             is
             
             thinner
             ,
             more
             rare
             and
             of
             a
             more
             bright
             colour
             ,
             than
             that
             which
             flows
             out
             of
             the
             Veins
             when
             they
             are
             opened
             :
             yet
             ,
             I
             will
             not
             therefore
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             differs
             formally
             from
             the
             Venal
             ,
             Blood
             :
             for
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             may
             differ
             as
             aforesaid
             from
             the
             Venal
             ,
             because
             it
             comes
             reaking
             hot
             as
             it
             were
             from
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             abounds
             with
             greater
             store
             of
             Spirits
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             boyling
             Milk
             differs
             from
             it self
             being
             cooled
             ,
             for
             the
             same
             ▪
             reason
             :
             for
             that
             Blood
             which
             is
             in
             the
             smaller
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             so
             farther
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             observed
             to
             differ
             less
             from
             the
             venal
             Blood.
             And
             when
             we
             have
             taken
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             Arteries
             ,
             yea
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             it self
             of
             a
             living
             Creature
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             same
             Creature
             ,
             have
             taken
             some
             out
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             have
             let
             then
             ,
             both
             grow
             cold
             and
             congeal
             ,
             we
             could
             never
             observe
             any
             difference
             betwixt
             them
             .
             So
             that
             we
             can
             see
             no
             other
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             is
             of
             the
             same
             kinde
             with
             the
             Venal
             .
          
           
             Some
             few
             will
             have
             ,
             that
             the
             venal
             Blood
             is
             of
             two
             kinds
             ,
             one
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             another
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             .
             But
             we
             cannot
             see
             any
             difference
             of
             these
             Bloods
             either
             when
             they
             are
             included
             in
             their
             vessels
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             are
             let
             out
             :
             and
             that
             Reason
             doth
             teach
             as
             much
             we
             shall
             see
             anon
             .
          
           
             Besides
             these
             ,
             we
             may
             likewise
             conceive
             another
             sort
             of
             Blood
             ,
             which
             being
             made
             of
             Chyle
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             hath
             not
             received
             any
             further
             perfection
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
             And
             we
             are
             little
             concerned
             to
             know
             the
             Nature
             thereof
             ,
             because
             we
             see
             it
             continues
             such
             but
             a
             very
             little
             while
             .
             So
             that
             we
             are
             to
             enquire
             
             into
             the
             motion
             of
             
               only
               one
               sort
               of
               Blood.
            
             
          
           
             Now
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             moved
             either
             in
             
               that
               part
               of
               the
               Vein
            
             or
             
               Artery
               wherein
               it
               is
               contained
            
             ,
             or
             
               out
               of
               that
               part
               into
               another
               .
            
          
           
             In
             
               one
               part
               of
               a
               Vein
               or
               Artery
               ,
            
             the
             Blood
             is
             not
             discerned
             to
             move
             up
             and
             
             down
             ,
             like
             boyling
             water
             ,
             neither
             when
             it
             is
             received
             into
             a
             Vessel
             ,
             nor
             when
             let
             out
             of
             a
             living
             and
             hot
             Body
             ;
             nor
             yet
             in
             the
             Artery
             it self
             ,
             if
             it
             being
             on
             either
             hand
             tied
             ,
             shall
             be
             opened
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Ligatures
             .
             Ye●
             ,
             when
             we
             have
             many
             times
             cut
             off
             the
             point
             of
             a
             living
             Heart
             ,
             and
             set
             it
             upright
             ,
             we
             have
             found
             the
             Blood
             to
             be
             hot
             ,
             but
             never
             to
             boyl
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             moved
             
               from
               one
               part
               of
               an
               Artery
               or
               Vein
               into
               another
               ,
            
             is
             
             a
             thing
             very
             manifest
             .
             For
             Blood
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             furthest
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             which
             seeing
             it
             is
             not
             bred
             there
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             come
             from
             some
             other
             place
             .
             And
             it
             is
             evident
             enough
             ,
             that
             in
             living
             Creatures
             ,
             the
             Blood
             flows
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             into
             the
             Heart
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             this
             same
             
               whole
               Motion
               of
               the
               Blood
            
             may
             be
             by
             us
             the
             better
             understood
             ,
             
             I
             conceive
             our
             best
             way
             will
             be
             to
             begin
             
               at
               the
               very
               Fou●tain
            
             ,
             and
             Original
             thereof
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             solid
             Meat
             in
             Dogs
             hold
             the
             same
             order
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             just
             as
             it
             was
             eaten
             by
             the
             Beasts
             ;
             unless
             the
             Stomach
             being
             distended
             with
             too
             much
             Drink
             ,
             did
             make
             the
             Meat
             to
             float
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             change
             its
             order
             and
             situation
             .
          
           
             The
             Meat
             which
             the
             Stomach
             receives
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             but
             two
             ounces
             ,
             
             it
             evidently
             imbraces
             the
             same
             round
             about
             ;
             just
             as
             we
             see
             folded
             purses
             contract
             themselves
             about
             a
             Bullet
             or
             round
             Ball
             within
             them
             ,
             also
             the
             upper
             and
             lower
             Orifice
             are
             both
             shut
             :
             which
             
             by
             making
             an
             hole
             near
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             putting
             in
             your
             little
             finger
             ,
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             try
             .
             But
             the
             lower
             Orifice
             notwithstanding
             ,
             when
             we
             finde
             it
             perfectly
             shut
             ,
             seems
             rather
             to
             be
             fallen
             together
             ,
             than
             straitly
             closed
             ,
             that
             upon
             the
             smallest
             pressure
             it
             may
             let
             the
             Chylus
             pass
             by
             .
             Also
             many
             times
             when
             the
             Stomach
             and
             its
             Orifices
             are
             weak
             ,
             they
             fail
             in
             their
             natural
             closeness
             ,
             and
             upon
             searching
             are
             found
             looser
             .
          
           
             The
             meat
             retained
             in
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             as
             thoroughly
             moistened
             with
             the
             Liquor
             
             of
             our
             food
             ,
             Drink
             and
             Spittle
             :
             and
             it
             quickly
             becomes
             porous
             and
             Spungie
             :
             because
             as
             is
             most
             likely
             the
             said
             Liquor
             hath
             drawn
             out
             and
             suckt
             into
             it self
             some
             of
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Meat
             .
          
           
             A
             while
             after
             it
             is
             cut
             and
             torn
             as
             it
             
             were
             into
             very
             small
             particles
             ,
             both
             that
             of
             thin
             and
             that
             of
             gross
             Substance
             ,
             yea
             ,
             in
             Dogs
             the
             very
             shells
             themselves
             of
             Eggs
             :
             which
             doth
             questionless
             proceed
             from
             some
             acid
             sharp
             humour
             that
             hath
             in
             it
             a
             dissolving
             power
             .
             So
             we
             finde
             by
             experience
             that
             the
             Stomach
             burthened
             with
             the
             quantity
             or
             grossness
             of
             meat
             ,
             doth
             find
             it self
             eased
             ,
             by
             taking
             a
             little
             Vinegar
             ,
             Juice
             of
             Citrons
             ,
             Oyl
             of
             Sulphur
             ,
             or
             Vitriol
             .
             Nor
             let
             any
             man
             assign
             the
             Cause
             thereof
             to
             Spittle
             or
             Choler
             belching
             back
             into
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             when
             he
             shall
             see
             Bread
             steeped
             some
             hours
             in
             hot
             Spittle
             or
             the
             Gall
             of
             an
             Ox
             ,
             by
             them
             not
             dissolved
             ,
             moreover
             in
             an
             hundred
             Dogs
             or
             more
             which
             I
             have
             cut
             up
             on
             purpose
             alive
             ,
             I
             found
             Choler
             flowed
             back
             into
             the
             Stomachs
             of
             onely
             two
             of
             them
             ,
             one
             of
             which
             had
             eaten
             nothing
             for
             three
             daies
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             Stomach
             ,
             which
             was
             wonderful
             to
             behold
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             Cholerick
             froath
             so
             thick
             and
             full
             of
             bubbles
             ,
             as
             that
             we
             see
             on
             the
             Suds
             of
             such
             as
             wash
             in
             Lye.
             
          
           
             Now
             I
             conceive
             this
             acid
             humor
             comes
             from
             the
             Spleen
             into
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             because
             
             there
             is
             no
             other
             part
             in
             the
             body
             which
             we
             can
             perceive
             to
             be
             sharp
             or
             acid
             :
             and
             because
             upon
             swallowing
             a
             bit
             of
             boyled
             Spleen
             especially
             of
             a
             ●ow
             ,
             heaviness
             of
             the
             Stomach
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Quantity
             or
             grossness
             of
             Meats
             ,
             is
             thereby
             holpen
             .
          
           
             Thus
             the
             Meat
             being
             mixed
             in
             its
             
             smallest
             particles
             with
             the
             Liquor
             ,
             in
             tract
             of
             time
             by
             concoction
             it
             comes
             to
             the
             consistence
             of
             thin
             Barley-cream
             :
             which
             when
             it
             hath
             attained
             ,
             then
             at
             last
             it
             is
             thrust
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             all
             Meat
             doth
             net
             receive
             
             this
             change
             in
             the
             Stomach
             in
             the
             same
             
             space
             of
             tim●
             ;
             it
             is
             sooner
             performed
             in
             the
             day
             time
             ,
             with
             a
             little
             meat
             thin
             of
             Substance
             and
             well
             chewed
             ;
             it
             requires
             a
             longer
             space
             in
             the
             night
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             store
             of
             it
             ,
             the
             meat
             is
             gross
             ,
             and
             swallowed
             down
             in
             great
             bits
             :
             so
             that
             the
             meat
             which
             is
             well
             grinded
             with
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             begins
             to
             be
             turned
             into
             Cream
             ,
             when
             that
             continues
             yet
             solid
             ,
             which
             was
             swallowed
             down
             in
             great
             bits
             .
          
           
             Milk
             and
             Broaths
             in
             the
             day
             time
             are
             perfectly
             digested
             in
             an
             hours
             space
             or
             
             sooner
             ,
             and
             if
             somewhat
             else
             hinder
             not
             ,
             they
             are
             then
             also
             distributed
             ;
             which
             the
             voiding
             of
             Urin
             alone
             ,
             after
             them
             ,
             doth
             evidently
             shew
             ,
             without
             any
             Dissection
             :
             Herbs
             are
             more
             slowly
             changed
             .
             Bread
             in
             respect
             of
             Digestion
             seems
             to
             be
             of
             a
             midling
             Substance
             ,
             we
             finde
             in
             the
             first
             hour
             and
             half
             very
             little
             changed
             ;
             in
             the
             following
             hour
             it
             is
             rare
             and
             light
             ,
             just
             like
             a
             wet
             Spunge
             ;
             when
             that
             hour
             is
             past
             ,
             it
             is
             divided
             into
             very
             small
             particles
             ,
             and
             mixt
             so
             with
             the
             Drink
             ,
             that
             all
             appears
             liquid
             ,
             and
             soon
             after
             it
             is
             most
             of
             all
             digested
             ,
             and
             at
             last
             as
             much
             of
             the
             Braad
             as
             is
             digested
             ,
             between
             the
             fourth
             and
             fift
             hour
             after
             its
             eating
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Stomach
             forced
             through
             the
             Pylorus
             ,
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
             But
             some
             of
             the
             said
             Bread
             staies
             behind
             ,
             which
             by
             little
             and
             little
             is
             pertectly
             digested
             ,
             as
             also
             if
             any
             other
             meat
             were
             eaten
             with
             the
             Bread
             of
             harder
             digestion
             than
             it
             :
             which
             meats
             I
             have
             observed
             to
             be
             digested
             in
             this
             order
             .
             First
             Beans
             and
             Pease
             ,
             then
             Fish
             ,
             then
             Flesh
             which
             is
             perfectly
             digested
             and
             thrust
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             between
             the
             sixt
             and
             seventh
             hour
             :
             Beef
             between
             the
             seventh
             and
             eighth
             :
             yea
             ,
             and
             the
             membranous
             parts
             of
             the
             Animals
             are
             longer
             in
             digestion
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             shells
             of
             Egs
             ;
             I
             have
             seen
             Bones
             that
             have
             abode
             in
             the
             Stomach
             unto
             the
             third
             day
             ,
             during
             which
             space
             they
             were
             become
             like
             Gristles
             .
          
           
             Yea
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             parts
             of
             these
             very
             meats
             ,
             oft
             times
             great
             variety
             is
             seen
             ,
             as
             
             of
             Bread
             and
             Flesh
             ,
             though
             they
             seem
             whole
             in
             the
             Stomack
             ,
             yet
             some
             portion
             though
             very
             little
             ,
             is
             distributed
             sometimes
             the
             first
             hour
             ,
             unto
             the
             Milky
             Veins
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             whatever
             is
             digested
             ,
             doth
             not
             at
             all
             expect
             the
             digestion
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             nor
             is
             staid
             by
             that
             which
             is
             undigested
             ,
             but
             presently
             slips
             out
             ,
             and
             is
             carried
             into
             the
             Guts
             :
             yea
             ,
             and
             you
             shall
             seldome
             finde
             a
             Dogs
             Stomach
             empty
             ,
             although
             he
             have
             not
             eaten
             in
             sixteen
             hours
             before
             .
          
           
             Now
             I
             could
             easily
             make
             all
             these
             Observations
             in
             Dogs
             ,
             which
             I
             cut
             up
             alive
             ,
             at
             several
             distances
             after
             they
             had
             eaten
             their
             Meat
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Guts
             the
             Chyle
             is
             of
             an
             Ashcolour
             ,
             and
             is
             seldome
             coloured
             by
             the
             yellowness
             
             of
             Choler
             :
             and
             presently
             now
             from
             the
             Duodenum
             it
             begins
             to
             enter
             the
             milky
             Veins
             of
             Asellius
             ,
             nor
             doth
             this
             entrance
             cease
             in
             any
             of
             the
             Guts
             as
             long
             as
             any
             Chyle
             remains
             in
             the
             said
             Guts
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             
               Intestinum
               rectum
            
             or
             Arse-gut
             it self
             ,
             is
             endued
             with
             milky
             veins
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             times
             seen
             to
             look
             white
             by
             the
             afflux
             of
             Chyle
             .
             And
             that
             we
             may
             not
             think
             that
             same
             milkie
             
             juyce
             comes
             elsewhere
             than
             from
             the
             Guts
             ,
             I
             have
             bound
             these
             milky
             Veins
             inserted
             into
             the
             Body
             of
             the
             Guts
             ,
             and
             observed
             that
             from
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Guts
             to
             the
             Ligature
             they
             are
             evidently
             full
             and
             swoln
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             Ligature
             towards
             the
             Mesentery
             they
             wax
             empty
             and
             fall
             in
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Chyle
             hath
             never
             been
             observed
             to
             enter
             into
             any
             Vein
             in
             the
             body
             of
             
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             nor
             any
             Meseraick
             Vein
             ,
             nor
             yet
             the
             Blood
             being
             by
             the
             binding
             of
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             (
             whereof
             the
             reason
             shall
             hereafter
             appear
             )
             exceedingly
             augmented
             in
             the
             Meseraick
             Veins
             ,
             hath
             ever
             been
             ●een
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             milky
             Veins
             .
             So
             that
             I
             cannot
             see
             otherwise
             ,
             but
             that
             Nature
             hath
             ord●ined
             the
             milky
             Veins
             only
             to
             carry
             Chyle
             ,
             and
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Meseraick
             Veins
             only
             to
             carry
             Blood.
             
          
           
             The
             Chyle
             in
             the
             milky
             Veins
             is
             alwaies
             though
             it
             proceed
             from
             Ash-colour'd
             
             Chyle
             in
             the
             Guts
             or
             such
             as
             is
             dyed
             yellow
             by
             Choler
             .
          
           
             By
             these
             Milky
             Veins
             the
             Chyle
             goes
             
             upwards
             ,
             after
             what
             manners
             ,
             is
             not
             very
             easie
             to
             say
             .
             This
             seems
             to
             me
             most
             probable
             ,
             which
             I
             observed
             in
             great
             and
             lean
             Greyhounds
             ;
             that
             some
             of
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             do
             go
             right
             on
             ,
             to
             the
             
               Ramus
               Mesentericus
            
             ,
             some
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             it self
             ,
             others
             into
             the
             hollow
             parts
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             very
             few
             do
             sometimes
             end
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             near
             the
             Emulgents
             .
             For
             these
             Animals
             have
             not
             that
             single
             kernel
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             which
             Asellius
             hath
             termed
             Pancreas
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             wont
             to
             obseure
             the
             passage
             of
             these
             Veins
             ;
             but
             they
             are
             furnished
             in
             that
             place
             with
             smaller
             kernels
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             five
             in
             number
             ,
             which
             being
             distant
             by
             a
             man
             fest
             space
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             through
             that
             space
             they
             afford
             free
             passage
             to
             some
             milky
             Veins
             .
             But
             seeing
             that
             above
             these
             kernels
             ,
             there
             are
             fewer
             branches
             of
             the
             milky
             Veins
             (
             and
             some
             of
             them
             greater
             )
             than
             beneath
             ,
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             believe
             ,
             that
             neer
             those
             kernels
             ,
             the
             milky
             Veins
             are
             divided
             into
             branches
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             said
             kernels
             serve
             ,
             as
             elsewhere
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             to
             accomodate
             the
             divarication
             or
             branching
             of
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Sometimes
             also
             I
             have
             been
             shewed
             milky
             Veins
             ,
             which
             entred
             into
             the
             
             Liver
             ,
             but
             when
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             Shewers
             ,
             I
             accurately
             examin'd
             the
             matter
             ,
             we
             found
             them
             to
             be
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Chyle
             being
             carried
             through
             
             these
             milky
             Veins
             is
             mixed
             with
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             
               Ramus
               Mesentericus
            
             ,
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             very
             Liver
             also
             it self
             :
             for
             in
             what
             place
             soever
             you
             tie
             the
             milky
             Veins
             ,
             they
             alwaies
             swell
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             hindred
             from
             passing
             the
             Chyle
             to
             these
             parts
             ,
             and
             the
             Ligature
             being
             loosed
             ,
             they
             manifestly
             infuse
             the
             same
             into
             those
             parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             in
             the
             Liver
             although
             in
             sundry
             places
             they
             are
             knit
             to
             the
             branches
             of
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             never
             opened
             into
             a
             great
             branch
             of
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             but
             the
             smallest
             branches
             of
             
               Vena
               porta
            
             do
             transfuse
             this
             Chyle
             mixt
             with
             Blood
             into
             the
             smallest
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ;
             as
             is
             easie
             to
             observe
             in
             the
             Liver
             blown
             up
             when
             the
             Flesh
             is
             taken
             off
             ,
             and
             it
             swims
             in
             water
             .
             And
             that
             the
             same
             happens
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Chyle
             mingled
             with
             the
             Blood
             ,
             will
             be
             hereafter
             manifest
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             little
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             
             the
             Blood
             is
             in
             the
             Judgement
             of
             all
             men
             poured
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             :
             and
             when
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             it
             is
             tied
             above
             the
             Liver
             ,
             it
             manifestly
             swels
             with
             blood
             flowing
             in
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             it
             enters
             into
             
             
               the
               right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
            
             and
             either
             part
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             being
             tied
             ,
             either
             that
             which
             is
             seared
             above
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             is
             below
             the
             Heart
             ,
             I
             have
             many
             times
             observed
             ,
             especially
             in
             an
             Eell
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             quickly
             emptied
             towards
             the
             Heart
             which
             also
             Harvey
             hath
             observed
             chapter
             tenth
             of
             his
             Book
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             it
             enters
             manifestly
             enough
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             ,
             and
             by
             it
             into
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             dare
             not
             say
             that
             any
             of
             the
             blood
             passeth
             out
             
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             by
             the
             partition
             wall
             ,
             〈…〉
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             thereof
             ,
             seeing
             I
             find
             open
             passages
             elswhere
             ,
             but
             none
             in
             this
             place
             .
             
               Purut
               Gassendus
            
             a
             General
             Scholar
             
             and
             of
             a
             candid
             Spirit
             ,
             in
             his
             Exercitations
             upon
             Fluds
             Philosophy
             part
             3.
             chap.
             1●
             .
             relates
             how
             he
             had
             seen
             Payanus
             shew
             the
             Partition
             wall
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             be
             transpassable
             ,
             by
             sundry
             crooked
             and
             turning
             passages
             :
             and
             that
             they
             might
             be
             found
             out
             ,
             if
             putting
             a
             Probe
             gently
             into
             one
             of
             the
             pits
             ,
             you
             shall
             most
             leafurely
             thrust
             it
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             and
             to
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             still
             seek
             a
             further
             passage
             till
             you
             meet
             with
             the
             end
             thereof
             .
             And
             the
             truth
             is
             I
             have
             divers
             times
             found
             it
             to
             succeed
             as
             he
             saies
             ;
             but
             I
             have
             withall
             observed
             ,
             that
             those
             waies
             and
             turning
             passages
             ,
             were
             not
             at
             all
             made
             by
             Nature
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             Probe
             or
             point
             of
             a
             Penknise
             ,
             while
             we
             open
             a
             way
             already
             made
             ,
             and
             seek
             one
             farther
             :
             for
             the
             Flesh
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             so
             tender
             and
             withall
             so
             consistent
             ,
             that
             with
             the
             smallest
             touch
             of
             any
             thing
             that
             can
             bo●e
             ,
             it
             is
             presently
             broken
             ,
             and
             leaves
             a
             Cavity
             ;
             so
             that
             we
             may
             also
             after
             this
             manner
             ,
             find
             passages
             through
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Blood
             being
             entred
             by
             the
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             into
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             doth
             return
             
             through
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             unto
             the
             Left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             I
             do
             hereby
             collect
             ,
             in
             that
             having
             bound
             the
             greater
             branch
             of
             the
             
               Arteaia
               Venosa
            
             (
             in
             a
             live
             Anatomy
             )
             neer
             the
             Pericardium
             or
             Heart-bag
             ,
             we
             have
             seen
             it
             grow
             hard
             and
             swell
             towards
             the
             circumference
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             that
             part
             being
             emptiod
             and
             falling
             in
             which
             looks
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             Ligature
             was
             loosed
             ,
             we
             saw
             the
             Blood
             move
             to
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             :
             and
             this
             is
             very
             easily
             observed
             in
             Rabbies
             .
             Now
             this
             Blood
             ,
             because
             it
             can
             come
             from
             no
             other
             place
             ,
             must
             needs
             come
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             hither
             .
          
           
             
               Leonardus
               Botallus
            
             a
             most
             learned
             Man
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Book
             
               de
               Catarrho
            
             ,
             supposeth
             he
             hath
             found
             another
             way
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Blood
             may
             continually
             goe
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             right
             ,
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             
               A
               little
               above
               the
               coronal
               Artery
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               I
               found
               a
               passage
               visible
               enough
               ,
               nèar
               the
               right
               Earlet
               ,
               which●
               goes
               immediately
               and
               right
               forth
               into
               the
               left
               Earlet
               .
            
          
           
             This
             passage
             unless
             it
             be
             the
             progress
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               arteriosa
            
             ,
             
             which
             we
             call
             
               Foramen
               ovale
            
             ,
             or
             another
             passage
             which
             I
             have
             somtimes
             found
             in
             a
             Sheeps
             Heart
             ,
             as
             big
             as
             a
             Wheat
             straw
             ,
             going
             with
             a
             crooked
             passage
             from
             one
             Earlet
             to
             another
             ;
             unless
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             it
             were
             one
             of
             these
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             what
             for
             a
             passage
             it
             was
             .
          
           
             And
             as
             for
             that
             
               Ovale
               foramen
               Eg-fashion'd-hole
            
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             every
             where
             alike
             shut
             up
             ,
             and
             oftentimes
             there
             is
             a
             very
             thin
             and
             transparent
             little
             Membrane
             growing
             in
             the
             middle
             thereof
             ,
             which
             with
             the
             smallest
             touch
             of
             a
             Probe
             is
             easily
             broken
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             very
             seldom
             upon
             any
             occasion
             found
             open
             ,
             in
             grown
             persons
             .
             And
             the
             Blood
             flowing
             through
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             out
             of
             the
             Lungs
             ,
             doth
             fasten
             the
             Membrane
             placed
             before
             that
             hole
             ,
             so
             that
             even
             when
             it
             doth
             not
             grow
             to
             ,
             hardly
             any
             thing
             can
             pass
             that
             way
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             same
             oblique
             passage
             which
             I
             have
             seen
             in
             a
             Sheeps
             heart
             ,
             doth
             many
             times
             pierce
             deep
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Earlet
             ,
             but
             is
             very
             seldom
             carried
             into
             the
             other
             Earlet
             .
             And
             I
             conceive
             it
             was
             given
             the
             Earlet
             for
             its
             Nutrition
             ,
             it
             not
             being
             wont
             to
             receive
             branches
             from
             the
             Coronaria
             .
          
           
             Now
             from
             such
             things
             as
             seldom
             happen
             ,
             we
             cannot
             conclude
             any
             thing
             touching
             those
             things
             that
             constantly
             come
             to
             pass
             :
             for
             Nature
             frequently
             sports
             her self
             in
             the
             Fabrick
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             So
             in
             the
             
               Septum
               Intermedium
            
             or
             partition
             wall
             of
             an
             Oxes
             Heart
             ,
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             according
             to
             the
             length
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             sometimes
             I
             have
             found
             a
             Cavity
             ,
             opening
             at
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             about
             the
             point
             ,
             which
             was
             as
             long
             and
             large
             as
             a
             mans
             Fore-finger
             .
             The
             like
             whereunto
             possibly
             Aristotle
             saw
             ,
             when
             in
             his
             3.
             
               de
               partibus
            
             Chap.
             4.
             he
             saith
             the
             greater
             sort
             of
             Animals
             have
             three
             Ventricles
             in
             their
             Heart
             .
             For
             the
             greatest
             Animals
             that
             are
             ,
             have
             but
             two
             Ventricles
             ,
             as
             I
             observed
             in
             the
             Dissection
             of
             a
             young
             Whale
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             Blood
             cannot
             be
             thought
             to
             go
             ordinarily
             any
             other
             way
             ,
             then
             through
             the
             Lungs
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             being
             thus
             caried
             into
             the
             
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             goes
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             
               Arteria
               aorta
            
             ,
             the
             middle
             and
             smallest
             Arteries
             :
             for
             they
             being
             bound
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             ,
             do
             wonderfully
             swell
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             towards
             the
             extream
             parts
             they
             fall
             in
             ,
             and
             the
             Ligature
             being
             loosed
             ,
             they
             evidently
             send
             the
             Blood
             to
             the
             remoter
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             smaller
             Arteries
             
             may
             enter
             into
             the
             Veins
             ;
             for
             the
             Arteries
             have
             a
             way
             open
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             by
             the
             common
             mouths
             of
             one
             opened
             into
             another
             ,
             .
             And
             to
             the
             intent
             we
             might
             be
             sure
             that
             Blood
             may
             pass
             by
             those
             mouths
             ,
             we
             have
             freed
             the
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             in
             the
             Foot
             of
             a
             dead
             Dog
             ,
             from
             such
             things
             as
             are
             wont
             to
             hinder
             their
             being
             seen
             ,
             and
             we
             emptied
             the
             greater
             crural
             Vein
             ,
             and
             bound
             it
             in
             the
             flank
             ,
             least
             any
             Blood
             might
             flow
             in
             that
             way
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Knee
             we
             bound
             both
             this
             Vein
             and
             its
             neighbouring
             Artery
             :
             and
             then
             with
             our
             fingers
             we
             forced
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             Iliack
             Arteries
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Knee
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             emptied
             the
             crural
             Artery
             ,
             but
             the
             crural
             Vein
             we
             saw
             manifestly
             replenished
             ;
             and
             seeing
             into
             the
             Vein
             tied
             above
             and
             beneath
             nothing
             could
             come
             or
             a
             very
             little
             out
             of
             its
             branches
             and
             yet
             it
             was
             much
             filled
             ,
             and
             the
             Artery
             quite
             emptied
             ;
             we
             did
             gather
             that
             the
             Blood
             wherewith
             the
             Vein
             was
             filled
             ,
             was
             driven
             by
             the
             little
             mouths
             out
             of
             the
             emptied
             Arteries
             ,
             into
             the
             said
             Vein
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             this
             Opinion
             is
             not
             new
             Galen
             
             himself
             shews
             in
             his
             5.
             chap.
             
               de
               Usu
               pulsus
               .
               The
               Conjunctions
               of
               the
               mouths
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               are
               not
               visible
               to
               our
               Eyes
               :
               and
               if
               you
               shall
               justly
               refuse
               to
               believe
               them
               as
               not
               credible
               enough
               ,
               you
               may
               be
               brought
               by
               other
               reasons
               dellvered
               by
               the
               Ancients
               to
               believe
               there
               are
               such
               things
               :
               and
               not
               a
               ●●l●
               by
               this
               plain
               token
               ,
               that
               in
               case
               a
               Man
               shall
               take
               any
               of
               those
               Creatures
               in
               whom
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               are
               manifest
               ,
               as
               an
               Ox
               ,
               an
               Hog
               ,
               an
               Ass
               ,
               an
               Horse
               ,
               a
               Sheep
               ,
               a
               Bear
               ,
               a
               Libard
               ,
               an
               Ape●
               or
               a
               Man
               himself
               ,
               and
               open
               many
               large
               Arteries
               in
               the
               said
               Creature
               ,
               he
               may
               draw
               all
               the
               Blood
               in
               its
               Body
               out
               through
               the
               said
               Arteries
               .
               I
               have
               divers
               times
               experimented
               the
               same
               ,
               and
               finding
               alwaies
               that
               the
               Veins
               are
               emptied
               with
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               I
               did
               perswade
               my self
               that
               the
               Opinion
               was
               true
               concerning
               the
               common
               mouths
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               common
               passage
               of
               the
               Blood
               from
               one
               to
               another
               .
            
             Yea
             it
             is
             a
             received
             and
             common
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Arterial
             blood
             doth
             naturally
             enter
             into
             the
             smallest
             Veins
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             part
             might
             be
             nourished
             with
             arterial
             and
             venal
             Blood.
             
          
           
             And
             that
             indeed
             and
             in
             truth
             the
             
             Blood
             doth
             naturally
             pass
             in
             living
             Creatures
             ,
             out
             
               of
               the
               Arteries
            
             into
             the
             Veins
             by
             those
             little
             mouths
             ,
             these
             signs
             do
             cleenly
             witness
             .
          
           
             He
             that
             in
             living
             Dissections
             shall
             
             consider
             that
             Quantity
             of
             Blood
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             Arteries
             is
             conveighed
             to
             the
             parts
             and
             Veins
             ,
             can
             hardly
             perswade
             himself
             to
             think
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             all
             consumed
             in
             nourishing
             the
             parts
             :
             especially
             if
             he
             shall
             consider
             that
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             is
             thick
             enough
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             fourth
             part
             thinner
             than
             the
             Venal
             blood
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             often
             obs●●●ed
             ▪
             when
             I
             have
             suffred
             both
             of
             them
             to
             grow
             cold
             and
             〈…〉
             whence
             
             we
             may
             justly
             conclude
             with
             Harvey
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             which
             is
             communicated
             from
             the
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Veins
             and
             Parts
             ,
             does
             a
             great
             part
             of
             it
             ,
             return
             back
             again
             to
             the
             large
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             when
             we
             open
             a
             vein
             in
             a
             bound
             Arm
             ,
             if
             you
             press
             that
             
             part
             of
             the
             swelling
             Vein
             with
             your
             Thumb
             which
             is
             neer
             the
             orifice
             ,
             betwixt
             it
             and
             the
             Hand
             ,
             or
             if
             you
             make
             such
             a
             ligature
             as
             the
             former
             betwixt
             the
             Hand
             and
             the
             Orifice
             ,
             you
             shall
             see
             that
             no
             blood
             will
             come
             forth
             ;
             whence
             it
             seems
             to
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             comes
             from
             the
             Hand
             ,
             which
             flows
             from
             the
             orifice
             .
             And
             seeing
             some
             pounds
             of
             Blood
             are
             drawn
             away
             by
             such
             a
             Blood-letting
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             cannot
             be
             contained
             in
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             it
             must
             needs
             come
             thither
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             stopped
             by
             that
             Ligature
             above
             the
             orifice
             ,
             as
             their
             Pulse
             remaining
             entire
             doth
             testifie
             .
          
           
             But
             that
             we
             might
             see
             the
             same
             with
             our
             Eyes
             ,
             we
             have
             divers
             times
             in
             
             great
             living
             Dogs
             ,
             freed
             the
             large
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             in
             the
             groyn
             ,
             from
             such
             things
             as
             did
             hinder
             their
             sight
             ;
             which
             may
             be
             easily
             done
             if
             they
             lie
             not
             beneath
             the
             Muscles
             :
             and
             we
             bound
             the
             said
             vein
             with
             a
             thred
             ,
             and
             we
             observed
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             which
             looked
             towards
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             to
             empty
             and
             fall
             in
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             part
             towards
             the
             Foot
             exceedingly
             to
             swel
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             regard
             of
             its
             fullness
             ,
             it
             seemed
             harder
             than
             the
             Artery
             it self
             ;
             but
             the
             ligature
             being
             loosed
             ,
             the
             Blood
             presently
             moved
             upwards
             ,
             and
             the
             fullness
             and
             hardness
             of
             the
             Vein
             was
             very
             much
             abated
             .
             And
             the
             Artery
             being
             bound
             ,
             that
             part
             thereof
             did
             wonderfully
             swell
             ,
             which
             was
             nearest
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             part
             more
             remote
             did
             fall
             in
             through
             emptiness
             :
             nor
             did
             the
             Vein
             then
             bound
             evidently
             swell
             .
             And
             this
             we
             did
             many
             times
             and
             the
             effect
             was
             still
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             we
             might
             have
             no
             scruple
             remaining
             ,
             and
             might
             observe
             withall
             ,
             
             what
             was
             done
             within
             in
             the
             Vein
             ,
             we
             did
             lift
             up
             the
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             being
             thus
             made
             bare
             ,
             and
             under
             them
             we
             firmly
             bound
             the
             Thigh
             it self
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             might
             not
             move
             upwards
             or
             downwards
             ,
             by
             any
             other
             Vein
             ●ave
             that
             which
             we
             had
             lift
             up
             .
             The●
             the
             Vein
             being
             held
             up
             ,
             and
             also
             shut
             with
             a
             Thred
             ,
             as
             is
             expressed
             in
             this
             Figure
             ,
             we
             opened
             it
             above
             and
             below
             the
             Thred
             with
             a
             small
             orifice
             .
             Now
             immediately
             from
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             which
             was
             farthest
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Blood
             flew
             out
             violently
             plentifully
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             full
             stream
             .
             but
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             which
             was
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             thred
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             did
             only
             drop
             out
             a
             few
             drops
             .
             whence
             it
             seemed
             to
             us
             to
             be
             a
             cleer
             case
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             did
             not
             come
             downwards
             from
             the
             greater
             Vessels
             ,
             but
             upwards
             out
             of
             the
             smaller
             Vessels
             into
             the
             greater
             .
             Especially
             when
             having
             made
             another
             Ligature
             upon
             the
             same
             Vein
             further
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             foresaid
             Orifice
             and
             the
             Foot
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             we
             saw
             no
             blood
             at
             all
             come
             from
             that
             Orifice
             ,
             whence
             before
             it
             issued
             with
             such
             violence
             .
             For
             we
             conceived
             those
             drops
             which
             sell
             from
             the
             Orifice
             neer
             the
             Heart
             ,
             might
             proceed
             from
             Blood
             which
             possibly
             was
             in
             the
             Vein
             when
             it
             was
             opened
             ,
             or
             which
             it
             might
             continually
             receive
             from
             some
             small
             Branch
             of
             the
             crural
             Vein
             situate
             above
             the
             thred
             ;
             but
             this
             cause
             will
             anon
             appear
             more
             evidently
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             easie
             to
             make
             this
             experiment
             
             without
             any
             opening
             of
             a
             Vein
             in
             such
             persons
             as
             have
             the
             Veins
             of
             their
             Arms
             very
             Conspicuous
             :
             In
             whom
             if
             you
             stop
             the
             Vein
             near
             the
             Hand
             with
             one
             Finger
             ,
             and
             with
             your
             other
             hand
             force
             the
             blood
             upwards
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             Vein
             wil
             appear
             empty
             ●
             ▪
             which
             wil
             soon
             after
             be
             filled
             ,
             when
             you
             take
             away
             your
             lower
             Finger
             ,
             but
             not
             if
             you
             take
             only
             your
             upper
             ;
             as
             Harvey
             also
             observed
             in
             the
             13.
             
             Chapter
             of
             his
             Book
             .
             For
             the
             upper
             Blood
             goes
             into
             the
             greater
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             Valve
             hinders
             it
             from
             descending
             ,
             which
             will
             hardly
             let
             anything
             pass
             by
             ,
             unless
             the
             vein
             be
             so
             far
             widened
             ,
             that
             a
             great
             space
             remain
             between
             it
             and
             the
             Valves
             .
          
           
             Seeing
             therefore
             the
             Blood
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Hands
             and
             Feet
             ,
             and
             they
             do
             not
             breed
             new
             Blood
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             supply
             the
             whole
             Body
             therewith
             ,
             we
             doubt
             not
             but
             that
             the
             Blood
             in
             those
             parts
             continually
             and
             naturally
             goes
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             
               and
               out
               of
               the
               lesser
               Veins
               into
               the
               greater
               .
            
          
           
             
               TABLE
               I.
               
            
             
               The
               Explication
               of
               the
               FIGURE
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   A.
                   
                     The
                     right
                     Leg
                     of
                     the
                     Dog.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   B.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Leg
                     of
                     the
                     Dog.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   CD
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ligature
                     made
                     under
                     the
                     Vein
                     and
                     Artery
                     ,
                     which
                     fast
                     binds
                     the
                     Thigh
                     ,
                     expressed
                     in
                     the
                     right
                     Thigh
                     ,
                     least
                     the
                     confusion
                     of
                     the
                     lines
                     might
                     disturb
                     the
                     Spectator
                     in
                     the
                     left
                     Thigh
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   E.
                   
                     The
                     Crural
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Crural
                     Vein
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     String
                     wherewith
                     the
                     Vein
                     is
                     tied
                     and
                     born
                     up
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     Needle
                     through
                     which
                     the
                     thred
                     goes
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vein
                     which
                     flags
                     upon
                     the
                     binding
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   K.
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vein
                     swelling
                     after
                     the
                     Ligature
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   L.
                   
                     The
                     drops
                     of
                     Blood
                     which
                     fall
                     leisurely
                     from
                     the
                     orifice
                     in
                     the
                     upper
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   M.
                   
                     The
                     stream
                     of
                     Blood
                     continually
                     spinning
                     ●●●
                     of
                     the
                     〈…〉
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vein
                     〈…〉
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               .
               362
            
          
           
           
             Nor
             do
             I
             fear
             that
             the
             Arterial
             Blood
             cannot
             be
             contained
             in
             the
             single
             coat
             of
             a
             Vein
             ,
             which
             I
             see
             contained
             in
             the
             smallest
             little
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             in
             an
             Aneurisma
             ,
             where
             the
             Artery
             hath
             but
             one
             coat
             .
             And
             whereas
             the
             Arteries
             neer
             the
             Heart
             have
             a
             double
             Coat
             ,
             that
             might
             be
             so
             contrived
             ,
             least
             by
             violence
             of
             the
             Blood
             issuing
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Artery
             might
             be
             loosned
             ;
             as
             we
             see
             it
             loosened
             by
             a
             strong
             palpitation
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             But
             doth
             not
             the
             Blood
             flow
             as
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             so
             out
             of
             the
             
             greatest
             Veins
             into
             the
             lesser
             ?
             This
             that
             kind
             of
             Blood-letting
             seems
             to
             argue
             ,
             which
             is
             ordained
             for
             Revulsion
             sake
             :
             for
             the
             Vein
             of
             the
             Arm
             being
             opened
             in
             a
             Pleurisie
             ,
             that
             Blood
             seems
             to
             be
             revelled
             or
             drawn
             back
             ,
             which
             flowed
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             into
             the
             Azygos
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Azygos
             into
             the
             Pleura
             .
             But
             there
             is
             no
             
             token
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             so
             revelled
             ;
             for
             the
             Basilica
             Vein
             being
             opened
             the
             blood
             may
             be
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Arm
             ;
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Arm
             draw
             out
             of
             the
             axillary
             Artery
             ,
             the
             Axillaris
             out
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             by
             whose
             intercostal
             branches
             it
             had
             flowed
             into
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             twigs
             of
             Azygos
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             see
             by
             and
             by
             .
             And
             doubtless
             ,
             except
             in
             the
             Pleurisie
             ,
             the
             blood
             should
             be
             revelled
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             there
             were
             no
             reason
             to
             be
             given
             why
             we
             should
             for
             Revul●ions
             sake
             rather
             open
             the
             Vein
             of
             the
             side
             affected
             ,
             then
             that
             on
             the
             right
             side
             alwaies
             ;
             since
             the
             Azygos
             arises
             from
             the
             right
             side
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             and
             that
             a
             Vein
             to
             be
             opened
             for
             Derivation
             is
             to
             be
             opened
             on
             that
             side
             through
             which
             the
             blood
             flows
             into
             the
             part
             affected
             .
          
           
             But
             what
             shal
             we
             say
             ?
             Doth
             not
             the
             Arm
             after
             a
             sort
             grow
             lean
             and
             fall
             away
             
             (
             and
             so
             other
             parts
             )
             when
             it
             is
             bound
             ,
             as
             in
             those
             who
             have
             it
             hollowed
             in
             a
             Fistula
             ?
             because
             the
             Vein
             being
             bound
             ,
             the
             blood
             cannot
             descend
             as
             it
             ought
             ,
             unto
             the
             lower
             parts
             of
             the
             Arm
             ?
             There
             is
             no
             necessity
             that
             it
             should
             be
             so
             .
             For
             all
             that
             may
             happen
             because
             the
             Artery
             is
             bound
             .
             And
             really
             ,
             this
             is
             an
             Argument
             that
             it
             is
             so
             ,
             in
             that
             many
             times
             that
             Arm
             in
             which
             there
             is
             an
             Issue
             ,
             is
             perceived
             to
             pulse
             less
             and
             more
             faintly
             than
             the
             other
             ;
             the
             influx
             of
             the
             blood
             and
             spirits
             ,
             being
             in
             some
             measure
             hindred
             ,
             by
             the
             the
             binding
             of
             the
             Issue
             .
             Yet
             some
             part
             may
             peradventure
             fall
             away
             by
             binding
             of
             a
             Vein
             alone
             ;
             because
             Nature
             cannot
             plentifully
             infuse
             new
             blood
             through
             the
             Artery
             ,
             seeing
             it
             cannot
             freely
             go
             back
             by
             the
             Veins
             .
             And
             though
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             do
             then
             contain
             store
             of
             Blood
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             peradventure
             not
             very
             fit
             to
             nourish
             the
             parts
             as
             they
             should
             be
             ,
             but
             this
             wil
             better
             appear
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             nevertheless
             manifest
             ,
             that
             in
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Varices
             so
             called
             ,
             the
             
             blood
             descends
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             to
             the
             greater
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             into
             the
             lesser
             Veins
             .
             For
             that
             is
             easie
             to
             see
             in
             a
             Varix
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Foot
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Haemorrhoids
             .
             But
             that
             motion
             of
             Blood
             may
             happen
             besides
             Nature
             ,
             because
             the
             Veins
             being
             weakned
             do
             not
             send
             the
             Blood
             upwards
             ,
             but
             gather
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             because
             the
             humors
             by
             that
             weight
             ,
             do
             resist
             the
             Natural
             motion
             upwards
             ,
             and
             descend
             ,
             and
             therefore
             being
             collected
             in
             great
             Quantity
             in
             the
             lower
             Veins
             ,
             new
             Blood
             still
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ;
             they
             cause
             their
             dilatation
             and
             consequently
             a
             Varix
             .
             Thus
             artificial
             Fountains
             about
             those
             places
             from
             which
             they
             ascend
             ,
             are
             most
             frequently
             observed
             to
             make
             clefts
             ,
             being
             at
             last
             drawn
             asunder
             and
             torn
             by
             the
             Heaviness
             of
             the
             Water
             ,
             which
             ought
             nevertheless
             according
             to
             the
             Nature
             of
             Fountains
             to
             ascend
             upwards
             .
             And
             it
             is
             altogether
             most
             likely
             that
             Varices
             are
             caused
             after
             this
             manner
             :
             because
             humors
             in
             such
             as
             have
             Varices
             ,
             do
             not
             inlarge
             the
             Vein
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             violently
             moved
             in
             exercise
             ,
             but
             when
             they
             have
             rested
             after
             exercise
             ;
             because
             the
             humors
             can
             resist
             a
             smaller
             motion
             and
             descend
             by
             their
             own
             weight
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             these
             are
             not
             tokens
             ,
             that
             the
             
             Blood
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             Veins
             into
             the
             lesser
             ,
             but
             they
             argue
             rather
             that
             the
             Blood
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             lesser
             Veins
             into
             the
             greater
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             it self
             .
          
           
             We
             said
             before
             that
             the
             Blood
             goes
             
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             into
             the
             right
             ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             what
             !
             Doth
             that
             very
             self
             same
             Blood
             ,
             which
             
               a
               little
               before
               had
               come
               out
               of
               the
            
             Vena
             cava
             
               into
               the
               Heart
            
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             was
             shed
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             had
             returned
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             doth
             that
             enter
             again
             into
             the
             Heart
             ?
             or
             doth
             that
             alone
             which
             being
             newly
             bred
             in
             the
             Liver
             doth
             the
             first
             time
             enter
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             and
             hath
             never
             yet
             past
             through
             the
             Heart
             ?
             Truly
             both
             .
          
           
             For
             that
             may
             easily
             be
             done
             ,
             seeing
             
             both
             are
             alike
             near
             to
             the
             Heart
             :
             and
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             done
             ;
             seeing
             that
             which
             is
             returned
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Cava
             ,
             is
             more
             plentifull
             than
             that
             ,
             which
             is
             all
             of
             it
             consumed
             in
             the
             nourishment
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             not
             carried
             to
             the
             lesser
             Veins
             .
             Doubtless
             it
             is
             a
             sign
             that
             this
             is
             so
             ,
             in
             that
             a
             Vein
             being
             tied
             nea●
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             not
             only
             a
             little
             but
             very
             much
             emptied
             ,
             and
             sends
             all
             the
             Blood
             it
             hath
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             some
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Heart
             seems
             to
             shed
             more
             
             Blood
             into
             the
             
               Arteria
               aorta
            
             ,
             then
             the
             Liver
             can
             supply
             it
             withall
             ,
             at
             least
             not
             in
             some
             daies
             fasting
             .
             For
             I
             have
             divers
             times
             experimented
             that
             in
             many
             persons
             the
             Heart
             pulses
             above
             three
             thousand
             times
             in
             an
             hour
             .
             And
             the
             Heart
             as
             long
             as
             it
             hath
             any
             vigour
             left
             ,
             expels
             somwhat
             at
             every
             pulsation
             :
             for
             the
             
               Arteria
               aorta
            
             being
             bound
             near
             the
             Heart
             ,
             between
             the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             I
             opened
             the
             said
             Artery
             ,
             and
             I
             saw
             some
             Blood
             come
             out
             at
             every
             pulse
             ;
             till
             the
             Heart
             grew
             quite
             to
             languish
             ,
             for
             then
             somwhat
             came
             away
             after
             three
             or
             four
             pulses
             only
             :
             because
             so
             little
             was
             thrust
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             that
             it
             could
             not
             be
             moved
             upwards
             till
             some
             quantity
             of
             it
             was
             collected
             ,
             nor
             pass
             out
             at
             the
             upper
             orifice
             of
             the
             Artery
             .
          
           
             Also
             I
             cut
             off
             the
             tip
             of
             an
             Heart
             and
             setting
             the
             same
             upright
             ,
             I
             observed
             though
             the
             Ventricles
             were
             not
             full
             ,
             at
             every
             pulse
             somwhat
             was
             shed
             forth
             ;
             which
             also
             Harvey
             notes
             in
             his
             2.
             
             Chapter
             .
             Yea
             and
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             cut
             through
             the
             middle
             ,
             there
             ceased
             not
             to
             come
             somwhat
             out
             ,
             till
             either
             the
             Beast
             died
             ,
             or
             the
             Blood
             congealed
             so
             in
             the
             upper
             part
             ,
             as
             to
             make
             a
             kind
             of
             small
             Skin
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Blood
             could
             flow
             no
             more
             that
             way
             .
             And
             certainly
             somwhat
             must
             needs
             come
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             because
             there
             in
             the
             Heart
             is
             alwaies
             made
             more
             strait
             ,
             as
             shall
             afterward
             appear
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             how
             much
             comes
             from
             the
             
             Heart
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             we
             cannot
             determine
             .
             this
             I
             can
             witness
             ,
             that
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Rabbit
             there
             hath
             come
             at
             every
             pulse
             half
             a
             dram
             of
             blood
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             great
             Water-spaniel
             half
             an
             ounce
             :
             yet
             I
             conceive
             more
             comes
             out
             ,
             when
             a
             live
             Creature
             is
             Diffected
             ,
             than
             when
             it
             is
             in
             health
             .
             And
             if
             a
             man
             would
             determine
             by
             conjecture
             from
             what
             we
             have
             seen
             ,
             how
             much
             may
             come
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Man
             in
             health
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             I
             shall
             not
             be
             against
             them
             who
             say
             that
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Man
             at
             every
             pulse
             half
             an
             ounce
             of
             Blood
             is
             shed
             into
             the
             
               Arteria
               aorta
            
             .
          
           
             Butlet
             us
             suppose
             it
             is
             but
             a
             scruple
             ;
             seeing
             the
             Heart
             makes
             above
             three
             thousand
             pulses
             in
             one
             hour
             ,
             there
             must
             above
             ten
             pound
             of
             blood
             pass
             every
             hour
             through
             
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             than
             we
             eat
             ,
             and
             more
             than
             the
             Liver
             can
             supply
             the
             Heart
             withall
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             must
             needs
             be
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             which
             hath
             once
             past
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             must
             flow
             thither
             again
             ,
             and
             from
             it
             return
             again
             into
             the
             Arteries
             .
             So
             that
             there
             is
             a
             
               circular
               motion
               of
               the
               Blood
            
             ,
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             from
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             from
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             it
             returns
             again
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             thence
             into
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Truly
             ,
             I
             cannot
             sufficiently
             wonder
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             many
             Ages
             past
             ,
             this
             
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             hath
             been
             unknown
             ,
             seeing
             I
             find
             sundry
             ,
             and
             those
             no
             small
             intimations
             thereof
             in
             the
             ancient
             Writers
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Volume
             of
             the
             Works
             of
             Hippocrates
             ,
             The
             Author
             of
             the
             first
             Book
             
               de
               Victus
               ratione
            
             ,
             attributes
             three
             circular
             motions
             to
             our
             Heat
             and
             Humors
             ,
             whereby
             they
             are
             moved
             inward
             and
             outward
             from
             divers
             parts
             .
          
           
             Hippocrates
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             his
             Book
             
               de
               Ossium
               Natura
               ,
               The
               Veins
            
             
             (
             under
             which
             he
             comprehends
             the
             Arteries
             )
             
               being
               spred
            
             saith
             he
             ,
             
               through
               the
               Body
               ,
               do
               cause
               a
               fluxion
               and
               motion
               ,
               sending
               many
               branches
               from
               one
               .
               And
            
             
             
               this
               one
               ,
               whence
               it
               hath
               its
               original
               and
               where
               it
               ends
               I
               cannot
               find
               .
               For
               it
               keeps
               in
               a
               circular
               course
               ,
               so
               that
               you
               can
               find
               no
               beginning
               .
            
             and
             it
             will
             appear
             plainly
             to
             him
             that
             examins
             the
             place
             ,
             that
             he
             understands
             this
             Circle
             to
             be
             chiefly
             in
             the
             distribution
             of
             the
             Humors
             .
          
           
             As
             also
             in
             the
             End
             of
             his
             Book
             
               de
               Na●ura
               humana
               .
               The
               great
               Veins
               do
               mutually
               afford
            
             
             
               nourishment
               one
               to
               another
               the
               internal
               to
               the
               external
               ,
               and
               then
               again
               to
               the
               internal
               .
            
          
           
             And
             more
             plainly
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Book
             
               de
               alimen●●
               .
               There
               is
               one
               beginning
               of
               all
               that
               nourish
               ,
               and
               one
               end
               of
               all
               ▪
               and
               the
               same
               is
               the
               beginning
               and
               the
               End
               :
            
             and
             therefore
             a
             little
             after
             he
             subjoyns
             these
             words
             :
             
               The
               Aliment
               〈◊〉
               into
               the
               Hair
               and
               Nails
               ,
               and
               from
               the
               inner
               parts
               into
               the
               outer
               Surface
               ;
               from
               the
               external
               parts
               the
               nourishment
               comes
               from
               the
               outer
               surface
               to
               the
               most
               inward
               parts
               :
               there
               is
               one
               conflux
               ,
               one
               conspiration
               and
               one
               consent
               of
               all
               .
            
          
           
             And
             
               Diogenes
               Apolloni●●a
            
             seems
             not
             to
             
             have
             differed
             from
             this
             Opinion
             ,
             in
             Aristotle
             his
             3
             ▪
             
               de
               Historia
               Animalium
            
             chap.
             2.
             
             
               The
               must
               thick
               Blood
               is
               sucks
               by
               the
               fleshy
               parts
               ,
               and
               that
               which
               redounds
               into
               these
               places
               viz.
            
             the
             greater
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
               becomes
               thin
               ,
               hot
               ,
               and
               fro●●hy
               .
            
          
           
             
               TABLE
               ●
               .
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Abdomen
                     or
                     Pa●ch
                     of
                     a
                     Dog
                     opened
                  
                
                 
                   BB.
                   
                     The
                     Midriff
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   CCCC
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Call
                     turned
                     inside
                     ●●●
                     ,
                     towards
                     the
                     Chest
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     inner
                     parts
                     there
                     of
                     might
                     be
                     more
                     visible
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DDD
                   .
                   
                     Three
                     lobes
                     or
                     laps
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                     turned
                     a
                     little
                     to
                     the
                     right
                     hand
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   ●EE
                   .
                   
                     Certain
                     little
                     portions
                     of
                     the
                     Pancreas
                     which
                     is
                     cut
                     off
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     following
                     Vessels
                     might
                     come
                     into
                     sight
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Kidney
                     covered
                     with
                     its
                     Coat
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   G.
                   
                     The
                     upper
                     hollow
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     ,
                     together
                     with
                     the
                     adjacent
                     Fat.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   H.
                   
                     The
                     middle
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     ,
                     about
                     which
                     Vessels
                     are
                     inserted
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     lowest
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Spleen
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   KKKK
                   .
                   
                     The
                     G●●s
                     moved
                     downwards
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     following
                     Vessels
                     might
                     be
                     visible
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   LLLL
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mesentery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   MM.
                   
                     The
                     splenick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   N.
                   
                     Part
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     splenica
                     annexed
                     to
                     the
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     porta
                     ,
                     which
                     falls
                     in
                     ,
                     upon
                     the
                     Ligature
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   OOO
                   .
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     splenica
                     and
                     three
                     branches
                     arising
                     therefrom
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     implanted
                     into
                     the
                     spleen
                     ,
                     and
                     do
                     very
                     much
                     swell
                     upon
                     the
                     Ligature
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   PP
                   .
                   
                     The
                     left
                     Mesenterick
                     Artery
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Q.
                   
                     A
                     portion
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Mesenterica
                     sinistra
                     ,
                     next
                     to
                     the
                     Trunk
                     of
                     Vena
                     porta
                     ,
                     falling
                     in
                     as
                     empty
                     ,
                     upon
                     the
                     Ligature
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   R.
                   
                     The
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Vena
                     Mesenterica
                     sinistra
                     ,
                     ready
                     to
                     be
                     divided
                     into
                     branches
                     ,
                     swelling
                     by
                     means
                     of
                     the
                     Ligature
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   SSS
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Mesaraick
                     Veins
                     ,
                     therefore
                     more
                     full
                     and
                     swollen
                     ,
                     because
                     the
                     Mesenterick
                     Vein
                     is
                     tied
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   TTTT
                   .
                   
                     The
                     rest
                     of
                     the
                     Mesaraicks
                     ,
                     not
                     so
                     swollen
                     ,
                     because
                     their
                     Trunk
                     is
                     not
                     〈◊〉
                     ▪
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               364
            
          
           
           
             Yea
             and
             those
             things
             which
             Plato
             in
             his
             Timaeus
             delivers
             concerning
             the
             Blood
             ,
             are
             
             more
             sutable
             to
             this
             Opinion
             than
             the
             common
             .
          
           
             Aristotle
             himself
             may
             easily
             be
             drawn
             to
             
             this
             Opinion
             .
             For
             thus
             saith
             he
             in
             his
             Book
             
               de
               Somno
            
             chap.
             3.
             
             
               Every
               i●ability
               of
               Sense
               is
               not
               sleep
               ,
               but
               that
               only
               which
               is
               caused
               by
               the
               v●poration
               of
               Meats
               ,
               for
               that
               which
               is
               rarified
               ,
               must
               needs
               after
               a
               sort
               be
               lifted
               up
               ,
               and
               afterward
               return
               and
               flow
               back
               like
               an
               Euripus
               :
               for
               the
               Heat
               of
               every
               Animal
               ,
               must
               needs
               naturally
               move
               upwards
               ,
               and
               when
               it
               is
               come
               aloft
               ,
               it
               soon
               after
               circulates
               and
               discends
               again
               .
            
          
           
             It
             is
             to
             be
             feared
             ,
             that
             those
             Writers
             which
             followed
             the
             former
             did
             not
             sufficiently
             study
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             yea
             that
             they
             ob●cured
             the
             same
             ,
             because
             what
             the
             former
             attributed
             to
             their
             Veins
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             these
             later
             attributed
             to
             the
             Veins
             in
             opposition
             to
             ,
             and
             as
             distinct
             from
             the
             Arteries
             .
             And
             seeing
             Galen
             a
             most
             excellent
             Physitian
             ,
             was
             not
             able
             to
             reform
             all
             things
             perfectly
             :
             and
             the
             later
             Greeks
             ,
             Arabians
             ,
             and
             Latines
             ,
             have
             too
             close
             followed
             or
             transcribed
             him
             ,
             hence
             I
             suppose
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             hath
             remain'd
             concealed
             till
             this
             present
             Age.
             
          
           
             Wherein
             that
             incomparable
             
               Paulus
               Servita
            
             the
             Venetian
             ,
             did
             acurately
             
             observe
             the
             Fabrick
             of
             the
             Valves
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             which
             Observation
             of
             his
             that
             great
             Anatomist
             
               Fabritius
               ab
               Aquapendente
            
             afterwards
             published
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             that
             constitution
             of
             the
             Valves
             and
             other
             Experiments
             he
             collected
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             and
             asserted
             the
             same
             in
             an
             excellent
             Treat
             se
             ,
             which
             I
             understand
             is
             preserved
             to
             this
             very
             day
             amongst
             the
             Venetians
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             learned
             
               William
               Harvey
            
             being
             taught
             by
             the
             foresaid
             
               Paulus
               Servita
            
             ,
             did
             more
             accurately
             search
             into
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             augmented
             the
             same
             with
             Inventions
             of
             his
             own
             ,
             proved
             it
             strongly
             ,
             and
             publish'd
             it
             to
             the
             World
             in
             his
             own
             name
             .
          
           
             Such
             hath
             been
             the
             Invention
             and
             such
             the
             Fate
             of
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             And
             let
             us
             now
             further
             enquire
             ,
             whether
             
               through
               all
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
            
             
             the
             Blood
             hath
             this
             Motion
             or
             whether
             in
             some
             others
             it
             hath
             some
             other
             motion
             ?
             Concerning
             which
             thing
             ,
             that
             I
             might
             be
             more
             certainly
             informed
             ,
             I
             contemplated
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             many
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             of
             liveing
             Creatures
             ,
             and
             I
             have
             found
             ,
             besides
             what
             hath
             been
             already
             said
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Arms
             and
             Legs
             ,
             that
             the
             
             blood
             is
             moved
             through
             the
             Spermarick
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Stones
             ;
             through
             the
             Veins
             from
             the
             Stones
             to
             the
             left
             Emulgent
             or
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             in
             the
             right
             side
             :
             through
             the
             Mesenterick
             Arteries
             ,
             to
             the
             Guts
             :
             through
             the
             Veins
             to
             the
             
               ●am●s
               mesentericus
            
             :
             through
             the
             Caeliack
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             through
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             of
             
               Ve●a
               porta
            
             forthwith
             to
             the
             Liver
             :
             through
             the
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               caeliaca
            
             ,
             which
             answer
             to
             the
             following
             Veins
             to
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Call
             ;
             through
             the
             Gastrick
             and
             Epiploick
             Veins
             ,
             to
             the
             
               Ramus
               splenicus
            
             :
             that
             the
             short
             Arterial
             and
             Venal
             Vessels
             ,
             are
             branches
             of
             the
             caeliacal
             Artery
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               splenica
            
             ,
             which
             when
             they
             are
             come
             unto
             the
             middle
             space
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             Stomach
             and
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             are
             divided
             into
             two
             branches
             ▪
             one
             of
             which
             goes
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ;
             by
             this
             branch
             of
             the
             Artery
             the
             Blood
             goes
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             branch
             of
             the
             Stomach
             to
             the
             Stomach
             ;
             and
             by
             the
             venal
             branches
             to
             the
             Trunk
             of
             
               Vas
               breve
            
             ,
             from
             the
             Stomach
             and
             the
             Spleen
             it
             is
             moved
             through
             the
             emulgent
             Arteries
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             :
             by
             the
             coronal
             Artery
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             Vein
             ;
             out
             of
             the
             coronal
             vein
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             :
             by
             the
             Intercostal
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Pleura
             ;
             out
             of
             the
             〈◊〉
             by
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Azygos
             ,
             and
             thence
             into
             
               Vena
               cava
               ▪
            
             And
             this
             I
             found
             by
             binding
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             〈◊〉
             live
             Anatomies
             ;
             which
             did
             swell
             in
             that
             part
             which
             di●
             look
             towards
             those
             parts
             ,
             from
             which
             we
             have
             shewed
             the
             course
             of
             Blood
             to
             come
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             parts
             did
             not
             only
             grow
             empty
             but
             quite
             settle
             and
             fall
             in
             .
             And
             I
             was
             very
             careful
             ,
             not
             to
             bind
             an
             Artery
             with
             a
             Vein
             ,
             for
             then
             the
             Artery
             swelling
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             would
             have
             ra
             sed
             the
             Vein
             above
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             would
             have
             seemed
             that
             the
             Vein
             was
             filled
             on
             both
             sides
             the
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             Now
             in
             the
             Head
             and
             Neck
             I
             saw
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             a
             live
             Goose
             most
             easily
             
             and
             in
             an
             Hen
             ,
             that
             the
             jugular
             being
             tied
             ,
             did
             swell
             from
             the
             Head
             towards
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             and
             was
             emptied
             from
             the
             Ligature
             towards
             the
             Cava
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             is
             there
             also
             man
             fest
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             returns
             from
             the
             Head
             through
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             if
             it
             should
             come
             to
             the
             jugular
             veins
             I
             cannot
             determine
             ,
             since
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             hardness
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             I
             could
             not
             accurately
             dissect
             the
             living
             Brain
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Beast
             would
             first
             die
             :
             but
             credible
             it
             is
             nevertheless
             ,
             that
             it
             flows
             through
             the
             carotick
             and
             cervical
             Arteries
             unto
             the
             four
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             passages
             open
             to
             the
             said
             Ventricles
             ,
             For
             those
             most
             learned
             Men
             
               Franciscus
               Sylvius
            
             and
             
               Franc.
               Vander
               Shagen
            
             ,
             have
             told
             me
             ,
             that
             the
             fibrous
             substance
             being
             pul'd
             away
             which
             frequently
             is
             found
             congealed
             in
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             of
             dead
             bodies
             ;
             when
             it
             was
             drawn
             back
             in
             the
             carotick
             Artery
             ,
             it
             discovered
             a
             certain
             motion
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             third
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             and
             veri●y
             ,
             since
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             through
             the
             jugular
             veins
             ,
             flows
             back
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Ventricles
             cannot
             receive
             it
             elsewhere
             ,
             then
             from
             the
             Arteries
             .
             But
             whether
             the
             Arteries
             do
             shed
             it
             immediately
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             or
             into
             the
             branches
             which
             arise
             from
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             is
             not
             very
             easily
             discerned
             ▪
             because
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             are
             hardly
             distinguished
             from
             those
             little
             branches
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Arteries
             also
             have
             only
             one
             Coat
             in
             the
             Brain
             :
             but
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             beleive
             ,
             that
             the
             Arteries
             empty
             their
             blood
             ,
             into
             those
             little
             branches
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             rather
             then
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             themselves
             ;
             because
             I
             have
             observed
             those
             vessels
             which
             are
             inserted
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             to
             be
             greatest
             near
             the
             ventricles
             ,
             as
             branches
             are
             wont
             to
             be
             at
             their
             Original
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             it
             is
             in
             grown
             persons
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             
               Child
               in
               the
               Womb
            
             ,
             the
             Circulation
             
             seems
             to
             be
             somewhat
             otherwise
             ,
             and
             thus
             I
             conceive
             it
             is
             .
             The
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             Mothers
             Womb
             ,
             does
             not
             go
             into
             the
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             the
             Observation
             of
             Arantius
             ,
             are
             not
             joyned
             to
             the
             Womb
             ;
             but
             it
             enters
             into
             the
             Umbilical
             Vein
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             Vena
             cava
             ,
             and
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             for
             the
             Heart
             beats
             in
             the
             Child
             though
             it
             be
             imperfect
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             it
             goes
             into
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             ;
             but
             because
             the
             Lungs
             do
             not
             breath
             ,
             and
             therefore
             are
             not
             opened
             ,
             they
             cannot
             receive
             the
             blood
             plentifully
             ,
             no●
             send
             it
             to
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             by
             a
             peculiar
             passage
             into
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             likewise
             by
             a
             peculiar
             passage
             or
             hole
             of
             the
             Vena
             cava
             getting
             into
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             't
             is
             poured
             into
             the
             left
             Earlet
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             thereof
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             just
             as
             that
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             ,
             it
             enters
             into
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             ;
             so
             that
             in
             the
             Womb-child
             Nature
             useth
             the
             two
             Ventricles
             for
             one
             ,
             least
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             womb
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             have
             much
             but
             no
             intense
             heat
             ,
             and
             which
             must
             not
             be
             dry
             ,
             the
             Blood
             being
             twice
             boyled
             should
             be
             burnt
             ,
             being
             destitute
             of
             the
             cooling
             and
             Fanning
             action
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             
               Art●●ia
               Aorta
            
             the
             Blood-goes
             to
             the
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             ;
             for
             they
             being
             bound
             ,
             the
             part
             towards
             the
             Child
             ,
             doth
             pulse
             and
             swell
             :
             the
             other
             part
             towards
             the
             Womb
             is
             void
             of
             pulsation
             .
             Out
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             it
             goes
             to
             the
             Placenta
             or
             Womb-cake
             ;
             where
             the
             
             Arteries
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Veins
             by
             manifest
             .
             Anastomoses
             ,
             and
             by
             those
             Anastomoses
             the
             blood
             entring
             into
             the
             Vein
             ,
             is
             again
             carried
             through
             all
             the
             forementioned
             journey
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             Vessels
             by
             which
             the
             blood
             flows
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             from
             
             the
             Vessel
             of
             the
             Arteries
             it
             goes
             into
             the
             Veins
             after
             a
             double
             manner
             ;
             first
             and
             most
             usually
             by
             Anastomoses
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Arteries
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             Veins
             ,
             
             which
             Anastomoses
             are
             sometimes
             great
             and
             in
             the
             greater
             Vessels
             as
             about
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             in
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             in
             the
             Womb-liver
             .
             And
             the
             most
             accurate
             B●slerus
             observes
             the
             like
             Anastomosis
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             but
             I
             could
             never
             yet
             be
             so
             happy
             as
             to
             finde
             it
             in
             the
             Body
             of
             Man
             or
             Beast
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             are
             not
             all
             in
             the
             extream
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             but
             some
             in
             the
             middle
             parts
             :
             and
             therefore
             we
             see
             in
             a
             Cripple
             whose
             limbs
             are
             cut
             off
             ,
             the
             same
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             continued
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             .
             Secondly
             it
             seems
             also
             possible
             that
             Blood
             may
             pass
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             
             the
             Veins
             ,
             through
             the
             flesh
             it self
             :
             for
             we
             see
             when
             a
             Vein
             is
             opened
             till
             the
             colour
             change
             ,
             Inflamations
             fall
             ,
             because
             the
             Blood
             shed
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             is
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             Flesh
             .
             But
             I
             conceive
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Blood
             this
             way
             is
             but
             seldome
             and
             in
             small
             quantity
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             it
             is
             now
             ,
             I
             conceive
             ,
             clear
             ,
             
               what
               the
               motion
               of
               the
               Blood
               is
               ,
            
             and
             by
             
             what
             waies
             it
             is
             accomplished
             :
             it
             follows
             that
             we
             enquire
             ,
             what
             
               kind
               of
               motion
               it
               is
            
             ,
             and
             how
             it
             is
             performed
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             observed
             that
             this
             Motion
             of
             
             the
             Blood
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             from
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             continual
             never
             cleasing
             ,
             nor
             once
             stopped
             or
             interrupted
             for
             a
             moment
             of
             time
             .
             And
             the
             truth
             is
             ,
             seeing
             the
             said
             motion
             is
             made
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             see
             anon
             ,
             because
             the
             Heart
             receives
             and
             transmits
             ,
             and
             seeing
             this
             motion
             lasts
             perpetually
             all
             the
             life
             long
             ,
             the
             said
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             cannot
             but
             naturally
             be
             continuall
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             quick
             ,
             for
             an
             Artery
             or
             Vein
             being
             bound
             compressed
             ,
             it
             immediately
             
             swells
             and
             grows
             round
             and
             hard
             :
             and
             when
             the
             ligature
             and
             compressure
             are
             taken
             away
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             seen
             to
             be
             swiftly
             moved
             .
          
           
             But
             how
             soon
             the
             blood
             performs
             its
             Circuit
             from
             the
             Heart
             and
             to
             
             the
             Heart
             again
             ,
             I
             cannot
             precisely
             determine
             .
             We
             observe
             it
             is
             done
             sooner
             by
             an
             Anastomosis
             near
             the
             Heart
             ,
             than
             by
             one
             off
             ;
             nor
             will
             I
             be
             much
             against
             him
             that
             shall
             say
             the
             greatest
             Circuit
             from
             the
             remotest
             parts
             of
             the
             body
             is
             performed
             in
             less
             than
             a
             quarter
             of
             an
             hour
             ;
             for
             the
             blood
             passeth
             with
             exceeding
             celerity
             .
             Howbeit
             it
             goeth
             not
             so
             swiftly
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             it
             leap
             out
             when
             a
             vein
             or
             Artery
             is
             opened
             ,
             because
             then
             it
             is
             moved
             in
             the
             free
             and
             open
             Air
             ;
             but
             within
             the
             body
             it
             is
             compressed
             to
             lift
             up
             its
             vessels
             ,
             and
             to
             thrust
             on
             the
             foregoing
             blood
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             we
             see
             an
             Artery
             being
             cut
             open
             especially
             if
             near
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             sooner
             emptied
             than
             the
             heart
             can
             supply
             it
             with
             new
             blood
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             this
             be
             true
             ,
             why
             do
             Feavers
             return
             once
             in
             a
             quarter
             of
             an
             hour
             ,
             
             seeing
             the
             Fit
             seems
             then
             to
             happen
             ,
             when
             the
             corrupt
             matter
             comes
             to
             the
             heart
             ?
             whereas
             now
             some
             fits
             come
             every
             day
             ,
             others
             every
             third
             ,
             and
             some
             every
             fourth
             day
             .
             Truly
             ,
             I
             will
             not
             deny
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             fall
             out
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Corrupt
             matter
             comes
             to
             the
             heart
             ,
             the
             Fit
             may
             happen
             ,
             as
             Harvey
             hath
             an
             example
             thereof
             ,
             in
             the
             16
             ▪
             chapter
             of
             his
             Book
             .
             But
             I
             do
             not
             think
             it
             is
             necessary
             ,
             for
             some
             portion
             may
             slip
             out
             of
             the
             corrupt
             Seminary
             ,
             or
             some
             sooty
             stream
             may
             arise
             ,
             and
             go
             into
             the
             heart
             and
             so
             raise
             the
             Feaver
             ,
             as
             most
             Feavers
             are
             seen
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Inflammation
             of
             the
             Parts
             ,
             which
             the
             Imposthume
             being
             opened
             and
             the
             Quittor
             removed
             ,
             do
             cease
             .
             And
             as
             such
             kinde
             of
             symptomatick
             Feavers
             ,
             even
             so
             also
             may
             some
             intermitting
             Feavers
             and
             Agues
             happen
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             ●ome
             matter
             shut
             up
             ,
             within
             or
             without
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             which
             by
             putrifying
             every
             day
             ,
             every
             third
             day
             ,
             or
             every
             fourth
             day
             ,
             regurgitating
             or
             fuming
             into
             the
             large
             Vessels
             ,
             may
             bring
             the
             Fit.
             
          
           
             In
             continual
             Feavers
             I
             confess
             ,
             whose
             
             matter
             is
             to
             stick
             to
             the
             larger
             vessels
             ,
             it
             is
             harder
             to
             shew
             a
             reason
             why
             there
             should
             not
             be
             a
             Fit
             or
             Exacerbation
             at
             every
             Circuit
             of
             the
             blood
             .
             But
             I
             conceive
             I
             may
             alledg
             the
             same
             cause
             which
             is
             vulgarly
             given
             ,
             why
             continual
             Feavers
             are
             not
             allwaies
             alike
             feirce
             ;
             because
             ,
             though
             the
             matter
             be
             sufficiently
             near
             the
             Heart
             ,
             yet
             it
             doth
             not
             cause
             a
             Paroxism
             till
             it
             have
             attained
             a
             certain
             degree
             of
             putrifaction
             :
             and
             that
             the
             Fit
             lasts
             so
             long
             ,
             till
             that
             putrid
             matter
             be
             evacuated
             ,
             which
             touches
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             sends
             its
             Fumes
             thereto
             .
             But
             I
             suppose
             no
             man
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             return
             of
             Ague-fits
             ,
             which
             is
             altogether
             abstruse
             and
             unknown
             ,
             will
             deny
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             to
             be
             very
             quick
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             very
             manifest
             thing
             .
          
           
             Besides
             swiftness
             ,
             the
             blood
             
               hath
               vehemence
            
             in
             its
             motion
             ,
             which
             appears
             
             from
             what
             we
             have
             said
             touching
             the
             Hardnesse
             and
             Tension
             or
             stretching
             ,
             which
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             acquire
             when
             they
             are
             bound
             :
             for
             nothing
             can
             be
             distended
             by
             a
             liquid
             Substance
             into
             an
             extream
             hardness
             especially
             upwards
             ,
             unless
             it
             be
             vehemently
             driven
             thereinto
             or
             retained
             therein
             .
             But
             this
             vehemence
             ,
             of
             motion
             is
             chiefly
             near
             the
             Heart
             ,
             
             removed
             from
             which
             it
             grows
             by
             degrees
             lesser
             and
             lesser
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             little
             Arteries
             in
             the
             remote
             parts
             ,
             do
             not
             pulse
             ,
             unless
             some
             impulse
             of
             blood
             greater
             than
             ordinary
             do
             happen
             ,
             as
             we
             observe
             to
             happen
             in
             Feavers
             ,
             therefore
             it
             is
             that
             the
             Veins
             are
             not
             seen
             to
             pulse
             ,
             because
             the
             impulse
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             less
             in
             them
             than
             it
             is
             in
             the
             smallest
             Arteries
             ;
             and
             because
             the
             Veins
             ●oyned
             to
             the
             Arteries
             by
             Anastomosis
             ,
             when
             they
             go
             from
             them
             ,
             divide
             themselves
             into
             more
             little
             branches
             and
             twigs
             than
             the
             Arteries
             do
             ,
             for
             when
             Rivers
             are
             divided
             into
             divers
             Arms
             the
             force
             of
             the
             waters
             motion
             is
             abated
             .
             And
             therefore
             when
             some
             Arms
             of
             a
             Vein
             are
             shut
             ,
             either
             by
             something
             pressing
             them
             ,
             as
             in
             certain
             Tumors
             ,
             or
             somewhat
             which
             stops
             them
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Varices
             ,
             the
             blood
             slipping
             back
             by
             its
             own
             weight
             ,
             the
             force
             of
             the
             bloods
             motion
             is
             then
             again
             observed
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             are
             seen
             to
             pulse
             :
             for
             I
             have
             often
             observed
             in
             the
             Veins
             which
             are
             transparent
             through
             the
             Skin
             ,
             that
             most
             of
             those
             palpitations
             in
             the
             parts
             ,
             which
             are
             thought
             to
             proceed
             from
             Winds
             ,
             are
             nothing
             else
             but
             the
             pussations
             of
             the
             veins
             .
          
           
             And
             because
             the
             motion
             is
             more
             vehement
             
             in
             the
             Arteries
             than
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             it
             seems
             at
             first
             sight
             to
             be
             swifter
             also
             
               in
               the
               Arteries
               than
               in
               the
               Veins
            
             just
             as
             Men
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             and
             other
             Animals
             which
             move
             themselves
             with
             great
             labour
             ,
             and
             through
             mistake
             judged
             many
             times
             to
             make
             the
             greater
             speed
             .
             For
             the
             Blood
             forced
             through
             the
             Arteries
             cannot
             all
             pass
             through
             the
             Anastomoses
             ,
             because
             it
             comes
             out
             of
             a
             wide
             place
             into
             a
             narrow
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             accumulated
             in
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             they
             are
             dilated
             ,
             in
             which
             dilation
             they
             persist
             a
             small
             time
             ,
             wherefore
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             dilation
             and
             in
             the
             whole
             time
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             that
             same
             force
             doth
             very
             little
             further
             the
             quickness
             of
             the
             bloods
             motion
             ,
             which
             motion
             is
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             
             more
             free
             in
             the
             veins
             ,
             because
             it
             comes
             out
             of
             a
             strait
             into
             a
             wide
             place
             ,
             and
             is
             performed
             by
             more
             wayes
             .
             Now
             Reason
             doth
             teach
             us
             in
             this
             Case
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             motion
             of
             blood
             ,
             the
             swiftness
             hereof
             must
             be
             alike
             in
             the
             Arteries
             and
             the
             Veins
             ;
             for
             as
             much
             blood
             as
             the
             Liver
             sends
             to
             the
             heart
             made
             of
             new
             Chyle
             ,
             and
             as
             much
             nourishment
             as
             the
             Arteries
             give
             to
             the
             parts
             ,
             must
             be
             repayed
             ,
             or
             the
             Heart
             will
             at
             last
             be
             void
             of
             all
             moisture
             ,
             which
             thing
             also
             sense
             confirms
             ,
             for
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             pulses
             so
             often
             ,
             in
             that
             whole
             Tract
             from
             the
             Liver
             to
             the
             Jugulum
             ,
             and
             therefore
             drives
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             the
             Artery
             is
             observed
             to
             pulse
             and
             therefore
             to
             receive
             from
             the
             heart
             .
             But
             we
             shall
             hereof
             speak
             more
             anon
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             in
             the
             Arteries
             themselves
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             moved
             more
             
             aimbly
             when
             the
             
               Heart
               drives
               it
            
             ;
             from
             which
             Quickness
             it
             departs
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             when
             the
             Heart
             begins
             to
             rest
             and
             is
             afterwards
             dilated
             .
             Yea
             and
             in
             the
             Veins
             themselves
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             blood
             is
             more
             vehement
             and
             quick
             when
             the
             Heart
             pulses
             ;
             which
             as
             we
             have
             observed
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             so
             have
             we
             often
             noted
             the
             same
             ,
             when
             a
             Vein
             hath
             been
             opened
             in
             the
             Arm
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Veins
             were
             not
             much
             distended
             with
             the
             Ligature
             .
             Also
             the
             foresaid
             palpitations
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             seem
             to
             proceed
             from
             no
             other
             cause
             then
             that
             the
             Veins
             being
             straitned
             by
             the
             Blood
             sliding
             back
             ,
             or
             by
             some
             other
             means
             ,
             when
             the
             blood
             cannot
             by
             its
             force
             make
             it self
             way
             ,
             it
             lifts
             the
             Vein
             up
             ,
             which
             falls
             again
             ,
             when
             that
             forcible
             endeavour
             is
             abated
             or
             the
             Vein
             gives
             a
             freer
             passage
             to
             the
             Blood
             flowing
             through
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             do
             not
             conceive
             that
             the
             blood
             which
             is
             once
             carried
             ,
             for
             
             examples
             sake
             to
             crural
             Veins
             ,
             is
             continually
             carried
             the
             same
             wayes
             ,
             but
             that
             when
             it
             is
             returned
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             is
             mixt
             with
             
               that
               blood
               which
               comes
               out
               of
               other
               parts
               ,
            
             and
             is
             so
             promiscuously
             distributed
             to
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Body
             :
             for
             so
             the
             parts
             may
             be
             the
             better
             nourished
             ,
             if
             they
             have
             alwayes
             new
             blood
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             they
             may
             draw
             ,
             that
             which
             may
             best
             serve
             to
             nourish
             and
             strengthen
             them
             :
             so
             Plants
             do
             best
             grow
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             transplanted
             into
             new
             Soils
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             whole
             Manner
             of
             the
             Bloods
             motion
             :
             and
             also
             of
             
             the
             
               motion
               of
               the
               Vital
               Spirits
            
             ,
             seeing
             they
             are
             mingled
             with
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             I
             have
             often
             endeavoured
             to
             
             search
             out
             the
             
               motion
               of
               the
               Animal
               Spirits
            
             ,
             but
             I
             could
             not
             eisewhere
             observe
             it
             save
             in
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             them
             to
             be
             distended
             broadwayes
             and
             deepwayes
             ,
             and
             being
             cut
             asunder
             to
             tremble
             and
             pant
             .
             For
             the
             Nerves
             being
             bound
             neither
             swell
             nor
             are
             they
             extended
             ,
             and
             being
             cut
             in
             sunder
             they
             shew
             no
             other
             motion
             ,
             save
             that
             they
             contract
             themselves
             .
             And
             it
             is
             a
             very
             easie
             matter
             to
             bind
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             sixt
             pare
             ,
             which
             freely
             wander
             through
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             through
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             ,
             is
             most
             
             manifest
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             not
             so
             continual
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             not
             alwayes
             a
             supply
             of
             Chylus
             .
             And
             ▪
             when
             it
             wanders
             
             out
             of
             the
             Guts
             through
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             ,
             it
             goes
             quicker
             than
             the
             Blood
             it self
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             being
             bound
             do
             swell
             immediately
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             do
             not
             long
             appear
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             nor
             are
             they
             found
             in
             dead
             Carcasses
             ;
             unless
             some
             obstacle
             do
             hinder
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             .
             And
             in
             that
             being
             bound
             they
             do
             not
             so
             swell
             as
             to
             grow
             hard
             ,
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             Sign
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             i●
             not
             so
             vehement
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Blood
             :
             peradventure
             because
             ●h●
             Chyle
             is
             to
             be
             moved
             through
             a
             smaller
             space
             ,
             the
             ●ike
             violence
             of
             motion
             was
             not
             requisite
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             is
             now
             time
             to
             enquire
             into
             
             the
             Causes
             of
             
               these
               motions
            
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Whatever
             the
             Cause
             is
             ,
             either
             it
             must
             be
             moved
             by
             ●●
             inbred
             vertue
             of
             faculty
             ,
             or
             by
             some
             motion
             which
             must
             ●●
             referred
             to
             carrying
             ,
             drawing
             ,
             or
             thrusting
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Blood
             is
             moved
             in
             this
             manner
             by
             its
             own
             proper
             Vertue
             ,
             we
             
             cannot
             observe
             ,
             either
             from
             the
             Blood
             received
             in
             a
             Basin
             or
             shed
             into
             the
             body
             ,
             which
             that
             it
             should
             be
             in
             a
             moment
             corrupted
             is
             hard
             to
             say
             :
             nor
             can
             we
             see
             such
             a
             spontaneous
             motion
             ●●
             any
             inanimate
             thing
             .
             And
             whereas
             Harvey
             relates
             Chap.
             4.
             that
             when
             the
             Earlet
             was
             still
             ,
             he
             observed
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ;
             I
             likewise
             have
             observed
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             likewise
             when
             the
             Heart
             was
             quiet
             ;
             but
             withall
             ,
             that
             motion
             was
             imparted
             to
             the
             Blood
             from
             the
             
               Vena
               ca●●
            
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             the
             Heart
             from
             the
             Earlet
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             see
             anon
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Blood
             is
             here
             carried
             by
             the
             
             Spirits
             cannot
             by
             any
             Argument
             be
             proved
             :
             and
             they
             by
             their
             lightness
             should
             move
             the
             Blood
             upwards
             ,
             which
             we
             see
             here
             to
             be
             moved
             downwards
             and
             sidewayes
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             it
             remains
             that
             either
             the
             blood
             must
             be
             drawn
             or
             thrust
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             blood
             is
             thrust
             forwards
             ,
             
             Men
             of
             excellent
             wits
             do
             conceive
             ,
             because
             the
             Hearts
             heat
             immeasurably
             rarifying
             the
             same
             ,
             it
             requires
             a
             greater
             place
             ,
             and
             that
             therefore
             it
             dilates
             and
             lifts
             up
             the
             Heart
             ;
             and
             seeing
             it
             cannot
             be
             contained
             in
             the
             dilated
             Heart
             ,
             it
             is
             poured
             with
             such
             violence
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               Anteriosa
            
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             ,
             that
             it
             distends
             all
             the
             Arteries
             and
             makes
             them
             pulse
             .
             And
             they
             bring
             this
             Argument
             for
             their
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Heart
             of
             an
             Eel
             or
             any
             other
             Animal
             when
             it
             leaves
             pulsing
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             warmed
             by
             Fire
             held
             under
             it
             ,
             it
             is
             seen
             to
             pulse
             again
             .
             But
             whether
             may
             not
             that
             pulse
             happen
             ,
             because
             the
             Spirit
             being
             by
             that
             heat
             made
             more
             lusty
             ,
             can
             better
             assist
             that
             cause
             which
             moves
             the
             pulse
             in
             the
             Heart
             ;
             just
             as
             ,
             when
             the
             Guts
             and
             Muscles
             are
             heated
             in
             a
             live
             Dissection
             ,
             in
             which
             nevertheless
             there
             is
             no
             ebullition
             ,
             the
             motion
             seem
             ▪
             to
             be
             restored
             .
             For
             there
             is
             indeed
             only
             a
             certain
             light
             Rarifaction
             proceeding
             from
             a
             certain
             warmth
             in
             the
             Heart
             ;
             no
             ebullition
             or
             sudden
             diffusion
             .
             And
             truly
             I
             have
             often
             seen
             in
             strong
             Do●s
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             doth
             n●●
             leap
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             by
             reason
             of
             Rarifaction
             ;
             wh●●●
             Heart
             the
             tip
             being
             cut
             off
             ;
             when
             through
             the
             Efflux
             of
             blood
             it
             was
             not
             half
             filled
             ,
             being
             set
             upright
             ,
             it
             was
             nofilled
             by
             rarifaction
             :
             but
             the
             Constriction
             following
             ,
             that
             portion
             of
             blood
             which
             was
             left
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             was
             spirt●●
             out
             above
             four
             Foot
             's
             distance
             ,
             so
             that
             my self
             and
             others
             by
             me
             (
             for
             many
             were
             present
             )
             were
             bespattered
             there
             with
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             driven
             by
             the
             part
             .
          
           
             
               It
               is
               also
               driven
            
             because
             the
             blood
             being
             so
             changed
             ,
             is
             troublesome
             to
             the
             Heart
             and
             those
             parts
             .
             For
             if
             the
             whole
             Hearts
             or
             the
             tip
             thereof
             living
             and
             Dissected
             ,
             or
             other
             greater
             particle
             ,
             be
             pricked
             with
             a
             Pen-knife
             or
             ●●
             Pin
             ;
             as
             often
             as
             it
             is
             pricked
             ,
             so
             often
             it
             will
             move
             it self
             as
             by
             Natural
             motion
             ,
             though
             it
             seem
             long
             ago
             to
             have
             lost
             all
             motion
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             driven
             by
             the
             
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             into
             
               the
               right
               Earlet
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
            
             I
             have
             manifestly
             seen
             in
             the
             dissection
             of
             live
             Creatures
             :
             for
             in
             all
             motions
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             first
             beginning
             of
             Motion
             is
             s●
             or
             no
             ,
             because
             the
             Cava
             was
             knit
             to
             the
             Earlet
             and
             the
             Heart
             ,
             we
             ●ut-the
             Heart
             and
             the
             Ea●let
             quite
             off
             i●
             〈…〉
             D●●s
             ,
             ●●
             the
             Vena
             〈…〉
             ,
             and
             we
             observe
             ,
             that
             〈…〉
             
             the
             
               Vana
               cava
            
             did
             a
             very
             little
             pulse
             ,
             and
             at
             every
             time
             did
             send
             forth
             a
             little
             Blood.
             And
             therefore
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             hath
             certain
             fleshy
             fibres
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             about
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             elsewhere
             you
             shall
             not
             find
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             :
             but
             they
             may
             be
             seen
             very
             evidently
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             an
             O●
             ,
             a
             Dog.
             Now
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             is
             most
             evident
             neer
             the
             Heart
             ,
             yet
             for
             the
             most
             part
             I
             have
             observed
             it
             also
             in
             live
             Dogs
             ,
             all
             along
             that
             passage
             from
             the
             Liver
             and
             from
             the
             Jugulum
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             
               right
               Earlet
            
             drives
             that
             Blood
             which
             it
             receives
             ,
             by
             a
             certain
             tension
             and
             
             constriction
             into
             the
             
               right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
               :
            
             for
             also
             in
             the
             Earlet
             the
             motion
             or
             constriction
             is
             a
             little
             sooner
             than
             it
             is
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
             And
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             being
             cut
             open
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Earlet
             ,
             at
             every
             constriction
             there
             manifestly
             appeared
             somwhat
             to
             be
             droven
             out
             of
             the
             Earlet
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             also
             Harvey
             observes
             in
             his
             fourth
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             Blood
             comes
             chiefly
             by
             pulsion
             ,
             into
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             
             But
             is
             it
             not
             also
             drawn
             both
             into
             the
             Earlet
             ,
             and
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ?
             I
             conceive
             so
             :
             for
             with
             part
             of
             that
             Blood
             which
             they
             receive
             ,
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             nourished
             within
             :
             now
             that
             which
             must
             nourish
             ,
             must
             be
             drawn
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             part
             may
             receive
             that
             Blood
             which
             is
             most
             useful
             to
             it
             ;
             for
             by
             pulsion
             also
             that
             which
             is
             unprofitable
             is
             sent
             away
             ,
             as
             Galen
             excellently
             (
             according
             to
             his
             wonted
             manner
             in
             other
             Cases
             )
             doth
             infer
             in
             his
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             and
             3.
             
             Books
             
               de
               N●●
               .
               fac
            
             .
             Now
             this
             drawing
             is
             not
             only
             of
             that
             blood
             which
             is
             near
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             that
             which
             is
             far
             off
             ,
             as
             all
             parts
             have
             that
             faculty
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             be
             soon
             destitute
             of
             nourishment
             .
          
           
             But
             doth
             not
             the
             Heart
             also
             draw
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             widened
             ,
             to
             avoid
             Vacuum
             ,
             as
             we
             are
             wont
             to
             say
             ?
             It
             is
             not
             likely
             ,
             because
             in
             its
             dilatation
             there
             can
             be
             no
             fear
             of
             Vacuum
             ,
             as
             shall
             hereafter
             more
             evidently
             appear
             .
          
           
             As
             the
             Blood
             comes
             to
             the
             right
             
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
            
             ,
             so
             also
             it
             comes
             
               to
               the
            
             
             left
             ,
             save
             that
             we
             could
             not
             observe
             the
             impulse
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             when
             the
             Lungs
             fall
             ,
             to
             be
             so
             strong
             out
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Venosa
            
             into
             the
             left
             Earlet
             ,
             as
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ;
             yet
             there
             is
             manifestly
             some
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Impulse
             into
             both
             Earlets
             and
             
             into
             both
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             happens
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             moment
             of
             time
             :
             save
             in
             Creatures
             ready
             to
             dye
             ,
             in
             which
             we
             have
             observed
             ,
             that
             both
             Earlets
             and
             both
             Ventricles
             do
             not
             pulse
             at
             one
             and
             the
             same
             time
             .
          
           
             But
             when
             the
             Blood
             is
             thus
             driven
             into
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             the
             Heart
             hath
             no
             motion
             evident
             to
             the
             Eye
             ,
             but
             putting
             our
             Finger
             upon
             the
             Heart
             ,
             we
             perceive
             somewhat
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Heart
             becomes
             fuller
             ,
             which
             also
             Harvey
             hath
             observed
             ,
             in
             his
             4.
             
             Chapter
             .
             Yea
             ,
             we
             have
             observed
             that
             the
             Earlet
             hath
             pulsed
             seventy
             ,
             sometimes
             an
             hundred
             pulses
             ,
             before
             any
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             followed
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             we
             see
             how
             the
             Blood
             is
             moved
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             Let
             us
             now
             see
             how
             it
             is
             moved
             into
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Blood
               is
               moved
               into
               the
               Arteries
               by
               way
               of
               pulsion
               or
               driving
               :
            
             
             for●
             an
             hole
             being
             made
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             we
             saw
             Blood
             come
             forth
             ,
             when
             the
             Heart
             contracted
             it self
             ;
             also
             the
             Aorta
             or
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             being
             cut
             off
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             we
             saw
             Blood
             poured
             forth
             when
             the
             Heart
             did
             straiten
             it self
             ;
             the
             tip
             of
             the
             Heart
             being
             cut
             off
             and
             the
             Heart
             ser
             upright
             ,
             we
             saw
             the
             Blood
             expelled
             and
             leaping
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             the
             Heart
             being
             cut
             a
             thwart
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             we
             saw
             the
             Blood
             expelled
             in
             the
             Systole
             ,
             but
             we
             never
             saw
             it
             go
             out
             in
             the
             Diastole
             .
             And
             whereas
             some
             say
             they
             have
             seen
             in
             live
             Dissections
             the
             Blood
             come
             out
             in
             the
             Diastole
             ,
             I
             conceive
             they
             were
             deceived
             ,
             by
             taking
             that
             to
             be
             a
             Diastole
             ,
             which
             is
             indeed
             the
             Systole
             ,
             which
             also
             that
             rare
             Anatomist
             Columbus
             ,
             observed
             in
             his
             14.
             
             Book
             
               de
               Re
               Anatomica
            
             .
          
           
             For
             in
             the
             
               motion
               of
               the
               Heart
            
             ,
             we
             must
             exactly
             distinguish
             betwixt
             the
             Constriction
             ,
             Quiet
             ,
             and
             Dilatation
             thereof
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Constriction
             or
             Systole
             of
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Heart
             draws
             near
             to
             the
             Basis
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             becomes
             a
             little
             broader
             .
             And
             in
             his
             Animals
             in
             which
             the
             Aorta
             is
             inferred
             not
             into
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             a
             little
             towards
             the
             middle
             ,
             as
             in
             Rabbits
             ,
             E●ls
             and
             such
             like
             ,
             the
             Basis
             also
             of
             the
             Heart
             draws
             towards
             the
             point
             .
             Now
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             seated
             against
             the
             right
             and
             left
             Ribs
             ,
             do
             come
             one
             nearer
             to
             another
             ,
             so
             that
             if
             you
             shall
             cut
             off
             the
             tip
             of
             either
             side
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             may
             hang
             ,
             in
             the
             constriction
             it
             will
             return
             unto
             the
             sound
             side
             and
             as
             it
             were
             into
             its
             place
             .
             But
             the
             side
             of
             the
             Heart
             against
             the
             Breast-bone
             ,
             is
             lifted
             up
             ,
             and
             especially
             towards
             the
             Basis
             :
             and
             so
             the
             whole
             Heart
             is
             bent
             and
             stretched
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             and
             that
             part
             mea●
             the
             Basis
             being
             lift
             up
             ,
             seems
             most
             of
             all
             to
             smite
             the
             breast
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             that
             beating
             which
             we
             feel
             ;
             although
             the
             point
             also
             may
             do
             it
             ,
             which
             that
             great
             Anatomist
             Riolanus
             observed
             ,
             in
             the
             sixth
             Book
             of
             his
             Anthropologia
             Chapter
             ,
             12.
             
          
           
             And
             that
             I
             might
             be
             the
             better
             assured
             ,
             that
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             now
             described
             ,
             is
             the
             Constriction
             thereof
             .
             I
             have
             sometimes
             cut
             off
             the
             tip
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             cut
             it
             asunder
             athwart
             through
             the
             middle
             ;
             And
             I
             manifestly
             saw
             ,
             when
             it
             made
             the
             foresaid
             motion
             ,
             that
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             became
             less
             ,
             and
             my
             Finger
             being
             put
             into
             the
             hole
             ,
             I
             felt
             the
             Ventricles
             contract
             themselves
             to
             ●y
             Finger
             .
             And
             the
             self
             same
             motion
             which
             I
             have
             shewed
             in
             the
             Heart
             makes
             externally
             when
             it
             contracts
             it self
             ,
             it
             shews
             also
             inwardly
             ;
             save
             that
             there
             seems
             to
             be
             no
             motion
             in
             the
             
               Septum
               intermedium
            
             :
             peradventure
             ,
             least
             the
             Septum
             to
             straiten
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             should
             come
             nearer
             the
             left
             side
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             should
             leave
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             wider
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             the
             ●ension
             and
             Constriction
             
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Blood
             is
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               Arteriosa
            
             and
             the
             Aorta
             .
             And
             when
             it
             is
             languishing
             ,
             it
             is
             made
             only
             by
             the
             help
             of
             those
             fibres
             wherewith
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             furnished
             ;
             but
             to
             make
             a
             stronger
             constriction
             ,
             those
             greater
             fibres
             concur
             ,
             which
             are
             seen
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             often
             observed
             ,
             in
             Dissecting
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             .
          
           
             Now
             those
             fibres
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             and
             in
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Heart
             it self
             ,
             do
             manifestly
             cause
             the
             Constriction
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             on
             all
             sides
             distended
             broadwise
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             are
             abbreviated
             as
             to
             length
             ;
             just
             as
             all
             the
             musculous
             parts
             of
             our
             Body
             ,
             do
             in
             like
             manner
             perform
             their
             motion
             :
             and
             therefore
             when
             we
             would
             chew
             ou●
             meat
             we
             feel
             our
             temporal
             Muscle
             swell
             and
             grow
             hard
             .
             By
             reason
             of
             this
             swelling
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             made
             more
             sirait
             .
             And
             this
             Turor
             of
             the
             Flesh
             and
             greater
             fibres
             begins
             at
             the
             Basis
             ,
             and
             proceeds
             gradually
             unto
             the
             ●ip
             .
             In
             regard
             of
             which
             Motion
             if
             Hypocrates
             in
             the
             Beginning
             of
             his
             Book
             
               de
               Corde
            
             ,
             cal'd
             the
             Heart
             a
             strong
             Muscle
             ,
             he
             did
             truly
             after
             an
             elegant
             manner
             express
             the
             manner
             of
             its
             Motion
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Heart
             by
             its
             Constriction
             
             hath
             forced
             the
             Blood
             into
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             it
             returns
             to
             its
             ,
             Natural
             state
             .
             For
             the
             point
             returns
             from
             the
             Basis
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Basis
             from
             the
             point
             ,
             in
             those
             Animals
             which
             have
             no
             passage
             into
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             in
             their
             basis
             ;
             but
             the
             left
             and
             right
             side
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             extends
             it self
             towards
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             that
             side
             which
             looks
             towards
             the
             Breast-bone
             falls
             in
             ,
             especially
             
             there
             where
             it
             answers
             to
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             whol
             Heart
             rests
             and
             is
             found
             loose
             and
             soft
             .
          
           
             And
             unless
             that
             upper
             side
             did
             settle
             and
             fall
             in
             ,
             the
             Heart
             would
             be
             dilated
             in
             this
             return
             hereof
             to
             its
             naturall
             state
             ,
             as
             is
             easie
             to
             see
             and
             feel
             ,
             when
             the
             heart
             is
             dissected
             .
             But
             that
             upper
             side
             must
             needs
             fall
             in
             ,
             least
             the
             heart
             being
             emptied
             by
             foregoing
             constriction
             should
             admit
             a
             Vaccuum
             .
             But
             when
             out
             of
             Vena
             Cava
             and
             the
             Arteria
             Venosa
             ,
             new
             blood
             is
             forced
             into
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             the
             Blood
             contained
             therein
             is
             rarified
             by
             heat
             ,
             then
             the
             upper
             side
             rises
             :
             and
             the
             other
             sides
             ,
             as
             we
             said
             before
             ,
             remain
             extended
             .
             And
             so
             the
             
             heart
             is
             then
             in
             its
             dilatation
             ;
             nor
             is
             there
             any
             other
             dilatation
             of
             the
             heart
             save
             this
             ,
             to
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Particles
             of
             a
             live
             heart
             dissected
             and
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Bodie
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             other
             dilatation
             then
             a
             remission
             or
             slackening
             from
             Constriction
             .
             Indeed
             in
             those
             particles
             where
             constriction
             is
             ceased
             ,
             there
             remains
             a
             seeing
             kind
             of
             Palpitation
             ;
             but
             that
             is
             another
             kind
             of
             motion
             proceeding
             from
             the
             spirit
             conteined
             in
             the
             flesh
             and
             seeking
             its
             way
             out
             ;
             such
             as
             may
             also
             frequently
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             muscles
             whole
             or
             dissected
             ,
             in
             Creatures
             dissected
             presently
             upon
             their
             death
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             Dilatation
             and
             Constriction
             of
             the
             heart
             happens
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             that
             of
             other
             parts
             ,
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             Gutts
             ,
             Bladder
             ,
             Womb
             ,
             which
             are
             distended
             by
             what
             is
             sent
             into
             them
             ,
             which
             when
             they
             have
             voided
             ,
             they
             return
             to
             their
             naturall
             state
             .
          
           
             Now
             we
             cannot
             better
             observe
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             then
             in
             those
             Beasts
             which
             have
             only
             one
             ventricle
             in
             their
             Hearts
             ,
             or
             if
             they
             have
             two
             ,
             when
             the
             Animals
             begin
             to
             languish
             ,
             otherwise
             when
             the
             Creatures
             are
             strong
             ,
             the
             motion
             is
             hardly
             discerned
             because
             of
             its
             Swistness
             ;
             also
             because
             the
             two
             ventricles
             present
             those
             motions
             doubled
             ;
             and
             because
             the
             Cone
             of
             the
             right
             ventricle
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             less
             high
             then
             the
             left
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             drawn
             back
             to
             the
             Basis
             ,
             it
             makes
             an
             oblique
             motion
             .
          
           
             But
             let
             us
             return
             to
             our
             business
             ,
             and
             let
             us
             see
             further
             how
             the
             blood
             
             out
             of
             
               the
               Arteries
               near
               the
               Heart
            
             ,
             is
             spread
             through
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             whol
             Body
             ,
             now
             it
             is
             done
             by
             a
             manifest
             Impulse
             or
             driveing
             or
             any
             Artery
             being
             bound
             ,
             at
             the
             Ligature
             it
             swels
             very
             much
             ,
             and
             is
             stretched
             to
             an
             extream
             hardness
             .
          
           
             Notwithstanding
             the
             Heaviness
             of
             the
             Blood
             furthers
             its
             motion
             downwards
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Heart
             seems
             to
             have
             been
             placed
             neerer
             the
             Head
             then
             the
             Heels
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             likely
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             drawn
             into
             all
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             they
             
             and
             their
             neighbouring
             parts
             may
             be
             nourished
             with
             convenient
             Blood.
             
          
           
             But
             that
             the
             Arteries
             should
             draw
             by
             
             being
             widened
             ,
             there
             seems
             no
             necessity
             :
             for
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             driven
             forward
             only
             by
             impulse
             ,
             and
             the
             Arteries
             may
             drive
             the
             same
             :
             for
             an
             Artery
             being
             broke
             and
             an
             Aneurisma
             made
             in
             the
             Flesh
             ,
             the
             Aneurisma
             in
             the
             flesh
             ,
             is
             perceived
             to
             pulse
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             Artery
             ;
             wherein
             manifestly
             the
             flesh
             doth
             not
             draw
             the
             blood
             by
             dilatation
             ,
             but
             the
             blood
             is
             driven
             into
             the
             same
             .
             A
             miserable
             example
             whereof
             we
             latlely
             saw
             in
             the
             most
             expert
             Dr.
             
               Johannes
               Elemannus
            
             ,
             in
             whom
             an
             Artery
             breaking
             ,
             the
             Aneurisma
             possessed
             a
             fourth
             part
             of
             his
             Chest
             .
             And
             the
             like
             was
             observed
             by
             Riolanus
             in
             the
             6.
             
             Book
             of
             his
             Anshropologia
             chap.
             12.
             
             And
             that
             indeed
             the
             pulse
             of
             the
             arteries
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             Impulse
             of
             Blood
             ,
             the
             waving
             ,
             creeping
             ,
             pismire
             pulses
             seem
             to
             shew
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             which
             manifestly
             imitate
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             the
             artery
             .
          
           
             True
             it
             is
             indeed
             ,
             in
             that
             Book
             of
             
               Galen
               whether
               blood
               be
               contained
               in
               the
            
             
             Arteries
             ,
             in
             the
             last
             words
             it
             is
             asserted
             ▪
             that
             an
             hollow
             Reed
             being
             thrust
             into
             the
             arteries
             ,
             and
             the
             artery
             tied
             above
             the
             Reed
             ,
             the
             artery
             doth
             not
             pulse
             beyond
             the
             ligature
             ,
             though
             the
             blood
             may
             be
             driven
             through
             the
             Reed
             .
             But
             I
             suspect
             that
             place
             is
             mained
             and
             wants
             somwhat
             ,
             because
             after
             the
             manner
             there
             described
             ,
             the
             operation
             can
             very
             rarely
             and
             hardly
             succeed
             ▪
             for
             a
             free
             artery
             is
             there
             prescribed
             to
             be
             opened
             out
             of
             which
             when
             it
             is
             open
             ,
             every
             body
             knows
             what
             a
             world
             of
             blood
             leaps
             out
             ,
             so
             that
             either
             the
             Creature
             will
             die
             ,
             or
             through
             its
             weakness
             ,
             no
             arteries
             at
             least
             not
             those
             more
             remote
             can
             pulse
             .
          
           
             But
             suppose
             the
             place
             is
             perfect
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             operation
             shall
             succeed
             as
             it
             is
             there
             described
             ,
             it
             may
             happen
             that
             the
             Creature
             quite
             languishing
             because
             of
             the
             flux
             of
             Blood
             ,
             the
             pulse
             might
             be
             felt
             on
             this
             side
             the
             Reed
             ,
             because
             the
             Reed
             being
             thrust
             in
             ,
             rendring
             the
             artery
             more
             narrow
             ,
             might
             in
             part
             stop
             the
             blood
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             might
             easily
             fill
             the
             artery
             and
             lift
             it
             up
             .
             So
             I
             have
             many
             times
             seen
             ,
             arreries
             which
             shewed
             either
             a
             languishing
             or
             no
             pulse
             ,
             manifestly
             pulsing
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             compressed
             not
             very
             far
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             Galen
             observed
             no
             pulse
             beyond
             the
             Reed
             ,
             because
             through
             the
             Reed
             much
             narrower
             than
             the
             artery
             ,
             the
             artery
             received
             little
             blood
             .
             And
             that
             such
             a
             thing
             might
             easily
             happen
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             in
             a
             Rabbit
             ,
             into
             the
             Aorta
             whereof
             ,
             it
             being
             tied
             on
             each
             side
             we
             thrust
             a
             little
             Reed
             ,
             but
             because
             the
             ligature
             being
             loosed
             the
             Beast
             died
             ,
             we
             thought
             it
             not
             worth
             the
             while
             to
             bind
             the
             artery
             above
             the
             Reed
             and
             we
             thought
             we
             saw
             some
             pulse
             as
             far
             as
             to
             the
             Reed
             ,
             but
             we
             could
             perceive
             none
             beyond
             the
             Reed
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             we
             could
             never
             make
             that
             experiment
             succeed
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             not
             easie
             to
             find
             a
             convenient
             Artery
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             is
             found
             and
             duly
             opened
             ,
             the
             Creature
             most
             speedily
             dies
             ,
             either
             because
             of
             Bloodshed
             ,
             or
             (
             which
             may
             seem
             strange
             )
             by
             Convulsions
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             we
             can
             see
             no
             other
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             Blood
             being
             forced
             may
             pass
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             it
             also
             the
             Arteries
             may
             be
             distended
             ▪
             nor
             seems
             it
             necessary
             to
             call
             any
             other
             Cause
             to
             make
             the
             Arteries
             pulse
             ,
             seeing
             the
             forealleadged
             Cause
             may
             suffice
             .
             Yet
             Nature
             is
             wont
             frequently
             
             to
             call
             more
             assistances
             to
             the
             performance
             of
             her
             works
             then
             do
             indeed
             to
             us
             seem
             necessary
             ,
             who
             cannot
             alwaies
             dive
             into
             her
             Secrets
             .
             So
             here
             ,
             some
             tokens
             are
             observed
             by
             Galen
             ,
             that
             besides
             that
             dilatation
             they
             receive
             from
             the
             impulse
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             the
             Arteries
             do
             also
             endeavor
             their
             own
             dilatation
             .
             That
             all
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             body
             both
             in
             sound
             persons
             and
             Creatures
             ,
             and
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             ,
             do
             pulse
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             moment
             :
             but
             nothing
             that
             is
             moved
             to
             distance
             ,
             can
             be
             every
             where
             at
             one
             moment
             ;
             and
             therefore
             not
             at
             the
             same
             moment
             make
             distention
             every
             where
             .
             The
             Guts
             when
             blown
             up
             by
             Anatomists
             ,
             or
             Pudding-makers
             ,
             are
             seen
             to
             be
             distended
             in
             the
             parts
             neer
             the
             Blower
             first
             ,
             before
             the
             remoter
             parts
             are
             distended
             .
             True
             indeed
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Arteries
             are
             not
             empts
             as
             the
             Guts
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             distended
             being
             partlyfilled
             with
             blood
             :
             yet
             ,
             seeing
             that
             blood
             which
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             must
             thrust
             forward
             that
             which
             is
             next
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             again
             that
             which
             is
             next
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             forward
             untill
             the
             Arteries
             be
             filled
             and
             distended
             every
             where
             ,
             it
             doth
             not
             seem
             ,
             though
             the
             motion
             be
             performed
             out
             of
             a
             wide
             into
             a
             narrow
             place
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             be
             performed
             in
             one
             moment
             ▪
             just
             as
             we
             see
             twenty
             stones
             which
             the
             Boys
             set
             in
             a
             row
             ,
             the
             greatest
             first
             ;
             when
             the
             first
             is
             beaten
             down
             ,
             all
             the
             rest
             do
             not
             fall
             in
             one
             moment
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             may
             suspect
             ,
             that
             the
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             impulse
             of
             blood
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             own
             proper
             dilatation
             :
             and
             that
             both
             these
             causes
             contribute
             to
             the
             bloods
             motion
             .
          
           
             Hence
             also
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             this
             same
             
             impulse
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             made
             only
             by
             
             the
             Heart
             ,
             nor
             does
             one
             part
             of
             the
             Arteries
             drive
             it
             into
             another
             :
             for
             that
             part
             which
             drives
             by
             constriction
             ,
             that
             cannot
             in
             the
             same
             moment
             be
             dilated
             ,
             but
             all
             the
             Arteries
             are
             dilated
             in
             a
             moment
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             the
             blood
             is
             moved
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ;
             and
             out
             of
             the
             
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             lesser
             Veins
             into
             the
             greater
             and
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             it self
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             moved
             also
             by
             Impulse
             .
             For
             any
             Vein
             being
             bound
             in
             living
             Creatures
             ,
             it
             falls
             in
             ,
             and
             growes
             lank
             towards
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             filled
             in
             that
             part
             which
             is
             more
             remote
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
          
           
             And
             this
             same
             Pulsion
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             seems
             to
             happen
             from
             any
             part
             of
             a
             
             Vein
             ,
             for
             a
             Vein
             bound
             or
             compressed
             in
             a
             living
             Arm
             it
             is
             not
             only
             sttretched
             in
             the
             part
             remoter
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             
             also
             in
             the
             rest
             there
             of
             nearer
             the
             Heart
             it
             falls
             in
             and
             is
             emptied
             ;
             which
             nearer
             part
             if
             you
             also
             tie
             that
             also
             will
             be
             distended
             beyond
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             and
             will
             swell
             .
             Now
             this
             Pulsion
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             Fibres
             whereof
             the
             Veins
             are
             constituted
             .
          
           
             We
             conceive
             nevertheless
             that
             the
             veins
             do
             also
             draw
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             receive
             
             the
             blood
             without
             choice
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             may
             draw
             to
             themselves
             that
             which
             is
             most
             useful
             :
             howbeit
             they
             seem
             to
             receive
             the
             blood
             more
             by
             Pulsion
             then
             by
             traction
             or
             drawing
             ,
             because
             the
             veins
             being
             bound
             ,
             are
             wonderfully
             distended
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             there
             is
             a
             certain
             Store-house
             of
             Blood
             ,
             wherein
             blood
             is
             treasured
             up
             for
             future
             Uses
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             more
             plentiful
             then
             that
             all
             of
             it
             need
             be
             sent
             unto
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             And
             all
             these
             are
             Causes
             of
             the
             Natural
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             .
             To
             which
             
             the
             
               causes
               of
               the
               motion
               of
               the
               Chyle
               ,
            
             are
             not
             unlike
             :
             for
             the
             Stomach
             contracting
             it self
             by
             its
             Fibres
             ,
             squeezes
             out
             as
             much
             Chyle
             as
             is
             digested
             ,
             And
             by
             that
             pressure
             it
             seems
             also
             to
             open
             the
             Pylorus
             :
             for
             there
             seems
             not
             to
             be
             any
             spontaneous
             motion
             in
             the
             Pylorus
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             in
             the
             Stomach
             or
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             The
             Chyle
             staies
             not
             long
             in
             the
             Guts
             ,
             but
             is
             presently
             driven
             out
             
               by
               the
               constriction
            
             
             
               of
               the
               transverse
               Fibres
            
             :
             and
             while
             many
             fibres
             ,
             and
             which
             mutually
             follow
             one
             another
             ,
             do
             act
             ,
             the
             Chyle
             is
             pressed
             ,
             nor
             can
             it
             all
             slip
             downwards
             ,
             whereupon
             some
             of
             the
             pressed
             chyle
             slips
             into
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             ;
             yet
             least
             that
             the
             Chylus
             should
             slip
             too
             soon
             to
             the
             Fundament
             ,
             it
             is
             stopped
             by
             the
             constriction
             of
             the
             lower
             transverse
             Fibre
             :
             and
             being
             thus
             shut
             ,
             and
             compressed
             above
             and
             beneath
             ,
             it
             is
             pressed
             through
             the
             wrinkled
             Coat
             of
             the
             Gut
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             through
             a
             strainer
             into
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             .
             Now
             this
             same
             constriction
             of
             the
             transverse
             Fibres
             ,
             happens
             in
             all
             the
             thin
             or
             small
             Guts
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             thick
             or
             round
             Guts
             ,
             in
             a
             certain
             order
             ,
             and
             at
             certain
             distances
             of
             time
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Chyle
             is
             moved
             through
             the
             
               milkie
               Veins
            
             into
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Portae
             ,
             
             into
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             also
             into
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             by
             pulse
             ,
             a
             Ligature
             does
             shew
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             likely
             that
             Chyle
             
               is
               drawn
            
             out
             of
             the
             Guts
             and
             milkie
             Veins
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             
             moved
             more
             swiftly
             out
             of
             them
             ,
             then
             the
             Guts
             or
             
               Venae
               lacteae
            
             do
             seem
             to
             drive
             or
             force
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             Chylus
             in
             the
             
               Ramus
               mesentericus
               ,
               Vena
               partae
            
             and
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             being
             mingled
             with
             the
             blood
             ,
             is
             moved
             by
             the
             same
             cause
             ,
             which
             there
             as
             we
             have
             said
             ,
             does
             move
             the
             blood
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Chylus
             is
             carried
             by
             peculiar
             
             Veins
             ,
             rather
             then
             by
             the
             Mesaraicks
             which
             contain
             blood
             ,
             because
             the
             Mesaraicks
             being
             to
             admit
             blood
             ,
             were
             to
             have
             their
             mouths
             opened
             into
             the
             Guts
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             blood
             would
             easily
             have
             slipt
             into
             the
             Guts
             .
             Nor
             could
             the
             drawing
             Faculty
             prevent
             that
             inconveniency
             ,
             which
             is
             here
             much
             obscurer
             and
             much
             weaker
             then
             the
             expulsive
             Faculty
             .
          
           
             As
             this
             Motion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             ,
             so
             also
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             hath
             its
             uses
             and
             conveniences
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             principal
             seem
             to
             be
             these
             .
          
           
             That
             by
             the
             continual
             passage
             therof
             
             through
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             also
             continually
             heated
             ,
             and
             whiles
             som
             blood
             goes
             through
             seldomer
             ,
             other
             blood
             oftner
             ,
             there
             is
             found
             in
             the
             Veins
             blood
             of
             all
             Qualities
             :
             which
             while
             it
             is
             carryed
             into
             all
             parts
             ,
             and
             Nature
             unlocks
             ,
             and
             offers
             all
             the
             treasure
             to
             them
             ,
             they
             may
             be
             the
             better
             heated
             ,
             and
             receive
             that
             Nourishment
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             most
             convenient
             to
             feed
             and
             strengthen
             them
             .
          
           
             But
             this
             motion
             does
             also
             contribute
             
             much
             to
             the
             preservation
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             its
             integrity
             ,
             free
             from
             corruption
             or
             putrefaction
             :
             for
          
           
             
               Vitium
               capiunt
               ,
               ni
               moveantur
               aquae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Unstirred
               waters
               easily
               corrupt
            
             .
          
           
             which
             is
             also
             most
             true
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             daily
             see
             when
             the
             Vessels
             are
             obstructed
             .
          
           
             It
             contributes
             also
             to
             the
             perfection
             
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             whilest
             by
             continual
             motion
             ,
             it
             is
             rarified
             and
             attenuated
             .
             But
             it
             makes
             chiefly
             towards
             it
             perfection
             ,
             in
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             somtimes
             attenuated
             ,
             grows
             hot
             ,
             and
             is
             rarisied
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             somtimes
             again
             it
             is
             condensed
             and
             congeales
             as
             it
             were
             in
             the
             Habit
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             For
             no
             part
             in
             the
             Body
             is
             horter
             then
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             none
             less
             hot
             then
             the
             Habit
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             And
             therefore
             there
             happens
             a
             certain
             Circulation
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             not
             unlike
             to
             that
             whereby
             the
             Chymists
             make
             their
             Spirits
             most
             subtile
             and
             perfect
             .
             For
             the
             blood
             which
             is
             attenuated
             by
             heat
             ,
             after
             it
             is
             condensed
             by
             cold
             ,
             is
             able
             to
             persist
             in
             that
             thinness
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             return
             to
             its
             old
             thickness
             :
             from
             which
             degree
             of
             thinness
             in
             tract
             of
             time
             it
             attains
             to
             a
             greater
             by
             means
             of
             heat
             ,
             in
             which
             being
             again
             condensed
             by
             cold
             ,
             it
             comes
             to
             continue
             ;
             and
             so
             at
             last
             it
             becomes
             most
             fit
             for
             the
             making
             of
             vital
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             For
             this
             end
             the
             blood
             is
             moved
             
             circularly
             ;
             but
             hath
             it
             not
             therefore
             elsewhere
             another
             motion
             ?
             Out
             of
             the
             smallest
             Arteries
             the
             blood
             is
             carried
             right
             out
             into
             the
             flesh
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             constitute
             the
             nameless
             humor
             ,
             the
             
               Ros
               ,
               Gluten
            
             ,
             and
             Cambium
             ,
             nor
             does
             it
             return
             hither
             from
             whence
             it
             came
             ,
             least
             the
             blood
             flowing
             through
             the
             least
             ,
             should
             hinder
             these
             humors
             from
             being
             gleued
             and
             assimilated
             to
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             It
             flows
             also
             somtimes
             chiefly
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             driven
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             flesh
             :
             and
             frequently
             also
             the
             chief
             moving
             cause
             is
             attraction
             :
             for
             the
             bones
             cannot
             without
             attraction
             receive
             the
             thicker
             part
             of
             the
             humor
             for
             their
             nourishment
             ,
             and
             leave
             the
             remaining
             thinner
             part
             thereof
             ,
             unfit
             to
             nourish
             them
             in
             the
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             
               TABLE
               .
               III.
               
            
             
               The
               FIGURE
               Explained
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   AAAA
                   .
                   
                     The
                     vulgar
                     mesaraick
                     Vein
                     and
                     Arteries
                     ,
                     derived
                     from
                     the
                     Gate-vein
                     called
                  
                   Porta
                   .
                
                 
                   BBBB
                   .
                   
                     The
                     milkie
                     Veins
                     discovered
                     by
                  
                   Asellius
                   .
                
                 
                   C.
                   
                     The
                     Glandule
                     or
                     Kernel
                     in
                     the
                     Centre
                     of
                     the
                     Mesentery
                     which
                  
                   Asellius
                   
                     calls
                     the
                     Pancreas
                     or
                     Sweetbread
                     ,
                     to
                     which
                     all
                     the
                     Branches
                     of
                     the
                     milkie
                     Veins
                     do
                     go
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   DD.
                   
                     Two
                     milkie
                     Branches
                     greater
                     then
                     the
                     rest
                     ,
                     ascending
                     by
                     the
                     Porta
                     ,
                     and
                     inserted
                     into
                     the
                     Liver
                     by
                     the
                     Opinion
                     of
                  
                   Asellius
                   .
                
                 
                   EE
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Lobes
                     of
                     the
                     Liver
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   F.
                   
                     The
                     Gall.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   GG
                   .
                   
                     The
                     empty
                     Gut
                     called
                  
                   Jejunum
                   .
                
                 
                   HH
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Ilium
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   OO
                   .
                   
                     Glandulous
                     Flesh
                     in
                     Dogs
                     ,
                     by
                     the
                     Duodenum
                     and
                     the
                     Entrance
                     of
                     the
                     Jejunum
                     ,
                     which
                     may
                     be
                     called
                     in
                     Dogs
                     ,
                     the
                     lower
                     part
                     of
                     the
                     Pancreas
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               page
               ●●●
            
          
           
             Some
             also
             there
             are
             
             who
             suppose
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             being
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             does
             go
             back
             ,
             and
             return
             again
             by
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
             Which
             they
             are
             therefore
             moved
             to
             think
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             able
             to
             give
             a
             mechanick
             cause
             ,
             why
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             do
             fall
             down
             and
             are
             closed
             up
             .
             I
             truly
             have
             alwaies
             esteem
             that
             a
             rare
             design
             of
             Erasistratus
             ,
             to
             explain
             all
             things
             that
             happen
             in
             our
             Body
             mechanically
             ,
             but
             I
             account
             it
             a
             rash
             thing
             in
             him
             to
             measure
             the
             Wisdom
             of
             God
             by
             his
             own
             Wisdom
             .
             And
             these
             are
             to
             be
             counted
             Engins
             ,
             which
             evident
             reason
             ,
             and
             especially
             Sense
             do
             shew
             to
             be
             such
             .
             Here
             contrariwise
             our
             Senses
             observe
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             goes
             through
             the
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Heart
             not
             to
             the
             Heart
             ;
             and
             in
             a
             rare
             and
             languishing
             Pulse
             ,
             that
             the
             Artery
             does
             not
             swell
             last
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             knit
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             it
             should
             do
             if
             that
             Opinion
             were
             true
             ,
             but
             first
             of
             all
             .
             Also
             that
             the
             Valves
             are
             not
             shut
             by
             the
             blood
             running
             back
             ,
             we
             have
             this
             sign
             ,
             that
             in
             case
             the
             Artery
             be
             bound
             two
             fingers
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             it
             be
             so
             opened
             betwixt
             the
             Ligature
             and
             the
             Valves
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             freely
             pass
             forth
             ,
             and
             therefore
             go
             neither
             backwards
             nor
             forwards
             ;
             yet
             the
             Valves
             may
             be
             divers
             times
             well
             sastned
             ,
             the
             Heart
             ordinarily
             moved
             ,
             and
             so
             as
             not
             to
             s●ed
             forth
             the
             blood
             ,
             save
             in
             its
             constriction
             .
             And
             therefore
             if
             I
             would
             here
             allow
             of
             any
             mechanical
             Motion
             ,
             I
             should
             admit
             the
             common
             Opinion
             ,
             which
             saies
             ,
             that
             the
             shutting
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             so
             of
             the
             Valves
             ,
             is
             performed
             by
             contraction
             of
             the
             Fibres
             .
             For
             that
             same
             contraction
             of
             the
             fibres
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             every
             where
             obvious
             to
             the
             Eye-sight
             .
          
           
             But
             we
             have
             truly
             no
             sign
             or
             ●oken
             
             that
             the
             Blood
             is
             any
             other
             waies
             directly
             moved
             through
             the
             Veins
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             or
             through
             the
             Arteries
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
             In
             Joy
             ,
             truly
             ,
             the
             Humors
             move
             outwards
             ;
             but
             this
             may
             be
             betide
             by
             the
             Arteries
             alone
             .
             And
             in
             Sadness
             ,
             the
             Humors
             may
             be
             moved
             inwardly
             through
             the
             Veins
             alone
             :
             and
             they
             must
             needs
             do
             so
             ,
             for
             seeing
             the
             Pulse
             does
             not
             cease
             in
             Sadness
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             Pulse
             there
             goes
             continually
             somwhat
             through
             the
             Arteries
             outwards
             ,
             hardly
             can
             any
             thing
             be
             moved
             through
             the
             Arteries
             inwards
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Howbeit
             ,
             praeternaturally
             the
             humors
             have
             another
             motion
             besides
             
             that
             which
             we
             have
             here
             described
             ,
             whilest
             by
             their
             lightness
             or
             other
             activity
             ,
             they
             mount
             upwards
             ,
             or
             by
             their
             weight
             descend
             downwards
             ,
             as
             is
             manifest
             in
             such
             as
             have
             the
             Varices
             so
             called
             .
             Also
             that
             way
             being
             shut
             up
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             were
             wont
             to
             be
             moved
             ,
             they
             are
             compelled
             to
             seek
             another
             .
             So
             in
             a
             Duck
             I
             have
             divers
             times
             seen
             in
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Breast
             ,
             the
             blood
             parti-coloured
             ,
             some
             whiteish
             ,
             some
             reddish
             ,
             which
             the
             Artery
             being
             contracted
             ,
             was
             moved
             to
             and
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             in
             divers
             sides
             of
             the
             Artery
             :
             
             but
             that
             motion
             lasted
             not
             long
             ,
             nor
             did
             the
             blood
             ever
             enter
             into
             the
             Heart
             by
             that
             motion
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             (
             most
             worthy
             Friend
             Bartholine
             )
             I
             conceive
             I
             have
             answered
             your
             Question
             touching
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood.
             Whereinto
             I
             did
             enquire
             more
             scrupulously
             ,
             that
             I
             might
             better
             know
             the
             Nature
             of
             the
             Humors
             ,
             and
             their
             Deflux
             :
             from
             which
             Flux
             of
             Humors
             innumerable
             Diseases
             arise
             .
             I
             did
             also
             believe
             that
             I
             might
             more
             exactly
             understand
             how
             good
             or
             bad
             blood
             was
             generated
             ,
             if
             I
             knew
             those
             Parts
             by
             which
             the
             Humor
             passing
             along
             might
             be
             changed
             .
             Also
             I
             conceived
             that
             I
             should
             be
             better
             able
             to
             judg
             ,
             how
             very
             many
             Diseases
             ought
             to
             be
             cured
             ,
             if
             I
             knew
             which
             Vein
             being
             opened
             ,
             would
             evacuate
             such
             and
             such
             parts
             ,
             and
             through
             what
             parts
             the
             Remedy
             ought
             to
             pass
             ,
             before
             it
             can
             come
             to
             the
             part
             affected
             ?
             Also
             innumerable
             things
             came
             into
             my
             mind
             ,
             diffused
             through
             our
             whole
             Art
             ,
             as
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Pulses
             ,
             of
             Feavers
             ,
             of
             Inflammations
             ,
             their
             Generation
             and
             Cure
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             made
             me
             desire
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             this
             Motion
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             And
             the
             Experiments
             whereby
             I
             was
             brought
             into
             this
             Opinion
             ,
             are
             so
             evident
             ,
             that
             I
             doubt
             not
             to
             affirm
             ,
             that
             learned
             and
             discreer
             Physitians
             will
             henceforwards
             ,
             allow
             of
             this
             Motion
             of
             the
             Chyle
             and
             Blood.
             Howbeit
             in
             some
             Causes
             and
             in
             certain
             circumstances
             of
             this
             Motion
             ,
             I
             cannot
             promise
             the
             like
             Agreement
             :
             for
             sundry
             men
             are
             Naturally
             inclined
             by
             a
             disparity
             of
             their
             Judgments
             ,
             to
             embrace
             different
             Opinions
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             truth
             of
             these
             Experiments
             ,
             you
             cannot
             (
             my
             Bartholine
             )
             make
             Question
             ,
             who
             have
             your self
             seen
             many
             of
             them
             :
             and
             there
             were
             frequently
             present
             most
             learned
             Doctors
             of
             Physick
             not
             unknown
             to
             you
             ,
             
               Franciscus
               Sylvius
               ,
               Johannes
               Van
               Horn
               ,
               Ahasuerus
               Schmitnerus
            
             most
             accurate
             Dissecters
             ;
             and
             those
             persons
             of
             solid
             Learning
             
               Franciscus
               vander
               Schagen
            
             ,
             and
             
               Antonius
               Vockestaert
            
             :
             nor
             were
             they
             only
             present
             ,
             but
             they
             also
             afforded
             their
             Counsels
             and
             Handiwork
             to
             help
             make
             the
             said
             Experiments
             :
             to
             whom
             in
             that
             respect
             I
             am
             very
             much
             obliged
             .
             And
             so
             farewel
             most
             learned
             Bartholine
             ,
             and
             persist
             to
             love
             me
             .
             Dated
             at
             Leyden
             the
             10.
             of
             the
             Kalends
             of
             
               October
               ,
               Anno
            
             1640.
             
          
        
         
           
             THE
             SECOND
             LETTER
             OF
             THE
             Motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             To
             the
             said
             BARTHOLINUS
             .
          
           
             SUch
             is
             the
             Fate
             of
             Writers
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             comcompelled
             to
             write
             when
             they
             are
             unwilling
             :
             that
             so
             they
             may
             answer
             their
             Adversaries
             ,
             unless
             they
             would
             rather
             be
             wanting
             to
             themselves
             ,
             or
             the
             cause
             which
             they
             defend
             .
             A
             certain
             learned
             Man
             would
             needs
             extort
             this
             from
             me
             ,
             being
             busied
             about
             far
             other
             
             matters
             .
             For
             those
             Theses
             which
             he
             had
             before
             objected
             against
             ,
             he
             hath
             endeavored
             now
             lately
             by
             a
             peculiar
             Writing
             to
             refute
             .
             In
             which
             Writing
             there
             are
             many
             witty
             and
             learned
             Passages
             :
             but
             I
             find
             that
             fault
             in
             the
             Author
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             found
             in
             Albutius
             the
             Rhetoritian
             ,
             who
             made
             it
             his
             Business
             in
             every
             Cause
             he
             pleaded
             ,
             not
             to
             say
             all
             that
             should
             be
             said
             ,
             but
             all
             that
             he
             was
             able
             to
             say
             .
             Also
             that
             Motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             which
             is
             evident
             in
             live
             Dissections
             ,
             he
             hath
             never
             labored
             to
             observe
             :
             just
             as
             if
             the
             matter
             might
             better
             be
             conceived
             by
             the
             Mind
             ,
             then
             he
             could
             see
             it
             with
             his
             Eyes
             .
             But
             these
             and
             other
             things
             concerning
             those
             Theses
             ,
             I
             leave
             to
             the
             
             Care
             of
             
               Roger
               Drak
            
             who
             is
             now
             a
             Doctor
             of
             Physick
             at
             London
             ,
             a
             Man
             of
             an
             acute
             Wit
             and
             solid
             Learning
             :
             I
             shall
             
             only
             meddle
             with
             such
             things
             as
             shall
             seem
             to
             oppose
             the
             circular
             Motion
             of
             Blood.
             And
             in
             the
             first
             place
             ,
             what
             it
             is
             that
             Blood-letting
             does
             teach
             us
             in
             this
             Case
             ,
             concerning
             which
             that
             
             learned
             Man
             hath
             observed
             things
             worthy
             of
             Consideration
             .
          
           
             A
             Surgeon
             being
             to
             open
             a
             Vein
             ,
             
             makes
             a
             Ligature
             upon
             the
             Arm
             ,
             that
             the
             Vein
             may
             swell
             .
             The
             Vein
             that
             swells
             ,
             not
             on
             this
             fide
             the
             Ligature
             towards
             the
             heart
             ,
             but
             on
             that
             side
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             which
             is
             furthest
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
             Now
             the
             Cause
             of
             that
             Tumor
             is
             not
             Pain
             ,
             caused
             by
             binding
             the
             part
             :
             for
             oftentimes
             little
             ,
             and
             commonly
             no
             pain
             in
             the
             part
             bound
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Arm
             is
             pinced
             or
             pained
             by
             Burning
             or
             otherwise
             ,
             it
             hath
             its
             Veins
             for
             the
             most
             part
             less
             swollen
             ,
             then
             upon
             a
             simple
             and
             bare
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             Nor
             is
             it
             more
             likely
             ,
             that
             the
             Veins
             swell
             upon
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             because
             through
             the
             Veins
             which
             are
             straiter
             because
             they
             are
             bound
             ,
             greater
             pienty
             of
             Blood
             comes
             and
             with
             more
             swiftness
             from
             the
             Liver
             ;
             as
             about
             Bridges
             and
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             Rivers
             being
             straitned
             do
             run
             more
             swiftly
             .
             For
             the
             Water
             of
             a
             River
             being
             gathered
             
             together
             in
             a
             narrow
             place
             ,
             is
             manifestly
             lifted
             up
             into
             a
             swelling
             ,
             from
             which
             when
             it
             falls
             ,
             it
             goes
             the
             faster
             :
             but
             the
             arm
             being
             bound
             the
             contrary
             happens
             ;
             for
             they
             are
             not
             the
             Veins
             nighest
             the
             Liver
             ,
             from
             which
             blood
             should
             come
             ,
             but
             those
             farthest
             from
             the
             Liver
             which
             are
             most
             distended
             .
          
           
             It
             remains
             therefore
             ,
             that
             the
             Veins
             swell
             beyond
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             because
             
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             running
             from
             the
             small
             veins
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             stopped
             by
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             and
             being
             there
             gathered
             together
             ,
             distends
             the
             Vein
             .
             But
             to
             the
             end
             I
             might
             be
             more
             certain
             hereof
             ,
             I
             bound
             the
             jugular
             and
             crural
             branch
             ,
             in
             living
             Creatures
             very
             strongly
             with
             a
             threed
             ,
             so
             that
             no
             blood
             might
             pass
             by
             ;
             and
             I
             opened
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             which
             was
             more
             remote
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             bled
             plentifully
             ,
             swiftly
             ,
             vehemently
             ,
             soon
             after
             I
             loosed
             the
             band
             ,
             and
             cut
             the
             Vein
             asunder
             through
             the
             middle
             ,
             and
             the
             part
             thereof
             farthest
             from
             the
             Heart
             being
             drawn
             out
             of
             the
             body
             upwards
             ,
             presently
             and
             swiftly
             fell
             a
             bleeding
             :
             whilst
             in
             the
             mean
             time
             the
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             nearest
             the
             heart
             ,
             being
             somewhat
             elevated
             ,
             least
             the
             Creature
             strugling
             with
             pain
             should
             easily
             force
             out
             the
             Blood
             ;
             first
             it
             voided
             but
             little
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             no
             blood
             at
             all
             .
             whence
             it
             seemed
             to
             me
             apparent
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             came
             out
             of
             the
             veins
             far
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             into
             those
             near
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             not
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             Veins
             into
             the
             lesser
             ;
             unless
             haply
             some
             neighbouring
             blood
             finding
             a
             way
             might
             slip
             away
             .
             Any
             one
             may
             easily
             try
             as
             much
             in
             opening
             a
             vein
             in
             the
             Arm
             :
             for
             if
             he
             force
             the
             blood
             above
             the
             Ligature
             upwards
             with
             his
             finger
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             vein
             appear
             empty
             ,
             yet
             shall
             he
             see
             the
             blood
             issue
             out
             as
             fast
             as
             ever
             below
             the
             Ligature
             ;
             which
             could
             not
             come
             through
             the
             upper
             branch
             being
             at
             present
             empty
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             the
             Vein
             be
             thus
             distended
             with
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             moved
             from
             the
             smaller
             
             veins
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             how
             can
             the
             artery
             be
             distended
             upon
             the
             ligature
             ,
             which
             divers
             excellent
             Physitians
             relate
             to
             have
             been
             so
             distended
             ,
             that
             it
             has
             been
             opened
             instead
             of
             a
             vein
             ;
             the
             truth
             is
             ,
             the
             Artery
             doth
             not
             swell
             upon
             the
             Ligatures
             being
             made
             ,
             unless
             where
             it
             is
             neer
             the
             Heart
             ,
             but
             farther
             off
             it
             falls
             in
             somewhat
             ,
             and
             is
             diminished
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             an
             hundred
             times
             and
             oftener
             experimented
             in
             the
             Dissections
             of
             living
             Anatomies
             .
             But
             I
             do
             not
             think
             it
             was
             any
             of
             the
             authors
             ,
             meaning
             thar
             the
             remoter
             part
             of
             the
             Artery
             was
             distended
             by
             means
             of
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             but
             that
             their
             meaning
             only
             was
             ,
             where
             the
             Vein
             did
             not
             appear
             which
             was
             to
             be
             opened
             ,
             that
             there
             the
             place
             where
             it
             lay
             was
             to
             be
             sought
             by
             feeling
             ;
             and
             that
             by
             a
             pit
             ,
             by
             motion
             and
             swelling
             of
             the
             Blood
             it
             was
             to
             be
             found
             :
             and
             when
             we
             feel
             a
             swelling
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             discover
             the
             same
             ,
             we
             should
             not
             presently
             conclude
             that
             there
             was
             the
             Vein
             ;
             for
             it
             might
             be
             an
             Artery
             which
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             hard
             binding
             had
             lost
             its
             pulse
             ,
             and
             which
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             thickness
             of
             the
             Coates
             not
             quite
             falling
             in
             ,
             might
             counterfeit
             a
             certain
             tumor
             and
             puffing-up
             as
             it
             were
             .
          
           
             But
             moreover
             if
             the
             Vein
             swels
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Blood
             returning
             to
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             why
             does
             the
             vein
             also
             swel
             and
             if
             opened
             ,
             why
             void
             Blood
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             a
             Ligature
             made
             below
             as
             well
             as
             above
             the
             place
             phlebotomized
             ?
             which
             Blood
             cannot
             be
             thought
             possibly
             to
             come
             from
             the
             lower
             parts
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Ligature
             made
             below
             the
             Orifice
             .
             But
             this
             does
             not
             alwayes
             so
             happen
             ,
             but
             but
             sometimes
             ,
             only
             when
             the
             Arm
             is
             tied
             at
             a
             certain
             distance
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             greater
             Veins
             in
             the
             place
             between
             those
             two
             Ligatures
             do
             receive
             that
             blood
             from
             the
             smaller
             Veins
             ,
             which
             smaller
             Veins
             receive
             from
             the
             smaller
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             smal
             veins
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             .
             And
             that
             indeed
             the
             blood
             which
             flows
             out
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Ligatures
             ,
             does
             come
             by
             way
             of
             Anastomosis
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             this
             is
             a
             sign
             and
             in
             that
             it
             flows
             more
             hotter
             and
             with
             more
             violence
             ,
             and
             more
             easie
             and
             sooner
             a
             Lipothymia
             or
             fainting
             fit
             follows
             the
             efflux
             hereof
             .
             And
             this
             Ligature
             I
             am
             wont
             to
             make
             use
             of
             ,
             when
             I
             have
             signs
             that
             spirituous
             and
             hot
             blood
             is
             in
             fault
             ,
             and
             I
             bid
             the
             Chirurgeon
             seek
             out
             those
             Anastomoses
             ,
             by
             his
             Ligature
             :
             for
             if
             the
             Ligature
             be
             made
             above
             the
             Anastomosis
             ,
             it
             stops
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ;
             but
             beneath
             it
             does
             not
             stop
             it
             ,
             but
             the
             blood
             leaps
             out
             hotter
             to
             the
             feeling
             of
             the
             Patient
             .
          
           
             When
             a
             Vein
             is
             opened
             and
             the
             
             blood
             runs
             out
             ,
             as
             soon
             as
             it
             begins
             to
             stop
             or
             come
             away
             sparingly
             ,
             or
             if
             it
             did
             so
             at
             first
             ,
             we
             loose
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             might
             run
             out
             faster
             .
             Now
             the
             Ligature
             seems
             not
             therefore
             to
             be
             slacked
             ,
             to
             the
             intent
             the
             blood
             may
             come
             from
             the
             Liver
             through
             the
             Veins
             .
             For
             though
             there
             be
             little
             or
             no
             blood
             above
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             yea
             only
             a
             pit
             appear
             in
             the
             Vein
             ,
             yet
             will
             the
             course
             of
             the
             Blood
             be
             increased
             by
             loosening
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             which
             cannot
             possibly
             come
             out
             of
             an
             empty
             Vein
             .
             But
             by
             the
             loosening
             of
             the
             band
             ,
             the
             Blood
             may
             the
             better
             descend
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             and
             pass
             out
             of
             them
             into
             the
             Veins
             ;
             because
             the
             Arteries
             being
             compressed
             by
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             by
             loosening
             the
             said
             Ligature
             become
             more
             free
             .
             Now
             that
             the
             Arteries
             are
             not
             alwayes
             sufficiently
             at
             Liberty
             when
             the
             arm
             is
             bound
             ,
             the
             patient
             himself
             can
             witness
             ,
             who
             oft
             perceives
             the
             pulse
             of
             the
             Arterse
             at
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             which
             perception
             the
             compressed
             Arterie
             causes
             ,
             when
             it
             smites
             against
             the
             flesh
             .
             And
             the
             Physitian
             if
             he
             examine
             the
             matter
             ,
             shall
             often
             find
             a
             less
             pulse
             in
             the
             bound
             a●m
             then
             in
             the
             free
             .
             And
             I
             can
             testifie
             that
             I
             have
             divers
             times
             applyed
             my
             fingers
             to
             the
             Patients
             wrist
             ,
             when
             the
             band
             was
             to
             be
             loosed
             ,
             and
             observed
             ,
             that
             when
             by
             loosing
             the
             Ligature
             Blood
             came
             in
             more
             plentifully
             ,
             the
             Pulse
             became
             greater
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             that
             Blood
             which
             flows
             
             out
             when
             a
             vein
             is
             opened
             ,
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             veins
             ,
             how
             can
             it
             be
             plentifully
             taken
             away
             ?
             for
             all
             the
             Arteries
             pulse
             equally
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             seem
             to
             afford
             blood
             to
             the
             Veins
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             measure
             :
             and
             if
             so
             be
             therest
             of
             the
             arteries
             afford
             so
             much
             to
             their
             veins
             as
             the
             arteries
             of
             the
             Arms
             do
             to
             theirs
             and
             is
             drawn
             out
             ,
             shall
             not
             the
             heart
             be
             soon
             destitute
             of
             all
             blood
             ?
             There
             is
             truly
             no
             danger
             at
             all
             :
             For
             we
             have
             said
             the
             blood
             comes
             as
             fast
             unto
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             driven
             thence
          
           
             Yet
             I
             cannot
             conceive
             the
             Blood
             enters
             all
             veins
             alike
             ,
             although
             the
             Arteries
             seem
             to
             pulse
             equally
             ;
             for
             all
             Liquors
             flow
             more
             easily
             and
             swiftly
             into
             an
             empty
             place
             ,
             in
             which
             there
             is
             nothing
             to
             drive
             and
             force
             them
             ,
             and
             moreover
             in
             this
             case
             the
             Blood
             is
             more
             forcibly
             drawn
             by
             the
             empty
             Veins
             then
             by
             the
             full
             ones
             .
          
           
             Now
             more
             store
             of
             Blood
             issues
             
             from
             a
             ▪
             vein
             opened
             in
             the
             cubit
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             Hand
             ,
             because
             all
             that
             blood
             ,
             which
             comes
             to
             the
             Veins
             through
             all
             the
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Cubit
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             must
             return
             through
             the
             Cubit
             Veins
             ;
             
             but
             less
             runs
             through
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             and
             that
             only
             ,
             which
             comes
             through
             the
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             a
             wounded
             Arterie
             ,
             indeed
             the
             blood
             presently
             flowes
             ,
             although
             
             it
             be
             not
             bound
             .
             But
             that
             happens
             because
             the
             Blood
             is
             carryed
             with
             greater
             vetiemence
             ,
             though
             the
             arteries
             then
             through
             the
             Veins
             ;
             by
             which
             vehemency
             ,
             it
             fills
             the
             Arterie
             ,
             lifts
             up
             and
             distends
             the
             Coat
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             be
             opened
             ,
             necessarily
             flies
             out
             .
          
           
             Our
             of
             a
             Vein
             opened
             when
             Blood
             has
             flowed
             sufficiently
             ,
             we
             
             stop
             it
             by
             untieing
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             because
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             carried
             again
             its
             old
             way
             ,
             now
             it
             is
             at
             Liberty
             and
             the
             way
             free
             .
             But
             if
             it
             so
             happen
             ,
             that
             too
             much
             blood
             being
             gathered
             about
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             the
             Veins
             cannot
             give
             it
             a
             free
             passage
             ;
             or
             so
             large
             an
             orifice
             be
             made
             ▪
             that
             the
             Blood
             may
             now
             go
             right
             out
             that
             way
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             went
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             shut
             in
             ,
             sometimes
             the
             Band
             being
             loosened
             ,
             the
             blood
             runs
             out
             in
             a
             full
             stream
             .
          
           
             Which
             our
             Chyrurgeons
             at
             this
             very
             day
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             effectually
             stop
             ,
             they
             frequently
             compress
             the
             vein
             with
             their
             Thumbs
             a
             little
             below
             the
             Orifice
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             stop
             the
             
             blood
             ;
             least
             if
             they
             should
             compress
             it
             above
             the
             orifice
             ,
             the
             blood
             contained
             therein
             should
             presently
             curdle
             ,
             and
             hinder
             the
             healing
             up
             of
             the
             Vein
             .
             And
             they
             that
             deny
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             thus
             be
             stopped
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             wherein
             we
             should
             credit
             them
             who
             would
             abuse
             us
             in
             a
             thing
             obvious
             to
             the
             Senses
             .
             And
             seeing
             the
             Blood
             is
             stopped
             by
             compressing
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Vein
             ,
             it
             is
             truely
             manifest
             that
             the
             Blood
             ascends
             from
             the
             lower
             parts
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             case
             it
             should
             happen
             ,
             not
             in
             Blood-letting
             ,
             but
             by
             some
             other
             
             mischance
             ,
             that
             a
             Vein
             should
             be
             so
             wounded
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             could
             not
             be
             stopped
             ,
             the
             Vein
             is
             cut
             asunder
             in
             the
             middest
             :
             Whereupon
             ,
             the
             Vein
             being
             no
             longer
             strerched
             out
             as
             before
             ,
             the
             parts
             cut
             asunder
             are
             drawn
             upwards
             and
             downwards
             into
             the
             flesh
             ,
             by
             which
             flesh
             the
             mouths
             of
             the
             Veins
             are
             compressed
             and
             shut
             ,
             and
             that
             so
             much
             the
             more
             easily
             because
             the
             Blood
             can
             move
             its
             self
             so
             much
             the
             more
             easily
             through
             the
             neighboring
             veins
             which
             are
             extended
             and
             open
             ,
             the
             former
             being
             shut
             up
             ,
             and
             therefore
             for
             the
             very
             same
             cause
             a
             small
             Arterie
             being
             cut
             asunder
             athwart
             ,
             neither
             Bleeding
             nor
             Inflammation
             do
             follow
             .
          
           
             Which
             things
             being
             so
             ,
             I
             conceive
             it
             is
             evident
             to
             all
             Men
             ,
             that
             such
             things
             as
             happen
             in
             Blood-letting
             ,
             do
             either
             prove
             the
             Circular
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             are
             not
             against
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             But
             seeing
             other
             Things
             are
             objected
             against
             us
             ,
             we
             must
             answer
             
             them
             also
             .
             And
             first
             whereas
             they
             prove
             that
             the
             Blood
             comes
             through
             the
             Veins
             ,
             not
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             Liver
             ;
             because
             some
             parts
             receive
             Blood
             ,
             and
             have
             Tumors
             arising
             from
             the
             Afflux
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             which
             parts
             have
             no
             Arteries
             ,
             amongst
             which
             they
             reckon
             the
             Pleura
             .
             But
             it
             does
             not
             follow
             ,
             if
             the
             parts
             have
             not
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             their
             veins
             do
             not
             receive
             their
             blood
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             Liver
             ;
             for
             as
             we
             said
             ,
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Mesenterick
             and
             Celiack
             Arteries
             does
             not
             enter
             the
             Mesenterick
             and
             Splenick
             Veins
             ,
             through
             which
             it
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             Liver
             :
             even
             so
             other
             veins
             may
             receive
             blood
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             which
             they
             may
             carry
             into
             a
             part
             more
             remote
             from
             Arteries
             .
             Howbeit
             there
             is
             no
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             any
             bulk
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Anatomists
             do
             not
             rightly
             acknowledge
             Arteries
             to
             be
             .
             And
             infinite
             Arteries
             do
             not
             as
             yet
             lie
             concealed
             from
             their
             knowledge
             ,
             because
             the
             smallest
             Arteries
             dispersed
             through
             the
             flesh
             ,
             have
             only
             one
             Coat
             as
             the
             Veins
             have
             .
             Yea
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Liver
             it self
             ,
             there
             are
             so
             many
             branches
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Celiaca
            
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             ,
             and
             as
             many
             branches
             also
             there
             are
             of
             the
             
               Ductus
               Cholidocus
            
             ,
             all
             which
             have
             bin
             by
             Anatomists
             hitherto
             reckoned
             for
             Branches
             of
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             .
             because
             those
             three
             kinds
             of
             Vessels
             are
             in
             the
             Liver
             inclosed
             in
             a
             common
             Coat
             .
             At
             least
             no
             man
             will
             ever
             deny
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             that
             has
             once
             seen
             the
             Chest
             of
             a
             living
             Creature
             opened
             ;
             for
             whilst
             the
             Chest
             is
             dissected
             ,
             Blood
             is
             wont
             to
             leap
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Pleura
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             they
             prove
             that
             Blood
             does
             not
             come
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             because
             the
             Arm
             being
             so
             bound
             ,
             that
             the
             Arteries
             may
             still
             pulse
             ,
             the
             arm
             is
             not
             immeasurably
             swelled
             below
             the
             ligature
             ,
             whereas
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             so
             swollen
             and
             distended
             ,
             if
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Ligature
             nothing
             can
             flow
             back
             into
             the
             greater
             Veins
             ,
             and
             at
             every
             pulse
             ,
             the
             Arteries
             drive
             somewhat
             into
             the
             lower
             veins
             ,
             at
             every
             contraction
             ,
             of
             which
             Contractions
             there
             are
             more
             then
             three
             thousand
             performed
             every
             hour
             .
             Nevertheles
             ,
             it
             may
             come
             to
             pass
             that
             the
             Arm
             is
             not
             extended
             to
             such
             a
             bulk
             when
             it
             is
             bound
             ;
             because
             the
             veins
             are
             not
             totally
             shut
             up
             ,
             and
             the
             blood
             may
             by
             some
             creeping
             holes
             pass
             under
             the
             ligature
             ,
             and
             go
             into
             the
             greater
             veins
             :
             as
             we
             see
             a
             part
             being
             closely
             bound
             to
             repel
             Humors
             ,
             for
             divers
             months
             or
             years
             ,
             is
             nevertheless
             nourished
             by
             the
             blood
             which
             flows
             through
             ;
             also
             it
             may
             come
             to
             pass
             that
             so
             little
             Blood
             is
             forced
             in
             through
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             bound
             Arm
             ,
             as
             that
             it
             cannot
             distend
             ,
             or
             Swell
             the
             same
             under
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             for
             that
             Blood
             only
             is
             forced
             in
             ,
             the
             veins
             being
             stretched
             with
             fullness
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Ligature
             unto
             the
             Hand
             ;
             for
             that
             which
             is
             above
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             can
             enter
             more
             easily
             into
             the
             veins
             ,
             by
             open
             Anastomoses
             .
             Yea
             it
             may
             come
             to
             pass
             ,
             when
             the
             veins
             being
             distended
             ,
             do
             no
             longer
             permit
             the
             Blood
             to
             be
             forced
             into
             them
             by
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             that
             the
             pulse
             of
             the
             Arteries
             is
             stopped
             ,
             or
             that
             the
             Blood
             regurgitates
             upwards
             ,
             and
             enters
             the
             Veins
             above
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             through
             the
             Anastomoses
             :
             the
             like
             whereto
             I
             saw
             in
             a
             Duck
             ,
             as
             I
             formerly
             related
             .
             Unless
             one
             of
             these
             things
             happen
             ,
             the
             Arm
             would
             presently
             swel
             after
             it
             is
             bound
             ,
             and
             a
             suffocation
             of
             the
             innate
             Heat
             ,
             by
             the
             Abundance
             of
             Blood
             driven
             in
             would
             follow
             .
             For
             I
             have
             often
             bound
             mine
             own
             and
             others
             Armes
             above
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             and
             I
             alwayes
             saw
             the
             veins
             distended
             ,
             and
             the
             Flesh
             to
             swell
             somewhat
             and
             grow
             red
             ;
             and
             oftentimes
             though
             not
             alwayes
             ,
             the
             arteries
             abated
             by
             little
             and
             little
             of
             their
             pulse
             ,
             yea
             and
             sometimes
             intermitted
             ;
             and
             afterward
             the
             red
             colour
             of
             the
             bound
             Arm
             was
             changed
             into
             black
             and
             blew
             :
             and
             therefore
             I
             presently
             undid
             the
             Ligature
             ,
             being
             frighted
             with
             this
             Example
             .
             A
             certain
             Country-man
             being
             wounded
             in
             the
             inside
             of
             his
             Arm
             about
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             when
             the
             Village
             Chirurgeon
             could
             not
             stop
             the
             blood
             ,
             he
             bound
             the
             Arm
             extream
             close
             about
             the
             Wound
             ,
             whence
             followed
             an
             exceeding
             Inflammation
             of
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             his
             Arm
             ,
             and
             such
             a
             swelling
             ,
             that
             deep
             pits
             were
             seen
             in
             the
             place
             of
             his
             fingers
             joynts
             ,
             and
             within
             eighteen
             hours
             ,
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             his
             Arm
             was
             gangrena●ed
             and
             sphacelated
             ,
             which
             
               Christianus
               Regius
            
             an
             expert
             Chirurgeon
             did
             cut
             off
             ,
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             my
             
             self
             ,
             and
             
               E●aldus
               Screvelius
            
             an
             excellent
             Physitian
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             they
             object
             ,
             if
             the
             venal
             Blood
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             
             how
             can
             the
             arterial
             Blood
             differ
             so
             much
             from
             the
             venal
             ?
             But
             we
             must
             know
             that
             it
             differs
             less
             from
             the
             venal
             Blood
             ,
             then
             most
             men
             imagine
             ,
             who
             from
             the
             violence
             wherewith
             the
             arterial
             Blood
             leaps
             forth
             ,
             do
             collect
             the
             great
             plenty
             of
             Spirits
             therein
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             rarity
             or
             thinness
             thereof
             :
             whereas
             that
             Leaping
             proceeds
             from
             the
             Force
             wherewith
             the
             Heart
             drives
             the
             Blood
             through
             the
             arteries
             ;
             for
             an
             Arterie
             being
             opened
             below
             or
             beyond
             the
             ligature
             ,
             the
             Blood
             comes
             out
             only
             dropping
             .
             And
             the
             difference
             between
             these
             two
             bloods
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             greater
             or
             less
             quantity
             of
             Heat
             and
             Spirits
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Blood
             is
             more
             or
             less
             remote
             from
             the
             Heart
             the
             fountain
             of
             Heat
             .
             For
             the
             Blood
             which
             is
             near
             the
             Heart
             differs
             much
             from
             that
             which
             is
             far
             off
             ,
             in
             the
             smallest
             arteries
             ,
             which
             you
             can
             hardly
             distinguish
             from
             that
             which
             is
             in
             the
             small
             veins
             .
             And
             the
             smaller
             veins
             have
             more
             thin
             and
             hot
             Blood
             ,
             then
             the
             great
             ones
             ;
             which
             any
             one
             may
             easily
             try
             in
             opening
             veins
             of
             the
             Arm
             and
             Foot.
             Yea
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             Vein
             be
             opened
             with
             a
             double
             Ligature
             on
             each
             side
             the
             orifice
             ,
             as
             I
             said
             before
             ,
             the
             Blood
             will
             come
             out
             hotter
             then
             with
             a
             single
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             the
             Blood
             does
             not
             go
             out
             of
             the
             smaller
             veins
             into
             the
             
             greater
             ,
             they
             endeavour
             to
             prove
             by
             womens
             monthly
             purgations
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             their
             judgment
             ,
             are
             gathered
             one
             whole
             month
             together
             in
             the
             Veins
             about
             the
             Womb
             ;
             and
             if
             they
             are
             carried
             from
             the
             Womb
             unto
             the
             Head
             ,
             they
             conceive
             that
             they
             do
             not
             pass
             through
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             and
             the
             Heart
             .
             Howbeit
             ,
             the
             common
             and
             true
             opinion
             is
             ,
             that
             about
             the
             time
             of
             the
             usual
             flux
             ,
             the
             blood
             begins
             to
             be
             moved
             to
             the
             Womb
             ,
             from
             which
             motion
             of
             the
             humors
             ,
             pains
             of
             the
             sides
             and
             loines
             are
             wont
             to
             arise
             about
             that
             time
             ,
             And
             I
             know
             by
             Experience
             ,
             that
             about
             the
             time
             of
             the
             menstrual
             Flux
             ,
             if
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Heart
             and
             arteries
             can
             be
             made
             greater
             ,
             the
             Courses
             will
             flow
             the
             better
             ,
             because
             the
             Blood
             will
             through
             the
             arteries
             be
             driven
             more
             forcibly
             into
             the
             Womb.
             It
             may
             nevertheless
             fall
             out
             ,
             that
             the
             Courses
             may
             be
             collected
             and
             make
             an
             Obstruction
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             and
             that
             then
             the
             Blood
             may
             not
             return
             into
             the
             greater
             veins
             ,
             that
             motion
             being
             stopped
             :
             but
             that
             is
             besides
             nature
             .
          
           
             And
             when
             the
             menstrual
             blood
             is
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Womb
             into
             
             the
             Head
             ,
             the
             way
             is
             not
             inconvenient
             ,
             through
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             ,
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             the
             ascending
             branch
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             do
             indeed
             pass
             through
             the
             Heart
             ,
             those
             palpitations
             and
             light
             faintings
             do
             seem
             to
             argue
             ,
             which
             are
             wont
             to
             attend
             upon
             the
             Courses
             stopped
             .
          
           
             But
             should
             we
             not
             conceive
             it
             to
             be
             a
             dangerous
             
             thing
             ,
             if
             all
             the
             ill
             humors
             in
             our
             bodies
             must
             pass
             into
             and
             through
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             we
             must
             know
             ,
             that
             our
             bodies
             are
             so
             framed
             ,
             as
             that
             they
             may
             be
             most
             convenient
             for
             us
             when
             we
             are
             in
             Health
             ,
             and
             not
             when
             we
             are
             sick
             .
             Moreover
             the
             Humor
             which
             putrifies
             by
             reason
             of
             obstruction
             and
             is
             very
             bad
             ,
             comes
             not
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             because
             its
             way
             is
             stopped
             up
             .
             Nor
             is
             the
             Heart
             so
             weak
             as
             to
             be
             corrupted
             by
             an
             evil
             Humor
             ,
             which
             stayes
             not
             long
             therein
             :
             for
             those
             great
             Physitians
             
               Galen
               ,
               Hollerius
               ,
               Laurentius
            
             have
             observed
             that
             the
             Quittor
             of
             such
             as
             have
             an
             Empyema
             ,
             and
             other
             sharp
             and
             stinking
             Humors
             ,
             do
             critically
             and
             without
             any
             bad
             symptomes
             ,
             pass
             through
             the
             left
             ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             which
             many
             times
             makes
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             sick
             Persons
             ,
             in
             whom
             that
             bad
             Humor
             passing
             through
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             often
             vanquished
             by
             the
             Vigour
             and
             Vertue
             hereof
             .
          
           
             The
             other
             Objections
             which
             they
             
             make
             ,
             do
             only
             respect
             the
             Causes
             of
             this
             motion
             or
             certain
             Circumstances
             ,
             wherein
             men
             are
             wont
             more
             freely
             to
             dissent
             ,
             yet
             let
             us
             breifly
             consider
             whether
             or
             no
             they
             have
             in
             them
             any
             weight
             ,
             wherewith
             to
             burthen
             our
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             They
             say
             that
             at
             every
             contraction
             
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             not
             driven
             out
             by
             half
             ounces
             ,
             nor
             by
             drams
             ,
             nor
             by
             scruples
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             for
             three
             Causes
             :
             first
             because
             that
             blood
             is
             too
             spirituous
             ,
             but
             I
             have
             already
             shewed
             that
             it
             is
             not
             so
             spirituous
             as
             men
             imagine
             commonly
             :
             secondly
             because
             those
             little
             Valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             do
             only
             gape
             a
             little
             ,
             and
             then
             are
             close
             shut
             again
             ,
             which
             also
             doth
             not
             agree
             with
             experience
             :
             for
             an
             Arteric
             being
             cut
             off
             from
             the
             heart
             ,
             great
             streams
             of
             Blood
             do
             issue
             from
             the
             Heart
             .
             Thirdly
             that
             the
             Arteries
             are
             too
             full
             then
             to
             be
             able
             to
             admit
             half
             an
             ounce
             ,
             a
             dram
             ,
             or
             a
             scruple
             of
             Blood.
             But
             that
             is
             too
             inconsiderately
             avouched
             ;
             for
             when
             the
             Heart
             contracts
             it self
             ,
             all
             the
             arteries
             in
             the
             body
             are
             enlarged
             ,
             and
             that
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             divers
             times
             perceived
             with
             my
             hand
             ,
             holding
             the
             naked
             arterie
             betwixt
             my
             fingers
             .
             And
             who
             will
             now
             say
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Body
             being
             dilated
             ,
             cannot
             admit
             of
             a
             Scruple
             ,
             a
             Dram
             ,
             yea
             half
             an
             Ounce
             of
             blood
             ,
             more
             then
             they
             have
             ?
          
           
             Also
             they
             deny
             that
             in
             the
             child
             
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             the
             blood
             out
             of
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             ,
             does
             through
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             heart
             united
             enter
             into
             the
             
               Arteria
               Aorta
            
             ,
             and
             go
             from
             thence
             out
             of
             the
             umbilical
             Arteries
             into
             the
             umbilical
             Vein
             ,
             and
             return
             back
             by
             it
             into
             the
             Heart
             :
             because
             they
             think
             this
             great
             absurdity
             will
             follow
             ,
             that
             one
             Vein
             should
             carry
             the
             mothers
             blood
             and
             withal
             so
             much
             blood
             as
             the
             two
             umbilical
             arteries
             do
             bring
             in
             .
             As
             if
             Rivers
             did
             not
             frequently
             carry
             as
             much
             water
             in
             one
             Channel
             ,
             as
             many
             Brooks
             are
             able
             to
             bring
             in
             .
             And
             here
             the
             umbilical
             Vein
             when
             it
             is
             but
             one
             ,
             is
             much
             greater
             then
             the
             Arterie
             .
             There
             is
             often
             but
             one
             arterie
             or
             there
             are
             two
             veins
             ;
             that
             the
             arteries
             may
             as
             much
             as
             may
             be
             answer
             to
             the
             veins
             .
             
               In
               brute
               Beasts
            
             (
             sayes
             Fallopius
             
               a
               rare
               Anatomist
            
             )
             
               there
               are
               allwayes
               two
               Veins
               and
               two
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               with
               the
               Vrachus
               or
               pis-pipe
               do
               reach
               as
               far
               as
               the
               Navil
               ,
               and
               the
               Veins
               do
               presently
               grow
               into
               one
               before
               they
               enter
               into
               the
               Abdomen
               which
               does
               reach
               to
               the
               Gates
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               observed
               in
               all
               Sheep
               ,
               Goats
               ,
               and
               Cows
               ,
               whose
               young
               ones
               I
               have
               dissected
               ,
               But
               if
               they
               speak
               of
               the
               Child
               in
               a
               Womans
               Womb
               ,
               I
               avouch
               that
               sometimes
               I
               have
               not
               seen
               the
               two
               umbilical
               Arteries
               ,
               but
               only
               one
               Arterie
               and
               one
               Vein
               ascending
               together
               with
               the
               Vrachus
               to
               the
               Navil
               :
               where
               the
               Arterie
               is
               again
               divided
               into
               two
               ,
               which
               afterwards
               go
               unto
               the
               sides
               of
               Os
               sacrnm
               .
            
             And
             that
             indeed
             those
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             are
             united
             in
             a
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             may
             pass
             that
             way
             out
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             into
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             Waterfowl
             ,
             
             as
             the
             Duck
             ,
             Goose
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             do
             seem
             to
             teach
             us
             ;
             
             which
             because
             they
             cannot
             often
             breath
             under
             the
             water
             ▪
             no●
             dilate
             their
             Lungs
             ,
             nor
             consequently
             admit
             the
             blood
             that
             way
             ,
             they
             have
             those
             unions
             of
             the
             vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             grown
             up
             .
             Which
             also
             Harvey
             notes
             in
             his
             6.
             
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             Also
             they
             deny
             the
             frequent
             Anastomoses
             
             of
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ,
             for
             if
             such
             there
             were
             ,
             they
             say
             tumors
             would
             not
             arise
             by
             Fluxion
             and
             Congestion
             of
             Humors
             .
             As
             if
             Rivers
             though
             they
             have
             outlets
             ,
             receiving
             over-great
             plenty
             of
             water
             ,
             may
             not
             overflow
             the
             neighbouring
             fields
             ;
             nor
             can
             the
             blood
             shed
             out
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             because
             it
             congeals
             ,
             easily
             return
             into
             them
             again
             .
             Moreover
             Tumors
             are
             many
             times
             caused
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             by
             reason
             of
             Obstruction
             ,
             the
             bloods
             passage
             is
             stopped
             ;
             and
             because
             by
             heat
             and
             pain
             it
             is
             drawn
             into
             the
             flesh
             .
          
           
             Now
             those
             Tumors
             seem
             rather
             to
             favour
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             the
             bloods
             circular
             motion
             ,
             because
             they
             happen
             through
             cold
             ,
             bruising
             ,
             and
             all
             stoppage
             of
             the
             passages
             of
             the
             Body
             ;
             and
             because
             with
             
               Aqua
               vitae
            
             or
             some
             such
             medicine
             ,
             the
             Humors
             and
             the
             Tumors
             being
             often
             made
             fluid
             ,
             it
             is
             by
             this
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             drawn
             into
             the
             Veins
             ;
             and
             the
             Tumor
             by
             that
             means
             sooner
             cured
             then
             by
             repulsion
             ,
             revulsion
             ,
             concoction
             or
             dissipation
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             
               Cause
               of
               the
               Bloods
               motion
            
             ,
             difficulties
             do
             also
             present
             themselves
             
             unto
             us
             ;
             and
             when
             we
             deny
             that
             the
             blood
             according
             to
             the
             Course
             of
             Nature
             ,
             is
             so
             suddenly
             and
             vehemently
             rarified
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             as
             to
             be
             able
             to
             move
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             Arteries
             themselves
             ;
             those
             famous
             men
             the
             Ring-leaders
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             do
             suppose
             that
             they
             do
             hereby
             prove
             it
             ,
             
               In
               that
               while
               we
               are
               cold
               ,
               all
               the
               Veins
               of
               our
               Body
               are
               contracted
               ,
               and
               can
               hardly
               be
               seen
               ,
               where
               as
               afterwards
               when
               we
               grow
               hot
               ,
               they
               do
               so
               swell
               ,
               that
               the
               blood
               contained
               in
               them
               ,
               seems
               to
               take
               up
               ten
               times
               so
               much
               space
               as
               before
               it
               did
               .
            
          
           
             As
             for
             me
             ,
             this
             truly
             is
             my
             Opinion
             ,
             and
             thus
             I
             perswade
             my self
             ,
             that
             seeing
             they
             have
             now
             divers
             times
             ,
             so
             diligently
             endeavored
             in
             Publick
             to
             perswade
             men
             to
             embrace
             this
             their
             Opinion
             of
             Rarifaction
             ;
             and
             have
             diffected
             and
             lookt
             into
             the
             Hearts
             of
             Living
             Creatures
             ,
             nor
             have
             yet
             dared
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             sensibly
             perceive
             any
             such
             Rarifaction
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             Heart
             ;
             I
             say
             ,
             my
             Opinion
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             not
             indeed
             and
             in
             truth
             observe
             any
             such
             Rarifaction
             of
             the
             blood
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             would
             in
             this
             place
             maintain
             ▪
             And
             it
             will
             be
             easie
             for
             him
             that
             is
             a
             little
             verst
             in
             live
             Dissections
             ,
             to
             see
             that
             there
             is
             no
             such
             rarifaction
             .
             And
             therefore
             though
             it
             might
             be
             proved
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             Rarifaction
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             does
             sometimes
             happen
             praeternaturally
             ,
             yet
             ought
             not
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             Natural
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             Blood
             and
             Arteries
             be
             therefore
             attributed
             thereunto
             .
          
           
             Yet
             in
             the
             Example
             which
             they
             propound
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             see
             what
             certainty
             there
             is
             that
             the
             blood
             by
             reason
             of
             its
             Rarifaction
             does
             possess
             ten
             times
             more
             space
             then
             before
             .
             For
             might
             not
             that
             same
             Tumor
             of
             the
             external
             Veins
             easily
             arise
             ,
             because
             whereas
             before
             the
             veins
             were
             contracted
             and
             straitned
             through
             cold
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             receive
             much
             blood
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             could
             not
             swell
             :
             Which
             cold
             and
             straitning
             of
             the
             vessels
             being
             afterwards
             taken
             away
             ,
             and
             the
             Veins
             being
             loosned
             by
             heat
             ,
             they
             might
             admit
             much
             blood
             ,
             which
             is
             driven
             into
             them
             by
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             so
             appear
             full
             and
             swelling
             .
             That
             this
             is
             not
             the
             least
             cause
             of
             the
             tumor
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             persons
             that
             are
             feauerish
             seem
             to
             teach
             us
             ,
             who
             if
             they
             thrust
             their
             arms
             into
             the
             cold
             ,
             have
             not
             their
             Veins
             so
             swelling
             ,
             but
             if
             they
             keep
             them
             warm
             under
             the
             cloaths
             ,
             they
             have
             them
             very
             full
             and
             swole
             ,
             which
             tumor
             if
             it
             came
             from
             Rarifaction
             ,
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             in
             both
             cases
             alike
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             them
             ,
             the
             bloods
             Rarifaction
             proceeds
             from
             an
             internal
             cause
             .
          
           
             Nor
             do
             I
             conceive
             that
             it
             is
             also
             void
             of
             Question
             and
             undoubted
             ,
             that
             when
             we
             are
             first
             cold
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             grow
             hot
             ,
             the
             inner
             Veins
             as
             well
             as
             the
             outer
             do
             swell
             .
             For
             it
             is
             much
             to
             be
             suspected
             ,
             that
             the
             inner
             parts
             do
             possess
             less
             blood
             and
             heat
             before
             ;
             because
             by
             that
             cold
             wherewith
             before
             they
             were
             not
             hurt
             ,
             if
             when
             we
             are
             so
             heated
             we
             drink
             cold
             drink
             ,
             they
             are
             wonderfully
             weakened
             .
             Doubtless
             as
             the
             inner
             veins
             are
             oftentimes
             the
             treasury
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             wherein
             the
             blood
             is
             stored
             up
             for
             future
             uses
             ,
             so
             may
             the
             external
             ▪
             Veins
             be
             the
             like
             treasury
             ,
             and
             they
             appear
             to
             be
             when
             they
             so
             swell
             as
             aforesaid
             .
          
           
             These
             men
             themselves
             when
             they
             
             observed
             that
             this
             also
             was
             much
             against
             their
             Opinion
             ,
             that
             we
             asserted
             that
             the
             blood
             was
             manifestly
             poured
             out
             ,
             at
             the
             constriction
             of
             the
             Heart
             ;
             they
             avouch
             that
             that
             is
             not
             the
             constriction
             ,
             but
             the
             dilatation
             of
             the
             heart
             which
             we
             mean.
             But
             that
             we
             were
             deluded
             by
             a
             certain
             appearance
             ,
             because
             in
             our
             constriction
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             constriction
             only
             at
             the
             Basis
             ,
             but
             about
             the
             tip
             a
             true
             Dilatation
             ;
             which
             Invention
             when
             others
             saw
             that
             it
             could
             not
             hold
             ,
             least
             they
             also
             should
             seem
             to
             desert
             their
             cause
             ,
             they
             invented
             that
             there
             is
             a
             constriction
             indeed
             ,
             in
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             whole
             Ventricle
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             pits
             and
             passages
             of
             the
             sides
             ,
             especially
             in
             Dogs
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             certain
             kind
             of
             Extension
             and
             true
             Dilatation
             .
          
           
             But
             truly
             ,
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             not
             seen
             to
             be
             dilated
             ,
             when
             the
             lower
             is
             contracted
             ;
             save
             when
             the
             Creature
             is
             dying
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             waving
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             caused
             by
             the
             impulse
             of
             the
             blood
             .
             Nor
             can
             we
             observe
             one
             Dilatation
             or
             Constriction
             of
             the
             Pits
             ,
             another
             of
             the
             ●avity
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             .
             Only
             a
             certain
             progressive
             motion
             is
             observed
             in
             a
             large
             Heart
             ,
             because
             the
             Dilatation
             or
             constriction
             doth
             evidently
             begin
             at
             the
             basis
             ,
             and
             sensibly
             proceeds
             to
             the
             tip
             ,
             although
             't
             is
             performed
             all
             welnear
             in
             a
             moment
             .
             And
             that
             I
             might
             be
             perfectly
             assured
             ,
             that
             the
             Heart
             was
             contracted
             within
             likewise
             ,
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             having
             cut
             off
             the
             tip
             of
             each
             Ventricle
             ,
             ●
             put
             my
             thumb
             and
             fore-finger
             into
             the
             living
             heart
             of
             a
             Dog
             and
             a
             Rabbit
             ;
             and
             I
             manifestly
             felt
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Heart
             to
             press
             my
             fingers
             to
             the
             middle
             partition
             ,
             equally
             in
             the
             middle
             ,
             tip
             and
             Basis
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             pits
             in
             greater
             Beasts
             ,
             became
             to
             Sense
             ,
             not
             bigger
             but
             lesser
             .
             And
             soon
             after
             the
             Constriction
             abating
             ,
             that
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             heart
             above
             ,
             beneath
             and
             in
             the
             middle
             were
             loosned
             ,
             and
             the
             pits
             did
             feel
             evidently
             larger
             .
             But
             in
             the
             Septum
             or
             partition
             wall
             it self
             ,
             no
             motion
             is
             felt
             ,
             save
             that
             the
             Spirits
             seeking
             egress
             make
             a
             kind
             of
             Palpitation
             ,
             when
             in
             Creatures
             at
             the
             last
             gaspe
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             ceases
             ,
             the
             Septum
             follows
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             would
             have
             it
             nevertheless
             
             that
             naturally
             the
             blood
             is
             poured
             out
             in
             the
             widening
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             Constriction
             or
             straitning
             thereof
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             wounded
             Heart
             of
             Living
             Creatures
             ,
             the
             blood
             is
             seen
             to
             come
             out
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             dilated
             .
             And
             this
             is
             sometimes
             true
             ;
             but
             that
             which
             they
             thence
             collect
             ,
             our
             very
             Senses
             teach
             us
             to
             be
             untrue
             .
             For
             either
             the
             Dog
             or
             other
             creature
             is
             placed
             with
             its
             Head
             and
             breast
             elevated
             ,
             and
             
             the
             belly
             low
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             wound
             is
             inflicted
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             in
             which
             case
             ,
             seeing
             the
             blood
             which
             enters
             through
             the
             
               Vena
               cava
            
             and
             
               Arteria
               venosa
            
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             is
             higher
             then
             any
             wound
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             ,
             as
             soon
             as
             it
             is
             entred
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Dilatation
             ,
             flows
             out
             ,
             not
             because
             of
             the
             Pulse
             ,
             but
             of
             its
             own
             heaviness
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             not
             by
             any
             force
             made
             to
             flie
             out
             to
             some
             distance
             ,
             as
             it
             happens
             in
             the
             Pulse
             of
             the
             Arteries
             .
             But
             if
             as
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             ,
             the
             dog
             be
             laid
             on
             his
             back
             ,
             his
             head
             and
             belly
             resting
             on
             the
             same
             plane
             ,
             and
             the
             wounded
             Heart
             be
             raised
             with
             a
             mans
             fingers
             ,
             as
             long
             as
             there
             is
             any
             strength
             in
             the
             Heart
             ,
             it
             sooner
             by
             Constriction
             casts
             out
             the
             blood
             it
             hath
             received
             ,
             at
             a
             distance
             ,
             then
             the
             whole
             Heart
             is
             filled
             or
             widened
             .
             But
             when
             the
             strength
             of
             the
             heart
             decayes
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             seldom
             straitens
             it self
             or
             not
             at
             all
             ,
             because
             the
             Earlets
             are
             more
             strong
             ,
             and
             do
             still
             continue
             pulsing
             ,
             even
             when
             the
             Heart
             quite
             gives
             over
             ;
             the
             blood
             being
             driven
             by
             the
             Earlets
             enters
             the
             heart
             ,
             is
             there
             collected
             ,
             and
             when
             more
             is
             come
             in
             then
             the
             Heart
             can
             contain
             ,
             it
             goe
             out
             at
             the
             wound
             ,
             not
             with
             violence
             ,
             as
             it
             must
             do
             to
             cause
             Pulsation
             ,
             but
             with
             a
             gentle
             motion
             ,
             drop
             after
             drop
             .
             So
             that
             our
             Sense
             can
             perceive
             no
             strong
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             save
             in
             the
             Hearts
             Constriction
             .
          
           
             Now
             they
             will
             have
             the
             blood
             to
             return
             through
             the
             Veins
             into
             the
             
             Heart
             ,
             only
             because
             the
             blood
             being
             forcibly
             driven
             to
             the
             Parts
             ,
             as
             water
             poured
             into
             an
             horn
             ,
             does
             regurgitate
             or
             abound
             back
             upwards
             ,
             and
             so
             is
             carried
             back
             unto
             the
             Heart
             .
             But
             I
             have
             already
             shewed
             tokens
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             either
             drawn
             ,
             or
             driven
             by
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Veins
             :
             besides
             which
             I
             have
             also
             these
             following
             :
             in
             that
             the
             Heart
             being
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             and
             that
             swift
             enough
             ,
             is
             still
             seen
             in
             the
             Veins
             .
             And
             if
             a
             Vein
             ,
             yea
             a
             milkie
             one
             ,
             be
             tied
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             that
             same
             Ligature
             being
             only
             loosned
             ,
             which
             is
             nearest
             the
             Heart
             ,
             while
             the
             parts
             are
             yet
             hot
             ,
             the
             Chvle
             will
             still
             be
             moved
             to
             the
             Liver
             ,
             the
             blood
             unto
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             could
             neither
             by
             any
             step
             be
             driven
             from
             the
             Heart
             through
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             nor
             from
             the
             Guts
             through
             the
             
               Venae
               lacteae
            
             ;
             nor
             would
             it
             by
             its
             own
             fluidity
             more
             rather
             upwards
             then
             downwards
             .
          
           
             But
             let
             us
             answer
             the
             remaining
             objections
             :
             
             They
             suppose
             ,
             if
             the
             blood
             should
             be
             moved
             so
             swiftly
             ,
             that
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             could
             not
             conveniently
             be
             nourished
             .
             But
             a
             dog
             can
             quench
             his
             thirst
             ,
             drinking
             at
             the
             River
             Nilus
             and
             running
             as
             he
             drinks
             ;
             but
             here
             the
             parts
             stay
             at
             the
             brook
             side
             :
             and
             whatever
             they
             have
             drawn
             from
             the
             blood
             ,
             they
             treasure
             up
             in
             their
             own
             substance
             ,
             least
             it
             should
             be
             washed
             away
             ,
             by
             the
             running
             by
             of
             the
             humor
             .
          
           
             Also
             they
             conceit
             this
             Motion
             is
             not
             useful
             for
             the
             blood
             .
             Seeing
             it
             may
             
             sufficiently
             be
             conserved
             (
             since
             it
             abounds
             with
             native
             heat
             )
             by
             respiration
             and
             transpiration
             .
             Yet
             most
             certain
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             blood
             is
             yet
             more
             ventilated
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             speedily
             moved
             ,
             and
             its
             smallest
             Particles
             also
             agitated
             with
             this
             motion
             .
             So
             the
             water
             of
             a
             lake
             or
             standing
             pool
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             gently
             moved
             and
             fanned
             on
             the
             Surface
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             corrupted
             ;
             when
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             Rivers
             that
             are
             totally
             and
             in
             all
             parts
             agitated
             ,
             are
             found
             to
             continue
             most
             uncorrupt
             and
             wholsom
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             things
             (
             most
             excellent
             Bartholine
             )
             which
             I
             thought
             fit
             to
             joyn
             to
             the
             former
             ,
             that
             I
             might
             satisfie
             those
             who
             cannot
             receive
             a
             new
             opinion
             ,
             wherin
             they
             observe
             any
             difficulty
             or
             obscurity
             ;
             who
             many
             times
             have
             neither
             mind
             nor
             time
             to
             enquire
             exactly
             into
             the
             bowels
             thereof
             .
             But
             in
             my
             Judgment
             ,
             we
             ought
             not
             to
             deny
             things
             manifest
             ,
             although
             we
             cannot
             resolve
             such
             as
             are
             difficult
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             never
             was
             disposed
             to
             contend
             and
             quarrel
             with
             any
             man
             about
             words
             .
             There
             are
             very
             many
             excellent
             things
             about
             which
             time
             may
             be
             spent
             ;
             which
             many
             times
             also
             is
             not
             sufficient
             for
             our
             necessary
             occasions
             .
             Also
             from
             a
             Scoffer
             that
             seeks
             after
             her
             ,
             Knowledge
             does
             hide
             her self
             away
             ,
             but
             to
             him
             that
             is
             studious
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             she
             comes
             to
             meet
             ,
             and
             presents
             her self
             to
             his
             view
             .
             Farewel
             most
             Learned
             Bartholine
             .
             From
             the
             University
             of
             Leyden
             in
             Holland
             ,
             the
             Kalends
             of
             December
             1640.
             
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A31102-e640
           
             The
             Subject
             of
             Anatomy
             .
          
           
             Why
             Anatomy
             treats
             chiefly
             of
             the
             Body
             of
             Man.
             
          
           
             The
             Dissection
             of
             other
             Animals
             is
             useful
             to
             an
             Anatomist
             and
             why
             ?
          
           
             The
             division
             of
             the
             whol
             Body
             of
             Man.
             ●
             
          
           
             What
             a
             Part
             is
             ?
          
           
             What
             is
             the
             proper
             acceptation
             of
             the
             wor●
             Part.
             
          
           
             What
             is
             ment
             by
             the
             Action
             of
             a
             Part.
             
          
           
             What
             by
             the
             ●●●
             .
          
           
             Which
             Part
             of
             the
             Body
             is
             first
             generated
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Vessels
             were
             to
             be
             made
             before
             the
             Bowels
             .
          
           
             Division
             of
             the
             Parts
             .
          
           
             In
             respect
             of
             their
             End.
             ▪
             The
             principal
             Parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             or
             principle
             of
             Radication
             .
             The
             Original
             of
             Dispensation
             .
             Parts
             subservient
             or
             ministring
             .
          
           
             In
             respect
             of
             their
             Matter
             .
             A
             similar
             part
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             how
             manifold
             .
          
           
             How
             many
             sorts
             of
             Flesh
             there
             are
             ?
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             the
             Similar
             Parts
             .
          
           
             What
             a
             Spermatical
             Part
             is
             ?
          
           
             What
             a
             Sanguine
             Part.
             
          
           
             What
             a
             dissimilar
             part
             is
             ?
          
           
             Organical
             parts
             .
          
           
             con●…
             a
             vision
             ●●
             
          
           
             This
             whole
             Work
             divided
             into
             four
             Books
             and
             four
             Petty
             Books
             or
             Manuals
             .
          
           
             The
             division
             of
             the
             Body
             according
             to
             the
             Regions
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e2930
           
             The
             Reason
             of
             the
             Order
             .
             Why
             Dissection
             is
             begun
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             lower
             Belly
             is
             .
          
           
             The
             Parts
             of
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             and
             their
             Names
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Parts
             which
             a●e
             to
             be
             examined
             in
             this
             Book
             .
          
           
             The
             Scarf-skin
             .
          
           
             What
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Scarf-skin
             be
             made
             of
             seed
             ?
          
           
             Or
             of
             Blood
             ?
          
           
             Or
             of
             the
             Excrement
             of
             concoction
             .
          
           
             Laurentius
             and
             Archangelus
             confuted
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             matter
             of
             the
             Scarf-skin
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             Cause
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Vse
             .
          
           
             The
             color
             of
             the
             Scarf-skin
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             number
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Skin
             is
             ?
          
           
             Piccolhomine
             ●s
             refuted
             .
          
           
             Galens
             
               Opinion
               touching
               ▪
               the
               matter
               of
               the
               skin
               .
            
          
           
             Aristotles
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             Opinion
             of
             others
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             matter
             of
             the
             skin
             .
          
           
             AScar
             ,
             what
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             The
             efficient
             cause
             of
             the
             skin
             .
          
           
             The
             Action
             of
             the
             skin
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Vse
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             What
             fat
             is
             ?
          
           
             
               The
               difference
               between
            
             Pinguedo
             and
             Adeps
             .
          
           
             Fat
             is
             not
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             what
             parts
             have
             Fat
             ,
             and
             what
             not
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             not
             made
             of
             Chyle
             .
          
           
             But
             of
             Blood.
             
          
           
             That
             blood
             is
             Aiery
             and
             oyly
             
          
           
             Fat
             is
             colder
             then
             Blood
             ,
             yet
             moderately
             hot
             .
          
           
             The
             efficient
             cause
             of
             Fat.
             
          
           
             How
             Fat
             is
             bred
             ?
          
           
             T
             is
             proved
             that
             Fat
             is
             generated
             by
             cold
             .
          
           
             How
             Fat
             is
             bred
             in
             th●…
             Call
             ?
          
           
             And
             about
             the
             Heart
             ?
          
           
             And
             the
             Kidneys
             ?
          
           
             An
             Opinion
             that
             Fat
             is
             caused
             by
             Heat
             .
          
           
             An
             Opinion
             that
             it
             is
             made
             by
             compactness
             .
             Refuted
             .
          
           
             An
             Opinion
             that
             it
             is
             caused
             by
             Dryness
             .
          
           
             It
             hath
             ●…ing
             whi●…
             th●r
             .
          
           
             By
             a
             peculiar
             Form.
             
          
           
             The
             form
             of
             Fat.
             
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Uses
             .
          
           
             Whether
             it
             may
             turn
             to
             nourishment
             ?
          
           
             The
             fleshy
             Membrane
             ,
             its
             situation
             .
          
           
             The
             difference
             between
             a
             membrane
             and
             a
             Coat
             ,
             and
             Meninx
             .
          
           
             What
             a
             Membrane
             is
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Difference
             of
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             fleshy
             Membrane
             what
             for
             a
             thing
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Original
             .
          
           
             The
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ▪
             what
             ?
          
           
             〈…〉
             Use
             .
          
           
             What
             a
             Muscle
             is
             ?
          
           
             A
             Muscle
             is
             an
             Organical
             part
             .
          
           
             The
             Connexion
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             .
          
           
             The
             Parts
             of
             a
             Muscle
             only
             two
             .
             The
             tendinous
             Part
             how
             many
             fold
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Tendon
             of
             a
             Muscle
             is
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Beginning
             .
          
           
             Why
             called
             Tendo
             ?
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             and
             Head
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             Both
             the
             beginning
             and
             end
             of
             a
             Muscle
             may
             be
             called
             a
             Tendon
             .
          
           
             Two
             things
             observable
             touching
             the
             beginning
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             Galens
             Rule
             .
          
           
             Disliked
             by
             Walaeus
             ;
             and
             why
             ?
          
           
             The
             Objection
             of
             Riolanus
             answered
             .
          
           
             The
             middle
             of
             a
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             end
             of
             a
             Muscle
             how
             known
             by
             Galen
             and
             other
             Anatomists
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Head
             of
             a
             Muscle
             be
             void
             of
             sense
             ?
          
           
             If
             it
             have
             Motion
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             the
             end
             be
             thicker
             then
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Nerves
             go
             into
             the
             Tendon
             .
          
           
             The
             action
             of
             a
             Muscle
             is
             Motion
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             Voluntary
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             .
          
           
             Which
             Muscles
             do
             move
             more
             strongly
             ?
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             oblique
             descending
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             End.
             
          
           
             What
             the
             white
             Line
             is
             ?
          
           
             
               The
               Error
               of
            
             Aquapendent
             and
             Laurentius
             ,
             
               touching
               the
               Original
               of
               the
               oblique-descending
               Muscle
               .
            
          
           
             Their
             first
             Reason
             refuted
             .
          
           
             Their
             second
             Reason
             
          
           
             answered
             .
          
           
             T
             is
             proved
             that
             these
             Muscles
             arise
             from
             above
             ,
             not
             from
             beneath
             .
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             obliquely
             ascendent
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Their
             double
             End.
             
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             right
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             That
             there
             are
             divers
             right
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Veins
             .
          
           
             The
             Arteries
             and
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Pyramidal
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Their
             Original
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             transverse
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Action
             of
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
          
           
             Why
             there
             are
             divers
             muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             ?
          
           
             A
             Praeoccupation
             .
          
           
             A
             Secondary
             action
             of
             the
             muscles
             of
             the
             Belly
             .
          
           
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             how
             so
             called
             ?
          
           
             What
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             The
             Shape
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Surface
             .
          
           
             Original
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             double
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Fernelius
             .
             How
             many
             Holes
             there
             are
             ?
          
           
             Its
             Productions
             .
          
           
             The
             Cause
             of
             a
             Rupture
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             the
             mother
             of
             the
             Coats
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             .
          
           
             The
             Etymologie
             of
             the
             Call.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             Barrenness
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             situation
             in
             persons
             strangled
             .
          
           
             In
             Infants
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Origina
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             .
          
           
             Riolanus
             refuted
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
             ●
             
          
           
             It
             s
             use
             .
          
           
             The
             Stomach
             ,
             why
             called
             Ventriculus
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             .
          
           
             The
             Number
             of
             Stomachs
             in
             feathered
             Fowle
             .
          
           
             In
             Beasts
             that
             chew
             the
             Cud.
             
          
           
             Its
             Orifices
             .
             The
             Symptoms
             of
             the
             Stomachs
             ,
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             why
             like
             Heart-passions
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Soul
             be
             seated
             in
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             stomach
             ?
          
           
             The
             right
             Orifice
             ,
             called
             Pylorus
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             opened
             in
             the
             Distribution
             of
             Chylus
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             shut
             somtimes
             ,
             and
             opened
             in
             Vomiting
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             somtimes
             exceedingly
             widened
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Pylorus
             have
             any
             Rube
             over
             the
             inferior
             Parts
             ?
          
           
             The
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             their
             use
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             The
             Surface
             .
          
           
             The
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             Crustiness
             in
             the
             stomach
             whence
             it
             proceeds
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Shape
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Whether
             blood
             cast
             out
             of
             the
             Spleen
             help
             Appetite
             and
             Concoction
             .
          
           
             Its
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Stomachs
             Fermentation
             .
          
           
             Three
             things
             requisite
             to
             Concoction
             ,
          
           
             Concoction
             is
             the
             Stomachs
             Act.
             
          
           
             How
             it
             is
             made
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             The
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Why
             called
             Intestina
             .
          
           
             Their
             greatness
             
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             turnings
             and
             windings
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             The●r
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Their
             Coats
             .
          
           
             Their
             Crust
             .
          
           
             Their
             Fibres
             .
          
           
             Their
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Difference
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             thin
             Guts
             may
             be
             right
             said
             to
             be
             uppermost
             ?
          
           
             The
             thick
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Gut
             Duodenum
             .
          
           
             The
             Holes
             of
             the
             said
             Gut.
             
          
           
             The
             Gut
             Jejunum
             .
          
           
             The
             Gut
             Ileon
             .
          
           
             Rupture
             of
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             The
             Passio
             Iliaca
             .
          
           
             The
             thick
             Guts
             .
             The
             Gut
             caecum
             ,
             or
             the
             blind
             Gut.
             
          
           
             The
             Intestinum
             caecum
             ,
             or
             blind
             Gut
             of
             the
             Ancients
             .
          
           
             The
             Gut
             Colon.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             and
             Progress
             .
          
           
             A
             Valve
             in
             the
             Gut
             Colon.
             
          
           
             How
             it
             is
             found
             out
             ?
          
           
             The
             Intestinum
             rectum
             ,
             or
             the
             straight
             Gut.
             
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Fundament
             .
          
           
             The
             Sphincter
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             cald
             Ani
             Levatores
             ,
             or
             Arse-lifters
             .
          
           
             Mesentery
             why
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Division
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Rise
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Mesenterie
             .
          
           
             And
             of
             its
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Pancreas
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             ▪
             
          
           
             Original
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Pancreas
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Liver
             is
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             Veins
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Number
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Its
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Color
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Their
             Anastomoses
             .
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             The
             Authors
             opinion
             how
             the
             blood
             is
             made
             .
          
           
             See
             Fig.
             III.
             Table
             17.
             
          
           
             The
             Shape
             of
             the
             Gal-bladder
             .
          
           
             Division
             .
          
           
             Bottom
             .
          
           
             Neck
             .
          
           
             Its
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Porus
             biliarius
             .
          
           
             Ductus
             communis
             ,
             naturalis
             ,
             the
             common
             passage
             natural
             ,
          
           
             Pre●ernatural
             .
          
           
             Scituation
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
          
           
             See
             Table
             XV.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Number
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Spleen
             may
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             Why
             a
             man
             hath
             a
             large
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Shape
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Color
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Coat
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Its
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Its
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Its
             Anastomoses
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Spleen
             receive
             Melancholy
             from
             the
             Liver
             ?
          
           
             The
             argument
             of
             Rondeletius
             invalid
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Spleen
             make
             Blood
             ?
          
           
             For
             what
             Parts
             the
             Spleen
             makes
             Blood
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             any
             portion
             of
             Chyle
             be
             carried
             to
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             and
             what
             way
             ?
          
           
             What
             Creatures
             have
             no
             Spleen
             
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Spleen
             be
             an
             Organ
             of
             the
             sensitive
             Soul
             ?
          
           
             
               The
               Opinion
               of
            
             Walaeus
             
               touching
               the
               use
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
          
           
             How
             the
             Spleen
             may
             be
             said
             to
             be
             the
             seat
             of
             Laughter
             .
          
           
             *
             T
             is
             called
             
               Lover
               in
               the
               North
               of
            
             England
             ,
             
               &
               possibly
               that
               is
               the
               Etymology
               of
               the
               Word
               .
            
          
           
             How
             its
             thick
             .
          
           
             The
             threefold
             excrement
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Which
             Kidney
             is
             the
             highest
             ?
          
           
             Their
             Bigness
             .
          
           
             Surface
             .
          
           
             Their
             Colour
             .
          
           
             Shape
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             What
             it
             is
             to
             search
             the
             Reins
             ?
          
           
             Their
             Bellies
             .
          
           
             The
             Caruncles
             .
          
           
             The
             emulgent
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             A
             Valve
             in
             the
             Vein
             .
          
           
             Venae
             adiposae
             .
          
           
             Their
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             Why
             such
             as
             have
             a
             stone
             in
             their
             kidney
             are
             subject
             to
             vomit
             ?
          
           
             The
             structure
             of
             a
             Dogs
             kidney
             .
          
           
             The
             Cribrum
             benedictum
             of
             the
             Ancients
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Vesalius
             .
          
           
             Aristoles
             Error
             touching
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Urin
             is
             made
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Kidneys
             prepare
             Seed
             ?
          
           
             This
             Opinion
             reconciled
             with
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Circulation
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Kidneys
             make
             Blood
             ?
          
           
             Their
             first
             finder
             out
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Their
             Cavity
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             and
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Their
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Their
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             Ureters
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             The
             Original
             of
             the
             Ureters
             .
          
           
             Their
             Middle
             .
          
           
             Their
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Their
             End.
             
          
           
             Why
             the
             Urin
             cannot
             go
             out
             into
             the
             Emulgents
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Asclepiades
             and
             Paracelsus
             .
          
           
             The
             Situation
             of
             the
             Piss-bladder
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Its
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             Crust
             of
             the
             Bladder
             .
          
           
             The
             expulsive
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Bladder
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Holes
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Neck
             .
          
           
             The
             Sphincter
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             and
             their
             Original
             .
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Their
             Passage
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Stones
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             Why
             placed
             without
             in
             Men
             ?
          
           
             Their
             Greatness
             .
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             left
             Stone
             be
             colder
             then
             the
             right
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             Whether
             Nature
             alwaies
             intends
             to
             beget
             Boys
             .
          
           
             Their
             Coats
             .
          
           
             Common
             .
          
           
             The
             Cod.
             
          
           
             Why
             void
             of
             Fat.
             
          
           
             Porper
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             of
             the
             Stones
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficiens
             cause
             of
             the
             Seed
             .
          
           
             Without
             the
             Stones
             there
             is
             no
             Generation
             .
          
           
             The
             Sympathy
             of
             the
             Stones
             with
             the
             whole
             Body
             ,
          
           
             The
             Parastatae
             .
          
           
             Names
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Their
             Rise
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
          
           
             See
             Fig.
             III.
             Tab.
             XXI
             .
          
           
             Whether
             a
             Bull
             may
             ingender
             after
             he
             is
             guel
             
          
           
             Whether
             seed
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Bladderkies
             .
          
           
             Whether
             in
             the
             Prostatae
             ?
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             XXII
             .
             Let.
             QQ
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Prostatae
             do
             make
             seed
             .
          
           
             The
             seat
             of
             the
             Gonorrhaea
             .
          
           
             The
             Prostatae
             do
             not
             help
             to
             make
             seed
             .
          
           
             Its
             Names
             .
          
           
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Yard
             is
             void
             of
             Fat
             ,
             the
             first
             Opinion
             .
             Laurentius
             his
             Error
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             The
             four
             Parts
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
          
           
             Urethra
             .
          
           
             The
             Nut
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
             ●
             
          
           
             The
             nervous
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             Whence
             the
             hardness
             and
             Erection
             of
             the
             Yard
             proceeds
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Yard
             .
          
           
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             Conception
             .
          
           
             The
             Genitals
             in
             Women
             quite
             different
             from
             those
             in
             men
             .
          
           
             The
             similitude
             of
             the
             Yard
             and
             of
             the
             Womb
             ridiculous
             .
          
           
             The
             praeparatory
             Vessels
             in
             women
             .
          
           
             How
             they
             differ
             from
             those
             in
             Men.
             
          
           
             How
             the
             Stones
             of
             Women
             differ
             from
             those
             of
             Men.
             
          
           
             Why
             Womens
             stones
             are
             placed
             within
             their
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             womb
             is
             placed
             in
             the
             Hypogastrium
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             Figure
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             upper
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             falling
             down
             of
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             Lower
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Its
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             left
             Veins
             of
             the
             Womb
             are
             joyned
             to
             the
             right
             
          
           
             Anastomoses
             in
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             The
             Largeness
             of
             the
             Uterine
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             A
             Child
             conceived
             in
             a
             womans
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             The
             wombs
             motion
             .
          
           
             Why
             sweet
             smelling
             things
             do
             hurt
             some
             women
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             XXVII
             .
          
           
             The
             short
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             Some
             Cause
             of
             Barrenness
             .
          
           
             The
             Bottom
             .
          
           
             No
             Cavities
             or
             Cells
             in
             the
             womb
             of
             a
             woman
             .
          
           
             Why
             Horns
             are
             said
             to
             be
             in
             the
             wombs
             of
             women
             .
          
           
             The
             inner
             Orifice
             of
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             Some
             Causes
             of
             Barrenness
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Orifice
             of
             the
             womb
             
          
           
             When
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             womb
             is
             opened
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             XXVII
             .
          
           
             Wrinkles
             in
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             The
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Bladder
             .
          
           
             See
             Fig.
             IV.
             and
             V.
             of
             Ta●
             .
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             That
             there
             is
             some
             true
             sign
             of
             Virginity
             .
          
           
             Why
             Virgins
             are
             pained
             in
             their
             first
             carnal
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             An
             Exception
             .
          
           
             What
             is
             the
             token
             of
             Virginity
             .
          
           
             The
             I.
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Arabians
             .
          
           
             The
             II.
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             III.
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             IV.
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             V.
             Opinion
             strengthned
             by
             many
             Authors
             .
          
           
             The
             Confutation
             of
             such
             as
             deny
             it
             to
             be
             alwaies
             found
             in
             Virgins
             .
          
           
             The
             VI.
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             hole
             in
             the
             middle
             of
             the
             Hymen
             ,
             is
             of
             several
             fashions
             .
          
           
             A
             Question
             touching
             the
             shedding
             of
             blood
             in
             the
             first
             Copulation
             .
          
           
             Whether
             Conception
             may
             be
             made
             without
             hurting
             the
             Hymen
             .
          
           
             Parts
             of
             the
             Privitie
             .
          
           
             See
             Fig.
             II.
             and
             III.
             
               of
               the
            
             XXVIII
             .
             Tab.
             
          
           
             See.
             Fig.
             IV.
             of
             Tab.
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Its
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Tentigo
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             See
             FIG
             .
             III.
             and
             IV.
             
               of
               the
            
             Tab.
             XXVIII
             .
          
           
             The
             Lips
             and
             Venus
             Hillocks
             .
          
           
             Wher●●n
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb
             differs
             from
             a
             grown
             person
             
          
           
             Whether
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Womb
             only
             ●e
             the
             Efficient
             cause
             of
             the
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             Sundry
             opinions
             concerning
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             said
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
             What
             the
             Secondine
             is
             ,
             and
             why
             so
             called
             ?
          
           
             Whence
             the
             Liquor
             proceeds
             that
             is
             in
             the
             Amnios
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Cotyledons
             are
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Navil
             is
             ,
             and
             of
             what
             parts
             it
             consists
             .
          
           
             The
             Vena
             umbilicalis
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Insertion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Knots
             .
          
           
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             umbilical
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Their
             Twisting
             .
          
           
             The
             length
             of
             the
             Rope
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             thickness
             .
          
           
             The
             binding
             of
             the
             Navil
             .
          
           
             The
             Dignity
             of
             the
             Navil
             is
             not
             much
             .
          
           
             Urachus
             .
          
           
             The
             Urachus
             is
             not
             hollow
             in
             Mankind
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Laurentius
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e49030
           
             The
             middle
             Venter
             what
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             Hypocrates
             and
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             .
          
           
             Common
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             hair
             under
             the
             arm-pits
             .
          
           
             Why
             there
             is
             little
             Fat
             in
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             The
             proper
             Parts
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             XXV
             .
             Lib.
             I.
             
          
           
             Why
             the
             Dugs
             in
             Mankind
             are
             seated
             in
             the
             Breast
             .
          
           
             Number
             of
             the
             Dugs
             
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             The
             difference
             of
             the
             Dugs
             in
             men
             and
             women
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             .
          
           
             Their
             Parts
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Nipples
             come
             to
             have
             so
             exquisite
             Sense
             .
          
           
             The
             Dug
             .
          
           
             The
             Venae
             Mammariae
             .
          
           
             Why
             Milk
             is
             bred
             after
             the
             child
             is
             born
             .
          
           
             Their
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             The
             matter
             of
             Milk
             is
             not
             Blood
             as
             Martianus
             holds
             .
          
           
             But
             arises
             from
             the
             Stomach
             &
             the
             Chyle
             .
          
           
             The
             said
             Opinion
             refuced
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             Argument
             of
             Martianus
             and
             others
             are
             answered
             ▪
             
          
           
             Their
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             Their
             Pipes
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Dugs
             .
          
           
             The
             Efficient
             cause
             of
             Milk.
             
          
           
             Milk
             may
             breed
             in
             Virgins
             ,
             Men
             ,
             Women
             not
             with
             Child
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             See
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             following
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             others
             .
          
           
             Their
             use
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Number
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             An
             Head
             and
             Tail
             in
             the
             Midriff
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             substance
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Holes
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Sardonian
             Laughter
             ▪
             
          
           
             Use
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             is
             performed
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Pleura
             is
             ,
             and
             its
             Original
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Thickness
             .
          
           
             The
             place
             of
             the
             matter
             which
             causes
             a
             Pleurisie
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Holes
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             substance
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
          
           
             The
             Pericardium
             .
             See
             Tab.
             3.
             of
             Book
             2.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Original
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Holes
             .
          
           
             Situation
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Surface
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Whether
             all
             Live-Wights
             have
             this
             wherish
             Liquor
             in
             their
             Heart-bags
             .
          
           
             Why
             more
             plentiful
             in
             dead
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             Whence
             the
             liquor
             in
             the
             Heart-bag
             proceeds
             ?
             The
             first
             Opinion
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Heart
             ●●
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             A
             vulgar
             Error
             that
             the
             Heart
             is
             in
             the
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Heart
             enclines
             to
             the
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             Who
             have
             the
             greatest
             Hearts
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Substance
             of
             the
             Heart
             is
             so
             thick
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Coat
             .
          
           
             Whether
             Fat
             is
             found
             about
             the
             Heart
             ?
          
           
             The
             Coronary
             Vein
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             
               An
               Error
               of
            
             Fallopius
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Heart
             be
             a
             Muscle
             ?
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Averroes
             .
          
           
             An
             Hairy
             Breast
             what
             it
             signifies
             ?
          
           
             An
             Hairy
             Heart
             what
             it
             signifie●
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Heart
             doe
             perfect
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             What
             things
             are
             requisite
             to
             perfect
             the
             Blood
             ?
          
           
             In
             which
             Ventricle
             the
             Blood
             is
             perfected
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Pulse
             is
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Heart
             takes
             in
             Blood
             in
             the
             Diastole
             .
          
           
             The
             Quantity
             of
             blood
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             form
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             the
             Systole
             .
          
           
             The
             shape
             of
             the
             Heart
             in
             the
             Diastole
             .
          
           
             The
             next
             Efficient
             Cause
             of
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Whether
             there
             be
             a
             pulsifick
             Faculty
             .
          
           
             Remote
             Causes
             of
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Earlets
             of
             the
             Heart
             why
             so
             called
             ?
          
           
             What
             pulses
             first
             in
             an
             Eg.
             
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Number
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Their
             Surface
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             IV.
             of
             Book
             II.
             
          
           
             Their
             Motion
             .
          
           
             Their
             use
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
            
             .
             Aristotles
             Error
             .
          
           
             Fleshy
             Pillars
             in
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Things
             preternatural
             found
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             A
             Bone
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             right
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             The
             left
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             Manifest
             Pores
             in
             the
             Septum
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Blood
             pass
             through
             the
             partition
             of
             the
             Heart
             ?
          
           
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Vena
             Cava
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             treble
             pointed
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             Vena
             Arteriosa
             ,
             why
             called
             a
             Vein
             ?
          
           
             Why
             call'd
             an
             Artery
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Original
             and
             Progress
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Sigma-fashioned
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             Arteria
             venosa
             ,
             why
             an
             Arterie
             ?
          
           
             Why
             a
             vein
             .
          
           
             Whether
             Air
             enters
             into
             the
             Heart
             ?
          
           
             The
             Mitre-shap'd
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             Arteria
             Magna
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             Its
             Valves
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             The
             Union
             of
             the
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             various
             Uses
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             little
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             'T
             is
             shut
             after
             the
             Birth
             .
          
           
             By
             a
             Chanel
             or
             Pipe.
             
          
           
             Which
             is
             dried
             up
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             use
             .
          
           
             The
             Reason
             of
             their
             Name
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Division
             .
          
           
             Into
             Lobes
             .
          
           
             Their
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Their
             Colour
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             A
             certain
             Cause
             of
             long
             lasting
             Short-windedness
             .
          
           
             The
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             The
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Lungs
             ●at●
             so
             great
             Vessels
             ?
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             4.
             of
             Book
             2.
             
          
           
             How
             Circulation
             is
             caused
             in
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             Contrary
             objections
             answered
             .
          
           
             Why
             Ulcers
             of
             the
             Lungs
             are
             without
             pain
             .
          
           
             Whence
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             proceeds
             .
          
           
             Aristotles
             Error
             .
          
           
             The
             Opinion
             of
             Falcoburgius
             .
          
           
             The
             motion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             is
             proved
             to
             arise
             from
             the
             Chest
             .
          
           
             An
             Observation
             in
             live
             Anatomies
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             All
             kind
             of
             Air
             is
             not
             a
             friend
             to
             mans
             Spirit
             .
          
           
             Our
             heat
             doth
             want
             a
             Cooler
             .
          
           
             Why
             Fishes
             need
             no
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             The
             Lungs
             of
             Children
             in
             the
             Womb
             move
             not
             .
          
           
             The
             Wesand
             .
          
           
             
               Why
               call'd
            
             Trachea
             
               or
               Aspera
               Arteria
            
             ?
          
           
             Whether
             any
             part
             of
             our
             drink
             doth
             pass
             into
             the
             Wesand
             and
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             in
             Man-kind
             .
          
           
             In
             a
             Swan
             .
          
           
             Its
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             Voice
             hurt
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Wefand
             is
             in
             part
             Gristly
             ?
          
           
             Why
             in
             part
             Ligamental
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Wesand
             .
          
           
             The
             Larynx
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Number
             .
          
           
             Shape
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             voice
             becomes
             shril
             ,
             or
             big
             ?
          
           
             What
             the
             Causes
             are
             of
             a
             great
             Voice
             ?
          
           
             How
             the
             Voice
             comes
             to
             change
             .
          
           
             Its
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Common
             .
          
           
             The
             Proper
             .
          
           
             The
             Proper
             .
          
           
             Its
             Gristles
             .
          
           
             Adams
             Apple
             is
             more
             bunching
             out
             in
             Men
             then
             in
             Women
             .
          
           
             The
             Glottis
             .
          
           
             Epiglottis
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             
          
           
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             Spittle
             
          
           
             How
             the
             Voice
             is
             made
             ?
          
           
             Sig●ing
             .
          
           
             What
             is
             properly
             a
             Voice
             ?
          
           
             The
             differences
             of
             Voices
             ,
             or
             Speeches
             .
          
           
             Parts
             of
             Voice
             or
             Speech
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Scituation
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Gullet
             is
             diseased
             ,
             Medicaments
             are
             applied
             to
             the
             Back
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Kernels
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Whether
             Swallowing
             be
             a
             Natural
             or
             Animal
             Action
             ?
          
           
             Why
             somtimes
             solid
             meats
             are
             more
             easily
             swallowed
             then
             liquid
             .
          
           
             The
             Neck
             .
          
           
             Why
             call'd
             Collum
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e72090
           
             Why
             the
             Head
             is
             placed
             so
             high
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Greatness
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Division
             .
          
           
             Calva
             .
          
           
             The
             Face
             .
          
           
             What
             creatures
             have
             Hair.
             
          
           
             Whether
             Hair
             &
             Nails
             grow
             of
             good
             nutriment
             .
          
           
             The
             remote
             matter
             of
             Hair.
             
          
           
             Where
             Hair
             b●eede
             .
          
           
             Why
             crusted
             Animals
             have
             no
             hairs
             .
          
           
             Requisites
             to
             the
             Generation
             of
             hair
             .
          
           
             Cause
             of
             baldness
             .
          
           
             Hairs
             bred
             in
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             Use
             of
             Hair.
             
          
           
             Why
             a
             man
             hath
             plenty
             of
             hair
             ?
          
           
             The
             Beard
             adorns
             .
          
           
             Their
             Form.
             
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Figure
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             the
             hair
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             grey
             hairs
             .
          
           
             Why
             they
             are
             soonest
             grey-hair'd
             that
             go
             with
             their
             Heads
             cover'd
             ?
          
           
             Why
             Men
             are
             soonest
             grey
             about
             their
             temples
             ?
          
           
             The
             Pericraneum
             .
          
           
             Periostium
             .
          
           
             Crassa
             Meninx
             .
          
           
             The
             Brain
             moves
             .
          
           
             The
             Sickle
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             11.
             
          
           
             The
             upper
             Cavities
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             .
          
           
             See
             
               Tab.
               II.
            
             
          
           
             The
             lower
             Cavities
             .
          
           
             See
             
               Tab.
               II.
            
             
          
           
             The
             Use
             .
          
           
             Pia
             Mater
             .
          
           
             What
             is
             properly
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             Marrow
             what
             ?
          
           
             How
             they
             differ
             ?
          
           
             Parts
             of
             the
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             The
             Head
             of
             the
             Marrow
             ,
             what
             ?
          
           
             A
             new
             opinion
             concerning
             the
             place
             where
             the
             Animal
             spirits
             are
             made
             .
          
           
             The
             Magnitude
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             Who
             have
             most
             Brains
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Brain
             hath
             windings
             .
          
           
             The
             winding
             Clift
             of
             the
             Brain
             
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             3.
             
          
           
             The
             Colour
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             temperament
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             brain
             is
             moderately
             soft
             ?
          
           
             There
             are
             Veins
             in
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             brains
             Motion
             .
          
           
             The
             Matter
             of
             the
             Animal
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             A
             new
             opinion
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             touching
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Brain
             and
             the
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             The
             right
             Dissection
             of
             the
             Head
             must
             begin
             at
             the
             lower
             Part.
             
          
           
             See
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             Section
             in
             the
             Manual
             of
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             beginning
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             An
             Objection
             .
          
           
             The
             Answer
             .
          
           
             A
             new
             Opinion
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             that
             the
             Marrow
             is
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             brain
             .
          
           
             A
             proof
             hereof
             .
          
           
             The
             spinal
             Marrow
             divided
             .
          
           
             Another
             division
             .
          
           
             Another
             division
             .
          
           
             The
             Coats
             of
             the
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             A
             noble
             Ventricle
             in
             the
             Marrow
             .
          
           
             The
             cover
             of
             the
             noble
             Ventricle
             is
             from
             the
             Brainlet
             .
          
           
             The
             true
             place
             where
             Animal
             Spirits
             are
             generated
             according
             to
             our
             Author
             .
          
           
             A
             Proof
             .
          
           
             The
             preparation
             of
             the
             Animal
             Spirits
             where
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             This
             Marrow
             the
             beginning
             of
             all
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Brainlet
             what
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Structure
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             4.
             
             Fig.
             1.
             
          
           
             The
             Use
             .
          
           
             Rete
             mirabile
             
          
           
             Vesalius
             his
             Error
             .
          
           
             Glandula
             pituitaria
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Seat.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Brain
             ful
             of
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             Infundibulum
             .
          
           
             The
             Authors
             opinion
             that
             there
             is
             but
             one
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             The
             foremore
             Ventricle
             described
             .
          
           
             Corpus
             Callosum
             .
          
           
             The
             Conformation
             of
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             Septum
             lucidum
             .
          
           
             Fornix
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Ventricle
             .
          
           
             The
             Anus
             ,
             what
             it
             is
             ?
          
           
             The
             Nates
             and
             Testes
             .
          
           
             Penis
             .
             Vulva
             .
          
           
             The
             Plexus
             Choroidis
             ,
             what
             ?
          
           
             Glandula
             pinealis
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             serve
             to
             receive
             Excrements
             .
          
           
             The
             order
             of
             the
             parts
             to
             be
             shewn
             in
             the
             new
             way
             of
             Dissection
             .
          
           
             The
             order
             of
             the
             parts
             in
             the
             old
             Dissection
             .
          
           
             The
             order
             in
             the
             middle
             way
             of
             Dissection
             .
          
           
             The
             Dissection
             of
             the
             right
             side
             .
          
           
             The
             Dissection
             of
             the
             left
             side
             .
          
           
             An
             excellent
             Argument
             for
             the
             Circulation
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Why
             Mens
             Face
             ,
             is
             void
             of
             Hair
             ?
          
           
             Frons
             why
             so
             called
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             Skin
             .
          
           
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Eyes
             why
             called
             Oculi
             ?
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Their
             Number
             .
          
           
             Their
             Shape
             .
          
           
             Its
             Parts
             .
          
           
             The
             Eye-lids
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             lower
             Eye-lid
             be
             moved
             ?
          
           
             The
             Membranes
             .
          
           
             The
             Cilia
             ,
             what
             ?
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Eye-brow
             .
          
           
             Punctum
             lachrmyale
             
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             fat
             in
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             The
             Eye
             muscles
             .
          
           
             Columbus
             his
             Error
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             
          
           
             The
             third
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             .
          
           
             The
             fift
             .
          
           
             The
             sixt
             or
             pulley
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             A
             seventh
             Muscle
             in
             Brutes
             .
          
           
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             The
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Eyes
             but
             three
             .
          
           
             Adnata
             Tunica
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Seat
             of
             the
             Ophthalmia
             or
             Blearey'dness
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Tunicle
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             Cornea
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Tunicle
             of
             the
             Eye
             .
          
           
             The
             Pupilla
             .
          
           
             Iris.
             
          
           
             Ligamentum
             ciliare
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Coat
             .
          
           
             Aranea
             .
          
           
             Vitrea
             .
          
           
             Humors
             of
             the
             Eyes
             .
          
           
             The
             watry
             Humor
             .
          
           
             The
             watry
             Humor
             is
             no
             animated
             part
             ,
             the
             other
             Humors
             are
             .
          
           
             The
             vitreous
             of
             glassie
             bumor
             .
          
           
             The
             Chrystalline
             .
          
           
             Names
             of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             outer
             Ear.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Skin
             .
          
           
             It
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Why
             few
             move
             their
             Ears
             ?
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             first
             
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             second
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             third
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             fourth
             ,
          
           
             The
             Ear
             Gristle
             .
          
           
             The
             Kernels
             cal●d
             Parotides
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             The
             s●at
             of
             Kings-Evil
             swellings
             .
          
           
             The
             External
             Organ
             of
             Hearing
             .
          
           
             The
             Internal
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Tympanum
             .
          
           
             A
             cause
             of
             Deafness
             .
          
           
             A
             Cause
             of
             thickness
             of
             Hearing
             .
          
           
             The
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Drum.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             of
             the
             inner
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Why
             Masticatories
             help
             in
             Diseases
             of
             the
             Ears
             ?
          
           
             The
             Names
             of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             parts
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             Skin
             .
          
           
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             Coat
             of
             the
             Nostrils
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             Sneezing
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             The
             Names
             of
             the
             outward
             parts
             about
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             Two
             pare
             of
             Muscles
             common
             to
             the
             Cheeks
             and
             Lips.
             
          
           
             Spasmus
             Cynicus
             .
          
           
             The
             Figure
             of
             the
             Muscle
             Buccinator
             .
          
           
             The
             Lips.
             
          
           
             Trembling
             of
             the
             Lip
             in
             such
             as
             are
             ready
             to
             cast
             ,
             how
             caused
             ?
          
           
             Four
             pare
             of
             muscles
             moving
             the
             upper
             Lip.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             common
             to
             both
             Lips.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             of
             the
             lower
             Lip.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             of
             the
             lower
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             Temporalis
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             temporal●
             muscle
             .
          
           
             Why
             t
             is
             dangerous
             to
             hurt
             the
             temporal
             muscle
             .
          
           
             Mansorius
             primus
             .
          
           
             Alaris
             .
          
           
             Mansorius
             alter
             .
          
           
             Graphyoides
             .
          
           
             Gingiva
             .
          
           
             Palatum
             .
          
           
             The
             Uvula
             how
             seated
             .
          
           
             Its
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             falling
             o●
             the
             Uvula
             .
          
           
             Vulgar
             Error
             .
          
           
             Names
             of
             the
             Os
             hyoides
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Construction
             .
          
           
             Its
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             Os
             hyoides
             .
          
           
             The
             tongue
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Scituation
             .
          
           
             Number
             .
          
           
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             A
             Pernitious
             Practice
             of
             midwives
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Coat
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             tongue
             be
             a
             muscle
             .
          
           
             Its
             Vessels
             .
          
           
             The
             line
             of
             the
             tongue
             .
          
           
             Its
             muscles
             
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Tongue
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e93590
           
             The
             Limbs
             what
             ?
          
           
             Why
             the
             muscles
             also
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             Neck
             ,
             Back
             &c.
             are
             handled
             in
             this
             Book
             ?
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             Manus
             what
             ?
          
           
             Why
             many
             Fingers
             on
             the
             Hand
             ?
          
           
             Why
             the
             right
             Hand
             is
             more
             active
             then
             the
             left
             ?
          
           
             The
             number
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             Laying
             hold
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Hand
             is
             compounded
             ?
          
           
             Of
             the
             Nails
             .
          
           
             Colour
             of
             the
             Nails
             and
             signs
             from
             thence
             .
          
           
             Whence
             the
             sense
             of
             the
             nails
             proceeds
             
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Humerus
             how
             many
             ?
          
           
             The
             place
             of
             an
             Issue
             in
             the
             Arm.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             other
             Anatomists
             .
          
           
             An
             Order
             in
             Dissection
             .
          
           
             Pes
             what
             ?
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e103820
           
             What
             a
             Vein
             is
             ?
          
           
             'T
             is
             proved
             against
             Aristotle
             that
             the
             Liver
             ,
             not
             the
             Heart
             is
             the
             Original
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Blood
             is
             not
             made
             in
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             The
             Vse
             of
             the
             Veins
             .
             According
             to
             the
             Ancients
             .
          
           
             According
             ●o
             later
             Authors
             the
             Primary
             Vse
             .
          
           
             Their
             secondary
             Vse
             .
          
           
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Connexion
             .
          
           
             Anastomosis
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Veins
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             Of
             sundry
             kinds
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Veins
             are
             in
             some
             places
             invested
             with
             Coats
             ,
             in
             others
             not
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Veins
             have
             Fibres
             .
          
           
             Who
             first
             observed
             the
             Valves
             in
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Veins
             were
             found
             .
          
           
             The
             Cause
             of
             the
             Varices
             .
          
           
             The
             Valves
             of
             the
             Veins
             what
             ?
          
           
             Where
             they
             are
             not
             found
             at
             the
             original
             of
             the
             Veins
             ?
          
           
             Their
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             In
             what
             Persons
             there
             are
             most
             Valves
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Figure
             .
          
           
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Vse
             .
          
           
             
               According
               to
            
             Harvey
             .
          
           
             The
             Vena
             Portae
             ,
             why
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             The
             Branches
             of
             the
             Portae
             in
             the
             Liver
             ,
             termed
             Roots
             .
          
           
             The
             Spleen-Veins
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             Call.
             Pancreas
             .
          
           
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             Call.
             
          
           
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Stomach
             .
             Call.
             Guts
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Mesentery
             .
          
           
             The
             Meseraick
             Veins
             .
          
           
             According
             ●o
             Harvey
             .
          
           
             The
             History
             of
             the
             Milkie
             Veins
             .
          
           
             The
             History
             of
             the
             Vena
             Lacteae
             .
          
           
             Their
             Name
             .
          
           
             Their
             Situation
             .
          
           
             Their
             Insertion
             in
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             It
             s
             Substance
             .
          
           
             Their
             Quantity
             .
          
           
             Number
             .
          
           
             Their
             Use
             .
          
           
             The
             Haemorrhoid
             Veins
             what
             ?
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             other
             Anatomists
             .
          
           
             The
             Differences
             between
             the
             internal
             and
             external
             Haemorrhoides
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             what
             ?
          
           
             It
             s
             division
             into
             great
             Trunks
             .
          
           
             The
             ascendent
             Trunk
             what
             ?
          
           
             The
             Vein
             of
             the
             Midrif
             pericardium
             and
             mediastinum
             .
          
           
             Anastomosis
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Vesalius
             .
          
           
             How
             pleuritick
             persons
             are
             purged
             by
             Urine
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Ham-vein
             is
             profitably
             opened
             in
             a
             Pleurisie
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             
               Amatus
               Lusitanus
            
             and
             Hollerius
             touching
             Valves
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             other
             Anatomists
             .
          
           
             An
             Error
             of
             Practitioners
             in
             Blood-letting
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             apparent
             Vein
             is
             to
             be
             opened
             .
          
           
             Anastomos●s
             .
          
           
             Jugular
             veins
             why
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             A
             Caution
             in
             opening
             the
             Basilica
             or
             Liver
             vein
             .
          
           
             The
             Variation
             of
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Arm.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e113860
           
             The
             name
             Artery
             .
          
           
             What
             an
             Artery
             is
             .
          
           
             The
             End
             of
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Arteries
             pulse
             .
          
           
             The
             Pulse
             how
             caused
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Arteries
             are
             dilated
             together
             with
             the
             Heart
             or
             no.
             
          
           
             It
             s
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Arteries
             do
             feel
             .
          
           
             Their
             Substance
             .
          
           
             How
             many
             Coats
             an
             Arterie
             hath
             .
          
           
             Whether
             an
             Artery
             may
             be
             opened
             ,
             and
             how
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             Belly
             be
             circulated
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e117900
           
             The
             significations
             of
             the
             term
             Nervus
             .
          
           
             A
             Nerve
             what
             .
          
           
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             moving
             Nerves
             and
             the
             sensitive
             differ
             .
          
           
             A
             new
             opinion
             of
             the
             Author
             touching
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             use
             of
             this
             Doctrine
             in
             Physick
             .
          
           
             The
             Nervus
             sine
             pari
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Nerves
             are
             not
             hollow
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Optick
             Nerves
             are
             hollow
             .
          
           
             Nerves
             hard
             or
             soft
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             moving
             Nerves
             are
             hardest
             .
          
           
             Whether
             there
             be
             any
             smelting
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             A
             Praeocupation
             ▪
             
          
           
             Processus
             Mammillares
             .
          
           
             The
             Organ
             of
             Smelling
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             others
             about
             the
             rise
             of
             the
             Optick
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             The
             Union
             of
             the
             optick
             Nerves
             and
             the
             true
             Cause
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             others
             about
             the
             Rise
             of
             the
             Eye-movers
             .
          
           
             Why
             one
             Eye
             being
             moved
             ,
             the
             other
             moves
             also
             .
          
           
             Why
             somtimes
             when
             the
             temporal
             muscle
             is
             hurt
             ,
             the
             Eye
             is
             hurt
             likewise
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             sixt
             pare
             be
             the
             same
             with
             the
             fift
             .
          
           
             Why
             we
             cough
             when
             the
             Earp●cker
             goes
             far
             into
             our
             Ear.
             
          
           
             The
             Recurrent
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             How
             Hoars-ness
             comes
             after
             the
             Cholick
             .
          
           
             Why
             Vomiting
             in
             the
             stone
             of
             the
             Kidney
             .
          
           
             The
             Nerves
             of
             the
             whole
             Arm.
             
          
           
             The
             Nerve
             Sine
             par●
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e123850
           
             The
             reason
             of
             the
             Authors
             Method
             .
             Why
             he
             treats
             last
             of
             the
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Why
             he
             treats
             of
             the
             Gristles
             and
             Ligaments
             with
             the
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             ▪
             Marrow
             be
             the
             Nutriment
             of
             the
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Why
             creeping
             things
             cannot
             go
             .
          
           
             Why
             many
             Bones
             in
             a
             living
             Creature
             .
          
           
             The
             Periostium
             feels
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             Bones
             .
             The
             Sense
             of
             the
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             A
             Bonefire
             properly
             what
             .
          
           
             The
             division
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             .
          
           
             Depraved
             shapes
             of
             the
             Head
             eleven
             in
             number
             .
          
           
             Other
             shapes
             of
             the
             Head
             observed
             by
             the
             Author
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Chirurgeons
             
          
           
             An
             Head
             without
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             The
             Error
             of
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             The
             coronal
             Suture
             why
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             The
             triangular
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skul
             .
          
           
             Why
             some
             Sutures
             are
             like
             Scales
             .
          
           
             A
             great
             number
             of
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             See
             Tab.
             4.
             
             Fig.
             1.
             
          
           
             Why
             the
             wounds
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             are
             deadly
             .
          
           
             The
             triangular
             bone
             in
             Dogs
             .
          
           
             The
             Cavities
             in
             the
             Ossa
             petrosa
             .
          
           
             How
             the
             Teeth
             do
             differ
             from
             other
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Which
             part
             of
             the
             Tooth
             feels
             .
          
           
             The
             Teeth
             are
             bred
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             Why
             Children
             are
             sick
             of
             Teeth-breeding
             .
          
           
             Why
             and
             when
             young
             ones
             loose
             their
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             Whether
             new
             Teeth
             are
             bred
             out
             of
             the
             womb
             ?
          
           
             Many
             teeth
             argue
             long
             life
             .
          
           
             The
             Diseases
             and
             Pains
             of
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             how
             caused
             ?
          
           
             Speech
             him
             .
          
           
             Why
             Men
             have
             few
             dog
             teeth
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             upper
             Grinders
             have
             more
             roots
             then
             the
             lower
             ?
          
           
             A
             Transition
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Spina
             is
             ?
          
           
             Why
             the
             first
             Vertebra
             has
             no
             Spine
             ?
          
           
             An
             incurable
             Squinzie
             by
             Luxation
             of
             the
             Tooth
             .
          
           
             The
             Os
             sacrum
             why
             so
             called
             .
          
           
             Os
             sacrum
             properly
             hath
             no
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             The
             Os
             coccygis
             may
             be
             loosned
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Os
             Ilium
             is
             larger
             in
             Women
             ?
          
           
             The
             Share-bones
             are
             loosned
             in
             Child-birth
             .
          
           
             Why
             there
             are
             great
             Holes
             in
             the
             Sharebones
             .
          
           
             The
             Share-bones
             larger
             in
             women
             .
          
           
             An
             Admonition
             for
             Chirurgeons
             .
          
           
             The
             Gristles
             of
             the
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             Why
             the
             Ribs
             are
             many
             is
             number
             ?
          
           
             How
             many
             Ribs
             Adam
             had
             .
          
           
             How
             many
             true
             Ribs
             there
             are
             .
          
           
             The
             bastard
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             The
             Cartilago
             Ensiformis
             .
          
           
             An
             ●●llow●e
             ●
             about
             the
             channel●●nt
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Scapula
             is
             .
          
           
             A
             Memento
             for
             Chyrurgions
             .
          
           
             Their
             shape
             .
             Magnitude
             .
          
           
             Situation
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A31102-e145990
           
             To
             PARIS
             .
          
           
             The
             occasion
             of
             this
             writing
             
          
           
             What
             Blood
             it
             is
             which
             is
             moved
             ?
          
           
             That
             it
             is
             only
             one
             kinde
             of
             blood
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             not
             moved
             up
             and
             down
             in
             the
             Vessels
             like
             boiled
             water
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             is
             moved
             o●e
             of
             one
             part
             into
             another
             .
          
           
             Which
             motion
             perfectly
             to
             understan●
             ,
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             must
             be
             sought
             into
             .
          
           
             That
             meat
             which
             is
             first
             eaten
             hath
             the
             first
             place
             in
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             The
             Stomach
             closely
             embraces
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             moistned
             with
             the
             moisture
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             cut
             and
             minced
             by
             an
             acid
             humour
             .
          
           
             Which
             comes
             from
             the
             spleer
             .
          
           
             Afterward
             it
             is
             changed
             into
             Cream
             .
          
           
             Tom.
             se●
             3.
             ●
             ,
             s●●nt
             ●●t●r
             .
          
           
             How
             soon
             or
             late
             it
             is
             concoctèd
             and
             distributed
             .
          
           
             All
             at
             once
             or
             by
             piecemeal
             .
          
           
             Being
             digested
             it
             is
             distributed
             into
             the
             Guts
             and
             milky
             Veins
             .
          
           
             See
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             milky
             Veins
             ,
             pag.
             563.
             
          
           
             Not
             through
             the
             Meseraick
             veins
             
          
           
             Alwaies
             white
             .
          
           
             By
             one
             Continued
             passage
             of
             the
             milky
             veins
             .
          
           
             Not
             to
             the
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             But
             to
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             Gut
             of
             the
             Liver
             into
             the
             Vena
             Cava
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             Vena
             cava
             into
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             right
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             Vena
             arteriosa
             .
          
           
             But
             not
             through
             the
             Sep●●●●
             inter●…tium
             or
             partition
             of
             the
             Heart
             
          
           
             O●●
             of
             the
             Vena
             arteriosa
             into
             the
             Arteria
             venosa
             and
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             But
             not
             through
             the
             foramen
             ovale
             .
          
           
             And
             thence
             into
             the
             Heart
             ,
             the
             Arteria
             aorta
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             small
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             the
             Blood
             by
             commen
             mouths
             .
          
           
             Known
             to
             the
             Ancients
             .
          
           
             Goes
             into
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             As
             the
             store
             of
             Blood
             sent
             into
             the
             parts
             doth
             sh●●
             .
          
           
             The
             pressing
             a
             Vein
             below
             the
             orifice
             in
             Blood-letting
             .
          
           
             The
             Ligature
             of
             a
             vein
             in
             living
             Anatomies
             .
          
           
             Dissection
             of
             a
             Vein
             in
             living
             Creatures
             .
          
           
             The
             emptying
             of
             the
             Veins
             appearing
             in
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Blood
             doth
             not
             come
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             Veins
             into
             the
             lesser
             .
          
           
             Sevulsory
             Blood-letting
             doth
             not
             argue
             it
             .
          
           
             Nor
             the
             Arms
             falling
             away
             occasioned
             by
             a
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             Nor
             the
             Varices
             .
          
           
             But
             it
             flows
             ●●●
             of
             the
             smaller
             vessels
             into
             the
             Vena
             cava
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             Vena
             cava
             to
             the
             Heart
             again
             .
          
           
             Yea
             that
             Blood
             which
             hath
             already
             past
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Because
             the
             Meat
             affords
             not
             so
             much
             Blood
             as
             the
             Heart
             passeth
             through
             .
          
           
             Viz.
             about
             half
             an
             ounce
             at
             every
             pulse
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             Blood
             〈◊〉
             circularly
             .
          
           
             Which
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             was
             not
             unknown
             to
             the
             Ancients
             .
          
           
             To
             Hippocrates
             in
             Foëtins
             Edi●●on
             pag.
             344.
             
          
           
             pag.
             277.
             
          
           
             pag.
             229.
             
          
           
             To
             
               Diogi●●●
               Apolloniata
            
             .
          
           
             To
             Plato
             .
          
           
             To
             Aristotle
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             this
             Age
             found
             out
             ●…sh
             by
             
               Paulus
               Servita
            
             .
          
           
             Publish'd
             in
             Print
             by
             
               William
               Harvey
            
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             motion
             is
             made
             through
             all
             the
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             Yea
             of
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             Yea
             in
             the
             Child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             It
             goes
             out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             .
          
           
             By
             Anastomoses
             .
          
           
             And
             through
             the
             Flesh
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             Is
             continual
             .
          
           
             Quick.
             
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             whole
             Circuit
             or
             round
             is
             performed
             in
             less
             than
             a
             quarter
             of
             an
             hour
             .
          
           
             Nor
             do
             the
             Fits
             of
             Agues
             argue
             any
             other
             .
          
           
             Nor
             the
             Exacerbations
             of
             Feavers
             .
          
           
             This
             motion
             is
             also
             vehement
             .
          
           
             Not
             of
             like
             vehemence
             in
             the
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             .
          
           
             Yet
             the
             same
             Quickness
             in
             both
             .
          
           
             Yet
             of
             greater
             quickness
             when
             the
             Heart
             beats
             .
          
           
             One
             portion
             of
             blood
             doth
             not
             allwayes
             go
             the
             same
             way
             .
          
           
             The
             Vital
             Spirits
             are
             moved
             with
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             The
             Animal
             Spirits
             motion
             through
             the
             Nerves
             cannot
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Chylus
             easily
             through
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             .
          
           
             What
             kind
             of
             motion
             that
             i●
             .
          
           
             The
             Cause
             of
             the
             Bloods
             motion
             .
          
           
             Is
             not
             an
             i●b●●●
             power
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Nor
             is
             the
             blood
             carried
             by
             the
             Spirits
             .
          
           
             Nor
             is
             it
             voided
             by
             reason
             of
             rar●faction
             only
             .
          
           
             Put
             it
             is
             drive
             :
             by
             the
             Vena
             cava
             into
             the
             Earl●t
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             it
             into
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Yet
             is
             it
             drawn
             also
             ?
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             the
             motion
             into
             the
             left
             Ventricle
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             A●d
             ▪
             happens
             in
             both
             places
             at
             one
             moment
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             is
             driven
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             into
             the
             Arteries
             when
             the
             Heart
             is
             contracted
             .
          
           
             The
             Cause
             ,
             of
             the
             Constriction
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Which
             is
             performed
             by
             help
             of
             the
             fibres
             .
          
           
             The
             Heart
             after
             its
             Constriction
             returns
             to
             its
             Natural
             state
             .
          
           
             And
             then
             it
             is
             dilated
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             is
             driven
             out
             of
             the
             greater
             into
             the
             lesser
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Yet
             it
             is
             drawn
             withall
             .
          
           
             Not
             necessarily
             by
             dilatation
             of
             the
             Artery
             .
          
           
             
               Nor
               doth
            
             Galens
             
               experiment
               shew
               any
               other
               thing
            
             .
          
           
             Yet
             Galen
             hath
             certain
             tokens
             that
             the
             dilatation
             of
             the
             Arteries
             helps
             their
             motion
             .
             
               De
               usu
               puls
            
             .
             cap.
             5.
             
             
               An
               sanguis
               in
               Art.
            
             c.
             8.
             
          
           
             But
             the
             impulse
             i
             here
             caused
             only
             by
             the
             Hart.
             
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             Arteries
             into
             the
             Veins
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             smaller
             Veins
             into
             the
             greater
             
          
           
             It
             is
             driven
             .
          
           
             By
             every
             Particle
             of
             the
             Vein
             .
          
           
             And
             drawn
             .
          
           
             So
             also
             by
             Pulsion
             the
             Chyle
             is
             moved
             out
             of
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             Through
             the
             Guts
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             milkie
             Veins
             .
          
           
             And
             also
             drawn
             .
          
           
             Why
             not
             through
             the
             mesaraick
             Veins
             .
          
           
             The
             motion
             of
             the
             blood
             serves
             for
             the
             utility
             of
             the
             parts
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             it
             may
             be
             preserved
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             perfect
             the
             Blood.
             
          
           
             The
             blood
             which
             is
             carried
             to
             nourish
             the
             part
             ,
             is
             not
             moved
             circularly
             .
          
           
             Nor
             is
             there
             any
             other
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Heart
             are
             shut
             .
          
           
             Nor
             in
             Passion●
             of
             the
             Mind
             .
          
           
             Yet
             there
             is
             another
             praeternatural
             motion
             thereof
             .
          
           
             The
             occasion
             of
             this
             second
             Letter
             .
          
           
             Answer
             to
             the
             Objections
             .
          
           
             That
             in
             Blood
             letting
             the
             Vein
             does
             swest
             at
             the
             binding
             .
          
           
             Not
             through
             Pain
             .
          
           
             Not
             by
             straining
             the
             Vein
             ;
          
           
             But
             because
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             is
             stopped
             .
          
           
             Nor
             doe
             the
             Arteries
             swel
             because
             of
             the
             Ligature
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Veins
             swel
             also
             with
             two
             Ligatures
             ,
             and
             wherefore
             .
          
           
             Why
             in
             blood-letting
             they
             unbind
             the
             Arm
             ,
             when
             the
             blood
             does
             not
             run
             apace
             .
          
           
             Why
             much
             blood
             may
             be
             taken
             away
             .
          
           
             And
             more
             out
             of
             the
             Arm
             then
             out
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             Why
             it
             flows
             out
             of
             a
             wounded
             Arterie
             not
             bound
             .
          
           
             The
             Ligature
             being
             loosed
             ,
             the
             blood
             stops
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             it
             runs
             ,
             and
             why
             ?
          
           
             But
             is
             stopped
             by
             holding
             the
             finger
             in
             the
             Vein
             below
             the
             Orifice
             .
          
           
             Also
             when
             the
             Vein
             is
             cut
             asunder
             in
             the
             middle
             and
             wherefore
             ,
          
           
             No
             parts
             receive
             Blood
             by
             the
             veins
             excepting
             the
             liver
             .
          
           
             How
             and
             why
             the
             venal
             blood
             differs
             from
             the
             arterial
             .
          
           
             How
             menstrual
             Blood
             is
             collected
             about
             the
             womb
             .
          
           
             How
             they
             are
             carried
             out
             of
             the
             Womb
             into
             the
             Head.
             
          
           
             How
             it
             comes
             that
             the
             Humors
             passing
             through
             the
             Heart
             ,
             do
             not
             cause
             great
             Inconveniences
             .
          
           
             The
             Objections
             against
             circumstances
             .
          
           
             Nothing
             hinders
             ,
             but
             that
             half
             an
             ounce
             of
             Blood
             may
             be
             forced
             out
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             at
             every
             pulse
             .
          
           
             Nothing
             hinders
             but
             that
             the
             Blood
             may
             be
             circularly
             moved
             in
             the
             child
             in
             the
             Womb.
             
          
           
             A
             sign
             that
             it
             is
             so
             indeed
             .
          
           
             Though
             there
             be
             Anastomoses
             of
             the
             Veins
             &
             arteries
             ▪
             yet
             Tumors
             may
             arise
             .
          
           
             Not
             by
             Rarifaction
             .
          
           
             But
             by
             constriction
             of
             the
             heart
             the
             blood
             is
             driven
             in
             the
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Not
             in
             the
             dilatation
             ,
             though
             sometimes
             blood
             go
             out
             therein
             .
          
           
             And
             being
             driven
             by
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             Veins
             ,
             it
             returns
             to
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             motion
             the
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             may
             be
             nourished
             .
          
           
             And
             the
             blood
             ventilitated
             better
             .